Chapter 1: The life of an Innocent
Chapter Text
Disclaimer: Nothing in this story, save for the concept of the Treasure Guardians/Children of Eden and the mythology and information surrounding them belong to me. This has some ties to my future story “Chain of Advent”, as well as the “Hearts” ‘verse in general, but it can still be read as a stand-alone.
Guardian Apprentice
“Alnesr, follow closely, and act when I give the order,” he ordered, turning to catch the bright, pale yellow eyes of his apprentice.
“Yes, Master Altaïr.”
Nodding subtly to the young Apprentice Assassin, Altaïr moved, swift and silent, through the deserted halls of the temple. Almost too deserted, really; there were bound to be Templars guarding the treasure that Master Mualim had sent the four of them out to claim. If there even was treasure at all; all that the Master had said was that the Templars had found something in this place.
Sounds up ahead alerted him to the presence of another; likely a Templar guard. Signaling for Alnesr to wait, he moved forward.
“Wait! There must be another way, this one need not die,” Malik called; Altaïr ignored him.
Even if the old man was not a Templar, he could not be allowed to alert the Templars to their presence. This mission demanded secrecy, and he would not see it compromised for Malik’s weakness. Plunging his hidden blade into the man’s neck, Altaïr killed him with the same swiftness and silence as the eagles that he had often been compared to.
“An excellent kill,” Kadar said, clear awe in his voice. “Fortune favors your blade.”
“Not fortune; skill,” he corrected.
“Yes; indeed, Master Altaïr is most skillful,” Alnesr said, moving to stand closer, and keeping alert the way he’d been taught.
He smiled, feeling a sense of pride; almost like his own father must have felt, he thought. “Watch awhile longer and you might learn something more, Kadar.”
“Indeed,” Malik said, with clear distain. “He’ll teach you how to disregard everything the Master has taught us.” Malik stepped slightly into Kadar’s line of sight, glaring at him as if he had overstepped some invisible boundary. “Teach what you will to your own Apprentice, Altaïr; anyone can see that he’s already too much like you. But do not try to corrupt mine.”
“Oh?” he asked, as Alnesr moved to stand shoulder-to-shoulder with him, showing the solidarity that any good Apprentice should. “And, how would you have handled this?”
“I would not have drawn attention to us,” Malik said plainly. “I would not have taken the life of an innocent. What I would have done, is follow the Creed.”
Perhaps Malik did not remember the Creed. “Nothing is true; everything is permitted. Understand these words; it matters not how we complete our task, only that it is done.”
“But this is not our way!” Malik protested.
“My way is better,” he said, decisively ending the conversation.
“I will scout ahead. Try not to dishonor us further,” Malik said, with significantly more distain than he had previously shown.
Sneering at his back, Altaïr wiped the expression from his face as Kadar turned to regard him with curiosity. He might not have been fond of Malik’s constant questioning, but Kadar was far more tolerable. He was almost like Alnesr, though somewhat less shy; likely another artifact of his own Apprentice’s odd appearance.
One who had nearly been killed for such a thing as that was not likely to want to draw attention to himself, after all.
“What is our mission?” Kadar asked, moving to stand closer to him. “My brother would say nothing to me, only that I should be honored to have been invited.”
“Yes, Master; I, too, would like to know what our mission entails,” Alnesr said, moving slightly to catch his eye, then ducking his head shyly once he had done so.
“The Master believes the Templars have found something beneath the Temple Mount,” he informed them both.
Alnesr merely looked thoughtful when he had spoken of Master Mualim’s suspicions, but Kadar spoke up with no hesitation: “Treasure!”
“I do not know. All that matters is that the Master considers it important. Else he would not have asked me to retrieve it,” he informed them both.
Alnesr nodded to indicate his comprehension of the matter, and the three of them moved to meet up with Malik. He hoped that his fellow Assassin had at least managed to find something useful; he’d no desire for Alnesr, Kadar, and himself to shoulder the entire burden during this mission.
He soon spotted Malik up ahead, moving slowly and alertly through the deserted halls of the Temple Mount. He was pleased to note that there were no guards or other people inside; he was not particularly eager to hear more of Malik’s lectures on the importance of the Creed. He knew the Creed, likely better even than Malik, because he outranked the older Assassin.
This, he often thought, was the root of Malik’s distain for and disparagement of him.
Continuing to follow Malik through the Temple Mount, he could clearly hear Alnesr and Kadar keeping pace just behind them. He was pleased to know that his Apprentice was taking proper initiative. Moving through the Temple Mount, he continued searching for guards and others that Malik might have missed. Or simply left alive because he did not consider them a threat.
Climbing the two ladders that he found in his path, Altaïr then found himself facing a Templar guard standing at the entrance to another part of the Temple Mount. Likely as not, Malik had left this one alive out of some misguided desire not to stain his hands, or other such nonsense. Dealing with the Templar the same way that he had dealt with so many of the man’s brethren – and the same way he would deal with any others he encountered in the future – he made his way into the next room.
The next room opened up into a much larger space than any of the previous rooms, and Altaïr found himself looking down upon the main group of Templars at last.
“There, that must be the Ark,” Malik said.
“The Ark? Of the Covenant?” Kadar echoed, as if he actually believed in such nonsense; clearly, Malik should have endeavored to teach him better.
“Don’t be absurd. There’s no such thing; it’s just a story,” he said.
“Then, what is it?” Kadar asked, looking from him to Malik.
“Quiet!” Malik said quickly. “Someone’s coming.”
Watching and waiting, as any good Assassin was trained to do, he both saw and heard the man giving orders to this group of Templars. The greatest enemy of the Assassin Brotherhood: the Templar Grand Master, Robert de Sable.
“Robert de Sable!” he spat. “His life is mine! Alnesr-!”
“No,” Malik said, gripping his arm; holding him back. “We were asked to retrieve the treasure, and deal with Robert only if necessary.”
“He stands between us and it, I’d say it’s necessary,” he said, pulling his arm free from Malik’s grasp.
“Discretion, Altaïr!” Malik snarled.
“You mean cowardice,” he snapped back, having had more than his fill of Malik’s insistent disrespect; even Alnesr was a better Assassin, he at least knew how to show the proper respect to his superiors. “That man is our greatest enemy, and here we have the chance to be rid of him!”
“You have already broken two tenets of our Creed,” Malik growled. “Now, you would break the third: do not compromise the Brotherhood.”
“I am your superior, in both title and ability,” he reminded the older man. “You should know better than to question me.” Dismissing Malik from his mind, he turned to his loyal Apprentice. “Alnesr, follow closely, and observe well. You may have the chance to claim your first Templar head today, if you act swiftly.”
“Yes, Master Altaïr,” his Apprentice acknowledged.
Chapter 2: Return to Masyaf
Chapter Text
Moving as swiftly as he ever did, he heard Alnesr just behind him and smiled slightly. He would claim the life of Robert de Sable this day, and Alnesr would claim the first of many lives that he would take as he rose through the ranks of the Assassins under Altaïr’s tutelage. They would both return to Masyaf triumphant this day.
Their descent to the ground floor of the Temple went as smoothly as he could have hoped, and for a moment Altaïr thought back on his Apprentice’s younger days. Alnesr had not been a quick study, like Altaïr himself had been, but the boy had more than made up for such deficiencies with the determination to please his Master that every good Apprentice had. This situation would be no different: Alnesr would will his way through.
Bringing his mind back to the present, he stood at last on the floor of the Temple and moved to confront the Templars gathered in the largest room, Alnesr a silent presence at his side.
“Hold, Templars!” he snarled, calling their attention to him; let them feel fear as he and Alnesr came among them and killed them all. “You are not the only ones with business here!”
“Ah, well this explains my missing man,” Robert de Sable sneered, in his strangely accented voice; French, Altaïr recalled from his lessons. “And what is it you want?”
“Blood,” he answered simply, not giving them a chance to register what he had said before he leaped the length of the room, hidden blade out and ready to be plunged into Robert de Sable’s black, twisted heart.
Malik shouted and tried to hold him back, grabbing at his arm in a way that was likely intended to throw off his momentum; that had to be the reason that his hidden blade had not sunk into Robert de Sable’s flesh. And, likely the only reason that Robert de Sable had been able to grab his wrists and restrain him so quickly. Malik… he would have to be reprimanded for this; no matter one’s own preference, one of the Brotherhood was not to interfere with a target claimed by another.
It seemed Malik would need reminding of that when they all returned to Masyaf.
“You know not the things in which you meddle, Assassin,” Robert de Sable snarled, his voice low and steady. “I spare you only that you may return to your master and deliver a message: the Holy Land is lost to him and his. He should flee now, while he has the chance. Stay, and all of you will die.”
Robert threw him from the room then, sending him crashing through a wall of old, crumbling stone that then collapsed, walling him off from Alnesr, Kadar, and even Malik. Narrowing his eyes at the barrier now sealing him into the empty room he had landed in, Altaïr knew that it would be entirely futile for him to attempt to break through the remains of the wall and the stone that it had been holding up.
Turning on his heel, he made his way out of the room; climbing ladders when he could and climbing the walls themselves when he could not. After what felt like more time than the four of them had even taken getting in, Altaïr found himself nearing the exit. He also found that the Templars had, all unknowing, provided the means for him to leave with more swiftness than that which he had when he had arrived.
Untying the reins from the post that the Templar had used to restrain his horse, Altaïr kicked the beast into motion and, reining it in, he rode for Masyaf.
For a moment, he was overtaken by thoughts of Alnesr; the boy was still merely an Apprentice, he had no weapons and did not possess the skill in unarmed combat that a full Assassin would have had. Still, the boy was his Apprentice all the same, and would naturally possess a greater modicum of skill than any other Apprentice.
Alnesr would be well; he knew it.
He rode the beast harder than he would have any horse that had come from Masyaf, resting only when his own body demanded that he do so; he had nothing but the most practical of concern for the beast, and would not be dismayed if it fell down dead so long as it carried him to his destination. Quenching his thirst with the water-skin that had been strapped to the beast’s saddle, Altaïr continued to ride.
The landscape was becoming ever more familiar to him on this, the fifth day of his journey, and so he knew that he would soon return to the place where he had lived for his entire life; he would soon be forced to report his failure to Master Mualim.
The mountain fortress of Masyaf loomed before him now, the city that their fortress and the Assassins within it guarded spread before him now, and he slowed the horse to a walk. Leaving the beast to the care of the stable hands within the city, Altaïr continued to make his way up the hill, through the city, and past all of the people that the Brotherhood sheltered. He’d never been one for the company of those who were not Alnesr when it wasn’t necessary, and this time was no exception.
Making his way out of the city and up the winding path that would take him to the fortress itself, Altaïr felt a strong urge to go and cleanse himself in one of the fountains of his home. He’d not had the means to do so while he was traveling those five days, and now he was uncomfortably aware of all the dirt and grime that he had accumulated during his journey. He had already stopped beside a well to refresh himself, quenching his thirst and washing the dust from his face, but the feel and smell of his clothes was swiftly becoming offensive to him.
Still, he had a duty to report his failure to Master Mualim; his own comfort did not matter in the face of that.
As he passed through the marketplace, the warm, inviting colors highlighted by the shafts of sunlight slanting down from the sky, Altaïr heard the sound of another Assassin hailing him. Turning, he saw that it was Rauf; any other day, any other moment than this, he would have been pleased to see the younger Assassin. Rauf, like Alnesr, looked up to him; though Rauf’s admiration was more pronounced than even Altaïr’s own Apprentice’s was.
Alnesr thought of him as a wise teacher, perhaps even a father when he forgot himself; Rauf had always seemed to revere him as a god.
If there had been a worse Assassin to have greeted him now, Altaïr could not think of who they might be.
“Altaïr, you’ve returned!” the younger Assassin called enthusiastically, smiling at him like a child. He paused for a moment, looking over his shoulders as if he expected someone else to come striding up behind him; Altaïr did not have to guess who that might be. “Is your Apprentice seeing to the horses, or has he gone on ahead to make his own report?”
“Alnesr is well enough,” he said, that being the only thing he was certain of regarding his young Apprentice.
“It pleases me to hear that,” Rauf said, smiling slightly wide; Altaïr hated himself for a moment, he had failed, and now facing the admiration that Rauf felt for him, he was made all the more acutely aware of that failure. “It is good to see that you are unharmed. I trust that your mission was a success?”
“Is the Master still in his tower?” he asked, changing the subject quickly so that he would not be forced to dwell on such things; he would be forced to confront his failure soon enough, he knew.
“Yes, yes,” Rauf said, nodding and not seeming dismayed by the change in subject; he did try to peer more closely at Altaïr’s face, as if trying to determine the reason for it. “Buried in his books, as usual. No doubt he expects the two of you; or one, if Alnesr has indeed gone ahead.”
“My thanks, brother,” he said, nodding slightly.
“Safety and peace, Altaïr,” Rauf said, still wearing his wide smile.
“On you, as well,” he said, turning to continue his way up to the castle citadel.
He had never before found the edifice so utterly imposing before; it had been his home for as long as he lived, the place where he had both grown up and helped to raise Alnesr from babyhood into the dedicated, diligent boy that his Apprentice had become. Still, the fact remained that he was returning to this place to report a failure. He’d not expected to have to do so; he’d rode out those ten days previous with thoughts of returning in triumph, holding the Templars’ treasure in his hands and with Alnesr’s quiet voice regaling him with tales of his own triumph over the Templar forces in his path.
Now, however, he was returning to Masyaf empty-handed, and without Alnesr beside him, to report both of his failures to Master Mualim; the lack of his Apprentice by his side would be considered as great a failure as not retrieving the treasure that he had been sent out for. An Apprentice’s place was at his Master’s side, after all. And Apprentices such as Alnesr were not meant to fight alone.
He should have remembered that; the Master would no doubt berate him for that, as well as the failure he had returned to report in the first place.
The guards greeted him as they usually did, but Altaïr thought for a moment that he sensed additional hostility in their stances. It was likely an artifact of his own uneasiness, he realized after a moment. Moving closer, coming near to the grand archway that lead to the barbican, he saw a figure that he recognized. A figure that he was not particularly pleased to see: Abbas.
His fellow Assassin leaned almost insolently against the wall, standing beneath a torch that chased away what shadows there were underneath the arch. He was bareheaded, the blade of a full Assassin hanging from his left hip, and as his eyes fell on Altaïr his expression twisted into an ugly one. Altaïr could feel the sneer on his own face; there had once been a time that the two of them had been as brothers, even helping to raise Alnesr together, but that was long past.
Abbas was a bitter, pitiful shell of a man; nothing left in him but spite and vitriol, and so Altaïr spared him barely a thought.
“Ah, he returns at last.” Abbas looked over his shoulders, still wearing the mocking smile that had when he had first deigned to recognize Altaïr’s presence.
“Abbas,” he greeted coldly, not willing to allow the bitter man the satisfaction of seeing him react.
“Where are the others? Did you ride ahead, hoping to be the first one back? I know you are loath to share the glory,” Abbas looked over his shoulders again, an oily grin slowly spreading across his face. “I see your little boy is no longer with you. I wouldn’t have thought that someone like you could ever tire of being fawned over, but I suppose it loses its appeal from someone you have seen suckling at the breast of nursemaids since he was in swaddling clothes.”
“Are you done?” he sneered, feeling annoyed even in spite of the fact that Abbas’ taunts were as pitiful as those of a spoiled child.
“I bring word from the Master. He waits for you in the library,” Abbas said, still in that insolent tone. “Best hurry. No doubt you’re eager to put your tongue to his boot.”
“Another word and I’ll put my blade to your throat,” he snapped, having had more than his fill of Abbas and his insolence.
“There will be plenty of time for that later, brother,” Abbas’ tone made the last word an insult, and as Altaïr shouldered past him he used a bit more force than was strictly necessary.
Making his way into and through the courtyard and the training square – where he and Alnesr had spent a great deal of time between the missions that he had been assigned for the Order – Altaïr continued on his way to the entrance to Master Mualim’s tower. The guards here showed him a bit more respect than the ones below, but Altaïr knew that that was not to last. Once word of his failures had spread to them, as it inevitably would, their respect for him would vanish like water on the desert sands.
Not stopping to heed any of the greetings from the Assassins around him, knowing that they would not be so pleased to see him for much longer, Altaïr moved calmly through the citadel on his way to Master Mualim’s tower and the library contained within it. He was not going to delay any longer; as with all wounds, this one was best handled quickly.
He found the Master in his library, standing behind his desk and staring out a shaded window on the far wall behind him. It was a hard thing, what he had to do now, but Altaïr was determined to do it all the same.
“Altaïr,” the Master greeted him.
“Master,” he acknowledged.
“Come forward, tell me of your mission,” the Master ordered, and for a moment Altaïr felt his throat close. Still, he had known there would be a price to pay for his failure; best it be paid quickly. “I trust you have recovered the Templars’ treasure.”
“There was trouble, Master,” he began. “Robert de Sable was not alone.”
“When does our work ever gone as expected?” the Master asked, sounding rueful. “It is our ability to adapt that makes us who we are.”
“This time, it was not enough,” he said, feeling again the shame of his failure.
“What do you mean?” Master Mualim asked, his tone sharper than it had been.
“I have failed you,” he said, and the shame of it still burned him inside.
“And the treasure?”
“Lost to us.”
Master Mualim’s eyes narrowed, and he looked over Altaïr’s shoulders, even as Rauf and Abbas had done in their turn. “Where is Alnesr? Why does he not return with you?”
“I do not know,” he admitted at last; Alnesr was his Apprentice, yes, but his own foolishness had likely cost Malik and Kadar their lives. He could only hope that it had not cost Alnesr his own.
“Then what of Robert?” the Master demanded.
“Escaped.”
“I send you, my best man, to complete a mission more important than any that has come before, and you return to me with nothing but apologies and excuses? And worse, you betray your own Apprentice?!” the Master’s voice was as the crack of a whip across his back, and Altaïr forced himself not to wince; this was no less than he deserved.
“I-”
“Do not speak! Not another word.” The anger on the Master’s face had diminished, but his tone was as sharp as ever. “This is not what I expected. We’ll have to mount another force. Both for the treasure, and for your former Apprentice.”
“Former, Master?” he asked, feeling a chill.
“Do you honestly think that Alnesr would still be willing to serve under the man that betrayed and abandoned him? Are you really so foolish? So arrogant?” The Master’s eyes narrowed, though his silence seemed thoughtful rather than angry this time. “Where are Malik and Kadar? Have you betrayed them, as well?”
“I did all that I could,” he said, trying to explain; not to defend himself, no defense was possible after this kind of failure, but merely to inform the Master of the circumstances that he had faced.
“It was not enough,” came the voice of a ghost.
Chapter 3: Eagles and Fledglings
Chapter Text
~five days earlier~
“Men, to arms! Kill the Assassins!”
Finding himself in the midst of Robert de Sable’s soldiers, with only his younger brother and an unarmed Apprentice at his back, Malik spared a moment to curse Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad and all his arrogance to the deepest depths of Jahannam. Only a moment, of course; the Templars with Robert would not have been sent to this place under the command of a Grand Master if they were not at least as skilled as any full Assassin. Malik would need all of his skill and focus if he was to be able to protect both his own younger brother and Altaïr’s abandoned Apprentice from dying at the hands of these Templars.
Raising his sword, Malik met the first charge and held it back. “Kadar! Both of you! Stay behind me!”
Neither of them were yet ready for this kind of combat; not against Templars under the command of a Grand Master. The boy was an Apprentice; more suited to gathering information under the command of his Master. Provided his Master was not the fool that Altaïr had proven himself to be, of course.
And Kadar… his younger brother was not yet so proficient that Malik was prepared to risk him against elite Templar soldiers such as these.
Slashing, hacking, and stabbing, Malik waded deeper into the press of Templars on all sides. He saw Robert leaving from the back of the room, but he could do nothing about it with the man’s forces surrounding him on nearly all sides. One of the Templars managed to slip through his guard, but he found the blade blocked by that of another.
Looking over, he found that it was Altaïr’s young Apprentice who had stepped forward in his defense. He held a stolen Templar blade, and the way he wielded it spoke of at least some experience. It at least told him that he was not such a fool as to rush into a battle he was not prepared for, even if his Master was.
Malik would have asked the Apprentice how Kadar was doing, if there had been any time for words; if the tides of battle were not so uncertain, but there was no time for such things. He needed all his breath to swing his sword, as well as the short blade that he had pulled from the sheathe on his back. He could not ask how Kadar was doing, could not call out to his younger brother; all he could do was strike and block, dodge and defend, and hope that he could cut down the Templars in his path before either Kadar or Altaïr’s Apprentice could lose their lives to one of the Templars surrounding them.
He could hear cries from all around him, and he listened for two particular voices amid the tumult; he thought, once, that he heard a cry go up from Altaïr’s Apprentice, but there was nothing he could do under the circumstances but to keep fighting. The tide of Templars forced him back for a few moments, and he could see nothing but red crosses on a background of white.
Cutting the final Templar down at last, Malik heard the heavy breathing of another over even his own. Turning, raising his sword in case it was another Templar that he had to deal with, Malik instead saw the gray robes of an Apprentice. The short stature told him that it was Altaïr’s Apprentice that he had found, and the bloody Templar blade still in his hand showed that the corpses fallen at his feet had not been put there by chance.
“Have you seen my brother?” he asked, catching his breath as he made his way over to the Apprentice’s side.
“Forgive me, I lost sight of him,” Altaïr’s Apprentice said, bowing his head and incidentally showing more humility in that single gesture than his idiot Master had shown in the entire time that Malik had known him.
“You wouldn’t be the first,” he said, biting back a groan as the pain of his wounds hit him in earnest, now that the battle had ended. “Come, we’ll search for him together.” He would need the boy’s sword-arm, in any case. His own felt like it had been all but shorn off.
“Of course,” Altaïr’s Apprentice said, raising his stolen blade into a guard position.
Malik had seen the blood dripping across his face, but since it had merely been coming from a cut above his right eyebrow, and since he already knew that head-wounds tended to bleed entirely out of proportion to their severity, Malik knew that any tending he would do could wait until the two of them had met up with Kadar. Or, at least until they had laid him to rest.
He was not about to allow hope to break his heart, even in spite of the fact that Altaïr’s Apprentice had somehow managed to acquire a sword from one of his enemies; he wasn’t about to think that Kadar could have been so fortunate.
As he came upon a large pile of Templar bodies, Malik swallowed the bile that crept up in his throat; Kadar lay there, impaled by many Templar blades. Malik did not bother to count them; it was enough to know that his brother had not been so fortunate as Altaïr’s Apprentice.
“I… I am sorry,” the quiet voice of Altaïr’s Apprentice spoke up. “I should have stayed closer to him; protected him, when you could not.”
Malik smiled slightly, but less bitterly than he would have done if it had been Altaïr himself. “No need; even I lost sight of him in this madness. Let’s just lay him to rest and return to Masyaf. I have what we came for, at least.”
“Yes. Of course,” Altaïr’s Apprentice said, still sounding as if he blamed himself for Kadar’s death; he would have to speak to the boy, while the two of them were on their way back to Masyaf.
It would not do for the boy to tear himself apart, thinking that he was supposed to have protected Kadar over even his own life.
Making his way over to the box that the Templars had been protecting – after directing Altaïr’s Apprentice to bury Kadar where he had fallen – the one that they had all died for in this very room, he paused. There was little chance that he would be able to carry so large an object for as long as he needed to with only one good arm; he would still have done so, yes, if there were no other recourse, but there was not.
“Come here, would you?” he called, trying to remember the name of Altaïr’s Apprentice.
He’d never really paid much attention to the boy before, save to remark on his odd eyes at one point before the Master had informed them all that such a subject was not important. He’d always just seemed to be Altaïr’s quiet little shadow, and even moreso once he’d become the younger man’s Apprentice. Still, seeing him now, watching as the boy dropped the stolen Templar blade and picked up the treasure box, Malik thought that at least Altaïr’s Apprentice was not as insufferable as the man himself.
“Come, we’ll have to find another way out of this place,” he said, taking the lead, and looking back over his shoulder as the yellow-eyed boy fell into step behind him without a word.
The blood dripping down his face had dried, and was clearly starting to itch just as badly as Malik’s own uncleaned wounds were, if the discomfort on his face was any indication. Putting those thoughts aside – he would make the time for them to tend to each other’s wounds after they had left this killing-ground far behind them – Malik turned his eyes back to the path that he was leading them on. He would not be able to climb with his arm so damaged as it was, and the yellow-eyed boy behind him would be in the same situation, though obviously not for the same reasons.
Carefully making his way through the halls of the Temple Mount, his sword raised in case there were surviving Templars present, Malik sought a way out of the killing-field not far behind them. Soon enough, he found it. It was, likely as not, the rout that the Templars themselves had used to enter this place; none of them, after all, practiced the same arts of movement as the Assassins themselves had perfected.
“Come, I’ve found the way,” he said, turning to look at the yellow-eyed boy behind him.
“Of course,” the boy said, nodding as he clutched the box tighter and hurried his feet.
He lead the two of them through the winding halls of the Temple Mount, some of which they had been able to bypass coming in by taking the higher path that was now lost to them, and others that they had not, until he began to smell fresh air wafting in through the entrance of the Temple Mount.
“I seem to have forgotten your name,” he said, turning to look back at the soft-spoken, yellow-eyed boy that tailed him so well. “Could you tell me it again?”
“Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr,” the boy – Alnesr, Malik reminded himself – said, continuing to follow him closely.
“Altaïr is your father?” he scoffed, slightly amused by the thought of such an arrogant man having such a tolerable son. “You seem to have inherited all the good sense in the family; you must take after your mother.”
“Truthfully, I don’t know.” He looked back, watching as Alnesr shifted his grip slightly. “The Master said that Altaïr saved my life, and that because he did so, he was then responsible for it. I never knew my true parents; Altaïr never speaks of them.” The silence between them was heavy with thoughts, and Alnesr had soon broken it again. “The one time I did ask, he told me that they were unworthy of consideration.”
Malik narrowed his eyes; that sounded like something Altaïr would say, but what did the Master have to do with it? Putting those thoughts aside, promising himself that he would ask the Master about the matter of Alnesr, Altaïr, and their relation to one another once he and the boy himself had delivered this Templar treasure to him.
They soon reached the outside again.
“Hand me the box,” he said, smiling wryly. “There’s little chance of my riding a horse with only one good arm.”
“Of course,” Alnesr said, biting his lip as he handed the box over. “For what it’s worth, I am sorry.”
“Yes, I know,” he replied, smiling at the boy even as he tucked the box under his good arm. “And, as I’ve said before, you have no reason to apologize to me. You were not the one who got us attacked and nearly cost us the mission. Now go, tie the horses together, and we’ll be off.”
“Of course,” Alnesr said, his nod more like a subtle bow as he turned to go about his work.
When Malik had finished getting the box properly settled under his good arm, he saw that Alnesr had also finished his own appointed task: two of the horses that the four of them had journeyed to this place on had been harnessed together.
“Good work, Alnesr,” he said, offering the boy praise in the hope of offsetting at least some of the uncertainty he was clearly prey to.
He honestly wasn’t sure how someone who had been raised by the arrogant Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad could be so timid in the first place, but Malik had to admit that he much preferred it to any alternative. As he was helped onto his horse by Alnesr, smiling down at the yellow-eyed boy as he handed up the chest, Malik allowed himself to relax slightly. He would still need to keep his wits about him, of course, since riding a horse was not so simple as sitting in a chair, but with Alnesr guiding the lead horse, Malik knew that he could afford at least some relaxation.
The day passed swiftly, and soon enough the two of them – or four, if one counted the horses – were settling down in a small island of greenery, in the shade of a single pair of palms.
“Can you give me some help with these wounds?” he asked, as Alnesr helped him down from the horse. “We should have time to tend to them before we sleep, at least.”
“Of course,” Alnesr said, reaching up to touch the dried blood streaking his face; it was only then that Malik noticed that it had sealed his right eye shut. “I think that would be best.”
“Come, then,” he said, deciding not to say anything; if Alnesr was not going to complain about his impairment, Malik wasn’t going to give him a reason to.
Alnesr was soon tearing a spare blanket that one of them had packed into strips that would serve for making bandages, and Malik smiled slightly at his diligence. He might have been raised by Altaïr, as well as being apprenticed to the insufferable man, but Alnesr clearly hadn’t absorbed any of the man’s worst traits.
While Alnesr tended to the wounds on his arm, Malik used a wet piece of cloth to clean the dried, caked on blood from the boy’s face, finally allowing him to open his right eye. Alnesr didn’t make any gesture of acknowledgement, but the expression on his face was one of such fierce concentration that Malik didn’t even have to guess why. Biting his lip after he had tied a last pair of strips of blanket into a makeshift sling for Malik’s own wounded arm, Alnesr sat back on his knees.
“I’m afraid that’s all I can manage,” the boy said, looking from the sling and bandages that he’d fashioned back up to Malik’s face, still with the same expression of uncertainty he’d worn ever since the two of them had been stranded together. “I haven’t the skill of any of the healers back at Masyaf.”
“I doubt any amount of skill is going to be able to help, now,” he said, with a reassuring smile that he hoped Alnesr would respond to. “Those Templar dogs do their work too well.”
There was no response from Alnesr, but he occasionally saw the boy glancing back at him as the two of them settled down to sleep. His last conscious thought was amused relief at the fact that Altaïr’s son – blood relation or not – was nowhere near as insufferable as the man himself.
The next four days passed in much the same manner: he would check Alnesr’s wound, after the boy had cleaned the wounds on his left arm and changed the dressings there, and then the two of them would settle down to sleep. He’d not known what to think, that first night when the boy had curled up next to him as they slept. As it turned out, the boy had just been seeking something soft to lay his head on.
It was amusing to think that he had done the same thing with Altaïr; he would not have expected the arrogant man to tolerate such a thing, but given the way the young Apprentice reacted, it seemed he did.
When the two of them finally returned to Masyaf, Malik was pleased to note that his wounds no longer pained him nearly so much as they had on that first day; uncertain as he had been about the quality of his work, Alnesr had done it well.
The mountain that their Order’s fortress sat atop was coming into view, and Malik had never been more pleased to see it. Of course, the fact that he was returning with not only the treasure that Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad himself had failed but also the arrogant man’s abandoned Apprentice was certainly a reason to be pleased: he had done what Altaïr could not. And, while it had cost him the life of his brother, it had not cost him so much as it could have.
It had also given him the opportunity to get to know Alnesr as more than just Altaïr’s young Apprentice, but that was not the foremost thing on his mind at this moment.
He had given the box to Alnesr to carry, once the boy had helped him to dismount and the two of them had left the horses in the care of the stable hands. The bindings on his wounded arm would need to be changed soon, that much he could feel, but now that they had returned to the fortress, he would be able to ask the healers to take care of such things rather than pressing Alnesr into service the way he had needed to do while the two of them had been between cities. Turning to look back at the boy following so quietly beside him, Malik found that Alnesr was worrying his lower lip with his teeth.
“What troubles you, brother?” he asked.
“I just- I wonder what will become of me. Of Altaïr. We’ve returned with the treasure, yes,” the boy said, looking up at him with earnest, worried yellow eyes. “But, I still wonder if it will be enough.”
“You care very much for that man,” Malik said, still unsure of quite how he felt about the matter; he would have said it was impossible for someone as arrogant as Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad to inspire honest loyalty in anyone, but the proof to the contrary was walking beside him even now. “Why do that to yourself? That man has hardly proven himself worthy of that kind of devotion.”
“Worthy or not, Master Altaïr is the only family I truly have left. He has done so much for me, that I feel this is the least I can do to repay his kindness.” Alnesr looked up at him again, and Malik knew the boy could see the expression he was wearing. “You may not understand it, but that is the way I feel.”
“Of course,” he said, as the two of them continued walking.
On that last point, Alnesr was wrong: Malik did understand now just what feeling was behind the loyalty that Alnesr felt toward Altaïr, of all people. It was the same kind that he had known that Kadar felt for him: that of family. Of people who trusted one another. Of course, it was odd to think of the arrogant Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad as someone who could inspire such trust in anyone, but then Alnesr had said that he had been raised by the man.
And, even one so arrogant as Altaïr must have had some good qualities to have attained the rank of Master Assassin.
Their journey up to the fortress was marked by the stares of the guards and those of their fellow Assassins that they passed, and Malik wondered for a moment if Altaïr had told all of them that he, Kadar, and even Alnesr had been killed by the Templars who had been waiting for them in the Temple Mount. The ones that Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad had been so arrogant as to challenge with only his unarmed Apprentice at his back.
Truly, the boy should have been angrier with the arrogant man for nearly getting him killed, or at least relieved that he was still alive to even return to the fortress in the first place, and yet it was obvious for anyone to see that Alnesr was still fretting over Altaïr. It was so much like Kadar had once done for him, a habit that he had had only limited success training his younger brother out of, that Malik began to feel a sort of kinship with the boy.
He may have looked odder than anyone – man or woman – that Malik had seen, with his pale yellow eyes and the bright, silvery-white hair that Malik could just catch a glimpse of under his hood, but Alnesr had indeed turned out to be far more tolerable than he would have expected, given who he had been raised by.
Making his way through the fortress, with Alnesr a silent but clearly fretting presence at his side, Malik began to hear the sounds of the Master and Altaïr himself discussing something. As the words became clearer to him, no longer muffled so much by both the walls and the distance separating them, Malik smirked slightly as he heard Altaïr attempting to justify his actions. Malik knew that he would not have been nearly so amused if he had been forced to make his journey alone, with the pain of his injured arm burning him almost as badly as the loss of Kadar, but having another to tend to his wounds, someone whose company was tolerable enough that he could relax in their presence and unburden himself somewhat, did help.
He was glad for small favors, at least.
“It was not enough,” he said, just as Altaïr had spoken up, trying to defend the actions that he had taken – the way that he had run away – back in the tunnels beneath Solomon’s Temple.
Chapter 4: Turnabout
Chapter Text
Both the Master and Altaïr himself turned to stare, as he lead Alnesr further into the Master’s chamber; it gave him at least some pleasure to see that Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad – arrogant man that he was – was clearly feeling the same uncertainty that Alnesr had been prey to. And, while seeing that boy fretting the way he had been – and still seemed to be, when Malik took the time to study him – was somewhat worrisome to him, he thought that it was only right that the arrogant Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad would suffer so for his own arrogance.
“We still live, at least,” he said, resisting the urge to sneer at Altaïr, if only for Alnesr’s sake.
He could express his full displeasure to the arrogant man when they were both alone.
“And your brother?” the Master asked, looking over his bandaged wounds and bloodstained robes with compassion.
“Gone,” he said, feeling again the swell of mixed bitterness and pity; bitterness for the fact that his younger brother had been killed during a mission that would have been easy but for Altaïr, and pity for the fact that Alnesr so obviously still blamed himself for Kadar’s death. “Because of you,” he snarled at Altaïr, deliberately ignoring the way Alnesr briefly cringed at the tone of his voice.
“Robert threw me from the room. There was no way back; nothing I could do,” Altaïr said, making a pathetic attempt to justify his actions; Malik did not think that even someone so arrogant as Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad could believe such words.
“Only because you did not heed my warning,” he snapped, feeling a twinge in his useless left arm as he almost instinctively clenched his fists. “All of this could have been avoided, my brother would still be alive, and your Apprentice would not have been injured so.” Turning slightly, he softened his expression for Alnesr’s benefit; the boy was looking up at him with that same uncertain expression that Malik had come to dislike so much. “Your arrogance nearly cost us victory this day,” he snarled, turning his attention back to Altaïr himself once again.
As much as he had come to enjoy the company of Altaïr’s soft-spoken Apprentice, the man himself was not in his good-graces; there was very little chance that he would be again, unless the man was somehow able to change his ways.
“Nearly?” the Master echoed, looking at him with new interest.
He smiled slightly; this triumph belonged to both him and Alnesr, but the simple fact was that even if he had been forced to make the long journey alone, the fact that he had something to hold over Altaïr’s head would have made him feel a great deal better about the situation. “We have what your favorite failed to find.”
Nodding to Alnesr as the young Apprentice looked to him, Malik smirked as the young Apprentice delivered it to the Master, setting it atop his desk and stepping back with a respectful bow. The boy’s gaze lingered for a few moments on the chest that he had just delivered, before he seemed to force his attention away from it. For a moment, Malik wondered what could have prompted such a reaction, but he was given little time to think of that, before a messenger burst into the room.
The sounds of running feet, the screams of those who could be either their fellow Assassins or citizens who lived in the town, and the unmistakable ring of clashing swords let him know what was going on even before the messenger could say a single word.
“It seems that we have returned with more than just the treasure,” he said, looking to the wall where the sounds of battle were coming through most strongly.
“Master, we are under attack!” the messenger that had burst in shouted, all propriety forgotten under the circumstances. “Robert de Sable lays siege to Masyaf village!”
~AC1~
He had not been foolish enough to truly believe that his theft – the Assassins’ theft – of the Apple would go uncontested by the Templars; however, he would have honestly preferred slightly more time to prepare for this battle. Still, such things could not be helped sometimes. “So he seeks a battle, does he? Very well, I’ll not deny him. Go,” he told the messenger. “Inform the others. The fortress must be prepared.”
Returning his attention to the Assassin that he had taken under his wing – the one who had disappointed him so greatly this day – he frowned. “As for you, Altaïr… our discussion will have to wait. You must make for the village; destroy these invaders. Drive them from our home.”
“It will be done,” the young Assassin said, and he seemed somehow relieved to have been sent on such an assignment.
“Alnesr, return to your quarters; the battlefield is no place for an Apprentice.” Though, it was entirely possible, depending on Malik’s account of the boy’s actions, that he would not remain an Apprentice for even the rest of this day.
“Yes, Master Mualim,” the boy said, bowing with respect.
He noticed, however, that the child’s eyes lingered on the box that held the Apple, before he seemed to force his attention from it; bowing a second time before he left. Interesting, Al Mualim mused; perhaps such obvious interest could be guided in the proper direction, given time. Now, however, there were more immediate concerns facing all of them.
“Malik, go to the healers, and have them see to your arm. Alnesr’s diligence is clear, and it pleases me to see such dedication, but I would not have you overlooked.”
“Thank you, Master,” Malik said, bowing in the same manner as Altaïr and Alnesr before him, and retreating from the room even as they had.
Leaving his study behind, curious about the boy Alnesr’s reaction to the Apple – he had known that the boy was not normal from the way his hair and eyes were colored, but he had never been given a reason to suspect that there was anything more to his appearance than the obvious – he nonetheless knew that his first task would be to prepare the Assassins to defend the city and the fortress that they claimed as their protectorate. His simple curiosity could wait until he had ensured that the Templars would not be able to retrieve the Apple. Not after all that he had done to claim it.
Speaking to the more talented and dedicated of the Assassins, Al Mualim arranged for the trap that he had helped to lay to be prepared to spring on Robert and his forces. Once he had finished with that, he turned his path and made for Alnesr’s quarters. Finding his way to the room where the odd-looking young Apprentice had been quartered when he had gained his rank and left Altaïr’s room, Al Mualim made his way inside.
He found the boy just settling down at his desk, after having divested himself of his outer robe; his odd, bright silver hair completely exposed.
“Alnesr,” he called, drawing the young Apprentice’s attention away from the contemplation that he had seemed to be absorbed in.
“Master Mualim?” the young Apprentice asked, looking startled. “What brings you here?”
“You seemed troubled by the presence of the Templar Treasure,” he said, deciding not to mention it by name; the boy did seem leery, and it would be best to allow him to come to the correct point of view with a minimum of prodding. “Would you be willing to speak with me about that?”
“It- it is not that I was troubled, Master Mualim,” Alnesr said, his strange, pale yellow eyes turning inward for a moment before his gaze settled again on Mualim himself. “The treasure… it seemed to- to draw me in, somehow. I do not know how I could explain it, but to say that- there is… something about the treasure that,” Alnesr sighed, seeming to have run out of words. “Draws me to it, somehow.”
“I understand; you’ve no need to say more,” he said, pondering the full implications of what Altaïr’s young Apprentice had said.
True, men were indeed drawn to the Apple, but that draw could only truly be exerted when a man – or, in rare cases, a woman – was in sight of the treasure itself. He had never heard of someone being drawn to the Apple when it was out of their sight, tucked away safely in a box; however, he had also never met someone like Alnesr. He had never put stock in the tales that Alnesr’s strange eye and hair colors had marked him as a demon, and yet they did mark him, all the same. Perhaps there was more to the boy than even he had suspected.
However, those speculations would have to wait; for now, there were far more pressing matters to attend to.
“We will speak on this matter later, child,” he said, making his voice gentle so that Alnesr would trust him; Abbas’ betrayal had hurt the boy deeply, that much was clear for anyone to see. “For now, stay in your room. I will call on you later.”
“Yes, Master Mualim.”
Returning the nod – though Alnesr’s was more akin to a subtle bow – that the boy gave him, Al Mualim left the child to his contemplation. Time would tell if reaction that Alnesr had had to the Apple could be properly channeled, but for now, he had an old compatriot to meet. Robert de Sable would not triumph this day.
~AC1~
Standing amidst his fellow Assassins, staring out at the corpses of the Templars whose blood now stained his robes and his blade, Altaïr couldn’t help but wonder if what the Master had said was indeed true. Would Alnesr indeed see his flight from Solomon’s Temple as abandonment? As a betrayal? Would all the years that they had spent together – as Master and Apprentice; as the closest thing to family that was allowed within the Brotherhood – be tainted by that one, impulsive action of his?
“Altaïr,” Rauf’s call pulled him from his thoughts, and he was grateful for that. “Come.”
“Where are we going?” he asked, feeling weary of all this: the killing, the necessity of it, and the uncertainty he was now prey to regarding Alnesr.
“We have a surprise waiting for our guests,” the younger Assassin said, smiling slightly. “Just do as I do; it should become clear soon enough.”
Rauf was pointing high above them, up into the ramparts of the fortress. Sheathing his sword and putting aside his doubts, as any good Assassin learned to do, Altaïr followed Rauf up the series of ladders that lead to the summit of Masyaf fortress. The leaders of the Assassins, Al Mualim among them, were all gathered there. He crossed the floor toward the Master, but Master Mualim said not a word to him, mouth set in stern disapproval.
Rauf said for him to take his place on the rightmost of three wooden platforms jutting out into the air, and Altaïr did so without a word. Now, finding himself staring out into the valley over which Masyaf fortress presided, Altaïr felt that he was able to breathe once again. The wind rushing around him, the familiar cries of birds carried on it, and the sight of them wheeling and swooping through the air, let Altaïr forget – for just a few, fleeting, precious moments – just where he was and what had happened to him.
The sight of the Templars, those both alive and dead, brought his attention quickly and firmly back to the present; there was still much work to be done.
“Heretic,” Robert de Sable snarled from his place at the head of his reduced forces, his steed shifting slightly underneath him in spite of the beast’s obvious discipline. “Return what you have stolen from me!”
“You’ve no claim to it, Robert,” Al Mualim’s strong voice echoed through the valley, and for a moment Altaïr found his thoughts turning to that very thing; the box had seemed to glow, but odder was the way Alnesr had reacted to it. It had almost seemed as if the boy needed to be close to the treasure, or at least felt he had, and had only managed to force himself to leave though sheer force of will and the discipline that was ingrained into every Assassin. It was a troubling thought. “Take yourself from here, before I’m forced to thin your ranks further.”
“You play a dangerous game!” the Templar snapped.
“I assure you, this is no game.”
“So be it,” Robert de Sable snapped, his patience clearly at an end; there was something else in his tone, as well… Altaïr didn’t like it at all. “Bring forth the hostage!”
From the ranks of Templar soldiers, an Assassin was dragged forward. Gagged and bound, the young man nonetheless fought to free himself; it was an admirable thing, the determination displayed by all of their Brotherhood, but Altaïr had the feeling that determination alone would not be enough to win this day. Sure enough, once the Assassins had been given time to see the captured Assassin – a Novice, by the look of him – Robert signaled to one of his fellow Templars forward.
The unnamed Templar drove his blade into the Novice’s chest, spilling the young man’s blood all over the dry dirt of the valley.
“Your village lies in ruins, and your stores are hardly endless!” Robert shouted up to Master Mualim, as the Assassins around him caught their breath. “How long before your fortress crumbles from within? How disciplined will your men remain when the wells run dry, and their food is gone?”
“My men do not fear death, Robert. They welcome it; and the rewards it brings.” There was a note of definite gloating in Robert’s harsh voice, but Master Mualim was as calm as ever.
“Good! Then they shall have it all around!” Robert shouted; if Altaïr could have seen the expression on his face, he was certain he would have seen rage.
“Show this fool Knight what it means to have no fear!” the Master said. “Go to god!”
Still, he knew that – Templar though he was – Robert de Sable was not lying. Nor was he arrogantly assuming that he could do more than he was capable of. The Templars were indeed capable of laying siege to Masyaf; cutting the Assassins off from the supplies they needed to sustain themselves, keeping them from obtaining food and water once their stocked supplies had run out. It would not be long, if such were allowed to happen, before the Brotherhood as a whole had been weakened enough for Robert and his Templars to attack with little fear of reprisal.
Altaïr could only hope that the Master’s plan, whatever it turned out to be, would help them to avoid such a fate.
“Follow me, and do so without hesitation,” Rauf said, bringing Altaïr’s attention back to the mission at hand.
Without a word, Altaïr moved to the end of the platform he was standing upon and looked down from it. There was a pile of hay, enough to break a fall, beneath the platforms each of the three of them stood upon. He was beginning to see just what it was that Master Mualim had planned, and he hoped that such would be enough to deal with Robert de Sable and his Templars.
The sound of his robes flapping, a sound like soft rain or the lapping of the sea, helped Altaïr to leave his thoughts behind; something that he had long since learned to do once he had made his first Leap of Faith. Soon, he came to a place of stillness within himself; the place that allowed him to fight without fear, that allowed him to leap without hesitation from even the tallest of towers. Everything else, even the threatening words that the Master was exchanging with Robert de Sable, fell away then.
For a few moments, Altaïr felt as free as the eagle he had often been compared to.
“Now,” Rauf said, catching what little attention Altaïr had spared for the outside world.
The three of them leapt then, wind rushing past them, and time ceased to exist for the few moments that he was falling through the air; all of his worries and thoughts for the future – his concern for Alnesr and what might become of them both after this day – washed away in the rush of wind.
He landed perfectly, the haystack breaking his fall as it was meant to do, and Rauf had done so as well, but the Assassin whose name he did not know – the one who had been placed on the leftmost platform – was not either so fortunate or so skillful; his leg snapped with a sound like a dry twig that had been muffled by cloth. Rauf was at the other Assassin’s side in seconds, hushing him so that the Templars would not be able to hear him and thus spoil there plans.
“I’ll stay behind and attend to him,” Rauf said, once he had managed to quiet the other Assassin. “You’ll have to go ahead without us; the ropes there will bring you to the trap. Release it; rain death upon our enemies.”
Nodding, Altaïr left without a word and with only a single look back. He wondered for a moment just how his fellow Assassins had been able to set such a trap without him knowing about it, and if there were other facets of the Brotherhood that remained unknown to him. Putting those thoughts out of his mind, Altaïr devoted his attention wholly to the task he had set for himself: that of navigating the log-bridges, walls, and ledges that stood between him and the trap that Rauf had spoken of.
Standing at last atop the tall watchtower that overlooked the valley, Altaïr looked down through the spaces between the boards and saw the trap: heavy, greased logs stockpiled and resting on a tilted platform; many of them, perhaps even enough to kill or drive off all of the Templars before they could begin their siege. Moving with the silence that he had trained into himself over his long years of service in the Brotherhood, he looked down upon the ranks of Templar knights standing with their backs to him.
They had no idea what was going to happen, and for the first time in several days – as he raised his sword to cut the ropes holding the logs in place – Altaïr smiled.
The logs swept in, scattering the ranks of Templar knights, and killing more than a few, he was happy to note. Robert de Sable, mounted on his horse, was not among their number. It was a troublesome thing, that, but he was not going to focus on it. There was nothing to be done without archers, and summoning them was not his duty.
No matter how much he wished to see a feathered shaft driven between Robert de Sable’s eyes.
Below him, the other Assassins were beginning to gather, all of them seeming pleased with the outcome of this battle; those who had died during it would be mourned, yes, but the fact that the Brotherhood was alive and free to do such mourning was worthy of note all the same. Still, he could not help but to think that this would not be the end of things; not after everything that had happened. Not after everything he had done, and everything he had not done.
Chapter 5: The price of failure
Chapter Text
Once he had finished his business with Altaïr – brash as the man was and had been, he was still a worthy member of the Assassin Brotherhood; he would only need to be reminded of what that entailed – Al Mualim made his way down the corridors of Masyaf fortress towards Alnesr’s room. He’d spoken to Malik about the role Altaïr’s former Apprentice had played in their escape from Robert de Sable’s Templars and the recovery of the Apple. Then, once he had been satisfied with the accounting given the boy, he had made a stop at the both the tailor, and the weapon smith to pick up an item that he had given over to their keeping long ago.
And also to acquire an item that Altaïr’s former Apprentice would be making use of a great many times in the near future.
Rapping on the door of the young, former Apprentice’s – not that young Alnesr knew that, as yet – room, Al Mualim stood back as the door was opened. Alnesr stood in the doorway, the expression on his face one that Al Mualim could not quite place.
“Hello again, Master Mualim,” the boy said, the unreadable expression on his face clearing, replaced with curiosity. “You said that you wished to speak to me,” stepping aside slightly, Alnesr gestured to his desk and the chair that sat in front of it. “Would you like to come inside?”
“It is kind of you to offer, child, but I have matters to discus with you that require your presence in my study,” he said; for a moment, Alnesr looked uncertain, but he soon put aside his doubts as every Assassin learned to do. “Now go; change into your robes and come with me.”
“Of course, Master Mualim,” Alnesr said, bowing and turning to do as he’d been told. “I will return shortly.”
Waiting for a few moments, he smiled gently as Alnesr came back out in full Assassin regalia; the regalia of an Apprentice, yes, but he was not to know that this would be the last day that he would wear such clothes. He placed his right hand on the young former Apprentice’s shoulder, guiding the boy gently back to his study so that the two of them could speak in earnest.
Making his way through the corridors and back to his study, Al Mualim found the curiosity that Alnesr’s words about the Apple had awakened gnawing at him once more; still, he contented himself with the fact that the boy would now be reporting directly to him. He would be able to speak more candidly to the child, more than that, he now had a more than passing interest in the boy; to have seen his reaction to the Apple, even though the treasure itself had been stored inside the box that Malik had brought to him, that had not been something that he could have ever expected.
Once the two of them had reached his study, Al Mualim directed Alnesr to stand before his desk, and then settled himself in his chair behind it. Alnesr waited quietly, and Al Mualim was pleased to see the child’s discipline even in the face of his obvious uncertainty.
“I can see that you are wondering why I have called you here, child,” he said, making his voice gentle so that Alnesr could take comfort from it. “You, the abandoned Apprentice of Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad. A man, who in spite of all his years of dedicated service, made a grave mistake that revealed us to the Templars and cost several Assassins their lives this day.” Alnesr’s lips parted briefly, but then he seemed to think better of whatever it was that he would have said. “I have heard accounts of you from Malik; you have proved that the lessons that Altaïr taught were not wasted, though he seems to have forgotten them, now.” Alnesr’s gaze was focused on his face, and while it was plain to see that the child was curious, it was just as plain that he trusted in Al Mualim himself to allay such curiosity; he was pleased to see such discipline in one so young.
Clearly, Altaïr had only passed the better parts of his nature onto the boy that he had raised as his son.
“Indeed, I will be counting on you, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr, to remind your former Master of the lessons that he has clearly forgotten.”
“Forgive me for questioning your wisdom, Master Mualim, but how am I to do that?” Alnesr asked, speaking at last.
Al Mualim smiled gently, holding the knife he had been heating just out of the child’s line of sight. “Give me your right hand, child.”
Alnesr’s hand, tanned by the sun and hardened from the work that the child had done during the seven long years that Altaïr had trained him – first as one of the many children within the fortress, then as a Novice, and finally as the man’s own apprentice – was offered to him without hesitation. Gently spreading the child’s – though, after this day he would no longer call the boy such to his face – fingers, Al Mualim grasped Alnesr’s ring finger and drove his heated knife into the base of it.
To his credit, Alnesr did not cry out as his finger was severed, though he did hiss in pain. In that way, the child reminded him all the more of Altaïr. Fitting, of course, since not only had Alnesr been raised by the man, the boy had been trained by him since he was old enough to properly understand the role of the Assassins.
“Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr, I hereby promote you to the rank of full Assassin, in recognition of your valor in battle, and the understanding of the Creed that you have demonstrated,” he said, standing once more. “Now, Alnesr, follow me, and I shall complete your initiation.”
“Of… Of course,” the child said, his voice quavering but the expression on his face making it clear that he was merely excited and pleased. “Thank you, Master Mualim.”
Leading the boy back through the corridors of the fortress, Al Mualim smiled softly. He could not deny that he, too, felt some pride in Alnesr; he had been the one to teach Altaïr of the Creed and what it truly meant to be an Assassin, and to see the proof that a pupil he had taught had been capable of teaching in his own turn was gratifying. True, he might have been holding himself aloof from these Assassins and their Brotherhood – and, he could at least admit to himself that he would have honestly preferred to instruct his students in the proper way of living – but seeing his own student become a teacher in his turn was indeed a pleasant thing all the same.
The two of them had soon reached the highest tower of the fortress, and Al Mualim lead Alnesr out into room at the top of the watchtower. The same place, in fact, that Altaïr, Rauf, and Hakim had leaped from in their efforts to deal with Robert’s Templars when they had attacked. Alnesr stood in the doorway for only a few moments, before making his way over to the rightmost platform. If he had been the sort of man who believed in such things, he might have found it fitting that Altaïr’s former Apprentice had chosen the very platform that the man himself had used to perform his first Leap of Faith.
Still, the rightmost platform was the closest to the entrance to the fortress, and that was most likely the whole of the reason that Alnesr had chosen as he had.
Moving closer as Alnesr stood at the center of the platform, turning as if to take in all of the valley at once, or as close to it as he could manage with only one set of eyes, Al Mualim saw that the young Assassin was not afraid – as some others might have been during a time such as this – he was clearly enthralled by the sight of the valley spread out beneath and before them. Making his way over to the young Assassin’s side, Al Mualim placed his hands on the young man’s shoulders, guiding his gaze in the proper direction.
“Tell me what you see, Alnesr,” he said, subtly turning the boy so that he would have a better view.
“I see the valley that that the fortress stands watch over, and in the distance the village,” the young Assassin said.
“Yes,” he said, smiling slightly. While he might wish that he could have guided this boy onto the true path to peace, it was still pleasing to the teacher in him to see that Alnesr was so eager to learn. “The village that we Assassins have stood guard over for as long as this fortress has existed. The very place that the Templars would destroy, were they to be given the chance. It is the duty of every Assassin to take a hand in their defense, and they in turn contribute to our own survival by supplying us with food and clothing.”
“Altaïr has told me that the villagers and the Assassins are two parts of the same whole; that we all stand together against the Templars,” Alnesr said, the reflective expression on his face suggested that he was looking into his memories rather than down at the village before them.
“He still has some wisdom, then,” Al Mualim said. “Still, you must be the one to remind him of the wisdom he has clearly forgotten at this juncture.”
“How will I do that, Master?” Alnesr asked, odd, pale yellow eyes turning to regard him once more.
“First, you must truly become a full Assassin,” he said, moving off the platform so that Alnesr stood alone once more. “Show me what it is to have no fear, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
“Yes, Master Mualim,” the young Assassin said, bowing slightly to him before turning to perform his first Leap of Faith.
Making his way to the edge of the tower, Al Mualim watched as Alnesr emerged from the haystack and made his way back to the side of the tower. He had had little enough opportunity to observe the boy’s training, his business with the Templars and the fact that Altaïr himself had taken on the task of raising and training the boy by that time, so seeing Alnesr make his way back up the side of the tower with such ease and strength was rather pleasing to see.
“Good work, Alnesr,” he said, as the young Assassin made his way back up to the top of the tower. “You have proved your dedication to our Brotherhood, and thus proven that you are fully worthy to take your place among our ranks.”
“Thank you, Master Mualim,” Alnesr said, bowing slightly to him.
“Now, follow me,” he said, turning to leave with a last look at the young Assassin. “There is still much for us to do, you and I.”
“Of course, Master Mualim.”
Reflecting back on the young man whose initiation he had just finished, Al Mualim felt again a sense of regret that he would be forced to treat the young man just as he would all of the other Assassins. Still, even for all of Alnesr’s fine qualities, the child had still been raised by the Assassins and would hence need be treated as an Assassin himself. There was no time, and no point, in wishing things otherwise.
Alnesr and Altaïr were what they were, and Al Mualim was what he was; and if either of them were to discover his nature, then they would act as their own nature dictated.
~AC1~
Altaïr could not be certain if he were awake, dreaming, or if he had indeed died when the Master had stabbed him. He could not know, for those first few moments, but as his vision cleared and Altaïr felt his senses slowly returning to him, Altaïr began to honestly doubt that he had died. He did not know how that was possible, considering that he had indeed felt the Master’s knife in his belly, but it seemed to be what was happening to him in the end.
As his senses slowly returned, Altaïr realized that he was standing on his feet. He did not know how this was possible, not after everything that he could remember happening, but that seemed to be the position that he was in. Altaïr wondered just where he was, if he had died and this was indeed the Paradise that they had been promised.
Still, if it was somehow Paradise, it looked a great deal more like Master Mualim’s study than he had been lead to believe.
The Master even stood before him, looking down with an inscrutable expression.
“I am… Alive?” he wondered aloud, hands moving instinctively to his belly. He expected to find the wound that had nearly ended his life, bandaged or not, and likely still bleeding at this point. He felt nothing, not even the wrappings that he had often seen on more grievously wounded Assassins. “But, I saw you stab me. Felt death’s embrace.”
“You saw what I wanted you to see,” Al Mualim said, the inscrutable expression remaining in place. “And then you slept the sleep of the dead, of the womb, so that you might awake, and be reborn.”
“To what end?” he asked, still attempting to regain his composure.
“Do you remember, Altaïr, what it is the Assassins fight for?” the Master asked, the inscrutable expression on his face remaining.
“Peace, in all things,” he stated, still feeling rather off-balance but making the attempt to master himself.
“Yes, in all things,” the Master said firmly, almost angrily. “It is not enough to end the violence that one man commits upon another, it refers to peace within, as well. You cannot have one without the other.”
“So it is said,” he allowed, though there were times that he doubted.
“So it is,” the Master snapped, the color in his cheeks rising the way that Altaïr had only seen a few times before. “But you, my son, have not found inner peace. It manifests in ugly ways. You are arrogant; overconfident.”
“Were you not the one to say that nothing is true, and everything is permitted?” he asked; truly that had been one of the tenets that the Master had emphasized to him, and that he in his turn had passed on to Alnesr.
“You do not understand the true meaning of the phrase, my child,” Master Mualim said, sounding disappointed once more. “It does not grant you the freedom to do as you wish, it is a knowledge meant to guide your senses. It expects a wisdom you clearly lack.”
“Then what is to become of me?” he asked, trying not to show the uncertainty he now felt.
“I should kill you for the pain that you’ve brought upon us,” the Master said, his single eye focusing on Altaïr with an intensity that he’d not often seen. “Malik thinks it only fair: your life in exchange for his brother’s.” The way that the Master paused after making that statement seemed deliberate, and Altaïr steeled himself for whatever would come next. “But, that would be a waste of my time and your talents. You see, you have been stripped of your possessions; your rank, as well. You are demoted, a child, once more; as you were on the day you first came to us. I am offering you a chance at redemption. You will earn your way back into the Brotherhood.”
“I assume you’ve something planned,” he said knowing that it had to be true.
“First, you must prove to me that you remember how to be an Assassin,” the Master said, coming out from behind his desk to pace the length of it.
“So, you would have me take a life?” he asked, suspecting that such would not be the extent of his punishment.
“No; not yet, at least,” the Master said firmly. “For now, you are to become a student once again.”
“If that is the case, then what is to become of Alnesr?” he asked; he and the boy had served together – had lived together – for so long that he almost did not know how to react to this. True, the two of them would likely have gone their separate ways once Alnesr had gained the rank of a full Assassin, but that time had not yet come.
“This is the first that you have seen fit to ask of him,” the Master said, the inscrutable expression that he had worn earlier returning to his face. “Do you remember, then, the lessons that you taught the boy?”
“I taught him of the Creed, of the work that we Assassins do; just as you taught me, Master,” he said, wondering what the point of this conversation was.
“Yes, and from the account that Malik gave of him, he has learned those lessons well,” Master Mualim said, folding his arms and studying him closely. “Alnesr seems to have learned the lessons that you taught him better than the ones that I taught you, my child.”
He did not know what the Master meant by speaking of lessons this way, but it was clear that he had some greater plan in mind. “So it would seem,” he allowed.
“In the past, Altaïr, Alnesr would have gathered the information that you required to hunt down your targets, and others would have done so before Alnesr had taken his place as your Apprentice,” the Master said, gazing down on him with a stern expression. “But no more. From this day forward, you will track them yourself.”
“If that is what you wish,” he said; it was not such a harsh punishment as he had been expecting, considering the disappointment in him that the Master had displayed so openly.
“You will also be accompanied by your new Master; watch him, learn the lessons that he has to teach, and I am certain that you will prove yourself worthy of rejoining the Brotherhood once more.”
“New Master?” he demanded; the thought that he would become an Apprentice once more was not one that had ever occurred to him. He could only hope that it was not Malik that he would be serving under; anyone else would have been better than that insufferable man.
“Yes; I believe that the two of you will get along rather well,” the Master said, turning to look over at the far right side of his study, into the shelves of books and scrolls that Altaïr had long since stopped paying any particular attention to. “You may come out now. Come, there is no need for hesitation.”
Another Assassin made his way out from the shelter of the shelves; this new Assassin was too short to be Malik, and the fact that this newcomer still possessed both of his arms let Altaïr know that this was not the man that he had wronged in the past. Still, that did leave the question of this new, smaller Assassin’s identity unanswered as yet.
When the shorter Assassin turned to look at him, the first thing Altaïr noticed were his eyes. Pale yellow, like saffron-dyed cloth that had been left to fade in the sun. It was the first thing that had called his attention to the boy back when he had merely been a babe in his father’s arms; that day, when he had first killed in defense of someone who could not yet defend themselves.
“Alnesr,” he said, he’d not expected this; Alnesr was wearing the garb of a full Assassin, and when he looked to boy’s right arm, Altaïr could see the bracer that held his former Apprentice’s new hidden blade.
The boy’s lips parted briefly, as if he wanted to say something but did not know just what to say in such a situation as this. “Altaïr,” he said instead.
The uncertainty that Alnesr was so clearly feeling was perversely comforting to him in this situation; there was little chance that the Master had told him of the plans that he had made, if the boy was reacting like this.
“The two of you have worked together in the past, accomplishing more than either of you could have easily done alone,” the Master said, looking over the both of them as Alnesr moved closer to him.
“Then, tell me what you wish us to do,” he said, moving to stand shoulder-to-shoulder with Alnesr the way that they had done so often in the past.
The inscrutable expression returned to the Master’s face as he took in the two of them, but he did not give voice to whatever troubled him. “I hold here a list; nine names adorn it. Nine men who need to die. They are plague-bringers, war makers; their power and influence corrupts the land, and ensures that the Crusades continue. You will find them all, and kill them. In doing so, you will sow the seeds of peace. Both for the region, and for yourself. Alnesr, your task will be to see that your Apprentice relearns the lessons that he has so clearly forgotten; just as he taught you your lessons in the past, it is now your task to teach him.”
“Yes, Master Mualim,” Alnesr said, though he still sounded rather uncertain.
“Nine lives, in exchange for my own,” he said, contemplating what he and Alnesr would soon be doing.
“A most generous offer, I should think,” he said, turning his gaze to take in Alnesr once more. “Have you any questions, Alnesr?”
“Where do we begin, Master?” his former Apprentice asked.
“Your journey will begin in Damascus,” the Master said, sounding pleased with the resolve he now heard in Alnesr’s voice; Altaïr was as well, but now was not a time to discus such things. “There you will find a black market merchant named Tamir; let him be the first to fall.” Master Mualim made his way over to the cage of carrier pigeons that he kept for delivering messages to the Assassin Bureaus maintained in other cities, removing a bird from the cage, he cupped the creature gently in his hands. “Be sure to visit the city’s Assassin Bureau when you arrive. I’ll dispatch a bird to inform the Rafiq of your arrival. Speak with him; you’ll find that he has much to offer.”
“If you think it best,” he said, wondering at just what message the Master was trying to impart to them with these cryptic words of his.
“I do,” the Master said firmly. “Besides, you can not begin your mission without his consent, Altaïr.”
“What nonsense is this?!” he demanded, affronted on Alnesr’s behalf as well as his own. “An Assassin is not required to report their activities to anyone.”
“Alnesr will not be required to account for his activities,” Master Mualim said, his tone sharp enough to catch Altaïr’s attention even in spite of the indignation that he felt. “But for yours. This is the price you pay for the mistakes you have made, Altaïr: you answer not only to me, and not only to your Master, but to all of the Brotherhood as well, now.”
“So be it,” he conceded, knowing that he would not be able to change the Master’s mind now that he had made it up but still displeased by the situation all the same.
“Go, then,” the Master said, his usual calm settling about him like a mantle. “Prove that you are not yet lost to us.” There was a moment of silence, as the Master took something from underneath his desk. “Alnesr, come; take this.” Watching in slight puzzlement as the Master handed his bracer to Alnesr, Altaïr wondered what the meaning of that action was. “Give this to your Apprentice when you feel that he is ready to carry it once again.”
“Yes, Master Mualim,” Alnesr said, only the tone of his voice showing the uncertainty he felt; his face was as professionally blank as an Assassin twice his age.
Altaïr felt a swell of pride; he had indeed taught his former Apprentice well.
Chapter 6: The hunters depart
Chapter Text
As the two of them made their way down the stairs and away from the Master’s study, Altaïr turned to look at Alnesr. His former Apprentice was staring down at the bracer in his hands, finally allowing his face to show the uncertainty he had clearly felt while he had been speaking with the Master in his study.
“Ma- Altaïr,” his former Apprentice said, one of his front teeth showing over his lower lip for a moment. “Would you like this back?”
“Yes, thank you,” he said, taking the bracer back and fixing it onto his left arm. “Come, we’ll go to the stables and get underway.”
“Of course, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, nodding as the two of them fell into step with one another.
As he continued on his way, passing by his and Alnesr’s fellow Assassins and finally out of Masyaf fortress itself, Altaïr breathed more easily. It felt as if he had indeed been reborn, as Master Mualim had intended; an odd thing, yes, but it was the way he felt nonetheless. Looking over at Alnesr, Altaïr found that his former Apprentice seemed to be mastering the uncertainty he had been plagued by earlier.
The sudden reversal of their respective roles had caught the both of them off-guard; Altaïr had to admit that it was true even for him. The Master must have had some greater purpose for doing as he had. It was their task to adapt to it, as all Assassins adapted to their changing situations.
The fortress of Masyaf was far behind them by now, and they were beginning to encounter the villagers that worked in the valley as a gesture of thanks for the protection that the Assassins provided for them. Making his way down to the stables, Altaïr looked over his right shoulder at Alnesr once more. His former Apprentice seemed to have regained the composure that the events of this eventful day had caused him to lose.
It was good to see; they would both need their wits about them for this mission; these nine men would not fall easily.
“Mount up,” he said, simply to fill the silence that had settled between the two of them.
“Of course, M- Altaïr,” Alnesr said; Altaïr knew what his former Apprentice had almost said, and he could not quite keep from shaking his head.
This situation was strange for the both of them, clearly. He didn’t know of any other pairs of Master and Apprentice who had been shuffled around as he and Alnesr had been. He did not know just why Master Mualim had decreed this, why he would have reassigned him and Alnesr as Apprentice and Master when the two of them had worked as Master and Apprentice for so many years, but the Master had to have had his reasons.
Altaïr did not know just what those reasons were, in the end, but he knew that the Master had them, all the same.
Mounted upon one of the many horses kept in the stables for use by both the Assassins and the villagers, Altaïr turned and watched as Alnesr mounted his own chosen horse. Nodding to his former Apprentice, he continued to watch until Alnesr had fully settled himself atop the horse, and then the two of them set off. The journey was not going to be a short one, and for that reason he had guided Alnesr to choose one of the horses who had been provisioned for long journeys such as the one that he and his former Apprentice were undertaking now.
Allowing himself to settle into his usual attitude of restful awareness that he had learned to maintain while on long journeys such as this one, Altaïr looked to his right. Alnesr’s horse was close enough beside him that he could have reached out and touched his former Apprentice’s left shoulder, but he would not do such a thing in this case. He would not distract Alnesr from whatever thoughts that the boy – rather, young man, now that he had gained the rank of full Assassin – was absorbed by.
Altaïr’s own thoughts were in Damascus, with Tamir; the fact that he was being sent there as the Apprentice of the one who had previously been his own Apprentice was an odd one, to be sure. Still, there was also the matter of Tamir himself; Alnesr would not be the one assigned to collect the information on the targets that they had been assigned. It had been some time since Altaïr had been required to observe his own targets in the field, to track them down through various means and collect information in various ways, rather than conferring with Alnesr once the young man returned to him flushed with success.
Strangely enough, Altaïr almost found himself anticipating that; Alnesr had seemed to carry with him a sense of satisfaction as he completed the information-gathering missions that Altaïr had sent him on back during the time when the young man had been Altaïr’s own Apprentice.
Still, if thought of another way, the fact that he was now required to go forth and seek information under the command of a boy six years his junior could easily be seen as a grave blow to his pride. Pride was what had brought him so much grief in the first place, however, and so Altaïr dismissed those thoughts almost out of hand. He would not allow himself to fail in this endeavor.
Their journey to Damascus was as uneventful as he could ask for, aside from the pilgrims on the roads that he had always seemed to encounter.
Alnesr fell in line behind him as the path before them narrowed, and Altaïr glanced back over his right shoulder at his former Apprentice. Turning his attention back to the path, Altaïr deftly guided his horse through the crowds of pilgrims, traders, and travelers making their way into Damascus. The two of them had soon come into sight of the large, imposing gates just outside the city.
He and Alnesr had visited this place the previous year, his then-Apprentice gathering the information that he needed to take the lives of the two men who had been his targets.
Before he and Alnesr could begin their work on this latest assignment – gathering the information that he would need to end Tamir’s wretched life – they would need to enter the city itself. They would need to do so without being challenged by the guards, of course, since the success of their mission depended on their stealth and being able to blend into the crowd.
Looking to Alnesr, he tilted his head subtly to indicate that the young Assassin should follow him, and lead his horse to a post so that he could tether the beast. Waiting while Alnesr did likewise, Altaïr took the opportunity to study the Saracen guards that stood just outside the gates. They would be trouble if they managed to spot either himself or Alnesr, and were better avoided under all circumstances.
However, just as he had considered and then just as quickly dismissed the walls – too high, and too smooth to be scaled in any case – as a method of entering Damascus, Altaïr saw the group of scholars making their way toward the gates.
He knew that Salah Al’din respected scholars and hence allowed them to walk the streets freely, untroubled by the guards and protected from any trouble that the citizens might give them, and so he knew what the best method of entering Damascus was to be.
“Alnesr, come,” he said, patting the young Assassin’s right shoulder to draw his attention, then nodding to the scholars as they moved slowly down the path to Damascus.
“Of course, M- Altaïr.”
The two of them matched the pace of the scholars, assuming their most pious poses and matching their own movements to the gait of the scholars on their way into Damascus. They became as one with the group of scholars, just as they had been taught to become as one with the crowds that they moved through, and in such a way they were able to make their way past the guards and into the city itself without being noticed more than any one person took note of a simple scholar.
Once the two of them had made it into the city, Altaïr did not allow himself to raise his head. They were still within sight of not only the guards, but also Damascus’ large population itself. Fortunately, there were not many citizens about in this area of the city, so he was able to break away from the group of scholars and lead Alnesr through the streets.
Matching his movements to the few citizens in this area of the city, Altaïr searched for a way up the side of the buildings he was passing. He’d been to this city before, yes, but the memories of its layout had faded during the two years when he had been away; clearly, he would need to reacquaint himself with Damascus before he and Alnesr could properly begin their mission.
He had soon found a minaret that would allow him comparatively easy access to the roof, and turned slightly to signal to Alnesr that the young man should follow him. Making his way up the side of the building, Altaïr couldn’t quite keep himself from maintaining a subtle watch on his young, former Apprentice; Alnesr climbed with the same confidence and skill that he himself had demonstrated. Truly, he had taught the young Assassin well.
Still, it remained to be seen how well Alnesr and he could adapt to their new roles; how well they could jointly carry out the task that the Master had assigned them.
Chapter 7: Reversed role-reversal
Chapter Text
Steadily climbing to the top of the minaret, Altaïr crouched there for a few, long moments; he had almost forgotten how enthralling the view of the city was from this high. Taking a moment to study the layout of Damascus more completely, Altaïr turned back to look at Alnesr. His former Apprentice was smiling slightly.
“You see it too, don’t you?”
“Yes,” Alnesr said, his pale yellow eyes half-closing as he too looked out over the city. “It always seems that one doesn’t properly see the city, until they see it from this vantagepoint. Sometimes… I- I suppose we should go to the Bureau now.”
“Yes, I suppose we should,” he said; he would speak to Alnesr more plainly once the two of them had reached the Bureau and had been given the chance to settle in somewhat.
Turning his attention back to the view laid out before him, Altaïr searched for a soft landing-spot; finding a cart of hay, he waited for a few more moments until he could be certain that there would be no one to hear what was to happen, then turned back to Alnesr.
“Wait a few moments more, and then follow me,” he said.
“Of course,” his former Apprentice said, nodding calmly.
After a nod back to the young man, Altaïr turned his attention back to the cart that he had found. Leaping from the minaret, Altaïr felt the momentary freedom of the air rushing past him, before he fell into the cart of hay. Waiting a moment for the remaining people, those few who had not yet made it inside to attend to their prayers, to disperse, Altaïr climbed out of the cart and felt the hay falling away from his body. Moments later, he saw Alnesr dive into the cart himself.
For a moment, he thought to offer his former Apprentice a hand, but no; Alnesr was no longer a child. It would not be right if Altaïr continued to treat him as one. When Alnesr reached his right hand up hesitantly, Altaïr paused for a moment. Then, feeling the young man brushing his hood, Altaïr smiled slightly as a small piece of hay was dislodged and fluttered down past his eyes. Reaching out, he gently brushed the still-clinging hay from his former Apprentice’s shoulders.
“Come, we’ll be expected,” he said, turning and nodding in the direction of the Bureau’s tower, though it was not visible now that they were both standing on the ground once more.
“Of course,” Alnesr said, nodding as the two of them made their way to a nearby building and scaled the wall.
Leading Alnesr over the rooftops and toward the tower that marked the Bureau’s location, Altaïr dropped into the vestibule amid the sound of a flowing fountain. As Alnesr landed beside him, the plants muffling the sounds of their movements, Altaïr smiled slightly. Perhaps the boy was no longer his Apprentice, but Altaïr could clearly see the results of his teachings.
Truly, anyone could tell that Alnesr had indeed been his Apprentice.
Continuing into the main room of the Bureau after a moment, he saw the Rafiq lounging behind the counter; the man came swiftly to attention when the two of them entered, of course.
“Altaïr, it is good to see you again,” the man said, nodding respectfully to him. “And in one piece, too.” The Rafiq’s smile was not entirely sincere; he did not like the look in the man’s eyes, either. “And Alnesr, I heard that you have finally managed to attain the rank of Assassin; good work. I am certain that your Apprentice will learn a great deal from you.”
“Thank you,” Alnesr said, nodding respectfully to the man.
“I am sorry to hear of your troubles, Altaïr,” the Rafiq said, his expression still seeming rather insolent; Alnesr clearly either did not notice or was attempting to be polite.
“Think nothing of it,” he said, already wishing to be about his business rather than dealing with this man.
“A few of your brothers were here earlier, Altaïr,” the Rafiq said, that insolent smile still on his face. “Oh, if you had heard the things they were saying, I’m certain you would have slain them all where they stood.”
“It’s quite all right,” he said, having long since grown weary of the Rafiq’s insolence and false friendship.
“Yes,” the Rafiq said, grinning now. “You’ve never been one for the Creed, have you?”
“Brother; enough,” Alnesr said, his tone sharper than Altaïr had ever heard before.
“My apologies, Alnesr; I forgot myself,” the Rafiq said, seeming humbled at last. “What business brings the two of you to Damascus?”
“A black market merchant named Tamir; Master Mualim has taken issue with the work he does, and has sent us to end it,” Alnesr said. “What do you know of him?”
“Your Apprentice will need to track him,” the Rafiq said, his gaze darting once more over to him; Altaïr gave the man a singularly unimpressed expression. He would not allow this man to best him in any manner. “Send him to search the city. Determine what Tamir is planning and where he works; preparation makes the victor.”
“So I’ve been told,” Alnesr said solemnly. “What can you tell us of Tamir, for a start?”
“He makes his living as a merchant, so the souk district would be where you would be best advised to begin your search,” the Rafiq said.
“Are Altaïr and I to return once our mission is complete?”
“Yes, the Master has requested that you both return once the information has been collected; I will give you the Master’s marker then,” the Rafiq said, seeming confused. “But, why would you leave? You’ve no need to participate in investigations at your rank, Alnesr.”
“I know; thank you, brother.”
The two of them left the main room of the Bureau and its insolent Rafiq behind, Altaïr looked once more down at the young man – the young Assassin – who had accompanied him on this mission,
“Thank you; you’d no need to put yourself forward on my behalf.” Watching as Alnesr’s expression became one of disapproval, Altaïr smiled slightly; it seemed even Alnesr’s politeness and diplomacy had limits.
“He should not have been saying such things to you,” Alnesr said, the disapproving expression on his face swiftly becoming something more of a scowl. “Any of our Brotherhood could have made that mistake; we are all, in the end, merely human. Even the greatest of us has flaws.”
Even a day before this, Altaïr thought that he would have dismissed Alnesr’s words, or at the very least merely considered them to be the words of a child who had spent too much time with his books. Now, however, Altaïr thought that he truly understood what the Master had meant when he said such things.
“So we are,” he said; and, oddly enough, he felt lighter after saying that.
As the two of them made their way out of the Bureau and away from its condescending, stultifying Rafiq, Altaïr turned his attention back to their surroundings: there were women chattering by the stalls selling freshly-polished oil lamps, and nearby two men stood, arguing over some matter that Altaïr was too far away to discern.
“We should return to the rooftops; it will be a great deal more simple to find the Souk from there,” he said, looking to the building opposite the Bureau they now stood in front of.
“Yes, I think that would be best,” Alnesr said, nodding.
“After you, then, Master,” he said, smiling gently.
Alnesr looked down slightly, his cheeks coloring. “Please don’t tease me, Altaïr.”
“Very well, Alnesr.”
Once the two of them had made it to the top of the building, Altaïr searched for and almost immediately found the large Souk Al-Silaah in Damascus’ Poor District. From there, according to what the Rafiq had told them, they could begin searching for information on Tamir. Of course, the Rafiq knew more than he had spoken of, but he knew that he was likely as not under orders from the Master not to speak of such things to an Apprentice. Alnesr could have perhaps asked for such information privately, but he had most likely not considered doing such, owing to his own still-recent promotion.
Altaïr would not hold such a thing against him.
Chapter 8: The work of an Apprentice
Chapter Text
Leading Alnesr to leap across the space that separated the two of them from the next building over, once he was certain that there were no others who might be watching their progress, Altaïr looked back once to watch Alnesr’s progress, before turning his attention back to the streets below. It would not be such a long time before the two of them would need to descend to street level once more.
“Make way!” shouted a man leading a group of guards; guards who were in turn surrounding the driver of an ass, pulling a cart that sagged under the weight of many stacked casks. “Make way! We come with supplies bound for the Vizier’s Palace. His Excellency Abu’l Nuqoud is to throw another of his parties.”
Not one of the citizens who had been shoved aside looked entirely pleased, but not one of them dared to question men in the employ of Damascus’ Merchant King. Altaïr had heard of the man in passing; never more than mentions of the extravagant parties that he hosted, however-
“Altaïr? Do we not have business in the Souk?”
“Indeed we do,” he said, clapping the younger Assassin strongly on his right shoulder. “Let’s be about it, then.”
Falling into step with Alnesr as the two of them continued on their way toward the Souk, Altaïr considered just what they were going to do. It was well enough for the two of them to travel together when they had just received their mission – though he was not honestly certain if the Master would have approved of it – but, now that they needed to gather the information to carry it out… the duties of an Assassin’s apprentice were simple and well-defined: they sought the information that their masters needed, while those selfsame masters worked to hone their skills.
Now, however, with Alnesr promoted to the rank of full Assassin, and himself acting as the younger man’s Apprentice… well, things had changed a great deal between them. And yet, at this moment it feels as if nothing has changed at all, Altaïr reflected, smiling softly at his own thoughts.
“What are you thinking of, Altaïr?” Alnesr’s soft voice came from his left this time, the two of them having changed places during the course of their journey across the rooftops.
Making a show of looking his former Apprentice over, Altaïr allowed his smile to widen slightly. “You are a rather small, and unobtrusive presence; very few people take notice of you, unless you go out of your way to draw their attention,” he said, gently pulling Alnesr’s white cowl down father over his silver hair.
“I suppose you have that much right, Altaïr,” the younger Assassin said, appearing confused as to just where this conversation of theirs was going.
“This is a good thing, so far as one of our Brotherhood is concerned,” he said, his hand on Alnesr’s chin so that his fellow Assassin would not lower his head. “I think it would be best if you dealt with the missions that require stealth, and I will complete those that require that the target come to fear for their lives.”
“Yes, I think that would be in both of our interests,” Alnesr said, the smile on his face becoming rather wry. “I would be the first to confess that I am not particularly intimidating.”
“Your appearance serves you well enough,” he said, releasing the younger Assassin’s chin so that he could clap him on the right shoulder once more. “Now, let’s be about our work; we shall meet up in the Bureau to share the information that we have both managed to gather.”
“Very well; safety and peace, Altaïr.”
“On you, as well,” he said, nodding respectfully as Alnesr parted company with him.
Taking only a moment to silently wish his former Apprentice good fortune in his endeavors, Altaïr turned his own attention to the task ahead of him. He had been hearing an orator speaking in praise of Tamir’s deeds, hearing him more and more clearly as he and Alnesr had closed in on the city’s poor district, and he thought now that the man could very well be in Tamir’s employ, or at the very least he could know someone who was. Either way, this one would serve as a good enough stepping-stone to further answers along this path that he now walked.
As another crowd began to gather around the orator, the man looking them over with hard but interested eyes, Altaïr noticed that the man seemed to be waiting for something. However, as the crowd continued to grow larger, Altaïr realized that the man had only been waiting for enough people to gather around him.
“None know Tamir better than I,” he announced boldly, voice carrying over the crowd with the experience of a man who had done such things often; perhaps this endeavor would prove even more fruitful than he had at first thought, Altaïr reflected. “Come close; here the tale I have to tell. Of a merchant prince without peer.”
For just a moment, the orator paused, observing the mood of the crowd; gauging their interest. “It was just before Hattin; the Saracens were low on food, and in desperate need of resupply. But there was no relief in sight. In those days, Tamir drove a caravan between Damascus and Jerusalem. But recent business had been poor; it seemed there were none in Jerusalem who wanted what he had: fruits and vegetables from nearby farms. And so Tamir left, riding north and wondering what would become of his wares, for soon they would surely spoil. That should have been the end of this tale, and the poor man’s life; but fate, it seems, intended otherwise.”
As he listened to Tamir’s man weaving his tale, Altaïr conceded that the orator did indeed know how to hold a crowd such as this in thrall. All the better that he is dealt with swiftly, then. The Master says that Tamir is one of those who seeks to continue the Crusades, Altaïr reflected, none of his current thoughts showing on his face.
“As Tamir drove his caravan north, he came across the Saracen leader and his starving men; most fortunate for them both, each having something the other wanted. Tamir gave the man his food. And when the battle was finished, the Saracen leader saw to it that the merchant was repaid a thousand times. Some say, were it not for Tamir, Salah Al’din’s men would have surely turned on him. It could very well be we won the battle because of that man.”
Tamir’s orator finished his speech, pausing for only a moment to observe the reactions of the crowd as it dispersed, a thin smile on his face as he stepped away from the stand and moved toward the market. Perhaps to make for another stand and from there to make the same speech in praise of Tamir and his “great works”. Altaïr followed, keeping to the shadows when he could, and always maintaining a safe distance.
He still remembered the Master’s words to him: put obstacles between yourself and your quarry. Never be found by a backward glance.
He could feel the faintest of smiles on his lips as he tailed Tamir’s orator; at the skills he put to use once more to do so, and the opportunity he was provided to shut out the many distractions within Damascus itself as he did so.
Up ahead, Altaïr watched in mild disapproval as Tamir’s orator bumped into a woman, causing the vase that she had been carrying to smash into the ground. The woman, clearly angry, began to berate Tamir’s orator, her right hand out to demand payment. Tamir’s orator curled his lip, cruel and sneering as any of the targets that Altaïr had been sent out to deal with. Altaïr tensed for a moment, but when the woman cringed, pulling away and cowering from the displeasure of Tamir’s orator, he allowed himself to relax.
He also made a silent promise to deal with Tamir’s orator as soon as possible; to have his terror done with, finally and forever.
Pausing for a moment, when Tamir’s orator kicked the shattered pieces of the vase, Altaïr moved again only once Tamir’s orator had taken several steps. The two of them now stood in a narrow, all but deserted lane, dark mud walls seeming to press in on them. Perhaps a shortcut to the next stand that Tamir’s orator would use; whatever this place was, in the end, it would serve his purposes just as well as those of Tamir’s orator.
Perhaps better, considering what he planned to do.
Glancing back to make certain that he was alone – to be certain that his actions here would not compromise the Brotherhood once more – Altaïr took a few, swift steps forward, grabbed Tamir’s orator by his right shoulder, and jammed the tips of his fingers beneath the man’s ribcage. Instantly, Tamir’s orator was doubled up and gasping for breath, his mouth working like a landed fish. Another glance confirmed to Altaïr that he was truly alone; stepping forward as quickly as he ever had, Altaïr delivered a final kick to the throat of Tamir’s orator.
The man fell back in the dirt, his thwab tangled around his legs. Smiling slightly as he watched the man clutched at his throat, Altaïr came to stand over Tamir’s orator… This was easy, he mused, and then frowned. Perhaps this had been too-
Tamir’s orator struck like a cobra, kicking up and catching Altaïr square in the chest. Surprised, and grateful for a moment that he had not sent Alnesr on this particular mission – or any like it, for that matter – Altaïr staggered back as Tamir’s orator rose back to his feet. The man had a gleam in his eye, knowing now that he had gained at least something of an advantage in their battle.
The man’s fists were up now; clearly he assumed that since he’d managed to gain a single victory, he would be able to win. Altaïr would show this man the error of such thoughts. Dodging one of the man’s swift punches, Altaïr found out too late that such had merely been a feint as Tamir’s orator caught him across the jaw with his other fist.
He almost fell, tasting blood and cursing Tamir’s orator; and also himself, for underestimating his opponent. That was something only a foolish Novice would have done; or a fool, but he was trying at least to be less of one than he had been. Shaking the pain from his jaw – pushing it aside so that he could focus – Altaïr came forward and slammed his fist into the man’s temple before he could begin making his escape.
For a time, the pair of them traded blows; Tamir’s orator was smaller and faster than Altaïr, and he managed to catch the Assassin with a blow high on the bridge of his nose; Altaïr stumbled back, blinking tears of pain from his eyes. Tamir’s orator seemed confidant of his victory now, a feeling that Altaïr knew he could use to his own advantage. He vowed silently that all of his pain would not be wasted.
As Tamir’s orator advanced on him, throwing wild punches in clear anticipation of an easy victory, Altaïr stepped quickly to the right, crouched, and kicked the man’s legs out from under him in what would have almost seemed like a single, smooth motion to anyone who had not been trained as an Assassin. Even having knocked the breath from his adversary, Altaïr had too much experience with the man to count on merely a single blow to keep him at bay.
Spinning back toward the supine form of Tamir’s orator as he lay gasping for air on the ground, Altaïr drove his right knee directly into the man’s groin. He was both relieved and gratified to hear the man’s pained sound – almost like a dog’s bark – and to see the way he folded on the ground like an empty sack. Rising back to his full height, shoulders still heaving from his heavy breaths, Altaïr watched calmly as Tamir’s orator continued to struggle voicelessly on the ground.
When the man had finally managed to recover enough to take full breaths, Altaïr squatted down to his level and pressed his face in close.
“You seem to know quite a bit about Tamir,” he said, using his superior positioning to intimidate Tamir’s orator as he lay in the dust of the alley. “Tell me what he’s planning.”
“I know only the stories I tell,” the man groaned; either more pitiful than he looked, or else trying to make himself sound so. “Nothing more.”
Altaïr showed only a singularly bland expression on his face; the same that he had always worn when he was about to kill one of his targets, something that would let that target know that they were only one more in a long line of lives that had been ended by his blade. “A pity. There’s no reason to let you live if you’ve nothing to offer in return.”
“Wait. Wait!” Tamir’s orator held up a trembling hand. “There is one thing.”
“Continue,” he allowed, secretly pleased but outwardly as impassive as ever.
“He is preoccupied as of late. He oversees the production of many, many weapons-”
“What of it?” he demanded, in no mood to have his time wasted. “They are meant for Salah Al’din’s army. This does not help me, which means it does not help you,” he reached forward, watching as Tamir’s orator cringed and cowered beneath him.
The man broke rather quickly after that. “No! Stop! Listen. Not Salah Al’din. They’re for someone else. The crests these arms bear, they’re different. Unfamiliar. It seems that Tamir supports another… but I know not who.”
He nodded, considering; it seemed this task might become more complicated than the Master had implied, at first. “Is that all?”
“Yes. Yes!” Tamir’s orator said, his tone almost pleading. “I’ve told you everything I know!”
“Then it’s time for you to rest.” Driving his hidden blade deep into the man’s sternum, Altaïr gently lowered the man’s body to the ground.
There was bloody foam on the man’s lips, and as Altaïr gently closed the man’s eyes and moved his body so that it lay behind a line of old, stinking barrels that had been filled with refuse, he nodded slightly to the corpse – likely as not, he had merely worked for coin, rather than having any personal loyalty to the man – and made his way out of the alley. He would need more information before he went to meet with Alnesr back in the Bureau, that much was plain.
He did not know just what would be done when the time came for Tamir himself to be dealt with – Alnesr was indeed a full Assassin, but his hands remained unstained with blood – but Altaïr knew that the time to deal with that matter when they had both finished gathering the full information they needed to ensure that Tamir died cleanly.
Moving further into the city, Altaïr caught sight of some of the usual rabble of guards abusing a citizen. More of those who abuse their power, he mused, his mouth turning down in disapproval. The people here remembered the Assassins as those who served the cause of justice; those who would take it upon themselves to see that no innocents were abused while they were present and could prevent such things. It fell upon him, therefore, to uphold such a reputation.
~AC1~
Leaving the bench, still contemplating the information that he had gleaned during the time he had been pretending to rest from the heat, Alnesr began to hear the sounds of men speaking to one another. It seemed as if one of them was angry with the other; clearly, that man worked for Tamir. Moving in behind the more timid man – the one who had been intimidated by Tamir’s man – Alnesr paced him in the same way that he had done with so many of his other unwitting informants. Moving in close, just when the man’s attention was distracted by a large knot of people, Alnesr darted his left hand in and out of the man’s pouch as quickly and smoothly as he had seen Altaïr do during their lessons together.
Tucking the letter into his robes, taking a moment to ensure that it was as secure as he could manage while walking, Alnesr melted back into the crowds.
He wondered for a moment if Altaïr would be proud of his accomplishments, before setting such vain preoccupations aside; even if he could afford to think of such things, they had been and remained unimportant. Even when Altaïr had been his master, Alnesr could not afford to entertain such vanities as to allow himself to be preoccupied with Altaïr’s approval where such minor things were concerned.
The sounds of another discussion – more than simply the two people he had heard arguing before – drew Alnesr’s attention, and he moved to observe them. As before, these men were discussing a letter that they were to deliver; this time to Abu’l Nuqoud. Waiting until the man carrying the letter had become distracted, Alnesr moved in and quickly removed the letter from his pouch, melting back into the crowds before the man could take any notice of him.
Tucking the second letter that he had stolen into his robes with the other, Alnesr noticed a group of merchants huddled together and talking in low tones.
“He’s called another meeting.” Alnesr thought the man was likely speaking about Tamir, and so he moved to stand nearer to them while turning so that he seemed to be watching the flow of the people through the marketplace.
“What is it this time? Another warning? Another execution?”
“No,” said the first man. “He has work for us to do.”
“He’s abandoned the ways of the merchant guild. Does as he pleases now,” the third man grumbled.
When they began to speak of another deal – one of the men said that it was the largest ever – Alnesr first thought that he would find out just what it was that Tamir was ultimately planning, and perhaps just why it was that the Master had chosen him of all people to die this day, but the men had soon fallen silent, looking around as if they expected someone unfriendly to be watching them.
“It is not safe to speak of such things so openly; Tamir has ears even we know nothing about.”
The other merchants agreed quickly, and the three of them dispersed into the crowds without saying another word. Alnesr could at least say that he had learned something from their conversation, even if it was not as much as it could have been. A snatch of overheard conversation drew Alnesr’s attention to a pair of old men – one wearing a turban and one bareheaded – speaking with one another.
“I’m telling you, it’s rats,” the one with no turban, gray-bearded and balding, said with annoyance.
“No, it’s children!” the man in the turban said, sounding oddly cheerful. “I hear them laughing.”
“Rats or children, either way it’s bad for business,” the turbanless, balding man said. “All that noise! Someone needs to get up on those beams and clear them out!”
“I wonder how they’re getting up there,” the other man said. “Must be through the central courtyard.”
“Then we should ask the guard to take a look!” the graybeard said.
The man in the turban made a disparaging noise. “They’re all much too busy polishing the backside of their master.”
Chapter 9: Separate but Equal
Chapter Text
Moving on, before the people milling around them could take notice of how long he had stopped without buying anything from the various stalls around him, Alnesr began to hear the sounds of a struggle. Pausing for a moment, knowing that it was now his duty to uphold the values that the Assassins were known for just as it was Altaïr’s. However, the fact remained that not many outside the ranks of the Assassins themselves were particularly inclined to look past his appearance – particularly his yellow eyes – when he spoke to them.
Still, his own feelings on the matter were not important; there was an innocent being abused by those who felt secure in their power, and it was his duty as an Assassin to help them.
Moving forward once more, following the sounds of the woman struggling against a group of the corrupt guards that had been showing up more and more often of late, Alnesr loosened one of his throwing knives – the same ones that the Master had provided for him when he had first attained his present rank – and sent it flying into the bared throat of one of the men. He saw now that they had been accosting a woman, and as he loosed more of his throwing-knives into their throats, Alnesr saw that she was beginning to look in his direction.
She knew that he was there, now – knew that he had acted in her defense, and likely as not recognized that his garb marked him as a member of the Brotherhood – and when the last of the men harassing her had fallen dead to the ground, the woman turned to look at him.
Alnesr ducked his head slightly, enough so that the woman whose life he had saved would not be able to see his eyes – their color having bought him more than enough trouble outside of Masyaf in the past – and made to turn away and leave before the shouts of ‘beast’ or ‘demon child’ could follow him. The woman called out once, but Alnesr knew that – aside from his personal desire not to be disparaged another time – he had his duty to the Brotherhood to consider as well.
He had learned a great deal about Tamir and his habits; it was time that he made his report.
Or, can I truly call it a report, when I am not strictly reporting my discoveries? Alnesr wondered for a moment, even as he made his way back up to the rooftops. It was still an odd thing for him to consider, the fact that he now outranked a man who had been his mentor for as long as he could remember. Odd, and somehow wrong; he would not and did not wish to begin questioning the dictates of Master Mualim, but he could not help but wonder if another Master and Apprentice pair had had their ranks inverted in the same way that he and Altaïr had had.
Sighing, Alnesr put those thoughts out of his mind; they were merely a distraction at this point. Still, I do not think the Master would think me too insolent if I asked him about this. What it all means; what he intended by this. His mind made up, Alnesr set his concerns aside for the moment, focusing once more on his ultimate destination. Altaïr awaited him at the Bureau.
~AC1~
Even with the detours that he had made, Altaïr found that he had managed to return to the Bureau just before Alnesr. Stepping to the left as the young Assassin climbed fully down into the building, Altaïr smiled proudly. True, he could not take all of the credit for the prowess that Alnesr had demonstrated this day, but the young man truly was his Apprentice.
Or he had been, before today.
“Welcome back, Alnesr,” he said. “I trust that your search was fruitful.”
“As much as yours, I expect,” Alnesr said, bowing slightly to him.
“Well then, shall we speak of what we found?” he asked.
“Yes, I think the Rafiq will be pleased to hear of what we discovered.”
“Come, then,” he said, gesturing toward the archway that would lead the two of them into the Bureau’s main room. The two of them spoke in low tones; he providing the knowledge that Alnesr lacked, and Alnesr discussing what he had learned as well.
“Altaïr! Alnesr! Welcome, welcome!” the Rafiq smirked slightly as the two of them made their way back into the main room.
Altaïr wondered, for a handful of moments, whether the man could tell that he had taken a life this day – one more in a long line of them, yes – and Alnesr had not. It was an odd thing to think about at such a time, whether or not the stench of death clung to him at moments such as these, and yet Altaïr found himself wondering all the same. Clearly it was not a thing that upset Alnesr; still, Alnesr had been training for the day that he would take his first life nearly since the day he could walk.
It was just as clear that he could not measure the reactions of those uninvolved in the business of death by Alnesr.
“Come now, tell me all of what you’ve found out about Tamir,” the Rafiq said, his gaze focused almost entirely on Alnesr. “I’m sure you know a great deal by now, young Assassin.”
“Tamir rules over the Souk Al-Silaah,” Alnesr said, his expression becoming pensive for a moment; clearly, he had seen the fearful glances of the merchants, and those who had had the misfortune to find themselves out of the merchant’s good graces. “He makes his fortune selling arms and armor, and is clearly supported in this endeavor by many: blacksmiths, traders, and financiers.”
“He’s the largest death dealer in the land,” Altaïr spat, thinking of the many innocents that had doubtless found themselves on the wrong end of the many, many weapons that Tamir sold.
“Yes,” Alnesr said, his tone thoughtful.
“Well then, have you devised a way to rid us of this blight, Alnesr?”
“A meeting is being arranged at Souk Al-Silaah, to discuss an important sale,” Alnesr said. “The merchants say that it is the largest deal that Tamir has ever made; he’ll be distracted with his work then.”
“And that is when you shall strike? Excellent!” the Rafiq said, speaking too fast for anyone to get a word in edgewise. “Well then, I will give you Al Mualim’s marker, and you will give us Tamir’s life.”
So saying, the Rafiq quickly reached under his desk and produced a feather from one of the Master’s birds; the marker that would be stained with Tamir’s blood once the merchant’s life had been ended. It would also mark the end of what little innocence that Alnesr had managed to preserve considering the nature of his work. Alnesr took the marker without hesitation, but when the two of them had reached the outer room of the Bureau, he saw that Alnesr’s expression had become rather pensive.
“Come, we should rest for the night,” he said, gesturing to the pile of cushions and blankets that would provide them at least some comfort while they took their repose.
“Thank you, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, smiling briefly before his attention drifted back to the feather he was almost absently spinning between his fingers.
“Alnesr, you’ve never observed me during one of my kills,” he said, drawing the young Assassin’s attention back to him. Alnesr’s hands stilled, his pale yellow eyes fixing on Altaïr’s face.
“No; I did not think to do such a thing,” the young Assassin said, looking back down at the feather he held in his hands.
“Perhaps, then, you should wait until the next mission, and take care to observe me closely when I make this kill,” he suggested, knowing that – while Alnesr had surpassed him in rank for the moment – his former Apprentice’s hands were as yet unstained with blood.
Aside from sentimental concerns, which Altaïr could at least admit to himself that he possessed, he did not know how Alnesr would handle his first kill if he had not been prepared for it beforehand.
“You would do that for me, Altaïr?” Alnesr asked, turning earnest, pale yellow eyes back to him from the feather that he had been examining.
“I think it best that you are more prepared, before you stain your hands for the first time,” he said, smiling so that Alnesr could understand that such was not his only reason. “It is not an easy task, necessary though it may be.”
“Thank you, Altaïr,” Alnesr said.
Altaïr smiled back in response to the young Assassin. “Get some sleep; we have much to do tomorrow.”
“Of course.”
The two of them settled down into the nest of cushions, Alnesr’s head coming to rest against the left side of his chest. Looking down at the young Assassin sleeping by his side, Altaïr reflected on the child that Alnesr had been, and the man he was swiftly becoming. He thought that this might have been how his own father felt, if the two of them had known each other as more than fellow Assassins.
He also thought it might have been how Master Mualim felt about them all; every Assassin in the Brotherhood.
Letting himself drift off into sleep, lulled by Alnesr’s soft breathing, Altaïr reflected for a moment that this next day would truly be the last day that his former Apprentice could be considered in any way a child.
Chapter 10: Tamir
Chapter Text
When the sun rose, bringing awareness of the world back once more, and hence awareness of the work that they would soon be doing, Alnesr opened his eyes and rose quickly to his feet. Altaïr was, naturally, already awake and preparing the few weapons that he still possessed. The two of them shared a silent breakfast of dates, figs, and dried strips of meat, washed down with water from the skins that had been stored for just that purpose.
The two of them left the Bureau after they had given their food time to settle, taking to the rooftops on their way to the Souk; for him, to see his first life taken in the Assassin manner, and for Altaïr to do the deed itself. The feather that he had received from the Rafiq remained tucked into his robes; he had attempted to give it to Altaïr, but his former Master had advised him to keep it, a smile on his face as if he had some other plan in mind.
Likely as not, he did.
Once they had reached the Souk once more, Alnesr found that there was a great crowd gathering about a sunken, ceremonial courtyard in the center of it. The reason for such a gathering swiftly became clear: a tall, regal-looking man stood there, two stout bodyguards at his back. The man himself wore silks in rich, dark colors, as well as a checked turban, and leg wrappings.
His teeth were bared beneath a thin, dark mustache; this could only be Tamir.
Altaïr nodded to him, and Alnesr faded into the outside of the crowd, always careful to keep both Tamir and Altaïr himself within his sight. There were traders gathering, some of them with worried expressions and others wearing those of relief, so it became yet more obvious that Tamir for all his power and influence, was not well liked.
“If you would just have a look-”
“I’ve no interest in your calculations, the numbers change nothing,” Tamir snapped, cutting off the man cringing before him. “Your men have failed to fill the order, which means that I have failed my client.”
The merchant swallowed fearfully, even as Alnesr wondered just who Tamir’s client was. Clearly, this client he spoke of was important in some way. The merchant searched the crowd, and for a moment Alnesr wished that he could help the man; clearly, he merely worked for Tamir out of the need for coin that all but those who had been born to riches were subject to. Still, it was not his place to act in defense of this man, at this time and this place.
To act here and now would be to compromise the Brotherhood, and it would likely do no good in any case.
“We need more time,” the merchant pleaded; clearly attempting to appeal to a sense of mercy that Tamir entirely lacked.
“This is the excuse of a lazy or incompetent man,” Tamir said, his tone rife with insinuations. “Which are you?”
“Neither,” the merchant said, wringing his hands in obvious terror.
“What I see here says otherwise,” Tamir said, raising his right foot onto a low wall and leaned forward on his knee. He was clearly attempting to appear at ease, something that neither Alnesr nor the merchant before him were foolish enough to trust. “Now, tell me: how do you intend to solve this problem of ours? Those weapons are needed now.”
“I see no solution,” the merchant stammered, still fearful of what was to come. “The men work day and night, but your… client requires so much. And the destination… it is a difficult route.”
“Were it only that you could produce weapons with the same skill as you produce excuses,” Tamir said, laughing; clearly either mocking the old man before him, or attempting to play to the crowd. Possibly both at once.
There came a few, scattered laughs; clearly caused chiefly by their fear of Tamir rather than the quality of his humor. The more Alnesr observed the hateful black market merchant, the more he became convinced that the world as a whole would be better off without him. Clearly, Master Mualim’s choice of targets was as wise as he had come to expect.
“I have done all I can,” the old merchant insisted; his voice quavered still, and perspiration clearly showed on the headband of his turban.
“It is not enough,” Tamir said, still making his vain attempt to appear good-humored.
“Then perhaps you ask too much,” the old merchant said.
The expression of false good-humor evaporated from Tamir’s face like morning mist. “Too much?” he echoed, something harder and more unpleasant in his voice than what Alnesr had heard before. “I gave you everything. Without me, you would still be charming serpents for coin. All I asked in return was that you fill the orders I bring you. And now you say I ask too much?”
Tamir drew a small dagger, the blade glinting in the sunlight. Those in the crowd shifted in discomfort, while Alnesr drew himself up straighter. Soon, it would be time for this to end. And, futile though it was to wish that it could end sooner, Alnesr found himself doing that very thing for a moment before he remembered himself. It was not for him, to decide who lived and who died.
The old merchant had dropped to his knees by now, looking up at Tamir with pleading hands and tearful eyes. Tamir glared down at the old merchant, his expression one of open contempt, then he spat. The old merchant stumbled, blinking phlegm from his eyes.
“You dare disrespect me?!” Tamir roared, righting himself from his own stumble.
“Peace, Tamir,” the old merchant pleaded. “I meant no insult.”
“Then you should have kept your mouth shut,” Tamir snarled.
The bloodlust all but glittering in Tamir’s eyes let Alnesr know that the man would not be satisfied with merely leaving things as they stood. Tamir swiped at the old merchant with the dagger he had drawn, opening a rip in the old man’s tunic that swiftly became stained with blood. The old merchant fell back on his heels, uttering a high, keening scream that drove Alnesr’s heart to pounding and made him wish all the more that he could intervene in the injustice he was bearing witness to.
“No, stop!” the old merchant screamed.
“Stop!” Tamir mocked. “I’m just getting started!”
Stepping forward, Tamir drove his dagger deep into the old merchant’s belly, driving him to the ground as the old man screamed and pleaded for mercy.
“You came into my souk!” Tamir shouted, driving his dagger into the old merchant as if in further emphasis of his words. “Stood before my men!” Another stab; the old merchant was rolling on the ground now, beyond all help. “And dared to insult me?! You! Must! Learn! Your! Place!”
Each word was now punctuated with a stab; the old merchant was long dead by that time, and Alnesr bowed his head slightly. He might not have known the man as anything more than a victim of Tamir’s savagery, but it was more than clear by now that the world at large would not miss another man such as Tamir.
“No, leave him,” Tamir said breathlessly, waving off the bodyguard who had been about to move the old merchant’s corpse. “Let this be a lesson to the rest of you: think twice before you tell me something cannot be done. Now get back to work.”
Tamir and his guards left the old man’s corpse to rot in the street – there was already a dog sniffing at it – and in moments it was as if the old merchant had not existed in the first place. As if he had been forgotten by all but the two Assassins who had borne witness to his last moments. Catching Altaïr’s eye, Alnesr found that his former Master was just as angered by this turn of events as he was.
The two of them stole swiftly and silently through the crowds after Tamir, heads bowed so that the people around them would not be able to carelessly glimpse their intent. Tamir’s bodyguards were no longer quite so close that they would be able to easily interfere with the work that he and Altaïr had been sent to do this day, but Tamir was now speaking to one of the traders that worked for him.
“I can’t sell this,” he sneered, scorn in every line of his face. “Melt it down and try again. And if it comes out just as poorly, it’ll be you who gets melted down next.” Eyes wide, the trader nodded frantically. “I don’t understand what it is you do all day. Your stall is filled with goods; it should be your purse that is filled with coin. Why can’t you sell these things? It isn’t difficult.” An ugly, suspicious expression came to Tamir’s face. “Perhaps you are not trying hard enough. Do you require motivation?”
The trader was nodding before he quite realized just what it was that he was agreeing to, and then shook his head quickly and more emphatically than he had nodded in the first place.
~AC1~
Altaïr could see that Tamir’s bodyguards had become distracted, and more than that they had become complacent faced with the sheer terror that Tamir’s methods of control had spread through the crowd. This… now, this could be the very opportunity that he was searching for. Catching Alnesr’s eye briefly, Altaïr signaled the younger Assassin to move with him, and then made his way closer to Tamir.
The merchant’s two bodyguards had chosen to take advantage of the terror that their master spread in his wake – demanding goods as gifts to their wives from yet another stall owner – while Tamir himself moved on to a new victim. Watching Alnesr out of the corner of his left eye, Altaïr slipped smoothly between the merchant and his inattentive bodyguards; he watched, pleased, as his former Apprentice did the same.
“You begged me for this position,” Tamir snarled, his back now firmly to the two Assassins. “Swore none could do as well as you, here. I should-”
Stepping forward smoothly, Altaïr released his hidden blade, swept his right arm forward to hold the merchant in place, and drove his blade deep. Tamir made a strangled noise deep in his throat, but he did not scream. For a brief moment he writhed, fighting the inevitable before going limp at last. Alnesr crouched next to him, but Altaïr’s attention was mainly focused on the stall-owner that had been one of the only people to bear witness to Tamir’s last moments.
The man seemed honestly unsure of what to do; clearly, he had been terrified of what Tamir might do to him – with good reason – and yet for a few long moments he seemed to be honestly considering raising the alarm. However, in the end, the man’s fear of Tamir won out over whatever loyalty he had – perhaps, at one point – felt toward the man.
The trader turned his back and left without a word or a look back.
“Be at peace,” he said gently, though he doubted this one would appreciate his consideration any more than the others.
“You’ll pay for this, Assassin,” Tamir rasped, a line of blood beginning to run from both his mouth and nose. “You and all of your kind.”
“It seems you’re the one who pays now, my friend. You’ll not profit from suffering any longer.” Out of the corner of his eye, he saw Alnesr drawing the feather that he had been given by the Rafiq; Altaïr would have smiled, were the situation not so grave. The young Assassin had indeed learned his lessons well.
Tamir laughed harshly, his breaths coming more shallowly now. “You think me some petty death dealer, suckling at the breast of war? A strange target, don’t you think? Why me, when so many others do the same?”
“You believe yourself different, then?” he asked; all men had reasons for what they did, he had said just the same to Alnesr, during the young Assassin’s lessons.
“Oh, but I am, for I serve a far nobler cause than mere profit. Just like my brothers…”
“Brothers?” Alnesr echoed, before Altaïr himself could voice that same question.
“Ah, did you think I worked alone, little Assassin? I am but a piece; a man with a part to play. You’ll come to know the others soon enough, I think.” For a few moments, Tamir’s eyes seemed to fix on Alnesr. “You have strange eyes, child. Perhaps you, of all your kind, can see deeper…”
Tamir passed then, the light fading from behind his eyes. Alnesr’s expression was pensive as he stained the Master’s marker with the merchant’s blood, and it remained so for a few moments more, before the two of them faded back into the crowds of the city and vanished. Tamir’s resting place was far behind them when the cry went up.
Returning to the rooftops with Alnesr close behind him, he heard the sounds of alarm bells being rung throughout the city. Things are becoming rather more complicated now, it seems, he mused. Looking to Alnesr, he smiled slightly as he saw the alertness with which the young Assassin was moving; truly, his former Apprentice had learned his lessons well.
They had soon reached the Bureau once more, slipping in through the rooftop entrance and landing neatly beside the fountain. Taking a moment to breathe, Altaïr looked to Alnesr as the younger Assassin straightened up once more. His earlier, pensive expression had returned, and Altaïr knew that he was turning Tamir’s last words over in his mind without the younger Assassin needing to speak it aloud.
“Sometimes, people must die for the world to change,” he said, reaching out to clasp Alnesr’s right shoulder.
“Yes,” Alnesr said, nodding. “Still, I think that Tamir was the first outside of the Brotherhood not to look at my eyes as some cursed sign. And, what he said-”
“What he said were the words of a man who knew he was dying, and one who wanted to cause discord and uncertainty among his killers, nothing more,” he said.
Chapter 11: Departure and return
Chapter Text
Yes, it was clear that the man had had his reasons for the actions that he had taken – all men did, and Altaïr would have been honestly surprised if Tamir had not – but merely having reasons did not, in the end, mean that those reasons were the right ones. As the two of them made their way back into the Bureau’s main room, Altaïr wondered for a moment if Alnesr would tell the truth of what had transpired between them and Tamir.
Then, thinking back on how the Rafiq had acted when the two of them had left, Altaïr wondered if the younger Assassin would have the chance to speak at all.
“Word has reached me of your victory, Alnesr,” the Rafiq said, his gaze seeming to pass over Altaïr entirely. “You have my gratitude, and my respect. I am certain that your Apprentice has learned a great deal from you.”
“Thank you, brother,” Alnesr said.
“I am sure that the other Assassins will be just as pleased to hear of your progress, as well,” the Rafiq said; Altaïr could not quite tell if he was mocking Alnesr or not, but he felt rather indignant on the younger Assassin’s behalf, all the same. “You should return, and bring news of your victory to Al Mualim. After you have taken some rest, of course. Taking one’s first life is a tiring thing, I hear.”
“Thank you for your hospitality, Rafiq,” Alnesr said, nodding to the man. “It is becoming rather late; I think I will sleep for the night.”
“Come, then,” he said, gesturing for the younger Assassin to follow him. “Let’s get settled.”
The two of them left the Bureau’s man room, making their way back to the pile of cushions and blankets that had served as their bedding the night before. Alnesr seemed rather pensive again, and Altaïr knew without words just what it was that was troubling the younger Assassin.
“I doubt the Rafiq would have been willing to let you speak, even if you had tried,” he said, smiling gently as he rested his hand on Alnesr’s right shoulder. “You’ve no need to concern yourself with my pride. Only remember: the next task will be yours.”
“I know, Altaïr. And, thank you,” Alnesr smiled, and Altaïr clapped the younger Assassin strongly on his right shoulder.
After that, the two of them settled down into the pile of cushions, each leaning against the other for the small extra comfort that such an action provided.
The next morning found him up just before Alnesr, as had always seemed to be the way such things were done; he rather thought that such was the way things would always be between the two of them, but Altaïr was forced to admit to himself that even such a small thing as that could change in the future. When Alnesr rose, and the two of them had finished breaking fast, Altaïr let the younger Assassin proceed him out of the Bureau, and the two of them met up on the rooftops again.
Leaving Damascus was somewhat more fraught than entering it had been, owing to the alertness of the guards in the wake of Tamir’s death, but the skills that they had been taught during their respective lifetimes as Assassins proved true once more. Blending with another group of wandering scholars, Altaïr suppressed a satisfied smile as he and Alnesr finally made their way out of Damascus.
Their horses were tethered in the same place, both beasts looking well enough for the day that they had spent being tended by those outside of Masyaf. Mounting up beside Alnesr once more, Altaïr finally allowed his smile to show. Alnesr would know what he meant by it.
Their return journey was nearly the same as the one that had brought them to Damascus in the first place, and yet it felt different. Still, Altaïr thought that it was simply because he knew what was coming, both when he and Alnesr returned to make their report to Master Mualim, and also once they had been sent out after the second of the nine men that their Master wished them to rid the world of.
They stopped in the shade of the same oasis that they had stayed in during their journey to Damascus, feeding and watering both the horses and themselves before bedding down for the night. Rising with the sun, they continued on their way. As the ground passed by beneath them, Altaïr found himself watching Alnesr as closely as he could while attending to the needs of their journey.
He also found himself reflecting back on the journey that the two of them had made, from the day that he had first heard Alnesr’s desperate cries in the poor district of Jerusalem. Seeing a child, not even old enough to walk, being dangled by his ankles over a fire pit by a man who had long and loudly denounced his murdered mother as a whore of Shaitan and the child as his spawn, had driven Altaïr to depths of fury that he did not know if he would ever feel again.
Alnesr – though the babe had not had any name that Altaïr had known at the time – had been an innocent, and seeing the teachings of Al Mualim and the Assassins mocked so openly, though it had been clear even then that those people in the square had not been of the Brotherhood, had drove Altaïr to take his first life.
Smashing every nearby pot that he could lay his hands to into the man’s face had driven him back, far enough from the fire pit that he had been able to grab Alnesr and wrench the babe from the grip of the madman who had meant to kill him. He’d wrapped the babe in his own robes, hushing him briefly before his attention had been forcibly returned to the madman. Master Mualim’s teachings had given him the skill to knock the man to the ground, and a large rock had provided him the means to end the man’s life.
When he’d stood over the man, looking down at the bloody ruin that had once been his face, Altaïr’s only thoughts had been for the babe whose life he had redeemed with his actions.
That had been how the Master and Abbas had found him: a madman dead by his hand, and a strange babe with pale yellow eyes in his arms.
He had been required to give an accounting of his actions, of course; still, when the Master had learned of what he had borne witness to, he had agreed that any true member of the Brotherhood would have acted the same under the circumstances. He had also decreed that, as the one to act in defense of the babe, he was then responsible for the life he had saved. Altaïr had, in fact, been the one to give Alnesr the name that every one of the Brotherhood knew him by.
Of course, for the first few years of Alnesr’s life, Altaïr had been almost as much of a nursemaid as the women that the Master had brought in to feed Alnesr. Then, when the boy had grown enough to be able to eat more solid foods, the Master had dismissed the women that had once helped to tend to him, saying that it now fell to Altaïr himself to see that Alnesr was taken care of. When Altaïr had asked after the Master’s purpose, he had said that while taking a life was simple enough considering the work that the Assassins were called upon to do, redeeming one was not simple at all.
From that day, Alnesr had become just as much his student as he had been the Master’s.
At one point, Abbas had been as close as a brother to him, and so naturally he had fallen into the role of an uncle to Alnesr. The three of them had taken lessons together, and eventually Alnesr’s skill had grown to the point where he had been able to take lessons with them and Labib. Altaïr had been proud, to know that his teachings had been so well received by the boy that he had raised.
And now, Alnesr had taken his place among the ranks of the Brotherhood; the boy had become a man.
The two of them made their way up to the village under the shadow of Masyaf, and Altaïr saw Alnesr straightening in his saddle as he looked up at the headquarters of the Brotherhood. A hint of uncertainty lingered in the younger Assassin’s expression, but Altaïr knew that such was only natural under the circumstances. There were times that even he did not know just what the Master desired of him.
Leaving their horses in the care of the stable hands within the village, Altaïr fell into step beside Alnesr as the two of them made their way back up the mountain to the fortress itself.
“I heard that you had both returned,” Rauf said, his eyes practically alight as he greeted the two of them. “Is it true? Has Alnesr truly gained the rank of a full Assassin?”
“It is,” Alnesr said, lifting his right hand to display his hidden blade and bracer that he had been given, and also the missing ring finger that all full Assassins possessed.
Rauf smiled all the wider. “How proud you must be of him, Altaïr. Will you tell me of your mission after you report to the Master?”
“If we are given the time,” he said, when it became clear that Alnesr’s thoughts had returned to what he would say to the Master when they made their report.
“Yes, of course,” Rauf said, looking over the both of them once more, smiling in shared pride. “I’ll leave you to your duties. Safety and peace, brothers.”
“On you as well, Rauf,” Alnesr said, his attention clearly having returned to the present.
“Good fortune in your future missions, Alnesr,” Rauf called, turning and making his way back to the training grounds where he spent much of his time.
“Thank you, brother,” Alnesr called back, as he and Altaïr fell into step once more, on their way up to the Master’s study.
Making their way through the fortress, he and Alnesr had soon found their way back to the Master’s study. Master Mualim was waiting for them behind his desk, watching their approach with quietly assessing eyes. Retrieving the feather from his robes, Alnesr handed it to the Master when he held out his hand.
Chapter 12: Wheel of Fate
Chapter Text
“You’ve done very well, Alnesr, considering your youth,” the Master said, inclining his head respectfully.
“I thank you for your praise, Master, but it was not I who carried out the task.”
“Oh? Then, explain your reasoning for leaving such a thing to your Apprentice, if you will,” the Master prompted; Altaïr looked to Alnesr as the younger Assassin straightened his shoulders.
“While it is a simple matter to kill another in the heat of battle, in defense of one’s own life or that of another, deliberately taking a life – in the way of the Brotherhood – is something that I had not yet witnessed, to say nothing of my own inexperience in such matters. I felt it best that I observed the act in person, first,” Alnesr said, his expression the professional mask of an Assassin once more.
“I admire your discretion, as well as your candor in telling me this,” the Master said, a small, pleased smile on his face. “Still, I sense that there is something troubling you; speak. You may no longer be an Apprentice, but that does not mean that you are required to find all of your answers on your own.”
“Tamir spoke as though there were others who believed as he did; as if he were a part of some greater cause, a brotherhood like our own,” Alnesr said, allowing some of his confusion to show now that the Master had addressed it.
“It is entirely possible that he is not the only man who believes that his actions serve a noble cause. You will find, my child, that many men in Tamir’s position believe deeply in the ultimate nobility of their actions, no matter how base they may prove. Still, your task is to remove these men from the world so that their twisted ideals are not permitted to cause suffering to those that they practice them on. This world is not shaped by the ideals of such men, nor should it be,” the Master said, a severe expression on his face. Then he smiled once more. “However, the both of you have performed admirably, and so I will restore a rank to you, Altaïr; you will no longer act as Alnesr’s Apprentice, but merely be under his watch. Take back your short sword, and take some rest; your journey here could not have been an easy one.”
“Thank you, Master,” he said, bowing slightly and then turning to leave.
“Alnesr, I would speak with you a moment more,” he heard the Master say, even as he turned and left the study.
~AC1~
For a moment, while he had been explaining the facts of the matter to Master Mualim, he had thought that there had been an odd expression on the Master’s face. Still, he’d not seen it again, and was starting to doubt that it had even been there in the first place.
“I am pleased to know that your first mission for the Brotherhood was carried out so well,” the Master said. “While you were away, I commissioned the blacksmiths to make you your own short sword, in preparation for your return. You may go and retrieve it now, or after you have rested for the night.”
“Thank you for your consideration, and for your faith in me, Master,” he said, bowing his head respectfully once more.
“I once said such to Altaïr, child: truly, to watch you having grown from a boy to a man in such a short time fills me with as much sadness as pride,” Master Mualim said, reaching out to set his hand on Alnesr’s right shoulder; he smiled, feeling pleased that the Master held him in such regard. “I am certain that you will do our Brotherhood credit.”
“I thank you for your kind words, Master,” he said.
“They are not merely words, my child,” the Master said, smiling kindly as he gently lifted Alnesr’s chin. “Still, you should take your rest; you seem wearied by your journey. Come to me in the morning; I would speak with you. Perhaps while we break our fast.”
“Oh, of course,” he said, surprised; to his knowledge, no other Assassin had been invited to break their fast with the Master. “Thank you for inviting me.”
“Of course, my child. Go and rest now, you’ve had a long journey,” the Master said kindly, clapping his right shoulder in a gentle gesture of dismissal.
“As you say, Master,” he said, bowing and turning to leave for his room.
Pausing for a moment at the top of the stairs leading up to his room, Alnesr yawned and then swiftly continued on his way. As the Master said, he would retrieve his short sword in the morning; after he had broken his fast with him. Making his way up the stairs to his room once more, Alnesr divested himself of his outer robes, folded them neatly, and set them down on the shelf by his bed.
Removing his bracer, he paused for a moment to examine his right hand; the missing ring finger would mark him as one of the Brotherhood to anyone who looked. It also served to remind Alnesr of the commitment that he had made, both to the man who had raised him, and to Master Mualim himself when he had been raised to his current rank. Settling down into his bed with a last look to the bracer on his table, Alnesr closed his eyes and let himself relax into sleep at last.
When he awoke the next morning, Alnesr rose and washed as swiftly as he could, before dressing in a new set of robes that had been left for him on a higher shelf by the laundresses that served the fortress. Making his way down the stairs once more, he was met by Master Mualim himself.
“Good morning, child,” the Master said, smiling down at him. “I am pleased to see that you came so promptly. Come, follow me; I take my meals alone, but I will make an exception this day.”
“Thank you, Master,” he said, falling into step just behind the Master as the two of them made their way down the corridors.
The place where the Master took his solitary meals was rather close to his study, which Alnesr supposed made sense, and Alnesr found that their morning meal had already been set out for them. The Master sat down first, and then gestured for Alnesr himself to sit down.
“Thank you, Master, for inviting me here,” he said, bowing his head respectfully as he settled down in the chair that had been offered to him.
“Of course, my child,” the Master said, smiling kindly at him. “Enjoy this meal, and then we will speak.”
“Of course, Master.”
~AC1~
Watching Alnesr as he ate, selecting a great deal of olives, some of his softer cheese, and two slices of flatbread, Al Mualim considered him for a few moments; he wondered what this conversation would reveal. Concentrating on his meal, he finished it swiftly and settled back into his seat as the boy finished the last of his own.
“What was it that you wanted to speak to me about, Master?”
“Perhaps it is best that I show you,” he said, gesturing for the boy to remain seated, even as he moved to retrieve the small, wooden box that he had stored the Apple inside in preparation for the meal that he and Alnesr had taken together. “I had thought to ask you this before, but things became rather fraught; this, I thought, was the best time that we might speak of such things.”
For a moment, it looked as if Alnesr was about to speak, but when Al Mualim set the box down on the table the boy fell silent. The child’s gaze was locked on the box, his pale yellow eyes so deeply intent that Al Mualim knew that Alnesr was one of those who would have a place in the new world that he was working to create. After a moment, Alnesr seemed to remember himself, drawing back in his seat and sitting up straight; his eyes, however, continued to flicker towards the Apple that he had not yet truly glimpsed.
It was as if, even when the Treasure was out of his sight, it still had a hold on his mind.
“This is what I wanted to speak with you about, child,” he said, making his voice gentle so that he would not startle the boy overmuch. “This, the treasure that the Templars were attempting to claim, is called a Piece of Eden.” He lifted it free from the box at last, noting the way Alnesr’s eyes immediately locked onto it; the way everything else in the room seemed to pass out of his awareness.
Alnesr slid out of his seat, the normally smooth motions of an Assassin of his rank lost in the face of his clear eagerness – his need – to be closer to the Apple. Moving to stand before the boy, Al Mualim held out the Apple and watched as the boy reached out to touch it. Once Alnesr’s hand had made contact with the surface of the Apple, Al Mualim saw solid lines of light – appearing almost solid enough to touch, though he knew that they were simply one of the Apple’s illusions and nothing more – reach out to the boy and seemingly curl around him.
The strangest sight of all, however, was what happened to the boy’s pale yellow eyes: as the light from the Apple reached out to him, his eyes were obscured by a white glow. The glow spread quickly, from his pupils to the edges of both of his eyes. It was only then, once Alnesr’s eyes were completely overshadowed by the shifting light of the Apple, that Al Mualim began to realize that this was not the full extent of Alnesr’s connection to the Apple.
It felt as though he were reaching into the child’s very mind, riding down the strings of light that the Apple appeared to project; but, more than that, it felt as if Alnesr’s mind was somehow… not entirely in his own body anymore. It was an odd thing to think, but it did not seem to be any less true for all of that. Reaching deeper with the aid of the Apple, Al Mualim found that he could indeed begin to feel the lingering connection that the boy’s mind had with his body.
It was not nearly so strong as he suspected it had once been; he was also beginning to realize that even this was not the full extent of Alnesr’s connection to the Apple.
Al Mualim was beginning to realize that, should he so wish, he could rip Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s mind free from its moorings and hold it within the Apple for as long as he so chose. Still, he was also becoming aware that to do so would be to leave the child’s body as little more than an empty, broken doll. Such was not something he could afford at this time; not with Altaïr still awake and aware, and not so long as his former associates remained among the living.
Still, this new discovery that he had made was a rather important one; he now knew just what it was that made Alnesr so different from every other man that had encountered the Apple in the past.
Laying his right hand atop Alnesr’s right, Al Mualim let his own mind reach down the links that bound Alnesr’s mind to the Apple; from there, he loosened them, drawing all of the links save one back into the Apple itself. That one, he left so that he would be able to more easily bring Alnesr into the light, once the final member of the Nine Templars had been dealt with. The child’s eyes had cleared some, as he had pulled the links from his mind, and now they simply appeared to reflect the lines of light that had once been projected from the Apple itself.
A moment’s concentration on the remaining link allowed him to suppress it deep enough that Alnesr’s eyes cleared, and the boy blinked in surprise.
Chapter 13: Masters and students
Chapter Text
“Master?”
“It is nothing against you, child,” he said, withdrawing the Apple and moving to set it back within the box. “All men who set their eyes on this Treasure find themselves drawn to it.” Still, it was clear that Alnesr had been drawn far deeper than any other man that Al Mualim had yet met.
“It is not that,” the boy said, looking around the room in confusion. “I was seated at the table, when you showed me the Treasure.”
Alnesr said nothing more, but the confusion on his face spoke volumes. So, he truly remembers nothing of what transpired between us. It seemed an odd thing, but the more he thought on it, the more he realized that it was not so odd at all. The Apple had held the child’s mind fast, binding it ever deeper within itself when Alnesr had been within its light; it was only to be expected that the child would not remember such a thing.
“Pay it no mind, my child,” Al Mualim said, making his voice soft and kind. “The Treasure exerts a pull over all men. You are no different.” It was one more falsehood in a long line of them, yes, but what he said next was no falsehood at all. “You’d best go fetch your short sword; you and Altaïr have a great deal of work yet to do.”
“Yes,” Alnesr said absently, his gaze taking in the room a last time – settling for a few, long moments on the box holding the Apple – before turning his full attention to Al Mualim. “Yes, Master.”
Bowing respectfully once more, Alnesr turned and left the room swiftly.
~AC1~
Even though the Master had taken time to reassure him, Alnesr was still troubled by the fact that he could not remember standing up from his seat when Master Mualim had shown him the Templar treasure; or the Piece of Eden, as he had been told that it was called. He had been taught to pay attention to his surroundings at all times; to know that he had lapsed in that so completely was troubling. Even though he had been more perfectly safe within the Master’s quarters than in almost any other place in the fortress that he might have found himself, the thought that he might have been forgetting the lessons that Altaïr had taught him was a troubling one.
Still, there were few enough things that he could do about that, aside from making a personal vow that he would pay more attention from this day on.
Making his way back down the stairs, Alnesr hurried his steps as he made his way deeper into the fortress’ lower levels. It was as Master Mualim had said: he and Altaïr did indeed have a great deal of work left to do. Leaving the fortress behind, Alnesr made his way down to the forges; speaking briefly to some of the smiths there, he quickly found himself holding the short sword that the Master had ordered to be forged for his use.
Thanking the smiths, Alnesr turned and made his way back to the fortress. From there, he would be able to meet up with Altaïr and the two of them could get underway. It was not so long as he thought it would be, before Alnesr found himself catching up to the man who had been his Master not so long ago; the man who he would always think of as his mentor.
“I see you’ve taken up your short blade, as well,” Altaïr said, smiling softly as the two of them fell into step with one another.
“Yes,” he said, nodding slightly as he looked down upon the weapon that had been made for him at the Master’s order.
“Well, seeing that I am no longer your Apprentice, perhaps you would like my help in honing your skills with that blade; I’ll not discount the value of Labib’s lessons, but a great deal of time has passed since then.”
“Yes,” he said, smiling slightly at the thought of being able to train under the watchful eyes of his mentor once more; acting as Altaïr’s Master, even for so short a time, had been an odd enough experience that Alnesr wished never to repeat it. In time, he would take his own Apprentice, but to be forced into the role for one who had been his Master was entirely too unnerving. “I think I would like that.”
“I think Rauf would be particularly pleased if we were to assist him in training his students,” Altaïr said, smiling softly.
Alnesr chuckled. “Yes, I think he would.”
The two of them turned their steps toward the training ground, where Rauf and his students awaited them, and Alnesr began to loosen the muscles of his shoulders the way that Altaïr had taught him to do while the two of them had been working as Master and Apprentice. Once the two of them had made it there, Rauf greeted them cordially, and the two of them spent a great deal of time sparring with the wooden training swords that Rauf had provided for them. Rauf’s students seemed purely enthralled to watch as he and Altaïr sparred each other; he did not know if that was because they had never seen Assassins of his and Altaïr’s rank sparring before, or if they were simply excited for the extra attention.
Alnesr could not ever remember being that way as a child, but his childhood had been rather different than any of the other children in Masyaf.
Once Altaïr had been satisfied that his memory of Labib’s teachings had not faded so much with time, the two of them left the sparring ring. Rauf asked them if they had the time to speak to him about their mission and how it had gone, as well as the matter of his own promotion to full Assassin. Altaïr said that he would see what the Master desired of them, and Alnesr agreed.
Their time was not truly their own when the Master had need of them; such held true for all Assassins.
They made their way back into the main building of the fortress, he slightly behind Altaïr in a gesture of deference that he did not know if he would ever feel comfortable abandoning, and back up to Master Mualim’s study. The Master himself was, naturally, standing behind his desk when they arrived.
“It is good to see that the two of you came so promptly,” Master Mualim said, gently stern gaze taking in both him and Altaïr. “The next of your targets is a man named Garnier de Naplouse. You will find him in Acre.”
“Of course, Master,” Altaïr said, while he simply bowed silently; he was still slightly troubled by the way his own mind had seemed to betray him in the presence of the Treasure.
“Alnesr, I expect that you will continue your efforts to see that Altaïr continues improving in his adherence to our ways,” the Master said.
“Of course, Master,” he acknowledged; it was a strange thing to think, that he would still be called on to account for Altaïr’s actions even though the two of them had now attained the same rank.
Still, it was what the Master had requested of him, and so Alnesr would endeavor to do as Master Mualim wished.
Leaving the Master’s study for the last time this day, he followed Altaïr down to the stables where they chose a new pair of horses and set off on their journey to Acre.
He could never quite remember just how many days the journey to Acre took; the days of travel seemed to blur into one another – the unchanging routine of waking, riding, and then sleeping once more serving to lull him into a half-apathetic sort of daze – but soon enough they had arrived at the city. A large crowd milled outside the city, more of them seeming to be leaving than entering. It fit with what Altaïr had told him of his last mission to Acre, just before he had been officially instated as the older Assassin’s Apprentice: the Master had assigned him to stop the Templars from poisoning the city’s water supply.
Naturally, Altaïr had done so, but the Crusaders had still managed to take the city; and even now, Acre and its people bore the scars of war.
Chapter 14: Into Acre
Chapter Text
They made their way into the city as silently as ever, this time going over the heads of the guards at the gate, rather than passing under their eyes amidst a group of scholars. Truly, Alnesr did not know if there even were scholars about in Acre; it was not a place that he was particularly familiar with. Altaïr nodded to him, and the two of them made their way across the rooftops and deeper into the city; Altaïr seemed to know just where it was, and so Alnesr elected to trust him.
He soon saw the familiar shape of an Assassin Bureau, and smiled softly; it seemed, as ever, that his trust had been rewarded. Finding himself thinking of the one time it had not, Alnesr cast aside those thoughts almost reflexively. Now was not the time for such idle musings.
When the two of them had at last reached the roof of the Bureau, he was the one who climbed in before Altaïr. Stepping down into the room, Alnesr moved back enough to allow Altaïr more space to lower himself down as well. Altaïr’s gentle smile, as he clapped Alnesr on his right shoulder, made him feel warm and contented inside, and prompted a smile of his own in return.
As the two of them made their way into the Bureau’s main room, he saw that this Bureau’s Rafiq had a genuinely kind look in his eyes. It was a welcome change from the false friendliness that the Rafiq in Damascus had offered.
“Ah, Altaïr, Alnesr; a little bird told me that you would be paying a visit,” the Rafiq said, seeming amused at his wordplay. When he opened his hands, setting the pigeon that he had been cooing at free, the bird alighted on the countertop between them, puffing out its chest and marching to and fro. “So, who is the unfortunate that Al Mualim has chosen to be your first mark, Alnesr?”
“The Master has ordered the execution of Garnier de Naplouse,” he said, wondering for a moment just who the man was and what he had done.
“The Grand Master of the Knights Hospitalier?”
“If that is his position in the city; the Master gave me only a name to seek him out,” he said.
“Do you intend to take care of the investigations within the city?” the Rafiq asked.
“I will take care of that,” Altaïr said, before he could say anything. Altaïr then turned toward him, a restrained sort of pride on his face. “Stay here and hone your skills, Alnesr. I will deliver the information you lack.”
“Thank you, Altaïr,” he said, feeling humbled at the generosity he had been offered; it was not long ago that he would have been charged with seeking out that selfsame information on Altaïr’s behalf.
Truly, these circumstances were the strangest that he had ever dealt with.
With a last nod to him and the Rafiq, Altaïr left the Bureau through the same roof-access that the two of them had used on their way in. Alnesr, left alone with the Rafiq, wondered for a moment just what it was that Altaïr did with his time while he was alone at the Bureau.
“Oh, I meant to tell you this before,” the Rafiq said, bringing out a small box and setting it down on the counter between them. “The Master had these sent to me, once it was determined that you and Altaïr would be traveling here.”
The Rafiq opened the box, revealing the set of five sharp, gleaming throwing knives that had been placed inside it.
“I would thank the Master for his generosity, were he here,” he said, bowing slightly in thanks to the Rafiq as he removed the knives from the case that they had been delivered in and sheathed them in the previously empty holsters that had been added to his belt.
“I will be sure to send him your regards,” the Rafiq said, smiling kindly. “For now, I think that you should hone your skills with those knives. Would you like me to show you where you may, or do you know the way?”
He paused for a moment, gathering his thoughts. “While it is true that I have accompanied Altaïr to many Bureaus just like this one, I confess that I have no knowledge of such a place.”
“Come, then; I will show you the way. Come, come.”
Falling into step with the Rafiq as he came out from behind the counter, Alnesr found himself being lead to a room opposite the one that he and Altaïr had entered from. A room that seemed to run the full length of the Bureau itself.
“We might not have the full facilities of Masyaf, but you will at least have the opportunity to gain some skill with those new weapons of yours.”
“Thank you, Rafiq,” he said, as the man nodded to him and left the room.
There were four targets on the far wall, as well as four lines painted on the floor; clearly, one was meant to start at the line closest to the targets, and then move closer over the course of their training. Moving to stand just behind the closest of the four lines, Alnesr stood at the center of the four targets and drew his knives. Time he began his own work.
Chapter 15: The mad doctor
Chapter Text
As he had gathered the information that Alnesr would need when he dealt with the man that Master Mualim had chosen as the first to die by Alnesr’s hands – the man who would be the one of the sole witnesses to the boy’s loss of his last bit of innocence – Altaïr found himself seething more and more with a slow-burning rage. It seemed that the man, Grand Master of the Knights Hospitalier and hence one that should have been helping the people of this wounded city, was doing nothing of the sort. He had heard reports of people being turned away from the Hospitalier fortress, and of others who disappeared into it.
He had also heard reports of a scandal that had driven the man from Tyre, and fears that such a thing would be repeated in Acre. He had also read a scroll, taken from an associate of Naplouse, clearly stating that the man had no intentions at all of curing his alleged patients. Supplied with unfortunates captured from Jerusalem, he had been conducting tests aimed at inducing certain states in his patients; all in the name of some unknown master. Tamir – his target from Damascus – had been working to procure weapons for the operation that Garnier seemed to also be a part of.
One particular phrase in the letter had drawn his attention above even that, however: we should endeavor to reclaim what has been stolen from us. He was still puzzled as to what it could possibly mean, but as he still had other information to gather, Altaïr had continued his investigation. To hear the people speak, Garnier allowed “madmen” to wander the hospital almost at whim; though Altaïr did not know if those men were truly mad, or if they were a product of the experiments that Garnier was said to conduct.
He had also learned that, when the archers covering the walkways above the hospital were dismissed from their posts, Garnier himself would take time to make the rounds of his hospital without a bodyguard. Only monks were allowed passage at those times, but such was the reason that the Assassins had chosen the garb that they wore; Alnesr would be given the perfect opportunity to strike.
With all of the information that he had gathered on behalf of the younger Assassin, Altaïr knew that it was best that he returned to the Bureau to present it.
Alnesr and Jabal would be waiting for him, and he could at least admit to himself that he was becoming weary of this day’s activities and wished to rest from them. Crossing the rooftops on his way back to the Bureau, Altaïr was careful to avoid the notice of the archers placed upon them. He’d no desire for a cry to go up, after all that he had done to conceal his presence from those who called Acre their home.
Coming within sight of the rooftop entrance, Altaïr allowed himself a small, contented smile as he climbed back down into the building.
“Altaïr, it’s good to see you again,” Alnesr said, rising from the table where he had clearly been taking his meal.
“How has your training been progressing?” he asked, settling down at the table so that he could partake of some of the food that Alnesr had laid out for the both of them.
“As well as can be expected without a sparring partner,” Alnesr said, seeming to contemplate the fig in his hands for a few moments before beginning to eat once more. Swallowing a last time, Alnesr turned a shyly pleased smile back to him. “The Master sent me my first set of throwing knives earlier.”
Altaïr smiled, feeling another swell of pride in the younger Assassin. “It is good to see how well you have progressed in your training.”
“Thank you, Altaïr. It means a great deal to me, hearing you say that.”
They fell silent after that, finishing their meal and taking a few moments to let their food settle, before he proceeded Alnesr back into the main room of the Bureau and stood before Jabal.
“Welcome back, Altaïr,” the Rafiq said, nodding and smiling. “Have you gathered the information you sought?”
“Indeed; I have determined both when and how the task would best be carried out,” he said.
“Share your knowledge with us, then.”
“Garnier lives and works within his Order’s hospital,” he said, feeling again the swell of anger at the man for the abuse of power that he had heard tell of from all quarters of the city. “Rumors speak of atrocities committed within its walls.”
“What is the plan that you have formed, then?” Jabal asked, folding his arms and shifting slightly behind the counter.
“Garnier keeps mainly to his quarters inside the hospital, though he leaves occasionally to inspect the patients. When he makes his rounds, he does so without a bodyguard. That would be the ideal time to strike.”
“You’ve clearly given thought to this, Altaïr,” Jabal said, smiling. “Well, what do you say to this, Alnesr? You’ve been rather silent on the matter.”
“Thank you, Altaïr, for your diligence and consideration,” Alnesr said, smiling up at him.
“Well then, I will give you leave to go, Alnesr,” Jabal said, smiling as he handed over yet another feather. “Though, I would advise that you take some rest first; it has been a rather long day.”
“Yes, I think I will do that,” Alnesr said, turning and making for the pile of blankets and cushions on the far side of the entrance room.
Altaïr followed just behind him, and soon enough the two of them had settled down to sleep once more.
The next day, as the two of them ate a light breakfast, Altaïr noticed a sort of tenseness that lingered around Alnesr; he knew why that was, as it had been just the same way with him when he had been called upon to take his first life.
“Be at peace, Alnesr,” he said, reaching out to lay a comforting hand on the younger Assassin’s right shoulder. “I am certain that your actions today will bring credit to both the Brotherhood, and to yourself.”
“Thank you, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, smiling softly as he finished the last of his meal. “It means a great deal to me, hearing you say that.”
He squeezed the younger Assassin’s shoulder a last time, before the two of them rose from their seats and made their way up and out of the Bureau so that they could be about their final business in this city. So that Garnier de Naplouse could be dealt with at last.
Crossing the rooftops as their journey continued, Altaïr took a moment to observe Alnesr in motion; the younger Assassin’s technique was clearly improving, though not many who watched him would see the added refinement to his movements that Altaïr was able to notice. Not many observed the younger Assassin so closely as he did; not many had taught him nearly since birth. Turning his thoughts back to their current mission after his moment of admitted self-indulgence, Altaïr signaled for Alnesr to follow him.
Turning their path toward the Hospitalier fortress, Altaïr began searching for the building he had found to be a good place to insert themselves into a group of scholars before they ventured inside the fortress. Finding it, he signaled to Alnesr and the two of them ducked out of sight of the archer patrolling the walkways above the fortress. Turning to take in the position of the sun, Altaïr knew that they had come at just the time.
Smiling to himself as the man moved to a ladder and let himself down, Altaïr signaled Alnesr forward and the two of them moved low and fast across the walkway, until they came to a point where they could see without being seen in turn. Peering down into the courtyard, Altaïr found to his surprise that it was rather a plain affair: sheer-walled in forbidding, dull gray stone, with only a well at its center.
Certainly a far cry from the ornately decorated buildings that were usually found in Acre.
There were also several guards, wearing the black, quilted surcoats of the Knights Hospitalier, as well as a group of monks. Moving randomly among the serene-looking monks and the severe-looking Knights, were small groups of shirtless, barefoot men. Poor wretches, who wandered dazedly about, their expressions blank and their eyes glazed.
Frowning slightly, Altaïr studied the courtyard further; there seemed to be no way to drop inside without being seen. Beckoning Alnesr forward, Altaïr moved to the entrance wall of the hospital so that he and Alnesr would be able to see into the street. On sun-washed stone, the ill and injured gathered, begging the guards to be allowed inside. Others, whose minds seemed to be gone, wandered among the throng shouting gibberish and obscenities.
Altaïr gritted his teeth; the city would be much improved after Garnier was dead, clearly.
He was pleased, however, to see the group of scholars moving through the crowd as if it was not even there; they seemed somehow removed from the tumult around them. It also looked as though they were making for the hospital, as well.
“Come.”
“Yes, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, nodding sharply.
The two of them made their way back to the ground, moving in the inattentive moments of the crowd and joining the group of scholars. Matching their pace and adapting their movements, he and Alnesr were able to vanish into the crowd. Risking a surreptitious glance at their surroundings at odd moments, Altaïr found that they were indeed making their way into the hospital; the guards that would have stopped an Assassin at the door stepped neatly aside for the scholars.
Altaïr wrinkled his nose at the scents inside the hospital; where the city outside had held the scents of baking, perfumes, and spices, this place reeked of human misery. From somewhere else, muffled by a pair of closed doors, there came a series of pained cries and a low, lingering moan; that would be the main hospital, Altaïr mused.
The doors were suddenly flung open, and a patient came running out, a look of mad terror on his face. “No! Help, help me! Help me, please! You must help me!”
A guard came charging out after him; the man had a lazy eye, as though the muscles in his eyelid had been damaged some time in the past. He was swiftly followed by another guard, this one healthy; together, the two of them beat on the man until he had collapsed to his knees on the stone. Altaïr, watching this from within the group of scholars, felt his jaw clench.
Being forced to merely stand and watch as this injustice was perpetuated was infuriating.
“Mercy,” the man howled, even as blows continued to rain down upon him. “I beg of you, no more…”
The man’s pleas trailed off, as the doors to the hospital swung open once more, and a man who could only be Garnier de Naplouse walked in. He was shorter than the image that Altaïr had formed of him from the Master’s description; beardless, with close-cropped white hair, sunken eyes, and an unsmiling, downturned mouth that gave him the look of a corpse. He wore the white crosses of the Hospitalier on his arms, and a crucifix around his neck, but he did not seem to be a particularly pious sort.
For he also wore an apron that had been soaked with the blood of many men.
Naplouse turned his eyes onto the struggling man, held as he was by Lazy Eye and the other guard; Lazy eye raising a fist with clear anticipation.
“Enough, my child,” Naplouse rebuked, a disapproving expression on his face. “I asked you to retrieve the patient, not kill him.” Naplouse smiled, though even then there was something in his eyes that Altaïr did not like. “There, there. Everything will be all right. Give me your hand.”
“No… no…” the crazy man moaned, sounding for a moment more like a dying animal than a man. “Don’t touch me… not again…”
Naplouse seemed to appear hurt by the man’s reaction, or he would have if Altaïr had not been able to see his eyes; those remained as hard and remote as ever. “Cast out this fear, else I cannot help you.”
“Help me? Like you helped the others? You took their souls! I saw. I saw. But not mine. No; you’ll not get mine. Never! Never… never. Not mine…” the man continued, repeating those two words with a regularity and lack of inflection that Altaïr found unnerving even in spite of all his training.
The last of the false friendship vanished from Naplouse’s face as though it had never been. “Take hold of yourself,” the man said sharply, after delivering what looked like a harsh slap to the man he was tormenting. “Do you think this gives me pleasure? Do you think I want to hurt you? But you leave me no choice…”
With a surge of strength that had carried many men through times of desperation, the man pulled free from the guards and tried to lose himself in the gathered crowd. Altaïr doubted that anything would come of the attempt, and so he tried not to feel anything for the man. “Every kind word, matched by the back of his hand!” the man screeched, and Altaïr ducked his head as the man passed close to him. “Nothing but lies and deception! He’ll not be content until all bow before him!”
Lazy Eye caught up to the man, dragging him back toward Naplouse; the expression on the Grand Master’s face once again matched the hardness that had always been in his eyes. “You should not have done that.” Naplouse turned his attention to Lazy Eye once more. “Return him to his quarters. I’ll be along once I’ve tended to the others.”
“You can’t keep me here!” the sickly man declared, sounding almost proud for a moment. “I’ll escape again!”
“No, you won’t,” Naplouse said calmly, turning back to Lazy Eye. “Break his legs; both of them.”
Lazy Eye grinned, even as Altaïr felt a hand on his wrist. Looking over to see who it was, he found Alnesr standing at his right side once more. The two of them had separated slightly when they had joined the group of scholars; having had to take care not to appear as outsiders there, of all places; but here and now it was safe for them to be seen together, as long as they did not act to reveal themselves.
Alnesr bared his teeth, pale yellow eyes narrowing at the sound of bones shattering, one at a time; a sound like cloth-wrapped sticks being snapped. Moving to stand shoulder-to-shoulder with the younger Assassin, Altaïr watched as those pale yellow eyes came to focus on him again. Nodding, in lieu of voicing the thoughts that he could not under the circumstances, he saw Alnesr’s expression clear once more.
Chapter 16: Garnier de Naplouse
Chapter Text
It had helped, to be reminded of their true objective in this time and place: they were not merely watching while an innocent was tormented. Their aim – his aim, in this instance – was to rid the world of his tormentor, so that this man and all those like him would never need suffer this way again.
However, as the cloying, false sympathy returned to the Grand Master’s face, Alnesr found that his fury was no less than it had been. He could simply control it more firmly.
“I am so sorry, child.” At those words, Alnesr snarled silently. “Have you people nothing better to do?”
This, the Grand Master directed at the monks and wandering patients that had paused to watch the gruesome spectacle. For a moment, even as the group dispersed and he moved to follow Altaïr and the group of scholars that had concealed their entrance, Alnesr was not quite certain who he hated more: Garnier de Naplouse himself, or those who had simply stood by and allowed him to do as he pleased with the ones whose lives he so carelessly destroyed.
Turning his thoughts again from those matters – it would not do to lose his composure in this of all places – Alnesr followed the scholars into another door. Forcing himself not to gag, as the stench behind this door was even more horrible than that which he had been confronted by when he and Altaïr had first entered this blighted place. Passing by many beds, some of them with wooden cages, and all of them filled with the moaning wretches that he had seen in the main room of this place.
Alnesr, making a concerted effort to close his ears to what he was hearing, coldly furious about what he had seen and was continuing to see, saw an opening to finally have done with Naplouse once and for all.
Extending his hidden-blade, Alnesr rammed it into Naplouse’s body, finally ending the terror that the man had inflicted on so many citizens of Acre; innocents or not, no one deserved to be subjected to this kind of torture.
“Your work is done,” he said, trying in spite of all that he had seen to hold himself to the standards that the Assassins maintained; he would not disgrace himself by showing undue emotion. No matter how much he wished to sneer at this man. “Rest now.
“All of my good works, and I’m to die at the hand of a child?” Naplouse seemed more bemused than displeased, and Alnesr found himself clenching his teeth briefly, before he forced himself to relax once more.
“I would hardly say that your works are good,” he said coldly.
“Oh, child,” Naplouse said, obviously attempting to sound kind. Given all that Alnesr had seen while he had been making his way through this place, he was not willing to accept such false sentiment. “These men and women were mad, before I rescued them from the prisons of their own minds.”
“So you claim,” he said, feeling the cold fury that had been building within him ever since he had seen the atrocities that this man had committed on those who were supposed to be in his care growing ever colder.
“It is not merely a claim, my child-”
“Do not call me that,” he snapped; it was unseemly, and yet Alnesr found that he could not fully manage to master himself after hearing Naplouse speak.
Hearing the way he tried to justify the depravities that Alnesr had borne witness to, while he had been tracking the man back to where he laired, Alnesr found himself forced to breathe deeply in the manner that Altaïr had taught him for those few times when he found himself overwhelmed by fury.
“Oh, my boy. What would your father say, if he could see what you have become?”
“My father stands behind me even now, and he would never have performed such base acts as you,” Alnesr all but spat, his eyes narrowed in disgust for the man dying at his feet.
Altaïr’s hand on his right shoulder drew his attention back to the task that he had been appointed, and what remained before he could truly call it complete. Crouching by the side of Naplouse, Alnesr stained the feather that he had been given with the man’s blood, foul as it so clearly was, and then allowed Altaïr to gently steer him back out into the courtyard. Together, they blended back into the crowd of scholars as they made their way back out of the nightmarish place that disguised itself as a hospital.
Soon enough, however, a cry went up from within the building; Altaïr gently squeezed his right shoulder, and Alnesr nodded subtly to indicate that he understood.
The two of them were soon out of sight of Acre’s citizens, and he and Altaïr swiftly scaled the side of the building they had once stood in the shadows of. Standing atop the roof, Alnesr found that, no matter how he tried, could not yet manage to excise the fury – cold as any Assassin’s – that he still felt in the face of all that he had seen within Naplouse’s chamber of horrors.
“We will speak more of this at the Bureau,” Altaïr said, his expression stern but for the gentleness that Alnesr saw in his eyes.
“Thank you, Altaïr,” he said, nodding as he fell into step with the elder Assassin as they made their way across the rooftops once more.
He could hear the ringing of Acre’s alarm as it was raised, but the two of them moved – swift and silent – over the rooftops on their way back to Acre’s Assassin Bureau, Alnesr found that he was not so concerned with the city guards finding them. He did not think that it was recklessness – not in a situation such as this – merely confidence that, whatever new situation he and Altaïr might have found themselves facing, they would be able to see it long before they were forced to confront it head-on.
Or else, they would be able to evade it long before it became a concern to either of them.
Once the two of them had passed into more familiar territory, Alnesr paused for only half a moment to banish the last scraps of cold fury that had nearly consumed him when he had beheld the suffering caused by the first of his targets. Naplouse was dead; those who had been held in the madman’s thrall would now be able to return to their lives without fear of having them stolen away once more.
He could comfort himself with that thought, now that he had the time to think on other things aside from the task that he had been sent out to accomplish.
Breathing more easily now that they had come within sight of the Bureau’s rooftop entrance once more, Alnesr followed Altaïr as the older Assassin made his way back down into the outer room of the building. Climbing back down the wall just as Altaïr had stepped down from the fountain, Alnesr let himself breathe fully and deeply once more. As he did so, he felt the subtle tension that he had been carrying with him throughout their return journey slowly ebb away.
He made no attempts to hold onto it; this was safe ground that he stood on now, he could afford to relax here, of all places.
Altaïr’s arm around his shoulder’s brought a smile of fondness and a feeling of relief to him, and as he looked up into his mentor’s face, Alnesr found his own expression mirrored on the older man’s.
Chapter 17: An end to horrors
Chapter Text
It was a strange thing, Altaïr mused, seeing Alnesr smile at the true death of his innocence. Still, Altaïr reflected, for the Assassins innocence was something more akin to a chrysalis: merely a phase that they passed through. A phase that was always meant to end. Perhaps this was what the Master had been speaking of, when he had said that seeing Altaïr’s own growth from boy to man in such a short time had filled him with pride and sadness both.
He’d been the one to see Alnesr taking his first, halting steps out of babyhood, helped to guide the boy’s feet as he made his way through childhood, and now to see him stand as a man and a fellow Assassin… Altaïr did indeed feel both sadness and pride at this moment.
As the two of them made their way into the main room of the Bureau, Altaïr found himself turning over what he had seen within the hospital where Garnier de Naplouse performed his butcher’s work. Some of the poor wretches in that hospital had actually seemed grateful for the horrors that Garnier had inflicted on them; it was not a thing that he would have believed possible, were it not for what he had seen this day with his own eyes.
Were it not for what he had heard some of those wretches saying.
He rather doubted that Alnesr had seen the same things as he had, or else he had ignored them in his focus on dealing with Garnier. Alnesr had not been exposed to such suffering as had been present within Garnier’s poor excuse for a hospital; Altaïr had seen the cold, stoic rage upon the younger Assassin’s face as the two of them moved through the crowds of wretches, guards, and attendants.
He was honestly unsurprised by Alnesr’s reaction, considering the way that the younger Assassin had been raised and trained.
As the two of them made their way over to the counter that the Rafiq stood behind, Altaïr hung back so as to allow Alnesr to make his own report first.
“Garnier de Naplouse is dead,” the younger Assassin reported, smoothly handing over the feather that had been marked with the man’s blood.
“Well done, then,” the Rafiq said, taking the feather. “I’m certain the Master will be pleased with your work, young Assassin.”
“There was something odd, however,” he said, drawing the attention of the Rafiq and Alnesr both.
“What was it that you saw, Altaïr?” Alnesr asked, before the Rafiq could say anything about the matter.
“I only wonder what Garnier wanted from these people, that he would keep them and experiment on them as he did,” he said, folding his arms in contemplation.
“It is not yours to ask, Altaïr, but to act,” the Rafiq said sternly. “As Alnesr has. It does not matter what the man wanted, only that he is dead.”
“Garnier seemed to believe that he was helping those people,” he mused aloud; he suspected that the Rafiq would not be particularly amenable to speaking about this matter.
“That was not what I saw, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, narrowing his eyes as he tilted his head slightly in thought. “We did not stand in place of healing, but one of pain and suffering.”
“Your brother has the right of it, Altaïr,” the Rafiq said, nodding to Alnesr. “Now, I would suggest that the two of you take some rest. You’ll have a long journey to Masyaf ahead of you. The Master will want news of your success, Alnesr.”
“Yes, I expect he will,” Alnesr said, nodding.
As the two of them made their way into the sleeping area, Altaïr gently resting his right hand atop Alnesr’s left shoulder, he felt himself steadily becoming more relaxed. He did not fight the sensation, as there was no pressing reason for him to maintain the peak of his awareness as he had outside these walls. Still, there might be other matters that needed settling.
“Does something still trouble you, Alnesr?”
“No; Naplouse needed to be removed from the world, and now those people who he was holding will be able to return to their homes. To the lives that he attempted to steal from them.”
“What you said to Garnier – that you thought of me as a father – do you still mean it?”
“You have been my family for as long as I could properly form memories,” Alnesr said, smiling softly; fondly. “Did you think that I would forget that so quickly?”
He chuckled softly, acknowledging the younger Assassin’s words. “It is not truly our way, but, all the same, I have come to think of you as a son, as well.” He glanced away, slightly over Alnesr’s right shoulder. “I do not truly know if the Master would approve of such a thing, however.”
“Perhaps we should not tell him, then,” Alnesr said, sounding slightly uncertain.
Looking down, feeling Alnesr’s right hand settled atop his own, Altaïr smiled softly. “Perhaps not.”
The two of them settled down among the cushions after that, Alnesr’s right hand still touching his own. Closing his eyes, just after Alnesr had closed his own, Altaïr breathed out and finally allowed the last of the tension that had been keeping him awake to ebb away.
The next morning, Altaïr opened his eyes and waited for Alnesr to do the same. It took only a few moments for Alnesr to awaken, his pale yellow eyes clearing quickly.
“Good morning, Altaïr,” the younger Assassin said, getting to his feet even as Altaïr himself did the same.
“To you, as well,” he said, smiling gently as the two of them made their way over to the low table that sat close enough to the cushions to serve them, but far enough that they would not strike the table with their limbs if either of them was to shift in their sleep.
Breaking their fast with raisins and dried figs, Altaïr reflected on their changed circumstances. They had not changed in any way that could be seen, but there was a confidence – a surety – to Alnesr’s stance; the way he sat, the way he held his head, and the look in his eyes, all told of it. It was a rather pleasing sight; to know that Alnesr now held the same rank as him, and that the two of them could now truly stand as equals.
When the two of them had finished their small meal, Altaïr allowed Alnesr to proceed him out of the Bureau, and the two of them began to make their way across the rooftops. Soon enough, they had returned to the gates of Acre once more; and, blending with a group of citizens on their way out of the city, the pair of them had soon left Acre behind.
Chapter 18: Departing again
Chapter Text
Mounting his horse, and pausing a moment as Alnesr did the same, Altaïr began the first stage of their journey back to Masyaf. They rode for most of the first day, stopping only to sleep but eating while they rode, and then swiftly returning to their journey. Days passed in a comfortable routine, which was quite a contrast to their time in Acre dealing with Garnier.
Soon enough, they came within sight of the great fortress-city, and Altaïr felt the last of the tension that he had been carrying with him ebb away. He and Alnesr now tread upon safe ground; no matter what challenges the world beyond these walls held for them, Masyaf stood as a haven and a place of rest.
Returning the horses to their stable, Altaïr once more allowed Alnesr to proceed him. This was his triumph, more than anyone else’s. The young man had indeed become an Assassin.
As he tailed the younger Assassin, Altaïr found that he could see that the new confidence that he had seen that morning in Acre had not merely been something transient. He could see it in the set of Alnesr’s shoulders, the surety of his stride as the younger Assassin proceeded him up the steps of the Master’s tower. As the two of them entered the Master’s library, making their way through the room to stand before the Master himself, Altaïr found it more difficult than before to hold back the curiosity that had been gnawing at his mind.
“I am pleased to see that the two of you returned to me safely,” the Master said, a welcoming smile on his face, “Alnesr, have you completed your mission?”
“Garnier de Naplouse is dead by my hand, as you ordered, Master.”
“Well done, then,” Master Mualim said, nodding. “We could not have hoped for a more agreeable outcome.”
“There is something I would have clarified, if you do not mind, Master,” he said, drawing the attention of both the Master and Alnesr himself.
“Speak of it then, Altaïr.”
“Garnier claimed that his work was noble, and looking back, some of those in his keeping, many of them in fact, seemed to be grateful to him. But enough to make me wonder; how was it that he managed to turn enemy into friend?”
“Leaders will always find ways to make others obey them, Altaïr,” the Master said, with a soft, knowing chuckle. “That is what makes them leaders. When words fail, they turn to coin. When even that won’t do, they resort to baser things: bribes, threats, and other types of trickery. There are plants, herbs from distant lands, that can cause a man to take leave of his senses. So great are the pleasures they bring, that men may even become enslaved by them.”
Chapter 19: One man’s truth
Chapter Text
“Are you saying that Naplouse was drugging those men?” Alnesr demanded, the cold fury that Altaïr had seen on his face while they had been hunting for Garnier making a swift return. “That he was poisoning them?”
“Yes, if things were indeed as Altaïr described them,” the Master said.
“Best he died when he did, then,” Alnesr spat.
“Indeed so, my child,” the Master said, resting his right hand atop the younger Assassin’s right shoulder. “Still, there are men who have accused me of doing the same. They say that there is a garden, overflowing with women and pleasure; that I drug you as Garnier did his men, and tempt you with its rewards.”
“They do not know the truth of us,” Altaïr said, not entirely certain if he was disappointed by the credulousness of those who lived outside the Brotherhood’s walls and knew nothing of their Creed, or else simply pitied them their ignorance.
“Which is how it must be,” the Master said; Altaïr was not at all sure if he could believe such, however.
“But if they knew the truth, that all we seek is peace-”
“Then they would not fear us, and we would have no hold over them,” the Master said.
“Perhaps some of them could come to know more of our truth,” Alnesr said, speaking for the first time in several moments.
“Yes,” the Master said, with a soft, knowing smile. “Those who choose to dedicate themselves to our cause are the only ones who can be permitted to learn the full truth of our work. But it is late, and the two of you must be weary from your journey. Go and take some rest; I will call for you in the morning to inform you of the next mission that you will be undertaking.”
“As you say, Master,” Alnesr stated, with a nod more akin to a subtle bow.
“Thank you for your understanding, Master,” Altaïr said, bowing to Master Mualim in turn.
The two of them turned to leave, and Altaïr clapped Alnesr on his left shoulder, earning a smile from the younger Assassin as the two of them made their way out into the corridors once more. Stifling a yawn, as he and Alnesr separated to make their way to their respective rooms, Altaïr turned to take one last look over his shoulder at the young Assassin who had once, not so long ago, been his own apprentice.
Altaïr could admit, if only to himself, that he continued to take pride in Alnesr’s skills; he had laid the foundation that the young Assassin was building on, after all.
~AC1~
Once the fortress had settled down for the night, and all of the Assassins within it – save for those night guards who were set to watch the walls – were asleep, Rashid ad-Din Sinan made his way through the halls of the Assassins’ fortress. He had put aside Rashid for so long, that walking as himself was almost strange to him. Still, there were matters he wanted to address; matters far more pressing to Rashid than Al Mualim.
Standing at the threshold of his library, Rashid concentrated on the remaining thread of the Apple’s power that he had buried within the Assassin Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s mind. Pulling gently at the thread, drawing the young Assassin closer, Rashid reflected for a moment on the new things that he had learned about Alnesr.
It was, in a way, a sad thing that he had not found out what the young Assassin truly was before the child had truly had a chance to dedicate himself to the cause of the Assassins and their Brotherhood. Still, Rashid accepted that even if he had possessed the knowledge, such would have been useless to him without the Apple to enable him to act on it.
When the young Assassin came to him at last, half-closed eyes reflecting the tracery of white light within the Apple itself, Rashid smiled as he reached out to cup the child’s chin for a few moments before gently guiding him deeper into his library. A curious thought came to him then, and Rashid released his grasp – gentle as it had been – on the child’s right shoulder.
Diverting slightly more of his attention to guiding Alnesr through the Apple, Rashid found that it was as simple a matter to guide the child using his thoughts as it had been his hand.
It was a good thing to remember, but as the young Assassin still had tasks to perform – tasks that not only required the use of his mind and senses, but also called for the child to be rested – Rashid commanded him back to his room. Half-closing his eyes as he traced the thread that stretched between the Apple and the young Assassin that he guided, Rashid found that he was able to guide the child’s steps just as easily through the Apple as he would have with his hands.
Settling the boy back down in his bed, Rashid once more retracted all of the threads but one; pressing that thread ever deeper into the young Assassin’s mind until he could only just reach it through the Apple.
Looking back to the Apple, sitting so placid and innocuous in his right hand – the only sign of the link that he still possessed to Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s mind a subtle, pulsing glow that was almost too faint for sight – Rashid contemplated it.
“So, yet another of your mysteries is revealed,” he stated softly.
Chapter 20: Hunting again
Chapter Text
When he awakened, sitting up in his bed, Alnesr had the oddest feeling of disconnection for a few moments. As if he was, somehow, not entirely himself in those moments. The feeling swiftly passed as he regained his full faculties and awareness, and so Alnesr disregarded it. Waking from dreams, even if one could not remember them, always seemed to be rather an odd thing.
Changing out of his sleeping-clothes, he swiftly dressed in another set of Assassin robes and armed himself for the day; the Master had implied that they would be given a new target, and he would not disgrace himself and the training that he had received from Altaïr by coming in unprepared for such a thing.
Meeting up with Altaïr himself as the two of them continued on their way through the corridors to the Master’s tower, Alnesr returned the smile that the elder Assassin gave him.
“You’ve had a restful night?”
“Yes,” he said, debating for a moment whether to tell Altaïr about the oddness that he had experienced when he had awakened in the morning. He did not want Altaïr himself to worry about something that was probably nothing, but he had always trusted the man; even before he had become the elder Assassin’s apprentice, when the traitor Haras had held him at sword-point and threatened his life in an attempt to force Altaïr to surrender. “I think that I had an odd dream; I awakened with a strange feeling of displacement.”
“Oh?” the elder Assassin turned back to him, even as the two of them continued on their way up through the corridors to the Master’s tower. “Your dreams have been troubling you?”
“I suppose; if I could remember them, I would be able to speak more clearly,” he said, as they came up and into the Master’s tower.
“That you could,” Altaïr said, and Alnesr saw him nod.
The two of them came into the Master’s study as last, finding him standing behind his desk. When the Master’s gaze fell upon them, he smiled.
“I trust that you both have had a restful night?” Master Mualim said; Alnesr nodded, and saw Altaïr doing the same. He would not trouble the Master with his own uncertainties; it was enough that Altaïr knew. “Good. Your next mission will bring you to Jerusalem; there is a man there named Talal, he will be your next target.” The Master smiled. “I think you will find that the Rafiq there has a great deal to offer you both.”
“As you say, Master,” he said, offering a short bow to Master Mualim even as he contemplated just what the Master could have meant by what he had said.
He and Altaïr fell into step with each other, making their way down from the Master’s tower and – eventually – out of the citadel itself.
“Do you know what the Master could have meant, when he chose to call our attention to this Rafiq? Of all others?”
“The Master’s ways can be rather enigmatic,” Altaïr said, sounding about as contemplative as Alnesr felt. “And, I must admit, I do not fully understand why he chose to say such a thing now of all times.”
Sighing, Alnesr chuckled softly. “You have always seemed to know more than me; I’d hoped it would hold true now as it has in the past.”
Altaïr laughed. “I’ve come to accept that not even I fully understand the Master when he chooses to be enigmatic.”
There was really nothing more to say after that, and so the two of them continued on their way down to the stables in relative silence. Choosing a pair of freshly tacked-and-saddled horses, he and Altaïr rode side by side down the mountain and away from the citadel. They passed untroubled through the gates of the fortress, and into the village beyond. Soon enough, they had gone beyond even that.
Their journey took them through other cities – cities whose names Alnesr had never quite been able to recall after he had passed through them – and at times they stopped, either to rest, to eat, or on rare occasions to aid a struggling citizen of one of the small cities or large towns that they passed through. Soon enough, however, they arrived before the gates of the great city of Jerusalem.
Dismounting from his horse, even as he saw Altaïr doing the same, Alnesr surveyed the large crowd of people entering the city. He did not know how many of them were pilgrims, but there were other matters – far more pressing – than his own curiosity at this moment.
“Come,” Altaïr said softly. “We should find our way inside.”
“Yes, of course.” Nodding, he fell into step with Altaïr as the two of them made their way forward.
The guards at the gate were of the same sort as the ones in Acre, or Damascus before them, but in this case there was no convenient crowd of scholars to disguise their entrance into the city. And so, with Altaïr proceeding him, though the two of them now held the same rank, Alnesr made his way up the side of a weathered-looking wooden structure that his mind was too preoccupied to recall the name of, and swiftly followed Altaïr across several beams, and finally into the city proper.
Right over the heads of those who had been assigned to guard it.
Chapter 21: Journey in Jerusalem
Chapter Text
Once the two of them stood back on solid ground once again, Alnesr took note of a man speaking the praises of another man; Talal was the one he spoke of, in fact.
“We should move,” Altaïr said, a gentle hand atop his left shoulder. “Observe the lay of the city, Alnesr. Things will become clearer after that.”
“Of course,” he said, nodding.
Moving out of sight of the large crowd milling about the square, Alnesr began calmly to scale the side of a large building. Once he had made it to the top, he looked out over the vast expanse of the city, laid out before and below him like the most detailed of paintings. He’d not been to this city before, and even though he had been dispatched with a mission, this place was fascinating all the same.
Performing a leap of faith once he had managed to locate a suitable hay pile, Alnesr brushed the remaining hay free from his robes and hurried to meet with Altaïr.
“I see that you are enjoying your newfound freedom,” Altaïr said, a subtle smile on his face.
“Yes,” he said, smiling reflectively. “It was not so long ago that I was all but confined to the grounds of Masyaf. Being free of them now… I… I must admit that I do enjoy the feeling.”
“I had almost forgotten,” Altaïr muttered, as the two of them continued on their way through Jerusalem’s front square. “Your appearance would not have served to mask your presence within the crowds; if anything, it would have done the exact opposite.”
“Yes; that is what the Master said to me, as well,” Alnesr nodded, allowing Altaïr himself to set their pace through the city, carefully keeping his head tilted just so; eyes out of the line of sight of anyone who might glance their way. “That was why I was restricted to missions solely carried out within the fortress or the village surrounding it. Master Mualim suggested that, if they were to some to know me more for my good deeds than for my appearance, they would come to accept me for who I am all the sooner.”
“The Master had the right of it, I expect,” Altaïr said, smiling slightly.
“He did, at that.” Alnesr smiled himself, then became reflective once more. “Still, there are days that I wish I could do the same in the other cities we operate in; but that would take a lifetime.”
“Perhaps; but in the end, that is all we ever have,” Altaïr said, still smiling. Then, as they came back to the square where the man whose voice he had heard when they first came into the city, the elder Assassin became serious once more. “The Master ordered us to deal with Talal; this seems an opportune time to begin learning of him.”
Looking from the orator to Altaïr, Alnesr tilted his head slightly; there was merit to what the elder Assassin had said, however… “Should we not speak to the Rafiq before we begin our investigation?”
“I would agree with you, Alnesr, were it not for the man who stands before us even now,” Altaïr countered, motioning to the orator with a tilt of his head.
“I suppose you have the right of it; we’ve no way of knowing how long this man will be standing here; how long we would be able to find him as quickly as we did now,” Alnesr said, accepting the logic of Altaïr’s statement even as the two of them fell into step with one another again. “Do you wish for my aid in this, Altaïr, or shall I simply watch for guards?”
“If you would not be averse to it,” Altaïr’s gaze fixed on his face for a long moment, and Alnesr thought that he could guess what the elder Assassin was thinking.
“No; you have the right of it, again.” Stifling a sigh, he conceded.
Allowing Altaïr to take the lead as the two of them moved forward to confront the man who had been offering Talal such high praise, Alnesr clasped his hands in front of his chest and lowered his head slightly, making himself appear as pious as possible; cultivating the illusion of being a young scholar in the company of his master. They closed in on the man with slow, easy strides; not giving him any reason to think that they were anything more than what they appeared to be.
That was the way of the Brotherhood: to blend with the citizens to such a degree that they could all but vanish into any crowd almost on a whim.
Raising his eyes slightly, Alnesr saw that he and Altaïr were almost upon the man. That was both a good thing and rather unsettling at the same time; good because they would soon have this task behind them and thus would be able to make their presence known to the Rafiq, and rather unsettling because – for all the time that he had been given to become accustomed to the way that those outside of the Brotherhood reacted to his appearance – he was not particularly pleased to have such a thing brought up.
Following Talal’s man until he had passed safely out of sight of the milling citizens in Jerusalem’s main plaza, Alnesr saw Altaïr nod subtly to him.
Raising his head, Alnesr straightened his stance and attempted to make himself as imposing as his relatively short stature would allow.
Cornering the man at last, Alnesr moved aside; Altaïr would not appreciate being distracted at such critical moments, and as the elder Assassin had not asked for his aid in combat, Alnesr would not insult him by forcing him to accept such.
Keeping pace with Altaïr as he continued his efforts to subdue Talal’s man, Alnesr watched carefully. When it seemed as though the man was attempting to disengage from battle, most likely so that he could gather more of Talal’s men, Alnesr turned his eyes on the man. His face was as professionally blank as any other Assassin’s would have been under the same circumstances, but Talal’s man reacted just as any of those outside of the Brotherhood had done.
The man recoiled, and Altaïr bore down on him with renewed vigor.
Once the battle had concluded, with Talal’s man subdued enough that he was willing to talk – with the condition that Alnesr himself stayed away – Alnesr stood back enough not to trouble Talal’s man as Altaïr interrogated and then disposed of him. Stepping carefully over the corpse, Alnesr closed ranks with Altaïr once more.
“Did he know anything of import?” he asked, as the two of them made their way back into the main plaza of Jerusalem’s rich district.
“The man spoke of preparing the men for a journey; that those men taken by Talal would be sent to Acre, after being gathered in Talal’s warehouse.”
His eyes narrowed, as Alnesr felt once more the cold fury that had taken him when he had borne witness to the pitiful conditions of those under Naplouse’s ill-named care. “Well enough that Naplouse is dealt with; no more of those taken will suffer under him. Was there more?”
“He knew nothing more; not even the location of the warehouse he spoke of.” Altaïr’s expression became more pensive. “I suppose we will have to find that out on our own.”
He smiled softly. “Yes, that sounds right.”
“Let’s be about it, then,” Altaïr said, his tone as calm as it had ever been, but the expression on his face was one of subtle amusement.
“Shall we report to the Rafiq now?” he asked, turning a slight smile on the elder Assassin.
“Perhaps,” Altaïr said, clearly seeing the humor of what they were doing.
As the two of them made it back out into the main plaza at last, blending with the crowd as they had trained to do during the course of their training as members of the Brotherhood, Alnesr allowed his eyes to roam the thronging crowds. There were merchants attempting to make sales, scholars making their rounds, and even in the rich district of the city, some beggars still wandered the streets. It was one more city that they needed to liberate from the grasp of those who would abuse its citizens.
He and Altaïr separated for a short time, both of them seeking their own vantage points from which to relearn the layout of the city once more, in Altaïr’s case, or to see it for the first time in his own. Looking out over the city, spread beneath him, Alnesr allowed himself only a moment to take in the full scope of it. Then, he turned his attention back to the lay of the city.
Leaping from the peak of the tower that he had climbed, Alnesr landed easily within the pile of hay he had picked out. Rising, once he had determined that there was no one close enough to observe what he was doing, Alnesr moved back into the crowds, blending with them in the guise of a simple scholar once more. Keeping to his falsely-pious stance, Alnesr subtly scanned the milling citizens for a familiar presence.
Soon enough, he’d managed to find the elder Assassin once more.
Altaïr nodded subtly to him by way of greeting, and the two of them continued on their way into the city. Though he was not going to ask about such, he wondered if they would be waylaid by another one of Talal’s men. True, they would have a great deal more to report to the Rafiq of this city than they would otherwise have, but Master Mualim had ordered them to report to the Rafiq when they entered the city.
As the two of them proceeded further into the city, moving slowly and deliberately as all scholars did, Alnesr continued his efforts at covertly observing the citizens around them. The people here seemed to be rather happy – save for the beggars, but that was only to be expected – but as this was the rich district, that appeared only natural. Every city’s rich seemed to be pleased with their lot; it was the poor that sought to change the way the world worked. And, often the poor who were a source of recruits and informers for the Brotherhood.
It was as the Master and Altaïr had told him: they and the citizens were two parts of a whole, all working together for the cause of peace.
Altaïr gently nudged him, and Alnesr looked more closely at the two guards standing in front of the mosque. Clearly, Altaïr had a thought about what they might be able to learn in such a place, but just as clearly this was not a place to discus such a thing. When Altaïr began to subtly steer him away from the mosque’s entrance, Alnesr realized that, while the two of them were quite capable of passing as a scholar and his apprentice in the eyes of the milling crowds – whose gazes would simply pass over them – the guards at the door would be apt to study them more closely.
And a disguise that relied on the inattentiveness of those around them would not serve them at all when they were confronted by guards; Altaïr had the right of it again: they would not be able to do this on their own.
Passing once more through the milling crowds, Alnesr fell back into step with Altaïr as the two of them searched out a group of scholars that they could blend into for cover. He wasn’t quite certain how to feel about what they were doing, since on the one hand they were gathering useful information so that their report to this city’s Rafiq would be more complete, but on the other Master Mualim had ordered them to seek out the Rafiq when they entered the city. Not when they had enough information to consider it worth their while to make such a report.
Still, this was hardly a time for discussing such matters; he would make it a point to speak to Altaïr after this task, if it seemed that he was looking to make another excursion rather than making his way to the Bureau.
Following in Altaïr’s wake as the elder Assassin made his way through the milling crowds, Alnesr made a point of searching out a group of scholars that the two of them could join, even as he saw Altaïr doing the same. True, the elder Assassin had been the one to suggest such a thing, but as the two of them were working together, he would carry his own weight in this task. He could do no less, in this as in anything.
After Altaïr had provided aid to a scholar who had been confronted by the city’s guard, those who were tasked with guarding the citizens, they were able to take shelter from unfriendly eyes amid their ranks. The guards, at least, were meant to aid in the protection of those who could not defend themselves. However, what Alnesr had seen of them did not give him much cause for confidence.
Pulling his hood down slightly farther, enough so that he could further obscure his eyes without occluding his vision, Alnesr continued on. While it was true that he and Altaïr had both acted in the defense of the scholar who had then persuaded his fellows to conceal them from whoever might turn their gaze onto them, the fact remained that the color of his eyes was not looked upon with favor. Truly, he did not know if it ever would be.
Lowering his head slightly, both to appear more pious in the eyes of those who would inevitably be observing them, and to further obscure his eyes from scrutiny, Alnesr consciously matched his movements to those of the scholars around them. They had soon come back into sight of the mosque that Altaïr had wished for them to investigate.
As they and the scholars made their way inside at last, Alnesr scanned the inside of the mosque for somewhere where he and Altaïr would be able to safely observe the comings and goings of those within this place; a location where they could observe without being observed in turn.
Soon enough, they had found a suitable bench from which to observe the interior of the mosque and had both settled down upon it to observe the comings and goings of those inside.
“He’s a coward!” a heavyset man of just below average height shouted, breaking the relative silence within the mosque. “If it wasn’t for the money, I’d be long gone!”
“You are either stupid or blind,” the taller man, the one that he was speaking to, said calmly; though his tone carried an undercurrent of warning in addition to his words. “Perhaps it is both.”
“How can you say that?!”
“You didn’t see what happened.”
“I saw well enough!” the heavyset man exclaimed. “Our caravan was attacked, and the first thing he did was flee!”
“No, he did not run,” the taller man said firmly.
“What are you talking about?”
“Did you forget what became of the men who attacked us?”
“Felled by our archers, thanks be to God,” the heavyset man snapped.
“Not our archers, him,” the taller man said firmly. “Alone.”
“You’re saying he saved us?” the heavyset man demanded, clearly startled by what he had been hearing.
“Yes, he headed for higher ground, and used his bow to kill them.”
“I,” the heavyset man stammered, his gaze shifting uncertainly. “I had no idea.”
“The man’s a master archer,” the tall man said firmly. “You would do well to remember that.”
~AC1~
Catching Alnesr’s gaze, he nodded to the younger Assassin as the two of them rose from their seats and blended into the crowd of scholars. True, the Master had ordered them to report to the Rafiq in Jerusalem before they began their investigations, and it was also true that the Rafiq would most likely dispatch them to go on more such errands when they finally did report to him, but the simple fact was that he had seen an opportunity to gather information from Talal’s associates in this city.
Associates who they could have very easily lost in the crowds had they not taken the time to track these men; he would explain as much to the Rafiq when they met him, and he would take whatever rebuke he was offered for his conduct.
“Do you feel that he have enough information to at least make a preliminary report to the Rafiq?” Alnesr asked, after the two of them had cautiously made their way out of the mosque where they had overlooked the meeting between two of Talal’s associates.
He bit back a smile at the gently teasing tone of the younger Assassin’s voice; it seemed that his former Apprentice’s confidence was growing the longer the two of them spent outside of Masyaf. “Yes; I think we should have enough now. Best we make our way to the Bureau.”
Chapter 22: Meeting with Malik
Chapter Text
Alnesr nodded once, and the two of them made their way back into the crowds milling outside the mosque. The two of them both melted into the crowd, hearing the cries of shopkeepers telling of their wares, citizens haggling for a better price, and above them all the haranguing of the crowds by one of the many men who spoke out against the Crusaders. Altaïr, for his part, paid the man little mind as he searched for a vantagepoint from which to observe the lay of the city once more.
Once he had found such, leaving the corpse of a too-curious archer inside a shadowed alcove where he would not be discovered quickly, Altaïr leaped down into a nearby haystack once he had seen the last of the nearby citizens moving away from it.
Melting back into the crowds, he searched for Alnesr. However, the younger Assassin was the one to find him, this time; his former Apprentice’s pale yellow eyes were the feature that he came to notice first.
“It is good to see you again, Alnesr,” he said softly, once the momentary attention of the crowd had drifted away from them once more. “Would you tell me of what you saw?”
“Of course, Altaïr,” the younger Assassin said, subtly pulling his hood lower as the two of them continued on their way.
Speaking of the city, Altaïr smiled slightly as he heard Alnesr’s clear pleasure in being outside of Masyaf. It was not entirely seemly for an Assassin, but considering the younger Assassin’s appearance and the fact that he had been all but confined to the grounds of Masyaf and the village that the fortress overlooked by that selfsame thing, Altaïr felt that he could understand his former Apprentice’s feelings in this matter. Seeing the world with the eyes of one that had been forced to hide from that very thing for so long, particularly due to something that was entirely beyond one’s control… yes, Altaïr felt that he could fully understand such a feeling.
Having been reminded of the Bureau’s location, and taking a moment to allow Alnesr to regain his composure after that minor lapse – he would have rebuked another Assassin in the same situation, but Alnesr’s circumstances were as unique as the younger Assassin’s appearance and so at least some allowances had to be made – Altaïr signaled to him and the two of them made their way into a more sparsely populated area of the city.
After making certain that the eyes of the crowds were no longer upon them, Altaïr proceeded Alnesr up the side of the building and onto the rooftops. The two of them moved over the rooftops quickly and with surety, and soon enough they had come to the rooftop-entrance of the Assassin Bureau in Jerusalem. Leading Alnesr into the main area of the building where the two of them would take their repose while they stayed in the city, Altaïr stopped in his tracks when he laid eyes upon the Rafiq that he and Alnesr were to make their reports to.
He’d not expected to be made to confront the mistakes that he had made so early, but there was no way to avoid it at this point.
For the first time, Alnesr was the first one to speak, while Altaïr himself could say nothing. “Malik?”
“It’s good to see you again, at least,” Malik said, his smile clearly only for Alnesr’s sake.
“Your arm could not be saved?” Alnesr asked, his tone shaken by what he was seeing.
Malik reached out with his right arm, settling his remaining hand atop Alnesr’s left shoulder. “You’ve no reason to blame yourself for my condition.” The momentary coldness in Malik’s gaze was clearly meant for only him to see, but Alnesr’s swiftly-concealed wince clearly showed that he had seen it as well. “After all, you would not think to blame me for this?” he continued, gently tracing the no longer fresh but still plainly visible scar just above Alnesr’s right eyebrow. “Would you?”
“No, I suppose I would not,” Alnesr said, reaching up to touch his scar even as Malik had done.
“Now, what have you and your idiot Apprentice come to do?” Malik asked, the smile on his face gentle only up to the point when he turned it upon Altaïr himself.
“Altaïr is no longer apprenticed to me, Malik,” Alnesr said softly, the confidence that he had developed during the course of their hunt for the men that Master Mualim had set them out to kill nowhere in evidence.
Malik chuckled darkly. “So, he couldn’t even manage as an Apprentice, could he?”
“Malik, please,” Alnesr said, reaching out as if to touch Malik’s right shoulder, then hesitating and pulling his hand back. “The Master has ordered that we hunt down a man named Talal. Will you allow us leave to stay here while we search for the information we need?”
“You are perfectly welcome to have the run of this Bureau, Alnesr,” Malik said, aiming a smile of honeyed poison in his direction. “All I ask is that you make certain that your idiot Apprentice does not make a nuisance of himself.”
“Yes, Malik,” Alnesr said, his tone subdued; Altaïr was almost certain that he could guess the younger Assassin’s reasons for acting in such a way. “I thank you for your aid.”
“You are quite welcome to it, young Assassin. Go, take your rest now; you’ve clearly had a long journey.”
“Thank you for your consideration, brother,” Alnesr said, offering a shallow, respectful bow to Malik as the two of them turned to leave the main room of the Bureau.
Wrapping his right arm around Alnesr’s shoulders as the two of them made their way into the back room of the Bureau once more, Altaïr felt the younger Assassin leaning more heavily upon him. Not enough so that either of their movements were compromised, but enough that it became clear that he needed the support that only Altaïr himself could provide.
“I’d thought that the aid I had given him would have at least been enough to keep him from being wounded so gravely,” Alnesr said, his eyes downcast as the two of them continued over to the table where they would take their meal after having done so much work this day.
“I doubt that there was anything you could have done, faced with so many of Robert De Sable’s elite Templars,” he said, wanting to be reassuring but not knowing if he would be taken that way.
“I know,” Alnesr said, sighing as the two of them settled down at the table in front of them. “But, I have to admit that – until now – I still held out hope that Malik would not be permanently wounded by what had happened that day.”
“I know,” he sighed, looking back towards the front room of the Bureau. “I should not have been so arrogant at Solomon’s Temple; I fear you’ve both suffered for it.”
“I would not speak against you, Altaïr,” his former Apprentice said, his demeanor more meek than Altaïr had ever seen before.
“Only because I raised you,” he said, reaching out to softly raise Alnesr’s chin with his right hand.
Still, that was not entirely true; Alnesr had been as happy as any child, during the easier days that he had spent in training at Masyaf. He had learned through trial and error, and attended his lessons with diligence and good-humor both. However, on the day following their release from Masyaf’s dungeons, Altaïr had found Abbas with his hands wrapped tightly around Alnesr’s throat, clearly attempting to strangle the life out of him.
Something he would have succeeded in, if Altaïr himself had not acted so quickly in Alnesr’s defense. Abbas’ punishment had been to be whipped on his unclad back ten times, before the whole of Masyaf’s population of students and Novices, and after the Master had finished doling out his punishment, he had brought Abbas over to where he had stood with Alnesr at the back of the room. The Master’s command that Abbas was to apologize to Alnesr had been soundly ignored.
Even to this day, Altaïr could remember the way the younger Assassin had seemed to shrink inward on himself when Abbas spat at his feet.
Continuing to watch Alnesr as the younger Assassin took his meal, Altaïr recalled the Master’s response to Abbas’ continued disrespect: an open-handed blow that had knocked Abbas’ head to the side. The Master had taken it upon himself to apologize for Abbas’ deplorable conduct, but the damage had clearly been done. There were times, though admittedly not many of them, that he wondered what path their lives would have taken if Abbas’ father had not chosen to take his own life in Altaïr’s quarters that one, dark night.
However, such musings were best left for when he had the time to contemplate them.
Once he and Alnesr both had finished their respective meals, Altaïr followed the younger Assassin over to the pile of cushions. It was the same in every one of the Bureaus he had visited: the pile of cushions was always in the same place, and he was almost certain that the various piles were all the same size. Settling himself down to sleep, and feeling Alnesr curling up next to him, Altaïr closed his eyes and allowed himself to fully relax at last.
Chapter 23: Shared burdens
Chapter Text
The next morning, after he and Alnesr had broken their fast, Altaïr rose and lead Alnesr out of the rooftop entrance of the Bureau. The two of them stood for only a moment, observing the layout of the city beneath them, before he took the lead and Alnesr fell into step behind him. Crossing a narrow walkway between two buildings that stood across the street from each other, Altaïr turned to nod over his right shoulder at his fellow Assassin, and the two of them parted ways.
Making his way up the side of a rather large tower, he calmly scaled the side of it and perched atop the low wall just below the top, pausing for a few, long moments to observe the layout of the city below him. Knowing even as he did so that Alnesr was doing the same. Leaping lightly from the lip of the tower, he landed easily in a cart filled with hay.
Rising from his landing, once he had determined that there was no one close enough to see what he was about, Altaïr left the cart behind him and made his way through the thronging crowds to meet with Alnesr once more.
Passing a pair of guards harassing an innocent citizen, Altaïr decided to deal with them; Alnesr would keep, but his duties to the Brotherhood were not to be neglected. Dealing with the guards, leaving them both dying on the ground, he paused a moment to acknowledge the citizen as she thanked him for what he had done. Even as he did so, Altaïr couldn’t help but think of his former Apprentice; Alnesr would not have been able to do something like this.
His appearance would not be well-regarded by any of those who lived outside of Masyaf.
As he left the quarter of the city where he had encountered the citizen whose defense he had acted in, he saw Alnesr coming from yet another quarter. It was clear that the younger Assassin had been in battle, the blood near the hems of his sleeves and on the bottom of his robes told plainly of the conflict that he had just participated in.
Nodding to Alnesr as the younger Assassin fell into step with him, Altaïr took the lead in their search as the two of them continued deeper into the rich quarter of the city. Turning as he heard various voices speaking from within the crowd, Altaïr listened for those who would speak of what Talal was about in this city. The more information they could find about the man, the easier their task would become when they at last moved to deal with him.
The two of them continued on their way through the city, melting through the crowd as though the two of them were not even present; or, that was how it would seem to anyone who sought to observe them. Hearing the sounds of urgent discourse, Altaïr bade Alnesr to follow his lead. Stopping just outside of the alleyway where he could hear the voices of the two men holding their discussion, Altaïr turned to brace Alnesr.
The younger Assassin shifted slightly, as in the manner of one who had discovered an uncomfortable pebble in his shoe, and as Altaïr watched his former Apprentice’s performance, he was almost tempted to smile; there were few enough who would think to look for spying eyes or listening ears among a pair of scholars whose younger had merely stopped to relieve a bit of discomfort on his foot.
“If the guard won’t take action, it falls to us to do something,” one of the men that he had observed, a bald one with a neatly-trimmed beard, said to another.
“What you propose is madness!” the other man said, as Alnesr removed his boot at last, upending it and shaking the item so as to dislodge anything that might fall out.
“But necessary!” the first man insisted. “How many more will we allow to go missing, before the people take a stand?”
“It does not affect us!” the second man snapped; both of them turning to look around, and quickly glance over himself and Alnesr as the younger Assassin firmly slapped the bottom of his boot, a look of concentration on his face that would have easily fooled those who did not know him.
“Not yet, but if we continue to do nothing, it will.”
“And what do you propose?”
“I’ve watched the man,” the first of the planners said, the confidence of desperation in his tone. “Learned everything there is to know about his operation! It’s all here, on a map I’ve made.” As Alnesr carefully replaced his boot, Altaïr looked to the man in the pale brown robe; sure enough, he was reaching into his bag even as they spoke. “He inspects his stock, every day at the same time. This is when I’ll strike!”
“So, you have a piece of paper,” the other man, this one in a patterned, dark blue-green robe, said with derision. “It won’t save you when you’re discovered! Won’t shield you from their swords and arrows!”
“If all goes well, it won’t come to that,” the first man said; Altaïr winced at the uncomfortable reminder of his own previous arrogance. Truly, he may very well have been doing this man a favor, to take that dangerous burden from him; it was not for an unblooded citizen, to seek the work of an Assassin. “Anyway, it’s a risk I’ll have to take. Wish me luck, my friend.”
“Indeed,” the other man said, sounding if not convinced by his friend’s resolve, then at the least resigned to it. “You’ll need it.”
Their conversation ended, there was no more need for he and Alnesr to carry through with the deception that had shielded them from the eyes of those two men. Allowing Alnesr to regain his own balance, which the younger Assassin did with a skill and certainty that would have made any teacher proud, Altaïr signaled to him and the two of them melted into the crowd – sparse as it was in this area – in pursuit of the brown-robed man. Separating only enough so that they could both pass by on either side of him, Altaïr continued onward.
As they passed, just close enough to the man in gold-striped-brown robes so that he could not easily anticipate where the hand that relieved him had come from his left or right, Altaïr swiftly and with the skills granted to him by a lifetime of training, proceeded to do just that.
Merging with the denser crowds in the main thoroughfare, Altaïr assumed a more pious air and let the eyes of the citizens pass easily over him; after all, they had nothing to fear from a simple scholar. When he saw Alnesr falling into step with him, Altaïr smiled slightly. Truly, seeing how far his former Apprentice had come from the days of his childhood was indeed gratifying. He rather thought that the Master felt the same.
Still, now was not the time to indulge in idle reminiscence; there was still work to be done.
The two of them made their way into yet another quarter of the city; Altaïr led Alnesr to a convenient bench just as a pair of men – both of them seeming rather preoccupied by some matter or other – came into view. Settling down with the mien of one taking a much-anticipated rest, Altaïr turned his attention toward these two new men.
Chapter 24: Shadow of the slaver
Chapter Text
“Please, you must help me,” pleaded one of the men; bearded and wearing dulled yellow robes. “I’ll pay you anything you ask. Anything!”
“It’s not so simple, my friend,” countered the man he was speaking to; this one wore a dark blue surcoat over bright white pants.
“But it is! I know all his tricks. He’s a coward, not a fighter.” Altaïr thought that this was rather less than likely, given the tales that others had carried of Talal and his skill, but he was not truly inclined to speak out on matters that he was not being consulted upon; nonetheless, he and Alnesr would clearly be doing this new man a favor by relieving him of the information he doubtless carried. “He’ll run at the first sign of trouble. Take this map; it will show you where he likes to hide.”
“You don’t understand,” the other man said, his tone becoming flat and almost menacing.
“Oh, I understand,” the first man said, beginning to sound rather overly confidant. “You are afraid. You call yourself a warrior, but a single slave-trader fills you with fear.” There was now a plain undertone of derision in the first man’s voice; Altaïr was uncomfortably reminded of the man he’d once been.
The second man laughed, a rather harsh sound, Altaïr observed. “Fear? Nothing of the sort,” he snapped.
“Then what?”
“It would be bad business on my part, seeing as I already work for him.”
“You?”
“So,” the other man said, now sounding rather cruelly amused. “Now you understand? Go! Leave now, and I’ll forget we had this conversation.”
The first man fell to his knees, his confidence clearly shaken by finding an enemy in a man he had sought out for help had turned out to be merely one more of his enemies wearing a guise of false friendship. As the man made his way back through the indifferently milling crowds, Altaïr watched as Alnesr slipped neatly in close to the man in the faded, yellow robes, and swiftly relived him of the map that he was carrying.
“Do you think that the Informants would have anything of note? Or should we go back and make our report to Malik?” Alnesr muttered softly, head bent slightly toward his own, as the two of them resumed their pious, scholarly attitudes, and continued on their way.
“Perhaps,” he allowed, thinking back for a moment on the sometimes pleasant – and even profitable, at times – tasks that he had been asked to accomplish by the Assassin Informants that had been scattered about the various cities that the Assassins themselves hunted in. “It depends; would you say that you want to perform what tasks that they would ask of you?”
“Well, I do not know what tasks they would ask of me,” Alnesr said, his words halting for a moment as an expression of contemplation crossed his face. “So, I do not know the answer to such a question.”
As the two of them moved through the milling crowds, becoming one with them and yet still remaining separate at the same time, Altaïr observed the pensive expression that settled on the younger Assassin’s face. He himself was not particularly eager to go chasing after Informants, when they had already managed to gather so much information about Talal in other ways, but for this mission, he would give Alnesr the latitude to choose.
So long as the younger Assassin also understood that he would also be the one to carry out whatever tasks the Informant – or Informants, if Alnesr had not had his fill of them after merely one – asked of him.
When they passed the location where an Informant was posted, Altaïr saw Alnesr subtly cock his head in thought, but he made no mention of it and they passed on without a word. Altaïr would not have actively discouraged the younger Assassin from pursuing the knowledge that an Informant might have had, if that were truly what Alnesr had desired, but it appeared that such had merely been a passing thought after all.
The two of them made for the rooftops once more, once the eyes of the crowds were no longer upon them, and together they were easily able to deal with those guards and archers both that they encountered on their way.
Soon enough, they had returned to the Bureau’s rooftop entrance. Climbing back down inside, once Alnesr was far enough that he would not be at risk of stepping on the younger Assassin’s hands as he descended, Altaïr stepped down off of the ornamental fountain and onto the floor beneath. Allowing Alnesr to proceed him into the main office, since it was clear that Malik would be far more amenable to speaking with him than to Altaïr himself, Altaïr made his own way inside.
“Safety and peace, Malik,” the younger Assassin said, clearly working to master the uncertainty he still felt.
“On you as well, brother,” Malik said cordially, though his gaze chilled when it fell upon him when he walked in. Altaïr said nothing; this was no less than he deserved, after the pain his actions had caused. “Come, tell me of what you learned this day.”
“Our target traffics in human lives; kidnapping Jerusalem’s citizens and selling them into slavery. He operates out of a warehouse inside the barbican north of here. Even now, he is making preparations to transport his prisoners in a caravan to Acre. There, they would have been given over to Garnier de Naplouse,” an expression of disgust crossed Alnesr’s face, but was quickly repressed.
“The Master informed me that Naplouse was your first,” Malik said, smiling gently. “It was well done, from the account he gave.”
Alnesr seemed surprised at such recognition, but he recovered his composure swiftly. “If we move quickly, we should be able to strike while Talal is still making his inspections. Between the two of us, we should have a good chance of handling what forces he could bring to bear against us.”
“Very well, then,” Malik said, nodding in a pleased manner. “Your assessment of your skills sounds reasonable,” here, Malik turned an icily-mocking smile on him. “I will give you and your idiot Apprentice leave to deal with this canker, Alnesr.” Malik placed a clean, white feather atop the counter, and Alnesr took it with only a moment of hesitation. “Safety and peace be upon you, brother. And good hunting.”
“Thank you, Malik,” Alnesr said, bowing subtly. “Safety and peace be upon you, as well.”
The two of them left in silence after that, one-by-one making their way back out of the rooftop entrance. They stood there for only a moment, before swiftly beginning to make their way north.
~AC1~
He was not yet certain if he was fully prepared to take another life, so soon after Naplouse. Alnesr knew that such hesitation was unseemly, and he was not going to mention it to Altaïr, even though he knew that his former mentor would understand. Altaïr would not be disappointed in him for such a thing, but that did not actually change the fact that Alnesr was rather disappointed in himself.
Putting those thoughts aside, he turned his attention back to the task at hand. Descending from the rooftops and making their way into the milling crowds once more, he and Altaïr continued on their path northward, to the warehouse inside the barbican that Talal operated out of. There, either he or Altaïr would move to deal with the slaver so that he could not cause any more misery to the population of Jerusalem than he previously had.
He would be required to make his final decision then, whether he would take on the task of ending Talal’s life so soon after he had ended that of Naplouse, or if he would allow Altaïr to take the lead as he had done so many times in the past. Their journey to the barbican northward would provide Alnesr with the time that he needed to decide on such a matter, and Alnesr would not waste it.
As he and Altaïr drew nearer to their ultimate destination, the crowds that had served to conceal them began to diminish in size, and so he and Altaïr returned to the rooftops. Alnesr always felt a thrill – one that he quickly suppressed, as he and Altaïr were and had been on a mission from Al Mualim – whenever he made the ascent beside the man who had been his mentor, and still remained the only true father that he had ever known; unseemly as such a thing would have been to admit before any of the Brotherhood. Not only for the fact that he and Altaïr moved almost as one in there better moments, not only for the wider vantage such a high-point provided him with, but for the simple fact that the village that Masyaf fortress stood sentinel over did not have any buildings within it that matched the height of those in the other cities that he had traveled to at the side of his once mentor and the behest of Master Mualim.
Still, Alnesr knew that he would have need to continue laying such feelings aside; not only were they unseemly for an Assassin, they might very well serve to distract him from his mission.
As he and Altaïr continued on their way across the rooftops bordering the streets of Jerusalem’s north district, making their way to the warehouse within the barbican that Talal operated out of so that they could be done with him at last, Alnesr breathed deeply in an effort to bring himself back to the state that he had achieved when he had ended the life of Garnier de Naplouse, and hence freed the citizens of Acre from his cruel dominion. It had served him well before, and as his task would – potentially – involve the ending of yet another wasted life, it would clearly serve him just as well here and now.
Chapter 25: Talal
Chapter Text
They came at last upon Talal’s warehouse within the barbican, and as they entered, he noticed that even Altaïr himself seemed to be rather unsettled by the place where they now stood. True, this was not the most comfortable of places – very far from it, in fact – but Altaïr seemed rather more unsettled than he could account for even from that.
“Alnesr, have you noticed anything untoward about this place?”
“Is there something I should be noticing, Altaïr?” he asked, scanning what he could see of the interior of the warehouse in the enveloping gloom.
“You have not taken note of the absence of guards here? Even of acolytes?”
Altaïr voice carried no inflection, but the glance the elder Assassin gave him was subtly reproving, and Alnesr winced slightly. He was so concerned with what was inside this warehouse, he had neglected to take note of what was not. Before he could speak, the door behind them slammed shut and he heard the distinct sound of a bolt being thrown. Shaking his head as Altaïr cursed softly behind him, Alnesr drew his own blade even as the elder Assassin did the same.
The crept forward as one, and Alnesr felt his eyes slowly beginning to readjust to the newly-darkened gloom inside the warehouse. He had also begun to smell something that reminded him a great deal of livestock, but the scent was somehow more human than animal. Clenching his jaw, steadying himself for whatever it was that he might soon see, Alnesr followed Altaïr deeper into the warehouse.
The first things he saw were mundane, and rather simple things at that: crates and barrels, all of them presumably filled with provisions for the journey that Talal thought he was going to make. However, what caught his attention next was neither of those: it was a cage, one in which a wan, pitiful figure of a man. One who was even then turning to regard the two of them with plaintive, sunken eyes that watered freely as they approached.
The man in the cage began pleading for their help, but he was not the only one. There were others, some in shackles and some held beneath grates in the floor. And all of them, it seemed, had seen their salvation and were now calling out for it.
“Alnesr, do you still remember your training to break locks?”
“I do,” he said, knowing just what it was that Altaïr would ask of him next.
“Free these people, then. I will see to Talal, and ensure that you are kept safe while you work.”
“As you say, Altaïr,” he nodded, moving to the cage where the poor wretch inside it even now watched him with awe and gratitude. “Good hunting, brother.”
However, as he went to work on the lock before him, Alnesr could hear the voice of another. A voice from on high; a voice telling them that they should not have come to this place.
~AC1~
As Alnesr worked to free the prisoners that Talal had taken, Altaïr himself moved forward. It had been a novice’s mistake, that which had lead him to trap both himself and Alnesr inside Talal’s warehouse and behind a door that was now barred behind them, but he would personally see that neither of them paid for his own mistake with their lives. Not Alnesr, nor any of the prisoners that his former Apprentice sought to free; none of them would be allowed to die for his foolishness.
“But, you are not the kind to listen to such warnings,” said a man that he suspected all the more now was Talal. “Lest you compromise your Brotherhood.” Talal paused once more, and his tone seemed rather regretful when he continued. “A pity about the child; we could have saved him, if we had been given the chance. Though perhaps we still can; time will tell.”
Altaïr knew that Talal meant to goad him with such words; to make him lose himself in fury, and hence endanger more than merely his own life, and so he set them aside. He knew Alnesr’s skill well enough to know that the younger Assassin would be able to protect himself and those he now guarded from whatever it was that Talal might contrive in an attempt to harm him.
“Still, did you truly think that you and yours would escape my notice here, of all places?” Talal continued; Altaïr could not truly tell if he was disappointed or not by the lack of success that his goading was met with. “The two of you were known to me the moment you entered this city; such is my reach. And it is hard to mistake a boy with yellow eyes, little Assassin.”
This he had clearly directed at Alnesr, but whether his former Apprentice had truly taken note of such words he did not know; Alnesr continued with his work of freeing Talal’s prisoners and sending them as close as he could to safety as though Talal himself had not spoken at all.
“So, there are slaves here,” Altaïr said, trying his hand at a bit of goading himself. “But where are the slavers?”
“Behold my work, in all its glory,” Talal said, seeming to put aside Altaïr’s own words just as easily as Alnesr had put aside his.
More torches flared to life, and he could now see Alnesr’s good work all the more clearly; the younger Assassin darted between cages, grates, and shackled prisoners, and it took him the work of but a few moments to have them free once more. Some of them, those newly freed for the most part, would attempt to take their shelter behind him, but Alnesr would quickly wave them off and direct them to safer ground.
“What now, slaver?”
“Do not call me that,” Talal snapped. “I will allow that your boy has upset the system I had emplaced, and it will take some time to see it set to rights once more. I will even allow the fact that the child believes himself to be acting in good faith to these people; that is a good thing, for it means that my brothers and I will have a far easier time in saving him than I had at first thought.”
“You do these people no kindness, keeping them here as you have done,” he said, choosing once again to ignore the insinuations made towards Alnesr.
“Imprisoning them?” Talal scoffed. “I keep them safe. Preparing them for the journey that lies ahead.”
“The journey?” he scoffed in return. “You mean to say, the life of servitude you so generously gift them with after you have stolen their own lives?”
“You know nothing,” Talal snapped. “It becomes clear to me that only one Assassin shall find his life spared, this day.”
“It becomes clear to me, that the man I face is a coward,” he returned, raising his sword in more of a taunting gesture to the room at large, than to any one opponent that he might soon be facing. “Who can only hide in the shadows and strike with words.”
“You desire me to come into the light? So that you might see the man that brought you and the little one here to me?”
“Alnesr and I were not brought here by any machinations of yours, slaver. We came of our own will.”
“Truly?” Talal laughed in derision. “And, tell me: who unbarred the door that you walked through? Who cleared the path? Did either of you even once raise your blades against a single one of my men? No. All of this was done for you, not by you.” Something in the ceiling opened, spilling a circle of daylight onto the stone floor. “Now, Assassin: step into the light, and I will do you a final kindness.”
Altaïr knew that if Talal had truly desired his death at this time, the slaver had more than enough archers to ensure that even he would fall under such an onslaught. Even so, as he stepped forward and to the edges of the circle, the sight of Talal’s own men – masked and armed as they were – was slightly unsettling to him. Particularly now, since more than his own life was riding on the outcome of this battle.
The eyes of Talal’s masked men were like any of those who dealt in death; even Altaïr’s own found a reflection of himself in them.
There were six of them, and it seemed as though Alnesr’s assessment held true: with two of them, they would have had a good chance of defeating these ones.
“And now I stand before you,” Talal said cordially, spreading his hands as though he was a gracious host who had merely invited Altaïr into his home. “What is it that you would ask of me?”
“Only that you come down, so that we may settle this with honor,” he said, calmly raising his sword; he was not going to be taken in by simple tricks, not after he had already been so deceived before.
“Why must these matters always end in violence?” Talal wondered aloud, his tone now one of gentle-seeming disappointment. “It seems that I truly cannot help you, Assassin; since you refuse to help yourself. So be it; I cannot allow my work to be undone, and I cannot allow your intransigence to threaten my brothers. Men: kill the elder Assassin, but spare the boy and bind him.”
“Alnesr, stand ready!” he called, as Talal’s men divided into two groups, and one of them moved to attack him with raised swords.
He distantly heard, over the rush of battle in his ears, Alnesr calling back to him, but then Talal’s men were upon him and there was no more time for reflection on things like that. Wading into the midst of his attackers, his sword raised to deal more swiftly with them, Altaïr briefly recalled the lessons that Master Mualim had taught him. As he closed with his chosen opponent, wearing a smile that was little more than a baring of teeth and intent, Altaïr could only hope that Alnesr was doing the same.
There was no time for him to call out to the younger Assassin again, and Altaïr hoped that there was no cause for him to do such, either; he could only trust in Alnesr’s skill, as the younger Assassin so clearly trusted in Altaïr’s own.
~AC1~
Two more of the men attempting to attack him fell to Alnesr’s blade, and were swiftly set upon by those who had once been their prisoners. Those selfsame former prisoners held no mercy for those who had kept them in bondage, and even as he continued to deal with the men still attempting to bar his path, Alnesr could hear the sounds of the still-lucid guards being kicked and beaten by the crowd that surged at his back.
“Talal seeks to escape from this place!” one of the stronger men, who had naturally been at the forefront of the crowd, called out. “Assassin!”
His remaining opponent was swiftly pulled into the surging crowd, and Alnesr quickly lost sight of him “I thank you for your aid,” he called back “Go now; return to your homes and your lives. My brother and I will attend to the rest.”
Turning away as the crowd disbursed behind him, Alnesr turned quickly to follow the path that Altaïr had, likely as not, taken in his pursuit of Talal as the slaver had attempted to make his escape. Once he had gained the rooftop, Alnesr quickly spotted Altaïr, just before the elder Assassin leaped from the rooftop in pursuit of someone. It seemed that he had indeed found just where Talal was trying to escape from.
Dashing along the path that Altaïr had previously taken, he leaped down into the crowds just in time to see Talal brought low by Altaïr’s hidden blade. As the crowds parted, clearly not a one of them wished to risk becoming a party to the violence being carried out here; just as clearly, none of them fully understood an Assassin’s dedication to preserving innocent lives.
He could hear Altaïr speaking more clearly, now: “You’ve nowhere to run now. Share your secrets with me.”
“My part is played, Assassin,” Talal wheezed, the life clearly beginning to leave him in earnest. “The brotherhood is not so weak that my death will stop our work.”
“What brotherhood do you speak of, slaver?” he asked, looking down at the man who then looked back at him.
“Al Mualim is not the only one with designs upon the Holy Land, child. But that’s all you and yours will hear from me.”
“Then we are finished,” Altaïr said firmly, already moving as though to rise. “Beg forgiveness from your God.”
“There is no God, Assassin,” Talal laughed weakly, death coming all the swifter now. “And, even if there ever was, he’s long since abandoned us. Long since abandoned the men and women I took into my care.”
“Your care?” Alnesr barely forced himself not to snarl, even as Altaïr rose back to his feet beside him.
“Beggars; whores; addicts; lepers. Do any of those strike you as proper slaves, little Assassin? No, I took them not to sell, but to save.”
“Yes, I have seen the salvation you would offer them,” he snapped, not entirely able to keep the snarl from his voice when he did. “I have met the man that you would send those in your care to; I have seen his cruelty with my own eyes, and ended it with my own hands.”
Chapter 26: Another evil one slain
Chapter Text
He noticed that Altaïr had already stained the feather with Talal’s blood, and so the two of them moved off. The alarm had already been sounded, and as he and Altaïr gained the rooftops once again, Alnesr was already scanning for places where he and Altaïr would be able to conceal themselves long enough so that their hunters gave up the chase. So that they would not bring danger to Malik where he stayed, and in so doing compromise the Brotherhood.
Sheltering inside a rooftop garden until he could no longer hear the sounds of their pursuers, he looked to Altaïr, following the elder Assassin’s lead as the two of them left their temporary shelter. They made their way quickly, over the rooftops and back once more to the entrance of the Bureau that Malik oversaw. Following Altaïr back down into the interior courtyard, Alnesr allowed himself to breathe more easily once he had stepped down from the ornamental fountain.
As he and Altaïr made their way back into the Bureau’s main room, Alnesr watched the warm, welcoming smile on Malik’s face transform into something sharper and distinctly less pleasant as his gaze moved from him to Altaïr.
“So, how did you and your idiot Apprentice manage this latest task, brother?”
“The task is done, Malik,” Altaïr said, sounding rather more subdued than Alnesr had honestly been expecting when he handed over Master Mualim’s marker.
Malik said nothing in response to Altaïr’s words, and for a moment Alnesr wondered why that was; he wondered until he saw Malik’s gaze on him, and then he wondered that such a thing could be for his own sake. “I suppose the two of you had better stay here, until all of this furor dies down. You’ve done well, but Jerusalem will not be a safe place for you while those who were loyal to Talal remain in power.”
“Thank you for sheltering us, Malik,” he said, wanting for a moment to thank the elder Assassin for his discretion, but not knowing how to phrase such a thing so that it would not be taken in a way that he did not intend it.
“Go, rest,” Malik said, the warm smile on his face clearly meant for his eyes alone. “This unrest your actions have caused will take some time to pass; best you both leave quickly when it does.”
Nodding to Malik, trying not to allow the guilt he still felt clawing at his throat to overwhelm him, Alnesr made his way back out to the entrance of the Bureau. He could feel Altaïr’s right hand on his shoulder, and for a few moments Alnesr allowed himself to take comfort in that. After the two of them had settled down at the table, eating a last meal in Jerusalem before they departed for Masyaf once more, he found Altaïr studying him closely.
Truly, he was not the only one who grieved for the wound that Malik had suffered.
They finished their meal in silence, then moved over to the sleeping area to take what rest they could before they departed once more.
~AC1~
When he awakened once more, long enough before Alnesr did so that he could watch the younger Assassin’s yellow eyes open slowly, clearing as he awakened further. It had happened every time the two of them had slept side by side, ever since Alnesr was a child, and yet each time Altaïr would take note of it. In a very real way, Alnesr was his child; the closest thing he had had to a family, since his mother and father had both died.
The two of them had a light meal, and he waited in the other room while Alnesr bid farewell to Malik; he knew that the Rafiq had no desire to either see him or speak with him, and while he wondered if the other would ever have such a desire again, Altaïr knew that it was not for him to ask. He had wronged Malik gravely, and while he might try to make amends for such, it was Malik’s decision whether he received forgiveness for his foolish actions or not.
Still, after everything his foolishness had cost the new Rafiq, Altaïr doubted that he would be granted such; there were times he doubted that Alnesr would have done so, if the relationship between himself and the younger Assassin had been more distant.
Chapter 27: Long travel
Chapter Text
When the two of them departed through the rooftop entrance once more, and Altaïr felt the embrace of the wind again, it served to settle his mind in the way it had so often done in the past.
Altaïr savored that peace of mind, knowing that it would not last. Talal was indeed not the only one who had spoken of being joined as part of a brotherhood, and his mind would not be settled until he had gained more understanding of just what it was that he faced, and Altaïr knew that only Al Mualim – who had sent himself and Alnesr out in the first place – could provide him with the understanding he now sought. Though there would, doubtless, be a price to be paid for such understanding.
Knowledge always came at a price.
Blending with a group of scholars who were even then making their own way out of the city, he and Alnesr passed right under the gaze of the watchful guards outside the gates. Breaking away from the group of scholars once they had passed far enough from the walls that they would not be seen doing so, Altaïr breathed more easily as he lead Alnesr back to the stable where they had left their horses.
Once the two of them were mounted and had set off once more, Altaïr allowed himself to look back and observe Alnesr’s state. The younger Assassin seemed to be doing well enough, though seeing what had become of Malik still clearly troubled him. Still, there would be little that he himself could do to assuage such guilt, when he clearly bore it for himself. A far greater share than Alnesr, to be sure, since his former Apprentice had not been the one to strike out on his own in an attack on Robert De Sable when the man had had at his back a cadre of elite Templar soldiers.
No; he could not be the one to speak to Alnesr about such things, not with his own guilt gnawing at his mind.
When it came time for the two of them to rest for the first time, near a well that had been carefully shaded from the heat and light of the sun that would steal the water away, Altaïr offered to see to the horses, and Alnesr in turn offered to see to their sleeping area. The two of them having mutually decided what tasks they would take, Altaïr set about his own while listening to the sounds of Alnesr making his own preparations.
The two of them slept neatly beside one another, and Altaïr woke as he always did.
They made as swift a journey as could be expected, down the roads and up the paths that lay between Jerusalem and Masyaf, stopping to sleep when they needed to and eating on horseback as they traveled. On the last long day of their journey, before they would make the last push forward to Masyaf village, and from there to the fortress that guarded it, he and Alnesr settled down to rest beside a fountain that had been walled-in and roofed; much in the same way the well they had taken their first rest by had been.
And, Altaïr suspected, for much the same reasons as well.
~AC1~
When he was awakened from a dream that had been all too common for him – that of Abbas’ father Ahmad coming to him; a gleaming dagger clutched in his hand, a dagger that he would draw slowly across his throat, grinning all the while – Altaïr looked to Alnesr, still seeming to be in the grip of peaceful slumber. He wondered, for a long few moments, if Abbas lingered in Alnesr’s dreams. If the hands of Altaïr’s once-brother, clenched around Alnesr’s throat, drove his former Apprentice from sleep even to this day. However, if that was true, you could not have proved it by Altaïr.
Moving closer to Alnesr, so that he could feel the younger Assassin’s warmth, Altaïr closed his eyes and hoped to at least be able to rest until first light.
When he was awakened again, this time by the lack of a need for sleep rather than the nightmare of before, Altaïr waited long enough to watch Alnesr’s pale yellow eyes open and then clear from the sleepiness that had formerly clouded them, before he rose and then helped the younger Assassin back to his feet. The two of them mounted their horses after a quick meal taken from their respective saddlebags, and Altaïr was only slightly swifter than Alnesr in departing from the fountain where they had taken their last night of rest.
Riding down the last of the roads, Altaïr began at last to see the village that Masyaf fortress stood sentinel over rising in the distance. He allowed himself to breathe more freely. Yes, he would be confronting the Master about the information that he had withheld, and it was likely enough that the Master would not be particularly pleased with the confrontation, but this was his home. He had been raised in this place, he had raised Alnesr in this place, and above any other that he might stay, Masyaf was his home.
All other considerations aside, Altaïr was glad to be returning.
Dismounting from his horse and giving the beast over to the stable hands to be cared for, he paused as Alnesr did likewise. Allowing the younger Assassin to fall into step with him, Altaïr made his way up the path to the citadel of the Brotherhood once more. Alnesr seemed to be rather contemplative, himself, and so Altaïr did not try to speak with him.
He would not have wanted to be interrupted while deep in thought, either; and so he would return the same courtesy.
The guards at the gate, those who had once seemed rather disdainful of him during the previous days, now seemed to be regarding him with something approaching the level of respect that they had previously demonstrated toward him. Altaïr was rather pleased to note such a thing, though he resolved not to allow the opinions of those uninvolved in his work to sway his own opinions about himself. That way lay the road that he had traveled down before, and he would not travel down it again.
Making his way back into the fortress, Altaïr turned to see that Alnesr seemed to have finished considering whatever it was that had made him so thoughtful. Nodding to the younger Assassin, Altaïr lead the two of them deeper into the fortress, up through the levels and onto the one where Master Mualim kept his library. The Master was standing at his desk, clearly waiting for them, and he smiled softly when the two of them made their way up to him.
Chapter 28: Seeking truth
Chapter Text
“You’ve done well,” the Master said, nodding to both him and Alnesr. “Both of you. Three of the nine now lay dead, and for that you have my thanks. I am also pleased to see that your skill grows apace, Alnesr.”
“Thank you, Master,” Alnesr said, bowing to Al Mualim.
“Still, neither of you should think to rest on your laurels,” Master Mualim said, becoming sober and serious once more. “Your work has just begun.”
“We are yours to command, Master,” he said, even as Alnesr echoed the sentiment.
Al Mualim smiled again, and even gestured for them both to sit. “King Richard, emboldened by his victory at Acre, prepares to move south, toward Jerusalem. Salah Al’din is surely aware of this, and so he gathers his men before the broken citadel of Arsuf.”
Altaïr paused a moment, his thoughts cast back to the day that Salah Al’din and his Saracens had come to Masyaf under the banner of war… “Would you have me kill them both, then?” he asked; he would not deny that the thought of the Saracen leader being made to feel the bite of his blade was a pleasant one. “End their war, before it can begin in earnest?”
“No,” Al Mualim said firmly, almost snappishly. “To do so would scatter their forces; subjecting the land to the bloodlust of ten thousand aimless warriors.” Altaïr was forced to admit that he’d not considered such a thing; he felt transparent under the piercing gaze of the Master. “It will be many days before they meet, and while they march, they do not fight. You and Alnesr must concern yourselves with a more immediate threat: the men who pretend to govern in their absence.”
“Give us their names, Master; and we shall give you blood,” Altaïr said; his considerations of revenge would clearly have to be put aside for a time.
“And so I will,” Master Mualim said, after a short pause as his gaze took in himself and Alnesr both. “Abu’l Nuqoud, the wealthiest man in Damascus. Majd Addin, regent of Jerusalem. William de Montferrat, liege-lord of Acre.”
Altaïr had heard of those men before, but when he looked to Alnesr, he saw that the younger Assassin’s pale yellow eyes were bright with curiosity. “What are their crimes?” he asked, for the both of them.
The Master spread his hands as he explained. “Greed. Arrogance. The slaughter of innocents. Walk amongst the people of their cities, and I’ve no doubt that you will both learn well of their sins. Neither of you should doubt that these men are obstacles to the peace we seek.”
“Then they, too, will die, Master,” Alnesr said, before Altaïr himself could say anything.
~AC1~
“Well spoken, my child,” he said, though he hated the notion of what the boy was learning; still, he would take the time to cleanse Alnesr’s hands after he used the Apple to cleanse the child’s mind. “Take a day to rest here, and return to me as each man falls. Then, we might better come to understand their intentions.”
“As you say, Master,” Altaïr said, as he and Alnesr both rose and bade him farewell for the day.
He was tempted, for only a moment, to call Alnesr back to his side so that he could speak with the boy more personally. Still, he would have the time that he desired, to speak with the boy and draw his mind deeper into the Apple – to guide the child’s mind onto the correct path – while he and Altaïr took their rest. Leaving his study, Al Mualim made his way back to his personal quarters.
He had previously made arrangements to take his meals there, separating himself from these Assassins so that it would be all the more uncomplicated – not simple; the taking of lives should never be a simple thing – to do what he must, in the end. Still, the thought that he would be able to preserve the life of one of those whose lives would have otherwise been forfeit was indeed a comforting one to him. Whatever name he went by, he was not a one to relish killing.
Once he had finished his evening meal, Al Mualim rose from his table and made his way back to his study within the fortress. The day’s light had begun to fail at last, and as dusk faded from the world as well, Al Mualim turned his gaze to the night sentries as they took their places around the fortress, he continued to wait. His chance would be coming soon, to further explore the hold that the Apple maintained over Alnesr’s mind.
Truly, the boy would need a different name; something to further separate him from the life that he had lived as an Assassin, just as Al Mualim had set aside his own name when he had entered into the life of a mentor to these Assassins.
Once true night had fallen at last, Rashid waited for several moments longer – wanting to be truly certain that all of the Assassins within their fortress were well and truly asleep – before he made his way back to where he had placed the Apple atop his desk. Placing his own hand atop the softly-glowing Piece of Eden, Rashid focused his will on the thread that he had left between the Piece itself and the mind of Alnesr.
Soon enough, he saw the boy himself making his way into the study that Rashid had claimed for himself under the name of Al Mualim.
Making his way over to the boy, Rashid gently touched the right side of his face; Alnesr was so calm, so placid like this. It was clearly a much better state for the child than his previous one. Still, Rashid had not yet been given the time he needed to fully establish his hold over these Assassins; he would need to take up Al Mualim again for that task.
And, for the time being, he would need to allow the child to stain his hands with the blood of those who acted in defense of his former comrades. Those that he had once called brother would need to die, so that he could steer the world onto the correct path. And now, so that he could cleanse the blood from Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s hands.
Gathering himself, Rashid sent Alnesr back to bed, placed his right hand atop the Apple, and carefully set the child’s mind back to rights.
Chapter 29: On the hunt once more
Chapter Text
When he awakened the next morning, Alnesr felt that same sense of detachment from his body that he had been prey to the previous time that he and Altaïr had taken their rest at Masyaf. He’d not particularly missed the sensation, but there was little time to think on such things; he and Altaïr would be returning to their appointed task just as soon as they had finished breaking their fast.
Disrobing, Alnesr clad himself in yet another of the uniforms that had been hung out for him, then threw his sleeping clothes into the basket for the servants to collect.
Meeting up with Altaïr on the stairs leading down from his own room, Alnesr smiled at his former master as the two of them continued on their way down to the eating area. He did not wish to give the elder Assassin anything more to concern himself about, especially considering the fact that they were soon to leave for Acre once more, this time on the trail of William de Montferrat.
Once the two of them had finished their first meal of the day – as well as the only one they would be taking at the fortress itself – he and Altaïr made their way down to the ground level and back out into the neatly-laid stone of the courtyard. He followed just behind the elder Assassin as Altaïr made his way back to the stables, and finished climbing into the saddle just as Altaïr turned to look back at him.
Nodding, Alnesr gently kicked his own horse into motion and followed Altaïr down the trail and away from Masyaf.
They traveled for six days, by his count, and just as the sun had begun to truly rise into the sky on the seventh morning, he and Altaïr finally came within sight of Acre once more. Gently urging his horse into a more sedate pace, even as Altaïr did the same in front of him, Alnesr guided the creature down the winding trail and into the field just outside the gates of the city.
Following Altaïr to one of the small stables outside of the city, Alnesr dismounted from his horse and left the beast behind. Falling in closely behind Altaïr as the two of them moved closer to the gates of the city, Alnesr only had a few moments to wonder just how they were going to make their way into the city, before he saw that Altaïr was preparing to blend in among a group of scholars as they made their way slowly forward. Closing ranks with the elder Assassin, Alnesr once again assumed a pious attitude, matched his walking pace to that of the sedately moving scholars, and moved into Acre itself directly under the eyes of those who had been set to guard it.
He supposed that another might have found it rather amusing, walking into a guarded city under the eyes of those who were meant to guard such a place; still, an Assassin could not be swayed by such things.
Separating from the quartet of scholars once the two of them were comfortably away from the sight of any guards, he and Altaïr swiftly made their way into a quieter part of the city, and then up onto the rooftops. It was a great deal easier to travel in such a manner; away from the citizens who might have otherwise have gotten involved in their affairs, and out of the way of a great many of the city’s guard forces. Yes, archers could still be a source of trouble, but they were rare and easily dealt with.
As he and Altaïr made their way swiftly back to Acre’s Bureau, Alnesr found himself wondering for a moment what would become of this odd partnership that he and Altaïr shared. Most Assassins worked alone, save for those times that they had taken on an Apprentice, or joined together in pursuit of some larger goal. It was clear that the Master no longer considered Altaïr his apprentice, and it did not seem as though this hunt that they were currently on required the presence of two Assassins.
As the two of them descended into the Bureau, Alnesr stepping down from the ornamental fountain just as Altaïr himself stepped back from it, Alnesr allowed himself to breathe more easily.
Chapter 30: Acre again
Chapter Text
He could see that Alnesr seemed more comfortable, more settled within his own skin; Altaïr was pleased to note that. He did not know just how long Master Mualim would insist that the two of them continue working together as they had been, however he was determined to enjoy it while he could. Truly, it was a pleasing thing to see, that his teachings – those that he had learned at the knee of Master Mualim himself, in his turn – had been absorbed so well.
“Word has spread of your deeds, both of you,” Jabal greeted them, the expression on his face more surprised than Altaïr was particularly pleased with. “It seems that you are indeed sincere in your desire to redeem yourself, Altaïr.”
“I do what I can,” he said calmly.
“And sometimes you do it well,” Jabal allowed. “I presume it is work that reunites the three of us again?”
“Indeed,” Alnesr said. “William de Montferrat is the target that the Master has selected for us, this day.”
“Then the Chain District should be your destination,” Jabal said, pausing for a moment with a rather pensive expression on his face. “Still, you should both be on your guard; that section of the city is home to King Richard’s personal quarters, and is under heavy guard.”
“What can you tell us of the man himself?” he asked, folding his arms.
“William has been named regent while the king conducts his war. The people see it as a strange choice, given the history between King Richard and William’s son, Conrad. But I think Richard rather clever for it.”
“Why do you say that?” Alnesr asked, tilting his head in the rather birdlike manner he did when he was curious.
“Richard and Conrad do not see eye to eye on most matters,” Jabal said with a smile. “Though they are civil enough in public, there are whispers that each intends evil upon the other. And then there was that business with the city’s captured Saracens.” Jabal shook his head, after a wordless pause during which he seemed to search for something to say to that. “In its wake, Conrad has returned to Tyre, and Richard has compelled William to remain here as his guest.”
“His hostage, you mean,” he said, having guessed Richard’s true purpose for such an action; it was indeed a wise one, he could see.
“Whatever you call it, William’s presence here should dissuade Conrad from acting out.”
“Where would you suggest that we begin our search, Jabal?” Alnesr asked, a thoughtfully curious expression on his face.
“At Richard’s citadel, southwest of here,” Jabal said, after a pause for thought. “Or rather, the market in front of it. You’ll find the Cathedral of the Holy Cross in that direction, as well. It’s a popular place, and should be filled with talkative citizens. Finally, try the border to the west, where the Chain and Hospitalier Districts meet. That should start you on your way.”
“Very well,” Altaïr said, nodding at the information that he had just been given. “We won’t trouble you for anything else.”
“It’s no trouble,” Jabal said, smiling kindly at the two of them for a moment before returning to cooing softly at his birds.
Turning, he caught Alnesr’s eye and the two of them made their way out into the entrance-room of Acre’s Bureau. Climbing up onto the ornamental fountain, Altaïr quickly scaled the wall, pausing once he stood atop the roof and waiting for Alnesr to reach him. When the younger Assassin stood next to him, Altaïr nodded and the two of them left to make their way southwest, toward the place where Richard’s citadel could be found.
And also the marketplace that Jabal had suggested would be such a fine source of information for them.
Descending back into the streets, in the shadowed corner of an ally out of sight of the milling crowds, Altaïr saw Alnesr shadowing him and smiled slightly. True, he did not know just how long their partnership would last beyond this mission, but it was a pleasant thing to observe the growth of Alnesr’s skill. A pleasant thing, to see his teachings put to such good use.
Chapter 31: Investigations
Chapter Text
Making their way out of the city’s middle district, with its market stalls and neatly-dressed citizens, they came into the rich district. Naturally, the place was in better repair than the middle district – to say nothing of the sorry state of the poor district; in any city, not merely Acre – and the citizens more finely dressed. However, a discussion between a knight and a figure in a brown cloak quickly drew Altaïr’s attention.
“Perhaps it was unwise to embrace William, he is old and thinks too much of himself,” the man in the brown cloak – a friar, Altaïr realized quickly – whose own voice creaked with age, said.
“His army is the largest,” the knight said, his voice younger and more confidant, said. “We’ll have need of them. For now, I’ll go and visit with the other Brothers. Make sure they have everything they’ll need.”
“Aye, they must not fall,” the friar agreed swiftly.
“Fear not,” the knight said calmly. “The Master has a plan. Even now, he prepares a way to turn our losses to hid advantage, should it come to that.”
Master? He pondered. Brothers? Could even these people be linked in some way? It was an unsettling thought, that; that there may yet have been more things that he was not aware of.
“What does he intend?” the friar asked.
“The less you know, the better,” the knight said firmly. “Just do as you’ve been instructed: deliver this letter to our Master.”
The knight smoothly passed the letter that they had spoken of to the friar, and Altaïr flexed his fingers slightly, a small smile curving his lips. He and Alnesr had both settled themselves down on a bench, as though they were merely resting from their walk through the districts of Acre. Rising, nodding subtly to Alnesr to let the younger Assassin know that he would be handling this on his own.
Walking up behind the friar, his mien on of a person merely wanting to take in more of the city’s rich district, Altaïr quickly lifted the letter from the folds of the friar’s cloak. Moving away from the place where he had made the lift, Altaïr saw that Alnesr was moving to close with him. Leading the younger Assassin into a nearby alleyway, he quickly unrolled the scroll and arranged himself so that he and Alnesr would both be able to read it:
Master: work continues in the Chain District of Acre, though we are concerned about William’s ability to see this through to the end. He takes his duties a bit too seriously, and the people may reject him when the time comes. Without the aid of the Treasure, we can ill-afford an uprising, lest it recall the King from the field. And then your plan will be for nothing.
We cannot reclaim what has been stolen unless the two sides are united. Perhaps you might prepare another to take his place – simply as a precaution. We worry that our man in the harbor will become increasingly unstable; already he speaks of distancing himself. And this means that we cannot rely on him should William fall. Let us know what you intend, that we might execute it.
We remain ever faithful to the cause.
Altaïr swiftly folded the letter once he had finished reading it, considering for a long moment the merits of showing it to the Master once he and Alnesr returned to Masyaf once more. Still, it was becoming ever more plain that there were things that Master Mualim had not spoken of with either him or Alnesr. After a few moments longer spent in contemplation, Altaïr decided that he would speak of his conclusions to the Master in more detail once he and Alnesr had returned to Masyaf.
However, for the moment there were other things that needed attending to; William de Montferrat was to fall – by either his blade or Alnesr’s – and to make that possible they would both need all of the information that they could gather on the man.
Moving back out into the more populated streets, so that they could lose themselves within the milling crowds once more, Altaïr was careful to keep his gaze sharp for anything else that might serve them in their investigation of Montferrat. He saw Alnesr’s head turn in that direction, just as he himself began to hear the sounds of a struggle. After only a moment of hesitation, Alnesr was moving through the crowds with the
stealth and swiftness that Altaïr had worked to train into him.
Trusting that Alnesr would be well, though he would speak to the younger Assassin if he seemed unsettled when he returned, Altaïr turned his own attention back to the search. Moving carefully through the crowds, always making certain not to attract undue attention, Altaïr caught the telltale sounds of yet another citizen in distress. Moving quickly but subtly out of the sight of the crowd, Altaïr sought out the citizen and quickly dealt with those who had been accosting him. As it happened, it was another of the scholars who had so often provided at least a reasonable amount of aid to the Brotherhood in the past; and clearly would continue to do so in the future.
“Thank you, young man,” the old graybeard whose defense he had just come to said. “You’ve done me a great kindness, and I will see to it that such is returned.”
“Of course,” he said, nodding respectfully as the old man turned and left.
Moving back in among the crowd, Altaïr matched their pace as he saw Alnesr turning to subtly scan the faces of the people milling around him. When the two of them had fallen into step once more, Altaïr began to hear the beginnings of another conversation; this one being held between another young man and an elder, but neither of them seemed to be knights this time.
“What news?” asked the younger.
“Grim; I finished my scout, a direct assault won’t work.”
“What’s the trouble?”
“Archers!” the old man said. “He’s got them all over the fortress. And no easy way to reach them; they’d pick us off before we’d made it ten feet inside.”
Altaïr narrowed his eyes, having ducked into the mouth of a disused ally when he had first heard the two men beginning to speak; it seemed as though they would be facing men such as Talal’s once more. It would be troublesome, yes, but with the help Alnesr could provide Altaïr thought it would at least prove more manageable for the two of them than it would for these two men. Both of whom seemed to be laborers of some kind or other.
“You’ve kept a record, yes?” the younger asked.
“Aye; I’ve marked their positions on a map.” Altaïr allowed a brief smile to flicker across his face.
“Bring it to the others,” the younger suggested. “No doubt they’ll have a use for it.”
“Very well,” the elder said, with a short, sharp nod. “I’ll go at once.”
“Stay strong, brother,” the younger man said.
“Yes, and you,” the elder said, returning the brief embrace that the younger gave him.
Motioning for Alnesr to stay where he was, Altaïr carefully followed the old man, shadowing his steps until he was able to close with the man and take the map that he had so carefully prepared. Such tasks were not suited for those who seemed, at best, to be nothing more than laborers who had some skill in moving unnoticed and observing their surroundings. Altaïr could only hope, however briefly, that these two and however many supported them in their endeavors would not do anything foolish in light of the reprieve they had been unknowingly granted.
Rejoining Alnesr, the two of them made their way back into the crowds, so that they could lose themselves and any followers they may have inadvertently gained during their excursion. Once he was satisfied that they were out of sight of anyone who might have thought to follow them, after they had briefly blended with a group of scholars on their way to some unknown destination, Altaïr turned his attention back to their appointed task.
True, they could have gone back to Jabal with the information they had gathered at present, but Altaïr was not about to leave a task half-completed if he did not have to; he did not know if another might have considered such a thing excessively prideful, but Altaïr was determined to hold to his chosen course of action nonetheless.
Listening for any other conversations happening in the area, those that would lead to more information on the standing of William de Montferrat in the city he had been said to rule. However, it seemed as though Montferrat was not well-regarded at all; all of those whose conversations he had stopped to overhear had all seemed to be plotting against Montferrat in some manner or other. Truly, he and Alnesr would be doing a great service to the people of Acre by removing Montferrat from his seat of power.
More words, seditious words, caught Altaïr’s ear then:
“William de Montferrat cares nothing for the people of Acre,” the man speaking in the square said, he signaled to Alnesr and the two of them carefully moved out of his sight to observe him. “While we sit and starve, the men inside his keep want for nothing! They grow fat upon the fruits of our labor! He brought us here to rebuild, he said. But now, far from home and the grace of our king, his true plan becomes apparent! He steals our sons, sending them into battle against a savage enemy! Their deaths are all but guaranteed! Our daughters are taken to service his soldiers, robbed of their virtue! And he compensates us with lies and empty promises! Of a better tomorrow; of a land blessed by God. What of now? What of today? How much longer must we go without? Is this truly the work of God, or of a selfish man who seeks to conquer all? Rise up, people of Acre! Join us in our protest!”
Altaïr continued to observe the man, even as others who lived in the city disparaged the work that he was clearly trying to do; it seemed as though no one was willing to risk rousing William’s wrath. His holds upon the citizens were clearly too tight, too many, and too varied.
“How many have you called to our cause?” asked the man he was meeting.
“I fear they are too afraid,” the man said, shaking his head. “None would heed the call.”
“We must keep trying,” the second man said; Altaïr could respect his tenacity, misplaced though it would ultimately prove to be. “Find another market; another square. We must not be silenced!”
When the two of them departed once more, Altaïr turned to Alnesr and found that the younger Assassin was watching the space where the man had gone with a wistful expression on his face.
“Alnesr,” he called softly, drawing the younger Assassin’s attention.
“It seems as though we will, indeed, be doing these people a service by removing Montferrat from their city,” the younger Assassin said thoughtfully, turning to face Altaïr after only a few moments.
Nodding with a slight smile, Altaïr turned to make his way back toward the Bureau; they had done enough for this day. The information that they had both gathered would serve them well in their appointed task. When they had made their way back up to the rooftops, Altaïr began to notice that Alnesr was watching him more closely, as though the younger Assassin had something to say. Turning slightly, after he’d dealt with the archer atop this particular rooftop, Altaïr nodded to show that he was listening.
“One of the informants that I met said that he attempted to strike a bargain with the guards within Montferrat’s citadel,” the younger Assassin informed him. “His intent was to have them leave the gates open even after the alarms were sounded. It seems that he failed.”
He hummed in thought. “I suppose that even some of our enemies may be bound by loyalty, even as we are. I do appreciate the gesture, but I have confidence in both our abilities.” He smiled slightly. “On that particular subject, I expect that you will be competing with me for the task of taking William’s life.”
“Indeed?” Alnesr tilted his head slightly, offering a small smile of his own. “Well then, I suppose I cannot refuse such a challenge.”
He chuckled softly at Alnesr’s enthusiasm; truly, even considering his advanced rank, anyone who knew the two of them would recognize Alnesr as his student.
The two of them had soon subsided into silence once more, and as Altaïr continued to lead Alnesr across the rooftops, he found himself honestly anticipating the work that he and Alnesr were soon to take part in. William clearly had no concept of how to properly administrate his city; the people of this city were suffering under him, and those who would otherwise speak against him were clearly terrified of such.
It was not a situation that could be allowed to continue, and so he and Alnesr would see to it that it did not.
Chapter 32: Lord of Acre
Chapter Text
Continuing across the rooftops, only pausing long enough to dispatch the archers that had the misfortune to stand between them and their destination, he and Alnesr had soon found their way back to the Bureau, and Jabal with it. Descending into the sleeping and eating area of the Bureau, he proceeded Alnesr into the main room to meet with Jabal. As ever, Acre’s Rafiq was in a jovial mood.
“We’ve done as asked,” Altaïr said, the tired satisfaction of a task well done coming over him once more.
“Indeed,” Alnesr said respectfully, taking up the narrative. “We have armed ourselves with knowledge, and now know what must be done to kill Montferrat.”
“Speak, then,” Jabal said, smiling gently for Alnesr. “And I will judge your efforts.”
“William’s host is large, and many men call him master,” Altaïr said, as Alnesr fell respectfully silent once again. He would have to work on the younger Assassin’s confidence, clearly. “But he is not without enemies. He and King Richard do not see eye to eye.”
“It is true,” Jabal agreed, nodding. “The two have never been close.”
“This will work to our advantage,” he said. “Richard’s visit has upset him. Once the king has left, William will retreat into his fortress to brood. He’ll be distracted then, and that is when Alnesr and I will strike.”
“You are certain of success?”
“As certain as I can be,” he allowed. “And if circumstances change, we will adapt to them.”
“That is good to hear,” Jabal said, nodding in satisfaction. “You have my permission to go. End the life of Montferrat, that we may call this city free.”
“We will return once the deed is done,” he said, taking the feather as it was handed to him with a respectful nod to Jabal.
Turning to make his way back out of the main room of the Bureau, Altaïr turned to watch as Alnesr quickly fell into step with him once more. He would speak to the younger Assassin once the two of them had made it back out onto the roof of the building; he’d no desire to bring up matters that should stay between the two of them before Jabal. Truly, they would merely serve to distract the Rafiq from his own concerns.
Climbing back up onto the ornamental fountain, and from there onto the roof, Altaïr turned his attention to Alnesr just as it seemed the younger Assassin was readying himself to set off.
“Wait a moment, Alnesr,” he said, turning to the younger Assassin before he could have even taken his first step.
“What do you wish to speak with me about, Altaïr?” the younger Assassin’s yellow eyes were intent upon him.
“Why did you fall silent when we were making our report to Jabal?” he asked, facing the younger Assassin intently.
“It seemed somewhat needless, to me, for the two of us to speak when we had both gathered the same information,” Alnesr said, the expression on his face a mix of calmness and curiosity.
He paused a moment; truly, he’d not been expecting something of that nature when he’d called for Alnesr’s attention. “Indeed?”
“Yes,” the younger Assassin nodded briefly.
“I suppose that makes sense,” he allowed, somewhat surprised that he had misjudged the younger Assassin after knowing him for so long, but also rather pleased that Alnesr seemed to have gained the confidence that he had been attempting to instill.
Chapter 33: William de Montferrat
Chapter Text
Allowing the younger Assassin to proceed him across the rooftops as the two of them made their way back into the district where William de Montferrat kept his citadel, Altaïr followed at just enough of a distance that neither of them would be in any danger of tripping the other up. He was pleased, once again, to note the smooth and economical motions of his former Apprentice displayed as he ran; truly, his teachings had taken well.
Banishing those thoughts from his mind after only a moment spent examining them, Altaïr turned his full attention to the journey that he and Alnesr were making. They moved with speed and grace over the rooftops, only pausing momentarily when they were forced to deal with an archer who might bar their path. Soon enough, they came within sight of the citadel that William de Montferrat maintained; now, all that remained was for them to find a path inside.
However, even as he searched for just such a way, one that would not see them discovered by Montferrat and his troops, Altaïr caught a glimpse of King Richard himself making his way up to the citadel. Signaling Alnesr to wait, since it would not be possible for them to enter unseen when there was such a large crowd gathered outside the citadel, he watched as Alnesr crouched down beside him, and then turned his attention to the exchange between William and the man he purported to serve.
Relations between the two were rather frigid, as they had previously been informed, and Altaïr found that he could not quite help the thought that Richard – of all people – would not particularly mourn the death of Montferrat, whatever he might say on the matter.
Once the king had left the citadel far behind, Altaïr watched as Montferrat spoke with one of his guards and briefly wondered what the man had said. Then, dismissing that thought from his mind since it was not of any particular importance under circumstances such as these, Altaïr signaled Alnesr to follow him, and the two of them carefully made their way into the citadel that William de Montferrat maintained. He’d not forgotten the challenge that had been made between himself and Alnesr, but in their present circumstances it was of far more importance that they were able to infiltrate the citadel.
They could compete for the man’s life once they were certain that their own were not at so much risk as they otherwise would be.
There were indeed archers within the citadel, and he turned to nod at Alnesr even as he found the younger Assassin turning to him in that same fashion. They nodded to each other, and swiftly parted to deal with the archers. For a few moments, as he dealt with those in the half of the citadel that he had taken on for himself, Altaïr was briefly tempted to check on Alnesr’s progress. But no; he’d trained the younger Assassin since Alnesr’s childhood, now he would have to trust that his lessons had been absorbed.
He would learn to do such; even if he had to force himself as he was doing now.
Moving quickly and silently, in the times when one of the archers would turn away from the interior of the courtyard to look outward for a time, Altaïr killed his targets with his own set of throwing knives during those times when he was certain that they would not fall into the courtyard and cause a commotion. Finding his thoughts beginning to turn back to Alnesr, he forced himself to concentrate on what Montferrat was saying.
There was little chance of it being particularly important, but it would serve to distract his thoughts, and that was what he most needed at this moment. Clearly, Montferrat was rather displeased with the carelessness that he and Alnesr had taken advantage of to enter the citadel proper.
“Men, gather round; heed well what I have to say.” The men that he had called to him all came as he had asked. “I come from speaking with the king, and the news is grim. We stand accused of failing in our duties. He does not recognize the value of our contributions to the cause.”
“For shame,” one of Montferrat’s men said, shaking his head.
“He knows nothing,” spat another.
“Peace. Peace. Hold your tongues,” Montferrat admonished. “Aye, he speaks falsely, but his words are not without some merit. When touring these grounds, it is easy to find fault. To see imperfection; I fear we have grown slack and lazy.”
Altaïr allowed himself a small smile; he and Alnesr could well attest to the indolence of the men Montferrat claimed to have trained.
“Why do you say this?”
All of the men in the courtyard bristled at those words, and Altaïr looked up to see that Alnesr had done just as he was doing: using the distraction so kindly provided to move stealthily along the walls of the courtyard. Looking back down, Altaïr found that he was in position to see what a good number of Montferrat’s men seemed too preoccupied to take note of: from a door at the opposite end of the courtyard, more guards had appeared.
However, these ones were dragging two men between them; men who wore Crusader livery, but were prisoners at this moment.
“I see the way you train,” Montferrat shouted, his scorn now turned fully upon those Crusaders that he had had taken prisoner. “You lack conviction and focus; you gossip and gamble. Tasks appointed to you are left unfulfilled or poorly performed. This ends today! I will not suffer further degradation from your actions! Whether or not you see it – and you should – this is your fault! You’ve brought shame upon us all. Skill and dedication are what won us Acre. And they will be required to keep it, as well! I have been too lenient, it seems; but no more. You will all train harder and more often. If this means missing meals, missing sleep; so be it. And, should you continue to fail at your tasks, you will learn the true meaning of discipline,” Montferrat once more swept the masses with his gaze once more, before focusing on the two prisoners he had had brought before him. “Bring them forward.”
Moving carefully, Altaïr soon found himself near enough to see Montferrat’s balding head more clearly, as well as the spittle that flew from his lips as he continued to berate his men. There was now the chance that he and Alnesr both could be spotted if any of the men below them were to look up for one reason or another, but discovery was always a risk that any Assassin took during their missions. However, here and now Montferrat’s men seemed to be far more concerned with what the man himself might have had in mind for them.
“If I must make examples out of some of you to ensure obedience, then so be it,” Montferrat announced, then turned his attention to the pair of captives that he had ordered taken. “The two of you stand accused of whoring and drinking while on duty. What say you to these charges?”
Over the muttering of the crowd, Altaïr found that he could just make out the mumbled pleas of Montferrat’s captives. He briefly wondered what they would have said if they were being tried honestly, rather than simply singled out so that a tyrant might once more prove his power over those he held in thrall. With only a scowl and a wave of his hand, Montferrat ordered their executions. Their throats swiftly cut, the two Crusaders spent their last moments of life staring at their own blood as it pooled around their heads on the flagstones.
“Disregard for duty is infectious,” Montferrat said, sounding almost regretful as he continued watching the men in their death throes. “It must be rooted out and destroyed. In this way, we might further prevent its spread. Am I understood?” the men muttered assent, and Montferrat nodded. “Good, good. Return to your duties, then; filled with a renewed sense of purpose. Stay strong, stay focused, and we will triumph. Falter, however, and you will join these men. Be sure of it. Dismissed.”
Montferrat waved them off, and as the men dispersed, Altaïr breathed more deeply than he had been allowing himself to do for some time. Now, it would be far simpler for either himself or Alnesr to descend from above and thus to finally rid Acre of the evil that Montferrat spread from his seat here. Montferrat’s attention was presently absorbed with the paperwork that he had spread out on the table before him, something that Altaïr also found himself grateful for.
If only in a distant sort of way, as most of his attention was currently focused in moving silently across the rooftop where he and Alnesr had concealed themselves.
His gaze fixed downward, Altaïr saw Montferrat turn in displeasure, still shuffling through his various papers in an effort to find whatever it was that he sought. A groan of annoyance was carried up to where he and Alnesr continued their own separate ways across the rooftop, as Montferrat spilled a stack of papers from the table in his haste. There was a brief moment when it seemed as though the man would summon assistance from those who served him, and Altaïr tensed for a few, long moments.
But then Montferrat seemed to reconsider such a thing, and Altaïr allowed himself to relax once more; even if only slightly.
As Altaïr leaped from the rooftop, Alnesr beside him, he saw Montferrat look up suddenly. It was possible that he had heard the soft snap-click of either his or Alnesr’s hidden blades being engaged, or seen shadows moving above him before they descended. But whatever the reason for his discovery, it was still far too late to save Montferrat from his ultimate fate.
He came down on the Crusader’s right side, Alnesr on his left, and as one they two imbedded their hidden blades in Montferrat’s flesh: he in the man’s neck, and Alnesr in nearly the same area from his own side.
A flash of good-humor from those pale yellow eyes was all he saw, before Alnesr turned his attention outward; guarding them both from being taken unawares by Montferrat’s remaining Crusader soldiers. Altaïr knew that the two of them would only have a limited time to remain here, with so many Crusaders in the same place, but he was grateful for Alnesr’s dedication all the same.
It seemed as though neither of them had quite won their small competition, however.
“Rest now,” he said, soft and quiet so that only the man dying in his arms would be able to hear him. “Your schemes are at an end.”
“What do you know of my work?” Montferrat demanded hoarsely, blood streaming from his mouth.
“I know that you planned to murder Richard; and to claim Acre for your son, Conrad,” he replied calmly, withdrawing his hand.
Montferrat seemed amused by this, for some reason. “For Conrad? My son is an arse; unfit to lead his host, let alone a kingdom. And Richard? He’s no better; blinded as he is by his faith in the insubstantial. Acre does not belong to either of them.”
“Then who?” he asked, wondering what answer Montferrat, of all men, would give to him.
“The city belongs to its people.”
Again, a confusing sentiment from one of the men whose lives he had been sent to take, but by this time Altaïr had almost come to expect such; these tasks that the Master assigned to him were clearly not so simple as he had made them sound. “How can you claim to speak for the citizens? You stole their food; disciplined them without mercy. And even forced them into service under you.”
“Everything I did, I did to prepare them for the New World,” Montferrat said, in the tone of a man who had no regrets. “Stole their food? No; I took possession so that when the lean times came, it might be rationed properly. Look around: my district is without crime, save those committed by you and your ilk. And as for conscription? They were not being trained to fight. They were being taught the merits of order and discipline. These things are hardly evil.”
“No matter how noble you believe your intentions to be, your acts were cruel and could not be allowed to continue,” Altaïr said; he knew that every man would have a justification in his own mind when they were confronted about their actions, but the one that Montferrat was giving him sounded distinctly familiar.
He’d heard words just like this before.
“We’ll see how sweet they are, the fruits of your labors,” Montferrat hissed, the light finally beginning to fade from his eyes in earnest. “You and yours do not free the cities as you believe, but damn them. And in the end, you’ll have only yourselves to blame. You who speak of good intentions…”
If Montferrat had intended to say anything else, however, no one living would hear it. “In death, we are all made equals,” he intoned, staining the feather he carried with Montferrat’s blood. “Alnesr, come.”
The younger Assassin followed him swiftly, a white shadow in the near-deserted citadel, as Altaïr lead the two of them quickly away. They gained the rooftops once more, a safer prospect now that the archers had been dealt with, and only paused for a moment to catch their respective breath once they had covered enough ground not to be spotted by any guards who might have even then been sounding an alarm.
As if in response to such thoughts, the bells of the city began tolling loudly, and so Altaïr swiftly lead Alnesr into a well-screened rooftop garden. It would serve to conceal them from the guards and Crusaders who would be coming out of the citadel in force, now, to avenge the death of Montferrat. Though some of those hunting might have held little love for the man, Altaïr was not willing to trust his own life or Alnesr’s to such sentiments.
Chapter 34: Departure with news
Chapter Text
Watching as a group of Crusader soldiers passed out of sight of their hiding place, Altaïr lightly touched Alnesr’s right shoulder, and then lead the younger Assassin back out onto the rooftops. The bells were still tolling, so he knew that the two of them would need to be particularly cautious in order to avoid being spotted by any of Montferrat’s men; Crusader and guard alike.
They were only forced to take shelter once more, this time in a pile of hay upon the ground, before returning to the rooftops to continue on their way back to the Bureau.
Once the two of them stood atop the Bureau’s own rooftop, Altaïr followed Alnesr back down into the building and allowed himself to breathe more freely once he stood at ease within the second room. Proceeding Alnesr into the main room, Altaïr saw Jabal look up in welcome.
“What news?” the Rafiq asked.
“William de Montferrat is dead,” he reported. “And with him, his plans for betrayal.”
“You’ve done well, keeping Acre from his hands,” Jabal said, approval clear in his tone.
Yet, Altaïr still found himself rather curious. “But why now? When the Crusaders require unity most? Montferrat could have simply waited; struck at a more opportune time.”
“He did not strike me as a particularly patient man,” Alnesr said. “It seems that he merely overreached himself.”
“Yes, that could be true,” Altaïr allowed, his attention turned briefly toward Alnesr.
“Ah, but what moment would he choose?” Jabal asked. “Richard would have discovered his schemes soon enough; such plans are not easily concealed. No, this was the perfect time for him to strike.”
“Strange,” he said, shifting slightly on his feet as he began to grow restless. “I was sure he meant to take Acre for Conrad, yet he claimed that such was not his plan.”
“You cannot trust the words of a snake, which even in death produces venom,” Jabal said dismissively.
“I should discus this with Al Mualim,” he said, knowing it was true.
“Yes,” Jabal said, now bent over a ledger. “The two of you should make for Masyaf. I am sure he is eager for news.”
“Yes,” he said, nodding. “We will do so once the city’s guards are no longer so eager to detain those attempting to leave. Come, Alnesr.”
“Of course.”
The two of them made their way back into the room that they had entered through, making their way over to the pile of cushions so that they could curl up within them and await the opportune moment to make their way out of Acre once more.
~AC1~
When the morning came again, and he had regained the full use of his mental faculties, Alnesr rose back to his feet and followed Altaïr to the nearby table where the two of them broke their fast. After they had taken a moment to allow their meal to settle, Alnesr followed Altaïr back up onto the Bureau’s rooftop, and the two of them swiftly made their way back out of the city.
It had been some time since he and Altaïr had entered the city, and so he was not entirely certain of what path they had taken to enter Acre in the first place. He could not, therefore, say with any degree of surety that he and Altaïr were retracing the path that they had taken into the city, but it was a path that took them out all the same. Once they had made their way back to the stables, Alnesr mounted his horse and quickly joined up with Altaïr on the road out of Acre.
They passed their first day in silence, as was their custom from the early days that they had been traveling together; the work of Assassins was not a thing lightly discussed outside of their fortresses, and never among outsiders.
Nights and days passed, with the two of them only pausing when they needed rest and having what meals they desired on horseback, and soon Alnesr was able to glimpse the distant spires of Masyaf where the fortress sat proudly upon its mountain. Breathing more easily for the fact that the two of them were home once more, Alnesr gently guided his own horse back to the stables and neatly dismounted.
Taking only a moment to wait for the stable hands to begin attending to his horse, Alnesr then turned and swiftly followed Altaïr from the stables.
They two made their way quickly up the path through the village that Masyaf stood guard over, and Alnesr found that he could not help but to wonder what their next mission would entail. Yes, it was true that every man that they had killed had seemed to present their own actions – the actions that had drawn the blades of the Brotherhood to them in the first place – as being in the service to some greater good, it was plain to anyone who had seen the results of such actions that they were merely deluding themselves.
No, it was not the views that such men had of their actions that gave him pause for thought, but how similar the words he had overheard from all of them were in the end. Each of them had spoken of a new world, one that those they were abusing were being fitted to take their place within. It could not have been a mere coincidence that their words matched so well, and so Alnesr determined that he would consult with the Master about these matters.
Provided that Altaïr himself did not bring such matters up first; of course, then he would merely contribute to the conversation.
Soon enough, they had passed through the village – with all of the people there as pleased to see them as they ever were – and were headed up the path that would take them back into the fortress. The sun was just beginning to climb to its zenith in the sky as he and Altaïr made their way up the smoothly-winding path that lead to the fortress itself, and Alnesr pulled his hood down slightly to shade his eyes from the light that was beginning to shine more powerfully down on them.
Entering the cool darkness of Masyaf once more, Alnesr allowed himself to release the last of the tension that he had been harboring ever since he and Altaïr had made their journey out of Masyaf on the trail of William de Montferrat; he did not think that Altaïr would rebuke him for such a thing, but he had never truly felt comfortable outside the walls of the fortress or the environs of the surrounding village.
Following Altaïr up the stairs and through the halls that would take them up to Master Mualim’s study, Alnesr found his thoughts circling back to the words of the men whose lives he and Altaïr had ended. Each and every one of them had spoken of nearly the same thing; their particular words may have differed, but the spirit behind them had always been the same. All of them had spoken as though they were the vanguards of a new world, speaking of it in those very terms, and Alnesr could not deny the curiosity he felt.
Truly, men who had no connection to one another would not speak such similar words.
Chapter 35: Ends and beginnings
Chapter Text
“Come,” the Master said, as he and Altaïr reentered his study. “Speak with me a moment.”
“As you wish, Master,” he said, and heard Altaïr echoing the sentiment beside him.
“Word has reached me of your successes,” the Master said, a small smile on his face. “You both have my gratitude, and that of the realm. Freeing those cities from their corrupt leaders will no doubt promote the cause of peace.”
“I am glad to hear that,” he said, briefly taking a moment to compose himself; Alnesr knew it would be some time yet before he was completely comfortable speaking so plainly to the Master. “However, if you would permit me to ask something of you?”
“Speak, my child, and I will give you what answers you need.”
“Each of the men whose lives either Altaïr or I have taken spoke strange words in their last moments,” he said. “The words themselves have been similar enough that I’ve come to wonder if there is a connection between them. Do you know if there might be?”
The Master smiled gently, seeming rather pleased. “It is good that you notice such things, child; as an Assassin, it is your duty to take note of what occurs around you, and to thereby be better prepared for the tasks you will undertake in the future.”
“Thank you, Master,” he said, pleased by the compliment that he’d been offered.
“I cannot help but notice that you failed to failed to answer his question, Master,” Altaïr interjected, drawing his attention as well as the Master’s own.
“True,” the Master allowed, and Alnesr could not help but note that he seemed at least mildly displeased. “However, as Assassins, it is your duty to trust in your Master, and to still such thoughts before they can take root. For there can be no true peace without order, and order stems from authority.”
“You speak in circles, Master,” Altaïr said, an exasperated tone in his voice that Alnesr had never before heard directed at Master Mualim. “You commend us for being aware, and then command us not to be. Which is it?”
“Such a question will be answered when you’ve no longer the need to ask it,” the Master said, his tone firm.
Altaïr sighed harshly. “I presume you’ve summoned us here for more than simply a lecture.”
“Yes,” the Master said, and Alnesr could not quite place the emotion in his tone. He would have said that Master Mualim was pleased, but there was something else, too. “Altaïr, a rank and weapon are restored to you now. Two more leaders remain; go and see to it that their rule is ended, as well.” The Master paused a moment, the expression on his face becoming thoughtful once more, though he also seemed to have decided something. “You also no longer need operate under the watch of a superior.”
For a moment, though he knew that such a thing was inevitable since Assassins worked alone for the most part unless they were Master and Apprentice, Alnesr felt almost stricken. Banishing those thoughts as soon as he consciously noticed them, Alnesr turned his attention back to Master Mualim. He did not know just what the Master would have planned for him now, now that he and Altaïr would not be sent out on missions together anymore, but as the Master had said, that was for him to decide.
“Altaïr, I would have you return to Damascus; the next man to fall shall be the Merchant King, Abu’l Nuqoud.”
“Yes, Master,” Altaïr said, bowing respectfully to the Master, though Alnesr thought for a moment that there was a tightness around his mentor’s eyes that had not been present before. But Altaïr left swiftly and without a look back, and so Alnesr put such musings out of his mind.
Chapter 36: Empty truths
Chapter Text
“Come, child; I would speak with you,” the Master said, and Alnesr turned to see him making his way back toward his desk.
“Of course, Master,” he said, turning to make his own way toward Master Mualim’s desk. “What might-”
And suddenly, there was only the light…
~AC1~
Reestablishing all of the bonds that the Apple had laid upon the mind of Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr, Rashid paused for a moment to look upon his work. Yes, he still needed to choose a new name for the child – something that would hold no connection to his Assassin past – but for the moment he could afford to regain his bearings. Using the Apple was not something that one should do lightly, but then he was not one to take the life of a child – even Assassin-raised as Alnesr had been – lightly in any case.
Reaching out, Rashid gently pushed the child’s white hood back, revealing the soft, short silver hair that the boy had been forced to keep hidden from the world for fear of what the attention of that world might mean for him.
“You’ll have no more need to hide yourself in the new world that I will create, my child,” he said, cupping the little one’s chin even in spite of the fact that he walked within the light of the Apple now, and hence was beyond all such Earthly cares. “However, for now come along; there are some matters that I would have attended to before you rest.”
Leading the boy out of his study, Rashid guided him gently toward one of the fountains within his private garden. Once the two of them stood before it, Rashid took the child’s hands in his own and dipped them into the water. Immersing them within the stream, Rashid cupped some of the water within his own and ran it over the child’s hands so that he could aid in cleansing them further.
Yes, he knew that the child had clearly attended to his own needs while he had been assigned as Altaïr’s partner, but the blood on his hands would not be cleared away so easily.
While the child’s hands rested under the stream of water, Rashid took care to remove the Hidden Blade that he had granted to the boy before he had known of the child’s true nature. He could do nothing about the severed finger, and while he grieved for the boy’s maiming, the action he had taken was in the past and so could not be undone. He would simply have to see that the child adapted to his new circumstances.
Still, there remained the matter of Altaïr; the Assassin cared for the boy in his own way, and so it would be all the more important that he be kept busy so he would not have time to wonder about where the child was. And also so that he would be able to deal with the remaining members of Rashid’s former circle. His fellow Templars would not fall easily; he would have to trust in Altaïr’s skill, as well as his own in keeping the Assassin from becoming overly suspicious of his motives.
Guiding the former Assassin with his right hand gently placed between the boy’s shoulder blades, Rashid took care to ensure that the two of them were not seen by any of the other Assassins within the fortress. He would need to deal with them later, yes; if only so that they would not attempt to interfere with his plans for creating a new world. But Rashid knew he had the time he needed to be subtle in his actions.
He had the time he needed to do things properly.
Once he and the child had returned to his study – he would need to think upon a new name for him, before he could begin to properly detach the boy from his former life – Rashid considered for a long moment just where he would settle the boy for the time being. Taking the child’s hands within his own, feeling again that pang of sorrow when he touched the stump of the child’s right ring finger, Rashid lead the boy back to his quarters and settled him gently upon his bed.
Smoothing the child’s silver hair back, Rashid gently closed his eyes, shielding their strange glow from sight, and also giving the appearance that he was merely asleep.
Leaving the child to what rest he would take when his mind was safely within the light of the Apple, Rashid turned and made his own way back to his study. There were still matters that needed attending to, and for that he would need to take up Al Mualim once more. He was pleased to know, however, that such would not be the case forever.
Chapter 37: The Vessel
Chapter Text
When the light had engulfed him, just after the Master had spoken those strange words to him, Alnesr had found himself in a strange place. Or perhaps it was not a place at all, and he was merely trapped inside his own mind.
“It would, indeed, seem that all things come together in the end.”
Whipping around as quickly as he could, attempting to find the source of the strange voice that he had only just heard, Alnesr could only see the light that stretched for an endless distance all around him.
“Of course, this is not the end; this is merely the beginning.”
Alnesr thought that he was walking, but the environment around him did not change even in the slightest, so there was no way for him to tell where he was attempting to go. There was only the light; the endless light that stretched away from him, obscuring everything that he might have otherwise have tried to search for.
“I will enjoy meeting with you, once our paths cross again, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
He would have demanded to know just how this strange man, for no woman could have a voice so deep, knew his name, but for the fact that he was still wandering within the light. There were no points of reference; no way for him to determine if he was moving or not, and no way to know where he might have been headed. And, once the strange man had fallen silent, there was no way for him to track the man who had been saying such strange things to him.
The light seemed to pulse around him; and as strange a thought as that was, it was even stranger to see. For just a few moments, Alnesr could see a myriad of lines of light surrounding him; as though he was within a net that had been constructed purely out of such. It was not a thing that he would have ever thought possible, and yet it was indeed what he was seeing here and now.
Granted, as this place did not seem to be a place at all, rather merely something within his own mind that he was trapped within by the same light that seemed to prevent him from making any movements at all, no matter how much he might have desired to do such.
There were no more words from the man who had spoken to him, strange and cryptic though they may have been, so there was little chance of him finding the man so that he could have the curiosity that he was now prey to assuaged. For a moment, Alnesr wondered what Altaïr would have done if he had been in such a situation himself. He could not know if his mentor – his former Master – would have been able to find the man who seemed to hide within the light, but he liked to think so.
He knew that it was unseemly, to think so highly of a man who was as fallible as any other, and yet Alnesr found himself comforted by such thoughts. He would wait, then; this light could not be all that was left of the world; he would will through it, as any Assassin would. He would not dishonor himself nor the Brotherhood by succumbing to fear.
Chapter 38: Walking alone
Chapter Text
When he arrived back in Damascus once more, Altaïr found himself almost instinctively looking for Alnesr at his side when he dismounted. Sternly, he reminded himself once more that the Master had ended their association as both Master and Apprentice, and also the odd partnership that they had formed when Altaïr had regained such rank as he possessed now. It was the Master’s prerogative to do such, and as Altaïr continued to remind himself whenever such thoughts came to him, their association could not have lasted forever in any case.
Even as Master and Apprentice, they would have been separated eventually when Alnesr had taken his own place among the ranks of the Brotherhood.
There were far more pressing matters that he needed to attend to, however, so after a moment to examine them Altaïr put such thoughts as those aside.
Making his way closer to the proud city before him, Altaïr paused for only a moment to consider just how he would gain entrance to the city as he needed to do at the moment. Seeing a group of scholars slowly making their way towards the entrance, Altaïr smoothly blended with them and allowed the men to cover his own approach. He could hear the cries of merchants attempting to sell their wares, and others speaking all around him as he and his concealing group of scholars made their way steadily into Damascus.
Once he was safely out of sight of the guards at the entrance, Altaïr broke off from the men whose bodies had acted to shelter him while he moved, and entered Damascus in earnest.
He had previously made contact with the leader of Damascus’ Bureau, and he was not at all fond of the man. In light of that, Altaïr decided that he would get this particular meeting done as quickly as he could manage. It was with some amusement that he thought of Alnesr’s presence, of how the younger Assassin would chastise the man when his subtle disparagement would become too noticeable, and would hence allow Altaïr himself to appear unfazed by such insolence as the Rafiq of Damascus would offer him.
It was, then, with some small regret mixed with good-humor that Altaïr pushed thoughts of Alnesr from his mind; the younger Assassin was not here, his former Apprentice was not beside him, and hence could not deflect the attention of the insolent Bureau leader.
Making his way deeper into the city, Altaïr flitted through crowds with all the skill that he had spent years developing, and had soon made his way up to the rooftops and then to the Bureau itself. He was not entirely pleased to have to contend with the insolent Rafiq once more, but as he descended into the receiving room of Damascus’ Bureau once more, Altaïr put such thoughts aside once again.
Now was not a time to think of his own comforts.
“Altaïr, welcome! Welcome!” the Rafiq called out, false friendship ringing in his tone more strongly than any Altaïr had heard from any of those he had encountered before. Even Abbas’ bitterness and hatred was at least honest. “Whose life do you come to collect today?”
“His name is Abu’l Nuqoud,” he said, maintaining his calm as well as he could manage in the face of the insincere friendship that Damascus’ Rafiq offered to him. “What can you tell me about him?”
“Oh, the Merchant King of Damascus,” the Rafiq exclaimed; Altaïr did not know whether his enthusiasm was entirely feigned, but he was unwilling to trust it in any case. “Richest man in the city; quite exciting. And quite dangerous, too. I envy you, Altaïr… well, not the bit where you were beaten and stripped of your rank… or the part where you were put to work under the supervision of a boy eleven years your junior… But I envy everything else. Oh… save for the terrible things the other Assassins say about you. But yes, aside from the failure, and the hatred and the humiliation, I envy you a great deal.”
“I do not care what the others think, nor what they say,” he stated, musing for a moment as to how the Rafiq would react if Altaïr were to strike him across the face for his disrespectful words and tone. But no; Altaïr quickly mastered himself, not wanting to give the man the satisfaction of bringing about such a reaction from him. “I am here to do a job. So I ask again: what can you tell me about the Merchant King?”
“Only that he must be a very bad man, if Al Mualim has sent you to see him,” the Rafiq said, still in that insolent tone of his. “He keeps to his own kind, wrapped in the finery of this city’s noble district. A busy man; always up to something. I’m sure if you spend some time amongst his type, you’ll learn all you need to know about him.”
“And where would you have me begin my search?” he asked.
“If I were you, I’d start with Omayyad Mosque, and Souk Sarouja; both of which are west of here,” the Rafiq said. “Farther to the northwest is Salah Al’din’s citadel. It is a popular meeting spot, and has proved a reliable source of loose tongues in the past. Yes; these three places should certainly serve your needs.”
“My thanks for your guidance, Rafiq,” he said, with the same courtesy that he’d not been honestly offered in this place since his work had begun. “I’ll return when I have gathered the necessary information.”
Altaïr wondered for a moment if there was truly a reason for that, or if this Rafiq was simply not one who was or had ever been well-disposed toward him. However, such thoughts were merely idle musings, and so he put them aside once more. He’d far more important matters to attend to, and hence he turned and made his way back out to the entrance room of Damascus’ Bureau.
Climbing up onto the ornamental fountain once more, Altaïr swiftly made his way back to the rooftops.
Standing for a few moments in the open air and winds, Altaïr turned his path westward, toward those places that Damascus’ Rafiq had indicated would be of interest to him. He would also need to reorient himself, as the last time that he’d been to Damascus had been a rather long time ago, and he’d done much since then. There would also, doubtless, be other matters that he would be called on to attend to within that selfsame district.
It was for that reason that, for only a few moments, Altaïr found himself missing Alnesr’s presence for a purely practical reason.
Making his way up the side of a tall tower that stood over Damascus with the mien of a sentry over the city at large, Altaïr looked as far as he could manage for as long as he could safely manage. Leaping into a nearby pile of hay once he had managed to take in the lay of the city once more, Altaïr made his way back into the crowds of Damascus as they milled to and fro.
As he continued on his way deeper into the Rich District, Altaïr continued moving farther west. It would not be such a simple matter, this time, to procure the information that he sought without finding himself constantly thinking back over the times that Alnesr would aid him with certain tasks that needed attending to.
Forcing those thoughts back and out of his mind with only slightly more effort than he had been required to use in the past, Altaïr continued forward; his true task in this, as in all things, was to continue forward.
Chapter 39: Distant Reminiscence
Chapter Text
As he moved through the city, making his way west, so that he could investigate the indicated places, Altaïr began to hear the soft sounds of far-off people speaking. As he passed by the Madrasah Al-Kallasah, he saw that those who had been speaking were in fact scholars; they were not speaking of either him or Nuqoud, and yet the content of their speech troubled him enough that Altaïr halted nearby to listen.
“Citizens, bring forth your writings,” the foremost of the scholars in the group he was observing said, speaking loudly and clearly for the benefit of all those who might be listening. “Place them in the pile before me. To keep any is a sin; know and embrace the truth of my words. Free yourselves from the lies and corruption of the past.”
While he still had his orders to discover the crimes committed by Nuqoud against the citizenry, he could not but admit to a definite curiosity; it was another group that seemed to see with eyes turned toward the future. Or perhaps this group was not quite so other, after all.
Another of the scholars spoke, then: “If you truly value piece, if you truly wish to see an end to war, give up your books, your scrolls, and your manuscripts. For they all feed the flames of ignorance and hatred.”
It was not a thing that he could spare the time to investigate, not at the moment in any case, and yet Altaïr could not help but to think that he would soon be called upon to deal with the master of those particular scholars soon enough.
Putting such thoughts out of his mind so that he could focus once more, Altaïr turned back to the path that he had been making west. Soon enough, Altaïr found himself truly within the rich district of Damascus once more. He also found himself coming among a group of citizens in a busy thoroughfare; citizens who were discussing something of rather pressing interest to him. Pleased, Altaïr settled himself down on a nearby bench to hear what they had to say.
“The last of it has been delivered,” one of them reported; he was a large, imposing man dressed in a sleeveless dark-brown tunic and leggings of the same color, possessed of a bald pate and sparse beard.
“Good,” the man he was clearly reporting to said; he was shorter than the first man, and wore dulled, bluish-gray robes, as well as having a full head of hair and a much fuller beard. “Make sure he also knows that it wasn’t easy arranging a shipment like this,” the man made a wide, impatient seeming sweep of his arms.
“It’s only wine,” the first man countered. “Some can be fickle in their faith.”
“Your holy book says something on the subject, I believe: leave them that they may eat and enjoy themselves, and that hope may beguile them. For they will soon know, and never did we destroy a town that had in turn made known.”
“What’s that supposed to mean?”
“Never mind,” the second man said, his tone quick and impatient. “Be about your business.”
“As you wish,” the first man said, and the two swiftly parted to melt back into the crowd.
Rising from his seat after the two men were no longer within his sight, Altaïr briefly considered what he had heard. It seemed as though the Merchant King was preparing some kind of festivities; naturally, the wine would just be the start of it. Best he found out more, then. Continuing on his way through Damascus’ teaming rich district, Altaïr found another likely pair – their garb once more marking them as those who would work for a man who was rich enough to be called Merchant King – and settled himself down on a nearby bench to overhear what he could.
“There’s a problem,” reported a man dressed in jaunty, bright yellow robes, with a pate as bald as the first man he’d overheard. “I need your advice.”
“What is it?” the one he was speaking to; a woman dressed in dark clothes, Altaïr noted.
“This morning, I went to hang the lanterns for the party.”
“And this troubles you, why?” the woman asked.
“I forgot to remove the scaffold,” the man said, sounding profoundly embarrassed for such an oversight; Altaïr allowed himself the smallest of smiles.
“Forgot it where?”
“Just outside the Merchant King’s quarters; above the balcony.” Better and better, Altaïr mused, pleased to have something go so right. “Wha-what if it falls? He could be hurt!”
“Too late to do anything about it now,” the woman said philosophically. “Just hope it isn’t noticed. You can deal with it tomorrow.”
Taking a moment to give thanks for the inattentiveness of hirelings, Altaïr stood from the bench and calmly melted back into the crowd himself, eyes and ears still trained for whatever other information might reveal itself to him through the loose tongues of those who had been entrusted with it. As he walked by a river, channeled neatly through an ornamental drainage canal, Altaïr gave an involuntary shudder of distaste.
He knew how to swim, yes – as all Assassins knew how to cope with dangerous situations that they might encounter on their travels – but he disliked being immersed in water over his head all the same.
Putting thoughts such as those out of his mind, Altaïr continued on his way through Damascus, eyes, ears, and mind alert for any new information that he might have been able to find. The streets were, as always, filled with citizens intent on their various activities; all of them rushing to and fro with the kind of restless self-importance that all civilians seemed to have. Altaïr moved through them, soft and unnoticed as a shadow; just the way that he had been taught to do during the many years that he had spent under the tutelage of Master Mualim.
And just as he had taught Alnesr in his turn.
It was becoming simpler, the longer he was away, not to focus so much of his attention on the younger Assassin’s absence. Part of that, he knew, was simply the fact that he had another mission to concern himself with once more. Finding out what he needed, so that he would be able to cope with whatever unpleasantness that he would be faced with when he at last moved to claim the life of the Merchant King, occupied most of the attention that he would have otherwise spent on musing about his fellow Assassin’s health and wellbeing.
Such things were rather unseemly now, now that Alnesr had taken his own place among the ranks of the Brotherhood.
Breathing out slowly, even as he continued on his way through Damascus’ rich district, Altaïr put such thoughts as those out of his mind once more. He would need to focus on the task before him; he still needed the information that Nuqoud’s people provided him with. Keeping his eyes and ears open for any other information that he could gather from Nuqoud’s inattentive workers, or else those who knew of him and yet did not think to guard their tongues, Altaïr continued deeper into the rich district.
His eyes swept over the people moving to and fro before him, taking them in and then dismissing most as they were intent upon their own business. Then, Altaïr found his gaze drawn to another form; this one wearing the concealing robes of an Informant. He’d not had dealings with many of them; even before he’d taken on Alnesr as his Apprentice he’d found their tasks onerous, and after that of course he’d left the entire task of gathering information to his former Apprentice.
Now, of course, neither option remained open to him.
He found the man standing in a doorway, the slanting sun casting sharp-edged shadows across his form. The Informant was the one who initiated their conversation: “Altaïr, my friend, my brother! It’s been such a long time! Have you had any news of Adha since she left?”
Turning a narrowed gaze upon the Informant, Altaïr watched as the man’s own gaze lowered in response.
“No? How sad. I’m sure you’ll find her someday.” Altaïr swiftly wiped the emotion from his face; though he still wondered at times what Adha would have made of Alnesr, now was hardly the time to think of such things. “I’ve heard that a feather is lying on top of Abu’l Nuqoud’s head,” the Informant continued, his former joviality seemingly restored. “Maybe I could help you; however, I have a mission of my own: there are four targets I must eliminate before noon. Let’s cooperate, just like old times! Two for you, two for me? They are Abu’l Nuqoud’s personal guards; you will spot them in minutes!” Perhaps less than that, Altaïr reflected; he had ways of finding men in a crowd.
He allowed a small smile to come to his lips; true, he was still rather less than partial toward Informants and the missions they offered, this one’s task was far less onerous than most. With only a nod and a small smile shared between each other, Altaïr parted from the Informant and made his way back into the streets. It was clear to him, from the words of the Informant before the two of them had parted ways, that these men would all be simple to single out in some manner or other.
Still, when information such as this was at stake, Altaïr honestly preferred not to take the chance that it would be lost so easily.
His stalking of the men took Altaïr to the rooftops, where there were substantially fewer eyes upon him and he could act with something that at least approached impunity. Narrowing his eyes as he concentrated on the men he aimed to find, Altaïr watched as the world was once more washed of color; the men he was seeking stood out in bright shades of red among the colorless forms of the crowds they could no longer hide within. Drawing his throwing knives, Altaïr took only a few moments to target them, before letting his weapons fly and watching the men that he had targeted fall, the red glow of their forms winking out in nearly an instant.
Turning, Altaïr made his way back to the ground, so that he could meet up with the Informant and they could at last speak to one another properly.
Making his journey back to the building where he had first met up with the Informant, Altaïr noted that the man himself was also making his own way back to the building where the two of them had met. Pleased to know that he would not be forced to wait for any longer than he absolutely had to. Sweeping the street with his gaze and finding that there was no one around close enough to observe their actions, Altaïr casually made his way back to the building, pausing within the door to wait for the Informant to find him once more.
“Wasn’t that great?!” Though the Informant’s face was naturally concealed by his dull-colored garb, Altaïr could tell that the man was smiling. “Just like in Alep. You remember? Here’s something I found on one of the Merchant King’s men; I think it’s a map of where he has stationed his guards. I’m sure it will come in handy during your mission.” The Informant paused, the tilt of his head suggesting that he was smiling once more. “Anytime you’re in Damascus, come see me; you know that my door is always open, to you and Alnesr both. Safety and peace, my friend.”
“Upon you, as well,” he said, turning at last as he departed from the area where he had met up with the man and made his way back towards the milling crowds within Damascus’ rich district.
Walking among the citizens once more, Altaïr narrowed his eyes slightly and saw the world washed free of color once more. He did not prefer to rely on such a skill too often, but he knew also that as with all skills it would not do to lose such a skill for the lack of using it. He allowed the other sight to fade, bringing back all of the colors that had been washed out by the strange second sight that only he and Alnesr could be definitely said to possess; so far as he knew at least
He sometimes wondered if any others possessed such a second-sight as he and Alnesr did.
Chapter 40: Return to Damascus
Chapter Text
The sounds of the city wrapped around him once more, and Altaïr again began to listen for mentions of Nuqoud in conversations that he might happen to be privy to as he continued on his way.
“It is an honor to serve,” said a darker skinned man in a bright yellow robe said. “What do you require?”
“The letter I have given you must be presented to Salah Al’din in his camp,” the man he was speaking to, mostly out of sight behind a decorative pillar, said calmly. “Seek out the one they call Hisham; he will be able to help. But tell no one else of this,” the other man said, and Altaïr furrowed his brow as he saw the other man, dressed in paler clothes than the one he was meeting with, lean out from behind the pillar to speak this last part more directly to the man he was meeting with; his tone low and conspiratorial.
“None will know of my mission,” the man in yellow assured the one that he was meeting with.
“Then our business here is concluded,” the man behind the pillar said calmly.
The man in yellow parted from the man who had once been behind the pillar, and Altaïr smoothly flowed into step just a few paces behind the man in yellow. Falling into step with the man in yellow, Altaïr swiftly took what he needed from him, and then blended once more into the milling crowds before the man in yellow could even think to raise an alarm. Quickly glancing over the letter when he had a free moment, Altaïr found that it detailed the plans that Nuqoud had for a celebration within his own home.
Altaïr smiled thinly; there were times when circumstances seemed to be arranged so perfectly for the work he needed to do, that he wondered if there were indeed a higher power who watched over such things. It was not a concept he considered often, given the things that he had seen during the course of his work for the Brotherhood, but at times such as these it was an easy thing to muse upon.
Turning his attention back outward once more, carefully tucking the stolen letter away so that he would not be at the risk of losing it, Altaïr continued on his search for information. He knew that, while he was perfectly capable of operating at the level of information he possessed at this moment, Altaïr would not allow himself to become so lax as to simply accept a level of information that could only be defined as adequate.
Perhaps it could be considered a flaw, but Altaïr would not settle for mere adequacy when he could properly complete a mission to his own standards.
Moving back into the crowds once more, Altaïr matched the pace of the citizens and kept his ears open for any conversation that might carry the name of his target within it; such were the ways that an Assassin could use to gather useful information when he – or else she, but female Assassins had a way about them that told those who knew to look what they were capable of – needed it. Continuing on his way through Damascus, Altaïr paused for a moment as he saw a group of guards making their way past. Observing the attitudes of the citizens in this area, Altaïr adopted the same pose of indifference and dismissal as they passed on their way.
It seemed only natural that those at this level of society would have no care for such matters; at least, not until such things became a concern.
Moving on once the last of the guards had gone beyond his sight, Altaïr continued forward until, yet again, he found himself catching sight of the familiar gray-garbed form of an Informant. This one was standing at the back of a rather plain courtyard, just in front of a small, unkempt stand of determinedly-growing weeds.
“Safety and peace,” the man, whose voice was not familiar to Altaïr, greeted with an indifferent sort of cordiality. “You want information about the city, I suppose? Right now, I don’t have so much time, I must find a shipment of cloth that the merchant I bought it from seems to have mislaid. But, in this heat, I am afraid I have not been able to search as long as I might have otherwise. Would you be kind enough to help me?” he gave the Informant a look of indifference – though inwardly he wondered, with some sense of exasperated amusement, if Alnesr had ever been asked to perform such inane tasks – and the man swiftly continued. “Return with the cloth, and I shall help you as best I may.”
Resisting the urge to laugh for being given such a task, though he knew that not all of Masyaf’s own craftsmen were capable of supplying such fine wares as could be purchased outside of the city, Altaïr made his way out of the courtyard and over to a merchant stall that was clearly selling bolts of cloth and other such things that one might use to make and repair clothes. Speaking to the merchant once the man had finished serving another customer, Altaïr found that the man had merely been waiting on a delivery from one of his own suppliers that had made a simple mistake.
Returning to the Informant with the bolt of cloth that the man had previously purchased, Altaïr watched the man’s entire demeanor change. “Thank you. The Rafiq will be pleased to have this at last. Perhaps this morsel of information will help you: I was invited by Abu’l to one of his lavish parties. I noticed the fountain in the middle of the Merchant King’s palace could be easily climbed. Use this information wisely.” The Informant bowed slightly. “Now, if you’ll excuse me, I must deliver this to the Rafiq. Safety and peace, brother.”
“Upon you, as well,” he said, as the Informant turned to leave with his burden.
Making his way back into the main thoroughfare of Damascus’ rich district, Altaïr continued on the path that he had chosen for himself, eyes and ears open once more for any mentions of the Merchant King or other matters pertaining to what the man might have been planning. The words of the citizens around him might have easily blended into incomprehensibility for someone with lesser training, but as Altaïr was a Master Assassin, he was not one to fall prey to such lapses.
Calmly scanning the slowly-moving crowd, each of them going to some destination known only to themselves, Altaïr continued to listen for any mentions of his current target.
He would not seek to rest upon his laurels when there was still information that he could seek out; though there might not be so much more to find as he thought. He would be appreciative of such a thing; to have this task done so that the people of Damascus might no longer suffer under the cruel whims of a capricious tyrant. Pressing deeper into the city’s rich district, Altaïr began to hear the voice of a man speaking the praises of Nuqoud to anyone who would listen. And even those who would simply pass him by on the way to another destination.
Turning his attention toward the man making such effulgent praises, Altaïr found that the man had the air of a hireling rather than one who would speak out on another’s behalf from a movement of their own heart.
After the man had finished with his oratory and had begun to move on, likely as not to another open square where he would make the exact speech that he had done in this very courtyard; as any hireling would do when they were being properly paid, Altaïr followed him. The blind alley that the two of them ended up walking into would serve the purpose that Altaïr needed it to, he decided; and so he moved. Slamming his right fist into the back of Nuqoud’s hireling, Altaïr knocked the man to one knee.
He was then forced to dodge, as the man whipped himself about like a serpent, lashing out in his own defense. Altaïr was pleased to note, in a distant sort of way as he bent his skills to his own defense, that Nuqoud’s hireling had not thought to bring any weapons to this confrontation. He did not relish the thought of being knifed when he was attempting to subdue this man.
At last, Altaïr found that he had managed to subdue Nuqoud’s hireling to the point where the man was – if not pleased about the prospect – at least willing to speak to him.
“I’ll talk. I’ll talk! I’ve no interest in dying for him. His coin’s not worth my life,” the hireling said.
“A wise decision,” he replied.
“What is it you want?”
“I’ve business with the Merchant King.”
The hireling laughed, the sound akin to a dog’s bark. “Good luck with that! He rarely leaves his chambers.”
“Why?” he demanded. “Is he afraid?”
“Not fear: hate,” the hireling said, speaking as if this were something he knew to be true. “He hates himself almost as much as he hates the people he pretends to serve.” The orator – the hireling – had been slammed down rather hard against the ground rear where the two of them had fought. “Locks himself away in his personal quarters out of shame.”
“He can’t stay hidden forever,” he observed, knowing such for a fact, given everything that he had seen.
“No,” the hireling agreed. “Those celebrations of his, he comes out to speak; to look down upon the people. A sense of belonging, I suppose. However brief.”
“What’s wrong with him, that he would hide like this?” he asked, curious both about Nuqoud’s motives as well as what his hireling would choose to say about him.
Nuqoud’s hireling chuckled, his dark amusement with the situation rather more than obvious. “You’ll see.” He became more serious after he had spoken, however. “Now let me go.”
It was Altaïr’s turn to chuckle; his own dark amusement no less than that of the hireling he was confronting. “Let you go? So you can tell him of my plan?”
“I won’t say a thing!” the hireling rushed to reassure him.
“No; you won’t,” he said coldly, swiftly ending the life of Nuqoud’s hireling so that he could move on from this place.
Chapter 41: The Merchant King
Chapter Text
Moving away from the blind alley where he had made this latest kill of his, Altaïr paused a moment when he had at last put a comfortable amount of distance between himself and the corpse of Nuqoud’s hireling. He had, indeed, gathered a respectable amount of information; even enough that such a man as the Rafiq who worked in the Bureau here was not likely to be able to gainsay him.
With such a thing in mind, his decision of whether or not to attempt to continue his investigations among the people of Damascus became far more simple than they had once been.
Turning his path back toward the Bureau within Damascus, Altaïr swiftly regained the rooftops on his journey. It was not such a long time before he came within sight of the rooftop entrance to the Bureau itself, and not much longer after that that he stood upon the same roof as that entrance. Climbing back down into the secondary room of the building, Altaïr stepped down off of the ornamental fountain and found himself almost pausing for a moment to wait for Alnesr to join him back on the ground.
Shaking his head at his own folly, Altaïr made his way into the main room of Damascus’ Bureau and found himself facing the insolent leader of the Damascus Bureau once more; he was not pleased to have to deal with the man alone, yes, but this was a necessary step to being done with this newest task of his. He would bear up under it as he ever did.
“Peace be upon you, Altaïr. How may I serve you?”
“I’ve done as asked, and learned all I need to know about my prey,” he said calmly, pleased at least to know that he would only need endure the Rafiq’s insolent expressions rather than his words.
“Then you must share your knowledge with me,” the man said.
“Abu’l Nuqoud is corrupt to the core, and despised by his own citizens as a result,” he said, speaking calmly so that he would give this man no reason to speak to him in the way he once had; and likely would otherwise. “It appears he’s been stealing money from the people of Damascus and spending it on himself. Even as we speak, he flaunts his greed, preparing for a lavish party. His guards and servants should have their hands full dealing with the guests; they won’t even know I’m there.”
“Most impressive, my friend,” the Rafiq said. “The others said you’d make a mess of things, but not I. No, I was sure you’d come through. And come through you have. The Bureau is yours to do with as you wish for as long as you need.”
More insolence; Altaïr fought to keep any trace of emotion from his face as he took the feather that the man had fetched for him.
Turning without another word, Altaïr left the front room of the Bureau and made his way back out into the sleeping area that he had once used during the time when he and Alnesr had both stayed here. Settling himself down under the cover of the swiftly-settling dusk, Altaïr slept for a time.
When he awoke, feeling refreshed as he ever did after a time of repose, Altaïr made his way up to the ornamental fountain and then back out of the Bureau once more. Standing for a moment upon the rooftops as he looked out over them, Altaïr took a breath and then began making for the place where he would at last be able to come to grips with Nuqoud. To end the suffering that he had inflicted on the people of Damascus with his depredations.
Passing over the rooftops that stood between him and the stronghold of the Merchant King, Altaïr dealt with those few archers who were unfortunate enough to cross his path in a way that he could not pass them by in some way that kept him out of their sight.
As he moved ever closer to his present destination, and the ending of this particular excursion, Altaïr began to see more and more signs of the prosperity that Nuqoud hoarded for himself. The increasing numbers of wealthy hangers-on were simply the most visible sign of what the Merchant King had prepared for those he considered his peers; prepared so as to rub the noses of those he considered beneath him in his vast wealth. The scents in the air around him were becoming thicker, those of spices and fine perfumes, exotic meats and drinks.
Nuqoud had also ordered a great deal of wine delivered, in clear contravention of his professed faith; Altaïr rather doubted that the man adhered to many other tenets of the faith he professed to have, either.
Crossing the remaining rooftops between his location and the place where he would complete his mission, Altaïr descended back to the ground and calmly blended into the crowds making their way into Nuqoud’s courtyard. He felt slightly out of place, moving among the richly-dressed, opulent guests of Nuqoud in his simple – almost shabby-looking – white robes and red sash. That no one else seemed to take note of his presence was a comfort and a testament to his skills at once.
Moving with the ebb and flow of the crowds, Altaïr took note of the servants hurrying to and fro on their errands – carrying plates of delicacies that the milling crowd would sample at their leisure – the dancing girls gyrating slowly to the music being played, and the terrain that he would have to contend with when he finally made his move. As he made his way farther into the well-appointed courtyard, Altaïr soon found himself able to look up at a grand balcony.
Standing within the balcony itself was a stern-faced guard with his arms folded, staring impassively out at the revelry taking place beneath his eyes. He rather thought that this was the place where Nuqoud would settle himself, so as to better observe the festivities that he had arranged. A few moments spent observing the balcony from his place within the crowd soon proved him right: as the music swelled to a new, faster tempo, the Merchant King himself appeared on the balcony with a second guard along with him.
Altaïr had heard lurid descriptions of the man’s appearance: of his corpulence – as large as three normal men, it had been said – of the gaudy robes and shiny trinkets that he wore, of his bejeweled turban; most of these he had dismissed as the exaggerations of an incensed populous. But, when he saw Nuqoud for the first time, Altaïr found that – if anything – such descriptions that he had heard had been understated. His girth, jewelry, and robes were more flagrantly ostentatious than even some of the wilder tales had spoken of.
He watched as the man continued to eat whatever delicacy that he had been sampling when he came out onto the balcony, the grease of what had likely as not been some kind of meat dish smeared around his mouth. As Nuqoud finished his food, the front of his robe fell open and revealed his bare chest, the flesh glittering with perspiration. Clapping his hands, Nuqoud waited a few moments after the music had stopped for the remaining conversation to die down.
“Welcome, welcome,” the Merchant King said graciously. “Thank you all for joining me this evening. Please, eat, drink; enjoy all the pleasures that I have to offer.” The Merchant King swept his hand wide over the gathered crowd, and Altaïr took note of the way the ornamental fountain at the center of the courtyard sprang to life; he at first thought that the water within the fountain itself had been colored by some means, but when the attendees of the party all began to flock to that same fountain bearing goblets and an eagerness that Altaïr himself found rather unseemly, he realized that he knew just where the wine shipment that Nuqoud had ordered had been placed. The Merchant King himself seemed to be waiting on his guests to drink their fill, waiting until each and every one of those who had made such a rush to the fountain had supped from it; Altaïr wondered for a moment if it was more than simple courtesy. “I trust everything is to your satisfaction?”
The cheering and toasting of all the guests present at the party was all the answer that the Merchant King seemed to need.
“Good, good,” Nuqoud beamed, he grinned, revealing bits of food between his teeth. “It pleases me to see you all so happy. For these are dark days, my friends. And we must all enjoy this bounty while we can.” Nearer to where Altaïr was standing, a few of the men who had been toasting Nuqoud returned eagerly to the free-flowing fountain for more wine. Nuqoud continued even as they did so. “War threatens to consume us all. Salah Al’din bravely fights for what he believes in, and you are always there to support him without question. It is your generosity that allows his campaign to continue.”
It was with the slight chill of apprehension that Altaïr noted that the galleries above the courtyard were beginning to fill with guards; and, when he looked more closely upon them, Altaïr saw that they were archers.
“So, I propose a toast, then,” Nuqoud said, his voice filled with a friendliness that Altaïr was beginning to suspect was entirely false. “To you, my dear friends: who have brought us this far. May you be given everything you deserve for it.”
Altaïr did not know precisely what to make of that phrasing, but he could not help but think it ominous.
“To your health!” came the cries of the crowd, as the revelers drank deeply from their goblets.
“Such kindness,” Nuqoud said, though his tone was now bitter and sarcastic. “I didn’t think it in you. You, who have been so quick to judge me; and so cruelly.” The mutterings of the crowd began to become more distinctly unsettled, more confused. “Oh, do not feign ignorance. Do you take me for a fool? That I have not heard the words you whisper behind my back? Well, I have; and I fear I can never forget. But this is not why I have called you here tonight. No; I wish to speak more of this war, and your part in it. You give up your coin, quick as can be, knowing all too well that it buys the death of thousands. You don’t even know why we fight. The sanctity of the Holy Land, you’ll say; or else the evil inclinations of our enemies. But these are only lies you tell yourselves. No; all this suffering is born of fear and hate. It bothers you that they are different; just as it bothers you that I am different.”
Looking back to the archers now stationed in the galleries, Altaïr turned his gaze to take in the galleries opposite them, and found that they too had been filled with archers; each of them had his gaze trained on the milling crowd that Altaïr was still using to shelter himself, though not one of them had begun to draw their bow. However, he could clearly see that when the time came for them to act, they had the whole of the courtyard covered. Moving closer to the wall he had been standing near, Altaïr noticed that one of the nearby men who had just made a toast to Nuqoud was beginning to splutter and cough, leading to no small amount of amusement for the man standing next to him.
“Compassion. Mercy. Tolerance,” Nuqoud continued his tirade, drawing slightly closer to the edge of the balcony. “These words mean nothing to any of you. They mean nothing to those infidel invaders who ravage our lands in search of gold and glory. And so I say enough. I’ve pledged myself to another cause, one that will bring about a New World; in which all people might live together in peace.” Altaïr tensed, watching as the archers all around the galleries did the same; those words were disturbingly familiar. “A pity none of you will live to see it.”
Chapter 42: Abu’l Nuqoud
Chapter Text
Altaïr watched as Nuqoud left, giving the order to his archers to kill anyone attempting to escape; those who had not supped the poisoned wine, and were therefore capable of doing so. Forcing himself to ignore the carnage behind him, Altaïr scaled the wall before him up to the balcony, dispatching the guard who would have otherwise attempted to hinder him with a quick slice of his short-blade across the man’s throat. This, naturally, drew the attention of Nuqoud himself.
The Merchant King had been thoroughly enjoying the carnage he had created, and now Altaïr was pleased to note that Nuqoud felt at least some measure of the fear that he had inflicted on those who had been in attendance at this farce of a party; then a measure of their pain, as Altaïr sank his Hidden Blade into the man’s wide neck above the clavicle.
“Why have you done this?” Nuqoud asked, already dying as he sank to lay on the smooth stone of his balcony.
“You stole money from those you claim to lead,” he said, providing some comfort for the man, though he’d done little to deserve such. “Sent it away for some unknown purpose. I want to know where it’s gone, and why.”
“Look at me,” Nuqoud scoffed. “My very nature is an affront to the people I ruled, and these royal robes did little more than muffle their shouts of hate.”
“So, this is about vengeance, then,” he stated, wondering what the man would say in response.
“No. Not vengeance, but my conscience. How could I finance a war in service to the same God that calls me an abomination?”
“If you do not serve Salah Al’din’s cause, then whose?” he asked, wondering if Nuqoud would be the one who finally gave him the answers he sought.
However, the Merchant King merely gave a tired, enigmatic smile. “In time, you’ll come to know them. I think, perhaps, you already do.”
“Then, why hide?” he asked, puzzled. “And why these dark deeds?”
“Is it so different from your own work? You take the lives of men and women, strong in your conviction that their deaths will improve the lot of those left behind. A minor evil for a greater good? We are the same.”
“Our methods may resemble each other, but to one who knows our motivations?” Altaïr stated, almost amused to find himself using the tone he had once used for speaking to Alnesr during the younger Assassin’s lessons. “We could hardly be more different.”
“Ah, so you say now,” Nuqoud continued, his voice growing quieter as the life left him. “But later, I wonder…” he grinned a last time. “Still, it does not matter: you cannot stop us. We will have our New World.”
Abu’l Nuqoud, the Merchant King of Damascus, died with an enigmatic smile on his face and his life’s blood pooling at the right side of his mouth.
“May you find the peace in death that eluded you in life,” Altaïr said, gently staining his feather with the Merchant King’s blood.
Rising from his crouch before the remaining guards could see his work and think to sound the alarm, Altaïr made his way quickly back to the rooftops so that he could more easily evade those guards that would inevitably be coming once the alarms had started sounding in earnest and those who were assigned to this area found themselves recalled to the posts that he had passed though. At least, those who he had not encountered on his way to this place.
Concealing himself within a walled garden as more and yet more archers began scaling ladders placed in this area for them, Altaïr crouched and peered through the delicately carved wood. Watching as the guards and searchers passed out of his sight across the rooftops, Altaïr breathed more easily once they were gone. Rising from his crouch, he scanned the rooftops around him to make certain that they were clear.
Turning his path back toward the Bureau once he had determined that his way was indeed clear, Altaïr crossed those rooftops that remained between himself and his new-chosen destination with only a few more encounters with the guards that were now searching for him with more than their usual share of diligence. He dealt with them in the same fashion that he handled the others.
He smiled slightly as he began to come into sight of the Bureau’s rooftop entrance, stepping up onto the Bureau’s rooftop and then carefully climbing back down into the back room below. Stepping down from the ornamental fountain, Altaïr breathed more easily now that he was back on safe ground. For all that the insolence of this Rafiq might have irritated him, fighting city guards was far more troublesome than that man could truly hope to be.
Removing the stained feather from the pouch on his belt, Altaïr made his way into the main room of the Bureau once more.
“Word has reached me of your success, Altaïr,” the Rafiq said.
“Abu’l Nuqoud’s reign of terror is at an end,” he reported, pleased to have such a task done with.
“I’m glad to hear it,” the Rafiq said, smiling slightly.
“He killed them,” Altaïr reported, eyes narrowing at the memory of those revelers – perhaps not all of them innocents, but none of them deserving the deaths that Nuqoud had given them – chocking and foaming as they died. “The men and women at his party; it was poison. A coward’s tool; he blamed them for the war. Said he wished to end it.”
“Strange,” the Rafiq said, looking as though the deaths of those people were not quite real to him; perhaps they were not. Whatever the case, he would speak about the missions he was carrying out alone with Alnesr, when the pair of them could find the time to meet once more. “But, then again, the Merchant King was known to be a bit… different. Perhaps this was simply a symptom of his madness.”
“Perhaps,” he allowed, not particularly willing to forgive the man such a transgression as what he’d seen this day.
“You sound unconvinced,” the Rafiq noted; Altaïr mused that his misgivings about what he had seen, and his desire to discus what he had heard with the Master and Alnesr both, would indeed have combined to make him sound so uncertain. “Speak with Al Mualim, then. He may offer a better explanation.”
“Yes, I’ll see what he has to say,” he said, handing over the feather he’s stained with the Merchant King’s blood.
Departing from the Bureau’s front room without another word, Altaïr returned to the back room and settled himself amongst the cushions, sheets, and pillows that made up the sleeping area. Closing his eyes, Altaïr breathed deeply and allowed himself to relax as much as any other Assassin would have at last.
Chapter 43: Strange words
Chapter Text
The next morning, after a sleep that was less restful and more troubled than he would have ever preferred, Altaïr rose and began to make his way out of Damascus once again. He did not know if he would be returning, since such things were at the discretion of Master Mualim and not himself, but if he did he hoped that he would not be returning to such uncertain circumstances as the ones he had been forced to work under here and now. Regaining the rooftops, Altaïr paused a moment to look for archers before continuing on his way.
His journey from the city was somewhat more eventful than the one that he had made to get inside, more than likely owing to the fact that the death of Abu’l Nuqoud still remained in the minds of the populous. They did not know – could not know – that the purpose of the Brotherhood was to safeguard them from those who would seek to exploit them for their own selfish ends. He thought it rather sad, at times, that these people would never truly come to know their saviors unless they found themselves entering the Brotherhood itself.
Then, he would remember the lessons that Master Mualim had taught him when he was under the man’s tutelage, and he would give no more thought to such things as that.
Once he had managed to return within sight of the entrance to Damascus, Altaïr paused for a moment to watch the guards at the gate. They were not the sort to allow anyone so suspicious as he was out under their eyes as long as they stood guard at the gates. He’d been searching long enough to know that there were no scholars close enough to allow him to take shelter within their ranks before he would run the risk of attracting unfriendly attention simply by his sheer immobility.
So, gathering himself, Altaïr moved swiftly out of Damascus over the heads of the men guarding the gate. Not a one of them looked up, and so Altaïr allowed himself to breathe more easily as he descended from the wall and stood at ease upon the grassy grounds outside Damascus once again. He stopped a group of men from assaulting a scholar, and then moved to locate the horse he had brought with him from Masyaf.
Mounting up once more, Altaïr rode from Damascus and turned his attention to what might be waiting for him at the fortress of the Assassins.
He knew that, for all he wished to speak with Alnesr about what the younger Assassin had been doing while he had carried out the missions that the Master had requested of him, he would need to speak to Master Mualim himself before he could truly have any time to himself; both to inform the Master of the results of his mission, and to assuage his uncertainty.
Settling himself down next to a tree that leaned out over a small well, Altaïr gave some water to his horse and then had a drink himself. Tying the horse up for the night, Altaïr settled down to rest. Waking refreshed the next morning, he resettled himself upon his horse and continued on. The next five days passed in much the same fashion, though rather more solitarily considering that he was no longer traveling with Alnesr.
He wondered again how the younger Assassin was faring.
Once he began to come into sight of the valley that Masyaf fortress stood guard over, Altaïr smiled softly as he began to guide his horse back to the stables. He looked forward to speaking with Alnesr about their respective activities during the time that they had been working apart, but before that he would need to make his report to the Master. Leaving his horse at the stables to be taken care of by the attendants, Altaïr swiftly dismounted and began making his way back to the fortress.
Rauf waved to him as he passed, and Altaïr returned the greeting as he continued on his way. Entering the fortress once more, he made his way up the stairs and into the Master’s study. As he had been suspecting, Master Mualim was waiting for him.
“Come, Altaïr, I would have news of your progress.”
“I’ve done as you asked,” he reported. “Abu’l Nuqoud no longer has power over the citizens of Damascus.”
“Good. Good,” the Master turned then, his gaze taking in Altaïr’s own face; he wondered what the Master was seeing there. “I sense your thoughts are elsewhere. Speak your mind.”
“Each man I’ve been sent to kill speaks cryptic words at the end. Each time, I come to you and speak of what I have heard, and each time you give me only riddles in response. But no more,” he said, resolving to have the uncertainty he had been pushing to the back of his mind for so long as he had been hunting the men on his Master’s list ended.
Master Mualim’s white eyebrows raised at once; he was likely surprised to find himself confronted in such a way. Well, he would need to become accustomed, if he wanted Altaïr’s further cooperation. “Who are you to say ‘no more’?”
“I’m the one that has done your killing for all this time,” he said, firming his expression as he did the same with his resolve. “If you want it to continue, you’ll speak straight with me for once.”
“Tread carefully, Altaïr,” the Master said, a hardness in his voice and expression that had not been present before; Altaïr noted it and set it out of his mind. “I do not like your tone.”
“And I do not like your deception,” he stated, forcing himself to sound more calm than he presently felt; he thought of how Alnesr would look to him for guidance, and then acted as though he was still called upon to provide it.
“I have offered you the chance to restore your lost honor-”
“Not lost,” he interrupted, incensed; not a thing he would have done if Alnesr had truly been here to see his example and take instruction from it, but Altaïr found that he could not manage to hold his silence through such an insult. “Taken; by you. And then you sent me to fetch it again like some damned dog.”
The Master’s sword slipped almost silently from its sheath; Altaïr narrowed his eyes slightly. “It seems I’ll need to find another. A shame. You showed such promise.”
“So, you would send Alnesr, then? He’s done his share of work, and seems far more willing to work without question than I find myself.” There was something that passed over the Master’s face when he spoke of Alnesr, some expression that Altaïr could only glimpse for the shortest of moments and so could not properly place. “You said that the answer to the questions I had would come when I no longer needed to ask it. So I will not ask; I demand that you tell me what binds these men.”
For a few, long moments, Altaïr found himself wondering if the Master would indeed go and fetch Alnesr, if only so as to teach the younger Assassin one of his inscrutable object-lessons. However, once those moments when he was required to await whatever judgment the Master saw fit to give him for what the man considered his continuing insolence, Master Mualim sheathed his blade and seemed to be considering his options. It seemed he was not so eager to begin anew with Alnesr.
“What you say is true,” the Master said, relenting at last. “These men are connected, by a blood oath not unlike our own.”
“Who are they, then?” he asked, in no great mood for further wordplay now that he had managed to glean at least some answers.
“Non nobis, Domine, non nobis,” the Master intoned.
Altaïr knew those words well. “Templars,” he spat.
“Now you know the true reach of Robert de Sable,” the Master said.
Indeed I do. “All of these men… Leaders of cities, commanders of armies…” he trailed off, momentarily overcome by the immensity of the task that had seemingly appeared before him.
“All pledge allegiance to his cause,” the Master said; Altaïr gathered his scattered thoughts so that he would be able to speak them properly once more.
“Their works are not meant to be viewed on their own, are they?” he thought aloud, for both of their benefits. “But as a whole. What do they desire?”
“Conquest,” Master Mualim said; it was a simple answer, but one that he’d come to think more and more plausible the more he saw of the men he now knew to call Templars. “They seek the Holy Land; not for God but for themselves.”
“What of Richard?” he asked. “Salah Al’din?”
“Any who oppose the Templars will be destroyed,” the Master said, his usual calm once more in place. “Be assured that they have the means to accomplish it.”
“Then they must be stopped,” he said, feeling a new resolve even as he spoke those words; as though a great weight had been lifted from his shoulders.
“That is why we do our work, Altaïr: to ensure a future free of such men,” the Master said.
“Then, why did you hide the truth from me? Why this evasion?”
“That you might pierce the veil yourself,” the Master said, sounding only slightly reproving. “Like any task, knowledge precedes action. Information learned is quite a bit more valuable than information given. Besides,” Master Mualim turned a more reproving expression upon him. “Your behavior had not inspired much confidence,”
“I see,” he said, lowering his head; he was almost pleased that Alnesr was not present to see him in such a state as this.
The younger Assassin knew well that his once-Master was not entirely without fault; no need for him to repeat such a lesson.
“Altaïr, your mission has not changed,” Master Mualim said, his expression becoming merely stern rather than reproving. “Merely the context in which you perceive it.”
“And, armed with this knowledge, I might better understand those Templars who remain,” Altaïr said, nodding as he turned over his new knowledge in his mind.
The Master nodded, clearly pleased. “Is there anything else you wish to know?”
Pausing for a moment, considering just what else that he could ask of the Master while he had the man’s ear, Altaïr had soon made up his mind. “What about the treasure Malik and Alnesr retrieved from Solomon’s Temple? Robert seemed desperate to have it back.”
“In time, Altaïr, all will become clear,” Master Mualim said, calm and cryptic as he had ever been. “Just as the role of the Templars has revealed itself to you, so too will the nature of their treasure. For now, take comfort in the fact that it is not in their hands, but ours.”
Chapter 44: Uneasy return
Chapter Text
Altaïr considered pressing the Master for the meaning of his words, but he knew that he had been fortunate in that the Master had chosen to indulge him. It would be entirely too simple for Master Mualim to decide that he had given out too much information on the subject, and there were other things that he wanted to know, besides.
“How does Alnesr fair? Have you sent him on another mission, or may I speak with him?”
“I’ve sent him off to gather more information about what Robert and his Templars might be planning, so that – though the two of you now tread separate paths – Alnesr might do what he can to aid in your efforts.”
“Thank you for your consideration, Master,” he said, bowing his head in respect to both Master Mualim’s patience, and his consideration in giving aid in what ways he could. “Where would you have me go next?”
“Return to Jerusalem once you have taken some rest; Majd Addin awaits you there,” the Master said. “You are restored another rank; take another set of knives, use them to restore honor to the Brotherhood.”
“Thank you, Master,” he said, turning to make ready to leave. “I will do as you ask.”
~AC1~
When the Assassin had left him at last, Rashid sighed softly. The boy was becoming rather too inquisitive for both of their good; it would not be long before the Assassin began to think to demand to know where Alnesr was, even in spite of the knowledge that Rashid had offered him. He would not be able to truly provide any more information to the Assassin than the boy himself had already gathered; he’d cut ties with Robert long ago, and hence knew very little about the activities of the Templars in the present.
He could not, therefore, offer the Assassin the information he sought, and for a moment Rashid wondered what had driven him to promise that which he had.
Returning to his room, Rashid made his way over to the bed where he had laid Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr to rest. Reaching out to gently caress the face of the young once-Assassin, he smiled. He could see the light of the Apple shining softly through the child’s eyelids, now that the sun was beginning to sink below the horizon at last.
He wondered, for a few moments, what the child could have been dreaming; what dreams that the Apple was showing to him, in that place beyond all cares and troubles of the waking world.
Gently brushing back the child’s silver hair, Rashid smiled more gently as he felt the softness of it. Truly, the gentler world that he would use the Apple to create could only be a boon to him and all of the children like him.
Chapter 45: Half-truths and secrets
Chapter Text
“Who are you?” he demanded of the man, the one who continued to hide himself within the light Alnesr had found himself wandering through for an uncounted amount of time.
Ever since such had overtaken him, while he’d been speaking to Master Mualim in his study.
“You’ll come to know me soon enough, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
He could only wonder at how the man knew his name, and even more at the fact that his voice seemed to echo from everywhere and nowhere at once. It made the man near-impossible to locate by sound, and the fact that he could not catch so much of a glimpse of the man whose voice he heard so clearly compounded the impossibility with yet more.
He was not fully prepared to concede victory or resign himself to hopelessness at this point, however; there was a solution to all problems, in the end. One merely had to find it.
“By all means, Alnesr: come and find me.”
The man’s voice sounded fully amused now; soft, mocking chuckles sounding from the light all around him.
“Come out and show yourself, then; or are you just a voice on the wind, merely empty noise at the end of things?”
“I look forward to seeing you find that out for yourself, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
He’d not expected the man to show himself at the prompting of what were merely words that could be ignored if one was truly uninterested in the opinions that others might hold of them – as Altaïr had been, long ago – and yet hearing such plain indifference in the voice of the man who would not come out to confront him was not a comfort at all. It suggested that, whoever it was that continued to speak to him within this place that was not truly a place, they held no concern for the opinions of others. It suggested a man who did not question the limits of his own strength, for there was nothing and no one that could truly challenge him.
Or else, that he had simply not met a one who could.
Chapter 46: Solitary hunter
Chapter Text
When the morning had come once more, Altaïr rose from his slumber and began to make for the stables after he had broken his fast. He was pleased to remember his conversation with the Master; pleased to know that Alnesr would still be supporting him even after the two of them had gone down separate paths. He was not entirely pleased that he’d not been able to wish the younger Assassin well on his way, but Alnesr’s departure had been at the Master’s discretion.
He was not going to go down the path of questioning the Master’s dictates, after the troubles that doing such had already caused him; he’d paid the price for his arrogance some time ago, and he would not soon forget the lesson that he had paid such a price for.
Taking a horse from the stables, Altaïr unhooked a pack of provisions from the far wall and slung it over his right shoulder. Guiding his horse out from the stables and down the path away from Masyaf, Altaïr turned his thoughts toward Jerusalem once more. Dealing with Malik would be more difficult now, without Alnesr to blunt the edges of the Dai’s words.
However, he would face the mistakes that he had made toward Malik, and the hatred that his fellow Assassin had a right to feel toward him. He would complete his tasks, kill Majd Addin and bring Jerusalem out from under his cruel thumb, so that the people there could once more live free as all people were meant to do. Then, he would see if Alnesr had returned from his own appointed tasks so that the two of them could speak once again.
Pausing to rest under the trees of a nearby oasis, Altaïr watered both himself and his horse before tying the beast up so that it wouldn’t wander off into the desert and become lost. Eating a piece of dried fruit, Altaïr settled himself down to rest for the night. Rising once he felt rested once more, Altaïr untied his horse and mounted it once more.
The next five days passed in much the same way, and Altaïr soon found himself standing outside the walls of Jerusalem once again. He would have to focus on getting inside, for the moment, before he could concern himself with what other things Malik might say to him now that he was meeting his fellow Assassin for the second time. Tying his horse to one of the hitching posts outside of a nearby stable, Altaïr paid the stable hand to board his horse and then turned his gaze to the walls of Jerusalem at last.
As always, there were many citizens of many stripes milling around outside the walls, and while he might have had some small chance of blending in with a crowd and making his way into the city in that manner, there would have still been an uncomfortably large chance of him being found out if he had done such. So, Altaïr was determined to find a way that did not expose him to such a danger, and hence did not carry such a risk of compromising the Brotherhood. He had pride in his own skill, yes, but he was not a fool.
Finding a group of scholars making their own way into the city, Altaïr blended carefully in among them and allowed them to cover his entrance into Jerusalem for this mission of his. Bidding them a subtle farewell once he had accomplished his purpose, Altaïr took only a moment to compose himself when he stood within the walls of the city once more. After a few moments’ pause, he moved off deeper into the city.
It was with some amusement that Altaïr recalled how he had found himself making investigations without truly intending to do so, when he and Alnesr had been to the city before on the trail of Talal the slaver. This day, however, there did not seem to be anything of import to draw his attention away from making his journey to the Bureau to present himself before Malik and hence gain the Dai’s approval for his latest foray into the city. Again, he wondered what Malik would have to say.
Continuing on his way, taking to the rooftops when he was certain that he would not be spotted doing such, Altaïr breathed deeply and tried to leave aside his concerns for what Malik’s reaction would be to confronting him without Alnesr. He could not deny anymore that he was ultimately the cause of the other man’s maiming, or that Malik had every right in the world to hate him for such a thing. No matter how he might wish to make amends, wishes on their own were little more than kindly words.
Finally coming into sight of the Bureau’s rooftop entrance, Altaïr carefully made his way down into the building. He still did not know just what to expect when he met with the man – the Dai who had once been his fellow Assassin, alongside Alnesr and the man’s own late younger brother – but he would face such scorn as Malik would offer to him as he faced all other challenges in his life. He could no more deny his responsibility for the man’s maiming than he could force the sun to set at his own discretion.
Making his way into the front room of the Bureau at last, Altaïr paused for a moment as Malik looked up at him.
Chapter 47: Malik’s Misgivings
Chapter Text
“Safety and peace, Malik,” he said, not wanting to start off on an argument, though he had a feeling that such was a futile hope.
“What news, Novice?”
“I am not a Novice, Malik,” he said, resisting the urge to sigh.
“A man’s skill is defined by his actions, not the markings on his robe,” Malik said, not sounding swayed at all by his tone. “And, as you do not seem to be apprenticed to anyone, you are again a Novice in my eyes.”
“We could trade barbs all day, if you would prefer it so,” he said, forcing himself to look into Malik’s eyes in spite of the clear disapproval he saw in their depths. “Or, we could return to doing Al Mualim’s work.”
“Then, be out with it,” Malik said, taking a box out from underneath the counter he stood behind. “Though I would much prefer to be dealing with Alnesr, I suppose I can tolerate you.” Malik faced him more firmly. “Do you at least know how he fares?”
“The Master says that he has gone to find more information about the enemies we currently face,” Altaïr said, wondering for a moment if he should reveal what the Master had said to him when he had demanded answers not so very long ago.
Still, such was not likely to matter to Malik, since he had other concerns.
“Well, I suppose the two of us might very well have the chance to meet again,” Malik mused. “Now, what was it you came here for?”
“Al Mualim has asked that Majd Addin be slain,” he said. “There are mutterings throughout the city, and the people seem to have little love for him.”
“So, you can be observant when it suits you,” Malik said; Altaïr forced himself not to sigh once more. “Very well, I shall give you leave to use the Bureau as you need it.”
“Thank you,” he said, bowing slightly to Malik as he left the front room.
Making his way back over to the ornamental fountain, Altaïr stepped up onto it and from there made his way up the wall and back onto the rooftops. Standing there a moment to regain the composure that he had found worn down during his meeting with Malik. He had been right in thinking that the Dai would not have forgiven him his transgressions so easily. Still, Altaïr would have been lying if he’d not admitted to hoping for such a thing.
Dismissing those thoughts from his mind after only a moment to observe them, Altaïr made his way away from the Bureau and into the poor district of Jerusalem.
Once he’d found himself looking down at the dilapidated buildings of the poorest section of the city he now stood within, Altaïr waited a moment for the streets below him to clear, before descending down onto the level where all of the varied citizens within Jerusalem went about their lives. Knowing that he would now need to keep his eyes and ears open from the time he blended into the crowds until he departed for the Bureau with his collected information, Altaïr smiled slightly at the prospect of yet another challenge.
The life of an Assassin was filled with them.
Chapter 48: Back in Jerusalem
Chapter Text
Making his way further into the poor district, Altaïr composed himself as he began to hear the sounds of a conversation not too far from where he currently stood. Moving toward it at a pace calculated to match that of the citizens that walked these streets beside, behind, and before him, Altaïr wondered for a moment just what it was that he would ultimately be finding. As it turned out, two men were meeting with each other; one of them wearing a simple, white tunic and pants with a smoke-gray turban, and the other far more elaborately garbed in rich, wine red fabric.
“They sent word you wished to speak with me,” the man in white and gray said.
“Majd Addin intends another execution today,” the man in red silks responded. “We must ensure all goes well.”
“It is my duty to serve,” the first man said, bending slightly at the waist in response.
“Bring the document I’ve given you to your master,” the man in red silks ordered; Altaïr narrowed his eyes slightly. “That way, he’ll know where my men are at all times. And be quick about it! We can ill afford any delays.”
“There will be none, you have my word,” the first man said. “Is there anything else?”
After a cursory check to see if anyone was watching them, during which time Altaïr had to fight hard to restrain his amused smile, the man in red silks turned back to the man in white and gray. “We’ve reason to believe they’d infiltrated the city,” the man in red silks had leaning his head slightly closer in that way that conspirators from all creeds and all walks of life had done before him. “Majd Addin fears for his safety.”
As well he might, Altaïr mused, not feeling particularly charitable.
“Truth be told I don’t blame him,” the man in red silks said. “A man in his position makes many enemies.”
“I am sure that your men will be able to keep him safe,” the man in gray and white said, straightening up and beginning to leave the intersection of street and alley where Altaïr had found him.
“God willing,” the man in red silk said, moving to leave, himself.
Altaïr, schooling his face in the wake of the new information that he’d been able to gather, moved in behind the new object of his attention as swiftly and silently as he ever had. Once the man’s attention had turned fully to whatever matters that he had concerned himself, fully distracted from whoever he might encounter within the city, Altaïr swept past him, taking what he needed from the man just as he’d been taught to do by the Master himself.
And, just as he’d taught Alnesr to do, in his turn.
Moving away from the man he’d tailed, so that he would not think to pursue him once he discovered that he was no longer carrying the message he’d been given, Altaïr melted back into the milling crowds and continued on his way even as he tucked the message he’d claimed safely away inside his robes. Passing deeper into the crowds, Altaïr made his stance and stride as unobtrusive as he could manage, searching out the next person who would be able to provide him with the information he sought, though they would have no knowledge of him or what he truly sought.
As he continued making his way through the crowds, Altaïr opened his ears once more to what those who lived under Majd Addin’s rule truly thought of the man; it would make him all the simpler to come to grips with, when the time came.
As he continued deeper into Jerusalem’s poor district, Altaïr began to hear the sounds of yet another conversation that might also prove to have more of the information he was currently searching for.
“Did you see the order?” a man in smoke-gray robes and black sash asked of a man in a white tunic and turban, this one wearing a bright green sash. “He wants us to prepare a stage for another execution. Today. It’s the one at the western edge of Solomon’s Temple. I was on my way just now.”
“So much death,” the man in white said, in the tone of a man who had been defeated; Altaïr was cheered by the thought that, unknown though he might be to this man, he would still be lifting a burden from his shoulders.
“Were it only that our true leader might return, and bring a measure of justice to this city,” the other man said, with far more enthusiasm.
“Yes, and not this mockery Majd Addin parades before us,” the man in white continued; it seemed the spirit had not been wrung out of him entirely.
“How? How does something like this happen?”
If Master Mualim’s deductions were indeed as well-founded as they had always been, then not without intervention, Altaïr reflected.
“Everyone appointed in Salah Al’din’s stead has met with an untimely end, and so the position falls to him,” the man in white said; Altaïr winced slightly at the thought that his own actions had given such a madman cause to hold power. “He who was once nothing more than a mere scribe.”
“How convenient,” the man in gray said, his tone making the words a jibe. “It would not surprise me to learn that he was behind these… accidents.”
More and more, Altaïr found himself pleased to be able to offer the citizens of Jerusalem reprieve from what was, in the end, just another tyrant that fed on the suffering of their fellow man. Or, perhaps much worse, considering the man’s affiliations.
The man in white swiftly hushed his companion. “If the guards hear us, we’ll be taken for treason! Executed on very platform we have to repair. Come; let us return to work.”
Turning his face back to the crowd, so that he would not appear to be taking too much note of the men whose conversation he had taken the time to overhear, Altaïr closed easily with the man in white, taking the map that he had been given to do his work. Drifting back into the crowd once he had done his work, Altaïr began once more to search for those who might be carrying information that he needed.
After continuing on his way through the city for some time, observing the ebb and flow of the crowds he passed into and through and by on his way through the poor district, Altaïr began to hear the sounds of a man haranguing the crowd around him. Turning that way, Altaïr settled himself down on a bench close enough to hear the words of the man that spoke so pointedly, while at the same time being safely out of the man’s sight. After all, it was a strong possibility that this man could end up being his enemy.
Chapter 49: Interrupted Execution
Chapter Text
“There is nothing more insidious than one who turns his back on the law!” the man shouted. “For the law was given to us by God! There is no harm in naming them: those among you who defy the law. We are nothing without our faith. Without its rules and its direction; to defy it, is to defy the one who leads us! Such behavior can not be allowed!”
The man had stopped speaking, and so Altaïr rose from the bench and began discreetly tailing the man; this one clearly being either a firm believer in Majd Addin’s tyrannical ways, or merely paid off by the man. And either way, one more than likely to have knowledge that could be put to proper use.
As he caught his first glimpse of the man, moving through the crowds, Altaïr took note of the travel-stained, faded tan robe that he wore. Around his waist was a black sash, and atop his head a wine-red hat of a type Altaïr had seen before, though he did not recall just what such a thing was called. Directing his attention away from such idle musings, Altaïr continued on his way though the crowds.
Ever closer to the man who would give him the information he sought, reluctant though he might have been.
Once he had passed beyond the watching eyes of Jerusalem’s citizens for a moment, Altaïr fell upon the man with his accustomed ferocity. A hireling the man might easily have been, since he did not fight with the strength or lack of regard for himself that characterized a zealot. The more they struggled, Altaïr himself striving far harder than this man whose name he did not know, he came to the conclusion that his first thought about the man was indeed right. The man fought too much like a hireling to be anything else.
“Enough!” the man gasped. “I still breathe, so you must desire more than just my life. What is it?”
“You know Majd Addin well?” he demanded.
“Better than most,” the man said, not sounding as though he was boasting, but not as though he was confessing, either.
All the more indication that this man was a hireling, truly.
“He seems a bit too righteous,” he said. “Is the law really so important to him?”
“What do you think?”
He narrowed his eyes, not entirely pleased with the man’s temerity. “I think he hides something, and I think you’ll tell me what it is,” he said, focusing the annoyance he felt into a sharp blade to further prod the man before him.
“It’s a veil, all of it,” the hireling said, his almost laughable resistance folding swiftly in the face of Altaïr’s annoyance. “Men like me? We are meant to scare them. Fill the people with fear. The ones he kills: not criminals, but… dangerous, all the same.”
“Dangerous to who?” Altaïr demanded, in spite of the fact that he was beginning to suspect the fact that he knew the answer to that question without troubling himself to ask.
“His plans; their plans,” the hireling said, his fear clearly beginning to get the better of him at last. “Yes! He speaks of others! Those he works with; works for, perhaps. I am uncertain. They need the city, though: controlling it is important to them.”
“Why?”
“You’ll have to ask him yourself,” the hireling said, clearly beginning to think that there was a way for him to survive this confrontation. “Attend one of his executions,” the hireling said to him. “It’s when he’s most talkative; addressing the crowd, hands covered in blood.”
“Then we are done,” he said, driving his Hidden Blade into the hireling’s neck at last.
Leaving the man behind as he fell to the ground, Altaïr swiftly moved away from the scene. Scaling a nearby wall to bring himself further away as swiftly as possible, Altaïr crossed as many rooftops as he could manage without being spotted by one of the archers that seemed to be far more prevalent in Jerusalem now than the last time that he had found himself in the city. It was quite possible that Majd Addin had ordered them posted when he had assumed power within the city.
Yet another reason to deal with him, if such were indeed the case.
Returning to the ground so that he would be better able to find the people that he sought within the city, Altaïr blended carefully back into the crowds so that he would be able to more easily make his way through the city, unnoticed and seldom seen. As he turned his attention back to the hunt for his new targets, Altaïr took care to match his pace to the ebb and flow of the crowds. He would not like to be spotted simply because of his inattention to a simple detail such as that.
Turning his gaze to the right, Altaïr raised his eyebrows slightly as he caught sight of an Informant standing at ease within a courtyard. Mildly interested in what the man would say to him, he hoped that the tasks that the other asked of him would not be too onerous.
“You again, grand Master,” the young man said; Altaïr was unsure if the young one was simply one of those overawed by his presence or simply confused as to his true rank, and so he offered no correction. “Safety and peace; I am so glad to see you. In these troubled times they asked me to prove myself, but I feel so inadequate when I compare myself to you.” Altaïr held himself aloof from the young man; knowing how unlikely it was that they would ever truly meet again, and so not wishing to cast a pall over his aspirations. “I must kill two of Majd Addin’s men without a fight. Could you show me the way?” it was a difficult thing, reading the emotions on a face so well-shrouded as that of an Informant, and yet the young man’s eyes gave his hesitation away; perhaps it was for the best that Altaïr showed him how he might perform future duties that might be asked of him. “I will be forever grateful; and share a very interesting story with you.”
Nodding his acquiescence to the young man who had asked for his help in this endeavor, Altaïr received the locations where both men could be found, and then turned his attention to tracking them. Such was not an entirely difficult thing, with the skill that he had often wondered if others among the Brotherhood possessed. It was not a thing he talked about, however; not an easy thing to bring up in conversation at all, the fact that he could see things that others might not.
Such musings were merely idle curiosities, however, and so Altaïr set them aside while he dealt with the men who had caused this Informant such consternation.
Returning over the rooftops to the young man who had sought his aid, Altaïr found that his wide-eyed look of welcome rather reminded him of Alnesr’s when his former Apprentice had been young.
“You are the best the clan has ever seen.” Altaïr took only a moment to consider such praise, before putting it aside as the words of a young man who had likely ventured no further than the city he had been stationed in. “Here is my story, Master: I was cleaning the temple steps; I overheard two scholars praising how easy it was for them to pass the soldiers guarding the entrance of the execution plaza.” He’d have not thought that such would be the case; Majd Addin must have truly felt more secure in his power than any of the others that he had been given cause to put to the sword. “If you time your entry properly, they could provide a choice distraction for the guards. But, I am sure that with your wisdom, you knew that already.”
Nodding slightly to himself in thought, not particularly caring how the informant would take such a gesture, Altaïr left the courtyard and made his way back out into the city at large. He possessed a great deal more information now than he had when he started, and for a moment he wondered if Malik would be satisfied with such progress as he had made. He honestly doubted it; not just for the hurt that he had caused to the Dai, but for the thought that he had not sought out all possible leads in all possible places.
With that thought in mind, Altaïr turned his attention back to what else he might be able to find out about the circumstances surrounding Majd Addin, and hence how he could improve his chances of killing the man when the time to do so properly came.
Hearing the sound of far off conversation, Altaïr turned his attention that way. Seating himself at a bench within range of the two men conversing – a man in white robes, sash, and turban, his face covered by a cloth of the same color; and a man in pale green who seemed to be dressed just the same – and turned his ears in that direction while taking care to appear that he was merely resting after a long walk.
“I am sorry!” the man in white said to the man in pale green, his tone indeed one of deep sorrow. “They came for him without warning.”
“My son?! They have my son?” thinking on how he himself would have felt if it had been Alnesr in such a situation, Altaïr lowered his eyes slight; truly, this only served to firm his resolve. Majd Addin would die, and the sooner the better. “What is to be done with him?!”
“We did everything we could,” the man in white said, wringing his hands.
“What is to be done with him?!” the other man demanded, shaking the first with the strength that desperation could lend a man.
“He is to be executed; today.”
“No,” the man in pale-green – the father bereft of his son – growled at last. “I won’t allow it.”
“What, what can we do?” the first man asked; clearly, a victim of the terror that Majd Addin had been spreading. “Majd Addin will hear no appeals! He says that there can be no barter with God’s will!”
“This is not God’s will!” In that, Altaïr mused, they two were in complete agreement. “But madness! I’ll go to him myself! Where is he?!”
Before the grieving father could have done something foolish, though Altaïr held no enmity for such a desire considering what he had lost, the man in white took hold of his right shoulder and pulled him back. “He will attend the execution; perform it, even. He enjoys the act; truly evil man.”
“We have no time to lose, then,” the bereft, grieving father said; Altaïr was almost pleased that the man’s voice did not shake when he spoke. “Let’s go!”
Taking a moment to compose himself, knowing that he could not offer aid in any but the most indirect of ways to the man who had lost so much, Altaïr moved back into the crowd and lost himself within it once more. He had a great deal of time to think about what else he might need – what other information there might be left to collect – before he returned to the Bureau to collect the Master’s marker and finish this mission at last.
On his way back through the poor district, Altaïr found his attention once more drawn to the discreet, robed form of an Informant standing just out of sight of the glances of the crowds, behind a section of wall that jutted out just enough to cover him.
“Still need my help?” the man said. “I’m not sure I can be of any help; I have not been in town for awhile. Well, not since Majd Addin put a bounty on my head! Three of his men are after me! Perhaps your blade could help,” the man – not sounding as young as the previous Informant he’d crossed paths with, but not sounding very much older all the same – said, sounding rather like he hoped it would. “Get rid of them, and I’ll search my memory for something worth your while.”
Nodding as the Informant bowed slightly to him, Altaïr turned and left the small almost alcove-like place where the two of them had met.
There was one more man due to fall to his knives than had been the case the last time he had been asked to perform such actions as were wanted of him here and now, but Altaïr had thought that such would indeed be the case when he had glimpsed the stance of this Informant out of all the others. This man indeed had had the mien of one being hunted.
Returning to the rooftops, stalking from above as had proved so useful to him in the past, Altaïr focused in that way that he did to bring his awareness of people’s inner-natures forward. The men he sought were colored brightly gold in that other-vision; haloed in red to further let him know that they were enemies. Striking each one of them down with the throwing-knives that he had often taken the time and care to liberate from the thieves who would have otherwise used them for ends meant to benefit only themselves, Altaïr allowed himself a slight smile, before he made his way back to the Informant so that he would be able to speak to the young man once more.
Making his way back into the small, sheltered alcove-like place that the young man had hidden himself within to avoid the notice of those who would have sought the bounty on his head, Altaïr carefully checked to see that he was not being observed by anyone who might have taken something of an interest in what he was doing, and then made his way back down the ladder that he had climbed to gain the rooftops in the first place. It was a good feeling, to know that he could move unseen both within and above the crowds.
“Now I’m starting to understand why they call you the one,” the Informant said, his enthusiasm showing even though most of his face was covered. “What could I tell you that would be of any help?” the young man seemed to be musing on his next words, as opposed to lacking confidence as the other Informant that he had encountered, so Altaïr merely watched without expectations. “Oh, yes: Majd Addin enjoys lecturing his prisoners before executing them. While doing so, he turns his back on the crowd. I’m sure it is the perfect moment to strike! Does that help? Now, I must go hide for a while.”
Nodding, more to himself than to the Informant who had already begun to make his way out of the small, alcove-like place where the two of them had been speaking with one another, Altaïr made his own way out once the Informant had left in another dissection. He did not wish to give anyone who might have been watching the impression that he and the Informant could be connected to one another.
He would not compromise the Brotherhood once again; not ever again.
Deciding that, even if Malik did not believe that he possessed the requisite information to justify the giving over of the marker Altaïr would need to properly perform the assassination he had awaiting him, he could ill-afford any more delays if he were to help those that the mad Templar aimed to execute, he turned his path back toward the Bureau once more. He would not allow Malik’s disparagement to drive him to delays that would only place the lives of those Majd Addin’s madness had condemned in further danger.
Making his way back over the rooftops, pausing only to deal with the archers and particularly troublesome guards that he encountered on his way, Altaïr made his way determinedly back to the Bureau where Malik waited for him. He would present his case to the Dai, and he would convince the man to allow him the marker he needed. He could not allow Majd Addin’s madness to condemn any more of Jerusalem’s innocents.
Coming within sight of the Bureau once more, Altaïr sighed softly in mingled relief and anticipation. Climbing back down into the secondary room of the Bureau, Altaïr steeled himself for what he might be forced to do. Whether it was to grovel and beg for a favor that the Dai might not be willing to grant him otherwise, or else to promise some form of penance to the man that he had wronged. Altaïr would do it; not only for the innocents that he would be unable to protect otherwise, but for the fact that he had wronged Malik, and he did owe the man.
As he came into the room where Malik was working, behind the counter that Altaïr’s own actions had left him to, Altaïr nodded to the Dai and made his way over.
“You have more news, Novice?”
“I do,” he said simply; Malik seemed almost surprised by his tone.
“Speak of it, then; let us see what you have learned.”
For a moment, Altaïr was almost bemused by how the Dai’s manner of speech reflected the Master’s own. “Majd Addin is to hold a public execution not far from here. It’s certain to be well-guarded, but given the information I have managed to collect, I feel it is not beyond my skill.”
“You would feel that,” Malik said, sounding as fully unimpressed as he looked.
Altaïr bit the tip of his tongue, briefly reminding himself of all the troubles that his own arrogance had brought upon the Brotherhood before. “Will you give me the marker?”
“There is something else you need know beforehand,” Malik said, sounding both pleased and slightly annoyed. “One of those meant to be executed is a Brother; one of us. Al Mualim wishes for him to be saved. Do not worry about the rescue: my men will take care of that. But you must ensure that Majd Addin does not take his life.”
After Malik had finished speaking those words, the Dai retrieved the Master’s marker and Altaïr took it. Nodding one last time, with respect to the man that his foolishness had harmed most of all, Altaïr turned and left the Bureau’s front room. Making his way into the room that he had entered from once again, Altaïr allowed himself only a small meal and a short rest before he scaled the wall and made his way back up to Jerusalem’s rooftops once more.
He did not have the luxury of time in this instance, so Altaïr did not allow himself to linger in any one place for longer than he had to. Dodging the sightlines of guards, and pausing only to deal with those archers who he could not avoid without deviating too far from the most efficient path, Altaïr made swift progress through Jerusalem, on his way to the execution grounds that had been indicated by the men whose conversations he had overheard and whose communications he had intercepted.
The western edge of Solomon’s Temple, near the Wailing Wall, was awash with people; shifting and muttering, most of them clearly constrained from acting by the fear of what reprisals Addin would contrive to bring down on their heads in the face of such open defiance. But, that was well enough for his purposes; Altaïr himself had often been the hidden blade of the people, striking down those who had thought themselves protected by the coin they extorted, or the fear they spread.
He was more than willing to become so again, after all that he had heard of Majd Addin and his atrocities.
Making his way into the crowd that had gathered, whether willing or unwilling, to witness the mockery of justice that Majd Addin would parade before them, Altaïr steadied himself and watched; his time to act would come soon enough.
“People of Jerusalem, hear me well!” Addin called out, his voice silencing the remaining mutters of the crowd who had not heeded his call for such when he had first made it, likely riled by the delivery of the prisoners – tied to stakes, and most of them beaten – before them. “I stand here today to deliver a warning: there are malcontents among you; they sow the seeds of discontent, hoping to lead you astray.” Over the crowd’s murmurs, Addin continued. “Tell me, is this what you desire? To be mired in deceit and sin? To live your lives in fear?”
Altaïr would have scoffed at that, were he not surrounded by Addin’s Saracen guards and those who he had cowed into his service. He was a fine one to speak of people in fear. His gaze, however, was fixed on the Assassin that had been captured by Addin’s men: the man was younger than him, but seemed to be older than Alnesr. He did not know if this man was unskilled in combat, or had simply been unlucky.
He was not likely to find out, for that matter; so Altaïr focused his attention on Addin, awaiting the moment when he would be able to strike.
Chapter 50: Majd Addin
Chapter Text
“Then you wish to take action?” Addin asked, to the roaring approval of the crowd; Altaïr was not pleased to see such a thing, but he well knew that a man with the proper will could guide a crowd to follow where he led them. “Your devotion pleases me,” he said, turning to indicate the prisoners with a sweep of his left arm. “This evil must be purged, only then can we hope to be redeemed.”
Narrowing his eyes as a pair of men, the same pair that he had seen discussing the fate of the man’s son – still in their white and pale-green garb – came up to the stage, loudly denouncing Majd Addin and the farce of bloodlust and madness he was parading as justice, Altaïr sighed softly. He would not be able to save these men, but at least he could ensure that their sacrifice would not be in vain.
Moving forward during the inattention of the guards that had been distracted by their murder of the two men who had spoken out against the madness and bloodlust that Addin had encouraged within the crowd before him, Altaïr lowered his head slightly in remembrance of the two men who had been so brave as to offer themselves in the defense of people who could not defend themselves. Making his way up onto the execution platform, Altaïr forced himself forward as Addin turned the sacrifices of those two men – infinitely better than Addin himself would ever be, even if he were allowed to live – to his own advantage with barely a thought.
He was forced to watch the deaths of another two innocents – a woman, and then a man, neither of them likely to have done what Addin had contrived to accuse them of – before he was able to make his way close enough to deal with Addin properly. It was a cold comfort, but he had at least managed to come in time to aid the Assassin that he had been informed would be present.
As though he had been alerted by some other power, some heightened sense of combat that Altaïr would not have expected of a man who was merely engaging in mindless butchery as he was, Addin turned to look directly at Altaïr. The man seemed to know, though not by any means accept, that death had come for him at last. Altaïr, however, did not particularly care what Addin was willing to accept.
Launching himself forward, flicking out his Hidden Blade so that he would be better able to deal with Addin when the time came, Altaïr sunk the blade into his neck as he landed amid the roars and screams of the crowd; at this point, Altaïr rather thought that none of them were particularly aware of what was truly happening, merely wanting blood to appease the bloodlust that Addin had stirred in them. Altaïr thought it fitting, when he allowed himself to think of it at all.
“Your work here is finished,” he said, tensing himself to deliver the finishing blow.
The guards, at least, seemed to have realized that something had gone wrong, and were attempting to fight their way through the panicking crowds. None of them, it seemed, had expected death to strike the man who had gathered them here. Altaïr knew that he did not have so much time to linger in this place, and yet he still wanted to know just what it was that Addin would say in his own defense.
“No, no,” the man moaned softly, already dying. “It had only just begun.”
“Tell me: what was your part in all of this?” he demanded. “Do you intend to defend yourself as the others have? To explain away your evil deeds?”
“The brotherhood wanted the city; I wanted power,” Addin said, beginning to smile slightly. “There was… an opportunity.”
“An opportunity to murder innocent people,” Altaïr returned, disgusted with the man now bleeding out at his feet.
“Not so innocent,” Addin said, blood beginning to pool at the left side of his mouth. “Dissident voices cut deep as steel. They disrupt order; in this, I do agree with the brotherhood.”
“You would kill people simply for believing differently than you?” Altaïr asked; it fit what he had learned of the Templars, at least.
“Of course not…” Addin said, almost seeming as though he would have been laughing. “I killed them because I could; because it was fun. Do you know what it feels like, to determine another man’s fate? And did you see the way the people cheered? The way they feared me? I was like a God! You’d have done the same, if you could. Such… power.”
“Once, perhaps,” Altaïr allowed himself to admit. “But then I learned what becomes of those who life themselves above others.”
“And, what is that?” Addin asked, curious to the last.
“Here, let me show you,” he said, finishing the tyrant, and then closing Addin’s eyes as a final gesture. “Every soul shall taste death.”
Moving swiftly away from Majd Addin’s cooling corpse, Altaïr dashed for the nearest of the buildings to him. Clambering up the wall, he broke the line of sight on himself, then dove into a rooftop garden to escape the scrutiny of the guards pursuing him. Safely out of sight, Altaïr waited for the furor in his area of the city to die down slightly, and then moved quickly away over the rooftops once more. He knew that the archers he had killed had more than likely been replaced, particularly considering the level of security that Majd Addin had been operating under.
He could not afford carelessness, less in this situation than in many others.
Timing his movements carefully, so that he would never have the eyes of a man he could not kill upon him, Altaïr made his way swiftly back to the Bureau; Malik awaited news of his success there, though the Dai was more than likely aware of such a thing already.
When he had finally returned to the Bureau, making his way back down into the building as quickly and quietly as he ever had, Altaïr found that he was rather more eager than he had ever been to return to Masyaf once more. There seemed to be other things that he had been unaware of; things he was beginning to consider, now that he knew that the men he was hunting did indeed share more than their means and motives. Now that he knew he was facing the Templars once more.
Making his way into the main room of the Bureau, finding Malik hard at work behind the counter once more, Altaïr made his way over to the Dai to make his report.
“Jerusalem shall need a new ruler,” he said simply, knowing that Malik would be aware of what he meant.
“So I have heard,” the Dai said, sounding rather unimpressed; Altaïr could not find it within himself to be surprised at such a thing.
“Yes; I suppose that all of the city knows of his demise by now,” he said.
“You performed as an Assassin should: no more, no less,” Malik said, his unimpressed expression remaining; Altaïr briefly wondered what it would take to change it, and then mentally rebuked himself for such a thought.
Deeds were the way to change a man’s mind; not merely words.
“Is there anything else that you would wish to speak to me about?”
“No,” Malik said bluntly. “Reflect on your performance on your way back to Masyaf. And, if you do chance to meet up with Alnesr again, tell him that I would enjoy speaking with him if his path returns here.”
“I will, Malik,” he said, dipping his head to the Dai and then turning to make his way back to the sleeping area so that he could wait for the furor that his actions had caused to die down.
A light sleep left him clear-headed and better able to face whatever the rest of the day would bring, as well as free of the harsh, strident ringing of the alarm bells that had begun clanging almost before the dying body of Majd Addin had fallen to the ground. Making his way back out of the Bureau, Altaïr found his way back onto the rooftops, and from there was able to make his way carefully back to the edge of the city once more. He smiled briefly to see another group of scholars, before moving down to immerse himself within their ranks.
Chapter 51: Making for Masyaf
Chapter Text
With his cover preserved for the moment, Altaïr passed under the gazes of the guards at the gate, and made his way back out into the groups of people milling around outside Jerusalem itself. Some of them did indeed seem agitated by what had happened, but a great many more of them seemed relieved to know that they would no longer be harmed by those who purported to be in power. Altaïr was glad to see it; to know that he had made a difference in the lives of so many was a good feeling.
It was something he had taught Alnesr to cherish, as well.
Mounting his horse once more, Altaïr made his way away from the walls of Jerusalem and back down the path that would return him to Masyaf. He stopped when he could not avoid it, eating both along the way and when he settled down to allow both the beast and himself to get what rest they needed. When, at least, he came into sight of the great citadel of Masyaf once more, Altaïr sighed slightly, a small smile playing about his lips; it was a pleasant thing, to be home once more after all of his labors.
Leaving his horse in the care of the stable hands once more, Altaïr made his way back up to the citadel, and from there back into the Master’s study, where Master Mualim was indeed waiting for him once more.
“Come in, Altaïr,” the Master directed, his usual expression of stern kindness settled upon his aged face. “I trust you are well rested? Ready for your remaining trials?”
“I am, but I would speak with you first, Master. I have questions.”
Master Mualim clearly disapproved of such a thing, and Altaïr was not one to forget the sight of the Master’s blade, but there were still things he needed to know. He would find them out; no matter the cost.
“Ask, then,” the Master said, displeased but clearly still willing to cooperate. “I’ll do my best to answer.”
“The Merchant King of Damascus murdered the nobles who ruled his city,” he said, after a deep breath to fortify and steady himself. “Majd Addin in Jerusalem used fear to force his people into submission. I suspect that William meant to murder Richard and Acre with his troops. These men were meant to aid their leaders, and instead they chose to betray. What I do not understand is why.”
“Is it not obvious?” the Master asked rhetorically. “The Templars desire control. Each man, as you’ve noted, wanted to claim the city in the Templar name. So that the Templars themselves might rule the Holy Land; and eventually beyond. But they cannot succeed in their mission.”
“Why is that?” he asked, curious to know the source of the Master’s confidence.
“Their plans depend upon the Templar Treasure: the Piece of Eden… but we hold it now, and they cannot hope to achieve their goals without it.”
Of course, Altaïr mused; such was the item that so many of his targets had referred to.
“What is this treasure?” he asked.
Master Mualim smiled, clearly pleased to hear the question. Moving to the rear of his chamber, the Master bent and opened a chest. Taking a box from inside that chest, the Master returned to his desk and placed the box down upon it. Altaïr realized what it had to be not a second before Master Mualim had done so, but even then he still found his gaze drawn – almost forced – back to the box. It was the same one that Alnesr had been carrying when he and Malik had returned from the Temple Mount, and as before it seemed to radiate a kind of power.
Not so much that he found he could not allow his gaze to leave it, the way that Alnesr had seemed to be affected, but enough so that Altaïr found himself fully aware of just how much of a hold that whatever was inside that box could have on the mind of any who beheld it. The Master’s expression was one of indulgence, as though he had seen many people react in such a way to this Templar Treasure of his.
The Master reached into the box, fetching up… a globe: it was the size of two fists held together, golden and with mosaic designs all over the surface. Altaïr did not know what to make of the device; wondering if his senses were deceived in some manner, for he almost felt as though the globe itself were alive, in some fashion. He found himself distracted, however; the globe was pulling at him… he could feel it, though he tried to resist.
“It is… temptation,” the Master intoned.
As soon as he became aware of his own reaction to the device, however, the draw that the device had on him was ended. He could still see the mosaic patterns etched into the surface of the device, but they no longer pulsed with light, and the device itself no longer carried the semblance of life that it once had. It was a well-made thing, he could allow, but nothing more than a mere trinket.
“It’s just a piece of silver,” he said.
“Look at it,” the Master insisted, holding the device up for examination.
“It shimmers for the briefest moment, but there’s nothing truly spectacular about it,” he said, though he had peered closer to satisfy the Master’s insistence. “What am I supposed to see?”
“This “piece of silver” cast out Adam and Eve. This is the Apple. It turned staves into snakes. Parted and closed the Red Sea. Eris used it to start the Trojan War. And with it, a poor carpenter turned water into wine.”
The Apple of Eden? He looked at the device doubtfully. “It seems rather plain for all the power you claim it has. How does it work?”
“He who holds it commands the hearts and minds of whoever looks upon it; whoever “tastes of it”, as they say,” the Master said.
“Then, Naplouse’s men…” he trailed off, thinking of the poor creatures that he and Alnesr had seen in the hospital that the Templar had presided over.
“An experiment,” the Master said. “Herbs used to simulate its effects, to be prepared for when they held it.”
He could see now: “Talal supplied them; Tamir equipped them. They were preparing for something. But what?”
“War,” the Master said plainly.
“And the others, the men who ruled the cites,” he turned his gaze inward, beginning to realize the full extent of the Templars’ machinations. “They meant to gather up their people, make them like Naplouse’s men.”
“The perfect citizens; the perfect soldiers,” the Master said. “A perfect world.”
“Robert de Sable must never have this back,” he said, narrowing his eyes at the device in Master Mualim’s right hand.
“So long as he and his brothers live, they will seek it out,” Master Mualim said, though he seemed pleased once more.
“Then they must die as well.”
“Which is what I have had you doing,” the Master said, smiling once more. “There are two more Templars who require your attention: one in Acre, known as Sibrand. The other in Damascus, called Jubair. Visit with the Bureau leaders; they will instruct you further.”
Chapter 52: Truth seeking
Chapter Text
“As you wish,” he said, bowing. “However, I would know how Alnesr fares, before I leave.”
“Your concern for the boy does you credit, Altaïr,” the Master said with a smile; though Altaïr did not know what to make of the look in his eyes. “He continues to be well, though his work keeps him busy. Now, you had best hurry: no doubt Robert de Sable is made nervous by our continued success. His remaining followers will do their best to expose you. They know you come for them: the man in the white hood. They will be looking for you.”
“They won’t find me: I’m but a blade in the crowd.”
Master Mualim smiled once again, and indicated a familiar sword upon his desk; Altaïr had taken note of it when he entered, but chosen not to mention it until or unless the Master chose to call his attention to it. “Here: my gift to you. In gratitude for the good work you’ve done.”
“Thank you, Master,” he said, bowing as he took his sword and left the room.
Chapter 53: Silver and light
Chapter Text
“I must commend your mentor, Alnesr. He has a very strong Heart.”
That same voice again; echoing around and around him through the light, until Alnesr could not discern just where it might have come from at all. Still, he was not going to let such a thing stop him from gathering what information he could. “What do you mean?”
“You may come to know that soon enough, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
Again! It was as though the man was deliberately trying to infuriate him! Mastering himself with an effort of will, Alnesr resolved that he would no longer take the taunting of this arrogant man as anything but empty words.
“Commendable of you, Alnesr. I wonder, however: just how long can you last?”
Narrowing his eyes, knowing that there was very little chance of the strange man answering any of his questions, and yet curious to know what he was about all the same, Alnesr turned his thoughts inward. He might not have known precisely how it was that he had come to be trapped within this strange, featureless world of light, yet he suspected that such had a great deal to do with the treasure that Master Mualim had shown to him. The Master could not have known that it would harm him in such a strange way, however, and so Alnesr forgave him his curiosity.
It was the way of the Assassins, after all: to seek the truth of things.
Chapter 54: Back again to Acre
Chapter Text
When he left for Acre once more, after a night of sleep that had not been entirely as restful as he would have wished, Altaïr tried to make himself put aside the uncertainty he felt. Alnesr did not need a nursemaid hovering over him at all times – the younger Assassin had proved himself more than capable during the time that the two of them had worked together – and the look in the Master’s eyes had likely been nothing more than his imaginings fueled by the Piece of Eden. The Master had said that those who tasted of it became enthralled by the device. It was likely some product of that: since the device had been unable to touch his mind, it instead sought to poison it.
As he continued on the road that would take him to Acre, Altaïr found himself becoming more and more certain that such was indeed what had happened. And so, resolving to master himself all the more after coming into contact with such a potentially dangerous device as the Apple of Eden that Master Mualim had showed to him, Altaïr turned his mind to what he was going to be doing in Acre. The Templar Sibrand would be the one to taste his blade this day.
As he came into sight of the battle-scarred city of Acre once more, Altaïr wondered just how many more times he would be required to come back to this wounded city before his work was done. And yet, it was not his lot, to decide where his skill was best used; the Master had a plan, to rid the Holy Land of the Templars who sought to control it, and Altaïr’s duty was to make sure that such was allowed to happen. It was his duty to carry out the missions that Master Mualim assigned to him; to ensure that the Templars fell so that the people they would otherwise threaten would be able to live free without their oppressive presence.
With that thought to fortify him, Altaïr continued on his way closer to the battle-scarred, pitted walls of the city of Acre – with the broken, charred remains of a wooden wall placed before them in an effort to further deter any who would think to try to enter the city – dismounting from his horse and leaving the beast once more in the care of a stable hand that he was able to find. Turning his gaze back again to the city itself, Altaïr faded carefully away from the watchful eyes of what small crowds there were, and set about scaling the pitted walls themselves. Entering the city above the heads of those who had been placed in front of it as defenders, Altaïr breathed more easily once he was within the walls once more.
After he hand managed to bring himself out of the line of sight of the guards, Altaïr descended neatly back to the ground after a careful search for those who might have been close enough to see him. Once he was merely one of many anonymous figures moving through the streets of Acre, on his way to some business that the citizens there neither knew nor seemed to care about, Altaïr began to make his way to the Bureau so that he might meet once more with the Rafiq and thereby receive more details about Sibrand.
So that he might better know the man who was to taste his blade, before the moment came when he was called to strike.
As he continued on his way deeper into Acre, allowing the crowds themselves to conceal him from those who might have thought to track his movements, he couldn’t help but take note of the sorry state of the city once more. He and the Brotherhood had done all that they were able to, to prevent both the Templars and the scourge of the war itself from ravaging this city, but there was only so much that even they had managed. It was a sad thing, but Altaïr could at least content himself with the knowledge that he was here to alleviate at least some of Acre’s suffering.
Returning to the rooftops after he had found a clear place to ascend from, Altaïr made his way swiftly over them and to the entrance of the Bureau once more. Climbing back down into the building, feeling the same sense of comfort that he had when he was within the walls of Masyaf, if to a lesser degree than that which the old fortress and its sprawling grounds had provided him with, Altaïr made his way into the room where Acre’s Rafiq performed his duties.
Chapter 55: Tracking the Teutonic
Chapter Text
“Greetings, Altaïr,” the Rafiq said. “What news?”
“Al Mualim has named another: calls himself Sibrand.”
“I am familiar with the man,” the Rafiq said calmly. “Newly appointed leader of the Knights Teutonic. He resides in the Venetian Quarter, and runs Acre’s port.”
“I’ll start my work at once,” he said, pleased once more not to be dealing with any of the complicated feelings he was prey to when working with Malik in Jerusalem.
“Here are the places where you should focus your search: on the docks east of here, among the ships and their crews; at the chapel to the northeast, with the cross overlooking the port; and to the north, in front of Saint John’s Gate.”
“This is most helpful,” he said, pleased to have the information he needed to continue his work. “My thanks for the guidance.”
“Altaïr?”
“Yes, Rafiq?”
“I owe you an apology,” the man said; he was surprised to hear such a thing, considering the words that they had previously exchanged.
“For what?”
“For doubting your dedication to our cause,” the Rafiq said.
“No,” he shook his head; he’d fully deserved what the man had said to him, time and reflection had allowed him to realize this. “It was I who erred: I believed myself above the Creed. You owe me nothing.”
“As you wish, my friend,” the Rafiq said, smiling cordially at him, no trace of his earlier unease in evidence at all. “Go in safety.”
“Safety and peace, my friend,” he said, turning to make his way back into the room that he had entered from.
Passing under the patch of sky that was revealed by the Bureau’s entrance, Altaïr climbed upon the ornamental fountain and began making his way back out. Regaining the rooftops once more, he set out to find the information that he would need to deal with Sibrand when the time came.
Making his way over the rooftops and away from the Bureau so that he could safely descend to the ground without the chance of compromising the security of the Bureau itself, Altaïr did so and then made his way out of the alley that he had entered and back into the city at large. Blending into the crowds once more, Altaïr took care to listen for those whose conversations might lead him to the information he would need to deal with Sibrand when the time came.
As he continued on his way deeper into the city, he listened for the sounds of idle conversation that would lead him to the first bit of information that he would be able to use to begin piecing together a plan that would enable him to kill Sibrand without exposing the Brotherhood to undue strife, and hence free Acre from the tyranny of the Templars’ attempts at ruling it. He could hear the muttering and idle chatter of the citizens all around him, as though he was standing in the midst of a tranquil sea that was yet occasionally stirred by breezes off the shore, and Altaïr smiled slightly at the sounds of the crowd all around him; life at its most human.
It was this that he and the Brotherhood acted to protect; this that the Templars and all of their high-handed, grandiose plans ultimately threatened.
Chapter 56: A bit less certainty
Chapter Text
Turning his mind once again to his work, Altaïr opened his ears and took in the swirl of conversations happening all around him; he passed an Informant on his way through the city: the man standing at ease under the shadow of a doorway in a lesser-frequented part of the city. Though he was not particularly fond of the tasks those placed in the role would ask of him, now that he had seen the man, Altaïr thought it best to be done with such a thing. Sometimes these men possessed information worth his time.
“Did they let you into the city, or did you fight your way in?” the Informant asked; Altaïr narrowed his eyes in slight annoyance, and then the Informant sighed. “Perhaps I should be more respectful.” Something they could both agree upon. “As I, myself, now require your help: I spent too much time in the harbor brothel last night, and insulted a Teutonic Knight’s wife. Or, so I am told,” the man said, scratching his head. “Now there is a group of them after me. Could you give me a hand, or a blade? If you return before I leave the city, I will give you the benefit of my wisdom.”
Altaïr could have easily questioned the purported wisdom of a man who had been so careless with his words as to invite the fury of those currently in control of this city, but that would have only served to waste time he might not have had. So, with a sharp nod to the Informant to let the man know of his intentions, Altaïr moved off into the city. A moment of concentration had the world taking on the subtle glow of intent as those around him became haloed by a light that he still did not know if any but him could see.
Those of particular interest to him were haloed in soft gold: as in the case of the three men who were clearly hounding the Informant whose cause he had taken up in exchange for the information that the man would be able to provide for him. Ascending to the rooftops once again, fully prepared to rain death upon his chosen targets, Altaïr had soon regained the high-ground and was steadily stalking the Knights who had set themselves after the Informant he was currently protecting.
Carefully tracking them with his gaze until the gold-haloed figures had each left the protection of the crowds they were moving through, Altaïr killed the men one-by-one as they each left the citizens who had been unknowingly sheltering them behind. Once he was finished with the task – not nearly so onerous as those that other Informants had asked from him in the past – he made his way back down to the ground, finding the Informant still standing in the doorway that he had positioned himself in, though now the man seemed to carry the mien of one hunted.
If what the man had said to him had indeed been the truth, however – though Altaïr had not been given a reason to doubt the man’s word, and had also been given confirmation of the men’s own ill-intent from his senses – such had indeed been the case.
“You are a lucky man,” the Informant said, sounding as though he also extended that sentiment to himself as well; a natural thing, Altaïr mused, for one who had escaped death so narrowly. “You are alive, and I am still in Acre. Here is what I have to tell: the only thing more dangerous than a drunken sailor is one who is also angry. I know it does not seem like much, but with your wisdom, I am sure it will help.”
A proverb? Altaïr mused, as the Informant hurried away, mindful of those who may have been interested in his progress for all the wrong reasons. It did not seem as though such a thing would be of any help to him with such a mission as the one before him now, and yet information was still information. Best he left it aside for the time being, and attended to the task at hand.
Turning his thoughts back to the information that he would need to gather to deal with Sibrand at last, Altaïr began to hear the sound of a man speaking at volume over an unhappy crowd. The reason for such unhappiness was clear: someone – likely Sibrand himself – had decreed that all ships were to be turned over to the Teutonic Knights, or those who owned and operated them would face imprisonment. Clearly, this man would know something about his target, and regardless: this was a thing that could not be allowed to stand.
Moving to confront the man making his speech to the crowds, Altaïr slowed to a walk; pacing the man so that he would not be seen by the still-grumbling citizens, even as they disbursed to go about what business they could in light of the new decree. Like as not, they would be pleased once he managed to rid them of Sibrand; one less Templar influence upon the city. Discreetly following the man as he made his way away from the stone overlook where he had been speaking, Altaïr smiled thinly as the unknowing man eventually made his way out of the sight of the guards – though there were more of them in Acre than in any other city he had set foot in thus far: more Templar influence, that – and into a narrow, blind alley where Altaïr could strike out at him without the risk of bringing the wrath of guards or Knights down upon his head.
However, this man was at least somewhat skilled in the art of combat; a thing Altaïr wondered at even as he broke the man’s guard and beat down his resistance with sheer force. He had only a moment to wonder if the increased resistance he had faced from the man before him was a product of Sibrand’s increasing paranoia in the face of his fellow Templars’ deaths at Altaïr’s own hands, or if this man had simply known how to fight as well as being an adept speaker before a crowd.
“It’s not my fault!” the man shouted, once Altaïr had subdued the uncommon resistance that the man had put up. “I’m only following orders! If you want your ship back, speak with the court!”
“That’s not what I’m after,” he said simply.
“Then what?!”
“Sibrand’s claimed near a hundred ships,” he said, eyes narrowing; both in thought, and to further cow the man into submission so that he would continue speaking as he did. “For what purpose?”
“A blockade. They’re to sail for open water, and establish a perimeter,” the man said, his voice beginning to quaver just the slightest bit.
“For what?” he demanded. “Does Salah Al’din intend to strike from the sea?”
“No,” the man said quickly; more Templar trickery then, Altaïr mused. “It’s not he we defend against, but ships from home! To deny Richard more troops!”
“Why would one of Richard’s own want to see him weakened in this way?” he demanded, wanting to know if this man was truly a part of Sibrand’s circle, or if his uncommon skill had merely been that: uncommon skill.
“I don’t know. Ask Sibrand,” the man said, the expression on his face one of genuine confusion; it seemed, then, that this one was indeed not a Templar. “They’re his orders. I’m just meant to carry them out. Now, please, let me go? I’ve told you all I know.”
“I’m sorry,” he said; they were not empty words: he did indeed regret the uninvolved lives that he needed to take. “I cannot risk you telling him I’m here.”
Finishing the man quickly and cleanly with his Hidden Blade, Altaïr made his way out of the alley and back into the bustling crowds of Acre before the guards could come to investigate the corpse that he had left behind. He’d no wish to expose himself, not now of all times, and certainly not in the face of a Templar who had already become aware of the swift death that stalked him and the rest of his brothers-in-arms.
His ears catching the sound of a conversation, Altaïr slowed so that he might hear it better.
“Deed’s done: I’ve moved the last of the food stores onto his ship this morning,” said a man; one of a pair of them, both wearing nondescript, shapeless, darkly-colored clothing.
“How much is that?” the other man asked.
“Enough for several weeks,” the first man said.
“What’s he planning, I wonder?” mused the second man; Altaïr suspected he knew the answer to such a question, suspected even that he was the answer to such a question.
However, such was not a question that he was in a position to answer.
“Perhaps he intends to flee,” the first man said, scratching his head; either that or rubbing at his hair. Altaïr was not in a position to determine which. “Something’s got him very scared.” Altaïr smiled thinly. “Anyway, I must be off. He asked that I deliver a letter to a courier at Saint John’s Gate. I best not keep him waiting.”
Fixing his eyes on the first man who had been speaking for such a long time, Altaïr concentrated briefly and saw the man limed in soft gold, making him all the simpler to follow. Such a nondescript man would have been all too easily lost in the crowds otherwise. Moving swiftly and silently in a moment of the man’s inattention to his surroundings, Altaïr swept past him, lifting the letter and carefully secreting it away within a hidden pouch inside his own robes.
Breaking his own path away from where the man was still walking, Altaïr continued on his way through the city. He had a great deal more information than when he had first started – he knew some of what to expect, at least – but there would perhaps be more he could find out within the city. More information that would provide him with an even greater advantage; particularly against a man like Sibrand.
Returning to the rooftops once more, he crossed to another alley and then descended once more back into the streets of Acre. His mind made up now: he would search out as much information as he could find within the middle district, so that when the time came for him to deal with Sibrand, he would not be caught unprepared for what he might need to do. Opening his ears to the voices of the citizens around him once again, Altaïr found himself catching wind of another conversation.
This one between a Knight and a bald man in a black tunic:
“I’ll tell him myself,” the Knight said.
“No! I won’t have you damned soldiers poking about in my business,” the black-clad man said, an air of finality about him; Altaïr wondered if this one was brave, foolish, or just too angry to care about potential consequences.
“Listen here, old man-!”
“No! You listen to me!” the old man snapped; it seemed he truly was too angry to care about the consequences that his words could so easily bring down upon himself. “This is my property, not his! I don’t care if Christ Himself put the man in charge!”
“He isn’t asking: it’s an order,” the Knight snapped.
The old man laughed harshly. “That’s rich. The man couldn’t order his way out of a burlap sack!” the old man said derisively. “I’ve seen the mess he’s made of the docks,” the old man said, gesturing back in the direction of such with off-handed contempt. “I won’t let him ruin mine!”
“Just read the letter,” the Knight said irritably; Altaïr looked up in interest. “You’ll see his terms are quite generous.”
“I grow tired of this,” the old man said dismissively. “I’ll consider what he has to offer, but I doubt it’ll change my mind,” the old man said, waving his right hand in dismissal of the Knight before him. “Now go on; get out of here.”
Stalking closer to the old man – bald, and white-bearded as the man was – Altaïr slipped past him and into the bustle of Acre at large, lifting the note as he went. Once that too had been accomplished, all without alerting the old graybeard to his presence, Altaïr continued to make his way through the city, all the while taking care to watch and listen for things that might be of interest to him.
Finding his way back through the middle district once more, Altaïr turned and turned to take in the city and the people around him, paying particular attention to any word about the docks, the conditions in the city at large, or mentions of Sibrand himself or the Knights Teutonic as a whole.
As he continued on his way through the city’s middle district, Altaïr chanced to come across another of the Informants that had been scattered throughout the city. It seemed to be his day for them, Altaïr mused, as he drew closer to the man in his travel-stained and hooded robes; one could mistake them as a true member of the Brotherhood, if one did not know what to look for.
The man himself was standing at ease in an alcove, within the shade of a well-maintained walled garden, just out of sight of anyone who might have thought to stroll through.
“Ah, Altaïr!” the man exclaimed, sounding unaccountably pleased to see him; most likely because of some difficulty he’d been having. “Demons are after me! Demons with a black cross! They want me dead. Me! Can you imagine?” Likely this Informant had been either careless or unlucky; with Sibrand’s growing paranoia, it was hard to tell the difference. “If you see them, tell them to go away: but use your blade. It’s the only language demons understand.” Altaïr would have sighed; even an Informant should know better than to stoop to superstition. “Please, return when you are done, and I will have something for you.”
With a sharp nod, to indicate both his understanding and his acceptance of this task that had been asked of him, Altaïr turned and left the walled alcove where the two of them had been speaking. Making his way back into the city at large, Altaïr concentrated and saw the citizens haloed in the colors of intent. Turning his gaze to those who had been limned in soft gold, Altaïr ascended to the rooftops so that he could once more stalk them without being seen.
A knife each for the five men who had threatened the life that he had been asked to save, and Altaïr was able to swiftly return to the man’s side. He wondered, even as he did so, just what tales such a timid one as that would be able to tell him, but then he was like as not to find out soon. Once he had been given such information as the timid Informant was able to give him, Altaïr considered it and then stored it away for later. He’d become rather fed up with Informants in general – all of the running about had firmly reminded him again of just another reason why he had been so pleased to have Alnesr as his Apprentice – and so resolved to ignore any further encounters he might chance to have with them.
Turning his path deeper into the city once again, Altaïr settled himself down on a bench when he began to hear a rather pertinent conversation.
“It’s gettin’ worse,” the first of the pair of Knights that he had stopped to observe said.
“His paranoia knows no bounds,” the second one agreed.
“He’s doubled our shifts; no one sleeps,” the first said.
“It wasn’t so bad, ‘till he decided to make the port his home.”
“He’s planning something at sea,” the first said; Altaïr had thought as such. “That’s why he came here.”
“Planning what?” the second demanded, in a tone of incredulity. “What’s the meaning of this?”
“Look at the two of you: off in a corner, whispering! Plotting!” a larger Knight who had just arrived, this one with a square jaw, large frame, and pale blond hair.
“We weren’t doin’ nothing of the sort, we was only-”
“Only what?!” the large-framed Knight – from the fear visible in all three men’s body-language, Altaïr began to suspect that this new Knight was Sibrand himself – demanded. “What secrets are you keeping?!”
“You misunderstand,” the first Knight said, sounding cowed.
“Damned Assassins, they’re probably here right now!” the Knight who seemed more and more likely to be Sibrand himself raved. “Watching us! Do you find this amusing?! Do you?! Well laugh while you can! Double the patrols!”
“Which ones?” the first Knight asked.
“All of them!” the man Altaïr was almost certain was Sibrand raved.
“But, we don’t have the men,” the first Knight said, still clearly cowed in the face of Sibrand’s growing madness.
“Find them! Recall our Knights from the field if you must!”
Waiting a few moments after Sibrand had departed, just long enough for his Knights to do the same, Altaïr rose from the bench he’d been seated at and calmly blended back into the crowds. He had what information he needed, and could now return to the Bureau to speak with Jabal once more. And from there, take up Master Mualim’s marker, and see to it that Sibrand could no longer threaten the people of Acre ever again.
Regaining the rooftops once more, Altaïr swiftly made his way back to the Bureau’s entrance, and from there back down inside.
“Greetings, brother,” Jabal said, sounding pleased as ever to see him once more. “How fares your search?”
“I’ve learned all there is to know about my target,” he said, reflecting on what he had seen and heard when Sibrand had made himself known to him amid the discussion of those Knights.
“Share your knowledge with me, then,” Jabal instructed gently.
“Sibrand is said to be consumed by fear,” he stated; and, sure enough, he had seen ample evidence of that fear for himself. “Driven mad by the knowledge that his death approaches. He has sealed the docks district, and now hides within, waiting for his ship to arrive.”
“This will make things dangerous,” Jabal said, leaning over the counter he stood behind. “I wonder how it is that he learned of your mission?”
“The men I’ve killed: they are all connected. Master Mualim warned me that word of my deeds had spread among them,” he said; Jabal sighed heavily.
“Be on your guard, Altaïr,” Jabal said, reaching under his counter to fetch the marker, and then handing it over.
“Of course, Rafiq,” he said, pleased by his fellow’s concern even as he took the marker from him. “But I think this will be to my advantage: fear will weaken him.”
“Safety and peace then, brother,” Jabal said.
“Upon you as well, Rafiq,” he said, nodding to Jabal as he turned and made his way back out into the secondary room of the Bureau.
A short rest quickly fortified him for the task that he was soon to undertake, and Altaïr swiftly rose from the pile of sheets and cushions that served as bedding. Scaling the wall, he regained the rooftops once more and swiftly began making for the docks. It was more than likely, given the blind panic that Sibrand was now prey to, that he would have to move quickly to catch up with the man before he was able to cast off.
Once he had reached a point close enough to the docks to be within sight of them when he descended once more from the rooftops, Altaïr did so when he found an empty corridor. Making his way over to the gathered crowd, Altaïr blended in among them and waited for the moment when he would be able to strike. However, it seemed that Sibrand had something else to distract him.
Chapter 57: Sibrand
Chapter Text
“Y-you are mistaken, Master Sibrand,” a man dressed in the white robes of the priesthood said, his nervous stutter audible even from where Altaïr stood among the back of the gathered crowd; clearly, Sibrand’s paranoia had claimed another. “I would never propose violence against a-any man. And most certainly not against you.”
Sure enough, this was indeed the Knight that he had seen during his time spent observing the interactions of two of his fellow Knights. It was more than clear, now that he was seeing the man closer, that the paranoia he had seen and been told of was nothing less than the complete truth. Sibrand was as heavily armed as he had ever seen a man; moreso than even Talal, Tamir, or Majd Addin; his belt was laden with swords, and he had a full quiver of arrows.
“So you say,” the Knight snarled. “And yet, no one here will vouch for you. What am I to make of this?”
“I live a simple life, my lord,” the priest said; Altaïr could see that he had begun to shiver, and he could hear the fear in the man’s voice. “As do all men of the cloth. It is not for us to call attention to ourselves.”
“Perhaps,” Sibrand said, closing his eyes briefly; then they snapped open, alit with fury. “Or perhaps they do not know you because you are not a man of God, but an Assassin!” Sibrand shoved the priest, off-balancing the old man and causing him to fall to the ground; the old man scrambled back to his feet.
“No; never,” he insisted.
“You wear the same robes,” the Knight growled; Altaïr reflected that the guise of the Assassins was a useful thing, even though some innocents such as this man were made to suffer for the fear of those who tried to escape their fate.
“If they cover themselves as we do, it is only to instill uncertainty and fear,” the priest said, clearly desperate to escape from Sibrand and his madness before it could consume him. “You must not give in!”
“Are you calling me a coward?!” Sibrand snarled. “Challenging my authority?! Perhaps hoping to turn my own knights against me?!”
“No- no! I-I don’t understand why you’re doing this to me,” the old man stuttered, terrified. “I’ve done nothing wrong!”
“I don’t recall accusing you of any wrongdoing,” Sibrand snapped. “Which makes your outburst rather odd. Is it the presence of guilt that compels your confession?!”
“But- but I confessed nothing!”
“Ah, defiant until the end!” Sibrand shouted in triumph. “How like your kind!”
“What do you mean?!” Altaïr watched as the old priest’s expression turned swiftly from confusion to fear, and then to desperation and hopelessness.
“Garnier and William were too confident, and they both paid for that with their lives,” Sibrand hissed. “I won’t make the same mistake: if you are truly a man of God, then surely the Creator will provide for you. Let Him stay my hand!”
“You’ve gone mad!” the old priest cried out in terror, turning an imploring gaze upon the spectators within the crowd. “Will none of you come forward to stop this?! He is clearly poisoned by his own fear! Compelled to see enemies where none exist!”
None of those within the crowd, however, were willing to make themselves the targets of Sibrand’s outraged paranoia. And Altaïr, though he pitied the old man for his misfortune, could not allow his mission to be compromised for the sake of one life. Acre would be better for Sibrand’s death, and no more would die like this old man. He could hold his peace for the sake of that.
“It seems that the people share my concern,” Sibrand said, his madness clearly vindicated within his own mind. “What I do, I do for Acre.”
Altaïr narrowed his eyes, watching as Sibrand drove his long sword into the old priest’s gut, twisted, and then pulled the blade free. Wiping it clean as the old priest writhed, dying, upon the ground at his feet. Sibrand’s underlings, more of his Knights, picked up the corpse and threw it into the water. Sibrand watched the priest’s body sink slowly away, a look of contempt on his face.
“Stay vigilant, men,” Sibrand ordered. “Report any suspicious activity to the guard. I doubt we’ve seen the last of these Assassins. Persistent bastards,” he growled. “Now get back to work.”
Moving closer, careful to make certain that he remained concealed by the crowds still milling about on the dock, Altaïr observed Sibrand as the man and two of his Knights climbed into a rowboat and cast off. Watching as they navigated through the crowded waters, through the maze of boats, and up to a skiff anchored far out in the water. Sibrand’s gaze was frantic now; as though he thought his death was going to come from the water itself.
And, Altaïr mused, that was precisely what he was going to do.
Moving to the nearest of the hulks that he had spotted, Altaïr jumped onto it and began to make his way across the water. The boats were as good as a road to someone with his skill, and soon enough he was making his way closer to the skiff where Sibrand had taken shelter. He could hear the Knight ordering his guards to hunt him down. Growling softly deep within his throat as he spotted a sentry looking his way, Altaïr sent a throwing blade at the man, and cursed the fact that he’d not been able to properly prepare his kill.
Just as he’d expected, the sentry’s corpse fell into the water with a flat splash, alerting Sibrand to the fact that the man had encountered him.
“I know you’re out there, Assassin!” the man screamed, unslinging his bow. “How long do you think you can hide?! I’ve a hundred men scouring the docks! They’ll find you, and when they do you’ll suffer for your sins!”
Staying close to the frame of a platform, out of sight of any of those who might be hunting him, Altaïr moved forward and every closer. Sibrand was calling upon him to show himself, ranting and raving in such a way as to make his fear all the more obvious to one who had tasted such before. Putting aside the words of the dead man he was stalking, Altaïr started up the side of the skiff and dropped back to the deck plating; Sibrand was already dead, killed as much by his own fear as Altaïr’s actions.
It was time the Knight was made to understand that.
“Please… don’t do this,” the Knight pleaded, even as Altaïr had deployed his Hidden Blade to deal with him at last.
“You are afraid,” he commented; it was not an uncommon thing, to see the man he hunted in such states, and in this case he had come to expect it.
Truly, anyone who looked would have seen the Knight’s fear.
“Of course I am afraid!” Sibrand retorted, his tone that of one who was speaking to an imbecile.
“But you’ll be safe now,” he said, wondering just what it was that Sibrand still feared; now at the end of things. “Held in the arms of your God.”
Sibrand’s laugh was more akin to the bark of a wounded dog. “Have my brothers taught you nothing? I know what waits for me. For all of us.”
“If not your God, then what?”
“Nothing,” Sibrand said, a broken, despairing smile on his face. “Nothing waits. And that is what I fear.”
“You don’t believe?”
“How could I, given what I know?” the Knight asked. “What I’ve seen? Our treasure was the proof.”
“Proof of what?” he asked.
“That this life is all we have.”
“Linger awhile longer, then,” he said. “And tell me of the part you were to play.”
“A blockade by sea,” the Knight said. “To keep the fool kings and queens from sending reinforcements. Once we had… once we…”
“Conquered the Holy Land?” he prompted, to see what Sibrand would say in response.
The Knight coughed wetly, slathering his lips and teeth with fresh blood. “Freed it, you fool. From the tyranny of faith.”
“Freedom?” he echoed; it was not a word he’d ever expected to hear from a Templar. “You worked to overthrow cities. Control men’s minds. Murdered any who spoke against you-”
“I followed my orders, believing in my cause,” Sibrand cut him off, his eyes already becoming glassy and unfocused in death. “Same as you…”
“Do not be afraid,” he said, reaching out to gently close the Knight’s eyes at last.
Rising quickly from his crouch, Altaïr swiftly made his way back across the water – jumping from boat, to post, to boat, to dock – until he stood once more upon solid ground. He was pleased to have returned: while the needs of his mission might have dictated that he cross the water, such had never been a thing that he preferred. And, while it was true that he could swim if he was called upon by circumstances to do so, it was not a thing that he enjoyed doing.
Chapter 58: Returning with questions
Chapter Text
Returning to the rooftops as the alarm bells of Acre began to toll, Altaïr took a moment to conceal himself from the searching eyes of a group of archers, then resumed his swift pace once more. Once he had returned to the Bureau for the second time that day, he made his way back down into the cool, shadowed darkness of the back room. Stepping down from the ornamental fountain once more, Altaïr continued into the Bureau’s front room.
“Altaïr, you’ve caused quite a stir,” Jabal said, smiling with gentle good-humor.
“I’ve done as requested: Sibrand’s life is ended,” he said, offering the bloodstained marker back again to Jabal.
“So it is,” the Rafiq said, taking back the marker as Altaïr handed it to him. “You should ride for Masyaf and inform Al Mualim of your success.”
“Yes,” he said, already contemplating just what he would say to the Master when they met again; and what he would ask, as well. “I should speak to him. Of this and other things.”
“Is everything all right, my friend?” Jabal asked, and Altaïr was pleased to note the genuine concern both in Jabal’s tone and his eyes. “You seem… distant.”
“It’s nothing, Rafiq,” he said, not wishing to trouble the other man with a thing that was, in the end, his problem to see solved. “Just a lot on my mind.”
“Talk to me,” Jabal said, his tone kindly. “Let me help.”
“I need to make sense of this myself, first,” he said. “But, thank you for the offer.”
“It is the men you kill, isn’t it?” Jabal asked; the man had always been perceptive. Altaïr was not certain that such a thing was a boon to him, now of all times. “You feel… something for them.”
“How did you know?” he asked; yes, it was true that he’d always known Jabal to be observant, but he’d liked to think that he was more opaque than most.
“Ah, my friend, you are not meant to enjoy these grim tasks,” Jabal said, pacing behind his counter as he spoke. “Regret, uncertainty, sympathy; this is to be expected.”
“I should not fear these feelings?” It was, perhaps, a rhetorical question, but he wanted to know how Jabal would answer.
“You should embrace them,” Jabal said with certainty. “They are what keep you human.”
“What if I’m wrong?” he asked, wanting more certainty than he had, though he knew even as he asked that Jabal was not likely to provide such for him. “What if these men are not meant to die? What if they mean well? Misguided, perhaps, but pure in motive?” It was a thing that he had come to ask himself more and more often, of late, and while it felt good to speak such words aloud, Altaïr did not hope for an answer from Jabal.
“I am but a Rafiq, Altaïr,” Jabal said, just as Altaïr had known he would. “And such things are beyond me. Perhaps Al Mualim can help you to make sense of it.”
“Yes,” he said; it was not surprising to him, to hear such a thing. He’d not been hoping for answers here, after all. “Perhaps. Thank you, Rafiq.”
“It is my pleasure to have served with one as skillful as you,” Jabal said, nodding in gentle dismissal.
Knowing that it was best that he get some rest before he started for Masyaf once more – both so that he would be more alert during his journey, and so that the guards would be given time to conduct their searches and find them to be fruitless – Altaïr made his way back into the secondary room of the Bureau, and there settled himself down to rest. Once he had awakened from his rest, Altaïr climbed back up to the rooftops, and began to make his way out of Acre once more.
Chapter 59: Damascus once more
Chapter Text
Leaving the city in much the same way he had entered – over the heads of those who had been set to guard it – Altaïr made his way back to the stable where he had left the horse he’d rode out of Masyaf. Mounting up once more, he made his way away from the battle-scarred walls of Acre once more. Breathing more easily once he had returned to the open road once more, Altaïr drank some of his water and mentally prepared himself for a long journey.
As the days passed, each one of them bringing him closer to Masyaf and the citadel of the Brotherhood that presided over the valley, Altaïr considered just what it was that he would ask of Master Mualim when the two of them occasioned to meet again. He would ask as to Alnesr’s welfare, of course; apprenticed to him or not, he still cared a great deal for the younger Assassin and wished him well. He would also ask just what the Templars that he hunted ultimately wished to accomplish.
What their ultimate aims were, and if they might be reasoned with.
Once he’d come within sight of Masyaf once more, Altaïr breathed more deeply and easily than he had during the time that he had been traveling. Here, at least, he would begin to gain more of the answers he sought. Leaving his horse with the stable hands, Altaïr dismounted and began making his way back into the citadel itself. Ascending through the varied levels of the fortress, he soon found himself entering Master Mualim’s study once more.
“Welcome home, child,” Master Mualim greeted him cordially, and Altaïr nodded his head with respect. “What news?”
“Another of the named is put to rest,” he reported.
“Then it would appear your work is nearly complete, and your status restored,” the Master said, sounding nearly as pleased as Altaïr felt at the prospect.
“A question, Master, if I may?”
“You need not worry so about the fate of your adopted son,” the Master said, a kindly smile on his face. “He fares very well, and still speaks quite highly of you.”
“My thanks for your consideration, Master, but that was not what I meant to ask,” he said; and he was pleased to know that Alnesr remained well, though he would have been far more pleased to speak with the younger Assassin in person.
“What is, then?”
“Why these men?” he asked. “Jubair and Sibrand?”
“Ah, don’t you see?” Master Mualim asked, in the tone of one who was imparting yet another lesson. “They paved the way for change. Ensure that threats both old and new are not given cause to intervene.”
“To weaken them is to weaken our enemy,” he stated. “I suppose that makes sense.”
“Were these men to continue their work, our own work would quickly be undone,” Master Mualim said, his tone as stern and serious as Altaïr had ever heard it.
“How is that?” he asked, certain that he had failed to see some connection that the Master would soon explain to him. “We’ve caused them much grief.”
“We strike at the arms, yes, but this is a hydra that you face,” the Master said, gesturing widely to emphasize the point that he was making. “And it is quick to replace that which is severed.”
“Then we should lop off its head and be done with this,” he said, his resolve becoming more firm with every word that he and the Master spoke with one another.
“Soon. Soon,” the Master said. “We are close; only one more man stands between us and our ultimate goal.”
“I will return to my work,” he said, nodding to the Master. “The sooner this last man dies, the sooner I might face our true enemy.”
“Before you go, I have a question for you,” the Master said.
“Of course,” he said, stopping before he could even begin to make his way out of the Master’s study and back to his own room; eager though he might have been to have this particular task over and done with, Altaïr knew that it would be best that he took some rest before he began the return journey to Damascus once again.
“What is the truth?”
“We place faith in ourselves; we see the world the way it really is,” he said; as he had learned from Master Mualim, and then taught to Alnesr in his own turn. “And hope that, one day, all mankind might see the same.”
“What is the world, then?”
“An illusion,” he said. “One that we can either submit to, as most do, or transcend.”
“And what is it, to transcend?” the Master asked, seeming pleased with his understanding thus far.
“To recognize that laws arise not from divinity, but from reason. I understand now that our Creed does not command us to be free, it commands us to be wise.”
He fully understood that now, and he wondered for a moment if such an understanding had been one of the lessons that he had successfully imparted to Alnesr, or if the younger Assassin had reasoned it out for himself. He would have to speak to his fellow Assassin, once Alnesr had finished with his own work and was hence given the opportunity to return to Masyaf once more.
“Do you see now why the Templars are a threat?”
He did, in fact, understand just what it was that the Master had seen in them; a thing that even Altaïr himself had not. “Whereas we would dispel the illusion, they would use it to rule.”
“Yes,” the Master said, nodding solemnly. “To reshape the world in an image more pleasing to them. That is why I sent you and your fellows to steal their treasure. That is why I keep it locked away. And that is why you kill them. So long as even one survives, so too does their desire to create a New World Order. You must now seek out Jubair. With his death, Robert de Sable will at last be vulnerable.”
“It will be done, Master,” he said, bowing slightly.
“Take some rest, and then return to your work,” the Master said kindly.
Bidding the Master to have a good rest himself, Altaïr turned and made his way out of the Master’s study and away from the tower where he kept himself. Yawning as he walked, Altaïr almost found himself making his way toward Alnesr’s new quarters, but the younger Assassin was not likely to be present at the moment, and such a thing would have served no purpose in the end. And so he turned his path back towards his own room, and soon enough found himself there.
The next morning, after he had taken the rest he needed and come out all the more refreshed for it, Altaïr made his way down to the stables so that he would be able to mount a horse and continue with his work. Taking a horse that had been provisioned for a long journey once more, Altaïr rode for Damascus for the final time.
The journey itself was as calm as he could expect, and he was pleased in a distant sort of way to be able to complete the last of his tasks before he would be able to come to grips with Robert de Sable at last. Making his way up to the stables that he’d used so many times before, Altaïr left his horse with one of the hands, and then made his way closer to the walls of Damascus once more. Naturally, he would need to make his way inside the city once more, and without being detected so that he would not compromise the Brotherhood as he had so carelessly done when he had faced de Sable for the first time, but Altaïr had confidence in his own training and experience.
He had already done such a thing twice before, after all.
Searching for a few moments, hearing the eager cries of those merchants who had stationed themselves outside the city walls so as to be able to cater to weary travelers, Altaïr quickly found a group of scholars making their unhurried way towards the gates of the city. Managing to pass under the very gaze of the guards who had been emplaced before the gates, Altaïr waited until he was beyond their sight before he left the group of scholars behind.
Standing within the walls of Damascus – he could not truly say that he was safe, for no Assassin was truly safe outside the walls of Masyaf – Altaïr began making his own way within the city. He knew that he would be best served by making his way to the Damascus Bureau so that he might speak with the Rafiq and so gain more information about his current target Jubair, but he also knew that such information might very easily come to him beforehand; best he kept his ears open as he walked, Altaïr decided.
Chapter 60: Tales of a mad scholar
Chapter Text
As he continued on his way through the city, taking to the rooftops once he was free of the crowds and could do such without being remarked upon, Altaïr began to make for Damascus’ Bureau. It seemed that he was not to find what information he sought before he made his way there, after all. Clearly, he would need some more precise directions for his wandering.
Coming upon the rooftop entrance once more, Altaïr climbed down into the building at last and made his way into the main room. To meet up once more with the Rafiq, and to gain the information that would allow him to remove this latest canker from Damascus.
“It’s the hero of Damascus!” the insolent Rafiq greeted him once more, arms spread wide; if there was one thing he would truly enjoy after having completed his task, it would be not having to deal with this insolent man for a great long time. “Come in! Stay awhile. Tell me all about your adventures!”
“I’m afraid I don’t have the time,” he said, not bothering to conceal the coldness of his tone.
“I see,” the insolent Rafiq said. “Too important for me now.”
“It’s not that,” he said simply.
“No. No, of course not,” the man said airily. “How may I serve you, then?”
“Al Mualim has asked that I take the life of the one they call Jubair,” he stated.
“Ah, Salah Al’din’s chief scholar,” the man commented. “Strange choice of target, in my opinion. But who are we to question the Master’s will? I’m sure he has his reasons.”
“Then you’re familiar with the man,” he prompted; he’d not thought that the Rafiq’s insolence would extend even to questioning the words of the Master, and yet Altaïr could not find it within himself to be surprised.
“He’s been quite busy these past few days,” the insolent Rafiq said. “Organizing the scholars and sending them into the streets to preach.”
“What do they speak of?” he asked; it could not have been anything good, given that the Master had sent him to end the man behind the words being spoken.
To say nothing of the fact that Jubair, akin to the rest of the nine, was a Templar.
“Light and fire; cleansing sins; apocalyptic nonsense if you ask me,” the man said, with a dismissive wave of his hands. “All this talk of paths, and a new world.”
“What about this new world?” he asked; it was exactly the words he would have expected from a Templar, yes, and so he was not surprised to hear that Jubair had spoken them.
“Couldn’t say,” the man said, with a dismissive wave of his hands. “I don’t pay much attention to the ramblings of madmen. Much too busy with real work.”
“Very well,” he said; he could not berate the man for having little interest in the words of a Templar who was nor long for this world in any case. “I’ll walk among the people; see what they have to say.” He’d been planning to do such in the first place, as he had done in so many others. “Where would you suggest I begin my search?”
“South of here you’ll find an academy and a guard tower,” the man said, waving in the general direction that he had spoken of. “They are both good places to search. There’s also a hospital to the east you might want to visit.”
“I’ll begin at once,” he said.
“So eager!” the insolent Rafiq said, and Altaïr narrowed his eyes slightly at the man’s mocking tone; he’d be more than pleased not to be forced to endure the man’s company once he was finished with the tasks that had been set before him. “You have truly changed! And for the better, I might add.”
Turning to leave without another word to the insolent Rafiq, Altaïr made his way back into the back room and out of the rooftop entrance once more. Pausing a moment to regain his composure and loosen his muscles, Altaïr made his way across the rooftops and then back down to the ground once more. Blending into the meandering crowds, allowing himself to pass under their gazes the same way that he had passed under the eyes of the guards at the gates of this city before he had even come into it, Altaïr listened for any mentions of Jubair or what exactly it was that he had been doing.
When he had at last made his way into a more wealthy-looking part of the city – not quite as opulent as the richer quarters where he had hunted for Abu’l Nuqoud, but far from appearing poor – Altaïr began to hear the sound of yet another conversation; though this one seemed far more pertinent to his interests than any he’d yet heard.
“Please, I must go,” a man in wine-dark robes and cap said to another he was facing; this one wearing a white counterpart to that one that he had on. “This letter must be delivered, and I cannot risk upsetting him.”
“Listen to yourself,” the man in white spat scornfully. “You are his puppet! Give up this task, and join us in our fight!”
“No,” the first man said; Altaïr wondered for a moment if he worked for the Templar, or if there was another consideration at hand. “I have a wife and child to think about.”
Altaïr bowed his head slightly; ever would the Templars seek to corrupt the bonds that held men together, corrupting them and turning them to their own use. It was yet another reason that he felt vindicated whenever he removed one from the world. That, and the fact that such things needed to be done.
“Which is precisely why I’ve come to you,” the man in white said; Altaïr sighed softly. Such matters were never simply resolved on any side. “Is this the kind of world you want your son brought up in?!”
“It will pass,” the first man said, sounding as though he wanted to believe it, but couldn’t quite manage to make himself do so. “If we just wait, he’ll stop,” there was a slight stutter to the first man’s words when he said such. “And everything will go back to normal.”
“Every day more is lost,” the man in white said, sounding like the desperation of his cause was beginning to take a personal toll on him. Altaïr wondered what it was that was being lost to Jubair’s Templar sensibilities. “And no way to reclaim what was taken. There will be no going back,” the man in white hissed. “You know this to be true!”
“Enough,” the first man said wearily; Altaïr could not find it in himself to blame him, simply for wishing to protect those most dear to him. “I am leaving.”
As the two parted ways as they said they would, Altaïr fell into step behind the first man, quickly reliving him of the missive that he had been given to him. Without breaking stride, Altaïr parted from the man even as he wished him well within the confines of his own mind. Soon enough, all of the citizens who had been forced to live their lives under Jubair’s stranglehold would be set free.
This he silently promised to everyone in Damascus; they would never know, but the fact that their work was done anonymously in the name of the people was at once their greatest protection, and a safety against hubris. He might not have guarded himself against it as well as might have been prudent, but it was still a safety.
Moving on through the city, careful and attentive as he had always been to the matters pertinent to his targets while he was hunting, Altaïr took note of an Informant standing out of the way of the foot-traffic within Damascus. Such was all he did, however; he well knew how onerous the tasks that those ones would ask of him were, and he’d no interest in attending to any more of them.
Moving on before anyone within the crowd could thing to wonder what it was that he was about, Altaïr opened his ears once more and began to take in the words of the citizens as they continued about their daily lives. Those who did not – who could not – know of his work, or the true danger that the Templars posed to them; sometimes he envied them their ignorance. And yet, his work was a worthy one, and Altaïr would not have traded the life he had for any other even if such a thing were possible.
Smiling briefly at the nature of his reflections, Altaïr turned his mind back to the business that he still had before him; there were still matters that needed attending to, and as it was now his duty to see that Jubair paid for his crimes against the citizens of Damascus in the most final way possible, Altaïr would carry that duty out to the utmost of his ability.
As he continued on his way deeper into the city, leaving the informant and the onerous task that he would have more than likely been asked to do by the man behind, Altaïr opened his ears to the conversations around him once more. Listening for any other mentions of Jubair, his scholars, or anything that might have also been useful to him considering the mission he was now undertaking. For a moment, as he continued on his way through the city, Altaïr reflected on what he had done to bring himself to this point.
It had certainly not been an easy road, the one which had led him to where he was now; stalking the nine Templars – seven of whom he had come to grips with at last – working under Robert de Sable, after he had made a foolish attack on the Templar Grand Master and dishonored himself and the Brotherhood as a whole. He was grateful to Master Mualim for giving him the chance to redeem his mistakes. And also for taking care of Alnesr while his former Apprentice grew into a man.
Turning his attention back to the task at hand once more, Altaïr continued to move deeper into Damascus, on the trail of those who might have the information he sought for the mission he had at hand.
The warm air was filled with the cries of merchants selling their wares, citizens running to and fro on various errands of their own, and those who continued to speak out about King Richard and his depredations. Altaïr ignored those, knowing that Richard was merely a symptom of one man’s seeking to control the thoughts and actions of others by force, rather than leading them to the truth through logic and reason. It was a foolish thing, but Altaïr found that he could indeed understand the wish for speed in such matters.
He could not condone it, and in particular the price that acting on such an impulse imposed upon those innocents that found themselves caught between those who gave into that impulse and the goal they sought.
Hearing a man speaking in terms of destroying texts and making a new world – terms that came easily from the mouths of Templars and those who allied closely with them – Altaïr paused in a well-appointed courtyard to listen to the man speaking such terms.
“This is our chance to begin anew!” said a man in travel-stained robes and sash – dusty enough that their true color could not be told from where Altaïr stood – presiding over the courtyard where Altaïr had found him. “Let Jubair lead you to a revelation! Let him lead you to the light!” that same talk of light; just as he’d heard from some of those who’d been taken by Naplouse. “Jubair sees things the way they truly are!” Altaïr scoffed, as the corrupt scholar continued. “Sees the poison you carry in your hearts and minds! He works to cast it out! Remove all texts from your homes and schools! Give them to us! The must be destroyed!”
Moving forward once the corrupted scholar had left the courtyard behind him, Altaïr followed the man out beyond the sight of the guards, and into an empty alleyway where he then pummeled the man into submission. It took a few, long moments before the man had taken enough of a beating so that he was motivated to speak, but Altaïr’s own strength and skill eventually won out in the end.
“Violence is not the answer, my child!” the corrupt scholar said.
You’re a fine one to talk, Altaïr didn’t bother saying. “In this, we agree. So speak, and I may stay my blade. What is it your master intends? Why destroy all this knowledge?”
“We lay the stones to build a road upon which, someday, all men will travel. It leads to a better tomorrow!”
“That is not what I see,” he said simply.
“Then you are blind,” the corrupt scholar said, the fanaticism becoming clear in his voice and on his face. “The words upon these parchments, they are poison! Jubair has the cure! He will free us from their lies!”
“It’s nonsense you speak,” he said, knowing that there would be no reasoning with the fanatic that this man had proven himself to be. “You’ve lost your mind.”
“Not lost, but found! I see the world the way it truly is! He has shown me so much! I am illuminated!”
“A fanatic is all you are,” he said; Altaïr himself was not quite certain whether he pitied the man more than he scorned him, or the reverse, a thing he was sure reflected in his tone. “And dangerous for it.”
“Do what you must,” the corrupted scholar said, clearly not regretting his fate in his madness; Altaïr decided then that he pitied him. “It changes nothing. We are not afraid.”
“Go in peace, then,” he said, taking the corrupted scholar’s life, and wishing him well in whatever awaited him at the end of things.
As he moved into the flow of people once more, matching his pace to that of the citizens all around him, Altaïr turned his mind back to seeking what information the people here might have for him. Ascending to the rooftops so that he might travel faster for a time, he descended back to street-level once more and resumed his search. Listening in on what the citizens were talking of as he moved through among them, and yet apart from them as he always was, Altaïr found another pair of men speaking of matters that pertained to Jubair and his stranglehold on Damascus.
“We found the place: it’s just as you described it,” one of the men – both of them dressed in off-white robes, and with head-coverings of the same color – said to his companion.
“I suspect he’ll want to deal with this himself,” the other man, stockier than the first, stated. “And quickly. Best we say nothing to the others.”
“A wise course of action,” the first stated. “Truth be told, I’ll be happy when all of this business is done.”
“Soon, my friend, soon,” the second said, clapping a reassuring hand on his companion’s shoulder. “This day should see the last of them put to the torch. Boy, come here!” A younger man, this one clad in a dark, earthy brown robe with a narrow sash, came over to the pair of scholars. Interesting, Altaïr mused, continuing to watch for his moment. “You still have the letter I gave you?”
“Yes,” the boy answered calmly; Altaïr smiled.
“Go and deliver it,” the second of the scholars who had been speaking said. “You’ll find the one its meant for inside the Madrasah.”
Moving in behind his chosen target with all the stealth that he had been justly famed for, Altaïr swept easily past the young man and smoothly vanished back into the crowds. Clearly, the Madrasah was important to Jubair in some way. Making up his mind that he would return to the Bureau and its insolent Rafiq after he had conducted a last investigation – no sense in giving the man yet another reason to berate him when he returned – Altaïr melted back into the crowds and began searching for another mention of the mad scholar whose trail he was tasked to discover.
As he continued on his way through the thronging crowds, searching for any indication that those he was surrounded by knew anything of the man he was seeking. Soon enough, however, Altaïr began to hear the sounds of men speaking of his present target.
“I wish to see him, to hear him speak,” said yet another fallen scholar to one of his brethren, the two of them standing in a walled courtyard with a small fountain at the center.
“It can be arranged,” said the other, leaning in slightly as the two of them spoke. “But we must be careful. There are still those who reject illumination. They would harm him.”
Altaïr forced himself not to scoff; they were fine ones to talk about harm, with what they were assisting Jubair to do.
“Then they are ignorant and afraid.”
“You seem sincere,” the first of the scholars said. “But, how do I know I can trust you?”
“It pains me that you feel even the slightest need to ask the question,” the second scholar said.
“Very well: we gather each day in the Madrasah; he comes to speak, and then leads us into the city, that we might cleanse it.”
“Could I join you, then?” the second scholar, a rather excitable sort, it seemed, asked.
The two of them continued on in that way for some time after that, Altaïr absorbing what he could manage until the two fallen scholars – he could find it in himself to forgive the younger of them, since he at least seemed to be earnest, if misguided in the extreme – ceased their conversation and left the courtyard behind them. Rising from his seat on a stone bench near to where the scholars had been speaking to one another. Making his way out of the courtyard, Altaïr took a moment to assure himself that none of the milling citizens of Damascus were in a position to observe him, then ascended back to the rooftops once more.
Swiftly making his way back to the Bureau, not entirely pleased to be once more forced to deal with the insolent Rafiq once more but at least pleased to know that he would not be forced to do such for so much longer, Altaïr alighted for a moment on the roof before climbing back down into the Bureau itself. The cooler air wrapped around him as he stepped inside, and Altaïr breathed deeply of it as he made his way into the shadowed main room of the Assassins’ stronghold in Damascus.
“What news, Altaïr?”
“I’ve learned much about my enemy,” he said, pleased with the prospect of having this mission in particular done with.
“Share what you know, then,” the Rafiq said, gesturing for him to speak.
“Jubair has become obsessed with purging the city of its knowledge,” he said, his disapproval for such an action plain in his tone.
“A most terrible crime. Now I see why Al Mualim wants you to remove him,” the Rafiq stated, clearly dismayed.
Altaïr was pleased not to be confronted with the man’s insolence, but he had no time to dwell on such feelings. “He’s using the city’s scholars to assist him,” Altaïr snapped, not sure for a moment if he was more disdainful of Jubair himself, or of those who would do his bidding without question. “They go out into the streets, harassing the people and collecting all their written works,” he continued, not quite able to keep a snarl out of his tone. “I fear he intends to destroy them all.”
“He must be stopped!”
“That’s why I’m here,” he replied, having mastered himself. “He’s to hold a meeting soon. At the Madrasah Al-Kallāsah. It’s where I’ll go; it’s where I’ll take his life.”
Taking the feather that the Rafiq placed on the counter for him, Altaïr waited a moment to see if the man would say anything more.
“I’ll leave you alone to prepare,” the Rafiq said, and Altaïr was pleased to note that there was none of his usual insolence; perhaps he had finally managed to change the man’s opinion. “Bring glory to the Brotherhood.”
Nodding, he continued on his way into the entrance room of the Bureau, there to take a short rest before he commenced with the execution of his latest target.
Chapter 61: Jubair al Hakim
Chapter Text
Waking refreshed, as he usually did after such a rest as he had taken, Altaïr made his way back up and out onto the rooftop of the Bureau. Taking a moment to savor his freedom once more, he swiftly began to make his way across the rooftops once more. Clearing the ways that remained between him and his next destination, Altaïr found himself standing atop a rooftop that overlooked his present target.
The thick, cloying scent of burning paper sickened him, as did the sight of countless books being burned in the courtyard below him. Altaïr knew that his own father, Umar, would have been equally as disgusted by such a practice as he found himself now. Every Assassin would have been disgusted to see what Altaïr beheld here and now: books were full of knowledge, and knowledge was the key to freedom and power.
He knew that as well as any Assassin; he’d forgotten for a time, yes, but he knew such once more.
He stood, just out of sight of any of those who might chance to look up, on the ledge of a rooftop overlooking the Madrasah Al-Kallāsah where Jubair had chosen to stay while he enacted his mad plan. The smoke from the large fire at the center of the courtyard rose up towards him, but all of the attention was focused on the task being carried out; all of the scholars that Jubair had deceived or forced into following along with his mad scheme were concentrating on their work.
Jubair himself was overseeing the work: barking orders at the scholars scurrying around at his beck and call. All of them were hard at work, save for one. That one was staring into the heart of the fire, his expression echoing Altaïr’s own thoughts.
Jubair himself wore leather boots, a black headscarf, and a dangerous scowl. Moving slightly closer, Altaïr mused upon what he had learned about the man while he had been going about his investigations within the city the man had such a powerful hold over. The man was apparently the chief scholar of Damascus, but only in name: it was, after all, not a typical scholar who insisted on not spreading knowledge but rather on its destruction. For that, he had enlisted – or else forced – the aid of the scholars and academics that Salah Al’din encouraged to come into the city.
He wondered just what this plan of Jubair’s might have been; if it had been a plan made by his Templar compatriots. If it was merely one more facet of their plans for a “New World” that he had been hearing about of late.
“Every single text in this city must be destroyed!”
Standing in the courtyard below him, Jubair was exhorting the scholars around him with a fanatic’s zeal; they scurried about, arms laden with books, scrolls and other written works, bringing them from some location hidden from Altaïr’s sight into the bonfire in the center of the courtyard. Out of the corner of his left eye, however, Altaïr could see the scholar who had earlier been standing by the side of the bonfire fretting becoming even more agitated than he had been before.
“My friend, you must not do this,” the scholar said, his jovial tone belying his clear distress. “Much knowledge rests within these parchments; put there by our ancestors for good reason.”
“And what reason is this?” Jubair snarled, the expression on his face becoming one of naked contempt.
“They are beacons meant to guide us; to save us from the darkness that is ignorance,” the scholar implored.
The flames danced at his back, growing ever taller and larger as the scholars crowding the courtyard dumped more written works upon the bonfire that was still steadily burning. Some of them, however, had begun to cast nervous glances to where Jubair and the scholar protesting his actions – a man whose courage Altaïr could respect, even as he mourned the fact that Jubair was more than likely to kill him – were standing.
“No,” the Templar snapped, taking a step forward and forcing the protesting scholar to take a step back in fright. “These bits of paper are covered in lies. They poison your minds. And so long as they exist, you cannot hope to see the world as it truly is.”
“How can you accuse these scrolls of being weapons?” the scholar asked, clearly trying to be reasonable, but still unable to hide his frustration. “They’re tools of learning.”
“You turn to them for answers and salvation,” Jubair took another step forward, forcing the scholar to give more ground. “You rely more on them than on yourselves; that makes you weak and stupid. You trust in words; drops of ink. Do you ever stop to think of who put them there? Or why? No. You simply accept their words without question. And, what if their words speak falsely, as they so often do? This is dangerous.”
“You are wrong,” the protesting scholar said, sounding as though he was helplessly confused by what Jubair was saying. “These texts give the gift of knowledge. We need them.”
Jubair’s face darkened, seeming rather morbidly amused. “You love your precious writings? You’d do anything for them?”
“Yes. Yes, of course.”
Jubair smiled cruelly. “Then join them.”
Planting both hands on the protesting scholar’s chest, Jubair shoved him backwards into the hungry fires. For the few moments, when the scholar was in mid-topple, he flapped his arms as though he thought that he might have been able to fly free of the greedy fires. Then he was claimed by the full momentum of the shove, falling into the bonfire that quickly began to eat into his flesh. The man kicked and screamed, his tunic swiftly catching fire.
For a few moments, it looked as though the scholar was attempting to beat out the flames that had caught on the sleeves of his tunic, but after a few moments more his screams stopped, and the thick, rising smoke became tainted by the scent of burning human flesh. Covering his nose, Altaïr observed that the scholars in the courtyard were doing the same.
“Any man who speaks as that man just did is just as much of a threat, and will be dealt with accordingly,” Jubair addressed them. There was no reply from the surrounding scholars, simply fearful eyes and hands held over noses. “Good. Your orders are simple enough: return to the city. Collect any remaining writings and add them to the piles in the streets. When you’re done, we’ll send a cart to collect them that they may be destroyed.”
The scholars left, and finally Altaïr found that he had been given his chance. Jubair was casting nervous glances around the courtyard where he stood, always careful to keep his eyes from the fire itself; Altaïr was all too familiar with the damage that such an action would cause to someone’s sight. It was almost as bad as staring into the sun.
However, the only sounds the corrupt scholar – the Templar – was aware of were the sounds of the crackling fire, and that of his own breathing. Altaïr smiled softly; Jubair was aware that the Assassins were hunting him, and he’d thought himself more clever than his hunters, sending decoys into the streets. Decoys accompanied by his most trusted bodyguards, so that the deception could be complete.
The Templar thought himself safe inside the madrasah; locked behind the walls in this courtyard, burning any piece of writing that he could lay his hands to; this was his last day.
Deploying his Hidden Blade with a soft snap, Altaïr leaped down from his perch, blade extended as he pounced. Too late, Jubair became aware of the fact that he was not truly any safer behind these walls than he would have been in the city itself. Too late, he tried to dart out of the way, but by then Altaïr had already buried his blade in the man’s neck.
With a soft sigh, Jubair crumpled to the marble floor.
“Why… why have you done this?” the Templar asked, eyelids beginning to flutter even as blood seeped from his mouth.
“Men must be free to do as they believe,” he said, after looking to the charred corpse of the scholar that Jubair had murdered; with the flesh of the face burned away, the skull appeared to be wearing a macabre grin. “It is not our right to punish one for thinking as he does, much as we might disagree.”
“Then what?” Jubair wheezed, as Altaïr withdrew the blade from his neck.
“You, of all people, should know the answer to that: educate them. Teach them right from wrong. It must be knowledge that frees them, not force.”
Jubair chuckled, blood running down the side of his chin and onto his neck as he did so. “They do not learn, fixed in their ways as they are. You are naïve to think otherwise. It is an illness, Assassin, for which there is only one cure.”
“You’re wrong, and that is why you must be put to rest,” he said simply, knowing that there would be no reasoning with this man; he wondered if any of the Templars would be amenable to reason, or if he truly would be forced to eliminate them all.
“Am I not unlike those precious books you seek to save? A source of knowledge with which you disagree? Yet you are rather quick to steal my life.”
“A small sacrifice to save many,” he told the dying Templar in his arms. “It was necessary.”
“Is it not ancient scrolls that inspire the Crusades? That fill Salah Al’din and his men with a sense of righteous fury? Their texts endanger others; bring death in their wake. I, too, was making a small sacrifice,” Jubair smiled softly, almost peacefully. “It matters little, now. Your deed is done; and so am I.”
Jubair died without another word, and Altaïr swiftly departed from the madrasah when he began to hear the sound of people swiftly approaching. Regaining the rooftops once more, he took the swiftest path that he could back to the Bureau, and the Rafiq that awaited him there. When he found himself standing atop the desired roof once more, Altaïr climbed back inside and breathed deeply again.
Here, at last, was the end of this latest mission of his.
“Altaïr, tell me you’ve met with success,” the Rafiq said, even over the sound of Damascus’ alarms ringing through the air.
“Yes.” He displayed the feather he’d stained with the Templar’s blood. “Jubair’s fires are extinguished. His life, as well.”
“Excellent news! I had no doubt you would succeed!” the Rafiq said with enthusiasm.
“You should have seen it,” he said, not particularly pleased that he had been forced to see what he had; still, such was the way of Templars. “The scholars followed him so readily. It wasn’t just books they fed to fire, either, but any man who opposed them.”
“Such ignorance breeds only evil,” the Rafiq said, sounding as though he pitied the deceived scholars in the same way that Altaïr himself had come to. “You’ve done a good thing this day.”
“As with my other targets, he believed he was doing the right thing,” Altaïr said, beginning to wonder just what it was that Master Mualim would say to him when he returned to Masyaf once more; he also wondered how Alnesr faired, but both thoughts were for the future, and so could wait. “Clearing a path to a better future.”
“Of course he would,” the Rafiq said, nodding. “Such is the landscape of a madman’s mind.”
“The things I’ve seen these past few weeks, it’s as if all the land has gone mad,” he confessed, narrowing his eyes as he recalled just what it was that he spoke of.
“And this is why we fight,” the Rafiq said with conviction. “To end the war; that sanity might return. The people are desperate for direction, it’s easy for men like Jubair to prey on this and turn them towards evil. You should go, Altaïr,” he suggested. “Return to Al Mualim; tell him what you saw. Let him know the good you’ve done this day.”
“Safety and peace, Rafiq,” he said, nodding to the man, even as he turned to leave for the sleeping area once more.
“Upon you, as well.”
Making his way back to the pile of bedding, Altaïr settled himself to take some rest while the furor of his actions had a chance to die down once more. When he awakened, it was to a far more peaceful city, and so Altaïr swiftly departed the Bureau once more. Making his way out of Damascus for the second time, over the heads of those who had been stationed before the gates, Altaïr made for the stables to retrieve his horse so that he could begin his return journey to Masyaf.
The beast had been provisioned once more, a thing that he was grateful for as he mounted it and set off once more.
Chapter 62: An old friend
Chapter Text
The journey back to Masyaf seemed shorter, but Altaïr knew that such was merely a product of his relief at having completed the task that Master Mualim had set before him at last. When he had finally managed to complete the journey to the Brotherhood’s stronghold, Altaïr gratefully dismounted and made for the fortress itself. Asking one of the guards where Master Mualim might be found, though Altaïr suspected that he knew, he swiftly found that his suspicion was indeed correct.
Master Mualim was again to be found in his study.
Making for the desk that the Master was once more standing behind, Altaïr returned the nod that he was given in acknowledgement.
“Come in, my student; we have much to discus. We are close, Altaïr,” the Master said, sounding pleased by the prospect. “Robert de Sable is now all that stands between us and victory: his mouth gives the orders, his hand pays the gold. With him dies the knowledge of the Templar treasure and any danger it might pose.”
“I still don’t understand how a simple treasure could cause so much chaos,” he admitted. The Piece of Eden he had been shown still seemed to him to be nothing more than a shiny bauble; certainly nothing that could cause such madness as he had borne witness to.
“The Piece of Eden is temptation given form,” Master Mualim said, nodding slowly as though he could read Altaïr’s own thoughts. “Simply look at what it has done to Robert: once he tasted of its power, the thing consumed him. He saw not a dangerous weapon to be destroyed, but a tool. One that would help him realize his life’s ambition.”
“He dreamed of power, then?”
“Yes and no,” the Master said gravely. “He dreamed, and still dreams, of peace. Even as we do.”
“But this is a man who sought to see the Holy Land consumed by war,” he stated, though he was beginning to become uncertain about such a conclusion.
“No, Altaïr,” the Master said, with a firm shake of his head. “How can you not see, when you were the one who opened my eyes to this?”
“What do you mean?” he asked, puzzled.
“What do he and his followers want?” the Master asked, and then answered his swiftly enough that Altaïr was not given the chance to speak a word. “A world in which all men are united. I do not despise his goal, I share it. But I take issue with his means. Peace is something to be learned; to be understood; to be embraced. But,” there was a look in the Master’s eyes that Altaïr took for a prompt, and so he took up where Master Mualim had left off.
“He would force it.”
“And rob us of our free will in the process,” Master Mualim concluded, nodding as though he were pleased.
“It seems strange, to think of him in this way,” Altaïr said, narrowing his eyes in thought.
“Never harbor hate for your targets, Altaïr,” Master Mualim said. “Such thoughts are poison, and will cloud your judgment.”
“Could he not be convinced, then?” Altaïr asked, curious to know if the end of his task could be made to come sooner. “To end his mad quest?”
“I spoke to him, in my way,” Master Mualim said, shaking his head sadly. “Through you. What was each killing, if not a message? But he has chosen to ignore our entreaties.”
“Then there is only one thing left to do,” he said; he was pleased, in a way, that he was to be sent after de Sable once more.
He, certainly, would not make the mistake of underestimating the man; not ever again.
“Jerusalem is where you faced him first. It is where you will find him now,” the Master said, releasing his messenger bird. “Let this final offering lend you strength. Go, Altaïr. It is time to finish this.”
“As you say, Master.”
“Safety and peace be upon you, child.”
“And you, as well,” he said, smiling in response to the Master’s gentle tone.
Making his way back out of the fortress once again, Altaïr caught Abbas’ eyes upon him as he came down into the courtyard. For a few moments, Altaïr thought to say something to the man who had once been his brother in all but blood; still, he could not think of a single word under the cold gaze of Abbas’ eyes, and so he continued on. He’d not the time to think of anything to say, in any case; there was one last task before him now.
Best he completed it swiftly.
Making his way down to the stables once more, Altaïr mounted another horse that had been saddled and provisioned for a long journey. Setting off quickly, he found that his thoughts were wandering back to the last day that he and Abbas had been able to call each other brother. It had been the morning after he’d told Abbas what had become of his father, foolishly thinking that the man – merely a boy, then, as he himself had been – could face the truth of what had happened.
That that truth might provide for him more comfort than empty words.
Abbas had been sullen and silent the entire morning; through breakfast, where Altaïr himself had taken his meal, and then mashed the food that Alnesr was to eat before he fed him; through the lessons that Master Mualim had taught them on that day, and even when Altaïr had taken Alnesr back from his governess, carrying the child out to the training grounds where Labib would then be given temporary charge of him.
Abbas had spoken then, but his words had been far from kindly.
His attack had been fierce, and made all the worse for the fact that it had been made with live steel. Altaïr could remember Alnesr’s frightened cries as Abbas had attacked him in misguided fury, but he’d not thought much of it until the still-toddling child had come into the training ring calling for the pair of them; it was clear that he hadn’t known what to make of what was going on. Why something so harmless and normal to them as sparring would become so fraught with unexpected danger.
But, the interruption had been enough to break Abbas’ momentum, and Altaïr rather thought that such was the only reason that he had been able to escape the altercation without more serious injuries than what he had taken. Still even Alnesr, innocent as he had been at that time, had not managed to escape Abbas’ rage unscathed. Abbas had knocked Alnesr unconscious with a blow from the pommel of his sword; even to this day, Altaïr would wonder if their lives might have taken a different path if Alnesr had not intervened.
Altaïr could have coped with an injury to his body or his pride, but finding Abbas with his hands around Alnesr’s throat – once the pair of them had been released from the dungeons of Masyaf – had not been something that he had been prepared to forgive at that time. It was also not a thing that the Master had been prepared to tolerate; he had ordered Abbas punished with twenty lashes upon his naked back, and then decreed that he was to apologize to Alnesr for his transgression in person.
Abbas had spat at Alnesr’s feet in response, earning himself a backhand blow from Master Mualim, who had been there so as to observe the proceedings. Altaïr was not certain if, even now, he was prepared to forgive Abbas for not only attempting to kill an innocent, but for attempting to end a life that had not yet truly begun. Such a thing would always be between them, Altaïr knew.
Breathing deeply to center himself within the here and now, Altaïr climbed down from his horse and tied the beast to a hitching-post near a deep well. Allowing the beast to drink some water from his right hand, and then watered himself, after that. Taking out the bedroll and setting it close enough that he could quickly re-mount and be off on his way when the time came, without taking the risk of being injured by accident.
Once he had taken such rest as he needed to continue his journey, Altaïr re-mounted his horse and began making for the gates of Jerusalem once more. The milling crowds of pilgrims were no different than those he had seen on the road when he had made his earlier journeys to Jerusalem, and as he passed them by, Altaïr felt a definite sense of satisfaction. Here, at last, was an end to the task that had been set before him.
Here, now, would be his chance to finally rest from his labors.
Making his way further down the path, mindful of the pilgrims making their way into the city alongside him, Altaïr began to see the city itself rising in the distance. Pleased to be making the last in his long line of journeys into the cities within the Holy Land, Altaïr guided his horse the remaining distance to the walls of Jerusalem, then dismounted to lead the beast to the stables once more. Once he had given his horse into the keeping of the stable hands, Altaïr made his way back into the milling crowds.
It only remained for him to make his way back into the city, and he would be yet another step closer to his current goal.
The guards before the gates seemed as diligent in their tasks as any of those he’d seen before, which again meant that he would need to find a way in under their eyes. Or, perhaps over their heads, he mused, climbing a wooden structure whose purpose he did not care to fathom, and then swinging himself in with the aid of the long wooden poles that stretched between the wide structure of the walls themselves. Once he had passed beyond the sight of the guards at the gate, Altaïr descended to the ground once more.
The city was as full of purposeful citizens, each of them intent upon their own business, as all of the other times he had made such a journey, and Altaïr paused a moment to observe them. For this, in the end, was what he and his fought to preserve: the freedom of people such as this to live the lives that they chose to. Freedom that the Templars meant to steal away from them at every turn.
Sometimes, Altaïr wondered… but such thoughts as those were best left for another time.
Making his way toward Jerusalem’s Bureau once more, there to meet with Malik again, Altaïr waited for a few moments for the citizens tramping the streets to make their way out of his field of view, before ascending to the rooftops once more. For such was the only place that one could enter the Bureau from in any case. Around him Altaïr heard the cries of merchants selling their wares, beggars pleading for what money they could scrounge, and men denouncing King Richard for the war that had been brought to the Holy Land.
Just as he had heard men in Acre denouncing Salah Al’din and the war that he had brought to the Holy Land.
It was just one more facet to being an Assassin: one came to hear from both sides of many struggles. Reflecting on that as he continued to move over the rooftops on his way to Jerusalem’s Bureau brought a slight smile to his face, for what was such conflict but another facet of such self-determination as the Assassins fought for? But, such things as that always had a price.
And it was not their way to allow tyrants to go unpunished.
Making his last leap over to the Bureau’s rooftop, Altaïr descended into the building itself, then made his way into the room where Malik would be waiting for him.
“Safety and peace, Altaïr,” Malik greeted him, and the Dai seemed to mean it in this instance.
“Upon you, as well, brother,” he said, trying not to allow the surprise he felt at honestly being greeted in such a way by a man he had wronged so badly as Malik show on his face.
“Seems fate has a funny way with things,” the Dai commented.
“So it’s true, then?” he asked. “Robert de Sable is in Jerusalem?”
“I’ve seen him and the Knights, myself,” Malik said with conviction.
“Only misfortune follows that man,” he said, frowning slightly. “If he’s here, it’s because he intends ill. I won’t give him the chance to act.”
“Do not let vengeance cloud your thoughts, brother,” the Dai advised, and Altaïr winced inwardly with the knowledge of what his determination had sounded like to Malik. “We both know no good can come of that.”
“I have not forgotten,” he said, forcing his gaze not to drift to the remnants of Malik’s arm, though the scar above Alnesr’s right eye flashed through his mind. “You have nothing to fear. I do not seek revenge, but knowledge.”
“Truly, you are not the man I once knew,” Malik said, sounding pleased, though a bit surprised besides.
“My work has taught me many things, revealed secrets to me. But there are still pieces of this puzzle I do not possess,” he allowed himself to admit.
“What do you need?”
“All the men I’ve laid to rest have worked together; united by this man,” he said, giving in to the urge to pace; feeling restless as he’d not been on any of his other excursions. For here, now, was the end of his journey to redeem his mistakes. “Robert de Sable has designs upon the land, that much I know for certain. But, how and why, when and where, these things remain out of reach.”
“Crusaders and Saracens working together?” Malik echoed, the confusion plain on his face.
“They are none of these things, but something else entirely: Templars,” he said, even as the Master had said it to him.
“The Templars are a part of the Crusader army,” Malik said, though he seemed more curious than ever.
“Or so they would have King Richard believe,” he countered, though gently so that he would not sound as though he were snapping at Malik. “No. Their only allegiance is to Robert de Sable, and some mad idea that they will stop the war.”
“You spin a strange tale.”
“You have no idea, Malik,” he said, seeing the mad humor in the situation he had just described and resisting the urge to smile; now was hardly the time for it.
“Tell me, then,” the Dai prompted, the expression on his face saying almost more clearly than words that he would accept nothing less.
“All right then, if you truly wish to know.”
And so, Altaïr told the Dai all that he had seen and heard on his travels, and also the things that he had discussed with the Master when he had been called back to Masyaf to make his reports.
“But enough of this,” he said, not wishing to insult Malik’s hospitality, but also knowing that the sooner he began his investigations the better it would be. “Tell me where they’ve been seen; I should be after him before he slips away.”
“Three places I can say for certain,” Malik said, drawing himself up straighter. “West of here, and to the southwest at the Church of the Holy Sepulcher. See what you can learn; I will do the same.”
“I’ll be quick as I can,” he vowed.
“Stay safe, my friend,” Malik said, the sincerity in his tone warming Altaïr’s heart; he’d never looked for forgiveness from Malik, never truly felt worthy of such, that to find it now was a truly pleasant surprise.
“I will do all I can,” he promised, turning to make his way out of the room.
Making his way back into the entrance area of the Bureau, Altaïr scaled the walls once again and then made his way across the rooftops so that he could find a safe place to descend into the crowds of Jerusalem once more. Locating such, he leapt lightly from the roof into a cart of straw, then made his way back in among the crowds after cleaning himself up enough to be presentable. Malik had said that he would be best served heading to the west and southwest, so that was the direction he was going.
Chapter 63: An old enemy
Chapter Text
As he made his way through the crowds of citizens, some milling and others more purposeful in their movements, Altaïr listened again for those who would speak of what he needed to hear so that he could find Robert and finally come to grips with him for the final time.
When he began to hear the sounds of two men speaking to one another, Altaïr paused for a moment as though he was admiring a particular view of the city, and listened.
“Bring that to your master, then,” the first man said; Altaïr turned slightly, observing that the man speaking was dressed in dark fabrics, while the man he was speaking to wore the garb of a scholar. “It contains everything you asked for.”
“Your assistance in this most delicate of matters is greatly appreciated,” the scholar said; he’d the hoarse voice of an old man who spoke often, Altaïr noted.
“It is my job to keep the peace,” the first man said, and Altaïr suspected by his tone that he was one of the city guards.
“And keep it you will,” the old scholar said. “You’ll have no trouble from us.”
“It’s not you and yours that concern me, but the citizens,” the guard said plainly. “You picked a strange time to visit our city.”
“We’ve simply come to pay our respects,” the old scholar said; Altaïr was now almost certain the man had affiliations of one sort or another with Robert de Sable and his Templars.
“And stir up trouble for it,” the old guardsman said.
“It’s not my fault your people can’t tell enemy from friend,” the old scholar said, not sounding impressed in the slightest by the words of the guardsman.
“Look, you’ve got what you came for,” the guardsman said, sounding more harried now. “I think it’s best that you were on your way.”
The guardsman left without a backward glance, and so Altaïr turned around and began to shadow the scholar as he began making his own way into Jerusalem’s crowds. Passing by swiftly and silently, Altaïr retrieved the map that the man had been given by the old guardsman, and then vanished into the milling crowds once more. As he tucked the map discreetly away inside his robes, Altaïr began to hear the sound of another conversation.
Or rather, a man speaking to whatever citizen would stop for even a moment to listen to him.
“People of Jerusalem, we stand upon a threshold: to cross it, is to usher in an age of peace between all men. Embrace these Christian soldiers as you would a brother; welcome them with open arms. In this way, we might forgive the sins of the past, and bring about a better tomorrow.” They were pretty words, but like the Treasure that Master Mualim had shown him, such things were merely illusions; the words of a Templar could seldom be trusted. “We must be strong; we must be brave, and we must find the courage to face those we once called our enemies, and now instead call them friends. The crusaders come to Jerusalem, bringing with them an opportunity to end the fighting; to stop the war, that we may stand as one. We must not turn them away.”
Following the speaker as he left the stoop he had been presiding over the crowd from, Altaïr reflected for a moment on his brief wish that they and the Templars could have come to some sort of an accord. Still, such was not the world he lived in, and the Templars as they were now could ill be trusted with the power they sought. He needed to find out where Robert was to be, if he was to finally put an end to the Templar Grand Master and his plans for the Holy Land.
Pummeling the Templar hireling into submission, Altaïr gathered himself as the man held up his hands in a warding gesture at last.
“You speak of peace, but your words are hollow,” he stated, wondering how the man would react; if he were truly a mere hireling, or instead a fanatic as Altaïr had met so many times before.
“No! I speak the truth! Why would you say otherwise?”
“You’re a Templar,” he stated calmly.
“So I am,” the man said, his own demeanor becoming rather more calm, though he still sounded curious.
“Then, you are also a liar and a fraud, just like your master,” he said, watching the distain flicker over the man’s face. “Tell me, where is he? What does he intend?”
“It’s peace he seeks,” the man said, with the mien of one who was secure in his convictions; Altaïr knew he would not mourn the death of this one overlong. “I swear it. And the proof is in his actions: a Christian at a Muslim’s funeral. We want an end to all of this.”
“Only because it serves your needs,” he stated calmly, knowing he was right.
“But this is a noble thing we want,” the Templar said, as though he was attempting to convince Altaïr to believe it; he’d have more luck wringing water from stone. “The land will be united beneath our banner.”
“United through force,” he clarified, just in case this one truly believed the nonsense he was spouting. “You’d enslave us all.”
“It is for the best.”
“No, it is not,” he countered; here was yet another man that the world as a whole would not miss. “And so long as my brothers and I breathe, you will not succeed.”
Ending the Templar’s life with his Hidden Blade, Altaïr left him to rot in the alleyway, and ascended once more to the rooftops. He’d been told that he would be best served by searching to the west and southwest, and since he had already been moving to the west, Altaïr turned his path more toward the south than he’d been doing before, and dashed swiftly over the rooftops until he came to a clear patch of ground. With the citizens unable to see what he would soon be doing, Altaïr descended back to the ground.
Making his way through the milling crowds of citizens, Altaïr paused once more to listen for any words that would guide him toward the next point in his investigation. It was not an easy thing, listening for furtive words over and above what at times seemed to be the idle chatter of an entire city, and as he was taking special care to avoid the sight of the Informants that had been stationed around Jerusalem, Altaïr could not be entirely certain where his next investigation would take place.
When he heard the sounds of three men having a discussion in a shadowed alcove, however, Altaïr settled down on a nearby bench so that he would be able to hear just what it was that those men were saying.
“Did you see them?” asked the first, a man with a bald pate in a dull, brown robe.
“No, but I heard their whispers,” said a man with scraggly black hair and a rough beard, this one wearing robes like the first one, but in a darkened green. “Is it true? Crusader Knights in Jerusalem?”
“It is,” said the first. “Different from the others: finely dressed, and bearing expensive gifts.”
“We should relive them of this burden,” stated a third; these men were thieves, then.
“They gather near David’s citadel, close to the cemetery,” said the first man.
“To attend a funeral?” asked the second.
“So it seems,” said the first.
“Then, let us visit their camp while they pay their respects,” the third man suggested.
The trio of thieves disbursed back into the milling crowds, and Altaïr too left the bench where he had been sitting, wiser now as to what the Templars planned. It seemed Robert de Sable was more sentimental than he had taken the man to be, or else more of a fool, if he would honestly come to mourn a monster such as Majd Addin.
Still, a Templar was a Templar, and this was an advantageous thing as far as he was concerned; the reasoning of his enemies aside, having the chance to come to grips with de Sable at last was a pleasing thing to him.
Deciding that he had enough information now to return to Malik once more, Altaïr ascended to the rooftops once more and began making his way back toward the Bureau. The rooftops passed smoothly beneath him as he continued on his way, more swiftly now that he was out of sight of the citizens who might come to wonder at his passing, Altaïr soon found himself atop the Bureau once more. Climbing back down into the shadowed interior, Altaïr made his way back into the main room with a sense of ease and confidence.
“You’ve the scent of success about you, brother,” Malik said, a small smile lingering on his face.
Altaïr smiled slightly, himself. “I’ve learned much about our enemy,” he said.
“Share your knowledge, then,” the Dai prompted. “Let us see what can be done with it.”
“Robert and his Templars walk the city; they are here to pay their respects to Majd Addin,” he said, the contempt he still felt for that contemptible man coloring his words. “They’ll attend his funeral, which means so will I.”
“Why is this, the Templars would attend his funeral?” Malik asked.
“I have yet to divine their true intentions, though I’ll have a confession in time,” he said, trying not to sound arrogant in his confidence. “The citizens themselves are divided. Many call for their lives; still, others insist that they are here to parley. To make peace.”
“Peace?” Malik echoed, in the same disbelieving tone he himself had turned on that Templar speaker.
“As I said: the others slain have said as much to me,” he stated, folding his arms and resisting the urge to pace.
“That would make them our allies,” the Dai said, not sounding like he believed a word of it, himself. “And yet, we kill them.”
“Make no mistake, we are nothing like these men,” he said firmly. “Though their goal sounds noble, the means by which they would achieve them are not.” He paused a moment; yes, the Master had taught him and Alnesr both the ways of the Brotherhood, but the longer he had been without satisfactory answers, the easier Altaïr had found it to doubt. “At least, that is what the Master told me.”
“So, what is your plan?” the Dai asked.
“I’ll attend the funeral and confront Robert,” he said, his conviction firm and his purpose set.
“The sooner, the better,” Malik said, the conviction in his eyes a clear match for Altaïr’s own.
Moving forward to take the feather that Malik had so obligingly set out for him, Altaïr turned and made his way back to the entrance-room of the Bureau. “Malik, ” he began, pausing in his last steps before the door. “ Before I go, there’s something I should say.”
“Be out with it,” the Dai said, though his tone was gentle.
“I’ve been a fool.” He made his way back over to the counter, bowing his head in repentance; the both of them needed to hear this, though Malik most of all.
“Normally I’d make no argument, but what is this? What are you talking about?”
Raising his head at the curious tone of Malik’s voice, wondering why the Dai didn’t sound angry with what he had done anymore, Altaïr continued. “All this time, I never told you I was sorry; too damn proud. You lost your arm because of me. Lost Kadar. You had every right to be angry.”
“I do not accept your apology.”
He lowered his eyes. “I understand.”
“No, you don’t,” the Dai said, almost sounding like he would have chuckled had their conversation warranted it. “I do not accept your apology, because you are not the same man who went with me into Solomon’s Temple. And so, you have nothing to apologize for.”
“Malik…” for the first time in a very long while, Altaïr found himself at a loss for words.
“Perhaps if I had not been so envious of you, I would not have been so careless, myself,” Malik said, and Altaïr looked up to see a small, wry smile upon the Dai’s face. “I’m just as much to blame.”
He shook his head. “Don’t say such things.”
“We are one,” Malik said, determination infusing the Dai’s tone once more. “As we share the glory of our victories, so too should we share the pain of our defeat. In this way we grow closer; we grow stronger.”
There was only a single thing that he could say in the face of such words. “Thank you, brother.”
“Take some rest; that you might be ready for what lies ahead.”
Nodding, he made his way into the secondary room. There to take what sleep he could, and then make his way back out into Jerusalem so that he could attend the funeral of Majd Addin. So that he could come to grips with Robert de Sable at last.
Once he felt rested enough to begin his work in earnest, Altaïr rose from the nest of blankets and cushions and made his way back up to the Bureau’s rooftop once more. Standing for a long moment in the open air, Altaïr began once more to swiftly make his way over the rooftops between himself and his newest target. Or rather, the target he had been craving to have done with for a very long time.
Taking note of the positions of the guards around the cemetery as he made his way inside, Altaïr reflected that this was the first time he had ever been present for the funeral of one of his targets. He wondered briefly if he would be able to maintain his composure when confronted with the bereavement and pain that he had caused to those uninvolved with the struggles between the Assassins and Robert de Sable’s Templars. However, if any of Addin’s family had been present, they were either keeping their grief silent, or else they did not particularly care for the man.
Altaïr wondered briefly if anyone did truly mourn the passing of Majd Addin; he thought it a sad thing, to pass from the world and leave no one to care that you had lived in the first place.
Chapter 64: The funeral
Chapter Text
Still, he had not come here to ponder such ultimately meaningless things, and so Altaïr turned his thoughts back to his work. He was here, now, at the end of this long mission at last. He would be able to deal with Robert de Sable at last, to avenge himself and his fallen brothers, and to finally put to rest his remaining doubts.
Looking over the gathered crowds, he found that there were a trio of Templar knights standing near to the imam by the graveside. All three of them wore full, face-concealing helms, but the man who stood at the forefront of the trio wore the distinctive cape of a Grand Master Templar. And yet… de Sable did not seem nearly as formidable a foe as the man who had bested him under Solomon’s Temple.
The thought troubled him, but Altaïr knew that he could not allow such things to distract him from his task; particularly not at such a late stage.
The lack of guards and men-at-arms, in short any of Robert’s comrades or underlings, was a thing that he could concern himself with. It was not what he expected of the Grand Master of the Templars: this carelessness. It was not a thing that he could ignore, either; he would have to be far more diligent than he had been walking among the others.
This laxity that de Sable was demonstrating could not be anything else but a trap.
The imam began speaking, addressing the few mourners gathered in this place. Altaïr paid the service little mind, save to briefly scoff when the man referred to Addin as beloved by the populace of the city. Truly, Majd Addin had been almost as beloved as leprosy. Breathing deeply, continuing to study the trio of Templar knights gathered by the graveside of one of their own, Altaïr could not help but to see an increasing number of discrepancies between the man he had faced under Solomon’s Temple, and the man – or was it a man? – who stood before him now.
The figure of the man in the garb of the Grand Master Templar was indeed far too slender to be de Sable, and even the cape looked too long, even if only slightly. Altaïr made a decision, then, in light of all he knew and was beginning to suspect. There was nothing right about this situation, so he would forgo the task for now; he would return to Malik, and the two of them would decide together what was to be done from this point.
His attention was caught, however, by the imam’s sudden change in tone: “As you know, this man was murdered by the Assassins. We have tried to track his killer, but it has proved difficult,” the man’s tone was rough and aggressive now; Altaïr tensed, knowing that things were going to become more difficult the longer he stayed. “These creatures cling to the shadows, and run from any who would face them fairly. But not today. For it seems that one stands among us. He mocks us with his presence, and must be made to pay!”
Almost immediately after the pronouncement from the imam, Altaïr saw the crowd beginning to form a circle with him at the center, in response to the imam pointing him out to them. They looked fierce, but as they had no weapons and likely little training, Altaïr spared them little attention. He was far more focused on the three Templars – two of de Sable’s men, and the one who purported to be de Sable himself – advancing on him.
“Seize him! Bring him forward, that God’s justice might be done!”
In a single, smooth motion, Altaïr unsheathed his sword and released his Hidden Blade. The crowd swirling around him panicked, not a one of them at all eager to test themselves against his blades. Not a one but the Templars, who began to move forward through the surging remains of the crowd in order to advance upon him. One of them, however, did not seem to realize that Altaïr was advancing upon their position, and hence Altaïr was able to cut him down with one swift, sure stroke.
A door in the wall nearest to where he was standing opened then, spilling more Templar knights into the graveyard; five of them, Altaïr counted, before he was forced to evade the hailstorm of arrows that the archers atop the walls were raining down upon him. One of the Knights before him fell, a fletched shaft protruding from the left side of his neck, and Altaïr smiled thinly. It seemed that this position favored him.
Still, he was not likely to be so fortunate a second time.
The second of the purported de Sable’s bodyguards came forward then; Altaïr sliced at the man’s neck with his sword, opening a gaping wound and sending the Templar to the ground amid a spray of blood. Turning his attention to the one who purported to be de Sable, growing more and more certain that this one could not possibly be such, Altaïr was only just quick enough to deflect the blow from the purported de Sable’s broadsword.
Even then, the sheer force of the blow sent him stumbling back.
Reinforcements soon arrived, and Altaïr quickly found himself pushed back under the sheer weight of armed knights – all of them in full, face-concealing helms – pressing in on him. Soon, he found himself standing atop Addin’s very grave, but he was not given even a moment to enjoy the fact of that. Another hail of arrows were loosed at his position, and Altaïr was both pleased and amused to note that yet another of the knights fell screaming to the ground with an arrow in his neck.
When the purported de Sable started shouting at the archers to stop firing into what was swiftly becoming a melee, Altaïr was struck by surprise at what he heard. For he did not hear the unmistakable French tone of Robert de Sable, or even a man’s voice at all. No, it was the voice of an English woman. He wondered for a moment just who she could have been; whether she was one of de Sable’s lieutenants, having disguised herself as a man in order to fight at the side of Robert’s Templars for a cause she may or may not have believed in, or else if she was a lover of his.
Either way, her skill with a blade could not be denied by any man who claimed working eyes; even Altaïr found himself rather awed by it. However, the last of her comrades could not make claim to the same skill, nor the nerve that clearly drove the mysterious woman who had chosen to stand in de Sable’s place, and so Altaïr was able to dispatch him easily. That only left him facing the woman.
Truly, she was the equal of any of the men he had faced in combat. But he had bested those men, and so it was even with her: driving his sword into her shoulder even as he swept her legs from under her with a swift kick. As she crashed heavily into the ground, Altaïr was already dragging the woman into cover with him, shielding them both from the rain of arrows that could begin at her command.
The woman still wore her helmet, but for the moment Altaïr was far more concerned with the blood seeping from her shoulder. She would not die of her wound, and would also be fully capable of recovering from such with proper treatment. If he were to allow her to do so, of course.
Chapter 65: The false Robert
Chapter Text
“I would see your eyes before you die,” he said; it was a strange thing to think about, that he would reveal the face of a woman when he removed her helm, and so Altaïr steeled himself for such.
“I sense you expected someone else,” the woman said, with a small, amused smile.
She had eyes like the ones he had seem reflected when he would take the time to look into still pools of water: strong, determined, and unyielding. And yet, they also reflected a softness and light that was more familiar to him from his days with Alnesr. He liked what he saw in her eyes, and yet Altaïr could not help but wonder just what the true nature of this woman ultimately was.
“What is your role in this?” he could not but ask.
“We knew you’d come,” the woman said, sounding proud and determined as he would have in the same situation. “Robert needed to make sure he’d have time to get away.”
“So he flees?” that did not seem like the Grand Master Templar that he had encountered, even so briefly as the two of them had clashed; he was also unwilling to trust to mere luck.
“We cannot deny your success,” the woman said, the smile on her face fading. “You have laid waste to our plans. First the Treasure, then our men. Control of the Holy Land slipped away… But then, he saw an opportunity. To reclaim what has been stolen: to turn your victories to our advantage.”
“Al Mualim still holds your Treasure, and we’ve routed your army before,” he said plainly. “Whatever Robert plans, he’ll fail again.”
“Ah, but it’s not just Templars you’ll contend with now,” the woman said, her smile returning.
“Speak sense,” he said, wondering just what it was that he had missed.
“Robert rides for Arsuf to plead his case: that Saracen and Crusader unite against the Assassins.”
“That will never happen,” he said, knowing well the intransigence of both sides. “They have no reason to.”
“Had no reason to, perhaps.” The woman’s smile grew broader, more amused. “But now you’ve given them one. Nine, in fact. The bodies you’ve left behind: victims on both sides. You’ve made the Assassins an enemy in common, and ensured the annihilation of your entire Order.” She grinned, an almost feral baring of teeth. “Well done.”
“Not nine.” He loosened his stance, feeling the tension beginning to slowly ebb out of him. “Eight.”
The woman’s grin faltered. “What do you mean?”
“You were not my target.” He removed the blade from her neck, gathering himself and standing once again. “I will not take your life.” Even as he turned to leave the cemetery, he kept his eyes upon the woman. “You’re free to go, but do not follow me.”
“I don’t need to,” she said, rising back to her own feet with her left hand clasped over her wounded shoulder. “You are already too late.”
“We shall see.”
He left the cemetery, and its corpses old and new, behind him.
Chapter 66: Returning to Malik
Chapter Text
Ascending back to the rooftops once more, Altaïr swiftly made his way back to the Bureau once more; he needed, more than ever to consult with Malik about what had just happened. He did not know if he would speak of the eyes of the woman that he had encountered, though he would clearly need to speak of her presence. He thought, however, that Malik – no matter what his feelings now were about the fact of Altaïr’s failure in Solomon’s Temple – was likely to look askance of him for such a thing.
Even now, Altaïr would have looked askance at himself, were such a thing even possible.
As he came within sight of the Bureau’s entrance once more, Altaïr forced himself to breathe more easily. This was not like the other missions that he had undertaken; he was not returning to Malik with the task at hand done, but to inform the Dai of a new complication that had arisen during the course of his attempt. To inform him that Robert de Sable had outwitted him once more.
He was certain that Malik would not be pleased to hear such a thing; he was still unsure if the Dai would feel anything else about the information.
Making his way back into the Bureau once more, Altaïr breathed deeply and steadily as he stepped back into the main room at last.
“It was a trap,” he said, once he had made his way back into Malik’s domain within the Bureau.
“I had heard the funeral turned to chaos,” Malik said, turning a concerned expression upon him; Altaïr smiled softly in response. “What happened?”
“Robert de Sable was never here; he sent another in his stead,” he said, firmly resisting the urge to pace. “He was expecting me.”
“You must go to Al Mualim.”
Altaïr knew that such a thing was undeniable, and yet… “There’s no time. She told me where he’s gone; what he plans. If I return to Masyaf now, he might succeed. And then… I fear we’ll be destroyed.”
“We have killed most of his men, he cannot hope to mount a proper attack,” Malik said, his mind clearly settling upon more practical matters for a long moment. “Wait, did you say she?”
“Yes, it was a woman,” he acknowledged. “Strange, I know; but that’s for another time.” He would be thinking of her later, Altaïr knew; he still remembered the fierce gaze of her eyes. “For now we must focus on Robert. We may have thinned his ranks, but the man is clever. He goes to plead his case to Richard and Salah Al’din. To unite them against a common enemy: against us.”
“Surely you are mistaken,” Malik said, sounding as though he wanted to make himself believe such, but could not quite manage it. “This makes no sense; those men would never-”
“Oh, but they would.” Altaïr forced himself not to sigh. “And we have only ourselves to blame. The men I’ve killed – men on both sides, men important to both leaders – Robert’s plan may be ambitious, but it makes sense. And it could work.”
“Look, brother: things have changed,” Malik said, clearly attempting to reason with him. “You must return to Masyaf; we cannot act without our Master’s permission. It could compromise the Brotherhood. I thought… I thought that you had learned this.”
He sighed. “I know; yet I haven’t the time to delay. That woman spoke as though Robert stands within reach of Arsuf even now, and I cannot allow him the time he needs. To not act swiftly in this matter may very well do worse than to compromise the Brotherhood.” Altaïr wondered for a moment if he should share what else it was that troubled him, and then reflected that if he could not share his concerns with Malik, there were few people indeed that he could do such with. “Also, I begin to suspect that there is something more than simply the Templars and their Treasure involved with these matters. Once my business with Robert is concluded, I will indeed ride for Masyaf so that I may speak with the Master; that I may have answers. But, perhaps you could go?”
“I cannot leave the Bureau,” the Dai said, sounding as through he wished to.
“Then walk amongst the people,” he suggested. “Seek out those who served the ones I slew; learn what you can. You say that you are perceptive; perhaps you will see what I could not.”
“I do not know,” Malik said, turning away slightly, appearing thoughtful once more. “I must consider this.”
“Do as you must, my friend,” he said, reaching out to clap the Dai’s right shoulder. “But it’s time I rode for Arsuf. Every moment I delay, our enemy gets one step ahead of me.” He could not help but think that, unwitting or not, he had risked compromising the Brotherhood once more.
“Be careful, brother.”
“I will,” he nodded, smiling softly. “I promise.”
Leaving the comfort of the Bureau for the rooftops of Jerusalem once more, Altaïr forced himself to breathe calmly and deeply. He would be no good to anyone if he allowed himself to panic, even in spite of what he had learned of Robert’s changed plans. Gathering himself after a long moment, Altaïr swiftly made his way back over the rooftops and out to the walls once more.
Chapter 67: Into Arsuf
Chapter Text
Peering down into the line of guards standing before and below him, Altaïr turned his attention back to the walls that he now crouched in front of. Making his way up to the top of the wall, Altaïr climbed up and over the peak of the wall, and then back down on the other side. Waiting and watching for a moment when he would be able to descend back to the ground without being seen by any of the citizens attempting to make their way into Jerusalem for whatever reasons had brought them to the city.
Finding an opening within the crowds, Altaïr descended once again to the ground outside the walls of Jerusalem.
Breathing more easily for the fact that he had done so, Altaïr went to reclaim his horse from the stables. Finding that the beast had freshly provisioned once again, he thanked the caretakers and paid them a bit extra for their trouble, and then made his way away from Jerusalem’s stables once more. Pleased as he was to be out on the road once more, free from the confines of the city and all of the troublesome guards that seemed only to be present to hem him in, Altaïr knew that this was not a time for him to relax.
Kicking his horse into a canter, Altaïr drove the beast in the direction of the old, abandoned fortress of Arsuf. He needed to find Robert, before the Templar could speak his poison into the ears of either Richard or Salah Al’din; and also to find out just what it was that the man knew about the Treasure that he and his had attempted to lay claim to. He’d never truly felt at ease around that silver sphere, he could recall with clarity now, and such a feeling only made him all the more eager to see whatever mysteries the Treasure the Templars had attempted to lay claim to solved.
Knowledge, after all, was the surest way of driving out fear.
He took note of the gossip from those he passed by on the road: that Saracen and Crusader armies had encountered each other at the old fortress, and were even then joined in battle. He was at least pleased to note that Robert had not managed to speak his poison to those who might have been all too willing to hear it, and Altaïr breathed more easily as he continued on his way to meet with Robert. So that he could find out what the Templar knew, and so that he could be done with the man at last.
As he drew ever closer to the battling armies, moving slowly against the flow of worried, anxious country folk fleeing the advancing ranks, Altaïr steadied himself and his horse as he continued to move forward. Looking back up from the frightened faces of the citizens attempting to escape the carnage that had been unleashed by both Crusader and Saracen upon them, Altaïr began to see plumes of smoke rising up along the horizon. As he continued moving in that direction, he also began to catch sight of the soldiers fighting on either side.
He was not yet close enough to determine which men were on which side, yet such was not his concern at this moment in time: he needed to find Robert.
Moving in closer, Altaïr found himself coming close enough to see the engines of war that the clashing armies maintained; at least one of them seemed to be on fire, explaining at least some of the plumes of smoke that he had seen while he moved in closer. The sky just before him was darkened with hails of arrows, the archers on either side raining death upon their foes with seeming impunity. As he continued closer to the ranks of warring soldiers, Altaïr began to hear the sounds of battle before him.
The stamping, trampling hooves of the mounted soldiers; the screams of the wounded and dying, and the subtly differing screams of those men caught up in the press and crush of combat; the sharp, rattling clatter of steel on steel, and the pitiful whinnies of wounded horses. As he came ever closer to the soldiers battling on either side, Altaïr began to see the leavings of battle. There were dead horses appearing on the ground before him now; all of them riderless, but it was not long before he began to see men fallen in the same attitudes as the horses: Saracen and Crusader alike, spread-eagled on the ground, or else propped against the trees where they had fallen.
Altaïr knew that he would have to be all the more watchful, now that he was drawing close enough to see living men battling on either side of this latest conflict. Reining in his horse, Altaïr began to see Saracen archers appearing out of the tree line some distance in front of him. Dropping back to the ground, he rolled out of the dirt road, swiftly taking shelter behind an upturned cart so that he could watch the melee with at least some semblance of safety.
There were, perhaps, one hundred of the archers in this particular group; they moved quickly, crouched and bent low to the ground, moving in the same way he himself had done when he had been tasked with infiltrating those cities that held his various targets. Making his own way into the trees, Altaïr followed the archers at a safe distance. He wasn’t able to determine just how long or how far he followed the archers, always being careful to stay out of sight of the Saracens he was tracking, but the distance he had covered seemed rather great.
He had clearly come closer to the main battle, as he was now able to feel the vibrations of men and horses trampling over the ground before him, each and every one of them caught up in the battle. Soon, the archers – and with them Altaïr himself – came upon a ridge that stood above the main battle. For a moment, Altaïr found his breath stolen by the sheer size of it, before he gathered himself once again and moved forward.
His duty was to the Brotherhood, Altaïr sternly reminded himself after the memories of the Siege of Acre threatened to overwhelm him; his task was to find Robert, to finally determine just what the Grand Master Templar knew, and then to be done with the man at last.
All around him were the bodies of the slain; Saracen and Crusader alike, as well as the broken remains or machinery and horses. It was clear that there had been a great battle for the advantageous position that this ridge would have provided to whoever managed to lay claim to it; the bodies of men, alongside their shattered weapons, littered the ground before where he now stood. Even as he watched, yet another group of Crusaders met with the Saracen archers that he had been tracking, bringing a great shout from both sides as they faced once another.
The Saracens possessed the element of surprise, and so had the advantage when the two groups met in combat, and their first attack left the bodies of Crusader knights dying on the ground before them. Some of the men even falling from the ridge into the chaos of the melee below the ridge. But, even as Altaïr crouched out of sight of the combatants, the Crusaders regrouped, rallied, and their counter-attack began in earnest.
Knowing that the safest way for him make his way to the position that Richard maintained, and from there find out just where it was that Robert de Sable had hidden himself, Altaïr moved forward and to the left. Leaving a wide berth between himself and the continuing battle atop the ridge, he skirted the main conflict and continued pressing onward and forward.
As he made his way on, to find King Richard so that he would be able to find Robert, Altaïr caught a glimpse of a Crusader foot soldier crouching in the underbrush. The man was whimpering as he watched the mad chaos taking place before his very eyes, and Altaïr passed by him without a word. He would not kill a man who clearly wished only to live.
Suddenly, a shout went up from the undergrowth, and Altaïr found himself facing a pair of Crusaders; both with broadswords raised to impede his progress. Reaching up for his weapons with crossed arms, Altaïr drew his short sword with his right hand and flicked a throwing knife with his left. One of them went down quickly with Altaïr’s own knife in his neck, and he swiftly impaled the other through the heart. The two of them turned out to be scouts; a fact he’d not taken note of when he’d first caught sight of them.
Still in a position to overlook the battle from where he stood, Altaïr found that he was no longer standing upon a ridge but on the brow of a hill. Looking back up, Altaïr found that he could just manage to catch his first glimpse of the standard borne by Richard the Lionheart, and beyond that even a slight glimpse of the king himself. The man’s steed, armored and caparisoned for battle, was distinctive enough on its own, but the flaming orange of Richard’s beard and his hair made it all the more clear just who he was now facing.
There remained only one barrier before him, now: the rearguard of Crusader knights guarding Richard from whoever might have attempted to attack him; or else anyone who had managed to make it so far for another reason.
Leaping into battle with the Knights who stood before him, Altaïr pressed forward, slashing with his long sword and short blade; at times he was able to make a long dash forward, and at other times he was forced to move more slowly and deliberately as he pressed what advantages he could find. Out of the corner of his right eye, Altaïr saw that King Richard had dismounted, and now stood in a clearing among the ranks of his immediate bodyguards.
The bodyguards had begun to form a circle around him; creating a smaller target and a wall of men to make such a target dangerous to challenge.
Dashing forward as he managed to clear yet another space for himself, Altaïr slowed and flicked the blood from his swords. Watching as the archers scrabbled to stand upon the boulders scattered around him, and the Knights before and around him took up arms, fierce pride in their eyes as they faced him down, Altaïr raised his chin and deliberately sheathed his swords.
“Hold a moment,” he said, making his voice calm as he locked eyes with Richard. “It’s words I bring, not steel.”
The king seemed to consider him for a long moment, while his archers and knights continued to hold their positions; the points of every sword aimed at his gut, and the sights of every archer fixed upon him. He was walking into the very maw of death; for a moment, Altaïr felt an odd urge to laugh at how common such a thing had become for him. Swallowing such a laugh, since this was not remotely the place for such an outburst, Altaïr gathered himself once again.
“Offering terms for a surrender, then?” Richard asked, seeming satisfied. “It’s about time.”
“No, you misunderstand,” he said, having managed to fully compose himself again after his odd urge to burst out laughing. “It is Al Mualim who sends me, not Salah Al’din.”
The king’s face darkened with clear displeasure. “Assassin? What is the meaning of this? And be quick with it.”
“You’ve a traitor in your midst,” he said, as the men gathered around him pressed forward slightly, the archers tensing even as they did so.
“And he has hired you to kill me?” Richard asked, his eyes narrowing. “Come to gloat about it before you strike? I won’t be taken so easily.”
“It’s not you I’ve come to kill, it’s him,” he said, deliberately moving his hands slightly away from his weapons.
“Speak, then, that I may judge the truth,” Richard said, then beckoned Altaïr forward. “Who is this traitor?”
“Robert de Sable.”
Richard’s eyebrows raised, a clear sign of the king’s surprise. “My lieutenant?”
Chapter 68: Robert de Sable
Chapter Text
“He aims to betray,” he said evenly, still searching for the words that he would need to persuade this man of what he needed to know.
“That’s not the way he tells it,” Richard said; Altaïr did not quite know what to make of the man’s tone, but he would at least hold to hope until and unless it had been proven to be ultimately futile. “He seeks revenge against your people for the havoc you’ve wrought in Acre. And I am inclined to support him; some of my best men were murdered by some of yours.”
It became clear that Robert de Sable had the king’s ear; Altaïr breathed deeply, knowing that what he said next could easily end in his death at the hands of Richard’s Crusader knights and bowmen. “It was I who killed them, and for good reason,” he said, deciding to leave the matter of Alnesr aside, since the presence of the younger Assassin could only confuse matters when he needed them to be clear. “Hear me out,” he said, in the face of Richard’s glare. “William of Montferrat sought to use his soldiers to take Acre by force. Garnier de Naplouse used his skills to indoctrinate and control any who resisted. Sibrand intended to block the ports, preventing your kingdom from providing aid. They all betrayed you, and they took their orders from Robert.”
“You expect me to believe this outlandish tale?” Richard demanded, folding his arms and narrowing his eyes; Altaïr would have liked to think he would have been more open to the possibilities, but as he’d not been placed in a situation such as this, he truly had no way of saying.
“You know these men better than I,” he said, both because such a thing was indeed true, and so that Richard would at least begin considering matters more clearly. “Are you truly surprised to learn of their ill intentions?”
Richard paused, and clearly seemed to be considering what he had known – and perhaps not known – about the men who had purported to serve under him. Then he turned to a man standing on his right; a man in a full-face helm. “Is this true?”
The knight removed his helm, and Altaïr was at least somewhat pleased to note that he was now truly faced with Robert himself. Narrowing his eyes in distaste for the man who had been willing to send a woman – even one with the skill that he had seen the female Templar display – in his stead, Altaïr steeled his resolve. Here, now, was his chance to find out just what it was that de Sable knew.
About the Templar treasure, and possibly other matters of import to the Brotherhood.
Robert shifted slightly, his lip curling in clear distaste, even as Altaïr narrowed his eyes at the man. “My liege, it is an Assassin that stands before us,” de Sable said, the tone of his voice conveying clear exasperation. “These creatures are masters of manipulation. Of course it isn’t true.”
“I’ve no reason to deceive,” he couldn’t quite stop himself from snapping.
“Oh, but you do,” de Sable sneered. “You’re afraid of what will happen to your little fortress. Can it truly withstand the combined might of the Saracen and Crusader armies?”
“My concern is for the people of the Holy Land,” Altaïr said, in the face of Robert’s goading grin. “If I must sacrifice myself for there to be peace, then so be it.”
Richard’s bemused expression turned from him to de Sable and then back once more. “This is a strange place we find ourselves in. Each of you accusing the other.”
“There really is no time for this,” de Sable said quickly. “I must be off to meet with Saladin and enlist his aid. The longer we delay, the harder this will become.”
“Hold a moment, Robert,” Richard said, as the Templar made to leave; the king’s gaze went from de Sable to Altaïr himself and then back once more.
“Why?” de Sable snapped, snorting in obvious frustration as he stopped in his tracks. “What do you intend? Surely you do not believe him?”
Altaïr could see in de Sable’s eyes that he, too, knew that the king he purported to serve was beginning to have his doubts about that service. Perhaps he was even coming to believe Altaïr’s own word over that of Robert. Altaïr breathed deeply, and hoped that such was indeed coming to pass.
“It is a difficult decision,” the king replied. “One I cannot make alone. I must leave this in the hands of one wiser than I.”
“Thank you-”
“No, Robert. Not you,” Richard’s tone indicated a rebuke.
“Then who?” the Templar seemed irritated, so Altaïr steeled himself for what might well come next.
“The Lord,” Richard said, smiling; clearly pleased with himself for coming to what he saw as the right conclusion. “Let this be decided by combat. Surely God will side with the one whose cause is righteous.”
Altaïr saw the expression of amused pleasure that lingered slightly on de Sable’s face; clearly the Templar was recalling the least time that the two of them had met in combat. Altaïr was doing so as well, but he liked to think that he was not so hampered by arrogance and willful blindness as he had once been. However, he also recalled the sheer physical strength of the Templar before him; the way de Sable had thrown him from the room as easily as hefting a sack of wheat.
“If that is what you wish,” de Sable said calmly.
“It is.”
“So be it,” Robert said, his calm tone belied by the taunting smirk he wore. “To arms, Assassin.”
The two of them could hardly have been more disparate in appearance: Robert’s pristine armor, as opposed to Altaïr’s robes, stained with travel and the blood of many men; the cuts and bruises that Altaïr had taken just making his way toward this meeting that he had been wanting for some time; even down to the absence of the weariness that Altaïr could feel pulling down on him even as he and de Sable faced one another across the swiftly-forming ring of Crusader knights. It was clear that de Sable could see all of this, for he still wore a taunting smirk on his face, even as he pulled on chain-mail gauntlets and a fellow knight came forward to assist him with his helmet.
“So, we face each other once more. Let us hope that you prove more of a challenge, this time.”
“I am not the man you faced inside the Temple,” Altaïr replied, raising his sword as de Sable did the same.
The far-off thunder of the battle at Arsuf seemed all the more distant now; the world itself receding to merely the two of them as they faced off and prepared for battle.
“You look the same to me,” de Sable said, in that same disparaging tone that he had previously used.
Altaïr ignored it; the Templar would learn better soon enough. Raising his sword even as de Sable did the same, Altaïr held himself ready for whatever first strike de Sable would choose to open with. The Grand Master Templar seemed surprised by this, he was pleased to note; he would endeavor to surprise the man all the more during their coming battle.
“Appearances can deceive,” he stated calmly.
“True, true,” de Sable said, his surprised expression melting into one of wry amusement.
The two of them met in combat once more, and Altaïr slowly began to realize that – for all the other advantages the Templar had over him – he was not nearly as fast as Altaïr had trained himself to be. He would need to make this contest one of attrition if he wanted a hope of besting the Knight who had challenged him; if he wanted to find out just what it was that de Sable knew, before he sent the Templar to join the rest of his brothers-in-arms.
“Soon, this will be over and Masyaf will fall,” de Sable taunted, having clearly regained his arrogant confidence during the course of the battle; Altaïr would see that he regretted it.
“My brothers are stronger than you think.”
“We’ll know the truth of that soon enough,” de Sable scoffed, still grinning.
Still, as Altaïr continued the dance of battle that he had become so familiar with over the course of his life within the Brotherhood, de Sable was forced to back down under the sheer weight of the attacks that bore down on him. Altaïr was pleased, also, to note the harried attitude that the Templar took on as he was pressed steadily backward.
“Oh, so the child has learned how to use a blade?”
“I’ve had a lot of practice,” he said, calmly for all that he was becoming steadily more pleased to have de Sable backed into a corner, the way he himself had once been. “Your men saw to that.”
“They were sacrificed in service to a higher cause,” de Sable snapped; Altaïr could hear his breath coming more harshly, then.
“As will you be.”
De Sable pressed forward again, but this time Altaïr was more than ready, slamming the pommel of his sword into the Templar’s gut, sending him stumbling back, barely able to stay on his feet. In fact, the only thing that kept the knight from falling to the ground was the presence of his fellow knights all around him, propping de Sable up before he could fall to the dust. De Sable bristled with an unseemly sort of fury, and Altaïr knew that this fight was his.
After all, he’d learned well and long ago that a warrior who lost his temper had long since lost the battle.
“The time for games is ended!” de Sable bellowed, as though shouting such words would make them ring all the more true.
“It ended long ago,” Altaïr responded calmly, feeling as a pure Assassin for the first time since he had confronted that strange woman at the site of Majd Addin’s funeral.
De Sable pressed forward for what Altaïr knew would be the last time; his breathing almost more ragged than his attacks, and Altaïr was easily able to fend the Templar off.
“I do not know where your strength comes from,” de Sable gasped, clearly at the end of his strength; Altaïr was glade to note such a fact. “Some trick? Or is it indeed drugs, as has been said before?”
“It is as your king said: righteousness will always triumph over greed,” he said, both since such a thing was fully true, and because he knew that it would infuriate de Sable to the last to hear such a thing.
“My cause is righteous!” the Templar bellowed like a wounded bull, straining now to lift his sword.
It was in that struggle that Altaïr glimpsed his chance: pressing forward for the last time, he drove his sword deep into the center of the bright, red cross that de Sable wore on his surcoat, parting the Knight’s mail and piercing his chest. Eyes wide and shocked in the throes of the death that had finally come for him, de Sable reached futilely for the blade that Altaïr had impaled him with, just as he pulled his sword free.
Turning his eyes to the knights who had previously formed a ring around him and de Sable, like as not thinking that one of their own could not be bested by one of his, in case they meant to attack him for doing just that. However, not a one of them appeared willing to make such a move. Beyond the circle of knights, Altaïr saw King Richard looking on, as though the battle itself had been merely an interesting spectacle that he had been privileged to witness.
It was a curious thing, but Altaïr knew that there were other matters for him to attend to before he could properly address the matter of the king and his knights.
“It’s done, then; your schemes, like you, are put to rest,” he said calmly, for all that he was beginning to feel slightly uneasy once more.
When de Sable only chortled in response, Altaïr forced himself not to tense; such would only make his dismay obvious to the Templar now resting in his arms. “You know nothing of schemes; you’re but a puppet. He betrayed you, boy; just as he betrayed me.”
“Speak sense, Templar, or not at all,” he snapped, discomfited in the extreme, now that he could do nothing about it.
“Nine men he sent you to kill, yes?” de Sable asked, a serene smile settling on his face. “The nine who guarded the treasure’s secret?”
There had always been nine, so far as Altaïr and the other members of the Brotherhood knew: nine Templars guarding the secret of their Treasure, each passing the responsibility to their successor in their turn. It had been so for as long as the Templar Knights had existed; for the one-hundred years since they had formed, and taken the Temple Mount as their base of operations. Those who took them at their word believed that the order had been formed to protect those making their pilgrimage to the Holy Land; that they lived their lives as warrior monks for that most noble of purposes.
It was all a ruse, of course; the Templars had far more on their minds than simply the protection of helpless pilgrims, no matter their rhetoric to the contrary.
“What of it?” he asked, knowing that his suspicions were soon to either be allayed or confirmed with what de Sable said next.
“It wasn’t nine who found the Treasure, Assassin,” de Sable’s voice was growing softer, but for all that his smile remained serene as ever. “Not nine, but ten.”
His suspicion was not to be allayed, then. “A tenth? None may live who carry the secret. Give me his name.”
“Oh, but you know him well,” de Sable’s answering chuckle drew blood from between the Templar’s lips; Altaïr knew, then, that his time was almost at an end. “And I doubt very much you’d take his life as willingly as you’ve taken mine.”
“What?” It felt as though he had swallowed a still-burning ember; not simply for the sheer inevitability of the fate de Sable’s words were slowly revealing to him, but for the other truth that he may yet be forced to face.
“It is your Master: Al Mualim,” de Sable said at last; his tone carrying an amused sort of finality to it.
“He is not a Templar,” Altaïr said, wanting more than anything to deny the truth he had slowly been coming to suspect; but the world was what it was, and the truth could not be denied.
“Did you never wonder how it was he knew so much?” de Sable pressed, sounding more amused by the word. “Where to find us? How many we numbered? Even what we hoped to attain?”
“He is the Master of the Assassins,” he protested weakly, for if he’d been misled so badly about one matter, it was all too possible that he’d been ill-informed about more; more lives than his own might well have been at risk.
“Master of lies,” de Sable managed. “You, myself, and even the little one; just more pawns in his grand game. And now, with my death, only you remain. Do you really think he’ll let either of you live, knowing what you do?”
“We’ve no interest in the Treasure,” he said, strangling the sudden, desperate worry for Alnesr’s sake; the younger Assassin knew how to defend himself from enemies. And, just as important, he knew how to escape from those who might try to hold him.
“Ah, but he does. The only difference between your Master and I, is that he did not wish to share,” de Sable said, voice growing quieter. “Ironic, is it not? That I, your greatest enemy, kept you and your own safe from harm. But now you’ve taken my life, and in the process ended more than your own.”
Breathing deeply to steady himself against the sudden rush of emotions he was feeling in the wake of this latest turn of events, Altaïr looked down at the corpse of Robert de Sable. “We do not always find the things we seek,” he intoned, rising back to his feet; for a moment, he almost wished the Crusaders would attack him.
Chapter 69: The last revelation
Chapter Text
Then, he forced such thoughts out of his mind, so that he could focus on what was to come.
“Well fought, Assassin,” Richard said, as the king came striding over from some place to his right, through the ring of knights that parted swiftly to allow him through. “It seems God favors your cause, this day.”
“God had nothing to do with it,” he said calmly, having regained his composure. “I was the better fighter.”
“Ah; you may not believe in Him, but it seems that He believes in you,” the king said. “Before you go, I have a question.”
“Ask it, then,” he said, longing to be away from this place; more than anything, to know what had truly happened to Alnesr.
“Why? Why travel all this way? Risk your life a thousand times? All to kill a single man.”
“He threatened my brothers and what we stand for,” Altaïr said simply, wishing to put this man’s curiosity to rest so that he could leave.
“Ah,” Richard said, nodding in the manner of one who had found a kindred spirit. “Vengeance, then?”
“No. Not vengeance,” he said, recalling what he had felt, and thought, when he’d finally managed to end Robert de Sable’s life. “Justice; that there might be peace.”
“This is what you fight for?” Richard echoed, brows arching in clear surprise. “Peace? Do you see the contradiction?”
Richard swept his right arm to encompass the battle taking place below them, the corpses scattered about the clearing, and lastly, the still-warm corpse of Robert de Sable, staring up at them with clouded eyes.
“Some men cannot be reasoned with,” he said, letting his gaze pass over the Templar’s still form.
“Like that madman, Saladin,” Richard sighed.
“I think he would like to see an end to this war, as much as you,” he said; Altaïr saw a just, fair-minded king, one who strove to do right by his people, even through circumstances such as these.
“So I’ve heard, but never seen,” Richard said, looking as though he would have liked to believe Altaïr’s words, but could not quite bring himself to do so.
“Even if he doesn’t say it, it’s what the people want. Saracen and Crusader alike.”
“The people do not know what they want,” Richard said, with a slight huff of annoyance. “It’s why they turn to men like us.”
“Then it falls to men like us to do what is right,” he said firmly.
“Nonsense,” Richard snorted. “We come into this world kicking and screaming; violent and unstable. It is what we are. We cannot help ourselves.”
“No,” he shook his head. “We are what we choose to be.”
“Your kind; always playing with words,” Richard replied, a rueful smile stretching his lips.
“I speak the truth. There’s no trick to be found here.”
“We’ll know soon enough,” Richard said, with a grunt that spoke of finality. “But I fear that you cannot have what you desire, this day. Even now, that heathen Saladin cuts through my men, and I must attend to them. But perhaps, seeing how vulnerable he is, he will reconsider his actions. In time, what you seek may be possible.”
“You were no more secure than him,” Altaïr reminded the king. “Do not forget that. The men you left behind, to rule in your stead, did not intend to serve you for longer than they had to.”
“Yes, I am well aware,” Richard said, seeming pained to admit such a thing; no one wished to think badly of those they had trusted.
He knew that better than most.
“Then I shall take my leave,” he said, nodding to Richard. “My Master and I have much to discus; it seems even he is not without fault.”
“He is only human,” Richard said, his eyes reflecting their shared pain. “As are we all. You as well.”
“Safety and peace be upon you,” he said, turning to take his leave at last; if Richard said anything in return, he did not hear it.
If he was to be of any assistance to the Brotherhood in general, or to Alnesr in particular, he would have to leave as swiftly as he could manage. Making his way back down the ridge, and then through the sparse forest with all of its unattended dead, Altaïr took care to avoid any of those – Crusader or Saracen – who would have attempted to hinder his progress.
Finding his horse once more, Altaïr re-mounted the beast and urged it back into motion. Setting off back down the path, Altaïr urged his horse to move ever faster, wanting nothing more than to return to Masyaf with all possible speed. Thusly, every time he was forced to break for either a meal or a night of sleep was like a weight pressing down on his heart; he was giving the- giving Al Mualim all the time he would need to solidify his control over the citadel. All the time he would need to use the Treasure for his own ends.
Upon the last day he needed to rest, with merely the last stretch of road between himself and Masyaf left to be covered, Altaïr forced himself to be calm and breathe deeply. He would be no good to anyone if he allowed himself to become tense, or to succumb to worry. He would need all his wits about him, if he was indeed to face what was to come.
The fortress was not as he had left it: the streets were eerily empty of people, and when he returned to the stable there were none there to greet him. None to attend to either his horse, or any of those that had been stabled alongside it. He would have taken such a task himself – he had the necessary skill – were he not far more concerned with the state of the Brotherhood, and just what Al Mualim might have been doing with the Templar Treasure.
Chapter 70: The hidden enemy
Chapter Text
The light seemed to be all that existed in the world, binding him like iron chains wrapped in silk; holding him in place, else he would have attacked the man that had orchestrated all of this. He’d only seen flashes, a brief suggestion of a form hidden behind the all-encompassing light, but the picture he had formed was enough for him to go on, at least: a tall man, cloaked in heavy black garments. He was unsure if it was a bald pate or else long hair that he had seen, but he at least knew that the man had been tanned heavily.
Clearly, whoever this man was, he worked in the sun a great deal.
“We all have our parts to play, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
“Speak sense, old man, or not at all,” he snarled, having long since lost his patience with the man’s cryptic words.
“I would speak more plainly to one of my own,” the man in black said, with an amused chuckle that made Alnesr hate him all the more. “But you? You’re merely a stepping-stone.”
The light closed in around him once more, binding him in stranglers’ coils until he felt as though his mind would be crushed by them. Altaïr, I wish I was with you right now…
~AC1~
He’d spoken to Malik; finding that his fellow Assassin was just as troubled by Al Mualim’s betrayal as he had been, and shared in his worry for Alnesr’s sake. He was pleased to know that, but he and Malik had both agreed that it was a cold comfort under the circumstances. Making his way through the deserted halls and corridors of the fortress, Altaïr forced himself not to think on what might have been happening to Alnesr.
He could only hope to deal with Al Mualim; all of these machinations of his couldn’t outlast the man’s hold on the Treasure, he was sure. Or at least, he tried to be so. It was not an easy thing, now that he was making his way through halls and corridors that had once bustled with the activities of his fellow Assassins, and now were as empty and silent as a disused cemetery.
It was not a thing that he had ever thought to see in Masyaf; not a thing he had ever wanted to, either.
When he managed to make his way out to the gardens that Al Mualim maintained, Altaïr found that it was as empty as all the rooms that he had seen before. However, he had barely taken three steps into the garden before the sound of a bolt being thrown drew his attention. The gate had been locked behind him; it was almost as though he was facing Talal the slaver once more.
In the end, however, it seemed that the two of them had far more in common than he had once been willing to see.
~AC1~
Looking down on the Assassin from his balcony, Rashid was glad that he’d not followed his first impulse to bring Hemamah into this battle. The child – once the Assassin Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr, but now purified by the Apple’s light so that he could walk in the new world – continued to rest in Rashid’s quarters. He did not know, yet, just where he would take the boy once he had finished with the Assassin before him, but he was also aware that he would have time to decide such a thing later.
“What’s happening?” the Assassin demanded, now bound and struggling within the Apple’s power.
“So, the student returns,” he said, looking down upon the Assassin in his grasp; one more task to be attended to, and then he could decide what else he wished to do.
“I’ve never been one to run,” the Assassin said, defiance in every line of his struggling body.
Rashid was hardly impressed. “Never been one to listen, either.”
“I still live because of it,” the Assassin snapped. “But enough games. Where is Alnesr?”
“He is beyond your reach,” Rashid said calmly. “But, that is not the question that must be asked now. No, the true question is, what shall I do with you?”
“Let me go!” the Assassin demanded.
“Oh, Altaïr. I hear the hatred in your voice; feel its heat,” he said, looking down with some pity upon the Assassin who had been so dutiful to him such a short time ago. “Let you go? I fear that would be unwise.”
“Why are you doing this?”
Curious to the last, it seemed; perhaps he could, at least, let the Assassin go in peace. “I believed, once. Did you know that? Thought there was a God; a God who loved and looked after us. Who sent prophets to guide and comfort us. Who made miracles to remind us of his power.”
“What changed?” the Assassin asked, his tone curious, though no more gentle than it had been,
“I found proof,” he said, gathering his will and focusing it into the Apple again.
“Proof of what?”
Chapter 71: False truths
Chapter Text
When he heard Al Mualim making his last pronouncement, Altaïr had not truly known what to expect. However, finding himself facing the nine Templars he had slain to come to this final reckoning was not what he had been expecting by a long road. Gathering himself for combat once more, shutting away his worries for Alnesr, Malik, and the others of the Brotherhood who served in Masyaf, as well as the lingering surprise and betrayal he still felt, Altaïr threw himself back into combat with a will.
Cutting the illusory Templars down just as easily as he’d managed when they were flesh and blood standing before him, Altaïr turned his attention back to Al Mualim.
“Face me,” he demanded, after he’d managed to catch his breath; his robes and underclothes were soaked and uncomfortable with sweat, but he knew that the battle was far from over. “Or, are you afraid?”
“I have stood before a thousand men, each of them superior to you, and all of them dead,” Al Mualim scoffed. “By my hand.”
Standing his ground as Al Mualim leaped from the balcony, Altaïr watched as the man rose back to his feet once more. He still held the Apple, the bright, glowing trinket held out in front of him as though Al Mualim intended to offer it to him. Though Altaïr knew that there was as little chance of that as of either of them learning to fly.
“I am not afraid of you, child.”
“Prove it, then,” he challenged.
He knew that Al Mualim would see his words as the ruse they truly were; that, even though he was ultimately a traitor, he had still been Master of the Assassins. No one gained such a rank without great skills in various forms of combat.
“What could I possibly have to fear?” almost before the words themselves had passed Al Mualim’s lips, eight duplicates seemingly emerged from within the old man’s body; each of them armed with a sword of their own. “Look at the power I command!”
Bracing himself for combat once more, Altaïr raised his own blade and met the first of the Apple’s second wave of duplicates. These were no stronger or more capable than the last wave that he had been made to face, and so he was done with them easily. Standing once more before Al Mualim, Altaïr breathed slowly and deeply to steady his trembling muscles once again.
Finding himself restrained by the power of the Apple again, Altaïr allowed himself to relax slightly; all the better that Al Mualim thought himself in control, so he could learn what he needed to kill the traitor – doubly traitorous, considering all that he’d learned during the course of his work – and have done with his mission at last.
“Have you any final words?”
“You lied to me,” he said, not bothering to keep a snarl out of his voice. “You called Robert’s goal foul, when all along it was your own, as well.”
“I’ve never been much good at sharing,” Al Mualim said, sounding almost rueful at the pronouncement.
“You won’t succeed,” he said with certainty. “Others will find the strength to stand against you.”
“And this is why, so long as men maintain free will, there can be no peace,” Al Mualim said, sighing as though in sorrow that he was forced to such an end.
“I killed the last man who spoke as such,” Altaïr reminded them both.
“Bold words, boy,” the old man laughed. “But just words.”
“Let me go, then,” he challenged. “I’ll put words into action.” Narrowing his eyes, considering some way that he could prod the old man into making a mistake, Altaïr decided to ask the question that had been troubling him ever since Al Mualim had been revealed for the man he truly was. “Tell me, Master: why did you not make me like the other Assassins? Why allow me to retain my mind?”
“Who you are and what you do are twinned too tight,” the old man said. “To rob you of one would have deprived me of the other, and those Templars had to die,” Al Mualim sighed softly. “But the truth is, I did try. In my study, when I showed you the Treasure; but you are not like the others. You saw through the illusion.”
“What did you do to Alnesr, then?” he demanded.
Surely someone he had raised as his own would not be susceptible to such falsities.
“The child… for all that he allowed you to touch his life, that boy was unique in all the world. He was never truly yours,” Al Mualim said. “He is beyond you, Altaïr. Beyond all cares or troubles.”
He did not know how to respond to such an assertion, and he knew that he still needed to have done with Al Mualim at last.
“What you have planned is no less of an illusion: to force men to follow you against their will.”
“Is it any less real than the phantoms the Saracens and Crusaders follow now? Those craven gods who retreat from this world, that men might slaughter one another in their names? They live amongst an illusion already. I’m simply giving them another; one that demands less blood.”
“At least they choose these phantoms,” he stated firmly.
“Do they? Aside from the occasional convert, or heretic?”
“It isn’t right,” Altaïr snapped in response.
“Ah, and now logic has left you,” Al Mualim said, sounding disappointed. “In its place, you embrace emotion. I am disappointed.”
“What is to be done, then?” he demanded.
“You will not follow me, and I cannot compel you,” Al Mualim said, the expression on his worn face appearing sorrowful enough that Altaïr wondered just how he was managing to do such a thing.
“And, you refuse to abandon this evil scheme,” he said, narrowing his eyes.
“It seems, then, that we are at an impasse,” Al Mualim said, the fire beginning to return to his eyes.
“No, we are at an end,” he snapped, gathering himself for combat once again.
Chapter 72: Rashid ad-Din Sinan
Chapter Text
“I will miss you, Altaïr,” Al Mualim said, unsheathing his sword. “You were one of my very best students.”
It was as though the years of his life were melting away as Al Mualim gathered himself for the coming battle. As the two of them met in combat for the first time, without the illusions of the Apple interfering with them, Altaïr found the skills that he had honed during the course of his life and work being put to the greatest test that he had encountered during the course of his life as an Assassin.
Watching as Al Mualim seemed to vanish and reappear several paces from where he had once been standing, Altaïr took careful note of how the old man held himself; it seemed that, every time he used that strange power, it took some measure of his own energy.
Pressing the old man harder, knowing now that Al Mualim did not have all the time in the world the way he had clearly wished to pretend. He now knew that there was indeed a way to triumph over the man, to defeat him while staying true to the very ideals that the old man had so callously cast aside in his pursuit of power for his own ends. Knew that, now that he understood the power that the old man was using more completely, he would be able to kill him.
Just as he had killed all of those Templars that needed to die.
Pressing further forward, harrying Al Mualim every time he vanished and reappeared further away in an effort to give himself more room to breathe, Altaïr began at last to see that his plan had borne fruit. Steadying himself once more, Altaïr drove forward with his blade again. He would not be defeated by something so simple as an illusion, even one so compelling as that which the Apple could create.
He would not think of such as the Templars’ treasure anymore; not when he was so close to being able to take it for the Brotherhood, so that he and the others would be able to keep it out of the hands of those who would seek to misuse its power for their own ends. Or, perhaps to destroy it, so that no one else would be able to make use of its power.
Yes; if this Apple that the Templars seemed to be determined to reclaim was indeed capable of corrupting someone like Al Mualim, it could clearly not be allowed to fall into the hands of anyone else. Altaïr did not know if he would even have trusted himself with that power. When he leaped forward, driving his sword into Al Mualim’s body with a roar of pain and triumph, Altaïr wondered for a long moment just what the old, former Assassin had made of this happening.
“Impossible,” Al Mualim gasped wetly, as Altaïr knelt down beside him. “The student does not defeat the teacher.” Altaïr hung his head; this was not a victory he had ever wanted. “You have won, then; go and claim your prize.”
“You held fire in your hand, old man,” he said, looking at the Apple where it had rolled onto the marble pathway in Al Mualim’s garden. “It should have been destroyed.”
“Destroy the only thing capable of ending the Crusades and creating true peace?” Al Mualim laughed; Altaïr shook his head at the sheer depths of the corruption he was bearing witness to. This was, pure and simply, madness. “Never.”
“Then I will,” he said calmly, rising to his feet as he tried to feel such calm as he had projected with his voice; it was not an easy thing.
“We’ll see about that.”
Chapter 73: The Apple revealed
Chapter Text
“It seems things have proceeded along well enough,” the man hidden in the light said, sounding more pleased than Alnesr could account for; there was truly no way for him to know just what had happened, what even then was happening, outside of the endless light that he found himself trapped within. “Time for your part, then.”
He felt the stranglers’ coils releasing him, and narrowed his eyes at the black-cloaked man who now stood before him.
“Well? I had thought that you wanted answers, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
“What madness do you speak now?” he demanded, holding himself ready for whatever else would come.
“If you can catch me, I will give you all the answers you desire,” the cloaked man held out a hand; gloved in black or white, Alnesr could not say with any certainty. “However, if I catch you, you will lose far more than merely a race.”
Without a word, wanting more than anything to have whatever answers this cloaked man was hiding from him, Alnesr dashed after him. It seemed, however, that the man had had training comparable to a member of the Brotherhood. Perhaps he was a Templar? Or even a traitor?
Alnesr did not know the answers to such questions as he had now, but the cloaked man had made it known that he would provide the answers that Alnesr craved, in exchange for merely out competing him in a contest of physical skill. However, it quickly became more than clear that the man in the black cloak was far swifter than his earlier demeanor would have suggested.
For no matter how doggedly Alnesr pursued him, no matter what measure of his own skill he employed – learned at the feet of one of the greatest among the Brotherhood – the man in the black cloak seemed to be at least several steps ahead for every one that Alnesr made.
“Far enough.” Alnesr felt as though he had been slammed into a stone wall, when the black cloaked man’s hand merely rested lightly on his head. “No one with eyes could deny your skill, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr; but in the end, it seems I did indeed catch you.” The man’s chuckle was like to make him clench his fists in response, if he could’ve moved his body in the slightest. “Now, for the prize I was promised…”
The light encroached upon his thoughts again, leaving him with naught more than empty nothingness…
~AC: TSC~
When he had finally managed to pry the Apple free from Abbas’ clenched hand, the pulses of light that had been lashing out almost aggressively from the odd silver sphere that his former friend had so foolishly reached out to claim it still not dying down now that he held it in his own hands, Altaïr tried to think of just what it was that he could do to stop such a thing from continuing. He was aware on some level of the third Assassin joining them inside the tower where he and Abbas stood, but as they had not made any hostile movements, Altaïr was content to leave them where they stood.
He would attend to them later, if they were still in need of reassurance after all that they might have seen.
Looking into the Apple as he held it out before him, Altaïr once again found himself wrapped in the item’s power. It was indeed a temptation, as Al Mualim had said not so long ago; it would corrupt the hearts and minds of any who sought to use it for the purpose that it had been seemingly made for. And yet, Altaïr wondered if it could not be put to a more benign use.
Perhaps it could not corrupt the mind of one who merely used it to gain knowledge… or perhaps that was what Al Mualim had thought, when he had gained possession of the Apple.
“Have you anything to teach us? Or would you lead us all to ruin?”
He knew that such a thing as the Apple would not be able to answer the questions that he had asked, and so Altaïr turned his attention to the one who had merely stood and watched as this drama had played out under his very eyes.
“And you, silent one, what would you…” when he turned to look into the face of the one who had watched them with such calmness as no one here should have truly been able to show, Altaïr realized just who it was. “Alnesr? It pleases me to see you well, but…”
And there, he caught sight of the younger Assassin’s eyes. They were the same blank white as the light shining out of the Apple, and they even pulsed in that same rhythm. He did not truly know what to make of such a happening, but he at least knew that he had to return Alnesr to his senses else there would be nothing he could find out from his fellow about this. Stepping closer to the younger Assassin, Altaïr lifted his chin.
Chapter 74: The Vessel and the Little Eagle
Chapter Text
The sight of Alnesr’s eyes, filled with the eerie light of the Apple, and more than likely blind to everything that truly existed in the world, was not one that Altaïr relished in the slightest.
“You are not an empty vessel for the Apple’s power,” he said, resting his right hand on the younger Assassin’s head; he could all but see the young man bound within the light, struggling even then to be free. Altaïr did not truly know if what he found before his eyes was true in any sense but the most metaphorical, but all the same it was something to hold to. “You are a member of the Brotherhood; an Assassin, as I am. Now, wake up.” The figure bound in the light, the one that looked as Alnesr looked, the one that seemed to be struggling against some sort of bonds that held him still. “Wake up, Alnesr.”
For a few moments, Altaïr thought that he saw a man garbed in black robes walking around the struggling form of Alnesr within the light, and he wondered if Al Mualim’s mind could have somehow survived the destruction of his body. It was only for a moment, however; the figure vanished with a flourish of his black robes, and the light departed Alnesr’s eyes at the same moment.
He did not know just how the younger Assassin would cope with what had happened to him, and so he was not entirely surprised when Alnesr almost leaped into his embrace. After a moment, however, the younger Assassin looked discomfited and then pulled away. However, it was clearly not because he had recovered from his ordeal, but because he thought his actions unseemly.
“It is nothing against you, to feel the need for reassurance after an ordeal such as this,” he said gently; he took brief note of Abbas, leaving the tower without words or a look back, but then returned his attention to Alnesr. “In truth, I find myself concerned over this latest turn of events.”
“Thank you, Altaïr,” the younger Assassin said, leaning lightly against him as the two of them paused briefly to regain their composure after all the upheavals of this day of days.
After a few moments spent to compose themselves once more, Altaïr led Alnesr down from the tower, and back through the citadel itself. The younger Assassin seemed to have mastered himself well after all that he had been through, and Altaïr was pleased to take note of such. They had a great deal of work ahead of them, if they were indeed to restore the Brotherhood back to what it had been before Al Mualim had betrayed them all.
Though Altaïr felt that, as one who had been closest to the man, he had ultimately suffered the greatest betrayal; though he tried not to think in such a way.
Once he and Alnesr had made it out of Masyaf once more, Altaïr found the same crowd of fellow Assassins waiting for him in the courtyard. All of them looked as though they had not yet recovered from what had happened; he could hardly fault them for that, however, given the events that had actually taken place. To say nothing of the man who had ultimately been responsible for them.
He spoke to those Assassins who had gathered before him, reassuring them that Al Mualim was indeed dead, in spite of the vision that he had been given by the Apple. He’d no way of truly knowing just who that man in the black cloak had been, or even if he had existed at all. He did not wish for anyone else to worry about a presence that might not have even been real.
He spotted Abbas, standing at the far edges of the crowd; he wasn’t such a fool as to think that his former friend would be willing to let go of his resentment so quickly after everything that had happened.
However, he knew that he could not afford to take too much time reassuring his brother Assassins that things were going to be returning to normal. Not if he was to intercept the Templars before they could depart for whatever new place they would choose to go now that he had driven them out of the Holy Land and laid full claim to the Treasure that they had been guarding.
“You called for me, Master Altaïr?” Malik said, smiling in that amused way he had, even as he spoke Altaïr’s new title.
“Thank you for coming so quickly, my friend,” he said, smiling as he, Malik, and Alnesr continued on their way back into Masyaf. “You know, as I do, that the Templars will not remain idle after this. If we are to take advantage of the confusion that these deaths will have doubtless caused within their ranks, we will need to act quickly.”
“What did you have in mind, Altaïr?” Alnesr asked, his bearing and expression far more calm for the time that he had been given to compose himself.
“We should pursue this lead; find out where it is that they intend to go from here on,” he said, leaning against the doorway that led into what had once been Al Mualim’s study.
Altaïr was not yet comfortable with calling such a thing his own as yet, and he was also fully aware that, once he and those he would select to aid him in the task of reorganizing and re-cataloging the texts in what had been Al Mualim’s study truly began it in earnest, the full weight of the events of the past two days – or day and a half, as he could not quite recall just what time during the day he had returned to Masyaf for his final confrontation – would fall upon him once again. He’d not the time to deal with such things, not with the Templars still at large, and not with their activities currently unknown. Not when there was a chance to be finished with the Templars once and for all.
“Alnesr, do you think that you could accompany me on another mission?” he asked, firmly turning his gaze away from the empty study that Al Mualim had once worked within.
“I will accompany you on this mission, if you truly wish me to, Altaïr,” Alnesr said.
Altaïr nodded.; it was not simply for the sake of such a close association as they had, that he had chosen Alnesr to accompany him on this next mission of his. His brother Assassin clearly needed to understand that he, and no other, was fully in control of his life, after however long he had spent with his mind bound inside the Apple. Altaïr was not willing to believe that the man Al Mualim had become after so long spent with the Treasure in his possession would not have imprisoned Alnesr’s mind within it once he had become aware of such a power.
It was what anyone who had willingly chosen to ally themselves with the Templars, and further to betray even them for more power, would have done.
Chapter 75: Moving Forward
Chapter Text
He spoke with Malik and Alnesr both, telling them of what he had thought and the tentative plans he had formed, and listened in turn to what they thought and had realized during the course of these trying times. Alnesr, he was pleased to note, spoke freely of his opinions. Though naturally he’d little to meaningfully contribute, considering his circumstances.
“The both of you should leave now, if you’re to catch up to the Templars and find where they’ve taken shelter after these upheavals,” Malik said, as the three of them moved away from the door to Al Mualim’s former study.
Altaïr knew that, soon enough, his brother Assassins would come to think of the place as his, and he was still not certain how he felt about the idea.
“We’ll be returning to the cities we visited before,” he said; best to begin the search where there had been a known Templar presence, before moving onto those he’d not visited in some time. “It’s likely they will still have some signs of where the surviving Templars will go to next.”
Malik agreed with his reasoning, and Altaïr smiled slightly as his brother Assassin wished them good fortune in their hunt. Departing with the assurance that Malik and his trusted would attend to at least the beginnings of the repairs that needed to be made, to the morale of the Brotherhood if not at any of the buildings, he led Alnesr down to the stables and the both of them mounted freshly-provisioned horses.
Returning to each one of the cities that he had previously visited, this time with Alnesr by his side, Altaïr was able to find out that the remaining Templars were congregating at the main port in Acre. He did not yet know just where they were planning to go from there, but with the information network that he was now in charge of, it would be a more simple matter than usual to find out where they planned to head after their various leaders had been killed.
Working closely with Alnesr, and alongside Acre’s Rafiq Jabal, Altaïr was able to find out that the Templars were not going to depart immediately, but were instead gathering their brethren in Acre so that they would be able to depart in force from the port. It was then that Altaïr realized what the next best course of action would be.
“Alnesr, you stay here and keep an eye on the situation,” he said to his brother Assassin, once the two of them had returned to Acre’s Bureau for the day. “I will return to Masyaf and speak with Malik.”
“Of course, Altaïr,” the younger Assassin said, nodding sharply.
~AC: TSC~
Seeing Altaïr off, Alnesr turned back to Jabal once more. “Will you let me know if anything important happens? I should probably eat.”
“And then sleep, I think,” Jabal said, smiling in that gentle way he had.
“Yes,” Alnesr said, chuckling gently as he lowered his gaze. “I thank you for your concern, Jabal.”
Leaving the Bureau’s front room so that he could take his meal and then rest in comfort, Alnesr gathered some dried figs and dates from the stores, along with a jug of water to quench his thirst, and made for the small table just opposite the pile of blankets and cushions that served as a bed within the room where he now sat. Once he had finished with his meal, Alnesr set his weapons aside and settled down to take his rest for the night.
Once he had awakened the next morning, Alnesr rearmed himself and made his way out to where Jabal was waiting for him. It had always seemed to be that way: the Rafiq of whatever Bureau he and Altaïr had stayed at would appear at their desk before either he or Altaïr had come out to speak with them, and to a man they had always appeared fresh and rested. There were times that he wondered what the daily life of a Rafiq truly entailed, but then he would remember his own duties as an Assassin.
Here and now, Alnesr resolved again to remember his own duties and so not to concern himself with those of others.
Chapter 76: Settling
Chapter Text
Speaking with Jabal, Alnesr found that the Informants had been assigned to monitor the activities of the Templars making their way into the city, which rather removed the necessity of him leaving the Bureau at all. Thanking Jabal for his consideration, though he found himself rather at loose ends in light of it, Alnesr made for the other room within the Bureau to hone his skill.
He did not know just how his body had been affected by the time that he had spent blind and all but helpless under the influence of the Apple’s power, but Alnesr was determined to restore his skill – if such a thing did indeed prove to be necessary – or else to improve it. He had also resolved to ask Altaïr if there had been something more that had happened when he had been released from the Apple’s power.
Something that would explain the way that his brother Assassin had looked over his shoulder for the first moments of Alnesr’s own returned awareness.
Training occupied a great deal of his time, and he also spoke with Jabal about what the Rafiq had learned of the Templar’s aims. It seemed that they were indeed making for the port, there to depart for one of their other strongholds. He and Jabal speculated on where they might have been going, but they both ultimately decided that such conjecture was futile with their present lack of knowledge.
However, he did receive news that Altaïr and a squad of their brother Assassins was making their way into Acre.
The citizens would not be permitted to know about their movements, of course, but Alnesr was at least pleased that he would have the chance to speak with Altaïr once more. Waiting in the Bureau’s secondary room for his former mentor and their brother Assassins to arrive, Alnesr smiled softly as he watched Altaïr and his chosen group descending once more into the Bureau.
“I see you waited for us, Alnesr.”
“Yes,” he said, smiling gently as his former mentor and father-in-all-but-blood made his way over to the table where he had set out food for them.
Altaïr thanked him for his consideration, and Alnesr accepted such thanks gracefully. Once he, Altaïr, and their brother Assassins had finished the meal he’d set out for them, Alnesr turned his attention to his former mentor as Altaïr began to discuss their next course of action. He contributed to the conversation when he was called upon to do so, and eventually it was decided that he and Altaïr would confront the Templars who had stationed themselves at Acre’s main port, while their brother Assassins would swiftly deal with any other Templars who sought to make their own way to the port.
Following swiftly on the heels of one of his brother Assassins, Alnesr made his way back up to the rooftops of Acre for the first time in what felt like entirely too long. He knew that such thoughts were false, considering that he and Altaïr had made their journey into this place not such a long time ago. Still, after he had spent an interminable amount of time bound within the power of the Apple, he couldn’t help the feeling slightly trapped when he could not see the open sky.
He wondered for a long moment if he would ever properly recover from such an ordeal, but Alnesr quickly put such thoughts out of his mind; he was an Assassin, he would will his way through.
Following Altaïr as he and the rest of their brother Assassins made their way to the main port of Acre, moving over the rooftops alongside Altaïr while the larger part of their group blended into the large crowd of citizens making their way into and out of the large, main port of Acre. For a moment, Alnesr felt as he always had when he’d done the Brotherhood’s work under the stern, exacting guidance of his former mentor. Still, there was a thought in the back of Alnesr’s mind that had not been there before.
It was as though he was only now aware of a presence just behind his eyes; one that seemed to watch all of his activities with a cold sort of scrutiny, one that did not seem to have anything but the most innocuous intentions, and yet one that Alnesr found that he could not bring himself to trust in the slightest.
Making up his mind that he would speak to Altaïr about such things as he had experienced when the two of them truly had a free moment to speak, Alnesr turned his full attention back to the infiltration that lay before him. Though infiltration seemed too grand a word for what they were doing, considering that he’d not seen a single Templar guard, or even a guard who was not a Templar, for that matter.
Chapter 77: A new hunt begins
Chapter Text
He had a long moment to wonder if he and Alnesr would encounter any resistance this night, or if their brother Assassins had managed to dispose of them all on their way in. It would be all the more fortunate for them if such were indeed the case, and yet he thought that Alnesr might not appreciate such a thing. The sound of far-off people speaking in low tones drew his attention to the group of guards making their way through the harbor, clearly on patrol.
Signaling to Alnesr to follow his lead more closely, Altaïr moved closely along the harbor wall, taking care to keep out of sight even as he watched the guards separating from one another. The foremost guard was now almost directly under his and Alnesr’s position, and as Altaïr leaped lightly from the rooftops, he wondered if the guard’s thoughts were of home. If he missed his home, in England or France, and the family he might have left behind.
He wished, as he drove his hidden blade into the guard’s neck, that he could have found another way.
Watching as Alnesr descended – silent, swift, and deadly – upon the former guard’s partner, Altaïr allowed himself a moment to sigh, before turning his attention to whatever guards might remain to challenge them. As it turned out, however, the rest of their brother Assassins had come to meet with them here. Issuing orders to them in a low tone, so as not to arouse the attention of any other guards. However, the presence of more of the Templars’ forces in the area was hardly something that could be ignored.
Leaving the Templars in the capable hands of his brother Assassins, Altaïr signaled Alnesr to follow him back up to the rooftops. There was a gnawing fear at the back of his mind: that he had waited too long to gather his forces; that the Templars would have already departed from the harbor while he had been gathering the necessary forces that he thought would be needed to face them.
When he and Alnesr made it to the top of the harbor’s perimeter wall, looking out over the sea, Altaïr found that his misgivings had more ground in reality than he would have honestly preferred: he could see a small fleet of Templar ships, barely visible in the gathering darkness, departing over the Mediterranean Sea. Cursing lowly, even as he heard Alnesr sighing, Altaïr turned swiftly and began making for the heart of the docks.
He could hear the sounds of far-off battle, and while pleased to note that it did not seem to be drawing closer in any way, he could also hear the greater intensity of the battle as more of their brother Assassins arrived to reinforce those who were already present. He could also hear Alnesr, following swiftly along behind him, and a fleeting smile passed over his face. They may not have been in time to put a halt to the Templars’ evacuation of the area outright, but Altaïr was determined to at least prevent them from establishing themselves once more.
He was certain that the key to doing such lay within the fortress that presided over Acre’s docks; the fortress where he had cornered Sibrand the last time he had come to this city.
Trusting Alnesr to follow him, Altaïr moved swiftly forward into the fortress. The pale gray stone, washed nearly colorless in the weak light of the moon and stars, absorbed the sounds of his and Alnesr’s footfalls as they made their way inside. The inside of the fortress seemed completely free of Templar presences, a notable contrast from when Altaïr had last been present in this place; he and Alnesr climbed various stone stairways until they came to a balcony, where he could hear the sound of voices raised in conversation.
One of them, the one who gave him the strongest feelings of both elation and dismay when he heard her voice, was the woman who had been present at Majd Addin’s funeral to prevent him from being able to attack Robert de Sable the second time that he had tried; he’d no care for the other two Templars.
“Where are my ships, soldier?” the woman demanded, clearly displeased to have been forced to wait as she was now. “I was told there would be another fleet of eight.”
Taking a glance out over the darkening sea, Altaïr saw the small fleet of Templar ships that the woman had doubtless been speaking of. He wondered for a moment just how many others had previously departed while he and his brother Assassins had been deliberating, and also if he could have done anything more to stop them. But no; Alnesr and Jabal were the only ones present and hence in any position to have done anything at the time, and he would not have risked Alnesr’s safety on such a foolish gambit in any case.
“I’m sorry, Maria, but this is the best we could do,” one of the remaining Templar soldiers said, sounding genuinely contrite.
He was pleased to be able to hear the woman’s name once more, and to be able to observe her without being observed in turn, but he could not help but to wonder just what had occurred to bring her to this state. Yes, he had killed Robert de Sable, but surely her own skills as a warrior was not an asset that the Templars wished to squander. Narrowing his eyes in thought, Altaïr settled back to observe, signaling Alnesr to do the same when the younger Assassin looked askance at him.
“How do you propose to get the rest of us to Cyprus, then?” she asked.
He wondered just what the Templars could want in Cyprus.
“Begging your pardon, but it might be better if you stayed in Acre,” the soldier said, sounding rather hesitant about voicing such an opinion.
Altaïr wondered at that, as well; perhaps this was yet one more thing that separated he and his brother Assassins from the Templars that they fought. He himself had met women who had chosen to dedicate themselves to the Brotherhood, few enough as they were; whether driven to escape the strictures of their former lives, or else simply wanting to be something more, Altaïr would never have been so callous to disparage his sister Assassins – rare as they were – for encountering an opponent beyond their current skill.
“What? Is that a threat?” Maria asked, sounding far more cautious than she had previously.
“It’s fair warning,” the Knight said, his tone neutral but hardly unkind. “Armand Bouchart is Grand Master now, and he doesn’t hold you in high regard.”
Chapter 78: Unsettled
Chapter Text
Catching Alnesr’s eye, he saw the younger Assassin nod. It seemed they would not have such a simple time dealing with these Templars as he’d once thought; they were not so leaderless as he had surmised. A troublesome development in some respects, and entirely unsurprising in others. While he may have despised the Templars’ means to achieving the goals they pursued – the goals that he and his brother Assassins shared – he was not so arrogant as to think them less intelligent than himself.
Not after all he had done during the course of his hunt for the nine Templars who had once held such power within the Holy Land.
“Why you insolent…” Maria bridled for a long moment, but then seemed to force herself to regain her composure. “Very well. I shall find my own way to Limassol.”
“Yes, milady,” the Templar said, bowing as he left.
Maria was left alone on the balcony, and as Alnesr came to stand beside him, he could hear Maria beginning to speak to herself in the tone of one who had been completely fed up with a situation.
“Damn. I was a single heartbeat from knighthood,” she groused, pacing the length of the balcony and then back again. “Now I’m little more than a mercenary.”
Moving softly forward, even as he signaled Alnesr to stay behind and guard their backs, Altaïr admitted to himself that there was not simply a practical purpose behind his current actions. He was not fully aware of the nature of the regard he held for this woman named Maria, but he would not deny that it was present and that he felt it, all the same. Such would have been the height of foolishness, and so an insult to his brother Assassins and the work they did.
“Well,” she said, calming quickly after she had spun to see him so swiftly. “It’s the man who spared my neck, but stole my life all the same.”
He’d little time to wonder what she meant, before her blade was out and she had fallen upon him with the fury he was so familiar with from Addin’s funeral. The fury that made him wish, for those breathless pauses between the swing of their respective blades, that he could convince her to renounce her allegiance to the Templars. Still, such a thing would ultimately depend on how deeply she believed in the ideals that the Templars held.
It was, much as he would regret such a thing, entirely possible that he would be forced to kill her as he had the rest of de Sable’s fellow Templars.
Sparing a quick glance at Alnesr, he found the younger Assassin intently watching for any of Maria’s fellow Templars that might have taken an undue interest in the battle that he and the woman were participating in atop the balcony where they might have been glimpsed by those beneath. He did not know if the prospect of Maria’s fellow Templars coming to her aid was a likely one, given that she had been associated with a fallen Grand Master of their Order, but he was pleased to know that Alnesr was prepared for them in such an event.
When he found himself with his back to the balustrade, Altaïr wondered for a pair of heartbeats if Maria would manage to force him over it and into the sea. He knew that Alnesr would act to save him, could not help but know it after all that the pair of them had been forced to endure, but Altaïr could not stop the thought from running through his mind. It would be a rather ironic fate, to be bested by one that he himself had bested in the past, and beyond that he did not in any way relish the thought of being made to swim.
Unlikely as he knew it would be for Alnesr to allow him to fall into the sea itself, such a thing might very well be beyond the younger Assassin’s control in the event that he were bested by this woman.
However, in her desperation to win she became rather careless, and Altaïr was able to regain the initiative once more. Spinning and kicking her legs from under her, Altaïr pounced, holding his blade to her throat. Alnesr’s soft footsteps came up beside him, but Altaïr kept his eyes upon Maria. He knew that his brother Assassin would understand the reason for his caution in such a case.
“Returned to finish me off, have you?” she demanded, looking with defiance at him, while sparing only the briefest of glances at Alnesr.
“Not just yet,” he said, maintaining his composure even in the face of his fascination with the woman he found before him; it was slightly more difficult than controlling his anger, but as he was a curious person by nature, Altaïr could not truthfully say that he had been unprepared for such a thing. “I want information: why are the Templars sailing to Cyprus?”
“It’s been a long, dirty war, Assassin,” she said, grinning confidently at him; he suspected that such was a façade, but could not help admiring her nerve once more. “Everyone deserves a respite.”
He bit back a smile, even as he continued holding her at bay; he knew that Alnesr would have questions for him after this, and he almost welcomed them. “The more you tell me, the longer you live. So I ask again: why the retreat to Cyprus?”
“What retreat?” Maria asked, clearly having regained her mental footing. “King Richard has brokered a truce with Salah Al’din. Your Order is leaderless, is it not? Once we recover the Apple of Eden, you’ll be the ones running.”
He caught Alnesr’s eye briefly, and the two of them shared a knowing glance. The two of them were fully aware of just how difficult their brother Assassins would make such a thing, if the Templars did indeed seek to attack Masyaf once more. He was also fully aware that the Brotherhood did have a leader, though he was not about to enter into such a discussion with Maria; not as long as she maintained her ties to the Templars and hence her support of their methods.
“The Apple of Eden is well hidden,” he said, carefully not looking to Alnesr; the two of them both knew that the artifact was still in his quarters, and thus not all that well protected as it might otherwise have been.
Conversely, there was also less of a chance of someone who was not prepared to resist the lure of the artifact taking hold of it if it stayed close to him; thus, there were advantages and dangers to every course of action he could take with regard to it.
“Consider your options carefully. The Templars would pay a great price for that relic.”
“I would say they already have,” Alnesr muttered, his tone mordantly amused, as the two of them led her down from the balcony and out of the fortress.
He and Alnesr had soon gathered together with their brother Assassins once more, and Altaïr took a moment to hear their reports in what privacy he could find in their current situation. Out of the corner of his left eye, he could see Alnesr and Jabal speaking with one another, and he was pleased that the younger Assassin had taken initiative where Maria was concerned. Once he had heard the reports, Altaïr made his way over to where Jabal and Alnesr stood.
“What’s happening on Cyprus that would concern the Templars?” he asked, having made up his mind to follow the Templars to their new stronghold.
He and Alnesr would journey to Limassol.
Chapter 79: A Master’s Work
Chapter Text
“Civil strife, perhaps?” Jabal suggested, his hands spread in confusion. “Their emperor, Issac Comnenus, picked a fight with King Richard many months ago, and now he rots in a Templar dungeon.”
“A pity,” he mused aloud. “Issac was so easily bent. So willing to take a bribe.”
When they stopped at the harbor steps, Altaïr watched as Maria was led past them, her chin held high in defiance. It was all he could do not to smile; it was clear that, in spite of the people she served, Maria was a worthy opponent. Altaïr still wished that she could be something more, however.
“Those days are past,” Jabal said, returning his attention to the present. “Now, the Templars own the island. Purchased from the king for a paltry sum.”
“That is not the sort of government we wish to encourage,” he muttered, narrowing his eyes in thought. “Do we have any contacts there?”
“I know of one in Limassol,” Jabal said. “A man named Alexander.”
“Send him a message,” Altaïr said, turning back to the Rafiq. “Tell him to expect us in a week.”
“You wish for me to come with you, Altaïr?”
“Yes,” he said, nodding to Alnesr as the younger Assassin came to stand beside him. “You and I have done good work in the past, and I would appreciate the presence of one I know I can trust fully at my back.”
When Alnesr thanked him for the confidence that had been shown to him, Altaïr reflected upon the secondary reasons that he wished to have Alnesr present on this next mission. It was not simply because of the bond they had shared as master and apprentice, nor was it simply because they had worked well together in the past. Because while those were both valid reasons in and of themselves, he also wished to keep Alnesr close because the younger Assassin had been bathed – trapped, really – in the light of the Apple, and come out.
He wished, more than anything else, to ensure that his brother Assassin would not suffer any ill-effects from what had happened to him.
He also wished to find out who the man in black robes that he had briefly glimpsed within the light of the Apple. He knew now that it was not Al Mualim, as he had burned the man’s body and the man in black robes had not made a single move. And also, while he’d not gotten a clear glimpse of the robed man’s face, the way the man had moved when Altaïr had seen him had not been at all similar to the way that Al Mualim had moved.
Still, he knew that it would be best if he and Alnesr were able to speak in private, so Altaïr turned his attention back to the preparations he was making to sail. He would need more supplies than merely his own weapons and those Alnesr was carrying, and so Altaïr made is way to the docks to secure himself a ship so that he, Alnesr, and Maria would be able to depart for Cyprus and their next mission.
~AC: BL~
Narrowing her eyes as she watched the Assassins scurrying around, attending to their various tasks, Maria ground her teeth at the thought of what she was being subjected to. Being captured by these Assassins was a humiliation that she could barely tolerate; particularly that arrogant one that she had faced in combat. The one that had bested her, and then not even had the decency to take her life once he had done so. There was also the matter of that strange, yellow-eyed boy in Assassins’ robes that had been standing so close to him.
It seemed that the two of them were as close to one another as she had been to Robert, something that she could understand, if not sympathize with.
The Assassins had gathered at the docks now, and Maria found herself being hustled onto the ship that was soon to depart for the island of Cyprus; and beyond that to Limassol castle. Holding her head up proudly, unwilling to let these Assassins have the pleasure of seeing her brought low. The eyes of the Assassin who had bested her were upon her again, as well as the pale yellow of the boy he seemed so close to. The defiant expression she gave the man was answered merely by a smile, and she scoffed in response.
He was a fool for underestimating her in such a way, and she would do all in her power to ensure that he regretted such a thing.
Once the three of them had boarded the ship, settling in as well as they could manage with the persistent atmosphere of wariness that could not help but be present under such circumstances, Maria secluded herself as far away from the pair of them as she could manage under such cramped conditions.
~AC: BL~
He was willing to admit, if presently only to himself, that he was intrigued by Maria and so appreciated the opportunity that he had been given to come to know her better. She had a strength and conviction about her that reminded him of his fellow Assassins, and he’d found himself wishing once more that he’d had the chance to speak to her on more civil terms. Still, perhaps he would have that chance while they were in Cyprus.
Setting out his journal and the Apple both, Altaïr began recording his observations about the artifact, all the while pondering upon its intended nature and purpose. If there was any good to be found within the Apple, Altaïr hoped to find it; however, if the Piece of Eden was only capable of bringing misery and strife, he could only hope that he had the strength of will to destroy it.
All of this he recorded in his journal, reflecting on the Apple and what its ultimate purpose might be; and also on the connection that Alnesr seemed to have to it.
Closing his journal and tidying his desk, Altaïr carefully tucked the Apple away where it wouldn’t be easily found by someone searching his room. A knock at his cabin’s door drew his attention before he could begin to settle down in earnest, and Altaïr made his way over calmly. Alnesr’s familiar, pale yellow eyes shown in the darkness when he opened the door, and he gestured for the younger Assassin to enter when Alnesr paused at the threshold.
“Altaïr,” the younger said, hesitating for a moment as though he was unsure if he would be permitted to speak, but only for that single moment. “What was the expression on your face when you subdued that Templar woman?”
“Maria,” he mused, not caring for a moment that he had spoken the name aloud and hence was likely to be questioned for it. “In her way, she reminded me of one of our brother Assassins; she has conviction and dedication, and while I cannot but disapprove of the cause she serves, I fully admire those traits in anyone.”
“I suppose you would know her better than I,” Alnesr said, still seeming rather bemused; Altaïr could not find it in himself to rebuke the younger Assassin, since he himself found his actions bemusing.
“Get some sleep,” he advised, once it had become clear that Alnesr had run out of words to say. “Best we both be rested when we arrive in Cyprus.”
“Of course, Altaïr,” his brother Assassin said, sounding for a moment as uncertain as he had when the two of them had stood together in the Temple Mount.
Reaching out to clasp his brother Assassin’s shoulders, Altaïr smiled calmly. “It is nothing against you to have been taken aback by this. In truth, I myself hardly know what my heart wills in this instance.”
“Few enough of us do, I suppose,” Alnesr said, seeming to compose himself, his bemused expression softening.
Chuckling softly in response, Altaïr bid the younger Assassin good night, and returned to his quarters to prepare himself for sleep.
Chapter 80: Slave and master
Chapter Text
When they arrived upon the docks at Limassol, Alnesr saw that the place was indeed swarming with Templars; hurrying from place to place, watched by a resentful but clearly cowed populace. It was clear that he and Altaïr would need to search diligently if they were to meet up with the resistance that had doubtless formed in response to the oppression that the Templars put in place in every area where they had come to power. Steeling himself for what was to come, Alnesr made his way back into the ship to rejoin his brother Assassin.
Making his report in low tones, low enough so that the Templar woman Maria would not be able to overhear them without making her attempts to do so more than obvious, Alnesr paused to await further instructions, and found himself sent to fetch ropes to bind Maria’s hands. Leaving to do just that, Alnesr returned to find that the woman had been stripped of anything that would have identified her as a Templar. Handing over the ropes he had been sent to fetch, Alnesr found the eyes of the Templar woman boring into him.
“What are you looking at, boy?”
“A captive,” he said, in response to the scorn he could see in every line of her face.
She scoffed. “I suppose your mother wouldn’t have had time to teach you manners, considering how long you’ve clearly been staying with this oaf.”
“Oaf indeed,” Altaïr chuckled. “Alnesr, stay close when we leave the ship,” his brother Assassin said, turning his attention slightly away from his binding of the Templar woman’s hands. “It may be that we will both need each other’s aid before this day ends.”
“I expect you have the right of it again, Altaïr,” he said, as the Templar woman scoffed.
She grumbled at the pair of them as they hustled her out of the ship, and Alnesr was wary as he took his first steps out onto the docks of Limassol. They were beginning to clear of citizens as the sun sank, but the Templar presence was actually increasing. It was not a situation he was overly fond of, but he was not such a one to complain about things that could not be changed. Or, as in the case of the Templars, things he himself would be working to change.
They disembarked from the ship and made their way down the docks, Alnesr moving to stand opposite the Templar woman as she grumbled and swore at the pair of them. She truly was beginning to remind him of the few sister Assassins that he had met during the course of his life; of course, such a thing was not an entirely welcome prospect, as none of his sister Assassins would have been slow to resist their captors, either.
“What if I just started screaming?” the Templar woman asked, the annoyance in her tone bringing a perversely sort of amused cast to Altaïr’s face; Alnesr could see it out of the corner of his right eye.
“People would cover their ears and carry on,” Altaïr said, amusement suffusing his brother Assassin’s tone. “They’ve seen an unhappy slave before.”
Alnesr knew, however, that beneath his play at mere amusement Altaïr was just as aware or the severity of their situation as he himself was. For there were too few people about in the streets, even with the hour becoming as late as it was, and as their group passed into the back streets of the city, Alnesr saw that the emptiness truly could not have been mere an artifact of the late hour at the docks. Else the three of them would have glimpsed more people walking the main roads when they caught sight of them through the maze of buildings.
It was not long after that, however, that Alnesr caught sight of another man coming their way, and another beside him.
“This port is off-limits,” the man at the forefront said, coming over to where the three of them stood. “Show your faces, strangers.”
“There is no one under these hoods we wear but a pair of faceless Assassins,” Altaïr said, sounding amused at the men that were standing before them.
Watching as Altaïr and this new man, apparently the Alexander that the two of them had come to this place to meet, spoke of what they had come to this place for and just why it was that the woman Maria was with them, Alnesr made a point to keep his eyes upon the woman so that he would be aware of any action she might think to take against them and their allies. The five of them continued on their way through the city, passing beyond the port and out of sight of the boats that had been moored there, walking at a steady pace so as not to draw attention to themselves from what Templars might have patrolling the city at this late hour.
Looking up, Alnesr saw that their small group was steadily coming closer to a large, old-looking warehouse at the far edge of the city they had arrived in. He suspected that this was to be where they would be staying for the duration of their mission to deal with the remaining Templars who had fled to this place, and as they all made their way inside, he found that he was perfectly right. While Altaïr checked the ropes that bound the Templar woman’s wrists, Alnesr himself watched for anyone who might have chanced to come close enough to catch a glimpse of the pair of them while they were gathered there.
He did not see anyone, and while he was pleased to note such a thing, Alnesr could not help but to wonder how long it was going to be before they encountered more of the Templar’s forces.
Following closely behind Altaïr as the two of them made their way inside, Alnesr tensed slightly as Maria’s eyes passed over him. He did not know, precisely, what it was that the Templar woman was planning, but there was no way that he could mistake someone who had a plan for escape when he looked in their eyes. He’d not be able to make proper contact with Altaïr until the pair of them had been settled within the warehouse and had a chance to get away from the Templar woman.
Altaïr led Maria into the warehouse, and he followed his brother Assassin into the warehouse where the pair of them would be staying.
Chapter 81: Assassins’ captive
Chapter Text
“I won’t assume you’re here out of charity,” Alexander said, as the two of them settled themselves down at the small table in what seemed to be a living area within the safehouse that the man had spoken to them of. “Can I ask you what your purpose here is, Altaïr?”
“It’s a complicated story,” Altaïr said, though he seemed rather impatient to leave. “But, it can be summed up easily: the Templars have access to knowledge and weapons far more deadly than anyone could have imagined. I plan to change this. One such weapon is already in our hands: a device with the ability to warp the minds of men. If the Templars possess more like it, I want to know.”
“And we can certainly trust the Assassins to put the Apple of Eden to better use,” the Templar woman, Maria, piped up with a cutting tone.
“Where are the Templars holed up now?” Altaïr asked, seemingly uncaring of the fact that Maria had spoken in the first place.
“In Limassol Castle, but they’re expanding their reach,” Alexander responded easily, though he sounded increasingly grim.
It wasn’t a thing Alnesr found himself wondering about; the reasons for the man’s feeling on the matter were obvious.
“How, then, do I get inside?” Altaïr asked.
Alnesr listened as Alexander laid out what information he had about Osman, the Templar whose sympathies were more aligned with the Cypriot Resistance than those he purported to serve.
“Kill the captain of the guard,” Alexander advised, his eyes dark and solemn. “With him dead, it’s likely that Osman will be promoted to the post. And if that happens, well, you could walk right in.”
“Alnesr, I would like you to stay here while I attend to this matter,” Altaïr said, pinning him with a determined gaze as he rose from the table. “I don’t wish to take chances with a Templar among us, so I would have you give them your aid if she manages to escape.”
“Of course, Altaïr,” he said, not knowing how he felt about being left behind, but pleased all the same to be of use.
Altaïr left, to attend to the matter of Osman and the current captain of the Templar guard, and Alnesr himself turned his attention back to Maria where she stood among the members of the Resistance. The Templar woman seemed quite a bit more at ease than she had been before his brother Assassin had departed, perhaps thinking that he himself would not be as capable of combat as Altaïr, ten years his senior. If she was hoping for such a thing to be true, then she would be fully disappointed.
He might not have had the full benefit of Altaïr’s twenty-five years of life, but even his own fifteen years of life as an Assassin would tell, in the end.
“Well, boy, it seems as though your master had left you to your own devices,” the Templar woman said, looking at him with disdain as the two of them were left to face one another. “How ever shall you cope.”
“Yes, it would seem that we will be forced to spend more time in each other’s company,” he returned, narrowing his eyes as he looked the Templar woman over.
“What do you even think you could do if I chose to attempt to escape your grasp, boy?” she asked, her expression becoming one of clear, arrogant disregard for him.
“I would stop you, Templar,” he said, stepping closer to the woman as the two of them faced each other.
“Oh?” the Templar woman stepped over to him, using her height in what he could see to be an obvious effort to intimidate him. “How do you think you would manage that?”
“You should not take me so lightly, Templar,” he said, standing firm in the face of the Templar woman attempting to loom over him. “I am not the helpless child you seem so determined to see me as.”
There was a long moment, during which Alnesr was not certain if he and the Templar woman would be forced into combat by their own pride, before she smiled tightly at him.
“Fearless little thing, aren’t you,” the woman said, sounding like she could not help but to approve of him, in spite of their respective affiliations. “It’s too bad that you’ve been raised Assassin. We might have done good work in the world.”
“I might say the same to you,” he returned, prompting the Templar woman to laugh softly.
The two of them fell into a more comfortable silence then, moving back over to the table where he and Altaïr had been sitting while Alexander had been speaking to Altaïr of what he could expect when he sought out the captain of the Templar guard in this area. The two of them settled down at the table together, and some of the Resistance served them food while they waited for Altaïr to return after his work had been completed.
Eating the meal that had been served to them, Alnesr heard the sound of someone making their way back into the safehouse, and looked over to the entrance to see that it was indeed Altaïr as he had begun to expect.
“Osman is making the arrangements as we speak,” Altaïr announced, as he made his way deeper into the safehouse where the main room where the Resistance were all staying.
“Excellent, now what?” Alexander asked, coming over to stand beside the table where he and the Templar woman were seated.
“We give him some time,” Altaïr said, then turned his attention to the Templar woman. “He also told me about the Templar archive. Have you heard of such a thing, Maria?”
“Of course,” the Templar woman said, sounding as though she was attempting to be deliberately flippant. “That’s where we keep our undergarments.”
Chapter 82: Guardian of the Apple
Chapter Text
Altaïr sighed, feeling as though he might despair for a moment; tossing those feelings aside, he turned to face Alexander once more. “Cyprus would be a good location to safeguard both armor and weapons. With the proper strategy, it’s an easy island to defend.” He stood, nodding to Alnesr as he did. “Osman will have had time to clear the walls of the castle now. Alnesr, you have done well to guard Maria as well as you have thus far, and so I wish for you to continue.”
“As you say then, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, nodding as he rose from his seat so that the two of them could bid each other farewell.
He swiftly departed from the safehouse, making his way over the rooftops to Limassol Castle so that he could truly begin his mission to clear the influence of the Templars from this island, so that they could be free once more, and also so that he would be able to find out just what it was that this man knew about the Templar archive that Osman had spoken of. His curiosity had been roused by that, and now Altaïr intended to satisfy it.
Or, at the very least, to make an earnest attempt to do so.
Stealthily approaching the courtyard of the castle he was making to infiltrate, Altaïr saw that Osman had indeed lowered the number of guards present outside atop the walls of the castle, and those walking the perimeter of the grounds below him. He was pleased to know that he’d not been led astray once more, and so he smiled slightly as he scaled the wall near the ramparts. Felling one of the nearby guards with his throwing knives drew the attention of one who was yet closer, and that one swiftly met his death at Altaïr’s sword.
Lowering the dead man to the stone floor of the castle, Altaïr swiftly removed his blade from the man’s back and continued onward. Continuing deeper into the corridors before him, disposing of what guards he needed to as he encountered them, Altaïr allowed himself a soft sigh of relief. Osman truly had done his job better than Altaïr had let himself hope for: not only were there fewer guards patrolling the walls and inside the outer courtyard, but there also seemed to be a distinct absence of the same within the castle, as well.
He was pleased to know that he’d not placed his trust mistakenly again.
Pushing aside the lingering unease he felt, not quite certain why he felt such a thing but knowing that it would only distract him from the work he was doing, Altaïr continued on his way. Onward and upward he climbed, steadily moving deeper into the castle, until he came to a balcony overlooking an inner-courtyard that was currently being put to use as a training field. For a moment, before he regained his composure, Altaïr was reminded of Masyaf and all of his brother Assassins training there.
Then, he caught sight of Fredrick the Red, and such thoughts were wiped clean from his mind; the man was every bit the brute Osman had described him as being. He could hear the Templar commanding his men, and as he watched for an opening that he could use, Altaïr took note of the man’s words. They were nearly the same as those he’d heard from Montferrat’s own mouth, and while he supposed that such a thing was only natural in the case of two such men who seemed so similar, he wondered for a moment if he and his brother Assassins shared such a manner of speaking.
Such thoughts lead almost inevitably to curiosity as to how Alnesr himself was fairing, and if he and Maria were getting along at least reasonably well, but Altaïr pushed those thoughts aside and focused his attention on the Templar speaking in the courtyard below him; this was the task he had before him now, so all that remained was to carry it out.
~AC: BL~
When he and the Templar woman had settled back down at the table opposite one another, Alnesr was given only a few minutes to reflect on what his and Altaïr’s task in this place was to be, before a member of the Resistance he’d not had the chance to meet before this moment came running into the room.
“Assassin, there are Crusader Knights approaching the safehouse!” the man shouted, tone and manner making his panic all the more plain to any who looked.
Alnesr could perfectly understand the temptation to succumb to such feelings, under the circumstances; though he also understood that he could not let himself be among them. “How many? And, how fast do they approach?”
“A great number of them,” the man said, and Alnesr noted with pleasure that this new man seemed to be swiftly regaining his composure.
“I’ll not be such a fool to think that you had a part in this,” he said, turning to the Templar woman so that she would take his meaning as he spoke. “Even so, it seems that we are discovered, and hence must move quickly. Stay with me; Altaïr gave you into my keeping, and I’ll not disappoint him.”
“Yes, I expect you won’t,” the Templar woman said, wearing an enigmatic smile as she came over to stand with him.
Putting thoughts about what the woman might have been thinking aside – he’d far more pressing matters to attend to at this of all times – Alnesr turned his attention back to those members of the Resistance whose lives were now in his hands. “All of you, scatter yourselves into the city. Go to another place that you might be safe; any other safehouses that you might know about. Send someone to meet with me or my senior when you feel it is safe to do so.”
Alexander and his remaining men all nodded to him, calling out that they would be well and that they would meet him again when they had managed to settle themselves in another one of their hidden strongholds. When the last of them had departed, he reached for the Templar woman, that the two of them might make their own way through the city until the Resistance members sought them out once more, the sudden scent of smoke and fire drew his attention.
“Damn! Looks like your companions won’t have this place to come back to anymore,” the Templar woman growled, as the flames licking at the outside of the building began to become visible, eating away at the walls.
There was truly no point in allowing himself to become distracted by idle chatter, particularly when there remained a task for him to complete. Something that Altaïr had asked of him, when it had become clear that there was something more to the Apple than the two of them – or, truly, anyone as far Alnesr himself was aware of – had suspected at first. Running over to the sack that Altaïr had so casually dropped upon a crate at the midpoint of what was about to become a former warehouse, Alnesr scooped it up and hurried back over to where the Templar woman was still standing.
“I certainly hope that was worth the time you wasted fetching it,” she said, not looking or sounding particularly impressed with his actions of the past few moments.
“Can I trust you with this?” he asked in return, narrowing his eyes slightly as he continued to watch the Templar woman now walking beside him.
“Trust?” she laughed, though it seemed rather more amused than scornful to his ears. “That’s an odd thing for an Assassin to speak of, boy.”
“Why do you say such a thing?” he returned, even as the pair of them ran out from the dangerously burning building that had once been as safe a shelter as could exist on contested ground such as this.
They’d no more time for conversation after he spoke those words, however: as soon as they left the temporary shelter of the burning building, the Templar soldiers who’d doubtless been the ones to put the safehouse to the torch in the first place came running out of wherever they had managed to conceal themselves when they had been moving into position.
“So, this is what we find when we come hunting for rats,” the man facing them, one who looked about as tall as Alnesr remembered Robert de Sable being, clad in heavy armor, and he even bore more than a superficial resemblance to de Sable, though his face was thinner and his cheeks and eyes more sunken. “A traitor and a child.”
“Bouchart,” the Templar woman snapped, narrowing her eyes at him as the two of them faced the leader of the Templars and the men he had brought with him. “I’d wondered when you were going to show your face.”
“So, when did you sell yourself to that Assassin?” the Templar; Bouchart, apparently. “And what was your price?”
“I’ve nothing to say to you,” the woman snapped.
There were no more words exchanged between them, and Bouchart called for his soldiers to attack them. Alnesr unsheathed the sword he’d been presented with when Altaïr had ascended to the rank of Master of the Syrian Assassins, bringing it up to guard himself as he turned back-to-back with the woman who’d once been part of the Templars. It was clear that the woman was not going to be part of that organization anymore.
He wondered just what she would do from now on, without the support of the organization she had been part of for so long, since it was clear that she was not particularly fond of Altaïr and his fellow Assassins. Still, he’d little enough time to think of anything else but the Templars attacking him. It was nearly the same as all of the other times that he’d been forced to face the Templars beside Altaïr.
He did not know exactly how he and this woman would be able to work with each other, but for the first few moments of the fight, the two of them were able to hold off the forces of the Templars attacking them. Then, though some kind of terrible serendipity, one of their attackers managed to slash the back of his left hand and cause him to drop the sack that contained the Apple, the artifact clattering to the ground and rolling slightly. The eye of every Templar around them turned toward the sack that had formerly been clenched in his left hand.
The entire group of Templars attempted to dive for the pile of cloth that had formerly concealed the Apple that Altaïr had been so interested in for so long. Alnesr attempted to drive them off as well as he could manage, but Bouchart managed to lay his hands to the artifact before he could do the same, and then all Alnesr could see was the bright, white light…
“Welcome back, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr.”
Chapter 83: Guard and Vessel
Chapter Text
When she saw the brilliant flash of colorless light from just behind her, Maria turned to see just what in the world had happened, and saw the large, broad-shouldered form of Armand Bouchart standing over the smaller form of the little Assassin whose name she couldn’t remember at the moment. She knew that the boy had one, since everyone who hadn’t been raised by particularly strange people had one, but at the moment it had slipped from her mind while the two of them had been fighting the Templars who had attacked them.
Turning, to see the boy standing idle before Bouchart as the old Templar reached out for him, Maria narrowed her eyes.
“Move, you fool boy!” she shouted, leaping over to cover the child so he wouldn’t be cut down for his lapse.
Bouchart grabbed for the boy’s shoulders, pulling him close without the boy seeming to have the mind to resist him, but when he turned the boy around she saw his eyes. His eyes were no longer the strange, pale yellow that they had once been, instead they glowed softly white in the same manner as the Apple was doing even as she watched. Clenching her teeth, Maria raised her sword and attacked Bouchart. The man seemed to think that, as she was a woman, she would be hesitant to attack him while he stood behind a child.
Conversely, after having been forced to spend even as little time as she had among the little Assassin and the man he had called his senior, Maria knew that the boy wouldn’t flinch from what she was about to do; in fact, he was more like to welcome it than anything.
Thus, when she attacked, Maria managed to catch that old bastard flat-footed, nearly carving a fresh wound in his corpselike face. And, while such a thing would have been rather satisfying – very few of her former fellows had been so willing to accept that she wanted to serve beside them as Robert had – Maria contented herself with forcing him to leap back, dropping the Apple and releasing the boy almost at once. Driving him back with relentless sweeps of her sword, Maria swept up the Apple and grabbed the boy’s robes near his left shoulder to pull him along as she began to run.
She did not know just where the pair of them would be able to take shelter from the Templars that were even now hunting them, but at the very least Maria was determined to escape from Bouchart; she’d once thought to tell him and the soldiers he commanded of the things she had been able to see during the time she’d spent in captivity with the Assassin and his fellows, but now… Bouchart could go hang, she would make contact with another, more level-headed Templar.
Or, perhaps…
Maria threw that thought aside with more force than she’d ever used before, dragging the little Assassin along by the shoulder, searching for a place that she might take shelter in while she determined just what the devil had happened when he’d touched the Apple. She’d never seen anyone react to the artifact in the manner of the little Assassin, but it was also a fact that she had never before seen anyone with the particular hair- and eye-coloring that the boy possessed, either.
There could easily be some sort of connection between the two things; in any case, she could find out such when she made it to a place she could shelter from the Bouchart and the remaining Knights he had pursuing her.
~AC: BL~
When he had managed to escape the remaining guards stationed within the castle that had previously sheltered Fredrick the Red, killing those who he could not quite manage to outrun, Altaïr swiftly made his way back over the rooftops toward the safehouse. Finding it in ruins, Altaïr forced himself to regain his composure as he looked down upon the destruction that had been wrought. He knew that Alnesr would have had the sense to leave, and he had to believe that Maria would have done the same under the circumstances.
Now, seated high in a tower in the shade of a large bell, Altaïr looked down. There was a great deal more movement in the streets than he’d noticed while he had been making his way back to the safehouse, and Altaïr was curious enough – and without other options at the moment – to follow it back to its source. Sure enough, with the safehouse destroyed, the Templars were mobilizing once more.
Drifting up from the crowd, Altaïr heard talk of revenge and reprisals – the townspeople feared them; from the Templars, and also from those they were hunting, while Altaïr found disappointing but unsurprising – and many mentions of the name Armand Bouchart. He’d not heard the name before, but as it seemed that he had just arrived on the island, it was to be expected. It seemed that the man was already forming a reputation as fearsome, unjust, and cruel; even if he’d not been a Templar, Altaïr would have felt compelled to deal with him.
If only to ensure than no others suffered under his rule of even an island such as this.
He was, at the least, pleased to note that neither Alnesr nor Maria had been captured by these new Templars that he was observing. Bouchart seemed to have some qualities in common with Robert de Sable before him: the two of them both being tall, powerfully-built, and clad in full armor. Bouchart wore no helm at the moment, so Altaïr could see his face rather clearly from the rooftop where he crouched: in stark contrast to de Sable’s strong-featured face, Bouchart had a rather sunken, cadaverous look about him.
“A foul murder has shaken my Order,” Bouchart bellowed, in a voice loud enough to command the attention of every citizen in the square, and to carry clearly up to the rooftops, besides. “Dear Fredrick the Red, slain in his very castle. He, who served God and the people of Cyprus with honor, is paid tribute by a murderer’s blade? Who among you will deliver those responsible to me?”
Such was always the way, among Templars: always seeking to use the fear of their fellow men against any who might have thought to rise up against their tyranny.
“Cowards!” Bouchart roared into the silence. “You leave me no choice but to flush out this killer myself. I hereby grant my men immunity until this investigation is concluded!”
“Bouchart,” Osman said, having shifted uncomfortably in the background of the conversation before working up the nerve to speak. “The citizens are already restless,” he looked down into the sea of muttering, shifting citizens. “Perhaps this is not the best idea.”
Upon the rooftops, Altaïr winced as Bouchart’s expression twisted in furious rage; it seemed that he, the same as most of his brethren that Altaïr had encountered, was not one accustomed to having his orders questioned. The matter of whether he considered such a thing to be insubordination or not was answered in a particularly final manner when Bouchart drew his sword and plunged it into Osman’s gut. Altaïr sighed in regret as he watched Osman crumple to the ground with a stunned shout that echoed around the square, cradling his stomach and writhing on the steps as he died.
His death rattle echoed across the crowd, shocked silent by the sudden brutality that Bouchart had demonstrated; Altaïr, however, knew that this was rather typical for the leaders of the Templars. Still, seeing another good man dying a needless death saddened him.
“If anyone else has objections, I invite you to step forward,” Bouchart said, after having wiped his sword clean on the right arm of Osman’s tunic.
Osman’s body shifted slightly, left arm hanging loose over the steps; his sightless eyes stared up at the sky. Needless to say, there were no further objections.
~AC: BL~
Having evaded her pursuers, Maria ducked into another abandoned warehouse, settling down atop a pile of empty crates and pulling the little Assassin over so that she could sit him down on another crate next to the one where she had sat down, herself. She’d seen glimpses of a man in black robes, sometimes standing next to the boy, and at times wrapping his arms possessively around him, for nearly as long as she had held the Apple. Maria wondered who the man was, and if any of those Assassins even knew what they were facing.
She also wondered if any of her fellow Templars knew about the man, or the little Assassin that seemed to be so deeply connected to the Apple he haunted.
The sound of footsteps on the grounds outside prompted Maria to stand up, pressing the Apple into the little Assassin’s hands, and also prompting the man in black to look over at her with the shadow of an arrogant smile on his lips. Turning away from the man, forced to let go of the Apple and allow the strange man to vanish, Maria turned her gaze to the far side of the room. She darted over to the door, drawing her sword and swinging it down upon… another sword that blocked her own.
“Assassin,” she greeted. “So, it seems as though we keep meeting in this manner.”
“Indeed, or something close to it,” the Assassin said, looking pleased for a moment, before he glanced over her shoulder and saw the little Assassin sitting on the crate.
~AC: BL~
The sight of Alnesr, once again lost within the light of the Apple, drew his attention before he could say more than a simple greeting to Maria. She seemed to understand, however, and stepped aside so that he could attend to the younger Assassin. Making his way over to where Alnesr had been seated, Altaïr allowed himself a moment of gratitude to Maria for protecting him as she had; he knew, after all, that it would have been so utterly simple for Maria to guide Alnesr into a Templar stronghold while he had been lost within the light of the Apple.
He was, and long would be, grateful that she had not chosen to take such an action; not only because Alnesr would likely have died in the hands of the Templars who took him captive, but because of what Maria’s choice might have meant for their future. If she was, in the end, willing to discus such a thing. Altaïr hoped that she would, at the very least, be amenable to a discussion on the matter.
For the moment, however, he needed to concentrate if he was to give what aid Alnesr would need to free himself from the Apple’s power. Altaïr wondered once again just how the connection was that Alnesr had with the Piece of Eden had been forged, and what its nature truly was. He also wondered about the man in black robes that he’d so briefly glimpsed when he and Alnesr had both maintained contact with the Apple itself; he wondered if, in some strange way, Al Mualim had been able to survive the destruction of his body.
If the Templar who had deceived the Brotherhood for so long had willingly abandoned his body for the shelter of the Apple, and was now attempting to exert his will through Alnesr by proxy.
However, when Altaïr drew close enough to lay his own right hand atop the Apple, his first sight of the man in black robes – arms wrapped around Alnesr’s neck in a particularly possessive fashion – served to disabuse him of that notion: for one thing, this man was far younger than Al Mualim had been when Altaïr had been forced to take the traitor’s life; his chin smooth and beardless, and both of his eyes bright and clear. The veritable waterfall of hair also gave the lie to the assumption that this man had ever been Al Mualim. However, it was the color of both this man’s hair and eyes that drew Altaïr’s attention more strongly than nearly any other thing other than this strange man’s presence in itself.
The man in the black robes had eyes as yellow as Alnesr’s own, and hair that was nearly the same shade of brilliant silver; had their facial features had any commonality to them, aside from the smoothness of youth they both shared, Altaïr might have thought that the man in black was a member of Alnesr’s family. However, before he could consider the matter in any depth, the man in black pushed lightly against Alnesr’s chest, and vanished back into the Apple with only a small, sly smile. Altaïr doubted that such a thing boded well for any of them; Alnesr in particular, of course.
“Altaïr?” his brother Assassin asked, holding his head and looking more lost than he had seen the first time he’d broken Alnesr free from the Apple’s grasp. “What… What has happened?”
“You were nearly lost within the Apple again; I begin to think I should not have left it so close to you, worried though I was about someone finding it on the boat,” he said, reaching out to clasp Alnesr’s right shoulder as he helped his former Apprentice down from the crate where he’d been sitting.
“Did you see the man in black, Assassin?” Maria asked, drawing his attention to the fact that she had actually chosen to remain in the room with them, even in spite of the fact that neither of them had acted to bar her way in any manner.
“I did,” he replied, as he stepped back to allow Alnesr to stand on his own feet once again.
However, it was not Maria but Alnesr himself who continued the conversation from there: “Man in black? What is it that the two of you are speaking of, Altaïr?”
“You couldn’t see him, boy?” Maria asked, addressing Alnesr for the first time since the three of them had met up once more.
“I’ve no inkling who either of you are talking about,” Alnesr said, sounding as though he wished to come off as stoic, but the uncertainty he was prey to coming through clearly to the one who had known him for nearly all of his life; Altaïr could not fail to see what moved his brother Assassin’s heart. “I’ve not seen a man in black since… Al Mualim,” Alnesr finished, a touch more of his uncertainty showing through.
“He seemed far more bound to the Apple than you once were,” he said, as Alnesr looked askance to him.
“Yes, but what I would like to know is just how the man came to be bound to the Apple in the first place,” Maria said acerbically. “It hardly strikes me as something an ordinary man could manage.”
“No; I would hardly call such a thing ordinary at all,” he said; beyond that, there was also the matter of just what the man’s connection to Alnesr was, because even aside his clear possessiveness of Altaïr’s brother Assassin, the physical similarities could not be ignored.
“I suppose I’d need to stay with the pair of you, if I’m to find out anything about that other,” Maria said, sounding as though the very prospect irked her to no end; Altaïr suppressed a smile. “Don’t expect me to betray my Order for this, Assassin. I’m doing this strictly to satisfy my own curiosity; that Apple clearly holds more secrets than any of us know.”
“Of course,” he replied, carefully holding himself back from smiling or giving any hint as to how he truly felt about the matter. “We should find the safehouse that the Resistance members relocated themselves to after the fire,” he said, turning his attention to Alnesr and observing the way his brother Assassin seemed to come back to himself in the presence of a task to be completed.
Chapter 84: Uncertain salvation
Chapter Text
“Yes, I suppose you’d better find out just what the next plan of my Order is, so you can go about foiling it,” Maria said, sounding distinctly unimpressed with the pair of them.
If Altaïr had been inclined to think in such a way, he might have considered that she was only saying such a thing to remind herself not to start to like working with either of them; all he did, however, was continue to bite back the smile that he could feel trying to spread across his face at the prospect of spending more time with Maria. Whatever her reasons for wanting to travel with them as she did, Altaïr was determined to make the best of the situation. And, perhaps she would even discover a reason to stay; he held some hope for that, at least.
When he and Alnesr ascended back onto the rooftops to make their way to the new safehouse that the Cypriot Resistance maintained, Altaïr heard Maria scoff up at the pair of them as they climbed.
“So, this is how you and yours always seem to vanish when we pursue you,” she said acidly. “I wonder how much this new knowledge will get me when I return to my Order.”
“I doubt many of them would be able to make use of it,” he volleyed back, allowing himself to smile now that he was not within Maria’s line of sight any longer. “Templars are not truly suited for activities such as this.”
“I’ll show you what Templars are suited for,” Maria growled, and Altaïr turned to see her climbing the very wall of the building that he and Alnesr had just crested the top of.
She had little of the smooth, easy grace that he’d seen demonstrated by his brother Assassins, but for one who had clearly never climbed in such a manner before, Maria was somewhat skilled in the purely physical aspect of an Assassin’s lifestyle. Signaling Alnesr to wait while Maria clambered to the rooftop to stand beside them, Altaïr suppressed his smile once more as he turned to her.
“That was well done,” he said, because it was true and because he was rather pleased with her accomplishment on a more personal level than he knew she would have preferred.
“Don’t sound so smug, Assassin,” Maria retorted, narrowing her eyes and raising her chin; he couldn’t help but want to smile in response.
Whatever else could be said about the woman, it was clear that she was not one to quail from even a self-imposed challenge.
As the three of them made their way over the rooftops on their way to the new safehouse that he had managed to find out about from the members of the Cypriot Resistance, Altaïr took note of Maria’s inexperience with moving as they did, and also of her clear unwillingness to be thought a burden in this or any task she found set before her. It was just one more facet of her character that Altaïr found himself admiring.
When they reached the new location of the safehouse, Altaïr watched from the side of his eyes as Maria descended from the rooftops after he and Alnesr had done so. She had a modicum of confidence from being able to follow them as well as she had, something that Altaïr had been pleased to see, as well. Her own return to the ground was somewhat less graceful than either his or Alnesr’s own, but such was only to be expected considering her relative inexperience with moving as an Assassin learned to.
Given time, and perhaps the proper motivation, Altaïr rather thought that Maria would make a fine Assassin; it only remained to sway the woman herself to their side. Not an easy prospect, he knew, but Altaïr had determined to do it all the same.
Falling into step with Maria and Alnesr as the three of them made for the safehouse before them, Altaïr greeted Alexander calmly as the Resistance leader waved him inside.
“I’ve somber news,” he said, once the Cypriot had finished speaking to him of what had occurred in his absence. “Osman is dead, during a demonstration by the Templar Armand Bouchart; he expressed sympathy for the Cypriots, and so Bouchart killed him.”
“That is indeed tragic news,” Alexander said, shaking his head sadly. “Still, despite his bravado, Bouchart must have been warned by someone within his forces; my sources tell me that, after destroying our safehouse, he immediately sailed for Kyrenia.”
“That’s a shame,” he said, frowning. “I was hoping to meet him. What’s the fastest route there?” he asked.
He still planned to meet with the Templar, if only to interrogate him about the Archive, and then to dispose of him so that the people of Cyprus could be free once more. Leaving the safehouse with Alnesr and Maria in tow, though he wouldn’t have said anything of it to Maria herself, Altaïr made for the docks to find a ship. Blending in among the crowds within the city, Altaïr took what chances he could to observe Maria as she kept pace with them.
The three of them were able to travel as a monk – Altaïr himself – a Novice studying under his guidance – Alnesr – and his consort, negotiating passage in the hold of a ship so that they would be able to sail to Kyrenia.
When the three of them had managed to settle themselves with reasonable comfort down in the hold of the ship, Altaïr carefully swaddled the Apple and bundled it away within a pouch concealed in the folds of his robes. He did not want to chance Alnesr being caught up within its light again, though he was now more curious than ever about the man in black that appeared to have bound himself within the Apple. He’d not risk Alnesr’s safety simply to satisfy his newfound curiosity, of course, but he was at least aware that there was something more he’d been unaware of concerning the Apple.
Watching as Alnesr and Maria settled themselves down to sleep after their exertions during the past day, Alnesr beside him and Maria as far from him as she could manage within the bounds of the tale they had crafted, Altaïr took out his journal and began to write:
I struggle to make sense of the Apple of Eden, its function and purpose, to say nothing of the man shrouded in black that seems to appear and disappear as he pleases from within it. Here he paused a moment, looking over Alnesr as the younger Assassin slept, arms folded loosely over his chest and hips. Also, what his connection might be to Alnesr is also a mystery. However, I can say with certainty that its origins are not divine. No; it is a tool, a machine of exquisite precision. What sort of men were they, who brought this marvel into the world? And, what of this man in black, who seems to haunt it?
Chapter 85: Concerning Eagles
Chapter Text
At the sound of Maria shifting in her sleep, Altaïr swept the Apple up and concealed it within his robes once again. Closing his journal, Altaïr looked down at Alnesr where he slept, smiling softly as he stood up. Stepping over the sleeping bodies of a pair of crewmembers, Altaïr came over to where she sat, settling down next to her where she leaned up against a stack of wooden crates. As Maria sat up, she tucked her knees up to her chest, clasping her arms around her legs; for a long moment, the two of them simply listened to the creaking and slapping of water against the hull of the ship.
“How did you find yourself here?” he asked, turning to look at her even as she looked his way.
“Don’t you remember, holy man?” she asked archly, her voice low enough that it wouldn’t carry. “You brought me here; I’m your consort.”
“I mean, here in the Holy Land,” he clarified. “Here, in the Crusades.”
“I should be at home, with a lap full of crochet, and one eye on the gardener?” she huffed, sounding supremely unimpressed.
“Isn’t that what Englishwomen do?”
“Well, not this one,” Maria said, raising her chin proudly. “I’m afraid I’m what you’d call the black sheep of my family. Growing up, I always preferred the boys’ games. Dollies weren’t for me, I’m afraid; much to my parents’ continued exasperation. I used to pull their heads off.”
“Your parents’?” he asked, smiling slightly.
Maria laughed. “My dollies’. Of course, my parents did everything they could to knock the tomboy out of me, and so, for my eighteenth birthday they gave me a special present.”
“And, what was that?” he asked, amused by her wit and yet curious as well.
“A husband.”
“You’re married?”
“Was,” she said. “His name was Peter. And he was a lovely man; Peter, just…”
“What?” he prompted, as she trailed off.
“Well, that was it,” Maria said. “Just lovely. Nothing else; you could say that Peter had hidden shallows.”
“So, not much use as a playmate, then,” he said, smiling slightly.
“In no sense was Peter much use as a playmate,” she said, sounding supremely unimpressed. “My ideal husband would have embraced those aspects of my character that my parents wanted to excise. We would have gone hunting and hawking together; he would have tutored me in sports and combat, and imbued me with learning. But, he did none of those things, of course. We’d soon enough retired to his family seat – Hallaton Hall in Leicestershire – where, as the lady of the house, I was expected to manage the staff, oversee the running of the household, and of course produce an heir or two. Two boys and a girl, preferably; and in that order,” she smiled, wryly amused, though at what Altaïr was not entirely certain of. “But, of course I failed to live up to his expectations as miserably as he failed to live up to mine. The only thing I cared for less than the hierarchies and politics of the staff was child-rearing, and especially the birth bit that comes beforehand. After four years of prevarication, I left. Fortunately, the Bishop of Leicester was a close, personal friend of the elderly Lord Hallaton, and he was able to grant an annulment rather than risk having this silly, impetuous little girl cause the family further embarrassment,” Maria “harrumphed” softly, though she still seemed rather pleased. “I was, of course, persona non grata at Hallaton Hall; indeed, in the whole of Leicestershire. And, returning home, the situation was no better. Hallaton had demanded his bride-price back, but Father had already spent it. In the end, I decided it was best for everyone if I made myself scarce, so I ran away to the Crusades.”
“As a nurse?”
She grinned, fierce and proud as he had ever seen her. “No; as a soldier.”
“Truly?”
“You have seen how adept I am at disguising myself as a man, yes?” she asked, a slight challenge to her tone, but smiling all the same. “Did I have you fooled, that day at the cemetery?”
“I knew you weren’t de Sable, but…”
“You didn’t anticipate me being a woman,” she said, a pleased cast to her face, as he ran out of words. “You see? Years of being a tomboy paid off.”
“And, de Sable? Was he fooled?” he asked, allowing himself to smile; he knew not how she would take it, but this conversation of theirs gave him the hope that they might build a rapport.
“I liked Robert, at first,” she said softly, and Altaïr sensed more than saw her rueful smile. “He certainly saw more of my potential than Peter did. But, of course he saw how I might be exploited. And it wasn’t so long before he was doing so,” she sighed, seeming to be reflecting on something. “It was fitting that you killed him. He was not a good man, and never was worthy of whatever feelings I had for him.”
“Did he give you that?” he asked, gesturing to the signet ring that glittered upon her right hand.
“Yes,” she said, after looking at it for a long moment, the expression on her face suggesting that she had briefly forgotten she had possessed the item at all. “It was a gift from him when he took me under his wing. This is about all I have left of my ties to the Templars, now.”
The silence that fell between them was awkward for a moment, before Alnesr inadvertently broke it by moving closer to him. The younger Assassin did not say anything, merely moving closer to Altaïr; he rather thought that Alnesr might have felt the need for reassurance, after the ordeal he had faced twice now. He fully understood; the man in black troubled him as well, and he’d not been taken captive by the man. Even if Alnesr’s mind had been addled by the Apple, Altaïr could fully understand his need for comfort.
“Did you study philosophy, Maria?” he asked, after Alnesr had settled himself more comfortably against his right side.
“I’ve read scraps, nothing more,” she said, looking at him with a dubious expression.
“The philosopher Empedocles preached that all life on Earth began simply, in rudimentary forms: hands without arms, heads without bodies, eyes without faces. He believed that all of these early forms combined, very gradually over time, creating all the variety of life we see before us. Interested?”
“Do you know how ludicrous that sounds?” she asked, all but yawning.
“I do,” he stated simply, as Alnesr moved slightly closer, mumbling tiredly. “But I take comfort in the words of philosopher Al-Kindi: one must not be afraid of ideas, no matter their source. And we must never fear the truth, even when it pains us.”
“I hardly see the point of your ramblings,” she said, with a laugh that sounded warm and sleepy.
He looked down to where Alnesr lay, wondering if he had misjudged her, in the end. Perhaps she was not yet prepared to go seeking after the truth, as those who had been raised among the Brotherhood were always prepared to do. However, the clear ringing of a bell in the distance let him know that they had arrived at Kyrenia, and he spared a moment to wake Alnesr, and then the three of them stood.
“Only a mind free of impediments is capable of grasping the chaotic beauty of the world,” he said, looking back at her. “This is our greatest asset.”
“But, is chaos something to be celebrated?” she asked, and Altaïr smiled to hear the question; it seemed she was, indeed, open to learning more of the world as it truly was. “Is disorder a virtue?”
“It presents us with challenges, yes,” he said, knowing that nothing less than the complete truth would satisfy her, and also that he would offer such in any case. “But freedom yields greater rewards than the alternative. The order and peace the Templars seek requires servility and imprisonment.”
“Altaïr and I have seen such things firsthand.”
Alnesr’s words, true as they were, were not what ultimately drew Altaïr’s attention. No, he was given to notice the words of the two apparent bounty hunters who had specifically mentioned their small group of three as being worth some greater or lesser amount of money. Likely greater, since such was more apt to persuade those kinds of men to ignore the threat posed by an Assassin’s skill and training.
Particularly when compared to common cutthroats such as these.
Dealing with them did not take particularly long, and Altaïr found himself rather pleased to be able to fight beside Maria and Alnesr both. Though he knew that she would say that such a thing was only so that she could satisfy her stated curiosity about the man in black, Altaïr made up his mind to appreciate the extra time in spite of what Maria would doubtless claim was the cause. As the three of them made their way out of the ship, Altaïr carefully maneuvered himself so that he would be able to watch her as she fought.
She was truly skilled with a blade, and though he’d long since known the fact from his previous encounters, Altaïr still found himself pleased to have the opportunity to observe and reconfirm such a fact once more. The three of them worked rather well together, and though such was like as not to be a futile endeavor, Altaïr wished for a moment that he could somehow convince Maria to join her strength to the Brotherhood. She not only had the skill, but more and more it was becoming clear that Maria had the mind for such a life, as well.
Resolving once more to speak to Maria in more depth when he could, so that he would be able to find out what it was that she truly wanted out of life, Altaïr allowed himself to breathe more easily as the last of the pirates fell dead to the ground.
Chapter 86: Deeper into Kyrenia
Chapter Text
“What is your business with us, strangers?” Alnesr asked, and Altaïr made his way over to stand beside his brother Assassin as he questioned the men now standing before them. “Are you Templar spies?”
“No, sir,” the man standing at the forefront of the group said, sounding as though he were trying not to stammer fearfully after witnessing the battle that had just taken place. “The pirates attacked, and I had to see if I would be of use. I can’t stand the Templars.”
Altaïr smiled, even as Maria scoffed. “I know; you’re not alone,” he said, nodding to the man as he cleaned and the sheathed his sword.
“My name is Markos, sirs,” the man said, bowing to the three of them. “I’ll help in any way I can, if it means ridding my country of these Crusaders.”
“Then, I’ll need you to keep this woman safe, until my brother and I return,” he said.
“Safe?” Maria scoffed. “After all you’ve seen me do, you still think me some fragile flower that needs protecting?”
“Far from it,” he said, allowing a small smile to show, before sobering. “But, I would not ask you to walk between your loyalties in such a matter.”
Maria smiled thinly. “I wouldn’t have thought you had the honor for that, Assassin. If I’m not careful, I might actually start to admire you.” She barked a roughly amused laugh. “Go on, then. You’ll need a head-start, if you’re to take on my Order.”
Altaïr did not know, precisely, how he felt about Maria continuing to describe the Templars as her Order, but given her tone it had almost sounded as though she was doing it to antagonize him to some greater or lesser degree. An odd thing to consider, if such were indeed true, but given all that he had learned of Maria’s character it was starting to seem all the more plausible.
He and Alnesr followed Maria and the Resistance members to the safehouse, this one having the outward appearance of a grain silo, so that they would at least know where it was and how best to return to it when they had completed their objective. Meeting up with the leader of this particular cell, a man named Barnabas, he directed Alnesr to take a moment to rest while he spoke to the man.
“I’ve been following Armand Bouchart,” he said, as he, Alnesr, and Barnabas all sat together on sacks of grain.
“Ah, is Bouchart in Kyrenia?” Barnabas asked. “He’s probably visiting his prisoners in Buffavento.”
“Buffavento? Is that a keep?” Alnesr asked, seeming to have had enough rest to at least make himself heard.
“A castle, yes,” Barnabas said, his expression questioning when he looked over at the younger Assassin; Altaïr could only be grateful that it was not wary or scornful. “It was once the residence of a wealthy Cypriot noblewoman, until the Templars seized her property.”
“Can you take me there?” he asked, frowning at the greed the Templars always seemed to display.
“Well, I can do more than that,” Barnabas said. “I can get you inside without the guards batting an eye. But, you must do something for me, first. For the Resistance.”
~AC: BL~
Turning her eyes away from the Assassin who vexed her such a great deal, Maria found herself contemplating the younger Assassin he traveled with.
“Tell me, boy: do you truly have no memory of the man in black?
“Nothing,” the little Assassin admitted, though Maria took note of the way he waited for the members of this latest group of theirs to pass out of earshot before he did so. “If you wouldn’t find it too much trouble, might you describe him to me?”
“He seemed a man in his prime,” she said, observing the hesitant way the little Assassin looked to her; she was starting to think that his stoicism was more a product of his age, rather than the way he had been raised. “I suppose one might call him handsome, but his manner was for too arrogant to persuade any but the most coddled of dullards. Oddly enough, he had your coloring; not only so far as his skin, but even to the hair and eyes.”
“What?”
“I hadn’t thought to see anyone else with that coloring, but it does indeed seem that you are not so odd as I once thought,” she said, studying the little Assassin as he folded his arms, a thoughtful expression overtaking his face.
She did not know just what was in the little Assassin’s mind, but Maria found her own mind turning back to the man in black that had revealed himself to her and that Assassin. She’d not been prepared for such a thing, seeing a phantom in the shape of a man appearing from within the Apple itself. Even the black robes he wore, though she might have dismissed them if another person were to ask her about such, didn’t quite seem normal.
They had appeared, during the short time she had been able to see the man clearly, to be made of heavy leather rather than anything approaching normal cloth; the bits of silver around the collar, that seemed not to be a part of the central silver striping, did not seem to be made of any kind of cloth, either. The striping and collar-piece were not the only silver upon the odd leather cloak, but for the life of her Maria could not truly determine what the tassels were for.
She supposed that they could have been strictly ornamental, but somehow Maria thought that that was not their true purpose.
Still, contemplating the wardrobe of the phantom within the Apple was not truly what she was going to devote her attention to, save to note that the Apple the man inhabited could not be returned to the Templars. Her Order would not hesitate to use the Apple, even with the man who seemed to haunt it, and she was not at all certain that she wanted to see what such a man would be capable of when in contact with her Order.
Particularly considering the way he had been able to possess the little Assassin’s mind; she didn’t know if there were others like him among the Templars, but as she’d not had the chance to meet all of them she had no real way of knowing if such was the case, and either way she preferred not to chance it after she had seen the way the little Assassin had reacted. He’d not done anything, aside from being raised the way he was, and Maria held no enmity against the child personally. She also knew that her fellow Templars would not take such a stance in regard to any member of the Assassins, not even a child.
It was another reason that she was not at all eager to reveal the little Assassin and his circumstances to them.
Still, during the time that the two of them had spent together before being forced to confront Bouchart and the fools working for him, Maria had become rather curious about the boy and just how he had come to live under the command of the elder Assassin. Turning back to the boy, Maria waited for him to settle back down on the bench beside her, before turning to him.
~AC: BL~
Making his way back into the safehouse that the Cypriot Resistance maintained, Altaïr made for the bench where he could see that Alnesr and Maria had sat down beside one another.
“Well, it seems as though there’s a hefty price on all our heads,” he said, as he came within earshot of the pair of them; he wondered just what the two of them had found to speak of, but he was not particularly concerned with such a thing as yet.
Perhaps he would ask Alnesr later.
“A price?” Maria demanded, sounding distinctly annoyed by the prospect. “Goddamn Bouchart. He probably thinks I took this one’s place as your apprentice,” she made an annoyed gesture in Alnesr’s direction.
“Someone called the Bull has dispatched his men to search for us,” he informed her, raising his eyebrows as she cursed harshly.
“The Bull? So they gave that zealot his own parish.”
“I take it he is no friend of yours,” he stated, wondering how she knew the man – had he worked closely with de Sable, or had Maria not stayed close to his side at all times – though he doubted he would learn such a thing easily.
“Hardly,” Maria scoffed. “His name is Moloch; a pious blowhard with arms like tree trunks.”
Turning at the sound of another approaching, Altaïr found that Markos was the one making his way over to where the three of them all sat on the bench that Maria and Alnesr seemed to have claimed for themselves.
“Do you know the Resistance safehouse in the Commons?” he asked the man.
“I know where it is, but I’ve never been there before,” the Cypriot said. “I’m just a foot soldier for the Resistance.”
“Alnesr and I will be able to make it there on our own, but would you escort Maria?” he asked. “All other considerations aside, the three of us should not be seen in each other’s company,” he continued, turning his gaze to Alnesr so that his brother Assassin would understand the true import of his words.
“I know some back-alleys and tunnels,” Markos said, looking around as he, Alnesr, and Maria all stood up to leave. “It may take some time, but we’ll get there in one piece.”
“Thank you,” he said, nodding to Markos and Maria both, as he and Alnesr turned to take their own leave of this safehouse.
Chapter 87: City hunters
Chapter Text
As he and his brother Assassin split from one another so that they would not be so easily discovered while they traversed the rooftops of the city, Altaïr reflected upon all the turns his life had taken lately. He would have never thought to be the Master of the Syrian Brotherhood, much less that Al Mualim would betray everything the Brotherhood stood for merely by gaining the Apple. He wondered, for a moment, if even such as that had been due to the influence of the man in black.
But no; everything that Al Mualim had done had seemed to stem from something within the man himself.
As he came within sight of the other safehouse that the Cypriot Resistance maintained, this one closer to the new location where he would need to be. Alnesr nodded to him as he approached from another direction, somewhere between perpendicular and parallel, and the two of them made their way back down to the ground and from there into the new safehouse that the Resistance maintained. He found Barnabas at the back of the room, lounging on sacks of grain that had been seemingly laid out for just that purpose, the man roused himself as though from slumber, shifting and stifling a yawn.
“I just got word that someone found poor Jonas’ body,” he said with a sneer in his voice. “What a waste, eh?”
As the Cypriot brushed grain from his robes, Altaïr forced himself to regain his composure. He might have been forced to work with this man by sheer necessity, but he was not fond of him on any real level. He took no pleasure in the death of others, but Barnabas seemed to be one of those that did. Altaïr held no love for those kind.
“You knew him better than I,” he said. “I’m certain he knew the risks of attempting to play both sides.”
“Yes,” Barnabas continued. “Unfortunately, this has complicated things. Jonas was a respected Cypriot, and his death has sparked riots near the Old Church. The public is hungry for revenge, and the Bull will tell them you were responsible. You may lose the support of the Resistance.”
“But, Jonas was a traitor to the Resistance,” he said; the nagging instinct that he’d ignored before, to his own detriment when he’d been forced to kill Al Mualim in defense of the Brotherhood and the world that they protected, became all the louder and more urgent. “Did they not know that?”
“Not enough of them, I’m afraid,” Barnabas said; Altaïr tried not to appear to be observing him too closely. “The Resistance is quite scattered.”
“Well, you’ll have the chance to tell them yourself,” he said, wondering just what Barnabas would say to that. “Some men are on their way here now.”
“You’re bringing more people here? People you can trust?” Barnabas asked, his tone and expression both concerned.
“It’s worth the risk,” he said, resolving to speak to Alnesr about his misgivings during this next task that lay before them. “Right now, I need to see these riots for myself.”
“And, per our bargain, I’ll see what I can do about getting you close to Bouchart. A deal’s a deal, after all.”
Even as Barnabas tried to smile at him in a way he seemed to mean to be comforting, Altaïr found that he still did not trust the man’s motives. There was simply something in his manner that rung as false. Standing and beginning to make his way out of the safehouse, Altaïr nodded to Alnesr as the two of them began to scale the wall of the building nearest to them.
Standing atop the rooftop for a few moments, he briefly discussed his plans with his brother Assassin, and the two of them parted company so that they would not be so easily spotted while there was a price on both their heads. Moving over the rooftops once more, Altaïr made his way steadily toward the destination, bent on observing the goings on there.
The church was the sight of more unrest than Altaïr had yet witnessed, with the notable exception of the time directly following his confrontation with Al Mualim. Altaïr narrowed his eyes, watching as Templar soldiers and guards cordoned off the marauding citizens that had already done so much damage to their surroundings. He could see smashed, overturned, and broken carts, crates, and barrels littering the streets, and the sounds of an angry crowd below. He’d heard such before, yes, and even been the cause of such a thing, but he’d no more love for it than the first time.
Alnesr joined him, and after a few moments more of watching the crowd from their perch – moments during which Altaïr decided that he and Alnesr would have to deal with the Bull if they were to restore peace to this region – he and Alnesr swiftly departed. Cursing himself, even as he paced Alnesr back to the new safehouse that the Resistance had established, Altaïr wondered, not for the first time, if he had allowed himself to be used for another task that he would not have performed if he had simply paused to think about who it was who had given it to him. And yes, he remembered that Al Mualim had once been the Master of the Syrian Brotherhood, and so he might be forgiven by another for not questioning him in that instance.
Still, he would be a long time forgiving himself for his own foolishness.
When he and Alnesr descended back to the street before the new safehouse, and from their making their way inside again, he searched in vain for Barnabas. Alnesr was the one who thought to seek out Markos and Maria, while Altaïr mastered himself and awaited them. They’d not met up with Barnabas on their travels, and that was simply more proof of Altaïr’s own foolishness in his eyes. He’d not listened, and he’d not questioned, and now a man who likely did not need to die had paid for such a thing with his life.
“Alnesr, could I speak with you a moment?”
“Of course, brother,” the younger Assassin said, following in his wake as Altaïr made his way to a secluded section of the safehouse.
“I fear I have allowed myself to become complacent,” he said, once the pair of them had passed beyond the hearing of any of the other Resistance members.
“What do you mean?”
“I had no love for Barnabas; he seemed a man too taken with what power he held here, and yet I allowed myself to believe that he’d been appointed as leader by the Resistance here,” he said, knowing that Alnesr had lived with him long enough to parse his words if he was not being entirely clear in his phrasing. “Still, I allowed myself to ignore what misgivings I had about him, and now I fear that an innocent man has died for it.”
“I am sorry to hear that, Altaïr,” his brother Assassin said.
There was no recrimination in Alnesr’s tone, but for a moment Altaïr almost wished there would be.
“Come, we should find what it is we’re to do next,” he said, mastering himself once more; it was foolish to think that Alnesr would denounce him for a single mistake after the two of them had lived and worked together for so long.
“What’s going on out there?” Markos demanded, once he and Alnesr had sought the man out again. “The city is in turmoil; I’ve seen riots!”
“The people are protesting the death of a citizen; a man named Jonas,” he said. “Have you heard of him?”
“My father knew him well,” Markos said, sounding stricken. “He was a good man. How did he die?”
“Bravely,” he said, forcing himself to look into Markos’ eyes even in spite of the way he felt his heart sinking ever lower. “Listen, Markos: things have become complicated; before I find Bouchart, I need to eliminate the Bull and put an end to his violence.”
“You’ve quite the taste for chaos, Altaïr,” Maria said sardonically; even in spite of her tone, Altaïr liked the sound of his name on her lips.
“The Bull is one man responsible for the subjugation of thousands,” he said, attempting not to smile. “Few will mourn his loss.”
She shifted slightly, a subtle expression of what Altaïr thought might have been approval in her eyes. “And, what? You propose to simply fly into Kantara, sting him, and exit unnoticed? The man surrounds himself with devoted worshippers.”
“Kantara,” he echoed, knowing the place that she spoke of but still wanting to be reminded; this was the first time he’d brought Alnesr with him to Cyprus, after all. “That’s to the east, yes?”
“Yes,” she said, giving him a sidelong look that he could not quite interpret. “It’s the most well-defended,” she smiled thinly. “Never mind; you’ll both see for yourselves.”
“I trust we will,” he said, smiling in gentle amusement at her continued defiance in even the smallest matters; she may have stated that it was simply curiosity that bound them together, and so far as he could see that was that she wished to believe such was the case, but for his part Altaïr hoped… well, such was not important at the moment. “Come, Alnesr; we’ve work to do.”
“Of course, Altaïr.”
Chapter 88: Moloch
Chapter Text
The pair of them swiftly departed, making their way back up the side of another building, and off to the east to make their preliminary foray into Kantara Castle, so that they would be able to determine the best rout in and out. And so that they would be able to determine the best time to deal with the man at last. Parting company with Alnesr, so that the two of them would be less easily spotted by the mercenaries that would flock to the bounty that Bouchart had put on their heads, Altaïr continued east toward Kantara Castle.
Over the heads of people who didn’t have the time to look up, those whose lives the Assassins sought to protect even though none of them – or at least a select few – would ever truly come to understand the lives of sacrifice that each and every one of the Assassins lived, those who lived the lives that those of the Brotherhood would never have the chance to experience. Forcing his thoughts away from the melancholy path that they had taken, Altaïr mastered himself once more and continued to move on.
His first sight of Kantara Castle was the walls; walls patrolled by Crusader soldiers, over an expanse of fanatical zealots that Maria’s description had not truly done justice to.
The Bull was not a Templar, as it turned out; he was a fanatic who used them as they used him in turn, with an army of followers that he used as personal guard, or as those who acted to spread his word, or as servants within his castle. He was nearly as devoted to Bouchart as he was to his religious principles, and the castle he lived in was presumably gifted to him by Bouchart himself; or else by the Templars as a whole. Altaïr also found that the man was most often seen worshipping within the Castle’s church.
As he and Alnesr rejoined each other on a clear patch of wall, he nodded to his brother Assassin as the two of them stepped down into the castle, the pair of them discussed what it was that they had seen on their separate journeys.
Making their way further into the castle, the two of them were often forced to pause in shadowed alcoves to evade the gazes of the fanatics that served within the castle in one capacity or another. They were clearly held in contempt by the Templar guards that patrolled within the castle, if the snatches of conversation that he overheard while he had been making his way deeper inside were anything to go by. Still, the Templars seemed to want to use him in the same way that they wished to use everyone else that happened to fall into their path.
Maria had said that the castle was well-defended, and it seemed as though she’d not spoken idly. Of course, it only meant anything if one was to attempt to besiege it with an army, but such defenses would and did mean nothing to a pair of Assassins entering the castle by stealth and secret ways. Particularly when those two brother Assassins had such a great deal of experience in doing such.
The pair of them made their way into a vast banqueting hall, and found two guards standing at the opposite end. He took a throwing knife, and saw Alnesr doing the same just beside him, and the two of them loosed them into the standing forms of the guards. Altaïr knew that they were close now, that they would soon be able to put an end to the Bull and his tyranny.
Making his way into what seemed to be a dead end, Altaïr paused to check behind them, and out of the corner of his left eye he saw Alnesr crouching to study the ground beneath them. His brother Assassin called softly to him just as he was turning to look back, and Altaïr looked down to see the trapdoor that those men had clearly been standing guard over. The pair of them paused to listen to the deep voice of a man speaking.
He shared a smile with Alnesr; it seemed that they had managed to find the Bull at last.
“I will make the first advance,” he said. “Wait until I call upon you.”
“Of course, Altaïr,” his brother Assassin said. “Good hunting.”
“Thank you, brother.”
The pair of them descended through the opened trapdoor onto the rafters of the church within Kantara Castle, and there they found an empty room lit by the flickering illumination of a large brazier upon the altar. And there, kneeling before the altar, was the Bull himself; Moloch, as Maria had called him. Her description of him, while it had had a certain paucity of words, did him a great deal of justice: bare-headed, with a drooping mustache, bare-chested apart from a medallion he wore.
His tree-trunk arms, wide chest, and bare head all glistened with sweat as he stoked the fire, chanting some incantation that resembled a growl just as much as it did the pious devotion that he clearly meant it to.
His attention was clearly absorbed by whatever rituals he was attending to during the course of his worship, and Altaïr smiled thinly to see it. The man was clearly powerful, and if he was even half as strong as he looked this would be a difficult battle even with Alnesr’s aid. Not only was the man large and powerful-looking, but he was said to use a weapon like a meteor hammer, and that he wielded it with ruthless and deadly accuracy.
He’d even less desire to fight this man now that he’d seen him than when he’d merely been listening to Maria as she described him, and he was all the more pleased to know that this was to be a stealth kill; clean, quick, and silent.
Making his way with the silent grace that he had learned at the feet of some of the greatest within the Syrian Brotherhood, and then passed on in his own time, Altaïr dropped lightly into the room behind Moloch. He found, however, that he’d landed slightly farther back than he’d planned, and held himself quiet and still, hoping that the Bull had not heard him as he landed. However, it seemed that the brute of a man had not been made aware of his presence; rather, he was still engaged with the brazier and his pieties.
Moving steadily forward, Altaïr forced himself not to look up to the rafters where Alnesr was watching, both so that his brother Assassin would not think that he was in need of aid, and so that the Bull would not have cause to do the same. As silently as he could manage, Altaïr engaged his hidden blade and raised it. The flickering light from the brazier reflected on the polished steel, glittering along the sharpened edges as he brought it to bear as he crouched and prepared to leap upon the unsuspecting brute.
He was in midair, just beginning to fall from the apex of his leap, when the Bull spun with deceptive quickness for a man of his great size, and Altaïr quickly found himself trapped within the circle of those tree-trunk arms. Before the Bull could make any other moves, however, one of Alnesr’s throwing knives imbedded itself deep in the meat of his left shoulder. Altaïr braced himself, landing back on his feet as the Bull stumbled back in pain, and leaped back from the huge man’s reach so that Alnesr could rain throwing knives down upon him.
Breathing more easily for the reprieve he had been given, Altaïr unsheathed his sword and charged forward to ram it deep between the brute’s ribs, deep into his heart.
His sword stuck fast, forcing Altaïr to place his right foot on the corpse so that he could wrestle it free while thick, syrupy blood spilled over the flagstones that he stood upon. Finally managing to free his sword from the corpse at his feet, Altaïr cleaned the weapon and then sheathed it once more, breathing more easily as he ascended back up into the rafters where Alnesr was still waiting for him.
“That was not precisely what I had planned, but I do thank you for your aid, brother,” he said, crouching down next to the younger Assassin.
“I had hoped that you’d not need to face such an opponent,” Alnesr said, looking from him down to the corpse of the Bull. “Still, I am pleased that I could be of some aid to you, Altaïr.”
Chapter 89: Disappearance
Chapter Text
Smiling back at his brother Assassin as the two of them made their way out of Kantara Castle, Altaïr wiped the last traces of emotion from his face as he continued on his way back out. Making his way out to the high walls of the castle, between the patrols of the Templar guards and the servants that paced the length of those walls, Altaïr descended lightly down to the ground, and then made his way back up onto a nearby building to the west.
As he continued on his way over the rooftops and alleys that stood between Kantara Castle and the safehouse that their group had moved to once he and Alnesr had arrived in the Commons within Kyrenia, Altaïr wondered just what he would find when he arrived once again. Barnabas was clearly not to be trusted, but he was also beginning to wonder about the other members of the Resistance that he had had dealings with. Markos had seemed trustworthy, yes, but it could also be that he was better at not speaking what he felt than Barnabas had ever been.
It was not a thought that Altaïr relished entertaining, but he would do such all the same; such a thing was his duty to the Brotherhood as a whole since he had become the Master.
Coming into sight of the part of the city that the safehouse within the Commons had once stood within, Altaïr found himself being confronted by Maria on the very rooftop where he and Alnesr had met up once again.
“We always seem to be meeting up this way, Assassin,” Maria said, her tone carrying more than a hint of sardonic amusement.
“What has happened?” he asked, looking from Maria to what he could see of the safehouse in the distance.
“Crusader soldiers working for Bouchart attacked just after the pair of you had left,” Maria said, quickly sobering after her earlier amusement. “A great deal of your compatriots in the resistance were taken prisoner, though some managed to escape. You might even be pleased to know that the one you were speaking to – his name was Markos, yes? – was among those who managed to hide himself when the Templars made their move.”
“Thank you for informing me of this, Maria,” he said, subtly bowing his head in gratitude for what she had offered to him.
Even though she would likely still continue to insist that she was present solely to assuage her own curiosity about the man in black, and though she still gave every indication of merely tolerating his presence for her own ends, Altaïr still found himself nurturing the hope that the two of them could perhaps come to see eye-to-eye one day.
“The question remains, Assassin: what do you intend to do about this?”
“I will speak to Markos, find out what he knows about this matter, and from there I will make further plans,” he said, turning to look at Maria more squarely when she scoffed.
“Do all your plans come to this, Assassin, or am I merely present on a special occasion?”
Turning away, a slight smile on his face, Altaïr descended back to the ground and made his way into the abandoned safehouse.
“Markos?” he called, pitching his voice to carry but remaining alert in case there were any Templar soldiers that had remained behind.
“I wanted to stop them, but I had to hide,” the Cypriot said, looking more than a little shame-faced. “There were just too many.”
“This was not your fault,” he said, after a moment’s pause; he may not have truly known who it was that he could trust, after Barnabas had revealed himself as a traitor, but that was no reason to go needlessly antagonizing those who might still be his allies. “The Templars are crafty.”
“I’ve heard they harness the power of a Dark Oracle in Buffavento,” Markos said. “That must be how they found us.”
He did not know if such a thing could be true, but after all he had seen of the power of the Apple and the man in black that haunted it, he was more willing than he would have been otherwise. Still, he rather suspected that such an advantage as the Templars had demonstrated here in Cyprus had a great deal more to do with the fact that the Resistance had been infiltrated by Templar spies rather than any kind of Oracle.
“That is a curious theory,” he allowed. “However, I expect it was Barnabas who tipped them off, in the end.”
“Barnabas?” Markos echoed, sounding more surprised than Altaïr could account for. “How can that be? The Resistance leader Barnabas was executed the day before you and yours arrived.”
Altaïr cursed himself for allowing himself to be duped yet again by those who held allegiance to the Templars. Jonas had not deserved to die for his mistakes.
“I will see to rescuing the prisoners that were taken from you,” he said, knowing that it was the least he could do in recompense for the foolish actions that he had taken earlier. “Will you be able to find another place to stay?”
“We will be able to take shelter in another of our safehouses,” Markos said, nodding. “I thank you again for your offer of aid.”
“Of course,” he said, nodding and leaving the safehouse once more.
Chapter 90: Into the castle
Chapter Text
Ascending to the rooftops once more, Altaïr alighted and found himself facing Alnesr and Maria. The two of them had seemed to be speaking of some matter or other, but when he came to them they stopped.
“What news, Altaïr?” Alnesr asked, sounding more comfortable than he had for some time; Altaïr was pleased by it, yes, but for a moment he wondered at the cause of such a thing. “What are we to do next?”
“The Templars have taken the prisoners from the Resistance into the harbor district,” he said, stepping closer to Alnesr as Maria stepped back from the pair of them. “I would like your aid to free them, even though I fear that it might be more difficult to keep them that way.”
Alnesr seemed for a moment as though he wished to ask further on that matter, but held himself back after only a moment’s thought. Altaïr was pleased to see such discretion, for he’d no wish to force Maria to choose purely because of circumstance. The two of them bid Maria farewell – Altaïr was almost surprised to hear Alnesr add his own voice, but then recalled how long he and Maria had had to become acquainted – and departed for the Harbor District of Kyrenia. The pair of them swept over the rooftops and across the alleys that separated them from the harbors, and soon enough Altaïr found that he could smell the sea.
The pair of them were soon able to discern just where it was that the prisoners taken from the Resistance had been taken: each of them had been thrown into a cell that was just as small and filthy as the cells that he had witnessed Talal the slaver using. He was not pleased with the reminder, and hence all the more eager to see these Templars dealt with in the most final of ways. Nodding to Alnesr, the two of them leaped back down to the ground.
Together, though each of them had taken a different angle of approach to the Templars guarding their allies in the Resistance, he and Alnesr each carved their way through the Templars that had been keeping the Resistance members prisoner. Stepping up to the cell while Alnesr stood guard, Altaïr swiftly unlocked it and received the thanks of those who had been trapped there. Breathing more easily once they were free once more, Altaïr turned to his brother Assassin.
“We should make for Buffavento castle now,” he said, watching as Alnesr nodded silently. “To see if we might put an end to Bouchart at last.”
“Yes; I would have suggested it myself, if you hadn’t spoken, Altaïr.”
“I am glad to see you gaining more confidence, Alnesr,” he said, smiling slightly. “Come.”
The pair of them swiftly departed from Kyrenia’s harbors, leaving behind the scents of sea and ships, and the creaking of wood and slapping of waves; heading now for Buffavento castle.
After some time, Altaïr found himself facing the imposing façade of a castle that seemed just that much larger than Kantara. He did not know if such a thing were indeed true, but as Alnesr joined him and the pair of them began to make their way into Buffavento by secret ways that the Templars who guarded it would not be able to track, Altaïr forced his thoughts to turn to other paths.
He did not truly know if the Templars had an oracle they could call upon in times of need, or if they were simply resorting to the methods of offering coin or intimidation that had served them in the past, but whatever their present methods, Altaïr was determined to see them stopped.
As he and Alnesr descended still farther and deeper into the bowels of Buffavento castle, Altaïr took care to observe his surroundings in depth, in case there were more Templar guards lying in wait. As before in Kantara, he and Alnesr were able to make their way into the castle with the careful combination of stealth and assassination that had brought them into so many of the Templars’ previous strongholds. Soon enough, over the sounds of dripping water and the soft breathing that Altaïr had always heard from inside himself, he began to hear a familiar voice.
Bouchart was indeed present, but it seemed as though he was speaking to someone.
“So, you lost to the Assassins again?” the Templar snapped.
The man who answered – one dressed in fine, long, fur-lined robes – was unfamiliar to Altaïr as yet, but he had the feeling that he would soon come to know him just as well as any of the other Templars he had encountered during the course of his work. “I tell you, that boy-”
“Yes, I know. I’ve heard plenty of your tales about that yellow-eyed demon boy,” Bouchart said, sounding more impatient with every word spoken, Altaïr turned to see Alnesr narrowing his eyes slightly, and sighed softly. “Don’t insult me, Shalim. If you have difficulties dealing with the Assassins, don’t blame them on the appearance of a single one of their members.”
“I will deal with the Assassins, and take that traitor prisoner,” Shalim said. “I promise you, Grand Master.”
He and Alnesr both took care to observe Shalim where he stood speaking to Bouchart; there was nothing in his form or his manner that served to connect him to his father Moloch. Not his appearance, not his form, and certainly not his attire.
“Do it quickly,” Bouchart snapped. “Before she leads those Assassins directly to the Archive.”
All this time, and he hadn’t thought to repeat his question to Maria about the Archive, and he swallowed a chuckle as he continued to watch as Shalim and Bouchart spoke. When Shalim turned to leave, however, Bouchart reached out to stop him.
“Oh, and Shalim; see that this is delivered to Alexander in Limassol,” Bouchart said, handing Shalim a large sack, and Shalim nodded his assent.
Chapter 91: The mad prophetess
Chapter Text
Altaïr clenched his teeth in fury; so, even Alexander had been working for the Templars, or else they had replaced him with one of their own as in the case of Barnabas. However, the two of them had soon begun to move off, leaving the path clear for them to make their way yet farther into the deep parts of Buffavento. Finding himself unable to pass through a gate that stood before him, Altaïr signaled Alnesr and the two of them clambered out onto a balcony, then made their way across the outer walls of the castle, and then climbed back in and continued on their way downward.
However, when they entered Buffavento’s walls once more, Altaïr began to hear ranting and screaming. A pair of guards that had been distracted by the noise echoing from farther down the halls fell to his and Alnesr’s blades, allowing the pair of them to move farther down through the corridor. As he came to the end of a tunnel that opened into what seemed to be another jail cell, though stronger and thicker than the others he had been seeing previously, Altaïr was finally able to find just where it was that Bouchart had gone.
“What’s happening?” the Templar asked the guard standing by on the side of a barred partition standing before yet another row of cell doors.
Altaïr crouched further out of sight, hidden in an alcove within the tunnel, some steps ahead of where Alnesr had stopped to hide himself.
“It’s that madwoman, sir,” the guard reported, raising his voice to be heard over the tumult behind him. “She’s on a rampage. Two of the guards have been injured.”
“Let her play,” Bouchart said, smiling with no kindness at all. “She has served her purpose.”
Once more, Altaïr found that attacking was just beyond his means; he and Alnesr might very well have been able to overcome Bouchart and the single guard he presently had with him, but there would be no way of knowing just how many others such an action would alert. He would not be such a fool as to trust to luck when he and his brother Assassin were surrounded by Templars in this way. He would not forget the lesson he had learned, nor the suffering he had inflicted on Malik and Alnesr both.
Watching as Bouchart and the guard he had been speaking with left, Altaïr turned to signal Alnesr and together the pair of them moved forward to stand before the partition. He found it locked, as he’d nearly suspected it would be in a place such as this, and so he spent a few moments working it open as Alnesr stood silent and watchful beside him. Finally having done with the partition barring his path, Altaïr clapped Alnesr’s right shoulder and the two of them made their way still deeper into the cell of the madwoman so many had spoken of.
The presumed dark oracle who was said to have given the Templars every advantage over the Cypriot Resistance; Altaïr rather doubted the latter, but after glimpsing the man in black more than once, he found himself curious about the latter.
As his eyes grew ever more accustomed to the darkness this deep within Buffavento, Altaïr was able to grasp the true size of the madwoman’s cell. It was nearly the size of a well-appointed banquet hall, rather than the small, cramped spaces that he’d seen in the proceeding halls. There was also a curtain of mist clinging to the floor at about mid-calf height on him, hiding the exact look of the floor, and also what looked like patches of some kind of foliage. He’d never seen the like of it before, not in any of the prisons he’d infiltrated during his time as a member of the Brotherhood.
The madwoman was making a long, drawn-out screeching, and the farther he continued into the oversized cell that the Templars had imprisoned the madwoman that they had used for their own purposes, Altaïr came to a complete halt as the screeching stopped. He saw Alnesr’s lips just beginning to part, the expression on his face making it clear that he was about to ask a question, before a disturbing voice echoed through the cold, dimly-lit room.
“Pagan blood,” the jagged, singsong voice came out of the shadows of the room. “I know your names, sinners,” she cackled. “I know why you’re here. God guide my claws. God grant me the strength to snap your bones.”
Drawing his sword, and hearing the hiss as Alnesr did likewise, Altaïr moved toward the sound of the madwoman’s voice with his blade drawn. She dove headlong at the pair of them, squalling and hissing almost like a maddened cat, and he brought his sword forward to block her charge with the flat of his blade. When Alnesr stepped forward, acting to push her backward with the flat of his own blade, their eyes locked and the madwoman hissed.
“Son of the heartless man,” she growled.
Alnesr scoffed, continuing to drive her backward as Altaïr closed with him.
“The heartless man, and the thirteen who would become him,” she warbled, her eyes widening and her mouth pulling back into a snarl.
Steadying his breathing, Altaïr drove forward to deal with the madwoman before she could attack them in earnest with her long, sharp nails. She had the desperate strength of madness, and Altaïr found himself hard-pressed to drive her back without suffering more than superficial wounds. However, it seemed as though the madwoman was particularly focused on Alnesr; either she thought his brother Assassin the greater threat somehow, or else she had been startled by his yellow eyes in the same way as any of those outside the Brotherhood had been. He did not know which it ultimately had been, but either way he was not going to simply disregard a useful advantage.
Though he often wished that Alnesr would not be looked askance at by those that he acted in defense of.
“Whatever the Templars have done to you, my lady, they have done you wrong,” he said, once he and Alnesr had managed to subdue her enough that she could no longer attack them; Alnesr’s yellow eyes staring into her own behind his brother Assassin’s own sword seemed to be a sufficient deterrent to keep her from moving to save herself. “Forgive us this.”
Taking what life the Cypriot had been left by the Templars who had held her for so long, Altaïr bowed his head briefly in a small gesture of regret and respect for the Cypriot woman who had been so ill-used by the Templars. Turning away from her sad, crumpled form, he caught Alnesr’s eye and the two of them swiftly departed from Buffavento along another path. As, considering what they left in their wake, there was always a chance that the remaining Templars would find their fallen comrades and attempt to start a search.
They encountered little enough resistance on their way out, and Altaïr was pleased at least to know that his skill had not been compromised alongside his better judgment.
Once they had left the dangerous grounds of the Templar-held castle behind, Altaïr turned his path toward the old safehouse that they had been staying in when they first arrived in Kyrenia, and he and Alnesr hurried their steps to get there. The safehouse was as they had left it so long ago; Markos and Maria had both found their way back there, and he greeted the pair of them easily. Though, when he spoke to Maria, it was for somewhat longer, and he was certain that she could hear the fondness in his voice when he did so.
Making his way over to an empty desk toward the back of the room, Altaïr took his journal out and opened it to the next blank page and then began to write:
Why do our instincts insist upon violence? I have studied the interactions between different species. The innate desire to survive seems to demand the death of the other. Why can they not stand hand-in-hand? So many believe the world was created through the works of a divine power; but I see only the designs of a madman, bent on celebrating death, destruction, and desperation.
He turned to contemplate the Apple again, musing on what he had found of it, and what else he might need to know:
Who were the ones who made it? What brought them here? What drove them out? What of these artifacts, and the man in black? Could he be one of them? Are these artifacts some kind of messages in a bottle? Tools left behind to aid and guide us? Or, do we fight for control over their refuse, giving divine purpose and meaning to little more than discarded toys?
Setting his quill aside, Altaïr contemplated the Apple farther. Running the tips of his fingers over the seams between the Apple’s metal plates; the odd, colorless light within the Apple flickered for a moment, and for a brief moment Altaïr thought he saw the form of the man in black. Wondering if such a thing could have been true, Altaïr closed his journal once again as he continued to think. He still did not know just what more he could do on that subject, about the Apple or about the man in black that haunted it, and so he decided to set both matters aside for the moment.
Tucking away his journal within his robes once more, Altaïr stood up and turned away from the desk where he had been working and made his way over to where the remainder of the Resistance, along with Alnesr and Maria, were all spread out to sleep. Settling himself down nearby, just to the right of where Alnesr had chosen to take his rest, Altaïr closed his own eyes. It was not long before he himself had fallen asleep as well.
Chapter 92: Son of the Bull
Chapter Text
The next morning, after he had gotten what sleep he could while he was still curious about the Apple and what secrets it still held, Altaïr rose from the pallets that occupied the furthest corner of the safehouse and made his way to the back of a line that led to what was clearly an eating area, given the setup he was becoming ever more aware of as he closed in on the small section of the room where those who served in this safehouse had all gathered for the moment.
“Well, a hearty good morning to you, Assassin,” Maria said, as the two of them fell into step beside one another on their way into what served as a dining room in this place.
“We always seem to be meeting like this, don’t we Maria?” he echoed her words, and saw her face twist briefly in amusement.
“Don’t think I’m going to tell you anything about anything my Order has planned, Assassin,” Maria said, her tone every inch as haughty as it had always been, but something like amusement glittering in her dark eyes.
“I would not think to ask such a thing,” he said, raising his own chin so that it matched hers.
He thought he glimpsed a small smile upon Maria’s face, but if he did indeed see such a thing he found that it was hidden almost more quickly than it appeared. As Altaïr made his way over to the place that Alnesr seemed to have claimed for the both of them, he allowed himself to settle down by his brother Assassin’s left side as the two of them began to eat the meal that Alnesr had gathered for the pair of them.
Once he had finished with the meal with the members of the Resistance that had gathered in the sectioned-off area of the safehouse, Altaïr rose and made his way back toward where Markos had set himself up to oversee the workings of the Resistance cell that inhabited this place. He wanted to get an early start in dealing with Shalim, and for that he would need to speak to Markos, on the very real chance that there was something he was unaware of.
When he found Markos, behind his desk even this early hour, Altaïr smiled slightly as he made his way over to the man so that they could speak.
“The Oracle is dead,” he said, sobering as he spoke the words; the death of another, even those necessary to safeguarding the peace and freedom that the Templars would steal from every living person if they were given the chance to do so, was not and would never be something that he took pleasure in. “She will not be spilling anymore secrets.”
“That is a relief to hear,” Markos said.
“Who is Shalim?” he asked, before the Cypriot could think of anything else to say. “I heard Bouchart speaking to him. Apparently, he was the one who carried out the attack on the previous safehouse your group was operating out of. I heard the two of them speaking about it last night.”
“Shalim is the Bull’s whelp,” Markos said, with a distasteful shudder. “He is a vicious man, though not so devout as his father. He’s been seen with Bouchart on more than one occasion.”
“I think I’ll tail him for awhile, to see what I can learn,” he said, pausing for a moment to consider whether or not he would involve Alnesr in such a matter; on the one hand, if he lost sight of Shalim in the crowds it would indeed be helpful to have another to pick up his trail, but on the other it was likely to have been Alnesr’s presence that had given Maria the chance to slip the net the Templars had cast for her.
“Meet me in the Market district when you’re through,” Markos said, and Altaïr wondered why he was so eager to meet up there, of all places. He could have perfectly innocent reasons for it, but Altaïr could no longer afford the luxury of blind trust; no Assassin truly could, but him less than most, considering the circumstances. “I want to know what you find.”
“Very well, Markos,” he said, allowing himself to hope for a moment that Markos was a man he could at least trust so far as matters of the Resistance were concerned. “I shall find you there, then.”
Departing from the safehouse without another word, Altaïr made his way back out into the city and up the side of a nearby building. Breathing more easily once he was safely out of sight of the Templar guards who might have been patrolling the streets that he would have otherwise been traveling on, Altaïr searched for the familiar form of Shalim within the crowds. It did not take him long to find the man; wearing no less of his finery than when Altaïr had first laid eyes on him, he made quite the easy mark.
Following him just far enough to see that he was going to a brothel, and shook his head in slight amusement; less devout indeed. Breaking off from Shalim’s trail, Altaïr turned his path toward Kyrenia’s market district so that he could meet up with Markos and hence be able to provide the information the Cypriot had requested that he bring. He still did not quite know just what it was that Markos had intended by such a request, but for the moment Altaïr was willing to give the man the benefit of reasonable doubt.
Once he came within sight of Kyrenia’s large market, Altaïr swiftly caught sight of Markos, wandering between the various stalls as though he could not quite decide what to buy. Nodding to himself, having often used just that sort of a disguise when he was seeking to meet with a contact or else to observe a target without being observed in turn, Altaïr set about finding a clear patch of street so that he could descend back to the ground without being seen.
Finding one rather quickly, Altaïr returned to the streets of Kyrenia so that he and Markos would be able to speak plainly, now that he had gathered at least some information about Shalim.
“I need to get close to him,” he said, once he and Markos had settled down on a bench together; something that would draw only the barest attention from the curious, and even then only for a few moments. “If he’s as stupid as he is brash, then I may be able to get some secrets out of him.”
“Speak to one of the monks near the cathedral,” Markos said, with a rather amused chuckle. “Shalim’s wayward lifestyle demands frequent confessions.”
“That does sound rather promising,” he said, nodding slightly with a soft smile of his own. “I will meet with you again later, Markos.”
“Good fortune, my friend.”
Nodding a last time as he ascended the side of a nearby building, once out of sight of those still on the ground, Altaïr set off to find the cathedral that Markos had spoken about. It was not so long before he had, and not long after that when he found himself a bench to sit on, this one placed beneath a light canopy that flapped in the strong breeze. The crowds of people going into and out of the cathedral, and around it on the way to their various errands, took little to no notice of what seemed to be a lone scholar resting his feet for a time.
Paying only a modicum of attention to those people whose presence wasn’t of interest to him at this place and time, Altaïr made sure to appear as though his interest in those people was as cursory as theirs appeared to be in him. When he saw one of the monks making his way out of the cathedral on some business or other, Altaïr sighed softly in relief that he would soon be done with this part of his task.
“Does it not trouble you, brother, to suffer the sins of such a vile man as Shalim?” he asked, in a low tone so that none but the man he was speaking with would overhear him.
“It does,” the monk said, after having checked to see that he would not be overheard while speaking his mind; such fears would be laid to rest when Altaïr was finally able to make an end to Shalim, Bouchart, and the rest of the Templars in this place. “But to oppose him would mean death. The Templars have too much at stake in this place.”
“You mean the Archive?” he asked, curious to know what he would be able to find out from this conversation. “Can you tell me where it is?”
He received only a grim-faced headshake in response, as the monk vanished into the crowds. As he was considering whether it would be worth his while to pursue whatever information the man might have had, Altaïr caught the sound of a man speaking from the top of an orator’s platform. The voice was particularly familiar to him, and Altaïr wondered what Shalim thought to accomplish by making speeches. Or, indeed, how he had the mind and constitution for speechmaking after the drunken whoring Altaïr had previously seen the man at.
“Men and women of Cyprus,” he announced as his audience assembled; Altaïr made note of how his mannerisms were smoother and more precise than the last time the man had been within his sights, and the lack of the prostitute that he had taken for his pleasure inside the brothel. He did not know if this lack would be explained by his speech, but Altaïr wondered at it all the same. “Armand Bouchart sends his blessings, but with a stern provision that all who foment disorder by their support of the Resistance will be caught and punished. But, those who seek order and harmony, and pay obeisance to the Lord through good work will enjoy Bouchart’s charity. Now, let us work together as brothers to rebuild what hate and anger have torn down.”
When Shalim had finished with his speech, Altaïr only found himself more bemused by the content of it. Shalim did not seem the type to speak of charity at all, much less in such a way as he had just moments ago. It took only another moment for Altaïr to make up his mind to follow the man, and he soon found himself standing before the high, imposing walls of St. Hilarion Castle. He quickly saw that Shalim was making his way inside, and since he did not know what defenses he might encounter within the castle, or else what kind of skill Shalim would have to be able to recover so well and so quickly from the state he had been in when Altaïr had first encountered him.
He was not such a fool as to confront an unknown quantity like Shalim without aid, particularly not when he still did not know the man’s full capabilities.
Chapter 93: Shalim and Shahar
Chapter Text
Making his way back to the safehouse in the Commons so that he could speak with Alnesr, Altaïr found his brother Assassin in a rather contemplative pose, simply watching as the remaining Cypriots around him went about their business.
“Alnesr, I would have your aid on a mission I am about to undertake,” he said, once he and the younger Assassin were alone within the small space Alnesr seemed to have claimed for himself.
“Of course, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, nodding as Altaïr sat down next to him on the bench.
“Where is Maria?” he asked, curiosity finally overcoming him as he realized that he hadn’t caught sight of her on his way in.
“I’m right here, Assassin.” Altaïr snapped his gaze to where the woman in question had been standing, just as she made her way over to the pair of them. “I’ll be coming along on this errand of yours, and don’t think to deny me, because while I might not have your skills at climbing, I can still follow you.”
“You’re welcome to come along,” he said, both for his own and for far more practical reasons. “We could always use another sword-arm.”
Maria nodded sharply, though there was a brief moment when Altaïr thought he could see surprise in her expression, and the three of them swiftly stood and departed from the safehouse for the third time that day. While they made their way back over the rooftops toward St. Hilarion Castle, Maria filled them in on the situation with Shalim. And, unexpectedly, the man’s twin brother Shahar.
He’d not been prepared for such a revelation as that, but it did rather explain just how what he had seen – what had seemed to be an impossibly fast rate of recovery – had been accomplished in the end.
“When we reach the castle, there are some things that I wish to speak with Shahar about,” Maria said, breaking the comfortable silence that had fallen over them as they continued on their way to the Castle again.
“Oh?” he asked, turning to look at her as the three of them stopped on the roof of a nearby building. “What do you wish to know?”
“I wish to know what it is the Templars are truly planning for the world, and what part that Apple of Eden plays in their plans,” Maria said, narrowing her eyes slightly in contemplation.
“I have no objections to that,” he said. “Alnesr, what are your thoughts on the matter?”
“I find myself rather curious about that matter, as well,” his brother Assassin said, looking rather contemplative.
In the end, the pair of them agreed to give Maria what time she would need to find out what purpose the Apple would have served in the plans that the Templars had been making, and only to intervene when it became clear that Shalim and Shahar had no more patience for words. Continuing the rest of the way to St. Hilarion Castle, he and Alnesr made their way up the walls and up onto a nearby balcony so that they would be in a position to look and listen in on the conversation that Maria would be having with Shalim and Shahar.
Finding their way up to a wide balcony, uninhabited with the full heat of the sun beating down on it and no shelter from such a thing, he and Alnesr settled themselves there in order that they might be able to observe the conversation that was to take place between Maria and the Templar brothers Shalim and Shahar. Looking down upon her as she made her way inside, Altaïr smiled slightly as he saw the fierce set of her shoulders and the proud way she walked.
“I didn’t expect to see you again,” Shahar said, in fact seeming rather startled. “How might I be able to help you, Maria?”
“I’m not here on social business,” Maria said, her voice terse. “I want answers.”
The two of them made their way into the castle, Maria tagging along beside Shahar as the pair of them began speaking again.
“Is it true, what I have heard?” she demanded. “That the Templars wish to use the Apple of Eden for ill? Not to enlighten the people, but to subdue them?”
Shahar smiled, in that same way that Altaïr remembered Al Mualim smiling when he would speak of the next task that Altaïr would be given. He was no longer impressed by such a small gesture as he had been, and was hence all the more eager for Maria to find out just what it was that the Templars were planning, and not the stories that de Sable had clearly told her when he had brought her into the ranks of his Crusaders.
“People are confused, Maria,” Shahar said, still wearing that smile. “They are lambs begging to be led. And that’s what we offer: simple lives, free of worry.”
“Our Order was created to protect the people,” Maria insisted, folding her arms in disapproval. “Not to rob them of their liberty.”
Shahar’s lip curled, looking rather contemptuous. “The Templars put no stock in liberty, Maria. We seek order, nothing more.”
“Order, or enslavement?” Maria demanded, standing firm as Shahar came toward her.
“You may call it whatever you like, my dear,” Shahar said, his tone darker and more menacing than it had previously been; Altaïr tensed, and signaled Alnesr to prepare himself, as well.
The two of them burst in through the doors just as Shahar was beginning to step towards Maria with malicious intent in his eyes.
“Apologies, Shahar, we let ourselves in,” Altaïr said, as he and Alnesr strode boldly into the room, himself proceeding by a few steps as the pair of them drew their swords.
“Assassins,” the Templar hissed, drawing his own sword; Maria jumped back from him and drew her own sword.
He could see Shalim and several of his guards hurrying into the room with them, and as he and Alnesr fell into step with Maria, Altaïr braced himself for combat once again.
The guards were easily dealt with, but the Templars themselves proved hardier and more skilled, as seemed to be the usual situation in those places he was forced to travel to when dealing with Templars. Shalim and Shahar also seemed to be as adept at working together as he and Alnesr, and Altaïr suspected that such a thing was probably for rather similar reasons. Still, in the end, their greater numbers and drive to win prevailed, leaving Shalim, Shahar, and the guards that they had called to them all dead at their feet.
Altaïr was particularly pleased at such a conclusion, and as the three of them made their careful way back out of the castle of St. Hilarion, he smiled briefly at Maria. He was not entirely certain that she would share in his appreciation, and so he made certain to smile when the back of her head was turned toward him. He also took note of the way her skill at climbing seemed to have increased, not only between this time and the last, but also from the time they had been initially scaling the walls of St. Hilarion and their efforts to descend once more.
It was yet another thing about the situation that he was starting to enjoy, knowing that Maria was willing to come with him and learn more of what the Assassins wished for the world.
Chapter 94: Growing together
Chapter Text
When the three of them finally made it back to the safehouse where the three of them had been staying while they aided the Cypriot Resistance, Altaïr allowed himself to breathe more easily when he climbed back down the side of the nearby building just slightly to the side of the one that he had climbed up originally. Taking the lead, and looking to the side as Maria fell into step just beside him, Altaïr soon found himself standing in the center of the trio he had once been leading. It was a rather interesting turn of events, Altaïr thought, but he’d little time to think about such a thing before Markos was addressing him.
“It’s happening, just as we wanted!” Markos exclaimed happily, reaching out to embrace him in comradeship; Altaïr smiled, though there was a part of him that still remained uneasy with things as they were, with the rumblings of Templar spies in the background of all his doings in Kyrenia and Cyprus as a whole. “The ports are emptying of Templar ships! Kyrenia will soon be free! And, after that, maybe the whole of Cyprus will soon follow!”
“Stay cautious,” he reminded both the Cypriot and himself, sobering even as he said such. “The Templars wouldn’t leave their Archive undefended, so it cannot be here,” he’d a moment’s thought to ask Maria about such, but then supposed that it was still likely she would refuse to speak of it; if out of a lingering sense of loyalty to de Sable, if nothing else.
“Most of the ships that left here were headed back to Limassol,” Markos said. “Could it be there?”
“I do not know, but I will make a thorough investigation in any case,” he said, allowing himself a smile wider than the one he had worn in any of these places; matters seemed to be proceeding more smoothly, and while he might have his doubts that everything was going to be proceeding with the same smoothness, Altaïr felt content for the moment. “Thank you, Markos. You have served your country well.”
“God speed to you three,” the Cypriot said, then turned squarely to Maria. “And, I am sorry I judged you so harshly, beforehand.”
“Think nothing of it,” Maria said, that same edge of fierce calm that he had heard so often when he had listened to her in the past. “I was a Templar, and I still agree with their motives, if not their means.”
“Come,” Alnesr said, before anyone else could say anything. “We should leave quickly if we’re to find a ship to travel with.”
“Thank you for your hospitality, Markos,” he bowed slightly to the man. “But, my brother is right: we truly should be leaving.”
The trio of them did not even bother with the streets this time, opting instead to travel over the rooftops between them and their present destination. Altaïr took note of the way Maria’s skill had improved almost literally by leaps and bounds, and was pleased that even when he was not actively attempting to teach, he could still manage to impart the wisdom that he had gained in such a way that it left a lasting impression.
Once the three of them finally made their way back out to the harbor, surrounded again by the creek and rustle of bobbing ships – the snap and crack of unfurling sails – Altaïr paused only briefly for a breath of sea air, still rather less than familiar to him after all this time, then signaled Alnesr and Maria to follow along with him as he moved. He’d spotted a likely candidate to take the three of them back to Limassol, and now all the three of them would need to do was board the ship, conceal themselves, and await their return to Limassol in at least a modicum of comfort. This he had explained to Maria, knowing that Alnesr’s learning – if not direct experience – in such an area would serve him as it always had.
Slipping inside under the very eyes of the Templars provisioning the ship for travel, Altaïr led the three of them to the hold where they perched atop the various crates that had already been stacked there. He was all the more pleased to note how well Maria seemed to be adapting to the rigors that life as an Assassin imposed upon those who had taken up the cause of the Brotherhood by choice, or even by birth as he and Alnesr both had. Clearly, the time she had spent under de Sable’s tutelage had borne fruit that would be useful for more than mere service under the Templars.
Settling himself into the state of relaxed alertness that had served him so well during the course of his many hunts for the targets that the Brotherhood had selected for him – and that he himself would soon be called upon to select for the Assassins that now served under him, Altaïr recalled after a moment’s thought – Altaïr felt the gentle rocking of the ship as bore the three of them and the Templars back to Limassol.
Soon enough, the journey had ended and the three of them were called upon to leave the ship and the harbor both without alerting the Templars to their presence now or then.
It was not such a simple thing, leading a group of three to move with stealth and silence when one of those three seemed more the sort to confront their enemies head-on while declaring their intent, but Maria learned quickly and the three of them were hence able to remain out of the hands of the Templars who would have only been too eager to take them in chains to some prison or other. If not kill him and Alnesr outright for being Assassins, and perhaps even Maria for being a traitor. Altaïr was just as happy to avoid any of those fates.
Climbing up the wall of a nearby building once the three of them were safely out from under the eyes of the Templars in Limassol’s own harbor, Altaïr paused for a moment to look down into the streets before he set off again. The Templars still seemed just as firmly in control as they had been when he had departed for Kyrenia; the populace seemed as resentful and beaten-down as they ever had been, and even as he continued on to a place were he might be more free to observe the layout of the city and hence find out just where the Resistance had moved to since he had departed this place, Altaïr resolved that he would make every possible effort to free them as he searched for the Templar Archive.
Making his way over to the side of a tall spire he had spotted in the middle-distance, rather familiar to him after all the time he had spent in Damascus and other cities of the Levant, Altaïr activated his second-sight and searched for the telltale soft blue glow of allies. He’d not thought to use the skill when he was working with the Cypriot Resistance as a part of it, but he knew now that it had been a mistake to neglect such a skill as he had done in the past.
He was not going to allow himself to make such a mistake in the future; more lives than his own depended on his caution.
Chapter 95: Traitor’s Tale
Chapter Text
Signaling Alnesr and Maria to follow him, once he had fully determined the location of the safehouse, Altaïr directed the pair of them over the rooftops and across the streets as he made for it. As he drew close enough to be able to make out the forms within the safehouse rather than simply the building itself, Altaïr again used his second-sight to determine if those within would be his enemies or not. All of those inside glowed a friendly blue, and so he let out a breath of relief as he descended down the side of a nearby building and then made his way inside.
“Assassins,” one of the Cypriots who had been attending to some manner of business behind the main counter said. “I apologize that Alexander was not here to meet you, but he was called away on business just this afternoon. For now, please, take some rest and make yourselves at home. It’s likely he will arrive tomorrow.”
“Thank you,” Altaïr said, making a mental note to use his second-sight to determine if it would truly be Alexander that he would be speaking to and not simply a Templar playing at being him. “Get some rest,” this he directed at Alnesr and Maria. “We’ll likely have a great deal to do come the morning.”
“Remember your own advice, brother,” Alnesr said, smiling gently at him. “We’re not the only ones likely to need sleep for what might be coming.”
“Thank you, brother,” he said, smiling in a slightly rueful fashion as he recognized just what the younger Assassin had seen to say such a thing; the thought of being the Master must have weighed upon him more than he truly saw.
Still, there was at least one thing he wished to have done before he slept, and while he fully understood that Alnesr would not be entirely pleased to know such if he managed to find out, he was determined to have it done before he forgot the thoughts he had been having during the course of these last few days. Settling himself down at a desk nearby the sleeping area, and returning the wry expression Alnesr gave him when his brother Assassin nodded that way, Altaïr turned back to the desk and laid out his journal atop it.
Opening to the first blank page he found, slightly down from the last entry he had made, Altaïr took up his quill once again and began to write:
I remember my moment of weakness, my confidence shaken by Al Mualim’s words. He, who had been like a father, was revealed to be my greatest enemy. Just the briefest flicker of doubt was all he needed to creep into my mind with this device, he set his right hand upon the Apple, musing again about it and the man in black. But I vanquished his phantoms, restored my self-confidence, and sent him from this world. And yet, now I find myself facing another conundrum: who is the man in black, and what might he intend?
Left with that question to ponder as he tried to settle himself down to sleep, Altaïr resolved that he would discover the answers to those questions.
~AC: BL~
When the next morning came, Altaïr rose with the sun and woke Alnesr so that the two of them could spar. He’d the feeling that the both of them would sooner than later have need of sharp skills and sharper blades if they were to survive what would clearly be coming. Maria joined them after only a short time spent observing how the pair of them fought, and he smiled slightly as she adapted herself to their rhythm and added a third side to their conflict.
Once their muscles and skills had been properly prepared for whatever else would come this day, Altaïr made his way over to the desk in the forefront of the building to find Alexander waiting for him. The Cypriot did not seem particularly pleased to see him.
“Stay back, traitor!” the man all but snarled as he approached. “You have betrayed the Resistance, and sold out our cause! Have you been Bouchart’s man, all this time?”
“I was about to ask the same of you, Alexander,” he said, after quickly mastering himself after the accusation that had been thrown at him; he might have deserved some of it, not having had the wit to question Barnabas until it was too late, but in light of what he had found out of Alexander he hardly thought the man was in a position to question him. “I overheard Bouchart mentioning your name. He delivered a package to you, did he not?”
“Yes: the head of poor Barnabas in a burlap sack!”
Altaïr felt chilled for a long moment; he’d not thought to ever be manipulated in the same way that Al Mualim had once done, and for much the same ends, it seemed. Making his way over to the burlap sack where it lay, already smelling the stink of what he had quickly recognized as rotting meat, Altaïr looked inside.
“This was not the man me and mine had dealings with in Kyrenia,” he said, not quite certain what he was to feel about such a thing; it was not as though he could have been expected to know the members of the Resistance by sight, but even within the privacy of his own mind the words sounded like an excuse.
“What?” Alexander exclaimed, looking as shaken as Altaïr had felt for those few moments before mastering himself.
“The real Barnabas had more than likely been murdered before we arrived,” he said, speculating aloud for both their benefit. “Replaced by a Templar agent, who did a great deal of damage before vanishing.”
“God help us,” Alexander muttered, composing himself after a moment’s loss of such. “The Templars have been equally brutal here: with Captains roaming the Market, the Ports, and the Cathedral square, arresting anyone they see fit to.”
“Don’t despair,” he said, pitching his tone to be calming. “Kyrenia has already shaken off the Templars; we will expel them from Limassol, too.”
“You’re right,” Alexander said, his resolve already looking more firm. “But, you and yours must be careful. Templar propaganda has turned some of my men against you, and others will still be wary.”
“Thank you for the warning,” he said, nodding as he made his way back out to speak with Alnesr once more.
Chapter 96: Captain’s trail
Chapter Text
It seemed as though they would soon be able to make at least some amends for the mistakes he had made in his handling of their contact with the Cypriot Resistance. Speaking briefly to Alnesr and Maria both, Altaïr called for his brother Assassin to follow him as the pair of them made their way back up to the rooftops over Cyprus once more.
“Good hunting, brother,” Alnesr said, as his brother Assassin turned and prepared to depart from the rooftop where the pair of them had alighted for the moment.
“To you as well, brother,” he said, drawing a small, brief smile from his junior, before the two of them parted to be about their work.
Making his way steadily back toward Limassol’s Marketplace, over the rooftops and across the gaps that stood between him and the Marketplace that was to be his first destination, Altaïr paused for a moment to deal with an archer that had the misfortune to be in his way as he was traveling. Leaping lightly down from the rooftops, just as he saw the Templar captain that patrolled in this particular area of Limassol, Altaïr swiftly ascended back to the rooftops and continued on his way.
He and Alnesr had already made plans to meet up at the Cathedral Square, while Alnesr himself dealt with matters at Limassol’s port, and so Altaïr turned his path to make for the meeting place that he and his brother Assassin had previously elected to meet when they had spoken atop the roof of the Resistance’s Limassol safehouse. Breathing more easily for the fact that he had completed the first of his and Alnesr’s tasks for the day, Altaïr took a moment to conceal himself within one of the rooftop gardens. Alnesr would be able to quickly spot him, using the second-sight that they both shared, and so the two of them had elected to meet up in this place.
~AC: BL~
Stalking his prey from the docks, Alnesr used his second-sight to determine just which of the ships carried the Templar captain that he was seeking. Flicking his eyes over the ships to either side of him within the expansive port, Alnesr was soon able to locate the man. Now, all that remained was to make his way out onto the boat where the Templar had secluded himself so that he could come to grips with the man for the first and final time. Turning his path away from the Templar’s boat, after having marked it with his second-sight, Alnesr blended neatly back into the crowds moving all along the docks and the waterside.
Departing once more from the crowds of citizens going about their daily business, Alnesr waited a moment for a break in the crowds so that he could remain unseen, and then made his way up the side of a building so that he could leap into the rigging of a nearby ship. Swiftly making his way back over the ships, evading the gaze of those few on the docks who thought to look up into the rigging where he was, Alnesr made his way back to the ship that he had marked in his second-sight.
Waiting for a simple lapse of attention from the sailors tending the cargo within this vessel, Alnesr acted as soon as he managed to spot such. The death of the captain threw those around him into disarray just long enough for him to escape with the deaths of only a small number of sailors. Blending swiftly back into the busy crowds, Alnesr broke away once more and made his way back to the buildings. Breaking from the crowds once more, Alnesr regained the rooftops and began to make his way to Limassol’s Cathedral Square.
He was due to meet Altaïr there, as the two of them had agreed upon just before they had parted company for the morning.
Making his way back over the rooftops that stood between him and the Cathedral square of Limassol, Alnesr wondered just who they could ultimately trust within the Resistance. Altaïr had told him of the trouble that the Templars had stirred up all about the Resistance – the agents that they had employed to discredit the Assassins in the eyes of the Cypriots – and Alnesr found himself annoyed by the prospect. He knew that the Templars were determined to bring down the Brotherhood by any means that they could manage, yes, but he still found himself irrationally annoyed by such a thing.
Setting those thoughts aside once more, Alnesr sighed and continued on his way back into the city.
Alighting on a rooftop nearer the square, Alnesr searched by quadrants for his mentor and brother Assassin. Soon enough, he had managed to locate Altaïr, and so moved quickly so that they could meet up once more. Meeting atop the buildings surrounding the Cathedral Square, he and Altaïr spoke briefly about their respective experiences while they had been hunting for the two Templar captains. They also mutually decided that the pair of them would each take half of the square; each searching it for signs of the last Captain’s presence.
~AC: BL~
Splitting off from Alnesr as the pair of them began searching the grounds of Limassol’s Cathedral Square, Altaïr allowed himself to feel a brief swell of pride for the skill that his brother Assassin had demonstrated during his own hunt for the Templar captain at Limassol’s port. Setting those thoughts aside, Altaïr returned his attention to his own hunt for the last of the three Templar captains in this area.
Searching for larger gatherings of Templars, knowing that the Captain was far more likely than not to have extra guards and soldiers around him while he went about his own work, Altaïr quickly found himself tailing a group of soldiers making their way quickly and with purpose through the streets and alleys of the Square. He was rather pleased to note that they were indeed making their way toward a meeting with their captain.
Descending swiftly from the rooftop he’d alighted on, Altaïr killed all of the gathered Templars as quickly and smoothly as he could manage.
Rising from the pile of bodies that he had left behind him, Altaïr returned to the rooftops so that he could meet up with Alnesr, and so that the pair of them could return to the Resistance’s safehouse to speak with Alexander. They would both need to know more about the situation as it developed, in order to make plans for what actions they would need to take next.
Perhaps he would also speak with Maria, to see if she could shed any light on what the Templars might be planning, herself.
Perched atop the rooftops for a moment, Altaïr searched for his brother Assassin, and swiftly found that Alnesr was making his own way closer. Smiling slightly, Altaïr turned his own path so that it would intersect with that of his brother Assassin. The two of them met up with each other once again, speaking briefly about what they had seen and done while they were making their own ways through the Cathedral Square.
Hearing of Alnesr’s own dealing with the Templar soldiers that had once roamed the streets of the Cathedral Square, Altaïr spoke in turn of his own encounter with the Templar captain in this area. Side-by-side once more, he and Alnesr made their way back to Limassol’s Port. Alnesr had said that the captain the Templars had employed had seemed to him rather more of a pirate than a proper sailor, and now Altaïr was curious to know what that meant.
He’d not thought that the ideals that the Templars espoused would have countenanced dealing with those kinds of people, but then all of those he had dealt with had seemed all too willing to compromise their stated ideals for material gain of one sort or another.
So, as he and Alnesr made their way back to Limassol’s port, Altaïr found himself growing increasingly curious about what the ultimate result of their actions in this place would be. They had at least made some form of progress in routing the Templars in this area, but there was clearly more for the pair of them – not knowing Maria’s present feelings, he couldn’t speak to her willingness – to do before they would be able to call this latest task of theirs complete.
Returning to Limassol’s docks once more, he and Alnesr had a brief discussion as to what each of them would do during this latest task of theirs. Alnesr volunteered to scout the docks and see to the disposal of any remaining Templar guards or soldiers, while Altaïr himself would interrogate the Port master. True, he did have the greater experience in such an area, but after this was finished, Altaïr made up his mind to begin teaching his brother Assassin his means and methods of interrogation.
Chapter 97: Stalking horse
Chapter Text
Making his way back through Limassol’s Port, Altaïr remained on guard for those who might seek to challenge him. Not all of them would be Templars, after all; Alexander had previously informed him that some of those working within and beside the Resistance had been deceived by the propaganda that called him a traitor to the cause. And, beyond that, there were still those who had no true idea of the struggle between the Assassins and Templars, and would simply seek to hinder him because they were paid to do so.
It was this last group that Altaïr did not relish fighting in the least; those who had no stake in this war of theirs, in his view, should not be in danger of losing their lives in it. Still, he knew better than most that the would that they all lived in was far from ideal.
Scanning the crowds of citizens hurrying along about their business, he heard the low, rumbling voice of a man speaking to someone or other.
“I’d honestly rather be out at sea than idling away in this dump,” the man speaking groused. “You know where I can find some entertainment, eh?”
“Go away,” a nearby man, this one wearing red, and a Templar cross, said in a tone of dismissive contempt.
The trio split up after that, and Altaïr followed the man in blue robes and turban. He was clearly the man Altaïr would need to interrogate, and so he would need to follow the man without being seen. Smiling slightly, Altaïr continued on his way; he’d not had the need to perform an interrogation in some time.
Following the man in red on his rounds through the city, Altaïr found himself making his way back into sight of Limassol’s marketplace once more. He thought it rather strange, that a man who had been assigned to the Docks would go so far away from the place where he had been assigned without some overriding reason. Making his way back up to the rooftops once more, Altaïr sought out the man once more from his new vantagepoint.
Once he had managed to catch up with the man, Altaïr descended as swiftly as he could manage. Silently inserting himself into the back of the group the man was traveling with, Altaïr followed him until he had departed their company, then struck him from behind with a hard punch. Beating the man down until he had agreed to cooperate, Altaïr stood back.
“I have a message for Armand Bouchart. Has he come through this port recently?” Altaïr demanded.
“I couldn’t say,” the man replied, wincing slightly as he slowly lowered his arms. “But, he’d do well to avoid this place. We had some awful murders here last night.”
“Who was killed? Templars?” he asked, hoping that such would be the case; he’d no desire to see more innocents involved in wars beyond their ken.
“No,” the Port master said, shaking his head sadly. “A couple of my men working the docks; cut down where they stood. It was so dark, nobody saw a thing.”
“Who was on duty that night?” he asked, wondering just what these new developments would come to, in the end.
“A goddamned Templar Sergeant,” the Port master snarled. “But you won’t find him here, if you’re looking.”
“I am,” he said, knowing now that this man, stubborn though he may have been, was not ultimately his enemy.
“He’s over by the Cathedral today,” the Port master said, his tone distinctly unimpressed. “Praying for his own soul, I hope.”
“Thank you for your time, my friend,” he said. “My Brother and I will see to this man.”
“Good luck to you both,” the Port master said, a wry smile on his face. “I hope you give him more than what you gave me.”
“I certainly will,” he replied, turning to leave the man behind.
He would need to speak with Alnesr about the new information he had gathered from the Port master, so that they could make further plans.
Ascending once more onto the rooftops at the edges of Limassol’s port, Altaïr searched for his brother Assassin. Spotting Alnesr’s agile, white-robed form as the younger Assassin darted down on another unsuspecting Templar soldier, Altaïr smiled softly as he hurried to catch up to the younger Assassin before he could draw too far away. Once the pair of them had drawn close enough to be able to speak once more, Altaïr detailed just what it was that he had learned for Alnesr’s benefit.
“It seems as though our presence will be a deterrent for more than just the Templars,” Alnesr said pensively.
“True enough,” he allowed, nodding. “Come; we’ll find our quarry back in the Cathedral Square.”
“Of course, brother,” Alnesr said, nodding and following his lead back down the side of the building and into the crowds of Limassol’s Port once more.
Leaving behind the wafting scents drifting in from the Marketplace’s many stalls for the scents of wood, water, tar, and pitch, Altaïr proceeded his brother Assassin on their way to the path that would return them once again to Limassol’s Cathedral Square. He’d not yet seen evidence of the Templar propaganda that was said to have turned the Cypriots against him and his, but all the same he had determined to keep an eye open for any signs of such. He’d no wish to be caught by surprise when he could avoid it.
Traveling over the rooftops on their way back into Limassol’s Cathedral Square, Altaïr found himself wondering once again just what Maria had gotten herself up to while the pair of them were gone; he knew that he could not afford to allow himself to become distracted by such thoughts, and so he put them aside to be examined later.
Chapter 98: The hunt and the hunters
Chapter Text
Once the pair of them had returned to Limassol’s Cathedral Square, Altaïr proceeded Alnesr down from the rooftops so that they would be able to track this Templar sergeant more easily. Pausing for a moment to activate his second-sight, Altaïr searched the crowds of citizens rendered colorless by the strange un-light that was only visible to him when he allowed himself to see in such a manner. Moving more quickly through the crowds, now that he was able to more easily dismiss those who would hold no interest for him, Altaïr was able to quickly spot the one of them that did.
“Alnesr, come; I’ve found him,” he said, looking back over his left shoulder.
“Yes, I see him, too,” his brother Assassin said, nodding.
“Follow along, this time, and take note of how I handle this,” he advised. “You might very well have need of these skills yourself, someday.”
“As you say, brother.”
Nodding with some sense of satisfaction as Alnesr fell into step behind him once more, Altaïr prepared himself once more to act as the teacher and mentor that he would need to learn once more to be, if he was to properly perform his new duties as Master of the Syrian Brotherhood.
Once he’d managed to catch up to the Templar sergeant he and Alnesr had managed to locate so simply – he did not often relish using his second-sight, for fear that he ease of it was more likely than not to make him complacent – Altaïr glanced back briefly at his brother Assassin, smiling at the expression of concentration he saw on Alnesr’s face, and moved forward to confront the Templar sergeant. It was time they found out what a man like that would know.
His first blow was blocked by the sword of one of the Templar’s fellow Knights, and just that simply Altaïr found himself dealing with a rather completely different situation than the one he had been mentally preparing for. Alnesr was, as always, swift to join him in battle, and together the pair of them were able to swiftly dispatch the Templar Knights that stood between them and the sergeant that they had both come to this place for in the first place.
“You cower like a man wracked with a guilty conscience,” he snapped, not feeling particularly charitable toward one who had upset the usual procedure for interrogations so completely; yes, he knew that such a thing was a natural consequence of fighting those who had minds of their own, but knowing such was not enough to keep Altaïr from feeling as he did.
He let the feeling pass; now was hardly the time for outbursts.
“Your kind is getting desperate, Assassin,” the Templar said, smiling up at him in a way that Altaïr did not like at all. “Attacking us blindly, grasping for answers.”
“You let Bouchart slip through the ports last night, and murdered two good men in the process,” Altaïr said, reining in his temper with both hands; men like this were the worst of all, as they had actually managed to convince themselves that they acted for the good of those they aimed to enslave.
“That wasn’t my work,” the Templar sergeant said, his tome sounding as though he found the very idea humorous. “I just patrol there; go pester Demetris, he practically owns those ports.”
“Demetris?” he echoed. “A wealthy man, I suppose…”
“Quite!” the Templar grinned up at him with bloodstained teeth, briefly prompting Altaïr to grind his own. “A debouched merchant and gluttonous worm, but he’s been a useful ally in this operation.”
Sickened by what he had heard, though Altaïr supposed that he truly should not have expected better from a Templar, Altaïr unhesitatingly ended the life of the Templar sergeant and let him fall to the ground. Alnesr’s soft hand on his right arm drew his thoughts back to the present where they properly belonged, and he turned to smile at his brother Assassin.
“This is an important lesson for you to learn, Alnesr, though not the one I had first intended to teach you,” he said, once the two of them had left the dead Templars behind them, crouching safely in a rooftop garden out of sight of the citizens on the streets and those few guards on the rooftops. “Not every plan you make goes as well as you might want it.”
“Yes, I have come to realize that myself, during the course of my own work for the Brotherhood,” Alnesr said, his tone sounding more wry than Altaïr had ever heard from the younger Assassin in all the time they had worked together.
It was a rather odd thing to hear, all told, but Altaïr chose to think of it as a sign of Alnesr’s increasing level of comfort in his own skin. His brother Assassin had always seemed more like an adult wearing a child’s skin, ever since the day Abbas had tried to kill him. At least, when he had gathered himself enough to be able to speak again. Altaïr still wondered, sometimes, what course his brother Assassin’s life would have taken if he and Abbas had not had their falling-out.
Still, he did not think himself wrong for sharing the truth of Ahmad’s fate with Abbas; it was only bitter denial that had led Abbas to reject such a thing, and it was more than likely to have been mere stubbornness that drove his actions since that day.
Putting aside those thoughts, important though they might have felt to him, Altaïr turned to confer with Alnesr again. The both of them agreed that the place they were most likely to find a merchant such as Demetris was in Limassol’s Marketplace, and so that was where the pair of them would go to first, before they widened their search.
Rising from his crouch, hidden within the rooftop garden and safely out of sight of any patrolling guards they would have otherwise been required to deal with, Altaïr moved in concert with Alnesr as the pair of them began making their way back towards the cheerfully wafting scents and sounds of Limassol’s Marketplace. He’d more than his fill of dealing with corrupted merchants – those that had given into either the Templars or their own desires – but, all the same, this was one more service he could perform on behalf of those who would not be able to protect themselves from the depredations of those who would otherwise seek to dominate them. His own desires were less than important, in the face of what services he could render to those under the protection of the Brotherhood.
Looking down on the varied stalls of Limassol’s Marketplace for yet another time, Altaïr gave a nod to Alnesr and the two of them descended back into the streets once more. Blending into the sparse crowd making their varied ways among the stalls for their varied reasons, Altaïr considered for a long moment whether or not to use his second-sight to find the merchant they were searching for. One the one hand, he did not wish to become overly dependant on the sense, however he also wished to have done with this task as soon as he could manage.
Above all other concerns, he needed to speak to Alexander about what he and Alnesr had discovered as soon as he could manage.
Pausing a moment to concentrate, Altaïr saw the world washed out into the soft light-and-shadow that composed his second-sight, revealing and reflecting the motives of those around him. Beside him, just to his right, he saw Alnesr’s eyes dart briefly to him, before his brother Assassin narrowed his own eyes in brief concentration. Nodding with some small sense of satisfaction that his brother Assassin had learned well enough to anticipate the need for such a thing without the two of them having to discus it.
He was fully aware that such a thing was, like as not, a product of their time spent together, but it was for that reason that he could not deny its utility.
Descending back to the streets, once he had spotted a man who shone with the golden light of those who carried information that would aid him in the completion of this newest – and, for the moment, last – mission that he and Alnesr would undertake before returning to the Resistance’s safehouse to report their findings to Alexander, Altaïr found himself confronted by the guards that the merchant had employed. Taking up the poise of a scholar before the men had drawn close enough to truly present a threat to him and Alnesr where they stood, Altaïr sighed inwardly as he realized that the man he had seen was inside the building rather than outside as he’d initially thought.
Moving carefully out of sight of the guards that had been gathered before the front entrance of the building, Altaïr led Alnesr around to the back, and the pair of them entered swiftly through an upper window. Following the sound of a man’s voice back toward the front of the building, and Altaïr paused for a moment. If the man they were about to confront called for his guards, it was likely to cause far more trouble than the two of them would be able to handle easily. It was also more than likely to result in the death of the very man he’d an interest in.
So, briefly turning back to Alnesr to speak with his brother Assassin about that matter, in low tones that wouldn’t carry to Demetris where he waited below, he posed the idea. Alnesr agreed with him easily, and went back out through a nearby window to deal with the guards that the pair of them had passed by on their way inside. Breathing more easily, knowing that Alnesr would be able to handle himself against the guards stationed before the building, Altaïr continued deeper.
The sound of a man’s voice, speaking to other people of his acquaintance, drew Altaïr forward until he was looking down on an elderly man seated in the middle of a pair of concubines. Pausing for a few moments, to see what the man he was observing might do next, Altaïr settled himself to wait for Alnesr to return. The pair of them together would doubtless be able to deal with anything this man thought to bring to bear against them; in addition to that, of course, was the simple fact that he’d long since learned that one was always better served bringing along a trusted companion when one was heading into an unknown situation.
It didn’t take much more than a few, long moments for Alnesr to return, the scent of blood still lingering on his robes to anyone who had the training to discern it.
Chapter 99: Truth
Chapter Text
Turning his eyes back to the man who was most likely to be Demetris himself – he acted the part well enough – Altaïr leaped lightly down from the rafters. The concubines who had been the focus of the man’s attention all scattered, some of them screaming at the sight of the pair of Assassins.
“This isn’t a public house, for God’s sake! Remove yourselves, paupers, before I call the guards!”
“We’re here on business, Demetris,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he and Alnesr closed with the man. “We’re looking for one of your clients. A killer.”
Alnesr folded his arms across his chest, clearly attempting to appear more imposing than his still-short stature would have otherwise been. Although, Altaïr rather thought that his brother Assassin’s uncanny, yellow eyes made up for quite a bit.
“What makes you think I know where to find such a man?” Demetris demanded, his eyes flicking briefly to Alnesr where he stood. “I deal in textiles, not cutthroats.”
“The, what is to be made of the rumor that Bouchart hired you to sneak him through the ports this morning?” he returned, curious to know just what this man’s answer would be.
“You- you’re crazy! I would never work with such a vile man as Bouchart, no matter how much money he offered!” Demetris shouted vehemently.
Altaïr was not entirely certain that he should trust the word of the man before him, and yet it had been a Templar who had directed him to this man. It was entirely possible that, much as he disliked the thought, that he and Alnesr had been deceived once more. However, the next words out of the man’s mouth put paid to that supposition.
Before either he or Alnesr could act on what they had just heard, Demetris collapsed to the ground. The knife that had been buried up to its hilt in the portly man’s back was revealed then, and Altaïr looked back down along the weapon’s trajectory to determine if he could find the man responsible for murdering Demetris. He found himself instinctively activating his second-sight; he found an enemy sitting atop the roof, crouched just outside the large opening in the roof that Altaïr had briefly taken note of when he and Alnesr had made their way into the building.
As he and his brother Assassin gave chase to the man, following him for a few, long moments as he made his way to some destination that Altaïr found himself particularly curious about, Altaïr had the sudden, unpleasant feeling that he was being led into a trap of one sort or another. Or, at the very least, being distracted from an important matter. Alighting on a rooftop, he called for Alnesr to halt as well.
“What troubles you, brother?”
“I begin to think that we should not be so swift to follow that man,” he said, seeing the confusion on Alnesr’s face and knowing that he himself would have wanted an explanation if their positions had been reversed. “He seemed rather too eager to lead us astray.”
“Perhaps,” his brother Assassin said, looking out in the direction that the man they had previously been chasing had departed in. “Still, do you think it’s truly prudent to allow this man to escape uncontested? I could pursue him, myself.”
He still felt uneasy about the prospect, but this was one of the few times that Alnesr had been willing to suggest something to him without the uncertainty that had seemed to plague him all the stronger since his interactions with the Apple. And, in particular, the revelation of the man in black and the fact that Alnesr had seemed so blind to his presence. Altaïr did not wish to rob his brother Assassin of that certainty, and yet he could not deny the unease he still felt.
“If you feel it necessary to find out what that man was dispatched for, you have my leave to do so,” he said.
It was not as though his brother Assassin needed such a thing, considering his present rank, but Altaïr had come to realize that Alnesr seemed most comfortable when operating under his guidance. It was a habit that he would clearly have to work at breaking, if the younger Assassin were to be expected to take an Apprentice of his own in turn, but all of those concerns were for later. At present, more pressing concerns were at hand.
“I thank you for your confidence, brother,” Alnesr said, smiling in gentle gratitude to him, before turning to leave, following the same rout his quarry had taken over the rooftops of Limassol.
“Good hunting, brother,” he muttered, forcing himself back to his feet so that he could begin making his own way back to the safehouse that the Resistance maintained in this area.
The building itself was not difficult to find, at least when one was traversing the rooftops and hand been there previously, and so Altaïr made good time on his way back. The unease that he had been feeling had not been diminished in any real way by the decreasing distance, and so it was that he returned to the safehouse almost expecting something to have gone wrong. What he found there did not serve to allay his suspicions.
If anything, it only served to worsen them.
He found that the safehouse he was standing in had been completely deserted by the time he had made his way inside once more, and Altaïr did not like the conclusions that he was drawing in light of such an occurrence. However, with Templar agents at large in the city around him, and the clear knowledge that they had already managed to infiltrate the Resistance before, Altaïr could no more deny the likelihood of another infiltrator than he could stop himself from wondering at Alnesr’s progress in tracking Demetris’ killer.
The sight of a scrap of paper laying atop a barrel on the far side of the room, what turned out to be a note from Alexander, asking that the two of them meet in the courtyard of the nearby castle, did nothing to dissuade his suspicions. If anything, finding the safehouse empty only served to heighten them all the more. Still, he knew that he would not be able to learn anything if he did not act.
And so Altaïr made his way back out of the safehouse, determined to find out just what it was that Alexander – or else, the Templar agent who had been playing that selfsame part – wanted with him at Limassol Castle.
When he had managed to make his way back to that place, Altaïr paused for a moment to call up his second-sight once more. While it was true that he did not relish the thought of becoming overly dependant on even such a marvelous sense as the second-sight he had awakened when he was younger even than Alnesr when the pair of them had been given to each other as Master and Apprentice, neither did he enjoy the thought of such a talent going to waste simply because he feared becoming too dependant upon it.
When he finally made it into the courtyard of Limassol Castle, Altaïr found himself facing an empty courtyard.
His unease only grew, as he continued on his way deeper into the courtyard. The lack of guards in the courtyard and archers on the ramparts of the castle whose shadow he was currently standing in only served to make his unease all the more acute. As he continued deeper into the empty courtyard, the sight of Alexander’s lifeless body was, while not remotely a surprise considering what he had come to expect from this day of all days, still served as a grim reminder that his trials were not yet done.
Sparing a thought for Alnesr, hoping that his brother Assassin was holding his own against whatever it was that he might have been facing during his pursuit of Demetris’ killer, Altaïr continued forward.
Crouching next to Alexander’s body – the body that he could not help but to identify as the leader of this cell of the Cypriots’ Resistance, given all that he had seen in merely the past day – Altaïr turned the corpse onto its back. A single glimpse of the corpse’s face was all Altaïr needed to confirm his suppositions, and Altaïr closed his eyes in brief remembrance. He’d not managed to do so much good here in Cyprus at all, and could have easily been said to have done more harm than good by coming out this way.
Still, it was his duty as a member of the Brotherhood – to say nothing of the fact that he was now Mentor of the Levantine Assassins – to challenge the oppression of the common citizens whenever he bore witness to such a thing occurring.
“A friend of yours?” a voice called out from behind him.
Turning swiftly, Altaïr found himself dazzled by the sun for a long moment, before he raised his left arm to block the light and was hence able to see more of the man standing on a balcony above him. The man wore white robes emblazoned with a Templar cross, already giving Altaïr reason to dislike him, and stood with legs apart as though to declaim himself some kind of conquering hero.
“You,” he snapped, narrowing his eyes at the man, even as he tensed himself for the combat that was certain to be coming; his personal feelings about this man aside, Altaïr had never been a friend to Templars. “I didn’t catch your name.”
“What did I tell you and your boy back in Kyrenia?” the spy asked, and Altaïr could nearly hear the mocking smirk in his very tone. “Barnabas, wasn’t it?” the spy made a brief show of looking about for someone, and Altaïr had a moment of relief that – whenever this man had planned – Alnesr would at the very least be away from it. “By the by, where is your boy? Has he gotten lost, perchance?”
Chapter 100: The Apple’s power
Chapter Text
Before any other words could be exchanged between the pair of them, Altaïr began to hear the rising shouts of a crowd beginning to gather around him, and it was then that he came to fully realize how thoroughly the spy before him had managed to lay his trap. The citizens now gathering around him had begun to call for his head in earnest, and as Altaïr searched for a way to extricate himself from his current situation without attacking the citizens around him – an action that would have shattered their faith in both the Brotherhood and the Cypriot Resistance itself – he seized upon the Apple itself.
He hesitated for a long moment, not wishing to enthrall the minds of the citizens around him – and, beyond that, not knowing what kind of effect it would have on Alnesr, even so far away as he was – but, in the end, he knew that he would not be able to avoid bloodshed if he did not act. And so, gathering himself in the same way that he’d done before diving into the Apple to pull Alnesr free of it, Altaïr held the item aloft.
Even as he did so, however, Altaïr made a personal vow that he would never use the Apple for such a thing again.
Diaphanous light spilled out of the Apple, spreading over the crowd almost as though it were a liquid, and the crowd as a whole seemed to stop in its collective tracks.
“Armand Bouchart is the man responsible for your misery,” he said, watching the expressions of the people around him, even as they were calmed under the unnatural influence of the Apple. “He is the one who hired this man to poison the Resistance against itself. Go from this place, and rally your men. Cyprus will soon be yours once again.”
Even saying that much was an effort for him, though not in the way that another might have thought had they been watching. Commanding the attention of these people was a terribly easy thing, with the Apple in his hands and a crowd of citizens before him, but Altaïr knew his duty as a member of the Brotherhood. Pulling his mind free from the Apple with some effort, watching as the citizens who had once been so misguidedly eager to take his life slowly turned away and began making their way back out into the city.
For a long moment, Altaïr stared down at the Apple, resting easily in his hands. The sphere seemed almost too small, for all that it could cause to happen, and all the power that it clearly exerted over the minds of men. To say nothing of the man in black, or what always seemed to happen to Alnesr when he came into contact with the artifact.
“Quite a toy you have there,” the spy said, drawing his attention back to where the man stood on the balcony, even as Altaïr tucked the Apple safely away. “Mind if I borrow it?”
Turning to confront the spy, with a personal vow that the Apple would only leave his possession if he died in this battle, Altaïr prepared himself for combat. However, just as the spy was preparing to leap down from the balcony he had been standing upon, a sword pierced his chest from behind. Altaïr watched, in curiosity and hopeful anticipation, as the still-bleeding corpse of the spy fell to the ground. Behind where the man had been standing, now revealed to him, was the familiar form of Maria.
About to call out in askance as to where Alnesr might have been, he saw his brother Assassin making his own way over the ramparts and onto the balcony where Maria stood. It was clear that the both of them had been through a fight of their own, but Altaïr was simply pleased that neither one of them appeared injured, or overly troubled.
“There, now you see what manner of weapon the Apple could prove to be, in the wrong hands,” this he directed at Maria, as she stood atop the balcony and Alnesr leaped lightly down.
“I don’t know that I’d call yours the right hands,” Maria returned, her eyes having briefly followed Alnesr as he moved.
“No, you’re right,” he admitted; it was not a safe thing, toying with the Apple as he had, even though he’d acted to spare the lives of the citizens all about him. “I will destroy it, or else find a way to hide it. Until Alnesr and I have found the archive, I can’t say.”
“Well, look no further,” Maria said, sweeping her right arm wide to indicate the large space they were all inside. “You’re standing on it.”
The sounds of running feet, followed quickly by the familiar shouts of Templar soldiers, drew his attention to the doors just before they were thrown open once again. The trio burst in, and Altaïr heard the sound of Alnesr unsheathing his own blade as the pair of them turned to confront the men now standing before them. Maria called something from up above, but Altaïr found that he could not pay attention to such a thing at the moment.
Once he and Alnesr had dealt with the last of the three who had attempted to stand against them, Altaïr turned his eyes back to where Maria had been standing. He found her staring down at the pair of them with a distinctly unimpressed expression.
“If the two of you are quite finished, we might be able to come to the real reason the pair of you came to this place.”
“Of course, Maria,” he said, permitting himself a small smile, as he was far enough from her sight that she was not likely to be able to make out his every expression.
There was a certain, satisfied finality to the way Maria nodded after he’d spoken, and as he and Alnesr climbed and leaped up and over the balcony and then over the ramparts themselves, Altaïr wondered just what it was that the three of them would ultimately find when they reached the end of the path they were currently on. Reaching the door at the end of the hallway they currently stood in, Altaïr watched as Maria stepped forward to push it open.
Chapter 101: Troubling thoughts
Chapter Text
Once the three of them had made it through, Altaïr smiling slightly as Maria took up a position at the forefront of their triangle-formation, he heard the doors they had just come through slamming closed behind them. As they began descending the staircase that spiraled down into the dark depths, torches casting only flickering, insubstantial light on the Templar crosses all around them, Altaïr took note of the state of the building.
There were rather a great deal of gaps that they needed to leap across, and beyond that the stonework and mortar looked to be crumbling away in places. It would have been clear to anyone who took the time to observe the state of the building they were all moving through would likely have come to the erroneous conclusion that it was entirely abandoned. It was a useful ruse, disguising a place that was truly important as no more than a deserted ruin, but he doubted that such a thing could be managed in the long run.
At the very least, the structural integrity of the building was likely to give out sooner than later, necessitating a move.
Still, such a consideration might have very well made this place all the more attractive to the Templars; he did not know their thoughts, and was no longer so arrogant as to claim to be able to discern them from such small things as he was observing while their trio had been pressing ever deeper into this particular stronghold. Spreading out once the three of them had reached a wide chamber whose floor was scattered with sand, Altaïr made to search for the guards who would doubtless be present in such a place as this.
Maria was the one who spotted them, in the end, and the two men died in a hail of thrown knives from him and Alnesr.
The place where the three of them stood, for just a moment before they all began to move forward again, seemed far more open and airy than he would have previously expected of a place where the Templars had chosen to shelter even a part of their holdings. Perhaps such had been the point, but Altaïr could not help wondering just which of them had been the one to suggest such a place. And also, what reception the idea had gotten from his brothers-in-arms.
Neither of those two musings were in any way relevant to his current task, however, and so Altaïr put them aside as he continued on his way down, holding his place on Maria’s right.
A glance at Alnesr let him know that his brother Assassin was also preparing himself for the battle that they were about to undertake, against the leader of the Templar contingent in this place at last, and he felt both pride and sorrow at the thought of what he would soon be doing. It was something he held in common with Al Mualim… or, perhaps the traitor had been lying, in an effort to off-balance him so he would not turn the full skill he had learned during his life on him. Forcing those thoughts aside, Altaïr turned his thoughts toward Bouchart once more.
Looking forward once more, Altaïr saw that the three of them were about to pass under a large arch that had been decorated with a Templar cross at the apex. Turning his eyes back to the path before their trio, he saw that they were about to step into a large chamber, what looked like some kind of ceremonial area. The chamber itself was ringed with stone pillars, and Bouchart was standing in the center of it, looking up at them with clear disapproval.
“Witless Emperor Comnenus,” Bouchart snapped, his tone full of contempt. “He was a fool, but he was our fool. For almost a decade, we operated without interference on this island. Our Archive was the best-kept secret on Cyprus. Unfortunately, even the best-laid plans were not immune to Issac’s idiocy.”
For almost a decade, Altaïr reflected, narrowing his eyes and taking a step forward. “He angered King Richard and brought the English a little too close for comfort. Is that it? Purchasing what you already controlled?”
“And look where that got us,” Bouchart confirmed, his tone one of controlled fury. “Ever since you and yours turned up and started sticking your noses into too many dark corners, the Archive has not been safe.”
“I wish I could say I’m sorry, but I tend to get what I want,” he said, projecting the bravado he didn’t feel in his tone; there was something wrong… something he’d not yet seen, but something that was present before him.
“Oh, not this time, Assassins,” Bouchart said, wearing a fierce grin on his face. “Not now. Our little detour to Kyrenia gave us just enough time to dismantle the Archive and move it.”
Of course, he mused, growling deep in his throat; it wasn’t a meager Archive that he and his had been making their way through, no. Indeed, it was the paltry, unwanted remains of a much larger showing. Annoyed with himself, that he hadn’t thought to examine the motives of the Templars, or at least to dispatch some of his fellow Assassins within Cyprus to monitor their activities. “You weren’t shipping artifacts to Cyprus, you were shipping them out.”
“Exactly,” Bouchart said, and Altaïr narrowed his eyes at the man’s nod. “However, not everything must be taken,” Altaïr narrowed his eyes all the more, as Bouchart smiled thinly at them. “You and the traitor may stay here, and I will take the child and the Apple back to my Order.”
“Take me, will you?” he heard Alnesr mutter, and smiled thinly himself.
Chapter 102: Armand Bouchart
Chapter Text
Bouchart leaped forward, into the newly-drawn swords of himself, Maria, and Alnesr as they all stepped forward to meet his charge. Breathing as deeply and steadily as he could manage during the course of the battle they were all participating in, Altaïr fell almost naturally into the triangular formation that had formed around Bouchart as the three of them continued to battle. Bouchart seemed to have no clear idea of what to do, now that he was surrounded and being slowly, relentlessly picked apart by the trio surrounding him.
Smiling slightly as Bouchart began to flag at last, the man bleeding and sweating and flailing at whichever one of them he was capable of reaching, Altaïr flowed into another slice just as Alnesr’s and Maria’s own swords bit deep into the flesh of the Templar they had surrounded and drove him down to the ground at last. Running the Templar through at the same moment as his compatriots, he stepped back and pulled out his sword as Bouchart collapsed bonelessly to the ground.
It was with some sense of satisfaction that he watched the Templar fall, but Altaïr pushed that aside and focused on what the Templar seemed to want to say to him.
“You are, a credit to your Creed…” the dying Templar gasped.
“And you have strayed from yours,” he said; Altaïr found that he could actually feel pity for this man, even if only at the last.
“Not strayed,” Bouchart wheezed. “Expanded. The world is more complicated than most people dare to admit. And if you, Assassin… if you and your kind knew more than how to murder, you might understand this.”
“Save your lectures on morality, Armand,” Maria snapped, before he could say anything. “We both know that you were never one to follow them.”
“Ah,” Bouchart smiled tiredly, as he continued to bleed out upon the stones. “Is that, then, why you chose to betray us?”
Maria scoffed, but gave no answer to the Templar’s question. Altaïr suspected that he knew the answer where Bouchart did not, but he was not about to say a word about that, either.
“You may die, knowing that I will not allow the Apple of Eden to fall into any hands but my own,” he said, looking down upon the man.
“Keep it close,” Bouchart said, with an ironic smile. “You will come to the came conclusions we did… in time…”
Bouchart’s eyes fell closed, and the man died with that same, ironic smile on his face. Altaïr sighed, but he had little time to gather himself, before he heard the sharp retort of cannon fire and was forced to step quickly out of the way of a sudden fall of broken stone and other debris. It seemed as though the Templars would not be satisfied with merely sending one of their own to kill him, instead they were shelling the building in an effort to see that none of them escaped from the building at all.
Maria took the lead again, owing to the fact that she was the most likely to know a faster way out than attempting to retrace their steps through the crumbling maze that the building was swiftly becoming.
Soon enough, with no more than a few close calls involving falling stones and other debris, the three of them made it out into the open air and bright light of Limassol’s port. Breathing deeply, he lay down on the sidewalk and tried his best to catch his breath, even as the Templars continued to shell the castle that had once held the Templars’ Archive. Closing his eyes slightly, Altaïr looked over at Alnesr and Maria where they lay.
Chapter 103: Maria’s choice
Chapter Text
“Are the two of you all right?” he asked, turning slightly so that he would be able to face his brother Assassin and the woman he could now freely admit that he was coming to care for.
He received weary confirmations from the pair of them, and sighed in relief. Laying back down once more, breathing deeply of air that was beginning to smell distinctively of stone dust, Altaïr settled against the low wall. Half-closing his eyes, even as he heard the shelling continuing on, Altaïr allowed himself to relax for a few, long moments. Then, during a lull in the shelling, Altaïr stood back up, called to his compatriots, and the three of them made their way out to the edges of the former castle.
Finding a spot that would be outside the arc of the cannons the Templars were steadily using to demolish even the remains of the castle that they had held what artifacts had made the Templars so dangerous to those that they had deemed enemies, Altaïr sat down against the base of another wall. Alnesr and Maria settled down on either side of him, and he smiled as his brother Assassin leaned against him.
The three of them stayed that way, each resting from the ordeal now behind them, as the sun made its slow path across the sky.
When he felt rested enough to stand again, Altaïr rose back to his feet, helping Alnesr to stand back on his own. He’d a moment’s thought to offer the same courtesy to Maria, he found that she had already stood up once more. She gave him a rather sardonic smile in return, and the three of them began making their way along the docks. Altaïr wondered what Maria was thinking.
“Everything I worked for in the Holy Land, I no longer want,” Maria said, before Altaïr could begin to articulate the questions brimming in his mind; and, at that same moment, removing all need for them. “And, everything I gave up to join the Templars… I wonder where it went, and if I might try to find it again.”
“Will you return to England, then?” he asked, not knowing even then what he would want her answer to be.
“No. I’m so far afield already, I’ll continue on… east. To India, perhaps. Or until I fall off the edge of the world,” she turned back to him, and Altaïr thought that there was a shadow of a smile on her face. “And what of you and yours, Assassin?”
“For a long time, under Al Mualim, I thought my life had reached its limit, and that my sole duty was to guide others to the same precipice I stood upon,” he glanced briefly to Alnesr, who smiled in response.
“Yes,” Maria said, nodding with a reflective sort of smile. “I felt the same way, once.”
“As terrible as this artifact is, it contains wonders,” he said, removing the Apple from the satchel concealed within his robes. “I would like to understand it as best I may,” he continued.
There was also the matter of the man in black, and just what he might have wanted. Perhaps he would even be able to find out what connection the man had with Alnesr, though with his brother Assassin present, he wasn’t going to speak of those desires. He’d no wish to cause his brother Assassin further distress, and the fact that he could not remember the presence of the one within the Apple, even when he had held it in his own hands, was bound to cause just what he would want to avoid.
Whatever else happened, he was going to have answers for that.
“You tread a thin line, Altaïr,” Maria warned, the look in her eyes telling him that she had guessed at the deeper meaning of his words.
“I know,” he said, with a slow, solemn nod. “But I have been ruined by curiosity, Maria. I wish to meet all the best minds, explore all the libraries of the world, and learn all the secrets of nature and the universe.”
“All in a single lifetime?” Maria asked, fond amusement in her eyes now. “It’s a little ambitious, Assassin. And what of you, little one? You’ve been so silent all this time.”
“I will follow where Altaïr leads,” Alnesr said loyally, a smile on his own face. “My Brother has never guided me down the wrong path.”
Altaïr did not know if he would have been so swift to forget the mistakes – and he could see so many of them, with the benefit of hindsight and his hard-won wisdom – that he had made with regards to Alnesr, Al Mualim, and the things that he had done in the past that was all too recent by his reckoning. Still, even if it could be called a child’s fancy, Altaïr appreciated Alnesr’s loyalty.
“Well then, where will the pair of you go first?” Maria asked, and Altaïr wondered if he was simply imagining the invitation in her tone; he rather thought the challenge would have been audible even to someone who did not know her.
Still, there was no more question in his mind that he wished to have Maria in his life, and he rather thought that the feeling had become mutual, during the time that they had spent walking beside one another. True, they had been at cross purposes in the beginning, but here and now they seemed to have come to an understanding. Some might have considered his actions self-serving, but he did not wish to give that up.
“I think we shall head east.”
Chapter 104: To the future
Chapter Text
The smile Maria turned on him was challenging, and Altaïr answered it with one of his own. Not only a challenge, but a promise: that the pair of them would stand together, not only against whatever else might think to harm them, but through the other struggles that living in the would that they did would inevitably bring them. Of course, it would not be so simple as merely deciding that they wished to spend their lives together, but this would be a start.
Another beginning, in a life filled with ends and beginnings both.
~AC: TSC~
They did indeed travel east, as Altaïr and Maria had both decided upon, and Alnesr soon found himself coming into contact with those members of the Brotherhood who had never set foot within the walls of Masyaf. It was not an experience that he would have ever thought to have, but that did not mean that he scorned it. Far from it, in fact; having the chance to speak with those who had never heard of the Levantine Brotherhood – or else knew of it only distantly – was one of the most interesting things he had done in several years.
During the course of their travels, Altaïr and Maria grew all the closer, and nearly two years to the day after the debacle at Limassol, the pair of them were returning to the island to be wed. Naturally, he was called upon to play a part, and while he was happy to do such, he still found the concept rather odd. He’d not have expected to attend the wedding of an Assassin to a Templar, even a former one such as Maria had declared herself.
Still, the event itself seemed to go as well as one could expect such a thing to proceed, and soon enough Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad and Maria Thorpe had been wed.
There was not so much of a change in their lives as Alnesr would have thought, but perhaps such a thing was because the two of them were of such a kind as to understand each other without the difficulties that others seemed to find. Whatever the reason, however, Alnesr was happy that his brother had found happiness after all the hardship he had faced during the course of their shared lives.
~AC: TSC~
When he was able to take some time for himself, away from those who might have been adversely affected by what he was about to attempt – Alnesr in particular, since he was not about to risk his brother Assassin’s wellbeing merely for the sake of satisfying his curiosity; no matter how such a thing had gnawed at him – Altaïr took the Apple of Eden from the small chest he kept just underneath his bed. Holding the artifact in the palms of both his hands, he noticed the traceries of light flashing through the grooves in the artifact for a long moment, before dismissing them from his mind and delving into the Apple itself.
Chapter 105: Troubling developments
Chapter Text
It seemed a mere moment before he saw the form of the man in black once more; seemingly walking out of the light within the Apple, and then circling around him as though the man believed himself some sort of predator. His first impression of the man in black – hood up and voluminous robes billowing about him as he stalked in a tight circle, always keeping Altaïr within the sight of his hidden eyes; the only visible part of his face dominated by the wide, amused smirk he was wearing – did not seem to be a favorable one, and so Altaïr resolved to be on his guard around this man. Whoever he was, it was clear that this man was dangerous.
When he reached up with black-gloved hands to remove his hood, Altaïr found himself beholding the face of the man in black for only the second time since he had become aware of his presence within the Apple.
The first things that anyone else was apt to notice were his bright, deep yellow eyes, and the veritable waterfall of silver hair that cascaded over his shoulders, and even framed the sides of his face. However, having spent so many years living with and working beside Alnesr had inured him to the oddities of his brother Assassin’s appearance, and so Altaïr was able to look beyond such ultimately minor things and see the true nature of the man before him. He had a look of avarice about him, and in that way the man in black was more akin to Al Mualim than he had suspected at first.
Such was clearly not a man that could be trusted.
The man in black tilted his head slightly, then raised his right hand. At a momentary loss as to what the man in black wished him to do, Altaïr paused for a moment to see what he would do next. The man in black tilted his head slightly, as though beckoning him forward, and Altaïr stepped forward with his own right hand held out.
When he reached out to touch the man’s right hand, his fingers passing through the man’s own up to the palm, Altaïr…
… he saw a room of high thrones, and the faces of other men passed before him… a one-eyed man whose long, black hair was heavily shot through with gray… a man whose heavy features were shadowed by a myriad of long, thin black braids… a vulpine-featured man with a great deal of long, pale blond hair… another man with heavy features, this one with bright, coppery-red hair, and a frame almost as large as the Bull in Kantara Castle… a young man with dark hair shadowing half of his face, and a certain scholarly air about him… a man whose hair was longer than any of the others Altaïr had seen before, who had a wild fringe of hair on the top of his head… two children, one fair-haired and one dark… and finally, a man with a bald pate; he only glimpsed this one from the back, and so could merely catch sight of the long, black robes the man seemed to possess, before Altaïr found himself…
Standing before the man in black, surrounded by bright, colorless, coruscating light that seemed almost apt to reach out and embrace the pair of them.
“Who are you?” he asked, as the man in black, once he had pulled his hand away and held it at his side again.
“Nobody in particular,” the man in black said, the shadow of a sly smile lurking on his face. “I am pleased to meet you, however, Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad.”
“You learned of me from Alnesr, yes?” he asked, forcing himself not to narrow his eyes in response; he did not know how this man would react to any hint of open suspicion.
“Indeed,” the man in black said, the sly smile on his face coming becoming fully visible at last. “He and I have become quite well-acquainted during the time we’ve had together. And, I would like to thank you for taking care of him so well as you have.”
“Of course,” he said, still wary of the man before him. “How long have you been here?” the man in black merely chuckled, softly, in response to his question. “How did you first come to be within the Apple?” The man in black gave merely an amused smile. “Is there anything that you will deign to tell me?” he asked at last, beginning to become exasperated, in addition to suspicious.
“Your Alnesr isn’t the only one of those who bear my imprint,” the man in black said, reaching up to replace his hood once more. “When you meet them, during your travels, do keep that in mind.”
The light around him pulsed strongly, and Altaïr found himself once again within the room in Limassol that he had taken for his own. He suspected that he’d not actually left in any real sense, and that anyone who had been present while he was speaking would have been able to tell him just the same. He did not know that they would have remained unaffected by his presence, and therefore until he could determine just what the man in black might want, he was not going to risk exposing anyone else to the man.
Gathering himself, Altaïr carefully tucked the Apple back into the satchel he used to transport it those times when he needed to move the artifact and remain unnoticed while doing so, and then tucked the satchel away in a drawer near his bed. Once he had managed to secure the artifact well enough that he was no longer concerned that someone who might not be so able as he was, to see the man in black for who he truly was, would chance to come across it.
He might not have gained the man’s name, but a name was truly the least of the various aspects of a man’s life.
Chapter 106: Matters of family
Chapter Text
Leaving Limassol behind, to resume their journey east, Maria couldn’t help but take note of the increasing amount of time Altaïr would spend locked in his chambers, the lights showing under the door indicating that he was looking into the Apple. The fact that he had been able to tell her the future of the small family they were beginning to build for themselves had had to be weighed against her husband’s increasing obsession with the artifact, and her husband’s obsession was beginning to win out.
The amount of time he would spend looking into the artifact was steadily growing longer, and even the presence of Alnesr here with him in Masyaf was not bringing him back to his senses; if anything, it seemed to encourage him to pursue the secrets that might lay within the Apple.
She knew that this situation of theirs couldn’t go on as it was currently, for Darim’s sake if none other, and she had made up her mind to confront him about his obsession this very night. Maria only hoped that she could make Altaïr see reason at last.
~AC: TSC~
Settling back into the room that Altaïr had granted him after their return to Masyaf, Alnesr found himself wondering how his mentor – now fully instated as the Master of the Levantine Assassins – was faring. Maria had spoken to him of her misgivings about the increasing amount of time he spent gazing into the depths of the Apple, but as Alnesr himself could never quite recall his thoughts when he was in the presence of the artifact, he hadn’t yet attempted to speak to his mentor about that matter.
However, as it was morning and he had not yet broken his fast, Alnesr was making his way down to the main dining area so that he would be able to do so.
Passing a fair few of his brother Assassins in the corridors, Alnesr caught snatches of talk from small gatherings of them along the way. He did not pause to listen to them, as he would not have wished any of them to intrude on his own conversations, but given what he was able to hear as he passed them all by, it seemed as though Altaïr had indeed regained the confidence of those present here. He was glad for it, as while his mentor had indeed made a grave misjudgment when he had first attempted to take the life of Robert de Sable within Solomon’s Temple, Altaïr had also used the lessons he had learned to grow as both a man and an Assassin.
When he made it into the main dining area, however, Alnesr found that Abbas was in the same area. More than that, the man was looking in his direction. He did not know what to make of the expression on Abbas’ face, as he had deliberately chosen a seat as far from the man as he could manage. He’d no care if it appeared that he was attempting to flee from the man who had once been as close as Altaïr still was, nor the impression that he was giving to his brother Assassins who were eating alongside him.
When he had finally finished his meal and was hence able to leave the dining area, Alnesr quickly gathered himself and departed.
He could hear the sound of another man following him, and while he hoped that it was not Abbas who was pacing him through the corridors, he knew that the length of the man’s stride was very similar to the last time he had heard it. It was not a situation he enjoyed being in, but he was beginning to suspect that he would not be able to evade such a situation for as long as he would wish. Steeling himself for what he was going to face, Alnesr turned and stopped in an unused study.
“I was hoping that I would have the chance to speak with you again.”
Turning to confront the man who had spoken such words to him, he found that it was indeed Abbas.
“Why did you pursue me, Abbas?” he asked, drawing away slightly as the man himself stepped forward; he’d no true antipathy for the man as he was, but the feel of strong fingers closing out his life was not one he would soon forget.
“I’d not known how to approach you before this day, my boy,” the man said, a gentle smile coming to his face; Alnesr thought it appeared rather false on the surface, but he of all people could hardly deny that a man was capable of change that others might not be willing to grant the possibility of. “I’d some hope that I might be given the chance to make amends.”
“May I have time to consider your words, Abbas?” he asked, belatedly realizing that he had been unconsciously tracing the paths of the bruises that had once been visible upon his neck when Abbas’ expression shifted into one of contrition.
“Of course, my boy,” the man – who Alnesr still could not quite bring himself to think of as his brother Assassin – said. “I’d forgotten… I am truly sorry to say, but I forgot the anguish I had caused to you. I do regret it, my brother, and I will give you what time you may need to come to terms with what I ask of you.”
“Thank you,” he said, nodding. “Abbas.”
He was not yet prepared to call Abbas brother once more, but Alnesr thought that such might not remain the case for such a long time as he’d thought. If Malik could forgive Altaïr for the mistake he had made – a mistake that had cost Malik far more dearly than Abbas’ mistake had cost him, in the end – then Alnesr himself could hardly be called a brother to Malik if he did not at least attempt to do the same.
Departing the empty study where he had spoken to Abbas, Alnesr turned to watch for a moment as the man departed. Not long enough that the man would take note of him doing so, but long enough that he could determine that Abbas was making his way down and out of the fortress. He wondered for a moment just where Abbas was going to go from there, since as far as he could recall Altaïr had not presented the man with a particular mission on this day, and then decided that such a thing was not his business.
Aside from that, there were many things that one could do without needing to leave the grounds of Masyaf.
Chapter 107: Matters of necessity
Chapter Text
“Alnesr, I’m glad to have found you so quickly.”
“Maria,” he greeted, as the woman firmly grasped his right arm and began tugging him along. “What do you want of me?”
“I’ve tried my damnnest to get that man to see reason; to give up that artifact, and thus break the stranglehold it seems to be tightening over him, but I think that seeing you again will serve to remind him of just what it truly is he risks by continuing to toy with that artifact of his.”
He did not truly know how to respond to such a thing, and so Alnesr remained silent, hurrying his steps so that he would not be pulled off-balance by the speed that Maria was traveling. As the pair of them made their way back up to the place that had once been Al Mualim’s study, Alnesr winced slightly as he felt the sensation of something pressing lightly against the sides of his head. He did not know what to truly expect, when he and Maria had made their way into Altaïr’s study at last, but before he could ponder such a thing too long, Alnesr found himself standing before the door to Altaïr’s study.
The bright, colorless light seeping out from under the lip of the door made it quite clear what he and Maria were going to be dealing with, once they had made their way inside.
Steeling himself once more, knowing all the same that there was little chance that he would be able to so much as glimpse the mysterious “man in black” that Altaïr and Maria had both spoken of seeing during the missing time he had been a victim of, Alnesr followed Maria into his mentor’s study. He found his brother Assassin just beginning to remove the Apple from whatever he used to store the artifact when he was not making use of it.
“Right, that’s enough!” Maria snapped, marching decisively over to where Altaïr had seated himself.
Alnesr would have been very close behind her, if not for the fact that the pressure on the sides of his head was steadily increasing the longer he spent in Altaïr’s study so close to the Apple. He imagined, just for a moment, that he could see that same flickering, colorless light that he had seen from the artifact before. The pressure around his head – and a strange, indescribable feeling in his chest – steadily increased as he drew closer to the desk where Altaïr was sitting.
~AC: TSC~
“Alnesr!” he called, just as he saw the first emergence of the man in black from his place within the Apple.
Maria acted faster, however, and was able to catch Alnesr before his brother Assassin struck his head on the stone floor of his study.
“This has gone on long enough, Altaïr,” Maria snapped, gently settling Alnesr into a nearby chair so that she would be able to speak to him more freely. “That artifact, the man in black within it… Whatever you discover within it, it cannot be worth constantly risking the health, or even the life, of someone you clearly care so much about.”
“She makes an interesting argument, Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad. How will you respond?”
Gathering himself, ignoring the goading words of the man in black, Altaïr forced his thoughts back into some form of organization. “I know that what I do is a risk; I act to mitigate such things as much as I may, and yet… I cannot simply allow the secrets this artifact holds to remain undiscovered, if they will provide new ways and means that I might be able to use to aid us in our struggle against the Templars, and all of those who might seek to deny humanity the freedom to grow and develop as they will.”
“Those are very fine words,” Maria said, though she did not sound impressed in the slightest. “However, they sound almost like the ones you said your old Master spoke when he was attempting to sway you back to his side.”
“I am not Al Mualim,” he said; it was his determination to be better than the man he had once looked up to in the not-so-distant past that would serve him in dealing with the Apple and the man in black both. “I do thank you for your concern, Maria,” he said, reaching out to clap her right shoulder. “However, I ask that you trust me in these matters. And please, by all means, continue expressing whatever concerns you might have. And, if you would, keep Alnesr out of these matters from now on,” he continued, looking over at where his brother Assassin rested in one of the larger chairs.
“Mind that you don’t become so absorbed in chasing shadows that you forget there is a whole world outside that artifact of yours,” Maria said, turning to gather up Alnesr from where he had been resting from his swoon.
“As long as I have you to remind me of such a world, I doubt that I will be able to forget so quickly.”
Maria gave him a dryly amused look over her shoulder as she turned to leave, and Altaïr smiled in response. Whatever else she thought of his motives, his words were no less true than they had been when he first wed her on Limassol. If anything, his bonds had only been strengthened by the demands that the Apple was placing upon him.
“Interesting…”
Chapter 108: Truth seeker
Chapter Text
When he regained consciousness, with Maria helping him to make his way back to his room, Alnesr sighed in frustration. More and more of late, it seemed as though he could not stand within the light of the Apple without suffering for it. And yes, Altaïr had spoken of the times he had seemed to be lost within the light of the artifact, but as he could not truly recall those times, he’d no other word but Altaïr’s own to suggest what had happened. And, while he was not truly questioning the integrity of his brother Assassin, it was truly a strange thing to consider.
Though, perhaps not so strange, in light of what he was continuing to see – or rather, fail to see – when he chanced to be in close proximity to the Apple.
~AC: TSC~
As he continued to study the Apple, in between searching out new areas to establish guilds of his brother and sister Assassins and updating the Codex that he was compiling on the information that he had gained from the Apple and the ideas he had worked out for improving the tools and tactics of the Brotherhood, Altaïr was also making detailed observations on the man in black. He took care to record those findings in another, secret codex that he was keeping for that particular purpose. Everything he had learned about the man in black, precious little from the man’s own words, gave him the impression that the only way he was going to find out anything about the man was through strict observation.
The man in black had steadily proven himself to be both self-amused and recalcitrant in the extreme.
He had also been observing events in the world at large, both during his travels and through the contacts he had made through the various guilds he had previously established, and given everything that he had learned, Altaïr was growing certain that the man who had come to be known as Genghis Khan was in possession of a Piece of Eden. There were precious few other explanations that he could see, as there was very little chance that a man, even a war leader like the Khan, would be able to amass such a large following purely on natural charisma. Altaïr even doubted that he himself would have been able to unite the many disparate clans that were said to be following this Khan’s banner.
This was, therefore, a matter of significantly more importance than his half-successful attempts to establish a sect of the Brotherhood in Constantinople.
At the moment, however, his concerns hewed closer to home. He now had two sons whose welfare and training he needed to consider before he made any far-reaching decisions, but as he also had Maria, Alnesr, and Malik to aid him in seeing to those and other matters that he might need to attend to, Altaïr found that he was not so pressed as he may have been otherwise. He was pleased, insomuch as he could be when he knew that there were other matters that would soon require his attention; matters taking shape in a different part of the world, yes, but that was no consolation, given what he suspected.
Truly, men in possession of a Piece of Eden were not to be taken lightly; he knew this better than most, and would not soon forget the lesson.
Returning his attention to the secondary codex that he was writing, that which detailed his observations and extrapolations upon the nature of the man in black, Altaïr reflected once more upon who he would be able to leave the slender volume with once he himself had come to the end of his lifetime. His main codex was not a thing that the man in black had ever shown any signs of interest in, but Altaïr rather doubted that the same would hold true about a book that was solely dedicated to the man himself. Particularly given how closely-guarded the man in black held any and all secrets about himself.
Even to this very day, Altaïr had not heard the man speak his own name.
Once he had managed to finish his drawings, detailing what little he could remember of the appearance of the others that he had glimpsed so briefly when he’d first passed into the light of the Apple, Altaïr carefully tucked his secondary codex away where no one else – particularly the man in black, those times when he would see fit to appear from within the artifact for his own incomprehensible reasons – would think to search for it. He was always careful with this secondary codex of his, making certain to keep it out of the way when he was working with the Apple, and in turn keeping the Apple safely out of sight when he was working on this secondary codex. He truly doubted that the man in black, secretive as he so clearly was, would take kindly to the efforts that Altaïr was making to uncover what secrets he could.
Chapter 109: Eagle’s eyes
Chapter Text
Making his way out to the training ring with Darim and Sef, Alnesr reflected on how strange it felt for him to be doing such a thing. Yes, he had once acted as Altaïr’s Master, but the pair of them had agreed that such a thing had just been one more of Al Mualim’s schemes to destabilize their relationship and so keep the pair of them off-balance so that they would be less able to counter his manipulations with the Apple when they discovered them. Alnesr tried not to think of those times when he could avoid it, since the complicated emotions he still felt about Al Mualim were not something he was quite prepared to deal with, even now.
As he directed Sef into the care of Rauf, Alnesr took a moment to thank the aging instructor for assisting him in these matters. He’d known for a rather long time that he was not going to have the chance to become a field Assassin, simply due to his odd appearance; it would take no less than several lifetimes to acclimate anyone who might have encountered him to seeing past such a thing. It was a lesson that had only been reinforced by his encounters with those others that Altaïr had mentioned the mysterious man in black speaking of: those who shared his appearance, if not his exact circumstances.
Some of them had been forced from their homes, to wander the streets in an attempt to preserve what they could of their own lives in the face of open hostility from those they encountered; those had, naturally, been foremost among the ones who flocked to Altaïr as he had spoken of what they were attempting to do. He’d been glad of it; to be able to help those whose circumstances mirrored his own to such a great degree, but also shamefully pleased at his own good fortune to escape such an outcome. He hadn’t liked the thought, not wanting to think himself better than those whose circumstances would have been his own if not for a fortunate twist of fate.
Still, it did serve to remind him that he was still human, if nothing else.
It was Rauf who had first suggested the idea that he become an Instructor and thus aid in the training of his brother Assassins in the Levant. Altaïr had been in favor of the idea nearly as soon as he had heard of it, and even Malik had been supportive. Alnesr had, of course, been pleased by such an outpouring, and so he had volunteered his services to Rauf. First as a trainee himself, and then moving on to more and more difficult assignments.
This, here and now, was the culmination of his efforts and his learning.
He’d found that, appropriately enough, working with Darim was nearly the same as working with Altaïr had been. Darim had the same intensity and focus as Altaïr, and working with him served to remind Alnesr of all the years he had spent under Altaïr’s own tutelage, both inside Masyaf and in the cities surrounding the fortress. He was pleased by such a thing, but Alnesr could not help reflecting on the strangeness of it.
Turning his attention to what it was he was going to have for lunch, now that he had finished working with Darim for the afternoon and was being given some time to eat and refresh himself before he returned to teach more of his brother Assassins the combat skills they would need to survive out in the field. It amused him, sometimes, to think that he would be teaching his brother Assassins to survive in a place he was not likely to return to, but he supposed that Altaïr sometimes felt that way, himself, being the Master of the Assassins and hence spending more and more time in Masyaf.
Chapter 110: Shadow over Masyaf
Chapter Text
“Alnesr, come!”
“Abbas,” he greeted his brother Assassin, nodding to him as he carried over his meal and climbed into the chair that was being offered to him. “How have you been?”
“I have been well enough, for my part,” Abbas said, smiling at him as the pair of them began to eat their respective meals. “I’d heard that you’ve taken up the post of instructor from Rauf. A noble profession, that; I’m certain you will bring the Brotherhood credit with your work.”
“Thank you, Abbas,” he said, smiling softly.
It had become a great deal easier to speak to his brother Assassin, over the intervening years that the pair of them had spent repairing their relationship. True, there still remained times when he would recall the feel of Abbas’ hands closing around his throat, but those times had lessened dramatically as he had come to renew the closeness that he and Abbas had shared so long ago. He was pleased about that, but he could not help noticing the way that his brother Assassin still seemed to cling to the resentment he felt toward Altaïr.
More distressing still was Abbas’ clear reluctance to speak about the breakdown of the relationship that he and Altaïr had once shared; it had been many years since the pair of them had parted on terms that could not have been considered remotely amicable.
Still, now was not the time for his attempts at getting Abbas to see that his was not the only side of the story that he and Altaïr had both lived; to say nothing of Abbas’ clear distaste for the topic, Alnesr himself had his own duties to concern himself with. Once he had finished with his meal, Alnesr swiftly returned to the mid-sized building beside the training ring. Soon enough, another group of students would come to him wanting instruction, and it was now his duty to see that they had it.
~AC: TSC~
Time passed, as it was wont to do, and Altaïr soon found that he could no longer afford to delay his dealings with Genghis Khan. Darim and Sef had grown well, under the tutelage of Alnesr and his fellow instructors. He himself would have never thought to see his former Apprentice among the ranks of Labib, Rauf and the others like them, but as Alnesr’s appearance was not one that would serve him when he was in the field – something he felt that the man in black was responsible for, given his words and the way he acted – Altaïr was pleased to know that his brother Assassin had found a place that suited him.
At the very least, Alnesr had managed to make a place for himself in Masyaf.
Making his way out of his study at last, having gathered everything that he would need considering his aims, Altaïr turned at the sight of the man in black.
“Best of luck, Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad.”
There was a small, self-satisfied smirk on the man’s face, just before he vanished back into the depths of the Apple once more. Shaking his head, knowing by now that the man in black wasn’t one to reveal his thoughts unless there was something for him to gain in the doing. It was yet another reason for his distrust of the man, and also why he kept his work on items – particularly that extremely dense, yet almost feather-light metal alloy that he had worked with Alnesr to forge into a suit of armor – that he had manufactured with the aid of the Apple a secret from the man in black.
He was not such a fool as to idly trust the words of a man who made himself so deliberately mysterious; he’d learned every lesson that he might need on such a subject from Al Mualim.
Speaking to Darim and Sef both, directing his eldest to pack for a journey to the territories held by Genghis Khan and his devoted followers and his youngest to stay behind so that he could care for his family and attend to his training, Altaïr then turned his path toward Alnesr. His brother Assassin would naturally want to know where it was that he was going, and he’d no desire to worry the younger man unduly.
“Alnesr,” he called, once he came into sight of the training ring and was thus able to determine that it was empty. “I would speak with you, brother.”
“Of course, brother,” his former Apprentice said, turning to look his way with a slight bow; Altaïr wondered idly if he would ever lose such a habit. “You look as though you have important matters on your mind.”
“I came to inform you that I will be leaving soon,” he said, as he and Alnesr fell into step with one another as they made their way slowly toward the dining area. “The Khan’s depredations have become too numerous to ignore, and I fear he may have managed to lay his hands to another of the artifacts like the Apple. Perhaps the Sword,” he continued, thinking aloud for Alnesr’s benefit.
“It sounds as though you have quite a task ahead of you,” Alnesr said, his tone pensive and his gaze going distant for a long moment. “I certainly hope you don’t intend to attempt to take this task on alone, Altaïr.”
He chuckled softly, warmed by the concern his former Apprentice was showing for him. “No; I have learned my lesson well about such things, brother. Darim will be accompanying me for this task. I will return as soon as I may, but I simply wished to tell you of my plans in this so you wouldn’t worry about me.”
“I know your skill in these matters, brother,” Alnesr said, and he smiled in response to the calmly confident expression on his former Apprentice’s face. “Still, I am pleased to know that you will have one of our brothers beside you. Truth to tell, I would be concerned if you had told me you planned to go alone, no matter how fair-spoken your words were.”
“Yes, I rather thought that,” he said, smiling as the pair of them made their way into the dining area and he parted company with Alnesr.
Though not without a final farewell on both their parts.
~AC: TSC~
When Altaïr had left Masyaf behind, in an effort to curb the excesses of Genghis Khan and those people who might not have been following him entirely of their own volition, Malik found himself rather amused at his position. Altaïr had elected to name him leader of the Levantine Brotherhood, and while Malik could hardly deny having wanted the position once, when he and Altaïr were both much younger men, he now knew better just what true leadership entailed. He’d seen such a thing wearing away slowly at his brother Assassin while the pair of them – plus Alnesr, since he had been raised by the man, and naturally shared a close relationship to him – were working side-by-side in Masyaf.
He’d little enough desire to take the reins of power after that, but it seemed as though his own desires were not particularly important at the moment; what mattered now, what had always mattered no matter that he hadn’t seen it, was to care for their brother Assassins and see that the Creed was upheld as well as any of them could manage.
That was the task before every member of the Brotherhood; from the youngest of the Novices learning their craft at the feet of their scholars, and instructors such as Alnesr and Rauf, to the members of the Brotherhood that carried out their missions in the field with the aid of the Rafiqs working in the cities: all of them worked to preserve, promote, and expand the influence of the Creed. Each of them, in their own way, worked to protect the lives under their care. He was pleased, at least, to be contributing to such an effort.
It was not as though someone in his condition would ever be able to return to work as a field Assassin; he and Alnesr had often discussed that very matter, speaking about their own experiences and finding a common ground on such.
~AC: TSC~
Falling into the rhythm of the sword fight as he continued to instruct his students, Alnesr steadied his breathing once more as the pair of them broke apart.
“Good work,” he said, smiling in the same way that Rauf had done when the man was aiding in his own training; both as an Apprentice and as his co-instructor while the two of them had been working together.
Taking a few moments to speak to his latest group of students, congratulating them and advising where he found it necessary, and then made his way back to the small outbuilding where the tools and trappings of his new trade were stored. Setting down his practice sword on a nearby rack, Alnesr turned and left the room, aiming for one of the washing areas so that he could properly clean himself up before making his way to the dining area.
Once he had finished with that, Alnesr made his way into the dining area to get his midday meal.
“Come, sit here, Alnesr!”
“Abbas,” he greeted, sweeping his gaze over those others seated at the table around his brother Assassin. “Are these men friends of yours?”
“This is Swami,” Abbas said, smiling as he gestured to the bald man seated at his right hand. “He and the others are those I have come to know quite well during my time here.”
“It’s good to meet you,” he said, a bit uncertain as he settled down among them.
He thought that he might have heard Altaïr speaking of them, some time or another while the two of them had been speaking of matters concerning the Brotherhood, but if there had been things that his former master had said about these men in particular, Alnesr couldn’t recall them. Speaking to them as he ate his meal, Alnesr found that they were rather genial sorts, though each and every one of them seemed to hold Abbas in higher regard than anyone else. He did not know if that was a good thing, considering Abbas had still not given up his bitterness toward Altaïr.
Swami in particular seemed ready to do far more than merely sitting at Abbas’ right hand.
Alnesr did not know what would happen, with Abbas clearly gathering support for some reason or other, but he knew that he would need to speak with Malik. It was clear that Abbas, as amicable as he acted when Alnesr spoke with him during those times when they would sit together to eat, was planning something. He might not have known precisely what it was that Abbas had in mind, but it was still important that Malik was made aware of the matter.
Once he was able to part ways with Abbas without raising his brother Assassin’s suspicions, Alnesr made his way back up into the fortress to speak with Malik.
Chapter 111: Malik Al-Sayf
Chapter Text
Given what Alnesr had told him, Malik found himself watching Abbas more closely than he had been before. It seemed as though the man was gathering the weaker-willed members of the Brotherhood to himself, overawing them in ways a Templar might have done, for some purpose that Malik couldn’t quite determine. He did not yet know if Abbas merely intended to take leadership of the Brotherhood for himself – not an outcome he was at all in favor of, but not the worst he could think of – or if he had some greater goal that wresting leadership of the Brotherhood was just one step of.
Either way, however, Malik knew that he would need to keep a closer watch on Abbas’ activities from now on. He’d asked Alnesr to keep him informed of any thing else that Abbas did or said while the pair of them were speaking, and while the younger Assassin had seemed reluctant for a moment, he had agreed once Malik told him of the concerns that Abbas’ behavior was causing. Now, with the extra information that Alnesr’s observations were able to provide for him, Malik found himself rather hard-pressed to believe that an Assassin could be so petty as Abbas was acting.
Yes, it was true that Altaïr had wronged them both to varying degrees, but a better man would have seen that their brother Assassin had grown beyond such things through the pain that he had suffered, or at the very least would not have sought to involve anyone but the man who had wronged them in their scheme for revenge. Still, it had become increasingly clear that Abbas no longer cared for anyone but himself; not even those Assassins that he had swayed to his way of thinking would be spared by what he was planning. Malik knew that the same held true for Alnesr, despite how much the younger Assassin might have wished to think otherwise.
And, while he himself could understand not wishing to think badly of those who treated him with kindness, Malik knew that he could not allow his brother Assassin to remain blind to Abbas’ glaring flaws as he clearly had been for so long.
Knowing all that he knew, Malik was fully aware of just how precarious their situation now was. The people of Masyaf could ill-afford the shadow war that Abbas seemed to be preparing to fight, but as Malik had come to know the unreasonable bitterness that the man had hidden behind his façade of a dutiful member of the Brotherhood, he had come to realize that such a thing was not only inevitable at this point, but that attempting to prevent it by speaking with the man would only bring such a thing on all the more swiftly. With all of that in mind, Malik knew that the only reasonable course of action he could pursue was to prepare to fight the shadow war that Abbas had dedicated himself to provoking.
To that end, he himself had begun recruiting those who still remained loyal to the old ways of the Brotherhood – the ways that Abbas had clearly abandoned long ago, and was now all but spitting on in his bitterness and spite – and instructing them to train with Alnesr and Rauf when they could, and also to speak to him of what Abbas and those he had gathered to him were planning when they were given the opportunity.
He would not be caught unawares by what Abbas had clearly been planning, nor would he allow the Brotherhood and those they protected to suffer for it; Malik would not forgive himself for such a lapse, to say nothing of what Altaïr’s feelings on the matter were likely to be.
~AC: TSC~
The signs of impending battle, of a schism within the ranks of the Brotherhood, were becoming more obvious to Alnesr with every day that passed; even to the point where he was honestly beginning to wonder if those living in the village surrounding their fortress were even aware of it. He did not know just what any of them were thinking, and he hoped that they were doing well, but Alnesr found that he could spare them little more thought than that. There was so much already happening, and so little of it that could be allowed to be discovered, that Alnesr found himself with barely a thought to spare for anyone outside the fortress.
Sides were being chosen, as they had to be in such a conflict, and even his and Rauf’s own students were not being spared from the push to do so.
On one side were those who held true to the ideals of the Brotherhood and the Creed that was meant to guide them all, and on the other were those who Abbas had swayed to his side through false kindness and promises of a kind that Alnesr wasn’t certain that anyone would be capable of delivering on; he’d long since given up any hope of the coming conflict being solved without bloodshed, as Abbas had proven himself unwilling to listen to any viewpoint that might show his actions in anything but the best possible light. And, while he sometimes wished that things could have been different, Alnesr had come to accept that Abbas would never overcome his bitterness toward Altaïr, simply because he did not want to do so.
It was a harsh thing, to see a man that he’d thought capable of learning kindness once more rejecting it entirely, but Alnesr had learned well not to allow himself to be blinded by sentiment.
Continuing to work with his students, he remained uncomfortably aware of the possibility that he would soon face more than a few of them in combat when the holding-pattern they were in finally broke. He was slightly less fond of that idea than he was of fighting Abbas, owing to the fact that he’d known his students for a longer time when he was capable of reason, and the fact that some of them might have been indoctrinated by their parents, or other elders who held to ideas planted in their minds by Abbas. In the end, however, it was one more thing that Alnesr had forced himself to accept.
No one could ever claim that the life of an Assassin was an easy one, but Alnesr sometimes found himself wishing – in spite of all sense – that it was not so hard as he found it in these moments.
~AC: TSC~
The days proceeded apace, and Malik found that the tension had had been growing as invisible battle-lines were drawn within the fortress. He’d been expecting nothing less, true, but to see it happening nearly before his eyes… No, he’d no desire to see such a thing happening to the Brotherhood he had devoted so much of his life to breaking apart in such a way, but it had become more than clear that Abbas would not be satisfied with anything less than the complete destruction of the Brotherhood for nothing more than the spite he still refused to let go of after all these years.
And, for all that he was doing and all that he intended to do, Malik had no more qualms about bringing the full force of those elements of the Brotherhood that remained loyal to their Creed down on Abbas’ fool head; truly, that man had become worse than Altaïr after Solomon’s Temple, and after everything Malik had seen, he knew that there would be no redemption in store.
~AC: TSC~
As the tensions around him continued to escalate, Alnesr found that the very neutrality that he tried to maintain as an instructor was beginning to turn some of those he sought to teach against him. However, having come to know their faces from the crowds that gathered in what had become Abbas’ space within the dining area, he’d come to accept the fact that he would likely be forced to turn his skills upon them when the battle that Abbas was clearly aiming to provoke finally broke out. He’d not resolved to kill them, as he sincerely doubted that such was something Altaïr would have done or wanted done in his name, but Alnesr did not know if he would be given the opportunity to spare them in the coming battle.
He would take advantage of such if it were presented to him, but he would not risk the lives of his brother Assassins to do so.
The tension in the dining area was as palpable as it ever was, in these days when even simple words could be twisted into support for one side over another, and Alnesr could almost feel Abbas’ gaze boring into his head where he sat, attempting to eat his midday meal in relative peace. He’d learned quickly not to return the looks Abbas would give him while the two of them were present there, and also that he could hardly hope to avoid the man when he took it upon himself to find him if he was not present in the dining area at his usual time. And, while he’d no wish to be the one to start the conflict that was clearly brewing between the two factions covertly vying for dominance within Masyaf fortress, Alnesr was beginning to think that he would not be able to avoid such a fate, in the end.
It was not a thought that he relished in the slightest, however much he was beginning to think it might hold true.
Abbas called to him, but Alnesr swiftly passed beyond the reach of the man’s voice, and returned to the training ring to finish his work for the day. He and Rauf had discussed matters, and both of them thought it best if they were not seen declaring themselves for or against either side in the battle that was swiftly approaching. No matter what their personal feelings on the matter at hand, they simply could not allow themselves to be seen as anything but impartial.
It was not as though anyone else seemed to be taking the same stance, and their students needed some stability, even though such a thing was clearly not going to last much longer.
As he worked with his students, training them for the combat they were all going to face rather sooner than he would have honestly preferred, Alnesr wondered how many of those he was training would end up on the wrong end of his blade when the growing tension within the ranks of the Brotherhood finally snapped. Forcing those thoughts out of his mind – knowing that he would not like the answers in any case, and was going to have them sooner than any of them would prefer – and continued about his rounds. Correcting stances where he needed to, and giving advice where it would apply, Alnesr continued about his work.
In the end, every one of them had their parts to play in the coming battle.
~AC: TSC~
When Alnesr made his way up into the room that Altaïr had once used as his study, and would do so again once he and Darim had returned from dealing with Genghis Khan, Malik sighed as he saw the same tension and weariness that had been weighing him down reflected on the younger Assassin’s face.
“Come, sit awhile and speak with me, brother,” he said, both because it was clear that the younger Assassin needed to unburden himself, and because he needed to know what Abbas’ supporters were up to of late.
“Thank you, brother,” Alnesr said, the expression of relief that spread across his face only somewhat diminished by the haggard cast to his gaze.
As his brother Assassin detailed the comings and goings of those who had all but declared themselves for Abbas’ selfish cause, Malik took note of far more than the contents of Alnesr’s report. He noted that, while the younger Assassin was taking care to display the full professionalism that was demanded of every member of their Brotherhood – and which Abbas had clearly abandoned – it was clear to someone who had taken the time to come to know him that Alnesr was concerned for the fates of his students. It was a concern that any instructor worth his title shared, and for that reason Malik was glad to see Alnesr demonstrating such a thing.
Still, the fact that it was taking a toll on him couldn’t be disputed by anyone with eyes.
“Your concern for your pupils does you credit, Alnesr,” he said, reaching out to clap the younger – neither of them could truly be called young, anymore – Assassin’s right shoulder with his sole remaining hand. “And, while I am certain you would give a good account of yourself in combat, I share your desire for things to be resolved peacefully.”
“Yes,” the expression on his brother Assassin’s face spoke of his desire for peace more clearly than almost any other words he could have said.
“That is why, when the two factions that have formed within our Brotherhood meet in the village of Masyaf, I want you to be by my side,” he said. “You and I both wish for this madness to pass without bloodshed, but we may yet be forced to fight.”
“I know,” Alnesr said, casting his gaze down at the desk Malik was seated behind.
“I suppose there is nothing I can say to ease your mind in these matters,” he said, knowing that the sentiment held true for the both of them. “Still, I think that even Altaïr himself would have been unprepared to deal with such a thing as we find ourselves facing now.”
“Yes,” Alnesr said, the younger Assassin’s gaze seeming to look into the past for a few, long moments. “I don’t doubt it.”
“Just so,” he said, aiming for reassurance but not knowing quite how well he was managing such. “Still, I don’t think Altaïr would have any reason to gainsay how we’ve been handling matters in his absence.”
Alnesr didn’t say anything in response, but Malik could still see the uncertainty on his face, and he knew that there was one more thing that he had to tell him. If only so that the pair of them could become accustomed to the idea.
“I’m naming you my successor here and now, so that if anything goes awry during our talks with Abbas and his faction next week, the Brotherhood will not lack for a leader who properly understands the dictates of our Creed, and will uphold it even in spite of the difficult life we all lead.”
“I- Malik, you’re naming me?”
“You were at his side, while he was relearning the lessons he needed,” Malik said, smiling gently to reassure the younger Assassin. “And, no matter that you looked up to him, you were still willing to question his preconceptions and help him to think through his actions.”
“I simply don’t know if I’m prepared for the responsibility, Malik.”
“A fact that gives me all the more confidence that you will do well to have it,” he said, smiling wider. “A good leader must always be willing to question himself; to consult others he can trust, and thereby ensure that his decisions are truly in the best interests of those he leads. The Assassins and their Mentor are not separate, as some might foolishly believe, but indeed two parts of the same whole.”
“Both working together for the cause of peace,” the younger Assassin said, his tone sounding as though he was repeating wisdom that had been imparted to him by one he trusted; like as not, those were Altaïr’s words he was speaking.
“Yes, that’s just it,” he said, smiling and nodding. “That is precisely why I am naming you my successor, Alnesr. You know what it is to learn, and you now have experience teaching. I feel that I can trust you with these matters.”
“I thank you for having faith in me, Malik,” his brother Assassin said, bowing where he sat in front of the desk that Malik was sitting behind.
Dismissing Alnesr from Altaïr’s former study, with a promise that the pair of them would meet up again to further discus the duties and responsibilities of a Mentor of the Brotherhood of Assassins, and also acclimate the younger Assassin to what his particular responsibilities would be, if he was indeed forced to take up the mantle of Mentor. It wasn’t that Malik wanted to die, during the meeting that the two shadow-factions of the Brotherhood would be holding next week, but if there was anything that the life of an Assassin taught one, it was to be prepared for any outcome.
No matter how much one wished that such a thing wouldn’t happen.
~AC: TSC~
The week long grace period that had been agreed upon before the two shadow-factions that had formed within the Brotherhood were to meet had passed only that morning, and while Alnesr wished for a moment that such had not been the case, he knew better than to hope for things that could never be. He had listened dutifully as Malik explained the duties that a Mentor of the Brotherhood would need to perform, and while the both of them had agreed that he was better suited to combat, Malik had said that Altaïr himself had thought the same. He had also said that, because Alnesr knew what it was to be led, he would have what it took to lead, as well.
Alnesr was not entirely certain that he fully understood the logic behind his brother Assassin’s words, but he knew that now of all times was not the one to gainsay him.
As the pair of them gathered up their group of representatives for the meeting in Masyaf village, Alnesr took care to discreetly arm himself, as all of the others in their group were doing. He was not so foolish as to think that Abbas and his chosen representatives would be meeting with them unarmed, and so they were going to answer in kind. He still held out some hope that their respective differences could be resolved without bloodshed, but even he had to admit that such a hope was a slim one at best.
Once their group had managed to fully prepare themselves for the meeting ahead, Alnesr raised his hood and joined them on their way out of the fortress. Each of Malik’s representatives had dressed themselves in their full Assassin garb, as a way to remind all of those who would be presenting themselves at the meeting – themselves included – of just what it was they were aiming to preserve. They left through the main entrance of the fortress, making their way down the path to the bottom of the mountain.
“Remember what we spoke about.”
“Of course, Malik,” he said, as his brother Assassin straightened once more and fell back into the center of their group.
Breathing more deeply to steady himself once more, Alnesr brushed the fingers of his left hand against the Hidden Blade that all Assassins wore. He’d heard Altaïr speaking about making changes to the design of the blade, particularly as to how it was worn upon the arm and hand, and while he couldn’t remember precisely what those changes had been intended to be, the weight of the blade on his arm served to remind him of that conversation all the same.
When their group of seven – Malik, and six of those who he had personally used his second-sight to select to accompany him – finally made their way down into the village that Masyaf fortress stood guard over, Alnesr searched for Abbas’ group as well as he could manage without leaving the shelter of Malik’s group. He did not find them, but when he saw that the tension that had pervaded Masyaf fortress seemed to have crept into the village, Alnesr suspected that he knew where they were.
At least in the most general of senses.
The seven of them made their way into the large building that they had all agreed upon for the meeting that they were to hold on this day of days, and Alnesr joined the others of their group in spacing themselves around the room. Abbas and his people filed into the room, and with his second-sight fully activated – the way he habitually kept it, in these late days – he could see them glowing with the red light of enemies. Chewing the inside of his lower lip, Alnesr tensed himself for combat.
“So, you and yours have finally deigned to meet with me,” Abbas said, a smile stretching his lips, one that did not nearly reach his eyes.
Sighing softly, Alnesr allowed himself to admit to himself that this day would not, indeed, end without bloodshed. Watching the men that Abbas had brought with him, keeping them within his second-sight so that he would be prepared for whatever they might attempt at the end of the discussion their two groups were having, Alnesr held himself ready for what might come. The tension between their two groups was clear enough to snap, but Abbas was at least able to hold himself back from attacking until the sun had traversed several handwiths through the sky.
The battle itself was sudden and fierce, yet because he and his had been prepared for just such an outcome, he and his were able to overwhelm them and incapacitate them to the last man. Abbas, however, was able to escape in the confusion. Alnesr was about to pursue, but a call from Malik drew his attention then.
“Malik!” he exclaimed, seeing the gaping wound in Malik’s stomach as he stepped over to where his brother Assassin was laying on the ground.
“You’ve done well, to come this far, Alnesr,” Malik said, reaching up with his remaining hand to clasp Alnesr’s own right hand. “Now, carry out your duties.”
“As you say, brother,” he said, clasping Malik’s hand a last time.
Calling some of his brother Assassins over, Alnesr directed them to do what they could for Malik, and to take him back to the fortress at Masyaf. Once he saw them getting to work, he turned and rushed out of the building in pursuit of Abbas. His second-sight allowed him to track the man even while he attempted to blend himself in among the milling crowds in Masyaf village, and so he was able to run the man down quickly, once he had broken from the milling citizens.
“Abbas!”
“So, it seems that you are the one who comes for my life, brother,” the man said, the grin on his red-glowing face appearing almost predatory.
“I had wished that it would not come to this,” he allowed himself to admit, gathering himself as he raised his blade.
“In the end, you remain Altaïr’s boy.”
“Abbas, I truly wish you had been able to overcome this bitterness you hold,” he said, raising his sword as Abbas fell upon him.
Swords clashing against one another, Alnesr braced himself and forced Abbas back. Abbas’ skill at combat seemed to have declined over the course of the three years he had been attempting to form the shadow-factions within the Brotherhood for the sake of his own bitterness. Abbas yelped in pain as Alnesr slashed the back of his knees, falling to the ground at the end of Alnesr’s sword.
“Well?” Abbas demanded, a pained expression on his face as he forcibly turned himself over, the backs of his knees still spraying blood. “Kill me, brother,” the man’s tone twisted the word into an insult. “For yourself, for Altaïr. For the Brotherhood!”
“I will not give you that pleasure, Abbas,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he brought his sword up to clean it. “I will not betray our Creed, as you and yours have.”
“Mentor, we have taken Malik back to the fortress.”
“Thank you,” he said, turning to nod at his brother Assassin.
Abbas’ mocking laughter drew his attention back to where the man lay upon the ground, his legs surrounded by a slow-growing pool of blood. “Mentor, was it? So, boy, how did you serve that one-armed bastard to be named so?”
Narrowing his eyes at the pitiful form laying on the ground before him – he was not so ignorant of the world as to be unaware of what Abbas meant – Alnesr snap-turned back to the Assassin standing next to him. “Gag him, and return him to the fortress.”
Not giving Abbas the satisfaction of an acknowledgement of his semi-coherent ranting, Alnesr made his way back to the building where they had met on this unfortunate day. Speaking to his brother Assassins, he gave them orders to return to the fortress with their own captives. He knew that it would fall to him, to cast the final judgments on the men who had acted in support of Abbas; it was what Altaïr would have done, if he had still been present to see what had become of the Brotherhood.
Alnesr wondered, for a moment, just how the conflict between Abbas’ faction and the rest of the Brotherhood would have gone if Altaïr had still been present when it was beginning to break out, but he swiftly pushed those thoughts aside; idle wool-gathering would get him nowhere. Malik had given him the role of Mentor, and no matter if Alnesr still thought himself ill-prepared or not, that was the role he would play. He did spare a thought for Altaïr, however, wishing him well in his undertakings.
That thought still in mind, Alnesr turned and made his own way back to Masyaf fortress.
Chapter 112: Homeward bound
Chapter Text
Rauf did not know if Altaïr would have handled the situation in the same way, and had said as much to the young Mentor when he had been asked, but Alnesr’s decision stood: Abbas had been locked deep within the dungeons of Masyaf, in a specially-prepared cell, there to spend the rest of his days in silent isolation for what he had done. Those who had supported Abbas had been banished from the Brotherhood, declared rogue and hunted down whenever they showed themselves.
Rauf did not know precisely why it was that Alnesr had all but named him his right hand, but at times he suspected that such was because he had been nearly as close to Altaïr as their interim Mentor was.
Alnesr may not have had the same pure force of personality and will that their brother Assassin – still gone these six years – had possessed, but he knew what it was to be an outcast because of circumstances entirely beyond one’s control, and so he did not judge any of their brother Assassins on anything but the merit their actions had earned. It was the same as Altaïr had strove to do, and Rauf said as much. Alnesr had, of course, been pleased with the accolade, and had returned to his work with the shadow of a smile upon his face.
A shadow, Rauf mused, with some fondness. It was what the people living in Masyaf village had taken to calling their interim Mentor, as a sign of their affection for him: they said that Altaïr had cast his shadow over the Brotherhood as protection, and as such the name Altaïr Alzl had come into use as a term of endearment among them. Alnesr had smiled to hear it, before swiftly returning his attention to the many tasks that a Mentor of the Brotherhood was always called upon to do.
He’d also taken on the task of tending to Abbas, still in his solitary seclusion within Masyaf’s dungeons; locked within his personal cell.
Rauf was still unsure if Altaïr would have entirely approved of the fact that his student had crippled a man, and then confined him to a cell, leaving the man with only his bitterness and spite to stew in. Alnesr had firmly stated that he would not take the life of any member of the Brotherhood, but it would have been simplicity itself to have Abbas renounce all claims of being such, and then to end him properly. Alnesr’s seemed a cruel mercy, though by the young interim Mentor’s own words he did indeed still hold hope that Abbas would find redemption through the reflection that had been forced upon him.
Rauf still did not know if Altaïr would approve of such a thing; he knew, at least, that he did not approve.
Still, on the whole Alnesr’s turn as Mentor was a great deal similar to Altaïr’s own, helped by the younger man’s willingness to consult with those who had more knowledge of how the Brotherhood had operated in the past, and those who knew Altaïr as a brother rather than a father. Rauf was pleased to see things settling back into a calm routine, and so allowed himself to settle back into his own routine. He would still need to train up a new successor, as it did not seem as though Altaïr would be returning to the Brotherhood with any real swiftness.
It having been seven years since the man had departed in the company of his son, after all.
~AC: TSC~
Altaïr often found himself wondering, as he gathered himself to return to Masyaf after nine long years of being away from the fortress and all of his brother Assassins, how Malik was fairing with all of his new responsibilities as the interim Mentor of the Brotherhood. Leaving had not been an easy thing, no matter how much he knew that Genghis Khan’s advance needed to be stopped, and the reminder of his own steadily-increasing age had not been a pleasant one. Still, he had clearly been in need of such a thing, in light of his clear failure to infiltrate the Khan’s camp.
He, Darim, and their Mongolian brother Assassin Qulan Gal had succeeded in their task to kill Genghis Khan, finding the Sword that had allowed him to gather so many disparate peoples under his command, and to cow so many others into submission so that he could spread his influence with as little bloodshed as possible. Some would have said that the Khan’s path was the true way to peace, but such a thing was unstable and short-lived at best. Like as not, any gains made in such a fashion would be lost at the end of the Khan’s life.
The kind of man who would create such a peace was not, after all, one who would trust that others would be capable of carrying it on.
As he and his bid farewell and good fortune to Qulan Gal and the man’s own brother Assassins, Altaïr turned his thoughts back to Malik and his own brother Assassins in the Levant. He’d kept himself from wondering at the state of his brother Assassins in Masyaf by way of stern discipline, and the constant reminders of his, Darim’s and Maria’s task in this place. Maria and Darim had both acquired skills with the crossbow, though Darim’s arm-strength and particular preference for such a weapon were most of the reasons that Altaïr had brought his and Maria’s eldest into Mongolia with them.
Another reason was that, no matter how he wished that he could deny time its due, he and Maria were simply not so young as they had once been. Such had been a lesson he had learned all too well when he and Qulan Gal had attempted to infiltrate the Khan’s holdings: he had been detected, and the pair of them had been forced to flee without the information they had been seeking. True, Darim had still managed to kill Genghis Khan in spite of that lack, but the failure itself had still served as an uncomfortable reminder of his own mortality.
True, in the end such had likely been exactly what he had needed to keep from making another foolish mistake, but all the same it had not been a thing that he enjoyed.
Shoving those thoughts firmly from his mind, Altaïr set about arranging the next leg of their journey. He was not about to allow himself to become lost within the Apple, not when there were so many others around him, and not when he knew that the man in black was so eager to taunt and distract him with cryptic statements that pulled at any Assassin’s natural curiosity. He’d long since come to realize that the man in black, whatever connections he might have held to those who bore his imprint as Alnesr did, was not one to share his motives.
It was a troublesome thing, the man in black’s insistence upon keeping everything of himself – even his own name – a secret to those who might chance upon him. Shaking his head, Altaïr banished those thoughts from his mind. This, of all places, was not one he could allow himself to be distracted.
~AC: TSC~
She could see that it weighed upon him, the fact that he was no longer the brash young Assassin he had been when the two of them had met for the first time, and Maria knew that she would need to speak to her mutton-headed husband before he allowed himself to fall too deeply into the melancholy that seemed to be consuming him with every day he spent away from their brother Assassins in the Levant. But for the moment, with Altaïr engaged in procuring their latest form of transport, Maria knew that it was hardly the time. Particularly given how fully she knew the old man’s stubbornness.
Still, she would make herself heard, even if she was forced to box the old goat’s ears so that he would actually listen.
As the their small family made their way back to the home that Maria had known for almost as long as she had been a member of the Templar Order – nearly longer, in fact – Maria smiled softly. They switched transports periodically, in order that they might further obscure their trail from those who might have otherwise sought to follow them, and the three of them were also scrupulously careful about blending into the varied crowds they encountered. She might have easily called it unchecked paranoia, but there was something to be said for honing one’s skill in a comparatively safe environment.
She was not nearly blind enough to have missed the way her stubborn, proud husband’s misstep in dealing with the Khan had continued to trouble him during the course of their preparations for returning to Masyaf.
And so, Maria continued to watch, ensuring that she and Darim were both close enough to intervene when her husband’s pride – or even his uncertainties, in light of what could have happened if things had gone differently – got the better of him. It was in that way that the three of them returned at last to the Levant: herself and Darim seeing to her husband’s mental state, while the man himself saw to their means of travel. Maria could hardly be more pleased to be returning to Masyaf, after what had happened.
If nothing else, he would appreciate seeing the Brotherhood that he had worked so hard to preserve and expand with his own eyes once again, and to reassure himself that they had been well in his absence.
Chapter 113: Shadow Brotherhood
Chapter Text
He was happier than he had been in some time for the fact that he had managed to convince Maria Thorpe that the cause of the Templars was not all there was in the world; that such would not bring her the freedom she sought, in the end. He was glad, because traveling with Maria and Darim made the journey seem to go all the more quickly and easily. He was still curious as to how Malik had been managing, both concerning the affairs of the Brotherhood as a whole, and in the matter of his own affairs.
He was also curious as to how Alnesr had been managing. He was not entirely pleased to admit, even if only to himself, that the cryptic words of the man in black – those few times that he had been given to look within the Apple – had almost succeeded in tempting him to return to Masyaf more quickly and more directly than he otherwise would have. Only the stern reminders that there may have yet been more Templars or other enemies upon the paths that they were called to travel had prevented him from taking such a foolish risk.
It would be a poor repayment indeed, to bring the Templars back to Masyaf when all that he’d truly wished to do was see to Alnesr’s health.
And so Altaïr continued on, taking care not to leave a coherent trail for the Templars or other enemies he might have made during the course of his hunt for the Khan. Sooner than he would have thought, Altaïr found himself within the limits of the village surrounding Masyaf fortress. The village itself seemed to have expanded, if only slightly; it was a thought that brought the smallest of smiles to Altaïr’s weathered face. It seemed he needn’t have worried for Malik’s adaptability at all.
If anything the slight expansion made to Masyaf village, the one that he could now see was not simply a product of what might have been charitably called misplaced optimism, proved that he had not been mistaken in his choice of the man who would watch over the Brotherhood while he could not have been present. Wishing for nothing more than to speak with Rauf, and so let Malik know that he would be making his way up to the fortress to relieve him of command at last, Altaïr hurried his steps. He was certain that Malik would appreciate the gesture, if only because his brother Assassin had not particularly wanted the position he’d been given.
More than likely, Malik would be entirely happy to give the position back to him.
Catching the eye of one of the nearby citizens, an older man who smiled to see him as he walked along with his gaggle of chattering children, Altaïr asked him to direct Rauf to them as soon as he could. When the man had agreed, after assuring the children that he would tell them just who the old Assassin he was speaking to actually was, Altaïr thanked him for his time and happily moved deeper into the village. However, it seemed as though that appellation would no longer hold quite so true as it once had, if the expansion that he was seeing continued apace.
Indeed, Masyaf’s protectorate village seemed to have blossomed into the smallest of towns during the course of the ten years that he, Maria, and Darim had been away hunting for Genghis Khan; he was pleased to see such a thing, as it meant that Malik’s leadership of the Brotherhood had indeed been well-chosen, but it was also a reminder of just how much time had passed during that selfsame task.
“It seems as though Malik has done quite well for himself,” he said, both because it was true, and because he’d felt the need to say something, or be drawn into musings of just how much time truly stood between Altaïr the Mentor of the Levantine Brotherhood, and Altaïr the aging Assassin.
“Yes, it does indeed seem so,” Maria said, a knowing smile gentling the planes of her weathered face. “But, I suspect that’s not the only thing on your mind, my husband.”
He laughed softly. “As ever, you’ve seen through me, Maria.” He sighed, no longer feeling quite so jovial as he once had. “All of this… truly, it serves to remind me of how old I really am.”
Maria’s own laugh was quite a bit louder, as was her way. “Do you think I don’t notice that as well, my husband? Time passes; it’s not as though you and I would be able to stop that.”
“I know,” he said, smiling gently at her admonishment. “It’s a foolish thing, and yet I find I can’t stop thinking about it.”
“I suppose that not all of us can accept our own mortality with the same ease,” she said, and Altaïr sighed more softly.
“Yes.”
Looking back up, he saw Rauf making his way down the path towards them.
“Welcome back, brothers!” Rauf called happily, raising his right arm to wave a greeting to them, before coming forward to take the reins and lead their horses to the waiting stables. “I hope your journey has been prosperous!”
“I sent reports,” he said, smiling at Rauf’s enthusiasm.
“Bah, always better to hear a story from the source, than to just read it in a book,” Rauf returned, the warmth of amusement never leaving his face or tone. “That’s what I say.”
“Indeed,” he said, smiling indulgently at the man who still seemed to look up to him, even though he’d not hidden any of his failings from any of his brother Assassins who composed his inner-circle. “Well, as I’ve little patience for telling the same story more than once, I’m afraid you’ll have to wait until I speak with Malik.”
The sigh that he heard in response was not nearly so cheerful as the tone that Rauf had been speaking in before, but Altaïr was only given a moment to wonder about that, before his brother Assassin turned an expression of rueful sadness back on him. “I’d hoped to be able to deliver you better tidings than this when you arrived, Mentor.”
He’d no time to wonder what it was that Rauf was speaking of, before his brother Assassin began detailing just what had happened during the ten, long years he had spent working, first to find Genghis Khan’s encampment, and then to kill him so that the people he had been oppressing could know peace.
Hearing that it had been Abbas’ bitterness that had nearly split the Brotherhood in twain was not at all what he had wished to hear, but such a thing paled in comparison to hearing that Malik had been killed during the course of what had been said to be a peace talk. He’d never wanted to think any of his brother Assassins capable of such betrayal, but such thoughts had been in his head while he had been confronting Al Mualim as well. Both times, Altaïr had found himself ever more thankful that he hadn’t made such a mistake with every one of those he’d chosen to give his trust to.
When the three of them had dismounted their horses, leaving them in the care of Masyaf’s skilled stable hands, Altaïr nodded to Rauf and, falling into step with his brother Assassin as the four of them made their way up through the various levels of Masyaf fortress on their way to the Master’s tower to meet with Alnesr. On their way, Altaïr could see that the same, bustling atmosphere present in the village that they had passed through not so very long ago was present there as well. True, such a thing was more subdued than what he had seen outside, but like as not that was simply due to the nature of the work that the Brotherhood was engaged in.
He was pleased to see it, all the same.
As he and his continued on their journey through the halls and corridors of the fortress, moving steadily upward toward the Master’s tower, Altaïr continued to sweep his eyes about. He was met with smiles from those Assassins old enough to have met him in person, and curious gazes from those too young, and he smiled to see both. Coming to the top of the tower he’d not set foot in for ten, long years, Altaïr paused a moment to allow Rauf to announce him.
Making his way up to the desk, smiling all the wider as Alnesr raised his head, pale yellow eyes meeting his across the room.
“Alnesr.”
Chapter 114: The Shadow in daylight
Chapter Text
He’d been anticipating his brother Assassin’s return for every day of the month since he’d been placed in command of the entirety of the Levantine Brotherhood, so when the sound of soft boots, the kind that nearly every member of the Brotherhood wore, sounded from just inside the Master’s tower, Alnesr was barely able to finish the work that he’d had set before him before sitting up to see just who it was that had come in to see him.
“I’m glad to see you again, brother,” he said, smiling as he stood up from behind the desk that he had been seated behind for so many days that even he had started to lose track.
“I am sorry to hear about Malik, but I truly appreciate the good work you have been doing here, Alnesr,” his brother Assassin, former Master, and father in all but blood said, smiling gently at him, while at the same time crossing the floor so that the two of them could speak with one another more personally.
“I’m simply pleased to see you again, brother,” he said, stepping out from behind Altaïr’s desk and swiftly crossing the remaining distance between the two of them.
Allowing himself the luxury of a brief embrace, knowing that his brother Assassin would not disparage him for the need of it, Alnesr allowed himself to relax for at least a moment. He might not have known what else this day of all days would bring, but now he could at least say that he was better prepared to face it.
When Altaïr requested a formal report on what had occurred while he had been away, Alnesr gathered himself in preparation as he presented it. The presentation itself had been a thing that he had worked on for a great long time when Altaïr had first departed, though his enthusiasm for such had steadily waned as the years had stretched on and he was left with only reading Altaïr’s own reports about the situation he had found himself in. Still, he had taken care to update the report where needed, so he was not concerned with the state of it.
For his part, Altaïr did not seem to disapprove of his handling of the situation with regards to Abbas and his splinter-faction, though the fact that he wished to speak with the man came as something of a surprise; though Abbas had been his friend as much as he had been Alnesr’s uncle, so perhaps it should not have.
~AC: TSC~
Following Alnesr’s lead as his former Apprentice and current Mentor of the Levantine Assassins proceeded him down into the lower portions of Masyaf, the pair of them on their way to the dungeons, Altaïr reflected on Alnesr’s conduct during the time he had taken the post that Altaïr himself had been unable to for ten years. It was the same as he himself might well have done, had he been in the same position and armed with the same knowledge as his former Apprentice, and while he was glad that the Brotherhood had prospered in the decade of his absence, Altaïr could not help wishing that he could have stayed.
Perhaps he could have done something more, but the past was the past, and all the wishes in the world would not change what had happened; best to look to the future, now.
When the pair of them arrived in the dungeons beneath Masyaf, a place that he could remember from the mishap in his and Alnesr’s youth that had first turned Abbas into his enemy, Altaïr steadied himself and followed Alnesr into the cell that had been prepared. The room itself had been further isolated from the other cells within Masyaf’s dungeon by wooden slats and empty cells, and Altaïr found himself musing on just how his former Apprentice had ultimately dealt with the man who had once been so close to the both of them.
It was well that Alnesr had refrained from killing him, since it served to show his brother Assassin was indeed genuine in his desire not to shed the blood of even a former Assassin such as Abbas, and yet… The fate that his once-brother had suffered was not one that Altaïr would have wished on the bitterest of his enemies. However, it seemed that Abbas had become just that, even as Altaïr himself had forgiven the man for his previous transgressions.
Such thoughts, however they might have been unavoidable in a situation so complicated as this, were not likely to help his position.
Tailing Alnesr as his brother Assassin made his way at last into the cell where Abbas had been confined to reflect on his bitterness – if such was even possible at this late stage; it was an unkind thought, but Altaïr found that he could not avoid it so well as he might have liked – Altaïr found that, for all his secluded isolation, Abbas was well cared-for. It was well to know that his brother Assassin had chosen to forgo even the pettiest form of revenge when he was confining Abbas.
“Come to see me again, brother?” Abbas sneered, the venom in his tone twisting the word into an insult.
“Abbas,” he said, drawing the attention of the one at the center of the cell where he and Alnesr now stood.
~AC: TSC~
Watching as Altaïr and Abbas confronted each other for the first time in ten long years, Alnesr allowed himself to breathe more easily. He was at pleased to know that Altaïr did indeed approve of the actions he had taken in the name of protecting and preserving the Brotherhood. However, he was also aware of the fact that his mentor wished that he himself could have found a better way to handle the situation that the three of them had found themselves in.
Almost as though Altaïr wished he could turn time itself on its head, though such a thing was impossible.
Following his mentor from Abbas’ cell as the pair of them departed, Alnesr wondered just what it was that Altaïr would wish to do next. Taking back leadership of the Brotherhood was such an obvious thing that it hardly needed stating, but beyond that, Alnesr could not be certain just what it was that his mentor would wish of him. The two of them continued on their way back to the tower that Alnesr had never truly allowed himself to feel at home in; always, he had reminded himself that he was simply holding it while the true Master of the Brotherhood was away on a journey.
And now that his brother and mentor had returned, Alnesr was more than happy to set aside the responsibilities that had been pressed upon him as interim Master of the Assassins.
Chapter 115: The choice
Chapter Text
He noticed that Alnesr seemed lighter on his feet – more comfortable in his own skin – and was pleased to see such as thing; more than that, he knew the cause of such a thing, and was already making plans to help his brother Assassin gain the full confidence that his odd appearance – the one he shared with the man in black, and all of those who had been “marked” by him – seemed to have denied him.
Resting his right hand lightly upon Alnesr’s broad shoulders – his brother Assassin had truly come into his own; no longer a child, but a man fully grown – he returned the smile offered to him, and opened the door to let them both back inside his old study.
“Alnesr, stay a moment more,” he called, halting his brother in his tracks, just as he was turning to leave. “I would speak with you.”
“What is it, Altaïr?” his brother Assassin asked, seating himself in the chair that Altaïr directed him to.
“I’ve heard only good things about your time as Master of the Levantine Brotherhood,” he said, smiling gently as Alnesr made himself more comfortable in the chair where he was seated. “And, while I am certain that Rauf will be grateful to see you return to your post, I would consider it a personal favor if you would be willing to meet with me more often than you’ve done in the past.”
“Very well, brother,” Alnesr said, though Altaïr could still see that he was rather confused.
“Malik was right, to trust you with the responsibility he did,” he explained; and, though he knew that he would still need time to mourn his lost brother, Altaïr also knew that he would not be alone in such mourning. “And, hearing how well you bore up under the responsibilities you were given, I would see fit to train you as my own successor, as well.”
“I thank you for your confidence, brother,” Alnesr said, though he sounded a bit befuddled by what he had just heard; Altaïr knew that his brother Assassin’s early life had not been conductive to building confidence in himself, but he was determined to correct such a thing as much as he could.
“Come to me when you finish instructing your students for the day,” he said, reaching out to gently take hold of Alnesr’s right shoulder. “And, thank you for seeing to the safety of our brothers.”
“Of course, Altaïr,” Alnesr said, bowing slightly as he rose back to his feet to leave.
Dismissing his faithful brother, Altaïr turned his attention back to the matter of overseeing the Brotherhood’s operations. Alnesr would keep, particularly since his former Apprentice had his own duties and commitments now. And, as ever, Altaïr’s own duties were to the Brotherhood as a whole, and naturally took precedence over his favor for any one Assassin in particular.
~AC: TSC~
Knowing that the Templars were still at large within the world, Altaïr had resolved himself to begin enacting the reforms that he had devised for the Brotherhood, so that they might be able to adapt to the world as it continued to change around them, rather than being left behind. He and Alnesr had already begun arranging for their brother and sister Assassins to leave Masyaf fortress for the various enclaves and guilds that had been steadily set up throughout the Levant, and now the pair of them were aiding in the scholars’ efforts to make copies of the texts that had filled Masyaf’s vast library.
He could see that Alnesr was pleased to be given such a task, and Altaïr was perfectly content to admit that he shared such a feeling, as well.
Once they had finished as much work as they could manage for the day, Altaïr was just as pleased to return to his other duties as Alnesr seemed to be. And, while it was indeed true that his load of duties were becoming lighter with the fewer Assassins that remained at the fortress with them, the duties themselves were no less important. Knowing that, and pleased to see that the dispersal of their brother and sister Assassins from Masyaf was proceeding as well as could be expected for those who were being made to leave the only home that many of them had ever known, Altaïr was as pleased as he could be with matters as they stood.
He’d been taking time to update both his personal codex, as well as the one he had started concerning both the man in black and those who seemed to be either his associates or his disciples – there seemed to be images of those ranging in age from adults to those who had barely left childhood behind, and so Altaïr had no means of truly determining what their relationship with the man in black ultimately was – but for the moment nothing pressed upon his mind save for those responsibilities he had accepted when he had taken up the mantle of Mentor of the Brotherhood.
“How goes the exodus?” he asked, looking up as Alnesr and Darim came striding into his study and arrayed themselves before him.
“Well enough, father,” Darim reported. “However, those who consider this place a home are not particularly eager to leave it.”
“I’d not have expected them to be,” he said, smiling gently at his eldest son. “Truthfully, I even find myself missing the glory days of Masyaf, and the Brotherhood’s own, as well. Alnesr, how go the scholars’ efforts?”
“Masyaf’s main library has nearly been completely copied, and those texts essential to learning the ways of our Creed have been disseminated with those groups being sent out among the cities of the Levant,” his brother Assassin reported.
“I’m pleased to hear that, Alnesr,” he said, nodding with a small smile on his face. “Continue to see to the evacuation, Darim. Alnesr, stay a moment.”
The pair of them bowed and Darim quickly turned to attend to the duties assigned to him.
“What is it you wished to speak to me about, Mentor?”
“The time for another visit to Abbas has come upon us,” he said, feeling his old bones creak as he rose from his chair.
He saw a flash of worry in Alnesr’s yellow eyes – so unlike the chilling avarice he could always see so clearly in the eyes of the man in black; it was how he reminded himself that, in spite of the coloring they shared, his brother Assassin was nothing like the man in black – and smiled, slightly ruefully, in an aim to reassure him.
“When you come to be my age, brother, I think you will find that you are no longer quite so eager to rise when you have been seated for some time.”
It was Alnesr’s turn to laugh ruefully, though his amusement seemed to be directed more at himself, as the pair of them made their way steadily deeper into the emptying halls and corridors of Masyaf. He could truly see what Darim meant, in these quiet moments of reflection: it was indeed a pitiful sight, watching the fortress being stripped bare of life and emptied of knowledge. Still, it was and would be a necessary step on the path of remaking the Brotherhood into what it would need to be, so that the Assassins and their Creed could survive in the coming era. It helped when he thought of matters in such a way.
Continuing on their journey down through the levels of the fortress that lay between the tower where he spent so much of his time and the dungeon that Abbas had been consigned to after his betrayal, Altaïr reflected again upon just what he was ultimately going to do with the former Assassin. The simplest answer would be to leave him to live out the rest of his days in quiet seclusion within the cell that Alnesr had caused to be prepared for him, but Altaïr could not help the thought that such a thing would be cruel beyond measure. To be locked away from all sight and sound, not only of the outside world but of all people save two…
He could not hush the thoughts that placed him in Abbas’ position; such a thing had to be the worst of tortures to one who had once been one of the fortress’ own Assassins.
Still, Abbas was clearly a man who had allowed bitterness and wrath to consume what compassion he might have had during the early years of his life, and so Altaïr knew that he would need to handle his future conversations with Abbas with at least some modicum of tact.
When the pair of them made their way down into the specially prepared cell where Abbas had been isolated on Alnesr’s orders – orders that he had once been tempted to rescind, if only for a moment, when he had retaken control of the Brotherhood from the younger Assassin – Altaïr sighed softly as he beheld the slumped form of Abbas seated before them. He knew that Abbas had been the one to bring this fate upon himself, if only because he had refused to give up on his bitterness until Alnesr was left with no other recourse but to confine him in the dungeon so he could not cause any more damage. Abbas was a pitiful figure, here and now, but Altaïr always made as best an effort as he could not to show the thoughts that were in his mind when he faced the man.
Nothing of that nature would ever be beneficial to his and Abbas’ situation; even before he’d succumbed to bitterness so completely, Abbas had always hated pity.
Chapter 116: Third option
Chapter Text
Having settled herself back into the Assassin’s fortress of Masyaf, Maria couldn’t have honestly said that she was happy to have been forced to leave it. Still, with the Mongols making plans for an all-out assault on the fortress, and the reforms that Altaïr had instated within the Brotherhood as a whole, she could understand the need for such a thing. That didn’t mean that she was any more pleased to have such a situation forced upon her, of course.
She’d been asked to help with the evacuation, something that she had agreed to do after only a moment’s thought, and now she was helping to shepherd the remaining Assassins as they dispersed in pairs and groups from Masyaf, instructing them to meet up again when they could be certain that they hadn’t been followed by any of the various enemies that the Brotherhood had accumulated during the course of its long existence; the remaining Templars in particular, of course.
Once she had managed as much of that task as she could in a single day, Maria returned to the chambers that she shared with Altaïr so that the pair of them could take what rest they needed after this rather trying day; and all of the days that would be soon to come after it.
~AC: TSC~
When he found himself being gently hurried away from his desk and all the papers atop it, Altaïr smiled softly as he looked up into the faces of the two he had become so close to over the course of his life.
“I expect you’re not going to be dissuaded if I tell you I have work to do,” he stated, his tone one of fond resignation.
“Of course not, you stubborn old goat,” Maria said; Alnesr laughed softly into his right hand, and Altaïr smiled a bit wider to see the pair of them enjoying each other’s company. “If I was able to let my own work rest, when there’s still so much to be done, I’ll accept nothing less from you.”
“Of course not, Maria,” he said, smiling a bit wider as he allowed her to help him from his seat. “Truly, I would almost have been disappointed if you had.”
The three of them shared a companionable chuckle, even as Altaïr allowed himself to be guided out of his study and back to the room that he and Maria had shared since the day they wed. As the pair of them went about preparing themselves for sleep, Altaïr was made all the more aware of the limitations that his increasing age was placing on him. Even these small tasks were becoming more of a chore with every day that passed.
It was not a prospect he enjoyed, but he’d lived too long – he’d done too much – to allow himself to mourn something he’d long known was inevitable.
~AC: TSC~
The next time he was able to lay his hands to the Apple, Altaïr found that he had very little desire to look into the artifact at all. He knew that the man in black would present himself once more. The man in black, with his cryptic pronouncements, his barely-hidden avarice, and of late his increasingly tempting offers.
Anyone with eyes to see the pair of them could not possibly miss the fact that, while he had long since passed the prime of his life, the man in black had not seemed to age a single day since Altaïr had first caught sight of him; the first time he had chosen to show himself.
Still, there might very well have been other wonders that he could create, using the designs and principles that the artifact could show him. It could very well be, that by refusing to make use of the Apple the way he was doing, he could end up inadvertently depriving the Brotherhood of something they would have need of in the future. Or, perhaps Maria is right, and this damned artifact has drawn me in too far; poisoning my mind and making me crave it, consequences be damned.
Altaïr knew his own mind, however; if he did not take this chance he had been presented with at the moment it had been presented to him, it would only gnaw at his mind, and then he would all too easily find himself seeking out the Apple more often, increasing his risk of losing himself to the artifact when he inevitably gazed into it.
Removing the Apple from the chest where he’d long stored it, Altaïr held the artifact before his eyes as it began to activate. The traceries of light within the artifact lit up slowly, and the heavily-cloaked form of the man in black appeared to stride slowly out of the Apple itself. His gait and manner had become no less predatory over the years, and the sly smile on his face was no smaller than he’d ever seen it.
“Have you been considering my offer, Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad?”
“My answer is the same as before: I’ve no interest in what you offer. When my time on this world ends, I will be content.”
“What about your Brotherhood? Have you no concern what might happen to those you care for without you?”
“All of my brother and sister Assassins have proven themselves quite capable,” he said, deliberately refraining from giving the names of those he trusted. “I will entrust what remains to them.”
“How quaint,” the man in black said, eyes narrowing in what seemed to be a sort of amused contempt.
He vanished not soon after speaking those words, leaving Altaïr free to examine the Apple itself in some form for peace. He remained, however, rather uncomfortably aware of the presence of the man in black as he continued to seek out more of the information that the Apple contained. Retrieving his codex, Altaïr’s thoughts turned to the second codex he had been writing.
Of late, the words of the man in black had turned towards the future, and his possible role in it, if only he would surrender himself to whatever it was that the man in black offered.
Given the man’s stubborn refusal to reveal so much as his name without playing word games, even claiming that such a thing was of no importance, Altaïr was unwilling to give him the benefit of any possible doubt. Still, he’d already recorded the temptations the man in black offered, as well as advice to any future members of the Brotherhood who might chance to lay their hands to this particular Apple not to listen.
Gathering himself once again, Altaïr dismissed the Apple’s phantasms and placed the artifact itself back in the chest that he’d since taken to storing under his bed. Closing the codex with a soft snap, Altaïr placed it back down on his desk and left his room. There were other matters still to be taken care of; particularly with regards to the Brotherhood and the few Assassins that remained within the fortress that they were slowly, steadily evacuating.
Making his way back to his study, Altaïr settled himself back down at his desk.
Chapter 117: March of time
Chapter Text
He’d been hearing more and more tales of Mongol advances into Assassin-held territory, and upon learning that their ultimate aim was to strike at Masyaf itself, Alnesr came to fully understand just why Altaïr continued to evacuate the fortress, even after enough of their brother and sister Assassins had departed the fortress that they would be able to create and maintain strongholds for the Brotherhood within the cities they were being dispatched to. He was pleased to know that the Brotherhood would outlast Masyaf itself, though he’d had little doubt in any case, owing to the many travels he had made at the side of Altaïr and Maria, each of them doing their part to spread the Creed to those they encountered.
Lately, however, he’d also begun to hear that Darim – who had traveled abroad to France and England so as to warn those of the Brotherhood who operated in those areas of the encroaching threat of the Mongols – was making his way back to Masyaf.
“Alnesr.”
“Altaïr. It’s good to see you again, Mentor,” he said, smiling even as he caught sight of the expression on his brother Assassin’s face. “What troubles you?”
“I wish for you to retake command of the Brotherhood for a year,” the Mentor of the Levantine Assassins said. “There is something I must see to, within the fortress of Alamut.”
“Very well, Mentor,” he said, rather confused about what reason his brother Assassin could have for asking such a thing of him, but still knowing that it was his duty to aid his mentor with the skill he’d trained to have. “I wish you all luck in your endeavor.”
“Thank you, Alnesr,” Altaïr said, smiling softly at him as he turned to leave.
~AC: TSC~
Departing Masyaf with little fanfare, Altaïr made his way to the old fortress of Alamut. While he was perfectly aware that Maria would not approve of his leaving, and even less of the fact that he had brought the Apple with him, he knew that there was little chance of him resting comfortably when there was clearly something of interest to the Brotherhood within the abandoned fortress. He’d left quietly enough that he didn’t think Maria would have noticed, or been curious enough to follow if she had.
Still, he knew that Maria would be truly, thoroughly displeased with him when he was able to return to Masyaf once more; in this case, he felt that it was far better to beg forgiveness than to ask permission.
Chapter 118: Shared sorrow
Chapter Text
Returning to Altaïr’s study, once again feeling the weight of responsibility that he had taken on at the request of his mentor – the Mentor of the Levantine Brotherhood, but Alnesr had long since accepted that he would always think of Altaïr as his mentor first – Alnesr settled in behind the desk, just as someone came in through the door.
“Father, I must speak with you.”
“Darim? What troubles you?”
“Brother,” Altaïr’s eldest son greeted him. “I didn’t know that Father had placed you in command of the Brotherhood again.”
“He said that there was some matter of interest to him in the old fortress of Alamut,” he said, watching the expression on Darim’s face to see if he might be able to interpret what his brother Assassin wanted more easily. “What troubles you, brother?”
“When Sef and I were returning to this place to make our report, we were waylaid by bandits,” Darim said, something in his tone letting Alnesr know that the tale he was relating would not have a happy ending. “And, while we were able to rid the world of their presence, our own time spent traveling left us ill-prepared for a fight such as the one we found ourselves in. Sef was gravely injured, and while I did all that I could for him, he passed away before I could bring him within sight of the village.”
Alnesr closed his eyes. “I am sorry to hear that, Darim. Sef was one of my best students, alongside you.”
“Thank you for your kind words, brother,” Darim said, making an attempt to smile that Alnesr was grateful to see, though he wished that such a thing had not been so much of a struggle as it seemed. “I wish that I could have spoken with Father and Mother about this; they should both know the fate of one of our own.”
“I will send a message to Alamut for you, if you wish to reestablish contact,” he offered.
“Thank you, brother,” Darim said, a gentle smile on his face.
“Of course.”
Darim left not soon after that, bidding him farewell as he did so, and Alnesr turned his thoughts back to the work he would still need to do.
~AC: TSC~
When she saw the tall, broad form of her eldest son returning to the fortress, Maria thought that Sef would be along shortly; the pair of them having departed together from Masyaf in order to make contact with their fellow Assassins who lived and worked outside the walls of the fortress or the confines of the village. Thinking that Sef might have needed to go to the infirmary, Maria made her own way down through the varied levels of Masyaf to see if she could find him.
When her elder son came to find her directly, Maria could tell by the expression on his face that something had gone wrong; it may have been cliché to say that a mother knew her sons, but Maria had always made the effort to stay in touch with both of her sons.
“Darim, what has gone wrong? Where is Sef?”
“Sef was killed during our return to Masyaf,” her eldest admitted, sounding about as pained as Maria felt at that moment. “The pair of us were overtaken by bandits, and while we were able to overcome them, in the end, Sef’s injuries proved too great for him. He perished during the course of our return journey.”
“I see,” she said, closing her eyes briefly as she breathed deeply to steady herself.
It was not a thing that she had been unprepared for, precisely, being the wife of an Assassin and having training as one herself, but this was still not a thing she enjoyed. Truly, she would have looked askance at anyone who did.
Turning her steps, Maria made her way up to the tower where her stubborn old goat of a husband kept himself so busy that she honestly doubted he himself had heard of Sef’s death. However, when she did make her way up to the tower where Altaïr held court, she found that it was Alnesr behind the desk. Hard at work, yes, but he was not the one she was searching for.
“So, where is that stubborn old goat of a husband of mine?” she asked, folding her arms as she gazed sternly down at him.
“He said that there was something of interest to him within the old fortress of Alamut,” Altaïr’s former student informed her.
She sighed. “Like as not, he brought the Apple, as well. Damned old fool,” she muttered, recalling her husband’s sheer obsession with the artifact.
“I could make certain, if you wish,” the earnest younger Assassin – no longer a boy, or even a young man, but still with fewer years than either herself or Altaïr – said.
“No,” she said, and shook her head gently. “It’s kind of you to make the offer, but I would not ask you to risk yourself against the man in black, if he remains present.”
The younger Assassin had nothing else to say after that exchange, and so Maria saw herself out. Clearly, she would need to find her stubborn goat of a husband and have words with him at Alamut. As soon as she was able to provision a horse.
Chapter 119: Darkness and yellow eyes
Chapter Text
When he was finally able to settle himself within the abandoned fortress of Alamut, Altaïr turned his gaze toward the Apple once more. It was one of the more pressing reasons that he had chosen a location that had been both long-abandoned, and was also far enough removed from surrounding settlements that he would not need to fear the man in black appearing before those who might not have had the foresight to resist his temptations. Alamut served well on both counts.
There was also a small part of him that wished to keep the Apple to himself; it was a part he made every effort to disregard, but Altaïr was aware of it all the same.
Focusing his attention upon the Apple once more, Altaïr picked up the artifact and cradled it in his right hand. When the traceries of colorless light emerged from the strangely colored sphere – it was clearly not gold, nor copper, having more the coloration of bronze or brass, and yet none of the weight – Altaïr narrowed his eyes as he saw the heavily-cloaked form of the man in black striding calmly out of the colorless light cast by the Apple.
“How nice to see you again, Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad.”
“I’ve no need to hear your offer again, as you already know my answer,” he said, nearly before the man in black had finished speaking.
“Perhaps. But, there may yet come a time when you find yourself at an end, and in need of assistance. When that time comes, call upon me.”
Turning his gaze away from the man in black, leaving the pair of them in deep, almost profound silence, Altaïr turned his full attention to the sights that the Apple itself was showing to him. Truly, if he was to improve the lot of his brother and sister Assassins, he would need far more than merely an armor design that even he had realized would be too much of a risk to release to the world at large, if for some reason the Brotherhood was unable to keep it out of the hands of those who would naturally covet the item.
Chapter 120: Make work
Chapter Text
Drawing himself away from such idle wool gathering once more, Altaïr focused his mind on the odd play of colorless light from within the Apple. The light itself formed dancing patterns in the air, and those patterns soon resolved themselves into the same kinds of images that he had used to derive the formula to create the armor that he had hidden away from those who might have been tempted to misuse it. Even his own brother and sister Assassins might, in a fit of desperation, use it to make their lives and their missions simpler.
Truly, Altaïr did not know if he himself would have been able to resist such a temptation, had it been presented to him as a younger man.
~AC: TSC~
Making her way along one of the many paths that her stubborn goat of a husband might have used as he traversed the distance between Masyaf and Alamut, Maria sighed as the bobbing and swaying of the horse finally became troublesome enough that she was forced to dismount in order to rest her aching bones.
“This is no job for an old woman,” she muttered, laughing ruefully to herself as she tied her horse by the well and made her way over to the saddlebags that the animal carried.
Taking out a small meal of dried food, Maria settled herself down in the shade of the well to rest and to eat. She wished, for a fleeting moment, that the one was not so important as the other, but she knew that such a thing was the price for living so long as she had. And, in light of the only other alternative, Maria was pleased with her life. Now, if I can just convince that stubborn goat of a husband of mine, I’ll be even more pleased.
Sighing as she once again began to marshal her arguments for dealing with Altaïr and his at-times-damnable curiosity, Maria settled back under the shade of the well to eat while she rested her weary old bones.
~AC: TSC~
When he had completed what work he was able to complete the work he’d begun, adding to and improving upon the tools and tactics that the Brotherhood itself had devised over the course of their existence, Altaïr turned his mind to the other matters that the Apple had brought to up for him to reflect upon. It was beginning to seem as though the Brotherhood had not been simply the creation of the Old Man of the Mountain, but something that he had rediscovered. Something that may well have been older than any of them.
Many of the sights the Apple had shown to him, while they had seemed to be far more technologically advanced than anything he had seen short of the Apple itself, still somehow appeared to have a great deal of age to them.
Exploring more of the mysteries that the Apple had left to present was yet another reason that he had wished to be free of distractions in a place such as Alamut. Beyond those, basic concerns of security and safety that they were, there was also the matter of the fortress itself. If what he had seen within the Apple was indeed true, there was a cache of artifacts stored within Alamut that had been created by those who had had a hand in creating the very artifact that had led him to them in the first place.
There was also the matter of the man in black himself; Altaïr had resolved himself that he would at least attempt to gain some information from him, even if the man himself was bound and determined to retain his air of mystery.
He knew that the information he gained in such a way was not likely to be fully reliable, but he would at least know more about his motivations and the ends he sought than he presently did.
Turning his mind to the problem of the man in black, Altaïr wondered just how he was to draw the attention of the man in black once more. As it turned out, however, he needn’t have concerned himself with such a thing to begin with. Appearing from within the depths of the Apple once again, this time seeming to step out from the light itself with a subdued flourish of his long, heavy-looking cloak.
“Well, this is rather interesting,” he said, the shadow of his typically avaricious smile appearing on his face, even as he pulled back his hood and allowed his brilliant, silver hair to spill free. “Is this, perhaps, a sign that you’ve reconsidered my offer, Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad?”
“You well know how I answered you on every previous occasion; please do not delude yourself by thinking that this day will be different.”
“Indeed,” the man in black said, his own amusement seeming to permeate the air around him. “Well, if you have no intention of accepting my offer, why did you call upon me?”
“I wish to know more about you,” he said, knowing even as the man in black smiled in that same, sly manner of his that such a thing would only serve to encourage his ambitions, but Altaïr knew that he had come to the end of what he could learn about the man merely from observing him.
“Oh? And, what will you give me in return?”
“I don’t doubt you’ve been observing far more of the Brotherhood’s comings and goings than you’re telling me,” he said, watching as the expression on the man’s face changed from one of amusement to one of interest. “So, I will offer you this concession: I will leave the Apple in a location where you will be able to observe events more easily, if you will give me at least some information about yourself and your goals.”
“Indeed? What an intriguing offer,” the man said; Altaïr reminded himself once again to ask for the man’s name when he could. “Very well; I accept. Ask your questions.”
Chapter 121: Little truths
Chapter Text
“First, I would ask that you tell me your name,” he said, wondering just how this man, who clearly took pleasure in presenting himself as inscrutable, would react to such an opening.
“You may call me Kronos; he who walks through time.”
“Kronos,” he repeated tonelessly.
There remained something in him manner that gave Altaïr reason to suspect that Kronos was not truly the name of the man in black, but he was not so naïve as to think he would have any other answer on the topic, so he left it.
“How did you come to be within the Apple?”
“I have my ways.”
It was clear from the expression on his face that the man in black – whatever his true name was – would not be answering any more questions along that line, either, so Altaïr shelved his curiosity for the moment. After he had come to know the man better, he would perhaps be given the chance to ask again.
“Are there, then, any others who you have shared yourself with in this way?” he asked, curious as to just what the man would say – if he would say anything at all, in the end – of those others that Altaïr had glimpsed so briefly within the light of the Apple.
“In this way? You would be the first.”
Mysterious as ever, Altaïr mused.
On the one hand, he’d held out little hope for a true answer from this man, and yet Altaïr could not truly help his wish that the man would have been more amenable to the discussion than he was swiftly proving himself to be.
~AC: TSC~
Once she was back on the road to Alamut, after having rested for as long as she’d needed – rather longer than she had been able to tolerate, however – Maria turned her thoughts toward just what it was that she was likely to find when she met up with her stubborn goat of a husband. She knew that he was more than likely to be gazing into the Apple again, and so she would need to gather herself for the necessary task of bringing Altaïr out of the thrall of that damnable artifact. She would, naturally, need to think upon it, but the long journey she was making would give her what time she would need.
~AC: TSC~
Narrowing his eyes as he considered the information, paltry as it was, that he had been granted by the man in black, Altaïr sighed. For all the words he and the man in black – he honestly doubted that the man had given him a true name, after being so free with half-truths and cryptic statements – had shared, there was an underlying core of uncertainty to every carefully chosen half-truth that Altaïr had heard from him. Still, there was another way he might be able to gain the answers he sought.
Looking into the Apple itself was dangerous, however, and in this case might well serve to draw the attention of the man in black; he would need to be careful in how he approached such a thing.
Retiring to the room he had chosen for himself, Altaïr settled himself and tried not to think of how little progress he had truly made toward his self-appointed goals. Closing his eyes, he slowly relaxed enough to settle more deeply into his bed. He would think more on this new problem he faced in the morning.
~AC: TSC~
…a flash of walls… Towers- buildings larger than any he’d ever seen outside of the visions granted to him by the Apple, all of them under a strange moon… the young girl that he’d seen before – dark of hair with bright blue eyes – faced the man in black with the backing of strange creatures… a man with red hair walked between the fair-haired boy and the dark-haired girl… a fair-haired man and woman faced each other, while the red-haired man looked on in amusement…the red-haired man faced one of the dark-haired men on an odd looking staircase…
Chapter 122: Meeting again
Chapter Text
When he awakened the next morning, the odd flashes of imagery that were far too coherent to be called dreamlike stayed with him as Altaïr prepared to go about his day once more. He mused, for a few moments, on the merits of bringing it up in his next discussion with the man in black, but then swiftly reconsidered. He did not know just how it was that the Apple continued to show him what seemed to be scenes from the life of the man in black.
Altaïr wondered again what the man’s true name was, since it was obvious from his manner that Kronos was simply a thing he called himself.
Making his way to the bathing chambers so that he could prepare himself to properly break his fast, Altaïr wondered once more what new information that he might be able to persuade the miserly man in black to part with; and also, what new visions the Apple would give to him in response.
~AC: TSC~
Drawing within sight of the no longer quite deserted fortress of Alamut, Maria looked with some asperity at the mountain it was seated atop. She knew that, as with Masyaf, there were like as not to be trails that she would be able to navigate on horseback even at her age, but looking for the first time upon the new task she had set before her could not help but be daunting. Sighing in exasperation, already mentally preparing the thorough, scathing lecture that she intended to give Altaïr for leaving in such a way for such a reason, and particularly for bringing the Apple with him, Maria began searching for her means of ingress.
~AC: TSC~
When he had fortified himself for the next round of questions, questions that the man in black was more than likely to avoid or ignore entirely, Altaïr turned his attention to the Apple once more. Gathering himself for what he was about to do, he concentrated on the artifact until he began to see the same traceries of light pulsing within the gaps of the Apple’s surface. The man in black reappeared quickly after that.
“This is interesting,” he commented, soft voice matching the amused, cunning smile slowly appearing on his face. “I must admit, I hadn’t expected to see you again this soon. This is a rare pleasure; are you certain you won’t reconsider my offer?”
“I am quite certain,” he said, forcing himself not to outwardly display the uncertainty that had grown within his mind as his strength slowly waned. “However, I have found myself rather curious about you. You said that you were involved in the creation of Alnesr and those like him; those who bear your mark. However, I would like to know if there was any true purpose behind such a thing.”
“What if I told you that they were merely a byproduct of my research?” the man in black asked, the amused smile on his face widening.
From you, I could believe it, he didn’t say. “So, your interest in them was purely academic?”
“You would have far more a reason to be concerned than I.”
The man’s tone would have sounded perfectly reasonable, but combined with his words and the smile on his face… Altaïr knew more than ever that he would never be able to bring himself to trust this man on any matter. No matter how well-spoken he could be when he made the effort, it was plain that the man in black had no care for anything but his own plans; Altaïr had little doubt that those plans were akin to the Templars’ own. Rather, depending upon how long the man in black had been within the Apple, Altaïr would have been more than willing to believe him the first Templar.
If nothing else, he certainly shared their callous ways.
The sound of soft footfalls drew his attention, and Altaïr had only a moment to wonder just who had followed him to such a remote place as Alamut, when Maria came striding into the room. Her expression was calm, though she still radiated the kind of disapproval he’d been growing ever more used to seeing on her face as his studies of the Apple consumed more and more of his time.
“Alnesr told me that I would find you here,” she said, and he tried not to wince at the reminder of his first student.
True, he had left behind in an effort to minimize the chance that whatever hold the man in black had over Alnesr – and, like as not, over all of those he had marked in such a way – would have such an adverse affect on him, but he could not help his awareness of the simple fact that he had, once again, left Alnesr with a load of responsibilities that he himself could have easily taken on.
“Well, this is rather interesting,” the man in black said, his amused expression not seeming to change even as he turned to regard her.
“He speaks,” Maria said, her disdain for the man in black clear enough to him, though he was uncertain if the man himself would either know or care about such a thing.
The man in black vanished, the amused smile on his face remaining even as he returned to the Apple.
“I suppose I don’t have to ask why you came,” he said, leaving the Apple on the table as he made his way over to Maria’s side.
“Well, someone sensible needed to be here, if only to make certain you don’t end up doing something even more foolish than spending your days staring into that damnable artifact,” Maria said, her tone disapproving but with an undertone of kindness that he had always heard directed his way. “Still, I take it there’s little point in asking you to return to Masyaf.”
“I am sorry, Maria,” he said, reaching out to gently embrace her the way he’d not been able to help wishing to do when he had first departed for Alamut. “There are still matters that I must attend to here.”
“That artifact weighs too heavily on your mind, Altaïr,” Maria said sternly, folding her arms and glaring at the Apple for a moment, before turning her gaze back to him. “To say nothing of that man in black that haunts it. Are you certain that you must be the one to uncover the secrets of this device, my husband?”
“I know of very few others who might be able to resist its illusions so well,” he said, facing her plainly so that she would be able to come to grasp his sincerity more swiftly. “And, of those that could, I am the only one who should be taking such a risk. I discovered the man in black; I feel it only proper that I find out everything I may about him.”
“How terribly noble of you, Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad.”
Chapter 123: Mind and matter
Chapter Text
The subdued flash of light from within the grooves in the Apple’s bronze-copper surface drew the attention of both him and Maria, but Altaïr wondered if the two of them had heard the last words of the man in black, or if they had merely been for his ears alone. He could be sure of nothing, where that man was concerned. Gently guiding her from the room where he had stored the Apple, looking back only once the pair of them were out of sight of the artifact itself, Altaïr allowed himself to breathe more easily.
“What was that?”
“Did you hear what he said, at the last?” he asked, more wishing to know he was no longer alone in the face of the man in black’s near-constant, subtle and less-than-subtle mocking.
“I heard him say that this new situation we found ourselves in was interesting,” he said, her gaze catching his own and holding. “Yet, I have a feeling that such a thing isn’t what you were referring to.”
“You would be right, Maria,” he said, nodding. “The man in black… Though he calls himself Kronos, I suspect that is not his true name in any sense,” pausing for a moment to gather himself, Altaïr pressed on. “I have been attempting for many days to find out anything about the man in black; anything that might help me to understand his motivations. And yet, all that I have managed to find is that the man is not a one to be trusted. He even claims that Alnesr and those like him were merely a product of some experiment he was conducting.”
“He sounds like a callous man,” Maria said, looking back down the corridor they were sheltering in; back toward the Apple, and the man in black that haunted it.
“Yes,” Altaïr said, narrowing his own eyes. “I would think him a Templar, save for the fact I doubt any of them would be particularly well-disposed toward a man so ostentatious in his mystery.”
“Perhaps he would not be so around one of his fellow Templars,” Maria muttered, glaring back in the direction of the Apple. “Still, I suppose we’ve no way of determining that, yes?”
“Indeed,” he said, looking back in the direction of the artifact lying so innocuously upon the table. “However, there is also another matter I must attend to. The man in black is not the only secret that the Apple has shown me: there is something, a storehouse of some kind, hidden beneath this very fortress. I’ve reason to believe that the storehouse was created by the same people who created the Apple.”
“What of the man who calls himself Kronos?”
“I’ve little enough real knowledge of him, but what I have gained suggests little that would tie him to those who created the Apple,” he said. “All other concerns aside, he does not seem like a man who would share his discoveries for any but the most dire of reasons.”
“I suppose you would know the man better than I,” Maria said, her tone sounding as though she was uncertain, but willing to hear him out if he had a satisfactory explanation.
“Yes,” he conceded, nodding; it was the work of a moment to dissuade himself from asking after Alnesr and the Brotherhood, as such a thing would serve no true purpose, in the end. Aside from that, Altaïr knew his former Apprentice had learned more than well enough to care for the Brotherhood in his absence.
“Aside from your curiosity about these artifacts you may or may not find, why else would you come out to a remote place like this?” Maria asked, fixing him with an expression that he could not entirely discern the meaning of.
“I had hoped to prevent anyone else from falling under the sway of the Apple, the way I know I have,” he said.
He would not stoop to deception with someone who had shared so much of their life, their very self, with him for so long. It was the one thing Altaïr was determined never to allow himself to do.
“Always putting the needs of others before your own,” Maria huffed, gently caressing the right side of his face. “I suppose I should stay here, if only to ensure that you don’t work yourself into an early grave.”
He could only smile at her concern, clear for all the acerbic bite of her words. She had never truly been one to hide her disapproval of a thing behind pretense or soft words. It was a thing he admired about her, for all that he still found himself surprised to be on the wrong end of it, at times.
Chapter 124: Separate lessons
Chapter Text
Finding himself in command of the Brotherhood once more had not been a thing that he had been entirely unprepared for, but at the moment Alnesr could not help his wish that he had at least been given some idea of how long he was to remain in command. True, he’d had little enough of such when Malik had first passed the responsibility to him, but those circumstances had not been at all conductive to long-term planning or strategizing. When Altaïr himself had presented him with the responsibility, however… well, Alnesr supposed that he should have seen such a thing in the offing, considering his mentor’s increasing uncertainty during the proceeding time.
He could no longer clearly recall just when Altaïr had truly begun showing signs that the Apple was wearing on his mind.
“Mentor, I would like to introduce you to the Italians I have been speaking about,” Darim said, having arrived in the tower he’d taken up residence in while he tended to the running of the Brotherhood once more.
“Bring them in, then, brother,” he said, looking up from the maps he had been consulting; the departure of Altaïr and Maria both would not halt the Mongols’ advance, and so it fell to those remaining at Masyaf to continue the evacuation of those still within the fortress.
“Niccolò, Maffeo, come in,” Darim said, turning back briefly to call through the door. “Rest easy, Mentor; I’ve told them what they need to know of you.”
“Thank you, Darim,” he said, not having been particularly eager to be looked askance at for merely the circumstances of his birth; or, if what Altaïr had said was indeed true in any sense, the machinations of the man in black.
Speaking with the Italians who had journeyed to meet up with the leader of the Levantine Brotherhood – who would always be Altaïr in his eyes, but such a thing would take too long to explain to those who had no inkling of the happenings within their branch of the Brotherhood – Alnesr found that they were particularly interested in forming their own branch within Italy itself.
“This could easily work out in favor of both of us,” he said, after hearing the Italians’ proposal from Niccolò’s own mouth; the man seemed particularly engaged with the idea, Alnesr thought that Altaïr himself would have been equally amenable to the idea. “Some of our own are still presently in need of evacuation, and there are also the copies of Masyaf’s library that need to be disseminated. If you would be willing to take some of them with you when you depart, they would be a great help to you with establishing the Brotherhood’s foothold in your homeland.”
“Yes, I think they would,” Niccolò said, a pleased expression spreading across his face.
“I was told that you had a brother?” he prompted, wondering what this man would make of an invitation to converse longer.
“Maffeo, yes,” Niccolò said, laughing softly, though with a rueful undertone that he was not yet equipped to understand. “He… Well, love my brother though I might, even I would say he has little head for the minutia we will be speaking of in the coming days,” Niccolò continued, in a tone that said he both loved and was exasperated by the one he was speaking of.
Alnesr could perfectly understand the sentiment.
The pair of them did indeed speak again during the intervening week that Niccolò and his brother Maffeo stayed within the fortress of Masyaf, and his encounters with Maffeo did indeed bear out Niccolò’s assessment of him. He’d little patience with those who focused solely or nearly so on combat when he’d been acting as the combat instructor for those training to be a part of the Levantine Brotherhood, but now that he was acting as Mentor while Altaïr sought out the secrets of the Apple and the man in black, he’d found that – though he was no more kindly disposed to them than before – he could at least see the utility of such people.
And, after a week’s time, Niccolò and his brother Maffeo did indeed depart from Masyaf; however, Niccolò swore to return as many times as he needed in order to properly introduce the teachings of the Brotherhood to the Italian branch he aimed at forming. He knew that Altaïr would be pleased to know that the teachings of the Assassins would not be lost when Masyaf likely fell to the Mongols, but he also wondered just what his mentor would make of the men who had taken it upon themselves to spread those teachings. He rather thought that his mentor would approve of Niccolò Polo, at least.
Chapter 125: Dreams of Eden
Chapter Text
Living in the presence of the Apple for so long, searching for both information on the man in black, as well as new tools and techniques that he could bring back to the Brotherhood when he finally returned from his stay in Alamut, however long it was ultimately going to be. He found that, interestingly enough, he was able to gain far more information about the man in black through the dreams the Apple would give him after a day spent speaking with him than by speaking directly to him. Of course, given the manner and mannerisms that he had demonstrated on every occasion they’d spoken to one another, such a thing no longer surprised Altaïr in the slightest.
He’d seen glimpses of a woman in white who seemed to both oppose and collaborate with the man in black, and while he had wondered why she herself did not seem to inhabit the Apple, what he had seen of the end of their partnership suggested that she was not particularly kindly disposed toward the man in black.
Having Maria present with him, even though she still didn’t truly approve of his dalliances with either the Apple or the man in black, was a thing that he truly enjoyed. Discussing the improvements that he wished to make to the Levantine Brotherhood when he returned, as well as the new weapons and tactics that the Apple had shown him the basic ideas for, only added to the enjoyment he had. Even so, Altaïr understood that he could not remain secluded in Alamut indefinitely.
To say nothing of the burden he would impose on Alnesr, there was still the matter of the Mongols’ approach and intent on destroying the fortress in order to stamp out the Brotherhood itself; it was a fine jest, that he, Darim, and Alnesr had long since begun the evacuation of Masyaf, and with it the spread of the Brotherhood and their teachings. Even with the loss of Masyaf and all of the physical reminders of their brother and sister Assassins who had trained there, the loss of the rooms where he and Alnesr had spent a great deal of their formative years, meant little in the face of the ultimate safety of the Brotherhood and the spread of their teachings and ideals.
He could be content with that, in the end.
Settling himself down to sleep once more after having spent the day with Maria, devising new tactics for the Brotherhood to adopt as well as improvements to their tools that might be made, Altaïr smiled softly. This might not have been the path he had foreseen himself taking, back at the beginning of his life, but he could not truly deny that – for all the strife he had borne witness to – he had found happiness at the end of it all. Laying himself down upon the bedroll he had brought with him, he looked over at Maria with a fond smile, just before he closed his eyes.
…Suspended over the towers of the strange city, he watched as the fair-haired boy – dressed in a cloak almost identical to the one worn by the man in black, save only for its size – battled against a pair with the same silver hair as the man in black himself… Drifting above another city, alike to and yet different from the one beneath the strange moon he’d glimpsed so often and yet briefly in his nightly excursions, Altaïr found himself following just behind the man in black as he himself followed the woman in white to an oddly-appointed room… Dragged along behind a man and woman he’d never thought to see before, Altaïr wondered for a long moment just who they were, until the woman turned enough for him to see that she carried a silver-haired babe in the crook of her right arm…
Chapter 126: The Little Eagle’s secret
Chapter Text
When he awakened, Altaïr found himself far more than slightly curious about just how the woman in white and the man in black were related to the babe he had seen in the arms of that unknown woman. There were also the matters of the fair-haired boy, the dark haired girl and her strange creatures, and the impossible-seeming city beneath its strange moon. He knew, however, that he would have no answers from the man in black regarding any of those topics, and so he simply recorded his thoughts and impressions within the codex he had dedicated to the study of the man in black.
He also took time to draw the pair of silver-haired figures he had glimpsed, as well as the babe and the woman who had carried him.
By that time, Maria had begun to wake up, and he himself was prepared to begin this latest day with her. The pair of them cleaned themselves up before breaking their fast, and Altaïr returned his attention to teasing out whatever new information he could from the Apple. And also, seeing what he could draw from the man in black when he chose to comment.
The day itself proved fruitful, but only with regards to his search within the Apple; the man in black was as determinedly enigmatic as ever. Still, with the extra information he was gaining from the Apple itself, Altaïr found that he no longer minded the man’s affectations quite so much as he once had. He was careful not to display that fact too outwardly, however; given his own connection to the Apple, Altaïr did not know if it was possible for the man in black to prevent the transmission of those visions if he was allowed to find out about them.
It was simply better that he never found out about them, so far as Altaïr was concerned.
When he settled himself down to sleep once more, Altaïr breathed more easily for the time he had been given to gather himself, then lay himself down beside Maria once again.
…It was a far stranger place than any city that Altaïr found himself drifting through, this night: what might have been called the sky seemed merely to be a shifting mass of stormlike clouds, shot through with what Altaïr could only describe as black lightning… It was through this strangest of landscapes that Altaïr saw the man in black moving… he could not truly describe what he was seeing as running, since the man’s feet did not seem to touch the ground as he moved, but there could be no question at all that he was moving, all the same… The landscape around the man in black erupted in what Altaïr could only describe as black fire and smoke, and then Altaïr found himself standing just behind the man in black as he took his first steps in the strange city… the man in black was met by the woman in white, and he took note that the pair of them did not yet seem to recognize one another…
He was almost disappointed, in a sense, to be forced to awaken from the dreams that seemed to be showing him the life of the man in black, but even then Altaïr was aware of the twin responsibilities he had – to both the Brotherhood and his own family – and so he rose from the bedroll and followed Maria as the pair of them prepared to go about their next day in this place. Once they had broken their fast again, Altaïr made his way back to the place where he had stored the Apple after stopping back in their shared room to update both of his codices.
Aside from the progress he was making with the Apple, and the hidden past of the man in black, Altaïr was also slowly unraveling the mystery of the location of the storehouse that had first drawn his attention to Alamut as a place of study. He knew that it was merely a matter of time before he discovered the location he’d been searching for these many weeks – or perhaps months, he would be the first to admit that time was slipping away from him the longer he spent working – and then he would have his answer as to what had drawn him to the old fortress to begin with. He still wished to know what such a thing could be, and yet at the same time he wished to know more about the man in black. It was not the first time Altaïr had found his heart torn between two desires, and he honestly doubted it would be the last.
Returning his mind to the task he had set before himself, Altaïr turned back to the Apple, his codex of weapons and tactics open upon the table before him.
“Hard at work as usual, I see.”
He’d no reason to answer the man in black, and even beyond that, such a statement did not seem to require and answer in the first place. And so Altaïr kept his attention upon his present work. He’d long since learned not to rise to the baiting of the man in black, to the point where it almost seemed that the man expected to be ignored during those occasions and would honestly be disappointed with him if he did react in some way or other. Altaïr did not truly know what to make of the man in black’s proclivities, but he was coming to accept that – even if he was given the whole of the man’s life to observe – he would have as little chance of coming to truly know the man in black as he did right now.
Once he had finished his work on the Weapon Codex, as he had privately dubbed it, Altaïr rose from his seat and made his way down the halls and corridors of Alamut to the lowest levels. That was where the Apple’s maps had indicated that he would find the storehouse; where he might find something of those who had had a hand in creating the Apple. Somewhere he might find out just what kind of people could have been behind the creation of such a potentially dangerous tool as the Apple had proven itself to be on so many occasions.
Making his way down to a point that he’d not yet searched, Altaïr soon found himself facing a fairly nondescript door that he was certain he’d never seen before. Considering the state of the room around him, Altaïr wondered if anyone had found this room during the times when Alamut had been filled with life and activity. The room he was standing in had a profound feeling of both age and disuse to it, but he wondered if that was simply due to the age and disuse of Alamut itself, or else if it truly was due to the nature of the room in itself.
Either way, it seemed as though he would need to have the Apple in his possession in order to gain access to the ancient door he had found himself standing before.
Departing again, after taking a moment to orient himself to the room that he had found, Altaïr retraced his steps back to the room with the table he’d left the Apple upon. He knew that there was little chance that the man in black would not take note of what he was doing, and even less that he would remain incurious about what he was likely to see there. Still, it was possible that the man in black would find himself distracted by such curiosity from anything else that might have thought to pursue.
When he finally laid his hands on the Apple again, picking it up and bringing it into the depths of Alamut, Altaïr found that he’d little need to retrace his steps once he had made it to Alamut’s lowest levels, as the Apple itself began emitting a coherent beam of the same, colorless light he had grown so used to seeing during his sessions spent plumbing the fathomless depths of the artifact. The beam stretched down the halls and corridors, always reorienting itself when he would turn a corner, and soon enough Altaïr found himself standing before the very door that he had discovered during his extensive searches of the empty fortress.
The light emanating from the Apple resolved into a coherent beam, and Altaïr let out a surprised breath as the light seemed to almost flow through the newly-revealed grooves in the door; grooves that bore a striking resemblance to those he’d become so familiar with from his investigations of the Apple itself.
Watching as the door he’d discovered retracted quickly into the ceiling – a thing he’d not expected to see, and yet almost dull compared to everything else he’d come to know during his work with the Apple and the man in black both – Altaïr took a breath, and then stepped into the darkened room beyond. It did not long remain that way: cold, blue lights sprang to life as he passed the threshold, following his footsteps as he walked. He found it interesting that these lights sprang from the floor underneath him, and so in more senses than one were following in his footsteps.
“A familiar place, after all this time.”
Turning slightly at the voice of the man in black, Altaïr observed the expression on the man in black’s face. He seemed rather more amused than pensive, and while that was an expected expression from him, he still wondered at it. Pushing those thoughts from his mind, knowing that there was little chance he would ever find out anything more than the scraps that the man in black could be cajoled into revealing about himself, Altaïr continued deeper into the storehouse.
He did not know exactly what he would find in the storehouse, but given all he had learned from the Apple – dangerous as the artifact was, even to those who used it with the greatest of intentions – he’d at least some idea what to expect. Still, the matter of the man in black was another thing he would need to keep in mind. If only so he was not taken by surprise when the man inevitably appeared again.
Chapter 127: Distant familiarity
Chapter Text
Composing her weekly report for Alnesr back at Masyaf, Maria contemplated requesting that Darim come out to Alamut to meet with them. She’d seen the way her husband looked, the way he seemed to fall deeper and deeper into that damnable Apple the more time the pair of them spent in this place. She knew that such a thing could not be good for him, and she’d a thought that showing her stubborn old goat of a husband what he stood to lose would persuade him to – if not give up his delving into the artifact entirely, which she had realized was incredibly unlikely at this point – take a slower and more cautious route toward gaining the answers he was seeking from the artifact. She knew, however, that no matter what she did, Alnesr would fret about what could be happening at Alamut.
It was only natural, since Altaïr – the stubborn oaf – had raised him as a father long before she and the old goat had said their first word to each other.
Sighing as she returned her attention to the report she was making, Maria decided that she would make one more attempt to speak with her husband, before she told her last remaining son about her concerns for his father. Levering herself out of her seat with some difficulty, which only served to remind her of just how old the pair of them were truly getting, Maria made her way down into the lower levels of Alamut.
~AC: TSC~
Settling himself back down behind the desk he had taken up residence behind for the three years that Altaïr and Maria had been away investigating the mysteries of the Apple within the abandoned fortress of Alamut, Alnesr reflected that curiosity – while it had served his mentor well in the past – could be just as dangerous as any blade when not handled properly. Everything he was reading in Maria’s reports, though couched in terms that were clearly meant to reassure anyone reading them, indicated that Altaïr was delving deeply enough into the artifact to cause her no small amount of concern.
It was causing just the same for him, and all the worse because he knew that – for various reasons, each as important as the last – he could not go haring off to Alamut, no matter his own wishes to the contrary.
Putting those thoughts out of his mind, knowing that they no longer served him in any sense, Alnesr turned himself toward the tasks set before him at present. Niccolò and his brother Maffeo had returned to the fortress a day ago, Niccolò in search of further lore concerning the Levantine Brotherhood, and Maffeo simply interested in learning new fighting styles from anyone who would take the time to instruct him; currently, Alnesr’s own successor, Abdul Al-Karim. He’d informed the elder Italian about the nature of his appointment as interim-Mentor of the Levantine Brotherhood, and while Niccolò had inevitably been surprised by the revelation, he’d soon come around.
He was now rather curious, and about as eager to meet Altaïr when he returned to Masyaf as Alnesr was for his mentor to return.
For the moment, however, Niccolò seemed content with asking him to share tales of his and Altaïr’s life together. When asked, he’d said that it was for a book he was writing, so that the tales of the legendary Assassin Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad would not be forgotten with the passage of time. Alnesr did not like to think himself conceited, but when Niccolò had spoken of his desire, he could not help but wonder just what his role in Niccolò’s proposed book was to be.
Sighing as he drove those thoughts from his mind with an effort of will, Alnesr turned his mind back to the work he was presently engaged in; Niccolò’s book would keep, but Altaïr would de disappointed in him if he neglected his duties to the Brotherhood for his own curiosity.
~AC: TSC~
He could see the way that Alnesr – his elder brother in all but blood – drove himself relentlessly forward, simply to please the shadow of his father that seemed to hang as a shroud over Masyaf fortress. Even as the fortress itself continued to steadily empty, with Alnesr’s time devoted almost entirely towards the evacuation of the remaining Assassins within the fortress and the resettlement of citizens in the town – just in case the Mongols were not satisfied with destroying the fortress itself – rather than accepting missions to improve the standing of the Brotherhood as a whole, Darim continued to watch him. Truly, Alnesr was more alike in temperament to Altaïr than either he or Sef had been.
It was a thing that had both benefits and setbacks, but Darim was fully aware that it was not a thing that could be changed by merely wishing it so; so, even as Maria had seemed to appoint herself as Altaïr’s caretaker, Darim had vowed that he would be so for his elder brother.
~AC: TSC~
When Niccolò and Maffeo Polo had departed again – with yet another promise to return when they could on Niccolò’s part, and some minor grumbling on that of Maffeo – Alnesr returned his mind to the evacuation of Masyaf and the small town that the fortress stood sentinel over.
Chapter 128: False brothers and true
Chapter Text
Seated upon his bedroll, writing down what he had learned of the life of Seth – the first of those marked by the man in black, and the only one who seemed to have encountered the woman in white, even if only while he was slumbering – Altaïr sighed softly. It seemed that the old stories, though distorted in a great many ways, held more truth in them than he’d thought. There had been a man and woman by the name of Adam and Eve, and they had eventually raised two sons by the name of Cain and Abel. He did not think the stories mentioned another brother by the name of Seth, but Cain had in fact killed Abel.
However, their dispute had been over the possession of the Apple itself, rather than less tangible matters.
Frowning down at the inoffensive codex in his lap, Altaïr recalled what else Cain had done. The first murder was not the only crime that the man who would become the first Templar was guilty of, so far as Altaïr was concerned: Cain had used the Apple on Seth, binding his brother’s mind and blinding him to everything else that existed in the world. However, if that had been the worst of it – Cain casting his elder brother’s mind into bondage by an accidental use of the Apple’s power in such close proximity – Altaïr would not have held such enmity for a man so long dead.
Such had not been the end of things, however, and Cain had not been merely fumbling about with the Apple while his older brother was close enough to make such a thing more dangerous than it would have otherwise been. No, Cain had deliberately bound his older brother’s mind, drawing him deep enough into the Apple that Seth could not have hoped to escape on his own; he had also attempted to compel Seth – who seemed to be a kind and generous man, given what Altaïr had seen of him – to throttle Abel to death with his own hands.
Even that had not been the end of things, depraved as it ultimately was.
No, the true horror of the situation was the way Cain had treated his brother after he had bound Seth’s mind within the Apple: he kept him that way for the rest of both their lives, and even attempted to breed Seth as though his brother were a prized mule or a hound. It was truly nothing less than Altaïr had grown to expect from the Templars after meeting Naplouse, and as Cain had been the first of their kind, while Altaïr remained disgusted with the man’s actions, he also found that he was unsurprised by the fact of them. He’d seen too much depravity from those who sided with the Templars to expect anything less from the man who founded them.
Still, knowing yet another fate that he had spared Alnesr by taking him in when he did gave Altaïr all the more reason to seek out those others who shared his circumstances; to bring them into the Brotherhood, where they would not only have protection from those who might exploit them, but where they could also learn to protect themselves when their situation called for such.
To that end, Altaïr was working to update his codices, telling the tale of Seth and Cain in the codex dedicated to the man in black, his associates, and those marked by him; and of the formation of the Templars themselves in the one reserved for the edification of the Brotherhood as a whole. He was determined to see that none of Seth’s other descendants – none of those who shared Alnesr’s circumstances – would ever find themselves so exploited by those who should have been their companions. Or, in the unfortunate cases that their own family reacted as badly to their appearance as the man who had killed Alnesr’s mother, the Brotherhood would know enough to take them in before they could be harmed overmuch.
Settling himself back upon his bedroll, Altaïr reflected on everything he’d learned during the time he’d spent working with the Apple. There was also the matter of the disks he’d collected from the storehouse beneath Alamut. They seemed to be able to record memories from the one who held them; he’d been thinking back on the circumstances that had led to his first meeting with Alnesr, and while he hadn’t thought much about the sheer clarity of his recollections at the time, the glow of the disk under his hands had drawn his attention when he came back to himself.
It had been an odd thing, to walk through memories that had faded with time, only to find them as sharp and clear as the day he’d lived them. It was that very thing that had given him the idea to record his most relevant memories, so far as the Levantine Brotherhood was concerned, and preserve them on more of those disks for the benefit of future Assassins. Since he had already recorded the memory of his first meeting with Alnesr, he’d placed that disk with his first codex and then gone back to the storehouse to find six more.
The first three were already imprinted, as he’d already possessed important memories that he wished to share with future members of the Brotherhood. The last three, however, waited empty; he would record important memories from the latter days of his life upon them. Levering himself up and out of his bedroll, Altaïr went to wash his hands a last time before he settled himself down to sleep for the night.
…Finding himself drifting through the strange city beneath its strange moon, Altaïr wondered for a moment just why he had been returned to this place, before he saw the fair-haired boy and the pair of silver-haired men – one clearly younger than the other – battling one another… the silver-haired men joined hands – the elder’s right to the younger’s left, and purple-black smoke erupted around them… the red-haired man knelt at the side of the fair-haired boy as he slumbered, wrapped in a black blanket that had exquisitely detailed blue butterflies seemingly sewn into the very fabric…
Chapter 129: Son and Brother
Chapter Text
Awakening at his usual time, Alnesr made his way to the private dining room he had been using even before Altaïr had placed him in command of the Levantine Brotherhood; he and Altaïr had often broken their fast in this place, before he would leave for his training sessions with Abdul Al-Karim. Allowing himself to reflect on those now-distant times while he ate, Alnesr took a moment to clear his mind as he finished his meal. There would be no true purpose in allowing himself to become lost in nostalgia, even though there were times he still wished to do so.
Niccolò and Maffeo had left merely a day ago, and though he hadn’t said anything to suggest it, Darim had seemed to be paying closer attention to him for some reason or other. He’d not had much time to consider his brother Assassin’s motives for such an interest, considering all the work he still needed to do; the last shelves were being steadily emptied, their contents transcribed so they could be disseminated alongside the groups of departing Assassins that still dwelt in Masyaf.
Moving back into the Master’s tower once he had fully broken his fast, Alnesr turned his mind to matters of import to the Levantine Brotherhood; he had an evacuation to mind, and efforts at copying to oversee.
~AC: TSC~
He still had a great deal of work to do, but Darim made a point of checking on Alnesr whenever he was given the time, or else could take it. His brother Assassin seemed to be managing as well as anyone could ask of him, and all of those who looked to him for guidance seemed to be well-served, but Darim knew that his brother would need those around him who would aid him in seeing to those matters within the Brotherhood that he no longer had the time to. Such as the way Abdul Al-Karim had taken Alnesr’s former post of combat instructor to the few Assassins who remained within the fortress.
Niccolò and Maffeo Polo had been expressing a great deal of interest in meeting their father, ever since they had learned that Alnesr was acting in his stead while the Master himself investigated the matters of Alamut and the Apple, and what secrets they might well hold. On the one hand, Darim had often found himself curious as to just what it was that his father had ultimately found; but on the other, he would not wish to expose anyone else to the lure of the Apple, after all he had seen it do to his father.
He was certain that Alnesr would have agreed, if he’d wished to distract his eldest brother from the work that he was still doing.
Still, all that really meant in practice was that he was the one who interacted with Niccolò and Maffeo more than any of their remaining brother and sister Assassins. Under the circumstances, he’d been delegating more of the work he had remaining to his juniors, foremost among them being Abdul Al-Wali, who had been particularly eager to contribute his service. Darim could at least be pleased with the progress they were all making; the Mongols might very well be able to destroy Masyaf fortress, but the Levantine Brotherhood would endure.
As well, the Brotherhood itself would spread across the world.
~AC: TSC~
Composing his own report, to inform Maria and Altaïr of the current goings on within Masyaf and the steady advance of the Mongols into Assassin-held territory, Alnesr wondered for a long moment if he should repeat his query as to just when the pair of them would be returning to Masyaf. He did not particularly wish to irritate his mentor and Maria with repeated queries, and yet he did wish to know just when the pair of them thought they would be returning. Or else, if they’d not decided on that particular matter as yet, just what it was that kept them there.
After considering the matter from every angle he was aware of, Alnesr decided not to add such a thing to his report; truly, it would only serve the most selfish of purposes, and he’d no true desire to trouble his mentor with matters that were ultimately unimportant in the grand scheme of things.
Chapter 130: Home and Heart
Chapter Text
It had taken nearly as long to extract the Apple’s secrets as it had to hunt down the leader of the Mongols, and while he still had the nagging feeling that he’d not managed to find all of them, but Maria had been insistent that a decade was more than enough time to spend chasing the shadows of the past. He’d relented, knowing that, even with their advancing years, Maria would have physically dragged him from the room if he’d attempted to insist upon staying within the crumbling walls of Alamut for yet another day.
Since he’d no wish to cause her any further distress or aggravation, Altaïr had quickly packed the Apple, his two codices, and the provisions that he had brought with him, and together the pair of them had departed for their return journey to Masyaf.
The pair of them had made camp for the night at a waterhole, somewhere very close to the small town that Masyaf village had long since sprouted into.
Altaïr found himself awakening at the sounds of a scuffle, turning his gaze to see just what it was that had drawn his attention. Out of the corner of his left eye he saw Maria sitting up as well, already beginning to reach for her weapons, but in the main his attention was focused on the men he suspected were brigands. There was no other reason for what was clearly an Assassin scouting party to be attacking them.
These new Assassins he could see seemed to be well led, given the way they fought and the manner in which they closed around the merchant they were protecting. Smiling to see the next generation of Assassins – likely to be the last, considering the Mongols and the state of the fortress – that had been trained within the walls of Masyaf, Altaïr helped Maria to her feet and the pair of them watched as the brigands were dealt with. For a fleeting moment, Altaïr found himself almost wishing that he himself could have taken part in the battle unfolding before him.
But that was utter nonsense for any number of reasons; foremost among them being that Altaïr the Assassin lived in the past, and while he had been sparring with Maria at her insistence, he knew that his speed, strength, and stamina had still waned with his increasing age.
Smiling as the last of the brigands was dealt with, Altaïr made his way over to the young man who seemed to be directing the scouting party that had happened upon them.
“Thank you for coming to our aid,” he said, making his way over to the young man. “Would you mind giving me your name, brother?”
“I am Adel Al-Rashid, Mentor,” the young man said. “Master Alnesr informed us that we were to be on the lookout for you, and to escort you back to Masyaf if we were the ones to find you.”
“I will have to remember to thank him when we see each other,” he said, smiling gently as he and Maria made their way back to the horses they had been riding.
The same smile stayed upon his face as their group drew closer to the small town that Masyaf fortress currently overlooked. He might not have known precisely what would happen to the small town, without the Assassins present to protect it, but Altaïr was pleased all the same to be returning to it. Masyaf had been his home for all the years of his life, and while it was clear that the Levantine Brotherhood was going to need to leave it soon, Altaïr knew that the place would remain in his thoughts even after the last Assassin had deserted it.
When all of them had returned to the fortress, leaving Mukhlis the merchant to find his own way home through the streets of the small town, Altaïr smiled as Maria sidled up next to him, wrapping her right arm around his shoulders.
“I’m glad you managed to come back to your senses,” Maria said, her smile rather wry as she turned her gaze to him.
He laughed softly. “I suppose I should be thankful, then, that you were with me during that time.”
The pair of them shared wry grins, and continued on down the path up to the fortress of Masyaf.
When their group finally made their way back inside the walls of the fortress, Altaïr looked around at those Assassins that remained within Masyaf, smiling softly as he observed their comings and goings. He was proud, both to have had a hand in laying the foundations of the improvements he could see, and to know that it had been his guidance that had carried Alnesr through the difficulties that would have inevitably appeared before him on his own path toward the future.
He would be sure to tell his brother Assassin just that, when the pair of them met up once more.
Chapter 131: Guardian and Master
Chapter Text
“Uncle! The sentries reported that Altaïr and Maria have returned to Masyaf!”
Tazim’s sudden outburst had effectively silenced the conversation taking place between himself and the Polo brothers, and he noticed that Niccolò seemed to be just as interested in the boy’s words as he was.
“Indeed?” he asked, rising from behind Altaïr’s desk.
He spared a brief moment to apologize to the Polo brothers for what was to be his swift and sudden departure, only for Niccolò to laugh and offer to accompany him on his way. He’d accepted the man’s offer, since he’d seemed both earnest about such, as well as eager to meet the true Master of the Levantine Brotherhood. The pair of them paced each other on their way down through the fortress and out to the main gates.
Catching his first glimpse of the welcoming party that had gathered around Altaïr and Maria, Alnesr smiled as he began to make his way up to the gathering crowd as they continued on their way up the remaining distance. His smile only grew as he began to hear the warm greetings that Altaïr was being offered by those he was passing on his way to Masyaf’s gates, and Alnesr moved through them swiftly, even as they parted to allow him to pass.
“It’s good to see you again, Master,” he said, once he had come close enough that his own words would not be lost within the general chattering of the gathered crowd.
“I’m pleased to see how well you have managed in my absence, Alnesr.”
It was only when his brother Assassin – his mentor, and the only father he had ever truly known – turned to face him for the first time in a decade that Alnesr realized just how long those years had truly been. Yes, he’d been aware of the passage of days and weeks, and then of months and years on top of them, but somehow he’d not fully appreciated the length of time that stood between the child he’d once been, and the Assassin he’d grown to be.
“Master, you’ve-” Alnesr began, then quickly bit the tip of his tongue before he could say something so ill-mannered
“I’ve grown old, yes?” his mentor returned, the twinkling of gentle amusement in his eyes not lessening one bit, nor the smile on his face.
“You said it, Master, not I,” he said, smiling back as Altaïr’s own smile grew into a grin.
“I could tell that you were thinking it,” Altaïr said, chuckling softly as the pair of them embraced. “Come; we’ve both more matters to attend to than just my welcome.”
“Of course, Altaïr,” he said, falling into step with his mentor and the Mentor of the Levantine Brotherhood as the pair of them made their way back into the fortress.
Maria was quick to join them, and Darim was not far behind her; Alnesr was pleased, both to have the entirety of the small family he and Altaïr had gathered about them present, and to be able to set aside the increased load of responsibilities that he had been laboring under while acting as Mentor of the Levantine Brotherhood. He and Altaïr spoke of matters that he’d not written up in his letters for one reason or another, with Maria and Darim both making their own contributions to the conversation when they could.
Chapter 132: Assassins of Italia
Chapter Text
He found that Altaïr was planning to continue his delving into the Apple, since there had been a great many things that he had wished to record from such, but his mentor had found himself sharply limited by a lack of materials in Alamut. He also, naturally, wished to visit Abbas’ gravesite; the old, bitter man having passed away silently in his secluded room within the depths of Masyaf. Neither he nor Altaïr had possessed any true desire to allow Abbas to waste away locked in Masyaf’s dungeons, but likewise neither of them had been enough of a fool to think that Abbas would not take the chance at vengeance if he thought that such was being offered to him.
And, in the frame of mind their old brother – the man he’d once called uncle, all those decades ago – had chosen to remain in, he would see any lessening of the intensity of his imprisonment as such a chance.
And so, he and Altaïr had agreed that Abbas would have to live out the rest of his life in seclusion, and had prepared the room that he was confined in for the remainder of his days, rather than letting him waste away in the dungeons. Still, there were few days that Alnesr did not wish for things to have turned out differently. However, he was fully aware of the fact that wishing, as he sometimes did, would not change the circumstances he was faced with.
Once he, Altaïr, and Darim had returned to Altaïr’s own study, Alnesr was able to formally step down from the post of Mentor in favor of his own mentor.
“Thank you, both of you, for seeing to the growth and stability of the Brotherhood while I was away,” Altaïr said, after having gently embraced the pair of them as he and Darim had stood side-by-side in Altaïr’s study.
“I am only glad that I could live up to your expectations, Altaïr,” he said; even after all the years separating Alnesr the Apprentice from Alnesr the Assassin, it still felt odd sometimes, not to have to call Altaïr Master.
There were still matters that needed to be attended to, before the pair of them could pay a visit to Abbas’ grave, and Alnesr gave what help he could to ease his mentor’s transition back into being the Mentor of the Levantine Brotherhood. Niccolò had offered to wait until the two of pair of them had finished paying their respects, and Alnesr had thanked him for his consideration. The Italian and his brother were waiting in the library, just four floors below the room where he, Altaïr, and Darim discussed the happenings at Masyaf.
Maria provided her own perspective on those events, naturally, but for the most part she seemed content to listen to their perspective on the events of the past decade.
~AC: TSC~
Once he’d retaken the position of Mentor from Alnesr, he’d also taken the opportunity to promote his brother Assassin as his right hand. He’d already done so well, during the decade that Altaïr had spent seeking out the secrets contained within the Apple, and with Abdul Al-Karim having taken over the duties of combat instructor for their remaining brother and sister Assassins, Alnesr himself seemed happy to be of continued assistance.
Once he had finished settling back into his routine as Mentor of the Levantine Brotherhood – he wondered, for a moment, just how many other branches there were now, with the Polo brothers working with them to spread the ideals of the Assassins outward from Masyaf – Altaïr found Alnesr, and the pair of them made their way out to the garden that Hassan Al-Sabbah himself had laid the foundation for.
The peace of that very garden at twilight seeped slowly into his soul, steadying Altaïr for what he was going to see when he and Alnesr arrived at their chosen destination.
“So, this is where you chose to put him,” he said, looking down at the lonely marker that stood over Abbas’ grave.
“I don’t know if he would have wanted it, at the end, but this was where I had the fondest memories of him.”
“Yes,” he said, feeling a small, reflective smile pulling at his lips.
This had been one of the places the three of them would most often rest from their days’ labors, talking about the lessons they had learned, or occasionally discussing their shared training sessions.
“I still mourn what he was,” Alnesr said, glancing briefly at him before returning his gaze to the small, unadorned grave marker. “What he could have been, if he’d chosen differently.”
“I find myself doing the same, sometimes,” he said, gently embracing Alnesr as the pair of them stood vigil at Abbas’ lonely grave.
It was some time later, by the positioning of the sun, when he and Alnesr roused themselves from their mourning and made their way into the library where the Polo brothers had been sent to await him. The elder brother, Niccolò, seemed to be far more eager to speak with him than Maffeo; Altaïr was not certain how he felt about a man who had all but admitted that he preferred combat to learned discourse, but he was willing to tolerate the man so long as he continued to behave in a calm and civil manner.
He and Niccolò had a great deal to discus, foremost among the topics in question being his desire to truly begin recording the knowledge that the Apple contained, this time in a far more comprehensive manner. What he presently wished of Niccolò was for the man to continue aiding in the evacuation of Masyaf, and the spread of the teachings of the Brotherhood alongside it. He was pleased to note that there was now the foundations of an Italian branch of the Brotherhood, and plans to spread beyond even there.
Niccolò also seemed eager to be told the story of his life; he seemed to have been of the same mind as Altaïr himself, when he’d been writing his personal codex. As he’d had no particular reason to object to such a reasonable request, and all the less so since he’d been doing something very much like that for so long already. Arranging their respective schedules to better facilitate the meetings that they wished to have was rather simple, since with fewer Assassins and almost no missions in this area of the world, so he and Niccolò were satisfied with that.
Chapter 133: Turn of the cycle
Chapter Text
Finding himself taking on nearly the same set of responsibilities that he had been laboring under while Altaïr had been in seclusion within the fortress of Alamut, Alnesr could not help but be amused. He’d not thought that his routine would return entirely to what it had once been, as both he and Altaïr had changed over the course of their separation, and his mentor clearly wished to discover whatever remaining secrets that the Apple might hold. Still, he’d not truly expected so little to change in the wake of his mentor’s return to Masyaf.
It was a strange thing, for all that he had tried to prepare himself for whatever had ultimately come of Altaïr’s return.
He’d also been the focus of more attention from Niccolò Polo, once the man had begun meeting with Altaïr on a regular basis. It seemed that, considering their close association for so long, he himself had caught the attention of the Italian. It was a rather interesting thing, to speak so candidly with a man about his past and the work he had done with Altaïr for a great many years of his life.
Everything was not so calm as he wished, however: he was beginning to hear far-off whispers and mutterings at the edge of his awareness, as though there was someone trying to speak with him, but they were too far distant to register as anything more than meaningless noise. Altaïr’s studies of the Apple were progressing steadily, to hear Maria tell it, though it was clear to anyone with ears that she didn’t approve in the slightest. Alnesr did not know if he agreed or not, since he was never able to come within reach of the Apple while Altaïr was gazing into it without suffering the loss of his sense of time.
He did not know if such were indeed due to the machinations of the mysterious man in black that Altaïr had spoken of on several occasions, but if that was indeed the case, he was not remotely fond of the man for that reason alone.
Breathing deeply to steady himself, having tensed up as he recalled the times when he had lost his senses to the Apple all of those times – both with Rashid and with Altaïr himself – Alnesr settled himself back into his seat. It would not do for him to become overly emotional about a thing that could not, in the end, be helped. Sighing as he returned his attention to his current work, Alnesr wondered for a moment just what all of his work was going to amount to, in the end.
~AC: TSC~
Having both Altaïr and the younger Assassin that seemed to be his most favored apprentice – or else his only one; he’d not gained more than the beginning of the story thus far – present in the same location was a good thing for him. Even better was the fact that the pair of them were altogether willing to share the stories of their respective lives with him. He was also learning, from Altaïr himself, about the apparent presence of a man shrouded in black haunting the Apple itself.
It was a strange thing to consider, that there might be a man within the Apple, a man who did not seem to have a body; a man who had seemingly refined his mind to the point where it was all he needed to truly exist.
Niccolò did not truly know what to make of such a man, but he had the impression that Altaïr did not fully trust him. Alnesr, conversely, had a more distant sort of dislike, seemingly based upon the fact that he could not remain in a room where the Apple was active without losing his senses. Niccolò often wondered how such a thing was possible, but it was more than clear to him that neither Altaïr nor Alnesr wished to speak in detail about those particular experiences.
He would not wish to cause any undue anguish to the Assassins hosting him and his brother within the walls of Masyaf, so he did not ask such things of them.
He’d produced many pages of the manuscripts that he was assembling, one about Altaïr’s past and one detailing that of Alnesr, and was presently taking the time to organize them. Reflecting back on what he had learned while he read over the manuscript detailing Altaïr’s life and work, Niccolò organized and sorted them as he paged through them. Continuing on to the manuscript for Alnesr, Niccolò wondered just how the man in black related to Alnesr and those others that Altaïr had mentioned.
He’d seen some of them around the fortress: those with eyes and hair the same color as Alnesr possessed, as well as sharing their coloring with the man in black, according to Altaïr. He could also see just why it was that Altaïr desired to protect them, as it was unlikely that they would truly be able to make a place for themselves in the world at large. It was a sad truth, but still true all the same, that those who did not fit in with others around them were often singled out and persecuted.
After hearing how Alnesr had nearly been killed before he had truly lived, Niccolò could not deny that those who shared Alnesr’s appearance would be safer under the wings of the Brotherhood.
~AC: TSC~
Breathing heavily as he forcibly extracted his mind from the Apple, Altaïr flicked his eyes toward the suddenly-appearing form of the man in black. He was not about to give the man the satisfaction of drawing his attention so suddenly. Drawing himself up from where he had stumbled, Altaïr made his way toward his desk to record the new information that he had gathered from the Apple.
“I’ve no need of your offers,” he said, before the man could speak a single word. “You know the answer I will give.”
“Of course.”
The expression on his face was as typically avaricious as he’d ever seen on the man, but Altaïr put such a thing out of his mind. It was far from the first time that the man in black had spoken to him in such a way, and he rather doubted that it would be the last. It was simply the man’s own personality coming through in his interactions with those who held the Apple in their possession.
Out of the corner of his left eye, Altaïr saw the man in black vanishing back into the depths of the Apple, and Altaïr continued his writing. He’d long since recorded his observations about the man in black within the codex that detailed the appearance of the man in black, his associates, and those others that he had marked as his own. And so, he felt no pressing need to record something so common.
Chapter 134: Last days of Masyaf
Chapter Text
He’d been receiving increasingly frequent reports of Mongol skirmishing parties making incursions into the edges of Assassin-held territory, but when he’d made his reports to Altaïr on the matter, his mentor would simply tell him to continue with the work they had already begun. Altaïr said that it was more important that the Brotherhood as a whole survived, even if scattered across the world, than it was for Masyaf fortress to survive the attack they all knew was coming.
And yes, while Alnesr would mourn the destruction of the only home he had ever known, he also understood that the Brotherhood as a whole was far more important than any of the fortresses that they had happened to inhabit.
And so, Alnesr continued about his work, coordinating and directing the evacuation of Masyaf’s few remaining Assassins, and the dissemination of the knowledge that had been gathered there. He was also disciplining himself to ignore the strange, soft voice that muttered incessantly at the edges of his hearing. The voice had not grown more coherent since he’d first begun to hear it, merely loud enough that he struggled to ignore it even with the self-discipline that had been instilled in him during his life.
There was also the rather disconcerting matter of the strange, black-shrouded figure that had been appearing in the extreme corners of his vision wherever he looked; it had merely been a week since the figure had first appeared, and Alnesr had been about to go to Altaïr with his troubles, only to remember that his mentor had duties of his own. It would not have been right to burden his mentor with such problems, not when Altaïr had enough of his own. He knew that their departure of Masyaf, necessary as it may have been, weighed heavily on his mentor’s mind as well.
Not only because Altaïr had told him just that, but because he knew his mentor well; knew the look in his eyes when he would speak of their coming departure; Altaïr mourned the loss of Masyaf as much as he did.
~AC: TSC~
He knew that he would need to send Alnesr away, knew that – with the hold the Apple now maintained on his mind – the man in black only grew stronger; able to walk more freely in the world, and able to make himself heard to someone who had not even touched the Apple in the first place. He knew he would need to send Alnesr away soon, and so he made plans. He would send his first student – the eldest of his sons – away with one of the departing groups of Assassins that were being sent away at such regular intervals lately.
He was pleased to know that Alnesr was able to remain so composed, even in the face of his brother Assassin’s clear nostalgia for the fortress and their shared past within it; but the past was just that, and nothing could truly bring it back save in memories, and he and Alnesr both knew that well.
It was why he was not, in the end, worried overmuch for his eldest son’s mental state: he knew that Alnesr would endure whatever trials were set before him. They had managed together, and he could see that Alnesr was managing on his own. It was good, but such a thing could not help but to make him feel their respective ages all the more keenly.
Speaking with Niccolò Polo helped to bring his thoughts away from those matters, giving him something else to occupy his thoughts when he wasn’t studying the Apple or musing on what might become of the Brotherhood now that he had changed them so much from what they had once been. Still, the times themselves had changed, and the Assassins had to change with them if they were to survive. It was a thing he had learned well, after so many years; he’d not soon forget the lesson.
~AC: TSC~
It had been Maria that had given him directions to leave with one of the departing groups of half-trained Assassins – those who would have been known as Novice and Apprentice, back during Masyaf’s height – but as he’d yet to glimpse Altaïr without the Apple close at hand, Alnesr knew just why she’d done such a thing. He’d a passing wish, at times, that he could speak more than a handful of words to his mentor without being in danger of losing his senses, but there was clearly nothing for that.
He would have to live on, without the comfort of his mentor’s voice.
On the subject of voices… Alnesr opened his hand, setting down the qalam before the tension in his hand could snap the fragile instrument. The strange voice he had been not quite hearing had not abated with his departure from Masyaf; if anything, they had only become all the more persistent. They had also become more coherent, even if only partially so; the phrase “almost ready” was the all he could make out from the nigh-incomprehensible stream of syllables he became fully aware of at any and every time he would find time to relax from his work.
He’d tried, therefore, to keep himself occupied as much as he could; training the younger Assassins and passing on the knowledge he had gained from his decades of working within the Brotherhood. Still, some of the knowledge he possessed was undone by reforms that Altaïr himself had made, and so it was not entirely his to teach, but to learn as well. He’d not been entirely unprepared for such to be the case, and it did serve to keep his mind occupied on those early mornings and late nights when he could not train his brother and sister Assassins in the way of their Creed.
It helped, in that way; the only time he found himself troubled by the murmurs at the edges of his hearing was when he prepared to sleep, and the small hours of the morning just after he had awakened. It was a small thing, but he could be grateful for that, at least.
~AC: TSC~
She thought it was rather sad, seeing Masyaf so deserted after all the work Altaïr and Alnesr had done to reclaim it, but her husband had been quite logical and persuasive in his arguments. She knew that the Mongols were nearly upon their doorstep, could not help but know it after all the reports she’d received concerning their activities over the past few months. Altaïr had said that the Assassins needed to change with the world they lived in, and while she had agreed with his assessment, she had wondered for a moment just what the Templars would do in response.
She’d spent so much of her life as a member of the Order, she couldn’t truly help wondering what they were at, sometimes.
She’d also taken over Alnesr’s duties, overseeing the evacuation and collaborating with Darim on matters concerning the remaining books in Masyaf’s vast library, as Alnesr had been sent away for his own protection. She’d made her disapproval on his rampant overuse of the Apple quite clear, and while it was clear that Altaïr himself agreed with her, it was also clear that Altaïr could not bring himself to let go of the Apple. She mourned for that, and tried to help where she could.
It was one of the many reasons that she would not return to the Templar Order, even if she was offered the chance. Settling down at what had once been Alnesr’s desk, Maria gathered herself to continue with the work that Alnesr had begun.
~AC: TSC~
This was not how he would have chosen to be awakened – by the sounds of sudden shouting, and people running about with swords clashing – but Niccolò had known for a great long time that the Mongols were on their way to Masyaf fortress. His and Maffeo’s possessions had long since been loaded aboard their ship, and now all that remained was for them to escape the grasp of the Mongols. He knew that the Assassins who remained would do their utmost to see that he and Maffeo escaped from the trap that Masyaf had become, but if his brother thought that the dark looks he kept sending over would keep Niccolò from finishing the codex he was writing, his brother was doomed to be disappointed.
The codex in his hands would provide both answers and guidance to future generations of Assassins; Niccolò could not have been more certain of it.
Joining the thin but steady stream of people making their way down to the courtyard, Niccolò found Altaïr presiding over the gathering. He could not help but wonder what Altaïr made of such a place, after all he had seen and done. It was, after all, the same courtyard that had seen his first meeting with Abbas; that had witnessed the fight that had ended their friendship; that had seen Altaïr himself shamed before the whole of the fortress, and it was also where Abbas had ultimately been laid to rest.
Niccolò almost thought that a reflective expression had come over the Master’s face, but such a thing could have easily been his own thoughts imposed on Altaïr’s expression.
“Brothers, our time together was brief, I know. But, I have faith that this codex will answer any questions you have yet to ask.” It was with a gentle smile on his face that Altaïr handed over a large book, and Niccolò looked it over with all due reverence.
It was, after all, a distillation of all the wisdom that the Master had extracted during the course of the two decades he had spent dealing with the Apple.
“Altaïr,” he said, overcome to the point where it was difficult to form words. “This gift… it’s invaluable. Grazie.”
“So, where do you and yours intend to go next?”
“Back to Constantinople for a time,” he said, smiling. “We can bring you news of Alnesr’s guild, before returning to Venezia.”
“Thank you,” the Master said, with a gentle smile, then he chuckled softly. “Your son, Marco, will doubtless be eager to hear his father’s wild stories.”
“He’s a little young for such tales,” he said, smiling at the Master’s good humor. “But, one day soon, sí.”
“A last favor, Niccolò,” the Master said, his expression becoming grave once more as he passed over a heavily-laden bag. “Take these with you, and guard them well. Hide them, if you must.”
Looking down at the bag with a raised brow, Niccolò saw the Master nod, and opened the bag once he’d been given leave to do so.
“Artifacts from Alamut?” he mused aloud; each of them – five in all – seemed to be made of stone, and all of them were perfectly rounded disks with holes the size of a small coin through the center.
“Of a kind,” the Master said, the expression on his face becoming pensive. “They are keys; each one of them imbued with a message.”
“A message?” he echoed. “For whom?”
The Master sighed. “I wish I knew.”
Just then, there was a far-off commotion, and Darim came up to speak with his father.
“A vanguard of Mongols have broken through our defenses,” the younger Assassin reported, his composure holding admirably in the face of everything occurring at present. “The town is being overrun.”
“We had better move swiftly, then,” the Master said, nodding to his son before he turned his gaze back to Niccolò and his brother. “Come; I’ll escort you through the worst of the fighting. Darim, you and Adel coordinate the defense of the town; ensure all of the citizens are able to escape safely.”
“Of course, father,” Darim said, nodding sharply before his long stride took him out of the courtyard.
“Once you reach the valley, follow its course until you find a small village,” the Master said, as the three of them began making their way out through the gates of Masyaf and into the crowds of battling Assassins and Mongols. “Your horses and provisions are waiting for you there.”
“Thank you, Master,” he said, even as Altaïr brandished the Apple and bore it aloft.
~AC: TSC~
He could feel each pulse of the Apple’s power as though it were ripped free from his own body, but he bore up under it for the sake of the future that Niccolò, Maffeo, and the new Assassins that he’d not yet met would build. He could be glad, at least, for the fact that he’d managed to persuade Niccolò to take Alnesr to Constantinople; glad that his first son would no longer be in danger from his father’s reckless, foolish use of the Apple.
He’d long since conceded that particular argument to Maria; such was why he had entrusted her with keeping watch over the other codex he had written.
“Master, are you well?” Niccolò asked.
“Just let me rest, for a moment,” he said, allowing himself a soft, rueful chuckle. “These old bones don’t move as well as they used to.” The pair of them settled themselves down on either side of him; Niccolò wordlessly offering support, and Maffeo looking around for any enemies that may have remained. “When I was young, I was foolish enough to believe that our Creed would bring an end to all of these conflicts,” he mused aloud, wishing for a moment that he could have spoken such words to Alnesr without endangering the both of them. “If only I had possessed the humility to say to myself ‘I have seen enough for one life; I have done my part’,” he smiled softly, looking into the past for a long moment; all of the many things that might have changed if he had simply altered his own actions. “Then again, there is no greater glory than fighting to find the truth.”
Levering himself back to his feet, knowing that he would rest the whole afternoon if he allowed his discipline to become slack, Altaïr took back his position at the head of the formation that Niccolò and Maffeo had fallen into. There were no more attacking Mongols in this area, a fact for which Altaïr found himself rather pleased, since he was no longer certain he could manage the artifact properly given how weary he felt after so much exertion.
“This is where we part ways,” he said, once the small town he had passed through many times on his way to and from Masyaf when he had been a much younger man. “The citizens will see to your care and keeping.”
“Thank you, Master,” Niccolò said, nodding solemnly as a group of citizens began making their way down the path. “Take care of yourself.”
“I’ll consider it,” he said, smiling gently at the Polo brothers as the three of them parted company for what he was almost certain would be for the last time.
Allowing himself a last look at the fortress that had seen so many beginnings and endings for him, Altaïr took a breath, gathered himself, and turned his back upon the past. The future was waiting for him; time he went to meet it.
Chapter 135: Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad
Chapter Text
When she received news that the last of the citizens was safe – the final group of Assassins having escaped under the cover of darkness – Maria allowed herself a moment to be glad of their success, before turning her thoughts back to her own journey. A night’s stay in the small village fortified her, as well as giving her time to plot out her next destination. As much as she wished to, Maria knew that following her husband to wherever it was that he intended to go was out of the question.
She would have to consider her actions carefully.
~AC: TSC~
He’d taken what rest he could in the towns and villages while he waited for the Mongol forces to either finish with their work or be drawn off, and now he was making his way back to the fortress at the last. He was weary; weary of the long years of his life, weary of the work he’d done… He almost welcomed the end he was slowly striding towards.
He knew that Maria and Alnesr would not have approved in the slightest of his current plans, and it was for that reason – among many others – that Altaïr could not entirely find it in himself to regret his decision to send the pair of them away.
As he came within sight of Masyaf again, Altaïr smiled softly as he saw that the fortress still stood proudly for all the damage that the siege had laid upon it. The fighting seemed to have died down, or at least moved on from the grounds of the fortress, but he still took the time to search out those who might have lingered, nursing injuries or exhaustion. Once he’d made a complete circuit of the fortress, verifying for himself that none of his brother or sister Assassins lingered within its walls, Altaïr made his way to the library that he had commissioned.
It was a fond sort of weariness that settled over him when he found it, and Altaïr smiled softly when he found Darim catching up to him.
“You and yours have seen to my books?” he asked, having glimpsed Darim and Adel conferring in brief, before the younger Assassin had departed.
“Yes,” his son said. “Those we didn’t send with the Polos, I myself will take to Alexandria.”
“Good,” he said, nodding. “Very good.”
“Father, I do not understand,” Darim said candidly. “Why did you build a library, if you do not intend to keep your books?”
“You should take Adel and go,” he said; he’d no more wish to burden Darim with his choices than he’d had to burden Alnesr. “When the Mongols return, Masyaf must be empty.”
“I see,” Darim said, the expression on his face becoming both stern and troubled. “This is not a library; it is a vault.”
“It must stay hidden, Darim,” he said, knowing that there was no way to truly refute his son’s argument; he would not lie to one of his own. “Far from eager hands. At least until it has passed on the secrets it contains.”
“Your man in black?”
“Not only him,” he said; he shook his head. “Go, son. Be with your family; and you and Alnesr live well.”
Darim sighed softly, before stepping forward to embrace him. “All that is good in me began with you, father. I am certain that Alnesr would say the same, that he could be here to say it to you in person.”
“Would that he could,” he said, closing his eyes at the memory of his eldest son.
The two of them held fast to one another for a long moment, but finally Altaïr forced himself to let go, triggering the door to slide closed and lock behind him. Only the five keys would be able to able to open it; the five he had sent off into the world with Niccolò Polo and his brother. Making his weary way down the stairs and across the length of the library, Altaïr headed steadily for the section of recessed wall whose very design he had extracted from the Apple itself.
It would have been an amusing jest, had the situation itself not been so grave: that he would hide the Apple in a storage-space that had been created by that selfsame artifact.
The Apple glowed softly atop its pedestal, and the pressure of his right hand upon a stone panel brought the hidden doors of what he’d thought of – in his more whimsical moments – as a storage cabinet rolling closed. Sighing softly, knowing that his life’s work was at an end, and beyond that knowing that he himself was not long for the world, Altaïr turned away from the wall that now hid the Apple. Pausing for only a moment to regain his lost breath, Altaïr began making his way to the chair he had set up for himself to sit in, back during the time when he’d been preparing this library for its ultimate purpose.
His journey, though he walked at a pace as slow as he ever had, seemed more arduous than any journey he had ever made before. When he finally made it to the chair at the center of his library, his old heart was hammering as though he’d just run the length of Masyaf and then scaled one of its walls. Closing his eyes for a moment, trying to steady himself, Altaïr found that he had no true motivation to open them again.
He’d lived so long, done so much, lost so many things and gained so many more… truly, he doubted that anyone who knew his circumstances could have blamed him, in the end, for resting where he was. It was not the ultimate end; the last of his works had been to ensure that the Brotherhood as a whole would survive without him, and Altaïr knew, even above that, that he could trust his wife and two remaining sons with the work that remained.
He still wondered about those who had made the Apple; about the man in black, and whether he was one of their number, or if he had somehow found a way to implant his mind within it without being such. He wondered about the means the man in black had employed, in either case, and he wondered what kind of people those who had made the Apple – those who “came before” – had been, if they had truly produced such a one as the man in black.
For a moment, just as his consciousness deserted him for what Altaïr knew would be the final time, he almost thought he could feel another’s arms, both of them embracing his left…
Chapter 136: Homeless hearts
Chapter Text
The others – his brother and sister Assassins of Constantinople; which was still an odd thought, whenever he allowed his mind to linger on it overly long – had informed him that he’d been sleeping for several hours, unable to be roused no matter what any of them had attempted. Alnesr, while shaken – no matter that the matter was several weeks past at present, it was still time that he had missed – had maintained his composure and thanked them for their consideration. He also did not speak of the fact that the shrouded figure on the edges of his vision had resolved into full coherence, and would at times wander fully into his field of view; it felt, at times, as though he were being mocked.
The voice had fallen silent, yes, but that was cold comfort when he still found himself plagued by the visions that seemed to be actively attempting to drive him to distraction at all hours.
The only thing for it had seemed to be continuing with his old ways: working himself to exhaustion with what tasks a man his age could still manage. He learned several differing languages over the days, weeks, and months that passed within the new stronghold that his brother and sister Assassins had established within the city, and translated what scholarly works made their way across his desk. He also integrated himself with the branch of the Brotherhood that had been rooted in the city.
Coming to know his brother and sister Assassins helped to ground him in what was real and what was not; all the more helpful when dealing with the strange, shrouded figure who seemed to be alternately stalking and taunting him.
This day, however, seemed to be different, if the excitement that seemed to permeate the very air within their den was any indication.
“Mentor, two men from Italy are here asking for you!”
It was still a trifle strange to Alnesr, being called Mentor after he had spent so much time calling Altaïr by that same title, but he liked to think he bore up under it well. If nothing else, he hadn’t let any of his brother or sister Assassins in the branch of the Brotherhood he had helped to nurture within Constantinople about the unease he still felt at times. Following at a leisurely pace – the best he could manage, at his age – as Aydin Tazim hurried down the halls and corridors of their den.
Sometimes, it was all Alnesr could do to believe that he himself had ever been so young.
“Mentor.”
“Niccolò Polo?” he blinked, then smiled softly. “It’s rather a pleasant thing, seeing someone else so familiar,” he said, nodding to the man that had first brought him to this city, all those years ago. “Come, we’ll speak over our midday meal,” he said, taking note of the tenseness of the Italian’s stance and wondering at the cause of it.
Still, he’d like as not have the time needed to seek for the answer to that after they had eaten together.
Making his way steadily to the main eating area of their expanding den – there were almost enough of his brother and sister Assassins to establish a new one, though Alnesr wondered at times if he would be alive to see such a thing – Alnesr smiled as he returned the greetings of those Assassins that passed him by. Once their small group had settled down at the tables, he noted that the tension present in the Italian Assassin’s frame had not lessened in the slightest. Clearly, the man thought that – whatever the nature of his mistake – Alnesr would not forgive him for it.
“What troubles you, Niccolò?” he asked, once their meal had been finished and cleared away.
“Mentor,” the Italian Assassin said, his face contorting in remorse. “I grieve to have to admit to this, but my brother and I were waylaid by the Mongols on our way out of the valley. I lost the codex merely two days after we had escaped from Masyaf, to a raiding party of their number,” Niccolò paused a moment, making a visible effort to gather his composure once more. “I promise you, however, that I will see Altaïr’s codex returned to us. Even if I must delay my return home to my wife and son by more than the two years I intend to spend here.”
“Thank you for your consideration, Niccolò,” he said. “I, too, grieve the loss of my mentor’s work. Still, I do hope your search will not take you away from your home and family for too long a time. The bonds between people are, after all, one of the things that our Brotherhood fights to protect.”
“I know, Mentor. Thank you for your forbearance,” Niccolò said, a small smile stretching his lips. “I will also be establishing a trading post somewhere within the city, and also hiding the keys to Masyaf’s library.”
“You intend to hide them?” he asked, sipping from his drink before gently setting it down again.
“Your mentor informed us that we were to guard the keys, or to hide them,” Niccolò said, taking a sip of his own drink. “And, considering the fate of Altaïr’s codex…”
“I see,” he said, as Niccolò’s words trailed into silence. “Thank you for letting me know, Niccolò.”
Truly, he supposed that it was the best course of action available to the Polos; there was little chance that the Mongols would give up their pursuit of his mentor’s work, if only they could see a small part of the Brotherhood destroyed. He knew at least that much, given how many times he and his had been forced to drive off raiding parties back during the days of Masyaf’s strength.
The pair of them talked for a few more minutes, before Niccolò excused himself. Alnesr thanked him, not only for his delivery of the news regarding Altaïr’s codex, but also for his handling of the keys that his mentor had asked the man to see to the care of. He was tempted, if only for a moment, to ask just where it was that Niccolò intended to hide the keys, but he quickly banished the thought from his mind.
He’d no need to know such things, and even though he had little need of making forays into the city at this late stage, Alnesr would not compromise the security of the keys for his own idle curiosity.
~AC: TSC~
She’d been traveling east for a handful of years at this point, and Maria was swiftly becoming aware that she would not be able to handle the rigors of long-distance travel for even one more. Here, then, was where she would have to give the secondary codex that her stubborn goat of a husband had compiled from the few odd, imprecise-sounding visions that the Apple had granted to him. The codex that spoke of the man in black, those who had been “marked” by him, and those others that Altaïr had spoke of.
Altaïr had said that the information detailed within this codex would likely prove too much a temptation to those who had made contact with the Apple itself, as the man in black could have spoken to them in the same way he had made contact with her and Altaïr.
She and her husband had agreed that it would be best if she did not travel alone; with her strength and stamina, though not her skill, withered by the passage of time, she was better served having those around her who would be able to fight on her behalf if and when she found herself faced with a situation that would have otherwise required her to enter into combat. She was glad of the protection, but there were times when she wished that she could have spent her remaining years with her husband. The pair of them could have found another way to resolve their strange situation.
Still, it was a known fact that her husband, for all his noble qualities, was a stubborn old goat of a man.
She and the six Assassins that Altaïr had asked to see to her care and protection had been on the many roads that stood between them and whatever safe haven that they would manage to find. Or, perhaps we will not manage to find anywhere safe, and will simply have to continue traveling for the rest of time. It was the same pessimistic line of thought that had been becoming ever more frequent as she and her small group continued on their journey. She and hers had heard talk of more artifacts, some in the same vein as the Apple her husband had personally sworn he would do everything in his power to conceal, and as neither of them had known if there were others of the same nature as the man in black, both of them had agreed that they would be better served not seeking out any of those other artifacts.
It was possible, though neither of them had known if such an outlandish-sounding thing was probable, that the man in black could project his likeness through any one of them; both she and Altaïr agreed that it was simply more sensible to stay away from the artifacts, under the circumstances.
Still, now that she and hers had found themselves taking a rest in this small settlement – it could hardly even be called a village, considering how small it was – Maria couldn’t help the knowledge that this tiny place, on the far edges of one of China’s great cities, was going to be her final resting place. She and her small group had been traveling between large and small cities for just over four years by now; the large ones had the advantage of large crowds that she and her fellow Assassins could lose themselves in, and the small ones had the advantage of easily being passed over by the Mongol raiding parties.
Still, knowing that she was going to die in this small settlement whose name she couldn’t even remember was not a thought that she relished in the slightest.
However, she’d taken time out of her remaining days to inform her fellow Assassins – even those who had joined their group from the surrounding cities she and hers had passed through on their way up through China – about the fact that, wherever else they chanced to go, in their efforts to spread the Creed and to guard the knowledge that had been imparted to them, she would no longer be able to accompany them. And, while it was clear that all of them would miss her when she died, it was also plain to see that they would be capable of carrying on their duties even without her presence.
In a way she was glad of it, to know that the task she had been entrusted with would be carried out even in her absence, but there was still a small part of her that almost wished that the opposite could have been true; Maria did her best to ignore that part.
Chapter 137: Slowing down
Chapter Text
The black-shrouded figure had only grown clearer and more defined – and, if he were the kind to give motives to what he hoped to be merely a dream image that had somehow manifested itself during his waking hours, he would have said it had grown more brazen – as his strength slowly ebbed. He’d taken to spending more and more time in his study; more time asking for the books that this branch of the Brotherhood had gathered over the course of their existence, searching for any mentions of the shrouded figure. Even after so long, however, he’d not managed to find anything.
It was not a situation he enjoyed, particularly since every day the shrouded figure – the broad shoulders and narrow hips suggested masculinity, loath though he was to give the shrouded figure a more concrete reality – seemed to grow clearer and more defined. Truly, if he were a more superstitious type, Alnesr would have almost said that the shrouded figure was leeching away his strength, but such a suggestion would have been absurd. No, Alnesr was perfectly aware that his life was simply at its natural end.
The knowledge that he had lived as full a life as anyone could ask was something of a comfort, at least; though, if only for his own peace of mind, Alnesr wished to know as much as he could about the shrouded figure that had invaded what remained of his life for these last few years.
Still, it was beginning to seem as though his search would prove fruitless in the end. Even with so little time left to him, however, Alnesr was also determined to ensure that the branch of the Brotherhood he had helped to take root in Constantinople would prosper and thrive even in the absence of contact with what other branches might have been formed in the interim. The sporadic visits from Niccolò Polo served to bring him news of the Italian branch, and he was pleased to know that the spread of the Creed was proceeding apace.
It served to comfort him, during those times when he would find the shrouded figure seemingly standing over him, reaching out its right hand as though to caress his face.
Setting his desk back to rights, Alnesr laboriously rose from his seat, took up the cane he’d been given by Aydin Tazim a year ago when the last of his strength had begun to decline in earnest, and began making his way back to the room that had been gifted to him when he’d first taken up residence in Constantinople. Stifling a yawn as he made his way down the stairs, Alnesr leaned against the wall, briefly closing his eyes to gather himself for the rest of his journey.
The shrouded figure moved in closely, right hand- Alnesr snapped back to full awareness, blinking harshly and shaking his head as he came back to himself. Scrubbing his face with his right hand, he made his way determinedly back to his room. Sleep was not as sure a method for escaping the shrouded figure as he had once hoped it would be, but his increasing lethargy and weakness was making the necessity for such a thing far more frequent than it had been even a mere year ago. It was for that reason that Alnesr suspected that he was to die in his sleep, and also that such a thing would happen soon.
It was not a thought he relished, though he’d learned to accept such a thing all the same.
Once he had finally found his way back to his personal chambers, Alnesr went about preparing himself for sleep once more. It was a process that he had repeated many times in many places, and yet… There was a certain sense of finality to this day. Closing his eyes briefly, now garbed in only his sleeping clothes, Alnesr sighed deeply. He’d known that his life was at an end, but he’d not expected that such an end would be coming so very soon.
Opening his eyes, Alnesr set aside the cane then climbed into his bed; he’d no expectation of rising again…
Chapter 138: Homing Instinct
Chapter Text
“Alnesr. Alnesr, come.”
Opening his eyes, Alnesr saw the gently smiling form of Altaïr looking down at him.
“Did you forget?” his teacher asked, smiling more widely down at him. “The Master has given us permission to access the hidden library! Come; you can hardly stay in bed with that waiting for you, yes?”
“Thank you for waking me, Altaïr,” he said, rising from his bed so that he would be able to prepare for his day.
Taking his teacher’s hand as the pair of them made their way out of his room and down through the halls and corridors of Masyaf, Alnesr’s thoughts turned once more to his impending assignment. Master Mualim had said that his time as a Novice was at its natural end the last time the pair of them had spoken in earnest, and thus he was to be assigned to a full Assassin to further hone his skills. He could not help but wonder just who it was that he would end up assigned to, and whether they would permit him to maintain such close contact with Altaïr as he currently did.
Truly, Altaïr was the closest thing he had to a father, but Alnesr was well aware that the Brotherhood did not hold such familiar bonds in high regard.
Putting those thoughts aside once more, Alnesr determinedly followed Altaïr down to the main floor and out of Masyaf fortress entirely. Looking up to the sky as a blast of heated air buffeted him, Alnesr thought for a moment that he’d caught sight of master Mualim’s distinctive black-robed form, but it turned out to be nothing more than a trick of the light and the wind in a tree. Shaking his head at the foolishness of his wandering thoughts, Alnesr determinedly followed Altaïr to the back of the fortress…
Sighing as he looked up into the endless blue sky that the proud fortress of Masyaf stood under, Alnesr found his thoughts turning back to just who he might be apprenticed to when his time came to take his place.
“What troubles you, Alnesr?”
“The Master says that I am to begin my Apprenticeship soon,” he said, knowing that he could trust Altaïr, of all people, with what was in his heart. “I… I simply don’t know if I will ever be able to form a bond with anyone else akin to the one the two of us share. Most of the others- the way they look at me…”
He could find no more words to express himself, though he knew that Altaïr would understand what he sought to express in spite of that.
“I will speak to the Master on your behalf,” his teacher said, as he led the pair of them to the shade of a wide, broad-leafed tree. “I am certain that he would not give you over to someone who would abuse your skill or your trust.”
“Thank you, Altaïr,” he said, wishing for a moment that he could have said father, before he sternly reminded himself that such was not the way of the Brotherhood, and that he was an Assassin above all other things.
Settling himself down against the trunk of the tree Altaïr had guided them to, Alnesr sighed softly as he wrapped both of his arms around Altaïr’s. He knew that his teacher would never allow such worries as he had to become anything more than the phantoms of his at-times overworried mind, and yet he’d not found any real way to stave off such things. Strange, he mused, watching as the sky overhead seemed to shift, peeling away to reveal…
Chapter 139: Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr
Chapter Text
The darkened interior of a room he had never glimpsed before in his life, and the shrouded figure that had been haunting his dreams – to say nothing of his waking hours – for so long that Alnesr had forgotten what it was to have a peaceful day. His heart pounded, leaving him feeling as though he’d run twice the length of his den’s training grounds, and he barely had time to notice that his arms seemed to be wrapped around something thin and hard, before he saw the flash of a pair of bright eyes…
“You did well to come this far,” the soft, amused-sounding voice of the shrouded figure who had appeared before him – clear even in the dimness of the room he was sitting in – the strange light in his eyes almost seeming to reach out and envelop him. “Now, surrender your Heart to me!”
Finding himself nearly choking on the very air itself, as the shrouded figure plunged its black-gloved hands into his chest, Alnesr found himself staring into a pair of bright, yellow eyes that resembled his own. Before he could wonder about such a thing, Alnesr almost literally felt his mind detaching from his body…
…the world around him was bathed in radiant, shimmering light, and as he drifted in a state that felt like drifting between dreams and waking, Alnesr glimpsed the face of the shrouded figure that had been following him for so long… the face belonged to a man, as he had been given to suspect, considering the few parts of his figure that had been revealed by his odd robes… he saw the man’s mouth moving as though he was speaking, but no sound came through to him where he was…
…an ominous, smothering darkness wrapped around him, suffocating him as it seemed to cling to his eyes and mouth…
…Alnesr felt himself being compressed and compressed…
“Flowing darkness and light mix, becoming hunting shadows that stalk wicked light…” he heard a soft, avaricious chuckle. “How interesting.”
…his mind seemed to be separating, standing as both Alnesr the Apprentice and Alnesr the Mentor… he could barely remember where he had once been staying…
…Master Altaïr? …where are you? …where am I? …
Chapter 140: Visions in Silver and Gold
Chapter Text
Drawing himself back to his own Body, to the Heart that he had formed from the scraps of Memories; the Light and Darkness that he could gather to himself on this separated World, he smiled as he beheld the bound Heart that he had taken from its own dying Body.
“So, this day sees our situations reversed, Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr,” he mused aloud, making his way out of the empty room, away from the two empty Bodies behind him.
The defenses that had been set up around the artifact – the Apple, as Juno had called it – that he had made use of for so long meant little to him, and as he stepped through a Corridor to set himself within the small room that housed that particular Apple, he smiled as he brushed his fingers across it. Imprinting a shadow of Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s mind within the artifact, there to wait and watch for anyone else who might find it, he turned and left.
Passing through the Corridors, he found his way back to the land that he had cleared in preparation for his future plans. He’d not yet decided upon a name for the small structure that he had built up over the many decades – or perhaps centuries; time meant little enough to a being of Nothingness, and even less now that he had perfected his hold upon those fascinating devices – that he had been operating within and around the environs of this separated World, but such a consideration was for later. When he began properly gathering his forces for the plan that he had put into play once he had managed to find his feet after his abortive battle with Juno.
The tall, sinuous forms of the pair he had taken with him to this strange World, dominating what little will they had possessed when they had first come into his possession; a time that was so long ago in his memories, and yet one that had likely not yet occurred. Their four empty eye-sockets tracked him as he made his way into the small room that he had managed to pull together from the remains of what few Worlds had fallen into Darkness within easy reach of one of his Corridors, and the pair of them moved smoothly to follow him inside. He’d yet to decide on a name for this place that he had slowly constructed, but such a thing could be safely ignored so long as he was the sole conscious inhabitant.
Cradling the Heart between his hands, he made his way to the center of the small room he had set up for his personal use. There, atop a pedestal not so much different than the one he had seen in that strange, abandoned library where he had left Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s empty Body, was the Apple that Juno had given over to him once he had shown how adept he was at manipulating it. The Apple that she, of course, had no remaining memories of.
Opening his hands, he reached out to touch the Apple, binding Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s freed Heart within the maze of its empty light. His work was not yet complete, however; there had been two, rather than one, that had drawn his attention when the time came. He would have to sift through those Hearts he had marked as his own to find the other that he had been passingly aware of when he had followed them out of Vexen’s laboratory in Castle Oblivion.
Kronos indeed, Xemnas scoffed, as he used the Apple to lull Alnesr Ibn La’Altaïr’s Heart into Sleep so that it would remain where it was. Above all considerations at present, what he needed most was time. There were a great many people on the separated World that he had been led to, and while not many of them were the hunting Shadows that called themselves Assassins, they had scattered to a great many places in response to the attacks by that other group of humans who also carried Darkness in their Hearts.
This plan of his would require time and patience, just as his old one had; still, the results looked to be very promising…
Chapter 141: Fallen doves
Chapter Text
Looking back down the darkened alleyway he had concealed himself in, Luccio tried to hush his breathing. Those who had taken him were certain to drag him back to the warehouse if they were allowed to know that he was here. He had managed to escape through an open space that had not quite been fully boarded up, and while he hoped that at least some of the others had managed to escape in the same way before the men wearing the red crosses found out about it, Luccio wasn’t about to turn back.
He wanted nothing to do with the cross-bearing men; nothing to do with the dark room where those like him were dragged, where they screamed once and were never heard from again.
He’d found a scrap of black cloth to cover his silver hair, but the yellow eyes that marked him as one of those who the crossed-men would be most interested in were a great deal more difficult without blinding himself. He could not see any sign that the crossed-men had sent some of their own to find him, and so Luccio cautiously made his way out of the darkened alleyway. It was dark enough to keep the people that the crossed-men spoke of – those who would bind him with ropes and cast him into the sea if they chanced to glimpse his true appearance – inside the buildings where they stayed, and so Luccio allowed himself to breathe without whimpering.
Looking around, holding his body close to the ground so that no one who might be awake at such a dark hour would be able to see him through the clear panes inset into their walls, Luccio panted as his eyes darted from shadow to shadow. He’d not seen any of the crossed-men lurking in the shadows, but everything the crossed-men had said – everything they had done – had let Luccio and his fellows know that there was little hope of escape for any of them.
Still, knowing what was coming as he did, Luccio found that he had to try.
There were so many new sounds, so different than the soft breathing of his fellows that had filled his nights and days, that Luccio hardly knew what to make of them. Even the air around him, cold rather than warmed and laden with the scents of his fellows, was strange and new to him. Truly, he did not know whether to be more frightened of the blackened room, or of this new, cold, empty place where he found himself.
Throwing himself back as something tall and shrouded in white landed merely two steps in front of him, Luccio pressed himself against one of the buildings as the white-shrouded figure raised itself up to the same height of one of the crossed-men that always seemed to tower over him from where they stood. His eyes widened as he stood, trembling, before the figure as it turned slowly to look at him.
~AC: II~
The soft sound of a child whimpering in distress drew his attention, and as Giovanni turned around, the first thing he noticed were the widened, frightened yellow eyes in the young face.
“Buona sera, piccina. Are you lost?”
The little one seemed terrified of even the soft tone he was using, cowering against the outer wall of a run-down inn and staring up at Giovanni as though he were every nightmare come out of the darkness. He’d no concern for his enemies thinking in such a way, and he’d in fact encouraged such ways of thinking whenever and however he could, but to see such fear in the eyes of a child… To say nothing of the oaths he had sworn as an Assassin, to the Creed and to himself alone, Giovanni was not the kind of man to take pleasure in terrifying a mere child.
“Calma, calma,” he called gently, raising his hands so that the little one could see that he was of goodly intent. “I won’t hurt you, piccina.”
Before he could say anything else, however, Giovanni caught sight of the small cross that had been painted on the child’s right cheek. It was the same marking that had been on the cheeks of the corpses that he and his had recovered the last week and the week before it. The same, he suspected, that had once adorned the cheeks of the children whose skeletons had been pulled out of Venezia’s canals over the previous month.
“Dio mio,” he muttered, stepping slightly closer so that he could see more clearly.
Sure enough, the painted cross did not in fact prove to be a trick of his imagination.
“Ah piccina, you’ve escaped something terrible, no?” he said gently, crouching so that he no longer towered over the frightened child. “You’re very brave, but you can rest easy now. I will take you to a place far safer than this.”
Making soothing sounds and gestures, Giovanni managed to pick up the yellow-eyed child and spirit him out of the alley. Hurrying his steps, even as the soft whimpering of the child in his arms drove him to grind his teeth in fury at those who had so cowed the little one that he’d merely gone limp as a doll when Giovanni had lifted him off his feet, Giovanni continued on his path to Lorenzo’s palazzo. Lorenzo de’ Medici, the Auditore family’s patron and protector, had naturally been furious at the sight of so many little corpses.
It was one thing to deal harshly with one’s enemies, to drive them out of your city with nothing but the clothes on their backs, and even to kill those who would pose a continued threat to you and your own. But the corpses that had been recovered had – each and every one of them – belonged to children too young to pose a threat to anything but a well-tended garden, or at worst the dignity of their elders. It was not only for that reason, but for their shared bond as fathers, that the deaths of so many children had enraged Lorenzo and Giovanni both.
It was for that reason, that the chance he had been given this night brought such hope to Giovanni’s heart.
He’d not even been looking to find such a thing, the sight of furtive movement below him merely drawing his eye due to the nature of his work. Still, even with his find being due merely to the convergence of chance and his own ancestors’ chosen line of work, Giovanni was pleased to have been able to save at least one of the children who would have otherwise died.
Once he had made his way back to Lorenzo’s palazzo, Giovanni found that the guards stopped him for merely a moment, before looking over the child in his arms and ushering him deeper inside. He’d been suspecting they would do as such; the fact that he already worked for Lorenzo aside, they had both been investigating the murders. A living witness could give them so much more than a corpse, and, even aside from such utilitarian concerns as those, it was always better to be able to save an innocent life rather than merely to avenge it.
“Giovanni,” Lorenzo greeted.
“Il Magnifico,” he returned, lowering his head as well as he could manage without disturbing the child in his arms.
“I’m glad to see you fare so well,” Lorenzo said, stepping in closer to him so as to take a better look at the child still in his arms; the child that was, even so, pressing himself farther into Giovanni’s body in a clear effort to escape from whatever it was that terrified him into the soft, almost mindless whimpering that Giovanni could still hear coming from him. “Calma, calma piccina. No one here is going to hurt you.”
Supporting the child’s back, Giovanni carried him over to an offered chair and gently settled the little one in it, keeping his hands upon the boy’s shoulders so he wouldn’t bolt out of sheer, blind panic.
“Can you speak, piccina?” Lorenzo asked, his tone gentle, crouching slightly in the same way that Giovanni himself had once done when he had tried speaking to the boy.
The boy made what sounded like several abortive attempts at speech, but in the end could not seem to manage even a single word. It was clear, given the way his eyes flickered between the pair of them, that the boy was terrified out of his mind at the prospect of whatever it was that he thought was to be his fate. Giovanni didn’t know precisely what that would have been, since none of the tiny corpses had had any marks aside from the cross painted upon their right cheeks, so there was no way to know what they had died of, only that they were indeed dead.
“Please, piccina, if you can say even one word, we may very well be able to find the ones who did this to you,” he said, knowing even as he spoke that it would take far more than simply a word to begin any kind of hunt for those most likely to be responsible for an atrocity on such a scale as this.
“You can stop the crossed-men?” the little one asked, his voice nearly too quiet to be heard over even the muffled sounds of activity that came through the drawn curtain.
Templars. It was a struggle not to growl, but as he knew that such an action would only undo all of the progress – minor as it ultimately was – he and Lorenzo had made thus far. Still, knowing that the Templars had involved themselves in the murder of so many children – each and every one of them with the markings of a Treasure Guardian – was one of the most infuriating things that he had ever had to deal with. Knowing that he and his fellow Assassins had been too late to save so many of them was a harsh thing, but Giovanni had been forced to learn many harsh lessons over his lifetime.
This was merely one more in a lifetime of them.
Chapter 142: Shrouded secrets
Chapter Text
It took a great deal of time to coax the child – he had admitted to having no name, but had apparently taken to calling himself Luccio – to tell them about the place that he and the others had come from. It sounded like there had been many of them brought in, and also as though each and every one of them had been of the same Line. Whichever of the Treasures they had been bound to, it was more than clear that the Templars were taking base advantage of such a bond; and that it was killing the Guardians in the process. He did not know precisely how a Guardian could be killed so cleanly without destroying their Treasure and ending the Line in question, but if anyone could have found a way to make such a thing possible, Giovanni knew it had to be the Templars.
“You say that the children where you were kept had no proper names. If it would not be too difficult for you, Luccio, could you tell us what the crossed-men called those they held?”
“They-” Luccio shuddered, and Giovanni gently rubbed the boy’s hands to sooth him; however, he knew even then that no small comforts would provide the kind of security the boy would need. Presently, the best thing for him would be to know that the ultimate authors of his suffering were well and truly dealt with. “They call us doves. Little doves, when they first take in the really small ones.”
Why would I be surprised that the Templars are willing to sacrifice even the youngest of children to whatever mad scheme they have dreamed up, Giovanni mused, tamping down on the rage slowly boiling up within him. The boy who called himself Luccio would not understand the cause of it – as he did not understand the function of a book, or the true nature of death even when he had been shown the corpses of the other children they had recovered – and so it would only serve to frighten him. Luccio’s no proper name, in any case, he reflected sadly.
Perhaps the little one had heard the name Luciano from one of the Templars; heard through a door or some other barrier that muffled sound without blocking it, he might have thought to call himself that in order to avoid being completely nameless. It was a sad thing, and no less infuriating for it, that the children who had been taken by the Templars were not even named, but such a thing was perfectly expected from those who would steal the very humanity from everyone in the world if they were given the chance.
“Stay here, Luccio,” Lorenzo said, gently patting the boy’s head. “Me and mine will free your fellows. Uberto Alberti, my Gonfaloniere, will see to your care and keeping. Uberto?”
“Of course, Altezza.”
“He won’t throw me into the sea?”
“No, piccina,” Lorenzo said, gently smoothing down the boy’s silver hair in an effort to soothe him.
It was one of the Templars’ more insidious methods of controlling the children they had kidnapped: even before they were truly old enough to understand the words, their Templar keepers would speak to them of all the terrible fates they would be prey to if they were glimpsed by those who lived outside of the warehouse where all of the children who had been captured were ultimately gathered. He’d not expected better, not from men with such goals as the Templars, but Giovanni couldn’t help the wish that one of the other children had managed to escape earlier. Or else, that his patrols had chanced to intersect with one of them at an earlier point.
Still, at this point, he would simply have to content himself with killing the Templars responsible while he and his rescued what children they could.
~AC: II~
When the men who had been kind enough not to throw him into the sea – or at least to speak to him as though they wouldn’t; their eyes were warmer than the crossed-men, so Luccio wanted to trust them – had left him behind with the other man, he hadn’t quite known how to react. He wanted to believe that those men-without-crosses wouldn’t leave him alone, alone to be bound with ropes and thrown into the sea, but he didn’t know this new man. Aside from the names that the men-without-crosses had given him, Luccio didn’t know any of them.
“Alberto?”
“Uberto, piccina,” the man with the round face said, smiling gently at him. “My name is Uberto Alberti.”
“What happened to the others? Why don’t they get up?”
The smile on the man’s round face slipped away, replaced with an expression that Luccio had seen many times on the faces of the men-without-crosses as they had talked to him and asked him about things. He didn’t have a name for it, but Luccio knew he didn’t enjoy it.
“They don’t rise because they’re dead, piccina,” the round-faced man said, standing up and gently taking his hands; the round-faced man’s hands were warm, but Luccio didn’t like what he was saying. “Those times you spoke of? When your fellows would scream once and then fall silent? That was most likely when they died, piccina.”
“What is that?” he asked, curious but suspecting he wouldn’t enjoy the answer at all. “That was what those other men said about them. But, I don’t know what that is, Uberto.”
The round-faced man reached out and gently set one of his large hands on top of Luccio’s head, “Would you like to see them a last time, piccina? To say your farewells?”
Reaching up to touch the round-faced man’s hand, Luccio closed his eyes. He didn’t know just what the man wanted him to say, what he wanted him to do, but seeing the others just lying there on those strange, raised slabs… he didn’t like it. Not one bit. They had looked like they were sleeping, but none of them moved, not even a bit.
Not even the small movements of chest and eyes that he’d seen during the times when he would sit and watch the littlest ones who had just been brought back from one of the other rooms.
~AC: II~
It was not a thing he had wished to believe, but facing the small boy who called himself Luccio – the boy who had not known what to do with a book when it was handed to him, and who still had no concept of death even after he had been shown the corpses of his fellows – it was clear to Uberto what he needed to do: he would have to speak to Rodrigo about what had been done to all of the children that the Templars had gathered to them. Yes, it was true that the odd appearances of the ones who were called variously Treasure Guardians or Children of Eden – depending on whether you asked an Assassin or a Templar – could easily draw the wrong sort of attention to them.
Still, the idea of killing actual children had never sat particularly well with him; surely, Rodrigo would never support such a thing, either.
However, for the moment the matter of Luccio was the more pressing. Uberto gently invited the boy to set next to him, taking out a book of children’s stories so that he would at least be able to do something for the boy, even if it was simply to explain to him those concepts that any normal child his age – he looked as though he couldn’t have been older than ten years, and he was small and lean besides – would have already been able to understand.
And so, with Luccio’s small hand resting on his right leg, Uberto settled back into his chair to both read the first story within the book he held, and to prepare himself to answer any questions that the child might have had about it.
~AC: II~
He was beginning at least to understand some of the things that the round-faced man and the men-without-crosses had said to him; mostly about what the man had meant when he told Luccio that all of the others that had been brought back to this place were dead. Dead meant their bodies would never be able to speak or move again, and that their souls – the round-faced man had tried to explain what those were, but even after listening to everything he’d said, Luccio wasn’t sure that he understood any better than before – had gone to a place called Heaven. The round-faced man had told him that they would all be happy there, and so Luccio tried to be happy for them.
He couldn’t seem to make himself stop thinking about them, though.
Sighing as he returned his attention to the large shapes with all of the straight lines and curved lines that the round-faced man had told him were something called letters, Luccio settled back down. He hadn’t known what the round-faced man had wanted him to do with them at first, but when the man had said that those were what had been in that thing he called a book, and that they were for something called reading, Luccio had found himself curious about just what else they were for.
The round-faced man had told him that there was more to letters than just reading them, and that once he could do something called write, he could actually make something that other people could read if they were given it. It was another thing that Luccio found himself wondering about, but when he’d asked the round-faced man what writing was, the man had just told him to watch the other men-without-crosses all around him. He said that the ones with feathers – the ones sitting in front of those light-colored things atop the small slabs – were all writing.
He’d asked what feathers were, and the round-faced man had tried to explain, but it had involved something else called birds, and Luccio had quickly found himself losing track of what he was saying.
Sighing as he turned his attention back to the strange “letters” that the round-faced man had given him to study, Luccio caught himself wondering what would become of him. The men-without-crosses had all said that they would not cast him into the sea, bound in ropes so that he would fall to the bottom, and they seemed to be kinder than the crossed-men. The one in white also seemed to hate the crossed-men, and Luccio wondered for a moment if he would ever find out the reason for such a thing.
Picking up the “chalk” that the round-faced man had handed to him, Luccio took one of the “slates” and began to copy the first of them onto it.
~AC: II~
Watching Luccio as the boy struggled to make sense of even the most basic of letters, Uberto found his resolve to confront Rodrigo about what had been done to all of those captured children that some faction of Templars had gathered and held under their control growing all the stronger. He hoped that he would not be forced to break his ties with them, as he still had his quarrels with the Medici and did not at all wish to abandon the protection that he had been granted as even a mere informant for the Order. Yet, to abuse and to murder children that had never done him and his the slightest wrong… no; he could never support such a thing.
Nor could he stand idly by now that he knew such a thing had been occurring, not and still call himself a man.
Chapter 143: The Eagle’s fledgling
Chapter Text
Standing beside the remains of the warehouse that had once housed the young Guardians that the Templars had captured to use in their mad ploy to give life to one of their own who should have been long dead – lives that had been stolen from every one of the Guardians that had passed their tenth year; the child calling himself Luccio had escaped at just the right time, it seemed – Giovanni held onto the baby that he had taken from the open floor of the warehouse just before he and his fellow Assassins had set fire to that terrible place.
“It seems as though the Templars were using some kind of artifact they called the Shroud to steal the lives of those Guardians connected to it,” Mario said, stepping up beside him as the pair of them began at last to make their way away from the killing ground that they and theirs had left behind.
“One wonders how they were able to find so many of them,” Giovanni mused aloud, looking back down at the slumbering infant in his arms; he’d long since scrubbed the painted cross from the little girl’s right cheek, just as he’d done with the boy calling himself Luccio.
“As much as I hate the thought, some of their own parents might have been convinced to give them away, or else sold them.”
Giovanni ground his teeth at the reminder; yes, the physical appearance of the Treasure Guardians could come as quite the shock to those who were not prepared to see such a thing, and he himself – even with the knowledge that the Brotherhood had been granted by Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad’s Guardian Codex – had been rather startled to see men and women with silver hair and yellow eyes in anything but the illustrations that he had seen in the codex. Still, even surprise or startlement was no reason to abandon a member of your own family
Particularly not to the Templars.
“Are you going to take that little one home with you?” Mario asked, smiling as he looked down at the infant in Giovanni’s arms.
“Yes,” he said, smiling gently as he looked down at the infant girl, all bundled up as she was.
She was such a tiny thing; she’d been helpless within the warehouse, abandoned in a crib alongside all of the other infants that the Templars had taken from where they had previously lived. Either with their families, or if they had been abandoned by those people, on the streets. Remembering that there were Treasure Guardians who had been forced from their homes, driven away by the people who lived there – people who should have loved them, as they were, in the end, their own – Giovanni spared a moment to hope that the Brotherhood would be able to find them, as well.
“Well, you’ll certainly be able to offer the little one a better life than these cani bastardi,” Mario spat, glaring at the still-smoldering wreck of the warehouse where Luccio and his fellows had been held while they awaited their turns to be murdered.
“Yes,” he said, standing back up as he and Mario began to make their way away from the gutted ruin of the warehouse.
It would take some time for him to return to the palazzo Auditore, but during that time – which would inevitably be longer than usual, as he could not truly hope to take his usual path home with such a small child in his arms – Giovanni would be able to think of just how he was to convince the rest of his family to take this little one into not only their home, but their hearts, as well. Still, it was likely that he would merely need to explain the circumstances he had found her facing.
Truly, his own were some of the greatest hearts in Firenze; though he’d admit to perhaps a bit of bias on his part.
Smiling as he came back into sight of his well-appointed palazzo, Giovanni ducked neatly into the concealed entrance he had used to depart this night – and many nights and mornings before – upon the business of the Brotherhood and Il Magnifico both. Once he had sealed the entrance behind him and was safely deep enough within the tunnel that he could both move and speak more freely, Giovanni turned his attention back to the little girl whose life he and his had redeemed this night.
“I hope you do manage to find a home here, bambina,” he cooed softly, continuing on his way down the tunnel to the concealed entrance behind his office’s large fireplace. “My family is very kind, and we have much to offer, so while I am reasonably certain that they will welcome you into their hearts, I would prefer to speak to them more personally about such a matter.”
He spoke aloud strictly for his own benefit, knowing that the infant in his arms could no more understand his words than the pair of them could converse with each other. Still, speaking aloud helped Giovanni to organize his own thoughts, and so he would do so when he felt safe enough to do so without revealing more of his secrets than he could afford.
~AC: II~
As she anxiously awaited the return of her dear husband, Maria Auditore wondered just what could have kept him away from their home for so long. Giovanni was a devoted family man, as every good Italian was, but he also had his duties to the Assassin Brotherhood, and there were times when those two allegiances would inevitably come into conflict with one another. Though she sometimes wished that such was not the case, she knew better than most what danger the Templars posed to the world.
She knew better than most what would happen if the Assassin Brotherhood were not present to oppose them.
And so she waited, praying every time that the Brotherhood’s business called Giovanni away from their palazzo that her husband’s skill and strength would be enough to see him returned to their family once more. This day was no different, though as time continued to wear on, Maria found herself becoming ever more unsettled about where her husband was, and just what kind of danger he might be facing.
The familiar, muffled scraping of stone that heralded the opening of the concealed passage into their palazzo drew her attention then, and Maria allowed herself to relax slightly. Of course, she had no true way of knowing just what condition her husband was in, but simply knowing that he was home did a great deal to settle her nerves. After waiting for a few, long moments to allow Giovanni to close the hidden passage once more – hiding it from the view of those who might bring harm to their family through the knowledge of it, even if only inadvertently – Maria made her way to her husband’s spacious office.
What she found there was rather surprising; her husband had indeed returned to her, but the small bundle in his arms appeared both strange and familiar at once.
“Giovanni, what have you been about?” she asked, moving to stand beside him so she could get a better look at the small bundle in his arms.
As she had come to suspect, it was indeed an infant; one who seemed to be no older than their own Petruccio.
“I found this little one being held captive by a cell of Templars who had been operating out of an abandoned warehouse on the outskirts of Firenze,” her husband said, holding out the infant so that she could get a closer look at the little one.
“Those eyes,” she gasped, as the little one opened bright, pale yellow eyes – the color of new gold, and so even more strange to see in a living person’s face – and peered up at her with the guileless innocence that all children possessed. “Does this have something to do with the Brotherhood?”
“In a sense, yes,” her husband said, looking down at the child in his arms with what seemed to be both sadness and hope in equal measures. “This girl is one of those who our Brotherhood calls Treasure Guardians.”
Settling herself down in a nearby chair and waiting for her husband to do the same, Maria listened as Giovanni told her the tale of the Treasure Guardians; how they had presumably come into being, how it had been Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad that had brought them into the ranks of the Brotherhood, and how the Templars had come to find out about them, some time later. It seemed that, in addition to their odd appearances, each of the Guardians bore a connection to one of the ancient artifacts that both the Brotherhood and the Templars were so interested in.
It was no surprise, then, that the Templars would attempt to gather up as many as they could lay their hands to; Giovanni and their fellow Assassins had spoken quite extensively – and on many occasions – of the Templars and their cravings for power and control.
“Considering all of that, Maria, I think it would be best if this girl is given a home with us,” her husband said, his kind eyes shifting from his examination of the infant in his arms up to rest on her own face. “Federico and Ezio will enjoy having another little sister, I think.”
“Yes,” she said, humming gently as she gently caressed the infant’s tiny face. “Claudia will enjoy it, too, I’ve little doubt. And she is about Petruccio’s age.” The soft smile on her face melted away, as Maria reflected again on the circumstances that had brought such a small child into their home all unlooked-for. “I cannot help but wonder just what happened to land her in such a terrible place.”
“Like as not, the Templars took her after they had killed what family she might have had,” Giovanni said.
“Yes,” she muttered softly.
Neither of them wished to mention the other, horrible possibility that this lost little one’s existence presented, and Maria simply wished not to think about it for any longer than she absolutely had to. Just long enough, in fact, to push the thoughts from her mind.
“She will need a proper name, if she’s to be a member of our family,” her husband said, and in that moment Maria realized that – in spite of everything that had happened and what might happen in the future – she herself was starting to think of how they would bring this tiny child into their family, rather than if they should.
“Do you think it would make her more safe or less if I were to give her my own name?” she asked, gently taking the infant from her husband’s arms as he passed the child into her own.
“Maria Auditore da Firenze,” Giovanni said, carefully pronouncing the name as he caressed the infant’s head.
Maria smiled. “I think it suits her, as well.”
Chapter 144: Sons and daughters
Chapter Text
As their small family slowly grew older, Giovanni found that their little Maria did indeed grow into the name that his dear wife had gifted her with when she had first come into their lives just a bit over a decade ago. She learned just as well as any of her natural siblings, and was a good friend to Petruccio when it was determined that the sickness that had plagued him since his birth would last for the rest of his life. Perhaps the bond between them had been strengthened by the fact that she was forced to hide her bright, pale yellow eyes behind darkened glasses; pretending to be blind when one could see perfectly well could not have been an easy thing to bear.
Still, whatever the root of her close bond with Petruccio, Giovanni was glad of it.
~AC: II~
As he tugged his littlest sister along behind him, Ezio looked around for the girl that he and Federico had seen. He might not have made the best first impression in the world, but cute girls like her could always be persuaded to take a second look at someone who was kind to their littlest sister. Particularly if that littlest sister was blind and helpless.
And yes, little Maria was not truly blind, and she was about as far from helpless as a girl her age could be, but no one really needed to know that tonight.
“You still haven’t told me what this is all about, fratello mio.”
“Don’t be so impatient, sorellina,” he said, returning the teasing smile she had turned on him with a bit of interest; just as any good banker would, really. “I said that I needed your help, little Maria, and so I so. With something very important.”
“Ah,” his littlest sister said, a sly expression barely concealed by the dark glasses shading her bright, pale yellow eyes. “You couldn’t manage to find a girl on your own, so you’re bringing in your little, blind sister to help you,” little Maria shook her head, giving him a disappointed expression that was so exaggerated it couldn’t have been anything but faked. “Dio mio, are you losing your touch, mio fratello? Whatever will-”
Ezio slapped his right hand over her mouth, but he could practically feel his littlest sister grinning at him behind it. “That’s enough out of you, grullo tesoro. Now, just stay close and look cute; I’ll find Christina.”
“Oh ho,” little Maria said, grinning at him like the troublesome little imp she truly was. “So, this Christina of yours can see through all of your little lines, can she? Seems like you do need my help, fratello mio.”
Tempted to pull little Maria’s hat down over her face, Ezio restrained himself with some effort. That kind of thing might have caused her wig to fall off, and even a glimpse of the silver hair hidden under it would have endangered the both of them more than he was willing to chance. Even though he didn’t know quite who little Maria would be in danger from, the Auditore family had enough enemies on their own without inviting the notice of whatever kind of people would come after his littlest sister simply for looking a bit strange.
So, all he did was to give the little imp a well-deserved swat across her left shoulder as the pair of them continued searching. The sounds of a scuffle reached him then, wiping away what good-humor he and little Maria had managed to create for themselves with their little game. I know that voice, Ezio felt his lips pulling back into a smirk that anyone who wasn’t a complete imbecile would recognize meant trouble.
“Hey, bastardo!” Vieri de’ Pazzi – one of the few people Ezio knew that was enough of a swine to threaten the many, many women who had likely spurned his clumsy advances – stood far too close to Christina, having clearly been leering at her, before Ezio’s right fist caught him full in the face.
~AC: II~
Watching her notorious flirt of a brother beat some civility into Vieri’s ugly head wasn’t all that interesting once the first few punches had been thrown, so Maria began to turn her gaze to catch sight of the woman he was so intent on catching the eye of, before quickly recalling the fact that she was still supposed to be playing the part of a cute, helpless little blind girl. Stopping herself before she’d begun to turn her head too much, Maria instead turned just her eyes, so that she would be able to see the girl – Christina, if she’d remembered right – as the girl watched her silly brother at work.
It seemed that, even without her having to do anything, Ezio was managing to impress.
The sound of her brother’s sudden shout drew Maria’s attention, but too late for her to do anything but take that bastard Vieri’s blow full in the face. Her darkened glasses were knocked flying, to clatter somewhere out of sight down the alley. All the worse was when the bastard gabbed her head, tore her wig clean off, and grabbed the long plait of silver hair hidden under it!
“I’d always thought there was something odd about you, principessa!” the bastard snarled, and Maria’s entire world narrowed to the horrible sensation of her long plait all but being wrenched from her skull as that bastard Vieri dragged her backwards.
Almost slamming into the ground as the pressure on her plait suddenly let up, Maria found herself caught gently by the very girl that her silly flirt of a brother had been trying to romance in the first place. Breathing more easily for the easing of her pain, Maria found herself tensing up all over again, however, when Christina – who was one of the only people she knew who would be so gentle under these kinds of circumstances – began to turn her around, either to take a look at her or just to settle her back on her feet.
She couldn’t help but wonder just how Christina was going to react to her odd appearance, and just how her pending reaction would shape the relationship that Ezio wished to share with her; or else destroy it, but Maria tried not to think like that.
“Dio mio, yellow eyes?” the woman exclaimed, but instead of drawing back, the way Maria had been concerned she would, Christina reached out to gently touch the right side of her face. “I’ve never seen such a thing before.”
“Not many people have, signorina,” she said, trying not to lower her gaze from the other woman’s.
“I suppose I can see why, piccola principessa,” Christina said gently, smiling softly. “Still, I think they look rather pretty.”
“Didn’t I tell you she was wonderful, sorellina?” Ezio asked, chuckling as he came to stand beside the pair of them.
“Well, I suppose you were right, fratello mio,” she said, grinning. “For once.”
“Grullo tesoro,” he growled, still smiling.
Christina laughed, clapping her hands and grinning at the pair of them. “Well, I suppose I can’t deny a second chance to the kind of man who not only defends my virtue, but is also so kind to his little sister,” Christina turned her smile on her. “Even when she is being a wicked little imp.”
The three of them shared a laugh, and Ezio reached out almost shyly to take her hand. That was just like her brother: he might have talked himself up so much when the pair of them were alone, but he was always so adorably shy when he actually started trying to talk to one of the women he wanted to romance. It really was the most adorable thing.
~AC: II~
Hugging his sister close, Ezio smiled all the way back to the Palazzo Auditore. This evening had been one of the best he’d had in a long time; he hadn’t only gotten to court Christina, but he’d gotten to punch that miserable bastardo Vieri in the face until he’d ran off with his tail between his legs. Patting little Maria’s head as the pair of them slipped back into their palazzo, Ezio cuddled her close and kissed both her cheeks as the pair of them parted.
“Bona sera, fratello mio.”
“Bona sera, sorellina,” he said, as the two of them hugged a last time and then parted.
~AC: II~
Opening his eyes as little Maria crept back into his room, Petruccio quickly covered up his grin with his blankets before she could end up seeing it. It was so funny when little Maria would sneak off with big brother Ezio to go out and do all kinds of things that he wouldn’t be able to do. Stuffing a wad of blankets in his mouth to muffle his laughter, Petruccio curled up under his blankets and tried to fall back to sleep.
Chapter 145: The good life
Chapter Text
The next day, when the sun had begun falling from the sky in earnest, Maria found herself following her brothers up the walls and over the rooftops that stood between their palazzo and the Ponte Vecchio. The three of them had decided – though more Ezio and Federico, since they were the ones who knew more about this kind of thing, and had quite a few friends suited for the task, besides – that it was time they taught Vieri a proper lesson for being such an arrogant prick even though everyone who wasn’t trying to curry favor with his high-handed family knew he was a dickless piece of shit.
“We all stand together!” Ezio called out, raising his right fist to rally the friends and comrades he and Federico had gathered together to fight by their sides; Maria smiled as she heard the voices of those around them rising like a tide of support and agreement. “Do you know why I have called you, my closest friends and comrades, here tonight? To ask your aid. For too long have I been silent while our enemy, Vieri de’ Pazzi, has gone about this town slandering my family, dragging our name through the mud, and trying in whatever pathetic way he can to demean us. Ordinarily, I would never stoop to kicking such a mangy cur, but just the other night he attempted to assault my littlest sister, and so I could hardly-”
“Enough of your nonsense, grullo!”
Stepping back from a thrown rock that had landed at her feet, Maria turned to sneer at Vieri and the laughable allies – allies whose families had probably been bought off or threatened to make them all come out to this battle – as they made their way into the same, wide alleyway that she, her brothers, and their own, true allies stood together.
“Bona sera, Vieri!” her brother greeted cordially. “We were just talking about you! Surprised to see you here; I thought the Pazzi hired others to do their dirty work.”
“It’s your family that calls for guards whenever there’s trouble, codardo! Afraid to handle things yourself?” Vieri returned; Maria scoffed at him.
“Your sister seemed quite satisfied with the handling I gave her earlier!” Ezio taunted, and Maria laughed openly.
“What do you say to that?! You and your famiglia di fottitori cavallo can’t just go around saying whatever you want!”
“Watch your tongue, principessa, or I’ll cut it out of your mouth!”
“Bastardo!”
She didn’t see exactly what happened after her middle brother rushed that bastard Vieri before he could fully draw the dagger he was beginning to pull out, since Federico pulled her back in among the watching crowds and told some of the larger boys there to keep watch over her, but Maria was sure that Ezio would be able to beat whatever low-class lapdogs that Vieri had been able to scrape up.
The sounds of fighting were confusing, and more than a bit thrilling, and Maria wished for a moment that she was a bit smaller so she could have sat on the shoulders of one of their allies and been able to see what was going on; still, if she’d been that small, her brothers would have flatly refused to bring her along to this kind of thing at all.
“Come on, sorellina,” Federico called, as she saw both of her older brothers making their way over to where she was standing.
“Dio mio, what happened to your face, Ezio?” she demanded, seeing the large, bleeding gash down the right side of her middle brother’s mouth.
“Now you see why I insisted on you seeing a doctor, fratellino?”
“All right, all right,” her middle brother said, sounding playfully harassed. “I guess, if it really worries you, sorellina. At least I have enough for a short visit.”
Grumbling at the utterly troublesome things that her adorable fool of a middle brother’s pride could drive him to do at times, Maria followed along with her brothers as they went to find a doctor to tend to Ezio’s wound. When the three of them finally found their way to a one-room building whose interior managed to seem small and almost cramped from all of the strange tools and plants that Maria had never truly been curious enough to ask about.
Listening as her brothers spoke to the doctor, who had naturally not been particularly pleased to be woken up at such a late hour, though he’d been a bit more understanding once he’d seen what kind of injuries her middle brother had taken.
“You must help him!” Federico exclaimed, the grin on his face giving lie to the urgency of his tone. “That pretty face is his only asset!”
“Hey, fottiti!” Ezio grumped, making a rude gesture where Federico couldn’t help but see it.
Soon enough, however, the doctor had managed to get her silly middle brother to sit down and behave himself. At least long enough that he was able to stitch up Ezio’s wound, and to make an appointment at their palazzo the next morning to remove them. So, at least all of that was good, and the three of them left after Ezio had paid the doctor for his time.
“Here, it’s our father’s best grappa,” Federico said, offering Ezio a flask. “Better than mother’s milk for a man in your condition. And some for you, little Maria.”
“Grazie, fratello,” she said, taking the generous swallow that had been offered to her.
“Quite a night,” Federico said, once the three of them had finished drinking their grappa.
“Indeed,” Ezio said, looking as though he were trying his very hardest not to grin. “If only they could all be as much fun as this. Oh, wait,” he said, in response to the grin she could see on Federico’s face, and the one she could feel on her own. “They are.”
The three of them shared a laugh, before Federico continued speaking, though the smile remained firmly on his face.
“Even so, I think a little food and drink wouldn’t be a bad thing before we go home. It’s late, I know, but there’s a taverna nearby where they don’t close until breakfast time-”
“And you and the owner are good friends?” Ezio asked, the smile on his face suggesting that he already knew the answer.
“How did you guess?” Federico asked, with a laugh.
And so, the three of them made their way along the streets until they came to the inn whose owner Federico was such good friends with, and not long after that, they were all sitting down to a hearty meal of varied meats, breads, and wonderful cheeses. Leaning softly against Ezio once she had eaten her fill, Maria smiled as her middle brother wrapped her left arm around his neck in turn. Once Federico and Ezio had finished their own meals, the three of them left the inn behind and ventured back out into the night streets.
Maria barely had the time to take even a step, before she felt Ezio’s arms lifting her up onto his back.
~AC: II~
“I thought you said I was too heavy for this, fratello mio!”
Laughing at his silly littlest sister’s exclamation, Ezio cuddled her close. “You might be growing quite a bit, sorellina, but I can still manage this for a little while longer.”
Federico laughed cheerfully, looking at the pair of them where they stood, little Maria riding on his back the way she’d done ever since she was tiny. Not that little Maria wasn’t still tiny, but if he said that around her too many times, she’d start to glare at him.
“We should head home now, you two,” their eldest brother said, smiling. “Father’s sure to be wondering where we’ve gone.”
“Yes,” he said, his good mood flagging slightly in the face of what he was, like as not, going to have to deal with when the three of them returned to the palazzo Auditore at last. “And I’d rather avoid a lecture.”
“Yes,” little Maria said, laughing softly. “Padre isn’t going to be happy you’re out so late, and even less when he finds out you took me, too.”
“Diavolo,” he muttered. “Sometimes I forget how little you really are, piccola Maria. But, you’re right; Padre’s going to be even madder once he finds out about that.”
“How about a race back home, then?” Federico asked, grinning. “Or, are you afraid you won’t be able to win with all that extra weight on your back?”
He could hear little Maria’s playful growl from where she was situated on his back, and grinned in challenge at their eldest brother. “Well, now you’ve done it; I’m afraid I have no choice now but to run you into the ground!”
Federico laughed. “We’ll just see about that, fratellino. On three: one, two, three!”
The both of them started off at a strong sprint, with little Maria shifting her legs so that they wrapped more loosely around his waist, letting him breathe more easily so he could run faster. The sparse amounts of people out this late at night – not even enough to be called crowds, really – made things easier, but a bit less interesting. Really, their daytime races were a lot more fun.
Breathing heavily once he’d made it to the street just before their palazzo, Ezio gently tugged little Maria’s arms loose from his shoulders, supporting his littlest sister as she slid back down to the ground.
“I think we won,” little Maria said, sounding a bit surprised.
“Well, I guess you’re not such a tartaruga, after all,” Federico said teasingly, drawing another playful growl from little Maria.
Before either of them had the chance to say anything in response, Ezio felt his littlest sister darting around him, and then heard the sound of his older brother squawking as he was firmly swatted. Muffling his laughter as well as he could manage, as he watched little Maria chase Federico around, swatting him with light slaps that couldn’t have hurt nearly as much as Federico was playing them up to. Still, little Maria seemed cheerful, and as long as his siblings weren’t truly hurting each other, Ezio was content to watch them at play.
“All right, all right, I surrender,” Federico laughed, holding up his hands in supplication. “Have mercy on me, sorellina!”
“Well, as long as you’re sorry, fratello mio,” little Maria said, wagging a finger as she playfully scolded him.
He and Federico both laughed, but their eldest brother sobered more quickly than either of them. “It’s a good life we lead,” Federico said, an uncharacteristic solemnity about him.
“The best,” he said, leaning back against a nearby wall as he looked out towards the palazzo the three of them shared with the rest of their family. “And may it never change.”
“May it never change us, either,” Federico said, the smile coming back to his face.
~AC: II~
Curling up closer to her brothers as the three of them stood just across the way from their palazzo, Maria smiled as the three of them made their way back up to the rooftops. She could still hear Ezio and Federico talking, but for the moment she was far more focused on getting back into their palazzo than anything her brothers might have been talking about. Of course, once she stood inside the grounds of their palazzo, Maria looked up to see that it was only Federico who had come back with her.
“Where did Ezio get off to?” she asked, after looking around to see if she could find her silly middle brother.
“Christina,” Federico said.
“Dio mio,” she muttered, shaking her head. “He really is hopeless.”
“You get no arguments from me, sorellina,” Federico said, grinning as the pair of them prepared to edge past the guards that served their family.
Those who served during the night were no less faithful and loyal than those who served during the day, and while that was a good thing by all accounts, it did make it just that much harder to sneak past them when the need arose. Times like these, Maria would find herself wishing that she could have turned invisible, somehow. Perhaps with one of those fantastic cloaks that the witches and sorcerers in those stories that Mama would read her sometimes.
Sighing with relief as she came into sight of her room, Maria tensed slightly when she felt a hand on her left shoulder.
“What has you up so late, little Maria?”
“Papa,” she exclaimed, guiltily surprised to find their father standing calmly behind her. “I didn’t know that you’d still be up,” she said, shifting under his firm gaze as he stood over her.
“Ah, so you thought you would be able to sneak back in under my nose, did you?”
She wilted under his stern, disapproving gaze. “I’m sorry, Papa. I should have told Ezio I couldn’t go with him, but I just hated Vieri so much-”
“What does Ezio have to do with this, Maria?”
She winced; her middle brother wasn’t going to be happy that she’d been the one to give him away. Yes, Papa probably would have figured such a thing out when her middle brother failed to return to the house in the morning, but Maria couldn’t help feeling as though she should have chosen her words better when she was speaking. When Ezio found out, he was certain to be disappointed.
Still, she was not Ezio that she was facing, here at this moment it was Papa she had to speak with.
Chapter 146: Working day and night
Chapter Text
It was hard, particularly at moments such as these, to remember just how fragile little Maria’s life truly was; she acted so much like one of his true-born children, it was all he could do to remember that she was a Treasure Guardian. To remember that, if the Templars chanced a glimpse of her silver hair or yellow eyes, they would do everything in their power to bring her back under their control. True, he and his fellow Assassins would not allow such a thing to happen unopposed, but the fact was that he had taken this job – built this life – to escape from the constant stresses that a member of the Brotherhood was subjected to was not one that Giovanni could lightly allow himself to forget.
He’d no wish to drag his family into such turmoil, particularly when such a thing could be easily avoided with a bit of discretion.
So, after thoroughly admonishing little Maria for her carelessness and then sending her to bed, Giovanni Auditore made his own way back to bed. He wasn’t as annoyed with Ezio’s escapade as he knew his wife would be – truly, the second-eldest of his sons reminded Giovanni of himself at the same age – but still, he knew that his Maria would wish to discipline the boy in her own way, once she realized what he had been about.
Still, all of that would be for later, once he himself had gotten some sleep.
~AC: II~
Panting as he hauled himself up onto a nearby rooftop, after managing to lose the guards that his sweet Christina’s father employed, Ezio let himself breathe a bit more freely. Having to lose guards first thing in the morning hadn’t been exactly what he’d planned on, but getting to spend a morning with Christina had been more than worth it. Still, now he had to get home before anyone had the chance to notice that he’d been gone at all.
And yes, there were those who would have probably said that that kind of thing was a fool’s hope, but those people weren’t here; and most of them were idiots, anyway.
Scaling the side of his palazzo’s walls, Ezio breathed more easily once he had over the edge of the roofline and could no longer be seen by anyone walking past on the street. Looking down into the courtyard of the palazzo that he and his family all shared, he smiled when he realized that there weren’t any guards around to catch sight of what he was going to be doing. Lowering himself back down into the courtyard, Ezio dropped back to the ground with a smile.
He’d just need to make it back to his room, and everything would be right again; at least as far as anyone else knew, anyway.
“Ezio.”
Tensing up all over again as he finds himself confronted by Giovanni Auditore, Ezio turned quickly. “Good morning, Father.”
“Come with me,” Giovanni Auditore said, the severe expression on his face wilting any desire Ezio might have had to resist.
Still, best to keep up appearances; maybe he could get off with just a lecture, instead of a thrashing. “Is something wrong?”
“Do you think me blind and deaf, my son?” Giovanni asked, the stern expression on his face not diminishing even a single bit as the pair of them walked together. “I know all about your fight with Vieri de’ Pazzi last night. And then this little visit to Christina Vespucci! Your behavior is unacceptable,” Giovanni Auditore said, as Ezio continued to wilt under the sternness of his words and his glare in equal measures. “It… It…” he looked over his shoulder, almost as though he was checking for anyone else who might overhear this conversation of theirs; Ezio wondered, just for a moment, whether his thoughts about the reason for just such a change in mood could be right or not. “It reminds me of myself, when I was your age,” he continued; and, just so quickly as that, Ezio found his jovial father standing before him once more. “I assume these misadventures won’t interfere with your work today?”
“No, Padre,” he said, relieved to have escaped with only a lecture, and happy that he and his father had managed to find yet more common ground between the pair of them. “You have my word.”
“Good, come,” Father said, making his way back over to his large, well-appointed desk. “I’ve prepared some documents for Lorenzo de’ Medici to review. I need them delivered to him.”
“With haste, Father,” he said, taking the letter as it was handed to him.
“Return to me when it’s done,” Father said, smiling with the same pride that always seemed to shine out of his eyes whenever he regarded any of them.
“Of course, Father,” he said, tucking the letter safely into his pouch so that he wouldn’t chance losing it.
Turning and calling a last farewell over his shoulder, Ezio made his way back out into the streets of Firenze, after only a brief stop at his room to clean himself up from the night’s… activities. Keeping to the back streets for long enough to get himself out of sight of the sight of the crowds within the city at large, he quickly scaled a nearby wall once he’d done so. It was better, up among the rooftops at the peak of the world; somehow, he’d always felt more himself up there.
It wasn’t something he’d likely be able to explain, but he had a good feeling that both Federico and little Maria understood even without the words being spoken between them.
As he continued on, Ezio soon found himself looking down upon a palazzo that was only slightly less familiar to him than his own. Especially after having spent so many times over there for midday meals and the occasional dinner. And so, he found a place to make his way back down to the ground, landing lightly on his feet with the grace and ease that he had worked so long to develop.
“Bon travato, Ezio!” Finding himself greeted by Boetio, Ezio smiled; it was a real stroke of luck to have found one of Lorenzo’s most trustworthy and dedicated servants so quickly. “How are you?”
“Same as ever,” he said easily. “I have a letter here for Messer Lorenzo.”
“I’ll see to it that he receives it when he returns,” Boetio said, holding out a hand for the letter in question.
“Returns?” Ezio echoed, having been given no reason to expect such a complication.
“They’ve gone to Villa Careggi, I’m afraid. And are not expected back for at least another day,” Boetio said, hand returning to his side after a moment’s wait.
“I’ll let my father know,” he said, handing over the document, knowing that it would be safe in the hands of such a faithful man.
Bidding Boetio his thanks and a good day, Ezio turned his path back to the back streets that he’d previously used to come within sight of Lorenzo’s palazzo, then made his way back up to the rooftops once he’d managed to do such. Covering the distance between their two palazzos much quicker than he would if he’d bothered with going through the winding streets, and with much less chance of being spotted by Pazzi thugs or that little swine Vieri, Ezio was soon able to make his way down the side of a nearby building, and was quickly standing before his family’s palazzo once again.
“Keep up the good work,” Federico called mockingly, as he jogged lightly past.
“Shut up,” he shot back, making a rude gesture in passing.
The sound of voices from within Father’s office caused him to pause, listening to see if he could find out just who it was before he made his way inside. Or, if he would even be allowed inside in the first place. It seemed as though Father was speaking to the Gonfaloniere about something; there was something about Francesco de’ Pazzi being in prison, and while he’d probably been as much of a bastardo as Vieri – if not worse, for having raised him – it didn’t sound as though either his father or Uberto were particularly untroubled by what should have been at least some kind of a victory.
Even a small once over those Pazzi bastardi should have been cause for at least a minor celebration, and this was hardly small.
Gathering himself for what he was about to do, and shoving his curiosity to the back of his mind so that it would not trouble him so much, Ezio rapped twice upon the door to call attention to himself, and smiled softly as he was let in. Yes, he hardly intended to make a scene about the fall of the elder Pazzi, but he was hardly going to pretend that such a thing had not happened.
“Ah, hello son. You remember my friend Uberto, yes?” Father asked, once he had stepped through the door and come into sight of the room’s occupants.
“Good morning, Gonfaloniere Alberti,” he greeted, the formality of their current arrangement hardly lost on him.
“To you as well, young man,” Uberto said, a kindly smile spreading across his rounded face.
“I trust you delivered the message,” Father said, his expression expectant.
“Sí, Padre, but it seems Lorenzo is out of town.”
“Hmm. I did not anticipate this,” Father said, sounding troubled.
“What does it matter?” Uberto asked, clearly aiming to be reassuring. “So you wait another day or two.”
“Listen, your mother and Claudia have been looking for you. I’ll have need of you later, but for now, see if you can help them,” Father said, and while the tone of his words were soft, Ezio knew an order when he heard it.
Still… “Are you sure?”
“Yes. Now, if you’ll excuse us?”
There was really only one thing he could say in the face of that tone. “Sí, Padre.”
Turning to leave, after having bid the pair of them a fond farewell and receiving Uberto’s in turn, Ezio turned and made his way back to the courtyard of their palazzo. There was about the usual amount of sound being funneled through the air – his mother’s singing, his little sisters talking together with their heads leaned close, and running footsteps that he thought might have belonged to the youngest boy of their family – and Ezio smiled to hear it. He did so love hearing the sounds of life echoing through the courtyard.
Even when it was night and everything was quiet, just the knowledge that the next day would be filled with the same life and sound as usual made him happy to know about it.
Making his way over to where Claudia and little Maria were sitting, since it seemed as though Claudia was troubled by something, Ezio sat down on the bench just on the opposite side of Claudia than little Maria.
“What’s wrong, Claudia?” he asked, gently laying his right hand on her right shoulder; his younger sister sniffled in response.
“She says that the other girls at her school have been saying… hurtful things about… Well, about her and Duccio,” little Maria said, looking worriedly at him from behind the still-sniffling form of Claudia where she sat nestled between the pair of them.
“Harpies!” he said, gesturing so as to fling out all their hurtful words like the useless garbage they were. “You’re better of without them, sorellina Claudia.”
“I,” Claudia sniffled again, clearly trying as best she could to bring her turbulent emotions back under control. “I think they might be right. Duccio…I think he’s been… unfaithful.”
Grinding his teeth as little Maria leaned back in, cuddling Claudia in an effort to comfort her as best she could after that bastardo Duccio had broken her fragile heart with his philandering.
“I want him to suffer for what he did!” Claudia said, raising her teary eyes to look first him and then little Maria in the face once more.
“Sí, sorellina, and I will make certain he does,” he vowed, his resolve growing all the more firm in the face of his younger sister’s distress. “Watch over her, eh little Maria?”
“Of course, fratello,” their littlest sister said, nodding as she settled more comfortably next to Claudia, wrapping her small, slender arms around their other sister’s shoulders as the pair of them leaned into each other’s embrace again. “Give Duccio a kick in the balls for me, all right?”
“I’ll give him more than just that,” he said, determinedly rising back to his feet, offering his little sisters a last, fierce smile before he turned to leave the grounds of their palazzo once again.
It wasn’t so hard to find Duccio, though the bastardo did turn out to be just the kind of philandering scum that Claudia’s so-called friends had mocked her about. It made beating him up all the more satisfying, though there remained a small part of Ezio that wished he hadn’t had to do such a thing. He wished that Claudia had managed to be engaged to a good man, one who would have loved his younger sister as she deserved to be loved.
It was just the same kind of wish he had for little Maria; the same, he expected, that any good brother had for their own sister, no matter how few or how many they may have had.
Once he’d returned to his family’s palazzo, Ezio found himself stopped short by Petruccio’s enthusiastic calling.
“Hey, Ezio!”
“What are you doing out here, Petruccio?” he asked, concerned for the youngest of his brothers. “You should be in bed.”
“I want those feathers,” Petruccio said, pointing to the top of a tower on a nearby building.
“What for?” he asked, though he suspected that he wouldn’t be wrong if he chanced a guess.
“It’s a secret,” his littlest brother said, grinning cheekily at him, all the while holding an intricately carved pearwood box to his narrow chest.
“If I get them for you, will you go back inside?” he asked, wanting to be certain that Petruccio would get the sleep he needed to keep his strength up.
“Yes, I promise,” the littlest of his brothers said, his eyes wide and guileless; Ezio suspected he’d have to put in a bit more work to make certain Petruccio would do as he’d promised, but such was often the way with little brothers.
Particularly little brothers whose health wasn’t very good, and who ended up missing out on more than a few childhood activities as a result of that; really, it was just the same with little Maria, and she only had to pretend to be sickly.
Once he’d managed to find his way up the tower – a slightly more difficult task than usual, owing to the smoothness of the brickwork – Ezio collected as many feathers as he could find in the currently-empty nest. It turned out that he’d managed to collect fifteen of the things, and so he made his way down and back to the Auditore palazzo with a certain sense of satisfaction. Time would tell, of course, just what else Petruccio would feel he needed after Ezio made it back to him.
Landing neatly back on his feet, just a few strides from his littlest brother, Ezio grinned as he saw the smile spreading slowly across Petruccio’s face. Yes, it was quite impish, but it was also clear as day that his littlest brother was happy to see him back. Even in spite of the coming silliness, Ezio knew gratitude when he saw it.
“Here, as promised,” he said, handing over the fist full of feathers he’d gathered so carefully.
“Grazie, brother,” Petruccio said, smiling all the more widely.
“You still haven’t told me why you want these,” he said, continuing to crouch so that he could remain at eye-level with the littlest of his brothers.
“I will, in time,” Petruccio said, wide smile turning mysterious.
“All right, keep your secrets,” he said, grinning at his littlest brother as he stood back up. “But now, it’s time for you to go back to bed.”
“Don’t forget that you should be getting to sleep soon, too,” Petruccio called back, sticking out his tongue as he turned to make his way back to his room.
“Brat,” Ezio muttered, grinning in fond exasperation as the littlest of his brothers obediently returned to his room at last.
Stifling a yawn of his own, Ezio turned his steps toward the dinning room as he heard the sound of one of their kitchen attendants calling all of them to dinner. Smiling as he joined the leisurely procession of his family as they all made their way to the table. Even Petruccio had been invited to the table, though his share was smaller than the rest of theirs, since at the moment he needed sleep more than food. The meal was as wonderful as ever, and Ezio passed along his thanks alongside the rest of his family for the care and attention that had clearly been paid during the course of preparing this meal in particular.
After waiting long enough that he could be at least reasonably sure he wouldn’t wake up with the terrible ache in his belly that he’d gotten those few times he’d forgotten to give himself time to relax after a meal before heading to bed, Ezio got up from the reading chair he’d curled up in, and made his way to bed.
Chapter 147: In the shadows
Chapter Text
After finding that he’d slept in later than he usually did, but also that his father didn’t have any pressing work for him, Ezio rose with a certain sense of relief. He was perfectly aware, of course, that his mother was more than likely to have work of her own that she wished him to do, but those tasks were – more often than not – simpler and more leisurely than those his father asked of him. So, after he’d broken his fast with some bread and cheese, taking a bit of wine to wash it all down, Ezio made his way back out to the main courtyard of the Auditore palazzo.
He was certain to find her there.
Smiling as he felt the bright, warm morning sunlight falling on his upturned face, Ezio turned his eyes back to the courtyard itself; sure enough, there was his mother waiting for him with a kindly smile on her face. Waving as he started into the courtyard, Ezio made his way over to where she was standing.
“Buon’ giorno, Ezio,” she said, turning the gentle smile she’d been wearing upon him.
“Buon giorno, Madre. How are you?”
“I’m all right. And you?” his mother asked, the kindly expression on her face transforming into one of tolerant amusement. “Still recovering from last night?”
“I… have no idea what you’re talking about,” he said, trying not to make the face that Federico had told him about so many times; the one that would tell anyone who knew him that he was lying.
“Of course not,” she said, still seeming amused. “Anyway, I have an errand to run. I’d like you to join me.”
“My pleasure,” he said, turning his steps to follow her as she began to leave.
“Come, it’s not far from here,” she said, as the pair of them fell into step with one another and began to make their way out of their palazzo’s courtyard.
Smiling slightly as he continued on his way, Ezio found his attention caught by his mother’s unimpressed expression.
“I know about your fight with Vieri,” Mother said, as the pair of them made their way out into the bustling streets of Firenze once again.
“What fight?” he asked, hoping that Mother wasn’t nearly as well-informed as she was attempting to sound.
“Please. Let’s not play this game,” Mother said, as the pair of them turned off of the street that lead to a nearby cathedral, and down in the direction of the Artists’ Quarter of Firenze.
“He spoke ill of us, and last night he attacked little Maria,” that last he growled, hardly willing to forgive that bastardo for everything he’d done. “I could hardly allow him to go unpunished.”
“I’m sure he’s having a hard time dealing with the accusations against his father. Francesco de’ Pazzi is many things, and none of them good. But, even I never expected he’d be capable of murder. Still, even if the pair of you should not have been wandering around so late at night – and I will be having words with you both, make no mistake – your protection of our little Maria was well done, at least.”
“Grazie, Madre,” he said, pausing for a moment to think. “What will happen to Francesco?”
“I imagine there will be a trial,” Mother said, as the pair of them ascended a wide flight of steps.
“Will Father speak at it?” he asked, not entirely certain how those kind of things worked.
“He’ll have to,” Mother said. “He’s the one with the evidence.”
“Still, I wish there was another way,” he muttered, as the pair of them continued deeper into Firenze’s Artists’ Quarter.
“You’ve nothing to fear,” Mother gently reassured him. “It is an unfortunate state of affairs, but it will pass.”
As the pair of them continued on their way through the Artists’ Quarter, Ezio at last caught sight of their final destination at last. It turned out to be one of the humbler apartments within the Quarter – unlike those bustling with assistants and frequented by clients that Ezio had found himself passing by time and time again on not only their present journey, but on the others he’d made to this place; not all of them at ground-level – and Ezio found himself with only a scant few moments to wonder just who it was that his mother knew in a place like this, before Mother knocked on the front door and Ezio almost immediately found himself faced with the tall, well-dressed form of the artist that Mother had clearly been seeking when she came to this place.
Ezio thought that the artist might have been at least six – perhaps even seven – years older than he himself was, and possessed both a thick shock of light brown hair, as well as a luxuriant but neatly-trimmed beard of the same coloring. He’d an air about him that seemed a bit foppish, but at the same time he also appeared rather athletic. Ezio made up his mind to reserve judgment until he’d been able to take the proper measure of Mother’s artist for himself.
“Hello, Leonardo,” his mother greeted, the kindly tone of her voice letting him know that this was a man whose company she truly enjoyed; Ezio wondered what kind of man this artist of hers truly was, to garner the attention of his mother.
Ezio liked the look of him, at least.
“Madonna Maria!” Leonardo greeted, the artist’s demeanor cheerful and a smile on his face as the pair of them exchanged a formal kiss. “This is my son, Ezio,” she said, stepping slightly to the side so that he and Leonardo could face each other more squarely.
“It’s a pleasure to meet you,” Leonardo responded, bowing slightly.
“The pleasure is mine,” he said, returning the bow, before straightening up and offering his own formal kiss to the artist.
“Let me go and fetch the paintings,” his mother’s artist friend said, turning swiftly on his heel. “I’ll be right back.”
Turning back to his mother as she watched Leonardo leave, Ezio found himself completely unsurprised by the next topic she brought up.
“He’s very talented.”
“I guess,” he said, looking around at all the varied and sundry items scattered over the many counters; truly, Leonardo seemed as though he was as much a natural philosopher as an artist.
There were skeletons of small creatures, rows of preserving jars with some plant or other floating inside them, and there were also things – most of them placed at the far end of the workshop – that Ezio found himself completely unable to put a name to.
“Self-expression is vital to understanding and enjoying life,” Mother said, the expression on her face telling more clearly than words just how much she approved of Leonardo; Ezio found himself glad that the man was such a worthy friend. “You should find an outlet, yourself.”
“I have plenty of outlets,” he said, not truly seeing the point of the conversation they were having; aside from that, he had always been more fond of active pursuits.
“I meant besides vaginas,” his mother said, a rather unamused expression coming to her face.
“Mother,” he groaned; this had become rather a common bone of contention between the pair of them, lately.
Leonardo returned not long after that, and the three of them set off back to the Auditore palazzo once more. Joining in on the conversation those times when it came his turn to speak, Ezio soon found that his initial impression as to Leonardo’s character was indeed more akin to a natural philosopher than any of the few artists Ezio had had a chance to meet. He also seemed to want his work to have some kind of greater meaning, which Ezio could respect even if he didn’t quite know just what it was that Leonardo was looking for, in the end.
Returned to their family palazzo at last, he said a fond farewell to his mother, and went off in search of lunch. Once he’d finished his meal, Ezio found himself sought out by Giulio. As usual, he found the secretary’s hurried pace a chore to keep up with, and was as relieved as usual to come to the end of his journey. Standing before the door to his father’s office, Ezio paused for a moment to catch his breath, before knocking at the door and being called in.
“I need these packages delivered to associates of mine in the city,” Father said, and Ezio looked down at his desk to see a pair of bulky letters, wrapped in vellum and neatly sealed with wax. “I also need you to retrieve a message for me from a pigeon coop not too far from here.”
“Va bene, I’ll get it done,” he said, nodding.
“Come back to me when you’re finished,” Father said, and Ezio wondered at the troubled cast to his face. “There are some things we need to discus. And please, my son, stay out of trouble, hmm?”
“I’ll do my best, Padre,” he said, grinning to try and lighten the mood.
~AC: II~
Smiling for his son’s sake, not wanting to worry his middle son with things that might not even happen, Giovanni made a request for Ezio to send in little Maria before he left. His adopted daughter, after all, would be the one most vulnerable to the schemes of the Pazzi and their Templar backers.
“You wanted to see me, Padre?”
“I did,” he said, wishing for a moment that he could have simply called her here to speak about her studies – she truly was a bright child, seeming to take to mathematics and art more than the other subjects that his hired tutors had introduced her to – or about some other matter of joyful import. Still, wishing the world different would do nothing but cause the both of them grief; particularly considering what he knew was likely coming. “Do you remember what I told you, about the men who wear red crosses?”
“Sí, Padre, but-” she paused, agile mind clearly hard at work behind her uncanny yellow eyes. “You mean, they’ve found us?”
“It’s likely they never stopped looking, but this has less to do with them, and more to do with the work I’ve been doing. I know you know of the trial of Jacopo de’ Pazzi,” little Maria nodded, and he continued. “The Pazzi, in turn, have been Templars for as long as we Auditore have been Assassins. And so, the Templars will be seeking to attack us not only for the damage my evidence can do at Jacopo’s trial, but also because the factions we both serve are naturally opposed.”
“I suppose that makes sense,” little Maria said. “Will they be coming here?”
“It’s all too likely that they will,” he said, reaching out to gently steady his youngest daughter with a hand on her right shoulder. “So, I want you to hide yourself within the passage, and if I don’t come to fetch you before the candles start to burn down, go out and find your brother, Ezio, and stay close to him. He’ll be able to protect you, at least.”
“Sí, Padre,” little Maria said with a nod, though she looked for a moment as though she wished to protest.
She didn’t, of course; he’d explained the dangers that the Templars posed to her and the other members of their family on many different occasions. Still, on those same occasions he had also asked that she not share the information he was giving her with any of the other members of their family. He’d expected to have more time; to be able to gently introduce the truth of their struggle to his younger sons and eldest daughter, but he’d not done so.
And now, there was so little time left…
Handing little Maria a candle that he’d carefully placed in a holder so that his youngest daughter wouldn’t chance burning her hands with the wax dripping from it as she made her way through the hidden passage. The two of them embraced each other a last time, and then Giovanni saw little Maria off into the hidden passage behind the fireplace within his office.
Then he paused for a moment, hoping that he would be able to bring her out again…
Chapter 148: The conspiracy unveiled
Chapter Text
As he made his way back across the rooftops toward the Palazzo Auditore, Ezio found himself completely unable to leave behind the feeling of unease that had been plaguing him ever since he’d spoken with one of the associates of his father that he’d never had the occasion to meet before this very day. He still didn’t know quite what to make of the man, who seemed to have been both poor and more than a bit unsavory, nor the pair that he’d spoken to before that.
Those had been, if anything, more disconcerting than the others, consisting as they had of another one of those unsavory men, and a courtesan besides.
Ezio still didn’t know what to make of it all, and could only hope that Father would be able to explain what had happened. Still, the feeling of unease wouldn’t leave him alone…
The sound of running feet coming from behind him focused Ezio’s attention, and he was just about to whip around and deal with whoever it was that had attempted to accost him, when the feel of small, slender arms around his waist registered in his mind and let him know just who it was that had come for him.
“Sorellina, what are you doing all the way up here?” he asked gently, knowing that – if anyone had seen her climbing up – people would wonder about an allegedly blind girl being able to scale the wall of a building at all.
“Padre said that I should go and find you, if he didn’t come to fetch me before my candle started burning down,” his little sister sniffled.
“Father said that?” he echoed, feeling the chill that had settled so heavily in his gut slowly beginning to creep up his spine. “Sorellina, do you think you can keep up with me?”
“Sí, fratello.”
“Bene, then let’s head home.”
The pair of them made their way back over the rooftops in the direction of their family’s palazzo, but when the pair of arrived at an overlooking rooftop, Ezio found that, for all of his growing unease, he was still unprepared to actually see what had happened to his family’s home. There were no lights on at all – not a single lamp burning in any one of the many windows – and the front doors stood wide open. That, of all things, was the most damning bit.
The outer doors were never left open, unless it was daylight and their guards were on hand to handle any trouble that might present itself.
Steeling himself for whatever he would see inside his home, Ezio called little Maria to his side and the pair of them cautiously made their way down the side of the building and across the deserted square. It was just one more thing that marked out this day as being different – being worse – than all of the days before it. When the pair of them finally stepped through the open doors and into the empty palazzo, Ezio clenched his teeth as he saw the destruction that had been wrought upon his family’s home.
“Annetta!”
Little Maria’s sudden shout brought his attention to the maid, who looked to have been preparing to defend herself from whoever might have made it inside their home.
“Ser Ezio! Little Maria!” she exclaimed, lowering the heavy, silver candlestick that she had clearly intended to use against anyone else who had attempted to invade their home. “Thank God you’re both safe!”
“What happened, Annetta? Where is everyone?” he demanded, feeling slightly better when his littlest sister gently embraced him around the middle.
“They took your father and brothers to the Palazzo della Signoria,” Annetta said, face crumpling in anguish. “To prison!”
“And Mother? Claudia? Where are they, Annetta?” little Maria asked, just before he could do the same.
“Grazie a Dio, the both of you managed to make it home!”
“Claudia!” in that moment, Ezio couldn’t have said who’s shout was louder, his own or little Maria’s; he could be certain, however, that the both of them were truly pleased to see her.
“Are you all right?” he asked, trailing just behind the littlest of his sisters as she hurried over to Claudia’s side.
“Mother!” he heard the girl cry suddenly, rushing over to the crumpled form – no longer so proud and stately as he remembered – seated on the ground near an upended table.
“She’s in shock,” Annetta said, gentling her voice so that there was less of a chance that little Maria would overhear them; clearly, whatever she had to say wasn’t for innocent ears. “When she resisted, they… Bastardi!”
“It’s not safe here,” he said, not needing – nor wanting – to hear anything more about what had happened to their poor mother; little Maria was already attempting to sooth her namesake, murmuring soft words of comfort as she embraced Mother around the waist. “Is there somewhere you can take them?”
“Yes,” Annetta said, sounding thoughtful for a moment, before brightening. “Yes! To my sister’s!”
“Good, do that,” he instructed, nodding sharply as Claudia and little Maria both helped to guide Mother out of their ruined home. “In the meantime, I’ll go see Father.”
“Be careful, Messer Ezio,” Annetta said, turning back towards him – he thought, just for a moment, that he could see a flash of guilt in his littlest sister’s eyes; Ezio quickly decided that it was merely a reflection of his own – for a last time as she gently escorted the remaining members of his family out of harm’s way. “The guards were looking for you, as well.”
“Don’t worry,” he said, offering his sisters and their loyal servant as much of a smile as he could manage, in the face of everything that had happened. “I have ways of moving unseen.”
“Come back soon, fratello mio,” little Maria said, and for a moment Ezio could see that same, brief flash of guilt that he’d managed up till then to convince himself he hadn’t.
“As soon as I can, sorellina, I promise,” he said, as he and the free members of his family shared a last embrace. “Take care of them, Annetta; and yourself.”
“Of course, Messer Ezio.”
Turning quickly, before he could begin making up reasons to delay any longer, Ezio hurried out of his family’s ravaged palazzo and up the side of a nearby building.
Sure enough, when he looked down from the rooftops, Ezio could see smaller and larger groups of city guards, all of them seeming to move with the swift purpose of wolf packs; they would be just as deadly if he allowed himself to be caught in their path, Ezio knew. Still, from so high above, Ezio felt at least reasonably confidant that he would be able to evade such men as composed the city guard. Breathing deeply for a moment, the tension of the night and all its horrors having tensed his muscles almost without his being aware of such a thing, Ezio continued across the remaining rooftops that stood between himself and his ultimate destination.
He’d soon arrived at the Palazzo della Signoria.
Carefully scaling the high walls of the tower, making sure that he was out of the sight of both the guards patrolling around the building itself as well as those still hunting down on the ground below, Ezio stepped into the enclosed courtyard on top of the main building. Swiftly breaking the neck of a lone guard who had been too close for comfort, Ezio set the corpse up against the wall to make it appear as though the man were still alive.
It wouldn’t do, of course, to be found out merely because he failed to take precautions against such a thing.
Scaling the walls protecting the inner-courtyard against any who might have made it past the walls of the one outside, Ezio paused for a moment at the end of the wall. Peeking over the top, making certain that he only exposed his eyes and the top of his head, Ezio studied the inner courtyard for a few, long moments before hauling himself over top of the half-wall before him and taking his first steps into the inner-courtyard.
Now, all I have to do is get to the tower, Ezio mused, narrowing his eyes as he thought of the guards he would soon be forced to deal with. He’d no ill-feeling toward these men or their profession – until this very day, the Auditore had had guards of their own – but as these men were standing between him and his father, Ezio wouldn’t hesitate to kill more of them if such a thing became necessary. Still, such a thing could only serve to delay him, so while he was prepared to act, Ezio still hoped that he would not be forced to.
Finally having made it to the tower where his father and brothers were being held, Ezio scaled the last length of wall that stood between him and his father’s cell, and took a moment to be thankful for the ledge – slender as it was – that offered him purchase to stand.
Chapter 149: The last secret
Chapter Text
“Ezio!”
“Father!” he exclaimed, but as quietly as the man himself had done; neither of them wished to alert the guards, after all. “What happened?”
“I took a bit of a beating, but I’ll be all right,” Father said, looking as strong as Ezio had ever seen him, in spite of the clear signs that he’d been handled a great deal more roughly than any banker was meant to be; Ezio seethed, but forced himself to maintain his composure in the face of what he would clearly need to do. “What of your mother and sisters?”
“Safe, now,” he said, happy to have at least some good news to report.
“Annetta took them?”
“Sí,” he said, nodding reflexively before he realized what it was that his father had said. “What, you knew this would happen?!”
“Not the way it did, and not this soon,” Father said, looking honestly haggard for the first time in Ezio’s memory; such a thing didn’t feel right in the slightest, as though the world itself had tilted awry. “It doesn’t matter now.”
“What do you mean? Explain?!”
“There’s no time, so listen closely: return to the house. In my office is a hidden door; use your talent to find it. Beyond it lies a chest. Take everything you find inside. Much of it may seem strange to you, but all of it is important. Do you understand?”
“Yes,” he said, head beginning to swim with all of the strange occurrences on this night of all nights.
“Good,” Father said, gentling his tone, even if only slightly. “Among the contents is a letter, and with it some documents. I need you to take those documents to Messer Uberto. He was with me in my office this morning.”
“The Gonfaloniere, I remember,” he said, feeling more off-balance with every revelation rather than less; such was not meant to be the case with explanations, Ezio could not help but know. “Now please, tell me what’s happening. Are the Pazzi behind this? There was a note for you at the pigeon coop, it said-”
The harsh sound of bolts being thrown drew both of their attention, and for a moment it was all Ezio could do not to scream in anguished frustration.
“Go Ezio, quickly! If you desire the explanations I could not give, then ask little Maria!”
Leaping down from the window, before Father’s words had had the chance to truly sink in, Ezio forced himself not to think so deeply as he made his way back to the Auditores’ abandoned palazzo. Once he’d managed that, his breathing a bit heavy for having to move so quickly so he did not catch the eyes of any of the patrolling groups of guards, though as the night advanced they were beginning to thin out. Ezio knew the way the guard shifts changed, but when he’d been moving he hadn’t been quite able to concentrate on those kinds of things considering how much he’d already had on his mind.
Finally able to breathe more easily, even standing among the smashed remains of what had once been his family’s property, Ezio hurried across the inner courtyard and made for Father’s office.
When he’d managed to make his way back into Father’s office, Ezio paused for a moment, concentrating so that he would be able to use the strange second-sight that – until this very night – he’d not expected Father to even be aware of. However, it was beginning to seem that Father had been aware of a great many things; more than Ezio would have been readily willing to credit him with before all of this.
And then, there was the matter of little Maria…
Sighing, shaking his head to clear his thoughts and reclaim his resolve, Ezio examined his surroundings once again. At first, it was as though nothing had changed save for the room around him growing darker, but as he began to search the ravaged room in earnest, Ezio began to notice a strange, colorless glow. Those few times he’d used this second-sight of his, he’d seen people in strange, distinct colors; he’d soon come to learn that those same colors held meanings relevant to his interests and those of his family.
Red was not to be trusted, yellow were those who held information he could use for various things, and blue was the color of friendship and solidarity.
Forcing his thoughts back to the task at hand – it being all too tempting, under the circumstances, to allow his mind to wander – Ezio quickly found the hidden door that Father had spoken of, and quickly located the release catch so he could pass beyond it. The room he found himself standing in after doing so was quite small, though not so much as he’d been expecting considering that the entrance had been concealed behind a hidden door upon the left wall.
In any case, he was able to find the trunk quickly, but what he saw inside…
Running his hands over the white robes he’d discovered within the chest, Ezio found himself seized with the sudden urge to don the woolen robes before him. Taking a moment to gather the other things within the chest – the sealed documents and the letter that Father had instructed him to deliver to Messer Uberto, as well as the rolled vellum scroll, both since Father had instructed him to take everything within the chest, as well as because the scroll seemed to have some importance in and of itself; perhaps Leonardo would be able to make more sense of it – Ezio carefully set them aside and began to don the odd but important-seeming robes that he had found. As he’d expected, they were made of wool of a very fine quality, but seemed to settle more lightly across his shoulders than he’d been expecting.
Almost as though it were made for him; Ezio wondered for a moment if that had indeed been the case…
Chapter 150: Vengeance Awakes
Chapter Text
Shaking his head as he forced his thoughts back to the present once more, Ezio gathered up the documents and carried them from the small room that he’d discovered hidden away in the secret places of Father’s office. Finding one of the pouches that Giulio used to ferry important documents from place to place on Father’s orders, Ezio tucked away the important documents he had been sent to retrieve, and then made his way out of the office after taking care to close the concealing door behind him once more.
Making his way back out into the courtyard, as empty and desolate as it had been since the start of this horrible night, Ezio quickly regained the rooftops before he could be spotted by any particularly zealous guard patrols.
~AC: II~
She hadn’t quite known what to make of the errand Mother had sent her on – communicating with silent looks and touches, in place of the words that still seemed to be beyond her – and, really, she still didn’t. But, Mother had clearly wanted her to deliver the sword that she was currently carrying on her back out to her brother as quickly as she could manage, so that was what she was going to do; even if she didn’t understand quite why Mother had thought he would need it. After all, all of their family was good at staying out of sight.
At least, once they had warning that they’d need to…
Sighing at the memory of just why the seven of them weren’t back inside their palazzo enjoying a well-earned night’s rest, Maria hurried her stride across the rooftops, seeking out a familiar form against the dimness of the moonlit sky. Huffing with some satisfaction once she’d managed to pick him out, Maria searched for a good point to intercept his path so that she would be able to meet up with him, to at least tell him that Mother was doing all right while she delivered the sword that had been meant for him. Turning her path so that the pair of them would come together on a rooftop four houses over from the one where her middle brother was presently standing, Maria made sure to keep him in sight.
For a moment, however, she found herself wishing that she’d had more time to enjoy her present circumstances; it was a rare moment, after all, when she was allowed not only to travel without her darkened glasses, but with her silver hair uncovered as well…
“Wha- Little Maria! What are you doing out here?”
“Mother sent me to find you,” she whispered back, standing firm in the face of her middle brother’s expression of clear disapproval.
“Wait, she’s speaking again?”
Sighing, Maria shook her head. “I wish. But, well, you know how Mother is,” she said, making herself smile gently, if only to put Ezio at ease. “Anyway, she wanted you to have this,” Maria continued, pulling out just enough of the sword on her back to prove that she was carrying it.
Seeing Ezio wearing Father’s Assassin gear… Well, it only served to show just how wrong this entire night had gone, in the end.
“This doesn’t surprise you,” Ezio said, his tone becoming distinctly wary; Maria could only be grateful that he didn’t sound at all accusatory, that she still had his trust, even after everything that had happened.
“No,” she said, wanting to lower her head, but knowing she couldn’t if the pair of them were going to be able to keep up their current pace. “It doesn’t.”
“Father also said that I should ask you about… whatever it was that he couldn’t manage to tell me before the guards returned,” her middle brother said, his tone sounding a bit warmer, though no less worried.
She sighed shakily. “Papa… He said that shouldn’t tell you any of what I know, save for in the most dire of circumstances.”
“Well, I would say that right now qualifies,” her middle brother said, a gentle tone returning to his voice, along with his smile. “Still, we should wait until we have some safety, if what you have to say is really so dangerous to share that Father told you that.”
“Gratzie, fratello mio,” she said, feeling distinctly lighter as the pair of them continued on.
“Of course, sorellina,” he said, planting gentle kisses upon both of her cheeks, and then another upon her brow.
The pair of them hurried on in silence, drawing steadily to Messer Uberto’s palazzo, and Maria allowed herself to relax a bit more with each step. Soon enough, she would be able to unburden herself of the load of secrets she had been carrying ever since she had been old enough to know what a secret even was. Yes, Father had trusted her, but his trust had – at times – felt like just as heavy a burden as the secrets she’d been asked to carry. She knew she’d borne up well under both, Father had said so often enough, but there was no denying her relief at being able to set them down at last.
She knew that even Father would say she’d carried them long enough…
When the pair of them finally arrived before Messer Uberto’s palazzo – having enough manners, at least, not to go clambering into his courtyard the way Ezio had probably done with their own – Ezio frowned down at the guards standing arrayed before it.
“Give me the sword, little Maria.”
Handing it over without a word, knowing that this was the last moment that her middle brother would have for his hands to remain unblooded by their line of work – that of the Assassins – Maria wished him luck and stayed up atop the roof as she’d been directed to. Sighing as she watched her brother cut down the men who’d once stood between them and their present goal, Maria clambered easily down to meet Ezio upon the field of battle that he’d just created.
“Come on, let’s get this last part done with.”
“Of course, fratello mio.”
~AC: II~
He could see that his littlest sister was still a bit uneasy with everything that had gone on, but considering what she’d had to just watch him do – not to mention the secrets that Father had been having her keep for some reason or other – Ezio figured that such a thing was perfectly natural.
Knocking on the front door of the Gonfaloniere’s palazzo, Ezio quickly found himself and little Maria facing the very man he’d been sent to meet.
“Our father and brothers have been imprisoned!” he exclaimed, once he’d managed to find his voice again; he felt little Maria’s arms around his waist, and squeezed her back in thanks for the gesture. “I was told to bring you this,” he said, handing over the sealed letter that he’d found within Father’s hidden chest.
Understanding lit the Gonfaloniere’s kindly face quickly, after that. “I see. It’s a misunderstanding, Ezio. I’ll clear everything up.”
“How?” he asked, feeling more than shaken about the whole affair.
“The documents here contain evidence of a conspiracy: against your family, and against the city. I’ll present it at your father’s hearing in the morning, and your family will be released.”
The pair of them both thanked him profusely, but the Gonfaloniere seemed perturbed, for some reason, when little Maria called him Uncle in passing, holding his hand as though she would have rushed forward to embrace the man if the pair of them had not been pressed for time.
“Of course, my children,” he said, the kindly expression on his face returning quickly, though it seemed slightly strained; of course, anyone who had been forced to speak at the trial of such a good friend would feel the same, Ezio thought. “Do you two need a place to stay? You’re both more than welcome here.”
“No, gratzie,” he said, sighing with the relief of having such a difficult task over and done with. “I’ll meet you at the Palazzo.”
“Don’t worry,” the Gonfaloniere said, the kindly expression on his face having returned in full. “Everything is going to be fine.”
The pair of them offered their thanks once more, hurrying off into the night.
Chapter 151: Final farewells
Chapter Text
She looks so happy, Uberto reflected, feeling a terrible pang in his heart as he turned to face Rodrigo.
“Well, it seems as though we’ve found one of our lost doves,” the man said, his harsh voice matching the smile upon his face entirely too well.
“Must we do such a thing, Rodrigo? She seems so happy, staying where she is,” he said, looking back at the Grand Master of the Italian Templars.
“I think you will find, my old friend, that a dove can be satisfied with remarkably little if properly kept,” Rodrigo said, his tone not inviting any sort of disagreement. “But enough about that. I trust you understand what you’re to do tomorrow?”
“Yes,” Uberto said, forcing himself not to sigh or hang his head; Rodrigo was not a man who understood sorrow or sympathy.
“Good,” the Grand Master said, snatching the letter from his hands and throwing it contemptuously into the still-roaring fire. “I look forward to meeting you at the Palazzo tomorrow.”
Once Rodrigo had passed out of sight into the inner-rooms of his own palazzo, Uberto Alberti allowed himself to slump bonelessly into his chair with a long, despairing sigh. There may have been no true affection between him and Giovanni Auditore, but he could not help wishing that there might have been something he might have been able to do for the man’s children. Still, with his situation so dire as it was, there was little he could do in the face of Rodrigo’s continued insistence.
The affairs of Assassins and Templars were not truly his concern; and, close as those children might have been to his heart, his own family took precedence in the end.
~AC: II~
Pausing for a moment, perched atop a rooftop only four buildings away from where the pair of them had spoken to Messer Uberto, Maria looked over to Ezio. Her middle brother seemed to be thinking deeply about something.
“What would you say to spending the night with Christina, little Maria?”
“Is there any particular reason you want to go there, fratello mio?” she asked, tempted for a moment to lighten the mood, but knowing that this was hardly the time.
“I don’t think she’ll be one to turn us away if we ask,” her middle brother said, looking calmer and more collected than she’d seen him since even before the pair of them had spoken to Messer Uberto. “And, I can’t deny that I could use some comfort, tonight of all nights.”
“I see,” she said, smiling gently as she nudged his right arm. “Well, let’s go, then.”
The pair of them shared a smile as they started across the rooftops once more, this time in the direction of the Palazzo Vespucci.
~AC: II~
Once they’d arrived below the balcony of Christina’s window, Ezio knocked, softly but urgently, on the wooden shutters. It took a moment, but Christina herself soon came to greet them. He felt a swell of relief at the sight of her, and though she did seem a bit startled to see the pair of them, Ezio did not find himself waiting long for her natural kindness to persuade her to allow him and little Maria into her room so that the pair of them could take some rest after the terrible day that they had both had.
“Sorellina?” he called gently, as the pair of them settled down with Christina in her bed for the night.
“What is it, fratello mio?”
“It’s a little late to start telling tales, but I would prefer to have an explanation about those secrets that Father asked you to keep,” he said, watching the expressions of curiosity and then resolve as they played across his littlest sister’s face.
“Yes,” little Maria said, pausing for a moment, her eyes taking in both him and Christina, before the expression of resolve that he’d seen on her face grew all the firmer. “And, if you truly are determined to share your life with Christina, the both of you should know just what kind of life our family has lived.”
He couldn’t help the wince that showed on his face, once his littlest sister had spoken those words; they weren’t something he’d ever thought to hear from his carefree little Maria. Cuddling her closer, wanting more than anything for the littlest of his sisters to be able to bask in what little comfort he could give considering the state he was in – to say nothing of the secrets she’d carried for so long – Ezio curled up for the night. Feeling Christina’s gentle arms wrapping around him from the other side of his little Maria’s smaller body, Ezio felt a certain sense of peace steal over him.
He was certain that things would look much better tomorrow.
~AC: II~
When the three of them awoke the next morning, the thought of what little Maria would soon tell him and Christina both weighing more heavily on his mind than he would have thought possible if he’d been told earlier that the littlest of his sisters was holding secrets at the behest of their father. Still, given everything that had gone on in order to bring them all to this point, Ezio knew that he could hardly be said to have been the same, carefree boy that he’d been even so little as a day ago. In that light, Ezio found that he could not, in good faith, say that he was surprised by the grimness of his littlest sister’s words of only the previous night.
“Buon giorno,” little Maria said, her tone softer and more meek than Ezio would have ever wished to hear.
“Buon giorno, sorellina,” he said, reaching out to lovingly caress the right side of her face. “I want you to know that – whatever secrets Father gave you to keep – nothing you say will ever change the way I feel about you.”
“Millie grazie, fratello mio,” his littlest sister said, seeming to regain at least some of the confidence she had lost over the course of the previous, horrible night. Then, taking a deep breath, and seeming to gather strength from some hidden reservoir that Ezio had never before been given cause to suspect she had, his little Maria sat upright in the bed that he, she, and Christina were all presently sharing. “This is the story, as Father told it to me.”
Listening more intently than he’d ever found cause to do before, Ezio found himself hearing the strange, sad, and rather frightening tale of Assassins, Templars, and what seemed to be a third group, caught between them.
“This treasure that you… People like you,” he corrected himself, not entirely certain that he enjoyed the idea of his littlest sister having been bound up in events that were so much bigger than not only her, but also of most of those who had thrown in their lot on one side or another. “Have been charged with the keeping of these Pieces of Eden?”
“Yes,” little Maria said, tilting her head downward slightly in thought. “Before you ask, fratello mio, I haven’t seen one of them, nor does anyone I’ve spoken to know of their ultimate origins.”
“I’m glad, at least, that Father managed to keep you safe from that,” he said, settling back upon Christina’s bed; the three of them had awakened before dawn, both eager to know just what it was that Father had told little Maria, and curious as to why she had been told to keep such a thing secret from even their family. “Still, I’m not sure what to make of all this. This tale of Templars, Assassins, and guardians of treasures said to be pulled from the Garden of Eden… it just sounds too much like fantasy to be real.”
“That was what I said to Father, when he started telling me about all this,” little Maria said, a slight, amused smile on her face.
Smiling back, even if only fleetingly, Ezio turned his attention to Christina. “I’m sorry to have ignored you for so long, amore mio.”
“It’s all right,” Christina said, a gentle smile on her face. “All of that… It was overwhelming even to me. Still, you both said that there was something you needed to do today. Why don’t you both take care of that? I think I need time for this strange story to… settle in my mind, a bit.”
The three of them had swiftly agreed, and Ezio embraced Christina a last time before he and little Maria made their way out of her window and back down into the streets of Firenze. The muggy air of what seemed to be a decidedly overcast day pressed down on the both of them, as he and little Maria made their way steadily towards the Palazzo della Signoria, to meet with the Gonfaloniere and bring Father, Federico, and Petruccio to Annetta’s house and hence back into the warm circle of their family’s arms.
However, as Ezio and little Maria drew closer to the Palazzo, he couldn’t help but notice that there was a large crowd already beginning to gather within the square. There was also the rather ominous sight of a gallows that looked to be newly constructed, set behind a long table with the arms of Firenze sewn carefully into the heavy, brocaded cloth that draped over it. The Gonfaloniere was there, but beside him stood a man that Ezio had never seen before.
He was clearly a Spaniard judging by his dress; given what little Ezio could see of his face, the man seemed to possess rather aristocratic features, with an aquiline nose and deep, calculating eyes. Ezio found himself wondering about a great many things, as he and little Maria continued drawing closer to their current destination; foremost among them being just who the Spaniard was, and why there were gallows already constructed.
Messer Uberto had cleared Father and their brothers of the charges against them, hadn’t he?
Chapter 152: Uberto Alberti
Chapter Text
There was a strange, tight feeling in her chest, whenever her eyes would fall upon the man in the ornate, hooded robe. He looked like a Spaniard, but more than that, he looked dangerous in some way. It wasn’t something she could have explained to anyone who asked – not even Ezio, she didn’t think – but that was the impression that the Spaniard’s manner gave her. Even Uberto seemed wary around him, which only made Maria all the more certain that there was something inherently dangerous about the Spaniard, whoever he turned out to be.
However, the look of shame on Uberto’s face – the way he didn’t seem to be able to meet Maria’s own eyes for even the most fleeting of glances – made the tightness around her chest all the more painful.
In light of all that, while she wouldn’t have said that she’d been expecting… what happened to Father and two of her three brothers, Maria would have been lying if she’d said it came as anything like a surprise. A terrible blow, yes, and more than anything she wanted to know why Uberto – who had seemed to hold Father in at least some esteem – would do something so terrible. More than anything, that was the question that haunted her, even as she and Ezio retook the rooftops to escape the guards pursuing them.
What few were left, after her brother had cut the ones pursuing them down in their tracks.
The pair of them were able to make it back to the ground, after what felt like an eternity of fleeing from those guards that had been determined to both kill her brother and capture Maria herself for some reason that she didn’t know if she wished to fully understand. Ezio looked ready to drop, by the time the pair of them were able to take shelter inside a small shack behind one of the warehouses that supplied goods to the city, but it seemed to be grief that weighed so heavily upon him rather than simple fatigue.
She fully understood.
Muttering soothing words to the last of her brothers as he sobbed into her lap, Maria held onto her own composure with both hands; this was no time to give vent to her feelings, though her heart was breaking for Father and her murdered brothers, and the sight of Messer Uberto’s stricken face would not leave her mind. But she had Ezio to think about, and so Maria buried her own anguish deep enough so that she would be able to support the last of her brothers in the way he needed her to do.
The pair of them, knowing that the city watch would be hunting them relentlessly upon the orders of whoever had truly been the one to strike out at their family in such a final and terrible way, concealed themselves within what shelter the shack could offer them until dusk started to approach in earnest. Then, making their way back up onto the rooftops of Firenze – the city where they had grown up; the city that was no longer home – Maria allowed Ezio’s path to guide her own footsteps.
Just as she’d expected, the pair of them were indeed making for the palazzo Vespucci once more. Allowing herself to rest, if only for the time that Ezio and Christina spent talking, Maria closed her eyes for just a moment…
~AC: II~
Poor little Maria fell right to sleep before she and Ezio had finished their conversation, clearly having been holding herself together solely for her last brother’s benefit. Ezio had asked that she take care of his littlest sister, while he himself saw to the needs of their poor family. She was happy to be able to help in at least some, small way to ease the suffering that she had seen on Ezio’s face ever since the moment he had returned with the knowledge of how deeply his family had been betrayed by the people of Firenze.
Sighing as she settled herself down next to the girl, Christina looked up at the sound of a gentle knock upon her shutters.
~AC: II~
After having lain their murdered family members to rest, spoken to Christina about what the pair of them were going to do, since he could no longer find it in himself to stay in Firenze – if those bastardi who had murdered Father and their brothers would have allowed them to do such a thing in the first place – and her parents would not have approved in the slightest if she were to depart from the city with him. Or if she was to depart from the city at all; Ezio knew that Christina’s father did not quite approve of the… enthusiasm with which he approached his relationship with her.
And, there was also the matter of the secrets that little Maria had shared with the pair of them earlier this very day; try as he might not to think about what that meant, Ezio could not avoid the knowledge that their lives would never again be what they were before this single, horrible day.
Knowing that Father had been an Assassin, and that the Pazzi – and likely others, since the Pazzi could have hardly managed such a thing on their own – had been Templars helped to explain at least some of the antipathy that Father had felt for them. Only some, because all of the Pazzi he’d chanced to meet – chiefly Vieri, since that bastardo made it all but impossible to ignore him – were horrible enough that he could believe that they were part of something like the Templars. Particularly considering what the Templars seemed to be intent on doing; he could definitely see those Pazzi bastardi trying to take over the world.
Still, after having laid Father and their brothers to rest at last, and allowing little Maria to give vent to the grief she’d been pushing aside while the pair of them had been in need of all their wits to flee from the guards Uberto Alberti would doubtless still have sniffing around for them, Ezio knew that it would be the best thing for both of them if they returned as quickly as they could to what remained of their family. The one problem with that, however, was that – while he and Annetta had been rather close, considering their respective positions – he only knew the general area of her sister’s house.
He’d never been to visit Paola at her house; it wasn’t something he’d had any cause to regret before, but under the circumstances…
Ezio sighed, forcing his mind back to the matter at hand. After speaking to little Maria, he found that she hadn’t been to Paola’s house either, and sighed as they both moved on. He hadn’t been expecting anything different, but he’d honestly been hoping for it; there was nothing for it but to keep moving, however.
As he and little Maria climbed back down onto the street, Ezio sighed with relief as he caught sight of Annetta at last. She seemed to be carefully not looking for something. Smiling as much as he could manage at this moment of all moments, Ezio carefully moved closer to the woman. She’d clearly been searching the city for them, and just as clearly she’d been careful not to be seen by those who were probably still searching for them, in turn.
“Thank God you’ve returned safely!” Annetta exclaimed, her voice quiet enough that it wouldn’t carry beyond where the three of them were standing. “I’ve been looking everywhere for the two of you!”
“I… I couldn’t stop them, Annetta,” he said, all of the anguish that he thought he’d left behind with Christina coming right back as soon as he spoke the first word. “I tried, I swear, but there were so many guards!”
“Please, come with me,” Annetta pleaded, offering her hands to the pair of them. “We need to get you both off the streets.”
“What of Mother and Claudia?”
“They’re safe,” Annetta said, clearly having regained some of the calm that seemed determined to elude Ezio himself. “Come, I’ll take you to them.”
“No! It’s too dangerous for us to travel together,” he said, knowing it was true even as he wished that it wasn’t. “Take little Maria with you,” he said, gently pushing his littlest sister into the arms of their nurse. “Then tell me where you intend to go, and I’ll meet you there.”
“My sister’s house, just north of the Duomo,” Annetta said, as she and little Maria clasped hands.
“Fratello, do you think you could do a favor for me?”
“What is it, sorellina?”
“When… everything was happening, it seemed as though Uberto was scared of that Spaniard that stood beside him throughout the course of… everything that was going on,” little Maria said, sounding firmer in her convictions than he’d heard from her over the course of this entire, horrible day. And, while it was true that his littlest sister was a rather keen observer of the people around her, Ezio didn’t quite know if she was thinking entirely clearly. “Would you ask him about that for me?”
Truly, he didn’t want to believe that one of their family’s old friends would betray them in such a horrible way, either.
“I’ll see what I can find, sorellina,” he said, knowing that she would understand his meaning.
The three of them parted swiftly after that, him leaving so that he could – perhaps – draw the wandering eyes of the guards away from the remaining members of his family before they could even think to fall upon them. Taking a more circuitous rout, while still making his way north, Ezio soon found himself standing before the house where Annetta’s sister Paola lived. It was a rather modest place, certainly nothing like his family’s former palazzo, but for all that it seemed rather homely and comfortable.
Ezio almost found himself wishing that he could stay for longer than the handful of minutes that it would take to gather the remaining members of his family, but he knew that kind of thing wouldn’t be possible. To say nothing of the fact that his heart would not rest within the city where half of his family was so unjustly murdered, it was a simple fact that they would all be in danger from at least the Pazzi, even if there were no other members of those Templars within the borders of Firenze. And so, steeling himself to do what needed to be done, Ezio made his way into the building at last.
His first impression of the interior of the building was that, while from the outside it had seemed like someone’s home, the inside seemed to be a sort of inn. Or else, that’s how it would have appeared, if not for all of the women who were clearly courtesans moving about the floor around him. There was a wide staircase at the left side of the main room, with a rich, deep red carpet in the center, and it was down this staircase that he saw the small, swift form of his littlest sister hurrying.
“I’m so glad to see you again, fratello mio!”
“I’m glad to see you, too, sorellina,” he said, having braced himself when it had become clear that little Maria had not been about to stop for a small thing like the fact that she’d reached the bottom of the stairs.
“It is a pleasure to make your acquaintance, Messer Ezio,” the woman said, smiling as she came to stand before the pair of them. “Little Maria has been eager to tell me anything and everything she can about her beloved brother,” the woman said, smiling benevolently at the pair of them. “To say nothing of how highly Annetta speaks of you.”
“I appreciate the kind words, Madonna,” he said, bowing slightly, but finding himself cut off before he could say more.
“Please, call me Paola,” she said.
“Thank you for offering your home to my family, Paola.”
“It was the least I could do,” she said, the kind smile upon her face not having diminished one bit. “You must be tired. Perhaps-”
“No, grazie,” he said, not wanting to be too abrupt, but knowing just what it was that he had to do; he had done with it quickly. “We can’t stay.”
“Why?” Paola asked. “Where are you going?”
“To kill Uberto Alberti,” he said, his resolve having grown all the firmer for the time he’d spent among the rooftops of Firenze.
“I understand your desire for vengeance, but the Gonfaloniere is a powerful man,” Paola said. “You’re not a killer, Ezio-”
“Spare me the lecture,” he cut in, before she could have truly gotten started.
“Fratello, she worked with Father,” little Maria said, large bright eyes serious as she focused her gaze on him for the first time since the pair of them had met up again. “She’s an Assassin, like he was.”
“An Assassin?” he echoed, turning to look back once again at the woman who had offered Ezio and the remains of his family shelter within the place that did, indeed, seem to be a home to her.
“Yes,” Paola said, the smile on her face becoming wry and rather reflective. “Your father and I, along with others you both are bound to meet if you are so determined to continue along this path as you seem to be, have done much work to free the world from the grip of the Templars. Though never so much as we all might have wished. Still, if you truly desire to walk the path that your father did, even if only for a short time, there are things that you must learn.”
And so, over the course of the next several days, Ezio followed in Father’s footsteps; he learned to match his pace to that of Firenze’s milling crowds, so that he might become invisible within them; he learned to take what small amounts of money he needed to sustain himself, without being caught out at such a thing; he learned, also, how to guard himself against those with the same skills he now possessed. He and little Maria – who’s safety he’d initially been worried about, until he learned that the Templars were actively hunting anyone who looked like his littlest sister, and that she would indeed be safer with Assassin training than without – had become competitive enough to draw Paola’s attention, and she clearly found the both of them amusing for it.
He was glad to know that the pair of them were learning the skills they would need to survive once they left Firenze behind them, but Ezio couldn’t help wishing that things could have been different.
“Now that you have learned to approach the enemy, we need to find you a suitable weapon,” Paola said, her expression one of stern amusement.
“What would you have me use?” he asked, unsure about just what it was that Paola was trying to say.
“Ah, but you already have the answer,” she said, sounding rather self-satisfied.
“Hey! Father’s blade and bracer!” he exclaimed, as Paola held up that very item for him to see. “How did you get them?!”
Paola laughed. “By using the same skills I’ve just taught you two.”
“She was fast enough that I barely saw her, fratello!”
“Well, it’s not exactly in working condition,” he said, deciding that it would be in their best interests if he gave his attention to what Paola meant to say to him rather than teasing his littlest sister.
“I assume you’re familiar with Leonardo Da Vinci?”
“Sí,” he responded, all the more curious when he saw the interested expression spreading across Paola’s face. “But how does a painter factor into this?”
“He’s far more than that,” Paola said.
“Do you mean that he’s an Assassin, too?” he asked, wondering just how far the arms of this secret society that Father had been a part of actually stretched, in the end.
“No,” Paola said, laughing softly at the suggestion. “While I’m certain that he would support our cause in a heartbeat, joining up with the Brotherhood is far more of a commitment than any of us can ask of him. Still, if he expresses interest, there’s no real cause to dissuade him,” she continued, smiling more gently. “Just bring him the pieces, and you’ll see.”
“Grazie Paola, for all that you’ve done for us,” he said, bowing as little Maria curtsied as well as she could manage with the small robes that had been made for her.
They were a near-match for his own; a fact that didn’t go unnoticed, even as Ezio found himself uncertain how to feel every time he chanced to see them. Knowing that his littlest sister would be able to protect herself from the Templars – to say nothing of anyone else who might attempt to harm her – was one thing, but knowing that his impish littlest sister would soon be learning to kill… It wasn’t a thing he could easily reconcile himself to.
Still, it was clearly a thing that would happen whether he approved or not, so Ezio resolved to learn to live with the fact.
As he and little Maria made their way over the rooftops of Firenze, following a path that was familiar in a painful sort of way to him in particular, Ezio wondered just what the pair of them would find when they reached Leonardo’s workshop. The man himself seemed to be rather eccentric, even from the little hints he’d been given of the painter’s personality he’d gotten when Leonardo himself had been speaking to Mother what felt like a lifetime ago. So, as much as he tried to guess just what it was that he’d find himself faced with when he and Leonardo Da Vinci saw each other again, Ezio fully expected to be surprised.
Climbing back down to street-level, once he’d spotted an alley empty enough that the pair of them would be able to easily blend into the crowds thronging in Firenze, Ezio hugged his littlest sister’s shoulders as the two of them stood back up once again. Joining up with the tail-end of a group of shoppers, he and little Maria blended themselves into the back to conceal themselves from any of the city guard who might have still been on the alert for their presence. He’d no idea of just what was in Uberto Alberti’s twisted mind, but he wasn’t about to make the mistake of underestimating the man.
He was either canny or desperate at this point, and both kinds of men were dangerous.
Breaking subtly away from the group, he and little Maria made their way over to Leonardo’s workshop. Finding out from one of his servants – or students, Ezio still wasn’t quite sure what to call them – that the painter was indeed present, Ezio followed the man’s directions out to the well-kept yard at the back of the workshop where Leonardo seemed to live just as much as he worked. It almost seemed a repeat of the situation he’d found Paola in, though Leonardo’s quarters were nowhere near as richly decorated.
Nowhere near as neat, either, Ezio reflected with some amusement, looking around at all of the various odds and ends that the painter seemed determined to collect by the cart load.
When Ezio and little Maria finally caught up to Leonardo, they found him in the midst of a rather strange activity. There were many places in Firenze where one could buy caged songbirds; people would hang them in their windows so that they would have music in their homes. Whenever they died, those who had purchased the, would simply buy another. Leonardo, for his part, was surrounded by a dozen such cages, and even as he and little Maria watched, the painter released a linnet from its wicker cage and watched with a wistful sort of reverence as it flew off into the sky.
“Leonardo?”
“Ezio, my friend,” the painter called back, hurrying over to embrace him; then, as the gravity of their situation pressed down once again, Leonardo grew grave. “I hardly expected to see you here, particularly after what you’ve been through. But welcome, all the same. Just bear with me for a moment; this won’t take too long.”
“What are you doing?” he asked, after a few moments spent watching as the painter released one bird after another into the sky.
“All life is precious,” Leonardo said, looking into the sky for a few moments more, before turning his warm gaze back to Ezio himself. “I can’t bear to see my fellow creatures imprisoned like this, simply because they have fine voices.”
“Ah, would you also be planning to fly with them, then?” little Maria asked, a slyly amused expression upon her impish face.
Leonardo laughed gaily. “You saw my flying machine, then? I haven’t quite perfected it, but once I do… Sí, I think I will be joining my little friends in the sky.”
“A flying machine?” he echoed, not quite knowing if the painter was truly mad enough to think that he himself could do the impossible.
“Yes,” Leonardo said, the confidence of his tone not having diminished a single bit in the face of Ezio’s obvious skepticism. “But, I doubt the pair of you came all this way, braving so much danger, just to speak to me of my inventions. So, what can I do for you?”
“I need you to repair something of mine,” he said, watching as Leonardo’s eyes lit with interest at the idea; he was starting to understand what Paola had been getting at, when she said that he was more than just a painter.
“Of course!” he exclaimed, jovial once more. “Come, this way!”
Following along as Leonardo led them into what seemed to be his personal workshop, Ezio felt a stirring of amusement as he heard the man’s soft, annoyed ranting as he cleared a space for himself by the simple expedient of piling the many things atop the many other things that had been taking up the space atop the drafting table he desired to use for this new job of his.
“All right, let’s see it!” Leonardo exclaimed at last, having made himself a large enough space for some work, even if only just. Handing over the dagger blade and bracer, along with the vellum page he’d found in the chest alongside it, Ezio watched in amusement as Leonardo’s face lit up. “Fascinating!” he turned the device over and over, looking at it from all angles in the manner that Ezio himself had not had time for when he’d first retrieved it from Father’s hidden room. “I don’t know, Ezio,” he said, something like disappointment suffusing his tone; a stark contrast, after his earlier excitement. “Despite its age, the construction is rather advanced. I’ve never seen anything quite like it. I’m afraid there’s not much I can do without the original plans. I’m sorry.”
He was just about to take the strange dagger with its bracer back, to perhaps find another person who would be able to make sense out of the strange, intricate mechanisms that the bracer possessed, when Leonardo snatched both bracer and vellum page right out of his grasp.
“What are you doing?” he exclaimed, surprised to see a familiar glint in the inventor’s eye.
“The contents of this page are encrypted! But, if my theory is correct… Based on these sketches, it- it may very well…!”
~AC: II~
It seemed that Leonardo’s mind works quite a bit faster than his mouth, Maria reflected, smiling as she watched the exchange between her remaining brother and the inventor that Father’s sister Assassin Paola had sent them to. Naturally, Leonardo was curious about the construction of Father’s hidden blade, but she hadn’t quite been expecting him to be able to not only decode the page of Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad’s Assassin Codex that Father had been keeping with it, but to be able to repair the device, as well.
The trick he’d played on her brother was even worth being wrestled gently into submission when she laughed.
When the pair of them were able to depart from Leonardo’s workshop, though not without a close call involving the city guard that were clearly still searching for them, Maria allowed herself to relax slightly. Father’s hidden blade would serve the last of her brothers well, considering the fights he was going to face not only as an Assassin in a city where Templars walked freely, but also as the last heir to the Auditore name still in Firenze. Still, the fact that they were planning to leave the city would probably mitigate that particular danger rather a lot.
At the moment, however, the pair of them were returning to Paola, so that they could have a bit of food, rest, and also so that Ezio could report his success.
Making their way across the rooftops of Firenze once more, far and above any of the guards who might have otherwise found them if they traveled another way, Maria stayed close to her last brother as they continued on. She knew that he was going to ask that she stay with Paola when he inevitably departed to redress the wrongs done to their family by Uberto, a man she and Father had both thought they could trust, but she didn’t quite know what she was going to say in response. Like as not, she was going to agree with him; she didn’t have the strength or size needed to contribute in any real way to any fights that her brother might find himself in, and she didn’t have the skill to make up for such a lack, as yet.
Truly, it was in both of their best interests if she stayed behind with Paola and worked to hone what skills she had, as well as developing those that she didn’t yet possess, before she attempted to give her remaining brother aid in any fashion aside from simply being a presence by his side.
By the time that the pair of them had returned to Paola’s establishment, Maria had made up her mind. It seemed to come as something of a surprise to Ezio, though he was clearly happy not to have to argue with her about something like that, so the two of them parted amicably. She was pleased with that much, at least.
“Paola, will you help me to refine my skills?”
“Of course, little Maria,” Father’s sister Assassin – soon to be her own, when Maria herself gained the skills and knowledge to join the Brotherhood at last – said, smiling almost proudly. “I will give you what skills you need, and help you to refine the ones you already have.”
“Grazie, Paola,” she said, smiling widely back.
She’d learn what she could, during whatever time she might have had.
~AC: II~
Killing Uberto, while it had provided him with a sense of vindication after the unjust murder of his father and brothers, had also left Ezio with more questions than he had answers for. He knew that the Spaniard’s name was Rodrigo Borgia, and that the man was indeed a Templar as he’d come to expect. He also learned, this time from a letter that Alberti had been carrying, that his betrayal had been driven – in the main – by fear of what might happen to his family after he’d been deprived of the means to support them. Knowing why Alberti had turned on Father and the rest of the Auditore family… it gave him quite a few things to think about.
Not the least of which was why the former Gonfaloniere hadn’t thought to come to Father with his troubles, instead of a Templar.
Still, the past remained just that, and Ezio knew that focusing too much upon such a thing would only leave him unprepared to face whatever else was to come. So, while Ezio had resolved to speak to Paola about the letter he’d found on Uberto’s person – he’d not stoop to petty vengeance upon a man who’d been a friend of his family, even if he did wish that Alberti had possessed the courage and sense to come to Father rather than the Templar Rodrigo Borgia – he was also planning to leave Firenze behind him. There would be no safe places within the city anymore, not after he’d both publicly assassinated Uberto Alberti and announced his own survival to the crowds within Santa Croce.
He’d no regret for the actions themselves, but there was no denying that they had made things rather more difficult than they would have been otherwise.
Chapter 153: Leaving Firenze
Chapter Text
As he made his way back to Paola’s establishment, taking the rooftops once more so as not to be forced to contend with the city guard that were presently out in force, Ezio ruminated upon just where he and the remainder of his family would be able to take shelter. There was a place that they could stay, if they could make it past the net of guards that would inevitably be closing in on them from all sides if they chanced to spot one of them. There would be a greater chance of that happening, as Mother and Claudia were not likely to be able to traverse the rooftops with the same skill that he or little Maria possessed.
Sighing as he alighted briefly on a rooftop just across the street from Paola’s establishment, Ezio waited for a few moments as the crowds thinned enough for him to climb down and dart across the wider street in lieu of attempting to leap a gap that was half-again as wide as those he’d able to cross more easily. Making his way to a hidden entrance that Paola had showed to him, both of them knowing that he’d be better off keeping out of sight of those who would be making use of her establishment for their own purposes, Ezio made his way back inside at last.
He’d not truly been expecting Paola to be idle during the time he had been away dealing with the matter of Uberto and his revenge upon the man, however seeing Paola engaged in a swordfight with his littlest sister was not a thing that he’d been prepared in the slightest to see. Little Maria caught his eye, smiling wider for a moment, just before returning her attention to Paola as the woman pressed her attack.
“You’re doing very well, little Maria, but don’t let yourself be distracted by anything that isn’t another attack,” Paola advised, her tone sounding pleased, but also carrying a hint of admonishment, as well. “Still, I think it best that we both take a break, sí?”
“Sí, Paola. Grazie,” little Maria said, bowing to the woman with a small smile on her impish face.
When she rushed to embrace him about the middle, Ezio felt a bit better about things, though he knew that his expression would still give him away once his littlest sister actually stepped back far enough to look at him.
“I think it’s best I leave Firenze,” he said, deciding to put aside the matter of what he’d just seen; if little Maria wanted to learn to fight with a sword, then that was probably for the best.
God knew, more of his remaining family might very well be forced to learn those same skills.
“Where will you go?” Paola asked.
“My uncle, Mario, owns a villa near Monteriggioni,” he said.
“You’re still a wanted man, Ezio,” Paola said, her tone suggesting that she knew that he understood such a thing already, but wished to remind him, all the same. “I’ve seen posters all across the district, and town orators have begun to speak against you.”
“What would you have me do, Paola?” he asked, feeling helpless as he contemplated the situation that now stood before him.
“Wait here,” she said, a hand on his right shoulder. “I’ll have my girls tear down the posters, and orators can be bribed to speak of other things. I’ll also have travel papers drawn up for the four of you, as well.”
“Grazie, Paola,” he said, bowing deeply to her.
“Make yourself comfortable, Ezio,” Paola said, smiling gently at him “It will be some time before all of this is finished.”
“Of course,” he said, waiting for the few moments it took her to make her way out of the room, then turning to his littlest sister with a smile. “So, little Maria,” he grinned, taking up another blunted training saber from the rack. “Would you like another sparring partner?”
Little Maria’s impish grin spread right across the width of her face.
~AC: II~
Their journey out of what had once been the safety of Firenze was, naturally, punctuated by Claudia asking Ezio if they might ever by able to return to the place where their family had stayed for so long. Personally, Maria doubted it, but she wasn’t about to say anything so terribly insensitive to her grieving older sister. They all had enough grief between them without anyone to add to it.
Once the four of them had made it outside the towering walls of Firenze once more, Maria allowed herself to relax from the tensed state of awareness she’d been maintaining while she and her remaining family were still under the gaze of those who might still have been their enemies. Yes, there was some chance that Lorenzo de’ Medici would be able to rein in the guards since he’d returned, but she wasn’t about to rely on something so uncertain to shelter the remains of her family. Best they all kept moving.
It was some time later, the sun having fallen almost to the horizon, when they were able to take shelter within the walls of an abandoned barn that was thankfully not too damaged by the passage of time or the depredations of small animals.
As they all settled down upon the pile of hay that she, Claudia, and Ezio had all helped to move towards the back of the barn, Maria felt Mother’s arms wrapping firmly around her waist, pulling her close as the four of them closed their eyes for the night. Sighing softly into the gathering darkness, Maria wrapped her arms around Mother’s right where it had draped over her. Best they all got as much sleep as they could, they’d be moving again tomorrow.
~AC: II~
After he’d awakened and then gotten the rest of his family up for the morning, Ezio found himself feeling slightly better about their current situation than he once had. Yes, it was true that he hadn’t managed to save Father or either of their brothers from being hanged, but he had avenged their deaths, taken up what had clearly been Father’s mantle, and made contact with one of Father’s allies from the past. It didn’t truly balance, in the end, but it was a place to stand.
It was at least a start; the list of names he’d taken from Uberto Alberti’s corpse would give him the means to finish.
It was some time later, judging by the position of the sun in the sky, when Ezio found himself reminded of the fact that – even outside the walls of Firenze – he still had enemies in the world. It was Vieri, of course, the little shit clearly unable to let their grievances rest. For his part, Ezio was simply glad to have an uncomplicated fight on his hands. Knowing that there was little more at stake here than his own pride – Vieri’s threats were as stupid as he was, and little Maria would feed him his own cock if he tried anything – made things quite a bit simpler.
The hail of what looked like thrown knives made things almost easy.
“Here, use this,” the large, broad figure who’d just arrived amid yet another group of mercenaries called, tossing him a sword; Ezio thought he recognized the man, but the pair of them could speak of such matters later.
With the extra fighters added to their side, it was, naturally, much simpler to drive Vieri and his dogs from the impromptu battlefield.
“You have my thanks,” he said, offering the weapon he’d used back to the man who’d so unceremoniously presented it to him.
“Keep the sword, Ezio.”
Before he could ask just who the other man was, Ezio saw little Maria rushing past him.
“Uncle Mario! It’s so good to see you again!” she called happily, embracing the man around the waist with a happy smile on her face.
“Uncle Mario?” he echoed, not quite sure what to make of their present circumstances.
“It’s been too long, nipote!” Uncle Mario said, before the pair of them shared a fond, familial embrace. “I heard about what happened in Firenze,” their uncle said, sobering quickly. “Terrible. Come, let’s get you all away from here.”
Falling into step with Uncle Mario, Ezio found himself chivvied to the side of the road, just as he heard the sound of a carriage pulling up to their group. Uncle Mario had clearly sent for it some time ago – perhaps even during the battle itself, since Vieri’s dogs weren’t exactly what anyone would call a challenge – and as the five of them all piled inside, Ezio found himself called on to continue his conversation about what had happened to Father and his brothers.
He also found himself hearing of the villa, Monteriggioni, and receiving his uncle’s offer of shelter.
Chapter 154: The Villa Auditore
Chapter Text
“I’m grateful for your kindness, Uncle Mario,” he said, beginning to suspect what his uncle had in mind, but not quite certain just what his own answer would end up being, in the end. “But, I was planning to head farther afield. Your home, while it is a beautiful place, wouldn’t be as safe as I’d wish.”
“Ezio, none of us will be safe, if the Pazzi are allowed to continue their scheming,” Uncle Mario said. “Aside from that, I thought you’d come here to continue your father’s work.”
“Would that be Father’s work as a banker, or his work as an Assassin?” Ezio asked, almost certain at this point what Uncle Mario was going to say.
“It’s good that he told you, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, smiling gently, though his expression carried a hint of sadness, as well.
“Honestly, Uncle, I found out from little Maria,” he paused, sighing. “And, I’m still not sure how I feel about all of… this.”
“Giovanni never told you?” Uncle Mario echoed, sounding taken aback at the prospect.
“No,” Ezio shook his head. “What’s more, this whole tale – Assassins, Templars, and the unknowing world caught in the middle – sounds like something out of fantasy.”
“That, Ezio, is how the Templars are able to perform any number of their depraved acts,” Uncle Mario said, what mirth that had been present on his face swiftly departing. “Do not make the mistake of dismissing this struggle of ours, nipote. We fight for the freedom of the world, so that the people might learn to become better than they are.”
“I don’t know if I could find it in me to be so selfless, Uncle,” he said, swallowing back a sigh; at the moment, Ezio doubted that he could put even a single person he didn’t know above the health, safety, and happiness of his three remaining immediate family members.
“Then, I think you’ll find what I’m about to say of particular interest, nipote,” Uncle Mario said soberly, though not without a hint of black amusement on his weathered face.
“What do you mean?”
“That list of names you took from Alberti? On it are the names of the men responsible for the deaths of Giovanni and your brothers,” Uncle Mario said; Ezio felt something deep within him tighten at the pronouncement. “And, all of them – each and every one – are Templars. The Pazzi in particular have been enthusiastic supporters of the Order.”
Hissing between his teeth, knowing that Uncle Mario had him – he couldn’t, after all, just let those who had done such terrible things escape justice – Ezio turned back to see a solemn expression on his uncle’s face. Uncle Mario clearly didn’t want to do what he was doing, any more than Ezio wished to find himself facing such a stark choice as he was being given. Still, it seemed as though there was nothing for it; and if he truly was to become an Assassin, he would clearly need to hone his craft.
“See that Mother and Claudia are taken care of, will you?” he asked, already feeling the heavy weight of the new responsibilities that came alongside his choice.
“I will, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, as the pair of them stood once again. “I will also see that you are properly outfitted for our work, though I’m afraid I can only offer you a discount at the shops.”
Smiling softly for the attempt at humor from their uncle, Ezio followed the older man to the shops, little Maria falling into step with them. It’d become clear, given Vieri’s reactions to her, that the Pazzi – at least, if not these Templars that he’d begun hearing about – knew at least something about his littlest sister, and so Ezio was determined to see that little Maria possessed the means to defend herself, in the unfortunate event that he found himself far from her side. If this work of Father’s was going to take him as far afield as it seemed, he wanted at least some assurance of his littlest sister’s safety.
Mother and Claudia were being given shelter in a nearby convent, true, but Ezio had no real way of knowing just how the nuns present would react to little Maria’s odd coloring; Uncle Mario hadn’t said anything much on the matter, but for his part the older man did seem pleased with Ezio’s reasoning.
~AC: II~
Having both his niece and nephew with him, in spite of the terrible circumstances which had brought them back to Monteriggioni, was something of a comfort. No matter what some of the others said, the safest place for an Assassin was always where his Brothers and Sisters could watch his back. Such a thing had only been proven all the more true by the sad fate that had befallen his poor brother; if Giovanni had had more Assassins to call upon than just his half-trained children, he might very well have been able to escape from the Pazzi’s trap.
Still, there was nothing Mario himself could do about such a thing; Giovanni had chosen his path, and now it was left to those who had survived him to carry on the Brotherhood’s good work in his absence.
Ezio and little Maria were, naturally, taking to their training like ducks to water; a thing Mario was glad for, since it meant that they would be far better protected against the Pazzi and their Templar allies than they would have been without the skills that he and Orazio were both working to impart to them. It also meant that, given the page of Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad’s Assassin Codex that had been hidden alongside Giovanni’s Hidden Blade, he could also tell Ezio of the other work that his father had been doing for the Brotherhood.
There were many new concepts that he wished to introduce his niece and nephew to, but every teaching needed a solid grounding in reality, else it would all collapse into nonsense.
After two weeks of observing Ezio and little Maria as they trained – presently, the pair of them were sparring each other; Ezio’s height and reach, set against little Maria’s speed and agility – Mario knew that they were as ready as he could ask, given the time they had for this next task.
“Nipoti, come! I’ve something to say that needs the both of you present,” he called, once the pair of them had disengaged in order to study the others’ movements and positioning.
Making his way out of the courtyard, the Assassin-garbed forms of his niece and nephew following along behind him, Mario smiled softly as he heard the soft-voiced discussion and playful banter going on behind him. It seemed that he was not the only one, now, who saw the value in the training they were being asked to undergo.
“You’ve both done very well, nipoti,” he said, once he heard a lull in their conversation. “I’m very proud of the both of you.”
“Grazie, uncle,” Ezio said, though he still seemed slightly confused about just what it was that the three of them were going to be doing.
“Do you know why I’ve been driving your training so relentlessly, nipoti?”
“Sí, Uncle: you’re planning to take over Italia,” little Maria said, and he turned back to see the wide, teasing smile that he knew would be on her face.
“I am not planning to take over anything, you wicked little imp,” he said, grinning as he pinched the silly girl’s cheeks and made her squeal with delighted laughter. “The truth is, Vieri de’ Pazzi has been harassing us ever since you four arrived,” he continued, releasing little Maria and straightening up as he, Ezio, and the girl herself all continued on their way to the barracks. “It’s only to be expected, considering his heritage.”
“Sí,” Ezio muttered, looking briefly to the younger of his two sisters. “You told me that the Pazzi were Templars.”
Chapter 155: Assassino e Assassina
Chapter Text
“Indeed, alongside the Barbarigo and the Borgia,” he said, leading Ezio and little Maria down across the grounds and to the stables.
“The Barbarigo are a part of this, too?”
“Sí, they are,” he said, nodding as their trio passed under the archways and into the stables, where his mercenaries – alongside a few Assassins-in-training, like Ezio and little Maria themselves – were girding themselves for battle.
“We’ve prepared horses and weapons for your nipoti, Messer,” the head of the stables, a kindly man by the name of Marco Grigori, said.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, giving the man a formal embrace, before turning back to Ezio and little Maria where they stood. “Both of you, saddle up and prepare for battle; we ride for San Gimignano tonight. Vieri de’ Pazzi’s threats, childish as they may sound, can hardly be ignored when he stands in possession of a garrison and enough soldiers to lay siege to the very walls of our home. Come, you’ll ride just behind me, at the head of our formation. You’ll both have protection, as well as a good view of the proceedings, from there.”
“Va bene, Uncle,” Ezio said, though there was still the slightest hint of unease when he spoke; even before his nephew looked to little Maria with concern, he knew the cause of it. “I’ll do what I can.”
Their journey to Tuscany was as short as could be asked, given the means they were using to travel, and when their group had drawn close to the south gates of San Gimignano, Mario directed some of his mercenaries to distract the guards while Ezio – little Maria was still a bit too small for that kind of work – made his way over the wall and found a way to open them from the inside.
“What do you want me to do, Uncle?”
“Well, you never learned to throw knives from horseback, did you?” he asked, smiling gently at the grin that spread across his adorable niece’s face.
~AC: II~
As he moved across the rooftops, silent and stealthy as his training had made him, Ezio found himself reflecting – during those times when his attention hadn’t been absorbed by aiming to send another of Uncle Mario’s throwing-knives plunging into the archers that had been arrayed along the inside of San Gimignano’s walls – upon the shadows he would chance to cast when the moonlight struck him at just the right angle. The hooded robe that he wore gave his silhouette the look of some great bird of prey. Ezio didn’t quite know if there was a type of eagle that woke at night, but that was what his shadow reminded him of, those few times he chanced to see it.
Narrowing his eyes as the last archer in his section fell, a throwing dagger embedded in his throat, Ezio breathed more easily as he clambered down from the wall he’d been crouching atop. Making his way over to the lever-and-pulley system that would open the gates for Uncle Mario and his men, Ezio proceeded to do just that, allowing their forces – with Uncle Mario and little Maria at the head of the group – to make their way into the city on foot; their horses having been hitched fast outside.
“Well done, Ezio,” Uncle Mario said, as he and little Maria stopped beside him, letting the mercenaries break around them like river water flowing around a rock. “The men and I will deal with the main force. You and little Maria just see to it that none of the guards or remaining archers give us any trouble, capito? That should give me all the time I need to find and silence Vieri.”
“Sí, Uncle,” he said, alongside little Maria, as the pair of them spilt off from Uncle Mario and melted back into the night. “We won’t let you down,” he continued, speaking on his own as little Maria stifled a laugh.
It was always amusing, when the pair of them chanced to find themselves speaking as one, Ezio reflected.
Scaling the building closest to where they’d been standing, he paused a moment to allow little Maria to catch up, before moving across the rooftops one again. The pair of them were quite able to dispatch the rest of the archers who had been standing sentry in balconies and at the edges of low rooflines, but Ezio soon found that he’d run out of daggers, and so he made his way back down. He’d spoken briefly to the littlest of his sisters on the subject, before it had become more than a minor concern, and the pair of them had eventually come to the conclusion that – in the absence of a way to strike out at their enemies – having another set of eyes on the rooftops wasn’t worth the risk.
The pair of them had met up with a cell of Uncle Mario’s mercenaries, and he found – to his surprise, mild as it was, considering their relationship and the man’s feelings for him – that Uncle Mario had given him the command of the men now surrounding him and his littlest sister.
“Well then, I suppose we’d better get back to work,” he said, falling into the role that had been given.
“Ezio!” Orazio shouted as he ran over, looking haggard and somewhat worse for wear, though not grossly injured by any stretch. “Your uncle has been pinned down in the courtyard! Hurry! We need your help!”
“Then you shall have it,” he decided, quickly marshalling his forces and making for San Gimignano’s large central courtyard.
Finding their uncle in just the kind of mess that Orazio’s tone had suggested they would, Ezio threw himself into the fracas, even as he ordered a pair of the men Uncle Mario had lent to him to look after little Maria.
“Ah, nipote!” the man himself called, once the crush of battle had brought them closer together. “There you are! It seems my plan has hit a little snag. Vieri’s men ambushed us, and now we’ve got our hands full. My brothers and I will deal with these guards. I want you to go ahead; get your sister to safety, and then root out that snake! Find Vieri; see that justice is served.”
“Va bene, Uncle,” he said, waving briefly to the men who had so generously taken little Maria under their wings.
They understood him without the need of words, and so he and his littlest sister were able to begin making their way back up to the rooftops once more. From such a high vantagepoint, it would not only be much simpler to spot anyone else who might try to hinder their progress, but also to find a safe place for little Maria to take shelter while he came to grips with Vieri. Breathing a bit more easily as he made his way across the rooftops beneath his feet, Ezio turned to look back at little Maria.
She seemed to be handling all this with good-natured aplomb, though it was still clear that she was a bit off-balance from the speed of the proceedings; they had that in common, at least.
“When I find Vieri, I want you to stay behind while I deal with him,” he said, as the pair of them came within sight of the tower where Vieri would likely retreat when he realized that his thugs were no match for Uncle Mario’s mercenaries.
“Sí, fratello. I’ll stay on one of the rooftops,” little Maria said, smiling gently up at him. “None of these oversized brutes seem to be able to move as well as we do.”
That’s certainly true, he mused, feeling more settled with the knowledge that his littlest sister – while she would still be in some danger, considering where they both were at the moment – would at least be somewhat protected from whatever was to come when he moved to confront Vieri. Offering his littlest sister a gentle, one-armed embrace as the pair of them alighted briefly on a rooftop bordering the walls of the fortress Vieri had been cowering inside, Ezio carefully positioned himself so that he would be able to oversee anything that happened in the vicinity of the fortress.
More specifically, so that he would be in a position to overhear the meeting currently taking place between Vieri, his bastardo father, and Rodrigo Borgia; Borgia seemed a more dangerous man than any of the other Templars that seemed to have gathered around him. Jacopo, a man that he’d only heard of before this night, seemed an weary and retiring sort, so Ezio thought it only fitting that he had been given the task of calming people, rather than riling them up, as seemed to be Francesco’s job. Vieri, of course, was clearly as much of a high-strung idiot as he’d ever been.
However, the coldness in Rodrigo’s tone and manner gave even Ezio a brief chill; hearing him speak of little Maria, however…
Chapter 156: Vieri de’ Pazzi
Chapter Text
Well, it seemed that there were, indeed, more than just his littlest sister who shared her coloring, and the Templars seemed to have an interest in every one of them. And so, since it had clearly been the Templars who had been the main force behind the cruel murder of Father and their brothers, Ezio made up his mind that he would do everything he could, in order to see that none of the plans that Rodrigo Borgia and his Templars ever succeeded. He resolved to give everything he could to the cause of the Assassins.
With a last, gentle embrace from little Maria, Ezio leaped over the remaining pair of rooftops that had separated him from the perimeter wall of Vieri’s no-doubt stolen fortress, and made his way along the top of said wall until he had reached a wide, stout, sturdy tower. The gray brickwork was even more dull under the light of the half-moon shining down on them, but Ezio’s eyes had long since adapted to the darkness. Still, it appeared that the same held true for Vieri.
After he’d dealt with the little bastardo’s two guards, Ezio had almost been expecting him to run away – fleeing like the coward he’d so clearly proven himself to be on every other occasion they’d chanced to meet in combat – but, it was clear that the presence of Rodrigo Borgia, however long the Spaniard had actually stayed with them, bolstered what little bravado Vieri had. Still, it wasn’t bravado that won fights, in the end.
As he and Vieri came to grips at last, Ezio felt a surge of anger – banked for so long by Paola’s kindness, and the presence of all those he still cared about – rush through him like fire. Here before him, was one of those who had been responsible – even if in the most indirect way – for the deaths of Father, Federico, and little Petruccio, for no better reason than greed, selfishness, and what was clearly a hunger for power. It was one of the most disgusting, deplorable things that Ezio had ever found himself confronted with; all the more reason to hate the Templars, truly.
And, since he had a Templar before him, Ezio was hardly going to show Vieri any more mercy than the bastardo would have shown him, had their positions been reversed, somehow.
Managing to land what was clearly a killing blow upon Vieri, Ezio watched with a cold sort of satisfaction as a look of resignation spread across his face. However, the amusement lingering in Vieri’s eyes didn’t please him in the slightest.
“What are you and your allies planning?!” he demanded, yanking Vieri upwards rather than kneeling at his side like some kind of mourner. “Is this what my father discovered?! Is this why he was killed?!”
“I’m sorry,” Vieri mocked, insolent to the end. “Were you… hoping for a confession?”
Vieri died with that same, mocking smile upon his face.
“Piece of shit!” Ezio snarled. “I only wish you’d suffered more! You met the fate you deserved! I hope you rot in the street like a dead crow!”
“Enough, Ezio!” Uncle Mario’s voice, sharp and biting, brought him back to his senses. “Show some respect.”
“Respect?” he echoed, incredulous. “After all that’s happened?! Do you think he would have shown either of us such kindness? Or little Maria, if his dogs had lived to find her?”
“You are not Vieri,” Uncle Mario said, his stern calm helping Ezio to settle his mind, even if only a bit. “Do not become him.” Watching for a long moment, as his uncle gave Vieri last rites, Ezio forced the scene from his mind to focus on more important matters. “Take this, read it when you have the time.”
“Sí, Uncle,” he said, taking the folded parchment Uncle Mario handed to him.
“Come, our work here is finished,” Uncle Mario said, his tone weary and pleased at once. “We should return to the villa.”
“Of course,” he said, nodding even as he set off to find little Maria, so that the pair of them could make their way out of the city together.
He’d look over the letter Vieri was carrying some other time; it couldn’t have been that important, to be foisted off on a brute like him.
Chapter 157: Homeward once more
Chapter Text
When she saw Ezio, leaping back over the rooftops to meet with her, Maria smiled and waved to him, beckoning the last of her brothers closer so that the pair of them might finally begin making their way back to Monteriggioni. Back to where they could send a message to where Mother and Claudia were staying, so that they would be able to check up on how the both of them were doing. And also, so that she and Ezio would be able to have a meal before the pair of them went to bed for the night.
She’d done what she could, with the few daggers that had been left to her when she and Ezio had parted company so that he could deal with Vieri at last, and was glad that her last brother was presently with her, as the pair of them made their way out of San Gimignano and met up with Uncle Mario and his mercenary forces so that they could all make their way out of the fortress together.
Once they had all made it back to the villa itself, she and Ezio had supper, and then bid Uncle Mario good night before the both of them ultimately settled down to sleep; for her part, Maria was just glad to be done with the whole thing.
~AC: II~
Waking up before sunrise the next morning, Ezio hurried over to the desk that Uncle Mario had given him when he’d set Ezio up within the room he’d chosen for himself, once it had become clear that he and little Maria were going to be staying in Monteriggioni together. Settling himself down, Ezio began mentally composing the letter he would write. Wondering for a long moment, just what kind of matters he should tell the two of them about, Ezio decided that he wouldn’t mention the fact that he and little Maria were training to kill the men who had been the ultimate architects of their suffering.
He didn’t know if Mother had been aware of the existence of the Templars as a whole, given that Father had been an Assassin himself, but he didn’t wish to trouble her with what was ultimately his fight.
Once he’d finished with the letter he was writing, Ezio yawned deeply as he made his way over to his dresser and began preparing for the day that he was going to be facing all too soon. There were a lot of things that he would have to do, given what he and little Maria were training for, and Ezio knew that it was best that he get started as soon as possible. That was what Uncle Mario would say, anyway.
Sending his letter off with one of Uncle Mario’s couriers, Ezio made his way out to the courtyard again. Uncle Mario would be wanting the both of them out there as quick as possible, since he’d made it clear that the both of them were going to need to train as hard as they could, if they were going to have any hope of taking the fight to the Templars. Much as he hadn’t liked the idea, Ezio knew that he couldn’t count on all of his opponents being as feeble as Vieri had ultimately proven himself to be.
Still, the thought of the long road that he and little Maria had yet to walk wasn’t truly a comforting one; they would be together on it, yes, but Ezio still couldn’t help his idle wish that none of them had needed to start down it in the first place.
It was a week later, almost to the day, when Ezio found that Claudia had made her way back to the villa, carrying a bundle of letters. There were three of them, one for him, one for little Maria, and one for Uncle Mario.
“Claudia,” he said, pausing for a moment to embrace his younger sister and lay a kiss on both of her cheeks, before turning his attention back to other matters. “I thought you and Mother were going to stay at the convent until she recovered.”
“I was,” his younger sister said, her expression one of just barely restrained discontent. “But, it was so… peaceful there. I mean, I know it will be good for Mother, being in a place like that…”
“But you found that it wasn’t good for you, sorellina?” he prompted, smiling as Claudia trailed off.
“Just that,” she said, with a sharp nod and a sharper grin.
“Well, far be it from me to tell you how to live your life,” he said, grinning back at his younger sister as the pair of them parted company.
It was kind of nice, having Claudia there with him, and the fact that little Maria had not left his side – even if he still wasn’t sure how to feel about his littlest sister training to be an Assassin at times – gave Ezio a renewed sense of hope, and from that he was able to motivate himself to begin moving forward faster with his training. It was some days later, when he found himself called back to Uncle Mario’s study, alongside little Maria. The first thing their uncle told them was that he was pleased with the speed that they were progressing with their training.
The next was to inform them of the state of San Gimignano, held now under the steady hand of an old comrade of his by the name of Roberto, was pursuing the last few pockets of Pazzi resistance within the fortress city. Ezio had been pleased to hear it, but it seemed that such was not the ultimate reason that he and little Maria had been called to Uncle Mario’s study on this particular morning. No, instead they were being given further information concerning Rodrigo Borgia, the Grand Master of the Templars in Italia.
Ezio already hated the man, for what he had done to Father and his and little Maria’s brothers, but knowing how many allies the man had could only aid him in his future endeavors.
Chapter 158: A mother’s wish
Chapter Text
Once their meeting had concluded, Maria returned to her room; to prepare for her next rounds of training, yes, but also to think about the letter that Mother had sent to her in particular. It seemed that, even as the trauma that she had faced at the hands of those Pazzi bastardi kept her from speaking, Mother had recovered enough that she was able to write. It also seemed that she had known about Father’s work for the Brotherhood, though the older woman hadn’t spoken of it where Maria herself could hear her.
It was something Maria had often found herself wondering about, whether she had been the only one of her family to be aware of the other things that Father had done – both for Firenze, and for Italia as a whole – but those kinds of questions wouldn’t do anyone any good if she asked them now, so Maria put them out of her mind.
Laughing softly as she recalled the look on Claudia’s face when Uncle told her that, if she truly wished to stay at the villa with the rest of them, she was going to do at least some work, Maria hummed a soft, tuneless melody as she dressed in the Assassin robes that Uncle had ordered made for her just a day after he had received the letter that Mother had written for him. Once she had finished, the ensemble rather more simple than even her own clothes to put on and take off, Maria made her way back to Uncle Mario’s study, just as she’d been asked to do.
Once she and Ezio met up again, they embraced and kissed each other on both cheeks, before settling down to hear just what it was that Uncle Mario wished to speak to them about on this particular morning.
“I’m glad the pair of you have been taking to your training so well, nipoti,” Uncle Mario said, smiling widely, though there was still a wistful cast to his expression. “I am certain that your father would have been proud of you both.”
“Grazie, uncle,” the pair of them said, turning sly, sidelong smiles upon each other when it became clear that they had both spoken at once.
“However, now that I have helped you to refine your skills, it is up to you to decide what you will do with them. Where do you intend to go next?”
“We’ll return to Firenze,” Ezio said, her last brother’s grim determination settling over him like a shroud once more. “Francesco de’ Pazzi will share the fate of his son.”
“Sí, and so will all of the other Templars on Father’s list of names,” she said, nodding. “But, Francesco first; he’s no doubt causing all kinds of trouble in the city. Plotting against the Medici, not to mention whatever other business a Templar like him would have there.”
Chapter 159: The Codex and the Templars
Chapter Text
“Well, I can see that you both have this well in hand, nipoti,” Uncle said, grinning widely. “That’s good to know. However, there is also something that I would like you to see. Come,” he said, leading them to the back wall of his study. It was something that Maria had noticed, in passing, every time that she and Ezio had been called to meet with Uncle in this very place, and each of those times Maria had told herself to wait; told herself that, when the time came, Uncle Mario would tell them all about what they were seeing. “Well? Does this look familiar?”
“Other Codex pages?” Ezio muttered, only the slight lilt at the end giving away the fact that he had been asking rather than telling.
“Sí. Your father managed to find and translate a few of them, before he…”
“Here,” Ezio said, handing over the page that had been stored with Father’s old robes.
“This is not your father’s work,” Uncle Mario said, not sounding disapproving so much as confused; Maria wondered if Ezio was as pleased to be able to surprise their seemingly all-knowing uncle as she was. “Someone else has translated it.”
“Leonardo da’ Vinci. A friend,” Ezio said, folding his arms with a distinct air of satisfaction.
“Do you see the way the words cross from one page to the next?” Uncle Mario asked, gesturing to the wall of pages – with many, many more spaces than pages currently on it – with a wide sweep of his arm.
“There is something underneath it all,” Ezio said, stepping closer even as Maria made room for him; her eyes were drawn more to the pictures that stood out amidst all of the elegant, clearly Arabic writing. Whoever had written this codex, whatever their other merits, clearly had the skill of an expert draftsman, and the eye of a master artist. “Some kind of map. Where is it supposed to lead?”
“Your father and I managed to make out bits of a prophecy, scattered across these pages,” Uncle Mario said, eyes narrowing in thought. “It was written by an Assassin, like us. Who, long ago, held a ‘Piece of Eden’. His name was Altaïr. He spoke of something powerful, and ancient, hidden beneath the land,” Uncle Mario chuckled, though he didn’t sound altogether pleased. “He also spoke of his Apprentice, a man with the same coloring as little Maria, who went by the name of Alnesr.”
“What?” she couldn’t help but exclaim, surprised to have been called upon so directly during what had simply seemed to be a bit of a history lesson.
~AC: II~
“Indeed,” Mario said calmly, even as he found himself faced with the clear expressions of disbelief upon the young faces of his niece and nephew. “I suppose Giovanni wished to spare you some anguish by letting you grow up a bit before you heard this, but where we found you… it was not any place for a child.”
As he told them of the warehouse where he, Giovanni, and some of their brother and sister Assassins who had been able to come out to such a remote location on the kind of short notice they had been forced to operate under, Mario knew that – even as he spoke – he himself was also striving to protect what little innocence a young Assassin could lay claim to in the world they lived in. He’d not mentioned the back room that he and Paola had found, the one where the corpses of the children whose lives had been stolen by the Templars before they had had much of a chance to begin living them had been stored, before they were thrown out like so much refuse. Abusing children like that, Treasure Guardians or not, wasn’t a thing that Mario was willing to forgive.
Still, it was something only a Templar could find it in themselves to take part in.
Sighing as he forced his thoughts back to the present, Mario found that the expected shock and fury were plainly visible upon the faces of his niece and nephew. “And, that was where we found you, little Maria,” he said, looking at the face of the strong, healthy, usually happy girl who his brother had raised, to keep himself from dwelling too much upon those other, poor, nameless children who the Templars had used as little more than cattle.
“Porco demonio!” Ezio snarled, fists clenching at his sides with the sheer force of the rage plainly displayed on his face.
“Sí, but don’t allow your anger to make you careless, nipote,” he said, knowing that such had been one of the risks he had been running, when he told the pair of them the truth of how little Maria had come to join his brother’s family alongside their other children. “Depraved as they are, the Templars are still very dangerous.”
“I understand, Uncle,” Ezio said, his expression clearing, enough that it no longer seemed that he was holding onto his composure with both hands. “As for the rest of the Codex, I’ll take the page I found on Vieri’s corpse to Leonardo.”
“Good,” he said, his smile likely still tinged by the grim atmosphere that had settled over the room after he’d spoken of little Maria’s tragic, early circumstances. “Once you have it translated, bring that page and any others you might find back here, and we’ll add them to the wall.”
“Uncle?” the small, plaintive voice of his niece – who was usually not either of those things – called his attention her way again.
“What is it, little Maria?”
“Grazie,” she said, seeming to have regained at least some of her spirit. “It wasn’t a happy story, but still… I suppose it’s good to know where I came from, at least.”
“Of course,” he said, nodding as he watched the light steadily returning to his niece’s face and eyes. “All of that business aside, there’s something else that I would like to show the pair of you.”
“What is it, Uncle?” Ezio asked, as the three of them turned away from the wall that held the pages of the Assassin Codex – he knew that there was a second Codex that existed, since Altaïr had written about such a thing, even if only in the most oblique of terms, but he didn’t know precisely where such a thing could be found – that he, Giovanni, and now Ezio had all found and decoded, making their way back towards the center of his study.
Chapter 160: The tombs and the treasure
Chapter Text
“Come along and I’ll show you, nipoti,” he said, leading the pair of them over to the wall-sized bookshelf that stood at the far right side of his study.
Pressing a hidden catch on the right side of the middle shelf, Mario smiled as the expressions of awe and amazement that spread across the still-young faces of his niece and nephew as the entire right side of the bookshelf split apart and away from the left, sliding easily and almost silently back into a recessed portion of the wall, just behind the left side of that selfsame shelf. Behind it, revealed for the first time since he’d brought Ezio and little Maria to his villa, was the plain, simple staircase that would lead the three of them down into the Sanctuary that their ancestors had built and maintained for the whole of Monteriggioni’s long and storied existence.
“This is the Sanctuary,” he said, once the three of them had all finished their journey down the winding staircase, and made their may at last into the large, underground room at the end of it. “It was built by my great-grandfather, to honor the memory of the Assassin Brotherhood, and to protect its secrets. Look around,” he said, directing the eyes of the youngest of his Brother and Sister Assassins to the seven marble statues – each of them carved from only the finest stone – that had been spaced evenly around the circular vault. “These are the Assassins who guarded the freedom of humanity when it was most threatened. And, this is the armor of Altaïr,” he continued, stepping up before the statue of the one who had not only discovered the existence of the Treasure Guardians – taking them in before those who would seek to harm them out of ignorance could strike at them, or else the Templars could capture them – and transformed the Assassins into what the Brotherhood had become in the days since the Third Crusade, but had also worked until the end of his life to bring the Brotherhood new ways of operating, and to create new tools and means to aid them in their struggle. “Little is ultimately known of Altaïr’s life, though it is rumored that the man’s Apprentice compiled a Codex of his own. But, his armor is light and very strong. I’d give it to you, Ezio, since it’s made for a man your size, but I don’t know how to retrieve it,” he sighed softly. “My great-grandfather told me that it would remain locked away until all of its protectors were made whole,” seeing a spark of interest in Ezio’s eyes, Mario smiled as he continued. “I heard rumors of crypts located throughout Italia, hidden tombs filled with treasure, where these six were moved centuries ago. Maybe they have something to do with it,” he said, thinking aloud for the benefit of his niece and nephew where they stood, watching him with rapt attention; if there was anything that the members of their family enjoyed, it was the hunt for hidden treasure; even Giovanni, before the needs of his growing family had begun pressing upon him in earnest, had enjoyed such a thing. “In my younger days, I sought the six, myself. With no success. Perhaps one of you will have better luck.”
~AC: II~
“We’ll certainly do what we can, Uncle,” he said, still reeling slightly under the sheer barrage of words that had been necessary to convey the weight of the history within this room, and its importance to the brotherhood that he and little Maria had just joined. “Come on, little Maria, let’s get some lunch. We’ve still got a long day ahead of us.”
“Sí, fratello,” little Maria said, sounding like she was more than a little taken-aback by everything, herself. “See you again, Uncle.”
“I’ll speak to the both of you soon, nipoti,” Uncle Mario said, grinning cheerily as the three of them made their way back up the stairs to his study. “Enjoy your meal.”
“Of course, Uncle,” he said, grinning widely.
“We will!” little Maria called cheerfully over her shoulder, as the pair of them made their way back into the main hall of Monteriggioni once again.
They still had preparations to make, if they were going to be leaving for Firenze to deal with Francesco de’ Pazzi and whatever Templars he had supporting him.
Chapter 161: Return to Firenze
Chapter Text
It was some months later, in March, when they were finally able to leave for Firenze again. With their travel papers in order, and a friend of Uncle Mario’s having offered to provide shelter for them in secret while they stayed, Ezio found it all the more simple to make his way down to the small out-station that stood before the walls of Monteriggioni, there to hire a caravan so that he and little Maria could make their way back to the city where they had been born. Back to the city where they had lost so much.
Wrapping his left arm around his littlest sister’s narrow shoulders, Ezio allowed himself to relax into her embrace as their carriage brought them back to Firenze for the first time since Father and their brothers had been so unjustly murdered by the Templars.
When the pair of them had returned to Firenze at last, the first thing Ezio did was head for Leonardo’s workshop. Not only because he had made a promise to Uncle Mario about that very thing, but also because he himself wished to visit the man. Seeing Leonardo, glimpsing the gusto and enthusiasm he had for even the smallest things in life… it was like a balm to his weary heart.
Look at me, becoming poetic over such a silly thing, Ezio mused, smiling softly as he and little Maria scaled the wall of a nearby building, stepping up onto the rooftop and moving steadily deeper into the city. Once they had reached the Artists’ Quarter, it was only a handful of moments before he was able to spot a break in the crowds, leaving him and little Maria free to leap back down to street-level once more. Breathing deeply as he stood back up, Ezio swiftly composed himself, took little Maria by the hand, and continued on his way to Leonardo’s workshop.
Finding himself allowed inside by someone who seemed to be one of Leonardo’s senior assistants, since he could still remember the man from the last time he himself had been present in Firenze, Ezio thanked him for allowing the pair of them inside. As he was coming to expect, Leonardo himself seemed to be working on some other project – either that, or he was simply out of contact for some other reason; Ezio could still remember the cages filled with songbirds, and little Maria teasing him about his flying machine – and so was not able to greet them properly when they came in.
On the subject of that mad contraption, Ezio mused, grinning as he caught sight of what seemed to be a scaled-up version of the tiny model that little Maria had drawn his attention to, when they had visited Leonardo for the first time together, carrying the codex page that Father’s chest had had concealed within it.
“It seems that Leonardo still hasn’t given up on that mad scheme of his,” he said, sharing an amused smile with little Maria as the pair of them passed deeper into the workshop.
“Sí, and it also seems that that’s not all he’s been working on,” his littlest sister said, her gaze roving to take in the veritable cavalcade of curiosities upon the pair of trestle tables they had passed between on their way deeper into the workshop, where Leonardo was waiting for them.
And there he is, Ezio mused, smiling warmly as Leonardo himself embraced first him and then his littlest sister.
“Ezio! It’s so good to see that both of you have managed to make it back to Firenze without incident,” Leonardo – Ezio was starting to think the man wished to be a bit of everything, and so was finding it harder to think of the man as simply a painter – said, taking a step back so that he could assess the pair of them where they stood. “However, I suspect that this isn’t a social visit.”
“I was hoping you might be able to help me with something,” he said, smiling at the inquisitive expression that spread over Leonardo’s gentle, scholarly face.
“Anything for you, my friend,” Leonardo said, his eyes alight once more with curiosity. “Aha! You’ve found another one!” the inventor – yes, that sounded like a much more fitting description than simply painter – exclaimed, grinning all the way to one of his work tables. “How exciting!”
He and little Maria shared grins, as the pair of them made their way to stand on opposite sides of Leonardo, watching as the man muttered to himself, bent determinedly to his task. Apparently, each and every one of the strange codex had had every one of its pages encoded with a differing cipher. Or, at least that was the impression he was getting; still, it could very well be that he was wrong, and that the small sampling of pages he’d seen encompassed the full range of codes that Altaïr’s codex had been written in. He couldn’t know, after all, until he had found more of them.
“It seems to be a manual, of sorts, for different assassination techniques,” Leonardo said, looking up at them once he’d finished with his work.
“May I see it?”
“Wait, what’s that?” Leonardo muttered, not even seeming to have heard Ezio’s question over the siren call of curiosity in his all-too-eager ears. “It’s not so much a design, this time, but a series of sketches,” the inventor continued, eyes darting from the left side of the vellum to its right. “Hmm, what to make of all this…” biting his lips, in order that he might avoid the embarrassment of mouthing like a landed fish, Ezio found that he could not quite avoid the soft harrumph that crawled up his throat in response to the inventor’s sudden laughter. “Of course! And, why not! What an inspired idea!”
Chapter 162: Altaïr’s teachings
Chapter Text
“Can you make it for me, while little Maria and I try what is in that manual fragment?” he asked, knowing Leonardo well enough to understand that only the prospect of new and esoteric inventions could have drawn his attention so quickly and easily.
“Take it,” Leonardo said, graciously handing the manual in question to him. “I’ll need at least two days, perhaps two and a half, to collect and assemble the raw materials,” a thought seemed to come to him then. “Do you have a place to stay?”
“A friend of our family has offered to let little Maria and I stay with them,” he said, pleased at the concern Leonardo was showing to the pair of them. “Grazie for your consideration, Leonardo.”
“Of course, my friend.”
The pair of them made their way to the back of Leonardo’s workshop, and then were led to a courtyard just to the right of the main building by yet another of Leonardo’s assistants, a man named Vincenzo. Once the pair of them had made it into the courtyard itself, he found that there had, indeed, been training dummies set out for him and little Maria to hone their new skills upon. After the pair of them had consulted the codex page for a few, long moments, discussing what they saw in low tones – more out of the need to cultivate such a habit than out of necessity, under their present circumstances – before moving off to practice the three new techniques for the first time.
Each one of them had an element of surprise about it – truly, it could be said that that was one of the greatest weapons that the Assassins possessed – with one of them being to spring from out of a haystack, pulling the intended target inside so that they could be swiftly hidden; the other being a high leap from a ledge, taking the unwary with very little chance of being detected from anywhere but above; and the last being to simply pull the legs out from under those who might have had the bad fortune to be standing on a balcony, thinking themselves safe for that reason. Of the three, Ezio could not quite decide which one he favored over the others. Little Maria, of course, was quite fond of leaping out of the haystack.
He’d expected nothing less of her, the little imp.
After they’d practiced three times upon each of the stuffed dummies, he and little Maria took turns practicing on one another; never with lethal intent, of course, but even being caught by whatever piece of clothing either one of them could grab was more than a bit disconcerting. The pair of them also trained themselves to dodge any attempts to use those same methods upon them, since there was always the chance, however slight, that they would be facing those who had been trained in the same ways he and little Maria were training.
Perhaps even some who had specifically trained to counter the very skills that they themselves were learning.
Once he and little Maria were both satisfied with their training for the day, though the pair of them did agree that they would both continue practicing the three techniques they had just learned with all due diligence, Ezio thanked Vincenzo for the help that he had been willing to give to them, and then proceeded little Maria back into Leonardo’s workshop, hearing the sounds of Vincenzo and some of his fellows as they began cleaning up the courtyard behind them.
“There’s something else I’d like to ask you, Leonardo,” he said, making his way over to the table that the inventor was still seated before, making notes and sketches.
“Ask, then,” Leonardo said, turning a warm grin back on him. “If I know something, even the smallest thing, I’ll tell you every bit of it.”
“Grazie, Leonardo.”
“It’s the least I can do, in return for a look into that marvelous Codex of yours,” the inventor said, grinning back at him. “I have some aspirations toward being an innovator, but so much in even those two pages you showed me would be new and strange, I think, even to the ones who taught me. Anyway,” Leonardo said, shaking his head, as though to chase away his errant thoughts. “What was it you wanted, amico?”
“There’s a man that Father wants us to get in contact with,” Ezio said, digging out the folded slip of paper that Father had handed to him on the day that he and little Maria had departed on their way back to Firenze. “We’re not to approach him publicly, Father was adamant about that in particular, so would you know a way-”
“La Volpe,” Leonardo said, cutting into anything else that Ezio might have said, while at the same time making the saying of anything in particular a rather moot point.
“The Fox?” Leonardo shushed him before he could have said anything else. “Capisco. But, do you know where a Fox might roam?”
“Perhaps,” Leonardo said, his tone low and quick, edging into being a whisper without quite taking that last step. “Near the Mercato, where the thieves dwell… If you’re aiming to find him, be careful. No one has ever managed such a feat, if… he wasn’t looking for them, first.”
“Grazie, Leonardo,” he said, nodding to little Maria as she hurried over and the three of them exchanged farewells.
“Come back in two days, and I’ll have it ready for you, as promised,” the inventor said, and Ezio smiled as he realized that Leonardo had been careful enough not to mention just what it was that he would have ready the day after tomorrow, now that the three of them stood before the man’s door and were preparing to depart.
He and little Maria embraced Leonardo a last time, before taking momentary shelter in an alleyway so that they would be able to climb back up to the rooftops without being seen.
“It was so amazing,” little Maria said, once the pair of them were comfortably above the height that anyone else might have heard them talking. “Leonardo has made so many things; not just those paintings that you told me about, but models and blueprints as well!” she said, her bubbling stream of words only momentarily pausing, when the pair of them reached a large gap between buildings that needed to be jumped. “I could hardly decide where to look first!”
“Sí, I saw you,” he said, grinning back at his littlest sister as the pair of them continued on their way across the rooftops of Firenze, in search of whatever it was that they would be able to find in the Mercato Vecchio district; if not the Fox himself, then perhaps someone who might know of him. “I think, if you truly wanted to, Leonardo would not mind if you asked to stay with him.”
“Sí, I know,” little Maria said, sounding more dejected than he could account for. “I would really enjoy that, but…”
“What is it, sorellina?”
“Well, the letter that Mother wrote for me said that she wanted me to look after you, and to learn whatever I could, so that I could take care of myself, if… anyone else were to try anything.”
“Anything like what those Templar bastardi tried,” he said, completing the thought that Mother had likely been having when she wrote the letter that Claudia had delivered to little Maria.
“Sí,” his littlest sister said, giving him a wan smile. “That’s what she told me she wanted.”
“It’s a sentiment we have in common, sorellina,” he said, pausing to think more deeply upon just what their mother might have meant when she wrote those words. “Still, I don’t think Mother would have wanted to stop you from following your own interests. Since she worked with Father, and everything that Uncle Mario says makes it seem like the Assassini are all in favor of everyone’s freedom, she probably just meant for you to keep up with your training, sorellina. Not to let it take over your life.”
“Grazie, fratello. I think you’re right,” little Maria said, sounding much happier than she had when the pair of them had first started their conversation.
“I’ll tell you what,” he said, smiling as the perfect solution to their respective situations presented itself before him. “There’s someone I’d like to… see, for just a bit,” he said, continuing in the face of the ever-widening grin he’d spotted on his littlest sister’s face. “Sí, it is who you’re thinking, you little imp, so don’t even ask,” he said, prompting a fit of giggles from the silly girl. “Anyway, perhaps you could return to Leonardo’s, and I could pick you up from there. It seems as though you’d both enjoy each other’s company.”
“Well I suppose, if you are going to be busy, fratello,” little Maria said, grinning shamelessly back at him.
“Go on, then,” he said, grinning back as he reached to ruffle his littlest sister’s silvery fringe. “I’ll meet up with you later.”
“Sí, fratello. Grazie.”
“Of course,” he said, smiling gently as little Maria turned and raced away across the rooftops, heading back toward Leonardo and his workshop.
Breathing in deeply to fortify himself, Ezio turned and made his way toward the palazzo Vespucci.
~AC: II~
When she had made her own way back to Leonardo da’ Vinci’s workshop, the smile Maria had been wearing for her silly, hopeless romantic of a brother was still firmly on her face. Yes, things were not truly likely to have remained exactly the same, during the two years that their family had been absent from Firenze – witness the state of their family’s palazzo, glimpsed when neither of them had been able to resist the urge to go and look - but it was clear that Ezio had been hoping that there was at least one thing that had and would remain true, no matter how many years passed. Maria still wished her last brother well, even though she didn’t quite know if she believed he would find what he wanted.
Still, Ezio deserved to have something go right for him, if only just to counter-balance everything that had gone wrong, and the pair of them truly did seem to love each other.
Well, enough thoughts about what my silly brother might be doing, Maria mused, alighting on a rooftop that overlooked Leonardo’s courtyard. Watching carefully for anyone who might have been keeping a lookout for anyone inside the courtyard itself, Maria waited for a few moments, and then leaped lightly down into the longer grass bordering the edges of the neatly-manicured yard. A look to her left and right, then to her right and left, assured Maria that she had indeed managed to escape the notice of any of the city guard who might have been patrolling in this area.
Knocking at the inner-door of the courtyard, the one she and Ezio had passed through not so very long ago, Maria waited to be let in. Vincenzo seemed surprised to see her, but he quickly went to fetch Leonardo when she asked it of him.
“Little Maria,” the inventor said, seeming surprised as well, but also just the slightest but pleased if Maria could call herself any judge. “I wasn’t honestly expecting to see you again so soon, but this does solve a conundrum I’d found myself facing. Come,” he said, leading her deeper into his workshop with all of its fascinating odds, ends, and inventions-in-the-making. “Now, would you mind holding out the arm you use the most often?”
She laughed, realizing just what it was that Leonardo had in mind. “You know, Ezio might not entirely approve of the gift you’re planning to give me,” she said, chuckling as another thought came to her. “And, you know that I’m still growing, sí? I might end up taller than Ezio, even.”
The pair of them shared a laugh, as Maria offered her right arm to Leonardo so that he could measure the lengths and widths he would need, in order to create what he was aiming to.
Chapter 163: Foxes and eagles
Chapter Text
Speaking with Christina that last time – to say nothing of meeting her fiancé, Manfredo – had left Ezio with mingled feelings of resignation and resolve. While it was true that he’d been uncertain about bringing Christina into the kind of life that he and little Maria were living, he’d have still appreciated having the option to do such, instead of having the option blocked to him as he had. However, in the end, he supposed that he could see the logic that Christina’s father had been operating under.
Two years was a long time to delay a marriage, particularly at the age he and Christina had both been.
Sighing as he came back into sight of Leonardo’s workshop, Ezio paused to watch the crowds milling below. Finally spotting an opportune moment, he leaped lightly down into the courtyard, then made his way up to the door. Rapping on the door, he waited for Vincenzo to come to the door and let him in.
“Ezio, come in, come in,” the inventor said, waving to him.
“Welcome back, fratello mio!” little Maria called cheerfully, grinning at him as she hurried over.
The pair of them embraced, sharing kisses, as Leonardo smiled at them.
“Do the pair of you have time to stop for a bit of wine?” Leonardo asked.
“Sadly, no,” he said, as little Maria took her place at his side. “I’m glad to see you again, amico mio. Grazie for your hospitality.”
“Of course,” the inventor said, smiling widely as he waved goodbye to the pair of them. “Remember to come back in two days, amici.”
“We will,” he said, as the pair of them turned to depart from Leonardo’s workshop once again.
Climbing back up onto the rooftops once more, Ezio breathed more easily, though he suspected that his lack of composure was showing, given the way little Maria was looking at him. The pair of them continued on their way to the Mercato Vecchio, moving a bit too fast to have any kind of conversation, and he tried to think of nothing but the man that Uncle Mario had sent them out to find. Still, seeing the understanding on his littlest sister’s face made Ezio feel at least somewhat better.
Perhaps, in time, he could even come to see the good in the decision that Christina’s father had made.
~AC: II~
When the pair of them finally arrived in the Mercato Vecchio, having descended back to the ground so that they would be better able to track down the man that Uncle Mario had wanted them to track down within that part of the city, the first thing Maria noticed was the man who tried to run past her. Reaching out to grab the man’s nearest arm, once she heard Ezio shouting about his stolen money, Maria nearly found herself yanked off her feet when the man tried to pull free from her grip. Bracing herself against the weight of the man as he fought against her, Maria glared at him when his eyes snapped toward her.
She’d honestly been expecting the man to freeze up the way he did, since that was what everyone did when they saw her yellow eyes, but it was his reaction after that that surprised her…
“Cazzo! One of you, all the way out here?!” the man exclaimed. “Come on! We have to get out of here!”
“Hey, lurido porco! Get your hands off my sister!”
“Sister?” the man asked, turning to look from Ezio to her and then back again, his eyes narrowed slightly. “Come on; quickly, now.”
Blinking in surprise as she found herself tugged along behind the man who had come up to them, clearly a thief given how they had met in the first place, Maria looked at her brother as the pair of them followed along in the thief’s wake.
“This isn’t what I was expecting at all,” she said.
“I know,” he said, an amused sort of smile pulling at his lips as the pair of them continued on their way through the city.
When the three of them finally stopped, finding themselves standing before a tall, broad-shouldered man dressed in a hooded cloak that looked familiar in all but color, and the subtler nuances of the cut. The man himself, whose eyes seemed to be some shade of violet of all colors, reached out to gently lift her chin, smiling in a fashion that Maria could only truly call knowing.
“I’m glad to see that the pair of you made it quickly and without too much incident,” the man said, the smile on his face slowly becoming more of a welcoming sort as he let go of Maria’s chin and folded his strong arms across his broad chest.
“You are La Volpe, Messer?” Ezio asked, just before Maria herself could articulate that same question.
The man grinned, an edge of self-deprecation to the expression. “Oh, there are many things I’ve been called, in my time, piccola amici; murderer, tagliagole, thief. But I remain, to the end, myself. And, the both of you may indeed call me La Volpe.”
“It’s good to meet you, Messer,” she said, feeling about as off-balance as Ezio seemed to be, but knowing that it was best to show courtesy to someone when you first met them; if they hadn’t harmed you or any of yours, at least.
“And you as well,” the man said, still smiling widely. “Still, I expect that you haven’t been sent all this way on merely a social call.”
“You’re right,” Ezio said, nodding decisively. “We need to find someone; to know where he’ll be, even before he does.”
“Who?” the man asked, though his manner suggested that he knew more than he was letting on.
“Francesco de’ Pazzi,” Ezio said, the name itself spat out like some kind of poison.
“There’s word on the street of a caravan just arrived from Roma; a secret meeting, to be held at sunset, tonight. You can learn something Francesco’s whereabouts there.”
“Do you know where this meeting is to be held?” Ezio asked.
“I do,” the man said, nodding. “Let me know when you’re ready, and we’ll go. Corradin!”
“Sí?”
“Take the little one here back to our guild’s headquarters, and get her something to fill her belly,” the man said, smiling gently. “Her brother and I are going to be hunting big game tonight. Don’t worry, piccola amico, I’ll be taking good care of your brother.”
She grinned at the pair of them. “That’s good; Ezio needs all the help he can get.”
“Hey! Marmocchio,” her last brother said, giving her a playful shove; the pair of them laughed softly, while La Volpe grinned.
Chapter 164: Into the underground
Chapter Text
After a final farewell, their small group split neatly into two pairs, and Maria followed the newly-named Corradin deeper into the city, passing through what looked like the better parts – though such was a relative term, in such a place as this – and into the smaller, more cramped, more run-down spaces that the thieves seemed to have made their own. She didn’t quite know what to make of it, with all of the rough-looking men congregating in such a place, but one glance at her yellow eyes and each and every one of them broke out in a knowing smile.
Maria wondered just what it was that these men in particular were seeing, when they looked at her.
When she and Corradin arrived at what seemed to be their final destination, Maria found, to her swiftly-mounting shock and amazement, that she was not the only one with yellow eyes and silver hair in this place. Most of those now beginning to gather around her were older – men and women, a few of them even starting to show the settling lines of age on their faces – yet, there were also those who seemed to share the same number of years as she herself had, or were only a few years ahead. It was such a strange thing, seeing so many who shared the features that had marked her out as strange and different for all of her life.
“So, you’ve found another one of ours out there,” the man who seemed to have elected himself to speak on behalf of every one of those who Maria could see arrayed around her.
“Sí, he did,” she said, speaking in an effort to overcome the sheer strangeness of the situation she had just found herself in.
“But you still don’t know what to make of all this, do you piccola aquila?” the man who had met her and Ezio when they first came into the city that this place was just a small part of said, making his way down into the maze of high walls and narrow corridors that Maria had followed Corradin down into not so very long ago. He held up his hands, as Maria’s eyes snapped to him. “Your brother will be fine; your uncle taught him well, and he’s absorbed enough of the lessons to keep himself out of sight, at least.”
“He’s spying on the Templar meeting alone?” Maria asked, not sure if she was more proud or worried for the last of her brothers.
“That he is, piccola aquila,” the man who called himself La Volpe said, smiling in a pleased sort of way. “And, though he’s still a bit slow to get started, he’s still young. Not quite so young as you, but he still has time to learn what he needs to.”
“Sí, I’d have to say that you’re right,” she said. “Still, who are all these others, Messer Volpe?”
“Please, call me Gilberto,” he said, the smile on his face becoming softer and more gentle. “Some of these, as you might have begun to suspect, came from the exact same place that you did, so long ago. Some of them,” here, Gilberto’s face fell into an expression of disapproval. “We took in, after they were forced to leave their families behind,” given the tone of his voice, Maria suspected that the mentioned partings had not been particularly pleasant. “Others, the ones your age, and those even younger, were born into this life, and chose to stay.”
“That’s quite the story,” she said, still surprised to see so many others who shared the coloring that had marked her out for the whole of her life. “I’m glad that your people are all doing so well, Messer Gilberto, but I confess that I still don’t know what to make of all this.”
“With enough time, you’ll come to understand,” Gilberto said, smiling gently. “But come, piccola aquila, let’s get you settled down for the night. You and your brother have both had a long journey.”
“You’re the one who Uncle Mario arranged for us to stay with, Messer Gilberto?”
“Sí, piccola aquila, I am,” Gilberto said, smiling gently back at her, as the pair of them fell into step with each other, moving steadily toward a building that, for all its rough outward appearance, seemed sturdy and well-built.
As she followed Gilberto into the candle-and-lamp lit interior, Maria couldn’t help but reflect that her life, strange as it had become in the days since the murder of Father and two of her brothers, had just taken another turn for the strange.
~AC: II~
He hadn’t quite known what to expect, when La Volpe had directed him down into the catacombs beneath Firenze, but being forced leap, climb, and dash like some kind of crazed monkey had most certainly not been in his plans for the evening. Still, all of that was over with, and now he was peering into the room where the Templars were having their meeting. Of course, after the course he had been forced to run – truly, the catacombs beneath Firenze seemed less like a hidden system of tunnels and more as though an entire city had been buried beneath Firenze itself, and some of the statuary he’d glimpsed had even suggested that there had been Assassins in that city – it wasn’t as though he’d simply been expecting to be able to sit down and listen in on the Templars at their meeting like a normal person.
He would have enjoyed it immensely, if such a thing had ended up being the case, but after all he’d done to get to that point, Ezio had been all but expecting this mad excursion to have an equally mad ending.
Chapter 165: Secret meetings
Chapter Text
And here he was, crouching outside a small, barred window, looking down into the room where the Templars – Rodrigo Borgia among them – were holding their meeting. He learned that Stefano de Bagnone, as well as a man named Bernardo Baroncelli, were conspiring with Borgia, the remaining Pazzi, and what sounded like a fair few others – including the Pope himself – in order to murder the Medici. Holding himself still, knowing that he would not do anyone a single bit of good if he were to slip up and get himself killed for even such a thing as this, Ezio also learned that there was someone very much like his littlest sister – a young man of about Ezio’s own age, or perhaps a bit older, he couldn’t tell from merely the conversation they were having – living as a part of the Medici family.
It seemed that, while the Templars here aimed to murder Lorenzo and Giuliano, their other objective was the capture of this unnamed man; Ezio knew that he would have his work cut out for him, attempting to prevent both.
Once the meeting had concluded, with Ezio also learning that Rodrigo Borgia was staying in Firenze for some unknown amount of time for some purpose that the man had not deigned to speak of even to his fellow Templars, he moved away from his listening post once he’d heard the last patter of departing Templar footfalls upon the rough, uneven stone floor. However, before he could take more than a couple of steps, the sight of what seemed to be an elaborate sort of crypt caught his attention, and Ezio stopped in his tracks.
The statue, standing over the coffin itself… it was a perfect match for one of those he’d seen within the Sanctuary that lay underneath Monteriggioni itself.
Making his way over to the side of the coffin, Ezio spotted the same innocuous sort of locking mechanism that La Volpe had shown to him when the man had shown him into the catacombs in the first place. It was beginning to seem that, if this place had not been built by the Assassins themselves, then at the very least it had a powerful connection to them. Looked at in that light, the presence of Templars in such a place could honestly be seen as the worst sort of defilement.
As he removed an artifact that bore as startling a resemblance to the round plate at the base of the statue as the statue itself did to what seemed to be its counterpart within the Sanctuary, Ezio wondered what those long-dead Assassins would have thought of his own actions. Would they have approved, that he was seeking to retrieve something that had been said to have been made by one of the best of their number, or else would they have seen his actions as merely another defilement, compounding that made by the Templars themselves.
Those thoughts pursued him, even as Ezio found his way back up into the streets of Firenze, and from there to what seemed to be an impromptu meeting with La Volpe.
“I know where Francesco will be, and when,” he told the man, as the pair of them settled down upon a bench together, like a couple of old friends watching the stars come out. “But…”
“What is it?” La Volpe prompted, when Ezio found himself unable to go on.
“I overheard something,” he continued, having gathered himself enough to continue, even in the face of his growing apprehension for the fate of the city he had once called home. “They have weapons, enough for a battalion. Even the Pope has given support!”
“Typical of Sixtus,” La Volpe said, sounding distinctly unimpressed. “But, what the hell are they planning?”
“I couldn’t understand all of the specifics,” he said, knowing only that the men present had been collecting and speaking of weapons, and yes there had been a moment when he was certain that it was murder that the Templars had on their minds, but he did not know if it was merely his own bad blood with the Pazzi that made him see things that weren’t there; Ezio did not want to allow his hatred of the Pazzi and their allies to force him to conclusions he would not have otherwise reached. “But, it involves the Medici, and I have heard talk of a young man – much like my little sister, who you’ve met – that they intend to capture. Whatever else they intend, it all begins tomorrow, at the Duomo.”
“The Medici will all be there for Sunday service, along with the rest of Firenze,” La Volpe said, his tone becoming all the more thoughtful, his eyes even beginning to narrow under the deep hood he wore. “They’re going to do it right in the middle of High Mass!”
Ezio also found himself shocked, not having thought that even the Templars would have been willing to commit such sacrilege as to launch what had to be an attack during such a holy time, but he quickly forced himself to regain his composure. “It’s also a chance for me to get close,” he said, knowing that such would be true. “To blend with the crowd, and stop that madness before it has a chance to start.”
“If they succeed, if we lose Lorenzo and Firenze falls to the Pazzi…”
“It will not come to that,” he said, cutting into La Volpe’s pessimism. “I promise.”
“I hope you’re right, Brother,” La Volpe said, a hand on his right shoulder.
Ezio sighed, drawing himself up. “While I am gone, would you look after little Maria for me?”
“You honestly thing she’s not going to insist on going with you?” La Volpe asked, a good-natured grin creeping back onto his face. “Our little Sister’s skill is growing by leaps and bounds.”
He sighed, knowing that little Maria would argue exactly the same thing, if she had been present with the pair of them. “I suppose you’re right,” he said, folding his arms. “All of the women in my family seem to be determined to fight, in their own way.”
“It’s something that all Assassins have in common,” La Volpe said, slapping a companionable hand on his right shoulder, and then giving him a soft shake. “If there is any way that we might be able to stand up against an injustice that we see in the world, there’s little anyone can do to stop us.”
“Sí, I’m beginning to understand that,” he said, feeling some of his good-humor restored as he stood back up.
Chapter 166: Seals and signs
Chapter Text
Making his way around the city, practicing with his second-sight – what he’d heard some of the other Assassins in residence around here and in Monteriggioni calling Eagle Vision – Ezio soon found his attention caught by the bright gold that marked a person, or a place as in his current situation, out as being something of interest. As it turned out, there was another one of those hidden spring-catches, marking out an entrance to the catacombs that he’d been through once before.
However, finding such a thing sticking out of the very wall of the Duomo itself… Ezio wasn’t sure what to make of that.
As it turned out, the passage that he’d currently stepped through was less of an entrance to subterranean catacombs, and more of a mad scramble up through the structure of the Duomo itself. In that, at least, Ezio found himself reminded of his earlier journey. Whoever these long-dead Assassins had been, Ezio found himself reflecting as he scaled to higher and more dizzying heights within the Duomo, he could not deny that they had been both madly athletic and ingeniously inventive.
Panting deeply as he stood within the high, bright room where the Assassins had laid one of their own to rest, Ezio moved over to the stone coffin – what kind of stone, he couldn’t tell – and triggered the spring-lock set into the right side. Once he was able to access the interior of the coffin, Ezio removed the artifact that he’d come into this place to retrieve, bowed respectfully to the statue and the history the Assassin it depicted had likely borne witness to, and then made his way to another one of those hidden spring-locks that had brought him into this place to begin with.
The journey he made back to the surface, back to the open air and the streets of Firenze, was a great deal easier than getting inside had been; still, such a thing seemed to hold true for at least the two catacombs that he had visited. He would have wondered what kept someone from attempting to back-trace the exit-rout that an enterprising Assassin had taken, if his own experience with moving in the gaps of attention that most of those outside the Brotherhood left for one with an Assassin’s training to slip through had not given him all of the answers to such a question without him even needing to ask to begin with.
Breathing more easily, once he left the stifling confines of the tunnels behind him, Ezio climbed back up onto the rooftops so that he would more easily be able to traverse the length and breadth of the city without being spotted by an enterprising guard patrol.
Once he had made it back into the quarter where he’d met up with La Volpe that last time, Ezio spotted the man himself, making what looked to be a round of the city. Quickly leaping down into a nearby haystack, Ezio made sure that there were no others nearby enough to spot them – a simple thing, since there were few enough people around this place in the daylight – and then went to meet up with the man who had already helped him and little Maria so much. Perhaps, considering all he seemed to know about the city, he’d be able to help them once more.
“Finished with your other business, amico?”
“Sí,” he answered easily, nodding as the man’s violet eyes – though they looked merely black, with the late hour and the shadows of his hood – fell upon him. “Still, I wonder if you could help me again,” he paused for a moment, waiting for La Volpe to nod before continuing on. “My uncle said that little Maria and I were to meet up with a man named Gilberto, who he’d arranged for us to stay with while we were here in Firenze.”
“Well, you certainly came to the right place,” La Volpe said, a grin filled with good-natured amusement beginning to spread across his face.
Ezio was just about to open his mouth, just about to ask what in the world La Volpe could mean by that, when he realized just what it was that the man had to have been getting at. Laughing softly at himself, Ezio felt a grin pulling at his own lips. “You… You’re Gilberto, aren’t you.”
“Sí, amico, that is my name,” the man who they would be staying with for the duration of their time in Firenze said, the grin on his face stretching all the wider.
Ezio shook his head; he felt more than a little foolish for not thinking about just who the man under the hood might have been, but glad, also, that he’d come to know the character of the man that he and little Maria were going to be staying with. Following Gilberto back to the quarter of the city he and his had claimed as their own, Ezio allowed himself to relax. At the very least, he knew what the Templars were currently planning.
Now, all that remained was to stop it.
Chapter 167: Attack on the Medici
Chapter Text
Waking just before dawn the next morning, she met up with Ezio and the pair of them made their way back out into the streets of Firenze. Ezio had told her about just what it was that Jacopo de’ Pazzi and his Templar allies planned to do to the Medici on this very morning, and the both of them had made up their minds to prevent the murders in any way that they possibly could. They couldn’t allow the Pazzi to gain control over Firenze, that much was certain.
Still, knowing that she was going to be heading into her first real battle – not simply raining throwing daggers down on the heads of anyone she could reach from a rooftop perch – beside the last of her brothers was a daunting prospect, all the same.
Now, however, having just descended from the roof of a building close enough to the Duomo that they could keep watch over the people that had begun to trickle in as the sun climbed steadily higher into the sky, Maria hoped that the training she and Ezio had done before this day would be enough to carry them through the battle to come. Pausing to observe for a long moment, Maria steadied herself as she searched for a familiar form amidst the gathering crowds.
This wasn’t something that the pair of them could do on their own, after all.
Gilberto, who’d asked that she and Ezio continue to call him La Volpe when they were outside of the walls of the small, cozy house they were all staying in while they worked to counter the scheme that the Pazzi and their Templar allies had engineered to give them power over Firenze and all the people who lived within her. Even aside from the fact that the Medici had been allies of the Auditore family for as long as she or Ezio could remember, there were also all of the other people in Firenze herself who would suffer under the dominion of those Pazzi bastardi. Maria also kept them in mind, since both Gilberto and Uncle Mario had said that the Assassins fought for the people.
More than that, they fought to give a voice to those people who – whether by circumstance or by design – could not speak for themselves.
And so, the sight of Francesco de’ Pazzi, standing just at the edges of the crowd – clearly thinking himself clever, with his stolen robes and whatever weapons he’d smuggled with him – gave Maria something of a thrill. Here, now, would be her first chance to honestly contribute to the struggle that all of their family, for however many generations the Auditore had existed, had been a part of. It was thrilling and terrifying at once, truly.
When Ezio signaled her to move, clearly having spotted Francesco himself, Maria pulled out her small dagger – a gift from Gilberto, so that she would not be without her own means of attack or defense in the coming battle – and raced alongside her brother into the fray.
The battle itself devolved into a mad scramble almost as soon as Francesco and his lackey, a man she’d been told was named Bernardo Baroncelli, rushed into the crowd, brandishing their long daggers at Lorenzo and his brother. The screams all around her, from panicking people who were so unlike the guards that she’d gotten brief glimpses of when Uncle Mario had brought her to ride alongside him during their attack on San Gimignano not so very long ago, rattled her concentration a bit, but Maria pushed through.
There was little chance that Francesco or his lackey had been so badly affected as she, after all.
She lost sight of Ezio in the confusion, and out of the corner of her right eye Maria spotted the brutish form of Francesco de’ Pazzi. However, before she could take note of more than the fact that he stood entirely too close to Giuliano de’ Medici for her peace of mind, Maria found herself shoved shoulder-to-shoulder with someone rather taller and broader than her, the pair of them facing another, quite larger pair of men, seemingly armed with nets.
“Well, brother, it looks as though we’re going to be getting double the reward for this capture,” the man on the right said, a twisted grin on his face.
“Indeed, brother,” the other man said, grinning in that same, sickening way.
She turned to meet the eyes of the man standing beside her, and found herself staring at eyes of the same shade that greeted her when she chanced to look into either still water or a mirror; it reminded her, once again, that there were indeed others who shared her circumstances. Others who would be in the same kind of danger from the Templars, the Pazzi, and anyone else who might have wanted the kind of abilities they possessed. Or else anyone who held a Piece of Eden and wished to lay their hands on even more of them.
She’d been told that she and those like her were able to sense the presence of the other Pieces by some means or other, but Gilberto hadn’t been able to explain more than that, and she’d been too tired to ask the others like her about what he might have meant by that.
Still, here and now, these men with ropes and nets were her enemy, and so Maria would stand against them, and beside the other man who they clearly had an interest in as well. The men, however, had of course been armed with more than simply ropes and nets, and as her dagger and the sword that the man standing firm beside her clashed with the swords of the two men facing them, Maria tried not to allow herself to become confused by the sounds of battle swirling all around them. Still, she also tried to keep at least one ear and eye out for the last of her brothers, even as she joined her strength and skill to that of the man fighting beside her.
That was the only way that she and the other man were going to be able to fight against these two men accosting them, whoever they turned out to be.
~AC: II~
When the shouts and screaming had started, Lorenzo di’ Medici had not known just who it was that was both brazen and depraved enough to defile the sanctity of such a holy place with bloodshed, but seeing Francesco de’ Pazzi bearing down on him and Giuliano with a barred dagger… No, Lorenzo could hardly say he was surprised at seeing the face of such a man. Still, when another man – one who wore the same hooded cloak that he’d seen Giovanni in, when the pair of them had had occasion to work together – leaped into the fray, a sword out to block the Pazzi’s dagger, Lorenzo allowed himself the luxury of a look around.
Luciano – originally calling himself Luccio; one of the oldest of the children to escape from the Templars that dark night so many years ago – was fighting against the Orsi brothers, faithless dogs who would work for anyone who paid them enough, and there seemed to be another Treasure Guardian fighting alongside him; from the look of them, dressed as they were in the same kind of hooded cloak that his own rescuer was wearing, it seemed that they had a connection to Giovanni’s successor, as well.
It was not a thing that Lorenzo had been expecting, but he was grateful for it, all the same.
“You saved my life,” he said, once the last of the Pazzi’s cowardly dogs had been killed, or else fled, as was the case with the Orsi.
“It’s nothing,” the young man, who could only have been Giovanni’s last remaining son, Ezio – and that meant that he also knew the name of the younger of the pair; the Treasure Guardian who had been so quick to fight alongside Luciano – said, with understandable, controlled fury in his voice. “But, the man who did this to you has to pay!”
Chapter 168: Bambini di Eden
Chapter Text
“Not now,” he begged off, forcing himself away from the wall he’d been leaning against while he regained what strength he could. “Luciano!” he called, seeing the familiar form of the young man – no longer the shy, cowering boy that the Templars had shaped him into – rushing over to him, Giuliano’s gravely injured form held between him and what Lorenzo could now see was indeed the young girl that Giovanni had taken into his home.
“He’s not doing well, fratello,” Luciano said, looking worriedly at the bloodied form of Giuliano held between him and the youngest of Giovanni’s two daughters.
“I know,” he said, turning back to the young Auditore who had given him aid in this most desperate of times. “We need to get back to my home; I have friends there who can help,” he said, glancing back over his left shoulder at Ezio. “Please, help me get there, Messer.”
“Sí, Altezza,” Ezio said, helping Lorenzo to lean against his right side, as the pair of them quickly set off in the direction of the church.
Trying to steady his breathing, as the five of them hurried to the church where he could take shelter while he was tended to, Lorenzo forced himself to keep moving. There, Giuliano could receive the life-saving care he would need, and Ezio and his young sister could rest from their labors. There, the five of them could rest and recover from the ordeals of this terrible day.
Their group had some close calls on their way back to their palazzo, but the most trying of their circumstances turned out to be the man he himself had set to guard the entrance to his family’s ancestral home.
“Angelo, open the fucking door!” he commanded, after Ezio’s initial call had been all but dismissed in spite of the clear urgency of the situation.
“By the Thrice Greatest!” the guard exclaimed, throwing open the door and allowing him, Ezio, and Luciano and little Maria, with Giuliano between them, into the palazzo courtyard. “Come in, quickly! The city is at war! Hurry!”
“Stay,” he called, when it seemed that Ezio would pull his young sister aside, so that the pair of them might leave more quickly. “You’re Giovanni’s boy, aren’t you?” he asked, though it wasn’t much of a question; he’d been suspecting as much since he caught a glimpse of the face under Ezio’s hood.
“I am, Altezza,” the young man – too young, to bear the burdens he so clearly did – said, nodding in a stoic sort of way.
“And, I suppose that would make this young lady your youngest sister, Maria,” he smiled gently in the direction of the Treasure Guardian, as she stood beside his own adopted Guardian.
“Sí, named after our mother,” Ezio said, his own gaze lingering on little Maria and Luciano as they handed Giuliano off to the nurses to be tended to.
“Your father was a good man, and one of my greatest friends and allies,” he assured the young Auditore. “Giovanni knew well of honor, courage, and the duty to Firenze that all of her protectors share,” he sighed, feeling again the weight of the loss the pair of them had been bound by. “I wish that my spies had been able to find out about the conspiracy against your family before things came to such a bloody conclusion,” he turned a gentle smile upon the young man who had suffered so much, and yet still fought on. “I was there when Alberti died. Your work?”
“It was,” Ezio said.
“You took a swift and fitting revenge,” he assured the young Auditore, even as the hushed tones of the nurses became more urgent-sounding. “Something I, sad to say, clearly have not. Stay here and rest, for as long as you need to,” he continued, and was about to offer the siblings what hospitality he could, when one of the nurses who had been tending to his brother came over to him.
Chapter 169: Giuliano de’ Medici
Chapter Text
Given the downward cast of the kindly woman’s face, Lorenzo suspected that he already knew what kind of news she meant to give him.
“I’m sorry, Altezza,” she said, the tone of her voice serving only to confirm his suspicions rather than allay them. “We were only able to ease your brother’s pain; he was wounded too gravely during the battle.”
“Dio abbi pietà,” he muttered, shaking his head.
“He’s some life left in him yet,” the gentle woman said, looking as though she were trying to smile, even through the tears gathering in her eyes. “And he wants to see you, one last time.”
“Of course,” he said, allowing himself to be lead into the room where the dying form of his younger brother was laid out.
~AC: II~
When Lorenzo and the Treasure Guardian that he had adopted left to make their last goodbyes to Giuliano, Ezio made his way over to little Maria.
“How are you managing, sorellina?” he asked, wrapping an arm around little Maria’s thin shoulders.
“That was my first taste of real battle,” little Maria said, shrugging a bit helplessly. “I guess… I was expecting that I might feel… I don’t know, different afterward.”
“I thought that, once,” he said, smiling gently as he settled down beside his littlest sister. “Other than that, how are you?”
“As good as anyone could expect, I suppose,” little Maria said, leaning gently against him as the pair of them rested from their labors.
Reaching up to gently stroke little Maria’s soft, silver hair, Ezio looked up to see the same man – Angelo, he recalled – hurrying back into the room with them.
Chapter 170: Burdens halved
Chapter Text
“The Pazzi supporters have rallied, and they are storming the Palazzo Vecchio!” Angelo exclaimed, stopping before the pair of them. “Francesco is at the head of them,” the man continued. “Lorenzo wants me to convey his regrets, but he cannot spare more than one detachment of his soldiers to accompany you.”
“Va bene,” he said, rising from his seat. “Where is your armory?”
“I’ll take you there, Messer,” Angelo said, hurrying to take the pair of them to the armory.
Once he, little Maria, and the detachment of Medici guardsmen that could be spared had all armed themselves for the next battle that was soon to be upon them, Ezio took his littlest sister back out into Firenze once again. The cacophony of clanging bells and shouting men-at-arms slammed into him, battering at Ezio’s ears in a distinctly unpleasant fashion. Grinding his teeth briefly at the pain in his ears, Ezio forced himself to climb up the side of a nearby building.
Once he’d managed to make it far enough away from the men fighting in the streets, into the clear air that he’d found invigorating ever since he’d made his first foray up to the dizzying heights that his training as an Assassin – though he’d not known it for what it truly was at the time – had allowed him to ascend to, Ezio found that he felt much better. Looking around, once he had managed to truly gain his footing upon the roof of the building, Ezio saw that the city did indeed seem to be at war.
Chapter 171: Francesco de’ Pazzi
Chapter Text
He also saw that Francesco de’ Pazzi’s most ardent supporters were fighting in the courtyard, but before he could start to wonder too much about just where that Templar bastardo had gotten himself off to, Francesco appeared from behind the low wall bordering the roofline of the palazzo he’d thought to cower in until all the fighting had passed him by. Smiling grimly as he heard Francesco calling out to his guards, Ezio leaped the last remaining gap that stood between the roof he’d climbed to, and that of the Palazzo Vecchio before him.
Scaling the wall of the tower that Francesco was attempting to shelter himself within, Ezio soon found himself face-to-face with Vieri’s bastardo of a father; both men seemed, at the end, equally pitiful. Still, Ezio resolved to remember the lessons that Uncle Mario had taught him.
“Oh, the boy thinks himself a master swordsman!” Francesco mocked; Ezio narrowed his eyes at the bluster, but gave no other indication that he’d heard anything at all. “So, you’ve drawn some blood! My men will make short work of you, and then we’ll see to that little dove of ours!”
Swallowing a snarl at the Templar’s phrasing – his little Maria was no docile thing, and anyone who said different would face every blade that Ezio could lay his hands to – he drew his blade, even as Francisco screamed and babbled more meaningless words at him. The Templar had already said the only words that Ezio was going to give him.
“No one’s coming,” he said, narrowing his eyes just that much farther in his fury. “It’s just us, now.”
“Damn it!” Francesco snarled, whipping his sword around in a clear, desperate effort to ward Ezio off. “Damn you to hell! Get away from me!”
Leaping from the rooftop, the mad desperation of a man at the end of his life driving him on in spite of the clear fact that Ezio could see he had landed badly, Francesco ran. Following the Templar back down to the polished, fitted stone of the courtyard below, Ezio tailed the man until Francesco, fear having drained what little strength the Templar could have laid claim to, tripped and stumbled to the ground.
“Now Firenze will judge you for what you’ve done,” he growled, drawing his hidden blade back from where he’d driven it into Francesco’s body.
“It’s over,” the Templar muttered, light already beginning to fade from his eyes. “It’s all over.”
“Better to be content in this life, than aspire to it in the next,” he said, as gently as he could manage, under the circumstances. “Requiescat in pace.”
Rising slightly from his crouch, Ezio heard the far-off sounds of battle beginning to draw closer, and over that the shouting of Jacopo de’ Pazzi. He was clearly trying to rally a crowd against the Medici forces that still clashed with them in the palazzo courtyard, and just as clearly would need to be made to stop.
“I think I know a last service you might do, Pazzi,” he said, beginning his work.
Chapter 172: Glad tidings
Chapter Text
Maria could feel her arms aching in earnest, as she raised her sword and braced herself for the next wave of Pazzi bastardi that were forming up to attack her even as she watched. However, the sound of shouts and laughter from the Medici guardsmen all around her drew Maria’s attention to where they were all beginning to point. Not even bothering to smother her laughter at the sight of Francesco de’ Pazzi’s pathetic, dangling corpse, Maria quickly joined the rest of the Medici supporters in throwing rocks, twigs, and anything else they could scoop from the ground at the fleeing Pazzi dogs.
“Vittoria! Vittoria! Insieme per la vittoria!”
The crowd around her cheered, whooping and hollering, even as Maria herself turned her eyes back to the rooftops to see if she could spot Ezio as he climbed down from the rooftops.
When she did finally manage to spot her brother, reaching up to wave to him as he leaped lightly into a nearby pile of leaves, Maria was quick to hurry over to the cart as her brother climbed out of it.
“You did it!” she called, happily rushing into her last brother’s embrace as he reached out for her in return.
“I did it,” Ezio said, smiling down at her. “And, I think I hear the people cheering your name, as well, sorellina.”
She laughed softly. “Well, I suppose this celebration is for both of us, then, fratello.”
The pair of them embraced again, and Maria smiled all the wider as Ezio kissed the top of her head; true, there was still a great number of things that the pair of them had yet to do, but for the moment they could afford to rest from this latest battle.
~AC: II~
It was three days later, when the celebration and merry-making in the streets had calmed down enough that they wouldn’t run too much of a risk of interrupting Leonardo if he was hard at work on some project of his, when he and little Maria were able to make their way to his workshop so that Ezio could obtain the second hidden-blade that the inventor had been crafting for him. However, when he and little Maria arrived at Leonardo’s workshop, Ezio found that his second hidden-blade had not been the only thing Leonardo had been working on.
Though, seeing little Maria with a hidden-blade of her own was about the strangest thing that Ezio had yet found himself having to face; still, he’d face it with as much aplomb as he could manage. Little Maria, having become rather charmed at Leonardo’s mad scheme of joining the birds in the air, had stayed behind to speak with the inventor on her own. Departing from Leonardo’s workshop, after thanking the inventor for all the help he’d given them over the course of the two years and some months that they’d worked with him, Ezio made his way back through the streets of Firenze, only to find himself coming face-to-face with a man he’d no expectation of meeting again.
“Angelo?”
“Il Magnifico asks that you meet him at the bank of the river Arno, Messer Auditore,” the Medici guardsman said, a gentle smile lighting his features.
“Grazie for letting me know, ser Angelo,” he said, returning the smile that he’d been offered; with interest, as any good banker would do.
Making his way to the indicated place, Ezio quickly found himself facing the upright, regal, though somewhat less than immaculate form of Lorenzo de’ Medici. The man all of Firenze – those parts of her that mattered, anyway – had once more taken to calling Il Magnifico was standing at the railing of a balcony overlooking the Arno, and seemed to have a wistful sort of air about him as he looked off into the rushing waters far below. Ezio was just starting to consider the merits of announcing himself, when the man who had been such close friends with his late, lamented father turned around on his own.
Stepping over to Lorenzo’s side, after a welcoming gesture from the Duke himself, Ezio took a moment to contemplate the rushing waters, as well.
Chapter 173: Family bonds
Chapter Text
“When I was six years old, I fell into the Arno,” Lorenzo said, a small, wistful smile settling on his face. “I soon found myself drifting down and down, into darkness, certain my life was at an end. Instead, I woke to the sound of my mother weeping. At her side stood a stranger, soaking wet and yet smiling at me. My mother explained that he had saved me,” Lorenzo continued, smiling slightly wider, eyes softening with what was clearly fond nostalgia. “And, so began a long and prosperous relationship between our two families,” Lorenzo shook his head, smile fading as he rested his right hand on Ezio’s left shoulder. “I am truly sorry that I could not save your father and brothers.”
Ezio sighed. “You have nothing to apologize for,” he said, both because it was true, and because he wished to reassure Lorenzo that he’d no ill will against him for anything that had happened. “I believe Jacopo de’ Pazzi had a hand in their deaths. The attack on you, as well. I need to find him,” he continued, turning an expression of resolve on the man who was yet another living link to his father’s memory.
“That coward fled before we could arrest him!” Lorenzo snapped, annoyance and disgust darkening his expression.
“Have you any leads?” he asked, not wishing to believe that one of the Templars could have escaped him so easily.
“No,” Lorenzo said, regret chasing away the lingering traces of his frustrated fury. “They’ve hidden themselves well.”
“’They?’” he echoed, wondering just how much concerning the secret war of Assassins and Templars Il Magnifico was truly aware of.
“Jacopo was not the only conspirator to escape,” Lorenzo said, shoulders slumping ever so slightly.
“If they worked with Jacopo, then they were surely involved in the plot against my family, as well,” he said, still unsure just how much it was that Lorenzo knew about the secret war that now consumed so much of his time and attention. “Give me their names,” he continued, trying to sound like he was making a request, rather than simply demanding outright.
“Antonio Maffei, Archbishop Francesco Salviati, Stefano de Bagnone, and Bernardo Baroncelli,” Il Magnifico said, drawing himself back up with a serene, dignified sort of grace.
“Bene,” he said, offering a gentle smile to the man whose friendship he had just reaffirmed. “I will go and see my uncle in Monteriggioni. He has a list of names these should be added to, and men stationed in the countryside.”
“Wait, before you go,” Lorenzo called, drawing Ezio’s attention before he could have turned and left.
“A Codex page!” he exclaimed, recognizing the scroll that Il Magnifico handed over to him; he’d certainly seen enough of them, after taking over the search from Uncle Mario.
“I took it from the files of Francesco de’ Pazzi, seeing as he clearly no longer needs it,” Lorenzo said, a black-humored grin stretching his face. “I’ve always had something of an interest in things of antiquity. As did your father,” Lorenzo continued, smile softening as he spoke of the man they had both lost.
“It is meaningful to me, as well,” he assured the man, smiling as Lorenzo clapped him on both shoulders and the pair of them embraced.
“Then consider it a gift!” Lorenzo exclaimed, cheer returning to his face. “God save us all!” he and Lorenzo looked heavenward for a long moment, before Lorenzo smiled gently once more. “Your family’s home is safe, at the very least,” Il Magnifico said, smiling calmly. “I put your old housekeeper, Annetta, in charge of some of my own people, and I will continue to have my guards ensure that no one who is not allowed in by my seal will be able to enter the premises.”
“Grazie,” he said, sharing a formal kiss with the duke, before the pair of them parted ways.
Vanishing into the crowds was slightly more difficult, since his name and deeds were still being occasionally spoken of by the crowds – to say nothing of the embellishments those troublesome, wandering minstrels were making to the tale – but Ezio was soon able to find a space clear of milling people, and quickly made his way back up onto the rooftops. This had swiftly become one of the ways he most enjoyed to travel, not merely for the more practical concerns of stealth and speed that the method provided for him, but also because he liked the feel of the wind in his face, and the sheer thrill that scaling a wall or a tower never failed to lighten his spirits.
He couldn’t have explained it to someone who got it in their head to ask, but Ezio had a feeling that little Maria would have understood him without a word.
Once he’d made it back to Leonardo’s workshop, Ezio found his heart feeling all the lighter when he saw little Maria both bent over a drafting-table, a small spread of sketches between the pair of them.
“I hope I’m not interrupting anything too important,” he said, when there came what seemed to be a lull in the conversation they were having.
Leonardo laughed, soft and delighted-sounding. “Not at all,” the inventor said, the smile on his face widening as he stood up and the pair of them embraced. “She was simply curious about my flying machine, so I was showing her my design sketches.”
“It was very interesting, grazie,” little Maria said, standing so that she, too, could share an embrace and a formal kiss with the inventor that the pair of them had steadily become friends with.
“I found something you might be interested in,” he said, once little Maria had made her way over to his side.
“Another Codex page,” Leonardo said, smiling brightly as Ezio handed over the scroll that Lorenzo had been kind enough to give to him. “Oh, and this one seems to have another blueprint on it.”
“I’ll come back tonight?” he prompted.
“Sí,” the inventor said, smiling brightly. “I should have it translated by then,” he grinned wryly. “Though you’ll have to wait a bit longer for me to build whatever new kind of blade this is.”
“Grazie, amico mio,” he said, as the inventor paused to give him a last, one-armed embrace, before hurrying off to see about the translation of the latest of the Codex pages he had been given.
Wrapping his right arm around little Maria’s narrow shoulders as the pair of them made their way out of Leonardo’s workshop at last, Ezio smiled as she hugged him around the waist. Leaning down to plant a kiss on his littlest sister’s right cheek, Ezio continued on his way to a quieter part of Firenze’s Artists Quarter, where the pair of them were able to scale the wall of a nearby building without being seen.
Taking a moment to breathe the open air of the city that lay under his feet, Ezio turned and determinedly made for the Mercato Vecchio once again; if nothing else, Gilberto would wish to know how he and little Maria were faring.
Chapter 174: Friendship of the Medici
Chapter Text
It was always a bit strange, Maria couldn’t help but think, seeing so many people who had the same hair and eye coloring that she herself possessed when she and Ezio would return to the Mercato Vecchio to speak with Gilberto about what she and Ezio had done to drive the Templars back from their attempted conquests. Or else, what they had discovered regarding the movements of the Order. Still, she was starting to become at least somewhat accustomed to their presence around her.
If nothing else, it was a reminder that, for all that her appearance had set her alone and apart for so long, there were in fact others who would be able to understand her circumstances because they shared much of them.
She worked to hone her skills with the other Treasure Guardians, while Ezio spoke with Gilberto about what they’d found out, as well as their plans for returning to Monteriggioni so that they could tell Uncle Mario not only about their success in Firenze, but also of the other Templars who’d clearly pledged their aid to the men that had murdered her and Ezio’s father and brothers.
“Ser Angelo paid us a visit,” Ezio said, once the pair of them had met up at their cozy, reasonably appointed house once again.
“On his own?” she asked, wondering for a moment just what the guardsman would want with the pair of them.
“He said that Il Magnifico sent him, with an invitation for the pair of us,” her last brother said, sounding like he was about as surprised as Maria now found herself.
After they’d made their explanations and said their farewells to Gilberto, and after she’d been quite thoroughly hugged by the kindly Treasure Guardians who had welcomed her into their circle almost as soon as they’d all laid eyes on her, she and Ezio made their way back out of the Mercato Vecchio. Following her last brother’s lead, even as Ezio himself followed the directions that had been given to him by Angelo. Once the three of them had made their way back to the palazzo Medici, Maria found, to her and Ezio’s delight, that they had been invited for dinner and a night’s stay.
Also, considering Ezio’s previously-stated desire to return to Monteriggioni, Lorenzo was also kind enough to offer them the use of one of his carriages. Maria had to confess that she’d almost been expecting such a thing to happen. What did come as something of a surprise was Luciano’s request to travel with them, as well as her fellow Treasure Guardian’s clear interest in and seeming connection to not only Uncle Mario, but to Father, as well.
Neither of them quite know just what that connection might be, though Maria has her suspicions, and she and Ezio make a promise that they’ll speak to Luciano and Uncle Mario both when they reach Monteriggioni again.
And, soon enough, they were out on the road and making good time back to Monteriggioni, with the promise of finding out just what it was that Luciano de’ Medici wished to speak to Uncle Mario about hurrying them on. Once their carriage had come within sight of the walled city itself, Maria allowed herself to relax, knowing that she and Ezio were just that much closer to finding out just what it was that Luciano wished to speak to speak to Uncle Mario about.
When the three of them climbed down from the carriage, taking their first steps onto the wooden floor of Uncle Mario’s well-appointed carriage house, Maria quickly fell into step with her brother, and the pair of them accompanied Luciano up to the main estate, and then into Uncle Mario’s study.
“It’s good to see you again, nipoti,” their uncle said, when the three of them had made their way into his study for the first time in weeks.
“It’s good to see you again, too, Uncle,” Ezio said, and Maria quickly echoed the sentiment, though by then she was almost unbearably curious about just what it was that had drawn Luciano de’ Medici to their home, one of her fellow Treasure Guardians or not.
“Now, I’m certain you’re both wondering why I came here,” the man himself said, pale yellow eyes bright with amusement to match the gentle smile spreading across his face.
“Sí, though I’m starting to suspect that your circumstances weren’t any happier than my littlest sister’s, to start out with,” Ezio said.
Luciano laughed, soft and reflective-sounding. “Well, you’d be right about that, Messer Ezio,” her fellow Treasure Guardian paused, seeming to gather himself for the story he was about to tell.
~AC: II~
Listening as Luciano told the story of how he, Lorenzo, and Giovanni had all met for the first time, Mario found himself smiling slightly as he considered the changes that the young man had undergone in the years that stood between the boy Luccio who’d possessed no last name, and Luciano de’ Medici. Gone was the child who’d tensed up at the sight of every new face that inevitably came into Lorenzo’s life, who’d gone limp as a doll whenever someone so much as stood over him, who had been incapable of reading even a single sentence, and who’d had no concept of the world outside the walls of the warehouse that he and his fellow Treasure Guardians who had been unfortunate enough to fall into the hands of the Templars had been kept.
Knowing what Luciano had been through so early in his life only made the sight of the young man he had grown into all the more satisfying; truly, this was what he and his fellow Assassins fought for: the right of every man, woman, and child to make their own choices.
And yes, the fact remained that safeguarding the peoples’ free will also sometimes meant that they were called upon to kill those who had become corrupted – either by the desire for power or the willful misuse of such – but, again, that was the price they paid for the work they did. The Templars, on the other hand, would willingly trade the lives and minds of everyone but themselves and their inner-circle for their own twisted idea of security. Seeing no end but their own desire for power over all things, whatever noble ideals the Templar Order had once possessed had long since become corrupted.
Still, if the Templars had not been so damnably determined to force their poisonous ideals onto the world at large, than Mario would not have had such an aversion to the Order as a whole; though he would still pursue the deaths of those who had killed his brother and two of his three nephews, of course.
Chapter 175: Return to Monteriggioni
Chapter Text
Making his way over to what he’d come to call the Codex Wall, Mario considered once more just what it was that Ezio – and Giovanni before him, considering that the pair of them had possessed that same rare ability of second-sight – had seen when he looked at the slowly-growing collection of pages that he, Giovanni, and now Ezio himself had steadily worked to assemble. Truly, if there were indeed something else written on these pages, only someone with the sight that Ezio had inherited from Altaïr would be able to see it.
Crossing his arms as he gave the Codex Wall a last look, Mario turned and made his way back out of his study; he’d arranged for the four of them to have dinner together, and in order to present himself as a proper host, he’d need to take the same opportunity he’d offered them. He’d need to bathe and change his clothes, dusty as they’d gotten from all his day’s labors, so that he would be able to have dinner with his family, as well as the boy that Giovanni had rescued, all those years ago.
~AC: II~
When the four of them had all gathered together at the table, washed and dried and with a hearty meal set out in front of them, Ezio still found his thoughts drifting toward Luciano again. Apparently, it had been Luciano – then calling himself Luccio, which seemed to have been a name he’d heard somewhere and decided to use for himself – who had been the one to ultimately lead Father and Uncle Mario to the warehouse where little Maria had been kept for the first few years of her life. In light of that, Ezio found himself much more kindly disposed towards the younger man.
Even without Luciano’s connection to the Medici family, Ezio would have found himself indebted to the man; however, he couldn’t deny that it was something of a relief, knowing that the debt he owed to Luciano de’ Medici would not, in fact, conflict with any of his other obligations.
Once dinner was finished, and the four of them were splitting up to head their separate ways, Ezio turned as Uncle Mario called to him.
“Sí, Uncle?” he called back, turning to make his way over as his uncle beckoned him to follow him. “What did you want to tell me?”
“We received the news from Firenze,” Uncle Mario said, smiling gently in a way that was proud and concerned at once; something Ezio had been seeing more and more often on his uncle’s face as their shared battle against the Templars wore on. “I’m glad to see that the pair of you gave such a good account of yourselves against Francesco and his supporters, but we all know that even the loss of another of their own will not be enough to drive the Templars back.”
“Sí, that is why I intend to go after Jacopo de’ Pazzi as soon as I can,” he said, knowing just as well as his uncle did that the Pazzi – while a clear and present danger in and of themselves – were just one of the many claws that the Templars had dug into the cities of Italia.
Fighting them, it sometimes seemed, was almost like what he imagined Heracles must have gone through, when the ancient Greek hero had found himself set against the Hydra; Ezio could only hope that his own struggle would not be so involved as that of the myth he’d been read those many times as a child.
“My spies reported that the man fled south, after his escape from Firenze,” Uncle Mario said, his expression becoming more grave with every word. “There is also another matter: Roberto and Orazio were forced from San Gimignano, and the city has once more become a stronghold for the Templars. I’m reasonably certain, in light of that, that Jacopo will seek shelter within the walls of that city,” his uncle sighed, shoulders slumping slightly under some invisible weight. “I hadn’t wanted to talk to you about this so soon, but after all that happened, I thought you might be more prepared for such a thing than I’d thought.”
Uncle Mario’s tone was still weary, and Ezio suspected that he knew why; more than anyone, at this moment, Ezio knew why his uncle wished for him to have at least some respite from the battle that he’d been so unceremoniously pushed into the thick of. He, after all, wished the same for little Maria.
“I have more names for your list, Uncle,” he said, knowing that there was little enough that he could actually do to assuage the man’s fears; truly, this was a battle that had chosen him, far more than he’d chosen it, in the end.
“Bene,” Uncle Mario said, taking the list as Ezio handed it over to him. “I expect that some of these men might well have even fewer resources to call upon than Jacopo, and so will be simpler to deal with. I will send out spies at dawn, see what information I might be able to gather. In the mean time, we must prepare to retake San Gimignano.”
“You and yours can prepare, but I have to send a message to Leonardo,” he said, having recalled what he’d asked of the inventor, and the plans that the pair of them had made while he’d been standing within the crowded mess that was Leonardo’s workshop. “He has another of the Codex pages, and I suspect that he’s already managed to translate it. He’ll be expecting me to return for it, and I don’t want to leave him wondering for any longer than I have to.”
“I’ll send your message with one of my curriers,” Uncle Mario said, a proud, pleased smile spreading across his face. “However, I would also like to ask a favor of you.”
“What favor would that be, uncle?”
“Stay here for the week, before you continue on,” Uncle Mario said, the smile on his face gentling even as it grew slightly wider. “Even if you do intend to attempt to infiltrate the city, since one man alone may very well pass through barriers that an army cannot, and we should be aiming to strike at the Templars when and where they feel most secure.”
“A week?” he echoed, not quite seeing the logic in his uncle’s request, but willing to be persuaded if the man did indeed have a convincing argument.
“There’s still a lot you need to learn, nipote,” the man said, smiling gently, though a tinge of sadness had overtaken his uncle’s expression, as well. “While I do understand your sadness at being forced to cut ties with the woman you had clearly come to love, I’m glad to know that you managed to bear up so well under the burden.”
Ezio sighed, trying to take what solace he could in his uncle’s approval. “Grazie, but I expect that’s not the only reason that you wanted me to stay for the week.”
“Sí,” Uncle Mario said, his expression firming once more. “Healing isn’t the only reason I wish for you to spend more time here before you and little Maria leave, nipote. While I’m sure that it will do your heart good to stay among family, another matter I wish to attend to is your training. I want to see how much you’ve improved since we last saw each other, as well,” his uncle continued, a boisterous grin spreading across his face for the first time since this meeting of theirs had started.
Ezio chuckled softly, feeling much lighter than he had at the beginning of their meeting. “Va bene, Uncle. I won’t disappoint.”
“I know you won’t, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, grin still firmly in place.
Chapter 176: Puzzle pieces
Chapter Text
It was indeed a week later, to the very day, when he and little Maria were able to depart from Monteriggioni with Uncle Mario’s blessing. It was also five days since they’d received Leonardo’s package by courier, one that had contained not only the blade that Leonardo had created from the blueprints in the Codex page that Ezio had showed to him, as well as the page itself, but also a smaller reproduction of the secondary Hidden Blade that the inventor had created some time earlier. It had been sized perfectly for little Maria, but he’d still watched with a bit of unease as she’d strapped it on.
He himself might not have had so much of a choice about taking up the cause of the Assassins, but that didn’t mean that he wished for the rest of his remaining family to become involved in this struggle of his; still, after the pair of them had heard the story of Luciano and his connection to both Father and Lorenzo de’ Medici, Ezio knew that he wouldn’t have felt right if he attempted to dissuade her from taking up the cause that he had already all but pledged himself to.
And so, the pair of them had made contact with a group of Uncle Mario’s mercenaries, taking up temporary residence with a group of them who had been stationed outside San Gimignano almost as soon as the Templars had retaken control of it, there to watch the comings and goings of men and materials through the gates. It was there, in the encampment where he and little Maria had taken up residence, that Ezio met up with the man who commanded this particular detachment: a tough-looking, clearly battle-hardened sergeant by the name of Gambalto.
He’d offered the pair of them a place beside the fire the night they’d arrived, and now they were eating bread with pecorino beside the man’s fellow mercenaries, with a mug of heavy Veraccia to wash it down.
“I think it’s a shame that Antonio Maffei ever left Volterra,” the man said, sounding as though he’d been pontificating on just that subject for some time, in spite of the fact that this was the first time that Ezio had heard him speak about such. “He’s got a bee in his bonnet about Lorenzo; thinks the Duke crushed his home town, when all he did was bring it under the wing of Firenze,” Gambalto shook his head, spitting to the side in clear contempt for the subject under discussion. “Now Maffei’s gone mad; he’s set himself up atop the cathedral tower, surrounded himself with Pazzi archers, and spends his days spouting scripture and arrows in equal measure,” Gambalto shook his head in disgust. “God alone knows what his plans are – to convert the people to his cause with sermons, or else to kill them with arrows – but so long as he remains up there, hate him though the people might, the city is powerless to stop him.”
“So, he would need to be dealt with, sí?”
“It would certainly weaken the Pazzi’s powerbase,” Gambalto said, beginning to grin slyly.
Ezio allowed himself a chuckle, as well. “Bene. How well-defended is your madman, if I might ask?”
“Plenty of men on the watchtowers and at the gates,” Gambalto said, grin widening as he spoke. “Still, they change the guards at dawn, so a man who was smart, fast, and clever might just be able to make it over the walls and into the city unseen.”
Ezio grinned, amused pride welling within him. “And where might we find such a man, do you think?”
“Sí, that is quite the problem, fratello,” little Maria, wicked imp that she was, said with the slyest kind of smile.
Wrestling her into laughing submission so that he could bop her on the head with at least some impunity, Ezio huffed as he heard Gambalto laughing, as well.
“Well, I don’t suppose anyone could doubt that the pair of you are brother and sister now,” the grizzled man said, a wide grin lighting his features.
All of those present around the fire laughed softly, and Ezio huffed again, forcing himself not to show the wide grin he could feel trying to stretch his lips. It wouldn’t do, after all, to let little Maria know she’d gotten one-up on him again. That would’ve taken all the fun out of things.
~AC: II~
The next morning, well before dawn as the pair of them had agreed on, she and Ezio made their way swiftly and silently over the walls of San Gimignano, scaling them and dropping silently to the other side. As she and Ezio scaled the walls of a pair of nearby buildings, the pair of them broke off from each other the way they had planned, Maria turning her attention to eliminating any guard who might have been foolish enough to attempt an attack on her brother when he was making his way back out of the city after dealing with Maffei.
Steadying her breathing as she continued on her way, Maria paused for a moment as she spotted one of the guards below her, just making his way toward what seemed to be his post. Carefully positioning herself so that she stood above the man, Maria dropped silently down onto the man, hidden blades poised to take his life. Once her task was done, she hid the corpse under a raggedy bush, and quickly made her way back up onto the rooftops. Taking care not to draw too close to the place where Ezio was making his own rounds of the city below them, a task made all the simpler since she could hear the voice of the man her brother was hunting, Maria continued searching for the guards who stood in his way.
Who stood in their way, if she wished to be precise.
Chapter 177: Antonio Maffei
Chapter Text
“Requiescat in pace,” he said at last, tucking the letter he had retrieved from Maffei’s corpse into the inner-pocket of his robes.
He’d not had an easy time making his way up to the man, with not only the Pazzi archers he’d heard of from Gambalto, but also Pazzi crossbowmen to evade as he made his way up the side of the tower where Maffei had tried to shelter himself atop while he rained down terror and death upon the people who might have otherwise sought to bring him down.
Now, with this latest task of his over and done with, Ezio found that he was as eager as ever to make his way back out of the city so that he could take at least some rest before he was called upon to take up yet another task for the Assassins. Smiling as he found his way free of the guards and archers who’d have otherwise troubled him, Ezio reminded himself to thank little Maria for her good work once the pair of them had met up outside the city. He also reminded himself to sit down for a proper breakfast once he met up with the rest of Uncle Mario’s mercenaries, considering he’d only had strip of dried meat on his way out of the camp before dawn.
However, Ezio suspected that his stomach would do a much better job of reminding him of that than his brain.
Chuckling softly as he scaled the large wall that guarded the city, Ezio allowed himself to relax from the state of frantic alertness he’d been operating on while he and little Maria had been in danger of being spotted by the guards – particularly the Pazzi guards – inside San Gimignano. Staying to the shadows beneath the sparse trees and shrubs, using them for what cover they could provide until he was well out of sight of any guardsman who might have retaken their posts.
“Ezio!”
“Buon giorno, sorellina!” he called, sharing a cheerful, relieved embrace with his littlest sister when the pair of them met up on their way back to the camp.
“Your presence brings us good fortune!” Gambalto said, laughing as he made his way over to the pair of them; really, the whole of the camp seemed to be in high spirits. “Our scouts have tracked down Archbishop Salviati!”
“Where?” he asked.
“Not far from here,” Gambalto said, still seeming pleased. “Do you see that mansion, on the hill over there?”
“Sí,” he said, after a look in the indicated direction.
“He’s there,” Gambalto said, then paused for a moment, as though remembering himself. “But first I must ask you, Capitano, how did you fare in the city?”
“There will be no more hateful sermons from that tower,” he said, wondering for a moment about the way Gambalto had chosen to address him.
“The people will bless you, Capitano,” Gambalto’s smile let Ezio know that the mercenary hadn’t misspoken when he’d addressed Ezio; or, at least the man didn’t think he had.
“I am no captain,” he said, as little Maria smiled at him.
“To us you are,” Gambalto said, with the conviction of a man who believed utterly in what he was saying. “Take a detachment of my men. Salviati is heavily guarded, and the mansion is a sturdy, fortified building.”
“Va bene,” he said, nodding. “Stay here, sorellina,” he directed little Maria, continuing on before she could think of a reason to object. “There’s little cover between here and there, and I’d rather not risk you in battle against these Templar dogs.”
“Va bene, fratello,” little Maria said, smiling gently. “If it really worries you that much, I’ll stay behind with the men.”
“Grazie, sorellina,” he said, leaning down slightly so that the pair of them could embrace, sharing a kiss as they did. “It’s good that the eggs are close together,” he said, grinning at Gambalto as he straightened up once more. “Almost all in one nest.”
“The others cannot be far away,” Gambalto said, smiling. “We will endeavor to find them during your absence.”
“Grazie,” he said. “Stay safe, sorellina.”
“I will, fratello,” she said, smiling back up at him even as he turned to depart. “Buona fortuna!”
Chapter 178: Francesco Salviati Riario
Chapter Text
Turning to leave, with a last smile for his littlest sister and the men he’d been traveling in the company of, Ezio pulled aside a dozen of Gambalto’s best hand-to-hand fighters, taking the lead as the thirteen of them made their way across the fields that separated their encampment from the fortified mansion that Salviati had taken shelter in. Fanning his men out, but making sure that they still remained in shouting distance from one another, Ezio drove them all forward.
The Pazzi sentries were easily evaded or neutralized, for the most part, but Ezio still ended up losing two of his own men in the approach.
He’d been hoping to take the mansion by surprise, while its defenders were still unaware of his presence, but the loss of two of his own had evidently let them know that he was coming. Still, even without the benefit of surprise, Ezio was determined to press forward. When he came up to the main gates of the mansion, however, a man dressed in the robes of an archbishop appeared on the walls above them.
The man gripped the battlements with clawlike hands, peering down on Ezio and his own like a vulture sighting for carrion, then quickly withdrew before a single one of them could make a move against him.
“Salviati,” Ezio muttered, almost growling; here, then, was another of the men who served the Templars and their Pazzi dogs.
The last of the guards who had been posted, if there had been any posted at all, had either fled to the inner-sanctum of the mansion. Either way, Ezio beckoned to the mercenaries that remained, calling them forward so that they would be out of the range of any Pazzi archers who poked their heads back out over the walls. There was no doubting that Salviati would have consolidated the remaining forces that he had gathered around himself within the walls of the mansion where he was sheltering.
The walls themselves were high and wide enough to seem unbreachable, and for a long moment Ezio wondered if he would be best served attempting to climb it, and then let his men in through the gate that he would then open. However, there would be little chance of him evading the Pazzi guards if he did that, since not a one of them would have been dull enough to let him if he did such a thing.
Motioning his mercenaries to stay out of sight, Ezio crouched low to the ground, moving carefully through the tall grass toward one of the Pazzi guardsmen that had been killed during their initial rush for the mansion’s walls. Stripping the corpse of its uniform, Ezio quickly undressed and changed his clothes, hoping that he would be mistaken for one of the Pazzi dogs still within the mansion’s walls. Given the first reaction of his own mercenaries, before he handed over his old clothes for them to hold, Ezio felt slightly more confident that he would manage in this case.
Banging upon the barred gate with the pommel of his sword, Ezio called out in a rough tone that he hoped would pass muster with the guardsmen still alive beyond the gates. “Open up! In the name of the Father of Understanding!”
As soon as he heard the bolts being pulled back to allow him and his access to the interior of the building, Ezio signaled his remaining mercenaries and together the eleven of them stormed the gates, before the remaining Pazzi dogs could raise so much as a single sword to stop them. Finding that he and his now stood in the courtyard, just beyond the swing of the gates they had just stormed, Ezio looked up at the looming form of the mansion that now stood revealed before them. He could see the three wings of the building, with Salviati himself standing at the top of the flight of stairs running up the center of the main wing.
“Filthy treachery!” Salviati bellowed, as a full dozen Pazzi guardsmen – burlier and looking more menacing than the ones that he and his had dispatched earlier – interposed themselves between Ezio’s loyal group of loyal mercenaries and the Templar archbishop. “But, you and your dogs will not escape this place so easily as you came in, Assassin! Kill them!” Salviati roared, thunderous gaze falling back upon his troops. “Kill them all!”
The remainder of the Pazzi guardsmen closed in around the eleven of them; however, his men were not Pazzi dogs, serving at the behest of their Templar master. No, his men had been trained under the steady hand and unflinching eye of Mario Auditore, and were hence more than a match for the Pazzi surrounding them, allowing Ezio himself to turn his attention to Salviati. Unleashing his poisoned blade with the slightest twist of his left wrist, Ezio waded, slashing, into the crowd of Pazzi bearing down on him.
Even a nick with the blade attached to his left bracer, filled with a poison that Leonardo distilled for him, was enough to knock the Pazzi guardsmen he was facing off of their feet, sending them dizzily to the ground, clutching the wounds that he’d inflicted. Not a one of them rose again.
“You are indeed a demon!” Salviati snarled, as Ezio cleared the last of the Pazzi guardsmen standing between the pair of them, retracting his poisoned blade and drawing the dagger he’d also come armed with. “From the Fourth Ring of the Ninth Circle!”
“This is your last chance,” he snapped, not about to give the Templar the satisfaction of baiting him into an argument on the man’s own terms; the Templars, if they had ever been Christian in the first place, had abandoned all pretence of faith when they had turned their gaze to the levers of power. “Tell me, where is Jacopo de’ Pazzi!”
“You will have nothing from me, demon!”
“Spare me your pretensions of piety! I know what you and all of your kind are truly out for!” he snarled, laying his dagger across the man’s bared throat, keeping a firm hold on the ornate collar of his robes. “Now, tell me where Jacopo has hidden himself!”
“Night guards us where we meet,” Salviati spat, defiance in every line of his face and body. “Now, finish your business!”
“So, you skulk like the cowards you are under the cover of darkness? Bene,” he allowed, biting down on the rage he still felt, with one of the men responsible – even if only in the most cursory sense – for the death of his father and brothers under his blade. “I will ask you one more time, where is Jacopo?!”
“The Father of Understanding knows that what I do now, I do for the greater good,” Salviati said, the defiance in him not diminishing in the slightest, even as he threw himself onto the blade of Ezio’s dagger, opening his throat and spilling a fountain of blood down the front of his ornate, white-and-yellow robes.
“Cazzo!” Ezio growled, letting the corpse fall to the ground, quickly stepping over it to rejoin the mercenaries that he’d come in alongside.
It seemed as though he would have no more answers than that, on this particular outing. Calling Uncle Mario’s mercenaries back to his side, Ezio felt a pang of sadness as he realized that they had lost yet another of their own during the engagement with the Pazzi troops guarding Salviati. Promising himself that he would report all of them to Gambalto, and also learn the names of the men who had given their lives to aid the cause of the Assassins and all that he and his family fought for, Ezio hurried quickly out of the now-deserted grounds of the mansion.
“Capitano, Gambalto sent me to find you,” one of the scouts he’d seen at the edges of the camp where he and little Maria had been staying said, reining in his horse.
“What news?” he asked, knowing that one of these men would not have been sent out for anything that was not a matter of grave importance.
“Stefano de Bagnone, Capitano,” the scout said, sounding pleased. “We’ve discovered where the rat has hidden himself.”
“Bene,” he said, grinning in response; it seemed as though he’d another chance to find what he sought, in spite of Salviati’s determination to see the Templars’ secrets taken with him to his grave. “We’ll follow your lead, then.”
“Sí, Capitano,” the scout said, turning his horse back around.
Chapter 179: Stefano de Bagnone
Chapter Text
After he and the rest of his uncle’s men had all retaken their mounts, Ezio signaled for them to fall in behind the scout, and they swiftly set off once more.
“So, where did Bagnone try to hide himself?” he asked, feeling a certain, grim satisfaction that he would soon be able to come to grips with yet another of the men who had proven themselves enemies of Firenze and all of the people living within her.
“Within the walls of Monte Oliveto Maggiore,” the scout reported; Ezio smiled thinly, more than ready to have done with another of the Templars. “Here,” the scout said, handing over a bag that felt like it had been stuffed with four large, heavy balls. “These will help you to create a distraction while you work.”
“Grazie,” he said, taking the bag and hefting it, before tying it quickly to his waist.
“Continue along this road, Capitano, and you’ll be certain to find him,” the scout said.
“You’ve been a great help to me, amico,” he said, clapping the scout on the shoulder, before swiftly dismounting and making his way forward.
Using the second-sight that had already made so many of his other tasks so very much easier, Ezio continued down the road at a brisk clip, quickly finding himself standing in the shadow of the abbey where Bagnone had attempted to take shelter. Controlling his breathing with the iron discipline that he’d learned so well under the guidance of Uncle Mario and the mercenaries that served under him, Ezio blended into the crowd making its way toward the abbey.
It came as something of a surprise, then, to learn that Bagnone had not yet managed to shelter himself within the walls of the abbey. Still, the Templar was clearly looking to do so, and Ezio knew well that he needed to keep such a thing from happening. And so, pacing Bagnone as the man ranted and raved to one of the monks within the abbey, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he spotted an opportune moment to strike. And, with a single breath, did just that.
“Now I will see who was right…” Bagnone said, sounding oddly… content, considering his fate.
“Where is Jacopo?”
“Nothing to fear, I suppose…” Bagnone breathed. “They meet in the shadow of the Roman gods…”
“Be free of your fear now,” he said, gentling his tone as he spoke. “Requiescat in pace.”
Standing as he heard the sounds of guards and men-at-arms coming for him, Ezio quickly took out one of the spheres from his bag and threw it to the ground. The smoke bomb – he’d recognized them from those times when he and Federico would get into mischief together, though for the life of him he’d never expected to use them to escape from anything more dire than angry shopkeepers and farmers – burst in a flurry of white power upon impact, and Ezio took swift advantage of the confusion to escape.
Breathing all the easier once he’d made it beyond the walls of the abbey, and firmly off the road as well, Ezio looked up at the sound of hoofbeats and a familiar salutation.
“So, it’s done?” the scout asked, leading the horse that Ezio had been riding.
“Sí,” Ezio said, taking care as he mounted his horse once again. “Bagnone has joined his fellow Templars, and I have a bit more information about where those bastardi are meeting.”
Chapter 180: The seal of Wei Yu
Chapter Text
“Bene,” the scout said, nodding. “I’ll make my report to Gambalto, then,” the scout said, pausing for a moment as a thought seemed to strike him. “Your sister offered to go into the town to purchase supplies. She’s well enough,” the scout said quickly, clearly seeing the worry that had bloomed on Ezio’s face when hearing those words. “However, see seems to have found something of interest; she sent Illusio back with the supplies, as well as a message to the effect that she would be guarding that something of hers until you got back to look at it.”
“Va bene,” he said, feeling a bit better about the situation, though it would’ve been a lie to say that he didn’t wish things could have been different. “I’ll go find this something of hers, then.”
Parting ways with the scout, Ezio made his way into the small town – almost small enough to be called a village, really – to see what little Maria had managed to find. And, just why in the world she considered it important enough to take up a position guarding it. As he made his way through the town’s narrow streets, Ezio found himself almost instinctively searching the faces of those around him. He’d noticed that the people who lived and worked within Monteriggioni seemed to be content for the most part, some of them happy, and all of them looked to be well fed and clothed.
It was a thing that Uncle Mario had instructed both him and little Maria to keep an eye out for, so that they might be a good ruler from a bad; Uncle Mario had informed the pair of them that, while a man could easily clothe his destructive actions in soft words so that they might better deceive the unwary, the results of those actions would always tell, in the end. The people would not long be fooled by such things.
The people going about their business in this small town seemed as cheerful and content as anyone could ask for, and so Ezio continued on his way forward.
Soon enough, he managed to spot the familiar, white-hooded form of his littlest sister, waiting for him just the way the scout had said that she would be. She seemed to have stationed herself just above the entrance to a dim, narrow alleyway, but quickly leaped back down to the ground when she spotted him.
“You found something?”
“Sí, fratello,” she said, nodding and making her way over to the small, familiar alcove; it was almost invisible within the dimness of the alleyway where they stood, but Ezio had seen such a thing before. “I remembered you telling me about a strange thing you found before, and so I thought you might be interested in this, too.”
“Grazie, sorellina,” he said, grinning widely as he leaned down to kiss little Maria on both cheeks. “This will be quite the boon, once I go and fetch it.”
That said, Ezio quickly turned his attention to the latch mechanism for the hidden door that he and little Maria now stood before, triggered it, and quickly departed down the tunnel that had been revealed. Breathing steadily, Ezio was somewhat surprised to have found himself in what seemed to be a catacomb that had flooded some time in the past. There were water marks on the walls above where he now stood, and the water that remained looked too deep to comfortably stand in. And so, not wishing to take a chance with whatever could be waiting in the depths – the water smelled stagnant, though thankfully not like any kind of sewer – Ezio scaled the walls and continued on his way.
He found that the place he was passing through, for all that it seemed to resemble the one he’d seen before, also seemed to have been a storehouse of some kind. He’d passed a fair number of empty shelves on his way through the catacomb, and what were clearly weapons – old, dusty, and in need of maintenance though they were – and the remains of what seemed to have been other floors, though time and lack of care had clearly caused them to crumble away.
It was a sad sort of thing, Ezio reflected, making one’s way through a place that still held the remnants of those who had once lived and worked there, but finding no one and nothing inside; truly, it was the same way he’d felt when he’d stopped to pay his last respects to the palazzo where he and his family had once lived.
Sighing, Ezio quickly returned his full attention to the task before him; he could afford to reminisce once he’d cleared the last of the obstacles.
Passing through what seemed to have been an underground settlement – with buildings and even windows that looked down into the sunless streets below – Ezio shuddered, just the slightest bit unnerved. He’d not have thought that there would have been actual people living so far beneath the ground; storage rooms and training grounds he was able to understand, to live all one’s life without fresh air or the sight of the sky…? Ezio shuddered again, and was glad to move on.
Once he came to what looked to be a well-appointed library, this one far better lit than any of the catacombs he’d been traveling through prior, Ezio felt some of the tension humming in his nerves lift at the sight. Yes, he still did not quite know just where he would ultimately be able to find the seal he was looking for, but there was no denying that he felt better simply for the fact that he did not seem to be nearly as far underground as he had been when he started out. And, the farther he could distance himself from that buried settlement he’d passed through not all that long ago, the better Ezio knew he would feel.
Climbing up to the second level of the library, Ezio made his way past a pair of windows that were letting in actual daylight – though not closely enough that he could get any kind of good look out through them – and felt himself relax all the more when he realized that he’d come out of the catacombs entirely. Yes, like as not, they were extremely useful for evading the gaze of any Templars who might have taken it into their heads to follow him, but Ezio could admit that the underground settlement in this particular catacomb had unsettled him enough that he simply wished to leave.
After making his way up to the third level of the library that he now stood in, Ezio began to hear the sounds of people inside, and knew that he would have to be quick and quiet if he wished to find the seal he was looking for, without ending up endangering himself or anyone else.
Happily enough, however, Ezio found that the next path he would need to take was up the inside of an empty tower, and so he would not need to worry for the health of anyone who had not chosen to involve themselves in the age-old battle between the Assassins and the Templars.
After making his way to the top of the tower, his arms feeling like freshly-beaten dough for the effort, Ezio took a long moment to catch his breath and relax his body from the arduous task that he’d just accomplished. Yes, he was not a lazy man, but Ezio was certain that anyone who had been able to observe him as he progressed up the height of the tower would have fully understood his need for the rest he was taking.
Once he’d managed to catch his breath and refresh his once-flagging stamina, Ezio made his way up to the tomb of the Assassin who’d been laid to rest in this place – he’d begun to recognize it as Torre Grossa while he’d been climbing his way up through the three-leveled library – with a definite sense of satisfaction. Pausing briefly to pay his respects to the long-departed Assassin, Ezio retrieved the seal from their resting place, and departed silently from the room.
Making his way up and out through a trapdoor set into the ceiling to his right, Ezio breathed deeply of the fresh air, once he stood at the top of the tower that had given the building he’d just departed its name.
Well now, that was quite the bit of exercise for today, he reflected amusedly, making his way back down among the buildings that stood at a more normal height. Knowing that it would likely be best if he and little Maria returned to Monteriggioni; Uncle Mario would want to know about what he’d done, and there was also the matter of the seal he now carried. It would be best if he returned it to its place quickly, rather than waiting and risking the chance that he would forget to do so.
And so, pausing a moment to search for the littlest of his sisters, Ezio quickly made his way to the rooftop where she had stationed herself.
“Did it go well, fratello?” she asked, looking excited and curious at once.
“Sí, sorellina, it did,” he said, grinning as he drew her into a warm embrace and kissed little Maria on both cheeks. “I’ll tell you what it was like inside while we travel.”
Chapter 181: More mysteries
Chapter Text
“Where are we going, fratello?”
“We’re heading back to Monteriggioni,” he said, as the pair of them climbed down from the rooftops and continued on their way through the streets.
“I suppose that makes sense,” he heard his littlest sister say, a contemplative tone to her voice.
Nodding, as the pair of them blended with the crowds for a long moment, before breaking off to meet up with Uncle Mario’s mercenaries again. All of them still seemed to be pleased to be rid of two more of the Templars that troubled them, and it seemed as though more than a few of them were looking to him with a sense of expectation in their eyes. He knew that Uncle Mario had trusted him with the command of this group for a reason, yet he couldn’t help wishing – at times – that things could have been different.
He couldn’t stop wishing that he could have been faster, in those breathless moments just before the ropes had tightened about the necks of Father and their brothers.
Sighing, Ezio paused for a moment before he informed Gambalto of his plans to return to Monteriggioni. The mercenary sounded pleased to hear it, and offered him further use of the horses that he and little Maria had rode into San Gimignano in the first place. He’d thanked the man, both for his present generosity and for the aid that his soldiers had provided to him and little Maria while they hunted for the three Templars who had been present in the area. Then, once their goodbyes had all been said and their saddlebags packed for travel again, he and little Maria departed again.
After a long few days and nights spent on the road, he and little Maria had come within sight of the walled city that Uncle Mario’s villa stood sentry over, and Ezio found himself smiling all that much wider as he caught sight of the runner that had clearly been sent out to meet them.
“Buon giorno, Ezio,” the man said, reining in his horse and falling into step with the pair of them. “Messer Mario sent me out to tell you that he wants you to meet him in his study.”
“Grazie,” he said, smiling at the man, even as the three of them rode into the city and the gates were shut behind them. “I’ll be sure to go and meet him right away.”
Once the three of them had brought their horses back into the care of the stable master, and after little Maria had bid him a fond farewell, the pair of them parted company; Ezio fell into step with Mercurio, and little Maria left to speak with Claudia about what the pair of them had been about while they were away. Thanking Mercurio for his company, Ezio continued on his way into Uncle Mario’s study on his own.
“Welcome back, nipote!” Uncle Mario called, a jovial smile on his face as the pair of them embraced and kissed each other upon both cheeks. “I’ve heard news of your successes, nipote. It’s good that you are making so much progress so quickly; I’ve little doubt that your present victories will drive the Templars to increasing levels of desperation.”
“I hope so,” he allowed himself to admit, knowing that Uncle Mario wouldn’t take it the wrong way. “I confess, I just want this to be over.”
“Sí, nipote, I know how you feel,” the older man said, single eye softening in understanding. “Still, nipote, none of us can truly afford to give up on our work. This might not have been the life you would have chosen for yourself, but every one of us has a responsibility to the people the Templars would otherwise enslave.”
“Sí, uncle, I know,” he said, sighing as the sheer scope of the task he had still before him pressed down on him like an invisible weight.
“For now, however, I’ve been looking over the translations that your friend from Firenze sent over,” Uncle Mario looked thoughtful for a moment. “It’s interesting that Vieri and his father possessed pages that were evidently so close together in the original text,” he said, turning a glance back on Ezio; Ezio nodded, looking back at the wall and all of the old pages spaced about upon it. “Now, let’s see what…”
“What is it, Uncle?”
“It appears to be referring to a prophet of some kind,” uncle said, sounding as though he were staring at a puzzle whose pieces he couldn’t quite make fit together. “Not the one spoken of in the Bible, but a living one… or else, one who is to come.”
“What does that mean, uncle?” he asked, feeling more confused than ever.
“I don’t quite know, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, turning a thoughtful expression towards the wall of scattered Codex pages that had been assembled so far. “So far as I can make out, it says “only the Prophet may open it,” and also makes reference to two Pieces of Eden,” he continued, narrowing his eyes slightly. “You might very well end up encountering other Guardians,” the older man looked back to him, seeming to resolve himself to whatever he thought was to come. “We’ll have to find more pages of the Codex, if we’re to make any further progress in unraveling this mystery.”
“Sí, uncle,” he said, nodding. “I’ll keep that in mind.”
Chapter 182: Home and away
Chapter Text
“Of course, nipote,” their uncle said, smiling gently once again. “Get some rest; you’ve no doubt had a long journey.”
“Grazie, uncle,” he said, as the pair of them embraced a last time, before he made his way back out.
~AC: II~
Paying a visit to Mother, while she was pleased to see the progress of her recovery, would always serve as a sad reminder of what had ultimately happened to her; to them all, really. And so, in that light, Maria could honestly say that she was glad to be returning to Firenze again, even though they would be returning to their hunt for the Templars that had killed Father and their brothers. And so, as she and Ezio boarded Uncle’s carriage, Maria settled back into her seat and turned to watch the scenery as it passed by on either side.
When the pair of them had returned to the Mercato Vecchio, reuniting with Gilberto, his thieves, and the other Treasure Guardians that had taken up residence alongside them, their fellow Assassin looked entirely pleased to see them. She was just as pleased to see him again, and all the moreso when Ezio suggested that she get herself reacquainted with the thieves and her fellows while he spoke with Gilberto about the progress the pair of them had been making while they were away.
Once he’d finished with that, and the pair of them had met back up on the rooftops of Firenze, Maria took a deep breath of the clear, clean air that only truly seemed to exist at this height.
After a moment to discuss just where it was that they were going to go to next, Maria quickly fell in behind the last of her brothers as the pair of them made their way across the city.
“Where do you think we should go next, fratello?”
“I heard from Gilberto that Luciano de’ Medici wishes to speak with us,” Ezio said, and Maria raised her eyebrows.
She’d not thought to hear anything further from her fellow Treasure Guardian after the pair of them had parted company. Then, however, she recalled that – even aside from the fact that their respective families were close friends and allies, which was sadly not always a certain thing – Luciano had seemed particularly sympathetic to her when the two of them had met for the first time. Knowing that, Maria realized that it made complete sense that Luciano would want to speak with them again.
~AC: II~
Once the pair of them had met up with the youngest of Lorenzo’s brothers – and the only one that the man himself had adopted – Ezio was informed of yet another thing that he hadn’t been aware of, with regards to his father’s work. Father had apparently been doing far more for Firenze than just making sure that all of her finances were kept well in line; he’d also hunted down Firenze’s enemies, with the help of those who had been informed of his status.
And, now that he knew such a thing and had the skill to best the caliber of enemies he was to find himself set against, Ezio had been asked to take over even that duty of Father’s.
Chapter 183: Hunting ground
Chapter Text
He’d agreed quickly, of course, knowing that not only did he owe the Medici as a whole more than could be easily repaid, but also that Lorenzo was an avowed supporter of the Assassins and their cause. Also, it was no great undertaking; the targets he was given consisted in the main of corrupted merchants, arms dealers who had been convinced to give their support to the enemies of the Medici and hence of Firenze as a whole, and in some rare cases, even thugs who were threatening those who had come into a bit of bad fortune and couldn’t pay off the exorbitant loans that those same corrupted merchants had offered them. Offered them, often at the point of a sword or dagger.
It was those in particular whose removal Ezio was the most pleased to be tasked with.
Sometimes, however, it would be one of the citizens about Firenze herself who would spot his hooded cloak and ask him to perform some kind of helpful service for them. Those jobs, of course, seemed to call upon his old set of skills: those he’d developed scrapping with Pazzi dogs, in the days before Assassins or Templars had meant anything more to him than some obscure lesson in a history book somewhere. He’d been invited to participate in the odd race through Firenze’s more deserted quarters, asked to teach a few cheating husbands the error of their ways, and even tasked with delivering letters to those who lived in different quarters of Firenze and yet wished to stay in correspondence with one another.
Lorenzo had advised him that making himself available to perform such favors for the people of Firenze, or even just appearing amenable as he went about his tasks, would make the people around him far more apt to turn a blind eye when he needed to work in secret; Ezio had never found such a thing to be untrue.
As things stood at present, however, he and little Maria found themselves staring down at a missive from Uncle Mario himself; a missive calling them both back to San Gimignano. It wasn’t something that Ezio had had much of a reason to expect, but then he wasn’t the one with full access to the spy-network that their uncle had gathered and maintained. And so, bidding their fond farewells to Lorenzo and Luciano, as well as giving their regards to the Medici as a whole, he and little Maria had departed for Toscana once more.
When the pair of them had arrived in San Gimignano once more, having been taken there aboard another of Lorenzo’s carriages, Ezio found the city to be much as he and little Maria had left it. It was something that both he and his littlest sister had noticed about the pace of life out in the countryside: it never truly seemed to change. They’d both agreed, therefore, that they were much happier living in a city like Firenze.
If nothing else, things could always be could always be counted on to be exciting in such a place.
Chapter 184: Travels in Tuscany
Chapter Text
Once the pair of them had reconnected with Gambalto and his mercenaries, the way that Uncle Mario had wished for them to do, Ezio found himself easily falling back into the place that he’d been accorded those other times he’d had occasion to work with this group of his uncle’s mercenary corps. He also found himself put to nearly the same type of work that he’d been doing in Firenze under the guidance of Luciano de’ Medici. It felt a bit strange, to find himself set to those same types of tasks in such a small town as he had in a city like Firenze.
Still, he supposed that – wherever one might find themselves in the world – people would still be people; it was one of the things the Assassins fought for, even if they were sometimes called upon to kill those who had allowed themselves to become corrupted by the power they had been given.
Having returned some time from a contract assassination that had taken him well outside the main town of San Gimignano, Ezio blended easily into a crowd and let them conceal him as he made his way back inside. Because, while the citizens had become steadily more accustomed to and accepting of his presence among them as he’d proved himself willing and able to carry out the small and not-so-small tasks that they felt bold or comfortable enough to ask of him, the guards in the places he was foreign to had always and would always be another matter. And, as he’d little desire to take the lives of men who were like as not simply trying to support themselves and their families, Ezio made certain to avoid them when he could.
After several more such things had been asked of him – Ezio having been asked to deliver several letters, assassinate a few more enemies of Firenze that had tried to hide themselves away among the people of San Gimignano, and even invited to participate in a couple of races that had been unofficially held, away from the watchful eyes of the guards – Ezio allowed himself to relax for a few moments. Yes, there still remained things that he would doubtless need to do in order to further establish himself as a fixture of this town, as well as to give the Brotherhood as a whole a foothold in the town, but given all he’d been doing during the course of his various stays, Ezio felt at least reasonably comfortable allowing himself to sit on a bench and simply watch the crowds go by.
Of course, such relaxation as he was able to find was a short-lived thing, and Ezio soon found himself asked to carry letters for a man who seemed to have friends in the most out of the way places.
Which was how he’d found himself riding out into the vast fields that bordered the town, searching for three people who lived at the absolute edges of what could have plausibly been called San Gimignano’s outskirts. It had been quite the long journey, and so once Ezio had finished delivering the last of the letters, he and little Maria met up and made their way to a modest tavern to have dinner together. The pair of them had been making themselves available all about the town for errands, and he’d heard good things about the littlest of his sisters, though he was rather disappointed to learn that there were still those who found her appearance too off-putting to do more than glance quickly at her and then turn away.
Yes, Ezio was pleased that none of them had actually attacked her, but he could also see that their callous disregard had hurt her, all the same.
For too long a moment, Ezio found himself entirely too tempted to find those people who had hurt her, but he quickly shook those thoughts away, putting them aside so he could think properly. It wouldn’t do anyone any good if he allowed himself to forget that these people – for all their preconceptions – were those that the Assassins had vowed to protect. And also that if he attempted to force the people of San Gimignano to think differently about his littlest sister, not only would something like that ultimately prove counterproductive and utterly futile, it would make Ezio himself little better than the Templars, in the end.
And so, Ezio forced himself not to think about the muted sadness that he’d seen in little Maria’s eyes whenever she had thought he wasn’t really looking in her direction; trying to focus on finding either a lead on just where another one of those Templar bastardi had hidden himself, or else another task that would give him the chance to further observe the lay of the town while at the same time ingratiating himself to the people living within its walls.
As it turned out, however, Ezio ended up finding one of his uncle’s mercenaries; one who had been looking for him, in fact.
Chapter 185: Bernardo Baroncelli
Chapter Text
“Ezio! About time you got here,” the man said, grinning in a way that took the sting out of his words. “We’ve found Bernardo Baroncelli.”
“That is good news,” he said, grinning at the man standing before him. “Tell me where he is, and I’ll see that he’s dealt with.”
“That’s the trouble,” the man said, grin slowly melting into a troubled expression. “Lorenzo actually had him arrested days ago, after being returned to us from Constantinople, but he escaped. We believe him to be somewhere inside San Gimignano.”
“Va bene,” he said, nodding to the man who’d been such a good help to him. “I’ll see if I can’t pin him down.”
Turning to leave, after having properly thanked Uncle Mario’s man for the help he’d been given, Ezio found himself stopped short by the man’s question.
“How do you expect to succeed where the rest of us have failed?” he asked, his tone sounding as though it was half honest curiosity and half utter disbelief that had prompted him to speak.
“I have my ways,” he said, not wishing to become embroiled in a long discussion, and thereby risk giving Baroncelli the time he might very well need to escape.
Turning away from the man who’d given him such a great deal of help, Ezio narrowed his eyes and saw the familiar wash of darkened colors as his second-sight overtook his normal vision. Making his way back up to the rooftops, Ezio smiled as he glimpsed a familiar group of blue-shaded forms making their way toward the safehouse that Uncle Mario’s mercenaries had set up for them once he and little Maria had returned to San Gimignano on their request. Smile lingering on his face as he continued on, Ezio regained the rooftops and began making his way back through the town.
Still, while it was true that San Gimignano was much smaller than Firenze and would hence have fewer places for a rat such as Baroncelli to hide, Ezio knew that Baroncelli and whoever was sheltering him had to be aware of just those kinds of things as well. And so, it was with a certain sense of subdued resignation that Ezio began searching the town for any large gatherings of red-hued enemies; he knew that it was certain to take a goodly amount of time before he was able to determine just where it was that Baroncelli and his cohorts had managed to hide themselves from the mercenaries that Uncle Mario had sent into the town to find them.
However, when he crossed over what had seemed at first to be merely another in the long line of rooftops that he was going to have to cross on his way through the small town during the course of his search, Ezio caught the end of what seemed to be a one-sided conversation. Then, just as he was about to leave the man speaking to himself behind and resume his search of San Gimignano, Ezio heard the phrase “the assassin” among the hurried, harried chatter of the man who was clearly his latest quarry. Bernardo Baroncelli, it seemed, had not hidden himself nearly as well as a man in his position might have wished.
Dropping back to the ground, taking care to remain out of sight behind the massive form of the building whose roof he had leaped to, Ezio signaled to a group of Uncle Mario’s mercenaries to keep pace with him as he moved through the crowd. Unfortunately, it seemed that Baroncelli was either more observant than he’d seemed, or simply so paranoid that it hardly made a difference. Still, Ezio’s greater endurance and training in such told in the end – as he’d known it would – and he was able to drive Baroncelli to the ground, plunging his hidden blade into the man’s side to finish the job.
“I knew it would be you, in the end,” Baroncelli said, eyes beginning to dull in death, resignation, or both.
“Where is Jacopo?” he demanded of the man, while the pair of them still had time to speak to one another.
“Why? So you can do to him what you’ve done to me?” Baroncelli asked, his tone carrying far more curiosity than defiance at this late stage.
“We gather at the church when a meeting is called,” Baroncelli said, his voice fading alongside the light in his eyes.
“I’m sorry it had to come to this,” he said, kneeling for a long moment beside the Templar he’d just put to rest. “Requiescat in pace.”
Standing quickly, knowing that the guards he’d been working so hard to evade during the course of his present and previous stays within the walls of San Gimignano would be all too swift to gather to the place where Bernardo Baroncelli had fallen, Ezio gave another signal to the pair of mercenaries that had followed him, and then made his way back up to the rooftops.
Chapter 186: Errand running
Chapter Text
Sighing with relief as she saw the familiar form of her sole remaining brother appearing over the roofline just a single street from where she and Uncle Mario’s mercenaries had taken shelter when they’d moved inside the walls of San Gimignano, Maria stood up and waved to him when he seemed to turn in her direction. Knowing that he’d seen her by the way that Ezio raised his own right arm in brief greeting, Maria smiled as she made her way back into the safehouse that she’d shared with Uncle Mario’s mercenaries ever since she’d been all but bundled into the place at Ezio’s insistence. She didn’t hold it against him, of course; they’d all lost pieces of themselves.
At least, the ones who’d managed to survive that damned day in the first place.
“I’m glad to see you waited so patiently for me, sorellina,” Ezio said, as the pair of them embraced, sharing a formal kiss as they separated.
“Well, I wouldn’t exactly say patiently,” she said, giving her last brother a slyly annoyed look. “But, tell me how things went, fratello. I’d just managed to find out that you were going out again, before I saw you coming back.”
Ezio sighed, flopping almost bonelessly down into the chair that sat opposite her at the small table she’d settled down at once she’d managed to make her way to the common eating area that this particular safehouse maintained; she still wondered if it was something that all of these kinds of places had, or if this one was a particular case. Still, Maria wasn’t really all that eager to spend more time than she had to in places like this. Even if it was to find out something that might have been interesting.
The pair of them shared a hearty meal of meat, cheese, bread, and wine, before separating to spend what Maria could only hope would be a last night away from the comforts of Monteriggioni.
~AC: II~
The next morning, once he and little Maria had gotten what sleep they needed after spending so much time at their respective tasks the proceeding day, Ezio met up with his littlest sister and the pair of them began making their way out of San Gimignano at last. The pair of them had completely agreed that they would be best served, as well as much happier, if they returned to Monteriggioni to tell Uncle Mario about what they’d managed to learn after he’d dealt with Baroncelli.
If nothing else, their uncle would want to have some kind of update on their current situation.
Making their way out of the town, blending seamlessly with a group of what seemed to be either merchants or farmers making their way outside the walls, he and little Maria broke off from the group amid embraces and offers of thanks for the tasks they’d undertaken at the request of the people all around them. Smiling as the people all wished them well on their way, not a one of them flinching or hesitating to meet little Maria’s eyes when she faced them to speak, Ezio felt better than he had in quite some time.
He knew that it wasn’t entirely likely to last, what with the fact that he still had to confront Jacopo de’ Pazzi – and even beyond that, there was still the matter of the Templars as a whole to address – to kill him, and then after that to determine just how many of Italia’s own Templars had been directly involved in the plot against the Auditore family. Those he would deal with as quickly as he could; the others, while clearly dangerous to the world as a whole, were of necessity a less immediate concern.
Once he and little Maria had made it out of sight of anyone who might have been standing atop San Gimignano’s walls, the pair of them met up with the remaining mercenaries that Uncle Mario had sent out alongside them, and together they all piled into the four carriages that had been sent out to meet with them at their uncle’s orders. Allowing himself to relax, as he felt the steady swaying of the carriage underscored by the beating of the hooves of the horses outside and the murmurs of conversation from the men inside, Ezio pulled little Maria close so that the pair of them could cuddle up close while they rode back home.
Sometimes he found himself joining in with one conversation or another, at times even recounting what he’d been about while inside the town or telling those who hadn’t had the chance to see him in action of his exploits against the Templars, but for the most part the men around him seemed content to allow him and little Maria to get what rest they could during the course of their return journey; Ezio was glad for it.
Chapter 187: Return to Tuscany
Chapter Text
When they all finally arrived before the high walls of Monteriggioni once again, Ezio found himself grinning widely amidst the laughter and cheers of the mercenaries all around him. Yes, there was still much that he would have to do – there was still the meeting between Jacopo de’ Pazzi and his fellow Templars that Ezio planned to interrupt in a rather final way – but seeing the place that had been given to the remains of the Auditore family as a second home always seemed to do his heart good. It was good, knowing that he, Mother, little Maria, and Claudia still had a place where they were welcomed, after all that had happened.
It was good, knowing what the work he was doing in the world outside these high, stone walls was ultimately serving to protect.
“It’s good to see that you’re both doing so well, nipoti,” Uncle Mario said, grinning as he held out his arms to the pair of them.
“Grazie for welcoming us so warmly, Uncle,” little Maria said, smiling brightly as she hugged their uncle and leaned against him for a moment.
“It’s always been my pleasure, my piccola principessa,” Uncle Mario said, with a wide grin and a soft chuckle. “But, tell me of the work you’ve been doing, nipote,” their uncle said, turning so that he could proceed the pair of them into the villa once again.
As Ezio began telling the older man just what it was that he and little Maria had been doing during their prolonged absence from Monteriggioni and their remaining family, he also listened with rapt attention to Uncle Mario’s own recounting of what had been happening within the villa and the small town that it presided over; it seemed, at the very least, that Mother’s health had continued to improve steadily.
~AC: II~
After lunch, Maria quickly found herself being whisked off by Claudia, seemingly so that her older sister could have someone to complain to about being all but forced to look after the finances of Monteriggioni while the three of them had been given leave to stay. It was kind of a funny thing, but Maria did her best not to laugh after seeing how honestly annoyed and frustrated Claudia seemed about the entire thing. She didn’t want her sister to think that Maria wouldn’t take her concerns seriously, even with as honestly silly as she found her sister’s present complaints.
It wasn’t as though she herself hadn’t had any complaints that would have sounded silly to someone else, no matter how valid they’d felt when she spoke about them.
Chapter 188: Mario il Mentore
Chapter Text
Once he’d finished filling Uncle Mario in on just what it was that he, little Maria, and the mercenary company that had been lent to him had managed to accomplish during the time that they had been out and about the town of San Gimignano – their discussion of his work in Firenze was both cursory and over quickly, to his mild surprise – the pair of them had moved on to discussing just where it was that the Templars meant to have their meeting.
“So, Bagnone mentioned the Roman gods, and Baroncelli spoke of a church where he and his fellow Templars would meet,” Uncle Mario said, pacing before the bookshelves to the right of his desk in a clear attempt to chase down some errant thought or other. “Did you manage to find anything that might tell us exactly where it is that they will be meeting? Or when they will meet next?”
“There was something in a letter I read,” he said, it having become something like second nature to him, searching the bodies of his fallen enemies for documents that would tell him just what it was that his enemies were planning next.
Or else, for the pages of the Codex that the Templars had managed to find by some means or other.
Digging through the satchel that he made it a point to carry with him once it had become clear that he would need a way of transporting the documents that the Templars he killed always seemed to be carrying, Ezio quickly produced the letter, and the pair of them began to go over it together. Ezio also reminded himself to make a return journey to Leonardo’s workshop in Firenze, so that the inventor could look over the new pages of the Codex that he had recovered during the course of his work.
~AC: II~
The pair of them had spent a night with Uncle Mario, with her brother working beside him to figure out just where it was that their next target was going to be, and Maria herself taking the chance to spend what time she could with Claudia, as well as composing a letter to send to Mother so that the woman wouldn’t worry about her while she was away. They’d left just after dawn, the pair of them making for San Gimignano once again. Apparently, not only was the church the Templars were planning to gather together with each other somewhere inside the city, but the old Roman temple that they were planning to conduct their actual meeting at was somewhere in the fields to the south-west of the town itself.
Chapter 189: Mercenary pursuits
Chapter Text
Maria couldn’t truly say she’d been anticipating this, but it would be nice to have the task over and done with; it would be nice to get some real rest, before they had to go haring off on the trail of yet another Templar.
~AC: II~
When he and little Maria had returned to San Gimignano once again, this time with a far better understanding of just where it was that they would need to go, in order to be able to intercept the Templars and follow them to their meeting, Ezio guided little Maria into the town. The pair of them carefully blended into the crowds in order to better evade any watchers that might have had their eyes on them, and then quickly found a deserted alley where they could both head back up to the rooftops once more. Both he and little Maria had long since agreed that taking their present rout above the streets made whatever errands they found themselves engaged in a great deal easier to see to.
It was also one more way to maintain at least some kind of connection to Father and their lost brothers; Federico in particular, since he’d been the one to teach both of them to climb and run and jump like this. It was nearly the same reason that Ezio continued to collect the larger and more beautiful feathers that he happened across during the course of his work, both inside and outside the high walls of Monteriggioni: it helped him to maintain at least some connection to Petruccio, as well. The new life he led – that they led, he reflected, looking fondly down at little Maria as the pair of them continued on their way – served to maintain their connection to Father and the ideals that he’d held so dear.
Gently embracing his littlest sister as the pair of them alighted on a rooftop together, Ezio smiled as little Maria returned his affection with equal enthusiasm; as good as it was to know where he stood and what he fought for, it was all the better to have someone standing beside him.
Chapter 190: Chasing conspirators
Chapter Text
Once the pair of them had managed to find the church indicated in the note that Jacopo de’ Pazzi had sent to his fellow conspirators, all that remained was for them to watch and wait for the man and his fellow Templars to appear. Dusk had fallen by the time those bastardi had deigned to show themselves, but there was at least enough light for the pair of them to see by, even without calling up the second-sight that both he and little Maria seemed to possess. Turning to his littlest sister, the pair of them nodded to each other, and then quickly set about following the small group of Templars to their meeting place.
Careful as they were to stay high and out of sight amid the rooftops, that kind of thing became a great deal more difficult as the Templars they were following drew closer and ever closer to the walls of San Gimignano. There were fewer buildings for them to leap to, fewer rooftops for them to shelter behind, and eventually they would be forced to descend back to the ground and follow the man and his entourage from there. Still, while he and little Maria remained out of sight of Jacopo de’ Pazzi and whatever guards he might have employed, Ezio would be grateful for it.
When the time came for them to abandon the high-ground and instead rely on the shadows of the swiftly-falling night and the inattention of the guards traveling alongside Jacopo as he continued on his way, Ezio leaped lightly down from the wall and paused for a moment to let little Maria catch up to him. Moving quickly and quietly, and careful to keep out of sight in case any of Jacopo de’ Pazzi’s guardsmen or fellow Templars chanced to look back the way they came.
Considering the paranoia of the men they were following, Ezio knew that such a thing was near-certain to happen.
Chapter 191: The secret meeting
Chapter Text
Still, he and little Maria were able to follow Jacopo de’ Pazzi and his guardsmen without being spotted by the man, and so Ezio allowed himself to believe that the pair of them might just be able to accomplish what they’d set out to do this night. It was a heady kind of feeling, particularly considering how long and hard the pair of them had been searching for that Templar bastardo. Sharing a rather pleased grin with his littlest sister, Ezio continued tailing the small group that – even as they watched – was attempting to shield their quarry from sight.
When the pair of them came within sight of the ancient ruins of the Roman temple that the Templars had chosen as their meeting place, Ezio nodded to little Maria, and the pair of them crouch-walked in among the remains of the stone walls that had once enclosed the place where the Templars were planning to hold their meeting. Careful to stay out of sight of any of the guards who might have been looking around, Ezio slipped a glance over one of the low, crumbling walls.
Seeing how close they were to Jacopo de’ Pazzi and his cohorts gave him some sense of satisfaction, but it was the sight of a rather unpleasantly familiar form at the rough center of the loose gathering of men that drew most of Ezio’s attention.
Yes, it was true that he’d known of the man’s planned attendance of this particular meeting from the letter that he’d found on Maffei when he’d finally been able to come to grips with the man, but the sight of him was still a troubling one. Still, there was nothing for it but for him and little Maria to continue about their task. Really, it was only another reason for the pair of them to keep their eyes and ears open for anything that the Spaniard might have had planned for this night.
Rodrigo Borgia, after all, was not a man anyone could afford to underestimate.
Chapter 192: Sight of the Spaniard
Chapter Text
“I’m sorry, Maestro,” the thin, reedy voice of the old man they had been following for nearly the whole of this particular night called, as Jacopo de’ Pazzi faced down Rodrigo Borgia amid a loose ring of their fellow Templars. “I did all I could, but the Assassin proved too strong!”
“Clearly,” Rodrigo growled, the harsh, gravely sound of his voice perfectly fitting – in Ezio’s considered opinion – for such a brutal man. “Else the others would be here with you. To say nothing of the fact that Firenze remains in Medici hands.”
“It’s Francesco’s fault!” Jacopo de’ Pazzi exclaimed, his tone sounding more desperately fearful than any of the other Templars that Ezio had found himself set against during the course of his hunt. “His impatience made him reckless! I tried to be the voice of reason-!”
“More like the voice of cowardice!”
“You’re one to talk, Signor Barbarigo,” Jacopo de’ Pazzi said, seeming to regain a bit of backbone as he turned a reproving expression on his fellow Templar. “Had you given us adequate weapons, instead of that garbage you Venetians call armament-”
“Enough!” Rodrigo’s shout sounded more like the snorting of the bull that adorned his family’s crest; just before that bull lowered his horns to charge. “We put our faith in your family, and you repay us with inaction and incompetence?! Then, when asked to account for your failures, you make excuses and insult us? How do you expect me to respond?!”
“I don’t know,” the old man said, clearly having been cowed by the sheer, unbridled fury he was facing.
“It’s all right,” Rodrigo Borgia said, and Ezio narrowed his eyes, tensing at the façade of friendliness that Borgia had pulled over himself. “I do.”
The sight of Borgia’s long dagger, glittering in the ring of torch-light, made Ezio wince in pained sympathy as he realized what was about to happen. It was a cruel and hateful thing to bear witness to. Yes, Ezio knew that he himself had killed many Templars, but seeing someone and knowing that they were your enemy was an entirely different prospect than to be facing such a betrayal from a man one had clearly come to trust.
Narrowing his eyes still further as he watched that Barbarigo bastardo assault the old man again, mocking him even as he did so, Ezio felt a small hand on his left arm. Turning back to look at little Maria, the pair of them nodded determinedly at each other, and quickly crouched down behind the low wall they’d been standing behind. Moving forward as swiftly as they ever had, Ezio ground his teeth when he heard that old Borgia bastardo addressing him.
“So sorry to have claimed your prize, Assassin!” Borgia called, sounding obscenely cheerful.
Chapter 193: Jacopo de’ Pazzi
Chapter Text
The sound of muffled shouting from behind him distracted Ezio for that one, single moment that the guards that Borgia had clearly sent out after them had needed to ambush the pair of them. Forced to march by the pair of guards that had firmly grabbed his shoulders, Ezio soon found himself dragged before the tall, hooded, cruel-eyed form for Rodrigo Borgia.
“I see you’ve managed to recover something of great value to us,” Borgia said, smirking widely as he turned to look over Ezio’s left shoulder.
Grinding his teeth as he was forced to watch two more of those damned Borgia guards dragged the unconscious form of his littlest sister forward, Ezio glared hatefully at Borgia. He’d heard muffled shouting and struggling, yes, but by then he’d been embroiled in his own struggle and hence hadn’t been able to give what had happened just behind him as much attention as he would have honestly preferred. Still, Ezio knew that his best chance of being able to rescue little Maria from the bastardi holding her captive was to act quickly and quietly.
He’d need to take advantage of the confusion that his actions would create, even as a buried part of him raged at the sight of his littlest sister helpless in the grasp of those damned guards, as that bastardo Rodrigo Borgia reached out to paint a bright red cross on her right cheek.
Grinding his teeth as the man pulled off her hood, spilling her silver hair out from its confines, Ezio palmed one of his remaining smoke bombs, forcing himself to relax in the grip of the guards that still held him fast, looking down so that he would be able to concentrate on what he was doing, rather than being continually distracted by his fury at what that Borgia bastardo was doing to his littlest sister, Ezio threw his smoke bomb to the ground. Lunging forward, breaking the slackened grip of the Templar guards that had been holding him, Ezio unleashed the hidden blade at his right wrist, jamming it deep into the thigh of the guard nearest to where he’d been standing.
Catching little Maria before she could bump her head on the ground, Ezio stood back up and threw a hail of knives at the retreating Templars, hoping to catch at least one of them somewhere – if not outright vital – than at least debilitating.
The nearest guard to where he was collapsed with a knife in his neck, the other with his left arm sliced open in several places, with blood already beginning to pour from the fresh wounds. Still, the man he’d most wished to hurt – that Templar bastardo who’d already caused so much pain for him and his – got away with little more than small rips and tears in the heavy fabric of his cloak. It wasn’t a situation that Ezio was particularly fond of, but as there was little he could do about it at the moment, Ezio turned his attention to the remaining guard.
After he’d put the man out of his misery, and helped little Maria to sit up so that she could get some more fresh air, Ezio turned his attention to the man the pair of them had followed to this ancient, lonely place; the man he’d ultimately been forced to watch die on the points of the knives owned by the Templars who’d once claimed to be his allies. And yes, Ezio had been planning to kill the man, but he would have at least had the mercy not to let Jacopo de’ Pazzi linger on in agony the way his so-called allies had done.
Making his way over to the pitiful figure lying on the grass, looking more like a broken doll than the scared, sad old man that Ezio had seen not such a long time ago, considering everything he’d seen in the intervening time.
“Go forward, friend, unburdened and unafraid,” he said, reaching out to gently close the old man’s eyes. “Requiescat in pace.”
Chapter 194: A dram of mercy
Chapter Text
Standing once more, Ezio turned a gentle smile on little Maria as she came over to hug his right arm. Then, the pair of them dealt with the remaining Templar guards who had followed them to this lonely place. Once that grim task had been finished with, he and little Maria made their escape from the battlefield that they had just created. There were those that he needed to speak with, Uncle Mario and Lorenzo foremost among them, but for the moment all that Ezio could find himself recalling was the helpless terror on Jacopo de’ Pazzi’s face as Borgia had turned on him.
It seemed that the man wasn’t even loyal to those he falsely claimed as allies; Ezio wondered, for a moment, if there was even a single person that Rodrigo Borgia was honestly loyal to.
Still, those kinds of thoughts wouldn’t see him meeting up with the remaining members of the mercenary group that Uncle Mario had lent out to him any more quickly, so Ezio put them aside and continued on his way to meet with Gambalto and his fellows. Speaking to the man and a few of his trusted comrades, Ezio told them what he’d learned, not only with regards to Jacopo, but also what kind of a man Rodrigo Borgia had shown himself to be.
Every one of them agreed that a man who would do something like that to one of his professed allies – no matter the circumstances – was a man that the world as a whole would be much better off without.
Arranging for transportation back to Monteriggioni was rather simple after that, and Ezio found that he was more than a little pleased to be heading back to the place that had begun to feel more like a home than the old Auditore palazzo that he’d left behind. He supposed that it was because of what he’d seen when he’d first come back to his family’s former home after he’d paid his last visit to Father, such a long time ago.
It wasn’t a thought he enjoyed, but Ezio was still determined to keep Father’s memory alive, even though he hadn’t been able to do the same for the man himself.
When he, little Maria, and the complement of mercenaries that had accompanied them on a great many of their forays beyond the high walls of Monteriggioni all returned at last to the small city that Uncle Mario’s estate stood sentinel over at last, Ezio sighed in relief as he felt the tension that had been steadily growing in both his mind and his muscles beginning to slowly ebb away. Yes, it would likely be at least a day or two before he could call himself truly rested, but as first steps went it was certainly one in the right direction.
Smiling widely as he and little Maria were welcomed back into Uncle Mario’s estate by the man himself, looking somewhat more weathered by the passage of years but no less jovial for all that, Ezio reached out to embrace their uncle and share a kiss with the man, before moving aside to allow his littlest sister to do the same.
Chapter 195: The kindly ones
Chapter Text
“It’s good to see you both again, nipoti,” Uncle Mario said, grinning widely as he ushered the pair of them inside and gave a brief nod to one of the servants to begin preparing dinner. “You’ll have to tell me of what you heard and saw, during the course of your work.”
“Sí, uncle, I will,” he said, with little Maria quickly agreeing with his sentiment, as well.
~AC: II~
With Ezio and Uncle busily discussing what that horrid old bastardo Rodrigo Borgia had done to Jacopo – even though the old man had been a Templar – Maria went to her room to write to Mother. She’d been keeping Mother abreast of everything that had been happening outside the convent she’d been staying at while she recovered, even if she didn’t know if it would ultimately do any good. It at least seemed to bring out something of the mother Maria had known, in those days when the Templars had just seemed to be one of the stories that Father had told her when the two of them were alone together.
And, unlike the fellow Assassins that he’d introduced her to in those days, a story without any real kind of substance behind it.
Sighing as she looked down at the letter she’d just finished sealing with red wax and the copy of the Auditore seal that Uncle had had made for her, Maria stood up and left to go find someone to send it off. While it was true that she would have preferred, in some ways, to have all of her and Ezio’s family under one roof again, every time she would bring such an idea up in their shared correspondence, Mother always seemed to shy away from it. It was a sad thing, that Mother didn’t feel she’d recovered enough to come back to the circle of their family, but Maria tried not to think of it that way.
Even though there were still times, much as she tried not to think that way, when Maria wondered if Mother would ever feel enough like herself to come back to them.
When she’d found one of Uncle Mario’s couriers to send her letter off with, Maria thanked him and then turned to make her way back inside. She always made time to speak with Claudia, even if she didn’t have anything in particular to say to her older sister, since she knew that she herself would have been happy to know that her family members were still thinking of her even though they were busy with other matters.
When she came into the room where Claudia worked during the day, however, Maria smiled when she saw Ezio sitting at a table with Claudia, the pair of them smiling over a small meal of cheese and wine.
“Fratello! I’m glad to see you!” she called, grinning as she watched her last brother pull out a chair so that she could sit down.
“Still, it’s kind of a surprise, sí?” her last brother asked, grinning in a way that invited her to laugh along with him.
“Sí, fratello,” she said, grinning back at her silly brother, and reaching out to tweak his nose for good measure.
~AC: II~
While Claudia and little Maria spoke of all the new things they had both seen during the time they’d spent apart from one another, Ezio contented himself with sitting back and watching. Uncle Mario had said, and he’d more than agreed, that this was what the Assassins fought for: the freedom of people to do what they wished, and to be who they wished to be. That freedom that the Templars would steal from each and every person in the world, if they were ever given the chance.
And yes, it was also the duty of the Brotherhood to remove those who had become corrupted from power, but that was an outcome that each and every one of them took all reasonable precautions to avoid when they could.
~AC: II~
When the three of them parted company again, each of them more than a little eager to go to bed for the night, Maria smiled sleepily as she made her way back to her room. It had been nice, having the chance to reconnect with not only her last brother, but also the sister who she didn’t get to see as much of as she would have otherwise wished to. Still, she and Ezio would probably have a great deal to do even if they weren’t sent off to hone their skills against Uncle Mario’s mercenaries, so it really was best that she and her last brother got as much sleep as they could.
The next morning, naturally, she and Ezio rose bright and early, meeting up in the halls so that they would more easily be able to face whatever it was that Uncle Mario had in store for them.
Chapter 196: Making ways
Chapter Text
After breakfast, she and Ezio found themselves lead outside, to the familiar sparring-ring that the pair of them had spent so much time honing their respective skill sets in. Uncle Mario was quick to join them, of course, and this time it was Orazio who was waiting for them in the center of the sparring ring.
“You’ve both proven yourselves to be adept with every kind of weapon we have here,” Uncle Mario said, grinning widely. “And I’m very proud of both of you, nipoti. Still, you’ve yet to begin properly training in unarmed combat.”
“That’s what you brought us out here for, Uncle?” Ezio asked, sounding a bit dubious about the whole thing.
“I know you’ve been in any number of street brawls during your youth, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, the grin on his face melting into a nostalgic sort of smile, before he became stern and serious again. “Still, the men you’re going to be facing in combat are not ones to be so easily defeated as those you faced in your youth, Ezio. And, there may very well be times when you find yourself without a weapon in easy reach. Best be prepared for anything, sí?”
“Sí, Uncle, I understand,” her brother said, though he didn’t sound particularly happy about it.
~AC: II~
Once they’d gotten in touch with Uncle Mario again, making sure that the man was kept informed of more than just what his spies could tell him, he and little Maria had returned to Firenze. After all, Lorenzo would also be waiting to hear about their dealings with the last of the Pazzi, and also just what it was that the Templars had planned for Venezia. He knew that the Duke wouldn’t approve of any of it, and would more than likely send Ezio off with his blessing.
When he and little Maria arrived in Firenze once again, Ezio smiled as he saw the familiar people and places of his old home city. True, there was little chance that he himself would ever feel at home in the city again, considering everything that had happened, there were still times when Ezio would find himself almost homesick for a place that was no longer his home in any real sense.
“Ezio!” called a familiar voice, breaking him free from the grip of nostalgia that had overtaken him so completely.
“Luciano?” he called back, stepping out of the way as Lorenzo’s adopted brother leaped down from the roofline where he’d evidently been observing their progress from.
Just the same as Ezio himself had done, when he and little Maria had been hunting Templars in this very city.
“He sent me out to look for you, just in case you came back into the city through another entrance,” Luciano de’ Medici said, grinning widely. “Buon giorno, sorellina,” he said, clapping little Maria firmly on her right shoulder as he passed her by.
“Buon giorno, fratello,” little Maria said, grinning back as the three of them climbed back up to the rooftops so that they would be able to make their way back to Lorenzo without too much of a risk of being seen.
Because, while there were far fewer unfriendly eyes upon them with Lorenzo in control of Firenze, there was always the chance that concealed agents of the Templars – the Borgia in particular – might have been keeping watch from within the milling crowds.
Smiling as he caught sight of Lorenzo himself, looking perfectly at ease as he watched the people passing by from the safety and comfort of the bench near the back of the walled garden where he sat. The three of them waited for a moment of inattention from the guards that stood sentinel over Lorenzo, before leaping easily down to meet up with the Duke in the walled garden where he sat.
“If we keep meeting up like this, my guards will begin to think that I consort with wandering sorcerers,” Lorenzo said, a good-humored smile on his face as he turned to look at the three of them as they joined him on the bench.
“Well, it was the way of the Brotherhood, to make themselves appear to have powers that ordinary men and women did not,” little Maria said, a sly smile on her face as she settled herself down on the other side of him from Lorenzo. “Or, at least that was what Father told me,” she said, the look on her face becoming pensive as she turned to look out on the other people who’d chosen to take some time to relax in the walled garden where Lorenzo sat at ease.
“That was what your father told me, as well,” Lorenzo said, a gentle smile on his face as he turned to look over at his littlest sister. “Ezio, what news is there of the Pazzi?”
He took a breath, gathering himself, before beginning the next part of his story. “The Pazzi are dead; every one of them.”
“I must admit,” Lorenzo said with a soft sigh. “I never before believed I could desire the death of others so badly.”
“Nor I,” he admitted, shaking his head, then smiling softly as he felt little Maria taking his left arm and wrapping it around herself so that she could give him a comforting, sidelong embrace.
Lorenzo’s gaze settled upon them, a smile lighting his own features, before he returned his full attention to their conversation. “Ezio, thank you for the role you’ve played in keeping this dream of mine alive a little longer.”
“It’s been my honor, Signore,” he said, bowing as well as he could manage from his seated position, and with an arm around little Maria’s shoulders.
“What will the pair of you do now, amici?”
“There are still others we must hunt, Signore,” he said, gently unwinding his left arm from little Maria’s shoulders, so that it would be more simple for the pair of them to stand back up when they were inevitably called to do so once more. “They’re already digging their claws into the heart of Venezia.”
“No! Le bella Venezia,” Lorenzo said, clearly struck by what he had heard, though he maintained his composure in the way all true statesmen did. “Then, that is where your journey must take you, amici. Before you leave us, however, I have something for the both of you.”
“What is it, Altezza?” little Maria asked, her curiosity clearly having gotten the better of her.
“It’s a gift,” Lorenzo said, smiling gently back at her as the four of them rose from the bench as one. “These capes will identify you both as friends of the Medici. As long as you wear them, you will have a great deal more freedom of movement within Firenze.”
“It’s a shame we won’t be able to stay longer, then,” he said, taking the cape as one of Lorenzo’s attendants handed it to him.
“True,” the Duke said, his nod almost seeming like a shallow bow, under the circumstances. “Still, keep it with you for when you return. And remember that you are always welcome here in Firenze.”
“We will,” he said, smiling as he felt the warmth of the Duke’s regard. “Millie grazie, Altezza.”
“Of course, Ezio. You and your sister take care of each other, and do write when you can.”
“We will!” little Maria called back, as the pair of them swiftly departed over the wall, returning to the rooftops once more.
Chapter 197: Short stops and small things
Chapter Text
The first place Ezio wanted to go, after they’d finished speaking to Lorenzo, was of course back to their old palazzo to visit with Annetta. Her brother did this every time they returned to Firenze, but he’d always sent her into the building ahead of him, and she hadn’t seen him inside once. True, the pair of them had talked enough that she understood his reasons for it, but there were times she wished that Ezio’s heart would heal more quickly.
When her brother stood on the edge of a rooftop, looking out in the direction of the palazzo Vespucci, Maria gently hugged him around the waist until he’d come back to himself.
After that, the pair of them made their way to Leonardo’s workshop, only to find that their friend had departed, locking his workshop behind him and leaving Agniolo and Innocento behind to look after it.
“Where has Leonardo gone?” her brother asked.
“It’s funny; the Maestro was in negotiations with the Sforza in Milan, but then the Conte de Pexaro invited him to spend some time in Venezia – he’s to complete a set of five family portraits…” Agniolo gave them a sidelong, knowing smile. “As though that will ever happen. Still, it seems as though the Council of Venezia is interested in his engineering work, and they’re providing him with a workshop, staff; the whole lot. So, amici, if you want to see him, you’ll need to make your way to Venezia.”
“But, that’s exactly where we’re going!” Ezio exclaimed, grinning happily. “This is wonderful news! When did he leave?”
“Two days ago, but you’ll have an easy time catching up with him; he’s got a huge wagon, absolutely loaded down with his things, and a couple oxen hauling it,” Innocento said, smiling easily.
“Are any of his people with him?”
“Just the wagoners, and a couple of outriders in case of trouble,” Agniolo said. “They’ve taken the Ravenna road.”
“Grazie,” she said, as she and Ezio turned to make their way back to the Mercato Vecchio.
They would need to tell Gilberto where they were going, and also to gather food and supplies for the journey they were going to be making, so she and Ezio hurried as quickly as they could over the rooftops of Firenze, and had soon returned to the narrow, darkened streets and shabby buildings that housed and sheltered the thieves that Father had told her about so long ago. After speaking to Gilberto, and making time for a meal with some of her fellow Treasure Guardians, she and Ezio left to meet up with Leonardo again.
~AC: II~
They’d left the city behind them at about noon, and traveled through the night so that they might make better time in their search for Leonardo and those accompanying him. He hadn’t thought, at first, that he’d have been using Uncle Mario’s lessons about sleeping while in the saddle, but it seemed that even those hadn’t gone to waste, under the circumstances.
The sun was just starting to climb to the top of the sky, when he and little Maria spotted the form of his old friend and the carriage he’d been riding in. It seemed that, once more, the pair of them had come just in time to lend a hand when it was needed.
Chapter 198: In times of need
Chapter Text
“Leonardo!” he called, grinning widely as he dismounted, far enough away that he wouldn’t make a nuisance of himself, but also close enough to lend a hand to the inventor.
“Ezio? What luck!” the inventor said, grinning up at him from where he crouched, just beside the back left wheel of the carriage. “I seem to have run into a bit of trouble.”
“Let me see if I can help,” he said, offering a smile of his own to the inventor.
It seemed that the wheel Leonardo was crouching before had worked itself loose from the axle; a situation that Ezio himself had had at least some experience with, though admittedly only when he was younger.
“I know how to fix it, but lack the means to do so,” the inventor said, sounding contrite but pleased at once. “If you could just lift the wagon?”
Nodding, Ezio made his way to the front of the carriage, crouching down so that he could lift it from the ground.
“Still hard at work on your flying machine?” he asked with a grin, having caught sight of a familiar, bat-winged form in the back of the carriage.
Leonardo laughed, seeming just as cheerful to be working out in the dust of the open road as he had been within the cluttered spaces of his workshop in Firenze. “Well, I could hardly leave it behind,” the inventor said, his voice filled with jovial good-humor.
“You somehow think it will work?” he asked, grinning as he set down the carriage at last, having watched Leonardo as the inventor had managed to straighten the wheel and set it firmly back into place.
“Well, the principles behind it seem sound, at least so far as all of my equations tell me,” Leonardo said, still grinning as he made to board the carriage again. “Did Agniolo or Innocento tell you where it was that I’m headed?”
“Agniolo did, sí,” he said, nodding as little Maria caught up to them. “Did you take care of the horses, sorellina?”
“Sí, fratello,” little Maria said, with a nod of her own. “Alfonso and I talked to the stable hands; they said that they would send a message to Lorenzo, so that he would know where his horses were being kept.”
“Grazie, sorellina,” he said, smiling as he helped his littlest sister up and into the carriage.
“Was that your flying machine I saw back there, Leonardo?” she asked, looking more than a little pleased to have caught sight of the inventor’s odd little project.
“Sí, it certainly was,” Leonardo said, the grin that never seemed to leave his face growing all the wider when faced with little Maria’s sheer enthusiasm.
“Meraviglioso! You’ll have to tell me all about what you’ve been doing since we last met!”
“I certainly will,” Leonardo said, chuckling heartily as he climbed into the carriage on little Maria’s heels.
Ezio thought the pair of them had their heads a bit too far up in the clouds, and reality was sure to disappoint them, but he didn’t say anything. Dreamers, after all, should be allowed to dream for as long as the world allowed it; eventually, if left to their own devices, all but the most stubborn of them would find their way back to the waking world.
Chapter 199: Uninvited guests
Chapter Text
It was some time later, when the sun had passed the midpoint of the sky and their carriage had descended into a steep-sided canyon, that Ezio realized that he’d not been hearing the sounds of the outriders. Even with the enthusiastic conversation still going on between Leonardo and little Maria, he should have been able to hear their hooves in the lulls when his littlest sister and the inventor would search for a new topic. He heard nothing, and it was clearly starting to make the carriage drivers uneasy, as well.
“Ezio? You look so worried,” little Maria said. “What’s wrong, fratello?”
“I expect we’ll be finding out, sooner than we’d like,” he groused, as the thunder of many hooves alerted him to the approach of a large group on horseback.
A glimpse of their banners was enough to let him know that these were Borgia soldiers he was about to be facing, doubtless sent out after word had begun to circulate that he and little Maria had left the relative safety of Firenze behind them. There were also, he was infuriated to note, the familiar forms of the men who had attacked Luciano and little Maria with ropes and nets. Lorenzo had told him that they were the Orsi brothers, faithless soldiers-of-fortune who would do any kind of work if they were offered enough coin for their trouble.
Grinding his teeth, Ezio turned back to face the curious faces of his littlest sister and the inventor they had both elected to travel with.
“There are Borgia troops coming this way,” he said, watching as the twin expressions of curiosity he’d been seeing slowly transform into apprehension – in Leonardo’s case – and subdued fury. Nodding at his littlest sister, Ezio gathered himself. “I’ll try to make sure that none of them make it past me,” he said, feeling again that shiver of apprehension that he’d felt when he’d first glimpsed the banners of the Borgia steadily closing in on them. “Still, just keep your wits about you, sorellina. If any of them make it past me, you’re going to be the only defense that Leonardo has.”
“Va bene, fratello. I understand,” little Maria said, a serious expression on her face.
Nodding to her, unable to help his brief longing to embrace her a last time before he was forced to wade into battle once again, Ezio turned and made for the top of the carriage. He might not have had a horse, but that was a situation that could be easily remedied once the Borgia troops had come into his range…
~AC: II~
When he’d first set off on his journey to Venezia, the last thing that Leonardo had been expecting was to end up in the middle of a battle, particularly with the Borgia, since he’d had little interest in politics at the best of times. Still, it was so exciting, watching as Ezio threw one of the Borgia free from his horse, mounting up himself and then charging at the rest of the Borgia soldiers with his long sword. And even his little sister was contributing to the battle in her own way: poised to launch a hail of knives upon whoever was so unfortunate as to make it under Ezio’s sword.
He’d had at least some idea that Ezio and his little sister weren’t quite what anyone would truly call normal – after what had happened to their father, Leonardo honestly doubted that anyone truly would have been recovered enough to be called normal after so short a time – but seeing this… Well, he could hardly deny what he’d seen with his own eyes. The story of how they’d learned to move and fight the way they did…it probably had something to do with the pages of that codex Ezio had been bringing him while the pair of them had been in Firenze together.
That reminds me, he mused, smiling as he turned to regard little Maria, sitting perched on the back seat of the carriage, just like the bird that hooded cloak she and Ezio were wearing made her look like. I really should ask if he’s gotten any more of those since we spoke last. He’d have to wait until the three of them made it to his new workshop in Venezia, of course, since now was hardly the time or the place to have a conversation like that.
Feeling like he was almost holding his breath through the course of the fight, even though he was in far less danger than little Maria, and nearly a world less than Ezio, of course, Leonardo was almost beside himself with anticipation when the last of the Borgia’s hirelings died on the end of Ezio’s long sword. Forcing himself to breathe more deeply, knowing that he wouldn’t be of any good to anyone if he lost consciousness but furthermore feeling almost as though he needed to bear witness to what was happening with his own eyes.
It was all so exciting!
Once the fighting began to wind down again, Leonardo allowed himself to relax, watching as Ezio’s little sister tucked away the throwing-knives she’d clearly been intending to use on any of the Borgia who managed to make it past her brother.
“It looks like our drivers have fled,” he said, having heard the sounds of desperate scrabbling and running, but being rather too absorbed in the battle taking place not so far from where he had been sitting. “I paid them a huge deposit for this carriage and oxen,” he sighed. “I don’t suppose I’ll be seeing it again.”
“You could always sell them in Venezia,” Ezio said, climbing up into the empty seat where the driver had once been seated.
“I suppose,” he muttered, thinking of the city of canals. “Don’t they use gondolas there?”
“There are plenty of farms on the mainland,” Ezio said, a moment before his friend whipped up the oxen and set them off on their journey once again.
Chapter 200: On to Romagna
Chapter Text
The open air of the countryside was a welcome relief after the clash of battle and the stench of blood, no matter how used to it Ezio had started to become during the course of his life as an Assassin. They passed by the stately town of Forlì, the town itself having grown some – into a city-state in its own right, if what he’d heard from Uncle Mario had been right – and continued on their way to Ravenna and its harbor.
Waiting with little Maria as Leonardo negotiated with one of the farmers for a fair price on the carriage and oxen they’d been traveling in, Ezio smiled and clapped the inventor firmly on the left shoulder when he returned to their little group and the three of them were able to set off once again for Ravenna’s harbor, and from there the ship that would carry them to Venezia.
From there, they were able to book passage aboard a coastal galley that would take them from Ancona to Venezia. For the entire duration of their journey, however, even after he’d determined that there were no hostile presences aboard the galley that he, Leonardo, and little Maria had found to carry them on the last leg of their journey to Venezia, Ezio remained uncomfortably aware of just how easy it would be to throw an unwary passenger over the side, their throat slit and their corpse all too readily taken by the cold, black water. He made certain to keep alert whenever their galley put into harbor to take on or disembark passengers.
He felt a great deal more settled once he, Leonardo, and little Maria were able to leave the galley and all its potential dangers behind them, of course.
Finding out that it would take at least a couple of days before the ferry would return to take them the rest of the way to Venezia, Ezio found himself with an unexpected surfeit of time. Leonardo, of course, was altogether eager to see everything that he could of the town of Forlì, before the three of them moved on to Venezia together. Sending little Maria off with him, since there was all too much of a chance that the Borgia would come after him again since he’d clearly been seen in the company of both an enemy of the family and a person of interest to the Templars, Ezio made his own way into the city.
After taking in what he could of the layout of the city, sparse as it seemed to be from so far out, Ezio turned and began making his way to the more thickly-peopled areas of the town. With their larger crowds and higher walls, Ezio found it a great deal more simple to blend in; to observe the lay of Forlì without being observed in turn. Of course, there was also the matter of finding the entrance to the Assassin tomb that his second-sight had located the last time that he’d made his way up the side of a tallish tower to see what he could see.
Knowing from what Uncle Mario had told him, all those years ago when he’d first begun this search of his, that there were more seals out there for him to find, Ezio had made it a habit of switching to his second-sight when he would survey a new place that he and little Maria had come to from on high; he’d not had a reason to second-guess his decision since.
Chapter 201: Walls and errands
Chapter Text
Finding himself swimming through the chill, bracing waters of what was either an over-built river or a rather large moat, Ezio found himself wishing that he’d managed to find a way to get to the entrance of the tomb while keeping himself dry at the same time. Still, there’d been nothing for it, both at the outset and now that he was down amidst the rippling water, Ezio forced himself to focus on moving forward.
It would not be long, after all, before he made it to the entrance.
With one last, powerful stroke of his arms, Ezio did just that. Grabbing hold of the small, wooden platform that stood before the entrance, Ezio hauled himself up and out of the water. Taking a moment to wring out what he could of his Assassin robes, wishing idly that he’d been able to safely leave them behind somewhere, Ezio stepped forward and triggered the latch.
The section of bricked wall before him recessed into the building, allowing him to step into the darkened interior at last.
Finding himself staring down at a large, empty room – seeming even larger than the courtyard at Monteriggioni, though that could have simply been a product of the all-encompassing gloom underground – Ezio took a moment to be thankful that he wouldn’t be traveling through yet more waterways. The broken remains of what seemed to be either a series of balconies or a bridge that had fallen through in the absence of anyone present to maintain it provided him with at least a path over the cold, still waters that Ezio could see all the more clearly as his eyes adjusted to the lack of light, if not an easy one.
Still, nearly anything was better than having to dive right back into the water after he’d finally begun to dry.
Climbing a nearby wall allowed Ezio to see that there was another level, just above the one he’d found himself standing on, and so Ezio continued on his way forward. Soon enough, after traversing what had looked like the remains of a wooden floor that had long since fallen through from time and neglect, Ezio found himself standing before a gate, just next to a mechanism that had clearly been made to raise such a thing. Pausing for a moment after he’d raised up the gate before him, Ezio scanned the newly-revealed walls for hand-and-footholds.
There was little he wished to do more, aside from laying his hands to the next of the seals he aimed to collect, than to stay out of the water for as long as he could manage.
Once he’d managed to scale his way to another gate, however, Ezio found himself forced to dive under the cold, black water to pass underneath it. Grumbling and swearing as he wrung out his clothes once again, Ezio perched for a moment atop a platform made of crumbling bricks, before quickly starting forward once more. Making his way up the inside of a tower whose inner-floors had clearly rotted away from the moisture that clung to his hands even as he continued on his way up through the ancient structure.
He wondered, in those times when he had the luxury to pause and examine his surroundings, just what this place had looked like when it had first been built; what it might have been used for, and who aside from the Assassins had once made use of it.
Once he’d made it to the top of the old, abandoned tower, Ezio paused for a moment to rest his legs and hands. True, while he’d become a great deal more accustomed to moving in the manner an Assassin was often called to do, there were still times when he would find himself needing a bit of a reprieve after a particularly difficult climb.
Beyond the tower was yet another large, almost imposing underground room, this one appearing almost as though it had once served as a place where those who had built such places as these might have gone about whatever kind of lives they had lived. Ezio wondered, even as he leaped, climbed, and skittered his way through the maze he’d found himself traversing, if he was once more in the presence of long-departed Assassins. Perhaps that was why every one of these sites he had found had been not only visible to his second-sight, but had also been chosen to house the tomb of one of his brother or sister Assassins.
Deciding that he’d speak to Uncle Mario about the matter when the pair of them had a chance to meet up again, Ezio returned his attention to the matter at hand.
Chapter 202: Four of Six
Chapter Text
After passing through several more gates, over the remains of more crumbling brickwork than he’d cared to think about, and even made his way up yet another storey within what he wasn’t quite sure was even the same building he’d come in through in the first place, Ezio finally found himself standing before the ornate burial chamber where yet another of the six Assassins who had been entrusted with the keys to Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad’s armor had been laid to rest.
As he made his way over to the ornate, white marble coffin that stood at the rough center of the room, at the feet of an elegant statue of one of his brother Assassins, Ezio decided that he would also ask if Uncle Mario knew just why it had been these particular Assassins who had been chosen to guard the keys to the armor that Altaïr had created. Grazie, amico, Ezio thought, pausing for a moment to look up at the statue of the man, dressed for a battle as he seemed to be.
After all the time he’d spent getting inside the tomb, it was a pure relief when Ezio found the hidden trap-door in the floor. Truly, he’d always appreciated the way that, after such a long time spent in making his way down into the tombs, he was able to find his way out much more easily. He was also coming to fully understand just why it was that Uncle Mario had given up his own search for the seals: the kind of activity required to get to them would hardly have agreed with a man his age.
There were times, he reflected with a mordant sort of good-humor, that Ezio found the activity disagreeing with him.
The trap-door he’d made his way out of ended up depositing Ezio neatly on the other side of a wall at the edge of the river or moat he’d first swam through in order to make his way into the tomb in the first place, and Ezio was at least grateful that he hadn’t ended up having to swim any more than he’d already been forced to. Stretching briefly as he nudged the covering over the catacomb entrance back into place, Ezio carefully arranged his clothes once more. He was glad that only the lingering traces of the scent of stagnant water that had once been clinging to him remained, but he reminded himself to have a bath as soon as he could manage, all the same.
The sun was just beginning to sink in the sky, after passing the mid-point some time earlier, and Ezio decided that – while he was here – he might as well start becoming known to the people of Forlì as a helpful presence. That way, if he ever chanced to need them to look another way while he worked, he would at least have some measure of trust from those he asked it of.
Chapter 203: Round and round the countryside
Chapter Text
Making her way around Forlì, after so much time spent among people who didn’t look strangely at her for something that was so far out of her control as the way she looked hadn’t been the most enjoyable of ways to spend one of the days she was going to end up staying within the walls of the city-state where she, Ezio, and Leonardo had all ended up, but the inventor’s enthusiasm for the place they were all seeing almost made up for the stares Maria had found herself becoming ever more aware of the longer she stayed within the walls of the fortress city.
“This place is almost like a small bit of Venezia, sí?” Leonardo asked, an eager smile on his face as the pair of them continued on their way through the city, searching for all the new sights that the inventor had said would stimulate his inspiration. “There’s so much water in the ground, and I’m sure I saw at least one river back the way we came.”
Maria laughed. “I suppose we could call it that,” she leaned in a bit closer to him, grinning conspiratorially. “But, I don’t think we should say it around anyone from Venezia.”
“Of course,” Leonardo said, grinning right back at her as the pair of them continued on their way through the city of Forlì.
It did somewhat the stories she’d been told about what Venezia was truly like, though only in the sense that there seemed to be water everywhere. And, while it wasn’t something she would ever say to anyone who actually lived here, Forlì seemed more like a swamp than the city of canals she had heard Venezia described as.
~AC: II~
As he continued on his way through the more densely-peopled areas of Forlì, continuing his search for those who might have been in need of help, or even simply a favor that he could do for them, Ezio wondered again at all the turns his life had taken. He’d have never expected to be hunting down the Borgia, or else to be chased by their men for anything more severe than brawling in the streets. But now so many people were dead, and he and little Maria were fighting against an organization that encompassed far more than simply the Borgia.
Yes, they had others who stood beside them, but the situation still struck him as odd, whenever Ezio had the chance to think on it.
Pushing those from his mind once again, Ezio returned his attention to the latest task he’d taken upon himself. He’d taken to collecting feathers, at least those that were large enough and reasonably intact, both as a way to remind himself of Petruccio, and because he thought that such a reminder might help Mother to recover herself faster. True, he didn’t quite know if such an endeavor would ultimately prove fruitful in any sense, but he would at least try.
It was the least he could do, after everything that had happened.
When he finally made it out to the farm where the man he’d offered his services to wished to have the letter he’d been given delivered, handing off the proffered document to a farmer who didn’t seem particularly happy to receive the missive – and in fact attempted to chase him off with a hoe – Ezio shook his head in exasperation as he looked down upon the man from the roof of a nearby shed, just beyond the boundaries of his land. He knew that there were those who did not appreciate having their quiet lives disrupted for any reason under the sun, but the urge to punch the sour old man in the face had been strong, all the same.
Still, Ezio tried to avoid getting into fights with uninvolved citizens whenever he could; no matter how surly or bad-tempered they were.
Finding himself flagged down by another citizen, once he’d climbed down from the shed, Ezio chuckled inwardly as he found that she also wanted him to teach her wayward husband a lesson in respect. Once he’d beaten some proper tact and discretion into the man, Ezio followed him at a discreet distance to ensure that he would not be so foolish as to stray from the path he’d been set back on.
Grinning as he watched the bastardo limp home, Ezio turned and left them to however they would ultimately work things out for themselves.
Chapter 204: Work and play
Chapter Text
Making his way back toward the more heavily built-up sections of Forlì, Ezio blinked in surprise as he heard a challenge being called out to him.
“Might I be of some assistance, Messer?”
“This is my turf,” the man said proudly, arms folded over his broad chest as he raked Ezio with his gaze. “I can outrun any man I know, but a little bird told me that you’re quite good,” the proud man grinned. “Care to prove it?”
“Bene,” he said, grinning back with the same good-humored challenge that he’d seen in the proud runner’s eyes. “We’ll see who’s faster, Messer.”
The pair of them shared a laugh, before quickly dashing off. As it turned out the proud man, whose name turned out to be Antonio, was nearly as fast as Ezio himself, but in the end Ezio’s greater conditioning and the endurance he’d gained from his training under Uncle Mario and his brother and sister Assassins brought him the victory. He and Antonio shared a laugh, both promising to buy the other a drink when the pair of them could take another break from their respective responsibilities.
He’d told Antonio that he would be leaving for Venezia soon, in the company of his littlest sister and a personal friend, so there would be little time for the pair of them to truly get to know one another.
Antonio, however, hadn’t seemed troubled by the prospect, and so the pair of them had had a bit of wine and good company, before parting to make for their respective places to spend the swiftly-falling night. Once he found his way back to the small, homely one-storey building next to the harbor, the one built and furnished to accommodate those weary travelers that needed to stay more than a few hours while the ferry dropped off or picked up passengers in Venezia, Ezio eagerly returned the waves and smiles offered to him by Leonardo and little Maria.
“Buona sera, Ezio!” Leonardo called out happily, as the pair of them embraced and shared a formal kiss.
“Welcome back, fratello,” little Maria said, hugging him just below the arms as she and Leonardo took up positions on either side of him as the three of them made their way into the little building. “How was your day?”
“Productive,” he said, grinning as the three of them found a room to settle themselves in for the night.
The three of them shared stories, speaking in low tones about what each of them had found to occupy themselves during the previous day. While he wasn’t particularly pleased to hear that little Maria had once again been subjected to the stares and whispers that seemed to follow her as a matter of course, it was at least a comfort to know that none of them had been cruel, hurtful, or hostile. For the most part, the people of Forlì had seemed to be honestly curious.
Or else amused, if Leonardo had been particularly enthusiastic about pursuing whatever bit of inspiration the city had apparently provided for him.
Bidding the pair of them good night, as little Maria came out from behind the screen in her sleeping clothes at last, Ezio closed his eyes amid the sounds of rustling cloth and settling beds. When he awoke the next morning, not quite feeling so pleasantly refreshed as he always had – a feeling he could easily attribute to his knowledge that the hunters that Rodrigo Borgia had set after him and little Maria would not give up after merely one setback – Ezio rose and dressed quickly, washing his face and hands in the small basin before stepping aside so that little Maria could do the same.
He wondered, for those moments during breakfast when he could allow his mind to wander in such a way, just what the day before him was going to bring. Still, when he, Leonardo, and little Maria all parted ways for the morning – promising to meet up at the boat, or failing that the dockside house once again – Ezio found that he felt assured of himself and the path he was on once more. Speaking to those he loved had always seemed to help, those times when he would find himself feeling uncertain or worn down by the seemingly never-ending nature of the task his family had taken up.
Leaving the dockside house behind him, Ezio made his way back out to the more sparsely-peopled parts of Forlì. If nothing else, he wanted to say goodbye to Antonio, just in case he and his were able to leave for Venezia today. Antonio invited him in for a bit of wine, but was perfectly understanding of the fact that he had errands to conclude in Forlì, considering the possibility of his leaving before the end of this very day.
Chapter 205: Time and tide
Chapter Text
He was able to fit in two more errands – both of them letters that wanted delivering, the latter of which allowed him to call a cheerful greeting to Antonio as the pair of them passed each other on their respective rounds – before the sound of Leonardo calling out to him drew his attention. His second-sight allowed him to find the pair of them more easily than he would have otherwise been able to, and a quick jog had soon brought him to the place where Leonardo and little Maria were standing.
“It’s good to see you again, fratello,” the younger of his sisters said, a bright grin on her face as the pair of them faced each other again.
“It’s good to be back with the both of you, sorellina,” he said, embracing and kissing little Maria, before turning to do the same to Leonardo. “What did you want to say to me, Leonardo?”
“I just wanted to thank you again,” the excitable inventor said, a wide smile on his face. “You both saved my life out there, not just once, but many times over. And I’ve certainly never had a dull moment since the three of us met.”
“We did what had to be done,” he said, smiling gently back in the wake of Leonardo’s sheer enthusiasm for even the strangest and most inconvenient parts of the life that he and little Maria now led. “You would have done the same.”
“I doubt it; bravery is not my strong suit,” Leonardo said, the admission sounding more like a statement of fact than anything that gave him more than a moment’s pause. “Either way, I owe the both of you a debt.”
“Think nothing of it,” he said, laughing softly as little Maria cuddled up to him again, then turning slightly as the ship’s captain began to call out for those who were going to be traveling to Venezia to begin boarding the ferry.
“That’s us,” Leonardo said, grinning widely as he grandly swept his left arm out to encompass the length and breadth of the not-quite-so-grand ferry. “Venezia awaits.”
The pair of them made to board, but Ezio found himself and little Maria firmly stopped at the ramp; it seemed that, quite unlike their trip from Ancona to Forlì, they would be needing passes to board this particular boat.
“Don’t worry, Leonardo,” he said, in response to the grimace that spread across the inventor’s face; the invitation that had been between the pair of them had been an informal thing, hardly the sort that would get him and little Maria past such an officious man as the one they found blocking their path forward. “I’ll think of something.”
Right then, as if in response to his need for some way to secure passage for both himself and little Maria on the ferry that would soon be departing for Venezia, Ezio heard the sound of a woman calling for help. Turning to see if he could locate the source of the voice, after telling little Maria to stay with Leonardo as he did so, Ezio soon managed to spot the well-dressed form of a woman, standing alone on a lip of rock in the middle of the river.
“I’ll be back as soon as I can,” he said, making for one of the unattended gondolas he could see moored a fair bit from where the ferry aimed to launch from.
Chapter 206: At first sight
Chapter Text
Smiling widely as he heard little Maria wish him good luck, Ezio climbed into the nearest of the gondolas, launching it with the strong shove of his right foot, and rowed for the lip of rock where he’d seen the woman standing. When he drew within sight of her, she stopped calling, her face instead settling into a wide, pleased grin. When he came alongside her, pulling the gondola to a neat stop so that she could step in, she only grinned all the wider as he offered her his right hand.
“Madonna,” he said, helping her to step into the gondola that he’d taken control of.
“Oh, you’re good,” the woman – a bright, strong-looking redhead with laughter lurking in her deep eyes – said, grandly stepping into his gondola and neatly seating herself in front of him. “The ladies must like you.”
“I wasn’t looking to impress,” he said, smiling as he thought of the way little Maria and Claudia would both laugh, if only they could hear him right now. “Merely to help someone in distress.”
“Which is exactly why you impress,” the redhead said, sounding far more calm and certain than he’d once heard her; he got the feeling, however, that this was far more her normal mien than what he’d been hearing before. “And you are Messer?”
“Auditore,” he said, continuing to row as smoothly and steadily as he could. “But please, call me Ezio.”
“I’m Caterina,” she said, turning a calmly grateful smile back on him for a moment, before returning her gaze to the view before them. “Now, Ezio, we must find you a suitable reward. Do you have any suggestions?” she asked, after a moment’s pause.
“There is, perhaps, something you could help me with,” he said, pleased to know that he and little Maria would soon be able to continue their interrupted journey into Venezia.
“Oh? So quickly?”
“My little sister and I are traveling with a friend to Venezia, but it seems that we need passes to get into the city, so-”
“Basta,” Caterina said, a determined tone in her voice, though she still sounded cheerful. “So, the official is giving you trouble, sí?”
“Sí, Caterina, it’s all been more troublesome than I was expecting,” he said, as he pulled his borrowed gondola back into its moorings and held it steady so that first Caterina and then he himself could step out again.
“Bene, you just leave that little man to me, then,” she said, turning a brief smile, filled with both promise and mischief, onto him as she made her way down the jetty with an assured, unstoppable stride.
“Dio mio, fratello, just what kind of a dragon did you set on that man?” little Maria asked, grinning as the three of them caught the sound of Caterina blistering the ears of the sour-faced old man who’d blocked them from getting on the ferry alongside Leonardo.
“Her name is Caterina,” he said, grinning and feeling distinctly pleased as he heard the sounds of the old man apologizing in earnest. “I like her.”
“You would,” little Maria said, and the pair of them shared a grin that was only not quite conspiratorial.
Chapter 207: Inroads
Chapter Text
“He won’t trouble you anymore,” Caterina said, pleased as a cat up to its whiskers in cream after catching a flock of canaries. “I… took care of it.”
“Mille grazie, signorina Caterina,” little Maria said, curtsying as well as she could manage in the Assassin garb that the pair of them had taken to wearing.
“We’re both very grateful for your help,” smiling at the pleased expression on Caterina’s lovely face.
“Perhaps we’ll see each other again,” she said, sounding as though the prospect would be just as pleasing to her as it was to him. “Should you ever find yourselves in the city of Forlì again, it would be my pleasure to welcome you. And you,” she said, turning to gently lift little Maria’s chin. “You should always look people in the eye, and if they stare, you just stare right back at them, piccola aquila,” she said, leaning down to plant a pair of firm kisses on little Maria’s cheeks.
“Sí,” little Maria said, smiling a bit wider as she raised her chin.
“I look forward to enjoying your hospitality,” he said, promising the both of them that he’d be returning as soon as he could ever manage.
“Please accept my most humble apologies, Messer e giovane signora. Had I known…”
“It’s quite all right, my friend,” Ezio said, feeling a great deal more charitable now that he knew he was going to be able to travel to Venezia alongside Leonardo and little Maria.
Making his way up and onto the ferry at last, Ezio smiled brightly as he leaned on the deck railing alongside the inventor. Leonardo seemed troubled by something, however.
“Be careful, Ezio,” the inventor said, before Ezio himself had thought to say anything. “Do you know who that was?”
“My next conquest,” he said, grinning in an easy, teasing manner as Caterina herself paused to wave at them from the jetty, before turning away to be about her own business.
“I don’t think so, Ezio,” Leonardo said, after a laugh that seemed to be caused more by discomfort than any kind of good-humor. “That’s Caterina Sforza, the daughter of the Duke of Milan. Her husband-”
“Husband?” he echoed, raising an eyebrow.
“Sí,” Leonardo said, barely missing a beat. “Her husband is the Lord of Forlì. That woman is as powerful and dangerous as she is young and beautiful.”
Little Maria laughed gaily. “It’s no wonder, then, that Ezio fell for her so quickly.”
He chuckled, giving his littlest sister a firm, fond shake as he embraced her with his left arm. “She certainly sounds like my kind of woman.”
“Dio mio, what am I going to do with the pair of you?” Leonardo asked, in a tone that suggested that even he knew that the question was rhetorical.
Turning to share a grin with little Maria, the pair of them laughed as the inventor shook his head, looking to the heavens as though in supplication. Eventually, Leonardo left off with his melodramatics, and the three of them went to have a small meal in their shared room. The ferry glided merrily onward, as the midday sun sank lower and lower in the sky, and eventually the three of them were forced to retire to their cabin for the night.
Chapter 208: Business and pleasure
Chapter Text
Allowing himself to fall into a somewhat restless sleep, knowing as he did just what kind of damage someone who was determined to kill them all in the night would be able to do under their present circumstances, Ezio found that he was about as well-rested as anyone could be after the night he’d had. Attempting to stifle a yawn, as he felt the ferry putting into port and he joined the slow, steady crowd as they all made their way back down to the boarding ramp so that they would be able to leave the ferry with the other passengers.
At the bottom of the ramp, however, the three of them were met by what could only be the servants of the Conte de Pexaro. The larger, strong-armed and –legged ones took charge of Leonardo’s luggage, and at the inventor’s suggestion, both his and Ezio’s horses. Soon enough, he, Leonardo, and little Maria found themselves in the company of a stocky, sallow-faced man with slightly bulging eyes, that seemed to be attempting to decide which of them he should lavish the focus of his attention on.
“Altezze, allow me to introduce myself: I am Nero,” the man said, his tone bearing more of a servile simper than any of the servants that Ezio had interacted with; he briefly wondered what kind of man the Conte de Pexaro was, to have a servant like this man, or if Nero’s attitude was solely a product of his own personality. “The Conte has sent me to ensure that all of you are able to properly find your feet here in our proud city of Venezia. After that, you will be the honored guest of the Conte de Pexaro, Messer,” Nero paused for a moment, looking from him to Leonardo and then back again. “Leonardo,” he said, his gaze settling on the inventor at last. “For a glass of Veneto before dinner, which meal Messer will be pleased to take in the upper servants’ hall,” Nero bowed obsequiously. “Our gondola awaits.”
After the four of them had boarded the gondola, Ezio found himself turning to watch the sun as it steadily climbed higher into the sky, wondering just when Nero would be done with his rambling speech. He knew that they were hardly the most charitable of thoughts, particularly the brief one he’d had of taking little Maria and Leonardo by the hands and vaulting the side of the gondola nearest to the edge of the canal, but under the circumstances Ezio couldn’t truly help the way he felt.
He simply held himself back from acting on any of his impulses, and made himself relax back into the gondola when he found himself tensing up. Soon enough, however, his attention was caught by something far more pressing than a lecture that he’d been only half listening to for the most part. There, on the bank of the canal, not so far from the grand palazzo of the Marchese de Ferrara, was an altercation clearly in progress.
Chapter 209: Troubled serenity
Chapter Text
“You were told to stay at home, sir,” the taller of the pair of armed guards that were clearly hassling a poor fishmonger said, looking down on the man with barely disguised ill-intent.
“But the rent is paid,” the old fishmonger said, seeming for a moment to be trying to stand firm in the face of the men who had clearly been sent to frighten him. “I have every right to sell my wares here.”
“Sorry, sir, but it’s in contravention of Messer Emilio’s new rules,” the burlier of the pair said, his tone and body language carrying the impression of a nasty grin. “I’m afraid you’re in a rather serious situation.”
“I’ll appeal to the Council of Ten!” the old fishmonger shouted, clearly indignant, for all the intimidating mien of the guards hassling him.
“No time for that, sir,” the burlier of the pair said, definitely sounding amused by the proceedings.
Almost before he was done speaking, the man kicked down the awning of the old fishmonger’s stall, and he and his taller partner began to callously toss the fish into the canal. All while keeping the plumpest and best-looking specimens for themselves, of course.
“What’s going on?” he asked, over the voice of the taller of the guards, watching them swagger away from the remains of the old fishmonger’s stall, uncaring and unafraid of consequences.
“Nothing, Altezza,” Nero said, apathy and dismissal in every line of his face. “A little local trouble; pay it no mind, if you please. Now, we are famous bridge of the Rialto: the only bridge to span the Grand Canal, famed in all of history…”
Turning to look back at the place where the old fishmonger had once been standing, the remains of his stall still visible even as their gondola drifted inevitably toward their destination, Ezio frowned. It seemed that the Templars had already begun to dig their claws into Venezia; clearly, he was going to need to start his work soon if he wished to break their hold before they could fully cement such a thing.
Sometime later, when he, Leonardo, and little Maria had left the gondola behind them, Ezio found himself tagging along behind the inventor as he browsed through a market stall that seemed to be selling children’s toys.
“What is it that you’re looking for, Leonardo?” he asked, feeling a bit out of place; neither he nor little Maria had been children for a long time, not since Father had died and they had been driven from their home in Firenze, and so he felt more than a little awkward standing in front of such a stall while Leonardo searched for whatever it was he’d come to such a place for.
“I’d been meaning to buy myself a manikin,” the inventor said, turning to him with a gentle smile on his earnest face. “It helps to work out a proper range of motion, and combined with my studies of anatomy, well,” Leonardo grinned, clearly pleased with himself. “I don’t suppose I should brag about it, but I’ve been wanting another one of these for a rather long time.”
“I suppose that makes sense,” he said, smiling gently at the inventor as he continued to browse the wares that the man behind the stall was offering. “What is it?” he asked, looking back at Leonardo as the inventor cursed under his breath.
“It seems I left my purse with my luggage when it was being taken to our house,” Leonardo said, not looking particularly pleased with himself.
“Don’t worry about it,” he said, glad to know that it hadn’t been anything dire. “I’ll get them for you, amico.”
Chapter 210: Venezia holiday
Chapter Text
Turning back to Rosa, once the pair of them had managed to find their way back to where her brother and Leonardo were shopping, Maria smirked in response to the thief’s nudge.
“So, that’s the one we’re looking for?” Rosa asked, pointing Ezio out and then folding her arms as the pair of them came abreast of each other.
“Sí,” she said, smiling as she watched Ezio and Leonardo shopping for that pair of dolls that her brother seemed to be buying for their inventor friend.
“Bene, let’s see what he gets up to, then.”
The plan had been to follow her brother and Leonardo until the pair of them had moved out of sight of the main force of the city guards stationed in Venezia, at least that had been the plan, until she and Rosa caught sight of a pair of guards hassling a haggard-looking man behind a market stall. The stall itself was stocked with what seemed to be high-quality leather goods, and the guards looked to be picking over the lot of it like a pair of carrion birds at a carcass.
“Bastardi,” Rosa snapped, and Maria saw her fists clench as her mouth turned down in disapproval.
Taking a breath to fortify herself for what she was about to do, Maria picked up a nearby rock and hurled it at the nearest guard’s head.
~AC: II~
Hearing a commotion at one of the stalls just up ahead, just as he and Leonardo had been about to begin their search for little Maria, Ezio turned to see his littlest sister and another woman who looked at least a few years older than her running from a group of guards that were just beginning to close in on them. Glad that Leonardo had gone ahead to the palazzo the three of them were going to be staying in some time before all of the commotion had started, Ezio jogged over to investigate the trouble that had obviously started.
The first thing he noticed about what he was seeing was that, in addition to little Maria and the woman with her, there seemed to be a group of thieves running with them. Narrowing his eyes as he looked back, Ezio saw another market stall, and realized what had to have been going on to lead to the situation he was seeing. It seemed that the pair of guards he’d originally seen were not in fact the only ones corrupt enough to threaten the citizens of Venezia who simply wished to make a living for themselves.
True, he’d known that such had likely been the case, but seeing it played out in front of him once again was always a helpful reminder.
Setting off after the quartet of guards pursuing his littlest sister and the woman she’d met up with, Ezio punched the closest of them in the head, and grabbed the second to fling into the last pair of them. Drawing his sword and preparing himself to fight, Ezio soon found himself joined by two other men. These newcomers were dressed in the ragged, patched clothes Ezio had come to know as almost the unofficial uniform of a thief.
“Rosa sends her regards,” the man on his right said, grinning widely as he drew a long dagger and brandished it at the guards, who were just starting to recover their senses and form up for another attack. “She said she looks forward to meeting you, amico.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding. “I look forward to speaking with her, then.”
After that, of course, the four guards set upon them and there was no more time for words.
Chapter 211: Fratelli in armi
Chapter Text
Ducking a wide, sweeping slash that would have taken off his head had he allowed it to connect, Ezio breathed deeply and stabbed forward, impaling his own attacker through the gut, then pulling out quickly to take the man’s head.
“Come on, amico, we’d better move quickly if we want to avoid the rest of these dogs,” the man who’d been standing to his right said.
Looking down at the remains of the four guards who had attacked them, Ezio sighed in relief. Yes, those men had probably just been trying to get by, but in doing so they had made themselves one more part of the corrupted system that Ezio had sworn to bring down, or at least to resist for the rest of his life. Following along with the pair of thieves who’d been so much of a help to him, Ezio wondered if Rosa would indeed turn out to be the woman that he’d glimpsed walking beside little Maria when the pair of them had caught sight of each other in the market that he and Leonardo had been shopping at.
He supposed he’d find out soon enough.
Finding himself hustled into a concealed gondola, Ezio quickly settled himself in alongside the other two men who had aided in his battle with some of the corrupted guards that had been causing so much grief to the citizens, citizens who were trying as best they could to earn a living for themselves. Sighing as he adjusted himself to the swaying rhythm of a gondola once again, knowing that he’d need to become accustomed to such a thing if he expected to travel any real distance within Venezia, Ezio tried as best he could to calm himself after the battle that had just taken place.
“Does the canal disagree with you, Messer?” asked the man who had been standing to his left when they fought; the man who had been standing to his right had taken up a post at the paddle and was currently paddling as fast as he could.
“No,” he said, with a soft laugh and a shake of his head. “I was just thinking: you’ve both been such a help to me, and I don’t even know your names.”
The thief manning the paddle laughed, a hearty sound filled with good-humor. “I’m Paganino, and that lump over there is Ugo.”
“Who are you calling a lump, stronzo?” the now-named Ugo shot back, smirking with the rough sort of good-humor that Ezio had seen in nearly every one of the thieves he’d worked with thus far.
“Cazzo! Archers,” Paganino spat, as the first of what was to be a large flight of arrows splashed into the canal nearby. “That bastardo Emilio has his goons everywhere!”
Pushing his questions out of the forefront of his mind, Ezio drew his throwing knives as beside him Ugo drew a stubby, well-maintained crossbow and loaded it. After a moment’s pause to see just where it was that the thief was going to be aiming, before unleashing his own hail of throwing knives into the second archer who’d been harassing them. Once the pair of them had been dealt with, leaving them in less immediate danger, Ezio allowed himself to relax.
“So, this Emilio of yours, would he be Emilio Barbarigo, do you know?”
“Sí, I’ve heard that name before,” Ugo growled, spitting over the side of their gondola. “That bastardo Barbarigo has been tightening his grip on Venezia ever since he set foot here. He’s ruthless, powerful, and he has several councilors in his pocket by now,” Ugo growled, clearly enjoying the opportunity to vent his considerable amount of spleen. “To say nothing of the fact that that stronzo wants to take over not just the local businesses, but the whole city, in the end,” Ugo shook his head, carefully flopping back down into their gondola with a long, frustrated sigh.
“Antonio will be able to tell you more, Messer,” Paganino said, grinning amiably as he continued to direct their gondola to a destination that both he and Ugo seemed to know.
Since the pair of them had already been such a great help to him, Ezio allowed himself to relax and wait for their gondola to make it to wherever it was that they were going to be stopping. He was impressed with how well they seemed to know their way through Venezia’s system of canals, though he supposed it was a necessary thing for people like them, to be able to find their way through what seemed like an impassable maze to him. Ducking low to pass under what seemed like one more in a line of impassable brick walls, Ezio chuckled softly as Paganino began slowing their gondola down.
It seemed that, for all the excitement of the first leg of their journey, things had settled down quite a bit.
When someone on the hidden dock they were sidling up next to tossed a rope to Paganino, Ezio braced himself as their gondola was hauled up to the side of the hidden dock, grinning widely as one of the other thieves reached down to help him up and onto the wooden slats of the structure. Pausing for a moment to stretch, Ezio followed Ugo and Paganino as the pair of them joined up with their fellow thieves on their way out of the small, three-sided room that they had left their gondola in.
Making his way out into the slowly-gathering dusk, the first thing that he noticed was that same woman he’d seen with little Maria, coming towards him with a look of determination on her face and a long, well-wrapped package in her hands.
Chapter 212: Make new friends
Chapter Text
“Buon giorno, signorina,” he said, smiling widely as he realized just how lovely the woman standing before him truly was.
“Buon giorno,” the woman said, a good-humored smile on her face. “You’re Ezio Auditore, sí?”
“Sí,” he said, only mildly surprised when he found himself handed the package that the woman had been carrying. “This is heavier than it looks.”
“Sí,” the woman said, clearly just as amused as she had been when she’d first handed the package over. “Maybe you should think about tipping the messenger,” she said, her smile turning to one of mocking amusement.
“I’m certainly thinking about it, Madonna,” he said, grinning down at her as the pair of them faced each other.
“Basta, basta,” said another man, making his way into the small, central courtyard that Ezio had found himself standing in. “Rosa, let’s not tease the man too much, sí?” the newcomer, a tall, lean man with shoulder-length black hair and a moustache of the same color, said with a grin that matched Rosa’s for sheer inherent mischief.
“Hey!” he said, giving the pair of them a mock glare, even as he shifted his grip on the large package in his arms.
Rosa and her fellow thieves, including the man who had introduced himself as the Antonio that Ugo and Paganino had been talking about when the three of them had been making their way to the hidden place where all of their companions had gathered together, all moved aside as Antonio himself invited Ezio into his small house. Thanking the man for his hospitality, Ezio followed him inside.
Finding himself standing in a homely, cozy-looking salon, Ezio made his way over to a nearby table to set down the package he’d been carrying for so long.
“It’s from my uncle,” he said, feeling a bit surprised as he checked the stamped wax seal holding the package shut.
Pulling out a chair as he turned the package sideways, Ezio settled down at the table to see just what Uncle Mario had seen fit to send him. It turned out to be the same kind of war-hammer that he’d seen some of his uncle’s mercenaries using when he worked or trained with them, as well as a letter.
“Your uncle has good taste,” Antonio said, sounding pleased.
Muttering his thanks for the compliment, Ezio turned his attention to the letter that Uncle Mario had sent alongside the war-hammer itself. While it was a pleasant thing to know that his efforts at reminding Mother of happier times for their family, learning that Uncle Mario thought the task was a futile one didn’t truly sit well with him. Still, even with all the experience Uncle Mario possessed, Ezio wasn’t about to give up on Mother.
As long as there was even a small hope that he could bring her out of the depression that had settled on her ever since that terrible day he and little Maria had come back to their home to find it ransacked, after watching half of their family die at the hands of a traitor, Ezio was going to do everything he could.
“So, it was a family matter?” Antonio asked, gently clapping a hand to Ezio’s right shoulder.
“Sí,” he said, pleased to know that his uncle and younger sister were doing well, though he didn’t agree with Uncle Mario’s opinion on the futility of continuing to send feathers to Mother. “They’re doing well,” he said, folding up both letters – Claudia had sent her own along with their uncle’s, keeping him abreast about the developments regarding their finances, as well as adding in some details about new friends she was making among both the household staff and the people in the town – and tucking them into his bag.
Picking up the war-hammer to test its weight and heft, Ezio found that it was – as he’d expected from a weapon that had been specially crafted for him on his uncle’s orders – perfectly balanced, and with a loop of tough leather that would allow him to both keep a better grip on the weapon when he was fighting with it, as well as making it possible for him to hang it from a loop on his belt when he wasn’t. He was pleased with it, as well as knowing how Claudia, Mother, and Uncle Mario were doing in his and little Maria’s absence.
“If you’re done thinking, there’s something I wish to speak to you about,” Antonio said, gently touching his right shoulder.
“Bene,” he said, nodding as he rose back to his feet. “There’s a few things I’d like to know about you, too.”
Chapter 213: The messenger
Chapter Text
As he followed Antonio to what turned out to be the other man’s study – a place that reminded him of nothing more than a smaller, slightly more crowded version of Uncle Mario’s study back in Monteriggioni – Ezio smiled as he caught sight of a model that bore more than a little resemblance to the model that he’d seen in his uncle’s study. The difference being, of course, that that old model had been of Monteriggioni itself, and this one looked to be a miniature of Venezia.
“So, how have you been finding Venezia, Ser Ezio?” Antonio asked, the same, welcoming smile he’d seen on the man’s face when the pair of them had first met returning once more.
“She’s a beautiful city,” he said. “But it’s a shame, what’s being done to her.”
“Sí,” Antonio said, nodding. “But, where are my manners,” the man continued, shaking his head in what seemed to be self-directed exasperation. “May I offer you anything? A biscotti? Coffee?”
“What’s coffee?” he asked, never having heard of such a thing before.
“An interesting concoction, brought to me by a Turk merchant,” Antonio said, his smile becoming one that of someone who was particularly interested in sharing a novel discovery; truly, at that moment Antonio reminded him very much of Leonardo. “Here, have a taste.”
Taking the tall cup that had been offered to him, Ezio paused for a moment as he felt the warmth of the liquid inside seeping up through his fingers. Then, taking a long sip of the pungent, black beverage he’d been offered, Ezio swallowed. Both the drink, and the urge to chuckle.
“I think my sister would like it more,” he said, thinking fondly of little Maria and her odd tastes.
“Well, I suppose it’s not for everybody,” Antonio said, taking the cup back from him after Ezio had finished his drink.
Following Antonio over to the model of Venezia that he’d taken note of when he’d first been invited into the man’s office, he heard the man sigh as he came to stand before it.
“I suppose it’s good that the pair of you showed up when you did,” he said, looking over the model he’d either built himself or asked to have built. “We’d been planning to move on Barbarigo’s forces within the Palazzo Seta, but once Rosa caught sight of your sister, she insisted on getting her to safety before any of Barbarigo’s thugs could get a glimpse of her, as well. People like your sister,” he sighed, turning a tired but grateful expression on Ezio. “They don’t tend to last long on their own.”
“Sí,” he said, nodding. “I’ve been hearing that more and more, lately.”
“In any case, once she’d joined up with us, she was able to use some kind of special sight to spot all of the new guards that that bastardo had hidden in the bushes, as well as the pair of archers he’d posted on a nearby rooftop,” Antonio smiled softly at him. “I think the both of you might just have saved me the loss of Rosa, and the revelation of our plans to Barbarigo. So, in return for that, you both have my gratitude, as well as a place to stay, should you need it.”
“Grazie,” he said, nodding as he looked from Antonio back down to the model he’d been gesturing to while he’d been speaking.
It seemed that, contrary to his first impression, it was not a model depicting the whole of Venezia, but rather the grounds of the Palazzo Seta itself. It also seemed that, once again, he and little Maria had come just in time to lend their aid to someone who needed it.
“What do you need, if you’re going to move against Barbarigo?” he asked, knowing that their interests were aligned; however, he wasn’t quite certain if Antonio and his people were merely allies of convenience, or if they were more parts of the Brotherhood that he and little Maria had all but pledged themselves to.
Time would tell, in the end, so Ezio would take what time he needed.
“What we need, first and foremost, is money,” Antonio said, moving to clap a companionable hand on Ezio’s right shoulder. “However, it’s growing late, and I truly shouldn’t keep you from your traveling companion. I heard you came in the company of an inventor?”
“Sí,” he said, grinning as he remembered Leonardo. “A very excitable inventor.”
“Then I’m sure I’ll hear more of him,” Antonio said, grinning back. “Still, I expect you’d better go back to him, before he builds some mad contraption to come find you.”
The pair of them shared a laugh, and Ezio couldn’t help but find himself thinking of the flying machine that Leonardo seemed so inordinately fond of. It certainly fit Antonio’s description, being a particularly mad contraption, but the thought of Leonardo riding in on that absurd thing… Ezio shook his head in fond exasperation, even as he made his way up to the room that Antonio had directed him to.
Finding Rosa and little Maria both, Ezio smiled widely. Introducing himself to the pretty young thief, ignoring the soft, smothered chuckles that he could hear coming from the direction of his littlest sister, he thanked her for taking care of little Maria while he had been away with Leonardo. After the three of them had bid each other a good night, he and little Maria made their way out of the small, rustic set of one-storey buildings. A short climb brought the pair of them back up to the rooftops, and from there they made their way back to the center of the city.
Looking over the expanse of Venezia laid out beneath their very feet from where they stood, Ezio smiled as he and little Maria alighted on the rooftop together for a long moment, before turning their paths back toward the well-appointed house that they’d been given for the duration of their stay in Venezia. He’d discussed the situation with little Maria while the pair of them had paused for a moment to catch their breath, and the pair of them had both agreed that it would be both in their best interests as well as Leonardo’s if they avoided doing anything that would draw attention to the place where the three of them were staying.
At least, for as long as they could manage such a thing.
Once the pair of them had returned to the palazzo that they were presently sharing with Leonardo, the three of them shared a light supper, before heading off to bed; tomorrow promised to be interesting, at the very least.
Chapter 214: Prince of thieves
Chapter Text
When Ezio found himself awakened by a chorus of birdsong far different than any he’d heard during the time he’d spent in both Firenze and Monteriggioni, he sighed briefly, before sitting up and making his way out of the room he’d slept in, so that he could start his day properly. After having a light breakfast with Leonardo and little Maria, as well as promising the inventor that he would be sure to bring back any Codex pages that he was able to find while he and little Maria were about in the city.
Departing after wishing Leonardo well in his own endeavors, he and little Maria stealthily departed from the palazzo where they stayed with the inventor, making their way steadily back to the place that Antonio and his fellow thieves had staked their claim on and so made their home. Once they’d returned, through the secret ways that only another Assassin – or else a thief that had had Assassin training – would have been able to follow them on, Ezio smiled softly as he found himself looking down into the courtyard where he and little Maria had left Antonio and his thieves yesterday.
Sharing a smile with his littlest sister as the pair of them descended from the rooftops again, Ezio took a moment to steady himself and then made his way back down into the courtyard.
“It’s good to see you again, amici,” Antonio said, smiling widely as he greeted the pair of them at the door to his small home.
“And you, amico,” he said, as little Maria added her own greeting and the pair of them were invited back into Antonio’s home.
Once the three of them had eaten a light meal, Ezio found himself being put to the same kind of work he’d done so many times in the past. True, he was good enough at it that no one seemed to notice when he cut their purses, and he’d spent enough time avoiding guards on the streets of Firenze and Forlì that doing it again in Venezia was no trouble at all, but he couldn’t quite help wondering if something like this would be all he was required to do.
Yes, he knew that Antonio and his fellow thieves fully intended to bring the fight back to Barbarigo – and potentially his fellow Templars, depending on just how much this bunch of thieves knew of what was truly behind all of their troubles – but the more he saw of their forces, the more Ezio found himself wondering how that was going to be possible.
~AC: II~
Finding herself among people who didn’t look at her strangely because of her hair and eyes was a nice change from Forlì, but Maria still found herself wondering where the others that looked like her had ended up.
“Hey,” Rosa said, drawing her attention as she settled down in the chair next to the one that Maria herself had flopped down in.
“Hey, Rosa,” she said, smiling gently at the thief sitting next to her. “Did you want me to help you with something?”
“No, your brother does good enough work to take care of that,” Rosa said, grinning for a moment, then becoming more serious. “Still, you’re probably wondering just how we know about people like you without actually having any here in the city.”
“Sí, that has been on my mind,” she said, nodding. “Do you know anything about why that is?”
“Sí,” Rosa said with a nod. “Though it’ll take some time to tell.”
Maria chuckled softly. “I don’t suppose I’m going to be going anywhere for awhile.”
And so, Maria listened as Rosa told the story of the Treasure Guardians who had once lived in Venezia, and the way they had been forced to leave when the Barbarigo and their Borgia master had contrived to bring themselves into power. She hadn’t been expecting a happy story, but even expecting it didn’t make her feel any better about hearing about those who shared at least some of her circumstances being forced to leave their homes simply because of those circumstances, and the greed that all of the Templars seemed to share. She was glad they had managed to get away in the end, though.
“Well, I suppose that explains why I haven’t seen anyone else here,” she muttered, slumping back in her seat as she looked up at the aged wood of the ceiling.
“Sí,” Rosa said gently, and Maria looked down to see the other woman gently take her left hand and enfold it in both of her own. “We managed to sneak them out of the city, and some of them still keep in contact as best as they can,” the thief smiled, leaning back in her own seat. “Some of them actually went to Firenze.”
Chuckling softly at the leading tone to Rosa’s words, Maria smiled as she leaned back in her own chair. “Oh? Did any of them say they had met up with a man named Gilberto?”
The pair of them shared a laugh, and Maria let Rosa tug her out of her seat so that the pair of them could make their way down into the deeper levels of the compound that Antonio and his people had set up. It’d been something that the pair of them had agreed on while they were talking: while it might have been true that she couldn’t risk going out so brazenly in the streets while the guards were still on high-alert after so many wealthy people had reported their purses missing, there were still things that needed to be done.
Particularly considering their stated intention of going back into battle with that bastardo Barbarigo and his troops.
~AC: II~
After about a week of getting into a routine, Ezio found himself much more comfortable moving, working, and occasionally fighting within the environs of Venezia. He also found himself called upon to take up more than a few tasks for the citizens who made their homes in Venezia, once they’d come to realize that he was open to doing just such a thing in the first place, simply in return for a bit of discretion and perhaps an averted eye on their parts.
Making his way over the rooftops of Venezia, on his way to start this day’s activities, Ezio smiled as he looked down on the bustling streets of the city. The people down there seemed just that much more lively than when he’d last paused to observe them as they went about their daily lives, and while it was true that that could have merely his own desire to see things improving coloring his perception, Ezio did make every effort to stay as objective as he could.
Chapter 215: Be it ever so humble
Chapter Text
When he finally made it out past the area where anyone who might have been tempted to look for him might have been searching, somewhere that the guards would not be on such a high alert as they had been in the other parts of Venezia that he’d previously paid visits to, Ezio looked down to see Rosa signaling him to follow her. Doing just that, the pair of them made their respective ways to a hidden alcove, shielded from the sight of anyone who might have wondered what the pair of them were doing.
“Hello again, Rosa,” he said, smiling widely at the pretty young thief he’d come to know over the course of the several days he’d been spending among the winding streets and canals of Venezia.
“Ezio,” she greeted, nodding at him with a small, welcoming smile on her face. “How have you been finding the city?”
“It has its charms,” he said, though a certain thing continued to linger in his mind, no matter how much beauty the city of canals had to show him. “Though I don’t see how you can stand that stench, it’s disgusting.”
Rosa laughed, clearly having taken his words with the same good-humored teasing as he’d intended. “Come, I’ve been watching you scrabble around for entirely too long; time someone taught you to climb properly.”
“Bene,” he said, grinning back at the look of challenge she pinned him with. “Lead the way, maestro.”
“Just try to keep up with me, capito?”
The pair of them shared another laugh, and Ezio followed her back down the winding maze of back-alleys and narrow streets that returned the pair of them to the compound that Antonio, Rosa, and their fellow thieves operated out of. He supposed that such a place was better suited to the kind of training they were going to be doing, particularly since neither of them particularly wished to be spotted by any guard patrols that might have been canvassing the area.
This kind of thing took focus as well as skill, so it was indeed best that they stayed out of sight of anyone who might take an undue interest in what they were doing.
Watching Rosa as she scaled the side of the tallest of the buildings that hemmed in the small courtyard that he’d spent so much time in already, just the way the pretty young thief had instructed him to, Ezio watched her progress for another handful of moments, before turning to make his own way up. The new style of climbing that he was being introduced to seemed to involve a fair bit of leaping, particularly when one was faced with the kind of bare patches of wall that had served to stymie him and little Maria both on many occasions since they’d made their way to this place.
“It looks like you’re getting the hang of this, Ezio,” Rosa said, sounding like she’d have been smiling down on him if the pair of them had been facing each other. “Still, let’s see if you can beat me to the top of that building.”
“Bene,” he said, grinning at the challenging tone in her voice. “We’ll just see who gets left behind, then.”
That time, she did turn to grin down at him, and the pair of them shared a laugh as they continued on their way up the side of the building. Their race ended in something of a tie, and the pair of them laughed together once more when they made it to the roof of the building.
“Well, that wasn’t so bad,” Rosa said, the grin on her face not having lost one bit of the challenge that it had held. “For an amateur, at least.”
“Mille grazie, principessa,” he retorted, smirking right back at her. “I’m so glad to have the approval of someone in such a high position.”
Rosa shoved him, still grinning unrepentantly, and Ezio climbed up onto the edge of the building, pausing for a moment before he began making his way back down to the ground by leaping from one perch to another, lower one on the scaffolding that stood next to the building he’d previously scaled. Once he stood back on solid ground, with Rosa having leaped right past him while he was still steadying himself from his landing, Ezio stuck his tongue out as she smirked back at him.
“Ezio,” the voice of another of Rosa’s fellow thieves, a wiry blond named Franco who never seemed to be without his cap, drew his attention before he could think of anything suitably flippant to say to Rosa.
“Sí, what is it, Franco?” he asked, leaving aside the matter of Rosa and her teasing for something that would likely prove to be far more important.
“Antonio wants to speak with you,” Franco said, gesturing to the door that would take him into the man’s house.
“Va bene,” he said, nodding. “I’ll go see what he wants, then.”
Chapter 216: All about the town
Chapter Text
When he made his way into Antonio’s study, and after the expected tide of nostalgia had washed over him, Ezio turned his attention to the man who had called him to this meeting.
“Ah, Ezio! I’m glad Franco was able to catch you. I’d like your advice on something,” Antonio said, turning to face him from his position overlooking the model before his desk.
“Of course,” he said, nodding. “Tell me what troubles you.”
“Emilio has turned some of my own men against me,” the thief said, sounding troubled.
“Bribery and blackmail, is it?” he asked, feeling a brief flame of annoyance against these thieves who’d been so quick to abandon their cause, to side with a man who meant to bring nothing but pain and degradation to Venezia.
“Sí, and we cannot strike until the traitors are dealt with,” Antonio said, seeming to have regained at least some of his spirit at the prospect of getting the help he’d clearly been wanting. “They’re still somewhere in district; keeping tabs on us and reporting back to their master.”
“Not for much longer,” he assured the man, clapping Antonio’s right shoulder strongly, before the pair of them shared a formal kiss and he departed to be about his new task.
Knowing that he would be far more likely to find the traitors he was searching for outside of the walls of Antonio’s compound, Ezio made his way back up to the rooftops once more. Pausing for a moment to call upon the second-sight that he and little Maria were both capable of using, Ezio steadied himself as the world around him was washed out into dark shades of gray-on-black.
Most of the people he saw, as he continued onward to the more thickly-peopled sections of the city, glowed with the faded white of those who held no interest for him at all, and so Ezio continued deeper over the winding streets and above the canals of Venezia. The first of the traitors, a human-shaped figure cast in the warning red of an enemy through his second-sight, actually turned out to be on one of the many boats plying the canals of Venezia; not a thing he was particularly pleased with, since he’d no desire to risk a swim in the canals, and smuggling himself aboard a supply boat hadn’t been particularly easy.
Still, he’d managed to carry out the task asked of him, all the same, leaving Antonio and his thieves free of yet another danger to their operations.
The second, he found after traversing the rooftops for the time it took for the sun to move about a hand’s width across the sky; that man had actually been on the rooftops themselves, practicing his movements in what seemed to be the same manner as an Assassin. Ezio wondered, for just a moment as he was disposing of the traitor, if he’d been one of the Brotherhood’s own, or simply observed them at their work and wished to try doing the same. It wasn’t a question that could be answered, however, so Ezio put it out of his mind.
The third of the traitors that Antonio had tasked him with finding was, once again, a fair distance across the city from the other two, and that man he found among the crowds down in the street. The traitor had the look of someone who’d been hunted for some time, but there were few enough people who could spot a trained Assassin when they were truly one with a crowd. That man died, the same as all the others, and Ezio swiftly returned to the rooftops as a cry began to go up at the sight of the corpse.
Once he was far enough out of sight of anyone who might have been looking for him, Ezio allowed himself to pause for a moment, to relax and catch his breath after he’d been sent to nearly the four corners of Venezia in an effort to find the traitors that had been paid off by either Barbarigo himself or his men, to kill them so that Antonio and his people would be able to conduct their attack on the Templar that had caused them all such difficulties. And, so that he would be at least one small step closer to redressing the wrongs that had been done to the Auditore family by the Templars as a whole and Rodrigo Borgia in particular.
Continuing on his way over the rooftops, as the sun slowly began sinking ever westward in the sky, Ezio wondered what Antonio would say when he returned. The leader of this particular group of thieves would more than likely be grateful for his help, both since it would serve to eliminate future problems for his people, and because they would now be able to carry out their attack with more surety.
Once he’d made it back to the courtyard, Ezio smiled as he saw little Maria and Rosa seemingly competing to out-climb one another up the side of the tallest building that seemed to preside over the courtyard where his littlest sister would spend most of her day while he was out and about within the wider city.
“Salute, Rosa,” he called, as the woman in question stepped up onto the roof of the building he’d just jumped to for that very purpose.
“Ezio,” the pretty young thief said, turning to smile back at him. “You’ve been gone most of the day; Antonio told me to send you to him as soon as you arrived.”
“Sí, I understand,” he said, nodding.
Before he could leap down from the lip of the rooftop in front of him, Ezio found himself caught in an embrace by his littlest sister. Laughing as the pair of them kissed each other hello again, Ezio stepped back from the edge so that he could hug little Maria more tightly, before telling her to wait for him while he spoke to Antonio. Leaping down from the rooftop, Ezio landed easily on his feet and made his way over to the small, low building that Antonio made his home in.
“It’s good to see you again, amico,” Antonio said, a pleased smile on his face as he turned and beckoned Ezio after him. “I trust that you managed to find all three of them, considering how long you spent out there.”
“Sí, I did,” he said, trying not to wrinkle his nose as the scent of warm coffee drifted over to him.
Antonio and little Maria had both taken to the drink, but even after several days of being exposed to the scent of it, Ezio still didn’t understand the appeal. That wasn’t truly important, however, so he put the thought out of his mind and focused on what Antonio had actually called him back for. The leader of Venezia’s thieves wasn’t exactly pleased to hear about what he’d had to do, but Ezio had the feeling that that was more to do with the knowledge that some of his own men had chosen to betray him rather than what had actually happened.
“Grazie,” Antonio said, once Ezio had finished speaking. “Even if things had to come to this, I’m still glad to have done with it.”
“Sí, I know the feeling,” he said, thinking back on the first life he’d taken.
He still didn’t know just what had driven Uberto into collusion with Rodrigo Borgia and his Templars in the first place, but without the fresh, blinding rage of seeing half of his family strangling to death in front of him, Ezio found that he could think clearly enough to wonder at just what it was that had been that had ultimately driven Father’s old friend to such an extreme action. Uberto had seemed to be such good friends with Father, so Ezio doubted it could have been something simple like greed that had driven him.
Still, those kinds of questions weren’t really the kind he could afford to dwell on, particularly not when he and little Maria would soon be expected to leave this place and return to the palazzo they shared with Leonardo.
Chapter 217: Company of thieves
Chapter Text
Turning to do just that, Ezio met up with his littlest sister, and the pair of them quickly made their way back out and away from the compound that Antonio and his fellow thieves operated out of, and back toward the palazzo they were currently sharing with Leonardo. Evading the guards as they came back in had become something of a routine by now, but seeing Leonardo himself standing in the courtyard waiting for them, alone in the well-manicured garden that the staff of their palazzo maintained, brought a smile to his face.
Chuckling softly as he made his way over the last wall that stood between him and the main building, Ezio made his way back down to the ground once more, stepping back down to the ground once more.
“Salute, Leonardo,” he said, as he and little Maria stood within the walls of the garden once more.
“Ezio,” the inventor said, grinning widely at him, even as little Maria hugged him around the waist before turning to make her way back to their palazzo. “So, what did you do today? Tell me everything.”
Laughing softly, knowing that his and little Maria’s inventor friend would be far more interested in the sights he had seen than in the matters he’d been asked to take care of by Antonio. So, with a pause to both breathe deeply and to gather his thoughts, Ezio began telling the inventor of everything he’d seen while he’d been out and about on business for Antonio and his fellow thieves.
~AC: II~
The next morning, when she and Ezio had finished breakfast and Leonardo had seemingly put them to work organizing the many specimens he’d collected – something she particularly enjoyed speaking to the inventor about, those times when they had the occasion to do so – the pair of them stealthily departed from the grounds, making their way back up onto the rooftops of Venezia once more, Maria felt a bit lighter than she had before. It was good to be getting back to work, making sure that the Templars wouldn’t be able to dig their claws any deeper into the city than they already had.
And, even though she herself would have brought too much attention to Antonio and his thieves if she went outside the walls of the compound, Maria was at least pleased to be of service in the ways that she could.
~AC: II~
Once the pair of them had made it back to the courtyard that Antonio and his fellow thieves lived and worked out of, Ezio carefully dropped back down to the ground.
“Well, I thought I heard someone out here,” Rosa said, grinning in welcome as she made her way over to him.
“Salute, Rosa,” he said, smiling back at her as the pair of them stood together.
“Buon giorno, Ezio,” the pretty young thief said, her grin melting into a warmly amused smile. “Come, Antonio’s waiting for you in his office.”
“Bene,” he said, smiling as he fell into step beside Rosa, and the pair of them made their way to the small, homely little house where Antonio lived and worked.
When they stood before the well weathered door, Rosa turned and made her way back out into the courtyard, to go about whatever errands that Antonio had seen fit to assign her. For a moment, Ezio found himself wondering just what it was that she was going to be doing, but Ezio pushed the thought out of his mind as he knocked at the door and quickly found himself invited inside. Interestingly enough, Ezio also found himself being asked about the Codex pages that he and Uncle Mario had been searching for. Not about their nature, since he seemed only to be aware that he and Uncle Mario were interested in them, but with an offer that if any of his thieves found a page of the Codex, he would see that it was given over to either himself or little Maria.
Ezio found that he was grateful for the consideration he was being offered, and so he went about this latest day’s duties with a sense of calmness and resolve both.
He’d been asked to survey Venezia in the way that only one with the training a member of the Brotherhood would be able to do, though something in the man’s phrasing gave him the impression that he knew about Ezio’s second-sight through some means or other. It’d become increasingly clear, after so many days spent working alongside Venezia’s thieves, that Antonio was at least aware that there was something more to their struggle than simply the politics of one family against another. He didn’t quite know if the man was fully aware of the conflict he’d chosen to involve himself in, but Ezio had long since made a personal vow that he wouldn’t allow anyone else to remain in the dark once he’d determined their true allegiance.
He’d learned his lesson from how Father had only seen fit to tell him about his heritage just before he’d lost the man forever; and, even then, only through little Maria.
Chapter 218: New ways and old
Chapter Text
Since there hadn’t really been anything for her to do for the thieves who made their home alongside Antonio, Maria had elected to leave a message for Ezio and then to return to Leonardo so that she could speak to their inventor friend about his wonderful flying machine. Of course, just saying that she was going to do something was one thing; actually carrying out her plans turned out to be both more and less difficult than she’d been expecting. For one thing, Antonio turned out to be perfectly amenable to delivering her message to Ezio once her last brother had returned from the errand he was currently on.
Still, there remained the task of actually making it back to the palazzo that she, Ezio, and Leonardo all shared; past all of the guards around, guards that would be expecting her to be inside the palazzo rather than returning to it.
Once she had managed to make her way back to the palazzo the three of them had been given for the duration of their stay in Venezia, Maria slid carefully around the edges of the routs that she and Ezio had determined that they would use, darting through the gaps in their attention when she was given the opportunity.
“Leonardo?” she called, once she’d managed to make it back into the large workroom the inventor had been given.
“Maria!” he called happily, turning away from the work he was doing – doubtless one of the paintings that had been commissioned for when he’d been offered the chance to stay in Venezia – smiling widely. “What brings you back so early?”
“Ezio hasn’t really needed my help since we first got here,” she said, shrugging easily. “So, I thought it would be better if I came back here. Particularly since, well, there are people out there who wouldn’t look kindly upon me for my appearance.”
“I suppose,” Leonardo said, turning back to his work with a disapproving expression on his face. “I don’t think that’s the way the world should work, though.”
“I know,” she said, flopping down in a nearby chair with a soft sigh. “Ezio and I have been trying to make it better, but our work seems to be going so slowly. No matter what we do,” she muttered, a renewed wave of melancholy coming over her as she remembered just how little her and her last brother’s work seemed to have changed things in Firenze or Venezia.
To say nothing of Italia as a whole, of course.
“I think it might just take time,” Leonardo said, a hopeful expression on his face as he turned to look back at her.
“You mean, like one of your paintings?” Maria asked, smiling softly as she felt calmed and assured by Leonardo’s words.
“Sí, exactly like that,” their inventor friend said, pointing to her with the brush he was holding, a wide, excited grin all but overtaking his face.
“Or like that flying machine you’ve been working on, sí?”
Leonardo laughed. “I thought you might bring that up, sooner or later,” his expression turned mischievous. “I think you might even be getting more excited about it than I am.”
Maria laughed in return. “I doubt that, Leonardo. I doubt it very much.”
Grinning at each other for a long moment, she and Leonardo shared a laugh, and Maria settled back into her chair to watch him work. After a long moment of consideration, Maria decided that she would stay home with Leonardo tomorrow. There’d been so little to do, once Rosa had taught her to climb like one of Venezia’s thieves, that she doubted Ezio would miss her help. She knew that her last brother would miss her, though.
Chapter 219: On guarded ground
Chapter Text
Once he’d managed to make his way back to the palazzo that he and little Maria shared with Leonardo, after reporting on the developing situation in Venezia, Ezio found himself reflecting back on the expression that had lingered for a few, long moments on Antonio’s face when he’d made the report he’d been asked to. It had seemed as though the leader of Venezia’s thieves had been preoccupied by another matter, and so when he’d delivered the report he’d been asked to make, Ezio had seen that Antonio’s attention hadn’t been entirely upon him.
Still, he supposed that he’d be able to find out just what it was that had been troubling Antonio so much when he returned to the thieves’ courtyard tomorrow.
He suspected that he’d be the only one to do such a thing, as he’d seen little Maria growing more and more restless as she found that there was less for her to do each time the pair of them had returned to the courtyard together.
Still, he at least knew that his littlest sister would be safe, behind the walls of the palazzo and under the protection of the guards that patrolled the grounds. Gathering himself as he made his way past the patrolling forms of the guards, slipping through the gaps in their attention, Ezio made his way back up to Venezia’s rooftops once more.
Chapter 220: Contract work
Chapter Text
Once he’d made his way back to the courtyard where Antonio and his thieves sheltered themselves from those who would have otherwise sought their destruction, after pausing for a moment to look for a suitable landing-point. Leaping down from the rooftop once he’d managed to find such a place, Ezio landed in a crouch. Standing back on his feet once more, he smirked as he heard Rosa clapping.
“I’m glad I manage to provide such amusement to you, principessa.”
“It’s just nice to see that all of my training hasn’t gone to waste,” the pretty young thief said, her usual, challenging grin lighting up her face.
“I may just show you one of these days,” he said.
Rosa laughed. “Come along, compagno. Antonio wants to see you again.”
“Bene,” he said, falling into step with her as the pair of them made their way to the small, homely house where Antonio had made his home.
“Rosa says that you wanted to speak with me, amico,” he said, after he’d made his way to the man’s study once more.
“It’s good to see you came so quickly, Ezio,” Antonio said, looking relieved, but only for a moment.
“Is this about what was troubling you yesterday?” he asked, thinking back to the uneasy expression he’d glimpsed on the man’s face when the pair of them had parted company yesterday.
“Sí,” Antonio said, nodding as he seemed to regain at least some of his composure. “I’d had Ugo investigating the rumors, but none of us quite have your skills at moving while fighting, the way we’d need to do if we wish to do anything but be overwhelmed by the guards, and likely killed.”
“What do you want me to do?” he asked, knowing that he couldn’t very well refuse, given what he knew Antonio and his fellow thieves were facing.
“Go find Ugo, he’ll tell you what’s happened, and what we need you to do,” Antonio said, clapping his right shoulder as the pair of them parted company.
While he searched for Ugo, Ezio also kept his eyes open for any signs of just what it was that had been troubling enough to Antonio that he hadn’t even wished to speak about it. Finding that there were much larger groups of guards spread about the interior of the city, Ezio wondered just what he and Ugo were going to have to confront. It was beginning to seem as though whatever this new situation he was going to be facing ultimately was, it wouldn’t be anything good.
Chapter 221: Jailbreak
Chapter Text
When he finally managed to spot Ugo, who had clearly been taking great pains to keep himself hidden if the fact that Ezio had had to use his second-sight to even catch a glimpse of the man was any indication, Ezio allowed himself to relax. Even though it was obvious that whatever it was that Ugo had discovered was not going to be either pleasant or easily solved, Ezio was glad to have found the man at last. Now, all that remained was for him to find out what it was that Ugo had discovered.
And, why it was that Antonio had been so troubled by it.
When he met up with the man, looking out from between a pair of chimneys where he could quickly duck down and conceal himself if an archer happened to glance in his direction, Ezio called softly, carefully ensuring that he was out of the range of anything but a well-thrown knife.
“Good to see you again, Ugo. Antonio told me there was trouble,” he said, after the thief had noticed him and called him over.
“Sí, there is. Emilio’s bastardi might not have been able to capture as many of us as they would have if we’d made the attack on Seta, as we’d been planning, but he wanted to make an example all the same. Those cani bastardi you killed had already led him to some of our own, but there are others who were just caught up in things because they looked the wrong way at the wrong time.”
“Do you know where they’re being held?” he asked, wishing for a long moment that he’d been able to do something about the traitors sooner.
Still, there was nothing for it now; he’d only known what he’d been told, and what he’d found for himself.
“Unfortunately, I only know that they’re still in the district,” Ugo said, sighing. “You’ll have to find the rest out on your own.”
“I expected as much,” he said, feeling a morbid sort of good-humor as he smiled at the man. “Grazie.”
“Buona fortuna, Ezio.”
Turning with a last, respectful nod to Ugo as he left, Ezio made his way back over the rooftops, taking care to ensure that he remained within the district of San Polo. Pausing periodically to inspect his surroundings, he searched for signs of increased guard presence once more. That was certain to lead him to the captured people.
Sure enough, once he’d managed to find a large knot of guards, Ezio also found a cage, just large enough to hold a single person, or two with some discomfort; the fact that it was filled with four grown men drew a brief snarl from him, but Ezio had long since learned better than to expect humanity from those who served the Templars. Breathing deeply to steady himself, Ezio leaped down from the rooftops, unsheathing his hidden blade and dagger once he landed.
After he’d dealt with the group of guards, Ezio quickly freed the people they had been holding.
“Grazie,” the rough-looking man who’d first stepped free from the cage said. “I’ll see that these men are returned home.”
“Bene,” he said, turning to hurry back up to the rooftops once more.
There were still more people waiting to be rescued, after all.
Chapter 222: In a trice
Chapter Text
Knowing with more certainty just what he would need to look for in order to find the citizens that the Templars had captured and imprisoned, Ezio determinedly returned to his search.
~AC: II~
When she and Leonardo were able to start working on the flying-machine in earnest, the first thing that Maria noticed was how heavy it was. When she mentioned the fact to the inventor, however, she’d found that he’d already known about such a thing, and that he was also perfectly confident in his work. He’d said that flying was not a matter of being lighter than the air around you, but of knowing how to use the air and wind around you to stay up.
She’d still had her doubts, of course, but Leonardo had been fully willing to allow her to explore her own ideas of just how to lift a man into the air. And so, that was how Maria had found herself standing before a small brazier, with a sheet of waxed paper suspended above it. Her first attempts had been something like she’d imagined Leonardo’s own firsts had gone, with her paper flying off in first one direction and then another. Eventually, she’d ended up tying thick, waxed strings to all four corners of the paper she was using, securing the strings to a two pairs of plumb-bobs that Leonardo had found for her.
“Well, it seems your idea of using heat to achieve lift is working out,” Leonardo said, smiling gently. “Though it doesn’t look like this construction of yours would be able to move much, even if we did scale it up.”
“Sí,” she muttered, looking down at the plumb-bobs she’d tied to the end of each of the four strings in order to balance out the paper and keep it from blowing off somewhere she didn’t want it to. “I suspect that anything built like this would only be able to travel where the wind took it. Still, at least we know how you might be able to get your machine to fly.”
“Sí,” Leonardo said, looking thoughtfully at the waxed paper Maria had worked so diligently to properly anchor. “Still, this idea of yours does look interesting, as well. Perhaps some kind of a lifting-bag…”
She could practically see Leonardo’s agile mind going to work on the new angle that Maria had provided him with, and she smiled softly. Yes, the ides she’d had hadn’t truly seemed to amount to anything, but seeing what Leonardo would do with them was bound to be very interesting…
~AC: II~
Once he’d managed to free the last group of kidnapped citizens from the cages that had been set up throughout the San Polo district, Ezio returned to the rooftops so that he could catch his breath without so much danger of being accosted by the guards. Once he’d managed to rest up, just enough so that he’d be able to continue on his way without stumbling, Ezio met up with Ugo once again.
“I’m impressed,” the thief said, though he also sounded pleased. “I didn’t expect that you would be done so quickly.”
“I aim to please,” he said, grinning good-naturedly at the other man; though this particular job had taken him a good chunk of the day, leaving the sun sinking into the west, and him with little time for anything but a return to the palazzo where he and little Maria stayed with Leonardo.
“I’ll let Antonio know of your success, and that you send your regards,” Ugo said, smiling broadly at him. “You should get back to your people before they miss you too much.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding at the man as the pair of them stood together atop one of the taller buildings within San Polo. “Just remember: you and yours are my people, too.”
Chapter 223: Coming and going
Chapter Text
Ugo laughed softly, clearly sharing the sentiment that Ezio had just expressed, and the pair of them parted company for the night.
Swiftly making his way back to the palazzo that the three of them had shared for the duration of their stay within Venezia, Ezio paused for a moment to determine just where and how the current rotation of guards were patrolling. Once he’d determined the best way to make his way back inside, Ezio allowed himself to breathe more easily. He’d no need for the guards to begin suspecting that there was something more to him than the simple assistant that Leonardo had presented him and little Maria as.
Once he was safely inside the walls of their shared palazzo, Ezio stood to his full height, stretching the tension out of his muscles so that he could rest more easily when he made it to his bed.
Kissing little Maria and Leonardo as he found them once again, the three of them bid each other good night and headed off to their separate rooms to sleep. Slipping into his bed once again, Ezio yawned deeply and pulled the covers up to his neck as he closed his eyes.
The next morning, once he’d fully rested and shared a morning meal with Leonardo and little Maria, Ezio got out of their palazzo before the sun had quite risen fully into the sky. Making his way back toward the district of San Polo where Antonio and his fellow thieves operated out of. As he crossed the rooftops of Venezia once more, taking a different rout from yesterday, something he’d long ago begun doing as a way to keep the guards from becoming too much of a hindrance to him.
He’d learned from Uncle Mario, and from his own experience, that it was always better to avoid conflict whenever one possibly could.
Standing atop one of the smaller building that encircled the courtyard he’d spent so much time in during the course of his stay in Venezia, Ezio dropped back down. The first thing he noticed was Ugo, coming to meet him, a welcoming smile on his face.
“Ezio, it’s good to see you again,” the thief said.
Ezio grinned back. “And you, amico.”
“Come, there’s something else I’d like your help with,” Ugo said, beckoning him forward.
“Is it more prisoners?” he asked, narrowing his eyes at the thought of more innocent citizens being abused by the Templars that had seized power in Venezia.
“I’ll tell you when we make it to the docks,” Ugo said, a determined expression settling over his features.
“Bene,” Ezio said, knowing that he could trust the man not to lead him into any situation that he wouldn’t be able to handle.
The pair of them made their way across the rooftops of Venezia once again, this time making for the docks. Ezio wondered what he would find when they got there, what kind of task it was that Ugo wanted them to take on, but running across rooftops – to say nothing of leaping the gaps between them – was not really conductive to holding any kind of real conversation. Once the pair of them had arrived at the docks, dropping back down to the ground and pausing for a moment to blend with a small group making their way out to the docks, Ezio turned his attention to Ugo.
Chapter 224: Tasks at hand
Chapter Text
“Rescuing my brothers was more than an act of charity, amico,” Ugo said, once the pair of them had caught each other’s eye. “Most of the men you freed will have a vital role to play in the weeks to come. Just ask for their help, and they’ll join you.”
“And, once I have my little band of thieves?” he asked, thinking that he might have an idea of just what Ugo was getting at, but wanting to be certain, all the same.
“Send them out on an errand, or to distract a group of guards you can’t be seen by,” the thief said, grinning as he confirmed Ezio’s suspicions. “Now, I’ll tell you what we’re going to do today: Antonio’s plan calls for a bit of deception. We’re to imitate his archers, which means that we’ll need the armor that they wear. A shipment of the stuff has just been loaded into chests, and now awaits delivery to Seta,” Ugo continued, before the pair of them, were forced to pause for a long moment as a small group of Barbarigo guardsmen made their way along the fringes of the crowd; Ezio was careful to watch them without looking, the way Uncle Mario had taught him, what sometimes felt like ages ago. “I want you to watch over my men while they loot the chests and fetch the armor. Then, when that’s done with, meet me back here. I’ll be sure to have found a boat we can use by then; we’ll use it to move our men into the palazzo undetected.”
“Consider it done,” he said, nodding and turning to leave.
Slipping back in among the crowds, determinedly avoiding the gaze of the Barbarigo guardsmen who had been sent to patrol the docks, Ezio paused for a long moment, carefully positioning himself so that he would be out of sight of the crowds when he climbed back up to the rooftops once more. Just as he’d no desire to find himself followed by one of the archers, Ezio didn’t want to risk one of the more brash citizens attempting to follow the path that he had taken; there was far too much of a chance for someone without the training of either a thief or an Assassin would injure themselves in any attempt to follow in his footsteps.
He simply preferred not to take those kinds of chances.
Once he’d caught up to the first of the men he’d be watching over, Ezio returned the signal the man had given him, and followed along to deal with any of the guards he might have otherwise encountered. The sun climbed to its zenith as he worked, staying high overhead while he took care of the last patrol in their way, and just barely beginning its westerly descent as he moved onto the next of the men who would be wanting his aid.
And so Ezio continued on, until he’d found every last one of the three thieves that he’d been asked to give his aid to during what was swiftly becoming this late afternoon, and then swiftly made his way back to Ugo at the docks. True to his word, the thief had indeed managed to secure a boat for them all, and stood waiting beside it while Ezio and the three thieves he’d shepherded to this place all gathered together once more.
“Molto bene, Ezio,” Ugo said, grinning in the swiftly-falling dusk. “This is exactly what we needed. I’ll let Antonio know you’ve finished the job.”
“Grazie,” he said, nodding as the four thieves he’d been aiding set about hiding both the gondola and the uniforms they’d all put such a great deal of time into securing. “I’ll see if there’s any cleaning up to be done,” he said, knowing that none of the remaining guards were likely to have taken well to the demise of their fellows.
“Bene,” Ugo said, nodding back with a smile. “Come back to the courtyard when you’re done.”
“Sí,” he said, nodding and making his way back up to the rooftops once more.
After making another round, focusing the main part of his attention on the docks, Ezio turned his path back to the courtyard once again. Leaping easily down from one of the taller buildings that ringed the expanse, Ezio made his way over to the door to Antonio’s holdings. Knocking firmly on the door, Ezio found himself quickly let in by a smiling Ugo.
“Please, come in, amico.”
“Grazie, Ugo,” he said, following as he’d been bidden to do.
The pair of them made their way inside, swiftly meeting up with Antonio, once again in his study, looking over the model of the Palazzo Della Seta that Ezio had seen him working with on so many occasions.
Chapter 225: Chasing dogs
Chapter Text
“Your good work has restored to us our former strength, Ezio,” the leader of Venezia’s thieves said, a calm, pleased smile on his face, his right fist raised and clenched with the strength of his resolve. “We are ready to strike.”
“Just tell me what needs to be done, and I’ll see that it is,” he said, feeling the weight of his own resolve settling over him like an invisible cloak.
“You’ll approach from above, under the cover of night,” Antonio said, expression becoming serious, as his gaze lowered back to the model he’d been examining when Ezio and Ugo had made their way inside. “Emilio has posted archers around the Palazzo. Kill them, but do so quietly. As they fall, my men shall replace them.”
“What about the guards?” he asked, after a moment spent studying the model, himself.
“When you’ve finished with the archers, we’ll regroup in front of this building, here,” Antonio said, pointing out what seemed like it represented some kind of squat, low building; it looked like some manner of storehouse, of like it would have been one, in Venezia’s better days. “And discus next steps.”
“That won’t be a problem,” he said, grinning determinedly. “I’ll take care of the archers, and get your men into place.”
“Then it’s settled,” Antonio said, looking more than pleased. “Good hunting, fratello mio.”
“Grazie,” he said, turning to make his way back out into the swiftly-falling night.
After having been given a general idea of just where it was that he would be hunting, Ezio made his way back out into the courtyard and up to Venezia’s rooftops once more. He’d thought it a bit strange, that there were two more targeted archers than uniforms that the thieves he’d been working with had stolen, but he thought that he might have understood Antonio’s reasoning: if enough archers were struck down, then the Barbarigo might be willing to overlook some unfamiliar faces among their ranks.
If that had indeed been Antonio’s plan, then Ezio was happy to help him carry it out.
Hunting down the five archers that Antonio had marked for death at his hands was somewhat easier than it would have been if he hadn’t spent so much time hunting in and among the archers of Venezia, or at least that was what it felt like, as he climbed, sought, and killed one after the other, until he could toss the last of the five archers into a convenient pile of leaves that been raked up some time ago by some group of city workers that he couldn’t spare more than a moment’s thought for. With the last of them dead, Ezio took a moment to catch his breath, before turning his path towards the warehouse where Antonio and his hand-picked cadre of thieves would be awaiting him.
Calling up his second-sight for a moment, wanting to be certain that Antonio and his fellows had indeed arrived, Ezio grinned in the falling darkness when he saw that the man was indeed standing there, looking out into the shadows as though he could see through them, as well.
Chapter 226: Thieves in archers’ clothing
Chapter Text
“Over here,” Rosa called, and he hurried over to the sound of her voice.
She, Ugo, and Antonio himself had all gathered together, and he’d just caught a glimpse of the blue-shrouded forms of the disguised archers moving out, so he suspected their time to act was coming fast.
“Well done, Ezio,” Antonio said, sounding thoroughly pleased by everything he’d just seen. “Everything is going according to plan: even as we speak, my men are replacing the archers you’ve removed. The way to the Palazzo is clear, now.”
“But, not the building, itself,” Ezio reminded them, himself most of all, since he remembered all too well when rushing into something hadn’t been good for him at all; and yes, those times mostly belonged to the past, to Ezio the boy from Firenze, who hadn’t known what hardship truly was, and had had not even the slightest inkling of the burdens that Father and his littlest sister had been laboring under. Still, now that he was an Assassin, the lessons from those times were more important than ever; after all, there was far more at stake for an Assassin than simply family pride. “Emilio’s guards still patrol its border.”
“Use my men,” Ugo suggested. “They can deal with the guards; save you from having to make too much noise on your own.”
“And, when it comes time to storm the place, remember what I’ve taught you,” Rosa said, a stern expression on her face; he supposed all of them were feeling the urgency of this night of nights.
“Take care, Ezio,” Antonio said, clapping him on the right shoulder like an old comrade. “We await word of your success.”
“I’ll be sure to bring it quickly, then,” he said, offering a tight, grim smile. “Insieme per la vittoria.”
“Insieme,” Antonio, Ugo, and Rosa said almost as one, their smiles just as grim as the one he’d offered.
Turning his path towards the walls and fences that surrounded the Palazzo Della Seta, Ezio paused for a moment, taking the time to send several groups of Ugo’s thieves out to cause trouble in various areas of the city, and thereby to draw attention away from what he was about to be doing. He hoped that those men would survive the night, but he could spare little thought for anything but the high, imposing walls of the palazzo he was approaching at last.
Once the last of the guards had been drawn away – and there was one more group of Ugo’s thieves who had put their lives in his hands – Ezio made his way up the walls of the Palazzo Della Seta. It wasn’t nearly as simple as he’d been hoping, since the walls were far less ornate than he’d been expecting of such a palazzo, and so did not offer quite so many hand-holds as he would have honestly preferred. Still, he made it over the outer wall soon enough, and found himself looking down into covered walkway bordering the edge of a large courtyard.
Looking down at an argument, it seemed…
Chapter 227: Emilio Barbarigo
Chapter Text
“Your little house of cards is crumbling, Emilio,” a rough-voiced man, clearly one of the Templars’ other conspirators in Venezia, growled.
“A minor setback, it will be dealt with,” the man who was clearly Emilio said, a dismissive tone to his voice; Ezio preferred that his enemies underestimate him, since it made dealing with them all the simpler when the time came. “This poor fool Antonio, and his thieves-”
“Nevermind them!” snapped the other man, clearly in no mood to suffer foolishness; he might very well be trouble. “It’s the Assassins you should be worried about!”
“Why? Are they in Venezia?”
“The boy has been here for weeks,” the other man said, his manner swiftly becoming all the more brusque in his impatience. “We haven’t gotten word about the Child of Eden, but we know that he travels with her, and so we have people looking for any sign. The Assassin won’t be able to hide her forever.”
We’ll see who’s hiding soon, you depraved Templar bastard, Ezio ground his teeth at the callous way those men were speaking about the youngest still-living members of his family; he’d have wanted to make the death of that man all the more painful, but Ezio knew that Uncle Mario would have been disappointed in him for thinking about such a thing. He’d understand the provocation, of course, but he’d always encouraged Ezio to be better than men like that.
“Well, that’s a good thing, isn’t it? Having a Child of Eden at our disposal again will make it all the easier to find the Piece that they guard, sí?”
“Not if the Assassin gets to you first, idiota,” the other man snapped.
“What is it you truly wanted here, Carlo?” Emilio asked.
“Maestro has called a meeting,” Carlo said, the tone of satisfaction in his voice unmistakable to Ezio, even as far away as he crouched, waiting atop the roof for his chance to move in. “Three days from now, at Santo Stefano.”
“Bene, I’ll be there,” Emilio said, and Ezio smirked in the moonlight.
“Assuming you still live,” Carlo said, with a rough, cruel sort of amusement in his voice. “If you want my advice, I’d find a less conspicuous place to wait,” Carlo continued, even as Ezio dropped down into the deep shadows cast by the high walls of Seta’s courtyard. “Seta is a target now.”
More than you think, Carlo, Ezio mused, a grin full of morbid good-humor knifing its way across his face.
“Seta is a fortress!” Emilio declared; Ezio grinned all the wider, for just a moment before he focused once more on the task before him.
“If you say so,” Carlo said, sounding as though he’d have liked nothing more than to leave as quickly as he could; Ezio fully approved.
Waiting for just a moment, as the Templar named Carlo vanished out through an interior door to the courtyard, he moved in quickly to deal with Emilio before he could think to do anything more than call for some of his functionaries to begin loading up a boat so that he could depart from Seta with all speed. Ezio wasn’t about to allow that to happen, of course. With the first of his hidden blades extended, Ezio struck like the eagles he’d been named for.
“Do not be afraid,” he said, holding the dying man in his arms.
“I feel no fear, Assassin, only regret. I sought unity, stability. Order.”
“At too great a cost,” Ezio reminded the man in his arms; it was something that seemed to be true, at least for some of the Templars he was called on to hunt: some of them truly did seem to believe that they were doing what was best for the world and its people.
“Progress demands sacrifice…” Emilio said, as his eyes dulled and death took him at last.
“I take no joy in this, but I see no other way. Requiescat in pace.”
Chapter 228: The settling of Seta
Chapter Text
Once the deed was done, Ezio allowed himself to kneel for a moment, steadying himself amid the chaos that always came in the wake of a successful assassination. Of course, the only reason he felt free to do so, instead of running for both his life and freedom the way he would have otherwise done – and had, on every other occasion – was the comforting knowledge that he was not so alone as he had been on those other occasions. And also, that the one watching his back was not his vulnerable littlest sister.
Standing after a moment, as well-aimed arrows began to rain down from the walls surrounding the courtyard, into the bodies of the Barbarigo guardsmen he’d just been about to rise to his feet and fight, Ezio looked up and smiled. Watching with a definite sense of satisfaction as first Ugo, then Rosa appeared over the top of Seta’s roofline, Ezio grinned and waved up at them.
As the pair of them made their way down, moving with such fluidity and grace that Ezio wondered for a long moment if they had had Assassin training of their own, Ezio stood up and smiled as the pair of them leaped the last of the way down into Seta’s courtyard. The disguised thieves followed swiftly behind them, and Ezio’s smile broadened into a small grin.
“Come,” Rosa said, a grin to match Ezio’s own blooming on her pretty face.
“Bene,” he said, falling into step with her as the pair of them made their way over to the large, front door of the palazzo they’d just taken possession of.
“Seta has fallen, and Emilio is no more!” Antonio said, kissing both him and Rosa alike in his enthusiasm. “So much of that is thanks to you, Ezio. Every one in Venezia owes you so much, even if they don’t know it.”
“Anyone with the training could have done the same, amico,” he said, reminding the both of them that it was true, in the end. “All of you had a part in this, as well.”
Antonio chuckled gently. “Still as modest as ever, I see,” he said, then turned his attention to the other thieves that had started making their way in behind him. “Go, tear down Emilio’s banners! Return what he has stolen from the people!” his fellow thieves rushed quickly to do as they’d been asked, and Ezio himself was just about to depart – he’d have a long journey in the dark, and would also need to avoid the gazes of the night guards, who would of course be searching particularly diligently considering the lateness of the hour – he saw Antonio’s gaze shift back to him. “Tell me, Ezio, how can I repay you for your service?”
“Money’s always nice,” he said, grinning in return for the man’s kindly smile and kinder offer.
“Easy enough,” Antonio said, with a gentle sort of good humor, holding out his right hand to a passing thief, who in return passed him a large bag near-bursting with Florins. “What else?”
“Emilio was meeting with a man named Carlo,” he said. “He looked to be a government official. Do you know him?”
“Carlo Grimaldi,” Antonio said, smile slipping from his face. “He sits on the Council of Ten. Why do you ask? What are you up to?”
“I have a meeting to attend,” he said, thinking of the remaining Templars – Rodrigo Borgia in particular – who would soon reveal themselves to him, all unawares.
“It seems that you have other business in Venezia than just the Barbarigo,” Antonio said, the expression on his face seeming to say without words that he understood.
“Sí,” he said, nodding. “In any case, I’d best get back before anyone has a chance to start wondering where I am.”
“Back to your inventor friend, sí?” Antonio asked, a calm, understanding smile on his face.
“And my little sister,” he said, returning the smile.
“Of course,” Antonio said, smile widening into a grin as the pair of them embraced. “Come back as soon as you can, sí? We’ll have a proper celebration.”
“I will,” he said, grinning as he turned to leave.
Chapter 229: Home and hearth
Chapter Text
He walked out through the front gate this time, since there were few enough guards out in this part of the district to harass or hamper him, under the circumstances. Making his way back up to the rooftops once more, Ezio headed back to the palazzo that he shared with Leonardo and little Maria. It would have been good to see them again, when he got back, but with the lateness of the hour, he knew that the both of them would have likely long since gone to bed.
He’d make it up to them both tomorrow.
When he’d finally made it back to the palazzo, after edging carefully through the gaps that he’d discovered in the attention of the guards who stood watch over them all while they slept, Ezio allowed himself to fully relax for the first time since the events of this particularly eventful day had begun. Back inside the palazzo at last, Ezio quickly made for his room, knowing the way almost by heart after so long spent in this place.
After stripping and dressing once again in his sleeping clothes, Ezio settled himself back into his bed for the night.
The next morning, feeling refreshed and ready to face the new day, Ezio rose, washed, and dressed for breakfast. Smiling as he made his way to the dining room, he raised an eyebrow as he caught sight of what looked like a miniature of the flying machine that he had been building, as well as something else. It seemed to be some kind of a basket, with a windmill of all things perched atop it.
“I see you’re still working on that flying machine of yours,” he commented, turning his attention from the miniatures on the table back to Leonardo. “But, what is that basket of yours?”
“It’s actually based on an idea that your sister had,” Leonardo said, looking pleased to be able to speak about one of his inventions.
Sitting back as Leonardo began speaking in earnest about what he and little Maria had been working on, while he had been hunting Emilio Barbarigo, and learning more about his Templar allies in Venezia. It was fairly interesting, though the idea of a man actually flying – whether on those wood-and-cloth wings that Leonardo himself had designed, or else that windmill basket that he and little Maria had collaborated on – was still too incredible for him to take seriously.
He only hoped that when this mad idea of theirs proved to be as fanciful as it sounded, Leonardo and little Maria wouldn’t be too disappointed.
As he left for the day, making his way back through the streets – clear of guards that would harass him, in the wake of Antonio’s takeover of Seta – Ezio made his way back to the Palazzo Della Seta. Rosa had all but said that there was to be a celebration of their victory over Emilio, and while he didn’t quite know if Uncle Mario would truly approve of them celebrating the death of one of their opponents, but the liberation of a district from Templar influence?
That seemed more like something Uncle Mario would approve of.
Once he made it back to the Palazzo Della Seta, through streets that were swiftly filling with cheerful citizens and happy merchants – most of whom seemed to be carrying some kind of basket or satchel – Ezio quickly found himself dragged back into the courtyard of the large palazzo once more.
Chapter 230: Runner’s high
Chapter Text
“Buon giorno, Rosa,” he said, grinning at the obvious eagerness he could see in her demeanor. “You just couldn’t wait to have me back again, I see.”
“Don’t flatter yourself, grullo,” the pretty young thief said, grinning at him in a distinctly challenging manner. “You might have been able to make it past all of Emilio’s guards, but this is the real test,” she said, grin seeming to widen all that much farther. “Let’s see if you’re as fast as you think you are, sí?”
“Bene,” he said, feeling a bright, challenging grin stretching his own lips. “Where to and where from?”
“From here to the Punta della Dogana! Starting now!”
Before he could say another word, Rosa had dashed off back out thought Seta’s large double-doors, made her way up the side of a building, and waved to him from the roof. He wasn’t so far behind her, of course, but knowing that she’d cheated… Ezio shook his head, chuckling as he leaped between a pair of buildings, steadily closing the gap that Rosa had originally placed between them.
“It seems I won, carissima,” he said, grinning as he watched Rosa climb the last of the way up to where he himself perched, on the roof of the Punta della Dogana.
“Well, since you’re so eager to brag about it, grullo, how about we have another one?”
“I’m sure the both of you would be perfectly happy to go running all over Venezia if you could,” Ugo said, swinging himself up and onto the rooftop with them. “But Antonio sent me to fetch you.”
“Is this about the party?” he asked, grinning at both the invitation and the look of amusement on Ugo’s face as he looked at the pair of them.
“Antonio might have mentioned something about that,” Ugo said, grinning as the three of them leaped easily back across the way they’d came.
Ezio heard the crowds, cheering and hooting at the spectacle as they watched it from the ground, but paid them little mind as he kept moving. He’d forgotten, in the excitement of the moment, that Antonio had also wished to celebrate their recent victory over Emilio. Now, following Ugo and Rosa back to the Palazzo della Seta, Ezio found himself feeling almost as light as he had when he and Rosa had been running and leaping across Venezia’s rooftops for the sheer excitement and challenge of it.
Yes, he didn’t know if Uncle Mario would have truly approved of the precise reason for their celebration, but Ezio was at least reasonably sure that the man would understand their desire, all the same.
Chapter 231: Tomb raiding
Chapter Text
When the three of them had returned once more to Seta, he found that Antonio had almost seemed to be expecting something like that to happen. Of course, when he considered just how long the pair of them must have known each other – in addition to the man’s own words – Ezio realized that he shouldn’t truly have been so surprised as he was at what the man had said to them when they’d arrived. More and more, Antonio’s band of thieves was seeming like more of a family than anything else.
The celebration they held only served to cement that impression.
Once it was over, leaving Ezio with a full belly and suffused with the warmth of good wine and better company, he smiled. They’d sampled some of Seta’s own stock, of course, but in the main they’d indulged themselves with a number of Antonio’s own collection, clearly reserved for moments such as this one. It took a few days before Antonio and his fellows could truly call themselves settled, of course, but in that time Ezio was pleased to watch as the district steadily revived under the steady hands and eyes of Antonio and his men.
As well as those women who, like Rosa, had chosen to dedicate themselves to the cause that Antonio stood for.
It was about a day or so later when he returned once more – leaving Leonardo and little Maria to continue their work on those odd little flying contraptions they were pouring such a great deal of time and effort into – this time heading to the basilica at San Marco. He’d spotted the familiar glow in his second-sight that meant there was something of interest to him in that place, but hadn’t had time to follow up on such a thing while he’d been celebrating their victory with Antonio.
However, he’d made note of it, and now that he’d the time to make his way back, he fully intended to claim the Seal hidden within.
Once he’d made his way through the concealed entrance – concealed, that was, to anyone who didn’t possess the second-sight that Ezio had inherited from his father; the sight that little Maria also seemed to possess – Ezio found himself facing hearing what seemed to be some kind of machinery, just setting itself into position. He wondered about that, staring out and down into the vast expanse of San Marco’s Basilica, but then quickly set his mind to the task at hand.
Yes, it seemed as though it would be a simple matter of crossing the floor and opening the crypt before him, but Ezio suspected that whoever had designed this place had had a much more intricate set of defenses in mind.
Making his way over to what looked like all of the other crypts he’d seen at the end of the mazes he’d traversed in the other Assassin Tombs he’d been to before, Ezio triggered the release mechanism and turned to look back out at the expanse of the room he stood in. Sure enough, four triggers that had been painted to look like open books popped up from the four sides of a large mosaic on the floor. He’d never given much thought to that, those times when he and Father had visited this place, but it seemed that there was more to the basilica than he’d ever believed possible.
Stepping on the closest of the triggers, Ezio watched as some kind of strange contraption descended from the domed ceiling, and sighed. Whatever mad maestro designed this place, I’m certain Leonardo would have loved to meet him, Ezio mused, shaking his head in exasperation. Yes, this would doubtless make a rather interesting story to tell the eccentric inventor, but Ezio knew that his arms weren’t going to be best pleased with him after the ordeal he was about to put them through.
Chuckling a bit at his own wayward musings, Ezio began to unravel the strange puzzle that he’d revealed within the center of San Marco’s Basilica.
Once he’d managed to pull the last of the four levers, forcing it down with the weight of his body as he leaped, Ezio watched in some surprise as the mosaic at the center of the four painted books – that had slowly twisted around to reveal that there was an Assassin sigil integrated into the image itself – began to descend into the depths of the Basilica, revealing what seemed to be a hidden room beneath the structure itself. It wasn’t so much different from all the others that he’d seen, but getting to it…
Truly, Ezio would be perfectly pleased to never have to encounter another one of these pain-in-the-ass leaping puzzles ever again.
Descending into the room he’d worked so hard to reveal, Ezio allowed himself a brief sigh of relief. Whatever else he was going to find in this hidden room, it couldn’t be nearly as troublesome as the puzzles he’d just solved to access it. Once he’d taken the Seal from the actual crypt, Ezio made his way over to the hidden door that had been revealed once he’d done so.
His trek back up and out into the streets of Venezia was a pure relief, after such a troublesome excursion as the one he’d been through, and the fresh air from the wind that blasted him in the face as he made his way up and out of the hidden catacombs that lay beneath Venezia the same way they’d lain beneath Forlì. He sometimes wondered just who had built those catacombs in the first place, but for all he’d learned during the course of his life, Ezio could hardly call himself a scholar.
Chapter 232: Roundabout
Chapter Text
Making his way back to Seta, to take what rest he could before resuming his work, Ezio thought again of the meeting that Emilio and Carlo Grimaldi had been speaking of; the one that was to be held only a day from now. The one where Grimaldi would be meeting with not only his fellow Templars, but Rodrigo Borgia, as well. Even the thought of that man brought back a flare of that same, hot rage that he’d found himself subsumed by when he’d been forced to watch helplessly as Father, Federico, and Petruccio had been hung.
True, such a thing had cooled in the intervening time, but it was no less intense than it had been when he’d seen three of his own family members dangling from the same, oversized gibbet.
Breathing deeply to calm himself once more, Ezio continued on his way back to the Palazzo Della Seta. Antonio and the others would doubtless be wondering where he was, and the sooner he could finish up the day’s work the sooner he could return to little Maria and Leonardo. His littlest sister was becoming steadily more enamored with the flying contraptions that she and Leonardo were attempting to create. And, since he’d never seen either of them fly, he wished to be close, so that he would be able to cheer the pair of them up once they both found that their flights of fancy had been simply that.
Sighing in relief once he’d come within sight of Antonio’s courtyard, Ezio made his way up to the door. Pausing to knock, Ezio smiled as he was invited inside once more.
“It’s good to see you again, amico,” Antonio said, smiling at Ezio as he made his way over to the leader of Venezia’s thieves once more.
“You too, amico mio,” he said, as the pair of them embraced for a moment. “Will you be needing me for anything today?”
~AC: II~
They’d been searching for some time, to find a way of propelling the other flying machine that he and Maria had dreamed up, and the pair of them had once again returned to the simple, marvelous fact that heat made things rise into the air. Even after so long spent working on the lifting-bag, Leonardo still found it fascinating to watch the waves of heat from a large fire quite literally ripple as they rose into the air.
True, he’d already known that there had to have been some way for the heat from a fire to be capable of spreading throughout the room where it had been lit, but actually seeing the distortion in the air had been something else entirely.
Now, however, he’d gone back to work on the propeller. It had been something that he’d noticed, that the waves of heat from a large enough fire could actually push a metal structure – provided it was light enough – and was now working to incorporate that feature into the design of the mechanism he intended to use to propel his and Maria’s… well, he supposed that he couldn’t truly call this new project of theirs a flying machine, since it didn’t seem as though it was apt to fly so much as float.
Well, perhaps it will be able to fly in some small way, if I can manage to get this propeller working, he mused, smiling as he continued to tinker with the workings of the mechanism he was designing. The both of them knew to varying degrees just what it was that they needed, but as such a thing had never before been attempted… Well, it was only natural that they would need time to fully realize it.
~AC: II~
When he’d finally been able to return to the palazzo that he shared with little Maria and Leonardo, after a productive day with Antonio and the thieves of Venezia, Ezio was more than ready to head off to bead and sleep for the rest of the night. He’d managed to stake out a good point to listen in on the meeting that Grimaldi and some of his fellow Templars – Borgia in particular – would be holding in Venezia entirely too soon. If I never see another Templar again, it would be too soon, Ezio groused, continuing on his way through the corridors of their shared palazzo.
After wishing both his littlest sister and their inventor friend a good night, Ezio made his way back to his room at last, settling down once more for a well-deserved night’s rest.
The next morning, after sitting down to the morning’s meal with Leonardo and little Maria, Ezio made his way back out into the open air of Venezia once again. This was the morning that Emilio Barbarigo and Carlo Grimaldi had been speaking of, just before he’d ended the tyranny of the Barbarigo within Venezia; the morning on which the meeting he intended to spy on was to take place.
Once he’d managed to position himself close enough to overhear the conversation that would be taking place between the Templars who had made so many bids to control not only Venezia but the whole of Italia herself, but far enough that he’d less chance of those same men observing him in turn, Ezio waited with the patience that so many years spent working within the Brotherhood had drilled into him.
When a man he couldn’t help but recognize as Carlo Grimaldi himself made his way out to the designated meeting point, Ezio forced himself not to give any indication that he was interested in who they were or what they were about to discus; this was always one of the more difficult parts of this kind of an investigation, he’d found. The waiting and watching that some might have found relaxing only served to make him all the more eager to move.
He was a man of action, when one came right down to it.
Chapter 233: Chasing clues
Chapter Text
“Where is Emilio?” demanded a younger man, no less sour-faced than Grimaldi; he thought that the man’s appearance might have matched the description he’d been given of Emilio’s cousin Silvio Barbarigo.
Particularly in light of the hooded robes he wore, marking him out as a State Inquisitor.
“I told him to be here,” Grimaldi said, looking up at Silvio from his place on a low, stone bench.
“You told him yourself?” Silvio asked, his tone carrying an unspoken insinuation. “In person?”
“Yes, myself, in person,” Grimaldi snapped, rising to his feet as Silvio looked around the square and Ezio carefully concealed himself. “I’m concerned that you don’t trust me.”
“As am I,” Silvio said, clearly having assured himself that there were no unfriendly eyes currently upon him. “Perhaps he’ll arrive with the others,” Silvio said, though there was something in his tone that suggested he doubted that. “Walk with me.”
Sighing briefly, knowing that such was the simplest way of evading the gaze of any particularly unfriendly eyes – or at least most people thought so – Ezio melted back in among the crowds and followed Silvio and Grimaldi at a discreet distance. With his second-sight activated – even for the brief handful of seconds it took for him to fully register the colors radiating before his altered vision – Ezio was able to discern Silvio and Grimaldi by the flickering, golden light that marked them out as having information that he wanted.
Breathing deeply, Ezio tailed the Templars he’d marked out.
“So, how go things at the palace?” Silvio asked.
“Honestly? It’s difficult,” Grimaldi said, sounding worn and tired enough that Ezio would have almost sympathized with him, if the pair of them had been different sorts of men. “Mocenigo keeps his circle close. I have tried to lay the groundwork, making suggestions, but he has other voices in his ears.”
“The, you must work harder,” Silvio said, as though things were just that simple; perhaps that was what all Templars believed, or simply what they wished to be true. “Become part of his inner-circle.”
“Sí, I know,” Grimaldi said. “But it’s harder than I expected,” the old man continued, his tone seeming all the more beaten-down as he spoke.
“And, why is that, Carlo?” Silvio asked, his voice once more rife with insinuations.
“I don’t know!” Grimaldi shouted, clearly having had more than enough of Silvio’s near-outright mockery. “I suppose, the Doge doesn’t like me.”
“I wonder why,” Silvio said, sounding as though he would have been smirking, if only Ezio could have seen him without the worry of being seen in return.
“It’s not my fault!” Grimaldi snapped. “I keep trying to please him; learn what he likes and have it delivered. The finest jams from the orchards of Sardinia! The newest fashions from Milano!”
“Yes, and that’s called being a sycophant,” Silvio snapped, before Grimaldi could begin to properly list everything he’d been doing to make his way into the Doge’s good graces.
“A what?” Grimaldi asked; Ezio doubted he’d be grateful to learn just what it was that Silvio had been calling him. “What did you call me?!”
“A doormat. A flatterer. A bootlicker,” Silvio sneered. “Need I go on?”
“Bastardo,” Grimaldi snapped back, clearly having gotten his back up. “You don’t know what it’s like. You don’t understand the pressure in there-!”
“Oh, I don’t understand pressure?” Silvio echoed, the mockery in his tone clear enough that someone would have had to have been either deaf, an idiot, or both to miss it.
“No, you have no idea!” Grimaldi out-and-out snarled. “You are a government official! I am two steps from the Doge himself! I am beside him day and night! You wish you could be where I am!”
“Are you done?” Silvio asked, not sounding particularly impressed with Grimaldi’s tirade.
“Hardly,” the old man snapped back. “You listen to me now: I’m close. The Doge can be recruited to our cause, I’m sure of it! I just… I need a little more time.”
“Time is not a thing we have in great supply,” Silvio said, and his posture combined with his tone suggested that he was shooting Grimaldi a look of disapproval.
Continuing on his way through the crowds, Ezio found himself crossing a bridge over one of the many canals that made Venezia such a popular destination for so many sightseers. Stepping into the back of a crowd of them, wondering all the while just how it was that they managed to ignore the terrible stench of the canals, Ezio kept his eyes on Silvio and Grimaldi as they continued on their way. Once he was as certain as he could be that the pair of them wouldn’t be able to catch sight of him with a simple backwards glance, Ezio moved away from the sightseers and continued his pursuit.
There had to be more that he could learn from this, though what he’d found out already wasn’t particularly comforting.
“Keep moving,” Silvio said.
“Is it much further?” Grimaldi asked.
“Don’t be such a little girl,” Silvio snapped, seeming to have lost whatever little patience a man like him might have possessed.
Chapter 234: Hunting the hunters
Chapter Text
As he continued on his way, crossing over another footbridge that spanned yet another canal, Ezio wrinkled his nose as he continued on his way, eventually making his way underneath the large, extravagant arches of what looked to be another indoor courtyard. Narrowing his eyes as he caught sight of another pair of men approaching Silvio and Grimaldi where they stood, Ezio carefully made his way through the crowds so that he would be able to more clearly overhear what they were saying.
There was little chance that it wouldn’t be important, considering everything else he’d just learned.
“Buon giorno, cousin, Signor Carlo,” said the old, white-bearded man who had introduced himself as a relation of Silvio’s, if not an immediate one.
“We thought Emilio would be with you,” Silvio said, sounding like he was eager for answers and no longer considered it worth his time to be polite.
“Emilio is dead,” the old man – Silvio’s cousin – said flatly.
“What?!” Silvio demanded. “How?!”
“The Assassin,” Grimaldi rasped, and Ezio bit back an amused smirk through sheer force of will. “The same one who hunted down the Pazzi! He’s here, in Venezia!”
“Just so,” Silvio’s elderly cousin said. “Silvio, did you not know about this? He could be anywhere, and we might not even know it,” the elderly Barbarigo said, sweeping his left arm to take in the whole of the square where they were standing. “He struck Emilio inside his own palazzo!” the elderly Barbarigo ranted, drawing a small, secret smile from Ezio where he stood.
“And so? What of our plans?!” Silvio demanded, looking from his cousin to Grimaldi and then back again.
“There is no longer time for subtlety, my brothers,” Silvio’s cousin said. “We must act now.”
“But, Marco, I’m so close,” Grimaldi said, and Ezio noted that Silvio’s cousin was likely named Marco Barbarigo. “A few more days. If I can just-”
“No,” Marco snapped, his tone heavy and final. “It happens this week.”
“We should keep moving,” said a tall, broad, round-shouldered man that Ezio suspected was Marco’s bodyguard.
“And, what does the Spaniard have to say of this change of plan?” Silvio demanded, not sounding particularly pleased.
“You may ask him yourself, soon enough,” Marco said, as their joined group of four continued on their way.
“He’s here?” Grimaldi asked, seeming surprised to hear such a thing; perhaps he hadn’t been told nearly as much as he’d expected to be. “From Roma?”
“So I’ve heard,” Marco said.
“Good,” Silvio replied, sounding rather pleased with the affair. “Then, perhaps he’s made a decision.”
The four of them continued on their way, seeming to be simply a group of men taking in the sights of the city around them, and Ezio melted back into the crowds so that he could follow them without so much of a risk of being seen.
“About what, cousin?” Marco asked.
“About which one of us will step in to replace the Doge, cousin,” Silvio said, his tone beginning to sound as though he were insinuating something once again.
It was beginning to seem that the Templars could poison even the bonds between family; it seemed that those who joined up with them possessed the kind of insatiable craving for power that would lead them into conflict even with those who should have been closest to them.
“I didn’t know there was a decision to be made,” Marco said, a slight sneer coloring his tone. “Surely, the choice is obvious to all.”
“Obvious, indeed,” Silvio snapped back. “It should be the one who organized the entire operation. The one who came up with the idea of how to save this city!”
“There is no lack of value in tactical intelligence, good Silvio,” Marco said, though to Ezio it sounded more as though he was humoring his cousin rather than speaking his true thoughts on the matter at hand. “But it is wisdom that one truly needs to rule. Do not think otherwise.”
“Calma, calma, amici,” Grimaldi said, and as Ezio turned the corner that he’d previously put between himself and the Templars he was following, he saw the old man step up to the pair of them with his palms raised. “Please, there’s no need for all this. You know, it’s not up to either of you. For all we know, he might not even choose a Barbarigo.”
“Then who, you?” Silvio demanded, bursting out into loud, raucous laughter at the suggestion.
“And, why not me?” Grimaldi demanded, clearly becoming furious once again. “I’m the one who’s done all the hard work!”
“Enough! Marco commanded, head moving as though he was turning glares upon first his cousin and then Grimaldi. “We wait for his arrival.”
“Are you sure he’s coming?” Grimaldi asked, as the four of them started walking again after yet another nudge from Marco’s bodyguard.
“Yes!” Marco shouted impatiently.
“We should move faster, signori,” Marco’s bodyguard said, still scanning around them in a futile attempt to find anything amiss. “I feel eyes on us.”
Good instincts for a hired thug, Ezio mused, narrowing his eyes as he took in the alertness of Marco’s man.
Chapter 235: Overheard and unforeseen
Chapter Text
“Grazie, Dante,” Marco said, and Ezio made note of the name of the man he’d just been inadvertently introduced to. “We will move at your pace.”
“This guard’s a good find, cousin,” Silvio said, sounding pleased. “How much did you pay for him?”
“Perhaps not as much as he deserves,” Marco said. “He’s saved my life on two occasions. Though I can’t say he’s much of a conversationalist.”
“Enough with your inane prattle!” Ezio ground his teeth at the sight of the Spaniard – Rodrigo Borgia – who had presided over the deaths of Father, Federico, and Petruccio, and whose trail he’d always seemed to lose when it was truly important. “The choice of Doge was never up to any of you. And you were never given permission to make plans!”
“Forgive us, Maestro, we wish only to serve,” Marco said, bowing his head in submission.
“The plan is this: Doge Mocenigo will die tonight. And, once the deed’s been done, Marco shall take his place.”
“You have my humblest gratitude, Maestro,” Marco said, with a deep, almost extravagant bow; it was all Ezio could do to keep from sneering at the man.
It was both pitiful and infuriating, the lengths that every Templar was clearly willing to go, simply to ensure that they would be able to grab whatever small measure of power they could for themselves. To say nothing of how dangerous it made them, of course.
“Good,” Borgia said, turning his attention away from Marco with what seemed like hardly a thought. “Messer Grimaldi. You are closest to Mocenigo; your work the most vital. Serve us well, and it won’t be forgotten. Walk with me.”
Knowing that he wouldn’t learn anything more from trying to continue after the pair of Barbarigo, Ezio stepped back in among the press and swirl of the crowds, focusing his attention on Borgia and Grimaldi.
“I don’t want any blood spilled, you understand? It must appear to all that he goes quietly,” Borgia said, his tone as low and intense as Ezio had ever heard it. “When are you closest to him?”
“I have full run of the palace,” Grimaldi said; it was not a comforting thought, that. “He may not care to hear what I have to say, but he trusts me now as one of his own.”
“Bravo,” Borgia said, though he didn’t sound any more enthusiastic than he had before. “Then I want you to infiltrate the kitchen, and poison his meal. Marco, can you furnish us with a suitable toxin on short notice?”
“I defer to my cousin,” Marco said. “That is really his area of expertise.”
“Ah, Silvio…” Grimaldi said.
“I am at your service, Maestro,” Silvio said, and Ezio watched as he flourished a bow of his own.
“What can you bring, to get this done?” Borgia asked.
“I will confer with my associates in the streets,” Silvio said, as the five of them continued on their way. “But, chances are good that I can procure some Cantarella.”
“Yes, and what is that?” Borgia asked.
“It is a most effective form of arsenic, and rather difficult to trace,” Silvio said, sounding rather pleased with himself; Ezio narrowed his eyes, knowing that time was closing in on him once again.
“Va bene,” Borgia said, sounding about as pleased as Silvio himself had. “Then it’s decided.”
Following the five of them through the crowds, on the off-chance that at least one of them would have something more to say about the terrible plan that all of them were forming, Ezio began forming his own plan. He would have to make his plans quickly, as well, since the Templars had only given him to the end of this very day to actually do something about the attempted murder he’d been all but told about by the Templars whose footsteps he was following in.
“Forgive me, Maestro, but is this not perhaps a tad dangerous for you?” Marco asked, his head turning to Borgia with what Ezio thought might have been an expression of concern; whether it was genuine or not was another matter. “Involving yourself so intimately with the minutia of our plans?”
“I feel the need to involve myself more directly,” Borgia said, his growl of a voice sounding as though he wasn’t pleased to have been questioned in any kind of way. “The Pazzi disappointed us in Firenze. I pray you will not do the same.”
“Do not worry,” Silvio said, an arrogance in his tone that almost drew an amused smile from Ezio as he stood listening to their conversation. “The Pazzi were a bunch of foolish-”
“The Pazzi were a potent and venerable family,” Borgia’s growl cut Silvio off before the Barbarigo could say more than a handful of words. “Reduced to rubble by one young Assassin, and a misguided Child of Eden. Do not underestimate these troublesome foes, who even now haunt your city, or else the same fate will befall the Barbarigo. I want this done promptly,” Borgia looked around, as though searching for any signs that he was being watched; Ezio made sure he didn’t find anything. “Bene,” he said, having clearly satisfied himself that he and his fellow Templars were as alone as they reasonably could be in such a public place as this. “I must return to Roma. Time is of the essence; do not fail us.”
The four Templars who had come to meet with him – including Dante, who Ezio wasn’t sure was any kind of Templar, but who joined in all the same – all bowed in submission almost before Borgia had finished speaking. Ezio was fair certain that he only blinked for a moment, when the flock of pigeons that had been thrown into the air in the wake of Borgia’s determined stride all took off suddenly, but all the same he’d managed to lose sight of the Templars once they’d all started going their separate ways.
Chapter 236: Those who would speak
Chapter Text
Mentally berating himself, even as he made his way back up among the rooftops so that he would be able to travel more quickly and with less chances of being interrupted while he was on his way back to Antonio, Ezio sighed. He knew that it wouldn’t do him any good to keep going on the way he had, knew that he should focus all of his efforts on returning to the San Polo district once more, but he couldn’t truly help the nagging feeling that – if he’d just managed to keep his eyes open – what he was going to need to do would prove to be just that much simpler, in the end.
Still, there was nothing for it at this late stage of the game, so Ezio gave the rest of his attention to the return journey he was making.
When he’d finally arrived, once again standing within the high walls of the courtyard within the Palazzo Della Seta where Antonio and his fellow thieves now operated out of, Ezio leaped easily back down into the courtyard itself. Allowing himself only a moment to catch his breath once more, he found himself confronted by a widely-grinning Rosa.
“Salute, bello mio,” she said, the welcoming amusement in her tone clear to anyone who listened for even a moment. “Have you come back to see me already?”
Leaning in for the kiss that Rosa so clearly wanted to give him, he grinned back at her pleased smirk. “Sorry, mia cara, but I don’t have time for any fun right now. I must speak with Antonio. It’s urgent.”
“Antonio! Ezio’s here!” she called up for him, turning to the balcony that stood to the left of where the pair of them had been standing. “Still, when you do have time for some fun, bello, remember me, eh?”
Huffing an incredulous chuckle as he felt his right buttock being gripped by one of Rosa’s formidable hands, Ezio turned for a moment to watch her as she sashayed lightly away, throwing a wink back over her left shoulder as she turned to catch his eye. After a few moments of waiting, however, he saw that Antonio was making his own way down to the courtyard, and resolved himself to completing his current, self-imposed mission.
The Doge’s murder wouldn’t wait on his convenience, and neither would the Templars.
“Ezio!” Antonio called, making his way over. “Is everything all right?”
“Carlo Grimaldi and the Barbarigo are in league with the one you call The Spaniard. They’re going to murder the Doge, and replace him with one of their own. They will have all of Venezia – her entire fleet, armies, and trading ports – in their grasp.”
“And they call me a criminal,” Antonio groused, making an elaborate gesture of contempt.
“Then, you’ll help me?” he asked, hoping that he’d managed to convince the other man, but wanting to know that it was true, all the same.
“You and yours have me on your side, brother,” Antonio said, his nod looking like a subtle bow in this instance. “And the support of all my men.”
“And women,” Rosa said, leaning over his right shoulder.
“Grazie, amici,” he said, reminded of the times when little Maria would try to follow along silently behind him, back when the pair of them had been small.
It’d been just like that, when Rosa had made herself a near-silent presence at his side, while he and Antonio had been speaking.
“But, Ezio, I must warn you: it’s not going to be so easy, this time,” Antonio said, his tone stern and serious once more. “Palazzo Ducale is the most heavily guarded building in Venezia.”
He supposed that made sense, since it was the Doge’s personal residence. Still…
“Nothing is impenetrable,” he said, knowing that such was true; particularly considering all that he’d done already.
“This is why we like you, Ezio,” Rosa said, laughing cheerfully.
“Come, let’s go take a look,” Antonio said, waving them all forward as the three of them began to make their way out of Seta’s own courtyard. “We’ll come up with a plan.”
As the three of them continued on their way out of the Palazzo Della Seta, within the Piazza San Marco, Ezio smiled in approval as Rosa volunteered to keep pace with them from the rooftops, and so act as another layer of defense against any unfriendly eyes that might have otherwise have fallen upon them. Once he and Antonio were reasonably certain of the protection she offered, the pair of them continued on their way toward the Palazzo Ducale.
“This business with the Doge, it’s terrible,” Antonio said, as the pair of them made their way up the length of a street lined with merchants in the process of selling their wares; more and more of them had been coming back, ever since he, Antonio, and the thieves of Venezia had managed to purge the lingering influence of Emilio Barbarigo. “Though, I must say that treachery like this no longer surprises me, unfortunately. When I was a child, we were taught that the nobles were just, and kind. I believed it, too,” he said, as he continued to set a steady, determined pace through the crowds of shoppers in their finery. “Though my father was only a cobbler, and my mother a scullery maid, I aspired to be much more…” Antonio shook his head, the wistful air about him dissipating almost as fast as it had settled there. “I studied hard, I persevered, but the nobles would never have me. If you are not born one of them, acceptance is impossible,” there was a hard-edged, reflective sort of grief in Antonio’s tone as he spoke, and couldn’t help thinking back on his own youth, in Firenze.
How many of those poor that he’d seen, on his way to and from Father’s various errands, had been looking to make their own way in the world? How many of them could he have helped, if he’d just known what to look for?
“So, I ask you, Ezio: who are the true nobles of Venezia? Men like Carlo Grimaldi and Marco Barbarigo? No. I say we are: the thieves, and mercenari, and whores. While we work, to save this city and its people, the so-called nobles seek to make it their plaything.”
Chapter 237: Roof stalking
Chapter Text
Antonio sounded like he would have said more, but the pair of them had arrived at a good vantagepoint to see the kind of defenses they would have been faced with, if they were to attempt to access the Palazzo Ducale in their usual way:
“We need to scout the Palazzo carefully; see it from every angle,” Antonio said, once they’d come within sight of the building he was soon to be infiltrating, if only he and Antonio could manage to find a way to circumvent its defenses. “We just might find a way in. Come, I know of a tall Campanile, behind the Palazzo. Or, we might find a way to climb the back of the Basilica. Do you have any ideas, amico?”
“I assume the front door is out?” he deadpanned, trying to lighten the persistently grim mood that seemed to have settled around them like an unwelcome chill.
“Va bene,” Antonio said, chuckling as a light-hearted smile came back to his face. “We’ll try the front door as well, smart ass.”
The pair of them moved off again, heading right around the Piazza San Marco, and making certain to keep the Palazzo Ducale in sight as they did.
“So, what do you think?” he asked, once the pair of them had made their way into a narrow alley, looking upon a barred gate that guarded the entrance to what seemed to be a private courtyard.
“We’re not getting in that way,” Antonio said, his eyes narrowed in dismissive contemplation. “They’ll have more than enough time to murder the Doge before we’d be able to get through all these guards.”
The pair of them resumed their trek, continuing on until they had reached a lonely, abandoned corner of the Piazza. Climbing up onto the roof of what seemed to be an empty warehouse of one kind or another, and then farther, up the side of the bell tower that stood beside it, Ezio waited a few moments for Antonio to catch up to him.
“Look at that! Archers everywhere!” Antonio groused, giving voice to the problem that Ezio himself had noticed, as he was making his way up the side of the bell tower.
“And the walls are impossible to climb on this side,” he said, sighing in frustration as he found himself stymied, yet again.
Leaping lightly from the bell tower, knowing that Antonio would be able to find his own way down sooner than later, Ezio paused at the foot of the tower to allow the leader of Venezia’s thieves to catch up to him. Then, once Antonio had rejoined him once more, the pair of them continued along their original rout. There had to be some way of getting inside the Palazzo Ducale, and with enough time to save the life of Venezia’s Doge, as well as to stop the Templars from succeeding in their aims.
“Bene, it looks like we’re in luck,” Antonio said, once the pair of them had managed to make it into a dark, secluded corner of the piazza. “It looks like we’ve the perfect path up the scaffolding to the roof of the Basilica. Shall we?”
“We shall,” he said, grinning back at Antonio as the pair of them began swiftly making their way up to the top of said scaffolding.
What they found when they reached those lofty heights, however, wasn’t nearly as promising as Ezio had been starting to hope for. Standing before them, far too high to be scaled in the time they would have to work with, was a wrought-iron fence, topped with spear-like spines.
“Ezio, look!” Antonio called, drawing his attention to the courtyard. “Isn’t that Grimaldi?”
Looking down into the courtyard, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he saw the Templar he intended to kill on this very night speaking with Doge Mocenigo. Listening to the conversation taking place beneath them as well as he could manage from such a high vantagepoint as he and Antonio both stood at, Ezio found that Grimaldi was all but threatening the very life.
“We’re running out of time!” Antonio snarled, drawing Ezio’s attention back to the matter that presently troubled them. “There’s no way though this fence, and there are guards everywhere! Diavolo!”
“Stay close,” he muttered, as Antonio seemed almost fit to burst from the frustration that Ezio could see in every line of the thief’s body.
“It’s impossible!” the leader of Venezia’s thieves groused, throwing up his hands in a helpless gesture that Ezio had never thought to see the other man make. “There’s no way in or out for men; only birds!”
It wasn’t something he liked to see in anyone, that same lack of hope that Ezio had found himself prey to for so long when his own father and brothers had been killed by the Templars, and so he found his resolve only bolstered by what he was seeing before him.
“Yes,” he muttered, beginning to grin; this seemed almost predestined, that Leonardo would have been working on just the sort of machine that he would need to get over the barriers that were presently causing him so much trouble. “Birds; of course.”
“Where are you going?!” Antonio demanded, after the pair of them had leaped down from the roof and he’d begun to make his way back through the Piazza San Marco to the line of tall buildings that bordered it.
“Back to my friend, Leonardo!” he called back, his grin growing all the wider.
“The mad inventor?!”
“Sí!”
Chapter 238: Proof of concept
Chapter Text
Scrambling up the nearest wall, Ezio paused for a moment to catch his breath, before swiftly continuing onward. He’d never quite traveled this far away from the palazzo where he and little Maria stayed with Leonardo, at least not without a place to rest in between journeys, but at present he didn’t have the time he would need for anything save a short break when he truly needed it. Pressing swiftly onward, Ezio quickly found himself in familiar territory once more.
From there, he was all the more certain of where he was going, and so was able to make the rest of his journey all the more quickly.
Once he’d made it back onto the grounds of the palazzo where the three of them had been put up by the Duke of Milano – who had clearly taken more than a passing interest in Leonardo and his mad inventions – Ezio carefully skirted the edges of the guards’ patrol-routs, and was finally able to make his way back inside once again. Making his way back through the varied rooms of the homely palazzo, Ezio soon found himself standing inside the workshop that Leonardo and little Maria had been working out of for so long.
“I need your help, Leonardo,” he said, as soon as he’d managed to spot the inventor; hard at work on one of his sketches, as usual.
“Welcome back, fratello,” little Maria called cheerfully, though there was a twist of wry humor to her smile.
“Mi dispiace, sorellina,” he said, making his way over to properly greet his littlest sister and most constant traveling companion. “Your flying machine, does it work?”
“Well, given everything I’ve learned about buoyancy and lift, a lot of it learned alongside your sister, it should be possible to fly it,” Leonardo paused for a moment, clearly gathering his thoughts from wherever they had strayed. “I mean, given the proper preparations, it’s theoretically possible.”
“What do you mean?” he asked, not certain he liked what he was hearing.
“Thus far, your sister and I have only been able to test scale models of the device,” Leonardo said, looking back at the hanging form of his flying machine against the far right wall.
“What do you mean, when you say you’d need to make proper preparations?” he asked, wanting to know everything he possibly could before he embarked on what was beginning to seem as though it would be only slightly less mad than his quest to defeat the Templars in the first place.
“You would need a large fire, to provide the lift that the device would need, in order to keep you from crashing back into the ground,” Leonardo folded his arms, looking rather pensive. “Also, you would need to leap from a tower, to gain the kind of height you would need to gain any distance with the device,” Leonardo sighed, looking put out for some reason that Ezio thought he might have been able to hazard a guess at. “It seems that the lifting-bag that your sister and I worked on together is truly going to be the only way that any man will have the chance at flying.”
“What’s wrong with it?” he asked, knowing that Leonardo would not have been so displeased by something he and little Maria had clearly put a great deal of work into unless there was a good reason for it.
“It lifts perfectly well,” the inventor said, with a short, sharp huff. “It’s just so slow.”
“Sí, the lifting-bag is like an immense, flying turtle,” little Maria said, with a soft laugh.
“So, this flying machine of yours would be a great deal faster than that lifting-bag of yours, sí?” he clarified, receiving nods from both Leonardo and little Maria both. “So, do you think I could test it?”
“I told you, the flying machine needs a large fire, and you would need to jump off of a tower if you wanted to go anywhere at all,” Leonardo said, as though that kind of thing was supposed to dissuade him; he shared a secretly-amused smile with little Maria. “So, if I had both, then would you be willing to let me test it?”
“Well, I suppose,” Leonardo said, the light of discovery beginning to dance in his eyes once again; Ezio knew he had him after that.
Once that was done with, it was a simple matter of gathering up Leonardo’s assistants, and then finding the materials they would need in order to light the fire that Leonardo said he would need. Interestingly enough, Antonio met them on their way to the long, flat roof of the palazzo he, little Maria, and Leonardo were all staying in.
“Antonio,” he said, already knowing that the leader of Venezia’s thieves would have been able to make it past the guards around their palazzo with the same ease that Ezio himself had done, but still wondering why he’d chosen tonight of all nights to do so.
“We need to move quickly, Ezio,” the man said, looking particularly stern and serious. “Word has come that Grimaldi has the poison, and intends to move tomorrow night.”
He was glad that Leonardo had gone ahead with his assistants to set up the flying machine, since there would have been any number of questions and Leonardo would have only worried too much about something he wouldn’t be able to anything about.
“It’s a good thing we’re testing this flying machine out tonight, then,” he said, turning a wry smile on Antonio as the man closed with him.
“Your mad inventor thinks he created a flying machine, eh?” Antonio asked, sounding like he didn’t quite know whether or not to believe his ears.
“Sí, and I think it could be just what we need,” he said, grinning back at Antonio, the returning his attention to Leonardo and his assistants as they worked.
“Ezio!” Leonardo called, hurrying back over to him, the grin on the inventor’s cheerful face telling him nearly all he needed to know. “It’s all ready for you! Come, come!”
Leonardo was nearly vibrating with the excitement that Ezio could spot in every line of his face and body, and he found himself grinning as he was strapped into the winged contraption that the inventor had brought with him up to the roof of their palazzo.
“Buona fortuna, Ezio!” Leonardo called, once he’d finished detailing just how in the world Ezio was supposed to maneuver the contraption he was currently strapped into, grinning widely as he waved.
Waving back, his own smile smaller and more wry than the one he saw on the inventor’s face, Ezio ran to the edge of the roof and leaped. He could see a trio of fires, all neatly spaced apart from one another. Taking a deep breath of the fast-rushing night air, Ezio carefully steered himself around the three bonfires that had been lit up on the grounds below him. He’d a feeling that, were he able to hear anything over the rush of the wind in his ears, he’d have heard Leonardo positively whooping with joy.
Knowing that something he’d spent so much of his time on had worked out so well – if not beyond his wildest dreams, because given what he’d created, Ezio suspected that the inventor’s dreams were wild indeed – had to be the greatest kind of vindication that Leonardo could have asked for.
Turning his path back towards the rooftop where Leonardo, Antonio, little Maria, and a small selection of Leonardo’s assistants were standing in order to bring him back up again. The inventor’s face was rapturous with sheer delight, practically one big grin, and Ezio offered one of his own in return. He had to admit, no one would ever think to expect a sudden assault from the air.
That would be his greatest advantage against the Templars.
“Well, amico mio, your machine worked out better than I would have ever expected,” he said, once he was standing back on the solid foundation of their palazzo’s rooftop.
“Sí, sí! Oh, it was wonderful, seeing it fly like that!” Leonardo enthused, the expression on his face having lost none of its cheer.
“I’m sure it will be perfect for our needs, right Antonio?” he turned to include the leader of Venezia’s thieves in their conversation, and found the man looking surprised, but thoughtful.
“Sí, I think you’re right,” he said, looking confused and thoughtful at once. “I suppose the fires are an important part of the device’s operation?”
“Sí,” Leonardo said, nodding and seeing to regain some of his composure. “They provide the lift the flying machine needs if you want to get any real distance from where you started.”
“Well then, it seems we’re going to need a lot of fires,” he said, looking down briefly at the grounds of their palazzo, where Leonardo’s assistants were putting out the three fires that had enabled him to make a full two circuits of their large courtyard.
“Sí, a whole line of them, leading from here to the Palazzo Ducale,” Antonio said, narrowing his eyes as he, too, looked down into the courtyard.
It seemed as though they were going to have a great deal of work ahead of them, but all of that would have to wait until they’d managed to get a good night’s sleep. He told as much to Leonardo and the others, and even little Maria was willing to listen, which was both funny and a bit sad, since she’d always seemed to hate going to sleep early, back when she’d been staying with Petruccio. Turning to take a last look back down at the courtyard where Leonardo’s assistants were working to clear up the remains of the fires, Ezio smiled, and then followed his littlest sister, Leonardo, and Antonio back into their palazzo.
Chapter 239: Fly by fire
Chapter Text
The next morning, Ezio found himself thinking all the more closely about what was going to happen once the mid-point of the day had passed. Knowing that he was going to be using Leonardo’s flying machine to cover the distance that stood between the Palazzo Pexaro and the Palazzo Ducale, it was an oddly-heady thought. And, as he made his way out to meet up with Antonio for this day of days, so that the pair of them could begin planning just what rout he was ultimately going to take from Pexaro to the Palazzo Ducale, Ezio also found himself considering what little Maria had said to him when the pair of them and Leonardo had been breaking their fast together.
Because, while it was true that little Maria was both smaller and lighter than he was, Ezio didn’t relish the thought of her being essentially at the mercy of the Ducale’s guards and the night winds both.
He’d explained as much to her over their meal, but he could see that she’d still been just as strongly determined to do something as she had been when they’d begun their conversation, and with the way she’d turned to Leonardo once they’d finished speaking… Well, he suspected that she was going to find a way to follow him, no matter what she ended up having to contrive to do so. It was one of the things he’d learned about his sisters: if there was anything that they truly desired, they would both find a way to make the world give it to them.
It was something he’d come to appreciate more and more, as the world seemed all the more determined to take the things that he desired away.
Once he’d come back into sight of the palazzo where Antonio and his fellow thieves now operated out of, Ezio made his way inside once more.
“Ezio, it’s good to see you again,” Antonio said, meeting him at the door for the first time that Ezio could remember since the pair of them had started working together.
“Antonio,” he greeted, allowing himself to be chivvied over to the map table that Antonio had set up once he’d fully settled himself within the palazzo that Ezio had helped him to liberate from the Templars.
“Since you’ll be flying,” Antonio paused for a moment, his expression twisting as though he couldn’t actually believe what he was saying. Sighing, the man shook his head. “We’ll be able to map out the most direct rout between the Pexaro and the Ducale,” he continued, drawing a line across the map that connected those two points. “Now, naturally there are still going to be guards out, so we’ll need to deal with them.”
“Sí, especially if we’re going to be setting up fires,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he looked down at the map.
He’d seen this part of Venezia from the rooftops enough times to know the patrol routs of the guards, and hence which ones would need to be disposed of so that Antonio’s fellow thieves would be able to set up the bonfires they needed in order to keep Leonardo’s flying machine in the air while he made his way to the Ducale. And so, while he and Antonio planned the routs that the man’s fellow thieves would clear, so that they could set their fires without being accosted or killed, Ezio chose his own rout to clear.
He wouldn’t have felt right, leaving Antonio and his fellows to do all the work, even in such a matter as this one.
Leaving the palazzo behind, alongside the first group of thieves that Antonio had sent out, Ezio made his way back up to the rooftops once more. Moving as quickly and quietly as he ever had, Ezio quickly found and dealt with the guards along his chosen rout, returning to Antonio’s palazzo just in time to see a group of thieves and Leonardo’s assistants all helping to move the large form of the flying machine up the stairs and into the building. Looking into the sky, Ezio smiled softly.
Dusk was beginning to fall; it would be time soon.
When he’d made his way up to the rooftop, not having seen a single glimpse of Leonardo, Ezio found himself wondering just where it was that the inventor had gotten himself off to. He hadn’t thought that the man would have wished to miss this, what would be the longest journey that his flying machine was likely to take, but it seemed that he would have thought wrong, in that case.
As Leonardo’s assistants helped him into the flying machine once again, Antonio stepped out onto the rooftop with him.
“I haven’t seen hide nor hair of that inventor of yours,” Antonio said, looking rather confused by the fact.
“Sí, I know,” he said, he said, nodding. “I don’t know why he would have stayed back at our palazzo, but it seems like he did,” he said, looking down for a moment, before looking back up into the distance; toward the Palazzo Ducale once again. “Still, I don’t think we can afford to wait for him.”
“No,” Antonio said, shaking his head. “We can’t afford to wait; Grimaldi is going to be moving soon. We must make sure that Doge Mocenigo survives.”
“Va bene,” he said, nodding as he looked out towards the Palazzo Ducale.
“Remember, you must fly from fire to fire,” the assistant who he could remember being the one mainly in charge of coordinating the assistants who worked under him. “The heated air from the fires will provide lift to the machine.”
“Grazie,” he said, nodding. “But, do you know where Leonardo is?”
“Sí, he told me that he needed to help your sister with something,” the man said.
Narrowing his eyes in confusion, even as he looked back out in the direction of the Ducale, Ezio wondered just what Leonardo and little Maria were doing, back at the palazzo they’d been lent for the length of their stay in Venezia. Making up his mind that he would asked them when he returned to their palazzo, Ezio took a deep breath to steady himself, and then leaped from the rooftop underneath him.
Chapter 240: Fly by fire
Chapter Text
The rush of the night wind past his face woke the same kind of near giddiness that he’d felt the last time, but now Ezio quickly clamped down on it so that he wouldn’t end up being distracted at the exact wrong moment. He wasn’t simply flying for pleasure; not this night. Still, when he saw an archer who’d just been starting to take aim at the flying machine’s right wing smashed in the head by what seemed to be some kind of bag, it took almost everything he had not to crane his neck in the direction that the bag had flown from.
He needed to keep his focus, if he was going to make it to the Palazzo Ducale unscathed.
on his way forward to the Palazzo Ducale, Ezio would occasionally see something else dropped down on the heads of anyone who tried to aim either a bow or a pistol at him. Not enough times to determine just what it was that was following him, but enough to know that whatever it was, it could fly the same as he could. Still, considering the circumstances, Ezio was beginning to have suspicions of his own about just what Leonardo and little Maria had truly been doing, back at the palazzo the three of them shared.
Sighing in mingled amusement and annoyance, as some other kind of heavy weight smashed down on yet another archer who’d just started to draw back the string of his bow, Ezio narrowed his eyes slightly as he focused on his target once more.
The sight of a rope being thrown down to the window of the Palazzo Ducale that he’d had his eye on to make his entrance through brought Ezio’s attention to the strange basket that he’d seen in Leonardo’s workshop; the one he hadn’t paid much mind to, in favor of the flying machine he’d been planning to use.
As she dropped the anchor for Leonardo’s lifting-bag, holding it fast to that the wind wouldn’t carry it away and the fires in the brazier wouldn’t cause it to rise too high, Maria braced herself and then climbed over the edge of the basket so she could slip down the anchoring rope. It wasn’t quite as simple as climbing up the side of a building, but she made it down, all the same.
Chapter 241: Carlo Grimaldi
Chapter Text
Catching sight of a man who fit the description of that Templar bastardo, Carlo Grimaldi, Maria braced herself to leap down into the room. Ezio had said that they wouldn’t have much time before Grimaldi made his attempt on the Doge’s life, and while she knew that Ezio would have probably preferred that she’d stayed back at the palazzo, she’d had a feeling about tonight in particular. And it hadn’t been a good feeling.
So, once she’d seen the goblet on the Doge’s table, she hurled the weighted anchor at it with barely a thought, spilling what was all too likely to be poisoned wine to the floor.
“Mi dispiace, Altezza, but that wine was probably poisoned,” she said, climbing in through the window and searching for a place that she would be able to place the hook at the end of the rope she was still holding.
However it seemed that Grimaldi, deprived of the chance to kill the Doge quietly, had grown desperate enough to resort to the use of the concealed stiletto he’d been carrying even during what had apparently been meant to be a peaceful game of chess. Leaping forward, the rope in her hands only just loose enough that she could cast a loop around his right arm and drag him backwards. Well, she could at least try, since both Grimaldi and the lifting bag itself were now fighting against her.
That was why, when Ezio himself climbed in through that same window, Maria allowed herself a soft sigh of relief.
“Maria!” her brother shouted, even as the Doge seemed to come to his senses and begin calling for his guards.
“Grazie a Dio, fratello, I’m so glad to see you,” she said, smiling even as she strained to hold Grimaldi’s sword-arm back with the rope she still had in her hands.
“My guards will be coming soon, amici,” the Doge said, speaking to them for the first time since they’d arrived in his palazzo. “I thank you both for your service, this night,” he glared coldly at Grimaldi, as Ezio advanced upon him and Maria herself continued to restrain him. “I’d suspicions that Carlo was a Templar, but I suppose I’d been trusting too much in the man’s good character,” the Doge sighed, standing back and watching as Ezio came forward to see to the Templar at last.
When the guards finally arrived, it was to find Ezio standing over the dying form of Carlo Grimaldi.
Chapter 242: The Doge Mocenigo
Chapter Text
“Dispose of that carcassa,” the Doge ordered, as Ezio finished riffling through the papers that Grimaldi had been carrying, and stepped back from Grimaldi’s corpse at last. “And, one of you send for my servants,” the Doge turned a kindly look on her and Ezio where they stood. “My welcome guests will require food and accommodations for the night.”
“Grazie, Altezza,” she and Ezio both said, bowing.
Ezio helped her to anchor the rope that dangling from the basket beneath the lifting bag she’d traveled to the Palazzo Ducale in, and the Doge sent some of his people up to the rooftop to fetch it down to the courtyard. Finally allowed to rest her arms from their prolonged exertion, Maria flopped down into the chair the kindly Doge had offered to her.
“Millie grazie, Altezza,” she said, stretching her arms briefly before allowing them to fully relax for the first time since this night of nights had begun.
“Think nothing of it, signorina,” the Doge said. “Still, after you both take some rest, I would like to hear just how it was that the pair of you managed to come to my aid swifter than the night winds themselves,” he looked at the both of them in askance, kindly eyes curious but calm.
And so, the pair of them were invited to spend the night at the Palazzo Ducale, and perhaps the following morning, provided there were no pressing matters to call them away. After a light meal and some mulled wine to sleep on, Maria found herself escorted to a room more opulent than even the one she could remember sleeping in while she and Petruccio had both been small. Thanking the Doge’s servants for their kindness, and also asking them to convey her gratitude once more to the Doge himself.
~AC: II~
When he awakened the next morning, it took Ezio a moment to recall everything that had happened on the fraught night that had just passed. Still, the thought of the victory that he and little Maria had just claimed over the Templars brought a wide, relieved smile to his face, though knowing that his littlest sister had willingly placed herself in such danger as she had dampened the feeling more than a little. Truly, the pair of them were entirely too alike.
Chapter 243: Friendship of the Mocenigo
Chapter Text
Once he’d cleaned up and made himself presentable once again, knowing that the Doge would be expecting nothing less, Ezio found himself being greeted cordially by the servant who had clearly been sent to fetch him down for the morning meal. Following in the cheerful man’s path as the pair of them continued on their way down through the Ducale, Ezio sound caught sight of a familiar person in unfamiliar clothing.
“That’s the first time I’ve seen a dress since,” he paused, still feeling as though the words would catch in his throat if he tried to say them. “Well, it’s been some time, sorellina.”
“I know, fratello,” little Maria said kindly, as the pair of them continued on their way down to the dining room.
Once they had finished their meal, a meal that had been filled with light conversation about the city and what the pair of them thought of it, he and little Maria followed the Doge and his servants down to the large office that Ezio himself had only caught a brief glimpse of when he’d been led into the Ducale before. The office couldn’t help but remind him of his father’s all those years ago when he’d had the rest of his family in the palazzo Auditore.
“I never thought I would have the chance to see a Treasure Guardian in person,” the Doge said, smiling at little Maria. “Especially after the Templars began encroaching, and they were forced to flee or face capture. Still,” a worried expression passed over his face once again. “I will do everything in my power to see that you are kept safe, signorina.”
“Grazie, Altezza,” little Maria said, smiling gently as she took another sip of wine. “I’m glad that Ezio and I could manage to save you.”
“Still, I would like to know just how the pair of you made it here so fast,” the Doge said, looking from little Maria to him and then back again.
“Well,” he said, chuckling. “That would be quite the story.”
He and little Maria shared a smile, before beginning the tale of just how they’d managed not only to outrace the night wind itself, but to evade every one of the defenses that had been set up to stand between those who lived and worked within the Palazzo Ducale, and anyone brave or foolish enough to attempt to invade her.
“This Leonardo of yours sounds like quite the mad Maestro,” the Doge said, laughing amusedly, once he and little Maria had finished their respective tales.
“Sí, he’s had more than a few flights of pure fancy, since we met,” Ezio said, laughing a bit, himself. “Still, the man’s helped both me personally and our cause, even without knowing just what it was that he was doing.”
“Sí, he sounds like both a good man and a good friend,” the Doge said, nodding.
“He has been both, Altezza,” he agreed, recalling the many times when he’d come to Leonardo for help and support, and been given both without reservation. “It’s been an honor knowing him, and I’ll always consider him a friend of the Auditore.”
“As the Mocenigo will always consider the Auditore, amici,” the Doge said, his kindly smile taking on a regal edge. “I will see to it.”
“Millie grazie, Altezza,” he and little Maria said as one, raising their glasses in toast of their new friendship.
Chapter 244: Pleasure and business
Chapter Text
The news that Leonardo had been called out of Venezia on some business of the Conte de Pexaro, while not entirely surprising considering the conditions of his stay, was still somewhat disappointing. There had been a page of the Codex among the papers he’d collected from Grimaldi, and he knew that Leonardo would have wished more than anything to have a look at it. Still, there were enough other matters to fill his current schedule that he didn’t have much more than a few moments in the mornings and evenings to think about the Codex page sitting tucked among the other papers upon his new desk.
The fact that he had a desk again, for one thing.
His and little Maria’s actions on the night they’d saved the life of Venezia’s Doge had been thoroughly spread among the people of the city; something he’d still not become entirely accustomed to hearing about, even with every one of the heralds he now encountered during his travels through the various districts of Venezia when he was out and about searching for other things that might prove to be of interest to the Brotherhood and those who supported their cause.
Doge Mocenigo had even presented him and little Maria the same kind of half-capes bearing his own crest, the same way that Lorenzo had done for them, so long ago.
Settling back down at his desk once more, Ezio began composing a letter to send to Uncle Mario and his remaining family. Little Maria had already finished hers, and now Mocenigo’s servants were just waiting on him to finish his own before they sent the pair of them off to Monteriggioni. And, while Ezio was glad to have the time for a more comprehensive letter to his family, he was finding himself a bit stymied on just what to start with.
~AC: II~
“Magnifico!” the Doge Mocenigo, who shared the same first name as Father, exclaimed happily, as the servants that had been standing in the courtyard slowly let out the anchoring rope to the lifting bag that Leonardo had created. “Your inventor friend is truly gifted, to make something like this,” the Doge laughed, grinning widely as he looked down on the courtyard of the Ducale beneath them.
“Sí,” she said, grinning back. “Working with him has always been interesting, Altezza.”
The Doge chuckled gently. “I should think so.”
Since the Doge had invited them both to stay in the Palazzo Ducale with him, Maria had found herself with a great deal more time to rest than she’d had since she, Ezio, and their family had all lived together in the Auditore palazzo. She liked that, but she also noticed that Ezio seemed to be a bit at loose ends without the constant need to go searching for Templars and their collaborators, what with the Doge’s guards being employed for that selfsame purpose.
She’d been trying to help him, keep his mind off of the fact that neither of them had much of anything to do at the moment, but so far she hadn’t been finding much success.
“Signorina Maria,” the Doge greeted kindly, as she came into his office; this was to be her last resort, seeking out the Doge to speak to him about her brother’s troubles. “What brings you here?”
“It’s my brother, Altezza,” she said, dropping a curtsy as she settled down into the chair the Doge had kindly offered to her. “I think he’s starting to feel a bit useless, since you’ve been handling so many things that he and I used to do.”
“Ah, sí,” the Doge said, nodding in understanding. “Your brother does indeed seem to be a man of action, and with your inventor friend away… Hmm,” the Doge settled back in his chair, folding his hands thoughtfully. “It’s going to be Carnevale soon,” the Doge said, his kindly smile taking on a hint of secrecy.
“Sí, Altezza, it will be,” she said, not quite certain just what the Doge was getting at, but knowing that she could hardly deny the passage of time.
He smiled gently, the kindness in his eyes tempered by a slowly-emerging amusement. Maria wondered about it, and questioned him on the subject, but he wouldn’t say another word about it.
~AC: II~
Finding out that little Maria had spoken to the Doge about his current situation brought a smile to his face, knowing that his littlest sister was still looking out for him, even after all of the troubles the pair of them had ended up having to face. Troubles whose varied causes could all be ultimately traced back to the battle between the Assassins and the Templars. The same battle that Ezio had chosen to involve himself in.
He was glad, to have the kind of support that little Maria seemed to offer him as a matter of course, even with all of the danger they had and would continue to face.
Sighing, knowing that there was nothing for his continuing ennui but to get up and do something, Ezio made his way out to the courtyard; even if he didn’t need to constantly battle with the guards that stood before his various objectives, Doge Mocenigo had told him that the sparring ring was always open to him.
~AC: II~
She’d found the Assassin robes that Father had made for her on a dressmaker’s dummy in the room just across from hers, and though she’d wondered what was going on, the Doge’s men had always reassured her that nothing untoward was going to happen, and that she shouldn’t trouble herself with things like that. Maria still found herself wondering about it, but only during those times when she wasn’t studying, practicing, or discussing what they might do once they left Venezia with Ezio.
Still, the thought of what secret the Doge might be keeping from her and Ezio both stayed in the back of her mind, coming up at odd moments almost as though to taunt Maria with what she didn’t know.
While he continued seeing to the duties that his city and her citizens asked of him, Doge Giovanni Mocenigo found himself more than slightly amused by the antics of the Auditore siblings he was currently hosting. The both of them were endlessly curious, a trait that he was certain served them well when they were searching out either the Templars or other matters of interest to the Brotherhood as a whole, but which also made planning a surprise for Carnevale as he and his were doing more than slightly difficult.
Still, keeping the pair of them busy remained an option, and so Giovanni would continue doing so until the time came for him to unveil his surprise; until the night of Carnevale was upon them.
Chapter 245: Mothers, daughters, sons
Chapter Text
When he’d gotten the message from Venezia’s Doge, an ally of the Brotherhood and a man who’d been friends with both Lorenzo de’ Medici as well as Mario’s own late brother, Mario Auditore smiled as he composed a letter in return. It was good to know that Ezio and little Maria were doing so well, and that they had managed not only to save the life of the Doge of Venezia, but also that they had found shelter with a friend of the Assassins. He was also pleased to have been invited to spend Carnivale in Venezia with his remaining family.
He’d been making preparations for that very thing ever since he’d received the invitations, and was presently nearly ready to leave Monteriggioni for the remaining week leading up to Carnevale.
He’d told Doge Mocenigo about what had happened to Maria, and the man had in turn promised to see that his sister-in-law had the best care while she was staying within the walls of the Palazzo Ducale. He’d been pleased to hear it, and hence had made all the more of an effort to be quick about the preparations that he still needed to make before he could travel to Venezia to meet up with his nephew and his young niece.
~AC: II~
The flurry of activity within the Ducale had become steadily more purposeful, as the day of Carnevale drew ever closer, and Maria found herself at loose ends more and more. Freed of the increasing load of responsibilities that had been pressed down on her by what felt like all and sundry, Maria was finally able to start making her own inquiries into just what it was that the Doge’s people had been planning for so long.
However, it seemed that the Doge had realized that such a thing would be the case, and had taken the precaution of moving whatever it was out of the Ducale and into some other place.
Shaking her head at the lengths the Doge and his people were going to, just to see that she didn’t know what it was that he was planning, Maria laughed softly as she made her way to the room that Ezio was staying in.
“Buon giorno, fratello,” she called, smiling as she made her way inside.
“Hello again, sorellina,” her last brother said, as the pair of them greeted each other. “Have you managed to find out what Doge Mocenigo is keeping from us?”
“No; apparently, he’s moved them out of the Palazzo,” she said, folding her arms and sighing.
The pair of them shared an amused expression, before making their way down to the dining room so that they could have their first meal of the day. The sound of familiar people down in the salon drew her attention, and she glanced back at Ezio as the pair of them began to make their way down the stairs. It almost sounded like…
“Uncle Mario!” she exclaimed, hearing Ezio saying the same thing as the pair of them hurried down to the salon where the remaining members of their family seemed to be gathering. “Claudia!”
“I’m glad to see you’re both doing so well, nipoti,” Uncle Mario said, leaning down to embrace them with his large, powerful arms.
“I’m so glad to see you again, Uncle,” Ezio said, as the pair of them embraced him tightly.
They all made their way into the dining room for the morning meal, carrying on conversations about their latest activities, and the progress that she and Ezio had made fighting the Templars and their influence in Venezia.
~AC: II~
Knowing that Ezio and his younger sister were nearly bursting from their curiosity about what he was planning, Giovanni decided that he would put on a special performance of the play he’d had written to commemorate them and their triumph over the machinations of the Templars on that day so long ago when they’d come bursting in through his window on that dark night. He was certain they would enjoy it, if only simply for the fact that they would have the questions that had clearly been gnawing at them for as long as his people had been working on the play.
Having gathered the remnants of the Auditore family together for the initial performance of the play he’d had written for Carnevale, Giovanni settled himself down in the seat that had been reserved for him, smiling at the gathering he was presiding over.
~AC: II~
As she and Ezio watched the play unfold before them, it was all Maria could do not to burst out giggling. Seeing everything that had happened to them interpreted through the lens of the play that the Doge had had written for them was just so amusing that, in the end, Maria couldn’t help but find the whole thing charming. She was almost sorry she’d started trying to find out what was going on early, since that would have just ended up spoiling the whole surprise.
So, when the Doge himself came to ask them what they thought about the play he’d put together for them, she, Ezio, Uncle Mario, and Claudia all laughed cheerfully as they began to discus the play with him.
Chapter 246: The underground lair
Chapter Text
He’d been feeling more and more confined lately, and even with the remaining members of his family now staying alongside him within the walls of the Palazzo Ducale, Ezio had found ways to make excursions into the city of Venezia. He’d eventually found something worthy of his attention: yet another of the tombs that the Brotherhood had hidden beneath the streets of the city. Given that he’d also seen that little Maria hadn’t been particularly happy with her own confinement to the grounds of the Ducale, he’d made point of tracking her down so that he could see if she wanted to come with him, as well.
And so, the pair of them had made their way out of the Ducale, carefully evading the guards on their scheduled patrol routs as they passed over the high fence of the Palazzo – which he’d noticed during the time he’d been staying within the Ducale with Uncle Mario and the rest of their family was built to keep people out rather than in – and out into Venezia as a whole.
Once the pair of them had made it into the city outside the walls once again, he and little Maria took a moment to breathe deeply and steady themselves after their journey, before turning their attention to the next part of their journey. Following the same rout that he’d marked out earlier, Ezio led the pair of them back up to the rooftops and from there back to the tomb that had been hidden beneath the floors of the Santa Maria della Visitazione.
After climbing to the roof, Ezio found the small alcove that he’d previously spotted, and activated the mechanism that would open the hidden door.
“Magnifico,” little Maria breathed, as the pair of them watched the hidden door pull away into the shadows of the church. “I’ve never seen anything like that.”
“Sí,” he said softly, nodding and smiling back at his littlest sister as the pair of them made their way inside. “I’ve seen it five times, myself, and I still don’t think I’m quite used to it, yet.”
The pair of them shared a soft, companionable chuckle, as they made their way deeper inside. Making their way through what at first seemed to be a simple set of catacombs beneath the streets of Venezia, but Ezio had long since learned not to take the initial appearances of these places at face value, and sure enough – once he and little Maria had leaped down into a small, circular room with the aid of a chain that had clearly seen better days, Ezio found himself faced with what seemed to have been a place to station guards, back when the Brotherhood had been actively making use of this place.
“It’s almost eerie, how empty this place is,” little Maria muttered, not seeming to really know that she was speaking aloud.
“Sí,” he said, speaking more to fill the oppressive silence than because his littlest sister’s words had called for a response. “This place does feel a bit too empty.”
Sharing a chuckle to break the tension he could feel pulling all the more insistently at him the longer the pair of them stood in this abandoned place, Ezio nodded to little Maria and the pair of them set off deeper into the catacombs. Some of the pathways had been blocked by fallen masonry that had clearly accumulated over the course of years, then decades, and perhaps even centuries as well, forcing the pair of them to seek out alternate routs over and through the rubble.
He thought it was a rather sad thing, passing through the remains of what had clearly been a great construction at one point, and knowing that those who made it were all long dead by this time; Ezio honestly doubted that most of them had died easily, or at home in their beds surrounded by family; which was truly the only proper way to die, in Ezio’s estimation.
Once they’d made it out to a wider room within the catacombs, one that seemed to be set up as some kind of a meeting place, Ezio found himself wondering what the Assassins who had built this place so long ago had discussed when they would meet in this place. Still, such curiosities weren’t for the present, and he’d a lot more to concern himself with than the Brotherhood in bygone days. He and little Maria swiftly passed through the meeting room, making their way through a door with another of the locking mechanisms on it.
This door, however, was marked more clearly with the Brotherhood’s crest.
Chapter 247: Cavernous race
Chapter Text
Beyond it was a deeper cave, one whose depths had been either filled with the rains, or else some part of the canal water was draining into this place through some means that he could truly only speculate about. Little Maria’s cheerful laugh broke him out of such thoughts.
“Fratello, I think there might actually be fish down here,” she called, looking down into the depths of the underground lake.
“It wouldn’t surprise me, with water this deep, sorellina,” he said, chuckling a bit, himself.
Returning his attention to the cavern that his efforts had just revealed, Ezio tried to determine just what he was to do, in order to activate what was appearing to be the same kind of mechanisms that he’d found protecting the last tomb he’d paid a visit to.
“It seems that I truly am going to need your help, sorellina,” he called, beckoning little Maria over to the lever he’d found after a bit of searching.
“What is it, fratello?” she asked, making her way over to where he was standing, just in front of the mechanism he’s stationed himself at.
“Would you mind standing by this lever?” he asked, smiling a bit sheepishly as she raised an eyebrow at him. “If I miss any jumps, I might need you reset it for me.”
“Bene, fratello mio,” she said, though no one who wasn’t blind would have missed the amused expression spreading across her face.
And no one who wasn’t deaf would have missed the sheer, mischievous amusement in her voice.
After swatting his most troublesome sister lightly on the left shoulder, Ezio made his way across the thoroughly troublesome obstacle course that his and little Maria’s actions had revealed to him. Sighing in profound annoyance once he’d managed to make the last jump, the grinding of stone as it settled into its new configuration letting him know that his most troublesome of tasks was over at last.
Sharing an amused glance with little Maria, who had clearly jumped across the small gap that had been all that separated her from the final door before the crypt he’d just finished opening. As he and little Maria made their way into the crypt at last, Ezio made up his mind to tell Leonardo about the mechanisms he’d encountered during his excursions into the last two of the five Assassin tombs he’d ventured into.
“So, this is the last of the five seals you were looking for?” little Maria asked, as the pair of them looked down at the smoothly-rounded stone disk he held in his hands.
“Sí,” he said, carefully tucking it away in the bag he’d brought along for just such an occasion. “Come on; we should let Uncle Mario know we’ve finally got the last one.”
“Sí, fratello,” his littlest sister said, as the pair of them began making their way back up and out of the catacombs once more.
Emerging from the tunnels in a quiet, deserted square, Ezio took a deep breath of fresh air as he and little Maria emerged from the tunnel at last. Moving the cover to the tunnel entrance back into place before anyone could come and see that there was more to this part of Venezia than was usually visible, he and little Maria made their way back to the Palazzo Ducale once more. The guards knew better than to stop them by now, but Ezio still considered it a point of pride, to be able to evade them when he could.
Still, he’d been forced to concede on more than one occasion that the Doge’s men were very well-trained.
Once he and little Maria had made it back into the courtyard of the Ducale once more, Ezio breathed more easily, allowing himself to relax even as he heard the sounds of people coming. He’d long since come to recognize the footfalls of both Uncle Mario and Doge Mocenigo both, and so he knew just who was coming to meet them.
“Welcome back, nipoti,” Uncle Mario said, grinning widely at them as he and the Doge stepped to either side of him and little Maria, leading the pair of them back inside the Ducale once again. “I trust you managed to find the last of them?”
“Sí, Uncle,” he said, grinning as he fell into step with his and little Maria’s uncle on their way back inside.
Chapter 248: The last
Chapter Text
As the four of them arranged themselves on the chairs in the small salon that had been set aside for them when he and the remnants of his family had come to the Ducale to stay for the play, and then for Carnivale after it.
“So, Mario has told me about these seals of yours,” the Doge said, smiling. “I would have never thought that such things could have been hidden in Italia.”
“I know,” he said, feeling rather amused at the prospect, himself. “Still, I’ve found that there are a lot of things hidden in the world that I would have never expected to find, before all of this started.”
“Sí, I suppose that’s true,” the Doge said, settling back into his seat and steepling his fingers as a thoughtful expression overtook his face. “I know that I, myself, have seen many things that I would have thought were impossible if I hadn’t been the one to lay eyes on them. Those like your sister, for instance.”
“Sí,” he said, nodding and conceding the point. “I think, if I hadn’t grown up with little Maria by my side, even I might have found her coloring odd.”
“So, I suppose you’ll both be wanting to return to Monteriggioni, to complete that collection of yours,” the Doge said, with a good-natured grin on his face. “I’ll give you leave, just make sure you return before we begin preparations for Carnivale.”
“Sí, Altezza,” Uncle Mario said, a grin on his own face to match the one the Doge was wearing. “Come, nipoti. Let’s see if that armor is all it was made out to be.”
The three of them, after saying their farewells to the Doge and his people for the time they would be gone, climbed into one of the carriages he’d lent to them, and set off back to Toscana once more. When they’d arrived back at Monteriggioni again, after Uncle Mario had checked in with his spies and the guards he still had posted around the villa, they all made their way back to their uncle’s office.
And, from there, back down into the Sanctuary itself.
Once the three of them stood before the statues of their brother and sister Assassins – Altaïr foremost among them – they divided up the six seals, and then Ezio made his way to the first pair of statues. Little Maria had taken the pair of seals that corresponded to the pair in the middle, and Uncle Mario had chosen the last two.
The harsh, grating sound of the locks disengaging, one by one as the seals were placed in their corresponding holders, drew Ezio’s attention, and he turned to look at them once he’d finished placing the seals he’d taken charge of in their slots. Wrapping his left arm around little Maria when she came to stand beside him, he turned to grin back at Uncle Mario when the man himself began coming over, as well.
“Well, nipote, it seems as though we’ll have our chance to see just what it is that that armor of Altaïr’s is capable of now,” he said, as the gate that’d been standing sentinel before Altaïr’s statue descended into the floor, and the statue itself was lowered to the ground by some hidden mechanism.
Thank you, Altaïr, for this great gift, he mused, as the three of them made their way over to the statue so that they would be able to not only get a better look at all of the mechanisms that their efforts had served to open, but also so that they would be able to retrieve the armor that had lain behind the bars of the Sanctuary’s vault for such a long time. May it help to shield me from my remaining enemies.
As Uncle Mario and little Maria helped him to don the armor that they had all helped to remove from its place at the foot of Altaïr’s statue, the first thing Ezio noticed was that it was a great deal lighter than any other set of armor he’d worn. It almost felt like the old leather set that he’d stopped using a long time ago.
“It suits you, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, smiling as he and little Maria stepped back to take him in.
“Grazie, uncle,” he said, smiling back as he moved and shifted to get a better feel for the armor he was wearing.
“Let’s see what that new armor of yours is capable of, nipote,” Uncle Mario said.
He quickly agreed, and the three of them made their way back up and out of the Sanctuary again, out through Uncle Mario’s office, and from there to the sparring ring so that he would be able to test out Altaïr’s armor properly.
Chapter 249: All the stops
Chapter Text
Once Uncle Mario had been as satisfied as he could with the capabilities of the armor set that her last brother had managed to uncover through his journeys into the hidden tombs of their brother and sister Assassins that had been hidden all over the length and breadth of Italia, the three of them quickly made their way back to Venezia so that they could celebrate Carnivale with Doge Mocenigo and the rest of their family. Mother even seemed to be recovering, outside in the sea air of Venezia. It was a good thing to know, even though she still didn’t seem quite up to speaking again just yet.
What was even better, at least so far as their inquiries into the mysteries of Altaïr’s Codex was concerned, was that Leonardo had returned from his excursion some time before they’d arrived.
“Leonardo!” Ezio called, as the pair of them made their way into his workshop for the first time since he’d left.
“It’s good to see the both of you again, amici,” their inventor friend said, grinning widely as he turned to face them. “I admit, I didn’t quite know what to think, when I heard the news about you and Grimaldi. Well, that is to say, what you and Maria did for the Doge.”
“I’m sorry we couldn’t manage to save your flying machine, but so many things were happening that night that I didn’t think to catch it before it was too late,” Ezio said, prompting Leonardo to chuckle gently.
“Va bene, amico. It’s fine,” the inventor said, smiling widely as he looked over at the pair of them. “It was just nice to know that one of my inventions was able to work so well. Two of them, even, since the Doge said that he’d seen my lifting bag flying that night, as well.”
This he said with a grin at her, and Maria chuckled and grinned back. “Sí, I think one of the Doge’s people managed to fetch it down from the roof where I landed.”
“Sí, they showed me where they had it tethered, when I returned from Milano,” Leonardo said, smiling with clear satisfaction. “I was glad to see they’d taken care of it so well, but I expect that this isn’t just a social call that brings you back here.”
“Not entirely, amico,” Ezio said, a gentle smile on his face as he handed over the Codex pages he’d been carrying.
“Ah, more of the Codex,” Leonardo said, sounding pleased at the prospect of finding out more about just what it was that Altaïr’s Codex contained as Maria found herself feeling, at times. “Wait, this page appears to contain plans for some kind of mechanism that attaches to your wrist.”
“Another one?” Ezio asked, giving voice to the confusion that they both seemed to be feeling, at the moment.
“Sí, but it’s no dagger of any sort,” Leonardo said, studying the diagrams now laid out before him all the more closely. “It seems to be some sort of firearm, one as small as a hummingbird,” Leonardo said, sounding in awe of the mind that could have created the mechanism he was currently studying. “I sometimes wish I could have met this master Assassin of yours; he sounds like a man I would have enjoyed knowing.”
“Sí, I sometimes wish I could have met him, too,” she said, looking down at the Codex pages that Leonardo had thoughtfully decoded for them.
Chapter 250: Gathered again
Chapter Text
When the pair of them left Leonardo back at his workshop, with the promise to visit after the festivities of Carnivale had ended and they were freer to move about Venezia as they chose, Ezio cuddled little Maria closer as the pair of them were escorted back to the Ducale by the Doge’s guards. It seemed that tonight, Carnivale night itself, was to be the opening of that play the Doge had had written to tell the story of what he and little Maria had faced, on their journey from their old home in Firenze to Venezia itself.
And yes, there had been some, small details changed – in order to avoid compromising the Brotherhood and his and little Maria’s place in it – but for the most part, the story of the Auditore family would be playing out on stage for all of the Doge’s guests to see. He still didn’t know quite how to feel about that, being of two minds even as the opening of the play drew ever closer, but as he and little Maria passed through the front gates of the Palazzo Ducale once more, Ezio found Uncle Mario waiting for them.
There was a woman that he’d never seen before – though upon first glace, he’d almost mistaken her for Paola – seated by his side, around the table that had been filled with a small, midday meal for the four of them.
“Ah, it’s good to see you again, nipoti,” Uncle Mario said, then gestured to the woman seated next to him. “This is a friend of mine,” Uncle Mario said, and there was a gently amused smile on his face. “She goes by the name of Teodora.”
“Sister Teodora,” the woman in question introduced herself.
Still, while this new woman seemed to have the dress of a nun, there was something in her manor that made Ezio think that Teodora – Sister or not – was more than she seemed.
“When you say that she’s your friend, uncle…” he said, not quite knowing if he should speak of such things so freely; while Doge Mocenigo was clearly one of their allies, he’d no desire to speak of things that might well have been the Brotherhood’s business in a place like this.
Servants still had ears, after all, and not all of those who might be listening were friendly; and, even those friendly to the Brotherhood could still be deceived.
“Sí, I do mean it in that way, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, grinning softly back at him.
“Bene, that makes more sense, then,” he said, as he and little Maria settled down in the chairs that had been set aside for them, alongside their uncle and the sister Assassin they were being introduced to.
Chapter 251: Carnevale night
Chapter Text
It’d been an odd thing to have to get used to, the actor that had taken to following her around at odd moments, trying to mimic the way she moved so that he would be able to play her part better on the night of the play. The night that had just come, Maria reflected, as she made her way down the hall to the backstage room that the actor playing her part was currently staying in. He’d suggested that the pair of them share some wine before the performance began, and the look in his eyes… Well, she was beginning to think that he’d taken a bit of a liking to her.
Ezio had agreed when she’d told him about it, and the pair of them were both making plans as to just how they would be able to let him down gently; the life she and Ezio led wasn’t one that Maria would ever wish upon someone uninvolved, but it was still just as much her duty as Ezio’s to see that the Templars were prevented from doing what they had done to the Auditore in Firenze to any other family.
As she came into the room, she could see Innocento smiling shyly at her from over the pair of ornate wine goblets that he’d doubtless had set out for her long before she’d made her way to this place.
“Buona sera, Innocento,” she said, smiling gently as she took a sip of the wine he’d provided for her, just to be polite.
Before either of them could say another word, however, Maria felt her shoulders seized by the large, strong hands of what felt like a large man. While the rest of the wine was forced down her throat, Maria heard Innocento shouting and struggling as a thick bag was dropped over her head. Struggling as best she could, even as she felt the dizziness from what was obviously some kind of drug in the wine went to work on her, Maria bent nearly double in an effort to bite whatever she could reach of the men dragging her away, even as she felt heavy ropes being wound around her legs and arms.
As the disorienting dizziness she was currently prey to grew steadily worse, and as Maria felt herself being carried away by the men abducting her, she couldn’t help but wonder how things had gone so wrong so quickly.
~AC: II~
As Ezio made his way through the halls to the room where little Maria was meeting with Innocento, he couldn’t help the soft chuckle that snuck its way out of his throat. He’d never thought that he’d end up being the judge of a contest of skill with women, though he had to say that if anyone could have been said to be a capable judge of such things, it would have to be him. Smiling to himself, knowing that for all that little Maria would tease him once he told her about it, she would still understand just why it was that he had been chosen for such a task, Ezio continued on his way to the back room behind the stage.
When he came within sight of that selfsame room, however, Ezio realized that he couldn’t hear anyone talking. In fact, the room seemed entirely too quiet to hold merely his littlest sister or the fluttering boy who had taken such a liking to her when the pair of them had begun spending what time they could together as a part of his efforts to learn more about the kind of person she was, so that he would be better able to portray her in the play. To say nothing of the pair of them both being in the same room at once.
Hurrying his stride, Ezio soon found himself confronted by the room itself; it wasn’t nearly as empty as he had been expecting.
The crumpled form of Innocento, his neck having clearly been snapped by whoever it was that had apparently made off with little Maria, was the first thing that caught his eye. Sighing, knowing that it had to have been the Templars who had done this – only those bastardi would have been so callous as to kill someone like Innocento, and like as not simply for being in their way when they had wished to make their move – and that he would hence have little time if he wished to catch them before they took his littlest sister to some place beyond his reach. But still, there was a part of him that quailed at leaving such a thing as this unfinished.
“Requiescat in pace, amico,” he said, crouching down by Innocento’s side, to gently close the boy’s eyes and properly arrange his body.
Gathering himself as he stood back up, Ezio looked one last time at Innocento’s corpse to firm his resolve, before making his way back out of the room; he would need to inform the Doge about what had happened here, and he would need Uncle Mario’s help if the pair of them were going to make any real headway in tracking down the Templar bastardi who had kidnapped little Maria and killed Innocento.
Chapter 252: The Doge and the Barbarigo
Chapter Text
Seeing Ezio making his way towards them, Christina was just about to call out to him – the pair of them had parted on good terms, and she fully understood his desire to shield her from the dangers his new life in the Brotherhood he was part of would inevitably force him to confront – when she noticed the grim set of his shoulders and the expression on his face.
“What’s wrong, amico?” her husband Manfredo called, speaking before Christina herself had managed to gather up the words she’d wished to say.
“I’m afraid I won’t be able to participate in the festivities, Altezza,” Ezio said, his eyes flickering apologetically over her as he spoke, asking without words for her forbearance in the face of whatever it was that had just happened; she gave it without hesitation, knowing that Ezio wouldn’t have asked for such a thing without a good reason.
“What happened?” the Doge asked, a concerned expression blooming over his stern face as he and Ezio faced one another.
“Innocento was murdered, and my littlest sister kidnapped,” Ezio said, his fists clenching briefly as he struggled to maintain his composure in the face of this terrible news.
Before she could gather herself enough to speak the soothing words of comfort she knew that Ezio would want to hear, Christina’s attention – along with that of everyone else in the room – was drawn to the large man who came stomping into the room. The man, who’d not even bothered to announce his presence before barging in, was broad-shouldered and tall, with the stocky build and the weathered face of a man who spent a great deal of time out in the sun.
She wondered who he was, this man who was so brazen as to go storming into a meeting between the Doge and some of his closest advisors and friends.
“Those Barbarigo bastardi have occupied the Arsenal!” the newcomer shouted, once all eyes were upon him, the way he seemed to want.
“Bartolomeo,” the Doge’s advisor – who also happened to be a member of the Barbarigo family himself – acknowledged. “You mean to say that Marco and Silvio have chosen to make their move now, of all times?”
“It has to be a distraction,” Ezio said, sounding as certain as she’d ever heard him before.
“Sí, it could hardly be a coincidence, that one of their faction would make off with little Maria, and then they themselves would do this,” Mario Auditore said, standing up.
~AC: II~
Once his uncle had said his piece, Ezio felt the last of the tension that had gripped him when he’d seen the Templars’ leavings in the room backstage slowly draining away. Yes, it was true that little Maria was still in danger from whatever those Templar bastardi intended to do, but knowing that he had the support of not only his uncle and the Doge himself, but also this newcomer, made things a great deal easier for him to handle. It also helped that Uncle Mario seemed to know the man, or at least to know of him.
“So, those bastardi are even more dickless than I thought,” Bartolomeo spat his words, seeming to resist the urge to spit something else, as well. “Just as well, then. Me and my men will run these bastardi screaming into the night like the spineless dogs they are, and you can go rescue this little sister of yours,” Bartolomeo said, giving him a look of understanding.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, nodding at the man; he’d recognized the name: Bartolomeo d’Alviano was a mercenary who had served the Papal States, before turning away from them for what had seemed to be reasons of his own.
“I’ll be coming with you, as well,” Uncle Mario said, moving to stand by Bartolomeo’s side. “I don’t doubt they’ll be expecting at least one member of the Auditore to show up, after what they did. Ezio, meet up with Teodora, and see if some of her girls can help you find where those bastardi might have taken little Maria.”
“Sí, uncle,” he said, nodding sharply as he turned to leave the meeting room amid the well-wishes of the Doge and everyone else in the room, with Bartolomeo adding his own gruff encouragement as only a professional mercenary could. “Mille grazie, amici.”
Chapter 253: Time, trials, and Templars
Chapter Text
When she’d started to regain consciousness, Maria was very careful not to move more than she absolutely had to, but it seemed as though whoever was holding her had been watching far more closely than she’d have ever thought possible.
“I do apologize for the accommodations, mia colomba, but I’m afraid we didn’t have the time to get properly settled,” said the gravely, unfeeling voice of the Spaniard that she’d last seen at the side of Uberto, back when the man she’d once thought of as another uncle had presided over the execution of Father and two of her brothers.
Biting down on the gag in her mouth, Maria glared at the man who had to be the ultimate author of the suffering that she, Ezio, and their remaining family had been through since Father’s death and their exile from Firenze.
“I can see that we’re going to have a lot of work ahead of us, if we’re to properly break you of those bad habits that life with that Assassino has caused you to develop.”
Subtly testing the bonds around her wrists and ankles when the Spaniard chanced to look away, his attention taken by the carriage slowing down as the pair of them reached what sounded like some kind of an impasse to their flight from Venezia. Narrowing her eyes as she began to hear the sounds of scuffling outside of the carriage she’d been confined in for god knew how long, Maria caught the sounds of weapons being drawn as the scuffle seemed to develop into an out-and-out fight.
Not knowing just who it was that had ultimately been responsible for stopping the Spaniard’s carriage before it had reached whatever its destination had been meant to be, Maria tensed when she saw the door nearest to her being smashed open. Shielding herself as best as she could manage from the flying shrapnel, considering her current state, Maria jerked her head back up when she felt a gentle hand cupping her chin.
“Dio mio, I hadn’t thought to find you here, little Maria!”
Gambalto! She thought as hard as she could, gag still jammed in her mouth where that horse-fucking Spaniard had stuck it. Tilting her head as Gambalto drew his dagger, she obligingly held still as he cut through the thick cloth.
“Disgustoso!” she snarled, spitting on the opulent seat that had once held the repugnant form of the Spaniard.
“You’ll get no arguments from me, piccina,” Gambalto said kindly, as he helped her out of the carriage, then gave orders to the men he was leading to destroy it.
“Where is that cavaliere Spagnolo? Lo farò le sue coglioni!”
“I’m afraid he managed to escape, little Maria,” Gambalto said, looking contrite for a moment, before an expression of rough good-humor spread across his kindly face. “Still, if we do manage to find him this night, I’ll help you with that.”
Sharing a laugh with her uncle’s guardsman, Maria obligingly climbed onto his back when he started trying to shift her around that way. After that bastardo of a Spaniard had taken her shoes, not to mention the rest of her clothes, she couldn’t very well walk through the streets of Venezia. At least not without the risk of cutting her feet on sharp rocks or other things she wouldn’t have wanted to step on.
There wasn’t really much for her to say, after she’d thanked her uncle’s men for rescuing her from wherever it had been that that Spanish bastardo had intended to take her, so Maria leaned quietly against Gambalto’s back as he and his people carried her through the darkened streets of Venezia on their way back to the Palazzo Ducale. When she began to see more and more groups of mercenary soldiers fighting in the streets, she wondered what else could have happened on this night of nights.
“Maria!”
“Ezio!” she called back, grinning widely as her last brother came dashing through the crowds to where she was clinging to Gambalto’s back.
“Here,” he said, helping to shift her up onto his own back, as he and Gambalto came abreast of each other.
“Grazie, ser Ezio,” Gambalto said, smiling with relief as he stood back up again. “I didn’t want Maria walking around without shoes, but I think my back might have been about to give out if you hadn’t gotten here.”
“I’m glad I could be of such help to you, amico,” Ezio said, as the pair of them nodded to each other and split off.
As Ezio took her back through the streets, Maria began to notice that they didn’t seem to be heading back to the Ducale the way she had been expecting, but to a place that somehow reminded her of Paola’s house, back in Firenze. The reason for that became a great deal clearer when her brother let the pair of them into the building and Maria was able to take in their surroundings once again.
“I recognize this place,” she started, before finding herself cut off by an even more familiar presence.
“I should hope so, little Maria, since your father and I did arrange to meet you, once you had managed to settle in.”
“Zia Teodora!” she exclaimed, smiling as Ezio moved over to one of the cushioned seats to set her on, then straightened up again.
“It’s good to see that you’re doing so well,” Sister Teodora – she might have been more of a freethinker than any nun he’d ever met before, but she insisted that it was the Lord who had called her to her work – said, smiling gently at his littlest sister.
Excusing himself from the brothel where he’d gotten little Maria settled for the night, Ezio made his way back out into the darkened streets once more. There were still the Barbarigo to be dealt with, something he couldn’t help but understand, after all of the damage he’d seen them do even in the short time they’d had to work. And so, when he came upon two groups of mercenaries clashing in the streets, he quickly hurried over to them. They wore the crest of the Mocenigo, something he’d come to recognize particularly well, after all the time he’d spent among the Doge’s people.
Those who wore the crest of the Barbarigo were fighting against those in the Doge’s employ, so Ezio knew in an instant that they didn’t work for Agostino.
Chapter 254: A night for mayhem
Chapter Text
Finding himself fighting beside the tall, broad-shouldered, barrel-chested form of Bartolomeo himself, Ezio couldn’t help but notice the wide, almost manic grin on the mercenary’s face.
“Quite a night, sí?” he asked, not quite sure how to react to the man that he’d just met, and so wishing to see what kind of man he was truly dealing with before he made any decisions about how he felt.
“Sí!” Bartolomeo roared heartily. “We’ll have these weak-kneed, dickless bastardi run out of Venezia long before they have a chance to crawl back to their masters.”
“It’s those masters I happen to be searching for, amico,” he said, smiling as the expression on Bartolomeo’s face shifted to one of distinctly predatory amusement.
“Well then, it looks like we’re going to be going hunting,” Bartolomeo said, laughing heartily as the pair of them began to move forward into the crowd of mercenaries all around them.
Bartolomeo roared, sounding very much like the bear he so resembled, and the mercenaries that served under him began to gather up around him once again, while the pair of them continued cutting their way through the ranks of the Barbarigo’s mercenaries. As he concentrated, narrowing his eyes as the world around him washed out into shades of blue, gold, and red – a sea of red in front of him, where the mercenary forces working for Marco and Silvio Barbarigo clashed with Bartolomeo’s own troops – and searched the ranks of the men in front of them for anyone who might know something that would be able to get him closer to the Templars whose lives he intended to take this night.
Once he’d managed to find the man, standing near the back of the line, and dressed in a captain’s livery so Ezio would have been able to recognize him more easily even without the golden light still limning his form when Ezio let his second-sight fade once more.
“I’m going to see if I can get some information out of the Captain,” he called over his shoulder, making sure to catch Bartolomeo’s attention before he started. “Do you think you could manage to hold off this rabble for me?”
The large mercenary laughed, though the expression on his face suggested that he was laughing at Ezio, rather than with him; not the most polite, no, but if this man could help him get what he needed on this night, Ezio was willing to put up with a bit of crude good-humor on the man’s part.
“Sí, piccina, we’ll make sure these bastardi don’t hurt you.”
“Grazie, commendante,” he volleyed back, smirking at Bartolomeo for a moment, before returning his attention to the captain standing at the back of his forces.
Rushing forward, under the cover of another attack made by Bartolomeo and his forces, Ezio soon enough had the enemy captain downed and at his mercy.
“Call off your men, Capitano,” he demanded, holding the man down at the point of his sword. “And, tell me: are both Marco and Silvio Barbarigo holding the Arsenal?”
“Sí,” the captain said, glancing sullenly at the tip of the sword pointed at his throat. “Both of the Barbarigo brothers are within the walls of the Arsenal by now.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding sharply and calling Bartolomeo over. “It seems that both of my targets are inside the Arsenal,” he said, once the burly mercenary had managed to make his way over.
After conferring for a moment, he and Bartolomeo elected to meet up with Uncle Mario and his mercenaries, and then launch their assault on the Arsenal. Under the cover of that, Ezio himself would be able to scale the walls and open the gates, just as he’d done when he and his uncle’s forces had broken the defenses of Vieri’s fortress in San Gimignano.
Once he, Bartolomeo, and the man’s own forces had met up with Uncle Mario’s, Ezio quickly told them of his plan. It was a fairly simple thing, getting his uncle to agree to follow along with the same kind of plan they’d used to subdue the mercenaries who’d been charged with the defense of the fortress Vieri had been cowering in, and soon enough Ezio was making his way over the outer wall. With his entrance covered neatly by the mayhem all around him – and then below, as he ascended to the top of the wall – Ezio crested the top of the wall and then leaped lightly back down to the ground.
Making for the doors as quickly as he could, considering his need to remain out of sight for as long as he could manage, considering that he didn’t have any backup on this particular errand.
Still, he’d been just as alone when he’d opened the door to Vieri’s fortress, and just as he’d done when he’d been faced with that task, Ezio completed it without being spotted and stopped. Opening the gates, Ezio drew his sword as his uncle’s troops swarmed into Venezia’s Arsenal, turning to catch sight of the large, brooding form of Silvio Barbarigo’s man, Dante Moro.
The man himself was armed with a large, heavy flail, with heavy iron knuckle-dusters on both of his hands. Throwing himself out of the way of a strike from the oversized brute’s flail, he glared up at the man he could see, standing up on the ramparts above them.
“A fine specimen, isn’t he!” Silvio called down; Ezio narrowed his eyes as he caught the sheer, contemptuous glee in the Templar’s voice. “You should both be honored to die by his hand!”
“Suck my balls, cazzo!” Bartolomeo roared, and Ezio glanced over at the large, burly form standing next to him; Bartolomeo had managed to snag Moro’s flail on his battle-staff. “Come on, Ezio! We need to catch that grassone bastardo!”
Dante turned back to them, a mad snarl on his face and a heavy, iron club in his hands. The club itself was covered in short, cruel, hooked spines, and when the oversized brute brought it down, it tore a furrow in Bartolomeo’s left shoulder.
“I’ll have your head for that, you pig-eyed sack of shit!” Bartolomeo bellowed, even as Ezio himself loaded up his small, hidden pistol and prepared to fire.
“Do you think I don’t know why you’re really here, Auditore?!” Silvio snarled, though Ezio could tell that the man had been startled by the bullet that had ricocheted off of the brickwork behind him. “But, you’re too late! There’s nothing you can do to stop us now!”
Reloading and firing without another word to the Templar, Ezio comforted himself with the thought that little Maria had been rescued from whatever it was that those Templar bastardi had planned to do with her.
“Hah! You pretend you don’t know!” Silvio spat, having narrowly managed to dodge the shot once again. “Though, once Dante’s done with you, your winesack of an uncle, and that muscle-bound friend of yours, it’ll hardly matter either way. You’ll just follow your fool of a father!” Ezio took another shot; missed, by a much thinner margin, yes, but he still failed to end the life of the Templar he was facing. “Do you know what my greatest regret is? That I couldn’t have been Giovanni’s hangman myself!” Ezio snarled; another shot, and another all-too-near miss. “How I would have loved to pull that lever, and watch your whoreson father kick and gasp and dangle!”
Ezio felt, for a moment, that he would have thrown himself at those very ramparts – to make his way up to that miserable Templar bastardo and silence him once and for all – if not for the very real threat of Dante Moro still standing in his way.
“And then, of course, there would have been plenty of time for that ubriacone uncle of yours!”
Snarling, but still knowing that he couldn’t go wasting his limited ammunition on the Templar, even as Silvio seemed bound and determined to infuriate him. And so, as he heard the sound of combat all around him, and as Silvio’s arrogant manner began to falter, Ezio pulled out a handful of throwing-knives and let fly. One of them ended up in Dante Moro’s left arm, as the man rushed up the ramparts to the aid of his master, so that would serve to slow them down.
Still, Ezio knew that there would be a ladder on the other side of the wall that Dante and his master had fled over, one that would take them down to the jetty and closer to their escape.
Chapter 255: Dante Moro
Chapter Text
And so, calling on Bartolomeo to assist him since Uncle Mario was currently leading the troops in their defeat of the remaining Barbarigo forces, Ezio hurried out after the pair of them. Palming a smoke bomb, even as he spotted the small boat that the Templar and his lackey had clambered into in their efforts to make good their escape.
“Cazzo! Will nothing short of death stop you, Auditore?!”
“Nothing short of yours, Templar!” he snapped back, tossing another couple smoke bombs for good measure, before leaping into the boat.
The sailors had fled as soon as the first of his smoke bombs had exploded across the deck, and now Ezio found himself alone with the Templar and his brutish lackey, surrounded by the swirling smoke from the bombs he’d just set off.
“You won’t kill me so easily as you did my brothers, Auditore!” Silvio shouted, false bravado lacing his shaking voice.
Springing forward, through the dispersing clouds, Ezio jabbed both of his hidden blades into Silvio Barbarigo’s stomach, opening the man up wide enough that not even the finest of surgeons would have been able to restore him to health. Standing back up with a sigh, knowing that he might very well still have Moro to deal with, Ezio turned to look at the brute.
He hadn’t ever been in a position to see the man’s eyes, before this moment when the pair of them stood and faced each other, but there seemed – even at this late stage, to be something almost childlike about them. It was as though, with the man he’d been assigned to guard dead at his feet, Dante Moro didn’t know what to do with himself. Still, pity the man though he might for his obvious mental deficiency, Ezio knew that he wouldn’t be able to take any prisoners on this night.
Not when he lacked the means to hold them, and not after Dante Moro had clearly made up his mind to attack.
Mentally slow the man might have been, but he was still a very large man; broad of chest and shoulder, tall, and with his form laced with corded muscles that propelled him forward as he charged. Dodging aside as he drew his dagger, Ezio took a moment to position himself as Dante turned back around and looked at him. There was an expression of childish, confused rage beginning to appear on the man’s face, and Ezio knew that he wouldn’t be able to evade the man forever.
And so, bracing himself against the charge that Dante was about to make against him, Ezio turned his dagger and slid the blade between two of Dante Moro’s ribs, directly into the poor, deluded man’s heart.
Sighing as he watched Dante crumple to the deck, Ezio knelt at the man’s side.
“Requiescat in pace, amico,” he said, then rose once more, mind already turning back to his task once more.
Chapter 256: Silvio Barbarigo
Chapter Text
“Where was that galley I saw bound for, Silvio?” he demanded, stepping over to the dying Templar on the deck.
Silvio chuckled, narrowing his clouded eyes. “It seems as though Marco had better things to do than stay here to die with me. Since I’ve no more need to protect that bastardo or his ilk, I suppose that I could at least tell you of that, Assassin: the galley is bound for Cyprus,” a rough, cruel grin stretched his face. “Give my regards to Marco when you see him again, Auditore.”
With those as his last words, Silvio Barbarigo’s eyes slipped closed at last, and Ezio knelt by his side to administer the man’s last rites. The sound of heavy footfalls, from two men making their way across the deck of the ship he was still standing on drew his attention then, and Ezio turned to see that his uncle and Bartolomeo were making their own way towards him.
“I see you managed to give a good account of yourself, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, making his way over to wrap a warm, companionable arm around Ezio’s shoulders.
“Sí, uncle, but it seems there’s something else I need to attend to,” he said, looking out towards the rout he’d seen the galley taking, just before he’d lost sight of it.
“Oh?”
“Sí,” he said, looking once more out to sea, along the path that the galley he’d seen departing had taken. “We’ve managed to secure Venezia once more, Uncle, but it seems that the Templars have business that calls them to Cyprus, now.”
Uncle Mario hummed in thought, narrowing his eyes as he, too, peered across the water. “I will set some of my spies on the task; see what they might find that would link the Templars back to Cyprus.”
“Grazie, uncle,” he said, smiling as he stepped down from the boat and the pair of corpses he’d left behind.
Chapter 257: Venetian victory
Chapter Text
He was already thinking about just how little Maria was doing, back at Sister Teodora’s brothel, and as he turned his path back towards the city once more, Ezio was pleased to know that the Doge and his people would be able to regain control over Venezia once more. Having dealt with another of the Templars that had plagued him, and knowing where it was that they were going to go next, even while he didn’t know why, would at least give him something of a starting point.
For the moment, however, Ezio was far more eager to make his way back to Sister Teodora so that he could find out just how little Maria was doing.
When he did manage to make his way back to the brothel where Sister Teodora and her people were sheltering little Maria while she rested from her ordeal, Ezio found that the citizens had clearly heard about his latest victory on the behalf of their city, as he was greeted with raised cups, cheers, and kisses from the more brazen among the populace. He’d sipped wine from several goblets that had been offered his way, and so found himself feeling all the lighter on his feet as he made his way through the doors of Sister Teodora’s establishment.
“The hero of Venezia returns!” Antonio greeted, pulling him in for an embrace and yet another kiss; both of which he returned with what enthusiasm he could, with the evening beginning to catch up to him at last.
“Come, Ezio; you’ve worked very hard, my son,” Sister Teodora said, taking his right shoulder and pulling him deeper into her establishment. “I feel your tired body is in need of comfort and succor.”
“It is true, Sister,” he said, swiftly catching on to the spirit of things. “I have such aches and pains that I may need a great deal of comfort and succor.”
The cheerful laughter of his littlest sister brought Ezio’s attention back to the little imp that had been returned to him not such a very long time ago.
“Fratello, have you forgotten what all of our doctors have been saying? True healing requires a good night’s sleep,” the wicked little imp grinned widely at him. “So make sure that you get one, fratello mio.”
“Take your own advice, sorellina,” he volleyed back, grinning back.
He was pleased, at least, to know that what remained of his family would remain safe.
~AC: II~
It was some time later, after he and little Maria had been given time to rest from their many and varied ordeals, that Ezio realized the significance of this particular day. It was Midsummer’s Day; his twenty-eighth birthday. He stood in the courtyard of the Ducale, simply allowing himself to breathe in the peace and tranquility of such a place while he could. He’d no real way of knowing just when he would be called upon to undertake another mission for the Brotherhood; when he would once more be able to strike another blow against the Templars who had robbed him of so much.
But, he would be prepared for the moment to come, all the same.
Chapter 258: Gathering Intel
Chapter Text
“Ezio!”
“Leonardo!” he called back, turning at the sound of the inventor’s familiar voice. “I thought you were in Milano!”
“I just got back,” the inventor said, and while there was a wide grin on his face, there was also something hurried about his manner. “They told me where to find you; there’s something I truly need to speak to you about, as soon as possible.”
“Now?”
“Sí; I do apologize for being so abrupt, but it’s not something I can leave to wait.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding as he fell into step behind the inventor and the pair of them left the Ducale.
It wasn’t long before Ezio found himself standing within the walls of Leonardo’s workshop once more, surrounded by the drawings, models, and paintings that he’d long since become accustomed to seeing those times when the inventor would invite him into his workshop to look at one thing or another.
“I had your Codex pages delivered to Monteriggioni, as promised,” Leonardo said, even as he produced wine and cakes that both seemed to have seen better days. “However, I couldn’t resist studying them some more, myself, and I’ve written down my findings,” the inventor said, digging out a few rolls of parchment that had been filled with his distinctive script. “I don’t know why I’ve never made the connection before, but when I put the pages together, I realized that the markings, and symbols, and ancient alphabets can all be decoded, and we seem to have struck gold! For all of this group of pages is contiguous!” Leonardo made a face, and for a moment Ezio thought that the inventor had discovered some unfortunate piece of news within the pages of the Codex. “This wine is too warm!” he shook his head. “Mind you, I’ve gotten used to San Colombano; this Veneto stuff is like gnat’s piss in comparison.”
“Go on,” he said, trying to hold back his laughter, but unable to quite hold back a grin.
“Listen to this,” Leonardo said, as he produced a pair of spectacles and settled them on his face. “The Prophet will appear, when the Second Piece is brought to the Floating City,” the inventor intoned, looking down at the notes he’d made.
Ezio took hold of them, his own curiosity fully aroused by even the small sample that he’d just been made aware of. “Prophet?” he scanned the translation in front of him. “Only the Prophet may open it… Two Pieces, two Guardians… beware the man in black?”
“That part tripped me up, as well,” Leonardo said, looking askance at his own documents even as he doffed his reading glasses, as though there would be something more to his translations if he just looked hard enough at them. “I know of some who would fit such a description, but I’ve no idea why your Codex would seek to warn against association with monks or nuns. I don’t even know what to make of these Guardians he speaks of.”
“That part concerns me, as well,” he said, looking down at the notes Leonardo had compiled in thought for a long moment, before coming to a decision. “Leonardo, we’ve known each other for such a long time by now, and if I can’t trust you with this, then I can’t trust anyone. Listen: my uncle, Mario, has been working to decipher the pages of the Codex, as well; he has a great deal more at Monteriggioni, both those that he himself collected, as well as those from my father’s searches. There’s a prophecy contained within the pages; one that makes mention of an ancient, hidden vault, which holds something incredibly powerful,” he paused for a moment, thinking back upon what else he’d learned this day. “I must confess that this is the first time I’ve heard of a man in black, however.”
“Sí, I still don’t know quite what to make of that,” Leonardo said, glancing briefly down at his translations, before turning his attention back to Ezio, a troubled expression on his face. “However, that’s not the only thing I find myself concerned about, amico. If we managed to find all of this out from the Codex, then it would only stand to reason that the Barbarigo and their allies have been made aware of just such a thing, as well. There’s more than a small chance that they know about this vault of yours.”
“Wait,” he said, narrowing his eyes as a thought firmly struck him. “What if that was why they sent the galley to Cyprus?” he asked, thinking aloud for the benefit of both of them. “To find this Piece of Eden, and bring it back to Venezia?”
“When the Second Piece is brought to the Floating City,” Leonardo muttered, looking down at his page of translated notes.
“It’s starting to come back to me,” Ezio said, as the disparate facts he’d slowly worked to assemble from the scattered pages of Altaïr’s Codex began to come together into an uncomfortable whole. “The Prophet will appear… Only the Prophet can open the Vault,” he quoted from memory, eyes narrowing in contemplation, before they widened in realization. “Dio mio… When I was young, I was too brash, too headstrong, to imagine that the Codex was anything but an old man’s fantasy. But, now I can see that it was so much more than that! The attempted murders of Duke Lorenzo and Doge Mocenigo, the deaths of Father and my brothers, as well as Lorenzo’s own brother… It’s all been a part of his plan!” Ezio hissed, unable to keep himself from shuddering at the implications he’d just uncovered, if only in his own mind. “Rodrigo Borgia!”
“The Spaniard?” Leonardo echoed, looking back up at Ezio from the notes he’d been studying.
“The very same,” he said, holding Leonardo’s gaze for a long moment, before returning his attention to the notes that the inventor had compiled. “The galley from Cyprus arrives tomorrow,” he narrowed his eyes, thoughts of what he was soon to be facing coming all too easily back to him. “I plan to be there to meet it.”
“Buona fortuna, amico mio,” Leonardo said, standing so that the pair of them could embrace.
“Grazie, Leonardo,” he said, wishing for a moment that he could assure the inventor that he would be well, but knowing that nothing could be certain.
He’d defeated Templars before, but there was truly no way of telling how a battle would go before it was joined.
Chapter 259: The mercenary captain
Chapter Text
After he’d spoken to both Uncle Mario and little Maria, Ezio found himself once more granted the use of his uncle’s mercenaries, as well as advised not to bring little Maria into the battle that he and Rodrigo Borgia’s Templars would soon be conducting against one another. Apparently, there was some kind of danger that the Pieces of Eden presented to the Guardians when they were placed in close proximity to one another. Ezio didn’t know quite what to think about such a thing, but he didn’t want to risk something happening to the littlest of his sisters. Particularly when he was going to be facing the Templars, since given what he’d heard from Uncle Mario, one of the things that the Templars most wanted was to capture any Guardians they came across.
He wasn’t going to endanger one of the last members of his family, particularly considering who he was going to be facing.
Looking down upon the docks from his shadowed perch up on the colonnade closeby, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he watched a group of men dressed in plain clothing but still displaying the crest of Rodrigo Borgia in a subtle sort of way. They were unloading a small, unadorned chest from the galley that he had seen departing from Venezia on the night that he’d taken the life of Marco Barbarigo and Dante Moro.
They seemed to be handling it with the utmost of care, giving Ezio the suspicion that it might very well be the Piece of Eden they had journeyed to Cyprus to collect. However, when he noticed that there were four other crates, each of them borne by another of the guards that Borgia had brought with him. Narrowing his eyes all the more, wondering just how he would be able to determine just which of those crates would ultimately contain the Piece of Eden he was searching for.
All four of them may have contained decoys, or they might have held some other kind of treasures, or else they might have been an eclectic mix of both treasure and trash; there would be no way of knowing, particularly at the distance he was going to be obligated to follow them at.
Breathing deeply as he prepared to follow the Borgia men he’d been observing, Ezio paused for a moment as he saw a flicker from one of the crates that the man on the near-left was carrying.
It was an odd thing to see, no doubt, but it seemed to speak of the location of the Piece of Eden he was seeking.
When the Borgia man and his escort set the crate down on the road, stepping back so that they could remove a small, round bundle that had been hidden within the folds of what seemed like some kind of finely-woven cloth if the way it moved was any indication, Ezio hurried closer. Just as he’d alighted on a nearby rooftop, another pulse of light from what had to be the Piece of Eden that the Borgia men were carrying emerged, rippling through the structure of whatever it was that had been concealed beneath that cloth.
However, this time there wasn’t simply a pulse from whatever it was that had been hidden under that cloth, but a veritable explosion of light from underneath the folds of the cloth concealing it. Ezio was almost certain by this point that what he was not-quite-seeing was indeed the Piece of Eden that he had been seeking since he’d become aware of just what it was that Rodrigo Borgia and his Templars were seeking. Eyes widening in surprise as he watched the column of light that had originally risen out of the small, round object that he’d briefly glimpsed in the hands of the Borgia men while they’d been making their way through the darkened streets that bordered the docks.
Watching in stunned disbelief as the light that had previously been pouring out of whatever Piece of Eden it had been that Rodrigo Borgia’s dogs had claimed shrank slightly, resolving itself into a cloaked figure; a figure clad in what seemed to be the deepest shade of black.
Beware the man in black, Ezio mused, melting back into the shadows as the figure raised its head.
The robes this strangest of newcomers was wearing seemed to be heavier than any he’d ever seen before, moving almost as though they were made of some kind of leather. When the man in black turned slightly, seeming to have taken note of the men standing to either side of him, Ezio had only a moment to wonder just what it was that he was going to do, before the mysterious figure drew out some kind of blade that seemed to shine with an inner light all its own. In the time it would have taken Ezio to blink twice, the man in black had cut down Rodrigo Borgia’s men in their very tracks, leaving the severed head of the first man to go rolling across the street, while the two halves of his escort fell beside him.
When the man in black turned his attention to the place where Ezio was standing, he couldn’t help but wonder just what it was that the man was seeing from so deep under his heavy cowl, even as the mysterious man looked up into the shadows where Ezio was still standing in an attempt to conceal himself from what remained of the guardsmen that Rodrigo Borgia had brought with him on this particular night. Turning as the remaining guards began pouring into the alley where two of their own had fallen, Ezio’s eyes widened as the man in black flicked his left hand, summoning another of those strange, shining blades that he’d used to cut down the Borgia guardsmen he’d faced when he’d first emerged from the Piece of Eden he’d somehow been concealing himself inside.
Ezio could only just see the man as he moved, what seemed to have been only a single, blurred step ending with the severed halves of the pair of guardsmen that had been the first to arrive on the scene of what had just become a place of slaughter falling to land on the empty street. Narrowing his eyes once more, as he watched the man in black calmly turn to face the remaining guardsmen that had clearly come in response to the screams and cries for help that the one, last surviving guardsman had managed to get out in the face of the man in black and his terrible, almost ethereal blades.
Ezio wondered for a moment if such as even that had been a part of the man in black’s plan; drawing the remaining guardsmen into position, so that he would be able to kill them almost at his leisure, rather than being forced to hunt them down in another fashion.
Chapter 260: Dangerous ground
Chapter Text
Then, recalling the present circumstances of this strangest of men, Ezio found himself wondering if the man in black would even be capable of hunting for those guardsmen who were currently beyond the range of whatever Piece of Eden he was inhabiting. It was a strange thing to think about, but this of all nights seemed to be the time for such thoughts. One thing Ezio knew for certain, however: Uncle Mario was going to want to know everything about what had gone on, on this night of all nights. Breathing deeply to steady himself, as the remainder of the guardsmen that Rodrigo Borgia had dispatched to bring him whatever Piece of Eden the man in black had made so uniquely his own came storming into the alleyway to die upon the strange, shining blades that the man bore with such skill and strength, Ezio found himself almost involuntarily tensing as – once the last of Rodrigo Borgia’s guardsmen had fallen dead to the street, this one in quite a few pieces – the hidden gaze of the man in black turned to regard him.
And, while it was a fact that he’d not moved beyond the range of whatever Piece of Eden it was that tied him to the world, Ezio couldn’t help wondering if such was simply one more part of whatever inscrutable plan the man in black seemed to have.
As the man in black turned his gaze fully to take Ezio in, Ezio found himself wondering just how much of him this strangest of men would be able to see in the darkness he stood in, still concealing himself from what might remain of the guardsmen that Rodrigo Borgia had dispatched to guard the Piece of Eden that he’d been aiming to claim in order to make his way into the Vault that the Codex had spoken of. Knowing that the man in black had offered him aid so readily clashed with what Altaïr had written; what little of it there actually was as compared to what the old Assassin had written on the subject of the Guardians. Still, Ezio knew that it was always better to take one’s own measure of a man, rather than simply relying upon impressions made by someone you’d never met.
Still, knowing that the man he was seeing wasn’t truly real in most senses of the word – or at least had no true, physical presence in the world – gave Ezio pause, at least for a moment before he mastered himself.
Leaping lightly down from his perch, Ezio made his way over to the fallen forms of the guards that the man in black had cut down with the kind of ease that he’d only seen demonstrated by Uncle Mario, his mercenaries, and La Volpe and his people.
“I had wondered if you would be willing to show yourself,” the man in black said, his deep, powerful voice letting Ezio know that he was a man in his prime.
“Grazie for your aid,” he said, making his way over to where the man in black was standing, glancing quickly at the small, bronzed form that had been revealed when one of the Borgia guardsmen had kicked it in his death throes.
The only response the man in black gave him was an enigmatic smile, as he handed over the bronze sphere and vanished back into it once again. Looking down at what he held in his hands, Ezio carefully wrapped it back in the muslin cloth that it had originally been concealed in, then made his way over to one of the guards that had been decapitated by the man in black as he’d moved through the ranks of the guardsmen in his path, cutting them down in their very footsteps.
When he found the guardsman, Ezio was surprised to see that the neck seemed to have actually been cauterized by the strange, shining blades that the man in black had wielded against the men standing in his way. Yes, the fact that he wouldn’t have to deal with blood spatter on the clothes he was going to be appropriating for himself, but the sight of such a clean wound made by a sword of all things unnerved him. Once he’d managed to fully outfit himself in the armor of the dead guard before him, Ezio quickly set about checking the other corpses around him.
Each and every one of them bore the same type of cauterized sword-wounds that he’d seen on the first guard that he’d seen, and as Ezio picked up the crate he’d just finished repacking, he shuddered briefly. Yes, he was still grateful for the help that the man in black had offered him, but he still wasn’t entirely certain how he felt about the weapon that the man in black had been using. He’d never seen a sword that could burn before.
Bracing himself to confront Borgia once more, Ezio drew himself up to his full height and began making his way from the Molo to the Campo dei Santi Giovanni e Paolo, passing by the large equestrian statue that Messer Verrocchio had erected some time ago, and then continued north along the Fondamenta dei Mendicanti until he found himself standing before a rather dull-looking house in a terrace overlooking the canals. Steadying himself once again, Ezio made his way up to the door, knocking firmly.
The door swung open, revealing another of the Borgia’s many guards, as well as the man himself seated at the back of the room.
“Where are the others?” Borgia demanded, standing as his expression contorted into one of barely restrained fury.
“Apologies, Altezza,” he said, disguising his voice as well as he could manage. “There was more resistance than we were prepared to face.”
“What a mess,” Borgia growled, stalking forward, fury in every line of his body . “Was it those damnable Assassins again?”
“Sí, at least so far as we can tell,” he said, once again forcing himself not to tense at the sight of Borgia standing so close to him. “All of the other guards were dead when I arrived.”
“Are you sure you didn’t help them along, Auditore?” Rodrigo Borgia growled; Ezio tried to hold himself steady as the man ground his teeth.
“How long did it take you to figure that out, Cardinale?” he needled, tone twisting the Borgia’s title into the insult that it fully deserved to be.
“I knew from the moment you set foot in this place,” Rodrigo Borgia snarled, piggish face twisting in rage, before he seemed to master himself. “But enough of your distractions, Auditore; hand it over.”
“You mean that Piece of Eden all of your men died trying to bring to you?” Ezio needled, standing firm even in the face of Rodrigo Borgia’s fury. He’d challenged and defeated the man’s forces often enough that he’d long since lost whatever trepidation he might have had about facing the man in combat. “And, where is that Prophet of yours? No one seems to have appeared but the pair of us.”
The Borgia’s laugh was akin to the sound of bones rattling.
“You claim not to be a believer, and yet here you are,” Borgia ground out, smiling like a hungry wolf. “You do not see the Prophet? He stands before you! I am the Prophet!”
Ezio narrowed his eyes; he honestly doubted that the Templar had had any dealings with the man in black, or else he would have had at least some kind of inkling as to just how dangerous the man in black could be when properly provoked.
“You, Borgia? I doubt that,” he sneered, drawing his sword even as Rodrigo Borgia did the same.
Chapter 261: Passing favors
Chapter Text
Out of the corner of his left eye, Ezio saw a flash of the man in black’s figure as he drew his strange, shining sword and sliced through the shiavona that Borgia had drawn; it seemed that he’d moved too fast for the Borgia to react, or even to notice what he’d done until the severed halves of his weapon fell to the ground.
“Are you alone, Ezio?” Borgia sneered, tossing aside the useless, broken halves of his weapon as he drew a twisted dagger from underneath the folds of his cloak. “Where are the rest of your Assassin friends?”
“I hardly need any help to deal with you,” he scoffed.
The pair of them clashed again, and he managed to score a slash across the man’s upper-torso, laying him open and leaving him to bleed over his elegant robes.
“You little shit!” the Borgia snarled. “I can see that I’m going to need help to master you! Guards! Guards!”
Even as the Borgia’s guards swarmed into the room, Ezio smiled slightly as he saw the shimmer from the Piece of Eden that had proceeded the emergence of the man in black those first times that he’d seen the man appearing. It was indeed the man in black; Ezio could feel the man as he became solid once more, right shoulder pressed against his left as the pair of them stood almost back-to-back against the forces Borgia was bringing to bear upon them.
“What madness is this?!” Borgia demanded, piggish eyes shifting from him to the heavily-cloaked form of the man in black then back to him.
“What, you wished to claim the Piece of Eden, and you didn’t know that the man in black inhabited it?” he mocked, smirking at the man as he and the man in black stood together against the remaining guardsmen that Borgia had sent against them.
The shimmer of the man in black’s shining blades as he deployed them brought a wider smile to his face, as did the sight of the clear and growing apprehension that showed on the Spaniard’s face. When he heard the sound of a throwing knife cutting through the air, Ezio found his attention drawn to the familiar form of his uncle, grinning at him from behind him and slightly to the right.
“Uncle Mario!” he called, grinning widely as he turned to face his fellow Assassin, and one of the last remaining members of his family. “I was wondering when you would show up!”
“I could hardly let you have all the fun, nipote!” his uncle called back, grinning widely. “Don’t worry, nipote! You’re not alone!”
He wondered, just for a moment, who it was that his uncle was talking about, before a crossbow bolt buried itself in the head of a guardsman who’d been approaching him with a halberd. The hooded form of La Volpe appeared on the other side of his uncle, and Ezio grinned that much wider.
“I didn’t think I’d be seeing you again so soon, Fox!” he called, grinning up at the man who’d given him and little Maria so much help over the time that they’d spent with the man and his people.
“We’ll be handling the rest of these cani bastardi for you,” the Fox said, a grin on his face as he reloaded his crossbow once more. “You just make sure that Borgia doesn’t get his hands on that box!”
“Va bene, I’ll make sure of it!” he called back up to the man, turning to snatch up the crate that he’d been carrying, as out of the corner of his eyes he caught sight of Antonio and Bartolomeo making their own appearances inside the small house beside the rest of his brother Assassins.
The heavy footfalls of Rodrigo Borgia as Ezio found the man pursuing him drew his attention once more.
“Give me the Apple, Assassino!” the old Templar growled, once Ezio had drawn away from the circle of his brother Assassins.
“You seem to have regained your nerve, Templar,” he needled, smirking as he shifted his grip on the crate so that he could draw his sword as Borgia closed with him. “What, were my brothers too much for you to handle?”
“I’ll see that you join your brothers, Assassino!” Borgia snarled, all but throwing himself forward, sword drawn as though to cut him down.
The shimmer out of the corner of his eye let him know that the man in black had appeared once again from the depths of the Piece of Eden, apparently called the Apple, and he felt a pressure against his left shoulder that was beginning to become familiar the more times he’d experienced such a thing. He knew that the man in black had come fully out of the Apple once more, standing as a part of the physical world once again.
“You again!” Borgia snarled, his gaze snapping to the man in black as his body formed fully. “Pezzi di merda¸ what even are you?!”
The man in black didn’t respond, except to draw his shining swords and brandish them in the direction of Rodrigo Borgia. The clatter of the Templar’s sword as the two halves fell to the ground after a single swipe from the man in black’s shining swords brought a smile to his face. Hearing the sounds of running footfalls, Ezio turned to gently grip the right shoulder of the man in black before he could vanish once more.
“Stay a moment, amico,” he said, pitching his voice to be gentle in an effort not to startle the man and potentially drive him back into the depths of the Apple. “The others will want to meet you.”
The man in black didn’t say a word, leading Ezio to wonder for a moment if the man would speak again this night, but he didn’t vanish back into the Apple the way he’d done so many times before, either.
Chapter 262: Learning to climb
Chapter Text
“Dio mio, where did you come from?” Paola exclaimed, her eyes settling upon the man in black where he stood at Ezio’s back.
“He doesn’t speak much,” he said, smiling slightly as he clapped the man in black on his leather-clad shoulder.
“What a strange man,” Uncle Mario said, as he made his way over to where he and the man in black were standing. “Come along; there are still matters for us to attend to.”
“Borgia mentioned a Prophet,” he said, as he, the man in black, and Uncle Mario fell into step with one another. “Do you think it could be him?”
“I didn’t know about him until today,” Uncle Mario said, as the pair of them continued on their way through the darkened streets. “What do you think, amico?”
“I don’t think the Codex mentioned this man,” a new man said, stepping out of the shadows to his left; this new man had dark hair, pale skin, and a thoughtful, humorous face. “Not in the context of his being the Prophet, at least. However, the man in black was indeed mentioned.”
The man in black didn’t say a word in response, but the small smile he could see on the deeply tanned man’s face let him know that he was indeed rather pleased about what he was hearing. Whatever the reason for such a thing could have been.
“Then, are we going to have to keep searching for him?” he asked. “If only to keep him from falling into the hands of the Templars?”
“I don’t think we’re going to have many problems with that,” the good-humored man said, the smile on his face becoming rather amused, though in that same good-natured way that seemed to come so naturally to him. “A Prophet’s arrival was predicted, and here you’ve been right among us all along without us guessing the truth.”
“I don’t understand, you think I’m this Prophet of yours?” he asked, turning his full attention to the man walking beside him as they all continued on their way. “Who are you, anyway?”
“My name is Niccolò di Bernardo dei Machiavelli,” the man said, sketching a light bow. “I am a member of the Brotherhood of Assassins, just like you, your uncle, and so many other members of your family.”
“Speaking of my family, how are Claudia, little Maria, and my mother doing?” he asked, turning to look at Niccolò as he blended smoothly with their group.
“They’re doing as well as can be expected,” Niccolò said, turning his gaze to Uncle Mario as he caught up to them.
“While you have been away, seeing to the destruction of the Templars in this city, Claudia married Orazio,” Uncle Mario said, smiling in pleased reflection as their group continued on their way through the city. “Soon enough, I think she will present you with a new niece or nephew.” He smiled, chuckling softly as their group continued on their way. “Much remains to be done before we can see them again, or celebrate. We may not even have such a chance; Rodrigo Borgia might have been forced to abandon the Piece of Eden he was pursuing, but he’s never been the type to give up on anything he desires,” Uncle Mario turned to regard the man in black. “And, now that he’s caught a glimpse of you, amico, he’s going to do everything in his power to reclaim the Apple, so that he might find out about who and what you are.”
A glance at what could be seen of the tanned face of the man in black revealed a small, pleased looking smile on his face; it seemed that there was little that could phase the man, and Ezio found himself wondering just what kind of a man he was walking beside.
“I think it is time we completed your initiation, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, smiling with the same kind of pleasure that he’d seen on the kindly man’s face as soon as the pair of them had met up with each other again. “Here,” he held out a map, with a point marked on it. “Meet us here at sunset; I’ll bring little Maria along, too.” Uncle Mario paused for a moment, looking toward the man in black. “I must ask that you not attempt… Whatever the effect is that the Pieces of Eden have on the Treasure Guardians. Those that make them go into some sort of a trance.”
Turning to look at the man in black himself, not wishing for anything to happen to his littlest sister due to the presence of the man in black or the Piece of Eden that he inhabited. The slow, almost deliberate nod that the man in black gave them gave Ezio at least some comfort, but he couldn’t help wondering what the motives of such a deliberately mysterious man could be.
When Niccolò offered to carry the crate that contained the man in black’s Piece of Eden, and the man himself vanished back into the Apple once again, Ezio felt a bit of relief. Having the man in black walking next to him, even though he hadn’t said a word and had indeed helped him to fight off not only Rodrigo Borgia’s guards, but the Templar himself, had been unnerving the longer he’d had to do it.
~AC: II~
When the evening had fallen, and Ezio had made his way to the location of the tower that had been marked off on the map, he took a moment to look up the length of the tower before he began to make his way up the side of the building before him. He’d a moment to wonder just what it was that Uncle Mario and his brother Assassins wanted from him, before he arrived at the top of the tower. He’d been hearing their voices as he’d drawn closer to the top of the tower, but not clearly enough to determine just what it was that they had been discussing.
Taking Paola’s hand as she offered it to him, Ezio climbed the rest of the way over the wall, standing back to his full height as he looked around at the gathered forms of his brother and sister Assassins.
“Laa shay’a waqi’un moulaq bale koulon moumkine,” Uncle Mario said, pausing for a moment as though he’d just uttered some kind of incantation. “These are the words, spoken by our ancestors, that lie at the heart of our Creed.”
Niccolò was the next to speak, though his gaze seemed to be focused on both him and the form of the man in black; Ezio wondered if the man had been there from the beginning, or if he’d simply emerged from the Apple once the rest of the Assassins who’d been set to gather in this place had made their appearances, or if he’d been there from the beginning. Or, at least since whoever had been given charge of the Apple had brought it to this place.
“Where other men blindly follow the truth, remember,” Niccolò’s gaze sharpened, focusing on him almost to the exclusion of the man in black.
Somehow, Ezio found that the words he had to speak next came to him almost as though he’d been using them all his life; almost as though he already knew them: “Nothing is true.”
A glance at the face of the man in black as he continued to observe the goings-on between them revealed that he was clearly interested in what he was seeing.
“Where other men are limited by morality or law, remember,” Niccolò continued, glancing briefly back at the man in black where he stood, watching the byplay between all of them.
“Everything is permitted,” he continued, glancing to the man in black as he spoke.
Truly, he seemed content to observe; more and more, it seemed as though he was simply a curious sort. He wondered, before Niccolò made to speak again, just what the man’s connection to the Assassins was, if he’d even had one before Ezio had secured the Apple that he seemed to have poured his physical presence into by some means or other.
“We work in the dark, to serve the light,” Niccolò said, continuing on after a brief glance to the man in black. “We are Assassins.” After he and his brother and sister Assassins had repeated the phrase a few times, Niccolò drew their attention once more. “In this modern age, we are not so literal as our ancestors; we do not demand the sacrifice of a finger. But the seal we mark ourselves with is no less permanent. Are you two prepared to join us?”
He’d lost none of his conviction during the course of his work, and he could tell that little Maria felt just as he did, and so the pair of them answered in the affirmative without hesitation. Antonio was the one who made his way over to the burning brazier that had been set up at the center of the tower they were all standing atop.
“This only hurts for a little while, mi famiglia,” Antonio said, smiling gently at the pair of them as they stepped forward. “Like so many things.”
As Antonio branded first his and then little Maria’s ring fingers, Ezio found himself wincing not for the pain in his own finger, but for the soft hiss he heard from his littlest sister.
“Here, this will soothe it,” Sister Teodora said, gently rubbing some kind of thick, sweet-smelling salve on both of their ring fingers.
“Grazie, Teodora,” little Maria said, smiling softly at the woman who they’d spent so much time with during the course of their stay in Venezia.
“Benvenuto, you two,” Niccolò said, a pleased expression on his face, though he didn’t seem to be the kind to actually smile. “You are now a part of our Brotherhood. It only remains to complete the initiation. And then; then, mi amici, we have much work to do,” Niccolò’s gaze shifted, then, back to where the man in black stood, having watched the entire process as it had been played out before him. “I don’t suppose there’s a way to induct you into our ranks in this manner, amico, but I suspect you’ll speak when it suits you. And no sooner, at that.”
The man in black, for all the stoicism that he seemed determined to show in the face of whatever situation he found himself facing, seemed pleased to hear such a thing.
When he and his brother and sister Assassins all leaped from the top of the tower, Ezio grinned at little Maria as he took his position among the line of them and made his way up the line. Breathing deeply as he made his own leap from the top of the tower after Niccolò, Uncle Mario, and the others. He’d a moment of breathless anticipation, standing at the top of the tower and looking down upon the seemingly small bales of hay that he’d been meant to land in, but he’d made the leap all the same.
Grinning as he watched little Maria make her own leap from the summit of the tower, popping her head up from the pile of hay she’d fallen into when she, herself, had landed in it; Ezio reached over to embrace her and the pair of them shared a kiss as they stood back up.
Chapter 263: Try, try again
Chapter Text
Settling himself back into the object he’d learned was called a Piece of Eden – the Apple, in fact – Xemnas considered the new information that he’d been given. He’d restricted himself to observing these Assassins, as they called themselves; he could nearly taste the Darkness that they had washed themselves in, and when he’d heard how they thought of themselves, he could understand why. The Darkness that clung to them was a fascinating thing, and to see the way they nurtured it within their own Hearts was marvelous to see.
He’d also recognized the Heart of the second of the pair he’d seen within the walls of Castle Oblivion when he’d come to investigate the strange presences within the second fortress that Organization XIII had maintained; still, that was clearly a matter for the future.
~AC: II~
Once he, Niccolò, Uncle Mario, and little Maria had taken the Apple to Leonardo’s workshop, Ezio settled himself down at the large trestle table alongside them as they all gathered around the artifact in order to observe it.
“It’s fascinating,” Leonardo said, seeming enraptured by what he was seeing; and, while it was true that the Apple didn’t seem to resemble any kind of device that had ever been seen before, Ezio hadn’t quite known how to expect the inventor to react to it. “Absolutely fascinating! And, you say that there is some kind of a man inhabiting it?”
“Sí,” he said, leaning forward so that he could lay his right hand on the Apple. “If you wouldn’t mind, amico, would you show yourself to us again?”
The familiar shimmer emerged from the depths of the Apple, stretching and growing and reforming itself into the familiar, hooded form of the man in black that he’d seen for the first time.
“Magnifico,” Leonardo said, staring at the man in black as the last of the light he’d appeared from cleared from his physical form.
“He doesn’t speak much, but he seems to be interested in what it is we’re doing,” Ezio said, glancing at the shrouded form of the man in black as he turned slightly as though to study Ezio in turn.
Leonardo hummed softly, studying the man in black for a few moments more, before returning his attention to the Apple that sat at the center of their group. “Well, on the subject of this Apple of yours, I must say that I’m stumped; it clearly contains dark secrets, and its design is unlike anything I’ve ever seen on Earth. I don’t think anyone else has seen anything like this, either. I’ve certainly never seen anything with such a sophisticated design, and I could no more explain this device to you than I could explain why the Earth goes around the Sun.”
“You surely mean, ‘the Sun goes around the Earth’?” Uncle Mario asked, giving Leonardo an odd, curious look.
The inventor didn’t seem to pay the slightest bit of attention to him, however.
“It’s made of materials, that really shouldn’t, in all logic, actually exist,” Leonardo continued, an almost enraptured expression on his face. “And yet, it’s clearly a very ancient device.”
“It’s been referred to many times within the pages of the Codex we’ve collected,” Uncle Mario said, looking from the Apple to the man in black that stood over it. “Even you, amico, though Altaïr didn’t seem to have many kind things to say about you.”
“No, I suppose he wouldn’t,” the man in black said, the rich, powerful tones of a man in his prime emerging from under the deep hood he was wearing, just before he reached up with black gloved hands to remove it. After all of the oddities he’d seen with regards to the man in black, Ezio hardly found the fact that the man was himself a Treasure Guardian worthy of much note. “We never truly understood each other.”
“Fascinating,” Leonardo said, looking from the Apple to the newly-revealed Treasure Guardian that stood over it. “Was this device of yours named in the pages of the Codex you’ve been collecting?”
“It was called a Piece of Eden,” Ezio said, looking from the Guardian dressed in his black, leather cloak back to the Apple on the table. “Rodrigo Borgia called it the Apple.”
“The Apple?” Leonardo echoed. “You mean the apple from the Tree of Knowledge? The one Eve gave to Adam?”
Feeling what seemed to be a kind of compulsion toward the Apple, Ezio reached out to touch the smooth surface of the Apple, as a pulse of colorless light ran through it, almost underneath his very fingers. Light and sound seemed to explode out of the Apple that sat before them, not seeming to resolve into any kind of coherent images, but it was as though he was seeing through time itself…
Chapter 264: Golden eyes, golden Apple
Chapter Text
Narrowing his eyes as he saw the familiar pulse from the Isu device that Juno had showed him such a long time ago, once he’d managed to make a place for himself in the strange World that was proving so useful to his purposes, Xemnas turned his attention to the Assassins who had brought themselves into the presence of the Isu device that their people had been pursuing for so long. It was rather interesting to see the way they reacted to the presence of the device; none of them seemed to be able to withstand the light of the device, or the projections it was creating.
It was an odd thing to see, but in a way this device seemed to have something in common with the Darkness that he had channeled as Xehanort, or else an over-abundance of the Light that Eraqus had favored: an overwhelming presence that bore down upon the Hearts and Minds of those in its presence, crushing them down or else forcing them to become stronger in order to withstand it.
Truly, these that he was currently observing would indeed be worthy of surviving the new Keyblade War that he aimed to initiate.
~AC: II~
When he’d heard the sound of someone shouting, begging for an end to the terrifying show of light and images being played out all around them, Ezio forced himself forward toward the Apple, clasping his right hand around the Piece of Eden even as it continued to pour out such strange imagery all around them. Panting, once the room around them returned to normal once more, the light all but snapping off as though it were a doused candle.
“This must never fall into the wrong hands,” Leonardo said, panting and leaning against the table. “It would drive weaker minds insane.”
“Agreed,” Niccolò said, side-eyeing the Apple for a long moment. “I could hardly stand it; hardly believe its power… Do you requite the Apple’s presence to manifest, amico?”
“Yes,” the man in black said, serene golden eyes fixing on the Apple for a long moment, before he turned his attention back to Ezio and his brother and sister Assassins. “I’ll retreat back into the Apple, if you need to move it somewhere.”
“Sí, grazie,” Niccolò said, nodding as the man in black vanished back into the depths of the Apple once more. “While it seems as though this Apple is better protected than any of the other Pieces of Eden that I have ever heard of in the past, I doubt the man in black would thank us if we left the defense of the Apple solely upon his shoulders. Therefore, I suggest you take it to Forlì; the citadel there is walled, protected by cannon, and it remains in the hands of one of our greatest allies.”
“Who would that be?” he asked, curious to know just whose protection he would be operating under while he stayed within the walls of the fortress Niccolò intended to send him to.
“Her name is Catarina Sforza,” Niccolò said, bringing a bright smile to his face.
“Oh, I remember her,” he said, a full-on grin emerging on his face. “I became rather well-acquainted with her, during the time I spent in Forlì before.”
“I’m certain Ezio will be happy to renew such an association,” little Maria said, a teasing smile on her face as she turned to him.
“Little imp,” he returned, lightly punching her left shoulder, a grin on his own face.
“Bene, make your preparations, and we’ll depart for Forlì together,” Niccolò said, flashing the both of them a slightly amused expression, even as Leonardo chuckled at the pair of them.
“Bene, I’m grateful for that,” he said, then turned his attention to Leonardo. “Where will you be headed, amico mio?”
“I’ll be headed back to Milano, once my work here is done,” the inventor said, smiling gently as all of them began standing up from the table to leave. “The Duke there has been good to me.”
“You must come to Monteriggioni, as well,” Uncle Mario offered, a jovial smile on the man’s weathered face. “When you’re next in Firenze and you have the time.”
“Farewell, Leonardo,” he said, standing so that both he and little Maria could embrace Leonardo as tightly as they possibly could. “I hope that our paths will cross again.”
“I’m certain they will,” the inventor said, embracing the pair of them just as they did the same. “And, if you need me, Agniolo in Firenze will always know where to find me.”
“Take care of yourself in Milano, amico,” he said, kissing Leonardo before the pair of them broke apart.
“I fully intend to,” the inventor said, grinning as the three of them broke apart at last. “Also, I have a parting gift for you: some more bullets and powder for your little pistola, and a nice big phial of poison for that blade of yours,” the inventor said, smiling gently as he presented the gifts he’d brought with him. “I’m sorry I didn’t bring anything for you, Maria.”
“It’s all right, amico,” his littlest sister said, smiling gently as they all bid the inventor their own farewells.
“I must confess, I’m hoping that you won’t need them,” Leonardo said, a concerned expression emerging on his face once more. “Still, I feel it’s best that you be as prepared as possible for whatever might happen.”
“You have my eternal gratitude, amico,” he said, as the pair of them embraced for the last time.
When he’d departed from Leonardo’s workshop, feeling a certain warmth in his chest for the consideration that Leonardo had been so willing to show him. Knowing that, no matter where he went, he would have yet another friend waiting for him in Firenze. He might have lost the home that he’d been born in, driven out by the machinations of Rodrigo Borgia and his Templars, but the simple knowledge that Leonardo would still be present in such a place was truly a source of comfort.
Chapter 265: Far fields of Forlì
Chapter Text
When she and Ezio had boarded the galley that would take them from Venezia back to Forlì once more, Maria had found herself wondering about the man in black. It was more than clear, once she’d seen his eyes and his hair, that the man was a Guardian himself. She didn’t know anything more about him than that – not even his name, come to think of it – but she was beginning to look forward to trying to find out. Still, she was also perfectly aware that bringing the Apple out in a place like this wouldn’t do any of them any good.
There may very well have been Templar agents about, even in a place such as this.
As things stood, however, their return journey to Forlì was rather uneventful. And, while Maria was grateful that their presence – as well as the presence of the Apple along with them – wouldn’t endanger the very citizens they were aiming to protect by all but advertizing the fact that they were in possession of the very Piece of Eden that Rodrigo Borgia and his Templars had been seeking for so long. The port of Ravenna, in the same wetlands that she’d seen on the last journey that they’d made to the fortress-city that Catarina apparently presided over.
Catarina even came to meet them at the port, as well.
“They sent me word by courier that you were on your way back, so I thought I’d come down and accompany you all back to Forlì myself,” Catarina said, smiling widely as she came up to the three of them. “You were wise to use Doge Mocenigo’s galleys,” she said, smiling at Ezio in the same sort of way that Ezio had smiled at her, the first time they had met. “For the roads are often unsafe, and we’ve had problems with brigands,” Catarina grinned at Ezio all the more widely. “Not, I think, that they would have given you much trouble.”
~AC: II~
“I’m honored that you remembered me, Signora,” he said, as little Maria began laughing at him.
“Well, it has been a long time, but you certainly make an impression,” she said kindly, then turned her attention to Niccolò. “It’s good to see you again, Niccolò.”
“You two know each other?” little Maria asked, before Ezio himself could voice such a question.
“Niccolò has been able to advise me on,” she paused for a moment, glancing from him to little Maria and back again. “Certain matters of state. Anyway, I’ve heard the both of you have become full-fledged Assassins, now. Congratulations.”
When a carriage arrived to carry them the rest of the way to Catarina’s fortress, but the woman herself insisted on riding to the fortress instead. When she gave her reasons for doing so – it being a lovely day and the distance not very far – Ezio found that he agreed. The horses were duly saddled, and Catarina bade him and little Maria to ride alongside her as they all made their way to the fortress.
“You’re going to love Forlì,” Catarina said, smiling as the four of them made their way to the fortress on the horses that she had lent to them. “And you will all be safe there; our cannon have protected the walls for over a century, and my citadel is all but impregnable.”
“Forgive me, Signora, but there is something that intrigues me,” he said, turning to face Catarina as they continued on their way to the fortress that was steadily rising over all of their heads.
“Please, tell me what that is,” she said, smiling gently at him as they all continued on their way.
“It’s only, I’ve never heard of a woman being the ruler of a city-state before,” he grinned; the more he learned about Catarina Sforza, the more intriguing the woman showed herself to be. “It’s very impressive,” narrowing his eyes as another sound came to his ears, Ezio looked past Catarina. “I can hear you sniggering, you little imp. Admit it: you’re impressed, too.”
Little Maria simply laughed aloud, but there was no question in his mind that the littlest of his sisters was indeed impressed by the woman who was offering them not only shelter but all of the aid of the city-state she ruled.
“Don’t mind her, Ezio,” Catarina said, and he could all but hear the amused smile in her voice. “It’s simply the way of siblings, to tease and test each other.”
“I suppose,” he allowed, playfully shaking his right fist as little Maria stuck her tongue out at him.
“In any case,” Catarina said, grinning widely as the four of them began to get underway once more. “This place was once under the command of my husband – you might remember him: Girolamo – but, he died.”
“Mi dispiace,” he said, thinking of how he’d felt, when Father and been killed by Rodrigo Borgia’s Templars.
“Don’t be,” Catarina said, grinning amusedly at him. “I had him killed.”
“We found that Girolamo Riario was working for the Templars,” Niccolò said, as Ezio tried to conceal his shock at what he’d just learned. “He was in the process of making a map detailing the locations of the remaining undiscovered Codex pages.”
“I never liked the goddamned son of a bitch, anyway,” Catarina said, sounding about as unimpressed as he’d ever heard her. “He was a lousy father, boring in bed, and an all-around pain in my arse,” she paused for a moment, a thoughtful expression overtaking her face. “Mind you, I’ve had a couple of other husbands since; rather overrated, if you ask me.”
Swallowing a chuckle as the four of them continued on their way to the towering fortress with all of its cannon, Ezio found his attention drawn to the form of a riderless horse, approaching their group at a gallop. Catarina quickly dispatched a pair of her outriders to round it up, while the rest of them continued on their way to the fortress that still lay ahead of them. Tensing himself for battle, even as he saw the Sforza retainers drawing their swords in preparation for whatever it was that might be coming.
When he saw the overturned wagon, its wheels shattered, and the bloodied corpses of those who had been riding inside it, Ezio narrowed his eyes and prepared himself for the battle that was clearly coming.
Catarina’s face darkened, as well, and she spurred her horse forward; he, Niccolò, and little Maria all did the same. The next thing he saw, what told him that they were all about to be facing something terrible, was the group of local peasants – some wounded, others carrying bloodied weapons, and others clearly frightened by what it was that they had been forced to face – making their way forward, all grouped together in a clear effort to protect themselves and each other from whatever it was that would be coming for them.
“What’s going on?” Catarina demanded of a woman at the forefront of the group.
“They came as soon as you left, Altezza!” the woman sobbed, though she looked purely relived to see the woman now riding before her. “They’re preparing to lay siege to the city!”
Chapter 266: Iron Lady of Forlì
Chapter Text
“Who are?” Catarina demanded.
“The Orsi brothers, Madonna!”
“Sangue di Giuda!”
“The Orsi brothers?” he demanded; that name was one that he recalled from the time he’d spent guarding Lorenzo and his adopted brother Luciano. “Those bastardi are attacking?!”
“The Orsi have no worldview larger than their coin-purses,” Niccolò spat, clearly disapproving in the extreme. “They’re not very bright, but unfortunately they have a reputation for getting their jobs done. There’s little doubt that Rodrigo Borgia is behind this.”
“But, how would he have possibly been able to find out that we were bringing the Apple here?” little Maria asked, looking confusedly from Catarina to Niccolò as their group continued closer to the besieged fortress.
“They’re not likely to be after the Apple, piccola Maria,” Niccolò said, narrowing his eyes. “They’re most likely after Riario’s Map. The Map is still present in Forlì; Borgia will need it, considering his own search for the remaining pages of Altaïr’s Assassin Codex. We cannot allow that man to get his hands on the Map,” Niccolò all but hissed, eyes narrowing in fury as they continued on.
“Piss on your map!” Catarina hissed back. “My children are in there! Ah, porco demonio!”
“We’ll do everything we can to save your children, Catarina,” little Maria said, gentle golden eyes focusing on the woman they were escorting for a long moment. “I promise you that.”
“Grazie, piccola principessa,” Catarina said, smiling as she reached out to gently embrace little Maria around the shoulders.
“It looks as though they’ve gained control of at least part of Forlì, but not the citadel itself,” Niccolò said, and Ezio turned to look at the men gathering; those who wore the sigil of the Orsi family.
Still, the flags of the Sforza that still flew over the citadel let him know that, for all the trouble they were about to go riding into, Catarina and her forces were still firmly in charge of Forlì; it was a thing to keep in mind, considering the approach they were making.
“Double-crossing bastardi,” Catarina hissed, narrowing her eyes as she citadel looming before them.
“Is there any way I could make it into the city without being seen?” he asked, strapping his Codex weapons back on as the four of began to cover the last of the distance remaining between them and the Orsi forces arrayed against them.
“There is a possibility, caro, but it will be hard,” Catarina said, a thoughtful expression overtaking her beautiful face. “There is an old tunnel, that runs under the western wall from the canal.”
“Bene; be ready. If I can get the city gates open from the inside, be prepared to ride like hell,” he said, reining in his horse as the beast shifted restlessly underneath him; soon enough, the both of them would have all the action that they desired. Perhaps even more, at that. “If we can reach the citadel, your people should see your crest and let you in. We’ll be able to plan our next move from there.”
“Which will be to string these dickless bastardi up by their necks and watch them twist in the wind!” Catarina hissed, glowering out at all of the men invading her home.
Ezio could not quite say that he knew how she felt, since Catarina Sforza clearly wasn’t like any other woman that he’d met before, but their circumstances were similar; almost painfully so, though he hoped to bring Catarina’s to a happier conclusion than his own had been able to come to.
“Good luck, and move swiftly, caro,” Catarina said, smiling in that dangerous way of hers that he’d come to know so well. “I think I know something that might distract the attention of those bastardi.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding even as he dismounted from his loaned horse and stretching his legs in order to bring proper feeling back into them once more. “I’ll see what I can do on my end, then. Niccolò, would you mind looking after my sister?”
“Sí, Ezio; you have my word,” Niccolò said, nodding as he, Catarina, and little Maria continued on their way.
“Grazie,” he said, feeling a surge of warmth in his chest at the thought that his littlest sister – even though she did have the full training of an Assassin, herself – would be safe with Catarina and Niccolò.
~AC: II~
As she, Catarina, and Niccolò all made their way closer to the towering walls of Forlì, Maria turned to watch as Catarina took up a position at the front of their group, all but standing up on the back of her horse so she could shout up at the Orsi soldiers.
“Hey, you!” Catarina snarled, her pure fury making her seem all the larger. “Yeah, I’m talking to you! You faithless dogs! You think you can occupy my city?! My home? You really think I’m going to stand around doing nothing about it?! I’ll come up there, rip your coglioni off, and shove them up your arses!” Forcing down the giddy laughter that she could almost feel rising up in her own throat, Maria saw Catarina’s glare growing all the more severe at the sounds of harsher, more coarse laughter carried on the wind. “What kind of men are you? Doing the bidding of your masters for a handful of coin? That coin won’t be be so dear to you, after I come up there, cut your heads off, piss down your necks, and shove your faces up my figa! I’ll stick your balls on a fork, and roast them over my kitchen fire!”
Maria wondered how Ezio was doing, and if he could hear the performance Catarina was putting on; she’d since lost sight of him in the night’s darkness, and even the second-sight that the both of them possessed could no longer tell her where he was.
“Don’t think I can’t hear you laughing up there!” Catarina snarled, glaring up all the more harshly at the men causing her such trouble on this night of all nights. “You think I won’t come up there and wipe those grins off your faces just because I’ve got tits?! I bet you wish you wish you could see them better, don’t you? you want to touch them. You wish you could lick them, don’t you? Well, why don’t you come down and give it a try, like a real man? I’ll kick your balls so hard they fly out your nostrils! Miserable bunch of bastard dogs! Go back to your kennel, or else I’ll impale you all along my citadel walls!” Catarina paused for a moment, though whether it was to catch her breath or to gauge the mood of the soldiers still standing before them, Maria didn’t truly know. “Ah, but maybe you’d enjoy having a long, oaken pole shoved up your arses. Disgustoso! I’ve never seen such a piss-poor shower of shite! I doubt it will make much difference to any of you men after I have you all castrated!”
Another check with her second-sight revealed the blue-glowing form of the last of her brothers, and Maria smiled secretly for the knowledge that he was well, and would be rejoining them as soon as he could. The sound of the gates as they ground slowly open, as well as Niccolò leaning over to speak softly with Catarina then turning to nod at her, brought a wider smile to Maria’s face as they all continued on their way to the fortress.
“Open up, you pack of imbeciles!” Catarina’s whip-crack tones thundered out again. “It’s me! La Duchessa!”
“Subito, Altezza!” what looked like the captain of Catarina’s guard said, as the men at the gates vanished to go about their work.
However, before any of them could begin making their way up to the gates, so that they could be allowed through when the gates were finally opened to them, a sudden surge of Orsi soldiers appeared with the clear intent to surround them.
“It’s an ambush!”
“We can all see that, Niccolò!” Catarina shouted back, drawing her own sword alongside Maria and Niccolò.
Chapter 267: Lost and found
Chapter Text
After the three of them had cut down the first ranks of the Orsi soldiers, however, the gates slammed open and the Sforza’s guardsmen erupted from the portal. Their own blades, added to hers, Niccolò’s, and Catarina’s own, had soon managed to clear the grounds before them. The three of them swiftly dismounted, and Maria embraced Ezio when he met back up with their group once again. Breathing more easily once they’d gotten out of combat and were able to do so with less danger, Maria noticed the wet-nurse standing before them, holding onto a pair of small boys, with a baby in her arms.
“Cesare, Giovanni, don’t worry,” Catarina cooed softly; Maria smiled, seeing the small family reunited before her was indeed a good feeling. “Salute, Galeazzo,” she said, gentle smile growing all the wider; after a few moments spent reassuring her three children, however, Catarina turned her attention to the wet-nurse. “Nezetta, where are Bianca and Ottaviano?”
“Forgive me, Altezza,” the wet-nurse said, bowing deeply, her manner fretful and apologetic enough that Maria was nearly certain that she was genuine in her feelings. “They were playing outside during the attack, and we haven’t been able to find them since.”
For a moment, the obvious fear on Catarina’s face nearly drew Maria to make her way over to the woman to embrace her, but then a roar went up from the Orsi soldiers besieging them, and Maria found herself with no more time for anything but battle.
“Look after the cannons!” Catarina ordered, sharp eyes spearing both her and Ezio. “They’re our only hope! Don’t allow those bastardi to breach the citadel!”
“Sí, Catarina,” Niccolò said, his own tone taking on something of the whip-crack that Catarina herself had used so often on this night of all nights. “Come on, you two!”
Falling swiftly into step with Niccolò and Ezio as they both made their way up to the battlements to the cannons, already under fire from Orsi archers and crossbowmen. Some of them were dead, a great deal were wounded, and all of those who still capable of such were taking cover from the terrible barrage being rained down upon them. Ducking under an arrow that swished over her left shoulder, Maria found herself wishing that she could have done something more for the men still fighting and dying all around her.
“Merda,” Ezio growled, clearly having been observing more of the state of the battle than she’d been able to, considering her own concern for the men around them. “To have any hope of destroying those siege-engines, we’ll have to fire at targets within the walls themselves,” her last brother growled, narrowing his eyes. “Diavolo. I’ll have to tell Catarina bout this. Try to see if you two can give some aid to these men; and stay safe.”
“Sí, fratello; we’ll do what we can,” she said, nodding at him as he hurried back down the battlements to meet up with Catarina again.
~AC: II~
“We might have driven the Orsi troops out of the city, but the siege hasn’t been broken,” he warned the three of them, even as they made their way back up the ramparts after having been forced to descend back to the ground in order to break the back of the invading troops; once the trio of Ezio, Maria, and Catarina had been unleashed on the attacking Orsi, those Templar swine had quickly learned not to underestimate them.
“We already know that, Niccolò,” Catarina said, a weary sort of good-humor in her tone.
“Bene, then you also know that breaking this siege will be the first and foremost of our priorities,” he said.
Just then, before any of his three companions could answer him, the sound of men riding up on armored horses, and the sight of the crowds of Orsi soldiers neatly parting before the riders making their way forward, pulled all of their attention away.
“Catarina! Catarina Sforza!” the man; Lodovico Orsi, called up to them where they all stood upon the battlements. “I see you and yours are still cooped up inside your precious city! Answer me, Catarina!”
“Bastardo! What do you want, you faithless dog?!”
“Oh, nothing in particular,” Lodovico said, the grin that he was clearly wearing nearly audible in his voice. “I was just wondering if you were missing anything. Any children, perhaps?” the Orsi called up, arrogance in every line of his body. “Ah; Ezio Auditore, if I’m not mistaken,” the Orsi called up, his tone promptly becoming all the more arrogant. “And your little Guardian, as well! So nice to finally meet you! We’ve heard so much about you!”
“And I you!” Ezio called down to them, narrowing his eyes. “You are the Orsi brothers.”
“A pleasure to meet you!” the Orsi called up, every line of his body showing the grin on his face. “I am Lodovico!”
“And I am Checco!” the man next to him called up, that same arrogance hanging about him like a mantle. “At your service!”
“Piss on the both of you!” Catarina snarled. “Where are my children, you dickless bastardi?! Let them go!”
“Ma certo, Signora,” Lodovico said, all but laughing as he bowed mockingly to her. “We’ll happily give them back! In exchange for something of yours; rather, something that belonged to your late, lamented husband! Something that he was working on for a mutual acquaintance of ours!” the man’s voice hardened. “I mean a certain Map!”
“As well as a certain Apple, and that little Guardian of yours!” Checco shouted up, that same kind of arrogance in his tone as his brother. “Oh, yes; we know all about them! Did you think we were fools? That our employer does not have spies?!”
“Sí, we’ll have the little Guardian and her Apple, or shall I slice your little ones’ throats from ear-to-ear, and send them to join their pappa?!”
Catarina’s face twisted into a bitter, vicious snarl, and Niccolò had the feeling that the Orsi had underestimated yet another of their enemies. “Bastardi! You think you can intimidate me with your vulgar threats?! You dogs; I’ll give you nothing! You want my children? Take them! I have the instrument to make more!”
~AC: II
Wincing slightly as Catarina lifted her skirt, baring herself to the Orsi, Ezio gathered himself as he made his way over to her. The Orsi were already shouting back up, clearly not intimidated by anything Catarina had been saying. Just the way he’d been expecting, really. The Orsi were clearly mercenary enough to begin with, and being paid off by Rodrigo Borgia to attack, and to retrieve the Apple.
To say nothing of what that fat old Templar bastardo wanted to do to little Maria…
“You’re not going to sacrifice your children, Catarina,” he said firmly, making his way over to her, feeling himself the weight of the choice that had been set before her. “No Cause could ever be worth that.”
“Not even to save the world?” she asked, lips parted and eyes wide under her mane of red hair.
“No,” he bit out. “We cannot become people like them. There are some sacrifices that cannot be condoned.”
A light came back into Catarina’s face, tension leaving her body as she smiled. “That’s just what I expected you to say, Ezio,” she said, happily throwing her arms about his neck. “Of course we can’t sacrifice my children! But, I cannot ask you to take the risk of rescuing them, caro.”
“Try me,” he said, offering a calm, gentle smile to the woman who had made such an impression on him; not merely with her sublime beauty, but with her bravery, her determination, and her sheer ferocity in defense of the people she loved.
“Sí, and I’ll help, too.”
Snapping his head around, as he heard the voice of his littlest sister and realized that – just as he wasn’t the kind who could stand by and allow innocents to be threatened while he was capable of doing something about it, little Maria had absorbed just the same lessons over just the same time that he had, and hence had become uncomfortably similar in all the ways he would not have wished her to – he wasn’t going to be able to argue her down and still have the kind of time he would need to rescue Catarina’s children. Closing his eyes for a long moment, as the weight of his actions and their consequences settling upon him, Ezio forced himself to face what he was about to do squarely once more.
“Bene,” he said, wrapping an arm around little Maria as she came over to stand beside him, then turning to face Niccolò. “I hope we won’t be gone long, but whatever happens, you and Catarina take care of each other. I know you will both guard the Apple with your lives, but don’t hesitate to call upon the man in black if you need another sword-arm.”
“Man in black?” Catarina echoed, and Ezio remembered then that they hadn’t actually spoken about the man in black since they had arrived.
“I’ll fill you in, Catarina, but allow the pair of them to work,” Niccolò said, gently taking hold of Catarina’s right shoulder.
“Wait,” Ezio called, before the pair of them could turn and depart. “Catarina, do you know where Girolamo’s Map is?”
“I’ll find it,” Catarina said, with a sharp, decisive nod.
“Bene; make sure it doesn’t fall into the hands of our enemies,” he said, even though he knew that neither Catarina nor Niccolò were the type to concede any kind of victory to the Templars or their allies.
“What will you do about the Orsi, then?” Niccolò asked, though there was something in his manner that suggested he knew more than he was saying.
“They are already added to my list,” he assured the both of them, as little Maria took up a position by his side. “They work for the same man responsible for the death of a great deal of our family. Still, I have come to realize, during the course of my work, that there is a far greater Cause than merely revenge that we must serve.”
“Buona fortuna, amico mio,” Niccolò said, smiling sternly as the pair of them shook hands.
“Buona fortuna anche,” he and little Maria said, and he shook the man’s hand while little Maria hugged him.
Chapter 268: Happy reunion
Chapter Text
She and Ezio had divided the task of rescuing the last two of Catarina’s children, leaving her to find and bring back Bianca, while Ezio chased down Ottaviano. Making her way through the besieged city, Maria narrowed her eyes as she began to hear the sounds of rough-voiced men threatening what sounded very much like a young woman. Younger-sounding than her, even. Sighing softly as she made her way up the side of a nearby building, Maria laughed as she heard Bianca actually beginning to berate the men holding her captive.
“Are you two sorry-looking specimens all they could find to guard me?” a higher-sounding version of Catarina’s whip-crack tones rang out from inside the building she was making her way up the side of. “Stolti! It won’t be enough! My Mamma is fierce, and will never let you hurt me!” climbing up to the top of the roof, far enough that she could look over the side of it, Maria was forced to bite back a laugh at the sight of Bianca Sforza drawing herself up to her full height so that she could berate the Orsi soldiers attempting to hold her captive. “We Sforza women are no shrinking violets, you know! We may look pretty to the eye, but the eyes deceive! As my pappa found out!” as Bianca drew a deep breath so that she could continue berating the men around her, Maria laughed softly as the men looked at her in confusion. “I hope you don’t imagine I’m scared of you, either; because if you did, you’d be very much mistaken! And, if you touch one hair on my brother’s head, my Mamma will hunt you down and eat you for breakfast!”
Limbering herself up and drawing her throwing knives, Maria loosed them into the throats of the men stranding around little Bianca Sforza, then leaped down from the rooftop to cut down the last man with her sword.
“Your mother sent me to rescue you, but it was starting to seem as though you were just about to rescue yourself, principessa,” she said, grinning as she cleaned the blood from her sword, making her way over to Bianca even as she sheathed the weapon once more.
“Mamma sent you?” Bianca asked, looking Maria over in that same, regal way that her mother had done when they’d met for the first time. “Bene; still, we have to go and find my brother, Ottaviano, however.”
“Don’t worry about that, principessa,” she said, taking Bianca’s hand as the younger girl offered it to her. “My brother is actually going out to rescue yours, so the both of you will soon be reunited with your mother,” she said, smiling gently down at the little girl she was escorting.
“Bene, and then I can watch Mamma deal properly with these dickless bastardi,” Bianca said, nodding in the same, decisive way she’d seen Catarina do on those few times the pair of them had spoken.
~AC: II~
Breathing more easily once he’d managed to dispatch Lodovico Orsi, having rescued Ottaviano Sforza from the man and his soldiers, Ezio continued on his way. He and Catarina’s son had been chatting, just enough to give him the idea that Ottaviano hadn’t taken very much after his mother. Perhaps he’d more in common with his late father, but as he didn’t know much about the family, he wasn’t going to try and guess at anything.
The sound of heavy footfalls and lighter ones drew his attention, and Ezio reached for the hilt of his sword even as he turned to face them.
“Buona sera, fratello!” little Maria called, waving and grinning widely at him as she and Bianca Sforza made their own way over to where the pair of them were. “I see you managed to find your own way here, too!”
“It’s good to see that I don’t have to go out and rescue you, sorellina,” he said, smiling widely to cover the sudden flash of fear that he’d always felt when little Maria was forced into combat with the Templars and their forces.
“Idiota,” the little imp said, grinning fondly at him as the pair of them fell into step with one another again.
Crossing the bridge that Bianca indicated to him, he and little Maria soon found themselves back in the main part of the city. It was disturbingly silent; all of the soldiers seemed to have retreated, leaving those within to begin the long process of repairing what had been broken during the course of the siege. Which, while it was an encouraging sight to see in more than a few ways, made him all the more concerned about what he was going to see when he, little Maria, and their two rescues inevitably found their way back to the fortress that stood as a final defense over Forlì.
When the forms of Catarina and Niccolò came back into view, Ezio found that his suspicions were only strengthened when he saw the way they seemed to be fretting over something.
“What has happened?” he asked, making his way over to where the pair of them were standing, eyes narrowing as he took in the expressions of worry and surprise on Catarina and Niccolò’s faces when he finally drew close enough to actually see them.
Chapter 269: New trails, new trials
Chapter Text
“The kidnapping of Catarina’s children was nothing more than a distraction!” Niccolò snapped, clearly more furious at himself and the situation they’d found themselves in than he was with anyone currently present. “It was merely meant to merely meant to split our forces, so that Checco would be able to make off with the Apple more easily.”
“What of the man in black?” he asked, doubting that such a one would have been amenable to the uses the Templars would put him and the Apple he inhabited to.
“He appeared, true, and watching him cut off Checco’s arm like a haunch of beef was amusing,” a sharp smile knifed across Catarina’s face, before she became serious once again. “Still, he was forced to retreat back into the Apple, and Checco was able to make off with it.”
“What of the Map?” he asked, concerned about what else might have happened.
“We still have it in our possession,” Niccolò said, an expression of relief spreading across his face. “So, that’s one thing we can still be glad of.”
“Still, if he has the Apple, he might not need the map anymore,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he heard little Maria coming up beside him.
“The Templars cannot be allowed to get their hands on the Apple,” Niccolò said, stepping forward, a stern expression on his face. “Come, we must go after them quickly.”
“Wait,” he said, holding up his hand to stop Niccolò from following him. “You’re injured; stay with Catarina so you can recover.”
“Sí, you should both stay here and rest,” little Maria said, stepping up to stand beside him. “Ezio and I will be able to find the Apple for you.”
“Bene,” Niccolò said, nodding. “Having a Guardian with you will make locating the Apple all the more simple for you; we’ve managed to determine that each and every one of the Guardians bears a certain connection to one of the Pieces of Eden, and hence is able to sense them, on some subconscious level or other,” Niccolò said, a thoughtful expression on his face.
“Bene,” he said, nodding sharply as he turned to glance at little Maria.
He still didn’t quite know how he felt about his littlest sister being some kind of… detector for these strange Pieces of Eden that were about in the world. He was also starting to wonder what would happen at the end of her life, considering the fate of the man in black and how he had seemed to have been trapped inside the Apple when he’d died. He’d no wish to see his littlest sister imprisoned for God alone knew how long, when those who died were meant to rest in some happy afterlife or other.
The pair of them mounted up on a pair of horses that Catarina provided for them, and were soon making their way up into the Apennine mountains.
“Is it really true? Can you truly sense the Apple?”
“Sí, fratello,” little Maria said, though she seemed a bit uneasy. “I’ve been having a strange feeling since we first came into contact with the Apple; even before I knew what it was, I think I was somehow aware of it, at least on some level…”
Sighing as the uncomfortable thought about what might happen to little Maria at the end of her life came back to him once more, Ezio regained his composure again.
“Let’s see if we can find Checco Orsi, then,” Ezio muttered, forcing himself not to shudder as the pair of them set off one again.
Allowing little Maria to take the lead in their current procession, even though he was still uneasy about just what his littlest sister was capable of, and it seemed as though little Maria was just the same. Still, even though neither of them was quite sure what to make of their current situation, the pair of them continued to follow along the trail of the Apple that Checco Orsi had made off with, under the direction of little Maria’s odd connection to the item.
Still, it seemed as though the Orsi had spies in the area, considering the fact that the man seemed to be making provisions for a pair of carriages; one of them clearly meant to be a decoy, but with little Maria’s sense of just where the Apple was, the pair of them were able to determine just where the Apple was and to catch a ride on the carriage that Checco was going to use for himself in his attempt to escape with the Apple.
Yes, some of the man’s lackeys did try to throw them from the carriage as they climbed, but as he and little Maria were had a great deal of training and skill, they were easily able to evade the man’s attacks, and Ezio grabbed the whip from his hand then threw it to the ground.
“Get the hell off!” the man screamed, clearly beginning to panic as the carriage jerked and rocked. “What in God’s name do you think you’re doing?! Are you both mad?!”
Without his whip, however, the Orsi driver was unable to control his horses, and was forced to focus on reining in the horses as they continued running. Watching as little Maria sighed softly in relief, Ezio wished for a moment that he could reach out to comfort her. Still, that kind of thing was impossible under their present circumstances, and Ezio simply made a vow to himself that he would make it up to her when they managed to make it back to solid ground.
“Damn those eyes of yours!” Checco snarled, gaze aimed firmly at little Maria. “Just like that man in black!”
The thick, white bandages swathing the man’s right shoulder made it clear just where the man in black had slashed him with those shining swords of his; it would have brought a smile to his face, if such hadn’t been just one more reminder of the fate that might very well await little Maria at the end of her life. Still, even with only a single remaining arm, Checco Orsi seemed determined to fend them off in any way he could still manage. As the carriage rolled heedlessly onward, the driver clearly making every attempt to throw them from the vehicle by slamming it from side to side, Ezio glanced out the closest window.
It seemed that they were charging through one of the many marble quarries that supplied Italia with the marble it needed and used so much of, and as the carriage rattled and crashed through the quarry, the driver lost control, the horses bolted, and the carriage tipped over, throwing the driver into a pile of slabs that had already been cut free by the masons, but then discarded because of faults in the stone.
“Give me the Apple, Checco! It’s all over!” he demanded, drawing his sword and brandishing it even as little Maria moved to stand beside him.
“Over?!” the Orsi screamed, eyes flicking frantically from him to little Maria. “That damned man in black cut off my arm, and now you’re bringing another of those yellow-eyed bastardi before me?! I’ll cut you both down!”
Little Maria’s eyes narrowed, just before that same light that he’d seen from the Apple – the light that always seemed to proceed the appearance of the man in black – began pouring out once again. The column of light reshaped and almost seemed to fold itself into the familiar, hooded shape of the man that bore such a strange resemblance to little Maria.
“Did you think those two were the only ones present here?” the man in black asked, a slightly amused tone to his voice. “Have you already forgotten about me?”
Checco snarled wordlessly, as the man in black fully emerged from the Apple, grabbing Checco’s remaining wrist and throwing him to the ground.
~AC: II~
Looking down at the human before him, Xemnas considered once again the state of this large and varied World he’d made his way to. Not only were there two factions – one that seemed to have dedicated themselves to the Light, in the same way that Eraqus had done, so long ago; and another who even went so far as to say that they worked within Darkness to serve Light; it was a strange thing to think about, but for all that it seemed to be true – each acting against the other, and both seeking some goal that he couldn’t determine as yet. However, the two factions he’d learned about – the Assassins, and their enemies the Templars – were far from the only ones who existed in this World.
There were those who seemed to hold no connection to the battle taking place between those who served Darkness and those who claimed to serve the Light, but in a far more cruel fashion than Xemnas had seen even from Eraqus himself.
It was also interesting, to see the way that this World seemed to be made up of several places that could have so easily been considered Worlds of their own; Syria and Italy, for instance, seemed as though they could have would have fit just as easily alongside the familiar Worlds that he’d seen when he traveled through The Lanes Between on his Keyblade Glider, or else through the Corridors of Darkness that he had learned to use later in his life as Xehanort.
When he returned his attention to the battle that was taking place between the Templar mercenary he’d wounded so grievously beforehand, Xemnas found that another, larger group had been called through some means, and the girl that he’d placed a sliver of his Heart in had been knocked to the ground, unconscious. He could also sense the approach of another of the denizens of this World, and so quickly retreated back into the Piece of Eden he was currently inhabiting.
Chapter 270: Spy games
Chapter Text
Feeling each and every one of the injuries that had been inflicted on him by the Orsi and their allies, Ezio forced himself back to his feet, making his way over to where little Maria was laying, sprawled on the ground that had not so very long ago been a battlefield between them and the Orsi’s mercenary forces. He could hear the sound of someone coming, but he was more concerned with his littlest sister than with whoever it was that might be interested in what had happened between them and the dead mercenaries around them. Grabbing little Maria and the Apple, he was about to tuck the Piece of Eden back into the pouch he’d used to carry the thing, when he felt a heavy blow to the back of his head…
~AC: II~
Having been asked to follow in the footsteps of one of his brother Assassins, by Niccolò Machiavelli himself, Adriano Arongheri carefully guided his horse along the trail that Ezio Auditore and his Treasure Guardian sister had followed into the Apennine mountains. Finding the pile of mercenary corpses that the pair of them had clearly left in their respective wakes, he soon came to the spot where Checco Orsi had clearly fallen among a group of his own mercenaries. He breathed a bit more easily once he saw them, and turned his horse in order to make his way to the scattered pile of corpses that had been left around like a bundle of sticks that had had its cord snapped.
Dismounting from his horse once he’d reached the center of the group, Adriano hurried over to the struggling form of Maria Auditore and the unconscious form of Ezio.
“It’s good to see that you’re doing well, aquila d’argento,” he said, reaching down to help her as she struggled to lift the unconscious form of her older brother.
“Grazie,” she said, taking him in with a long gaze. “So, who sent you, fratello?”
“Niccolò Machiavelli,” he said, nodding to his sister Assassin as the pair of them carefully loaded Ezio onto the horse he’d brought with him, and then he helped her to mount up on that same horse.
“Grazie,” the Treasure Guardian said, nodding sharply at him as she reined in the the horse he’d once been riding, turning it back down the path he’d followed to get to them in the first place.
Without another word, Maria Auditore da Firenze departed swiftly, aiming to return to Forlì so that she could speak to Catarina Sforza and her allies.
Turning his attention back to his own mission, the other one that Niccolò had assigned to him, Adriano turned to make his way to the pigeon coop where Niccolò had doubtless sent him his new orders. He’d a long moment to wonder, as he found another horse and reined the beast in, making his way back to the pigeon coop that he’d been directed to in order to receive his new orders. After a long journey, spanning a full night and one and a half days, Adriano found himself standing before the pigeon coop that Niccolò had directed him to find.
The sound of an approaching horse drew his attention, and Adriano turned to see that Maria Auditore was making her way toward him, stopping before the coop as his sister Assassin dismounted and began making her way over to him, Adriano wondered just what it was that had brought her to such a place. And, just why it seemed that she had been sent to seek him out, in particular.
“Maria Auditore,” he said, nodding as the Treasure Guardian made her way over to where he was standing. “Did Niccolò send you here, too?”
“Sí,” she said, nodding. “He said that you would need my help to find the Apple, and also whoever took it.”
“Grazie,” he said, nodding to his sister Assassin, then turning to retrieve the message that Niccolò had left there for him in the first place.
Knowing that Niccolò was likely to intend for him to find the Apple before he began any of the other tasks that he’d been assigned, Adriano tucked the message that Niccolò had written for him into his pouch, Adriano remounted his horse and set off once more. As the pair of them discussed the new tasks ahead of them, however, Adriano found that Niccolò merely intended for him to provide some extra security for the Treasure Guardian while she searched for the Apple of Eden, since it had been proven on many occasions that the Templars would always act to capture any of the Guardians that they came across in any manner that they could.
When the pair of them dismounted for the night, Adriano took the time to read the message that Niccolò had wrote for him. Narrowing his eyes as he took in the new information that he’d been given, Adriano turned to Maria.
“It seems that your friend, Leonardo da Vinci, is in danger from agents of Cesare Borgia,” he said, settling himself down next to her as the pair of them unrolled their bedding for the night.
“What?!”
“Sí, that’s what Niccolò found out,” he said. “It seems that the Borgia have managed to find out just who was responsible for the creation of the Codex weapons that you and your brother have been using while fighting their forces.”
“I suppose that makes sense,” Maria said, golden eyes narrowing as she contemplated the information he’d just given her. “Is Leonardo still in Milano?”
“No,” he said, shaking his head. “He’s in Firenze at the moment; Cesare Borgia has been developing his own unit, with the intent of countering our skills and abilities. He calls them the Crows,” he continued, watching as her eyes widened in clear surprise.
“I suppose that makes sense, too,” she conceded, and finished setting up her sleeping area with the kind of short, sharp movements that communicated the fury now burning within her without even a single word.
Chapter 271: Another angle
Chapter Text
The next morning, Adriano was surprised to find one of the fast-couriers that the Brotherhood employed when they needed to communicate faster than the comparatively leisurely pace of normal messengers in Italia. When he took the message that the man was holding, Adriano was surprised to find that Niccolò Machiavelli himself was asking him to come to Roma alongside him and a select group of his brother Assassins. Reading farther, Adriano found that Il Corvo and his remaining Crows were going to head for Roma, and Machiavelli intended to confront them there.
Writing back with assurances that he would be along as swiftly as he could, Adriano began to provision himself for the journey he was going to undertake.
Gathering food, drink, and the weapons he would need to deal with any threats that he might encounter on his way, Adriano packed carefully, provisioning the first of the horses he was going to ride on his way to Roma to meet with Machiavelli and his brother Assassins. Mounting up, Adriano began making his way out of Firenze and away from the safe house that he’d been staying in for so long.
His journey was thankfully as uneventful as any journey he’d ever made, allowing him to make good time as he crossed from Firenze into its surrounding city-states, and then moved into Roma itself.
Once he’d arrived, Adriano quickly made his way to the safe house that the Brotherhood maintained within the bounds of Roma. There would be time to meet with his brother Assassins and Machiavelli once he’d settled in and rested from his journey. It was something that even the Crows and Il Corvo himself wouldn’t be able to avoid; the need for rest after such a long journey as all of them would have had to make to move from Firenze to Roma.
He was just pleased to have at least some chance to rest, after making the journey from Firenze to Roma the way he had.
Meeting up with his brother Assassins within the safe house that they had all gathered together in, Adriano turned his attention to Machiavelli as he made his way to the front of the room they had gathered in.
“I know that some of you have been troubled by the revelation of Il Corvo’s true intentions,” Machiavelli said, and for a moment Adriano found his brother Assassin’s eyes resting upon him. “Still, I know that each and every one of you understands the necessity of ending the last of the Crows before Cesare Borgia can spread their malicious influence any farther within Italia.”
He and all of his brother Assassins all fully understood, and as they all began making their way out into the grounds of the Castle Sant’Angelo, where Il Corvo and the remaining Crows were gathering what little remained of their forces, Adriano found himself wishing for just a moment that things could have been different. And, while he was fully aware that such a thing was the height of folly, but he allowed himself to indulge for a moment.
Such things were what kept them human, after all.
As he and his brother Assassins dispersed in twos and threes around the castle, as every Assassin knew that there was strength in numbers, Adriano caught sight of the first group of Crows that they would have to face on their way around the grounds of the castle. There were no words exchanged between their groups; there was nothing more to say, and thus the battle was swiftly joined. He and his came out the victors, their superior experience and training telling over that of the faction that Cesare Borgia had clearly wished to replace them with.
Leaving the piled corpses of their foes behind, Adriano and his brother Assassins swiftly moved on once more; there would be more Crows for them to deal with, at least until the moment when they confronted Il Corvo himself.
As he and his brother Assassins continued moving to clear out the grounds of the Castle Sant’Angelo, cutting down the Crows who stood in their way, Adriano took a moment to mourn the lives that had been lost to the madness of both Cesare Borgia and Il Corvo himself. If these men had been given the chance to think for themselves, rather than being indoctrinated into the ways of thinking that the Templars and their allies encouraged, they might very well have chosen to stand beside the Brotherhood.
Or, at the very least, they might have been left to continue their lives as ordinary citizens.
Moving deeper into the castle, leaving the bodies of dead Crows behind them, Adriano and his brother Assassins finally came into position to confront Il Corvo himself. As he and his closed with the man, the wild, hateful look in Il Corvo’s eyes as they fixed upon him let Adriano know that this day wouldn’t end without at least one more corpse on the floor. Once Il Corvo had breathed his last, he and his brother Assassins all gathered around Machiavelli.
The remaining Crows were quick to surrender to them after that, and while Adriano was not quite sure if they should trust the men who were so willing to give up when their leader was killed, but this was hardly the time or the place to bring up such a matter. He simply reminded himself to keep an eye on the men who were joining up with them, and to speak to Machiavelli about such a matter when he had the time.
Once they had set fire to the building, reducing it to little more than charcoal and ash, Adriano breathed a sigh of relief; knowing that this was the end of the Crows. Yes, he was aware that the Templars would doubtless seek to create other ways of destroying them – such a thing was all but inevitable, considering who they were presently set against – but after everything he’d seen during the course of the work that he and his brother Assassins had done, Adriano felt all the more certain that the Brotherhood as a whole would weather whatever storm they next faced.
Chapter 272: Walking unseen
Chapter Text
As he’d steadily prepared himself for the journey he was about to undertake, Ezio had found himself wondering just what kind of a man that his brother Assassin was going to prove himself to truly be. Aguilar De Nerha was not a man that he had ever heard of before the pair of them had begun exchanging correspondence, and thus he’d little way of telling what was true and what was not, insofar as the man in the letters compared to the man he would soon meet. Still, he didn’t truly think that Aguilar would betray him or the Brotherhood as a whole.
He simply didn’t know what to make of the man.
Once he’d finished preparing himself to travel to Spain, Ezio went to say his farewells to the remainder of his family; he’d be away from them for some time, naturally, since he was making such a long journey.
Once he’d made it to the boat, having assured himself that he was not being followed, Ezio allowed himself to relax slightly. Yes, he was fully aware that this was only the first leg of the journey he was undertaking, and the Templars and their lackeys would doubtless attempt to hinder him in some manner or another before he was done. Still, as he was coming to the aid of one of his brother Assassins, Ezio felt better about the situation than he might have otherwise.
Breathing deeply of the sea air as the ship he was traveling on launched at last, Ezio made his way down into his personal cabin so that he could begin preparing for the battles that he was inevitably going to be facing when he arrived in Spain.
~AC: D~
Awaiting the appearance of his brother Assassin from Italy, Aguilar de Nerha narrowed his eyes in contemplation as he saw the tip of the foremost mast of the ship Ezio Auditore da Firenze was traveling on rising above the horizon. It seemed he’d soon have his chance to take the measure of the man; and more, the means to rescue those of his brother and sister Assassins that remained alive after the damage that Tomás de Torquemada and his Inquisition had done to the ranks of the Brotherhood in Spain. Still, such would do nothing to save his own Maria…
Shaking away those thoughts – truly, he should have known better than to pursue the line of inquiry that had led him to ask about the youngest of Ezio’s two sisters – Aguilar folded his arms behind his back as he continued to await the ship’s arrival.
There were others among the crowd, those who would have sought to prevent this meeting, if they had been given the chance to find out about it; Templars, and others who supported Tomás and his Inquisition without knowing his true purpose. The ship was drawing closer; ever closer to bringing him and Ezio their face-to-face meeting; ever closer to bringing him the help he needed to rescue those of his branch of the Brotherhood that still survived…
~AC: D~
Finding himself stepping down onto the sunlit docks of Spain, Ezio found that the place was both similar to and different from the Italian climate that he was so used to. Perhaps it was simply the presence of the sea that made it feel so different than what he was used to, Ezio would be the first to admit that he’d not made many travels over the sea, but in any case it was something he took note of. He wondered if little Maria would have enjoyed the sight as much as he did, and if he should have asked her to come with him.
But no, she’d done well to end the threat posed by Cesare Borgia and his Crows, and so deserved the chance to rest for at least a little longer.
Concentrating for a moment, Ezio called upon his second-sight, quickly picking out the glowing blue form of Aguilar among the colorless forms of the citizens in the crowd. He also spotted the red glowing forms of the guards or Templars that were beginning to move in from the edges of that same crowd. It seemed that he wasn’t going to get away without a confrontation; not that he’d been expecting different.
If there was one thing that could be said for the Templars, it was that they were persistent.
Making his way through the crows to the side of his brother Assassin, Ezio paused when he caught sight of the man for the first time.
“Hermano,” Aguilar nodded.
“Fratello,” he nodded back.
Stepping in to reinforce Aguilar’s defenses as the crowd began to part before the Templars and their lackeys, Ezio raised his sword beside his brother Assassin for the first – but not, he knew, the last – time since the pair of them had met. Aguilar, he noted, had a great deal of skill with both his sword and the hidden blades that every member of the Brotherhood was granted when they joined. However, it seemed as though whoever had designed the blade on Aguilar’s wrist either lacked Leonardo’s skills, or simply hadn’t had access to the updated blueprints that Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad had created from his own research into the Apple.
He didn’t know which of those suppositions would ultimately prove true, but Ezio reminded himself to ask when he was given the chance.
Once the last of the Templars and their hirelings had been dispatched with, Ezio breathed more easily as he turned to speak with Aguilar.
“I’m beginning to see why you asked me to come,” he said, sweeping his right arm out to encompass the corpses that the pair of them had scattered about the docks.
“Sí, but let’s move quickly,” Aguilar said, already turning to make his way back up to the rooftops; that place where an Assassin was most comfortable.
Where they could both see and move with greater ease than in any other place.
He agreed without reluctance, knowing that more Templars would inevitably arrive to investigate once they became aware that the Assassins they hunted had been granted aid. Still, as the pair of them began making their way across the city, taking the route that only an Assassin was truly trained for, Ezio began to notice that the man seemed a great deal more dour than any of the other Assassins he’d met. He didn’t know if it was simply a product of the pair of them being from such different branches of the Brotherhood, or if there was something about Aguilar in particular that made him that way.
Truly, it reminded Ezio of himself, in those terrible days just after he’d witnessed his family being executed in front of his very eyes; and so, perhaps Aguilar wouldn’t thank him for prying into things best left alone.
Chapter 273: Roof stalker
Chapter Text
When the pair of them came upon the man that Aguilar pointed out to him as being the very man they had aimed to protect from the Templars and their lackeys, Ezio took a long moment to study the man that Aguilar had said was named Christoffa Colombo. He seemed an ordinary sort, but there was clearly the spirit of an adventurer about him, if everything that Aguilar had been telling him about the man was even partially true; Ezio wondered, for a moment, just how he and Leonardo would take to each other if they were ever given the chance to meet.
Still, he and Aguilar had hardly come all this way for him to lose himself engaging in idle speculation, and so Ezio followed his brother Assassin down to the ground, where he swiftly became aware of the men wearing Borgia crests determinedly closing in on the explorer.
“We should move quickly,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he looked down into the courtyard where Christoffa was standing, all unawares of the danger steadily closing in on him. “I’d no idea that the Borgia were involving themselves in this matter, but I can’t let that go unanswered.”
“Sí, there’s too much at stake, to let things go on,” Aguilar said, his tone fierce enough that Ezio found himself wondering if this was a personal matter for the man.
He supposed that that was all the more reason for Aguilar to have called for help; he would have wanted every assurance he could have possibly had, if it had been Leonardo’s life at stake.
The pair of them leaped lightly down to the ground, drawing their blades in a single, smooth, practiced motion as they moved to engage the Borgia soldiers closing in on them from all sides. He caught a brief glimpse of Christoffa’s face, and the surprise plain on it as he found himself both besieged and at once, before he once again spun around to face the Borgia soldiers swarming around the three of them. Cutting down the last man who had been threatening the man he’d taken on as his charge, Ezio turned his gaze to the man whose life he and Aguilar had just redeemed with their actions.
“Madre di dios, what even was that?” Christoffa demanded, a bit wild-eyed from what he had been forced to bear witness to, but happily no worse for wear. “Aguilar, do you know who those men were?”
“Sí: they were soldiers in the employ of Rodrigo Borgia,” Aguilar said, stern tone clearly directed at Christoffa.
“Rodrigo Borgia?” Christoffa echoed, incredulity plain in his tone. “There has to be some misunderstanding! Rodrigo Borgia was the one who offered to finance my expedition West in the first place, Aguilar. I don’t see any reason for him to send these ruffians to attack me.”
“I can, Messer,” he said, turning his attention to Christoffa from where he had been keeping an eye out for any other Borgia soldiers – or any other kind of Templar presence – that might have chosen these quiet moments to attack. “Borgia isn’t the kind of man who allows anything to happen that he himself can’t control. All of this was probably because he thought he wouldn’t be able to exert enough control over you and yours when you were so far from him,” he said, watching as an expression of wary curiosity spread across the explorer’s face.
“Aguilar, who is this man?”
“This is Ezio Auditore da Firenze, mi amigo,” Aguilar said, still stern but sounding slightly more at ease than he’d once been. “He’s been called the deadliest man in all Italy, so I thought that if there was anyone who might be capable of helping me to protect you, he would be it.”
“Well, I suppose you have my thanks then, amigo,” Christoffa said, something of what seemed to be his usual joviality coming back to his face and manner. “Particularly if Aguilar was so willing to speak up for you.”
“Grazie, amico, I’m glad that we’ll be able to work so well together,” he said, offering the explorer a smile of his own. “Still, I think we should leave. There’s too much chance of us being found out if we stay where we are.”
“Sí,” Christoffa agreed quickly, with only the briefest of glances down at the corpses of Borgia soldiers that he and Aguilar had left behind them. “I wouldn’t wish to be caught out here, anyway,” he smiled wryly. “The city guard can be rather touchy about corpses.”
Chuckling softly as the three of them began making their way back towards the small manor house that Christoffa had made his home while he was seeing if he could gather the funds needed to make that expedition of his. He wondered, once more, just how the explorer and Leonardo would find each other; just what the pair of them would find to speak about. And just how the world as a whole would be changed by what discoveries they would share.
However, Ezio reminded himself once again that Aguilar had not called him all the way to Spain simply for the prospect of introducing such strange, singular minds as Leonardo and Christoffa to one another.
Chapter 274: A fine punch up
Chapter Text
“We should go and meet with Luis Santangel,” Christoffa said, standing with the kind of decisiveness that Ezio couldn’t help but think came naturally to the man; he didn’t know quite what to make of the man, but as he was clearly a friend of the Brotherhood, Ezio was willing to see where this situation was heading, rather than trying to anticipate everything that was going to happen. “He’s a friend of mine,” he turned a wry smile on Aguilar, inviting him to share in some joke or another. “Not so interesting as you or your friend, amigo, but a friend all the same.”
“I suppose,” Aguilar said, though he sounded rather uncertain about the idea; Ezio wondered if he knew the man, or if he was just generally opposed to sharing information with those uninvolved in their conflict.
He supposed he’d come to know soon enough, if Luis Santangel was truly uninvolved in all of this save for his association with Christoffa, or else if he was secretly one of their own.
He, Aguilar, and Christoffa all made their way to a well-appointed garden, and there met with a rather stoutly-built man who was dressed in slightly less ornate clothing than the man himself favored. Ezio would have felt almost shabby next to the pair of them, if it hadn’t been for the presence of Aguilar, and the fact that he’d come to this place on the Brotherhood’s business and not merely for an excursion on his own time. Though, I think that Claudia and little Maria would enjoy the climate, at least, he mused briefly, before returning his attention to the matters before him.
“Luis, it seems that Rodrigo Borgia is against us, after all,” Christoffa said, a soft sigh escaping him; Ezio found himself wondering if the man had actually been foolish enough to actually trust the Borgia, or if those faithless bastards had merely been the last option he’d found himself pressed to take. “He sent his soldiers to ambush me at the docks, and if it hadn’t been for Aguilar and his Italian amigo, I would have been far too dead to report anything back to you, here and now.”
“That’s terrible!” Luis exclaimed, a stricken expression on his face. “All of this, and I think I saw men prowling about earlier! They might well have been more Borgia soldiers, looking for that Atlas of yours!”
“You’ve no need to worry yourselves, amici,” he said, stepping forward with a reassuring smile on his face. “Aguilar and I will be here to protect you.”
“Gracias, amigo,” Christoffa said, a wide, relieved smile on his face.
“Sí, you have both of our thanks,” Luis said, the same kind of relief showing on his face.
“Sí, now all we need is to keep my Atlas from falling into the hands of the Borgia,” Christoffa said, looking rather worried. “But, as I had intended to show it to one of Rodrigo’s agents before everything went so wrong, I was forced to leave it back at the docks when we were attacked,” the explorer sighed, looking as though he wished to be anywhere else than where he was at present.
“I will go and fetch it, amigo,” Aguilar said, his usual, stoic expression on his face. “Ezio, will you stay here and make sure that the Borgia don’t try anything while I’m gone?”
“Of course,” he said, nodding as his brother Assassin turned and made for the wall of a nearby building.
“I don’t think it will ever cease to amaze me, the way you Assassins move,” Christoffa said, smiling widely as he turned from watching Aguilar making his way up the side of the building to where Ezio himself was standing.
“Sí, sometimes it still amazes me, as well,” he said, smiling for a moment at the enthralled expression on the explorer’s face, before becoming serious once again. “Still, we should keep moving; the Borgia and their hirelings will doubtless be following you all the more closely, once they find out that you have protection.”
“But, wouldn’t that kind of thing scare them off?” Luis asked, looking desperately confused for a moment; Ezio was beginning to think that the man was either a bit slow or else putting too much into his act.
“You might be surprised, amico, what desperation can drive a man to do,” he said, as their small group began making their way out of the garden where they’d been standing just a short time ago.
He knew that Aguilar would have been thinking just the same as him, and would therefore have a much better chance of finding them than someone with less experience in tracking than one of the Brotherhood learned almost as a matter of course. Calling up his second-sight as the three of them began making their way closer to a large group of what seemed to be perfectly ordinary citizens, Ezio swept his gaze over them and was relieved to note that he saw only the gray-shaded forms of those uninvolved in the conflict he was currently mired in.
With a soft breath to settle himself after making it through such a dangerous situation, Ezio continued on his way.
“Is there anywhere else you might be able to find shelter?” he asked, once the three of them had made it away from the thronging crowds who would have otherwise overheard them. “Somewhere that the Borgia would be less able to find you?”
“Not so many as we once might have, with groups of Assassins being arrested by Tomás de Torquemada and his Inquisition.”
Surprisingly enough, it was Luis who spoke up, that time.
“So, you know of the Brotherhood,” he commented, not quite sure how he should react, as he wasn’t quite certain what to make of the man; even if he was a friend of Christoffa, Aguilar hadn’t reacted entirely well to the man.
“Sí, but it seems that the Inquisition has made a habit of arresting them,” Christoffa said, shaking his head sadly.
Ezio allowed himself a brief sigh, as well; it seemed that, no matter where he went, the Brotherhood would always find itself under threat from the Templars. It was a troublesome thing, that, but it remained the truth no matter how much he disliked it.
“Sí, Aguilar informed me of the troubles our brothers in Spain were having,” he said, as they continued on their way, intending to stay moving so that they would present less of an opportune target for the Borgia and their hirelings as they waited for Aguilar to return.
Chapter 275: Harsh words and fists
Chapter Text
Scanning the rooftops with his second-sight, knowing that one of the Brotherhood would always be more likely to return in such a way, and Aguilar in particular would be apt to return the way he’d departed in the first place. The sight of a blue-limed figure emerging over the roofline of a nearby building brought a smile to his face, and Ezio subtly directed the attention of Luis and Christoffa to the place where Aguilar would be returning to them sooner than later.
“I’m glad to see he’s returning so soon,” Christoffa said, and indeed the explorer sounded as though there had been an invisible weight lifted from his shoulders.
“And without anyone following him back,” Luis commented. “I’m glad to know he’s back. Not that we don’t appreciate your company, senor, but having someone you know is always better than not. Don’t you agree?”
“I suppose,” he allowed, still not quite certain what to make of the man, though Luis hadn’t acted against him or Aguilar in any way that Ezio could have named.
Perhaps he was merely jumping at shadows in this instance; it would have been a welcome relief, not to find himself caught up in bonds of treachery at each and every turn.
Once Aguilar had made his way back down to the ground again, the three of those who had been awaiting him moved to meet with him once more.
“It’s good to made it back here unhurt, mi amigo,” Christoffa said, once the three of them had met up with each other again.
“Sí, but I made a stop, and it seems that any allies we might have found in Barcelona are being swiftly thinned by the Torquemada and his Inquisitors,” Aguilar said, the grim tone of his voice letting that the task ahead of them would not be so easily completed as Ezio had found himself wishing. “The only one who seems to have escaped their net is an old friend of mine: Raphael Sanchez.”
“A Thief?” he asked, turning to face Aguilar more squarely as the four of them began moving once more. “Or one of our brothers who managed to slip the nets?”
“The latter,” Aguilar said, at least some of the grimness of his face washed away by the new resolve Ezio could see appearing there. “If there’s anyone who’d know more than I do about what’s happening, it would be him.”
“Do you want me to go and help you find him, or would you like me to stay back and look after your friends?” he asked, as they continued making their way through the city.
“I’ll find him,” Aguilar said, a slight smile cutting through the grimness that seemed to linger about him like a shroud. “Just make sure that you get Luis and Christoffa to the safe house,” he continued, handing over a map.
“I will,” he said, nodding as his brother Assassin turned to depart from their group once more. “Come on; let’s get to the safe house before we’re accosted again,” he called to his two remaining traveling companions.
“Sí, and let’s be quick,” Christoffa said, nodding in a decisive sort of manner.
The three of them moved more quickly after that, covering the ground that remained between them and the safe house that the Brotherhood operated out of in this part of Barcelona, where Ezio managed to find them a way inside after a few, long moments spent contemplating the façade of the building. Yes, any of his brother or sister Assassins would have found it a great deal more simple to make their way inside, but as both Christoffa and Luis lacked the training in movement that each and every one of the Brotherhood possessed almost as a matter of course – save for the very youngest who had been born into such a life – he couldn’t have very well made use of any such ways. Not while he was travelling with them, at least.
Once the three of them had managed to settle themselves in, with him taking note of all the little differences between this one and the ones that he had stayed in during his time in Italia, Ezio smiled slightly as he watched Christoffa fairly race over to the bookshelf on the far wall of the main room they’d all made their way into. He could see that the explorer was eager to discover all that he could about the world around him; something that he fully approved of. And something that he fully approved of, considering all that he himself had striven to find out about the world and his own place in it.
Aguilar did not return for some long moments, and when he did it was with the scent of blood and death about him; a scent that Ezio had come to recognize rather too well, over the course of his own work for the Brotherhood.
“Did one of our enemies catch you unawares, fratello mio?”
“No, hermano,” Aguilar said calmly, though he looked pleased at the concern he was being shown. “The man who was hunting them, Gaspar Martinez, was a high-ranking member of the Inquisition and hence needed to die.”
“Sí, I understand,” he said, nodding as a bearded man came out from behind Aguilar and looked at him with relief. “Fratello,” he said, nodding to the other man; this figured to be their brother Raphael Sanchez.
“Buenas tardes, hermano,” the man said, a smile on his face as he stepped out from behind the broad-shouldered form of Aguilar.
“One of our brothers was due to be burned by the Inquisition,” Aguilar said, a tightness to his manner and tone that suggested he had some kind of previous experience with that kind of method of execution; on the other hand, being burned alive was a horrifying thing in any case.
He supposed that he could understand his brother Assassin’s reaction, in any case.
“We managed to recover him, as well as a list of our brothers who have been captured,” Aguilar said, handing over the list that he’d captured from the man he’d just killed.
“It seems that they reside in the kingdom of Zaragoza,” Raphael said, stepping forward. “So, even while my skills as a fighter have begun to degrade, I will at least be able to guide you.”
“Sí, grazie,” he said, nodding.
“Sí,” Aguilar agreed, nodding sharply as he turned his gaze to take in Christoffa and Luis once again. “You and Luis stay here, Christoffa. You will be safe here, while my brothers and I go to find and free those of our own who have been taken by the Inquisition.”
“Of course, mi amigo,” Christoffa said, nodding as he came over to where the three of them were standing. “Have a safe journey, and I hope everything goes well for you.”
“Gracias, mi amigo,” Aguilar said, as the pair of them embraced quickly.
Chapter 276: Back into the underground
Chapter Text
The three of them departed swiftly, mounting up on the first of a succession of horses that they were going to need in order to reach the kingdom of Zaragoza in order to free their brother Assassins from the Inquisition before they could be killed in the same way that his family had been killed back in their own home, so long ago.
Once the three of them had made it into Zaragoza itself, Raphael seemed to sit straighter in his saddle, as though simply returning to the kingdom had brought back the strength he’d spend during the journey.
“You both should seek out the Inquisition’s Calificador: Pedro Llorente. His tribunal operates out of a building on the far side of town,” Raphael said, reining his horse in as the animal shifted under him. “I will go and see if I can stir up some trouble,” he smiled wryly. “My face is known well enough that the Inquisitors should be eager to come to me.”
“Sí,” Aguilar said, nodding seriously as he reined in his own horse. “Ezio and I will see to our brothers, then.”
The three of them parted, he and Aguilar making their way for the edge of town so that they would be able to find the Calificador and deal with him before he would be able to inflict any more damage upon the Brotherhood than he clearly already had. The building that the Inquisition was clearly operating out of came steadily into view as he and Aguilar gave their horses their head and galloped over the packed ground that stood between them and it.
Leaping down from their horses, so as not to risk the animals in battle against the Inquisitors or else whatever Templars might have been supporting them, he and Aguilar battered their way through the doors, casting them open and allowing the pair of them inside to see the Assassin standing defiantly against the Inquisitor facing him.
“Invaders!” the man shouted in surprise, as he and Aguilar forced their way through the shattered remains of the doors under their feet. “Guards! Guards!”
He’d only a moment to take note of the way the captive Assassin sheltered behind the pair of them, as well as the small form in his arms that seemed to have been bound and gagged. He and Aguilar closed ranks before their brother Assassin and his charge, giving what protection they could from the guards now charging into the room with them. Clashing with the men piling into the room nearly on top of them, Ezio cut them down as swiftly and efficiently as he could. These men were not his true enemies; not the Templars that hounded him, or the Inquisitors that threatened them.
These were simply more hirelings, who might have easily have chosen an occupation that did not bring the pair of them into conflict with one another.
Once the last of the guards had been routed, a great many of them laying dead on the ground, Ezio turned his attention back to his brother Assassin and the man’s charge, who he only then noticed was a Treasure Guardian.
“Gracias,” their brother Assassin said, gathering his charge into his arms and carrying the young boy over to a table that seemed to have been used for Pedro and his tribunal to meet while they discussed their plans. “I discovered this boy when I was captured; the Inquisitors had him drugged with some kind of herbs, and seemed to wish to use his abilities to locate the Piece he holds a connection to.”
“Templars,” he sneered, narrowing his eyes as he turned to look out in the direction that the Inquisitor who had taken to his feet to flee, after calling his guards to accost them. “Disgustoso.”
“Sí,” their brother Assassin said, nodding as he began to remove the binds around the Guardian’s hands and feet, and then the gag and blindfold. “My name is Alberto Acosta; thank you for helping me to escape Llorente and his Inquisitors.”
“Of course, hermano,” Aguilar said, making his way over to check on the insensate form of the nameless Treasure Guardian on the table. “I’m glad to see that this one is going to make it.”
After that, the four of them departed from the building where Pedro Llorente and his tribunal met to discuss matters of the Inquisition and what they would do next, making their way back to where they had tied up their horses so that they could escape from this place all the more swiftly.
Once they had returned to the safe house that the Brotherhood maintained in Zaragoza, Alberto took the nameless Treasure Guardian to the back room, clearly aiming to at least begin treating the damage the Inquisitors had done to him while they’d had him in their hands. It was all the simpler to come to hate the kind of people who could do things like this; still, Ezio had long since come to know that allowing himself to hate the Templars and those who supported them would be the first step towards allowing himself to become like them. And so, once he’d become aware of such a feeling within himself, Ezio let them go.
However, there was still the matter of their captured brother Assassins, and so he and Aguilar made their way out of the safe house. He spotted the racing forms of more Inquisition guards, a small smile curing his face as he realized that Raphael had to be the one keeping the attention of more guards than they might be able to handle from falling upon them while they worked. He and Aguilar ended up splitting up, so that they would be able to free their brother Assassins all the quicker, and because the guards’ ranks had been thinned out by Raphael’s efforts.
Three of his brother Assassins were freed by his hands, and Ezio led them back to the safe house so that they would be able to recover from what had been done to them at the hands of the Inquisitors they had faced. He also found that the Treasure Guardian’s name was Jesús; Alberto had apparently been able to speak with him during the moments of lucidity that the boy had been able to display while he was recovering from the damage the Inquisitors – as well as their masters, the Templars – had done to him.
“I’m glad to know he’s doing better,” he said, as Alberto settled down in a nearby chair with an air of satisfied tiredness.
“So am I,” Alberto said, smiling grimly as he settled back into the chair to rest.
Chapter 277: Racing time
Chapter Text
“Pedro Llorente will be searching for us, after this,” Aguilar said, making his way to the center of the room so that he would be within sight of each and every one of them. “We will need to deal with him before he is able to harm any more of our brothers or sisters.”
“Sí,” Raphael said, rising from his seat and making his way over to stand beside his fellow Spaniard. “To say nothing of what Torquemada himself will attempt to do, now that he knows there are others who will stand against him than just me. And, also that we have help,” he added, turning an expression of gratitude to Ezio; he nodded in response.
“Sí, I think so, too,” he said, rising from the chair he’d settled down in while he’d rested from the worst of his previous exertions. “We’re also going to need to deal with the guards that will inevitably be drawn in by our actions; I confess, I don’t know this place as well as any of you, so I’d be more useful as a distraction this time.”
“You have our thanks, hermano,” Raphael said, smiling widely at him. “And, I’ll be accompanying you. My skills as a fighter might have withered a bit with time, but I can at least be of help against the Inquisition’s lapdogs.”
It was generally agreed upon that Aguilar would be undertaking the task of ending Pedro Llorente’s life, while he, Raphael, Alberto, and some of their rescued brothers who weren’t urgently in need of healing, rest, or both would deal with the guards emplaced around the city before the Inquisitors could call upon them. Riding out with his brothers from Spain was hardly different than doing the same back in his native Italia, but he couldn’t help the feeling that it should have been so. He tried not to take so much note of it, but the thought remained in the back of his mind, even as he and his brother Assassins went about their work.
Once they had managed to clear out the last of the guards in and about the town Pedro and his group of Inquisitors were operating out of, Raphael pulled him aside.
“I am afraid that you will have to handle whatever comes next without me, hermano,” his brother Assassin said, as the pair of them paused for a moment to water both the horses and themselves.
“What do you mean?” he asked, after swallowing the water he’d just been drinking.
“I work for Queen Isabella, as her Treasurer, and I’ve just gotten word that I’m being called back to attend a financial meeting,” Raphael said, and it was clear that – for all his dedication to the monarchs he served – he wished to stay and aid them in whatever struggles their brother Assassins would face next.
“You have the ear of your Queen?” he asked, surprised but pleased to know that there was another Assassin in a position to aid and protect the people of his homeland.
“Sí, we have one ear, but I expect the Templars have the other,” Raphael said, a contemplative expression on his face, as he turned his horse back down the road. “Given what I’ve learned of Tomás de Torquemada and his Inquisitors,” Raphael paused for a long moment, seeming to chew over just what it was that he would do next. “Tell Aguilar that I’ve gone to Grenada; I’d also suggest that you and he should do the same.”
“Sí, I’ll let him know,” Ezio said, nodding as Raphael bid him farewell and raced off to make the meeting he had been called to.
Turning his own path back to where Aguilar and their brother Assassins were, Ezio paused for a moment to concentrate. Using his second-sight to make his way through the crowds and back to the side of his brother Assassins once more, Ezio quickly managed to locate Aguilar once more. Once he’d managed to meet up with his Spanish brother, the pair of them spoke briefly, and then swiftly made their way back to the safe house that the Brotherhood maintained.
Along the way, the pair of them made a point of pausing to aid small groups of civilians that were being harassed by groups of wandering soldiers that had somehow managed to escape them when they were hunting for those who would otherwise hinder them in their efforts to save not only their brother Assassins but those who would be threatened by the activities of the Templars and Inquisitors in this area.
Once the pair of them had managed to make it back to the safe house, he and Aguilar waited for their brother Assassins to make their own ways back inside.
“Luis Santangel?” he asked, feeling a distinct thrill of surprise when he found himself confronted by the man that had seemed merely to be a friend of Christoffa.
“You seem surprised, hermano,” the man, who was evidently far more than he’d first appeared, said with a calm, pleased smile. “Everywhere you go, you’re bound to find at least one of us around. Sometimes even in the court of a monarch.”
“You mean, you and Raphael both work for Isabella and Ferdinand?” he asked, intrigued at the prospect.
“Sí. It took some work, and reluctant conversions, but the pair of them seem particularly amenable to pious drivel,” Raphael said, an amused sort of smile on his face, before he quickly became serious once more. “However, it appears that a Templar spy has been passing false information to King Muhammad; encouraging him to continue hostilities in this area.”
“So, you wish for Ezio and I to find this spy and silence him,” Aguilar said, making his own way into the room. “Is that it?”
“Sí, but you should also find just where the hidden passage they are using to make their way into the city,” Luis advised the pair of them, looking from him to Aguilar and then back. “I will send some of our own to follow in your footsteps, so that we can either take possession of the tunnel for our own, or at least keep it out of reach of the Templars in whatever way we can.”
Once the pair of them had made their way back out of the safe house again, searching for the Templar spy that had been manipulating the war for the benefit of his Order, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he concentrated on his second-sight again. If he and Aguilar were going to be searching for a target once more, then he was going to need every advantage he could muster, particularly since he hadn’t had nearly as long to familiarize himself with the layout of this city as anyone else here. Perhaps Aguilar had, hence why he was following his brother Assassin’s lead in this case.
After they’d managed to deal with the spy, Ezio found himself standing before what looked like the entrance to some kind of catacombs; it felt almost as though he had stepped back in time, standing before one of the Assassin tombs that he’d taken it upon himself to search.
He and Aguilar discussed what they’d seen, and decided that he would stay behind while Aguilar went to report on what they had discovered, as well as the death of the Templar spy. Concealing himself and the horse he’d rode on, Ezio concentrated for a moment to bring up his second-sight again. There was thankfully no one close enough to be visible – ally or enemy – and so he climbed up into a nearby tree so that he would be out of sight of anyone who might show up.
After the sun had passed a handswith through the noon sky, Ezio turned back to the path that he and Aguilar had taken to get to this place, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he called on his second-sight. Settling back down on the bench as he began to see signs of the approach of his brother Assassins, Ezio smiled softly, knowing that this long watch of his was finally coming to an end.
“Buon giorno, fratelli!” he called, leaping down from the tree where he’d been concealing himself so that he could properly greet his brother Assassins.
“Buenas tardes, hermano!” Raphael called back, smiling widely. “Aguilar has told us about the spy you dealt with,” Raphael continued, sobering once more. “However, it seems as though the Templars are determined to make their own voyage to the west. And that they will do anything they can to delay Christoffa’s voyage, in order to give themselves a better chance of finding whatever it is they seek there. Even if they must continue provoking this war of ours.”
“Sí; there is no kind of base act the Templars won’t stoop to,” he said, nodding as he found himself thinking back on the schemes that he’d found himself having to deal with over the decade and more that he had found himself set against the Templars and their allies.
“Sí,” Luis said, nodding somberly. “But, I can’t help but wonder what happened to King Muhammad. He was once a great ally of the Assassins, but none of us have heard from him in many months. If you can, I would like you two to find him, if you can. That is, if the Templars haven’t managed to find him first.”
“We’ll make our way through the catacombs,” Aguilar said, and Ezio nodded sharply as his brother Assassin said the very thing that had been on his own mind.
“Bene,” he said, nodding. “That was the route that the Templar spy seemed to prefer using.”
As the pair of them made their way through the catacombs, on their way from Zaragoza to Grenada, Ezio looked up as he felt the ground shuddering under his feet from the force of a distant explosion.
“Do you think the siege is still going on?” he wondered aloud, not truly expecting an answer.
“Sí, it’s more than likely,” Aguilar said, narrowing his eyes as he himself looked up at the ceiling of the catacombs they were traveling through.
“I hope that we can get there in time to help the citizens,” he muttered, taking a deep breath as he and Aguilar continued on their way.
“Sí, so do I.”
The smell of smoke wafting in through the opening of the catacombs as they swiftly approached them made Ezio wrinkle his nose, giving him a good idea of just what he and Aguilar would be facing when they arrived. The smell of flaming wood, smoldering textiles, and the sounds of people panicking as the city around them burned drove Ezio to move all the faster. Looking to his left, he saw that Aguilar was being driven forward in the exact same way. Pleased to know that his brother Assassin was just as dedicated to this cause as he himself was, Ezio turned his gaze forward once again.
There would still be the matter of saving the citizens who would be in danger from the flames, but there was also the matter of finding out just what it was that the Templars were holding over King Muhammad to force him to continue the war against Spain.
Chapter 278: False witness
Chapter Text
Once the pair of them made it to the end of the catacombs, Ezio found himself facing the burning castle that he and Aguilar had been drawing steadily closer to for the entire length of their journey.
“Come, we should get inside as quickly as possible,” Aguilar said, after the pair of them had spent a long moment staring at the devastation before them.
“Sí,” he said, nodding sharply as he and Aguilar began making their way up to the burning castle.
Keeping themselves out of sight of what guards remained in the burning castle, he and Aguilar continued on their way up the walls, bringing down gates to let themselves steadily deeper inside.
Once the pair of them had made their way through the halls and corridors of the burning castle, Ezio began to hear the sounds of people talking. Narrowing his eyes as he continued to press forward, Ezio concentrated and brought his second-sight back into play. Seeing through the walls that stood before him, he found that there was one ally and one enemy in the rooms before him. Gesturing for Aguilar to follow him, knowing that if he was close enough to see whoever it was threatening one of his allies, they would be able to hear him if he spoke.
Aguilar nodded back, and the pair of them moved quietly through the remaining corridors that stood between them and whichever of their allies was being threatened by this new enemy. Narrowing his eyes still farther as he heard the plain defiance in the voice of the man being threatened by the Templar standing over him, Ezio turned slightly when he heard Aguilar snarling softly from his left.
It seemed that Aguilar knew the man being threatened.
Catching sight of the man being threatened, Ezio saw the well-appointed clothing of the man tied to the post, and began to suspect he was a noble of some kind. Growling, Aguilar launched himself at the man threatening the noble, and Ezio quickly fell in behind him, supporting his brother Assassin in the battle they were about to engage in. While Aguilar dealt with the Templar, Ezio made his way over to untie the noble that had been captured by him.
“Peace be upon you,” the noble said, smile coming back to his face as the pair of them faced each other. “You are one of the Assassins, aren’t you?”
“Sí, I am Ezio Auditore,” he said, nodding as he removed the last of the ropes and helped the noble to stand up again. “Luis Santangel sent me to find you; he suspected you were in danger, so Aguilar and I were sent out to help you.”
“You have my gratitude, Assassin,” the noble said, smiling as he brushed off his ornate robes. “Your Brotherhood and I have not always seen eye to eye, but I have been grateful for their assistance on many occasions.”
“We still need to end this war, Su Alteza,” Aguilar said, stepping over the corpses of the first guard, as well as the others that had been drawn to the clear sounds of battle.
The noble sighed sadly, shoulders drooping. “There have been so many misunderstandings and missteps over the course of this war. I suppose I can try, if only to see that no more of my people suffer. What do you think we should do?”
“First, we should see to it that you escape safely from this place,” he said, moving to stand alongside Aguilar and the noble that the pair of them had had a hand in rescuing.
“Of course,” the noble said, as the three of them began making their way down into the depths of the castle, so that they would be able to escape without being at too much risk from the flames.
Once they’d managed to get the noble – who turned out to be King Muhammad himself – out of the castle, through the tunnels that ran underneath the structure that were meant for escaping just these kinds of situations, he and Aguilar turned back to the city. There would still be more for them to do, considering that they couldn’t simply allow Alhambra castle and the city around it to burn to the ground. Not while the pair of them still drew breath.
Chapter 279: Firestarter
Chapter Text
Moving almost as one, he and Aguilar emerged back into the outside, facing the flames consuming the castle around them once more. There was an unspoken agreement between the pair of them, just before he and Aguilar split up in order to help as many people as they could to escape the fires. And, to put out as many as they could manage, before the city around them could become further engulfed. However, there were more and more guards flooding into the city, all of them seeking to spread the already-existing fires and to set new ones.
They were clearly either working for the Templars, or else Templars themselves, so it was all the more simple for Ezio to deal with them as cleanly as was possible.
Leading the trapped groups of citizens out of the collapsing remains of the city all around them, Ezio nodded to Aguilar as he saw the man moving around the edges of the group, nipping at their heels and picking them off as smoothly as he could manage. Breathing more easily once the last of them had fallen, Ezio nodded to Aguilar as the pair of them split up once again.
Once he’d managed to get the last of the citizens out of the burning city all around them, Ezio made his way back into the city once more. It was more smoldering than burning, considering all that he and Aguilar had done in order to restore it to what it had once been, and Ezio could feel himself becoming all the more pleased when he saw how the remaining guards were giving their aid to the people of the city who had remained behind to do what they could against the fires that were still burning.
Breathing as deeply as he could manage when he made it into the clearer air of the lower parts of the city, Ezio steadied himself and rededicated himself to giving as much aid as he could to those working all around him.
Once the city around him had been saved from the fires all around them, Ezio quickly made his way out before he could find himself caught up with the other citizens all around them. Looking up into the rooftops, Ezio nodded to Aguilar as his brother Assassin emerged on one nearby, and moved quickly caught up to him. The pair of them moved almost as one, hopping back down to the ground and making their way over to where Luis and Raphael were waiting for them.
“I’m glad to see that the pair of you managed to make it out,” Luis said, nodding to the pair of them as they stood before him. “Now that King Muhammad is attending peace talks with Isabella and Ferdinand, we can turn our attention to Christoffa and his voyage.”
“It will be good to have this done with, at least,” he said, feeling time pressing down on him once more. “There are still things that I must attend to, back in Firenze.”
“What has been happening in your city?” Raphael asked, confusion appearing on his face as the four of them all stood together.
“The Apple of Eden has been stolen, by someone wearing the robes of a monk,” he said, knowing that his brother Assassins would understand the gravity of their current situation. “I have been looking everywhere for it,” he took a breath, considering what he might say next, before pressing determinedly onward. “The youngest of my sisters is a Guardian, so that gives me an advantage.”
“She’s of the Line of the Apple, then?” Raphael asked, looking relieved. “I’m glad to know that you’ve managed to keep another one of our most vulnerable hermanitas out of the hands of the Templars.”
“Sí, but I think you should return home,” Luis said. “We’re all thankful for your help, but it truly would be best if your Apple wasn’t allowed to remain in the hands of whatever madman captured it.”
“Sí, grazie,” he said, nodding. “While I am glad to have done what I could, here, I think it would truly be best if I returned to Italia once more.”
The four of them parted on the best of terms, and Ezio made his way back to the docks, so that he would be able to begin making his return journey to Italia at last.
It struck him, then, how much he’d done for his brother and sister Assassins in Spain; rescuing one of the Treasure Guardians that had been captured by the Templars, giving aid to the citizens of Spain alongside Aguilar, and even bringing the hope of stopping a war, as well. Still, there was the matter of the monk that had stolen the Apple of Eden, and could easily be using it to control the minds of the people around him. He could only hope to make it in time to prevent anything too disastrous from occurring.
Chapter 280: An end and a beginning
Chapter Text
Standing on the docks, waiting for the last of her brothers to return from Spain, Maria called up her second-sight again, scanning the crowds to make certain that none of their enemies would be present to attack him when he arrived. And also, to ensure that no one was about to try capturing her for what she could do. She could still feel the presence of the Apple in the back of her mind; something that she would have been hard-pressed to describe to anyone who might have asked, but something that she had become experienced enough with that she could use it to locate the Apple.
At least, that was what she and Ezio were counting on.
Moving smoothly through the crowds as the ship that Ezio had been traveling on arrived at last, Maria smiled softly as she caught sight of the last of her brothers as he made his way back onto the docks, looking around as he began making his own way into the crowds.
“It’s good to see you again, sorellina,” Ezio said, as the pair of them met up with each other after such a long time apart.
“Sí, and you as well, fratello,” she said, as the pair of them reached for each other to share an embrace and a kiss. “Come; Uncle Mario and the others are waiting for us in Monteriggioni.”
“Sí, and we are going to need to start looking for the monk and his thralls as soon as possible,” Ezio said, as the pair of them began moving through the crowds once more. “Have you a carriage we can travel in?”
“Sí, the one I came in,” little Maria said, taking the lead as she made her way back through the crowds on her way to the carriage she had taken out to this place.
Once the pair of them had gotten settled, and the carriage had set off once more, Maria found herself wondering just what it was that they would be confronted with at the end of this latest task of theirs. It was at least clear that they would be looking for one of the monks of the Dominican Order, given everything that Catarina had told her when the pair of them had had the chance to speak. She could only hope that they would be able to find whatever monk had taken the Apple before he could cause too many people to suffer under his rule.
She also wondered what in the world the man could have been doing with the Apple.
~AC: II~
The sharp banging on the front door, as well as the screams and cries from his family guards, caused Piero to drop his utensil in shock, just before he found himself pulled out of his seat by Luciano’s strong hands.
“Get out of here, Piero!” Luciano shouted, a wild look in his uncle’s eyes as the silver-haired man all but threw himself up and out of his chair. “Run!”
Dashing backwards out of the dining room, knowing that his uncle wouldn’t have been nearly as adamant if the danger had not been clear, present, and all but upon them, Piero ran.
~AC: II~
Feeling a grin stretching his mouth as he watched the little Child of Eden attempting to stand against him, Rodrigo chuckled. “I suppose that you think that you can stand against me, Child,” he grinned, signaling for one of his guards to hand him the Staff. “Even though I have this!”
The little one snarled in futile defiance, as he brandished the Staff and laid it atop the Child’s head, grinning as he watched the telltale white light filling up the Child’s eyes. The Child gave one last, futile thrash, as though in an attempt to throw off the control that none of his kind would ever be able to resist. It was a useless gesture, but amusing all the same.
“Bene,” he said, grinning once the light had overtaken the last corner of the Child’s eyes, and he stood as the broken doll all of his kind was meant to be. “Come, Child,” he said, reaching out to cup the chin of the little doll standing before him. “Let’s deal with that troublesome nipote of yours.”
Grabbing she Child’s left shoulder, Rodrigo turned the little doll around, so that the pair of them would be able to find Piero di Medici all the easier. The Child obediently drew his sword as Rodrigo commanded him to do so, and Rodrigo smiled as the doll followed in his footsteps as he’d been commanded.
~AC: II~
Panting as he dashed into the hidden entrance that so many of Padre’s Assassin friends had used during the course of the time he’d actually known about the Assassin Brotherhood and all that they had done for Italy as a whole and the Medici in particular, Piero quickly sealed it up behind him and slumped against the nearby wall as he tried to catch his breath. There was nothing he could have done for his uncle; he’d been told, many times, that once a Guardian’s mind had been overtaken by the power of their Treasure, there would be no bringing them out of their trance until the Piece of Eden was taken away.
Or else until they were killed, but Piero had no desire to see his uncle be killed for something he couldn’t have stopped; knowing what he would have to do, Piero hurried out through the hidden tunnels and back into Firenze.
~AC: II~
When he’d returned to Monteriggioni, he’d found that there was an abbey in the wetlands of Forlì that housed an order of Dominican monks. And yes, he was fully aware that these monks were not likely to be affiliated with the one who had stolen the Apple from him, but they were at least likely to know more than he did about the monk he’d seen. And so, he and little Maria had made the journey back to Forlì so that they would be able to search the Wetlands Abbey that they had learned about.
Once the pair of them had arrived back in Forlì, Catarina greeted him enthusiastically.
“It is so good to see you again, mia caro,” Catarina said, as the pair of them parted from a passionate kiss.
“It’s good to see you again, amore mio,” he said, grinning widely as the pair of them held each other for a lingering moment. “Unfortunately, it’s business rather than pleasure that calls me back here.”
“Sí, I know,” Catarina said, smiling even as the pair of them parted, and little Maria stepped forward to embrace her, as well. “I was the one who sent you the letter, after all.”
“Sí, and I’m sure that Ezio is very grateful to you for it,” little Maria said, a sly grin on her face as she side-eyed him.
“Little imp,” he said, pressing down on her head as the pair of them stood together.
“It is the way of sisters, mia caro,” Catarina said, grinning. “No, go; find this troublesome monk!”
“I think I’m going to miss you when this is over, Catarina,” he said, reaching up to gently caress the right side of her face.
She laughed softly, reaching up to cover his hand with her own. “I know you will.”
Chapter 281: Uomo del mistero
Chapter Text
The pair of them left not soon after that, with little Maria laughing up until the pair of them had mounted the pair of horses that Catarina had been generous enough to lend to them on their journey, and so Ezio found himself forced to tickle her into submission before the pair of them could mount up and begin making their way to the Wetlands Abbey at last. Once the pair of them began making their way, of course, Ezio could only wonder about just what it was that they were actually going to find there. He hoped that it would provide them at least some answers, if not the monk himself.
When he and little Maria entered the Abbey, Ezio found himself met by a man who was the very picture of a monk: plump and rubicund, but he had flaming red hair, and there was a certain shrewdness to his eyes when he and Ezio faced one another. There was also the matter of his accent; Ezio recognized it from among some of the mercenaries in Uncle Mario’s employ. This monk was from Ireland.
“Blessings be upon you both, my brethren,” the monk said, making his way over to the pair of them.
“Grazie, Padre,” he began, but found himself swiftly cut off by the monk.
“Oh, no; I am Brother O’Callahan.”
“I wonder, then, if you might be able to help us,” he said, hoping that he and little Maria would soon be able to come to grips with the monk who had stolen the Apple.
“That is why we are here, brother,” the monk said, a certain wheedling tone to his voice. “Of course, we live in troubled times. It is difficult to think straight without something in our stomachs.”
“You mean, something in your coin purse,” he said, feeling rather unimpressed with the whole prospect.
“You take me wrong,” O’Callahan protested. “I’m not asking for anything,” he spread his hands in supplication. “But, the Lord helps the generous.”
Sighing in an amused sort of resignation, Ezio took some florins from his pouch and handed them over. “If that’s not going to be enough,” he said, allowing his voice to trail off, waiting to see what O’Callahan would do.
“Ah, well the thought is there, but to be honest the Lord actually helps the slightly more generous.”
Sighing, but firmly resisting the urge to give vent to any more of his annoyance, Ezio continued shaking out coins until O’Callahan’s expression had cleared at last.
“The Order appreciates your open-handedness, my brother,” the rotund monk folded his hands over the expanse of his belly. “Now, what is it that the pair of you are seeking?”
“A black-hooded monk, who lacks one of his ten fingers,” he explained, hoping that there would be at least something for him in this place, after what he’d been forced to pay for it.
O’Callahan hummed in thought. “Brother Guido has only nine toes. Are you sure it wasn’t a toe?”
“No, I’m quite sure it was a finger,” he said, having studied all of the descriptions of the monk he could get his hands on, in preparation for just this kind of situation.
“Then, there is also Brother Domenico, but it’s his entire left arm that he’s lacking,” O’Callahan said, sounding thoughtful.
“No. I’m sorry, but I’m sure it was a finger,” he said, beginning to think that there was indeed nothing for him in this place.
O’Callahan hummed again, an expression of deep thought on his shrewd but kindly face. “Now, wait a moment; I do recall a black-cowled monk with only nine fingers. Yes! Of course! It was from when we had our last San Vicenzo’s Feast at our abbey in Tuscany.”
“Sí, I know the place,” he said, nodding, pleased to know that there was at least something for him to find in this place. “I’ll try there. Grazie, amico mio.”
Little Maria thanked the monk as well, and the pair of them wished O’Callahan and his brother for the help they’d been given; little as it has ultimately helped, in the end. The pair of them mounted up on the pair of horses they had been given by Catarina, and were soon making their way back to Tuscany. The journey itself was long and difficult, and took them through the end of summer and into fall, moving ever westward into the abbey in Tuscany.
As the pair of them drew closer to the abbey, however, Ezio found himself growing ever more apprehensive.
“Fratello, is something wrong?” little Maria asked, turning to him as the pair of them drew ever closer to the abbey that they were hoping to find out more about that monk that had stolen the Apple.
“This place was where I drove Stefano de Bagnone to ground,” he said, narrowing his eyes as the abbey slowly came into sight. He chuckled. “I don’t think I’d be welcome here.”
Little Maria laughed. “Well, I suppose I should go in, then.”
“Sí, I suppose you have the right of it, sorellina,” he said, smiling slightly.
Chuckling softly as little Maria made her way into the abbey to speak with the monks, and to find out just what she could about the monk who had stolen the Apple from them. Carefully concealing himself and the horses that he and little Maria had rode to this place on, Ezio settled himself down to wait and see just what kind of information she would be able to gather from this place.
Just as he was beginning to wonder what his littlest sister was actually doing, he saw her making her way back over to where he was concealed. She paused for a moment, studying the ground in a way that Ezio had often heard described to himself when he was using the second-sight that he and little Maria had inherited from their parents. Him from Giovanni Auditore, and her from whatever poor unfortunate that those Templar bastards had stolen her from. Forcing the thoughts of little Maria’s original parents out of his mind, Ezio turned back to little Maria as she made her way up to where he was standing.
“What did you manage to find out, sorellina?”
“There was a monk with nine fingers here,” she said, handing over a small piece of bread; he wondered if one of the monks had given them to her. “A man by the name of Savonarola; the Abbot said that he didn’t fit in there, however, and so they suggested that he take up a hermitage in the mountains.”
“I fear his hermitage must have ended,” he said, becoming ever more certain that Savonarola was the monk that he and little Maria had encountered after their battle with Checco Orsi and his mercenary forces. “Did the Abbot tell you where he might have gone?”
“Sí, he said that Savonarola might very well have returned to Santa Maria del Carmine, in Firenze,” little Maria said, a worried expression beginning to overtake her face.
“Firenze,” he muttered, even as he helped little Maria back onto her horse, and the pair of them set off again.
Sighing, knowing that there was little chance of him being able to escape from the fate that seemed to be setting itself before him, Ezio turned his horse and began making his way back down the road; back toward Firenze once more.
He knew that he and little Maria couldn’t risk making contact with their brother and sister Assassins; there would be too much of a chance that one of Savonarola’s allies would find them out, and thus endanger everything they were trying to do. As fall inexorably advanced into winter, he and little Maria made their way to Santa Maria del Carmine, searching for the monk named Savonarola. As the pair of them came within sight of the monastery, however, he noticed that there was an expression of worried concentration on little Maria’s face.
“What is it, sorellina?”
“I don’t think we’re going to be able to find the Apple here, fratello,” she said, sighing softly. “We might be able to find just where it is that Savonarola is staying, however.”
“Sí, I’ll keep that in mind, sorellina,” he said, reaching up to gently embrace her as well as he could while the both of them were on horseback.
Even with the peace that seemed to remain over Firenze as a whole, there was something about it that felt false to him. As though there was a sort of stalking danger that held sway over the city, even in the absence of anything tangible; anything that he could have pointed to, in the hope of convincing someone uninvolved with his and little Maria’s struggle of just what it was that was going on in Firenze. Just why this peace of theirs rang so hollow and false to him.
As the pair of them made their way up to the church that Savonarola was said to have taken refuge in after he’d broken from his Dominican brothers to do… Whatever it was that he had intended to do, since laying his unjust claim to the Apple. However, it seemed that the false peace that still hovered over Firenze like some kind of shroud was nowhere in evidence in this place.
“Hold on, Brother!” he called, grabbing onto a wild-eyed monk that had been running from the church in fear. “It’s all right. Calma, calma.”
“Stay away from this place, amici!” the monk exclaimed, looking from him to little Maria and then back again. “If you value your lives!”
“What’s happened in this place?” little Maria asked, as the pair of them paused for a long moment, each wondering what could have been happening inside the church they now stood so close to.
“Soldiers from Roma have seized our church! They’ve scattered my brothers, asking questions that make no sense!” the monk shouted, clearly aiming to keep the pair of them from entering the church that they were standing before. “They keep demanding that they give them fruit!”
“What kind of fruit?” he asked, feeling the familiar chill of unwanted recognition.
“Apples!”
“Apples? Diavolo!” he snarled. “Rodrigo got here before us!”
“They’ve dragged one of my fellow Carmelites behind the church!” the monk shouted, looking back over his shoulders with the air of a hunted man. “I’m sure they mean to kill him!”
“Carmelites?” he wondered aloud. “You mean you aren’t Dominicans?”
“I’m afraid not, my brother,” the monk said, hands out in supplication. “Still, I would ask that you give aid to my brothers. Please.”
“I would give aid to anyone suffering under the heel of the Borgia,” he said, nodding to the monk as he and little Maria began to make their way up the walls of the church and up to the rooftops.
Chapter 282: The monk and his cousin
Chapter Text
Narrowing his eyes as he saw the Borgia soldiers torturing what was clearly another of the monks that had taken up in this place, Ezio signaled to little Maria and the pair of them leaped down from the rooftop to attack them. Both of them working together had soon managed to clear out the last of the Borgia’s dogs, sending the few that they had left alive running into the far distance. And yes, he was fully aware that those men could easily cause him trouble in the future, since he hadn’t the time to cut them down if he was going to find out more about that monk that had stolen the Apple.
“Grazie, grazie,” the monk wept, as little Maria helped him back to his feet.
“There’s no need for that, amico,” she said, smiling gently at the man as she looked over his wounds, and then handed over a bit of the medicine they carried in order to treat the inevitable injuries they gained during the course of their work. “It’s just as mi fratello said: we would have helped anyone suffering under the heel of the Borgia.”
“Terrible men,” the Carmelite said, shaking his head in what almost looked like some kind of pity; he tried not to be surprised, but didn’t manage entirely.
There was certainly no love lost between him and the Borgia’s dogs.
“You have ten fingers,” he sighed; yes, he’d not seen any hints of the Apple’s presence in this place, but he’d at least some hope of finding the man in this place, after having it pointed out to him by the Abbot he’d spoke to in Tuscany.
“Sí, I have ten fingers,” the Carmelite said, a thread of wariness and concern beginning to creep back into his tone as he spoke. “And the only apples I have are those that come here from the market every Thursday!” as he carefully applied the medicine that little Maria had given to him, he took the time to adjust his robes and cowl. “In the name of God, has the whole world stopped making sense?”
“Who are you?” he asked, dismissing the question; there were some matters that an Assassin simply could not discuss with those outside of the Brotherhood. “Why would they be so focused on you?”
“Because they found out that my family name is indeed Savonarola!” the Carmelite exclaimed, once he’d finished setting himself back to rights once more. “But, why would I betray my cousin to those thugs?”
“Do you know what he’s been doing?” he asked, wondering if he would need to deal with this man, as well.
“I know nothing!” the Carmelite exclaimed. “He is a monk, like me! He chose the harsher Order of the Dominicans, it is true, but-”
“Has he lost a finger?” he asked, wishing to hurry the conversation along; the longer he spent here, the more damage this man’s cousin could do with the Apple.
“Yes, but how could anyone-?”
“Who is Girolamo Savonarola, Fra’ Savonarola?” little Maria asked kindly, moving a bit closer to the man.
“My cousin, and a devoted man of God, signorina,” Savonarola’s cousin said, looking from him to little Maria and then back again. “Mi dispiace, but who are you people? Though I thank you both humbly for the aid you have given me, and I do indeed owe you a favor for this.”
“We are… nameless, you might say,” he assured the Carmelite. “But, do us the favor of telling us your name, would you?”
“Fra’ Marcello Savonarola,” the Carmelite said, still sounding curious, but also quite a bit more subdued than he previously had.
“Where is your cousin Girolamo?” he asked, wondering just how Marcello would react to his question; wondering if he would be forced to kill this man, as well.
“It is true that my cousin… has a singular view of how to serve God,” Marcello said, and the pained uncertainty in his eyes let Ezio know that this man had no desire to support the madness that his cousin was engaging in. “He is spreading a doctrine of his own,” Marcello paused, looking between the pair of them in an imploring sort of way. “The pair of you may seek him now in Venezia.”
“And, what do you think he is doing there?” little Maria asked.
“I think he has set off down the wrong path. He preaches fire and brimstone; he claims to see the future,” Marcello looked stricken – eyes red-rimmed; the same eyes that Ezio could remember seeing in mirrors, those terrible first days just after Father and his two brothers had been hung, back in Firenze – but determined, all the same. “If you wish my true opinion, he spews madness!”
“Sí, it sounds like he does,” he said, relieved to know that this man did not support the mad aims of his cousin.
Relieved to know that he would not be forced to kill another member of the church who had been corrupted by madness and the desire for power.
Chapter 283: Unknown motives, unseen hands
Chapter Text
Moving off, heading back to Venezia once more, Maria wondered just what it was that Savonarola was ultimately aiming for; if he had some mad scheme of creating a new world – as the Templars so often spoke of – or if he merely wished to reign over Venezia and her people as some kind of a dictator. In either case, he would clearly need to die, but she couldn’t help wondering about what might truly drive such a man. Sighing as she and Ezio found themselves following the sharp, acrid scent of a distant fire, Maria wondered just what kind of madness had overtaken the city.
Madness that this monk named Girolamo Savonarola had only encouraged.
~AC: II~
Shuddering as he made his way through the streets of Venezia, keeping his head down so that he would not be accosted by the crowds that seemed to be drowning in a form of madness that seemed to be spreading like the Plague itself through the streets, Piero found himself unable to forget the sight of his Uncle Luciano – eyes filled with the blank, eerie white glow of the Staff – with his sword raised against him. That damnable Borgia had been smirking at him, as he directed Piero’s poor, enthralled Uncle to attack. Grinding his teeth as he forced those thoughts away again, Piero continued moving.
He could only hope that his sisters, Lucrezia and Maddalena, would manage to come through this madness all right.
~AC: II~
Making his way through the secret passages that their mysterious benefactor – the man in the heavy black cloak, that seemed to actually inhabit the strange artifact that that mad monk, Savonarola, had taken hold of through some means or other – had showed to him when he had begged for the man’s aid in preserving at least some of the knowledge and beautiful things of the city that Savonarola would otherwise cast into his fires, Sandeo Calfucci checked to make certain that none of the mad monk’s thralls were about to accost him. Once he was sure that he out from under the eyes of those who would have otherwise thrown him upon the madness of Savonarola in some kind of effort to preserve themselves from it.
Once he’d made his way into the room where Savonarola had stored that artifact that he had taken from whoever it was that he had taken it from, Sandeo breathed more easily as he came within sight of the strange artifact that Savonarola had laid claim to in his efforts to take control of Firenze.
“Amico, I’ve returned,” he said, speaking lowly to the man in black so that he wouldn’t risk being overheard by any of the mad monk’s other thralls.
The strange light that seemed to sprout up from the artifact, growing as though it was some odd type of tree, brought a grim smile to Sandeo’s face.
“You’ve managed to recover more of those artifacts you wish me to preserve?” the man in black asked, deep hood seeming to cast shadows over his face.
It was a strange thing to see, considering that the man himself was clearly made out of the light that shined out of the strange artifact.
“Sí, I’ve managed to recover some books from the fires that Savonarola has been setting up around the city,” he stated, pulling forward the sling-bag that he’d pulled over his right shoulder after filling it up with the books that he could fit inside it; he’d been hiding caches of art around Firenze with the aid of those men and women that he’d managed to convince to abandon the madness of the monk, so there was still the hope of preserving at least some of Firenze’s learning and beauty in whatever place it was that the mysterious man in black would ultimately be able to store them.
“I’ll have some of my own transport them, then,” the man in black said, as a pair of heavily-cloaked and hooded figures emerged from the light, appearing neatly on either side of the man who had called them.
Sandeo had not known what to make of them, at first, but seeing how they were so willing to preserve what was beautiful and worthy of Firenze against the fires that that mad monk had been setting throughout her had served to soften his disposition toward them. Yes, he knew little about the hooded men that the man in black could call upon from the artifact that he inhabited, but seeing the way he was so willing to give aid to those in need made him far more kindly disposed to such a strange man than Sandeo thought anyone else would have been.
When the pair of silent attendants that the mysterious man in black had summoned – themselves clad in the same kind of black, hooded cloaks that the man in black himself habitually wore – appeared from out of the light of the artifact that Savonarola would surround with religious icons when he himself wasn’t putting it to use for his own mad purposes, Sandeo unhesitatingly handed over the books that he had been carrying. The man in black gestured to the far wall on the right, and something that looked like black smoke and purple fire sprouted up from the very ground. He’d not known what to make of such a thing, at least at first, but when the man in black had actually allowed him to follow in the path of one of his attendants – it had seemed to amuse him, the way Sandeo would refer to them – into the fortress-castle that the man in black had clearly been working to create for some time, he’d found himself relieved to know that Firenze’s wealth of culture and beauty would survive in a place fit for them.
True, there were times when Sandeo would find himself wishing that he could have saved the Vespucci family, but the one time that he’d found it in himself to make the journey through the strange portal that the man in black had opened – the way to his fortress-castle, which sometimes drove Sandeo to wonder just where in the wide world such a place could have been – he’d felt a heavy weight on his chest that had never quite left him, even so many weeks after he’d made such a journey; such was the reason that he’d never asked to make such a journey again.
Chapter 284: Treacherous whispers
Chapter Text
When they’d returned to Venezia again, it was Teodora who met them at the Ravenna galley as it arrived at Venezia’s docks.
“We have your news,” she said, looking over the pair of them as they stepped off of the galley and onto the docks proper. “But, are you certain this is all being caused by a single man?”
“Sí,” he said, wishing all the same that such a thing hadn’t been true. “Savonarola took the Apple, and I’ve felt that thing’s power before,” he said. “Savonarola, I hear, has been preaching to the masses of the hellfire and tribulations to come.”
“I’ve heard of the man,” Sister Teodora said. “To me, he just seemed like one more of the kind of madmen that emerged in the wake of the Plague.”
“Sí, but the Apple would make him far more of a threat than any of those men could ever hope to be,” he said. “Do you know where he might be found?”
“No, but I’ve seen a Herald drawing crowds in the industrial district, preaching the kind of fire-and-brimstone stuff and nonsense that you’re speaking of. Perhaps this one is a disciple of your monk.”
“Grazie,” he said, as the pair of them moved to join up with Teodora so that they would be able to take shelter with her in the uncertain, hostile lands that Venezia had clearly become for them.
“You’ll both be my guests while you’re here,” Teodora said, smiling kindly as she turned to lead their trio away from the docks at last. “And, once you’ve gotten settled, I’ll take you to the place where this man delivers his sermons,” she sighed, shaking her head. “This Herald and his boss are really cashing in on the panic caused by the approaching half-millennium.” He could see by the expression on her face that she didn’t approve any more than he did. “For all I know, they believe in it, themselves.”
“I think they must,” he said, sighing even as his resolve hardened all the further. “The true danger is that, with the Apple in their hands, they might easily be able to create a worldwide disaster that even the man in black himself wouldn’t be able to hold back,” he paused for a moment, thinking about what he had just said. “Though, I can’t help but wonder just what it was that Savonarola has done, to restrain even his hand from being raised against this terrible situation.”
“Sí, but the situation might well be worse than even that,” Teodora said, and there was something in her tone that let him know that; however bad he thought the news she was going to share with him was, the reality of it would be even worse still. “Have either of you heard the news from Firenze?”
“Little Maria and I haven’t been getting news since we left Forlì,” he said, feeling a distinct chill as he contemplated just what kind of news could be worse than he was beginning to think it was.
“Lorenzo de’ Medici has died at his villa in Careggi,” Teodora said, pausing for a moment, before seeming to gather herself in order to speak again. “And, there are also tales that the last of his brothers vanished, as well.”
“Luciano is gone? Not dead, just gone?”
“Sí, there was no body that could be identified as Luciano, when Lorenzo was found,” Teodora continued, and Ezio began to wonder just how much bad tidings it was possible for one person to deliver.
“This is worse than I thought it could be,” he muttered, as the three of them made their way – quick and quiet as any Assassin – through the streets and back-allies of Venezia; he’d have wondered why they weren’t taking a carriage, but knowing just what kind of a free-thinker Teodora was… In the current climate, no; he wasn’t surprised that they were making their way through secret paths that an Assassin would be most at home in. “Lorenzo was not only a great ally of our family, he was a close friend, as well. The Palazzo Auditore might truly be lost to us, but that’s nothing, compared to what his death might mean for the peace he maintained between the city-states. It was always fragile at the best of times. Without even Luciano to ease any transition…”
“There is more, and this is, if possible, even worse news than Lorenzo’s death and Luciano’s disappearance,” Teodora said, and Ezio wondered again just how many bad tidings it was possible for one person to carry. “Both of you must brace yourselves for this: the Spaniard, Rodrigo Borgia, has been elected Pope. He rules the Vatican and Roma itself as the Supreme Pontiff, Alexander VI.”
“What?! How did that lying bastardo ever managed to make it past the gates without being thrown out on his grassone culo?!” little Maria demanded, before he could have made any kind of similar demands.
“The Conclave of Rome has only just ended this very month,” Teodora said, as the three of them paused for a moment, falling silent so that they would be better able to evade the gazes of a group of what were clearly Savonarola’s followers if the religious ecstasy on their faces was any sort of clue. “The rumor is that Rodrigo simply bought most of the votes. Even Ascanio Sforza, who was the most likely candidate standing in his way, voted for him! They say that four mule-loads of silver was his bribe.”
Ezio sighed; it always seemed that greed was a Templar’s most staunch ally. “What profits him to be Pope? What is it that he seeks?”
“Is such great influence not enough, my son?” Teodora asked, in such a way that seemed almost calculated to remind him of the way she had once ministered to the people of Venezia; and would doubtless do so again, once the threat of Savonarola had been addressed at last. “Now we are in the power of a wolf; the most rapacious, perhaps, that the world has ever seen.”
“Sí, you’re probably right,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he contemplated just what deeper plans Rodrigo Borgia might have had for laying claim to the Papacy as he had. “Still, if he has control of Il Vaticano, he is that much closer to gaining access to the Vault… Diavolo! The two Guardians! With Luciano missing, like as not in the Borgia’s hands, he only needs one more Guardian, and he’ll be all the closer to gaining access to the Vault!”
His gaze snapped back to little Maria, knowing that she was the key to finding the Apple, and more than that, fully aware of the fact that Rodrigo knew that just as well as he did; he’d tried to capture little Maria for just such a purpose before.
“Let us hope that Maria can help you find the Apple without being seen by any of the madmen within the city,” Teodora said, her worried eyes locking onto little Maria. “Savonarola has clearly seen the man in black for himself; he’s turned Venezia against any of the Guardians that they can lay their hands on. One of our own was forced to give his life, so that the others in the settlement could escape from the net Savonarola’s thralls have been casting. We found his charred bones only yesterday.”
Hissing through his teeth, even as little Maria winced, Ezio gathered himself once more.
“It could very well be worse even than that,” Teodora said. “Rodrigo Borgia as Pope and Grand Master Templar is dangerous enough, if he is given access to the Apple, and beyond that, the Vault… He could very well become indestructible.”
“I suppose Savonarola thinks himself safe behind all his thralls,” he growled, narrowing his eyes as he thought of the poor man who had been forced to give his life for his fellow Guardians; as well as those remaining Guardians who were forced to live in fear for their lives, surrounded by those same thralls.
“Sí; we can only hope that you and Maria can find the Apple without running afoul of Savonarola and the madmen that follow in his wake.”
“Sí, I wouldn’t want to risk little Maria’s health against those madmen,” he said, as the three of them made their way into what looked like one of the safe houses that La Volpe and his fellow thieves maintained.
As the three of them settled down, having some food and settling in so that they could rest from their journey, Ezio allowed himself to relax for a moment. He knew that he and little Maria would soon be facing the dangers of Savonarola’s followers – to say nothing of his thralls – as soon as they left the sanctuary of the safe house they were sheltering in, but for the moment Ezio allowed himself to put aside the tension he’d been bearing up under for so long as he’d been making his way through the city.
Chapter 285: The monk’s madness
Chapter Text
“Medici!”
Looking up as he heard Cesare’s hateful snarl, Rodrigo narrowed his eyes as he watched his son as he loomed over the enthralled Child of Eden, brandishing his dagger. Standing as Cesare slashed the right side of the Child’s face, drawing a wide, dribbling line of blood from the Child’s upper cheek, he drew the Staff and called upon the broken doll seated in the chair where he’d placed the doll to rest.
“Diavolo!” Cesare exclaimed, jumping back as Rodrigo commanded the Child of Eden to rise from his seat, turning his blind, covered eyes to face Cesare where he stood.
“Are you done posturing?” he demanded, narrowing his eyes at his fool of a son as Cesare stepped back from the enthralled Child of Eden, and he commanded the doll to fetch the handkerchief that he habitually carried in a fold of his doublet. “You know that the Children of Eden are important to our work, and yet you’re still acting the fool. Just because this one happened to have the misfortune to be taken in by the Medici, that does not mean that he is any less vital to our aims. He is of the Line of the Staff, and I possess the Staff. Therefore, I possess him; I won’t have you damaging one of my possessions.”
Cesare scoffed in response, turning away and leaving without another word or even a look back. Sneering at the fool boy’s back, Rodrigo returned his attention to the damaged doll standing before him.
“Let’s get you stitched back up,” he said, making his way to the doctor that attended him and his family, brandishing the Staff so that he could properly command the little doll to move as he desired. “Come.”
~AC: II~
Once they’d taken as much rest as they could safely afford, and he’d suggested to little Maria that she stay behind so as not to be endangered by the madmen and thralls that Savonarola had set to wandering the streets, he had followed Teodora out into the industrial district of Venezia. There to hear what the Herald had to say; there in the hopes that the man would aid him in finding out just where it was that Savonarola was hiding himself. With his hood up, moving as one of the crowd itself, Ezio listened for just what it was that the Herald would be preaching.
He didn’t have long to wait, before the crowd had become a thronging mob, and the Herald that had been stirring them up on Savonarola’s behalf had appeared; he was an ascetic-looking man, with cold blue eyes, iron-gray hair, hollow cheeks, and gnarled hands. If there had ever been a more perfect man to embody the teachings of Savonarola, Ezio couldn’t think of them. Breathing deeply to force himself to hold steady, even in the face of one of the men who would have doubtless tortured and killed little Maria or any of her fellow Guardians who had had the misfortune to fall into their hands.
“Gather, children, and hear my cry!” the Herald exclaimed, holding court over the men and women around him in the way he’d been so often told that Savonarola’s men were known to do. “For the End of Days draws nigh! Are you prepared for what is to come? Are you ready to see the Light my Brother, Savonarola, has blessed us with?” the Herald demanded, looking around at the surging mob all around him; Ezio knew just what light he was talking about, and shuddered at the thought of such a madman in possession of the Apple. “Dark days are upon us, but my Brother has shown me the way forward, unto salvation! Unto the heavenly light that awaits us! But only if we are prepared! Only if we embrace him! Let Savonarola be our guide, for only he knows what is to come! He will not lead us astray!” narrowing his eyes as he carefully moved closer, slipping through the gaps that any but the most tightly-packed of crowds would naturally leave. “Are you prepared for the final reckoning, brothers and sisters?” the Herald asked, leaning forward earnestly on the lectern he stood behind. “Whom shall you follow, when the time comes?” the Herald paused for a moment, clearly gauging the reaction of the people all around him. “There are many in the churches who claim to offer salvation; the summoners, the pardoners, the scatterbrained slaves of superstition… But nay, my children, they are all in thrall to the Borgia Pope; all in thrall to “Pope” Alexander, the sixth and most mortgaged of that name!”
As he continued watching the interplay of the Herald and the crowd, Ezio became all the more terrifyingly certain that Savonarola had actually opened the Apple. And, it seemed that Leonardo’s assessment had indeed been correct: the Apple’s power was dangerous to weaker minds.
“Our new Pope Alexander is not a spiritual man; not a man of the soul! He and men like him buy your prayers and sell your benefices profit. All of the priests of our churches are ecclesiastical merchants! Only one among us is a true man of the spirit! Only one among us has seen the future, and spoken with the Lord! My Brother, Savonarola! He will lead us!” the Herald paused, taking a long moment to survey the mood of the crowd once again. “However, there are those who would strike out against us! Those who would try to prevent us from walking on this path to the Light that we have all been seeking! They have been called up from the very depths of hell, and can be told by their demonic yellow eyes, and dead white hair!”
Grinding his teeth as he listened to the shouts and cries of the crowd, knowing that he’d been right not to bring little Maria out into this swiftly-spreading madness, Ezio concentrated for a moment in order to call upon his second-sight once more. Finding the man limed in the golden light of those he was interested in gathering information from, Ezio melted back into the crowds and followed along in the wake of the Herald who had been stirring up the crowd against little Maria and the other Guardians like her. If he’d not had the fury of what might happen to his littlest sister to fuel him, it might have been that he would have taken a different approach.
Still, the Herald had spoken against little Maria and her fellow Guardians, and so he’d be dealing with the man on a more permanent basis.
Narrowing his eyes as the crowds around him began to disperse, thinning out until there were little more than the stragglers that had been coming and going among the thralls that Savonarola and his deceived pawns had gathered to them, Ezio scaled a nearby building and looked down at the Herald that was now standing under him. Once the man was completely alone, he leaped down from the roofline, blades out and ready to stab.
“Demon!”
“You’ve been stirring up hatred and madness, and now it’s all caught up with you,” he snarled, glaring down at the man under his hands as he hovered over him. “All in the service of your false prophet.”
“Savonarola is not false!” the Herald snarled, the light of religious fervor coming back into his eyes, even as he bled out on the cobblestones beneath them. “He will lead us to the Light! Only he knows the way to Heaven!”
“Requiescat in pace, bastardo,” he snarled, finishing the man off, knowing that he wasn’t going to get any more information than the mad ramblings he’d already heard.
Rising back to his feet, then continuing on his way back up to the rooftops and away from the madman’s cooling corpse that he’d left behind, Ezio resolved that he’d cut his way through any of those who stood between him and the life of Girolamo Savonarola. The thralls he would go around as best as he could – he’d not idly throw the tenets of the Creed aside, not if he wasn’t forced into it – but those men who had fully given themselves over to Savonarola’s insanity would swiftly find themselves facing the sharp ends of every one of his blades.
Chapter 286: Guarded gates
Chapter Text
Continuing on his way through what had once been his father’s city-state – and now was clearly nothing of the sort – Piero pulled up the cloak he’d managed to grab ahold of to conceal himself from the Borgia and those men who might have easily been working with them. He knew that the fat old bastard of a Templar, Rodrigo Borgia, wouldn’t hesitate to send out his poor, enthralled uncle to attack him once again, if he were allowed to find out where Piero was hiding. That was why he needed to find out just where it was that the Assassins had been driven to hide themselves, in this mad new world that Girolamo Savonarola and his thralls were working to create.
He knew that his late father’s allies would have to have been driven into hiding; they would have never stood for that poor, blinded Treasure Guardian being burned alive if they’d had a strong enough presence in Venezia to stop it.
Shuddering again as he remembered the stoicism that the silver-haired man had displayed, even in the face of his eyes being cut out, right up until the flames had begun to consume him, Piero kept moving. Even now, Piero found the man’s screams echoing in his ears. He must have succeeded in his aims, however, because he hadn’t borne witness to the death of one more Treasure Guardian since the day that first one had been murdered.
More and more, it was beginning to seem that the nameless Treasure Guardian had indeed given himself up so that the Assassins would be able to hide away those others of his kind that would have otherwise been subject to that same kind of fate, themselves.
And, while he was glad to know that no one else who shared his Uncle’s circumstances would share the fate of that poor, nameless Guardian, Piero couldn’t help wishing that he hadn’t been forced to witness such a thing. Still, in a way he was grateful – if not glad – to have seen what he had. Someone should remember what had happened; and, just as clearly, he’d have to make an effort to learn the Guardian’s name when he met up with the Assassins again.
He’d need to know the name of the man whose death he’d witnessed.
~AC: II~
The sound of approaching footsteps drew Silvio Tapia’s attention, and he turned his attention to the side of the tunnel he’d been making his way through. All of them – each and every one of his fellow Guardians – had quite literally gone underground, in an effort to survive the fires that the mad monk Savonarola had been setting throughout the city where they had once been living in at least relative peace. Turning around, Silvio sighed in relief as he saw that it was one of his fellow Guardians making his way through the tunnels towards him. When he looked closer, however, Silvio found that this particular Guardian looked old and worn down by the life he’d clearly lived.
Hurrying over to the side of the Guardian making his way through the tunnels, Silvio slung the old man’s left arm over his shoulders and helped his fellow Guardian through the tunnels to find the settlement that their fellow Guardians were currently staying in.
“I’d wondered when I was going to find someone to pass this on to,” the old man said, his voice as old and weary as his face and body had looked when Silvio had first seen it.
“What?” he asked, turning to look at the strange Guardian in askance.
Turning fully to face the old man he was helping to the settlement that they and theirs had constructed within the depths of the tunnels that ran beneath Firenze, Silvio was just about to ask the man what he meant, when he caught sight of the bare edges of the Shroud peeking out from under the man’s overcoat.
“You’re the Line of the Shroud, old man?” he asked, raising an eyebrow at the old Guardian as the man leaned over on him.
“Something like that,” the old man muttered, a soft, subtle smile on his face. “I’m glad to have met someone else who can take this up when I’m gone.”
“What?” he asked, turning back to look at the weary old Guardian as the pair of them drew closer to the settlement he and the other Guardians had created for themselves.
“This is as far as I’m going to be able to go,” the old man said, shedding his overcoat and unwrapping the Shroud from around his shoulders.
Silvio had only a moment to wonder just what the old man was talking about, before the old man draped the Shroud around his own shoulders as though it were a mantle, and Silvio found his mind opening like a flower in the sun. A thousand flowers, it might have been said; from the first of them, who had been given the name Asim Al-Rashid by an ancient Assassin by the name of Bayek, down to this man named Eligio Abaroa dying at his feet.
“Requiescat in pace, fratello. Il compito è fatto,” Silvio said, crouching so that he could pick up Eligio’s body and carry it to the burial ground within the catacombs.
~AC: II~
Once he’d managed to reach Firenze again, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he began to hear someone else haranguing the crowd. The words that were being used sounded different, of course, but the tone and intent behind them sounded exactly the same as that of the Herald he’d dealt with not so long ago. It seemed as though he’d found his next target. As Ezio continued on his way, over the rooftops that stood between himself and the man he was currently hunting – whether he was one of Savonarola’s brainwashed thralls, or else a man following along with this madness for his own reasons remained to be seen – he narrowed his eyes as he realized that the man who was feeding so much of Firenze’s beauty and culture to the flames that Savonarola had caused to be set throughout the city-state was an artist just like Leonardo. Well, clearly the man was either a great deal more weak-willed than the inventor had proven himself to be on so very many occasions, or he’d not the dedication to his craft that Leonardo had also demonstrated.
Either way, Ezio was going to make certain that his madness ended today.
When he’d managed to position himself above the artist so that he could strike, after having carefully eliminated those guards and archers that had once stood between him and where he needed to be, Ezio leaped down from the scaffolding that he’d descended onto during the course of his stalk.
“What have I done? What have I been doing?” the man pleaded, glazed eyes clearing ever so briefly, before they began to cloud over in death.
“Your actions were not your own,” he said, hoping to provide at least some comfort to the artist as he passed on.
“But, they were,” the man said, sounding all the more miserable for it. “It was my own self-doubt that let him hold me as he did. I am sorry.”
“As am I,” he said, gently laying the artist – he even seemed about Leonardo’s age, now that Ezio had a chance to study him more closely; he wondered if the two of them had been friends – down on the cooling cobblestones. “This is not a task I take lightly. Requiescat in pace.”
Once he’d closed the man’s eyes, paying what respects he could to a man he didn’t even know, Ezio quickly departed from the area. He knew that, while none of the city guard had seemed to be particularly happy about just what it was that they were all being forced to do by Savonarola and his brainwashed thralls – to say nothing of the brutes that the mad monk had brought under his control, or those in the employ of his thralls and collaborators – he knew enough to know that very few of them would have the conviction to refuse, even in the face of the madness that had descended upon them. Moving off, taking another path that would lead him back to the safehouse that the Brotherhood had established above the concealed entrance to one of Firenze’s many underground catacombs, Ezio breathed more easily for the completion of this task.
He didn’t know just how long it was ultimately going to take, before he managed to come to grips with the mad monk at last, but as long as he could keep little Maria as safe as he could while all of this madness was swirling around them, Ezio was fully willing to take the time he needed to have this task done properly.
~AC: II~
Breathing heavily as the run he’d been forced to take in order to escape from Savonarola’s thralls with the case of paintings he’d managed to liberate from the warehouse, where they’d been stored while the mad monk’s thralls gathered ever more of them in order to be burned, Sandeo Calfucci paused for a moment to make certain that he wasn’t being followed by one of the mad monk’s braver thralls, and then swiftly continued on his way. He found the artifact in the same place where Savonarola had left it, once he was done using it to stir up such trouble and strife among the people of Venezia, and smiled softly as the lines in the steel began to glow.
“I’m glad to see you’re still doing well, amico mio,” he said, as the familiar form of the man in black emerged from the artifact once more.
“I’m certain you are,” the man in black said, his usual cryptic inscrutability settling over him as though it were a shroud. “I see you’ve come with more for our collection.”
“Sí,” he said, giving the case a firm shove so as to bring it more completely into the man in black’s range of vision. “I truly have to thank you, for all the aid you’ve been giving me in this endeavor.”
“Of course,” the man in black said, summoning a pair of his attendants from that same, strange portal that Sandeo had only seen when the man in black was around to call it forth.
Breathing more easily once he’d seen the pair of them depart through the portal once more, Sandeo turned and quickly departed from the room. If there was one thing certain to draw the unfriendly gaze of not only Savonarola, but every one of the thralls he had gathered to him in this place, it was to be seen consorting with the man in black after he’d been declared anathema to anyone who wished to follow him along the path that he was setting out on. Still, knowing that the man in black was so willing to help him in preserving what was good and worthy about Venezia’s culture gave Sandeo all the motivation he needed to pursue the relationship that the pair of them had formed.
He simply needed to keep what he was doing out from under the sight of the mad monk and his thralls.
~AC: II~
Looking up as she heard the sound of approaching footsteps, Maria concentrated briefly in order to call up the second-sight that she and Ezio shared the capability of using, and then smiled as she realized just who it was that was making his way through the tunnels.
“Fratello!” she called, hurrying over to meet the last of her brothers as he came down into the catacombs where she and her fellow Treasure Guardians were staying for as long as it took for the madness that Savonarola had called down upon them all to pass. “It’s so good to see you again!”
“It’s good to see you again, too, sorellina,” Ezio said, as the pair of them embraced tightly. “This hasn’t been too hard on you, has it?”
“Well, it’s hardly a place that I would choose to live, fratello,” she said, as she and Ezio separated so that they would be able to look at each other once again. “Still, I suppose it isn’t really a choice, considering everything that’s been happening in Firenze.”
“I’m beginning to wish I’d left you back in Venezia,” her brother said, eyes downcast. “Or maybe I could have sent you back to Monteriggioni, and you would have been safe with our uncle and Claudia.”
“Fratello, what makes you think I wouldn’t have followed you?” she asked, and the last of her brothers turned away; they both knew it was true.
She would have insisted on coming with him in any case, and under the circumstances she would have only ended up putting herself in danger. Still, ending up down in the tunnels that ran beneath Firenze was a strange situation, and not one that Maria had ever expected to find herself in. However, exploring the tunnels that ran beneath the city-state had turned out to be rather interesting.
It wasn’t very much like the catacombs that she’d heard described when Ezio had recounted his search for the tombs of their Assassin predecessors, but for all that it was still an interesting place to stay; at least for the moment, but she was still hoping to leave this place as soon as she could.
Chapter 287: The hunter’s work
Chapter Text
After having spoken to Teodora and La Volpe both, and then getting some sleep in order to fortify himself for whatever it was that he was going to be doing next, Ezio had made his way back into Firenze so as to restart his hunt for the mad monk Savonarola. Searching through crowds for signs of the madness that Savonarola and his thralls were spreading throughout the city, Ezio soon found just the signs that he was searching for. There was yet another of the madman’s thralls speaking above the crowds that pressed against the barriers that had been erected in front of the Ponte Vecchio.
This one was shouting some nonsense about how the only true obligation that remained to them was that of submission to the deranged whims of the monk who had already unleashed such devastation upon Firenze and all of her people. Clearly, the situation he’d found himself in was not one that he could idly allow to continue any longer. Breathing deeply as he started forward once more, Ezio smoothly targeted and eliminated the guards who would have otherwise thrown themselves in his path as he went to deal with this latest of Savonarola’s thralls.
Once he’d managed to position himself properly, he leaped down from the balcony he’d momentarily stood on the edge of, landing blade-first in the man’s neck.
“You wear a noble’s clothes, so how was it that Savonarola charmed you?” he asked, wondering if this man could have been like the artist who he had been forced to dispatch only yesterday.
“Wealth and power do not ensure contentment,” the man said, a small, rueful smile on his face, even as the light slowly left his eyes. “I wanted even more…”
“And now, instead, you have nothing,” he said, narrowing his eyes at the man dying in his arms; nothing at all like the artist he’d encountered; still, he was at least pleased not to have been forced into killing another man who had only been pulled into this madness by his own insecurities. “This is something that must be done. Requiescat in pace.”
Breathing deeply to steady himself as he rose back to his feet, Ezio quickly made his way back up to the rooftops before the guards who remained in the area could begin swarming him. While he’d been making his way through the crowds, listening for those who would speak of their present misfortunes even with the fear of the mad monk’s reprisals hanging over their heads, he’d learned not only of the obstruction of the Ponte Vecchio, but of a priest that had clearly been enthralled by the power of the Apple, as well.
This one had perched himself atop the Duomo, so it was only a matter of going to find him, now.
~AC: II~
Silvio had known, from the moment that Eligio had laid the Shroud about his shoulders like a mantle, that he would be set apart from his brother and sister Assassins. If only by the virtue of the other minds he now carried alongside his own; all of the knowledge that he now possessed could not help but to change the perspective he had on the world around him. However, at the moment Silvio was finding himself reflecting on the madness he and his fellow Guardians were currently being forced to hide from.
It was something Asim had seen before, though on a much greater scale; there had been no one to speak for the Treasure Guardians, then, no one who had even known what they truly were.
The boy, who had later been named Asim but who at that time had been nameless, had been one of the few of those fortunate enough not to be given up by his parents when he was born. Asim had learned from Bayek that such had been the dictates of those who would later come to call themselves Templars, and the pair of them had worked together to destroy that sect of them. Still, it was clear that the knowledge of what those of the Line of the Shroud could be made to do had not died with the men that had taken those nameless Guardians captive back in Egypt. Would that it could have, Silvio mused, looking out on all of his fellow Guardians – those who shared his circumstances, and to a certain extent his story – as they all tried to settle themselves down in the catacombs they had been forced into.
It was not a life he would have wished for those who had become, in the end, more of a family than his own blood; and yet, this had not been a choice offered to them at all.
~AC: II~
When he’d made his way up to the Duomo, making his way through the crowds in the street when he could manage such a thing, Ezio began hearing the sounds of song, carried on the wind as he drew closer. He thought it was a bit odd, that someone who had clearly been put under the thrall of the Apple by Savonarola would not be taking the opportunity to either spread the word of the mad monk to the masses, or else to urge the crowds into further destruction of everything that had been deemed “impure” in Savonarola’s eyes.
He paused for a moment, concealing himself so that he would have the time to consider his next course of action. He didn’t know just how much of a danger this man would ultimately prove himself to be, and so Ezio decided that he would take the man’s measure before he acted. Watching as what seemed to be the man’s parishioners shuffled and milled around before the Duomo, a few of them pausing to look up in confusion at the man as he continued singing in Latin while he stood over them all.
Watching the sun as it moved through the sky, Ezio watched the preacher until he saw that it had passed a palm’s width through the sky. In that time, he’d observed enough of the comings and goings of the crowd about the Duomo to determine that – while there were those who maintained enough sense of self to find the whole thing absurd and hence stay away from what was happening – those who gathered around the base of the building were clearly coming under the thrall of the man standing above them all. And so it seemed that, while this man might very well have been a well-meaning sort, merely deceived or enthralled by Savonarola and the Apple, he would need to be dealt with in the same way as the artist and the noble he’d come across before.
Making his way up onto the Duomo itself, Ezio deployed his right-hand hidden-blade, plunging it into the corrupted priest’s body as he dove forward.
“I thought I was doing the Lord’s work…” the priest said, the light beginning to fade from his eyes in earnest.
“That is an easy mistake, in times such as this,” he said, gently cradling the man’s body as he died in Ezio’s arms. “Requiescat in pace.”
Gently laying the man down at the base of the Duomo itself, Ezio hurried away before any of the remaining guards could begin seeking him out, following the trail of bodies that he had been forced to leave along the alleys and rooftops of Venezia on his way to dealing with those men who had fallen under the thrall of Savonarola and the Apple. Making his way back over the rooftops of Firenze once more, Ezio paused for a moment as he witnessed a scuffle on the streets below him.
Moving so that he would be better able to see just what it was that was happening down in the street, Ezio leaped down into the fray once he’d determined that it was La Volpe’s thieves that had been faced with a group of guards on their way to whatever their destination ultimately was.
“Grazie a Dio, our savior has returned!” Corradin exclaimed, grinning widely as the pair of them faced each other across the gulf of however many years it had been since he’d worked in the company of La Volpe and his thieves.
“It’s good to see you again, too, amico,” he said, smiling once the last of their attackers had been dispatched and they themselves were able to move freely once again.
“We’ve come bearing food for our mutual friends,” Corradin said, leaning in close so that their voices would not be so easily carried to unfriendly ears as they might have otherwise been. “Something that the guards took exception to, of course, but we can talk more later, amico.”
“Bene,” he said, making his way back up onto the rooftops so that he could follow along and protect Corradin and his fellow thieves as they made their way back to the safehouse that Teodora and all of their fellow Assassins who remained in Firenze had taken shelter.
Using his throwing knives to eliminate any of the guards who had the misfortune to find themselves in the path of the thieves he was he was looking after, Ezio soon found himself able to relax as he caught sight of the compound that he and his brother and sister Assassins had relocated to once Teodora’s brothel had been closed. Leaping easily back down to the ground as he spotted the walls of the compound, Ezio stood for a moment, looking over the place where he and his fellow Assassins had found their shelter, before making his way inside at last.
The sight of a familiar man, his stern and serious air only seeming to be enhanced by the weathering of years that none of them had been able to avoid, brought a surprised smile to his face.
“Machiavelli!” he called, making his way over to where the man was standing, even as he saw Corradin and his fellow thieves making their way down into the catacombs with the food that they had stolen; he hardly had to guess who they were delivering it to, and he was pleased to know that he wasn’t the only one looking out for the most vulnerable of their number.
“Salute, Ezio,” the man – a senior Assassin and a man of learning both – said, a certain twist to his mouth that highlighted the amusement in his eyes without actually being a smile. “As usual, you’ve chosen quite a time for a homecoming.”
“Sí, but you already know me,” he said, smiling calmly in the face of Machiavelli’s clear disapproval for the time that he’d chosen to return to the place where he had been born. “Where there is sickness, I like to try to cure it.”
“We could certainly use your help,” Machiavelli said with a sigh. “There’s no doubt that Savonarola couldn’t have gotten nearly as far as he did without the use of the Apple.” Something of his curiosity must have shown on his face, because Machiavelli held up a hand. “I know all about what has happened to you and Maria since we last met. Catarina sent a courier two years ago, and so I’ve been able to keep abreast of the developments with regards to you, your sister, and the artifact.”
“I’m here for the Apple,” he said, making his mind up; he wasn’t about to risk little Maria’s life against the madmen filling the streets under the thrall of the mad monk who had taken so much power in such a short time. “It’s been out of our hands for too long.”
“I suppose we could be grateful, in a way, for Savonarola and his thralls,” Machiavelli said. “At least he’s managed to keep it out of Rodrigo’s hands.”
“Has he tried anything?” he asked, feeling a slight chill as he thought of what Rodrigo Borgia might have been willing to do, in order to get his hands on both little Maria and the Apple both.
“He keeps trying,” Machiavelli said. “There’s a rumor that Alexander is planning to excommunicate our dear Dominican, however it’s not as though it would change much around here.”
“We should get back to retrieving it as soon as we can,” he said, knowing that such a statement would be obvious, but that it still needed to be said, all the same.
“The Apple? Of course, but it’s more complicated than you might think.”
He barked a laugh. “When isn’t it? Why don’t you fill me in on things while we walk?” he suggested, wanting not only to have things between him and the mad monk settled at last, but also to know just what it was that had been happening in the city-state that had once been his home.
“I’ll tell you what I’ve managed to find out,” Machiavelli said, as the pair of them began making their way back out of the compound once again. “There’s little enough to relate, though I’ll give you the details: King Charles VIII of France finally managed to bring Firenze to her knees. Piero was attacked by some kind of phantom, but managed to flee; no one’s seen him, though there are some reports that indicate the “phantom” is still stalking him. In any case, Charles, land-hungry as ever – why the hell so many have taken to calling him “The Affable” is beyond me – marched on to Naples, and that was when Savonarola saw his chance. He filled the power-vacuum that was left when Charles departed on his next conquest,” Machiavelli’s expression became that of someone who’d seen too much of the same kind of thing. “He’s like any dictator anywhere, tinpot or grand: utterly humorless, utterly convinced, and filled with an unshakable sense of his own importance. It seems to be a pattern among those who wish to seize power; perhaps I’ll write a book about it, someday.”
“And, the Apple was his means to this end,” Ezio stated, having a certain sense of what it was that he needed to do; the work he would need to continue, if Firenze was to be truly free.
“Only in part,” Machiavelli said, giving Ezio pause even as the pair of them mounted up a pair of horses and began making their way into Firenze’s wounded heart. “A lot of it, sad to say, is down to the man’s own charisma. It’s not Firenze herself he’s enthralled, but her leaders; those men possessed of influence and power. Of course, some of the Signoria opposed him, but now…” Machiavelli shook his head. “Now they’re all in his pocket. The man everyone once reviled suddenly became the one they worshipped. If they didn’t agree with what was happening, then they were obligated either to leave, or to hide themselves so well that none could find them. Both of which I’m sure you’ve seen,” Machiavelli said, and Ezio nodded in response; he’d certainly seen more than his share of strife, both within the walls of Firenze and outside her. There were even those he’d heard hoping for the return of the Assassin who had stalked the streets. “And now, the Council aids in the oppression of the citizenry, seeing that the mad monk’s will is done.”
“What of the people?” he asked, thinking again of all those he had seen on their way out of Firenze; forced to leave their homes and the lives they’d built for fear of Savonarola and his thralls.
Machiavelli sighed, a small, sad smile on his face. “You know the answer to that as well as I do, Ezio: it’s a rare man or woman who is willing to oppose the status quo. And so, it falls to those like us to help them see their way through this.”
Nodding as the pair of them continued on their way into the bleeding heart of Firenze, Ezio began noticing the piles of bodies in the streets; bodies that he hadn’t been responsible for. Bodies that carried the crest of the Borgia.
“Oh, yes,” Machiavelli said, a sardonic twist to his mouth. “Friend Rodrigo – I don’t suppose I’ll ever truly become accustomed to calling that bastardo Alexander – keeps trying to push inward. He sends his soldiers into Firenze, and Firenze sends them back in pieces. It’s become something of a grisly trend, you might have noticed.”
“So, he does know the Apple is here,” Ezio muttered, more to himself than Machiavelli.
“Sí. It’s an unfortunate complication,” Machiavelli said, nodding as the pair of them made their way over to a stable so that they would be able to leave their horses behind. “He rules Firenze from the Convento di San Marco. The man almost never leaves it, but the work you’ve been doing seems to have unsettled him, even if only slightly.”
“I’ll have to see that it’s continued, then,” he said, as the pair of them dismounted and began making their way deeper into the wounded heart of Firenze.
“That’s clever,” Machiavelli said, as the pair of them left the stables. “I’ll speak to La Volpe and Paola; see if they can stir up an uprising in the wake of your actions.”
“See if they might be able to sway the opinions of the people back to at least tolerating the Guardians who make their home here, if not loving them as I and the other Assassins do,” he requested.
“I will see what I can do,” Machiavelli said, though he seemed to know that that was not the only thing on Ezio’s mind, since he led the pair of them to the quiet cloister of a nearby church so that they could sit down. “But, what else is it that troubles you, amico?”
“Two things, but both of them are personal,” he said, not knowing just how Machiavelli would react to what it was that he was about to ask of the man.
“Tell me.”
“The palazzo where little Maria and I grew up; I hardly dare to go look, under the circumstances, but I still wonder about it,” he said, after having settled himself down next to Machiavelli.
“Ezio, you must be strong,” Machiavelli said, though a dark shadow passed over his face. “Your family palazzo stands, but Lorenzo’s power to protect it lasted only as long as his life. Piero, I think, would have tried to follow his father’s example, but the phantom drove him out of Firenze before he could lay a proper claim to the building. When the French moved in, they laid claim to the Palazzo Auditore, using it as a billet for Charles’ Swiss mercenaries. When they moved south, Savonarola’s men stripped it of everything that had been left inside, closing it down once they were finished. One day, however, you may very well be able to restore it, so don’t give up.”
“What of Annetta?” he asked, wishing to know that the last tie he had to his family’s home had not been broken, as so many others had in all of this upheaval.
“She managed to escape to Monteriggioni,” Machiavelli reported, sounding glad that he had at least something positive to report. “The last I heard of her, she was staying with your mother, and was rather pleased to find out that you and little Maria were doing so well in her absence.”
“I’m glad to know she’s doing so well,” he said, rising from the pew where the pair of them had been seated together while they spoke of what had been happening in the past. “Still, I suppose I should get back to my work, before Savonarola and his thralls can get their feet back under them again.”
“Sí, I think that would be best,” Machiavelli said, folding his arms as he looked out over the expanse of the church around them.
“Bene,” he said, nodding. “I’ll meet up with you when I can.”
“Va bene, I will await word of your successes.”
The pair of them parted after that, and Ezio made his way back out into the streets of Firenze once more. There were clearly others who acted in Savonarola’s name, carrying out the mad monk’s will among the people who would have otherwise resisted in any way they could. It was time he started giving his own aid to them, as well.
Chapter 288: City of flames
Chapter Text
Pausing for a moment at the sound of footsteps behind him, Sandeo gathered himself once again, making his way purposefully toward the room where the artifact where the man in black had made his home was stored in some kind of effort – futile as it so clearly was – to keep the man in black from raising his phantasmal hands in the service of those who would act to preserve what was good and worthy about Firenze. The sounds of footsteps began once again, and Sandeo gathered himself for whatever was going to be coming. The one who was following him could, of course, would either prove themselves to be friend or foe.
They would do it all the sooner, of course, if he were to reach the chamber where the artifact had been stored.
Once he made it into the chamber itself, Sandeo grabbed the hilt of the dagger he’d taken to keeping on him while he made his rounds of the church that Savonarola and his thralls had though to make their own. The sound of a sword being drawn informed him that this was indeed one of his enemies stalking him through the halls and corridors of the church.
“Savonarola informed me that you were consorting with powers beyond your ken,” the man, dressed in the livery of one of the church’s guards, said with a cruel twist to his mouth.
“So, he decided that you would be the one to put me down?” he asked, blocking the draw of his dagger with the folds of the cloak he’d taken to wearing.
Another man might have thought that he wore them in mimicry of the man in black, but it was the Assassins that had been closest to his mind when he’d chosen the new clothes to shroud himself in. Still, if such things were enough to give those who might have otherwise attempted to attack him even a moment’s pause, Sandeo was fully willing to make use of that.
“Savonarola has declared that you are to be put down for your heresy!” the man at the forefront of what had turned out to be a group of six guards shouted, brandishing his longsword as his five compatriots charged.
A blast of light from the artifact behind him let Sandeo know he was no longer alone in the room where the strange artifact had been placed, and out of the corner of his right eye Sandeo caught a blur of movement. When he saw the man in black, a strange, shining blade in his hand, appear as though by magic – and amid shouts of “Sorcery!” from the guards who had come into the room – before the first man to draw his sword, amid the clatter of the pieces of that same sword to the floor.
“It’s a fine thing that you came when you did, amico,” he said with a smile, casting a sidelong glance at the man in black as the pair of them stood together against the remaining three guards.
Two of their number had run for the protection of another room – likely close to Savonarola, since all of the guards had sworn their service to him when he’d taken over the church – leaving only the four men who stood before them.
“Of course,” the man in black said calmly, drawing another of those strange, shining blades of his with a snap and a hiss.
The pair of them moved almost as one, though with the sheer speed the man in black had revealed himself to be capable of, Sandeo found himself without an opponent of his own to fight. The remaining four ran for their lives, once the man in black had sundered their weapons in their very hands, and Sandeo found himself almost completely unable to hold back a laugh.
“It seems as though not a one of them wishes to challenge you, amico,” he said, grinning as the man in black appeared beside him as though by the very sorcery that Savonarola’s guards had been so quick to accuse him of.
“So it would seem,” the man in black said, sounding as steady and calm as he ever had. “You have more for our collection?”
“Ma certo,” he said, making his way over to the artifact, even as the man in black appeared next to it once more.
With a sweep of his left arm, the man in black summoned another pair of his heavily-shrouded attendants – or else the same pair; he couldn’t manage to tell them apart, dressed as they were in heavy cloaks and black sashes – and Sandeo handed over the bag of books he’d collected. It was with a definite sense of pleasure that he watched the attendants of the man in black vanish into the strange portal that the man in black seemed to be able to call up with barely a thought.
It may have been true that the man in black – and those of his ilk that Sandeo had been hearing so much about – was something more than a man, but given what kind of aid he’d been so willing to provide, the way he’d been so willing to preserve the treasures of Firenze’s culture, Sandeo was willing to forgive quite a bit.
~AC: II~
As he continued on his way over the rooftops of Firenze once again, searching for the next of Savonarola’s thralls that he would need to deal with before he could truly call the city-state of his birth free once more, Ezio couldn’t help but notice the increasing signs of unrest within Firenze herself. And, while he was pleased to see that the people’s will had not been entirely wrung out of them by the strife they were all facing, he still found himself regretting the necessity of what he was doing. He knew that many of the citizens who had been stirred up by the activities of his brother and sister Assassins might very well die for the liberty they were all fighting for.
Still, it was a simple fact that toppling a tyrant such as Savonarola was not done without bloodshed.
Forcing his thoughts back to his own mission, knowing that it rested on him to keep the eyes of Savonarola and his remaining thralls from falling upon them any more than could be reasonably avoided, Ezio turned his eyes away from the citizens in the streets, and back to the path he needed to follow. However, it seemed that he had not been so stealthy as he’d meant to be.
“You must not disrupt our work!” shouted the man he’d been tailing for so long that even he had begun to lose track of the time. “Firenze is sick! It is our duty to cure her!”
“How? By making her citizens follow the whims of a madman?” he demanded, rising back to his feet even as he cursed himself for his lapse in attention.
However, it seemed that the man he’d been following had no true answer to the question he’d posed, because all he did was to call for his guards, and then break into a run when he realized that there were none present to answer his call. Breaking into a run of his own, after leaping down to the ground before the man he was pursuing could have run under cover, Ezio leaped forward, hidden-blades out and poised to end the man’s life.
“I was a victim,” the nobleman entreated, dying in Ezio’s arms like the rest of his brethren. “It wasn’t my fault!”
“No, you made your choice,” he said to the man dying in his arms. “Your death will help the people to be free. Requiescat in pace.”
Standing once more, knowing that the few guards he had left alive in this area would soon be moving in to investigate not only the disappearance of their fellows, but also the death of the nobleman that he’d been forced to deal with, Ezio quickly moved off once more.
~AC: II~
There was a certain tension in the atmosphere of the tunnels they were all staying in, something that went unspoken among all of her fellow Guardians, and the knowledge of what would happen to any of them if they allowed themselves to be seen made things all the worse. Maria was just as susceptible to the tension in the atmosphere as any of them, but there was something else. That same itch, in the back of her mind; the sensation that she would have known where the Apple was, if she’d had more experience in locating the Piece of Eden she was bound to.
Still, as there was little else to do but sit around in these gloomy catacombs, Maria had decided that she would at least make the attempt to hone her connection to the Apple that Ezio was searching for. Even though she knew that there was very little chance of her being able to participate in the battle against Savonarola that was likely to take place when Ezio was finally able to come to grips with the mad monk, both since Ezio would have never wished for her to risk herself against the mad monk’s thralls, and there was still the matter of how the Apple itself seemed to affect her.
It was still a strange thing to consider, just how much of a hold the Piece of Eden seemed to have on her mind, but now that she was actively seeking it out, Maria could feel a sensation as though someone else was beginning to take notice of her. Frowning, even as she reached out in return, Maria found that the other presence seemed actually to turn away from her, after only a moment spent seeming to examine her presence. She wondered at that, and would have pursued the presence that she had become aware of, save for the fact that when she attempted to reach out once more, Maria felt as though she had been slammed into a wall of solid stone.
Snapping her eyes open out of sheer startlement, Maria looked around at the catacomb she was sitting in; it seemed that most of her fellow Guardians had had the same idea, as she could see them folded up in the same way that she herself had once been. Sighing as she closed her eyes once more, Maria reached out once more for the muted sense that he possessed of the Apple and where it was. There was that same sensation of being blocked by an ephemeral wall, but as she pushed up against it in order to get a sense of just what it was she was facing, Maria found herself confronted with the same kind of presence that she’d become aware of, just before finding herself thrown out the first time.
Finding herself under the scrutiny of that same presence that she’d been only peripherally aware of when she’d found herself all but thrown back into her own mind, Maria tentatively reached out once more.
“Who are you, Messer?”
“Ah, the second. I was wondering when I would be able to find you.”
Blinking as she found herself back in her body again, facing the meditating forms of her fellow Guardians, Maria sighed. Clearly, she wasn’t going to be able to find out just who it was that was hiding within the light of the Apple. She almost wished that it could have been different, that she could have found out just who it was that seemed to have reached out to her from within the depths of the Apple, but there was clearly something preventing her from doing just that.
Maybe it had something to do with Savonarola, and perhaps it was something to do with the man in black that everyone but her seemed to have met; either way, she wasn’t going to be able to find out anything more about the Apple or that strange presence she’d sensed within it.
~AC: II~
Gathering himself once more, as he crossed over the rooftops of Firenze on his way to come to grips with the next of Savonarola’s mad thralls, Ezio hurried on his way. He’d been seeing more and more signs that the people of Firenze were moving to take back the homes and the lives that had been stolen from them by Savonarola and his thralls. He was also seeing the signs of increasing Borgia presence within the city-state; at the least, he was seeing more corpses of the men whose lives Rodrigo Borgia was all too keen to waste in an endeavor that was clearly futile.
There would be no freeing Firenze from Savonarola and his thralls as long as the mad monk held the Apple in his hands.
Narrowing his eyes as he leaped down into a suspiciously empty courtyard, Ezio heard the voice of the man that he was searching for calling down to him.
“Ah! Another challenger!” growled the man he’d been pursuing, an ugly look of triumph on his face. “Excellent! Savonarola informed me that some were starting to oppose our rule, and so I devised this little trap. To ferret out those foolish enough to play hero. It’s proven to be both entertaining and effective. Let us begin!”
Finding himself surrounded by guards for only the third time since he’d started cutting his way through the ranks of the mad monk’s thralls, with the man who was obviously their Captain calling taunts down to him where he fought, Ezio found that he could hear the exact moment when the man realized that this battle – unlike all of the ones that this man had alluded to in the past – was not going to go the way he had planned it. A grim smile lighting his face as the last of the guards fell under his sword, Ezio returned his attention to the captain.
As he expected, the coward was running for his life.
It was a simple thing to catch the man, and even simpler to plunge in his hidden-blade and end the tyranny of the corrupt Captain.
“Is this truly who I was? So proud and cruel?” the man asked, eyes clearing even as the light behind them began to fade; it seemed he’d been corrupted in more than one sense, in the end.
“No. Savonarola bewitched you,” he said, offering what comfort he could, to a man at the end of his days.
“Did he? Or was it that I had tasted power, and found myself intoxicated?” the Captain asked; Ezio found that he could respect a fellow seeker of truth, and found himself wishing that the pair of them had been able to meet under better circumstances. “I wish I had been stronger.”
“As do I,” he confessed, at the last. “I am truly sorry, but there is no other way. Requiescat in pace.”
Standing up, leaving the cooling corpses of the Captain and his guardsmen behind before any more of those who had been beyond his reach could have started searching for him, Ezio moved off again. It was a harsh thing he was forced to do, taking the lives of men that might have otherwise been on the side of the Brotherhood if their minds had been their own, but Ezio was determined to do it kindly. He’d not idly lay aside the Creed, as he’d once come so close to doing in his youth.
Chapter 289: The Duke’s son
Chapter Text
Having made his way into Firenze, having heard that his former Dukedom could at least be said to be a safe haven from the Borgia – and therefore from the forces of the old bastard that continued to haunt his steps whenever he tried to actually rest somewhere – Piero di’ Medici sighed as he continued on his way through the back-alleys of Firenze. It was a hard thing to see, his home being abused so grossly under Savonarola and those people he had managed to enthrall in some manner or other, but he forced himself forward, all the same.
When he found himself confronted by the guards that had once worked for him – and his father, before him – Piero drew his sword, but quickly found himself surprised when the guards blocking his path were cut down in their very tracks by the same Assassin that his dear, departed father had described to him on many an occasion.
“Grazie a Dio,” he said, once the last of the men who would have killed him in the name of their madman of an alleged prophet. “I hadn’t thought to find a friend in this mad place.”
“What did you think to find here, amico?” the Assassin asked, making certain to clean his sword before he sheathed it once more.
“Shelter from the one stalking me,” he said, sheathing his own sword, though he hadn’t needed to use the weapon for anything; he could at least be pleased with that. “Though, don’t mistake me, I would free him from the influence of that damned Staff, if I were capable of such a thing.”
“Luciano di’ Medici,” the Assassin muttered, looking at him as though truly seeing him for the first time.
“Sí, my uncle,” he said, shuddering slightly as he remembered the blank, pulsing white light that had shone out from under the hood of his poor, enthralled Uncle every time he would catch sight of the man. “That damnable Borgia…” he shook his head. “Still, he isn’t the only problem in the world, and far from the worst that I can see, at the moment.”
“Sí,” the Assassin said, a grim look overtaking his features as he nodded. “Savonarola has turned Firenze to complete madness, though my brother and sister Assassins have been doing everything we can to bring sanity back to this place.”
“I am glad to hear that, amico,” he said, looking up into the skyline of his wounded city. “May I have the name of the man who has given me and my family such aid for so long?”
“Ezio Auditore,” the Assassin said, nodding to him in the way of those who had only met through the most distant of intermediaries.
“Molto onorato, Ezio,” he said, nodding to the Assassin that had done so much for his family in the past, and clearly would continue to do so in the future. “And I am very grateful for all you’ve done for my family.”
“Va bene,” Ezio said, nodding to him. “Seek out the Brotherhood’s current holdings,” the Assassin said, offering him directions to the place where those hidden guardians of mankind made their home in this place of madness and fanaticism. “My brothers and sisters will see to it that you remain as protected as we can manage.”
“Millie grazie, amico,” he said, reaching out to embrace the man who was akin to another uncle to him, even considering the brevity of their present meeting.
“Addio, Altezza,” Ezio said, smiling widely, even as he turned to depart once more.
~AC: II~
Breathing more easily once Piero di’ Medici had set out for the protected grounds that the Brotherhood maintained, Ezio turned his thoughts back to the task that he still had before him. There were, after all, still the matters pertaining to Savonarola’s remaining lieutenants. And then, after that, the mad monk himself.
Still, with Piero making his way to the safety of the Brotherhood’s stronghold within Firenze, Ezio could at least take some comfort from things as they stood.
~AC: II~
Narrowing her eyes as she once again caught the sense that she was being observed by some far-away presence, Maria settled herself down in a nearby alcove so that she would be able to concentrate more completely on whatever or whoever it was pulling on her mind in the way that could only be coming from the Apple. However, when she reached out for the sense of the Apple that had always been in the back of her mind, Maria found that she was stymied by that same kind of ephemeral wall that she’d found the last time. It was a troublesome thing, and troubling as well, knowing how easily it seemed that she could be cut off from something it seemed like she’d been made for.
She knew that Ezio wouldn’t have liked hearing her put it that way, but such was the only way she could think too put it.
~AC: II~
Smiling as he made his way into the new room where the artifact had been stored, having been shown the way by one of the man in black’s many cloaked attendants, Sandeo hefted the bag of sentimental trinkets and oddments that he had been given over to him when word had begun getting around that there was a way to preserve the good and beautiful things of Firenze from the fires that Savonarola had been ordering set all about the city-state. He was pleased to know how much he was managing to do for the people of Firenze, even in the heart of the viper’s nest.
Finding his way back to the artifact once more, Sandeo smiled as he watched the familiar, colorless light bloom from within the artifact as the man in black stepped out from within the small, golden-brass sphere.
“You have more for our collection?” the man in black asked, sounding curious.
“Not this time, amico,” he said, smiling gently as he faced the man in black once again. “There are those who will want to have these back, once all of this madness has blown over.”
The man in black seemed pensive, even as he summoned another of his many and varied attendants, who had soon taken the bag through the portal that he could call up at will.
“Grazie for all the aid you have given to me, and the people of Firenze will thank you as well, once I tell them of all the services you have done for them,” he said, smiling widely at the man in black, even as he vanished back into the artifact once more.
Chapter 290: Starvation diet
Chapter Text
Narrowing his eyes as he continued his search, calling up his second-sight so that he would be better able to spot the next of Savonarola’s lieutenants, Ezio found himself hoping that no more of the citizens that had been stirred up by the efforts of Machiavelli, La Volpe, and Paola would end up laying dead in the streets and parks of Firenze. It was his hope that, by removing these men from the world, he could bring sense and reason back to Firenze once more.
Making his way up into the higher rooftops within the city he was moving through, wanting a higher vantagepoint so that he could see more of Firenze’s environs in a single sweep, Ezio looked for the next, golden-glowing target that he would need to seek out. Settling into himself for a moment, while he searched for the next man who stood between him and Savonarola, Ezio had soon found him.
Leaping back down to the lower rooftops from the tower he’d been perched in, keeping the man he’s spotted within the second-sight he’d targeted him with, Ezio swiftly crossed the rooftops that stood between him and the man he was presently hunting.
“Your orders are simple: keep watch over these fields, and ensure that no harm comes to the bundles of fieno,” the man he was to kill next said, speaking to what looked like a small group of city guards. “It may seem a mundane task, but it is critical nonetheless.”
Moving down to another, lower rooftop as he continued his slow, methodical stalk, Ezio wondered just what it was that could have driven this man to collusion with Savonarola and his madness. There were many reasons that a man might be driven to such dark deeds as this man. Leaping lightly down from the rooftop he’d been perched on while he observed the man at work, Ezio dove quickly for the nearest haystack. Breathing as quietly as he could, Ezio concealed himself within the haystack as the man passed him by.
“Without this most basic resource, they will lose the means to resist,” the farmer said, clearly having been in the midst of a conversation while Ezio had been moving. “The rebellious elements will be forced to stand down.”
Narrowing his eyes even as the farmer continued on his rounds, speaking either for the benefit of those around him or simply attempting to puff up his own sense of self-importance, Ezio held himself steady for a long moment, and then dove for a closer haystack.
“Already, many have fallen into line,” the farmer continued. “They require clothing. Food. Shelter. Warmth. And all of these things are born of fieno!” he watched as the farmer turned to one of the other guards. “I hear you grumbling; you think this post a waste of time. But, you must understand: our very existence depends on keeping all this secure!”
Moving to a closer haystack, Ezio grabbed the guard standing in his way, killing him with the hidden-blade and throwing him into a haystack on his way to the next one that he aimed to conceal himself in.
“You don’t believe me, do you?” the farmer asked, with a sigh. “Let me explain: the fieno feeds our horses. They, in turn, pull our carts; which transport our goods to other cities, where trade is conducted. In this way, our economy is made to thrive! And then, there is our livestock. Cattle and sheep require fieno for sustenance. And, as you know, they provide us with all manner of things: wool, meat, and milk, to name a few.”
Moving to a closer haystack, even as the farmer continued about his rounds with the man he was either showing the ropes or simply using as a prop to speak his mind, Ezio was forced to deal with yet another guard in his way.
“Do you see, then, why the fieno must not fall into enemy hands?” the farmer asked, and Ezio flexed his own hands in anticipation; wanting to have things done with, but knowing that he would still need to wait for his moment, if he wished to finish this matter without unnecessary bloodshed. “So, do not dismiss the work you do here! It is vital to our continued success.”
Watching through narrowed eyes as the guardsman departed, Ezio knew that the time he’d been waiting for had come at last. Moving and striking as swiftly as he ever had, Ezio made sure to catch the farmer as he fell.
“You would have let your own people starve! And for what?!” he demanded, feeling almost as furious as he had when he’d come to grips with Vieri at last.
“Too long I suffered their insults. They called me simple, low-class,” the dying man snarled, not a scrap of remorse in him. “I wanted their respect; and, if I could not have that, then I would settle for their fear.”
“You have neither of mine,” he said, glaring down into the glazing eyes of the man in his arms. “Though the passing will be painful, it will be a gentle sleep. Requiescat in pace.”
Leaving the corpse behind him, Ezio continued on his way to the harbor. If one of Savonarola’s thralls was willing to resort to such deplorable measures, to break the wills of those courageous enough to take a stand against the madness that had overtaken Firenze and all too many of her people, then there were likely to be others. And, as though conjured by his own thoughts, Ezio began to hear the sounds of another man shouting.
“Secure those crates! We can ill afford to let their contents fall into the wrong hands. If they want to eat, they’ll accept Savonarola as their leader,” the corrupted merchant said, as Ezio continued moving closer.
Yes, he knew it would be somewhat more difficult to deal with this man, considering that he was not likely to leave his ship, but there were still ways to have done with a man even under such trying circumstances.
“How the Medici family can still hold any sway in this city is beyond me,” the merchant said, and Ezio found himself wondering again just how Savonarola had appealed to this man; or, as with so many others, whether he had appealed at all. “To think, I once considered them my patrons,” the merchant scoffed, an almost explosive-sounding rush of air. “But, that was before the Prophet opened my eyes.”
As Ezio drew closer, making his way out to the end of a jutting rooftop so that he would be able to dive, unseen, under the water, Ezio held his breath as he swam under the shallow wavelets. Surfacing once he was close enough to the boat that an errant glance would not reveal his presence to those onboard, Ezio made his way up the side of the vessel before him.
“Then I saw the evils of commerce, and the division it creates,” the merchant continued, and Ezio couldn’t quite determine from his tone if he was one of those Savonarola had convinced, or those he had enthralled; he supposed it didn’t matter, as the results would be the same in either case. “Savonarola will lead us to a new era,” the merchant continued, his tone beginning to sound like that of a man who had convinced himself. “One of fraternity, equality, and justice.”
Ezio wondered if such blindness came from more than one source, but decided that such a question – if it was anything more than academic at this point – would be answered very soon.
“All that remains is for us to cast off the shackles of our troubled past, and accept the Lord as our savior and true leader.”
Holding back a sigh through the sheerest effort of will, pulling the pair of guardsmen standing in his way down to their deaths – snapping their necks and tossing them into the water – before making his way carefully to the aft section of the boat.
“We’ll see just how tough the holdouts are when they’re forced to go without food!” was the last thing the corrupted merchant said, before Ezio launched himself over the railing and straight into the man’s body, hidden-blades out and ready.
“What…? What have I done?” the merchant asked, the light of fanaticism fading from his eyes, just before the light of life would do the same.
“Only what you were made to,” he said, aiming to provide at least some comfort to the man in his arms. “Though your head may be tormented, let your heart be clear. Requiescat in pace.”
Chapter 291: Little sister
Chapter Text
Sighing as he stood for a moment, looking down at the corpse he’d laid out neatly on the deck of the boat where the pair of them had come to grips in the most final of ways, Ezio sighed deeply. It seemed entirely too easy, for madness of the kind that Savonarola encouraged to spread among the people. He knew that a Templar, or Machiavelli in his more cynical moments, would say that such a thing was due to the weakness of humanity as a whole, but Ezio found such an argument entirely too simple for his taste.
It rang of someone who had either given up on the world, or had never come to love it in the first place.
As he made his way back over the rooftops of Firenze, aiming for the compound that the Brotherhood had established themselves in once it had become obvious how deeply Savonarola had entrenched himself within the wounded city-state. Once he’d made it back over the walls of the compound, Ezio took time to walk the walls, making sure at none of Savonarola’s thralls or their servants had attempted to make their own inroads into the compound. Or any holes in the walls that protected them.
Sighing in relief as he found the walls and grounds of their compound just as impregnable as they had been when he’d last seen them.
Saying his hellos to La Volpe and Paola on his way down to the entrance of the catacombs that little Maria and her fellow Guardians were staying in while the madness of Savonarola and his thralls had overtaken Firenze, Ezio breathed easier when he’d climbed down into the hidden catacombs of the city-state. Yes, there were times when he found himself reminded of the time he had spent searching for the keys to Altaïr’s armor, and he would feel the same thread of annoyance that he’d felt when trying to make his way through the maze of obstacles, gates, and waterways that had stood in his path.
Shaking his head with a soft laugh, Ezio continued on his way through the catacombs before him; he knew that the Guardians had set up their own encampment deeper inside the tunnels, to make sure that they were as safe as they could be from the madness that Savonarola was spreading.
~AC: II~
Following in the wake of one of the attendants of the man in black, as the artifact had been moved once more from its former resting place in an obvious effort to prevent him from continuing to save the beauty and culture of Firenze from the fires that Savonarola was continuing to set throughout the city-state that they were both currently staying in. It was just as plain that none of them was aware of the attendants that the man in black could summon to him at need.
Or simply at will, as he usually seemed to do.
When he made it into the room that the artifact had been newly stored in, Sandeo smiled as he carried in the crate full of paintings that he had reclaimed from the piles that were due to be burned once that madman Savonarola had made his way through those that Sandeo had not managed to pull from the storehouses before they had been fed into the fires that Savonarola and his fellow madmen were still continuing to set throughout the city-state and its surrounding environs.
“It’s good to see that you’re doing so well, amico,” he said, as the artifact shimmered and the man in black emerged once more.
“I see you have brought more for our collection,” the man in black said, yellow eyes briefly visible as he turned his hooded visage to take in the two bags – large and small – that Sandeo had brought to the new room where the artifact he inhabited had been placed.
“Some books, and a few small paintings, sí,” he said, smiling as he handed over the bag to another of the man’s attendants. “Grazie,” he said, once the cloaked figure had moved off, departing through the portal that led to the fortress-castle that the man in black had established for himself in that strange place that only his attendants seemed to be able to reach.
Once he’d finished filling the man in black in on everything that had been going on in Firenze of late, and the news that he’d been able to gather about the state of Venezia and the people there who might have been able to escape the madness that Savonarola and his thralls were only helping to fuel with their activities in Firenze herself, Sandeo turned and left. He was glad to have been able to meet the man in black, even with all of the madness that had accompanied their meeting.
Truly, while theirs was a strange friendship, there were few more staunch allies that Sandeo could have imagined himself meeting.
~AC: II~
After spending a full day and a night with little Maria, even down in the near-lightless catacombs where she and her fellow Guardians had been forced to shelter from the threat of Savonarola and all of the mad monk’s thralls, had left Ezio feeling lighter and more sure of himself and his course of action than he’d felt since he’d begun his task of freeing Firenze and the surrounding city-states from his poisonous influence.
And, while he knew for a fact that his task wasn’t going to be finished without additional bloodshed, he’d long since come to accept that the life of an Assassin was not truly meant to be a peaceful one.
Chapter 292: Last man down
Chapter Text
As he made his way back into Firenze at large, Ezio quickly started searching for the last of Savonarola’s lieutenants so that he would be able to finally deal with the mad monk himself. Making his way back up to Firenze’s rooftops once more, Ezio began searching in earnest once more. The sight and sounds of milling crowds drew his attention, and he smiled as he saw some of La Volpe’s thieves handing out the food that had been stolen from the citizens by the thralls of Savonarola that he had dealt with earlier.
It was, therefore, with a certain lightness in his heart that Ezio continued on his way through Firenze on the way to the next of the thralls that he would need to eliminate before he would be able to confront Savonarola himself.
The sight of another crowd gathering drew his eye, and the fact that this one seemed to be far less pleased than the one he’d seen gathering around for the distribution of the food that had been stolen from them earlier gave Ezio all the reason he needed to investigate the crowd. Turning his path to intersect with the rooftops that stood over the open plaza where the crowd had gathered. As he drew closer to them, Ezio could more clearly see the simmering anger of the people who made up the crowd that had gathered in this particular place.
He was also beginning to hear the words of the man – this one a black-robed doctor – who was tyrannizing the people before him.
“It’s quite simple, amici: if you desire care, you’ll submit yourselves fully to our new ruler,” the corrupt doctor said.
Ezio ground his teeth, even as he made his way back down to the ground once more. Given everything he’d already done – the deaths of Savonarola’s other lieutenants, and the news of the Assassin’s return that had been spreading in the wake of them – Ezio knew that he would need to handle this task with a modicum of discretion.
“The choice is yours to make,” the doctor – whether he was enthralled by the Apple or acting of his own free will, the simple fact was that he needed to be stopped – continued, even as Ezio moved in closer. “Continue to support the Medici who, as you know, have long since fled Firenze. Or accept Savonarola,” the man – unworthy of his station as he so clearly was, Ezio found that he could no longer bring himself to think of him as a doctor – said; as though a choice forced upon people in this manner was any kind of choice at all.
Shaking his head as he found his fury about to overtake him again, Ezio paused for a moment to master himself.
Continuing on his way over the rooftops that still stood between him and his present destination, Ezio found that there was a conspicuous absence of guardsmen in his way. He didn’t know if it was word of the Assassin’s return had spread so far and wide by this time that it had scared all but the most determined from their posts, or else if standing sentinel over a man such as this was too far for even men such as the ones he’d found himself set against during his elimination of Savonarola’s other lieutenants to tolerate.
Either way, Ezio could not help but to find himself grateful for the reprieve, no matter its ultimate source.
“Why fight it?” the man – likely to be another thrall, considering his tone and words both – continued on stubbornly. “Why refuse? He is a good man; strong of character and morals. He seeks to save us from ourselves.”
When he’d finally managed to position himself just over the head of the black-robed man standing before the restless crowd, raising his arms as though he meant to speak again, Ezio leaped down with both hidden-blades poised and ready.
“You have spilled the blood of a healer,” the man croaked, seeming not to have realized how badly he’d strayed, even here here at the end of things.
“No; I have spilled the blood of a tyrant,” he said, narrowing his eyes at the man dying in his arms.
“To command such power over the body, between this world and the next,” the man sighed, life beginning to leave him in earnest. “It seems I grew intoxicated.”
“And now, you grow still,” he said, letting the anger he’d felt for this man fade along with his life. “Your death serves a greater purpose. Requiescat in pace.”
Rising once more from his crouch, Ezio began to hear the sounds of the crowd before him cheering, and remembered at once that there were others who were aware of his actions, at least in this case.
“Assassino! Assassino!”
“Bravo!”
“Vittoria agli Assassino!”
Turning briefly to nod to the gathered crowd before him, Ezio hurried back up onto the rooftops once more. This was the first true sign he’d become aware of, that the mood in Firenze was changing in the wake of his elimination of those men who had been beguiled, deceived, and enthralled by Savonarola. Sighing briefly once he’d made it up onto the higher rooftops that bordered the plaza where he’d dealt with the corrupted doctor, Ezio rose back to his feet with a deep breath.
It would, of course, take time for him to find the next of the men who he would need to eliminate in order to clear his path to Savonarola, it was beginning to sound as though the last one he had to find was the last man; the only life that stood between him and the mad monk after all of the work he’d previously done.
In light of that, Ezio wasn’t particularly fond of the idea of going to ground so that he would be able to rest, but knew that not doing such would only endanger himself and the work he was doing. And so he made his way back to the safehouse that his brother and sister Assassins had established for themselves within the wounded city-state that they were ultimately trying to protect. After a night spent in the company of his littlest sister and those others who shared her circumstances – those who stood to lose the most, if Savonarola and his thralls were not stopped – Ezio found his resolve strengthened all the more.
There was more at stake than simply what he desired, of course, but being reminded of what he and his stood personally to lose helped to steady him for what was to come.
After making his way back over the walls of the compound once more, Ezio began searching for the last man that stood between him and Savonarola. As it came out, however, the last of the men Ezio would need to come to grips with was himself a preacher that had been beguiled by Savonarola. Listening in on the discussions of the crowds he moved through – those times when he would descend in order to gather more information from those who were closer to the present matters he was going to need to confront during this latest excursion of his – Ezio had soon discovered just where it was that he was going to need to go next.
Turning his path toward the church of Santo Spirito, Ezio found himself faced with yet another crowd that had gathered at the feet of one of Savonarola’s thralls; the mood of the crowd was not a promising one, at least insofar as listening to the man was concerned.
“People of Firenze! Come! Gather round! Listen well to what I say: the end approaches! Now is the time to repent; to beg God’s forgiveness! Listen to me: if you cannot see what is happening for yourselves, the signs are all around us! Unrest! Famine! Disease! Corruption! These are the harbingers of darkness! We must stand firm in our convictions, lest they consume us all!” the man scanned the crowd with furious eyes, the clear light of fanaticism in his own. “I see you doubt; you think me mad! Ah, but did the Romans not say the same of Jesus? Know that I, too, once shared your uncertainty; your fear. But that was before Savonarola came to me! He showed me the truth, and at last my eyes were opened! And so I stand before you, hoping to open your eyes, as well!”
The preacher paused for breath, and Ezio took the opportunity to move closer.
“Understand that we stand upon a precipice! On one side, the shining, glorious Kingdom of God! On the other, a bottomless pit of despair! Already, you teeter precariously on the edge! Men like the Medici and the other families you once called masters sought Earthly goods and gain; they abandoned their beliefs in favor of material pleasures, and they would have seen you all do the same!” the man paused again, but this time he seemed more interested in making certain that the full effect of his words was felt by the crowd before him. “Our wise Prophet once said: ‘The only good thing that we owe Plato and Aristotle is that they brought forward many arguments that we can use against the heretics. Yet they and other philosophers are now in hell’” Ezio thought that sounded exactly like something Savonarola would say. “If you value your immortal souls, you will turn back from this unholy course and embrace the teachings of our prophet, Savonarola. Then, you will sanctify your bodies and spirits! You will discover the Glory of God! You will, at last, become what our Creator intended: loyal and obedient servants!”
None of those who had remained behind seemed remotely interested in listening to the ramblings of the man who was attempting to hold their attention. Leaping lightly back down to the ground once the last of the citizens had departed from the plaza where they had gathered – either under the influence of the enthralled priest or of their own will – Ezio made his way over to the priest. As he did so, Ezio found himself confronted with an odd feeling.
“Your mind,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he made his way over to the priest. “I sense it is still your own.”
The man grinned, the same fanaticism that he’d seen in the eyes of the many men he’d put to rest over the course of his work. “Not all of us required persuasion or coercion to be convinced!” the madman actually laughed. “Everything I have said is true!”
“Nothing is true,” he said, smoothly closing in on the madman whose grasp of reality was just as weak as Savonarola’s own. “And what I do is no easy thing,” he said, extending the hidden-blade on his right wrist so that he could at last be done with the priest. “Requiescat in pace.”
Laying the priest out on the grounds of the plaza where he had once been standing, Ezio quickly made his way back up to the rooftops once more. Feeling lighter than he had since he’d started on this latest hunt of his, even though he knew that his task wasn’t done quite yet, Ezio swiftly headed back to the compound where he and the rest of the Brotherhood were all staying. Pausing for a moment as he drew closer to the walls, Ezio checked to make certain that no one was following him before making his way over them.
Chapter 293: Girolamo Savonarola
Chapter Text
Breathing more easily once he was back on the safe ground that he and his brother and sister Assassins had established for themselves, Ezio made his way down into the catacombs where little Maria and her fellow Guardians were all staying.
It took a great deal of time, but eventually more and more signs of rebellion against Savonarola’s rule began to show. Primarily, it seemed to be because Savonarola – with his hatred of commerce, pleasure, and everything else that had made Firenze the great power all of her citizens expected her to be – had allowed Firenze’s star to begin falling, as he continually neglected to attend to the things that had brought Firenze to prominence in the first place in favor of preparing for the Day of Judgment; a Day that never seemed to come, and thus served as the first of many things that eroded Savonarola’s remaining authority. The first overt challenge to Savonarola’s authority came from a liberal Franciscan friar.
He challenged the mad monk to an ordeal by fire, and when he refused – as Ezio had been expecting him to do – an irreparable damage was done to what little authority Savonarola had managed to cling to.
Still, if nothing else the madman was a persistent one, and so even in spite of the fact that gambling, whoring, theater, banking, and all of the other vices of the world that Savonarola had hated so much were all taking root in Firenze once more. Before even that, the young men of Firenze had marched in protest of the tyranny that had gripped their home; he’d wondered, even as he’d concealed himself from the eyes of those that would have otherwise found him, if those young men had been stirred up by the efforts of La Volpe, Paola, and Machiavelli. Still, as the people who had found themselves having to flee Firenze in the wake of Savonarola’s rise to power began to trickle back into the city-state once again, Ezio found himself witnessing the increasing signs of desperation from the mad monk with a certain sense of hope.
It seemed that the people who still lived in the place he’d once called home were not so easily cowed as Savonarola had clearly been counting on.
~AC: II~
As he made his way to the room where the artifact that housed the man in black had been moved to, following in the footsteps of another of the man’s attendants, Sandeo Calfucci felt himself lighter and more cheerful than he had been since he’d met up with the man and began the process of saving what he could of Firenze’s beauty and culture from the fires that that madman Savonarola had been setting all about the city-state where he and the family he had served for a great many years of his life. The wide smile that remained upon his face as he made his way into the room where the artifact had been stored would have easily drawn the ire of any of the mad monk’s guards that he might have had the misfortune to encounter on his way, but they had all been sent out to shore up the crumbling remnants of the madman’s influence within Firenze.
And so, Sandeo continued on his way to the room where the artifact had been moved to, in order to have what might very well prove to be his last conversation with the man in black.
“Have you come with more for our collection?” the man in black asked, after a long moment spent seemingly contemplating his presence in the room where the pair of them now found themselves.
Sandeo chuckled softly. “Not this time, amico,” he said, making his way over to where the man in black was standing, right hand resting upon the very artifact that he had inhabited for… well, for however long that the man had been staying there. “It seems that Savonarola is finally losing his grip on the hearts and minds of the people,” he barked a derisive laugh. “If he ever had it in the first place. Still, as it seems that things will be going back to how they were, it’s time to start bringing back those treasures that we’ve been saving for the people.”
“So, it seems we have come to an end,” the man in black said, sounding as contemplative as Sandeo had ever heard him.
“Sí, but don’t despair, amico; I’ll make sure that the people who gave these treasures over into our keeping know how much even you were willing to risk, in order to make sure that something of the beauty and culture of Firenze would be able to survive this madness.”
He had only a moment to wonder about the strange, blackened sword – glowing with a light that could not have truly been called light at all – that had appeared in the right hand of the man he’d met with so many times as to feel as though the pair of them could have truly been friends, before he moved…
~AC: II~
It took longer than he would have preferred – almost a year to the day since the young men of Firenze had risen up in riot against Savonarola and his dictates – but finally it seemed as though the mad monk’s grip had loosened to the point where he could be prized free and cast out. It was this feeling that Ezio held to, as he, Paola, La Volpe, and Machiavelli all gathered together before the gates of San Marco, alongside a crowd that was swiftly going from restless to outright unruly.
“You’ve done well, Ezio,” Paola said, as the four of them stood at the forefront of the crowd beating against the gates that stood before them all.
“Grazie, but what happens now?” he asked, looking from the group he was standing among to those at the very gates of San Marco itself.
“Watch,” Machiavelli said, and so Ezio turned his eyes back to the crowd that had gathered around them all.
With a loud, rumbling crash, a door above their heads opened and the lean, black-robed figure of Savonarola appeared on the balcony that had been situated above them to allow for the kind of addresses that the mad monk clearly intended to make.
“Silence! I demand silence!”
Narrowing his eyes as he tried to feel the same, odd thrumming from the Apple that little Maria had described to him on many of the occasions that he would make his way down into the catacombs to speak with her, Ezio found that he could only feel a slight heaviness in the air from what he knew had to be the Piece of Eden that the mad monk possessed. At least for a short time longer. The muttering of the crowd had subsided, as though even in spite of themselves they were still held in thrall by the madman.
Or, at least by the Apple.
“Why are you here?” Savonarola demanded, pacing the length of the balcony he stood on with the short, sharp motions of a man who had been pushed to the edge of what little patience he had originally possessed. “Why do you disturb me? You should be cleansing your homes!”
“Of what?!” one of the men in the crowd demanded. “You’ve already taken everything!”
“I have held my hand!” Savonarola all but snarled, glaring wild-eyed down from the balcony where he was standing. “But now, you will do as I command! You will submit!”
When Savonarola brandished the Apple at them, as Ezio had been expecting the man to do, he could hardly help the smile that emerged on his face when the form of the man in black appeared from within the shimmering light of the Piece of Eden itself. The gloved left hand of the man in black closed around the right wrist of the mad monk; the man in black seemed to brace himself for a moment, before hurling Savonarola down into the crowd surging below the balcony the both of them were standing upon, vanishing once more into the Apple itself.
“Quickly, Ezio: find the Apple,” La Volpe said, giving him an encouraging shove to get him moving once more. “It can’t have gotten far.”
“Va bene,” he said, nodding sharply as he began to push his way through the crowds that were now surrounding Savonarola, shouting that the mad monk should be taken to the Palazzo della Signoria, to be tried for all the strife that he had brought to Firenze.
Ezio had the feeling that the trial would not be kind to the mad monk.
“Idiots! Blasphemers! God bears witness to this sacrilege! How dare you handle His prophet this way!” Savonarola shrieked, writhing and twisting in the grip of the furious crowd that had taken hold of him. “Heretics! You will all burn in Hell for this! Do you hear me?! Burn!”
However, even amid all of his bluster, Savonarola seemed to realize that he’d used the last of his chances, and was about to pay the price for his tyranny over the people of Firenze. Still, it seemed as though he would not go without making himself heard:
“The Sword of God will fall upon the Earth, swiftly and suddenly! Release me, for only I can save you from His wrath! My children, heed me, before it is too late! There is but one, true salvation, and you would forsake the path to it for mere material gain! If you do not bow to me once more, all of Firenze will know the fury of God! And the city will fall like Sodom and Gomorrah, for He will know the depths of your betrayal! Aiutami Dio! I am brought low by ten thousand Judases!”
“Oh, enough of your lies!” a man in the crowd shouted up at the writhing monk borne aloft on the arms of the many men and women of Firenze that had joined together to deal with him. “You’ve been pouring out nothing but misery and hatred since you first walked among us!”
“God may be in your head, Monk, but He is far from your heart!” another man called up, as the crowd drew closer to the Signoria.
“We have suffered enough!” a woman in the crowd called out, as the crowd drew within sight of the Palazzo della Signoria at last. “We shall be a free people once more!”
“Soon, the light of life will return to our city!”
“We must punish the traitor! He is the true heretic! He twisted the Word of God to suit himself!” another woman shouted, as Savonarola was pushed and shoved into the wide space of the Palazzo della Signoria itself.
“The yoke of religious tyranny will be broken at last!” another woman within the crowd shouted happily. “Savonarola will finally be punished!”
“The truth illuminates us, and fear has fled!” a third woman in the crowd took up the cheering of the crowd surging and rushing around them. “Your words hold sway no more, Monk!”
“You called yourself His prophet, but your words were dark and cruel! You called us puppets of the Devil, but I think the true puppet was you!”
The four that had come with him to this place all met back up once again, and they followed the crowd as they pressed forward into the Signoria in earnest. Firenze’s leaders, eager as ever to claw back power for themselves as well as to save their own necks, streamed from the Signoria to show their support for the furious crowd that had gathered before them; before those same people could become even more unruly than they clearly were. A stage was swiftly erected, and upon it a huge stack of wood and kindling was raised around a trio of stakes.
Wincing at what he knew was soon to occur, Ezio began to make his way around the back of the crowd.
The trial itself – if it could even be called such – was a brief and savage affair, with the crowd howling and baying for the blood of those displayed before them.
“Oh Lord my God, pity me!” Savonarola’s pleas were loud enough to carry even over the shouts and jeers of the crowd all around him; Ezio continued positioning himself, knowing that there would be only one thing he would actually be able to do for the man he was about to watch die. “Deliver me from evil’s embrace! Surrounded as I am by sin, I cry out to You for salvation!”
“You wanted to burn me,” jeered a man in the crowd, this one pressed against the base of the stage as though to get a better view of what was going to be happening. “Now the tables are turned!”
As the executioners lit the trio of pyres standing before them, Ezio found himself remembering once again the way so much of his own family had died in this very place, betrayed by a man that they had once thought that they could trust. Even after so many years since that day, Ezio found that he could still clearly see the way their broken bodies had dangled from the gibbet. Closing his eyes for a moment, Ezio gathered his composure once more.
“Infelix ego,” Savonarola prayed, his voice filled with pain as the flames that had been set in his pyre began to catch in his clothes. “Omnium auxilio destitutus… I have broken the laws of Heaven and Earth. Whom can I run to? I dare not look up to Heaven, for I have sinned grievously against it! I can find no refuge on Earth, for I have been a scandal to it, as well!” Savonarola’s expression had twisted into one that mixed terror, hopelessness, and pain in nearly the same measure. There were few enough who deserved to die without knowing some kindness, and nearly none who deserved to die in such agony. “It’s you,” the monk said, as their eyes met across the gulf that still separated them. “I knew this day would come! Brother, please show me the pity I did not show you. I left you to the mercy of wolves and dogs!”
“Farewell, Padre,” he said, raising his pistol and ending the life of the monk who stood before him. “Go now in peace, that you may be judged by your God,” he said, as Savonarola’s head sank down to his chest. “Requiescat in pace.”
Chapter 294: Revelation of yellow eyes
Chapter Text
Turning his attention to the pair of younger monks who had clearly dedicated themselves to Savonarola and his cause, Ezio found that they had long since died in the fires; their burst guts hissing as they cooked in the flames. Closing his eyes briefly, even as the scent of burning flesh filled his nose, Ezio composed himself and turned his attention back to where his brother and sister Assassins were waiting. Machiavelli nodded to him as he stepped away from the trio of still-burning pyres, and Ezio turned to mount the stage at the far end.
Far away from the still-burning pyres on the stage.
“Citizens of Firenze!” he called, projecting his voice as the people who had gathered in the open courtyard of the Signoria turned to him. “Twenty-two years ago, I stood in this same place, watching the ones I loved die; betrayed by those they and I had considered friends. Vengeance clouded my mind, and would have consumed me if it had not been for the wisdom of a few strangers. They taught me to look beyond my instincts; they never preached answers, but guided me to learn for myself.” As he continued speaking, Ezio noticed that Uncle Mario had joined up with the three that had accompanied him to this place, and as his uncle smiled and raised a hand in salute, Ezio felt a new warmth spreading through him. “Amici, we don’t need anyone to tell us what to do; not Savonarola, not the Pazzi, not even the Medici. We are all free to choose our own path,” he paused for a moment, to catch his breath before he continued. “There are those who would take that freedom from us, and too many of us – alas – easily give it. But, the power to choose – to choose that which we deem true – remains with us. And it is the exercise of that power that makes us human. There is no book or teacher to choose the path for us; so, choose your own way! Do not follow me, or anyone else!”
There was more he could have said, of course, and while the clear unease of those in power amused him at times, Ezio knew that he was treading on the edges of their patience and they could easily send guards after him once he was out of sight of the people who had gathered in the Signoria. And so, once he’d made his way out of the square – hood pulled up to grant himself at least some form of anonymity – Ezio ran along the north wall of the Palazzo della Signoria, and quickly vanished out of sight of the crowd.
~AC: II~
It wasn’t quite as simple as all that, of course, since there was still the matter of the Guardians that had been forced to hide themselves down in Firenze’s catacombs. None of them quite knew how much the people of Firenze had been turned against those Guardians that had previously been able to live within the city-state in at least some manner of peace, and so even as they all began making their way up from the catacombs that they had been hidden in, Ezio and his brother and sister Assassins all helped them to settle themselves within the compound that they had established for themselves.
“Ezio,” the familiar voice of Christina called out, bringing a smile to his face as he turned to look at her.
While he fully understood and respected the love that she and Manfredo clearly felt for one another, there would always be a part of him that remembered the way he’d fallen in love when they first met. He tried not to show it too openly, however. And so, while he suspected that she knew, neither of them had spoken about such a thing.
He didn’t truly expect the subject to come up, either; because truly, what was left to say?
“Is all of that madness in Firenze over with?” she asked, as the silver-haired children who had all gathered around her turned to look up at him, as well.
“Things have begun to settle down, sí, but I don’t know how much better they’re truly going to be,” he said, sighing as he made his way over to the group of young Guardians that had clearly become fond of her during the course of the time they had spent down in the catacombs.
“Ezio!”
“Buon giorno, Manfredo,” he said, as Christina’s husband came over to greet him and the pair of them shared a formal kiss.
“It’s good to know you made it back here, amico,” Manfredo said, as the pair of them stepped away from each other again.
The three of them settled down to speak to one another, with Ezio filling them in on what had happened while they had been hiding among the Treasure Guardians who had taken their own form of refuge down in Firenze’s catacombs. Knowing that it had been Christina’s own kindness in acting to protect a young Treasure Guardian from the madness that Savonarola had encouraged within the people of Firenze that had protected her from being consumed by that same madness gave Ezio a certain warmth within him; not only the fact that more people would come to know the kindness that Christina had shown to him and to everyone else that she had met, but for the fact that such a thing had been what had ultimately saved her life. It was also good to be able to see her at all, he had to admit.
Simply seeing Christina and the small family that she had gathered around herself wasn’t the end of things, of course, but it made for a good beginning.
Over the course of the next two weeks, Ezio and his brother and sister Assassins worked to integrate those Guardians who had chosen to make their home in Firenze back in among the people of the city-state as things settled back into some form of normality. Most of those who had lived through the madness that Savonarola and his thralls had instigated were simply eager to go back to how things had been before, and if that meant becoming accustomed to – or else learning to ignore – a more prosaic oddity such as the hair and eye colors that each and every one of the Guardians shared was a rather simple thing in most cases. There were a select few of them, however, who spoke of a man named Sandeo.
Ezio thought for a moment that he remembered the name – something to do with Christina’s family, he thought – but there was little time for him to think about things like that.
Chapter 295: Missing Pieces
Chapter Text
Consultation with Leonardo gave him the means of creating copies of Girolamo Riario’s map, and thus of providing his brother and sister Assassins – as well as those Guardians that had put themselves forward to aid in the Brotherhood’s current time of need – with a way to seek out the remaining pages of Altaïr’s Assassin Codex, both so that they would be able to regain access to the knowledge that the great, long-gone Mentor from Syria had wished to share with them, but also so that they would be able to keep that same knowledge out of the hands of the Templars and others who would misuse it. It was something he and the others were careful to keep out of the sight of those who held no stake in the battles that the Brotherhood waged against the Templars in secret.
It wasn’t for them, to get others involved who had no stake in the battles taking place in the shadows all around them; those who simply wished to live their lives undisturbed by such concerns.
There was also the matter of Rodrigo Borgia’s election as Pope, and the delicate situation with regards to Luciano de’ Medici, but as there was little he and his brother and sister Assassins could do about such a thing as that without access to the remainder of Altaïr’s Assassin Codex, Ezio simply kept that in the back of his mind. As well as dealing with any and all of the Borgia soldiers that would just so happen to cross his path when he was delivering the copied maps that Leonardo had created for him. Yes, it was a rather troublesome thing, being forced to divert from his course in order to deal with the obstacles that Rodrigo Borgia and his Templar allies would try to place before him, but it was also something that he’d been mentally preparing himself for ever since he’d started this latest task of his.
He’d also taken care to maintain his ties with Aguilar and the branch of the Brotherhood that had taken root in Spain, so that was some assurance against the possibility – remote as Ezio intended to ensure that it remained – that something would go awry on his current quest.
As the remaining pages of Altaïr’s Assassin Codex were slowly, carefully gathered from Italia’s entire peninsula – with Ezio’s brother and sister Assassins from Firenze and Venezia making their way from Piedmont, to Trent, to Liguria, Umbria, Veneto, Friuli, Lombardy, into Emilia-Romagna, the Marche, Tuscany, Lazio, Abruzzo, then to Molise, Apulia, Campania, Basilicata, and even into the hazards of Calabria; there was, perhaps, too much of their time spent in Capri, but they had soon crossed the Tyrrhenian Sea into Sardinia, and from there into Sicily – Ezio found himself coming into contact with those rougher elements of the Brotherhood that he doubted Uncle Mario would have introduced him to on his own. Or, at least without the type of prodding that all of them were presently getting as a matter of course.
It was a bit strange to think of, that his uncle would wish to protect him even at this stage of both their lives, but then he supposed that such was as natural a reaction as any; there were still matters he wished to shield little Maria from, after all, even though she wasn’t nearly so little anymore.
Five, long years were spent in such a fashion: crossing from one end of the peninsula to the other, disseminating copies of the Codex Map that Leonardo had created for them, and gathering up the remains of the Assassin Codex that Altaïr had written in order to share his knowledge with those generations of the Brotherhood who would come after him. Once that most involved of tasks had been completed – with the Brotherhood forging, strengthening, and renewing their alliances with Italia as a whole – Ezio and his brother and sister Assassins who had been the most involved in their search for the remaining pages of the Codex that had been scattered so far and wide in an effort to keep them out of the hands of those who would have otherwise abused them all made their way back to Uncle Mario’s villa in Monteriggioni.
For Ezio, it was a melancholy sort of homecoming, since he and all of those present were already fully aware of the fact that he and little Maria were soon to be leaving; if nothing else, the Templars could not be allowed to remain in control of the Holy See.
“It is time, Ezio,” Uncle Mario said, once all of those who had been the main force behind the search for the remaining pages of the Assassin Codex – himself, Mario, Paola, La Volpe, Machiavelli, Teodora, Antonio, and Bartolomeo, with little Maria alongside, since she had a stake in things as they stood – had gathered before the Codex Wall in his study. “We hold the Apple, and now all of the pages of the Assassin Codex are collected here together. Let us now finish what you and my brother – your father – began so long ago… Perhaps, we could begin to make sense of the Prophecy within the pages of this Codex, and thus prevent anyone else from suffering under the yoke of the Templars.”
“Sí,” he said, nodding as he looked to the fully-assembled Assassin Codex upon the Wall before them. “Then, I think we should begin by locating the Vault. The reassembled pages of the Codex should be able to guide us to it.”
“Bene, I thought so, too,” Uncle Mario said. “This, then, is how the pages relate to one another,” he continued, gesturing to the intricate design that had steadily been revealed as, one by one, the pages of Altaïr’s Assassin Codex had been assembled once more; Ezio had found himself wondering, during the process, just how many secrets the canny old Mentor had been able to hide in places only the Brotherhood and those associated with them would truly think to look. “It appears to show a map of the world, but it seems to be a world far larger than the one that we know; with continents to the west and south.”
“I wonder if those might be the Americas that Aguilar has been writing to me about,” he muttered, narrowing his eyes slightly as he thought on just what else it had been that his brother Assassin from Spain had been so concerned about, the last time the pair of them had corresponded.
And, while it was a simple fact that he hadn’t known Christoffa Colombo nearly well enough to say what kind of a man he was, it was also true that the power of an Apple was not a thing to be underestimated; and nor were the lengths that some were willing to go to in order to hold onto it. It was, sadly, entirely possible that having the Apple in his possession had indeed driven Christoffa to the horrid acts of tyranny and cruelty that Aguilar had detailed in his letters. Of course, it was also possible that the man had been a tyrant by nature, and being given nearly-uncontested access to new lands had simply allowed that part of his nature to flourish in a way it had not been able to when surrounded by the might of Spain on all sides.
Ezio simply didn’t know enough to say, but both he and Aguilar knew what needed to be done.
“There are other elements,” Machiavelli said, drawing Ezio’s attention back to the present, and all of the struggles that awaited him even there. “Here, on the left, you can see the traced outline of what can only be a crozier; indeed, what might very well be the Papal Staff. On the right is clearly a depiction of the Apple. In the middle of the pages, however, there are a dozen dots whose significance I must admit remains mysterious.”
Reaching out to place his right hand on the Apple, as the Piece of Eden seemed to take Machiavelli’s words as some kind of a cue to start glowing with the odd light that he had seen so many times before. Finding himself slightly startled as the man in black himself emerged from within the depths of the Apple, Ezio was just about to ask just what it was that he was looking for, when he realized that it was probably the discussion that he and the others had been having that had brought his attention to them. He was, however, beginning to see how a man such as Altaïr could have come to mistrust the man in black so much.
He gave so little of himself that it would have been all too simple to ascribe any kind of motives to him, and Altaïr’s life had not been conducive to trusting such a man; not after being betrayed by his own “man in black”.
“How can such a thing be possible?” Paola gasped. “Undiscovered continents…”
“A New World,” the man in black said, a contemplative tone to his voice.
“Perhaps those waiting to be rediscovered,” he said, turning to nod to the man in black, before returning his focus to the Codex Wall once more.
“How can such a thing be?” Teodora asked, though her tone was one of earnest fascination.
“Perhaps the Vault holds the answer,” Machiavelli said, looking up with interest at the designs that had been revealed once the Codex had been fully assembled.
“Can we at least determine where it is, now?” Antonio asked, his concerns as practical as ever.
“Let’s look,” he said, narrowing his eyes and activating his second-sight for a moment; however, there was nothing he could see with that that had not been visible to him without it, so he dismissed it once more. “If we trace lines between these dots,” he muttered, suiting actions to words as those all around him continued to watch. “They all converge, on a single location… No! it cannot be! It seems as though the Vault is in Roma!”
“It certainly explains why Rodrigo was so eager to become the Pope,” Uncle Mario said, speaking before Ezio himself could have given voice to such a thought. “Eleven years he’s ruled the Holy See, but he still lacks the means to uncover its deepest secret, though he clearly must know he’s come to the location itself.”
“Of course!” Machiavelli exclaimed. “In a sense, you have to admire him: he’s not only managed to locate the Vault, but my becoming Pope, he now has control of the Staff.”
“The Staff?” Teodora echoed.
“The Assassin Codex always mentioned two Pieces of Eden, in addition to the two Guardians, who were the keys to the Vault,” Uncle Mario said, his tone becoming stern and serious once more. “One of them is the Apple,” he said, turning a sidelong glance to little Maria.
“And the other is the Papal Staff!” he exclaimed, as the realization came to him. “Diavolo! I thought he might have been using Luciano to locate it, but now…!”
“It seems that the young Medici might very well have fallen into his hands after he gained the office of Pope,” Machiavelli said, a hand to his chin as he considered the Codex Wall in front of them all.
“Whatever did happen, it’s clear that the answers we have all been searching for for these many decades have finally been found,” Uncle Mario said, narrowing his eyes slightly, even as the man in black vanished once more into the depths of the Apple once more.
“And now, we have them,” Paola said, looking as though she would have almost been as pleased not to know.
“But so, too, might Rodrigo himself,” Antonio added, a somber cast to his face. “We have no true way of knowing that there haven’t been copies made of the Codex’s pages. Or, if Rodrigo’s own collection – incomplete as it may have been before Aguilar and his own brothers raided his holdings – the man nevertheless possessed enough information to…” his voice dropped. “And, if he manages to find his way into the Vault… It’s contents might well make even the Apple’s power seem a trifling thing.”
“Two keys, and two Guardians,” Mario reminded them all. “The Vault needs two keys to open it.”
“But, we can’t take any chances,” he said, gathering himself for what he and little Maria were going to need to do next. “We must ride to Roma and find the Vault at once!” there were no objections to his course of action, as he’d been expecting, but there was still something he needed to know. “What will all of you be doing while we’re gone?”
Bartolomeo, who had been content up to that point to remain silent and listen to just what it was that they were all talking about, spoke up with an audacious grin. “I will do what I do best: cause some uproar in the Eternal City; keep the eyes of the guards from falling too much on either of you.”
“We’ll all do what we can to keep the way as clear as we can for you two,” Machiavelli said, turning to the pair of them with his usual, calm expression on his face.
“Just let me know when the pair of you are ready to leave, nipote, and we’ll all be behind you,” Uncle Mario said. “One for all, and all for one!”
“Grazie, amici,” he said, as little Maria sidled up to him and the pair of them embraced. “I know that every one of you will be there when we need you, but let us do this. Rodrigo and his Templars will be on their guard, after everything that’s been happening. A small group such as ours might be more easily able to slip through the cracks in whatever defenses they have set up.”
“Sí,” little Maria said, nodding as she folded her arms. “Rodrigo may be a lurido porco, but the man is by no means stupid.”
Chapter 296: Hide in plain sight
Chapter Text
It took them just over half of the month, even moving as fast as they could in order to interrupt whatever progress that Rodrigo Borgia had made in his efforts to access the Vault underneath Roma, to provision themselves and prepare for the battle that she and Ezio were about to enter into against the fat old bastard and his forces. But, the pair of them were soon making their way by carriage to the Tiber, and then by boat across it. However, it seemed that, even for all their precautions, Rodrigo’s spies had managed to ferret them out.
The pair of them were met at the gates to the wharfs by a group of Borgia guardsmen; guardsmen who were not only armed with knives and swords, but with ropes and nets.
“Alexander would like to thank you, for delivering the Child to us so promptly,” the man at the head of the group said, an ugly grin on his face.
She and Ezio both growled at the presumptuous bastard, and without a word – for who would even waste them on filth like this – the pair of them drew their own swords and waded into combat with the guardsmen standing in their way. Once they had managed to dispatch the last of the group standing before them, and knowing that it was only a matter of time before the battle that had taken place drew the attention of even those who had no personal stake in the battle that had taken place, she and Ezio quickly made their way to the Passetto di Borgo so that they would be able to make their way to the Vatican from the Castel Sant’Angelo where they had arrived.
Sighing as the pair of them managed to make it into the passage at last, she nodded as Ezio signaled her forward and the pair of them made a run for the next gate.
The Passetto itself was half a mile in length, and patrolled by a great deal of guard groups along said length, and so she and Ezio would need to move as quickly and quietly as they were able, in order to avoid putting the entire city itself on alert. And so, as she and the last of her brothers continued on their way forward, pausing momentarily when they were forced to deal with yet another group of guards, Maria found herself wondering just what the pair of them would find when they finally arrived in the Eternal City itself. There was little question of Luciano’s presence when they arrived, since there was little chance that fat bastard wouldn’t keep him as close as he possibly could, but she couldn’t stop thinking about what might have been inside the Vault itself.
Once they’d made it inside Il Vaticano itself, Maria narrowed her eyes slightly as she and Ezio began making their way into the labyrinthine corridors of the building they were meant to move through. Her gaze passed swiftly over the frescoes, sculptures, and paintings inside the building they were moving through, and while she would have loved to have come to this place on a holiday with her family, Maria knew that she couldn’t afford the distraction that looking around would provide. And so, regretfully, Maria forced her attention forward and back onto the task that she and Ezio had taken up together.
The hateful sound of Rodrigo Borgia’s voice drifted towards them, as she and Ezio continued on their way into the labyrinthine building, and Maria ground her teeth in fury as they drew closer to the fat old bastard. She, Ezio, and all of their remaining family had suffered enough at the hands of Rodrigo Borgia and all of his Templars, so the chance to be done with him once and for all was something that she would entirely welcome.
~AC: II~
Looking back at little Maria, as the pair of them made their way up into the high ceilings of Il Vaticano, Ezio sighed softly. He knew that it was unseemly of them, to crave the death of a man so much as the pair of them had come to do so over the course of their lives, but after everything the man had done to them… Ezio was willing to allow himself a bit of latitude. Though he wasn’t certain that Uncle Mario would have been so sanguine about the situation.
Carefully positioning himself above the head of Rodrigo Borgia as he continued with the sermon he was delivering – Ezio thought it one of the most perverse of the things he’d seen, watching a man such as Rodrigo Borgia speaking of the Lord and His works – Ezio narrowed his eyes as he took up a position next to little Maria so that the pair of them could have done with the bastard at long last. Unsheathing his hidden-blades, even as he heard little Maria doing the same, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he stared down at the man who had caused the Assassins such difficulty with all his clawing for power.
He and little Maria leaped down from the hidden places up near the ceiling, striking like the eagles they had been compared to on more than one occasion, little Maria baring her blades as he himself stuck down the fat old Templar who had been causing them and the Brotherhood as a whole such grief.
“I thought…” he growled, narrowing his eyes all the farther. “I thought I was beyond this; that I would be able to rise above the need for vengeance. But I can’t; I’m just a man. I’ve waited too long, and my family and I have suffered too much! And you are a canker on the world, who should have been cut out long ago! Requiescat in pace, bastardo!”
“I think you’ll find that I am not so easily dealt with as all that!” the hateful voice that he’d been hearing for so long that it felt that it had almost become a part of him snarled, as something fast and dark as a shadow leaped at him all too suddenly.
Leaping out of the range of whoever it was – the form, while it had been shrouded from head-to-toe as well as any Assassin that Ezio had seen before – Ezio steadied himself once again. The eerie glow of the man’s eyes, even overshadowed as it was by the hood that had been pulled down to shield them, gave Ezio all the information he needed in order to deduce the identity of the man standing before him now.
“So, this is what you have been doing with Luciano,” he growled, as little Maria took her usual place at his side, drawing her own sword as the pair of them stood beside each other, both of them tensed in preparation to deal death to the man who had done so much harm to them and all of their own.
“Such is the fate of all Children,” Rodrigo said, amused contempt lighting his cruel features, even as he drew the Staff and drove it into the ground before them with a sharp, ringing slam. “They were made to be servants; and I suppose I should thank you for bringing me the other that I needed. I will show my gratitude by granting you a swift death!”
Gathering himself once again, as Rodrigo commanded the unfortunate Luciano de’ Medici to attack him, Ezio sheathed his own sword and quickly moved to disarm the enthralled man before he could inadvertently do any damage. It was a terrible thing that he was being forced to do, but knowing the character of the man who was ultimately responsible for what was happening, Ezio found himself completely unsurprised by what was happening. He would simply need to steel himself for what needed to be done.
He would also need to think of a way to deal with Luciano without actually harming the man, since it was hardly his fault that Rodrigo had managed to enslave his mind with the Piece of Eden that his mind was connected so deeply to.
“How is it that you so stubbornly continue to resist?!” Rodrigo snarled, brandishing the Staff and forcing all of those around them to fall to the ground, as strange, wispy forms emerged from their bodies and were funneled into the Staff through some strange mechanism. However, something of the thrumming energy that he could feel from the Apple must have been visible to the man, because his eyes glowed with baleful cheer. “I see! You have brought even the Apple to me! Bene, give it to me now!”
“Vai a farti fottere!” he snarled in return, even as little Maria added her own voice to his.
“Such vulgarity,” Rodrigo laughed, a look of cruel, contemptuous amusement on his face. “But always the fighter, just like your father! Well, rejoice, my boy! You will be joining him soon!”
With another feral snarl, Rodrigo swung the Staff like a bludgeon, and Ezio ground his teeth in pain as the crozier’s hook caught against a scar on the back of his left hand. The thrumming energy that he’d seen so plainly within the Piece of Eden that Rodrigo was brandishing against him caused him to stagger backwards, but Ezio managed to keep on his feet. Looking over at little Maria, he saw that she herself was also managing to stand against the man that had caused their family such grief in the past.
He didn’t know what kind of effect a Treasure they weren’t linked to would have on the mind of a Guardian that was close to it, but he could only hope that his littlest sister would be safe in such a place as this.
“You will give the Apple and the Child to me!” Rodrigo snarled.
“If you can take them, come and try!” he shouted back, raising the Apple aloft even as little Maria spat at the man’s feet.
He felt the thrumming power of the Apple simmering within him as he called upon the abilities that the Piece of Eden granted him. As eight other Ezios arrayed themselves before him and little Maria where they stood, Ezio looked over to see that his littlest sister was shaking her head.
“Are you all right?”
“Merda… It feels like there are bees in my head,” she said, swaying a bit before she regained her feet once more. “But, I will be all right, given some time.”
“Fascinating! An impressive power, this. But, if you think it’s going to save you, you’ve got another thing coming!”
The eight of those Ezio had summoned from the depths of the Apple all clashed with Rodrigo, though each and every one of them was dispersed with only a single blow from the Staff that he was brandishing, but while they were present, those that he had summoned could keep the eyes of Rodrigo Borgia from falling upon them for just enough time that he and little Maria were able to strike and stab the man with their swords and fists.
Still, for every one of the phantoms that Rodrigo dispatched, Ezio felt some of his own energy leeched away into the Apple; by the end of the battle, Ezio found himself panting nearly as badly as the fat old man that he and little Maria were fighting.
“You will not take this from me!” Rodrigo snarled, clutching tightly to the Staff.
“It’s finished, Rodrigo!” he commanded, forcing himself to appear more composed than he truly felt, with so much of his remaining energy having gone into the formation of those phantoms that he had conjured from the Apple. “Lay down your arms, and I will make sure that your end comes swiftly!”
“Really, Ezio?” the Templar sneered, brandishing the Staff at him once again. “And would you give up so easily, if it were the other way around?” there was an unpleasant sort of grin on his ugly face, even as he drew himself up and slammed the Staff into the ground once again. “Why don’t we find out?!”
Finding himself hurled onto his back by yet another blast of power from the Staff that Rodrigo was brandishing at him once again, Ezio struggled as he found himself pinned to the floor once again. Grabbing for the Apple as he felt it slipping from his fingers, Ezio found himself yelping in pain as Rodrigo’s slippered foot slammed down on his right wrist.
~AC: II
“At last!” he said, pure satisfaction filling him as he took hold of the Apple at long last. “And now for you, dear Child,” he said, reaching out of the mind of the pretty doll who had so obligingly presented herself to him in this, the moment of his greatest triumph; he watched as she struggled in vain against the inevitable, and smiled amusedly when she lost, the light within the Apple filling the yellow eyes that marked her as one of those that had been created as an extension of the Pieces of Eden. “Come; come here.”
Chuckling as she stepped lightly over the supine form of the Assassin whose family had been so arrogant as to steal her from her proper place, he grinned down at the boy on the floor for a moment more, before using the Staff to lift him into the air so that he could be properly dealt with.
“Take care of this for me, Child,” he said, grinning as he handed over the short-sword he had been preparing for just such an occasion, and pulling on more power from the Apple in order to overcome whatever feeble sentiment the Assassin was calling upon from interfering with his command of the little doll standing so close to him. “Good,” he said, grinning as the obedient little doll drove his short-sword into the gut of the Assassin bound before them, and then taking the weapon from her unresisting hands so that he could cut off the hood from her silver hair; they could deal with the other rags she was wearing later…
Chapter 297: Portents and Prophets
Chapter Text
Once he’d managed to regain consciousness, still furious at the way that bastard Borgia had used the Apple to manipulate little Maria as though she was nothing more than a puppet for him to play with as he wished, Ezio forced himself back to his feet. The blade she’d stuck him with hadn’t struck anything vital, and while he wanted to think that it was because the pair of them had loved each other for so long, he knew that it was truly because that bastard dog of a Templar had wanted to watch him suffer for as long as he could. Gritting his teeth as he began making his way toward the recessed panel in the floor that he’d seen Rodrigo making his way through, just before he’d lost consciousness from the wound and the loss of blood, Ezio made his way over to the Botticelli fresco that stood in front of it.
He knew that there had to be some means of gaining access to the passage that Rodrigo had made his own way through, however long ago that was, and so Ezio concentrated on the second-sight that had already been such a help to him over the course of the life that he had lived for so long. There turned out to be two switches, both of them needing to be pressed, before the door set into the floor slid back, revealing a set of lighted stairs leading down into depths that seemed to have been lit by some, pale ambiance that he couldn’t begin to guess the source of. However, there was a certain resemblance to the light cast by the Apple, when he thought about it.
Gathering himself once again, Ezio descended into the depths, following the path that that bastard Borgia had clearly taken before him.
As he continued on his way, deeper into the place that had to be the Vault that had been spoken of within the collected pages of Altaïr’s Assassin Codex, Ezio found himself fascinated by the light that came from the walls. Even though it was a cold sort of blue, it was as steady and unwavering as the light that had come from the Apple, those times when he’d made use of the Piece of Eden for himself. Still, a great deal of his attention was taken up by the search he was making for both little Maria and Luciano de’ Medici; both of them having been taken under the thrall of one of the Pieces of Eden that remained in the fat hands of that bastard dog of a Pope.
He, of course, aimed to do something about that.
The passageway opened up, at last, into a large room whose walls were as smooth as the finest glass Ezio had ever seen; and filled with the same, pale-blue radiance that had lit the interior of the passageway he’d just come through. However, what caught his eye more than anything else that he’d just seen were the pair of immobile figures that stood in the center of the room, a hand each on the Piece of Eden that had enthralled them, were the forms of little Maria and Luciano de’ Medici both.
“I’m glad to see you both again, but it seems that there’s one last thing I’m going to have to do before I can bring you both back to your senses,” he said, looking a last time at the pair of them, before gathering himself and continuing onward.
He could hear the hateful sound of Rodrigo Borgia’s voice, but given the clear frustration in his tone, Ezio felt at least some satisfaction that he wasn’t going to be able to do whatever it was that he’d originally come to the Vault to do. Before a wall that had been pierced by hundreds of evenly-spaced holes stood the fat, old Templar himself, pacing and pushing at the wall as though that kind of thing would do him a bit of good.
“It’s over, Rodrigo,” he said, drawing his sword once more as he closed with the fat old Templar whose life he had been pursuing for such a long time that he had almost forgotten that there was another way to live. “No more tricks. No more ancient artifacts. No more weapons,” he continued, casing the sword itself aside, and then doing the same with his dagger, and the cestus he had been wearing for long enough that it had begun to seem almost a part of his own hand. “Let us see what you are truly made of, old man.”
“All right, then,” Rodrigo growled, an ugly look on his ugly face. “If that’s how you want to play it!”
“What do you even want with the Vault, Rodrigo?” he demanded, knowing that such a man was not the kind to crave knowledge for any sake at all. “Don’t you already have all the power you could ever need?”
“Don’t you know?” the old man laughed, a raspy sound that carried only the most cruel sort of amusement, as the pair of them clashed once more. “Or, has the great, powerful Brotherhood of Assassins not managed to figure it out?”
“What are you talking about?” he demanded, ducking out of the way, and punching again as he found an opening to do so.
“It’s God! God dwells down in the Vault!” Rodrigo shouted, the light of fanaticism clear in his eyes.
“Do you really think that God lives down in a Vault beneath Il Vaticano itself?” he demanded, not truly knowing if even Rodrigo Borgia was mad enough to believe something like that.
“Isn’t that a more logical location than a kingdom on a cloud, surrounded by singing Angels and Cherubim? I admit that makes for a lovely story, but the truth is far more interesting!”
“All right, then, say I believe you,” he allowed, knowing that the old man had likely lost his mind, but wishing to know what drove him to such lengths; even a madman had limits, after all. “What do you think He’s going to do when you confront Him?”
“To be honest, I don’t care,” Rodrigo said, an ugly, avaricious smile curling his fat face. “It’s not His approval I seek, just His power!”
The pair of them clashed once again, and though there was a certain satisfaction in beating down the Templar for all that he had done to both the Brotherhood and the Auditore family, Ezio found himself wishing – for just a moment – that he hadn’t cast aside his cestus, at least.
“And you think He’ll give it up?” he demanded, pulling the old man close for a head butt.
“Whatever lies beyond that wall won’t be able to resist both the Staff and the Apple!” Rodrigo proclaimed, madness lighting his eyes once more. “They were made for felling Gods!”
“God is meant to be all-knowing; all powerful,” he reminded the madman, though he doubted that such a thing would do much good at this point; honestly, it seemed that his points would be better made with fists. “Do you truly think that a couple of ancient relics will be enough to harm Him?”
“You know nothing, boy!” Rodrigo sneered. “You take your image of the Creator from an ancient book! A book, I remind you, that was written by men!”
“You are the Pope!” he exclaimed, not certain whether he was more disgusted with the man’s naked grasping for power, or if he simply pitied the old Templar for his seeming lack of faith in anything at all. “And yet you dismiss the central text of your Faith?!”
Rodrigo laughed, from the spot where he had fallen to the floor after taking a powerful blow to both his ample gut and his loins. “Are you so naïve? I became Pope because it gave me access! Because it gave me power! Do you think I believe a single word of that goddamned book? It’s all lies and superstition! Just like every other religious tract written over the past thousand years!”
Knowing that there was no point in further discussion with a man so blinded by his own ambition as Rodrigo Borgia, Ezio grabbed him by the neck and choked him into submission. Breathing deeply to steady himself, and letting go before he could succumb to the temptation to strangle the very life from the fat Templar’s supine form, Ezio moved forward once more. Staring for a moment at the wall and all of the evenly-spaced holes that stood before, behind, and all around him, Ezio heard Rodrigo shouting at him from the ground, just as the light from the Staff and Apple began to fill the underground chamber they all stood in.
“No! You can’t! this way my destiny! Mine! I am the Prophet!”
“You never were,” he said, making his way over to where the forms of little Maria and Luciano de’ Medici stood, eerily glowing eyes blinded to the drama unfolding before them. “Mi dispiace, but there’s one, last thing I need to do, before I can bring you out of this trance you’ve been put in.”
Taking hold of the Staff before him, Ezio felt the rumbling through the floor as the very wall in front of his face opened, in almost the same way that the passage to the chamber that had first brought him to the Vault to begin with had done. Nerving himself for whatever it was that he was about to see, Ezio took a last, deep breath before the plunge. With only a single look back, a silent promise to both his littlest sister and the brother of one of his greatest, departed friends, Ezio made for the room that had been revealed when he’d touched the Staff.
There seemed to be, in addition to the light from the symbols upon the walls, columns, and on the very floor he stood on, a stone sarcophagus of the kind he’d not seen since his hunt for the seals that had opened the way for him to lay claim to Altaïr’s armor. Ezio had only a moment to wonder just what in the world he was going to find in such a place as this, before the ageless figure of a woman, glowing with the same ephemeral light light that he’d seen so many times during his encounters with both the Pieces of Eden and the Treasure Guardians, that he couldn’t quite help the thought that – whoever this strange woman was – she had something to do with both.
“Greetings, Prophet; it is good you have come. Let us see it. To give thanks.”
Mouth hanging slack for a moment, as the ageless woman resolved into both coherence and great beauty before him, Ezio shuddered as he recalled the mindless way that little Maria had handed over the Apple to him, even as he took it out of his own pouch to show to her. She held a hand out over it, summoning even more light from within its depths, before seeming to satisfy herself, somehow.
“We must speak.”
“Who are you?” he wondered aloud; he did not know if such a woman would deign to answer him, even with the apparently high status he seemed to hold in this place, for reasons he was presently unaware of.
“Many names. When I died, it was Minerva. Before that, Merva and Mera. And on, and on. The others, too: Juno, who was before called Uni. Jupiter, who was before called Tinia.”
With those words, the woman before him gestured to a pair of columns that had been covered in the strange, glowing glyphs that seemed to be some kind of a language, though one that Ezio had never seen before; with those words, Ezio realized just what the ageless woman named Minerva truly was: “You are… Gods.”
A gentle laugh, filled with a warm sort of good humor, echoed around the walls.
“No. Not gods. We simply came… before. Even when we walked the world, your kind struggled to understand our existence. We were more… advanced in time. Your minds were not yet ready. Still… not. Maybe never. No matter; you may not comprehend us, but you will comprehend our warning. You must.”
“None of what you are saying makes sense,” he said, as the ageless woman turned to regard the wall, as though she were speaking to it, rather than Ezio himself.
“Our words are not meant for you.” Here, Minerva turned to regard him once more, her tone and her eyes both stern.
Chapter 298: Voices of the past and future
Chapter Text
“What are you talking about?” he asked, not quite having the nerve to make demands of someone like Minerva. “There’s no one else inside here!”
“Enough. I do not wish to speak with you, but through you. You are the Prophet; you’ve played your part. You anchor him, but please be silent. That we may commune. Listen.”
Looking around for whoever it was that Minerva might have been trying to speak to yielded not a single person; little Maria and Luciano were both back in the main room of the Vault, and there was little chance that someone such as Minerva would have had anything to say to Rodrigo Borgia. It made no sense to him, but it was beginning to become clear that there was far more happening on this strange night than even he was aware of.
“When we were still flesh, and our home still whole, your kind betrayed us! We who made you! We, who gave you life! We were strong, but you were many. And both of us craved war. So busy were we with earthly concerns, that we failed to notice the heavens. And by the time we did, the world burned until naught remained but ash. It should have ended then and there. But we built you in our own image. We built you to survive; and so we did. Few were our numbers. Your kind, and mine. It took sacrifice. Strength. Compassion. But we rebuilt. And, as life returned to the world, we endeavored to ensure that this tragedy would not be repeated. But now, we are dying. And time will work against us; truth turned into myth and legend. What we built, misunderstood. Let my words preserve the message, and make a record of our loss. But let my words also bring hope. You must find the other temples; built by those who knew to turn away from war. They worked to protect us; to save us from the fire. If you can find them, if their work can be saved, so too might this world. Be quick! For time grows short; and guard against the Cross, for there are many that will stand in your way.”
Through all of this, Ezio had found himself walking through what seemed to be a projection of the vast, unbounded Heavens, and also of a kind of turmoil that Ezio had never seen before. It seemed as though the entire world had burned, in that long-ago time that Minerva and all of her kind had come from. It was such a terrifying cataclysm that – for just a moment, before he mastered himself once more – Ezio found himself stunned to find that the world had survived at all.
“It is done. The message is delivered. We are gone, now, from this world. All of us; we can do no more. The rest is up to you, Desmond.”
“What? Who is Desmond? I don’t understand! Please, wait!” he called, even as Minerva’s form turned back into light and began to fade away in earnest. “I have so many questions!”
But the Vault was cold and empty, now; there was no one left to hear him; save for a phantom by the name of Desmond who may or may not have existed. Sighing as he turned to leave, with only a last, lingering look at where all of those strange designs had appeared on the walls and columns of the Vault itself even as those columns retracted back into the floor by some mysterious means, Ezio made his way back out of the room he’d once been standing in – before the stone sarcophagus and all of the columns that it had stood behind – and into the large room where he had left both little Maria and Luciano de’ Medici.
Because, while he was almost painfully curious to know just who Desmond was and why Minerva had been so insistent that he was the one destined to receive the message that she had been carrying through time and war alike, there was still the matter of little Maria and Luciano both.
Making his way back out to the room that had once held the conjoined forms of both the Apple and the Staff, and still held the enthralled forms of both of their Guardians, Ezio sighed in relief as he found that the pair of them were still as well as anyone could truly be called when they had all but had their minds torn from their bodies in such a fashion as every poor Guardian who’d had the misfortune to encounter their Piece of Eden in the hands of one who would so grievously misuse it as that fat bastard Rodrigo Borgia had clearly done. Nerving himself for whatever it was that he would have to do, in order to see that little Maria and Luciano were able to recover their senses, after everything that had been done to them, Ezio stepped up to stand before the Staff once more.
It seemed a simple thing, just to reach out and take the Staff from the bracket in the floor where Rodrigo Borgia had clearly set it so firmly as to ensure that it would be free-standing – a thing made all the more obvious by the way little Maria and Luciano only touched it with the very tips of their fingers – but the moment that he reached out to take hold of it, to perhaps wrench it free and thus remove whatever baleful influence it had upon his littlest sister and the brother of one of his good friends, Ezio found that he couldn’t budge the thing even the tiniest bit.
However, when a burst of that same strange, colorless light that had seemingly overtaken the eyes of both little Maria and Luciano de’ Medici this terrible night burst from the head of the Staff, Ezio laughed in surprised relief as he found both of their eyes clearing almost at once. Being forced to catch the insensate form of Luciano as the young man lost his footing, and then to brace himself in turn as – once the Staff had been fully sealed away underneath the hard stone of Il Vaticano’s Vault – the sub-basement room that he was standing in began to descend still further into the Earth was almost a secondary concern, when he looked into little Maria’s eyes and saw the littlest of his sisters looking back again.
“Ezio? Fratello, what’s been happening? I can barely recall anything that’s gone on since we made our way in here…”
“Not tonight, tesoro mio,” he said, reaching out to gently take her left arm as she began to look around at the strange room they were all standing in, even as it underwent yet another transformation. “You’ll find out what happened when everyone else does. For now, let’s just go home, sí?”
“I could hardly have said it better myself, nipote.”
“Uncle?” he called back up, a bit surprised by the old man’s presence, though he probably shouldn’t have been.
“What can I say? We sent two against an entire army. I was worried. Are the three of you going to be able to get out on your own, or should I send someone in with a rope?”
“I think we might be able to manage on our own, sí,” he said, looking up at the walls that were clearly meant to be climbed.
True, he’d never done such a thing as this while attempting to maneuver anyone who was basically semi-conscious before, but as Luciano de’ Medici began to revive in earnest, he was able to move on his own, and hence able to make their task of getting back out of Il Vaticano’s Vault all the simpler. It was another thing to be grateful for, he supposed: that even such a long exposure to the effects of the Staff hadn’t had too terrible of an effect on his brain.
Still, there were clearly some lingering effects, given the way Luciano stumbled about like a drunken man as he tried to walk, before Ezio and Uncle Mario both reached out to steady him.
“Grazie, grazie,” Luciano muttered, in a voice that was weak and shaky even in spite of the obvious way that he tried to steady it. “It feels as though I’ve been wandering through a fog,” he said, panting deeply as the three of them began to make their way up and out of the Vault and back into the free air of Il Vaticano at large.
“You’ve been away from us for some time, Altezza,” Uncle Mario said, as the three of them began making their way up the remaining stairs and into what seemed to be the light of day.
It wasn’t a comforting thought, that he’d spent the entire night among the ruins of the past, hearing from Minerva the story of what had happened and what might well happen again – though it seemed as if such a repetition was a thing for the far-off future, rather than something any of those present in this place and time would need to be worried about – but Ezio continued on his way through the crowds of brown-robed monks that were gathered in this place along with them. A fair few of them looked askance at both little Maria and Luciano both; little Maria for the silver hair that he and Uncle Mario hadn’t had the time or the means to cover from the sight of those who either would not understand the significance of such or else would seek to abuse her for it, and Luciano, likely because he seemed to be recovering from either a long illness or a long night.
He’d no real way of knowing what those uninvolved with their struggle would make of Luciano’s condition, delicate as it still was.
Chapter 299: The bigger picture
Chapter Text
Still, the four of them were able to make their way farther out of the chapel, and then through a courtyard thronged with chattering Cardinals, before they were challenged by men wearing the livery of the Borgia; Ezio found himself pleased that such a thing had taken so long, even though he also wished that it had not happened at all. Taking up a triangular formation around Luciano, as Uncle Mario tossed a sword to little Maria, Ezio fell into the familiar steps of combat once more.
The Borgia dogs fell around the three of them like dry, withered leaves, and Ezio soon found himself without an opponent as little Maria cut the last one on his side down with a sweep of what seemed to be a newly-bought sword.
“We won’t be able to make the rooftops, considering our present circumstances,” Uncle Mario said, and Ezio knew without a look back that his uncle’s focus would have been on the recovering form of Luciano, struggling to keep up with their group as they stuck close to him. “So, we’ll make for the catacombs, which should take us far enough out of the city that we won’t be harassed by any more of the remaining Borgia dogs in place here.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding as the four of them continued on their way, holding formation as they were pressed by more and more of those damned Borgia dogs.
Once they’d managed to make their way to an entrance of the catacombs that he had become so very familiar with, during the course of his search for the six keys to the armor that Altaïr had created, once he’d gotten hold of the Apple and been able to make inquiries of the device, so long ago and far away. Following Uncle Mario down into the catacombs for the first time in a long while, Ezio found that the musty air hit him just as hard as it had the first time he’d gone down into such a place. The fact that he’d no need to go deeper than the surface in this particular occasion made things a great deal easier, and Ezio sighed as he made his way back out into the sunlight once more.
The four of them mounted up on a quartet of horses, and Ezio continued the conversation that the four of them had been having, telling Uncle Mario and all of those around him about just what it was that he and Minerva had been carrying on, deep within the Vault beneath Il Vaticano.
“Sometime far in the future, vero?” Uncle Mario asked, once he’d gotten finished detailing just what it was that Minerva had told him, while the pair of them had spoken together in the Vault. “Then we need not worry about it.”
“Sí,” he said, feeling as though an intangible weight had been lifted from his shoulders. “Perhaps our work is finished.”
“Would that be so bad?” Uncle Mario asked, as the four of them drew ever closer to the high walls and welcoming towers of the fortress-city of Monteriggioni.
Just as he’d begun seriously considering what answer he would give to his curious uncle – because while he was pleased at the prospect of setting down his blades; of not needing to go and hunt down the Templars that remained to threaten what remained of his family after their cruel scheming had taken so many of them from him, but there was also the matter of the threat those same Templars posed to the world and everyone in it – something slammed into the ground at the feet of their horses, startling the beasts into shying and giving Ezio himself almost as bad a start.
Uncle Mario actually laughed, as the four of them struggled to get their horses back under control once more. “We upgraded the arsenal, while you two were away.”
“Ah,” he said, feeling a little off-balance, but swiftly managing to regain himself. “And it is now customary for you to fire cannon balls at visitors?”
“My apologies,” Uncle Mario said, bowing his head slightly in contrition. “We only installed them a few days ago; my men are still being trained in their use.”
“Sul serio?” little Maria demanded, all the fire of an Auditore woman in her yellow eyes. “Just a bit off the mark, and none of us would have been able to make it back to the Villa! Merda! I’m going to have words with them when we get back!”
Ezio laughed softly, as the four of them continued on their way up to the gates of Monteriggioni, he could hear Uncle Mario laughing, as well. Breathing deeply of the fresh air all around them, Ezio found that his thoughts were all too ready to return to the matter of Desmond, and just who he might have been. He might very well have been related to that strange future disaster that Minerva had spoken of, especially considering the way that Minerva had been so eager to speak to him, in particular.
She had said that it was he who anchored Desmond to this time and place, or had at least allowed such a thing to be implied in a way that made it nearly impossible for anyone who had been in such a place to deny.
Once they had all made their way back up to the walls of the fortress-city that had shielded the remnants of the Auditore family for so long, after the Templars and their scheming had killed so many of those who had once lived and worked in Firenze, Ezio felt himself settling fully into himself once more. This place was safe ground, protected by armies – and now, it seemed, by cannons – and Uncle Mario and their fellow Assassins had held it for so long that Ezio felt more than comfortable allowing himself the luxury of a bit of relaxation. Looking up the length of the walls as he, Uncle Mario, little Maria, and Luciano all passed through the gates, Ezio found a smile settling naturally on his face.
This place, of all places, was one that he would always call home.
Chapter 300: The world as it is
Chapter Text
Those all around them, working the various shops, smithies, and taverns in the fortress-city were all quick to offer up their greetings, though some of them were naturally curious about just who the fourth member of their expanded party could have been. Uncle Mario was quick to assure those that asked that their curiosity would be assuaged just as soon as the four of them had managed to settle back into some kind of an organized routine.
“This place just keeps getting better,” he said, smiling widely as he looked around at the fortress-city that he and little Maria had helped bring back to life, after time and lack of care had worn down so much of it.
“Thanks to the both of you,” Uncle Mario said, as the quartet of them dismounted at the base of the stairs leading up to the Auditore villa that presided over Monteriggioni as a lone sentinel against those who might threaten her.
“Fratello! Sorellina!” a familiar voice called out, as Ezio took his first steps on the grounds of his second home in some time.
“Claudia,” he and little Maria called out, almost as one, making their way over to embrace one of the remaining members of their family; one of those who’d stayed home during all of the upheaval that had been been going on, and so had remained protected from the changes that had been wrought in the rest of their family. “It is good to be home,” he continued, stepping back as little Maria kissed their sister on the left cheek. “How is Mother?”
Chapter 301: The Eagle’s talons
Chapter Text
“She’s fine,” Claudia said, her eyes so bright and clear that Ezio couldn’t find it in himself to question her. “I heard you were returning, but I’m glad to see it with my own eyes,” she continued, and now there was something in Claudia’s own eyes that told him that there was something more to what she was about to say than another person might have seen. “The Contessa of Forlì is here to welcome you. I had no idea you were so famous!”
Before he could say even a single word, little Maria burst out laughing. “Oh, ho-ho, the Contessa,” she said, smiling in that way she always did when she was teasing him like the merciless little imp she so clearly was. “Well, I’m sure you don’t want any of us interrupting you, eh fratello?” she drawled, sly smirk widening into an impish grin.
“Don’t you have cannoneers to talk to?” he pressed, giving her a playful glare as the pair of them began making their way up the stairs that would take them to the level that the Auditore villa sat upon. “Go on,” he said, flapping his hands at her, even as he continued on his way up the staircase. “Go, you wicked little imp!”
Laughing as she skipped back and out of the way of his flapping hands, little Maria grinned amusedly at him. “Va bene, fratello, I suppose you wouldn’t want your little sisters getting in your way, when you’re trying to be really charming.”
He lunged for her, grinning even as she danced out of the way of his grasping hands, making her way up the stairs, just out of reach of a casual lunge. Claudia and Uncle Mario both laughed, as he and little Maria chased each other the rest of the way up the stairs, laughing and teasing as the pair of them made it to the top of the stairs for the first time in a long while. Cuddling little Maria as she slowed just enough that he could grab her by the left shoulder and pull her close, he paused for a moment as Claudia composed herself and tried to catch their attention again.
“Is it true, Ezio?” Claudia asked, once she was satisfied of the fact that she had gotten his attention and the pair of them would be able to have the conversation that had likely been interrupted by all of the fracas that he and little Maria had gotten into with each other. “Is the Spaniard truly dead?”
“Call a meeting in your study tonight, uncle,” he requested, pausing for a moment while he considered what else there was to be done at a time such as this. “I will tell you all what happened, when everyone is gathered together and I can say it all at once.”
“Better to have something like that done as quickly as one can, I suppose,” Luciano said, sounding more weary than he’d ever known the man to sound; however, he supposed that he couldn’t have said much, considering how brief a time the pair of them had truly spent together, that first time they had met.
“I suppose it would be better to get you settled, before we begin our work in earnest,” Uncle Mario said, as the five of them began making their way across the grounds of the villa that the Auditore family had built, so long ago when they had first come to settle in Toscana. “Come, Altezza.”
“Perhaps you should no longer call me that,” Luciano said, sounding reflective, as the five of them continued across the grounds of the villa. “I doubt that I will be able to return to Firenze, after such a long time away.”
“Vero, it is true that many of those in Firenze think you dead, Altezza,” Uncle Mario said, as the five of them paused before the imposing form of the villa for a long moment. “Still, I’m sure your own nipote will at least be pleased to know that you managed to survive Savonarola, and all of the madness that was stirred up by him and his thralls.”
“Sí, I suppose you’re right,” Luciano said.
“And I suppose that little Maria and I should go speak to the cannoneers about what happened,” he said, turning to make his way up to the barracks where Mario’s mercenary forces operated out of. “Just to make sure that little Maria doesn’t eat them,” he said, grinning as little Maria herself punched him on her way past.
The pair of them laughed, as they continued on their way up to the barracks. Once they reached that very place, however, they found out that the men who were responsible for firing the cannon that had startled their horses and caused them to shy in such a way as to nearly knock them from their mounts were still up with those selfsame cannons. He and little Maria shared a laugh, shaking their heads as they continued on their way up onto the wall that stood sentinel over the fortress-city where they all lived.
The wall itself was wide enough for at least four people of his approximate size to walk abreast, and gave a wonderfully long view from both sides when one cared to look over the lip of the wall at them. Making his way to the closest of the secondary barracks that stood atop the four corners of the wall that guarded the fortress-city of Monteriggioni, he and little Maria made their way over to the place where a pair of mercenaries that had been assigned as cannoneers were manning one of the huge artillery pieces that had been mounted all along the walls of Monteriggioni.
“So, are these the new cannons?” he asked, as little Maria narrowed her yellow eyes, studying the two men before them as though she couldn’t yet decide just whose head she was going to have for the mishap that had occurred earlier today.
“Sí, Signor Ezio,” the man at the back of the cannon said; Ezio reminded himself to learn their names, when he could find the time to do such.
“And which one of you was the idiota who fired them at us as we were coming up the path?” little Maria demanded acidly, her patience clearly at an end.
“Apologies, signorina,” the man at the right of the cannon said, smiling slightly as little Maria turned the full force of her glare upon him. “No one here is quite certain how to control these beasts, and the fool who mounted them is nowhere to be found.”
“I suppose that it would be my task to go and find him then, sí?” he asked, offering a lopsided smirk to the pair of mercenaries that he was speaking to, even as the pair of them stood over the cannon that had apparently caused so much trouble for the four of them as they had been making their way back up to the gates.
Chapter 302: Brother of the Medici
Chapter Text
Looking back at the heavily-cloaked form of Luciano de’ Medici as the man – nearly Ezio’s age, but seeming far older after everything that had happened to him – followed quietly along just behind him, Mario reflected back on all of the trouble that the Pieces of Eden had caused to those who seemed destined to follow in the wake of those treasures that had been cast off into the world at large.
“What is it, amico?” Luciano asked, as the pair of them continued on their way through the villa’s courtyard and up to the double-doors.
“It’s only a passing thought, Altezza,” he said, pushing open the doors before them and holding them for Luciano as he made his own way in. “Nothing we can really change, after everything that’s happened.”
“I suppose not,” Luciano muttered, as the pair of them made their way up and into the villa once more.
“It’s nothing against you, Altezza,” he said, pausing for a moment to speak to one of his servants, in order to make sure that he and Luciano would be able to have something to eat, once they reached the dining room and could settle down for a bit. “Still, now that you are free from the Borgia, you can at least begin your recovery from what was done to you.”
“I certainly hope so,” Luciano muttered, as the pair of them continued on their way through the cozy halls of the Auditore villa, to a place where the both of them would be able to refresh themselves and rest from everything that had happened. “Still, there are times I wish things could have been different.”
“So do we all,” he said, clapping a companionable hand on the nobleman’s right shoulder, as the pair of them covered the last of the distance between themselves and the dining room where they would be able to rest in comfort.
Chapter 303: Whispers of the Apple
Chapter Text
Sighing as he rubbed his still-ringing ears, Ezio turned to look at little Maria as she continued on her way down the stairs from the wall where they had been speaking with the mercenary cannoneers.
“Dio mio, I think I’m beginning to understand how they could have nearly killed us when we were riding back to the villa,” little Maria said, rubbing her own head in that way one would do when they wished to ward off a headache.
“Sí, those cannons of theirs were certainly a force to be reckoned with,” he said, as the pair of them continued on their way back down to the ground once more.
“They were certainly messy things,” little Maria said, chuckling softly as the pair of them continued on their way back down to the ground where they would be able to move on to whoever would need their aid next. “Destructive, too.”
“Sí, I think they might very well persuade any future attackers to reconsider their ambitions,” he said, chuckling softly as the pair of them stepped down from the wall at last.
The warm, rich scent of his home’s soil nearly distracted Ezio from the fretting man that stood just to the right of the entrance to Monteriggioni itself. Raising an eyebrow as he turned his path to meet with the man, Ezio bid a fond farewell to little Maria as she broke from his side to make her way back into the villa itself.
“Buon giorno,” he said, making his way over to speak with the fretful man before he could worry himself into a fit.
“Ezio,” the old stable-keeper said, with a look on his face as though he’d just found salvation. “Mario is going to murder me! I have lost his favorite horse!”
“Do not despair,” he said, setting a gentle hand on the man’s left shoulder, and then looking out in the indicated direction. “I will bring it back for you.”
“God bless you, Ezio,” the man said, a bit of light seeming to come back to his face, though the worry was still clear.
Making his way to the small stable that stood just inside the entrance to the gates, for those who needed horses to get from one place to another at a far faster pace than any normal man could run, Ezio mounted up and gently steered his own beast out just beyond the walls of Monteriggioni itself.
~AC: Bro~
Shuddering slightly as he listened to the tale of what had happened to Firenze in his absence, Luciano took a longer sip from the wine that Mario Auditore had been so kind as to offer him even as the man had taken him into his home in such a good-hearted way.
“I know that this is not a simple thing to hear, Altezza,” Mario said, the man stubbornly staying with that same form of address, even in spite of the obvious fact that – even if he had been a natural part of the Medici family – he’d not held power in Firenze for such a long time that such titles as he’d once held were basically worthless. “Yet, I fear all of it is true. The mad monk, Savonarola, was able to take power in Firenze, driving the people to such acts as I would have never thought them capable of if I’d not seen the power of the Apple for myself.”
“And, this mad Monk of yours was even able to convince the people of Firenze to turn on my fellows?” he asked, feeling a chill as he reflected upon the fate that could have all too easily been his own, if he’d not been so questionably fortunate as to have encountered that Borgia dog of a Templar who had invaded his home and terrified his nephew and niece so long ago.
“Sí,” Mario said, nodding grimly. “One of those in Firenze, a man by the name of Pietro, was forced to give his life in order to aid in the escape of the other Guardians. Delaying the mad monk’s forces, so that the remaining Guardians would be able to hide themselves down in the catacombs beneath Firenze herself.”
“That eases my mind, at least,” he said, settling back into his seat with a soft, gentle sort of sigh.
Knowing that his people once again had a place in Firenze, even if he himself no longer would, brought at least an easing of the worry that Luciano had been carrying for so long that it had almost seemed to have become part of him, by the time he’d had any opportunity to assuage the concerns that had been plaguing him ever since the light of that damned Staff had overwhelmed his mind and sent him into that strange, misty place between waking and sleeping. Still, even finding out what had happened in Firenze while he had been so unavoidably delayed by the machinations of that fat old Templar who had invaded his home and caused such distress to what remained of his family did not entirely settle his mind.
Because, deny it though Mario Auditore might, there was little chance that there was a man or woman waiting to welcome him back to Firenze once more.
~AC: Bro~
Once he’d managed to corral Uncle Mario’s horse, returning him to the stable-master so that he wouldn’t get in trouble with his uncle or anyone else, Ezio sighed as he stretched his legs, continuing on his way back into the fortress-city that had sheltered the Auditore family since the walls had first been raised in their defense. He even thought that the Auditore family had been founded by the man who first established Monteriggioni as a place of refuge for them. At the moment, his focus was more taken up by enjoying the peace that had settled over the fortress-city like the pleasant heat of a midsummer day.
As he continued on his way up to the ivy-twined staircase, the bas-relief form of the Brotherhood’s sigil was there to greet him, in that way that he had become so used to during the course of his stay in this place. Sighing softly, even as he smiled, Ezio breathed deeply of the warm air around him. He was pleased to know, after everything that had happened during the course of his battle against the Templars and the Borgia that supported them, that he could finally rest after such a long time spent laboring to such an end.
He was pleased to know that he would finally be able to rest from his long labors.
Breathing more deeply as he stepped off of the stairs, continuing on his way across the grounds as the sun slowly made its way westward as the day itself drew to a close, Ezio smiled as he saw the doors to the Auditore villa growing ever clearer in his sight. He remembered just what it was that he and Claudia had discussed; just who it was that was waiting for him to make his way back into the villa so that the pair of them could speak about… whatever it was that Catarina had been so interested in speaking to him about. Whatever it was that had drawn her to the Auditore villa in the first place. He wondered about that, but since he was about to find out such a thing very shortly, he didn’t keep such a thought in his mind for more than a few moments.
Pushing open the double-doors that stood before him, Ezio glimpsed the serene form of Catarina Sforza for the first time since he and little Maria had departed from Forlì on their search for the mad monk, Savonarola; it was a truly welcome sight. Making his way fully into the villa where he and little Maria had been staying, ever since they had been driven from their palazzo by the machinations of the Templars and all of their supporters in Italia, Ezio sighed in relief as he beheld the tall, beautiful form of the woman who had captured his heart, even for so short a time as the pair of them had been able to spend together.
“Buon giorno, Ezio,” Catarina said, turning to face him as he made his way inside.
“Catarina,” he said, smiling widely as he made his way over to the fascinating, beautiful woman who stood before him. “To what do I owe the pleasure of your presence here?”
“I desire… an allegiance. The Papal armies have resumed their march on Forlì,” she said, the stubborn cant to her eyes and lips giving him at least some idea of how troublesome the Borgia must have been proving to her own forces, to drive her so far from home in such a way. “Your mercenaries would be a great asset to my cause,” she continued, as the pair of them began making their way across the richly-carpeted expanse of the villa’s entrance hall.
“It is likely that I can give you what you seek,” he said, knowing that he could very easily do such a thing. “But we will talk later,” he said, as the pair of them made it to the foot of the large, main staircase.
Almost as though she had been waiting for just such a thing, or else had been sent down by those who had all gathered together in Uncle Mario’s study to speak about just what it was that had happened, little Maria came down from the stairs with a look of interest on her face. “Fratello, Uncle Mario and the others wish to see you.”
“To talk about that night, sí?” he asked, knowing that such a thing would have to be the case, as there was little else of import that had happened in such a short time.
“Sí,” she said, nodding as she stepped down from the last step and stood before the pair of them. “Buon giorno, Contessa,” little Maria said, as she nodded kindly to Catarina, who smiled back at her.
“It’s good to see that you’re doing so well, piccola aquila,” Catarina said, smiling gently as she and little Maria faced each other for the first time since the pair of them had met up with her on their way to confront the servants and thralls of Savonarola.
“Grazie, Contessa,” little Maria said, smiling all the wider for the kindness that she was being shown by Catarina. “It was good to see you again, but there are things that Ezio and I need to talk about.”
“Matters of import to your Brotherhood, sí?” she asked, the look on her face telling that she understood perfectly.
“Sí,” he said, nodding as he moved to stand next to little Maria on the stairs. “I suppose we should get going now.”
“I certainly won’t keep you any longer than you can stay, cara mio,” Catarina said, smiling as she sashayed off once more.
He could practically hear little Maria grinning, as the pair of them began making their way up the main staircase, aiming for Uncle Mario’s study so that they would be able to speak about what had gone on during the time that he had spent down in the Vault beneath Il Vaticano. “Not a word, sorellina,” he said, grinning in response to the look of mischief in the making on her still-impish face.
“I hardly said anything, fratello,” she said, still grinning at him in that way he’d come to know so well.
“Of course,” he said, as the pair of them continued on their way up the main staircase so that they would be able to speak about Minerva, the Vault, and all of the strange things that he had seen on that strangest of nights.
Perhaps he would even be able to find out about the phantom named Desmond, and just what it was about him that had drawn Minerva’s attention across the centuries – perhaps even millennia – that separated the world he knew from the world that she had come from.
Once he and little Maria had made their way up to Uncle Mario’s study, with Ezio pausing for a moment to gather himself and organize his thoughts, Ezio pushed his way inside and paused to allow little Maria to make her own way inside. Several of those who had been present for the full assembly of the Assassin Codex were also present in Uncle Mario’s study, with only Teodora, Antonio, Bartolomeo, and Paola missing from the assembly. He wondered, for a moment, if they were going to be informed of the matters that would be under discussion at this meeting later, then decided that such a thing was likely to be at Mario’s discretion.
And, like as not, his uncle would compose letters for the three of them as soon as this particular meeting was concluded.
“Mother!” he called happily, making his way over to the stern, lively woman whose recovery he’d not been so fortunate as to witness, though he could see the results standing before him even now; it was the happiest he’d found himself since he and Catarina had parted company, accompanied by the teasing voice of his littlest sister.
“Machiavelli,” he said, greeting the man who seemed to stand in place of those four who had either been held back by other obligations, or else were simply counting upon being informed later. “It is done,” he said, to the stern man who seemed to be one of his – if not the Brotherhood’s as a whole – most dedicated critics. “Though not, I think, as any of us expected,” he continued, turning to take in the rest of those gathered in his uncle’s study with a long, sweeping glance; and then, breathing deeply, he began his recounting: “I entered Il Vaticano and faced Rodrigo. He used the power of the Papal Staff against me, and also the control it granted him over the body – if not the mind – of Luciano de’ Medici. However, little Maria and I were able to defeat Rodrigo, and hold off Luciano long enough to bring him back to his senses. That was when little Maria and I were forced to part: as I combined the Staff with the Apple, and so gained access to the Vault. Down there,” he paused for a moment, scarcely able to believe what had happened himself, though he’d seen it with his own eyes, and heard it with his own ears. “A moving painting of the goddess Minerva spoke. She told of a terrible tragedy to befall mankind in the future, but gave hope of lost temples that will provide aid to humanity. And called out to a phantom, Desmond, as though he were standing alongside me in that place. After her warning, she vanished.”
“Amazing,” Catarina said, the willful woman clearly having followed him up the stairs while he had been distracted by little Maria and their playful banter with one another.
“I cannot imagine such wonders!” Claudia exclaimed, a look of fascination on her face, clearly wishing more than anything that she herself could have seen such things as he’d only been able to describe to them, and not nearly as well as he would have liked, at that.
Chapter 304: The name of Desmond
Chapter Text
He almost wished that he could have shown her – shown them all – just what it was that he had seen, down in the Vault while he had been speaking to her, since he was finding that his own skill with words was not entirely sufficient to describe just what it was that he had seen and heard down in that mysterious place beneath the ornate floors of Il Vaticano.
“The Vault did not house the terrible weapon we feared,” Machiavelli said, stepping forward with a look of relief on his stern face. “This is good news!”
“What of this goddess, this Minerva?” Claudia asked, turning their attention to other matters. “Did she appear human?”
“Sí, but her words proved otherwise,” he said, thinking back upon the strange woman he had seen for so short a time in the depths of the Vault. “All of her kind died many years ago,” he paused for a moment, feeling profoundly reflective once again. “I wish I could show you the magic she performed. There was also something about her eyes,” he said, turning to look at little Maria, where she stood with their mother and Claudia. “They looked a great deal like yours, and even resembled those of the man in black.”
“They did?” little Maria asked, a look of interested surprise overtaking her face.
“Even down to the color,” he confirmed, nodding at the expression of fascination that he could see spreading across the faces of both of his little sisters.
“Be that as it may, I’m more interested in who this Desmond might be, as well as where those temples that Minerva spoke about,” Uncle Mario said, going to his desk so that he would be able to rummage through one of the drawers. “And, since it appears that this Minerva you met has something in common with our man in black,” he continued, narrowing his eyes slightly as he took the Apple from its resting place, face taking on an expression of supreme concentration for a long moment. “Hmm. It seems I don’t have the knack for it. Do you think you could do something with this, nipote?”
Taking the Apple from his uncle as the man handed it over, Ezio felt the familiar thrumming through his hand as the strange artifact began to activate once more. The familiar form of the man in black began taking shape, as the artifact activated once more.
“Amico, do you know of anyone named Desmond?” he asked, as the man in black became fully visible once more, pulling back his hood to reveal voluminous silver hair, and yellow eyes of the same kind that he had seen every time that little Maria would look at him, and when he had looked into the ageless face of Minerva, that night in the Vault beneath Il Vaticano.
“Have you tried looking behind you?” the man in black asked, an enigmatic expression on his face, as his gaze turned to take in what seemed to be empty space, above and just behind Ezio’s right shoulder.
“What do you mean, amico?” little Maria asked, before Ezio himself could have articulated such a question for himself.
In the blink of an eye, the man in black was at her side, right hand coming to rest on her left shoulder, as his gaze turned to stay fixed on the spot that seemed to be as perfectly empty as all of the air in Mario’s study; there was an odd sort of intensity to his gaze as he continued to study that place in particular. “Concentrate,” he said, that same intensity coming into his voice.
“Dio mio!” little Maria exclaimed, after a long moment spent studying the space that was apparently not so empty as it had appeared. “There is a phantom there!”
Turning to look back over his own right shoulder, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he tried to catch a glimpse of the phantom that seemed to have attached itself to him in some manner or other; perhaps even the very phantom that Minerva had been attempting to speak to, that night within the Vault. Before any one of them could say a single thing, however, the man in black dashed forward with that same, preternatural speed that he had demonstrated so many times in battle against those forces that had served to draw him from the Apple where he rested. His left hand seemed to strike out at empty air, but the results of such a thing were far from anything that Ezio had been led to expect.
The phantom that had apparently been following him staggered backwards, as though the strike to its chest had been a sharp, sudden blow, as opposed to the way the man in black had held himself back from anything but the most gentle of impacts. The phantom appeared before all of them, seeming to assemble itself out of the very light within Mario’s study, the point where the man in black had touched the phantom’s chest seeming to be the point from where he assembled himself.
“What the hell?” the phantom demanded, strangely accented voice echoing through the room as he examined his hands.
“Desmond?” he called, drawing the attention of the phantom that seemed to have been following him, for at least as long as he’d been speaking to Minerva within the depths of the Vault.
“Fuck; you can see me?” the phantom – clearly named Desmond, if everything he had heard within the depths of the Vault had been true – demanded, a look of startlement on his face that seemed to be shading into at least some kind of fear the longer he watched. “Wait, is that Aeon?”
“Aeon?” he echoed, looking back over at the man in black, who seemed to be rather interested in the conversation taking place all around them.
“Yeah,” the phantom named Desmond said, the fear overtaking his expression seeming to be washed away by curiosity, as he continued to study the man in black in a manner that suggested he at least knew of the man. “Aeon, the… The undying? The ageless? Something; it was something to do with time…” Desmond stopped suddenly, looking around at all of those who had gathered in Uncle Mario’s study in an effort to understand just what it was that Minerva had been trying to tell them on that night of all nights. “Oh, fuck me,” he said, right hand over his eyes and the smile on his face that of a man who had done something utterly foolish without realizing it at first. “I think… I think I just… broke…time.”
Desmond seemed to dodge backward, then, the flecks of light that had seemed to have assembled his oddly-clothed form peeling away from him as though washed off in some kind of rainstorm, or else having been outright rejected by the phantom himself; cast off, by the will of the phantom that Minerva had clearly been addressing, in her own way.
“Wait!” he called, even as Desmond vanished once again into whatever strange place it was that he inhabited when he wasn’t interacting with them through whatever strange means that the man in black – Ezio wondered if Aeon was indeed his name – had employed to bring him into the sight of those who had gathered together in Uncle Mario’s study in order that they might be able to find out just what Minerva had been talking about, that night they had spoken to each other in the Vault.
Chapter 305: Men in black
Chapter Text
“I don’t think he’s listening to you anymore, fratello,” little Maria said, seeming amused by whatever it was that she was currently seeing. “He’s even trying to dodge the man in black, now.”
“Amico,” he called, drawing the attention of the man in black, just as he seemed about to make another attempt to reveal the phantom named Desmond, who seemed to be making every effort to keep him from doing that very thing. “Is your name indeed Aeon?”
“Indeed,” he said, dipping his head slightly, as he drew himself back to his full height, a look of interest on his face.
“Why was it that he knew your name, when none of us did?” Claudia demanded, not sounding particularly pleased with the secrecy that Aeon seemed to live and breathe on, even though he seemed to lack both life and breath at this point in time.
“It seems that, given how he was acting and what he said, that Desmond is from the future,” he said, the idea just as strange to him as it seemed to be to everyone else who had arranged themselves in Uncle Mario’s study.
“Ah, perhaps that is the reason that Minerva was so eager to speak with you,” Uncle Mario said, some form of understanding lighting his face, even in spite of all the oddness he was currently bearing witness to. “She could see Desmond following alongside you, even as Aeon himself could.”
“What do you say to all of this, Aeon?” he asked, turning to look at the man in black, who seemed to be observing the goings-on with a certain interest; he supposed that it was only natural, since it did have to do with him, if only in the most esoteric of ways.
“I suppose that some of you would have been more pleased if I had introduced myself sooner,” Aeon said, sounding rather contemplative about the whole affair.
“Sí, some of us would have,” he said, giving Claudia a rather amused look, which his little sister returned by sticking her tongue out at him. “But, all people should have the opportunity to introduce themselves in their own time, so I suppose I can understand your caution. It seems you’ve been staying within that Apple of yours for a great long time.”
“Sí, you would have to be ageless, to have known Altaïr when he was at the height of his prowess in Syria, and then to be able to speak with us here in Italia,” Machiavelli said, stepping forward so that he could study Aeon in more detail than anyone else present seemed to be interested in doing.
“I still find it odd to think that there has been a phantom following us for so long as this Desmond of yours seems to have been doing,” Uncle Mario said, looking at the empty air that Aeon had been so quick to point out as the place where Desmond had been standing; and perhaps was even still standing, depending on circumstances that Ezio could not quite understand. “Aeon, is he still there?”
“He never left,” the man said, looking once again at the space behind Ezio’s right shoulder, where it seemed that Desmond remained standing. “Though he seems to be a great deal more eager to stay out of sight.”
“Sí, I would expect so,” he said, turning back briefly to nod at the phantom – apparently a man from the future, by the name of Desmond – before returning his focus to the rest of those who had gathered in Uncle Mario’s study in order to find out more about what had happened on that night in the Vault. “Given how worried he seemed about the course of history, even considering how little he said.”
“Sí, but all of that can wait for later,” Machiavelli said, stern expression coming back to his face as he drew himself back up to his full height once more. “I would like to know how your confrontation with Borgia ended, since it seems that we are not going to be the beneficiary of any any knowledge that the future might hold,” he continued, casting a gimlet eye upon the empty space where Desmond was still standing, at least according to everything that Aeon had been willing to tell them.
“Don’t press him so, Niccolò,” he said, folding his arms even as he cast a reassuring glance over his right shoulder, where Desmond was clearly still standing. “Neither we nor he has any way of knowing what might happen, if he were to speak too freely of what he knows.”
“Bene,” Machiavelli said, though he still didn’t seem pleased by how their conversation had turned. “Just, tell me how it finished with Borgia. Did Rodrigo beg forgiveness? Make excuses? Promise power, in return for his life?”
“No, none of those things,” he said, knowing what it was that Machiavelli was getting at, but still finding himself curious as to just what the man would make of the decision that he himself had ultimately made, with regards to the old Templar.
“Interesting,” Machiavelli said, turning away for a long moment, and then returning his focus to their conversation, a look of contemplation on his face. “I’m surprised he remained so composed, even to the end.”
“I let him live,” he said, not wanting Machiavelli to get the wrong impression, and by this point morbidly curious about just what kind of a reaction his decision would draw from the cynical Assassin.
“The Spaniard lives?!” Machiavelli demanded, turning back with a furious expression on his face. Then, seeming to have to force himself to swallow the rage and frustration he so clearly felt at merely hearing what it was that Ezio had decided to do with the man who had been their enemy for so long, Machiavelli simply glared sternly. “When our enemies are dead, then we may speak of Vaults, and gods, and ancient places,” Machiavelli paused for a moment, casting a gimlet eye once again upon the place where Desmond had last been seen when Aeon had revealed him to all of them. “You should have killed him. We’re sure to suffer for it.”
“I am not here to debate the past,” he said, moving to stand with Machiavelli even as the most cynical of his brother Assassins turned away from him. “Together, we should discuss the future.”
“No, I am leaving immediately for Roma,” Machiavelli said, stern disapproval writ large in every line of his proud face as he suited actions to words, departing with a grim sort of finality.
“Ezio, I do not know why you spared Rodrigo, but I trust your judgment,” Mario said, coming up beside him to clap a hearty hand on his left shoulder. “Machiavelli will come around.”
“We can only hope,” he said, trying to smile for all of his brother and sister Assassins that had gathered together in this place. “Grazie for all of your understanding, mi amici.”
Chapter 306: A night’s romance
Chapter Text
“Come, caro,” Catarina said, smiling gently at him as all of them began making their way down to the dining room so that they would be able to have dinner. “We shouldn’t be late.”
Chuckling softly, Ezio found himself almost involuntarily wondering just when Desmond would be eating; when he slept, or even if such a phantom as he seemed to be even needed to do such things. It was a strange thing to consider, but after Aeon and Minerva had both revealed that there was indeed someone following in his wake – rather, after Minerva had planted the idea of such a thing and Aeon had revealed that it was indeed true – Ezio had found himself wondering a great many things about the man who seemed to be following in his wake for some reason that he didn’t know if he would ever be able to find out. He wondered, again, if Desmond had even known it himself, when all of this madness had begun.
Sighing softly as he and all of his family – Assassin and not – all settled themselves around the grand table that had been set out for them all when they had arrived, Ezio found that he’d little appetite after all that he had seen and heard on this strangest of nights. And so, eating lightly of the stuffed chicken with roasted vegetables, Ezio listened with half an ear to the subdued conversations taking place all around the table. As he'd been expecting, they revolved for the most part around Aeon and Desmond.
Ezio had found himself wondering just the same, though it also seemed that there would be no answers forthcoming, since Aeon had returned to the Apple and Desmond seemed concerned with preserving the course of history as he’d apparently known it. And yes, such was likely a worthy concern for one who lived on the other side of the history he’d been bearing witness to, but Ezio could not quite find it in himself to be so sanguine about such things when he himself was going to be living that same history.
Perhaps it was to avoid such questions that Aeon himself had chosen to return to his repose within the Apple, as well.
Ezio knew that he was unlikely to find the kind of answers he sought so soon, particularly since it was clear that Aeon wasn’t going to speak of them, and there was little chance that he could go back to Il Vaticano and speak to Minerva once more. Truly, it seemed as though the only thing he could do was get some rest. And, after the tension that had been keeping him awake throughout the course of the meeting that he’d had with his brother and sister Assassins had slowly but steadily drained away while he and his family had been having dinner together, Ezio felt more than ready to do such.
He could only hope that he would have the chance to rest, considering the worries that Machiavelli had brought up in his mind; the concern that Rodrigo Borgia, since he’d not killed the old Templar when he’d been given the chance, would come back at the head of another attacking force.
When he’d made his way back to his room, trying as hard as he could not to drag his feet as he trudged up the stairs and down the hall to where he’d spent so much time during the course of his hunt for the Templars who had been corrupting the cities of Italia and scheming to enslave their people, Ezio found himself almost involuntarily yawning as he made his way into his room. It was pleasant to think about, that he would at least be able to get one uninterrupted night of sleep, before he and his fellow Assassins would be required to return their attention to the matter of the Templars that remained at large in the world as a whole.
Making his way over to the bath that had so obligingly been drawn for him, Ezio meticulously shed his clothes and weapons and settled them neatly atop his bed, and in the locked elm chest where he stored the Codex weaponry that Leonardo had so obligingly created for him. Sighing with a profound sort of relief as he submerged himself in the bath that had been provided for him, likely when he’d finished dinner and had started on his way up to his bedroom, Ezio felt a contented smile stretching his mouth as he spotted Catarina making her way in.
“Welcome home,” the Duchess said, a smile on her face that matched the glint of mischief in her eyes.
“Catarina,” he said, smiling wider as she settled herself down next to him.
Little Maria would tease him to no end, if she found out just what it was that he and Catarina were doing, but he would at least try not to allow his irrepressible imp of a littlest sister to find out what he’d been getting up to while he was ostensibly trying to rest from such a long series of tasks as the pair of them had been about for such a time as they had.
Still, it was not as though he would be needing so much sleep, so Ezio allowed himself to relax into the rhythm of his and Catarina’s lovemaking. They spent the night in just that way: learning each other’s bodies and what would bring each of them the most pleasure when it was done in just such a way, and thus sharing the most intimate of embraces throughout the long, dark night. He did end up getting some sleep, evidently, considering how rested he felt in when the morning light began slanting in through the windows on the eastern side of his room.
Chapter 307: The attack at dawn
Chapter Text
She’d been more than prepared to rest through the morning, considering everything that had happened to her and Ezio all through the night, when the rumble and rattle of cannons firing caused Maria to sit up in bed. She remembered hearing that the cannoneers were going to be practicing with the weapons that they had installed on the battlements for the protection of Monteriggioni and all of her people, but the sight of a cannon ball skipping in through her very window put paid to any such thoughts before they could truly have formed in the first place.
“Merda,” she growled, leaning down to grab her sword and hidden blades from the cherry wood chest where she kept them, before grabbing up her armor and Assassin robes, dressing as quickly as she could while making her way out to the window beside the one that had been blown out by the cannon shot that had landed a ball in her very room.
Grumbling to herself as she climbed up and out of the room where she had been slumbering during the night before, Maria beheld the devastation slowly overtaking the second home that she, Ezio, Mother, and Claudia had all taken shelter at after the destruction of their old palazzo back in Firenze.
“Sorellina!” Ezio called, clearly having caught sight of her while she herself had been searching for him, in turn.
“Fratello!” she called, turning to face the rumpled form of her last brother; it was clear that he’d been caught far more by surprise than she had been. She’d have wondered what he’d been doing, last night, but now was hardly the time for that kind of thing. “Here, take this!”
“No, keep your sword, sorellina,” her last brother said firmly, putting the blade back in her own hands. “I want you to help with the evacuation; see that none of our people fall into the enemy’s hands.”
“Bene, I suppose you’ll be searching for whatever bastardi saw fit to attack us, then?” she asked, bracing herself against the lurch and sway of the ground as another cannonball skipped over the far wall and buried itself in the ground.
~AC: Bro~
“Sí,” he said, knowing that little Maria would do as he asked, but still apprehensive considering everything that was going on, on this day of days.
The pair of them broke apart, after he’d gotten her promise to give what aid she could to their citizens who lived and worked within the walls of Monteriggioni, and Ezio leaped down as well as he could from the balcony where the pair of them had met. The sight of Uncle Mario, standing beside the black-cloaked form of Aeon, drew his attention and brought a smile to his face at once.
“It’s the Borgia!” Uncle Mario said urgently, even as the man helped him back to his feet.
“How did we not see this?” he demanded, nodding to Aeon as he caught the man’s yellow eyes, even hidden as they were within the deep shadows of his heavy-looking hood.
“They must have massed to the East, during the night,” his uncle said, pointing in the direction of where the Borgia encampment had to have been. “We need to hold them off, until the last of the townspeople have escaped.”
“I will take care of it,” he said, turning his attention back to the waiting form of Aeon, where he’d stood watching them. “Would you look after my uncle, amico?”
Before anyone could say so much as another word, the balcony they were standing under began to collapse, and Ezio felt his uncle pulling him forward before the debris from the shattered structure could have fallen down on him. Aeon had leaped forward with that same, preternatural speed that he’d seen the man in black demonstrate on many occasions, even though Ezio had never seen any indication that Aeon could actually be harmed by anything that did not damage his Apple.
“Use the cannons above the ramparts,” Uncle Mario said, after a brief glance at Aeon where he stood. “I intend to lead a frontal assault.”
“Aeon, will you look after him, mi amico?”
A silent nod was the only answer the man in black gave, shadowed gaze now focused firmly upon the advancing ranks of Borgia soldiery making their way up and over the walls that had once stood sentinel over Monteriggioni. Sighing for all the destruction he was witnessing, feeling the same emptiness that he’d felt when he’d lost his home in the palazzo Auditore in Firenze creeping up on him, Ezio forced it back down with the knowledge of just how many people were depending on him at this of all moments.
“The Borgia must not be allowed to breach the walls until everyone is safely away! Insieme per la vittoria!”
“Insieme,” he replied, taking his uncle’s hand in a firm, comradely grasp, before passing that same hand through the space where Aeon’s right shoulder would have been if the man in black was at all solid. “Take care of each other.”
With those as his last words to his uncle and Aeon both, Ezio turned to run for the main street that led through the center of Monteriggioni, leaping over the railing of the stairs and down onto a horse that almost seemed to have been waiting for him down there. Taking only a moment to catch his breath, given what was happening and the feel of time itself closing in all around him, Ezio set off for the far walls of the fortress-city that seemed to be falling all around him.
He could see a flash of silver hair, above the clothes of a nobleman that Uncle Mario had given to Luciano de’ Medici when they had recovered the man from the clutches of Rodrigo Borgia, and called his thanks to the man as he gave what aid he himself could in defense of the people of the fortress-city.
As he rode for the far walls, making for the cannons that Uncle Mario had directed him to man in order to aid in defense of the people fleeing so desperately from the Borgia soldiers closing in all around them, Ezio was forced to steel his heart against the scenes of carnage and devastation all around him. There was almost no doubt in his mind that, aside from the terror spread in the wake of such an attack as this one, the butchery of the citizens all around him was a coldly calculated act. The Borgia, after all, knew that this was a stronghold of the Assassins.
It seemed as though he was either contending with that heartless bastard of a Pope that he’d faced within the walls of Il Vaticano, or else a man just as cruel; neither was a hopeful thought.
Once he’d made it up to the high walls that stood over the city, cracking and chipped, and missing in places where cannon shot had slammed into them, Ezio was forced to dodge yet more falling masonry as the top of the wall nearest to him was battered by another shot. He could hear the gruff voice of the grizzled master-sergeant in command of the guns snapping out orders, even as he scrabbled his way up the wall and made his way up onto the battlements. The wall under his feet shuddered and shook, as he hurried over to the first group of cannoneers.
Chapter 308: Closing the trap
Chapter Text
Breath heavy in her throat as she continued directing the evacuation of those who had once been her fellow citizens not even a single day ago, Maria flicked yet more blood from her sword, and then went back to hunting Borgia soldiers once again. She’d seen horrors beyond even those that she’d been privy to while she and Ezio had been hunting Templars throughout the length and breadth of Italia, but gutting the dog soldiers and leaving them to scream themselves to death upon the flagstones provided at least something of a balm, when she found herself thinking of those she’d been unable to save.
“Signorina, this area is nearly clear, but there are other places that will be needing you,” one of Uncle Mario’s mercenary forces said; a man whose name she couldn’t quite call to mind at the moment.
“I’d best hurry, then,” she said, nodding sharply as she swiped her blade clean and then sheathed it so she could run, following the direction of the man’s pointing finger.
“Bene, signorina,” the man said, nodding sharply. “It’s good to have you here.”
~AC: Bro~
The sight of Aeon’s twinned blades, shining with what seemed to be a strange inner-light of their own, would have been unsettling enough on their own, but the cauterized wounds they left behind made things yet more strange and abnormal. Mario still wasn’t sure just what to make of Aeon or the swords he used, but in this case he was at least pleased to have the man in black fighting at his side. The Borgia soldiers who had set themselves against the pair of them had swiftly learned to fear both the prowess and the power of the man in black who stood at his side; not a one of them was willing to come within the range of his shining blades.
However, considering the preternatural speed that Aeon had shown himself to be capable of, there was almost no getting beyond the range of his shining blades.
The sight of the commander of the Borgia forces, a man named Cesare, drew both his and Aeon’s attention as the man stalked his way onto the battlefield with them. It seemed that, even with the sight of so many of his soldiers having been cut down by the shining blades that Aeon fought with, Cesare was insisting that they go in and fight. The man was clearly far too much a Templar for his own good.
~AC: Bro~
Breathing heavily, the feel of the cannon slamming into his hands still making itself known as a sort of phantom-pain, Ezio raised the sword that he’d appropriated from one of the dead Borgia soldiers scattered along the top of the wall where he’d been fighting so many of them, cutting down the man standing in his way and trampling over his corpse. He’d seen the Borgia soldiers stampeding over the shattered remains of the main gates, and so he knew that he was going to have to go back down into the streets of Monteriggioni to aid in the escape of her remaining citizens.
Leaping back down onto the rooftops once more, Ezio made his way back down to the streets, cleaving through a trio of Borgia soldiers in his way as they turned their attention to a fleeing woman who was gathering up her scattered children. Shuddering as the thought of what had been happening to the people of his home – the place that he would soon be forced to depart from in order to save himself and those people that he still had left – crashed down on him in almost the same sort of way that the collapsing structures all around him were doing.
~AC: Bro~
Reaching up to swipe away at least some of the blood streaming down his face as he tried to catch his breath, Luciano turned as he heard the sound of stalking footsteps from behind him.
“Well, it seems that I will have the chance to rid myself of at least one of your infuriating kind, bambino,” an ugly voice, coming from an equally ugly man, drew Luciano’s attention to the finely dressed figure who seemed to be commanding the troops that had invaded the city he’d been invited to stay in by those who had allied themselves with the family who had taken him in for such a long time.
Gathering himself once again, Luciano narrowed his eyes as he focused on the man standing before him. There was something familiar about the man, as though the pair of them had met – perhaps during the time that he’d spent under the thrall of Rodrigo Borgia and that damned Apple of his – some time before this day. Those were hardly pleasant thoughts, both that he’d missed so much of his life, and that he’d spent so much time under the thrall of the Borgia, but Luciano shoved those thoughts aside as he brandished his sword and stepped forward to combat the man standing before him.
This new Borgia man, Cesare, fought like the demon his eyes so resembled, and Luciano found himself pressed to the limits of his waning strength.
Considering all of the soldiery he’d just fought his way through, Luciano had his private doubts that he’d be able to make it to the end of the battle that he was currently confronted with. Still, if nothing else, he could at least give a good account of himself in this battle. Truly, if this was to be his last battle, Luciano would make certain that the Borgia, at least, would not soon forget him.
Chapter 309: Luciano de’ Medici
Chapter Text
Finding himself staring down at the shattered remains of the main gate, after having hurried there as fast as he could in order to reinforce the defenses at that most crucial of points, Ezio swiftly found himself confronted by the staggering, bloodied, half-blind form of Luciano de’ Medici, as well as the ugly, cruel-faced man who seemed to be leading the assault on his home.
“I know you’re there, Ezio!” the man called up, the notes of challenge and triumph both clear in his tone. “The Pope told me about you and your little group of Assassins! And the Apple that you hold! There has been too much bloodshed. I think a cleansing is in order!” the man shouted up to him, and Ezio could almost see the expression of false regret that had been painted across the man’s face. “So, consider this an invitation, from my family, to yours!”
The shot that tore through the back of Luciano’s head, spattering the flagstones with yet more blood from the undeserving, was timed almost perfectly with the shot that tore through Ezio’s own right shoulder…
Chapter 310: Shattered tranquility
Chapter Text
Finding himself being dragged by a pair of men who were dressed in the familiar garb of thieves, Ezio woke up to the sounds of continuing battle all around him, and the sight of night falling above him.
“Basta, I can walk,” he said, as the two men dragging him stopped to look down at him.
“Look out!” one of the men shouted, drawing Ezio’s attention to the advancing forms of yet more Borgia soldiers. “They are coming! Everyone, retreat to the Villa!”
Knowing that he would soon be called upon to defend those remaining – those of his friends and allies who had not fallen before his very eyes, as Luciano had – Ezio forced himself back to his feet. He’d lost the sword he’d been carrying, and knew that with the injuries he’d taken during the siege he would not be able to fight with the full strength that he possessed.
“I cannot fight like this! Stand with me!” he called, feeling a certain wash of relief as a group of Mario’s mercenary forces, along with a small group of thieves, all came to his aid.
Grabbing a sword as one of the thieves tossed it to him, Ezio gathered himself as he and his charged the group of Borgia soldiers who were even as he watched swarming into the street after them. Cutting down the men who stood in his way, Ezio felt a smile stretching his face as he heard the sound of the familiar voices of Claudia and little Maria, though the thought of so many Borgia soldiers pressing in all around them was not a hopeful one in the least.
Hurrying on to meet with the pair of them, knowing that even little Maria’s skill wouldn’t be enough to hold off such a large group of soldiery indefinitely, Ezio dashed up the two sets of stairs that stood before him, catching his first glimpse of his sisters amid the press of Borgia solders and corpses.
“Ezio! Grazie a dio, it’s good to see you again!” little Maria shouted, kicking aside an attacking soldier, and stabbing another one as he jogged up to meet with the pair of them.
“Come! We have to get to the tunnels!” Claudia exclaimed, before he could say so much as another word.
“Sí! We’re with you, sorellina!” he said, falling in beside his little sisters.
Together, he and little Maria were able to clear a path for Claudia, meeting up with a group of thieves on their way back into the Auditore villa. Ezio almost wished that he could have stopped for a moment, if only for the fact that he knew that he was not likely to see this place again, but he knew that there were too many things to do at the moment to allow himself to be taken by sentiment. It was a sad thought, but Ezio knew that he could hardly think about things like that at a moment like this.
Dashing through the main building, saying what farewells he could at such a tumultuous time, Ezio soon found himself back in Mario’s study once more.
The passage behind the bookcase had already been opened, just as he’d been expecting, and the younger mercenary guarding it it quickly volunteered his services to hold off the advancing troops.
“Stop! Wait for us!” he called, just as the old thief – a man with a weathered face an only one good eye – was about to go running down into the tunnel; that man would hardly know how to close the hidden door, and if they were discovered along this rout, all of their preparations would be for naught.
“We thought you had been killed, Ser Ezio,” the man said, a look of shock on his face; Ezio could hardly blame him, under the circumstances.
“Not yet,” he said, suffused with a grim sort of pleasure.
“Where does this passage lead?”
“To the North, outside the walls,” he said, chivvying first Claudia and then little Maria down into the tunnel.
“I am surprised it exists,” the one-eyed man said, and Ezio nodded absently, even as he stepped down on the trigger that would close the passageway up again. “Let me through!” the man called, though Ezio was hardly stopping him. “I must go help the troops!”
“Bene,” he muttered, once the hidden passage had been firmly sealed away behind the bookcase, before he moved to block it yet further with the aid of a pair of heavy iron bars.
Hearing both Claudia and little Maria calling for him, Ezio hurried down the stairs.
“Where’s Mother? Is she all right?” he called, once he’d descended deep enough that he’d little need to worry about his voice carrying over the noise of battle.
“I am here, Ezio!” Mother called back; and even in the midst of all that he’d seen on this terrible day, Ezio still felt a certain warmth at the knowledge that his mother had at last managed to fully recover her Self from the ordeals she had been put through at the hands of so many of their enemies.
“Grazie a dio,” he said, knowing that he would soon be able to recover from at least some of the wounds that had been inflicted on him during the battle that he’d just participated in.
Making his way down into the Sanctuary once more, Ezio hurried over to where Maria, little Maria, and Claudia were all gathered before the statue of Altaïr, Ezio shared an embrace with the three of them. It was, of necessity, a short one, and after that he found himself sat down on a nearby stone bench while Claudia and little Maria treated his wounds. One of the mercenaries that he’d found himself fighting beside during the press and crush of battle asked about the hidden door that Maria had evidently told him about, and Ezio directed him to twist a lever hidden in the statue of Altaïr.
The hidden door swung open easily, revealing the entrance to the escape tunnel that would take all of them – those who had managed to make it to this place, at least – to the countryside, half a mile beyond the limits of the besieged, fallen city that they had all once called home. Once his wounds had been tended to, at least as best they could be considering the situation they all found themselves in, Ezio stood back up and hurried over to the entrance to the tunnel. Joining in with Claudia, little Maria, and Mother as they urged the remaining citizens into the gaping mouth of the tunnel.
“How was Mario? Have you seen him?” Claudia asked, in the breathless moments when the last of the citizens had gone down into the tunnels, but before the remaining Assassin forces had departed.
“He was with Aeon, the last I saw him,” he informed them, as their remaining Assassin troops made their own way down into the tunnel. “He should be safe.”
“I hope so,” Claudia said, though she still sounded rather disapproving.
He supposed that she still hadn’t quite forgiven Aeon for keeping his name secret from all of them the way he’d done.
Chapter 311: What is to come
Chapter Text
Their own descent into the tunnels was marked by the ominous sounds of cannon fire and rumbling from above them, as Monteriggioni’s remaining defenses fell under the determined assault of the Borgia forces. Sighing even as he shuddered slightly, Ezio pressed forward. The sound of explosions from behind them, roughly in the direction of Mario’s study – Ezio even found himself wondering how their uncle was doing, even with Aeon to aid him – drew his attention, and he knew that it wouldn’t be long before he and the others found themselves the targets of yet more of the Borgia’s dog soldiers.
The sound of the doors behind them being smashed open at last let Ezio know that their reprieve from the Borgia’s relentless attacks had just run out. The sudden appearance of charging soldiers within the tunnel itself prompted Ezio to slam down the gate he’d been waiting at the controls of, crushing one of them under it and leaving the others to batter against the gate until they either gave up or all of the citizens down in the tunnels had been able to escape from them at the last.
As they all made their way through the tunnels, crossing over the various mechanisms that all of the Auditore family who had lived in this place before them had designed in order to hold back any enemies that might have been able to find the entrance to the tunnel, Ezio and little Maria both worked in tandem to raise those selfsame defenses.
The ominous rumbling of the ceilings above them, as he and all of those their Brotherhood had managed to rescue from the siege of Monteriggioni, sent dust sifting down from the rafters, and made it necessary on occasion for he and his to calm the citizens and hurry them along as they jogged through the hidden passages. The gradually increasing slope of the floor underfoot, as well as the scent of fresh air that had begun wafting into the space where they were all making their way through, let all of those present know that they would soon be able to see the open sky without the danger of attack from the Borgia.
Ezio could still recall, even after so much time that had to have passed, the sound of so many cannons being fired upon the city where he and so many of his fellows had lived for such a long time; he knew, therefore, that he would have a great deal of work ahead of him once he returned to Monteriggioni in the future.
The sight of the light of what looked like a brand new dawn brought a certain lightness to Ezio’s heart; likewise, the sight of Mario – a fair bit more bloodied than when he’d last seen the man, but under the circumstances Ezio had been fully prepared for such a thing – walking beside the heavily-cloaked form of Aeon, though the man in black’s hood was no longer up.
“Come, across the bridges!” Mario called, beckoning the villagers and other citizenry forward. “Aeon and I will cut them behind you!”
“Bene! I’m glad to see you both made it, amici!” he called, running with the other members of the Brotherhood who had taken up a position of rear-guard for the citizens all around them.
“Grazie! We’ll be meeting up with you soon! Corri!”
Aeon was as silent as his uncle had been verbose, but the man was beginning to seem more and more like one who kept his own council; more and more, it seemed as though that was the reason that Altaïr had been so wary of him when Aeon had presented himself to the Syrian, so long ago.
Once the last of the rope-bridges had fallen into the abyss, leaving Cesare and his lackeys to shout impotently at them from across the ravine that they had once spanned, Ezio allowed himself to breathe easier.
“So, where are we going to go next?” little Maria asked, hand hovering near the sword that she’d belted to her slender waist some time during the fighting.
“Roma is the next place we should look to,” Mario said, even as Aeon seemingly fell into step among their small group.
It was a rather strange thought, that there was a man who had no solidity at all walking among them; still, it was hardly stranger a thought than that of Desmond, who had come to them from the future.
“Roma? Because of the Pope?” he asked, as they all continued on their way through the countryside, the citizens slowly disbursing under the guidance of the Assassins.
“Sí, and also the rest of the Borgia,” Uncle Mario said, a grim cast to his face as they all continued on their way. “It’s likely that they plan to make it a Templar stronghold. No matter what, we can’t allow such a thing to happen.”
“Sí,” he said, nodding as he kept pace with his family, and the two men who followed them for their own reasons. “The Templars cannot be allowed to gain a foothold in such a place; to say nothing of the Borgia.”
“Sí, it is good to see that you understand so quickly,” Uncle Mario said, nodding in a pleased sort of way. “Claudia, you and Maria should probably return to Firenze, at least if you’ve no desire to join the Brotherhood fully.” Needless to say, Claudia stepped forward without a word, a look of defiant resolve upon her face. “Bene,” their uncle said, chuckling softly, the grin on his face a rather pleased sort. “We’ll all head for Roma together, then.”
The five of them all mounted up on horses from a nearby stable, and were soon making their way through the countryside in the direction of Roma.
Chapter 312: The long road
Chapter Text
Their journey was a long one, and even with Aeon retreating back into his Apple once more, the five of them were more than able to defend themselves from the dangers of the open road. Particularly the dangers faced by those who had managed to not only survive a siege undertaken by the Borgia, but also to escape from it in the manner that he and so many of their allies – to say nothing of the citizens they had been defending – had done from the attack on Monteriggioni. They switched horses several times, exchanging a wearied beast for one far fresher and newer, as the five of them continued on their way to Roma.
They also stopped for him, to change out old bandages and clean his wounds when he required such, but Ezio could not help the thought that he was slowing them all down.
Still, it was not as though his remaining family would so much as consider leaving him by the side of the road, so instead they all moved at a slower pace in order to compensate for the injuries that he – even above the rest of them – had taken in defense of Monteriggioni and all of her people. They also took the time to sleep, of course, and Ezio was reminded in a melancholy sort of way of his escape from Firenze in the wake of the murder of Father and his two brothers.
It was in that way that the five of them made their way, slowly but steadily, into Roma. Or, at least the far outskirts of what had once been the fine city that the Borgia had been steadily draining the life out of for quite some time.
“We have allies here,” Uncle Mario said, clearly having seen the dismay on Ezio’s face and seeking to assuage it, at least somewhat.
“Who might those be, Uncle?” little Maria asked, sounding about as dubious about the whole situation as Ezio himself felt.
“Foremost among them, at least in this area, would be the Contessa Margherita degli Campi,” Uncle Mario said, as the five of them all continued on their way deeper into the far outskirts of Roma.
It was a sad thing, how far Roma seemed to have fallen under the cruel hands of the Borgia and their Templar masters, but there was also the bracing thought of how he and his brother and sister Assassins would work to free the people of this place from their oppression at the hands of those bastards and their lackeys. It was mutually decided that, in light of the fact that the Borgia had to have been looking for them, they would all be best served by moving under the cover of darkness.
Even on the far outskirts of a city that had been taken in such a way, there would always be those who were susceptible to either terror or bribery.
Moving in the dark of night the way they did was yet another reminder of when he and his family had been forced to depart from their home in Firenze, and Ezio could not truly help wondering just what state their old palazzo was in. There was little enough that he could do about such curiosity as he was currently prey to, he knew, but Ezio could not truly find it in himself to push those thoughts away. He said nothing, and followed swiftly along when he was asked to do as such, but he suspected that every one of his family understood what was in his heart.
When the five of them finally made their way to what seemed to be the sad, dilapidated remains of an elegant manor, Ezio found himself struck by the sight of it. True, it was likely to be in better repair than their old palazzo back in Firenze, but the sight was still a sad one, all the same. Taking a breath to steady himself, Ezio found himself wondering just how Aeon and Desmond were both doing.
It didn’t seem as though he would be able to speak to either of them easily, considering where they currently were.
Chapter 313: Roads to Roma
Chapter Text
Uncle Mario was the one who made the approach to the manor where the Contessa was waiting for them, and Ezio swiftly found himself meeting a proud woman who, though she seemed rather past her prime, still had a fine figure to complement her dignified bearing.
“Grazie once again for your hospitality, buona donna,” Uncle Mario said, once the five of them had made their way into the inner rooms of her home; safe from the unfriendly ears that surrounded them in such a place as this.
“It is the least I could do, considering the horrors that the Borgia have perpetuated upon us for so long,” the Contessa said, a look of quiet defiance upon her face. “Still, I suppose all of that can wait. I think it would be best if you all got some sleep; moving under the cover of darkness might have helped you to stay out of the gaze of the Borgia and their dogs, but it could not have been good for you to rest that way.”
“No, I suppose not,” Uncle Mario said, as the five of them followed her into what looked to be bedrooms that had been set up to accommodate them.
Or anyone else who might have found themselves in need of the Contessa’s hospitality.
“Here,” Uncle Mario said, handing him the Apple, as the five of them all made their way to their separate bedrooms. “You seem to have more of a knack for using it than me, and I have seen the way you have been looking at it,” Mario smiled gently. “Though, try not to spend too much time speaking with Aeon, fascinating as he has proven himself.”
“I will keep that in mind,” he said, smiling gently at Uncle Mario as he took the Apple and made his way to the room that he was likely to be staying in while he was in Roma; or at least until they were able to make contact with the rest of the Brotherhood.
Once he’d settled down at the table in the room he was going to be staying in for however long, Ezio half-closed his eyes and concentrated upon the artifact in his hands. The presence of Aeon, glowing with that same, colorless light that the Apple generated when those strange images would appear from the depths of the artifact, stretched itself out and up into the cloaked, hooded form of the man in black who had stood beside the Brotherhood for such a long time that even Altaïr himself might not have been the first to meet him. Once Aeon’s form had fully resolved itself out of the light, the man in black pulled back his hood, spilling free his waterfall of silver hair.
“Was there something you wished to speak to me about?” Aeon asked, curious yellow eyes fixing upon him once he had removed his hood.
“I was wondering about Desmond,” he said, settling back into the seat that he had been given when he’d made his way into the house of their closest ally in Roma. “Is he still with me?”
“The young man has been following you for as long as I have been traveling with you,” Aeon said, an unreadable expression upon his dark-skinned face.
“Ah,” he said, looking over his right shoulder, concentrating so that he would be able to see in the way that he’d seen so many things that no one else but little Maria had ever seemed to be able to see; just as he had been about to turn his gaze back to Aeon, to bid the man in black a good night before he prepared himself to sleep during the night for the first time since he and his brother and sister Assassins had been forced to depart from Monteriggioni in order to escape from the Borgia’s attack on his former home, Ezio found Aeon’s right hand on his left shoulder. “Grazie,” he said softly, as the blue-glowing form of Desmond was made visible to him once again.
As Ezio removed his hand from the Apple so that he could begin preparing to sleep for the night, Aeon vanished silently back into the artifact once again.
“Buona sera, amico,” he said, nodding to the inert form of the Apple, before he turned to begin preparing to sleep for the night.
Chapter 314: Enemies of the state
Chapter Text
The next morning, once the sun had risen back into the sky and another day had properly begun, Ezio took the Apple from the table and began making his way back out into the main room of the sad old palazzo that he and his remaining family had been invited to stay in not such a long time ago. Ezio wondered, for a moment, just what he and his were going to be doing in Roma; rooting out the Borgia and their Templar allies, yes, but Uncle Mario had seemed to have more in mind for them than simply that.
Still, it was clear that Uncle Mario meant for them to meet up with more of the Brotherhood in this place, at least those who would have managed to survive against whatever forces that the Borgia would have set against them in their efforts to maintain control over Roma; to say nothing of their clear desire to spread that control to all of the surrounding cities within Italia.
“Bene, it’s good to see all of you up and about,” Uncle Mario said, as the five of them gathered together in the main room of the palazzo they were all staying in together. “Ezio and I will be searching for Niccolò, since there’s little doubt in my mind that he’ll still be present in this place. Maria, take your mother and sister to the Rosa in Fiore; we have allies there, and the three of you should be safe, until Ezio and I return for you.”
“You’re certain Ezio is going to be all right without me?” little Maria asked, that same, impish grin appearing on her face as she looked at him in particular.
“Sí, you troublesome little imp,” he retorted, grabbing his littlest sister – who was no longer quite so little as she had been, but was still little enough for his purposes – so he could wrestle her into an embrace, firmly mussing up her silver hair. “We will both be perfectly fine without a nursemaid, grazie.”
The five of them all shared a laugh, before he and Uncle Mario departed in order to search for a sign of where Niccolò Machiavelli would be waiting for them. As he and his uncle made their way through the city, after bidding a last farewell, temporary as they all hoped it was ultimately going to be, to Maria, Claudia, and little Maria, Ezio couldn’t help but notice the pervasive despair that seemed to have settled like a burial shroud over even the tiny town where they were all staying.
“This is how the Borgia operate,” he spat. “Disgustoso.”
“Sí,” Uncle Mario said, his own eyes narrowing as the pair of them continued on their way through the streets, passing many more citizens who had been reduced to a dejected, pitiful state by the miserable bastards who had seen fit to set themselves above their fellow men. “This is the way all Templars think: that they are better than their fellows, that only they have the right kind of mind to command.”
The sounds of someone in distress, combined with the crude shouts and jeers of the surrounding guards, drew their attention to the man that seemed to be at the center of the fight that a number of the Borgia’s dog-soldiers had started against him. Yes, the man seemed to be holding his own for the moment, but he was clearly fighting with the strength that desperation lent to a man. There was little chance that he would be able to best all of those standing against him with just that.
Particularly considering the skill that he was demonstrating; or rather, the pronounced lack of such.
As he and Uncle Mario waded into battle alongside the man who had stood up to challenge the cruelty of the Borgia, Ezio wondered what the man’s story was ultimately going to be. Yes, it was entirely likely that he was to find out when the three of them finally managed to dispose of the last of their enemies, but Ezio’s patience had been fraying for quite a long time, while he’d been forced to merely sit back and observe the cruelty of the Borgia and their dogs.
Once the last of those dogs – at least those who had been haunting this area – had fallen to the cobblestones in a heap of blood and spilled organs, he and Mario followed the old man up to what Ezio realized with a flash of painful recognition was a gallows.
“She was beautiful,” he said, hoping to provide at least some comfort to the man, who he could now see was mourning for the woman who had been taken from him so cruelly.
“She was, until that porco defiled her!” the man shouted, raw agony in a voice that sounded like it had been spent in shouting not long ago; Ezio could more than understand why. “I wish he’d just killed her! I wish he’d just killed la mia amata! People who saw her grow up cheered when he spat on her! Smiles on their faces, when her neck-!”
“That will be enough, mi amico,” Uncle Mario said, his voice gentle as he came over to embrace the distraught man with the same tenderness that he’d always demonstrated when Ezio himself had been in the same frame of mind.
“Grazie, mille grazie,” the man said, all the strength seeming to go out of him for a long moment, as he sobbed in Mario’s arms. “Will you help me? My Livia was innocent, but Il Carnefice has threatened to hang me if I cut her rope. He watches from his home on the hill above,” the man said, pointing up to a small manor that sat just inside the stone walls that stood sentry over even the outskirts of Roma.
“Sí,” he said, before Uncle Mario could say those same kinds of words. “My uncle will help you to cut her down,” he said, to a firm nod from the man in question. “I will be dealing with Il Carnefice.”
“Grazie, grazie, I do not know what I would have done without you,” the bereft man said, straightening up as well as anyone in his situation could be expected to manage.
“Come, my nipote will see to our enemy,” Uncle Mario said, gently shepherding the man up onto the gallows where his love had been hanged so unjustly. “Let us see to the lady who holds your heart.”
“Grazie, mi amico,” was the last thing he heard from the man they had worked so hard to save, before he departed from their company in order to deal with the murdering bastard who had taken her from him.
Making his way back into the crowds, Ezio steadily made his way up the hill where Il Carnefice reportedly kept his home, keeping his head down and matching his pace to that of the crowds even as they begun to thin out around him. Once he’d made it into a quiet patch, Ezio climbed up to the rooftops and up over the top of the rock face that a few of the buildings had been built into the side of it, and then over the man-sized wall that stood in front of the building. Breathing deeply as he made his way up onto the roof of what seemed to be not just a manor but a small compound, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he sought for the man he was going to kill on this day.
This kill, of all of them, he was pleased to make.
Once he’d managed to locate the form of Il Carnefice, painted a hateful red in his second-sight, Ezio carefully positioned himself above the man so that he would be able to kill the man with a single leap. Leaping from the rooftop at last, Ezio slammed into the man blade-first, watching him collapse with a distinct sense of vindication. Gathering himself as he stood up, Ezio swiftly found himself under attack from the guards that had been assigned to this place.
Cutting the last of those Borgia dogs down in their very tracks, Ezio turned his path back toward the still form of Il Carnefice.
“Requiescat in pace,” he said, and was hardly ashamed to admit that there was more of a snap in his voice than there had been more of a snap in his voice than there had been for anyone but Vieri de’ Pazzi.
Making his way back over the rooftops, down from the cliff-face, and back into the main area of the town once again, Ezio quickly caught sight of Uncle Mario and the man that the pair of them had given their aid to. The both of them looked a fair bit dirtier since the last time he’d seen them, but also a great deal more satisfied, as well.
“My Livia can rest in peace now, mi amici,” the man said, a wide smile upon his face. “The both of you have my eternal gratitude.”
The three of them embraced for a last time, before he and Uncle Mario swiftly departed from the man’s side, on their way to make contact with Machiavelli; to see just what it was that the man would say to them, once he came to know of their presence in Roma itself.
Chapter 315: Following along
Chapter Text
“I met with one of my contacts, while Bernardo was burying his wife,” Uncle Mario said, leaning in close to him as the pair of them continued on their way through the small town. “He informed me that Niccolò would be waiting for us at the mausoleo de Agusto.”
“Bene,” he said, as the pair of them began making their way to their next destination.
The familiar weight of the Apple, even concealed as it was under the Assassin robes that he wore, gave Ezio a certain feeling of comfort as he and his uncle made their way up yet another hill – this one quite a bit more gently-sloping than the one where Il Carnefice’s former manor had been sitting – and over to the ruins of what seemed to be the mausoleum they were searching for. The black-clothed form of Machiavelli stood out clearly against the crumbling gray stone. And, as he and Uncle Mario hurried to meet up with the man, Ezio considered just what it was they were going to do once they had met up with the man.
Their brother Assassin, who didn’t quite seem to approve of them at this time.
When the pair of them had made their way up to the side of Machiavelli where he stood, he and Mario slowed to a walk, and then stopped by the side of the man who’d been so adamant about killing Rodrigo Borgia in the days before the attack on the Auditore Villa. And yes, he could fully understand the reason for such a feeling on his brother Assassin’s part, but he had at least some hope that the pair of them could come to an accord while he was in the city.
“I suspected that I would find the pair of you here, if I only waited long enough,” Machiavelli said, as he turned to the pair of them. “There has been talk about our… mutual friend, among the ranks of the Borgia,” their brother Assassin said, looking around as though to check that the three of them were truly alone in this place; something that he and Uncle Mario had done in their own turn.
“I expect that they’ve found themselves unsettled, not only by what kind of powers that he demonstrated during the battle, but by the fact that he seems to be some kind of an immortal,” Uncle Mario said, as the three of them began making their way out of the ruins and back toward the town where they’d been staying for the night.
“Sí, given the tone of the talk my agents and I have been able to overhear, that is the general thrust of their sentiment,” Machiavelli said, as they made their way away from the ruins they’d met up with their brother Assassin in the shadow of. “Still, the both of you are going to need new armaments and armor, if you intend to stay in this place.”
“Va bene,” Uncle Mario said, falling in behind Machiavelli, as he himself did the same. “We’ll need to visit a blacksmith, then.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding as the three of them – with Aeon’s Apple concealed in his robes, in case they came to need the help of the man in black – continued on into the town.
He’d no experience with the shops in Roma, of course, but it was clear that Machiavelli knew just where he was going, so he was fully willing to follow the lead of their brother Assassin as he proceeded them through the city. As he saw more and more of the city; all of the damage that had been done by the cruel, uncaring Borgia and all of their lackeys, Ezio only felt himself growing ever more determined to unseat them. To free Roma from their poisonous influence, and to see that all of her citizens were allowed to live their lives without the fear of the Borgia and all of their Templar allies.
Once he and Uncle Mario had put in their orders for the armor that they would need, in order to protect themselves from the guns that the Borgia possessed; and weren’t too shy about using, Ezio mused, as the wound in his right shoulder twinged even through its bindings.
“The man who led the attack on the Villa, you said his name was Cesare?” he asked, returning his attention to Uncle Mario and Machiavelli, as they continued on their way through Roma.
“Sí,” Machiavelli said, with a sharp nod as he continued walking. “He is ambitious, ruthless, and cruel beyond imagining; the laws of men mean nothing to him. He murdered his own brother to take power. He knows neither danger nor fatigue; those who do not fall by his sword clamor to join his ranks. The powerful Orsini and Colonna families kneel at his feet, and the King of France stands stands at his side,” Machiavelli continued, but there was a certain tone to the man’s voice as he spoke of their current enemy. “What does he intend to do with his power? What drives the man? That, I still do not know. But, the fact remains that Cesare has set his sights on all of Italia, and at this rate he will have it.”
“Is that admiration I hear in your voice?” he asked, realizing just what kind of tone he’d been hearing from their brother Assassin as he spoke, and finding himself wondering all the more about the source of it.
“Let’s not discuss things like this in such a place,” Uncle Mario said, his tone seeming to admonish them both. “There must be a way to show the people that the power of the Borgia is not as unbreakable as those bastardi would have them believe, sí?”
Chapter 316: Taking a Tower
Chapter Text
“Vero, there is a guard captain near here,” Machiavelli said, nodding as he continued to lead them through the streets of Roma, turning their path to lead them toward what he could only hope was the location of the guard captain that he’d spoken of. “If the people were to know that he had fallen-”
“Bene,” he said, catching the implications of what his uncle and Machiavelli were speaking of. “I will see to this captain of yours.”
“Bene, then I will keep the guards off your back, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, smiling in a rather whimsical fashion, as the three of them continued on their way deeper into the town they were all staying in.
“Grazie, Uncle,” he said, nodding as he began searching for the Borgia captain with his second-sight.
There were a great many red-limed forms within the town, something he’d come to expect considering how deeply Roma had fallen under the thrall of the Borgia and their Templar masters, but as he continued searching for the captain that the Borgia had appointed, Ezio managed at last to come upon the large, armored form of the man who had been placed in command of the forces that those miserable, dickless bastards had left in this area. Smirking slightly as he climbed the side of a nearby building, Ezio concealed himself as he continued to move. Pausing for a moment, as a small knot of people passed between the buildings where he was awaiting his chance, Ezio hopped lightly from one rooftop to the other.
Now standing atop the building where the Borgia Captain had hidden himself, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he watched the pair of lower-ranking soldiers that had been assigned to him; the pair of them were looking out into the town at large, rather than up into the rafters where he was perched in his efforts to observe the goings-on in this particular place, and so they would be completely unprepared when he made his move.
Once he was completely sure – or, at least as sure as anyone could be, when dealing with soldiers; even those in the employ of the Borgia – that the pair of soldiers standing next to their captain were completely absorbed in watching for threats that might come in from the front of the courtyard the three of them had been set to watch over for whatever reason, Ezio leaped lightly down from the rooftop where he’d been perched. Grabbing the man by the surcoat he’d worn over his armor, Ezio braced himself and hurled the captain into the scaffolding that stood at the far end of the courtyard the pair of them had been battling within. The wooden structure collapsed upon him as the large, armored form crashed into it.
Breathing more easily once the Borgia captain had stopped twitching at last, Ezio turned his attention to the pair of guards that had been assigned to support the man in whatever capacity he’d been assigned to this place in.
Once he’d managed to cut his way through those men, Ezio climbed back up to the rooftops. Spotting the form of Aeon, of all people, Ezio raised an eyebrow as the man in black signaled for him to follow. Following in the path that Aeon was calling him to move down, Ezio considered for a moment just what he would do next. Yes, the captain that had been placed in charge of this area was dead, but there was still the matter of signaling that fact to the people of Roma.
“What brings you back into the world, amico?” he asked, as the pair of them descended back to the street once more.
“I asked him to lead you back, once you had finished with the captain,” Uncle Mario said, as Aeon vanished once more into the depths of the Apple.
“Ah, I suppose that would make sense,” he said, then decided to share his thoughts with the man who had stood by him for so long. “There should be some way for us to signal that fact to the people.”
“If you ignite the tower that the man was set to stand guard over, that would be a good way to let those around us know that the Borgia’s power has been broken in this area.” Uncle Mario said, turning to point up to the indicated place.
“Sí, that sounds logical,” he said, turning to make his way back to the place that the Borgia captain had been standing guard over; apparently a tower that they had caused to be constructed, which explained the scaffolding that had still been in place when he’d made his attack on the men who had been set to stand guard over it in order to prevent just this sort of a happenstance, it seemed.
Once he’d made his way back up to the lofty heights of the Borgia-constructed tower’s top floor, he pulled down the iron-bracketed torch that had been mounted on the far right corner of the tower. Hurling it into the spilled pile of hay on the floor, Ezio waited for only a moment as the fire spread through the hay and onto the old wood of the tower, before leaping out of the tower and down into the street once again. Smiling slightly as he saw the shops in this area beginning to cautiously open up again, Ezio continued onward.
Making his way back to where Uncle Mario and Machiavelli were waiting for him, he saw them surrounded by a small crowd. There was a sense of anticipation about them, but also one of fear; the first he was pleased to see, but the second… There was clearly still a great deal of work to be done, until they would truly be able to call Roma a free city again.
“You should not fear the Borgia,” he said, adding to the pronouncement that his uncle had been making. “Cruel and powerful they might very well be, but their time in power is coming to an end! My brothers and I will see to that!”
“The Borgia will inevitably return to this place,” Machiavelli said, once the crowd that had gathered around the three of them – clearly taking heart from what he and Uncle Mario had said to them – had returned to their homes and to their shops once more.
“That is true, but soon enough we will have the support of our brothers and sisters once more,” Uncle Mario said, a calm smile on his face, as the three of them made their way over to a nearby stable. “We will see that Roma is restored to her people once more.”
Chapter 317: Disapproval
Chapter Text
“On the subject of our fellows, I wonder what it is that you intend to do about Messer Aeon,” Machiavelli said, turning his gaze to the pouch that held the Apple that their most mysterious of allies seemed to be haunting.
“I think that it would be best if we told only our brother and sister Assassins about him,” Uncle Mario said, his own gaze turning to take in the pouch where the Apple had been so carefully concealed.
“Sí, I think that would be best,” Ezio mused, reflecting upon the varied reactions of the citizenry at large to the appearance of the Treasure Guardians when they had seen them. “Our brother and sister Assassins would truly be those best suited to know about Aeon, considering what he is. And what he looks like.”
“Sí,” Uncle Mario said, nodding sharply as the three of them continued on their way through the small town where they had all been staying for such a long time.
“That’s the most sensible thing I’ve heard from the pair of you since you arrived,” Machiavelli said, as the three of them rode onward through the town. “Now, the question becomes: as you have both proven yourselves to be so good at opening wounds, are either of you capable of closing them?”
“It is not enough to simply treat the symptoms of a sickness,” he said, as the three of them continued on their way through the town, passing so many of those who had been made destitute by the Borgia, and were only now being given the chance to pick themselves up once again. “For anything to truly change for the better, such a thing must be cured.”
“Stop sparring with me, Ezio,” Machiavelli said, turning to glare at him from the lead horse.
“Bene, I will speak clearly, then,” he said, urging his horse forward so that he could face Machiavelli squarely as the pair of them discussed their respective positions. “The death of Rodrigo Borgia would not have solved the problems that we see before us.”
“I would tend to disagree,” Machiavelli said, narrowing his eyes as the pair of them continued on their way through the town, his own hardened eyes raking over the citizens that milled all around them.
“Look at this place,” he said, gesturing to the citizenry all around them. “It’s in the heart of the Borgia’s power; killing one man would not have solved anything. We will need to take away the source of their power; even a tyrant cannot rule for long if enough people refuse to obey them.”
“Are you suggesting that we appeal to them, then?” Machiavelli asked, an unimpressed expression on his face. “Relying upon the people is like building on the sand.”
“That is not true; our belief in humanity rests at the very heart of our Creed,” he said, as the three of them continued on their way through the small, degraded town where the Borgia’s power had formerly been unquestioned by every one of the people who had been living there. “We simply need to show them that the Borgia can be defeated, and they will do the rest.”
The sound of running footsteps drew his attention, and Ezio turned to see a youngish man running past him; the weight of his bag, or the sudden lack of it as it was cut loose, brought his attention firmly back to the young man, who seemed to be dressed as one of the many thieves that had been prowling through the streets of even a run-down town such as this one.
Machiavelli laughed aloud, once he’d seemed to hear Ezio’s annoyed shouting. “He must be from your inner-circle.”
“You’d best catch up with him, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, smiling at him in that gentle way he’d always had of doing; one of the things he would have missed most if not for Aeon’s efforts in his defense.
“Sí,” Machiavelli said, nodding sharply. “Your uncle and I will be continuing on our way; look for us at the Campidoglio. A contact of mine will be meeting up with us there.”
“Sí,” he said, nodding sharply as he leaped down from his horse and swiftly gave chase.
The thief was good; he had to give the young man that much, at least, but Ezio found that his skill was not truly a match for someone who had trained for so long among the company of the Brotherhood of Assassins.
“You truly are as good as they say, messer,” the young man said, an awed expression on his face as he handed over the bag that he’d stolen some time ago.
“Did La Volpe send you to find me?” he asked, seeing the almost childlike excitement on the young man’s face as the pair of them faced one another for the first time since the young man had stolen his bag and hence drawn his attention for the first time.
“Sí, he wishes to know more of that man in black you and he met on that strange night, so long ago.”
“To start with, his name is Aeon,” he said, smiling gently at the young man before him. “But, that’s all I’m going to be able to tell you at the moment; my uncle and one of my brothers is waiting for me, and I must go see what it is they’re after.”
“Va bene,” the young man said, nodding as he turned to leave. “I will see that La Volpe finds out about what you told me.”
“Grazie,” he said, turning back to find his horse so that he could meet up with Machiavelli and Uncle Mario once more.
Chapter 318: Brothers and friends
Chapter Text
Mounting up once again, Ezio quickly began making his way out of the small town in earnest, his path turned towards the Capitoline Hill and the meeting place that Machiavelli had informed him about. Continuing on his way out of the town, and then up the gentle hill that had been designated as their current meeting place, Ezio called up his second-sight for a moment just to make certain that he knew just where it was that he was going to go. After he’d found the pair of them, Ezio guided his horse the rest of the way up to where the pair of them were waiting for him.
“So, did you manage to liberate your money from our friend?”
“Sí, and he was also a friend of La Volpe, as well,” he said, fitting himself back in among Uncle Mario and Machiavelli once again.
“Curious,” the man said, mouth pulling into a frown as he considered the new information he’d been given. “I wonder what he could want.”
“He wished to know more about Aeon, and what he might be capable of,” he said, as he caught sight of Uncle Mario mounting up on the horse he’d ridden out to meet up with all of them out on the hill where they were all currently standing. “Uncle, where are you headed off to?”
“I’m going to head back to our headquarters on Isola Tiberina,” Uncle Mario said, smiling down at him as he settled firmly into his horse’s saddle and prepared to set off once more. “I’ll see if I can’t get things more settled there, before we start moving back into Roma once again.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding and moving to stand closer to Machiavelli, so that Uncle Mario wouldn’t have to worry about moving too much when he was preparing to ride. “I’ll meet up with you when I can, uncle.”
“Insieme per la vittoria.”
“Insieme,” he said, nodding as Uncle Mario rode off at last, leaving him and Machiavelli alone together.
Chapter 319: Building bonds
Chapter Text
“Where are we headed off to now?” he asked, as Machiavelli mounted back up on his horse, and signaled to him to do the same.
“To the Colloseo, ” Machiavelli said, looking slightly displeased, but not at anyone currently present. “We’re to meet a contact of mine; a man named Vinicio. Though he was meant to meet me here in this place. Something must have kept him.”
“Let’s go find out what that is, then,” he said, mounting back up on his own horse as the pair of them set off again.
Following Machiavelli as his brother Assassin made his way to the Coliseum, Ezio found himself wondering just what had happened to Machiavelli’s contact. He knew that there was a great deal of danger surrounding them, particularly considering just how much power the Borgia clearly held within Roma as a whole and this small town in particular, so he was hardly expecting the man’s task to go off without a hitch. Still, Ezio found himself hoping that it hadn’t been anything too drastic that had delayed Machiavelli’s contact.
When he and Machiavelli arrived at the Coliseum at last, Ezio looked around for the man that his brother Assassin had described to him. Calling up his second-sight when it began to seem as though he’d missed the man that the pair of them were searching for. Of course, during the ride over, Machiavelli had been more than happy to share his cynical musings about the thoughtless, gullible nature of the people that the Brotherhood sought to save and protect.
Ezio had argued firmly against such a thing, of course, but Machiavelli had at least finished by saying that the Brotherhood still possessed allies even in a place such as this; though he was also quick to note that he did not know how long such a situation would last.
When Ezio did manage to find the man that he and Machiavelli were searching for, however, there was a trio of guards accosting him.
“Merda, it seems as though the Borgia forces have gotten to him first,” Machiavelli hissed.
“It seems we need to go help him, then,” he said, leaping down from his horse and running to intercept the trio before they could act to truly harm the man they were accosting.
Both he and Machiavelli were in agreement on that, and his brother Assassin was quick to follow along in his wake as he leaped into battle with the three Borgia guards that had been attacking Machiavelli’s contact. Once the three of them were laying dead on the grass, Ezio turned his attention back to the thief that they had just rescued.
“Where is the letter you were meant to intercept?” Machiavelli demanded, looking down at the man with the familiar, stern expression that Ezio himself had come to know so very well during the time that the pair of them had been working together.
“I didn’t manage to intercept it!” Vinicio panted, a frantic sort of light to his eyes. “He still has it with him!”
“Ezio, go! Bring that letter to me,” Machiavelli commanded, beginning to chivvy Vinicio away, to whatever his next destination was to be. “Meet me at the Terme di Diocleziano by midnight. I will be waiting for you there,” his brother Assassin said, nodding sharply to him as the pair of them parted company for the first time in quite a while.
Chasing down the Borgia courier, who had run from him after only a glance backwards, Ezio was fortunate enough to catch up to him just before he’d managed to mount the horse he’d been running towards.
“Requiescat in pace,” he said quietly, cutting the man’s throat with his hidden-blade as he closed with the courier.
Dropping the corpse to the grassy ground, Ezio searched the man for the letter he had been carrying, and then tucking the correspondence into a pouch nearby the hidden one where he was keeping Aeon’s Apple. Breathing more easily as his fingers touched the artifact where the man in black was resting, Ezio found himself wondering just how he and Desmond were both doing. It was an idle musing at this point in time, since there were many things that he had yet to do.
Principally being to make the delivery that Machiavelli had requested of him; to meet his brother Assassin at the Terme di Diocleziano.
Chapter 320: Among wolves
Chapter Text
The sun steadily melted westward as he continued on his way, having mounted the horse that the Borgia courier had been making for when he’d caught up to the man so as to make his present journey go by all the more quickly, and Ezio soon found himself making his way into the indicated, ancient baths that Machiavelli had requested that the pair of them meet one another at.
Tensing as he heard what sounded like the howling of a large, hungry wolf, Ezio swiftly climbed down from the back of his borrowed horse; he’d little desire to be caught between a panicking horse and a pack of wolves, but there was something odd about the howling he was hearing… They nearly sounded more human than beast…
When the figures who seemed to be accosting him began to appear out of the long, deep shadows of the night, Ezio found that they seemed to be a horrid mix of wolf and man. He’d not been given reason to even suspect that such ones would all but leap out at him from the darkness that had been clearly concealing them, Ezio quickly took hold of the Apple. The sight of Aeon’s glowing form out of the corner of his right eye brought a far more settled feeling to him than Ezio had found himself feeling for quite some time. Ever since he’d found himself confronted by the wolfmen, in fact.
Aeon was as swift on the uptake as he’d ever been, brandishing his shining blades – though the pair of them seemed to do quite a bit more than shine, in the flickering half-light cast by all of the torches – and together the pair of them seemed to dance among the wolfmen trying in vain to attack them. Breathing more easily once the last of those who had tried to kill him lay dead – for all that they lacked the skill, armor, and weaponry to do so – Ezio turned his attention to the man in black that had given him so much aid during the course of the work that Ezio had found himself doing for such a long time.
“Grazie,” he said, smiling as he pair of them stood together amid the wreckage of so many dead and dying men; wolfmen, who had all but thrown themselves into his path in an effort to… Well, he’d little idea of what those wolfmen had actually wanted, but he suspected that it was better for everyone that they did not get their hands on it. “I’m glad to have your help again, amico.”
“Perhaps we should find out where these strangers came from,” Aeon said, looking around at all the dead wolfmen that had been scattered all about the pair of them.
“Sí,” he said, nodding sharply as he called up his second-sight once again, searching for any hints about where those wolfmen had been coming from.
Soon enough, he’d managed to find the hidden grate – marked with what looked like the picked-clean skull of a wolf – that lead into a large, underground space that couldn’t help but to remind him of the tombs that he’d investigated in order to find the seals that had once given him access to the seals that had unlocked Altaïr’s armor. However, the place he now found himself in was an empty room with a great deal of evenly spaces, though worn and broken columns.
“This is an odd place,” Aeon said, as the pair of them dropped down into the cavernous space at last.
“Sí,” he said, giving the man in black a moment to reorient himself after their landing, while he himself examined the room that the pair of them had landed in.
Clearly, there was more to the room than what he was currently seeing, considering the fact that the wolfmen had come out of it, and yet he could not see a single one of them standing before him.
“Can you remain manifested, even if the Apple is out of sight, amico?” he asked, knowing that he would need the use of both of his hands, if he were to make an earnest effort to explore the ruins before him.
“Yes,” Aeon said, an expression of contemplation upon his dusky-skinned face. “However, it becomes more difficult, the farther I find myself from the artifact.”
“Bene, I will keep that in mind,” he said, nodding as he tucked the Apple away in his pouch once more.
It was good to have Aeon alongside him again, even though the man in black was not truly present beside him; he still wondered just where and how it was that Aeon had managed to first make contact with the Apple, and more still, just what had ultimately driven him to bind himself to the artifact in the first place. Still, a man’s secrets were his own, and he hadn’t truly known Aeon long enough to ask the man about his past in anything but the most general of senses. The pair of them made their way through the room, up the columns to where his second-sight told him that there would be something of interest to the pair of them.
And indeed, there was a lever that stood in one of the far corners of the room; a lever that sounded as though it had caused a large stream of water to start pouring out from what seemed to be somewhere behind the pair of them.
“I’m going to go back and see what happened,” he said, turning to Aeon. “Do you think you could make it to one of the other levers?”
“I’ll see what I can do,” he said, nodding once as the pair of them parted from one another.
With a last nod to Aeon as the man in black departed, Ezio made his way back to the center of the room so that he could see where it was that the water was pouring in from, and what it was pouring in to.
When he’d seen the pool at the center of the room, and more than that when he’d seen the second stream of water that began pouring into the pool at the center of the pillars that he’d seen when he and Aeon had first made their way into this hidden cavern that seemed to be where those wolfmen had come from; it had to be larger than he’d originally seen, since he hadn’t seen a single one of the wolfmen who’d attacked them since the pair of them had made their way down into the cavern in the first place.
Making his way back up the broken columns that stood in the rough center of the cavern where he and Aeon had ended up in when they’d made their way down into this strange, ancient place, Ezio found Aeon just about to begin making his way across the broken remains of a walkway that seemed to have run across the edges of the room when it was whole. Ezio couldn’t help wondering just what this room – this cavernous space that he and Aeon were making only the most cursory exploration of – had looked like when it was in its prime.
He’d found himself wondering the same kind of thing a great many times, while he’d been exploring the many and varied tombs and catacombs beneath the city-states of Italia herself; an, each and every one of those times, Ezio had found himself needing to leave without finding anything more than his musings, and in the case of six of those tombs, the seals that had granted him access to Altaïr’s armor.
Once the pair of them had managed to trigger the last of what seemed to be four levers that had been spaced equidistantly around the outer walls of the cavernous space that he and the man in black had begun their explorations of not such a very long time ago, Ezio turned at the sound of shattering stone.
“Dio mio!” he exclaimed, as one of the very columns that had been standing sentinel over the pool that had been filling up from their activities shattered, falling into the very pool that stood at the center of the four – now three – columns.
“Fascinating.” Aeon said, narrowing his eyes as the pair of them looked out over the expanse of the cavern where they were standing.
“Sí, we should probably go see what it was that we actually accomplished with those levers,” he said, turning to look over at Aeon.
“Yes, it seems you’re right,” the man in black said, falling into step behind him as Ezio made his way back to the center of the room.
It seemed that the broken column had done quite a bit more than fall into the pool of water that had stood at the center of the room; it had, in fact, smashed clear through the floor of the pool, revealing a lower chamber beneath the very floor of the cavern that he and Aeon had first made their way into when they had been following the single wolfman who had managed to escape from them during the time that they had been forced to confront him and his fellows for the first time. Diving easily into the circular pool that his and Aeon’s actions had brought to light, Ezio found himself wondering just how those wolfmen who seemed to inhabit this place had made it down into the lower chamber without revealing it to anyone who might have made their way into this place behind them.
Feeling a gloved hand firmly grasping his own, Ezio smiled as he helped Aeon to haul him up and out of the pool. Out of the corner of his left eye, even as he man in black pulled him out of the water and allowed him to get back to his feet, Ezio saw a pair of the wolfmen go running deeper into the under-caverns that he and Aeon had revealed with their actions, screaming about black-shrouded phantoms with the eyes of the king of wolves.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, standing back on his own, two feet once more. Then, remembering what he’d heard from the wolfmen who’d just run from them, he chuckled. “You’d think they’d be more kindly disposed toward you, considering what they said about your eyes.”
“Perhaps,” Aeon said, his attention clearly more focused upon the under-cavern that the pair of them had ended up in when they’d dropped down through the hole that he and the man in black had opened in the floor. “It seems we’ll have to find a way over these gates.”
“Sí, or through them,” he said, nodding as he turned his own attention to the four gates that ringed the circular pool that his and Aeon’s efforts had revealed.
“I could attempt to throw you over this one,” Aeon said, sounding rather contemplative as he studied the gate that seemed to stand sentinel over yet another of the levers that might very well control another of the mechanisms that the pair of them would need to trigger in order to make their way deeper into the under-cavern that they were exploring.
“Let’s save that for later,” he said, making his way toward the only open hallway that did not seem apt to dead-end in a bricked wall. “Grazie.”
“Very well, then,” the man in black said, falling into step with him as the pair of them made their way through the open hallway.
Sighing as he came to yet another gate, this one having been hidden by a sharp right turn as he and Aeon had made their way down through the tunnel, Ezio shook his head in rueful amusement.
“It seems I will be needing your aid for this, amico.”
“Of course,” Aeon said, a small, sardonically amused smile appearing upon his own, dusky-skinned face.
As the man in black helped him to climb up and over the gate that stood in their way, Ezio landed easily upon the other side; after he’d done so, however, Ezio found himself being reminded of the fact that the man in black had no true physicality aside from the Apple. Watching in surprise as Aeon walked through the blackened iron of the gate, his form turning ever-so-briefly to the light that seemed to reside within the Apple itself, Ezio smiled as Aeon’s form flickered and resumed the seemingly-normal form that he’d almost forgotten the man could shed at will.
“Come, we’d best see what those strangers are doing,” Aeon said, drawing Ezio’s attention back to the mission that the pair of them had originally come to this place to complete.
“Bene, amico,” he said, smiling as he fell into step beside Aeon once more, and the pair of them continued deeper into the under-cavern that they’d begun exploring some time ago.
He and Aeon worked together to make their way over and through three more iron gates, before Ezio was able to find a lever and open a wooden gate to make his way all the farther in. However, something in the makeup of the mechanism that he had just triggered started a fire in the wall beside him; a fire, it had to be noted, that traveled along through the other walls, and into several braziers that had been placed along both walls. The sight of a veritable ocean of pitch igniting before him brought Ezio up short for a moment.
The feel of a strong arm wrapping around his waist caused him to tense, and then the sudden rush of the world as he found himself thrown forward forced a yelp out of him, before Ezio found his feet back on solid ground once again.
“Next time, amico, do you think you could warn me before you do that?” he asked, a lopsided smile upon his face as he caught his breath after having it startled clear out of him.
“You seemed troubled,” Aeon said, his usual expression of steady calm upon his face once again.
“Sí, and I truly am grateful for your assistance, but it was rather disconcerting to have it happen so suddenly,” he said, smiling at Aeon as he and the man in black stood beside one another.
“I’ll keep that in mind, then.”
“Grazie,” he said, as the pair of them pressed onward and downward into the under-cavern.
Narrowing his eyes as he looked up through yet another iron gate, Ezio found himself watching as what seemed to be some kind of leader among the wolfmen threw one of his compatriots down into the next room that he’d found himself peering into. There was also a large fire at the center of the room, which looked like some kind of a shrine that had been left to molder away underground.
“We’ll have to find some way into that next room,” he muttered, narrowing his eyes as he considered what he’d seen on his way through the under-caverns.
“Clearly,” Aeon said, as the pair of them pressed farther and deeper inside.
Once he and Aeon had managed to find their way to what seemed to be a structural support for another floor, though a floor that had long since collapsed by this point in time, Ezio found himself startled by the sound of yet more stone shattering as one of his steps dislodged a brick and sent it skipping, rolling, and tumbling to smash more rotten stonework out of his way. Sighing as he made his way down into the shrine that his actions had revealed a path into, Ezio pressed on, making his way up the wall to where the lead wolfman had departed to.
Once he’d made his way up the wall, with Aeon vanishing once more into the Apple once it became clear that Ezio did not presently require the man’s help, Ezio chuckled as he found himself confronted with a rather familiar oddity. The room that he was now standing in bore a distinct resemblance to the tombs that Ezio had found himself exploring some time ago; save for the lack of the Brotherhood’s markings, and a sarcophagus. It even had a scroll with a large key, in the place of the seal that he’d found within the tombs that he’d once explored.
Ezio wondered just what it was that he would end up finding at the end of this particular quest.
Making his way back up and out of the catacombs that he’d discovered, taking an easier route that brought him and Aeon up a ladder and out through the ceiling of the under-cavern that had been hidden for such a long time. Perhaps that was how those wolfmen always seemed to be able to get ahead of us when we were making our own way through the catacombs. Stepping back out into the open air, Ezio found that he and Aeon had spent the whole of the night navigating their way through the catacombs and under-caverns that the pair of them had revealed with their respective efforts.
Chapter 321: Rebuilding the Brotherhood
Chapter Text
“What kept you?” his brother Assassin asked, making his way over to where Ezio was standing.
“I found myself waylaid by this mad group of wolfmen,” he said, turning to face Machiavelli as he made his way over to where the man was standing.
“The Followers of Romulus,” Machiavelli muttered, shaking his head.
“You know of them?” he asked, raising an eyebrow as he and Machiavelli continued speaking.
“This band of false Pagans have been terrorizing the countryside for some time,” Machiavelli said, eyes narrowing, even as an ironic smile appeared on his face. “Driving people into the arms of the Church. I’ve reason to believe that the Borgia have been employing them for just such a reason. Or, at least that a good number of them are Borgia agents of one kind or another.”
“Sí, I suppose that would make sense,” Ezio said, though he didn’t like the idea at all.
Knowing that the citizens of Roma would want to feel safe, and just how much authority the Church had in this area – as it did in most of Italia, it had to be said – Ezio knew that he would have to root out these “Followers of Romulus” wherever and whenever he ended up running across them. There was also the matter of the letters that he’d collected, both from the Borgia courier he’d chased down, and the one that he’d found within the catacombs that he and Aeon had explored together.
“It seems your man in black does better work than I’d been given to believe,” Machiavelli said, as he fell into step behind his brother Assassin on their way to what looked like the entrance to some kind of tunnel system.
“I do what I can,” Aeon himself said, appearing once more in a subdued flash of light and falling neatly into step with the pair of them.
“Benvenuto, amico,” he said, smiling amusedly at the surprised expression – subtle as it was – that appeared on Machiavelli’s habitually dour face. “I don’t believe you and Aeon have truly had a chance to speak with one another,” he said, as his brother Assassin gave him a sincerely unamused look.
Machiavelli huffed, and Ezio thought he could see an annoyed expression – subtle as every one of the man’s expressions seemed to be – on his aristocratic face. “We have been making use of this ancient system of tunnels to avoid the notice of the Borgia and their guards, but a great deal of the entrances have collapsed; whether due to time or else vandalism, or possibly both, we don’t know,” as the three of them descended into the depths together, Machiavelli continued speaking. “It was your father who first discovered them, and they have been the Assassins’ secret ever since. They are quite large, since they were meant to transport troops in ancient times, and well-built as things were in those days. Stay close, Ezio; it would be fatal if you ended up getting lost down here. Many of the tunnel entrances have collapsed or been blocked, though it might still be possible to repair them.”
“Sí, perhaps I might find a way to do it, myself,” he said, looking around at the ancient stonework all around them; it still remained rather beautiful, even in the soft, flickering light of the torch that Machiavelli had brought down into the tunnels with them.
“Perhaps,” Machiavelli allowed, and the three of them continued on their way in silence.
Even in the darkness underground, the space they were moving through somehow didn’t feel all that oppressive; it probably had a great deal to do with the impression of a vast expanse all around them. Ezio caught glimpses, in the gloom, of branching tunnels and what seemed to be other entrances. It gave him some hope that he might be able to repair them, once he’d managed to gain some inflows of money to replace what he had lost when he’d been forced from Monteriggioni by the Borgia.
As the three of them made their way up a gentle upslope, Ezio wondered just when the three of them would be able to make their way back up into the outside world once again. Of course, once he began considering such a thing, Machiavelli turned back toward him.
“We’re here,” Machiavelli said, looking over him and Aeon as the pair of them halted in their tracks behind him. “Let’s get going, but carefully. It’s dawn.”
“Sí, I’ll keep that in mind,” he said, falling into step with Machiavelli and Aeon as the three of them made their way up and out through a large manhole that led into what seemed to be some kind of a warehouse. “So, this is Isola Tiberina,” he said, as the three of them made their way up and out into the clearer air aboveground.
“Sí,” said a familiar voice. “That’s where we are, nipote.”
“Uncle!” he exclaimed, hurrying forward to embrace the older man as the pair of them met up with each other once again.
“Aeon, mi amico, it is good to see you again,” Uncle Mario said, nodding in lieu of attempting to embrace a man that had no true physicality in this world.
“Of course,” the man in black said, nodding calmly as the pair of them faced one another for the first time in a great while.
“Ben trovato, mi amici!” a burly, confident young man said, making his way over to the four of them where they were standing. “Fabio Orsini, at your service! I’ve heard so much about you from my cousin Bartolomeo, Ser Ezio!”
“Your cousin is a fine warrior,” he said, grinning back at the man; truly, he’d not been expecting to run across another member of that family so soon, though perhaps he should have.
“Fabio helped us to find this storehouse that we’ve been using,” Uncle Mario said, smiling easily as he made his way back over to where the pair of them were standing.
“Grazie,” he said. “It’s perfect.”
Chapter 322: A hope for Roma
Chapter Text
“I know that you are both used to better accommodations in Toscana,” Fabio said, sounding more uncertain than he’d ever heard from either member of the family that he’d met.
“There’s no need to worry,” he said, smiling widely as he clapped Fabio’s right shoulder. “This place will do nicely.”
“Sí,” Uncle Mario said, nodding firmly. “You’ve done an admirable job of restoring the inside of this place, but the outside is covered in enough clinging ivy that no one is likely to notice that anything but old stone is under it.”
“Grazie, amici,” Fabio said, looking a great deal more more confident than he had when they first began their conversation. “I am off to begin preparations for Romagna. Today Cesare commands my forces, but I have hope that someday we will be free again.”
“Arrivederci e buona fortuna,” Uncle Mario said, and the rest of them added their own farewells and well-wishes as Fabio turned to leave at last.
“Now, I think it would be best if you refreshed yourself while you’re here, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, smiling widely as he directed Ezio to a neat little table so that he could sit down and get some rest, and apparently some food, as well. “There’s food, wine, and some good, Roman water as well. I would offer you some,” he directed at Aeon, smiling as he made his way over to the table, himself. “But, I don’t suppose that you can actually eat, considering your current state.”
“Indeed,” the man in black said. “However, as you seem to have no need of me, I’ll return to the Apple.”
“Bene,” he said, as Aeon’s form faded back into the colorless light that he’d seen so many times, retreating back into the artifact once more. “So, Fabio is one of the allies I heard about?”
“Sí,” Uncle Mario said, nodding as the three of them settled down at the table.
“It seems as though the Borgia are employing the Followers of Romulus to maintain their grip upon the hearts and minds of the populace of Roma,” Machiavelli said, speaking up for the first time since the three of them had all settled down at the table that now held both the Apple and the food that his uncle had told him about.
“What do you mean?” he asked, taking a pair of drumsticks from the platter of chicken that had been offered to him when he, Machiavelli, and Aeon had all made their way down into this place.
“This letter states that their payment will arrive in the usual fashion and at the usual time, and instructs them to create terrifying diversions among the people of Roma, specifically in those districts not fully under control of the Borgia,” Machiavelli said, studying the letter that he’d clearly just finished decrypting. “These attacks are to be timed with the “fortuitous” appearance of a Borgia priest, who will use the powers of the Church to “banish” the attackers.”
“Sí, that does sound like something they would think of,” Ezio muttered, narrowing his eyes in distaste. “Unfortunately, it also seems as though the scheme would be able to work, as well.”
“Sí, that is why I suggest that we begin making more concrete plans for an assault on the Borgia,” Machiavelli said. “To continue the good work you began at the stables.”
“You truly think we are ready for such an attack?” he asked, having finished one of the drumsticks while Machiavelli had been speaking to him. “Do you, then, know the state of our allies?” he asked, all but feeling the weight of the accumulated tasks that now stood before him. “Do you know that Catarina Sforza has been captured by the Borgia?”
“Merda,” Machiavelli growled. “If she has been, she will have been taken to the Castel Sant’Angelo. They’ve turned it into their stronghold. It is a good thing that none of them managed to lay their hands to the Apple.”
“Something we can thank Aeon for,” he said, feeling a great deal more settled. “Among other things,” he said, a brief chill crawling up his spine as he found himself considering what could have all too easily happened if the man in black had not been present. “Do we have an underground network to work with?”
“Not much of one at the moment, I’m afraid,” Uncle Mario said, turning away from the map he’d been studying while he and Machiavelli spoke. “We have some girls working at a brothel, the same one I sent your mother and sisters to stay at, in fact,” his uncle clarified. “But, the Madam we have in place is lazy, and it seems that she would rather spend her time attending parties for their own sake, rather than working to further our cause by gathering information.”
“What of the city’s thieves?” he asked, wondering about the thief who had made contact with him, apparently on the orders of La Volpe himself. “Do they have a guild?”
“Sí, but they have been refusing to speak with me,” Machiavelli said, sounding rather disconcerted by the fact of it.
“Given what I have been hearing, Gilberto feels as though he has been given little reason to trust you, Niccolò,” Uncle Mario said, a severe expression on his face as he turned to face Machiavelli.
“I suppose I should go make some friends, then,” he said, finishing the last of his meal and standing back up once again.
“Sí, I think that would be best,” Uncle Mario said, smiling as he stood up to embrace Ezio before he left.
Chapter 323: Skillful progression
Chapter Text
Thanking his uncle for his hospitality, and also for the directions through the tunnel that his uncle had provided to him, Ezio found himself also directed to take the Apple with him. Knowing that the man in black had indeed been a great help to him – to them all, truly – Ezio was more than pleased to bring the artifact with him. He knew that it would be safe not only in his hands, but Aeon’s as well. Making his way back down into the tunnels once again, Ezio kept the location of the brothel he’d been directed to in mind as he made his way through the darkness of the underground.
Sighing in relief as he made his way back up and out of the tunnel, near a building that seemed like it had seen better days, Ezio took his first breath of fresh air in a long time.
Nerving himself up, since he didn’t quite know exactly what he was going to be facing, but he was fully aware of the danger that each and every one of them were in, considering the position of power that the Borgia still maintained within Roma. Therefore, he was still prey to the perhaps irrational fears about what might or might not have been happening to the remaining members of his family. Still, Ezio remained fully aware that he wouldn’t do any of them any good if he drew attention to himself while he was making his way to the brothel.
Much as he worried for the remaining members of his family, Ezio wasn’t about to go bringing trouble down on their heads just for that.
Making his way up to the door, Ezio knocked and then took a deep breath as it was opened to him.
“Welcome to the Rosa in Fiore, stranger,” the courtesan who had answered the door greeted him, a welcoming smile upon her face.
“Salve,” he said, smiling back as calmly as he could manage at this point in time. “Would you be so kind as to call your manager for me?”
“Ezio!” the familiar voice of Claudia called to him, drawing his attention before the courtesan he was speaking to could get another word in.
“Claudia,” he said, a far more genuine smile appearing on his face as his little sister appeared before him once again.
“Aspetta, you are Ser Ezio?” the courtesan said, her gaze becoming all the sharper and more intent upon him, even as a certain warmth entered her eyes as she continued to study him.
“Sí,” he said, nodding as he found himself ushered into the Rosa in Fiore by the courtesan that had greeted him at the door. “They’ve told you about me?”
“Sí, Messer,” she said, as the pair of them made their way deeper into the old, worn-down looking building; he wondered if it would have been possible to bring it back to the glory days that had clearly long since passed by, since doing such a thing would invariably help the courtesans who lived and worked in such a place. “In fact, your sister Maria helped to rescue Lucia and Madonna Solari when they were taken captive by slave-traders.”
“I’m glad she managed to help you and your people, signorina,” he said, following the courtesan into the brothel where she and her fellows worked. “What’s your name?”
“Agnella, messer,” she said, bringing him to the large main room of the brothel where they had all gathered together, while they begun the next part of their plan to free Roma from the influence of the Borgia at last.
“Grazie for your efforts in sheltering my family, Agnella,” he said, making his way over to the table where Mother, little Maria, and Claudia were all seated together.
“Ezio!”
“It’s so good to see all of you again,” he said, as the four of them all embraced for the first time since they’d all been forced to split up under the threat of the Borgia and their Templar allies.
“Fratello, it seems that the woman in charge of this place hasn’t been doing a good job of managing them,” Claudia said, as the four of them all settled around the table once again.
“Sí, Uncle Mario said the same thing,” he said, nodding. “It sounds as though she’s more interested in her own pleasure than serving the cause of the Assassins and our allies. Still, you sound as though you intend to do something about it, sorellina.”
“Sí,” Claudia said with a sharp, decisive sort of nod. “I will be taking over the running of things from her.”
“What?” he exclaimed, feeling as though he had just tried to climb up a nonexistent step. “What are you talking about, Claudia? This isn’t a place for you.”
“If I’m going to be a member of this Brotherhood of ours, which I am,” his fierce little sister said, eyes lit once again with the inner-fire that he’d seen so many times. “I’m going to need experience in working with our allies.”
He couldn’t help but notice the way that Claudia referred to the Assassins as ‘we’ and ‘our’ rather than in the ways that those who did not consider themselves as a part of the Brotherhood would have done.
“Claudia, if you do choose to do this, you will be setting yourself on the front lines of our struggle,” he said, not knowing if he would be able to dissuade Claudia from her chosen course of action, but at least wishing for his little sister to understand what it was that she would be getting herself into. “Not only against the Templars, but against the Borgia as well.”
“Sí, and I know the dangers of both,” Claudia said, the fire in her eyes more than a match for the kind he’d often seen in little Maria’s eyes when she was particularly serious about something.
“Va bene,” he said, not entirely satisfied with his little sister’s decision, but knowing that there was very little he could have done to dissuade her now that she’d clearly made up her mind. “Then you’re going to have a lot of work ahead of you; I want this place thoroughly cleaned up, redecorated, and improved in every way. Truly, even the gardens seem as though they’ll need a lot of work done on them.”
“Ma certo,” Claudia said, the expression on her face seemingly calculated to remind him that she had been the one to look after Uncle Mario’s business while he and little Maria had been hunting Rodrigo Borgia and his cadre of Templar conspirators; first through the streets of Firenze, then over the rooftops of Venezia, and finally into Roma herself. “I know, Ezio.”
“Bene. I want this place to be the best establishment in town, and God knows you’re going to have competition. I also want you to keep your girls clean; this New Disease that no one seems to know about… Well, it looks to be the worst in the ports and in the biggest cities, so you know what that means.”
“Sí,” Claudia said, with another decisive nod. “Is there anything else?”
“Sí, I want you and your girls to see if you might be able to find Catarina Sforza, or at least some hints as to where she might have been taken,” he considered what he’d said for a moment, thinking back on what Machiavelli had said, when the pair of them had parted company. “I want to know if she truly has been taken to the Castel Sant’Angelo.”
“I’ll assign some of them to that, once we’ve gotten a handle on things here,” Claudia assured him.
“Grazie, sorellina,” he said, still not entirely certain that he was comfortable with Claudia putting herself forward in this kind of way, but knowing that such a thing had not been up to him, in the end. “I’m going to be leaving soon; there are other people that I’ll need to speak to, in order to shore up the Brotherhood’s alliances.”
“Bene, fratello,” little Maria said, hopping easily back to her feet from the chair where she’d sat watching him as he spoke to Claudia. “I’ll go with you.”
“Bene,” he said, knowing that he’d as little chance of arguing little Maria out of her chosen course of action as he’d had of dissuading Claudia; even less, in fact, since little Maria had already fought by his side so many times.
Chapter 324: The search continued
Chapter Text
As the pair of them departed from the Rosa in Fiore, Ezio found himself considering just which of the factions that the Brotherhood had ties to he would pay a visit to next.
“I think we might be best served by making contact with La Volpe before we move on to anything else,” little Maria suggested, as the pair of them made their way out into Roma at large again.
“Sí, I suppose that makes sense,” he said, nodding in consideration as the pair of them made their way up onto the rooftops of Roma once more.
And so, the pair of them began making their way through the city, each of them searching both together and alone for any signs of where La Volpe might have settled when he’d come to Roma in the first place. And, after a few false-starts and spending more than a few late afternoons and early evenings in taverns and the occasional hotel, he and little Maria began to catch the attention of those who worked with La Volpe and so to find themselves led to what seemed to be the broken-down remnants of a hotel. Narrowing his eyes as he beheld the place that the ragged-but-cheerful young thief had brought them to, Ezio found himself wondering just what La Volpe and his people planned to do with this place.
It was clearly the old, skeletal remains of an inn or a tavern of one kind or another, which did provide some ideas as to what might be done with the place, given an infusion of money and time; still, there would be the matter of bringing said money in,
He and little Maria made their way up to the skeletal building, whose grimy windows were shadowed with tattered blinds, and whose weathered woodwork was in need of a new coat of paint. The sign displaying the name of the place, along with a fox that looked either asleep or dead, hung awry, occasionally shuddering in the stiff breeze. Shading his eyes as he looked up at the weathered place, Ezio found himself wondering once again just what it was that La Volpe intended to do with such a place.
He was, admittedly, surprised to note that the door itself had been closed fast; given how early in the day it was, but perhaps such a thing could be easily explained by the fact that La Volpe and some of his fellow thieves were sheltering in this very place.
Before he could so much as knock once upon the tightly-closed door in front of him, Ezio found himself startled by the soft, amused chuckle of a rather familiar voice.
“Ezio,” La Volpe himself said, making his way over to where he and little Maria were standing at a relaxed, gently-ambling sort of pace. “How pleasant to see you, and your piccola Aquila.”
“Buon giorno, Gilberto,” little Maria said, smiling brightly as she turned to look back at the thief who had just presented himself to them. “I’m glad we could meet up with you again, though this place,” she looked around at the courtyard full of milling thieves, and the weathered skeleton of the building they were all standing in front of. “Well, I suppose that the Borgia wouldn’t be looking here, of all places.”
“Vero, but I expect that you didn’t just pay a visit to me to get out from under the eyes of the Borgia,” La Volpe said, grinning calmly as he came to a neat stop before where the pair of them were standing. “Let me guess: Ezio, you wish to put my thieves to work as spies.”
“Sí,” he said, feeling as though an intangible weight had been lifted from his shoulders as he saw the good-humored understanding appearing on La Volpe’s gently weathered face. “Will you and yours join me?”
“I have something to ask you, in turn,” La Volpe said, the good-humor that had formerly suffused his manner being covered over by a more businesslike manner that he’d seen when the pair of them had worked together those times in Firenze, back when he’d first called upon the Fox and his people in order to learn just how it was that an Assassin operated within Italia.
“What might that be?” he asked, not quite certain what La Volpe could have wanted, to bring the momentum of their conversation to a complete halt the way he was doing.
“That man in black of yours, I heard that he’s made himself known all the better, since we all met up back in Venezia,” La Volpe said, revealing just what it was that he’d been searching for.
“Sí, his name is Aeon,” Ezio said, considering once again just what he would say; Aeon seemed to be a private sort of person, one who had little interest in putting himself forward in any kind of way. However, he also seemed to be accepting of the fact that those around him would wish to know just what it was that drove him, and so Ezio detailed just what it was that he had learned of the man in black during the time that the pair of them had worked together.
“So, it seems as though this Aeon of ours is indeed a brother,” La Volpe said, a contemplative expression on his face as the pair of them settled back into their respective seats, each of them nursing a cup of decent wine as they took a small meal and a break from the constant motion of the past couple of days. “Still, I don’t know if I’m willing to offer the same level of trust you seem to be putting in Machiavelli.”
“Why is that, Gilberto?” little Maria asked, turning to the man with her own expression of curiosity; Ezio himself had been just about to ask that same question, so he paid all the more rapt attention to what it was that La Volpe was about to say.
“That man was an ambassador to the Papal court,” La Volpe said, taking another drink of wine, as though to fortify himself for what he was about to say. “And he traveled as a personal guest of Cesare himself.”
“Uncle Mario said that he did such things on our behalf,” he said, narrowing his eyes slightly as he wondered just what it was that La Volpe was truly getting at.
“Did he?” La Volpe asked, still seeming unimpressed by what he’d heard. “Even so, I know that he abandoned you just before the attack on Monteriggioni.”
“Machiavelli might not agree with all tastes, but he is an Assassin,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he contemplated the accusation that La Volpe had just made; it was a rather serious allegation, coming from a thief.
“Do you have more proof, perhaps?” little Maria asked, just as Ezio had begun to formulate a response of his own.
“Sí,” La Volpe said, just as the young thief that Ezio had found himself confronted by when he’d been traveling with Uncle Mario and Machiavelli on their way into Roma itself. “He’s meeting someone in the Trastevere right now. I’m going to see what it is that he’s doing. Care to accompany me?”
The pair of them were swift to agree, and so they made their way back up into the rooftops of Roma once more; however, things in this quarter of the city were a great deal older, and a great deal less cared-for, than the ones that Ezio had found himself walking on during those times when he’d been called to make his way through Roma without being noticed by the Borgia guards more than he could absolutely help. There were even times when Ezio found himself taking a bad step on a crumbling bit of roof, kicking down a dislodged stone or piece of roof tiling to clatter upon the ground. Still, the three of them moved fast enough that, even when they did chance to draw the attention of the Borgia guards, they were gone too quickly for any of them to react.
When La Volpe signaled them to a stop, overlooking an mostly-empty marketplace – all of its stalls closed, with the exception of a handful of brightly-colored wine booths that a number of citizens were fluttering about like butterflies – he, La Volpe, and little Maria all carefully concealed themselves behind a pair of smoking chimney stacks, waiting to see just what La Volpe had been so adamant that he needed to know.
Soon enough, Machiavelli himself began to make his way into the square, his manner that of a man who wished to go unseen while he was about his task, and clearly knew just how many places that there were that might be hiding unfriendly observers. Ezio watched, feeling more than a bit of consternation, as a guard wearing the crest of the Borgia on his cloak approached Machiavelli, handing him what seemed to be a small, folded note, before departing in the same hurried way that Machiavelli himself had made his way into the square. Narrowing his eyes, disconcerted by what he’d just seen, Ezio began to hear the sound of a scuffle somewhere else in the square.
“Volpe, my son has been injured!” called a frantic thief, looking around the rooftops.
Ezio, having known the kind of fear and uncertainty he could hear in the voice of the thief calling up to them, stepped out from behind the chimney he and little Maria had been hiding behind.
“That’s Trimalchio’s voice!” La Volpe exclaimed, looking down at the thief with a stricken expression on his own face. “And that’s his younger son, Claudio!”
“I’ll distract the Borgia guards!” little Maria said, decisively pulling back her hood to spill out a waterfall of the same kind of silver hair that he’d seen so many times while he’d been working alongside Aeon. “You two go and help him!”
“Come on!” he exclaimed, knowing that his littlest sister’s appearance – to say nothing of the fight she’d participated in against Rodrigo Borgia himself within the depths of Il Vaticano – would draw the Borgia guards to her like flies to spilled honey.
“Sí! We’ll kill the archers while she draws their attention!” La Volpe called back, clearly having understood little Maria’s intent without needing to have such a thing explained to him.
Chapter 325: New management
Chapter Text
As he and La Volpe both split up, each of them taking a group of guards that had just turned their attention to little Maria as she dashed brazenly past them, silver hair flapping like a banner in the wind, Ezio ground his teeth. He’d known that it was a good idea – something that the Borgia would have doubtless told their lackeys to be on the lookout for; particularly considering the defiance that little Maria had shown to Rodrigo Borgia – but that didn’t stop Ezio from hating the need for it. Not a bit.
Especially since he knew just what it was that the Borgia – rather, the Templars that supported them – would do to someone like little Maria; truly, even Aeon himself could be in danger from them, if they somehow contrived to get their hands on the Apple that he inhabited.
Once he and La Volpe had managed to cut their way through the Borgia guards that little Maria had drawn to her, the pair of them met up once again. Bracing Claudio between the pair of them, he and La Volpe started moving quickly; even with the last of the guards that had been in this area dealt with, there would always be more of them who would come to this area under the orders of their Borgia masters.
“Grazie, amico,” La Volpe said, as the three of them began moving again, with little Maria and some of La Volpe’s fellow thieves keeping watch over them from the rooftops. “You’re going to be in more than a bit of trouble after this,” he continued, a slight grin on his face, once the pair of them had managed to make their way to a quiet square and could hence take some time to rest from their flight after having been fighting and running for such a long time. “Some of my people have already seen wanted posters; both for you, and your sister, as well. I’ve already employed some of my people to rip them down.”
“I’m glad to know that at least some of them have more sense than to go picking fights with the Borgia,” he volleyed back, smirking slightly in amusement as the three of them continued on their way.
“There’s a tension in this city that you haven’t yet experienced, amico,” La Volpe said, clearly known that he’d been trying to lighten the heavy mood that they were all laboring under, but still as serious as he’d ever been. “Still, I’m glad to have had your help. You can count on my help, though I still don’t approve of Machiavelli.”
“Intesi,” he said, nodding. “I’m grateful to have had your help as well, amico.” Ezio said, nodding as the three of them continued on their way.
“Bene, you know how to disappear,” La Volpe said, nodding. “We’ll meet you back at the guild. The Borgia have many more enemies than just you, but none more annoying, so they’ll be devoting more of their attention to you if they catch sight of you. The Borgia won’t stop until they see you hanging from the hooks of Castel Sant’Angelo.”
“They’ll have to find me, first,” he said, smirking slightly.
“Bene,” the thief allowed, chuckling softly.
Still, the mention of the Castel brought back thoughts of Catarina Sforza and her fate at the hands of the Borgia and their lackeys; he still intended to find her, to save her from whatever kind of grim plans that Cesare and his forces might have had in mind for her. As he and little Maria made their way back to the Thieves Guild by a more circuitous route than the one they’d previously taken, in an effort to not only stay out of sight of any of the Borgia guards that might have still been looking for them, but also to deal with the remaining posters that might have been hanging up around the quarter of Roma that they were moving through.
Once the pair of them had finally managed to make their way back to the old, abandoned inn that La Volpe and his fellow thieves were all staying in, Ezio allowed himself to relax slightly when he and little Maria had gotten out of sight of anyone who might have been looking their way. He’d been shifting into the second-sight that he and little Maria were capable of using periodically, just to make all the more certain that the pair of them weren’t being followed, but nothing in the world was completely infallible.
He’d come to know that better than most, after everything that had happened to the Auditore family as a whole.
The thieves inside the inn were tending to Claudio and his father, bandaging the wounds that they had incurred from their battle with the Borgia guards that they had been unfortunate enough to run afoul of during the battle that had taken place just a short time ago. La Volpe was seated at a nearby table, looking about as exhausted as Ezio himself felt, with a cup of wine and a roughly-cut plate of salami.
“What a day,” La Volpe sighed heavily, once he’d caught sight of the pair of them, making their own way over to the table where he’d seated himself to eat.
“I think I could do with a few less of them,” he said, dropping down into another chair beside La Volpe, even as little Maria herself dropped into a seat beside him.
“Not much chance of that,” La Volpe said, with a chuckle of his own. “Not while this fight of ours is still going on.”
“I know,” he said, feeling a smirk tugging at his lips as a plate of salami was placed in front of him and little Maria, as well. “And, with regards to Machiavelli; I know what we saw, but we both know the man’s methods by now.”
“Sí, the man is very devious,” La Volpe said, nodding in a way that still seemed disapproving, for all that he now appeared willing to give his support in their current endeavor. “Still, I owe the pair of you for Claudio’s survival; so if you say that Machiavelli remains loyal to our cause, Ezio, then I am inclined to trust your judgment.”
“Grazie,” he said, knowing that La Volpe held a great deal of sway with the thieves of any guild he seemed to join. “So, you’ll be helping us from now on?”
“Sí. But, there is something else I would like to talk to you about,” La Volpe continued, and Ezio turned his full attention to the man. “I was planning to do something with this place. Since the three of us seem to be working together again, I’d like to know what you think, too, Ezio.”
“Go on,” he said, settling back into his chair after another bite of salami.
“The others and I were already planning to renovate this place, but I’d like to know what you think of the idea,” La Volpe elaborated, as the three of them savored the last scraps of their respective meals.
“We need to make sure that the Borgia remain unaware of this place’s true purpose,” Ezio narrowed his eyes in contemplation, standing up so that he could take a more in-depth look at the place where he and little Maria were currently staying. “Perhaps it could look like an inn again?”
“Sí, that’s what the others and I were thinking,” La Volpe said, a satisfied smile on his face. “Still, it’s going to need a lot of work; painting, re-shingling, a new inn sign,” the thief chuckled. “And that’s just to start with.”
“Sí, though I expect you have plans for seeing to that, as well,” he said, smiling back at La Volpe as the three of them began clearing the table, handing in their used dishes to be washed.
“Vero,” La Volpe said, chuckling as the three of them began making their way deeper into the skeletal remains of the inn they were all currently staying in.
All told, it took about a month of dedicated work by La Volpe and his thieves – a great many of whom were tradesmen of one kind or another, who had been driven out of work by their refusal to kowtow to the Borgia or turn a blind eye to their depredations – but, in the end, the inn was indeed restored to its former glory by their combined efforts. The peeling paint had been scraped clean, and then replaced with a fine coat of bright, fresh paint; the old windows had been replaced, along with the blinds that had once covered them; the roof had been reinforced, and the holes that had been discovered had been patched just as fast as La Volpe and his people could manage to uncover them.
The inn’s new sign, however, was of course the first thing that one’s eye would be drawn to when they approached: it depicted a young, male fox, though this one was clearly sleeping, and not dead as the one on the previous sign had seemed to be. There was also a sense of subdued mischief about the creature; almost as though, when he inevitably awoke, he’d have been more than capable of raiding fifty henhouses in a single swoop. Given the way La Volpe had been looking at it ever since it had been put up, he was more than pleased with how it had come out.
“Buon giorno, and welcome once again to La Volpe Addormentata,” La Volpe said, making his way over to where he and little Maria were standing.
“I see you kept the name,” he said, grinning as he and little Maria made their way over to him.
“Sí, I enjoyed it, for some reason,” La Volpe said, grinning at the pair of them as they joined him in examining the interior of the inn that they’d all helped to refurbish over the course of the month that had passed.
“The work has gone well,” he commented, looking back at the various thieves going about their daily activities within the walls of the inn. “No one seems to suspect its true purpose.”
“Sí,” La Volpe said, chuckling as the three of them made their way to a back room – one with a sign declaring that it was for private business only – and past the pair of strong-armed thieves standing guard in a subtle sort of way. “The guild’s business will be handled from here,” he continued, leading them down a darkened corridor and to a suite of rooms behind heavy doors; the room that La Volpe ultimately led them to was hung with heavy maps of Roma, and lined with desks and tables, each and every one of them were neatly-stacked with papers and every one of them had a man or woman seated behind them, each of them hard at work even though it was barely past dawn.
“This is where our real business is done,” La Volpe said, as the three of them made their way fully into the room and looked over all of those who were hard at work on their various tasks.
“It looks very efficient,” he commented, once he’d taken in the sight of so many people hard at work even this early.
“That is one good thing about thieves,” La Volpe said, grinning slightly. “Good ones, at least: they’re independent thinkers and they like a bit of competition, even among themselves.”
“Sí, I remember,” he said, chuckling in remembrance of everything that he’d seen and done since he’d begun his journey as one of the Brotherhood.
“You’d probably be able to show them a thing or two,” La Volpe said, grinning at the pair of them as they began making their way back out of the workroom where all of those thieves had been quartered while they went about their work. “Both of you, if you chose to participate.”
“We might do that,” he said, after sharing a speaking glance with little Maria.
“Bene, but it wouldn’t be safe for either of you to stay here,” La Volpe said, a serious expression overcoming his face as he led them back out into the general hustle and bustle of the inn at large. “You in particular, piccola aquila; the Borgia will be hunting for you all the more diligently, since their guards have clearly reported your presence by now. Still, do visit me whenever you can, both of you.”
“We will,” little Maria said, just before he himself could have spoken up in that same way. “It’s been good speaking with you, amico.”
“We should be going now,” he said, as the pair of them made their way to the front of the inn and prepared to depart at last. “We’ll see you again.”
“Where should I send my reports?” La Volpe asked, as the three of them prepared to part for the last time in a long while.
“To the headquarters of the Assassin Brotherhood on Isola Tiberina,” he said, turning to depart from La Volpe’s inn at last.
Chapter 326: The mercenary’s favor
Chapter Text
He and little Maria made their way back up onto the rooftops of Roma, once they’d gotten out of the quarter that La Volpe and his thieves inhabited, Ezio having had more of his share of trying to make his way over the broken rooftops and crumbling tiles of the district while he and little Maria had been staying there. The pair of them had discussed their next course of action, and both of them had agreed that they would be best served by looking up Bartolomeo d’Alviano.
The man’s strength, loyalty, and unbending hatred of the Templars made him one of the most dedicated and dependable allies that the Brotherhood possessed.
However, Bartolomeo had been fighting alongside his fellow mercenaries in Spain for a rather long time, while he and little Maria had been fighting against the forces of the Borgia and their Templar allies, and now he’d returned to Italia once more. It would be good to see him again, even though he did have a marked tendency towards fits of both melancholia and rage, sometimes to a worrying degree.
He and little Maria continued on their way to the outskirts of the town, beyond which Bartolomeo kept his fortified barracks where he and his mercenary forces stood against the Borgia forces, which continued to close like a noose around them all with every passing day. As the sun steadily moved westward, bringing with it a stifling heat that was only relieved by a westerly breeze, Ezio found himself passing beyond the last outpost of the town that he, little Maria, and the rest of their family had been staying.
When the pair of them arrived before the huge gate in the tall palisade that stood before the barracks where Bartolomeo and his fellow mercenaries were quartered in, he knocked firmly upon it and waited for a long moment.
When a small port in the gate before them opened, Ezio felt a pair of eyes upon him, and then the port in the door before them closed and he heard the sound of a brief, muffled, conversation. There came a cheerful, familiar baritone bellow, as Bartolomeo threw open the door in front of him, grinning widely as he beheld the pair of them.
“Ezio! Piccola Maria! Come in! Come in!” the gruffly cheerful man said, grinning widely as he leaned forward to embrace the pair of them. “I’ll kill you if you don’t!”
Laughing, knowing that Bartolomeo – for all his bluff and admitted skill at fighting – wasn’t the kind to murder his allies, Ezio embraced him alongside little Maria.
“It’s good to see you again, amico,” little Maria said, as the pair of them shared a formal kiss and stepped apart from each other once more.
“Wait here!” the mercenary instructed them, his usual exuberance becoming more subdued, even if only just. “You both must meet my wife!”
When Bartolomeo turned and began calling for someone by the name of Pantasilea, Ezio found himself wondering at the fact that the rough mercenary was married to anything but his work; judging by the expression that he could see spreading across his littlest sister’s face, she felt just the same. The sound of a pair of footsteps making their way up the stairs that he’d just caught a glimpse of while he’d been studying the interior of the room he and little Maria had found themselves in drew his attention, and Ezio looked over to see the woman that Bartolomeo had to have been talking about when he’d introduced them to her.
She was certainly a beauty, that much was true, but there was a knowing and intelligence to her eyes that made Ezio suspect that Bartolomeo had found more than simply gentle companionship when the pair of them had met. Still, no one with eyes could say that Pantasilea wasn’t a beauty: she seemed to be in her mid-to-late twenties, with fine, soft brown hair that neatly framed her heart-shaped face, and her nose was tip-tilted like a flower, with deep, good-humored eyes that sparkled with an intelligence and inner-fire that reminded Ezio of his own family.
Particularly little Maria; once she had made up her mind to do something, Ezio didn’t know if there was anything short of one of the Pieces of Eden that could stop her.
“Ah, here she is!” Bartolomeo said, a wide grin spreading across his face as the four of them all faced each other in the front room of his barracks.
“Pleased to meet you,” the woman said, smiling in a welcoming way.
“Charmed; truly,” he said, reaching out to take her hand so that he could lay a soft kiss upon the back of it; firmly ignoring little Maria’s badly-hidden chuckling from off to his left.
Little Maria had soon shared her own formal kiss with Pantasilea, though not before his littlest sister had given him a teasing look over her shoulder.
“Now, we talk about war,” Bartolomeo said, seeming as though he’d been restraining himself for as long as he could, but there was only so much time that he could spend out of his natural element.
He could hear little Maria stifling her snickers just that much better than she’d done when he’d been greeting Pantasilea, and was tempted to laugh himself, if only for a moment.
“How goes the fight against the French?” he asked, sobering quickly as he refocused his thoughts on the reality – less than pleasant as it currently was – that they were all dealing with.
“Bene, my men are holding their own,” Bartolomeo was quick to reassure him, and Ezio found himself wondering if such was actually the case.
He’d worked with the gruff mercenary more than a few times, and knew better than most that Bartolomeo had a distinct habit of overestimating the strength of his own position, or else simply overlooking matters that a more cautious soldier would be able to spot in time to either turn them to their own advantage or else avoid them entirely.
“Machiavelli seemed to think things were more difficult,” he said wanting to see Bartolomeo’s reaction for himself before he made any hasty judgments of one sort or another.
“You know Machiavelli,” Bartolomeo began, his tone beginning to take on the dismissive quality that Ezio knew never quite boded well for whatever situation the man found himself facing, when the sound of the door slamming open firmly derailed any further attempts at conversation on either of their parts.
“We need your help, Capitano!” the man who had just stumbled in – Ezio had soon recognized him as one of the mercenary captain’s sergeants – shouted, bringing all of their attention to him.
“Excuse me,” Bartolomeo said, turning back to them after he’d nodded to the man now standing at the forefront of the room, then he turned his full attention to Pantasilea once more. “Throw me Bianca!”
The greatsword was duly tossed over, and Bartolomeo buckled it around his waist even as he followed determinedly in the footsteps of the sergeant who’d originally come to fetch him.
“Ezio, let me get to the point,” Pantasilea said, reaching out to take hold of his left arm, just before he himself could have started making his way out of the barracks. “The fight is not going well; either here, or out in Romagna. We’re under attack from both sides: the Borgia on one flank, and the French under General Valois on the other. But, know this: the Borgia position is weak. If we can defeat them, we can concentrate our forces on the French front. Taking the nearby tower would help; if someone could get around the back.”
“Intesi,” he said, smiling as he fully realized just what it was that Pantasilea had been getting at. “This information of yours is invaluable. Mille grazie, Madonna d’Alviano.”
“It is the least a wife can do, to help her husband,” Pantasilea said, a calm, gentle smile on her face.
“Will you be needing any help with this, fratello?” little Maria asked, looking as though she would be perfectly willing to follow him into battle, but also as though she could use some more food and some time to relax.
“No, sorellina,” he said, smiling gently as he set his hands on both of his littlest sister’s shoulders. “I can manage this on my own. Stay here; have some food, you look like you could use it.”
“So do you, fratello,” she returned, laughing softly as the pair of them embraced and shared a kiss that was far less formal than affectionate.
Chapter 327: The light phantasmal
Chapter Text
Turning to leave little Maria and Pantasilea, Ezio smiled again as he heard the pair of them beginning to talk about just what had been going on while she and Bartolomeo had been engaged in battles against their myriad opponents. Knowing that he had his own opponents to look to, Ezio turned his thoughts to the captain that the Borgia would have doubtless placed in charge of this particular area.
Even in the midst of the rush, crush, and confusion of battle all around him, Ezio was still able to find the captain that the Borgia had placed in command of the forces making such a determined assault upon Bartolomeo and his own mercenary soldiery. Making his way up the side of the indicated tower, festooned as it was with the Borgia colors as well as the crest that he’d been seeing more and more of as he continued about his work in freeing the people of Roma from the tyranny inflicted on them for so long by the Borgia and their Templar masters.
Peering over the lip of the tower’s roofline, Ezio paused for a moment as he beheld the eight men with guns looking down upon the battle. Taking only a single breath as he heaved himself over the edge of the rear parapet, Ezio fell upon the four men nearest to him with his dagger and hidden-blade. The four of them fell as easily before him as Ezio could have asked, but the other four had not been caught so unprepared. One of them, a man cleanly out of reach of even the sword that he had brought with him, began to draw his wheel-lock and aim it for him.
Ezio, acting even more quickly than the Borgia’s hireling, threw one of his many well-balanced daggers into the man’s head, sinking it between the man’s eyes in a sickening sort of way.
The sharp blast and boom of the man’s wheel-lock drew Ezio’s attention to the other Borgia soldier who had just been cut down by the errant shot that had been originally aimed at him; said shot had passed straight through the throat of the closest man on his right, and then imbedded itself in the shoulder of the man on his right. Breathing more easily now that five of the men that he had been set against had been killed, Ezio pressed forward to finish the battle.
Once he’d dispatched the last of the three remaining gunmen, Ezio continued on his way down through the tower, after pausing for a moment to set fire to the flags and banners decorating the outer walls.
There were still men that he was forced to confront on his way down through the tower, of course, but after the battle he had just come through Ezio was more than prepared to do what he had to in order to continue making his way out. However, with their resolve clearly bolstered by the taking of the tower that had once been just one more sign of Borgia power and influence in this part of Roma, Ezio could hear the sounds of fighting growing ever more intense as he himself cut down the last of the Borgia guards in his path.
Flinging open the gate that stood as the last thing barring his way, Ezio breathed deeply of the fresh air as he made his way down the low rise that the tower had stood upon, pressing forward to meet up with Bartolomeo once more. However, it seemed as though he was not the only one who had had such a thought; Pantasilea and little Maria had both come out to meet with the bluff mercenary captain in the spent field of battle. Chuckling softly as he hurried his steps, Ezio found himself smiling almost as widely as he could see Bartolomeo doing.
“Ezio! Good work! We sent those luridi codardi running for the hills!” Bartolomeo exclaimed, his grin growing all the wider as the pair of them stepped close to embrace for a long moment.
“Sí, indeed we did,” he said, even as he and Pantasilea shared a speaking glance; truly, this victory belonged just as much to her as it did to himself or Bartolomeo.
“Those newfangled guns,” Bartolomeo went on, clapping Ezio firmly on the shoulder as the entire group began falling back to the barracks at last. “We managed to capture a few, but we’re still working on how to use them. Anyway,” he continued, the light returning to his face as he beamed. “Now that the Pope’s dogs have fled, I’ll be able to draw more men to the fight on our side. But first, especially after all of this, I want to reinforce our barracks.”
“Bene, but who’s going to take care of that?” he asked, as their group finally made it back into sight of said barracks once again.
“I’m not much good with these things,” Bartolomeo admitted, shaking his head in the self-depreciating way that Ezio had seen the man do when the kind of dour moods that he would fall into on one occasion or another would creep up on him. “You’re the one with an education, why don’t you approve of the plans?”
“You already have some drawn up?” he asked; truly, with a woman like Pantasilea to support him, Ezio supposed he shouldn’t have found such a thing as surprising as he did.
Still, Ezio couldn’t help the moment of wrong-footedness that he’d almost found himself physically stumbling over for that moment when he’d first heard it.
“Sí,” Bartolomeo said, sounding rather pleased. “Pantasilea employed the services of a brilliant young man; a Florentine, like you. Man by the name of Michelangelo Buonarotti.”
“I’ve heard of him, though we’ve never met in person,” he said, feeling a great deal more confident in the plans he was about to be looking over. “In the meantime, there’s a favor I need to ask of you.”
“Name it!” Bartolomeo exclaimed, his previous exuberance clearly having returned in force.
“I need some of your men to keep an eye on the movements of Cesare and Rodrigo Borgia,” he said, pausing for a moment as the gates were opened for them, and then following Bartolomeo and Pantasilea as the pair of them made their way back into the barracks once again. “Can you have some of your men shadow them?”
“After this, I’m sure I’ll soon have no shortage of men,” Bartolomeo said, with a hearty chuckle. “At least, I have enough to give you a decent workforce for the improvements to be made to this place, and a handful of skilled scouts to keep an eye on the Borgia.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding as he felt the last of the tension he’d been carrying from the conclusion of the battle finally falling away.
And, while he did fully recall that La Volpe and Machiavelli both had their own agents looking in on the secret activities of the Borgia and their Templar masters, Ezio knew that it was always better to have more eyes on a problem than less. That had likely been just what Pantasilea, who had probably been responsible for finding and then hiring Messer Michelangelo in the first place, had said when she suggested that he could give Bartolomeo’s plans a second going-over.
As with his efforts to improve the lodgings of La Volpe and his thieves, work on Bartolomeo’s barracks consumed the better part of a month, during which time he was of course kept updated on further developments as to what was happening among the Borgia and their lackeys. Knowing that Catarina Sforza remained in their keeping was not something that let him rest easily, those times when Ezio would find himself with enough idleness to reflect back on that fact, but for the most part Ezio found that his thoughts were more than occupied by the more mundane tasks of overseeing renovations, rebuilding, and improvements to Bartolomeo’s holdings in Roma.
Still, once the work itself had been finished, Bartolomeo called him back so the pair of them could make a proper inspection of the barracks.
“Isn’t she a thing of beauty?” Bartolomeo asked, a wide grin on his face as he swept a meaty arm around them as the pair of them continued on their way through the refurbished main building.
“Very impressive, I think,” he said, smiling back in response to the sheer enthusiasm he could hear in the mercenary’s voice.
“More and more people have been joining up lately, and it has gotten very competitive, which is just the way I like it,” Bartolomeo said, grin widening all the more as he continued over to a large board set against the far wall on an easel. “As you can see, this board shows the rankings of our top warriors; as they gain ranks, they move up the board.”
“So, where am I?” he asked, grinning at the good-humored amusement the pair of them were presently sharing; all the while knowing that such a thing couldn’t last.
There was still a whole world out there, a world threatened by the Borgia, the Templars, and others like them, and it wanted saving.
“There’s also the matter of that man in black of yours. Aeon, was it?”
“Sí,” he said, nodding and wondering just what it was that Bartolomeo was getting at. “Did you wish to speak to him about something?”
“Your uncle told me about what he did, when all of you made your escape from those Borgia bastardi back in Monteriggioni,” Bartolomeo said, the eagerness in his voice giving Ezio a definite idea of just what it was that the bluff mercenary wished to speak about.
“So, then you wish to see a demonstration?” he asked, feeling rather amused to have guessed correctly about just what it was that had drawn Bartolomeo’s attention to Aeon; there were few things as likely to draw the attention of a mercenary as Bartolomeo as the kind of combat prowess that Aeon had demonstrated on those occasions when he was called upon to do battle against the Borgia and their Templar allies.
“Sí!” the bluff mercenary said, grinning more widely as the pair of them began making their way out of the barracks.
~AC: Bro~
“So, you and Machiavelli have been in contact, Madonna?” she asked, as the pair of them looked up at what seemed to be a newly-installed dovecote, one that was alive with pigeons of all kinds.
“Sí,” she said, nodding with a look of what seemed to be a pleased satisfaction on her face. “Each of these birds continue to bring me the name of one of the Borgia’s agents in Roma. The Borgia grew fat on the Jubilee of 1500. All of that money from eager pilgrims who wished to buy themselves absolution, and of course those who were not so eager, but were robbed anyway.”
She scoffed. “Sí, that sounds just like those bastardi.”
“Sí,” Pantasilea said, nodding even as an amused smile knifed briefly across her face, before she became sober once again. “The Borgia’s spies comb the city, searching out our spies and exposing them whenever they can. Machiavelli has managed to uncover some of their names, and some of these he has managed to send me by carrier pigeon. Meanwhile, Rodrigo has added even more members to the Curia, in an effort to maintain his balance of power among the cardinals. I suppose you know that he has decades of experience in Vatican politics.”
“Sí, Ezio and Uncle Mario have both been keeping me informed about Rodrigo Borgia and his dealings,” she said, biting back a smile as she remembered what else they had told her about him; the both of them had been about as verbose in their descriptions as they had been vulgar.
Not as though the fat, old bastardo hadn’t deserved every bit of it, but it was still amusing all the same.
“Bene,” Pantasilea said, nodding in a pleased sort of way. “Take these names along with you when you and your brother return to the city. They will prove of great use to you both.”
“Millie grazie, Madonna d’Alviano,” she said, smiling with the relief and gratitude that Pantasilea’s actions had earned.
“Hunt these people down, and eliminate them when you are able, and all of Roma will breathe easier for it.”
“I think that will help all of us breathe easier, Madonna,” Maria said, smiling as the pair of them parted from one another at last.
~AC: Bro~
He and Bartolomeo had spoken at length about the matter, and eventually the pair of them had mutually decided that finding out just what it was that Aeon could truly do was more a matter that concerned the whole of the Brotherhood, rather than just the pair of them, or even the mercenaries that Bartolomeo and his wife lived and worked beside. In light of that realization, he’d sent a one of Bartolomeo’s scouts to Isola Tiberina to make the suggestion that they have a demonstration of Aeon’s prowess in combat. At least for those of them who had not been able to see what the man in black was capable of when he was pressed into battle.
Those few times that he had been pressed into combat, in any case.
Leaving Bartolomeo, Pantasilea, and their mercenary company behind, Ezio made his way back to Isola Tiberina – through a roundabout route that would serve to throw even the Borgia’s more determined spies off of his trail; at least those who had not been careless enough to cross his path and die under his blades – with little Maria. Still, there was also the matter of Catarina Sforza, who had been a prisoner of the Borgia for entirely too long.
Still, it was entirely possible that the one might make the other more simple.
And so, when the day of the demonstration had come, Ezio found himself all the more eager to see such a spectacle.
“I suppose our fellows have all gathered?” Aeon asked, appearing once more from the depths of the Apple where he had presumably been resting for such time as Ezio and his brother and sister Assassins had not needed to call upon him.
“Sí, Machiavelli, La Volpe, Uncle Mario, and some of their associates have gathered within the hideout for this,” he said, smiling as he reached out to clasp Aeon’s right shoulder as the pair of them continued on their way up through the tunnel and into the bottom level of the old warehouse that concealed their presence on Isola Tiberina itself. “Each and every one of us is eager to see what it is that you can truly do, amico.”
“Indeed,” Aeon said, nodding in a thoughtful sort of way.
The pair of them had soon made their way into the cleared room, and Aeon’s yellow eyes narrowed slightly as he beheld the target dummies – twelve in all – that had been set up in the center of the room in order to allow him to demonstrate his prowess in combat. To at least some degree, since these dummies wouldn’t be any real kind of challenge to anyone who clearly had the kind of skill that those of the Brotherhood possessed as a matter of course.
“Benvenuto, amico,” Uncle Mario said, grinning widely as he and Aeon made their way fully into the room where he, Machiavelli, La Volpe, and a handful of La Volpe’s fellow thieves had all gathered to bear witness to the demonstration of skill that Aeon was about to provide for them. “I’m glad to see that you agreed to this.”
Aeon nodded, though the expression on his face remained unreadable as he swept his gaze over the gathered forms of La Volpe’s fellow thieves, turning away before Ezio could do more than begin to wonder just what such a thing might have been about. However, the pair of them reached the center of the room and the twelve straw dummies that had been set up in order to allow Aeon to give them at least some idea of the skill in combat that he was capable of.
Stepping back as Aeon made his way into the midst of the twelve targets that had been set up for him, Ezio watched as the man in black paused for a long moment, as though deep in contemplation as to what he was going to do next. The moment only lasted what seemed to be the length of a couple breaths, before he’d suddenly called those strange, shining swords of his back to his hands. Ezio had blinked what seemed to be three times, before the last of the twelve had fallen to the floor.
Some of them had been slashed in multiple places, and Aeon had dismissed those shining swords of his even before the last of them had fallen to the stone floor beneath him.
“Was that to your liking?” he asked, though his gaze seemed to be aimed slightly over Ezio’s right shoulder, as though he was also inviting Desmond to express his own opinion.
It was slightly odd, considering that the young man who seemed to have somehow come to them from the future seemed to be deliberately avoiding them at the moment, but it was clear that Aeon was still capable of both seeing and – like as not – speaking to him, as well. Still, Desmond may have very well had a good reason for keeping to himself the way he was doing. The simple fact remained that, unlike Minerva whose time on Earth had ended, the strange young man in the odd clothes had come to them from the future.
And, it seemed that the future would need to be left to look after itself.
“Grazie for being so obliging, amico,” he said, smiling as he made his way back over to where Uncle Mario, Machiavelli, and little Maria all stood, alongside La Volpe and some of his thieves. More than a few of those thieves seemed unnerved by what they had seen; foremost among them being the old man with the single eye that he’d met back during their escape from the besieged grounds of Monteriggioni.
The grounds that he was going to make a point of rebuilding, once all of this business with the Borgia had been concluded. Still, there were other matters that needed seeing to, now that all of this had been dealt with.
“While it is good to know that we have an ally that is more than capable of extricating himself from any situation that he might find himself in, I was under the impression that you also wished to know what had become of Catarina Sforza,” Machiavelli said, turning to him with an expression that – while it did hold a certain sense that he had indeed been impressed by the things that he had seen – also held a sense of impatience.
“Sí, but knowing the full capabilities of one of our allies will be of great help when I move against the Borgia again,” he said.
“Vero,” Uncle Mario said with a chuckle, bringing a smile to Ezio’s own face as he turned to look back at the old man. “That is certain to be a surprise for those Templar bastardi.”
Chapter 328: Captives and captors
Chapter Text
“What have the rest of you managed to find out?” he asked, mastering himself but still wearing the grin that had emerged on his face as he’d beheld the simple ease with which Aeon had dispatched target dummies that had been set before him.
Even though it was just as simple a fact that living enemies would be something different to face, it was also a simple fact that an enemy had to be able to see their foe in order to strike; such a thing would be made all the more difficult by the sheer speed that Aeon had demonstrated when he was moving.
“That bastardo Cesare is in the Castel Sant’Angelo, with the Pope,” Bartolomeo said, finally managing to tear his eyes away from Aeon and the remains of the target dummies he was standing over.
“My spies tell me that the pair of them have become all the more desperate to get their hands on the Apple, considering,” La Volpe said, casting a rather sardonic glance over at Aeon; Ezio couldn’t help but notice that, while most of the man in black’s attention was taken up by the form of Desmond that seemed to be visible only to him, he was also devoting a fair amount of his attention to the old thief standing at the back of La Volpe’s group. “Well, you can see why they would worry.”
“Sí, I can see how that would concern them,” he said, grinning all the wider at the thought of how the Borgia must have been unsettled by Aeon and all of the things that the man in black had proved himself capable of in even the short time that he’d interacted with the Brotherhood.
Sometimes, Ezio found himself wondering what the Brotherhood might have been capable of, if the differences between Altaïr and Aeon had not been so irreconcilable as they clearly had been.
“Caterina Sforza will be moved to the prison within the Castel next week, on Thursday at dusk,” Claudia reported, taking up the thread of their discussion and bringing their attention back to what it truly was that they had to concern themselves with.
Or, at least what Ezio himself was most concerned by.
“Bene, so the Castello it is,” Machiavelli said, nodding as they all came to a consensus at last. “Roma will heal quickly with Cesare and Rodrigo gone.”
“Only if the opportunity to assassinate them quickly arises will I take it,” he said, wanting to be certain that all of them fully understood what he was aiming for; saving one of their staunchest and most dedicated allies took precedence, in this case.
“Do not repeat your mistake in the Vault,” Machiavelli admonished, his tone and demeanor almost as stern as it had been when Ezio had first reported his decision to the man, though it had to be said that it was a great deal less harsh. “You must kill them.”
“I’m with Niccolò,” Bartolomeo said, tearing his appraising gaze away from Aeon once again. “We shouldn’t wait.”
“They must be eliminated, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, the mirth on his face having retreated to just his eyes once more.
“Do not worry, mi amici: they will die,” he said, standing firm and unbending once more. “You have my word.”
“Besides, having Messer Aeon with you should send those dickless bastardi running for the hills,” Bartolomeo said with a rough, hearty laugh. Then he turned his attention to Aeon himself. “How would you feel about learning to use another kind of sword, amico?”
Turning away with a slight smile, knowing that Aeon would simply retreat back into the Apple if and when he found himself losing interest in the discussion that Bartolomeo wished to have with him, he turned his attention to Machiavelli.
“So, you know just where and when you’re going to be able to save Caterina from the Borgia,” Machiavelli said, the expression on his face not quite one of approval, but also not quite one of disapproval, either.
“I’m doing this for all of us, Machiavelli,” he said, feeling again the uncertainty that La Volpe must have been feeling about the man.
He wondered for a moment if this was the same kind of feeling that Aeon himself had brought out in Altaïr, and if that was why the Syrian Assassin had never been quite willing to trust him. He’d little enough chance of finding something like that out, however, and so he put those thoughts out of his mind. Aeon was the kind of man who kept his own council, and so Ezio doubted that the man in black would be willing to speak about his interactions with Altaïr back during the times of the Third Crusade.
~AC: Bro~
When the time came for Caterina to be moved into the prison within Castel Sant’Angelo, Ezio and Machiavelli carefully concealed themselves within the crowd that had gathered around the ornate carriage, whose windows had been firmly covered by blinds; the carriage itself bore the Borgia crest, so there was no mistaking their current objective. Machiavelli laid a steadying hand on his right shoulder, as Ezio watched the cruelly beautiful form of Lucrezia Borgia dragged Caterina from the carriage. The duchess of Forlì, even dragged down by chains, barefoot, and dressed in little more than rags, possessed more grace and presence than any of her captors would ever be able to comprehend.
“Salve, cittadini di Roma!” Lucrezia shouted, playing to the crowd as all of her family – power-hungry brutes that they were – did as a matter of course. “Behold a sight most splendid! Caterina Sforza, she-whore of Forlì, has at last been brought to heel!”
There was only the most subdued of reactions from the crowd that had gathered around the carriage, but when Ezio found himself almost instinctively reaching for the Apple, not only did he find Machiavelli’s hand reaching out to stop him, but the black-gloved hand of Aeon, as well. Mastering himself with a bit more effort than usual, Ezio simply narrowed his eyes and continued to watch. The both of them had the right of things; even with the sheer power that Aeon could bring into battle, the Borgia and their Templar masters still held the advantage of numbers.
Even if the three of them did manage to cut their way through the Borgia guards, and even Lucrezia herself, the remaining Borgia would simply be able to bury them under the weight of numbers that they still possessed.
“Ha!” Caterina laughed into the almost oppressive silence that had been left in the wake of Lucrezia’s words. “No one kneels as low as Lucrezia Borgia! Who put you up to this? Was it your brother? Or maybe your father?” he could see the fierce grin on her face, and bit back one of his own; it was more than clear that Caterina’s sprit could not be cowed by something so simple as mistreatment by her Borgia captors. “Perhaps a bit of both? Perhaps at the same time?”
“Chiudi la bocca!” Lucrezia screamed, backhanding Caterina to the muddy ground, though not managing to wipe the fierce grin from her face as the pair of them faced each other. “No one speaks ill of the Borgia!” grabbing Caterina by the hair as she struggled back to her feet, Lucrezia hurled her back to the ground. “The same will happen to any who dare to defy us!”
Even the mad fury that he could see in every line of Lucrezia’s face and body was not enough to cow Caterina into submission, and Ezio felt a swell of pride for her as she stood against them.
“Good people of Roma! Stay strong! Your time will come! You will be free of this yoke, I swear it!” Caterina shouted, even as she was dragged away by the Borgia guards that had positioned themselves around her for just that sort of purpose.
“Well, the Contessa has clearly lost none of her spirit,” Machiavelli said, as the pair of them – Aeon remaining close at hand within the Apple, but also out of sight so that his presence would not bring undue attention to them at the wrong moment – took to the shadows near the Castello as the crowd around them began to disperse.
“They mean to torture her,” he said, knowing that such a thing was not only in character for the venal bunch of bastards that the Borgia had long since proven themselves to be, but also in keeping with the brutality that Cesare had more than proved himself perfectly capable of.
“It is unfortunate that Forlì has fallen, but we will get it back,” Machiavelli said, the man’s usual, stern pragmatism on full display once again. “We will get Caterina back, too,” he added, clearly having seen Ezio’s expression. “However, we are here for Cesare and Rodrigo, and so you must focus on them before anything else.”
“Caterina is a powerful ally; she’s one of us,” he said, making an effort to appeal to the sheer, ruthless pragmatism that he’d seen Machiavelli demonstrate on so many occasions. “If we help her now, when she is weak, she will aid us in turn.”
“Have you forgotten our own ally so quickly, Ezio?” Machiavelli asked, an expression of unexpected, good-natured amusement upon his stern-featured face.
For a long moment, as Aeon emerged once again from the depths of the Apple, Ezio felt like the biggest fool who had ever walked the streets of Roma. To have so easily forgotten about Aeon, even after the man in black had demonstrated the capability to be such a great asset to the Brotherhood as a whole and their struggle in Roma in particular… Ezio shook his head, banishing those recriminations and turning his attention to Aeon.
“Mi dispiace, amico,” he said, as the black-cloaked form of Aeon solidified out of the Apple’s strange light once more. “Have you been keeping abreast of our discussion?”
“I’ve been paying attention, yes,” the man in black said, with the subtle dip of his head that Ezio had noticed was his favored form of expression. “You wish for me to aid you in rescuing your ally from this prison?”
“Sí, I do wish to have your help in this, amico,” he said, feeling a great deal more settled now that he’d remembered that he wasn’t the only one who could act on the problem at hand.
“Very well,” Aeon said, with another dip of his hooded head.
“Bene, but keep your focus on Cesare and Rodrigo, Ezio,” Machiavelli said, stern expression returning to his face as he returned his gaze to the pair of them after having spent a long moment observing their surroundings; checking for anyone who might have been drawn by the Apple’s light, like as not. “You’re here for them; leave Caterina in Aeon’s hands.”
“Sí,” he said, feeling a certain amusement for the unpleasant surprise they were about to unleash on the Borgia and their Templar allies.
“We should move quickly, then,” Aeon said, turning his own, hidden gaze to the Castello Sant’Angelo.
“A moment,” Machiavelli called, before the pair of them could start moving in that direction. “How is it that you mean to keep the Apple from falling into the hands of the Borgia while you travel?”
“I’ve developed my own means of transportation, considering my circumstances,” Aeon said, and Ezio felt his eyes widening in surprise as Aeon’s midsection actually returned to being the same kind of strange, solid light that would emerge from the Apple when the man in black would make his appearance from the depths of the artifact itself.
More surprising than even that, however, was the way that Aeon then proceeded to place the Apple inside his own torso, with the hole that had once been present swiftly filling itself in once more after he’d done so.
“Miracolo,” he breathed, reaching out to touch the place where Aeon had placed the Apple, and finding that it seemed to be cloth over what felt like either armor or hardened muscle, but was in fact nothing of the sort.
“Bene, I suppose you have thought a great deal about how to best protect the Apple in your possession,” Machiavelli said, with a rather pleased-seeming nod at Aeon, as he and the man in black gathered themselves to begin their infiltration of the Castello Sant’Angelo, before anything irreparable could happen to Caterina.
Chapter 329: Secret journeys
Chapter Text
Finding herself locked up in this miserable rathole of a prison cell, within the tower of the Castello Sant’Angelo, was nothing that Caterina had not been prepared to face for her defiance against those Borgia dogs and their Templar masters. Still, it was a rather troublesome thing, having Forlì taken from her and not knowing if she would be able to return to her protectorate city and the home she had made for herself among the people there. She could at least be glad of the knowledge that the Brotherhood of Assassins – which Ezio Auditore was a part of – would look after her children, and might very well take them in for training of their own.
The sight of the guards that had once been stationed in front of her cell falling to the ground, some of them in more than one piece as they did so, drew Caterina’s attention swiftly, and she found herself laughing in surprise and what felt more than a bit like delight as her rescuer made his presence known at last. It seemed that the man in black was far more than simply an apparition within that odd artifact that Ezio and his fellows had spoken about, when all of them had gathered together in Mario Auditore’s villa to speak about what had happened when Ezio and his little sister had gone down into the depths of Il Vaticano to contend with that fat, old Borgia and whatever soldiers he had brought with him.
The fact that the pair of them hadn’t managed to kill the Templar wasn’t that much of a concern, in light of what the pair of them had managed to learn.
When she heard the sound of the door to the tower room where her cell was, Caterina watched with interest as the man in black leaped up into the rafters once more. The sight of Lucrezia Borgia making her way into the room drew an expression of disgust, tinged as it was by the sheer amusement inherent in knowing that the man in black was just above her head while she was making her way up to the cell where some of her lackeys had thrown Caterina in a futile effort to break her spirit.
The fact that Lucrezia didn’t manage to get so much as a single word out, before the man in black descended upon her – for all the world like a striking raven, with the color of his hooded robes making such a comparison all the simpler – drew a full belly-laugh, and Caterina grinned widely at the man in black as he made his way over to her.
“You’re quite the campione, Messer Aeon,” she said, as a single stroke from the shining sword that the man in black held in his right hand cut through the lock that had trapped her inside the troublesome cell where the Borgia clearly intended to leave her to rot.
“Thank you,” the man in black said, his attention clearly more focused on the matter of their pending escape than upon any manner of conversation that the pair of them might engage in. “Are you capable of walking?”
“Unfortunately not,” she said, knowing that her feet were in no condition to make such a long journey as would be required to escape from this place.
Aeon turned back to her, a contemplative expression appearing on his dusky-skinned face.
~AC: Bro~
Making his way down through the levels of the Castello – Cesare’s visit had been a flying one, and the man had swiftly departed for Urbino once whatever business that had ultimately brought him to Roma had been concluded – Ezio reflected on the fact that, while Machiavelli wasn’t likely to be pleased to know that he hadn’t been able to come to grips with either of the pair of Templars who had bedeviled them for so long, he himself had ultimately come to this place with the aim of freeing Caterina from her unjust captivity. Even the knowledge that Aeon was in all likelihood entirely capable of managing such a feat on his own could not dissuade Ezio from feeling as though he should at least take a hand in such matters.
It simply wouldn’t feet right, to leave everything up to the mysterious man in black.
As he continued on his way through the halls and corridors of the Castello, however, Ezio found himself forced to leap up into the high rafters in order to escape the notice of Lucrezia Borgia, who came stomping down the stairs with a face like a thundercloud.
“Guards! Guards! That bastardo who haunts the Apple is loose in the Castello! Find him!”
Shaking his head as she stomped away, Ezio found himself chuckling softly as the continued on his way. Knowing what kind of unpleasant surprise that anyone who was fool enough to challenge Aeon in combat was setting themselves up for, Ezio simply pressed onward. Clearly, it would only be a matter of time until he was able to meet up with Aeon, and the pair of them could make their way back out alongside Caterina herself.
All of the furor going on beneath him was simply more proof of that, so far as he was concerned.
When he’d at last managed to catch sight of Aeon himself once again, the man in black making his own way through the high rafters that were an Assassin’s most reliable means of cover under most circumstances, Ezio found himself disconcerted to see that the man in black seemed to be alone. Signaling for Aeon to follow him, wanting to know just what it was that had caused such a thing to happen, he caught Aeon’s gaze just long enough for the pair of them to exchange nods, and then swiftly moved into an open space within the Castello.
The pair of them would clearly need to speak quickly, since the emptiness of the room that they were going to meet in was not likely to last.
“Where is Caterina?” he asked, as Aeon stopped beside him and the pair of them exchanged a long glance.
Aeon gave no verbal response to such a question, but his form flickered in the way that it would do when he would emerge from or retreat into the Apple, and Ezio soon found himself facing both Caterina and Aeon. The Contessa laughed, though softly since she herself had to know what kind of a situation they were all still in.
“Well, that was the first time I ever found myself inside a man,” she said, a sardonic sort of amusement in her demeanor as she turned to face Aeon again. “You’re certainly proving yourself to be full of surprises, Messer Aeon.”
“Sí, if there’s one thing that I can say I know about our mysterious fratello, it’s that I know nothing about him,” he said, grinning at the pair of them as they all took a moment to rest from their respective journeys.
Truly, it did seem that the mysteries that Aeon lived and breathed – even lacking life and breath as he did – had ultimately been the catalyst for the schism that had formed between Aeon and Altaïr, back during the days of Masyaf. He thought it rather a pity, truly, since even with as recalcitrant as he was, Aeon had more than proven his worth as a member of the Brotherhood.
“We’re going to have to find some way to make it past all of the guards,” Caterina said, looking back over her right shoulder, an expression of distinct displeasure on her face as she gave voice to what all of them had to have been thinking.
“Sí,” he said, feeling an odd sort of humor – black as the hooded robes that Aeon was wearing – at the thought of being buried under so many Borgia guards that would be coming down upon them, if only to escape the wrath of the harpy that commanded them. “Good as you are, amico, I don’t think even you would be able to hold them off forever.”
Aeon nodded, though his attention seemed to be focused upon something rather different. “There is a way to avoid all of that,” the man in black said, removing the Apple from his torso before Ezio could wonder for too long about what he was talking about.
“Sí, I suppose you would be best suited to handle this sort of thing,” Ezio said, allowing himself a soft, amused chuckle.
“Bene, then we should move quickly,” Caterina said. “I still don’t think that I’ll be able to cover the kind of distance we’re still going to have to cover, so do you think you might be able to do something about that?”
“Yes,” Aeon said, with the sharp nod that had come to characterize his manner in Ezio’s mind.
There was little doubt in his mind that the man in black could get them out, even surrounded as they were by Borgia guards and soldiers, in the veritable heart of enemy territory. And indeed, over the course of a journey that did – he had to admit – come to seem rather interminable, Aeon was able to lead them out of the Castello and into the stables. It was the best place for him and Caterina to make good their escape from such a place, since Aeon could simply retreat back into the Apple once he’d finished with this task.
For a moment, Ezio found himself wondering just what manner of disguise Aeon had used to allow the three of them to evade the notice of the Borgia and their soldiers, but there was no real point in asking such a thing, and he doubted that Aeon would answer in any case. Once the three of them had made their way down into the stables that served the Castello Sant’Angelo, Ezio found himself grinning as he beheld the cache of gunpowder that stood within the place where he, Aeon, and Caterina had now found themselves.
“Well, I think I’ll be able to cover your escape,” he said, grinning as he carried Caterina over to a horse, waiting for her to climb on and get herself properly settled, before making his own way over to another horse that stood close beside the creature. “Amico, you’ve done very well for us,” he said, turning back to where the man in black was standing, watching as he and Caterina prepared to depart. “If you wish to return to the Apple, neither of us would begrudge you.”
“Very well,” Aeon said, vanishing once more into the Apple, which Ezio then tucked safely away into the hidden pouch within his robes where he’d carried it for so long.
Chapter 330: Horsemanship
Chapter Text
“Ride like hell,” he advised, as the pair of them met up with each other, standing for a moment next to her on her horse. “Before they have a chance to realize what’s going on. Across the bridge, and then make for Isola Tiberina! You’ll be safe there. Find Machiavelli, once you’ve made it there; he’ll be waiting for me.”
“We should both be getting out of here,” Caterina said, the expression on her face one of both concern and defiance.
“I’ll be close behind you, but there’s still the matter of the remaining guards,” he said. “Given all he’s done for us just today, I can hardly leave everything else in Aeon’s hands. I’ll hang back and create a diversion; draw off the remaining guards, so you have a better chance of getting clear.”
“Get out of here in one piece, or I swear, I’ll never forgive myself!” Caterina shouted, reining in her horse so that it reared, before kicking the beast into motion.
Letting out a breath that he hadn’t been quite conscious of holding, Ezio turned his own horse back toward the powder- and feed-storage that he and Caterina had just made their way through in their efforts at escape. Taking a torch from the first wall sconce that he passed on his way, he threw in onto the powder barrels that he’d spotted while he, Caterina, and Aeon had been making good their final escape from the Castello Sant’Angello at last.
Turning his horse away from what was very soon to be a scene of chaos, carnage, and destruction, Ezio drew his sword and moved to confront the guards who seemed finally to have realized that something untoward was well and truly happening. Even as the guards formed up against him, on foot against the horse that he’d managed to appropriate for himself, the powder stores that he’d managed to light up finally let go in a spectacular, thundering detonation. Instinct overcame what training the Borgia had managed to pound into their heads, and they ducked as the ground shuddered beneath them.
Instinct also overcame the horse Ezio had managed to claim for himself, and she reared, charging the ranks arrayed before them, leaping over their crouching forms as easily as she might have leaped a fence in her way. Gently patting the mare’s neck, once he’d managed to regain his seat from all the upheavals he’d just been forced to contend with, Ezio made his own turn for the bridge that he’d seen Caterina crossing what felt like a much longer time ago than it probably was.
Allowing himself to breathe, fully and deeply, for the first time since he and Caterina had parted company, Ezio turned his path toward the ferry that would return him to Isola Tiberina at last; his impending meeting with Machiavelli aside, the new capabilities that Aeon had revealed to him were clearly of interest to the Brotherhood as a whole.
Giving the mare he’d appropriated for himself over into the care of the chief ostler at the stable where he, Machiavelli, and Uncle Mario had begun their efforts to restore Roma to the glory that she had once possessed, and would possess again once the last of the Borgia’s poisonous influence had been purged. Loathe as he was to lose a good animal like the mare he’d brought from the Castello Sant’Angelo, Ezio knew that she would be well taken care of in a place such as this. A place that seemed to be maintaining the independence that he, Uncle Mario, and even Machiavelli had helped them to attain from the yoke of the Borgia that had once lain over this place.
Therefore, it was with a much lighter heart that Ezio made his way to the secret ferry that the Brotherhood used to make their way to and from Isola Tiberina; at least those who didn’t use the tunnel-system that Uncle Mario and Little Maria had been working to restore to full functionality.
Chapter 331: The Guardian and the Apple
Chapter Text
Once he’d made it back to the island itself, Ezio found that he felt even lighter as he made his way into the concealed hideout that the Brotherhood had established for themselves within Roma. He also found that Caterina had made it back before him. He’d had some hope that such would be the case, even in spite of the fact that he’d never had to instruct anyone else in making their own way to Isola Tiberina before. He’d been the one guided in the first place, and he’d returned alone all of the other times.
Making his way over to the makeshift bed that Caterina had been set up in, Ezio looked down at the woman who had proven herself to be such a great boon to the Brotherhood and all that they were working to accomplish; not only in Roma, but in the world as a whole. The woman who had lost so much, and whom he now found himself feeling more of a kinship for now than he had before. True, that part of his heart that loved deeply felt like it still belonged to Christina, no matter the impossibility of anything more than deep friendship between the pair of them, but there was more than enough room for the kinship he felt with Caterina.
“Ezio! It’s a relief to see that you made it back so quickly, amore mio,” Caterina said, struggling to rise as the doctor that had been brought in restrained her with a firm hand. “I knew you could, but I still couldn’t quite stop myself from worrying.”
“Grazie for your concern, Madonna,” he said, taking her hand so that he could gently squeeze it, knowing that she would appreciate the comfort, even if she seemed too weak to return the gesture for the moment.
“Ezio!” La Volpe called, drawing his attention before he could start to wonder where any of the others were. “Good to see you again!” he said heartily, as the pair of them embraced, parting only once they had both managed to reassure themselves of the other’s heath and wellbeing. “As you’ve seen, I brought the Contessa a doctor. However, as to Machiavelli-”
Just then, as if in response to whatever it was that La Volpe had been about to say about him, the main door opened and Niccolò Machiavelli himself walked in.
“Where have you been?” La Volpe demanded, and Ezio winced slightly at the accusation he could still hear in the thief’s tone.
This wasn’t going to help the cause, or the unity that the Brotherhood needed to maintain in the face of the Borgia’s occupation of Roma.
“Basta, Gilberto,” Uncle Mario said, his tone sharp and commanding for all that it remained fairly level. “These accusations you keep leveling against Niccolò have been proven to be baseless time and time again,” the Mentor of Italia’s Brotherhood said, glaring at La Volpe until the other man seemed to shrink in on himself, even if only slightly. “Now, I know that the thought of a spy within the ranks of the Brotherhood itself has been preying on all of our minds, but this constant sniping against Niccolò isn’t going to solve any of our problems.”
“Sí, I understand,” La Volpe said, looking rather shamefaced in the wake of the upbraiding that Uncle Mario had just given him; not to say he hadn’t deserved every word of it, but Ezio couldn’t help feeling a bit chagrinned on his behalf.
He hardly wished to find himself the target of Uncle Mario’s ire, after all.
“Grazie, Mario,” Machiavelli said, making his way over to where the rest of them were all gathered. “What of Cesare and Rodrigo?” he asked, without preamble.
“Cesare left almost immediately for Urbino; his visit was clearly intended to be a flying one from the outset,” he explained, knowing that Machiavelli wasn’t going to be pleased by any of what Ezio was going to tell him, but also that he could hardly let such a thing stop him, either. “As to Rodrigo, he was at Il Vaticano. However,” he continued, smiling as he hit upon something that would at least bring some modicum of hope to all of those present, even if he didn’t know if it would precisely please Machiavelli, given the man’s seemingly-habitual dourness. “It seems that Aeon has even more capabilities than we were aware of when the three of us parted company.”
“Sí,” Caterina said, laughing softly. “He was not only able to project his form over mine, and to carry me out that way even when I found myself unable to walk after all those dickless bastardi did to me while I was their captive, he was also able to use the Apple to project some sort of a veil over the three of us, so that we were able to leave from under their very noses.”
“Quite a feat,” Uncle Mario said, chuckling softly.
“Vero,” he said, nodding and feeling a certain sense of amusement, himself. “It seems that, every time I think we have discovered the limits of Aeon’s capabilities, he turns out to have something new to show us.”
“Sí,” Machiavelli said, though there was a far more pensive expression on his face. “I think that truly might have been at the root of Altaïr’s mistrust for the man.”
“So it would seem,” Aeon himself said, emerging from the Apple with a pensive expression on his own face, even though Ezio hadn’t yet removed the artifact from the hidden pocket of his robes where he’d stored it for safekeeping.
“Had you been listening in on our whole conversation, amico?” Uncle Mario asked, seeming slightly surprised to see the man in black emerging when he hadn’t been called out.
“I was aware of it, yes,” Aeon said. “I simply did not hear anything of import until the last.”
“Because it involved you, I expect,” Machiavelli said, an expression that Ezio couldn’t quite interpret on his face; though he didn’t seem particularly impressed, to Ezio’s eyes.
“Yes, that’s correct,” Aeon said, though there was an unimpressed expression on his face as he did so.
“Amici, please,” Uncle Mario said, stepping between the pair of them before any more barbed words could be exchanged. “None of this serves our purposes. Aeon, we all know by now that you much prefer to keep your own council on matters, and that’s no bad thing. Still, if there is something you’re capable of that would aid in our struggle, I think we would all appreciate it if you shared it before we started making plans for our next push against whatever enemies that we might find ourselves faced with,” having said that, he turned his attention to Machiavelli. “Niccolò, I know that it cannot be easy for someone like you to work with a man so ostentatious in his mystery, but all of us need to be united in our struggle, now more than ever, since we stand in the heart of the Borgia’s power. Do you both understand?”
“Sí, Mario,” Machiavelli said, with a sharp, solemn nod.
“Of course,” Aeon said, a contemplative expression on his face, as he dismissed himself once more, vanishing back into the Apple.
Machiavelli glared at the rough location of the hidden pocket in his robes where Ezio had tucked the Apple that Aeon inhabited for safekeeping – though it was beginning to seem rather redundant, given all that Aeon had shown himself capable of while they were working with him – and Ezio sighed softly. It was beginning to seem that, no matter how he tried to solve things, there would always be some matter that one or more of the Brotherhood would find themselves on opposing sides of.
He supposed that such a thing was simply part and parcel of the Brotherhood’s efforts to preserve the freedom to chose from the Templars and others who would seek to take it from them.
Chapter 332: Nobility and corruption
Chapter Text
“Anyway, onto other matters,” Uncle Mario said, drawing all of their attention as he stepped into the rough center of their group. “There remains the matter of Roma, her citizens, and the power that the Borgia still hold over them.”
“I’ve been thinking about that, Uncle,” he said, drawing the attention of all those present at this point in time. “I think we would be best served by appealing to the people of Roma herself. There must be those among them who are more fed up with the Borgia’s rule than they are afraid to challenge them,” he said, only mildly surprised when Uncle Mario chuckled in response.
“I was just about to say that very thing, nipote,” he said, grinning in a fond sort of way as Ezio found himself almost feeling as though he had to laugh at himself, getting ahead of himself the way he had. “As you and little Maria will be closer to the troubled areas than I will currently be able to make my way to at this stage – honestly, nipote, you’d hardly believe the price on my head these days; I think Cesare might have taken my escape from the villa attack more than a little personally – I will be leaving such things up to the pair of you. Though, I expect the pair of you will have plenty of counselors if you wish for aid in such matters.”
“Vero,” La Volpe said, stepping forward to clap him firmly on the right shoulder, glancing down with a brief smile at the concealed pouch where the Apple was hidden. “Any of you are perfectly welcome to make use of my spies; I have quite the network, after all.”
Ezio couldn’t help but know just why it was that La Volpe hadn’t seen fit to restrict his offer merely to him and little Maria, and also why he’d made it a point of mentioning his own network that he had in place all over Roma. It was beginning to seem that, since Machiavelli was clearly suspicious of Aeon, and La Volpe still had not been convinced of Machiavelli’s loyalty to their cause, La Volpe was going to be offering the man in black his full trust and cooperation.
And, while such a thing would probably serve to make Aeon more kindly disposed to La Volpe and his thieves, if not the Brotherhood as a whole, Ezio wondered how they were going to be expected to managed such a schism as seemed to be developing between La Volpe and Machiavelli.
“I suppose I had better go and make contact with Claudia,” he said, finding himself thinking again of the way the eldest of his little sisters had chosen to set herself forward, on the very front lines of their struggle against the Borgia, and finding that it sat no better with him than it had the first few times he’d found himself reflecting on such a thing. “If only to get her view on everything that’s been occurring.”
“Sí, I think that would be best,” Uncle Mario said, nodding in a pleased sort of way as their group of Assassins and allies began to part ways at last.
“Bene,” he said, smiling softly as he began making for the entrance to the tunnel that stood nearby; he knew better than most that it would be best to make as little use of the secret ferry that the Brotherhood maintained as was reasonably possible.
The tunnels, as well, came out far closer to the Rosa in Fiore than the ferry could ever manage, considering how limited that kind of vehicle was by its very nature.
Chapter 333: Ladies of the Evening
Chapter Text
Breathing more easily as he made his way through the tunnels, for all that they would have likely seemed dank and inhospitable to anyone who was not a part of the Brotherhood and hence had not been making regular use of them, Ezio brushed his left hand over the hidden pouch where he had stored the Apple that Aeon had taken such complete possession of – whenever and however the ancient Guardian had managed to do such a thing as that – Ezio continued on his way through the branch of tunnel that would lead him to the Rosa in Fiore once more. All other considerations aside, he wanted more than ever to assure himself that Claudia and little Maria were both doing all right.
Being away from his little sisters for so long – what felt like such a long time – had not been good for his peace of mind in any way, Ezio couldn’t help but admit.
As he made his way up and out through what served as both and entrance and an exit to the tunnel that those who knew of the system – members of the Brotherhood, or else La Volpe’s thieves when they would make their rounds of the city – would make use of, Ezio sighed in a profound sort of relief when he found himself presented with the sight of the Rosa in Fiore, restored to its former glory. He didn’t care so much about the building in itself, but knowing that Claudia was bringing in enough funds to keep not only herself in good condition, but also to maintain a place such as this… It gave him some comfort, Ezio had to admit.
Making his way over to the Rosa itself, Ezio knocked and swiftly found himself let in by Agnella once more, and thanked the courtesan for being so welcoming. And so prompt, besides.
“Ezio!” his two sisters called, once the pair of them had caught sight of him, and he turned to embrace them as they made their way over.
He also caught sight of the small gathering of Guardians who seemed to be taking shelter within the walls of the Rosa in Fiore, and reminded himself to ask about them as soon as he could.
“It’s so good to see the both of you again,” he said, more than pleased to know that the horrors that the Borgia had inflicted upon the people of Roma as a whole hadn’t yet managed to reach the last bastion of safety that sheltered the remnants of the Auditore family. “How have you been managing?”
“Well enough, though the Borgia have been proving themselves just as troublesome as ever,” little Maria said, her gaze shifting to take in the small group of Guardians – most of them well below the age to join the Brotherhood, or even for La Volpe to give them anything but the most cursory of glances – that had seemed to have been driven to take shelter in the Rosa.
Like as not, to escape the net that the Borgia and their Templar masters would be casting wide and long in an effort to snare both him and Aeon, since the pair of them had never truly bothered making a secret of their defiance.
“The Borgia have started searching for them again, haven’t they?” he asked, knowing even as he did so what kind of answer he was going to get.
“Sí,” little Maria said, nodding sharply, casting another look back at the group that had gathered in the parlor of the Rosa; the group that was, even as they watched, being chivvied toward the back of the establishment so that they could presumably have some food and be properly settled in. “More and more of them have been forced to leave their homes, either because their families are being threatened by the Borgia, or else,” little Maria narrowed her eyes, glaring down at an inoffensive spot on the floor.
“Intesi, I know what the Borgia can drive people to do, what fear can drive people to do,” he corrected himself, knowing that it was not just the Borgia who were able to drive ordinary citizens to turn on those who were most vulnerable; or else those who they would have protected, if circumstances had been kinder.
“Sí, fratello, I know you do,” little Maria said, letting out the breath that she had drawn in, hissing softly through her teeth in that way she did when she was particularly angry and was trying not to be. “Still, I keep finding myself wishing that I could do something more than just taking all of them in after everything happens.”
“You could come back out with me,” he offered, knowing that little Maria wasn’t at all the kind to be satisfied with merely hiding away while there were people suffering under her very eyes. “We might not be able to help every one of the Guardians that we come across, but we can at least let the rest of our allies know to keep an eye out for any that they might see.”
“Sí, I think I will,” little Maria said, nodding in a decisive sort of way, even as the sound of soft shoes on the carpeted floor drew his attention.
“Ezio, I’m glad to see you’ve come.”
“Mother!” he exclaimed, turning to embrace the staunch, proud old woman who had raised him and all of his family, all the while keeping the secrets that the life of an Assassin had demanded of her; even from those she had loved most in the world. “It’s so good to see you again. How has everyone been?”
“Not very well, I’m afraid,” she said, guiding him out of the flow of foot-traffic, and into a secluded alcove where the pair of them could talk without being troubled or interrupted.
“What do you mean? Why?” he asked.
“The old proprietor of this place, Madonna Solari, was a cheat and a liar,” Mother said, a sharp tone to her voice, for all that she didn’t raise it above a normal speaking volume. “Her ties to the Church have been uncovered. Worse still, several of those who work for us still sleep with the enemy.”
“Little Maria and I will find them,” he said firmly, knowing that the Guardians who had come to this place in search of safety deserved nothing less than their best efforts in searching for those who would compromise the safety of those who relied on the protection of the Rosa in Fiore.
To say nothing of those who relied on the loyalty of those who lived and worked here.
“Visit the girls I trust, they will help you,” Mother said, turning to a small table that had been set next to the base of the main stairs. “Here is a list of names. Grazie for everything you have done and continued to do, Ezio.”
“Of course, Mother,” he said, embracing her a last time, before he turned away to be about his business.
Catching up with little Maria again, the pair of them discussed which of the courtesans they would be handling personally, and which of those they would need the help of each other to manage. If any happened to need that kind of thing, of course. He ended up aiding a courtesan who had been poisoned, tracking down the men who had poisoned her, punishing them and driving them away from those who were most vulnerable .
There were also a few Guardians who he met on the way, and he made certain to send them to the Rosa in Fiore so that they could take shelter from the Borgia.
“Grazie, Ezio,” the woman said, as the pair of them parted company at the doors to the Rosa in Fiore.
“Of course,” he said, smiling softly at her. “Just, stay out of the wine, Madonna.”
She laughed, a rueful cast to her face as she did so. “Of course, Messer Ezio.”
Chapter 334: Eagles and little roses
Chapter Text
Once the courtesan he’d been aiding had made her way back inside once again, Ezio breathed more easily for the fact that he hadn’t gotten into any more trouble with the Borgia than he was likely already in, simply given the way that both he and Aeon had participated in raid on the Castello Sant’Angelo, and the rescue of Caterina Sforza from her imprisonment in such a place. The sound of familiar footfalls making their way over to him brought a smile to Ezio’s face, as he turned to greet the returning form of his littlest sister.
“It’s good to see you again, piccola Maria,” he said, as the pair of them embraced, though there was something in her manor that told him that she wasn’t just here to tell him about the things that she had been doing to aid the cause of the Brotherhood through their courtesan allies in Roma.
“It’s good to see you again too, fratello, but I’m afraid I have more business than just that of the courtesans on my mind,” little Maria said, as the pair of them broke apart and faced each other once more. “La Volpe has sent me a message: he and the other thieves need our assistance. They seem to be facing a challenge from a gang of thugs in the employ of the Borgia. Or, that was how he put it to me in his message,” she paused for a moment, clearly gathering her thoughts once more. “The look on the messenger’s face when he saw me… Well, I think there might be more than La Volpe was willing to mention in a message.”
“Sí,” he said, nodding. “Both of them could have been intercepted on their way to us.”
“Sí, that was what I was thinking, too,” little Maria said. “All that aside, fratello, we should get going. It sounded like the situation could be urgent.”
The pair of them made their way back down into the tunnels, this time heading for the inn that La Volpe and his people had brought back into working order with their help, and Ezio found himself hoping that whatever kind of trouble that La Volpe and his fellow thieves had run into with the Borgia’s hirelings, it would not prove to be too damaging to those who had found themselves inadvertently caught up in it. As he and little Maria continued on their way through the tunnel, Ezio found himself wondering if the situation that the pair of them had been called in to give their aid in was anything that Aeon might have an interest in.
There hadn’t been any indication either way, but Ezio kept the thought at the back of his mind; there was always that chance, considering what he and Aeon had actually done, not so long ago.
Chapter 335: A friend to thieves
Chapter Text
When he and little Maria made their way up and out of the tunnel entrance that emerged in the basement of La Volpe Addormentata, Ezio allowed himself to breathe more easily. Yes, he and little Maria – and even Aeon himself, if circumstances pushed them to that – might very well be getting into a fight with yet more of Cesare Borgia’s forces, but knowing that all of them were ultimately working towards the final shattering of the holds that the Borgia and their Templar masters held over the people of Roma was something of a comfort to him. Cold comfort that it would have likely seemed to another.
Looking up, Ezio smiled as he beheld the familiar form of La Volpe, seated at one of the few tables in the back where the running of the inn they had all helped to bring back to life. Making his way over to where the man had seated himself, seemingly awaiting a report of some kind or other, but when he saw the pair of them he stood right up.
“Bene, it’s good that the pair of you came so quickly,” La Volpe said, making his way over to him and little Maria so that the three of them would be able to speak without such fear of being overheard.
“What is going on, Gilberto?” little Maria asked, before Ezio himself could have articulated the same sort of question. “The message you gave us sounded urgent, though there was little enough to it.”
“Such things could have easily been intercepted by our enemies,” La Volpe said, confirming Ezio’s suspicions without him ever having to give voice to them. “Enemies such as the Cento Occhi; Cesare’s bootlickers and hired thugs. A group of them has managed to take a great many of the Guardians who made this part of the city their home captive, as well as some of our younger members who attempted to rescue them from their binds. Cesare seems to have some mad idea that, if he strikes out at the Guardians as a whole, he will somehow manage to weaken the hold that Aeon himself has on the world. I expect that it’s complete nonsense.”
Aeon seemed to know just as well as any of those that had gathered in this place that those words were meant for him, if the speed at which he emerged once more from the Apple was any kind of indication. “It is, but this is a troubling situation, all the same.”
“Sí,” he said, thinking of those innocents who had been dragged once again into a struggle that they may very well have wished to have no part in; it reminded Ezio of the way that he had once been, so long ago when he was first learning of Assassins, Templars, and the seemingly eternal struggle that took place between the two factions. “Can you tell us where this struggle is taking place?”
“One of my thieves will show you,” La Volpe said, turning back to call to the young man – amusingly enough, the one that Ezio had met when he, Uncle Mario, and Machiavelli had been making their first foray into Roma, to assess the damage that the Borgia had already done and to see how they might go about reversing it – that had been standing ready in the far corner of the back room. “I believe the pair of you have met before, Ezio,” La Volpe said, a dry sort of smile on his face.
“Sí, we have,” he said, offering a wry smile of his own in response.
The young thief, who’d introduced himself as Rico once he’d been integrated into their group, quickly led the three of them – Aeon having retreated back into the Apple so that the artifact was easier to transport – back up onto the rooftops of this part of Roma, and Ezio found that he could hear the sounds of struggle and muffled screaming that had to be coming from the captives that the Cento Occhi had taken. The Guardians that they were even at this moment abusing in a vain effort to drive Aeon off from offering his aid to the Brotherhood and all of their allies.
Narrowing his eyes as he, Rico, and little Maria came within sight of all the Guardians – bound and gagged as they were, with even the littlest ones forced to kneel on the hard ground as their captors arrayed themselves around them – Ezio felt just the slightest amount of relief as he saw that some of La Volpe’s thieves had already come to their aid. Yes, it was clear that they would need more help if they were going to free the Guardians who had been unfortunate enough to fall into the hands of the Cento Occhi – the Borgia’s iron fist in all but name – but it was good to know that they had more than just their own strength to call upon in times like these.
Good to know that La Volpe – even though he still clearly had his reservations about Machiavelli – was still an ally that the Brotherhood as a whole could count on.
Leaping into the fray beside little Maria, and the swiftly-reappearing form of Aeon himself, Ezio quickly found himself deprived of the enemy that had once been leaping for his throat. That man lay on the dirt, split cleanly by Aeon’s shining swords, the two halves of his corpse still smoldering slightly.
“Grazie, amico, but look to your own, first!” he advised the man in black, who with his hood back up and his shining swords brandished for battle looked for all the world like one of the Brotherhood’s own Mentors.
A nod from that hooded head was all he received in answer, but under the circumstances it was all he needed, as well. The men who had thrown in their lot with Cesare and his dogs were dealt with easily enough, particularly considering the preternatural skills that Aeon was in possession of, but there had been a few thieves injured in the fight. Considering the many possible outcomes that Ezio knew that he’d been staring down the throat of, Ezio was at least satisfied with the one he and La Volpe’s thieves had managed to secure for themselves.
As their group, made a great deal larger by the addition of not only the group of thieves who had originally gone out in defense of the captured Guardians but those selfsame Guardians as well, made their way back to La Volpe Addormentata once again, Ezio let himself breathe more easily. Yes, there was always the chance that they would find themselves accosted on the road – either by Borgia soldiers, or else by the Cento Occhi who truly amounted to more of the same – but with such a large group as they had, the odds of such a thing were a good deal smaller than they would have been otherwise.
Chapter 336: The Fox’s misgivings
Chapter Text
When the weather-beaten form of La Volpe Addormentata came into view once more, Ezio smiled as he heard the thieves speaking to the Guardians who had been caught up in all of this. True, it seemed that those present at this place and time had nowhere else to go, but the knowledge that there were indeed people who would take care of them even in such straights as they had found themselves in – either through the direct machinations of the Borgia, or else the fear that all tyrants seemed to count on to do their work for them – gave Ezio hope for them.
It also served to remind him of what his own father, dead before Ezio had truly come to understand the nature of the struggle he’d been born into, had done for little Maria when he’d first taken her in.
Making their way back inside the inn once more, Ezio patted the Apple as he made his way up the stairs of the back entrance. Looking back at the group of Guardians, the oldest of whom were being shown the way to the secret tunnel that he and little Maria had first made their way into this very place through, Ezio smiled softly. Those ones would soon be taken to Isola Tiberina, safe under the watch of the Brotherhood in Roma. It was also likely that more than a few of them would choose to join up with those whose efforts were moving most strongly to return Roma to the hands of her people once more.
Particularly after having tasted the cruelty of the Borgia first-hand; Ezio remembered with a wince that such had been necessary for him to understand the nature of the Brotherhood’s struggle, and the urgency of it.
Once their group had disbursed almost completely to go about their varied tasks, Ezio, little Maria, and Rico all continued on their way to the table where La Volpe had been waiting for them. Not for so long, if the plates of still-warm chicken that had been set out for the three of them were any indication, but long enough to order such a thing and have it set out, at least.
“It’s good to see that all of you made it back in one piece, amici,” La Volpe said, a subtle expression of relief spreading across his face. “Though I suppose that a great deal of that is due to who you were all traveling with.”
“Vero, but each and every one of us has skills to bring into battle,” he said, grinning as La Volpe chuckled softly, clearly conceding the point. “It wasn’t all on Aeon, to bring us back here safely.”
“I know, and I’m glad,” La Volpe said, even as Aeon himself rose once more from the depths of the Apple where he seemed to have been resting.
“Benvenuto, amico,” he said, turning a smile on the man in black as he emerged once more into the world again. “I expect you knew we were talking about you.”
“I did,” Aeon said, with the subtle dip of his head that served in place of a nod. “Was there anything else on your mind?”
“Something remains on mine, I must admit,” La Volpe said, before Ezio could say a word in response.
“Machiavelli?” he asked, hoping that such would not be the case, but knowing even as he did so that such hopes were probably in vain.
“Sí,” La Volpe said, and Ezio tried not to sigh too loudly in response. “I know that you vouch for him, Ezio, but there remains something about his manor that troubles me.”
“Yes, the man is rather shrewd,” Aeon said, and Ezio found himself hoping that he wouldn’t end up having to deflect the suspicions of the man in black; particularly since he wasn’t even sure how he’d even manage such a thing. “A calculating sort, to be sure.”
“I’m certain he has his reasons,” Ezio said, looking from Aeon to La Volpe and then back again; while La Volpe still seemed to hold to his suspicions, the man in black just seemed to be making an observation. “Anyway, he’s been doing good enough work for us so far,” he directed at La Volpe, since he seemed to be the one still actively harboring suspicions.
“Sí, I suppose I can’t deny that,” La Volpe said, though there was a stubborn set to his shoulders that Ezio didn’t particularly like the look of; time would tell if he could ever truly allay the suspicions that the thief harbored for Machiavelli.
“Is there anything else you will be needing me for?” Aeon asked, sweeping a gaze over all of those sitting at the table they were all gathered together at, though they lingered for a moment on little Maria.
Likely because of the kinship the pair of them shared.
“No, nothing more, amico,” he said, after looking to La Volpe, Rico, and little Maria in turn.
With a wordless nod, Aeon vanished back into the Apple once more, leaving the four of them to settle back around the table and have the meal that had been set out for them once they’d all made their way back to the inn once more. As he ate the meal that had been given to him, Ezio found himself wondering just what it was that caused such friction between La Volpe and Machiavelli. So far as he knew, or had personally experienced, Machiavelli was not an abrasive man, nor did he actively seek out the confrontation that La Volpe seemed to think was constantly in the offing.
Honestly, Ezio wondered if there was anything he would be able to do, or if this was simply something that La Volpe and Machiavelli would have to come to an accord about on their own.
Chapter 337: Inns and outs
Chapter Text
There were parts of him that hoped not, but Ezio knew that he couldn’t allow himself to become overly involved with the personal problems that La Volpe and Machiavelli were clearly having between one another. Particularly not with the clear and present danger that the Borgia and all of their lackeys posed to the Guardians who made Roma their home. Yes, he was fully aware that there remained the option of simply evacuating them all from the city, since they were a small enough segment of the population that their disappearance wouldn’t be noted.
Save for by the Borgia and their cutthroats, the Cento Occhi in particular, but as he and the Brotherhood already intended to fight them with everything they had, Ezio didn’t overly concern himself with those matters.
Bidding La Volpe a fond farewell, as well as thanking the thief for the hospitality that he had offered the pair of them while they had been staying among him and his, Ezio led little Maria back down into the tunnels once again. There were still matters that needed to be taken care of at the Rosa in Fiore, since they’d only gone out in response to a request from La Volpe and not because their work had been in any way finished. Once he and little Maria had managed to make their way back to the still-musty basement of the Rosa itself, Ezio made his way up to the door and listened for a long moment.
Finding it clear for the moment, at least enough so that the pair of them could emerge without drawing undue attention, he waved to little Maria and the pair of them made their way up and into the Rosa proper once more.
~AC: Bro~
Consulting the list that Mother had given her, Maria narrowed her eyes as she saw what one of the items detailed. That kind of betrayal couldn’t be tolerated, no matter how much that particular courtesan seemed to love the man she was telling secrets to. Speaking to a few of the other courtesans who had known her, Maria made her way up to the rooftops to begin her hunt.
Given what she’d managed to learn from the courtesans she’d been speaking to, it seemed that the courtesan she was following would be meeting up with the benefactor who she’d been steadily giving more and more of the Brotherhood’s secrets to, as she’d tried to gain more trust for herself that she could parley into a better relationship with the man she’d been selling their secrets to. Growling under her breath as she spotted the courtesan making her way through Roma’s milling crowds, she narrowed her eyes as she caught sight of a man making his way over to her, in turn.
There you are, she mused, crouching down near enough to the roofline that a casual glance up wouldn’t reveal her presence to those on the street below. Loosening her throwing knives from their sheaths, Maria stood up and threw down a hail of shining steel upon the man who had been meeting with her target. Once he’d fallen to the ground, she narrowed her eyes still farther as she watched the courtesan turn and run.
Following from the rooftops once more, Maria shifted slightly as the courtesan whipped around, scanning every one of the rooflines around her for signs of the one who was stalking her; it was just the same as any of her other targets would do. And that was just what this courtesan had made herself with her actions: a target.
Leaping lightly down from the rooftops, just as the courtesan was about to turn and run out of the blind alley she had managed to corner herself in without knowing it, Maria folded her arms as the courtesan came to a all but crashing halt at her feet.
“I heard you’ve been selling secrets to our enemies, Madonna,” she said, narrowing her eyes as she looked down at the courtesan who had caused her and hers so much trouble through either thoughtless ignorance or deliberate malice.
She hoped that it was the former, but the latter remained an uncomfortable possibility.
“Mi dispiace, signorina, I had no idea that the man was a spy; he was so kind, so gentle!”
“You might very well have done us a great deal of harm with your thoughtlessness, Madonna,” she said, relaxing slightly as she activated her second-sight and saw that the courtesan she was facing still glowed the reassuring blue of an ally. “I do not think you will be welcome at the Rosa in Fiore for quite some time. Find somewhere else to stay,” she advised, allowing herself to relax visibly in order to put the courtesan in front of her at ease. “And, if you are truly sincere in your regrets, you might be able to come back again, someday.”
“Millie grazie, signorina,” the courtesan said, the hope in her eyes positively lighting up her face as the pair of them finished speaking. “I will.”
“Bene,” she said, returning once more to the rooftops as she left the lost courtesan to find her way again.
~AC: Bro~
Following the directions that he had been given, making for the place where Santino – Madonna Solari’s brother, and a man who clearly had no greater claim to the loyalty of the courtesans than she herself had possessed – was assaulting one of the courtesans who lived and worked within the walls of the Rosa in Fiore in an effort to gain the support of the Borgia and thus put himself in a better position to take over the Rosa from the Brotherhood, Ezio found himself almost eager to come to grips with the man at last. He’d seen far too many of the man’s own kind, as he made his way through the streets on his way to meet with Santino.
The Borgia guards who held no hesitation about abusing the citizens they were meant to be protecting; the Cento Occhi and the Followers of Romulus, both who terrorized Roma’s citizens on the orders of their Borgia masters, with both likely accepting the Borgia’s money for such a thing, as well. Santino seemed to be the same breed as all of those, and so Ezio knew that Roma as a whole and the courtesans in particular would be better off without him.
Once he’d found the man that he was searching for, Ezio punched him in the face before he could catch the fleeing courtesan who he’d seemed to have been terrorizing for so long. Ducking out of the way before Santino – unpolished brawler that he so clearly was – could strike out at him again, Ezio grabbed the man’s over-extended right arm and used it to slam him into the wall that they had both begun fighting beside. Once Santino had been stunned badly enough by the impact, Ezio fell upon him with a rain of painful blows.
True, he did not intend to kill the man under his hands, but the man he was going to dump into the nearby fountain was intended as a message to the Borgia; a warning that no more of their encroachment into the Brotherhood’s territory would be tolerated, no matter what guise their agents tried to make use of.
“This man is a cheat, a liar, and a fraud!” he declared, once he’d laid Santino’s bloodied form at the base of the ornate fountain; he’d no desire to drown the man, after all. “The courtesans of Roma will never bow to him!”
Vanishing into the ensuing crowds before he could attract too much attention from the Borgia guards who’d already begun making their way closer, Ezio vanished, making for the rooftops that would take him back to an entrance to the tunnel-system once more. He’d no desire to bring any more attention to the Rosa in Fiore than the actions of their courtesans would have brought on its own.
Chapter 338: Secret movements
Chapter Text
Breathing more easily when he’d made it back down into the perversely comforting dark of the tunnel-system that he and the rest of the Brotherhood – as well as their allies who knew about such a thing – made use of in order to keep themselves out from under the eyes of those who would seek either to do them harm or else to stop the work that they were doing, Ezio turned and made his way back to the Rosa in Fiore once more. He was certain that Mother would be pleased with his work, but more than that he simply desired to speak to the woman again.
Having his entire family – what remained of them anyway, he recalled with the usual pang of sadness – here with him in Roma, while he still had his misgivings at times, did make him happier than Ezio thought he would have otherwise been without them; Mario’s presence in particular, though a great deal of that could be attributed to Aeon’s intervention. Something else to be grateful for, Ezio mused with a smile.
Pausing for a long moment, as he checked for the presence of anyone who might see him and wonder just why in the world he was coming up out of the basement, Ezio sighed in relief as he made his way up and out of that musty place again and into the light and sound of the Rosa proper.
Stopping a nearby courtesan as he spotted her on her way to some business or other, he received both her thanks for what he and little Maria had been doing, as well as directions as to where his mother might be found. Thanking her in turn for both, Ezio made his way into the office that his and little Maria’s mother had made her own while she and Claudia had been working to make the Rosa bloom once more.
~AC: Bro~
Once she’d finished making her report to Mother, informing her of everything that she had said to the courtesan who had been letting slip things that she should have been to people that she should not have trusted. In the end, she and Mother both agreed that it would be best to wait and see what became of the courtesan that she had been pursuing, whose name turned out to be Giuletta, rather than driving her out harshly, and potentially having her end up in the arms of the Borgia for certain.
“Ezio!” Mother called, drawing her attention to the fact that her brother had indeed arrived in Mother’s office and was looking at the pair of them with his usual expression of pleased affection. “It’s good to have you back again, figlio mio,” she said, as the pair of them stepped forward to embrace in the same way that she and Mother had done when the pair of them had first been reunited after such a long day spent working.
“It’s wonderful to see the pair of you again, too,” Ezio said, as he came over to embrace her, in turn.
Holding her last remaining brother for a long moment, Maria stepped back as Ezio made his own report about the work that he himself had done in order to further aid the cause of the Assassins in Roma.
“Well, my hard-working children, I think such dedication deserves its just rewards,” Mother said, grinning at the pair of them. “Besides, it’s time for dinner, in any case.” Maria tried not to laugh at such an abrupt pronouncement; Mother always had been one for a more subtle kind of humor, when the mood struck her.
“Well, I don’t suppose either of us could say no to an invitation like that,” she said, grinning in response to the amusement that she could see sparkling in the eyes of both her mother and the last of her brothers.
“No, sorellina, we can’t very well do that,” Ezio said, grinning right back at her as the three of them made their way out of Mother’s office at last.
Chapter 339: Past and Future
Chapter Text
Once their meal had been finished and Ezio had made his way back to his room once more, he found himself pondering just what their next move would be. Not just his own, but the Brotherhood’s as a whole. And then there was the curiosity that had been slowly building within him as he’d traveled on his errands about the length and breadth of several districts of Roma.
Or rather, as he’d felt Desmond’s phantom eyes upon him, and wondered just what it was that the young man could have been making of all this.
Reaching into the concealed pocket of his robes where he kept the Apple that Aeon had made himself a part of for only he knew how long, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he concentrated upon the artifact that he held in his hands. The sight of Aeon’s familiar form rising from the depths of the Apple once more brought a small smile to his face, even as he wondered just how Desmond had been doing, following in his footsteps all throughout however many days – and even nights – that the young man from the future had been doing so, for whatever incomprehensible reasons that such a man as Desmond might have had for doing such.
He wondered about that, and about how such things had been done at all, but Ezio honestly doubted that he would ever be given the chance to find out, given how recalcitrant the young man had proven himself to be about even small matters.
“Amico, do you think you could summon Desmond again?” he asked, once Aeon had removed his hood and fully turned to face him. “I’d like to speak with him, even for a moment.”
“Of course,” Aeon said, his voice as reassuringly calm as ever, even as he turned to grasp at the seemingly empty air where he’d seen Desmond standing, so long ago.
At least, what felt like so long ago.
When Aeon was forced to resort to a burst of the fantastic speed that Ezio had only seen him display in combat, grabbing hold of Desmond’s left shoulder before the clearly skittish young man could jump away from him again, Ezio firmly decided against asking any of the questions that had plagued him ever since the night in Il Vaticano’s vault when the goddess Minerva had first revealed Desmond’s existence to him. The look on the young man’s face as his form resolved itself once again, however, brought forth an entirely new curiosity.
“Look, Ezio, I really don’t think we should be doing this,” the young man said, and there was something familiar in his manner as he did so; Ezio could almost see Mother in the place of Desmond, scolding him in her gentle way when he’d done – or else was thinking of doing – something that would not come out well for him, in the end.
Truly, combined with the blurred sort of familiarity he could see about Desmond’s features, Ezio was beginning to have more than his share of suspicions as to just why it was that Desmond had come back to him across whatever length of ages and eras truly separated them; the how still remained a mystery, of course.
“Sí, I know that the future’s secrets will have to remain its own,” he said, nodding and smiling gently, wanting this familiar-stranger who had come to him across whatever gulf of time it was that ultimately separated them. “Still, I’ve found that there’s more to life than simply hunting for secrets. And I could hardly consider myself a brother to you if I didn’t inquire about your health, amico. You seem troubled.”
“Yeah,” Desmond said, shoulders slumping with the same kind of intangible weight that Ezio had often felt on his own shoulders, more and more of late. “I guess it’s just more of the same kind of stuff you’re dealing with around here.”
“Sí, I suppose there will always be those who believe as the Templars do,” he said, sighing as he reflected back on everything that he had seen and done while he had been acting in the Brotherhood’s name; he wondered what kinds of things that Desmond had found himself facing, but knew that he’d get no kind of answer from the young man if he asked. “Just know that, whenever you can see no end to this struggle of ours, you may come and speak to me.”
“I’ll keep that in mind,” Desmond said, smiling in the sad, gentle sort of way that Ezio remembered Uncle Mario doing, when the pair of them had spoken about the nature of their own struggle with the Templars, and how it seemed to be never-ending, as well. “Aeon, do you think you’d mind sending me back?”
Unspoken between them, of course, was the fact that Desmond might very well vanish back to the future that awaited him, just as easily as he appeared in this place and time.
“Of course,” the man in black said, smoothly moving forward to dismiss Desmond, just as easily as he’d summoned the phantom forth in the first place.
As he watched Desmond vanish once again, back into whatever future awaited them all, Ezio returned his attention to Aeon once more. There was a curious expression on the face of the man in black, and Ezio thought that he could guess just what it was that he wanted.
“You clearly had more questions for that young man than you were willing to ask,” Aeon said, yellow eyes turning to regard him in the darkness of the room where they both stood. “Why deny yourself?”
“There are some things that cannot be known, amico,” he said, smiling in a way that he hoped would reassure the man in black, even with as little as the pair of them honestly knew each other. “Even by such as us, in the end.”
There was a contemplative expression on the face of the man in black, even as he vanished back into the depths of the Apple once more, and so Ezio dismissed the conversation from his mind as he went about settling himself down for sleep this night. Truly, everything that he’d said to the man in black – and Machiavelli, when he’d asked just that same sort of question, himself – remained so, no matter the strange circumstances that all of them had found themselves in.
The circumstances that seemed determined to follow them, if the suspicions he was beginning to harbor about Desmond were indeed to prove true.
Chapter 340: Building up the Brotherhood
Chapter Text
The next morning, once he’d cleaned up and eaten a small meal to fortify himself for the work that he was going to be called upon to do this day, Ezio slipped back down into the basement of the Rosa in Fiore, and from there made his way back down into the hidden tunnels that would take him back to Isola Tiberina in the most secret of ways. There were matters that he wished to discus with Uncle Mario, and perhaps Machiavelli, if the man was present for him to do such a thing in the first place. The familiar sounds of the old warehouse where the Brotherhood had taken shelter while they were still in the sights of the Borgia and their allies brought a certain lightness to his heart, and Ezio continued on his way with the slightest spring in his step.
Making his way back up the incline and out of the branch of the hidden tunnels that had led him back to this place, Ezio sighed in relief as he caught sight of Uncle Mario, bent over his desk and hard at work as usual; ever since he’d come so close to losing the man in Monteriggioni, he’d always found himself relieved to see him safe in Isola Tiberina.
“Buon giorno, uncle,” he called, making his way over to the desk where Mario was sitting.
“Ezio! I’ve been waiting for you, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, waving him over to a seat that he hadn’t taken note of when he’d first come into the office where his uncle was working. “Come, sit.”
“Grazie, uncle,” he said, smiling as he made his way over to the chair and sat down. “I’ve been thinking: if we are to make any true headway against the Borgia, we are going to need to have loyal soldiers for our cause.”
“Sí, that’s just what I was thinking,” Mario said, nodding. “I was planning to speak with you and little Maria about it, but it seems as though you and I are in agreement on this. Just remember to deliver the message to her, all right?”
“Bene, I’ll let her know,” he said, nodding as he stood up from the chair and made his way back down the tunnel again.
Once he’d gotten back to the Rosa in Fiore again, Ezio made his way back up into the main rooms, looking for little Maria, wherever she might have been.
“Buon giorno, fratello,” little Maria said, as she came up next to him. “Did you find out anything new?” she asked, leaning in close so that the pair of them wouldn’t have to raise their voices overmuch and thus risk being overheard by those not involved with their struggle.
“Uncle Mario says that he wishes for us to begin recruiting new members into the Brotherhood,” he said, as the pair of them began making their way out into the bright sunlight once more. “So, we should keep our eyes out for those who are either being abused by the Borgia, or else those who have a grudge against them.”
“I expect we’ll find no shortage of those,” little Maria said, smirking slightly as they made their way out of the Rosa in Fiore for the day.
“Sí, I expect we will,” he said, laughing softly.
The pair of them made their way up onto the rooftops once more, and Ezio headed back to the place where he’d seen more than a few people being abused by the Borgia when he had been rescuing Caterina Sforza from her imprisonment in the Castello Sant’Angelo. There would be no shortage of recruits for the Brotherhood in a place such as that. Making his way down from the rooftops, Ezio searched for one of the people who had been crushed under the heels of the Borgia.
Catching sight of a brawl, Ezio unsheathed his sword and made his way in among all of the guards gathered around the man who had clearly been fighting them as hard as he could, but was still beginning to falter under the sheer weight of numbers bearing down upon him. Cutting his way through the guards that stood in his way, he fell in beside the man they had been attacking.
Once the pair of them had cut down the last of the attacking guards, Ezio let himself breathe more easily as he turned to the man who had fought beside him.
“Grazie, Messer, I don’t know what I would have done without you,” the man said, turning to him with a look of such relief on his face that Ezio smiled in response. “What can I do to repay your kindness?”
“There is no need, amico,” he said, wiping his sword clean so that he could sheath the blade once more. “The liberation of Roma has begun. If you desire to flee, do so now. But, if you would stand with those trying to free Roma from her shackles, go to Isola Tiberina. Some of my brothers will be waiting there.”
“I wish to fight with you, Messer!” the man whose life he had just saved exclaimed enthusiastically, wiping and then sheathing his own sword in turn.
After thanking the man for his dedication to the people of Roma, Ezio directed him to the secret ferry that the Brotherhood maintained for the use of those unfamiliar with the system of hidden tunnels that had been concealed under the very streets of Roma for such a long time. Ezio found himself wondering, not for the first or the last time, just who had ultimately been responsible for building the tunnel system that the Brotherhood was making such extensive use of. Still, he was fully aware that his curiosity was not likely to be assuaged, so Ezio set it aside.
It would hardly be the only unanswered question hovering in his mind.
Chapter 341: Malicious Malfatto
Chapter Text
The sound of an anguished scream drew her attention, and Maria leaped lightly down from the rooftops at the sight of the gathering courtesans.
“What has happened here?” she demanded, looking down at the wounded courtesan – clearly on the verge of death, and already being mourned by her sisters – laying on the cobbled ground in a slowly-spreading pool of her own blood.
“It was that monster, Malfatto, Signora!” the courtesan shouted, tears streaming down her face.
“You shouldn’t go after him alone, Signora!” the other courtesan, who had seemed to be more concerned for the fate of her sister when Maria had first joined them in this place.
“What do you mean?” she asked, seeing the expression of building fear on the face of the younger woman as she turned to look more squarely at her.
“Malfatto, he-” the courtesan cut herself off, sobbing. “I saw him take a little Guardian into that place where he works,” she continued, and Maria crouched down next to the younger woman, laying a gentle, reassuring arm around her shoulders. “Grazie, Signora,” the courtesan said, though the fearful expression still lingered on her face. “I heard that he doesn’t just take the girls who work down near the Tiber, but any Guardian he can get his hands on, too. They go into his workshop, and none of them ever come out!”
“Grazie, I’ll keep that in mind,” she said, rising back to her feet once again. “But this is something that cannot be allowed to go on,” looking around at the other courtesans gathered around the one who’d been killed not suck a long time ago. “Look after each other, and get back to the Rosa in Fiore as fast as you can.”
Pausing for only a moment, to make certain that all of the courtesans were following the instructions that she had given them, Maria made her way back up onto the rooftops. It was simpler for an Assassin such as her to both move and see from such a vantage as one was given when they stood atop the high places in whatever city they found themselves in. Roma was no different, of course.
Setting off at a run, Maria tilted her head in slight surprise as she found herself confronted with a trio in the same kind of garb that she herself was wearing, moving with the same kind of purpose that Maria was sure that anyone who looked up at her – anyone she allowed to see her, to be precise – would see. There was also the matter of the familiarity of the figure leading the pair as they continued on their way. Leaping down from the rooftops as the trio made to pass by underneath her, Maria turned to see a relieved expression spreading quickly across her remaining brother’s face.
“It’s good to know that you’re all right, sorellina,” Ezio said, as Maria quickly fell into step with him and the other two Assassins that he seemed to be leading. “I’d heard things about the man we’re chasing.”
“Sí, so have I,” she said, as Ezio began to seem distinctly uncomfortable with their current topic of discussion. “I know what he seems to be doing, fratello; I’ll be all right.”
“We all will be, sorellina,” Ezio said, his tone as sharp and decisive as she’d ever heard it. “This is Adele Sozzi,” he said, gesturing to the curly-haired woman on his right; Maria nodded respectfully to her. “And Saverio Salerno,” the man with short hair and a round, kindly face was next, and Maria nodded to him in her turn. “They will be the ones dealing with Malfatto; if nothing else, they could use the experience,” Ezio smiled gently, taking the sting out of his words.
“Ah, they are new to the Brotherhood, then,” she mused aloud, as the four of them continued on their way, hunting for what traces Malfatto left of his passing; of the crimes that he’d committed against the innocents of Roma.
~AC: Bro~
Once he, his new Novices, and little Maria had managed to catch sight of the black-garbed form that could only be Malfatto, Ezio signaled for little Maria to hold back while Saverio and Adele made the kill that would help him to decide just how much – or how little – instruction the both of them would need in the ways of the Brotherhood before he could truly consider them a part of it. Before either of them would be trusted to operate on their own.
After the pair of them had made their kill – or, rather after Adele had, since Saverio had paused for reasons that Ezio would clearly need to determine before their training could go any farther – Ezio and little Maria moved forward to observe how the pair of them handled themselves once the battle – such as it had been, against someone such as Malfatto – had been concluded at last.
“Saverio, why did you pull back so suddenly?” he asked, once he’d come to the place where the man who had been terrorizing the citizens who lived alongside the Tiber – to say nothing of the fear he had spread throughout the rest of Roma with his deeds – stood beside Adele.
“Adele was faster to strike than I was,” Saverio said, a certain approval in his tone, and in his eyes as he looked over at his fellow Novice. “I didn’t want to get in her way.”
He chuckled, beginning to grin in approval. “Sí, she is very fast on her feet,” he said, as little Maria made her way over to where the three of them were standing.
The serious expression on his littlest sister’s face let him know that she’d either been ignoring their conversation, or else she hadn’t heard it in the first place.
“I’m going to see what I can find in the shop that porco demonio was said to be working out of,” little Maria said, the look on her face telling him that she wouldn’t be turned back by any kind of argument that he could bring to bear. “I know it’s not going to be pleasant, fratello, but it’s not something I can leave unfinished, either.”
“Intesi,” he said, knowing just the kind of feeling that was behind his littlest sister’s drive; it wasn’t far removed from the one that had driven him, back in the early days of his time with the Brotherhood. “Buona fortuna, sorellina.”
A need to see that things were settled, no matter how unpleasant such a settlement could prove to be, in the long run.
“Grazie, fratello,” little Maria said, a small smile returning to her face, even as she turned and made to depart over the rooftops. “I’ll see you again when I can.”
“Keep safe, sorellina,” he said, stepping forward so that the pair of them would be able to share a last embrace before parting company once more.
“I will,” she said, holding him tight for a long moment, before turning and vanishing over the rooftops the way any trained Assassin could do.
Sighing briefly, Ezio quickly returned his attention to Adele and Saverio, who were both watching him with distinctly sympathetic expressions. “Grazie, mi amici,” he said, smiling at the pair of them as he signaled for them both to follow him.
In a city controlled by the Templars, such as Roma was for the moment, there would always be some new atrocity calculated to keep the citizens fearing for their lives and the safety of those around them; it was the way of things, though Ezio fully intended to change it as soon as he could. Discussing their next course of action, both so that he would be able to continue feeling out both Adele and Saverio, and so that he could continue their education as Assassins in a rather unobtrusive way, Ezio led the pair of them back down to the streets of Roma once more.
Chapter 342: Trafficking in lives
Chapter Text
His initial plan had been to teach the pair of them how to blend seamlessly into Roma’s crowds, and so be able to move unnoticed when such a time came that they needed to do so. However the sound of bitter weeping, carried on the light breeze from the docks on the Tiber, put paid to that thought before Ezio could do more than consider it for a few moments. Instructing Adele and Saverio to stay back and out of sight, just in case this was some kind of an elaborate trap concocted by the Borgia or their Templar masters, Ezio moved in carefully to determine just what was the next course of action that he and his should take in response to this new development.
When making his way over to the boy – younger than he’d been expecting, and distraught enough that he seemed even younger still – failed to trigger an ambush or any of the other manner of traps that Ezio had been subtly limbering himself up to deal with, he allowed himself to relax just that much; he’d still have his eyes open for anything that he might encounter, of course, but that was simply good sense when one found themselves in the midst of the Borgia.
“Bambino, why are you crying?” he asked, crouching down next to the little boy so that his presence wouldn’t seem so sudden and intimidating when the little one turned to look at him.
“Some big men came on a boat and took Mama away; they said that I was going to go on the next one,” the little boy said, looking up at him with tears in his eyes; Ezio laid a gentle hand on his left shoulder to steady him. “They scared me,” the little boy said, looking plaintively up at him, tears gathering in his eyes even as they continued to spill down his cheeks.
“They are scary,” he said, reaching down to wipe the tears from the boy’s eyes. “But you look very brave,” he assured him, folding up the slip of cloth he’d used to clean the child’s face and tucking it back into one of the hidden pockets in his robes.
“Will you save my Mama, Messer?” the little boy asked him; Ezio, of course, had already made his mind up some time ago.
“Sí, but is there some place you could stay? So that the men who took your Mama won’t be able to go after you?” he asked, not wanting to chance such a young boy getting caught up in something that was clearly more of the Borgia’s dirty business, and hence another target for the Assassins.
“Sí, my uncle’s,” the little boy said, and Ezio allowed himself a short sigh of relief.
“Go there, and quickly; make sure you aren’t followed,” he advised, helping the little boy back to his feet and hurrying him along; all the better to get him out of the crossfire of what might all too easily become a battle before such a thing could begin in earnest.
Once the little boy had hurried off, with Ezio keeping a discreet eye on him until he’d vanished from his normal sight, and then briefly calling on his second-sight to make sure that he was truly all right, Ezio made his own way back in among the thinning crowds. Looking briefly up into the sky, Ezio found that the sun had started to sink down the last few handspans into the west; soon enough, dusk would be falling. There were good points and bad points about working when night was about to fall, since the failing light would serve to hinder their opponents.
However, it would also serve that same purpose for those of them who didn’t actually possess the second-sight that certain members of the Brotherhood had possessed.
Making his way back to where Adele and Saverio waited for him, he signaled for the pair of them to follow him while he made his way away from the thinning crowds that were still out even at such a late hour as it was swiftly becoming. There were still those in the area close enough to overhear what he was going to need to say, and no simple way of knowing how many of them would give such information to the Borgia. Either by their own will, or because they had been ground down far enough by the Borgia and their Templar masters that they saw no other way.
After informing the pair of them about just what kind of filth they were going to be dealing with – human trafficking was a blight on the world that needed to be ended, and it also served to remind him of what had nearly happened to little Maria so many times in her life – Ezio sent the pair of them off to investigate what traces of this slaver they could find; it would make a good test of their developing skill, and it would also give him the time he needed to get his head in order once more. He’d never enjoyed being reminded of what had happened to little Maria – what could still happen, if something were to go drastically wrong – but Ezio knew that such a thing helped to remind him in particular of just what it was that he was fighting for.
One of many things, at least.
Chapter 343: Madness and mercy
Chapter Text
When she had managed to find her way to the shop that Malfatto was said to be working out of – or at least hiding out in, given the way she had heard the man described when she had been asking after his whereabouts and proclivities – Maria steeled herself for a long moment before making her way in. She’d done a lot and seen more during her time as a member of the Brotherhood, and while the tales she’d heard of Malfatto from the people who had caught more than a fleeting glimpse of him or his work did paint him as uniquely depraved, Maria reminded herself that those were ordinary citizens that she had been asking.
It was entirely possible that their lack of experience with those things that the Brotherhood was called in to handle shaped the responses they gave her; she could hold out hope for that, at least.
Making her way into the darkened interior of the workshop, Maria paused for a moment to check the room with her second-sight, even looking down into where a basement was likely to be hidden, in an effort to be certain that she wouldn’t have to worry about encountering any of an Assassin’s varied enemies in such a place. Once she’d managed to determine that there was indeed no one waiting for her within the workshop – enemy, ally, or otherwise – Maria moved deeper inside.
The spicy scents of dried, hanging herbs were the first things to draw her attention, followed by the jar of eyes that had been concealed behind the counter she passed on her way into the back room; the illumination wasn’t enough to allow her to see the color of the eyes collected inside of it, but Maria was certain that she already knew the colors of each and every one of them. Narrowing her own eyes as she continued on her way into the back room of Malfatto’s former workshop, Maria found herself facing what looked like a dissection table, covered with old blood, and gouged from a great deal of work done upon it.
The sight of a body, tucked away in the back of the room, drew Maria’s attention and she made her way over to examine it. As she’d been expecting, it was one of her fellow Guardians, laid out on another table. The stitching almost made it look like some kind of stuffed doll, and Maria hissed softly between her teeth. Seeing something like this… It was one more reason for her to hunt down the Templars and all of their allies, yes, but it also made Maria wish that she could have somehow arrived sooner, and thus prevented at least some of the suffering she’d seen in evidence before her.
~AC: Bro~
Once they’d managed to come to grips with the slaver that had been haunting the docks of the Tiber – a cruel man named Silvestro Sabbatini, who had only given the appearance of being under the thrall of Cesare Borgia because his wife would not have forgiven anything else – Ezio sent Adele and Saverio back to Isola Tiberina, then turned to run a last patrol of the area. He was glad to have done so, since he was able to come to the aid of a man named Rinaldo Rocca, who had been cornered by Borgia thugs simply for attempting to protect his wares from their depredations.
Giving his aid to the man, who had already heard tales of the man in the white robes – the Assassin – who gave help and protection to those crushed under the yoke of the Borgia and their Templar masters, quickly secured Rinaldo’s loyalty to their cause.
Making his way back to Isola Tiberina at last, through the tunnel-system that had served all of them so well during the course of their stay in Roma – however long such a thing was ultimately going to be – Ezio found himself seeming to settle back into his own skin. The wariness that had become habitual to him, as it had to be in a place that was so completely under the control of the Borgia, wore on him in both small and large ways, until there was nothing more that he desired than to return to the grounds that the Brotherhood had laid claim to so that he could rest.
The fact that he actually could do that, in this instance, was always more than a bit of a relief.
Standing once more within the cool expanse of the Brotherhood’s hidden stronghold – concealed well enough that the Borgia were less likely to find it, though Ezio knew that nothing was absolute, not even the secrecy that they all depended upon – Ezio stretched lightly as he made his way over to the table where some food had been obligingly laid out. Little Maria was also sitting there, and given the expression on his littlest sister’s face, he suspected that he knew just what it was that was troubling her.
“You found that workshop that the courtesans were talking about,” he said, sliding into the vacant seat at the table that had seemingly been cleared just for the pair of them.
“Sí, I did,” she said, nodding sadly as she picked at the remaining scraps of chicken on her plate.
Taking a moment to serve himself, Ezio turned to his littlest sister and the pair of them talked about just what she’d seen, and what she’d found herself feeling as she’d examined the workshop that had sheltered that depraved bastard as he went about doing his butcher’s work. The pair of them shared the wish that they could have arrived sooner, or at least found out about Malfatto and his activities. Still, there was little chance that even Aeon himself could have told them about what had been going on in Roma when they all arrived.
Yes, the man was clearly concerned for the wellbeing of his fellow Guardians in his subtle way, but his binds to the Apple were apparently both deep and numerous.
Chapter 344: Reunion with Leonardo
Chapter Text
When Ezio had finished his meal, bidding little Maria goodnight and began making his own way to the place where his brother and sister Assassins stored those weapons and gear that could not be slept in comfortably, he was brought up short by the sound of a furtive whisper. A rather familiar whisper, Ezio realized when he paused for a long moment, in order to listen to just who it was that was trying to get his attention.
“Leonardo!” he called, once he’d found just where it was that his old friend, too long absent during all this upheaval with the Borgia and their Templar masters, had managed to secret himself so that he’d not be found until he was prepared for such a thing.
The pair of them embraced for a long moment, and Ezio only reluctantly let go; it had been a long time since he’d last seen his old friend from Firenze.
“Where have you been? I received no word from the people I contacted in Milano,” he said, since he remembered well when Leonardo had left Venezia for new opportunities, what felt like a longer time ago than it probably had been.
“The Borgia have appropriated my services, I’m afraid,” his inventor friend said, and Ezio began to notice the lines of not only age – which he’d been seeing on even his own face, as time had continued its inexorable march onward – but the strain that had clearly been caused by his captivity among the Borgia. “They have been forcing me to make terrible weapons for them.”
“Under the threat of a horrid death by torture, I expect,” he said, narrowing his eyes at the thought of his friend – or anyone, truly – having the unspeakable misfortune to end up in the hands of the Borgia; Cesare in particular.
“Sí,” Leonardo said, looking harried and relieved at once; Ezio didn’t have to think long on why that might be. “Still, I have at least managed to compile a list of the inventions I have been forced to create, as well as the Templars who have been assigned to oversee their construction. I’ve also marked out their positions on this map,” Leonardo said, a small grin emerging on his face.
“Grazie, amico,” Ezio said, returning Leonardo’s grin with a wider one, both to thank his inventor friend for the part he continued to play in their struggle against the Borgia, and in the hope of reassuring him since he still looked rather uneasy. “It seems that I still have a great deal of work to do.” The weight of the Apple, still safely concealed within his robes, reminded Ezio that there was still something he could do for his old friend. “Aeon, amico, would you mind coming out so we can speak with you?”
The familiar sight of Aeon’s glowing form as it emerged once more from the depths of the Apple brought a definite feeling of relief to Ezio’s mind, even as he found himself wondering just how Leonardo would react to the offer he was about to make.
“You’ve been paying attention to our conversation, haven’t you?” he asked, once Aeon’s form had completely taken form.
“I have,” the man in black said, a look of subtle interest on his face. “I expect you wish for me to aid in his escape?”
“Sí, if you would be willing to do something like that,” he said, wanting more than anything for Aeon and Leonardo to both agree to what was, in the end, a rather audacious undertaking but knowing that he shouldn’t push either of them farther than they were willing to go.
“I suppose I would be willing, if Leonardo himself would be amenable to the idea,” Aeon said, turning to face the inventor himself more squarely. “He is a rather interesting sort.”
“I fully return the sentiment, amico mio,” Leonardo said, smiling widely at Aeon, even as Ezio himself dug the Apple out of concealment within the hidden pocket of his robes. When he handed the artifact over, Leonardo’s smile widened all the more, becoming positively childlike as Aeon turned his considering gaze fully upon the inventor. “I can’t believe that I’m actually going to get the chance to speak with you!” Leonardo enthused, looking up at Aeon as the man in black removed his hood, as he usually seemed to do when he felt at ease in a certain place.
“Leonardo, before I forget,” Ezio paused for a moment, feeling an acute sense of embarrassment, even though he knew that there had been very little that he could have actually done that long-ago morning when the Borgia had attacked the only remaining home that he’d had. “I lost all the Codex weapons that you fashioned for me.”
“Ah,” Leonardo said, an understanding expression on his face that paradoxically made Ezio feel just that much worse about what had happened. “Recreating them will be simple; I never forget a design. But, I will need to be compensated for the raw materials.”
“What, they were not paying you at Il Vaticano?” he teased, feeling a great deal better about what he would ultimately be asking of his old friend.
“Very, very little,” Leonardo said, an answering, wry grin on his own face as the pair of them reacquainted themselves. “I’ll tell you what: once Messer Aeon manages to get me out of the hands of the Borgia, then I’ll start work on recreating those Codex weapons of yours.”
“Grazie, amico,” he said, smiling widely as the pair of them embraced once more. “And, in return, I’ll make certain that the Borgia get no use out of the war machines that they have been forcing you to create.”
Leonardo thanked him for that, and the three of them parted company, Aeon retreating back into the Apple after a brief nod in his direction. Making his way down through the stone halls and corridors of the Brotherhood’s concealed headquarters within Roma, Ezio yawned as he made his way to the room that had been set aside for him to use, those times when he was compelled by necessity to spend a night – or several – in such a place.
Chapter 345: Runaway rider
Chapter Text
After a night that was about as refreshing as could have been reasonably expected, given the thoughts that had been chasing themselves around inside his head until he’d finally managed to drop off to sleep at last, Ezio sighed as he turned to look over his right shoulder.
“Well, Desmond, it seems that it’s just going to be you and me out there,” he said, a small smile emerging on his face as he recalled the fact that – though the circumstances of such were strange almost beyond imagining – he wasn’t truly alone.
Truly, such might have been the case even before Aeon had come into his life, he simply had no true way of knowing such a thing without consulting the man in black himself. Still, the knowledge itself was comforting in more than a few ways, since Ezio no longer felt so alone in every situation that he found himself facing. Preparing himself once more for the journey that he was about to make, Ezio found himself smiling softly at the thought that – even in his lowest moments – he’d never been truly alone.
Once he’d strapped on the last of his throwing-knives, Ezio made his way back to the tunnels. Checking the map that Leonardo had made for him, Ezio was quickly able to locate the tunnel entrance that would bring him out close enough to where the first of the war machines that he intended to see destroyed was being constructed. Taking a deep breath, to fortify himself for what he was going to be doing, he pressed onward.
Truly, it would be best if he didn’t allow himself to be seen before he’d destroyed the plans that the Borgia had forced Leonardo draft for them, if only so that he would be able to delay the moment when they inevitably realized that they had not only lost the plans, but also the brilliant inventor whose service they had compelled in their usual brutish ways. Once he’d made it back into the open air and sunlight outside of the tunnels, Ezio set about examining the garrisoned fortress that he had found himself in the presence of.
It was, pleasantly, not close enough to the tunnel entrance to give him the impression that there was a risk of the entrance being found out by anything but the most diligent of searchers or the worst turn of bad luck, but Ezio still knew that he would be best served staying out of sight for as long as he could manage. He would also have to make certain to leave as little trace of his presence as he could, since those who had been set to guard this place would have doubtless been informed by their masters that the Assassins were returning to Roma once more. Those in this place would have to have some watch posted, even if only a meager one that would be more suited to placating their masters than to protecting their interests.
Making his way forward, as slowly and carefully as he’d ever done so in all the times that he’d been tasked to infiltrate one Templar stronghold or another, Ezio concealed himself while he called upon his second-sight, using it to study the comings and goings of the guards in more detail than he’d have otherwise been able to. Once he’d managed to get as good an idea of the guards’ positions and patrol routes as he was going to be able to manage without staking the place out for the entire day, Ezio moved forward.
Making his way into the fortress, making sure to stay out of sight of any of the guards – bored and numbed by their work as each and every one of them seemed to be – Ezio breathed somewhat more easily once he’d managed to make his way to where the plans for the first of the war machines that he intended to destroy had been mounted. It seemed to be some kind of towed gun-platform that could be fired and reloaded with the kind of speed that made Ezio sick just to think about – particularly in the hands of the Borgia, and by extension the Templars – and in that light it was a relief more than anything to tear the plans from the wall and set them afire using the torch that had been so kindly provided for him by his unknowing benefactors.
Now, all that remained was for him to find the prototype that had been built using the plans that he’d just destroyed; it wouldn’t do, after all, to leave the Borgia in possession of such a terrible weapon.
Continuing on his way through the fortress, keeping his eyes open for both more of the guards – that he had to take care not to dispatch on his way, since there were few enough of them that their absence might very well raise just the kind of alarm that he’d been taking all possible precautions to avoid – and the war machine itself, Ezio finally managed to find what he was looking for. Concealing himself carefully, behind a stack of crates that sat just to the left of the barrels of gunpowder that were, even as he watched, being loaded up onto the war machine that Ezio fully intended to make certain that the Borgia didn’t get even a single day’s use out of. Gathering himself for what he was going to need to do, carefully preparing the throwing-knives that he’d provisioned himself with before making his way into this place, he loosed them with deadly precision.
The guards, who had likely taken their safety for granted while Ezio had been making his way into the fortress and dealing with the plans, jumped in surprise as the first of them fell with a knife in this throat. Sweeping down upon the remaining three with his sword bared, Ezio cut down two of them in their tracks as they attempted to flee, and then dealt with the fleeing fourth member of the small group before he could shout and call for aid.
Knowing that, even with the claim that he’d made on the war machine that he was currently riding, there would be little time before at least some kind of a cry went up in response to what he was doing, Ezio turned the gun on the remaining barrels of gunpowder that hadn’t yet been loaded onto the war machine that he had just commandeered. The ensuing explosion destroyed the storehouse, and Ezio set off amid the smoke and shouting. He knew that it was only a matter of time before his actions inevitably drew the notice of the remaining Templars and Borgia thugs that had been stationed in this place, but at least he’d have a better chance of dealing with them from behind the controls of Leonardo’s war machine rather than allowing the risk that such a thing would end up being turned on him.
As he began to see signs of the pursuit he’d known was coming, from the moment he had basically announced his presence to all and sundry by making his attack on the storehouse where Leonardo’s war machine was being provisioned for wherever the Borgia has intended to take it before he had intervened, Ezio whipped up the pair of horses that had been harnessed to the front of the carriage that had been designed to support Leonardo’s gun. The familiar lurch came, and Ezio braced himself against it as the riders that the Borgia had dispatched began gaining on him.
Chapter 346: A storm of lead
Chapter Text
Making his way over to the gun that he’d begun this whole mission for in the first place, Ezio looked it over for a long moment. It seemed to be an evolution of the cannon that he’d found himself handling, so long ago during the siege of Monteriggioni; such a thing had nearly been imbedded in his memory by the sheer, unending horror of the day, and so finding himself once more in position to cut down yet more of those who lent their strength to the Borgia held a certain attraction for him. The mechanisms of the gun he’d found himself behind were familiar enough to allow Ezio to cut down the Borgia’s riders before they could manage to gather in sufficient numbers to trouble him too much.
Taking a moment to relax his arms – the recoil on the gun he was handling, while it didn’t slam back into his hands with the full force of the cannon that he’d found himself manning for what had seemed like such a long time back in Monteriggioni, was a great deal more constant than even the fastest-loaded cannon could have ever been – Ezio urged more speed out of the horses, then returned his attention to the matter of the Borgia’s riders.
More of them had taken the chance to mass behind him while he’d been unable to keep them under fire, the way he’d known that they would from the instant that he’d taken his hands off of the gun, and so when he resumed firing upon them Ezio imagined that it came as a rather unpleasant surprise. When he was finally able to clear out the group of riders that had been pursuing him with such persistence that he hadn’t been able to raise his hands from the gun for more than a handful of seconds at a time, Ezio began rigging the war machine that he had stolen to explode in nearly the same way as the storehouse that had been holding the provisions for the monstrosity in the first place.
Truly, the world would be better off without such a thing as this, no matter who found themselves in command of it; this kind of power would make a tyrant of too many men.
Once he’d managed to sever the connection between the harnessed horses and the war machine that they were dragging, Ezio fired the pistol that he’d appropriated from one of the guards that he’d dealt with outside the storehouse, and fired it into the remaining barrel of gunpowder that he’d left whole in anticipation of doing just this sort of a thing. Reining in the horses, Ezio released the one on the left from its traces while he sat the one on the right. Steering the horse around carefully, Ezio observed the destruction of the war machine to make certain that it was total.
There would be no point in ridding the world of a machine such as this if he left enough for the Templars to attempt to repair it.
Once he’d satisfied himself that the war machine was beyond any hope of repair – at least now that the Borgia had been deprived of Leonardo’s genius and thus their ability to create any more such monstrosities as this – Ezio turned the horse he’d claimed and began making for Roma once again. Catching up to the other horse that he’d set free when he’d been setting Leonardo’s war machine up to destroy itself, Ezio lead the pair of horses back into Roma. They were close enough to a stable that he’d renovated with some of the funds that went into the Brotherhoods’ coffers from all of the businesses that they had helped to renovate while they were working to uproot the Borgia and their Templar masters from the city-state, and so he was able to drop the both of them off with the stable hands and continue on his way unencumbered.
Making his way back down into the tunnels from another entrance, Ezio sighed in relief as he passed back into the cool darkness of the Brotherhood’s underground network. As he drew slowly closer to the stronghold that sheltered them when they weren’t out and about on various errands within Roma, he began hearing the sound of excited chatter. Smiling slightly as he realized that the chatter sounded rather one-sided, and more than that when he found himself remembering just who it was that would be able to chatter with that kind of relentless speed, Ezio found himself chuckling softly as he continued on his way.
Sure enough, Leonardo was standing within the walls of the Brotherhood’s stronghold once more, with Aeon calmly watching the inventor as he paced excitedly back and forth.
“Leonardo!” he called, grinning as he drew the inventor’s attention once more. The pair of them shared a long embrace, but he could still feel Leonardo all but vibrating with enthusiasm as they did so. “I take it that Aeon demonstrated some of his skills to you, as well?” he asked, grinning as the pair of them parted only a few steps.
“Sí!” the inventor exclaimed, an almost manic glee in every line of his face and body. “It was just as you said: I could only see a blur when he moved. And those swords of his… Dio mio, I hardly know what to say about them! Still, the name Messer Aeon has given them is rather appropriate,” Leonardo concluded, smile still firmly on his face.
“They have a name?” Ezio asked, not knowing quite what to make of the information that he’d just been given; truly, it sounded far more like something that Bartolomeo would have done, and Aeon was about as far from being Bartolomeo as it was possible to be.
At least without being a Templar, Ezio thought.
“Sí, he calls them his Ethereal Blades,” Leonardo said, and Ezio found that he couldn’t quite manage to hold back a chuckle, himself.
“Sí, I suppose that dose sound rather appropriate, considering what they are.”
Still, there was also the matter of what they could do, something he’d seen only a few times but still found himself unsettled by.
“If you’ve no more need of my presence,” Aeon himself said, calm golden gaze taking them in with his usual reserve.
“Of course, amico,” he said, nodding to the strange Guardian as he retreated once more into the Apple.
“Fascinating, absolutely fascinating,” Leonardo said, making his way over to the inert form of the Apple, then picking up the artifact so that he could examine it in more detail up close. “If I hadn’t seen Messer Aeon for myself, I would have hardly believed that such a thing was possible.”
“Aeon does a lot of impossible things, it seems,” he said, chuckling softly as he led Leonardo into the back of the Brotherhood’s hidden stronghold. “Now, you should probably get some rest. Being a captive of the Borgia couldn’t have been good for you.”
Leonardo laughed, soft and rueful, as the pair of them continued on their way. “No, I’d have to say that it wasn’t.”
Chapter 347: Back on the hunt
Chapter Text
Once he’d managed to get Leonardo settled down with a room of his own, leaving him to recover from the strain that being a prisoner of the Borgia for such a long time would have caused in anyone, Ezio made his way back out into the environs of Roma with a definite sense of accomplishment. True, he might not have been the one who ultimately freed his inventor friend from his confinement at the hands of the Borgia, but there was still a certain satisfaction in having him back. Ezio could be content with that.
Making his way back out into the sunlight and open spaces of Roma again, Ezio almost immediately found himself confronted by the sight of yet more Borgia thugs accosting an innocent shop owner, though this one at least seemed to have some form of support. He didn’t know if it was a member of the man’s own family, or else simply one of his customers who’d been good-hearted enough to offer the man his aid in such a trying situation, but in either case, Ezio knew that even the pair of them would not be able to hold their own against the might of the Borgia forever.
Wading into the battle that the two men had begun, even as it seemed that the pair of them were about to be overwhelmed by the forces that they had set themselves against, Ezio cut his way through the remaining thugs that the Borgia had set out to terrorize the people of this part of Roma and so to enforce their dominance in this place.
“Grazie, Messer,” the man on his right – the one who seemed to be the owner of the fruit stall, if the concern that he was showing for the produce that had been spilled onto the ground was any indication – while the younger man rushed to help him.
“Sí,” the younger man said, and turned to look at him more closely; Ezio took the time he’d been given to observe the pair of them in more detail, given the clear resemblance between the two men, it seemed all the more likely that they were father and son. “I’m Alighiero Abate, and this is my father,” the young man continued, and Ezio stepped forward so that the pair of them would be able to greet each other properly.
“It is a pleasure to meet the both of you,” he said, once he and Alighiero had shared an embrace and a formal kiss.
“You’re the Assassino that so many people have been talking about, aren’t you?” Alighiero asked, a smile beginning to show on his face as the pair of them spoke.
“One of them, sí,” he said, beginning to see where it was that this conversation they were having could easily go, if he allowed it to continue along the path that it seemed to be heading in naturally. “My amici and I are working to break the hold that the Borgia have over Roma and her people.”
“Do you think I could become a part of this, Messer?” Alighiero asked, and Ezio thought he could hear the sound of the young man’s father laughing in a good-natured sort of way.
“I think you could, but such a thing is not up to me alone,” Ezio said, turning his attention to Alighiero’s father, who was indeed watching the pair of them with a good-natured sort of amusement.
“I suppose it would be a better sort of thing for my son to get himself mixed up in; those bastardi are growing too bold, anyway, without someone to remind them that they can only push honest people so far, before those people band together to kick their heads in.”
“Sí, that’s something that we keep trying to teach them, but the lessons don’t always seem to take,” he said, returning the man’s grin with one of his own.
He and Alighiero left the man’s father to man his fruit stand, and Ezio promised that he would send some of his Novices to keep watch over the man while he worked, to ensure that the Borgia didn’t get the idea that they could abuse the citizenry of Roma without consequences anymore. When he’d sent the boy back to Isola Tiberina, to speak with Machiavelli and Uncle Mario and thus to take his first steps toward becoming a full member of the Brotherhood, Ezio continued on his way through the city.
Chapter 348: Cavern of wolves
Chapter Text
There was still the matter of the Followers of Romulus, something Ezio had found himself reminded of when he’d chased a fleeing wolfman away from a young couple that he had looked set to pounce on, and so Ezio had set himself back to searching for the entrances to the underground caverns that all of them seemed to operate out of. Brushing his left hand across the Apple, Leonardo having insisted that he take it with him since there was no telling when he might find himself in a situation where Aeon’s help would make the difference between being able to return back to the Brotherhood once more, or being killed in the attempt. Or else simply being held as a captive, which would amount to much the same thing, in the end.
The Brotherhood could not afford to let the Borgia set the terms of their battle.
Still, knowing that he had the formidable – nigh-unmatchable, though Ezio was unwilling to allow himself to think too much in that direction, since it would be entirely too easy to come to rely on the man to the detriment of his own skill as an Assassin – presence of Aeon close at hand, in nearly the most literal of senses, provided a certain comfort as he made his way down into the darkened caverns whose entrance he had managed to discover after carefully concealing himself in order to allow the fleeing wolfman to think he had escaped.
The air around him was close and musty, heavily-laden with the scents of candles and torches, and with hints of old bones and dust. Shaking himself as he prepared to move forward again, Ezio found himself passing by the skeletons of a great number of people. Knowing that to the Followers, these people were simply one more way of striking terror into those who might have taken it into their heads to follow any of the wolfmen that they might have chanced to encounter, Ezio found himself all the more determined to put an end to them.
Pressing ever deeper into the catacombs where he’d found himself, Ezio called up his second-sight once more, wishing to determine just how far he was from needing to defend himself yet again from the Followers of Romulus. The sight of red-tinted figures in the far distance, far enough below him that they seemed to be the size of children’s toys, let Ezio know just how far it was that he had left to go.
And, to an extent, just how much deeper the catacombs that gaped before him extended.
As he descended farther and farther down, the sight of the Apple flashing with the strange, subtle light that he’d seen flashing through its tracery at times when he would find himself examining the artifact and wondering about the people who had ultimately created it – Minerva and the others of her long-vanished kind – he wondered if Aeon was attempting to contact him. Pausing to make certain that none of the wolfmen he was hunting were close enough to see what he was doing, Ezio removed the Apple from the hidden pouch within his robes, and held it out.
The familiar form of Aeon emerged from the depths of the Apple, his right hand appearing to rest atop the artifact, just opposite Ezio’s own right hand.
“Was there something you wanted to speak to me about, amico?” he asked, once Aeon’s form had fully emerged from the Apple and the man’s golden eyes had come to rest upon him.
“This place seems to be another stronghold for those men the pair of us confronted some time earlier,” Aeon said, his usual unruffled calm lending that same feeling of steadiness to Ezio while the two of them spoke. “I thought that you might appreciate my help in this case, as well.”
“Sí, grazie,” he said, realizing that Aeon’s ultimate aim had simply been to offer him aid. “I think the pair of us will manage better than we did last time, since this place seems to lack the obstacles that held us back during the time we spent traversing the last stronghold.”
So he hoped, at least, since as fantastic as Aeon’s speed was to have beside him in battle, actually moving at that speed to cross one barrier or another was disconcerting in the extreme.
As he and Aeon continued on their way down into the flickering shadows within the gaping catacombs, Ezio wondered for a moment just how well the man in black was able to see, considering the simple fact that he did not truly have a body in this time and place. Still, those were hardly questions that Ezio could afford to let himself ponder, considering their present situation. Besides, he truly doubted that Aeon would be willing to speak with him about something so personal, considering how much the man seemed to value his privacy.
As the pair of them continued on their way, with Ezio handing the Apple over to Aeon so that the man in black would be able to keep the artifact safe in the way that only he could, Ezio found himself tensing up at odd moments. The expectation of an ambush hung in the air all around them, as he and Aeon continued on their way down through the twisting, dimply-lit catacombs that still gaped before them.
The sight of what seemed to be a deep, subterranean well brought Ezio up short for a moment, and he found himself falling slightly behind as Aeon pressed determinedly onward. Following in the wake of the man in black, as he leaped down into the cavernous darkness within the well, Ezio chuckled softly. It was only natural, after all, that a man who did not truly possess a body would have no fear of injuring himself, even after such a long drop as seemed to be concealed by the darkness within the well.
Making for a nearby torch, so that he would be able to discern the true depth of the well he’d found himself standing before, rather than trusting to an invulnerability that only Aeon seemed to possess, Ezio removed it from the sconce that had been holding it and tossed it down the well before him. As he’d been expecting, the well was too deep for anyone but Aeon himself to survive a leap from the height of it, but there were enough handholds and footholds for one trained in the ways of the Brotherhood to make their way down into the depths.
When he was able to catch up with Aeon again, Ezio was pleased to note that the man in black had waited for him. With a nod that seemed no more than a subtle dip of his head, Aeon fell into step with him as the pair of them resumed their journey once more. The air in the catacombs seemed to be getting lighter, or at least less oppressive, to the point where Ezio was almost expecting to find the massive, underground temple that he and Aeon walked into.
“I seek those who lead the Followers of Romulus!” he declared, catching sight of a scattered few wolfmen – one of them looking as through he was attempting to pry something loose from the huge, ornate cross at the center of the temple – before they fled, presumably to summon their fellows.
“Those will, doubtless, be returning with reinforcements,” Aeon said, his tone that of someone who was making an observation rather than chiding.
“Sí, but we’ve dealt with their kind before,” he said, smiling slightly in response to what could have easily been seen as concern from the enigmatic man in black.
Aeon’s only response was to continue pressing onward, and Ezio began preparing himself for what was clearly to come. There was little chance, after all, that the Followers of Romulus – or, more properly the Borgia who commanded them – would allow him and Aeon to continue on their way with so little resistance. Particularly considering all of the damage that the Brotherhood – mostly in the person of himself, Ezio reflected with some pleasure – had done to their plans and to their holdings.
Sure enough, after passing out of the temple and down another winding tunnel, Ezio found himself and Aeon confronted with another, smaller temple. This one seemed to be dominated by a large, ornate stone bell that stood at the center of the room.
“Romulus declares that the Assassins must die!” shouted a voice from high above, drawing Ezio’s attention, even as Aeon brandished his Ethereal Blades against the charge of wolfmen that fell upon them at that command.
Throwing himself into battle, knowing that there he’d little chance of reasoning with this group – since they were likely to be either fanatics or Borgia hirelings, or both – Ezio positioned himself to cover what few openings that the long sweep of Aeon’s Ethereal Blades would not be able to reach. Conserving his strength where he could, knowing that Aeon’s untiring speed would do more to end the battle they were both in than his own comparatively limited strength, Ezio soon found himself without a single enemy.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, as Aeon came to stand beside him once more, the snap-hiss of his Ethereal Blades sounding a last time as he sheathed them. “There’s a last thing that I need to see to before I leave, though you’re welcome to return to the Apple, if you want.”
“Of course,” Aeon said, nodding slightly as he vanished once more into the depths of the Apple.
As Ezio began his search for the scroll that he suspected would be present, as it had been in the last of the strongholds of the Followers of Romulus that he’d found himself and Aeon making their way through after they had been accosted by that first group of wolfmen, he chucked softly as he found himself wondering again just where it was that Aeon went when he disappeared into the Apple. Of course, he also wondered just how it was that Desmond had come to be following him at all.
It seemed that he was destined to be bedeviled by unanswerable questions, Ezio reflected with a wry sort of amusement.
Once he’d managed to recover the scroll, with yet another ornate key affixed to the band – more and more, Ezio found himself reminded of his time spent beneath the streets of Firenze, Venezia, and even Forlì, when he’d been collecting the seals that had been either owned by some of his predecessors in the Brotherhood, or else made for them – Ezio wondered if he would find a suit of armor behind whatever door those keys would ultimately fit into. He also wondered how many of them there would end up being, as well.
Chapter 349: Reemergence
Chapter Text
Making his way back up and out into the sunlit streets of Roma once more, Ezio took a moment to breathe air that wasn’t laden with the smell of half-burned candles, old bones, dust, and the oppressive weight of so much stone. Then, knowing that it wasn’t truly safe for him to stay overly long in one place the way he was currently doing, he turned to make his way back to the tunnels that the Brotherhood used to move unseen within Roma. Deciding that he would pay a visit to Mother, little Maria, and Claudia, Ezio turned his path to head for the Rosa in Fiore.
Once he’d managed to make it back to the business that Claudia had claimed for her own, once it had become clear that the woman managing it wasn’t acting for the benefit of anyone but herself, Ezio smiled slightly as he made his way up through the building; always careful to stay out of the path of those who might have taken particular notice of his presence as he continued on his way.
“It’s good to see you again, sorellina,” he said, embracing little Maria as he found her.
“Ezio!” she exclaimed, turning to grin widely at him as the pair of them held each other for the first time in what felt like much longer than it had to have been. “It’s wonderful to see you again, fratello,” she paused, smirking at him in a distinctly teasing sort of way. “And you came just in time for dinner again. If you’re not careful, Mother might start thinking that that’s the only reason you bother coming back here anymore.”
“And I’m sure you won’t have anything to do with cultivating that sort of impression, would you, sorellina?” he jibbed, knowing that Mother wasn’t the type to think that kind of thing of the people who were close to her, but that his littlest sister was enough of an imp to tease him about it.
The pair of them shared a laugh, as well as another embrace, before heading down to the Rosa’s ornate dining room so that they could have their last meal of the day amid the company of people they cared about. Mother and Claudia were both pleased to see him, though his little sisters did still tease him about only showing up for meals. He gave as good as he got, of course, since staying in the luxurious quarters of the Rosa in Fiore could have easily been said to make people soft.
Finding himself invited to spend the night didn’t come as so much of a surprise, and Ezio was happy to accept the hospitality being offered to him.
~AC: Bro~
Feeling rested for the first time in a long while, Ezio got up, washed, and then made his way back down into the basement of the Rosa in Fiore so that he would be able to access the tunnel entrance once again. He’d kept the map that Leonardo had given to him, since given everything the inventor had said to him – combined with what he’d been able to overhear while he’d been hunting for the mobile gun platform that the Borgia had forced him to construct for them – there was more than simply one of those terrible devices out and about in Roma.
He would, therefore, need to hunt for the rest of them, before the Borgia or the Templars could put so much as one of the devices on the front lines of battle; there would be few armies that wouldn’t be overwhelmed by the kind of firepower that those devices could bring to bear.
Chapter 350: Flight and fire
Chapter Text
Pausing for a long moment next to a torch, Ezio checked the map that Leonardo had made for him, seeking out the location of the next of the terrible machines that he was going out to rid the world of. So, they even went as far as forcing you to recreate that mad flying machine of yours, he mused, finding himself uncomfortably reminded of the flight he had made to the Palazzo Ducale, back when he’d been hunting Templars in Venezia. Apparently, however, this new model had been equipped with some kind of fire-cannon, which could be used to both extend the duration of the flight, as well as to rain hellfire down upon anyone below.
Shuddering at the thought of that kind of device in the hands of the Borgia, Ezio took another moment to memorize the landmarks on the way to his next destination, and then pressed determinedly onward once more.
Once he’d made it back out into the sunlight once more, Ezio knew that he couldn’t afford to stop; he would need to find the place where the Borgia had stored the first of what they clearly hoped to be many of the armed flying machines that they had forced Leonardo to make for them. There was no way that he was going to allow Leonardo’s genius to be misused in the same way that the Borgia – or truly the Templars – would misuse everything they laid their hands to.
Managing to locate the tower that the Borgia intended to use as a launch-platform for their version of Leonardo’s flying machine, Ezio made for it as quickly as he could manage without making it obvious as to just where he intended to go. Melting into nearby crowds when he found the eyes of the Borgia guards passing too close to him, Ezio continued on his way to the tower. There were obvious signs of activity, but someone who hadn’t been informed of what Leonardo had been forced to create for the Borgia might have simply assumed that it was one more element of the military buildup that could be seen all around Roma.
And yes, it was true that one could easily spot the same kind of buildup of forces all over Roma, but as long as the Borgia held dominion over Roma and her military, such a thing was hardly a hopeful development.
Making his way into the fortress, slipping in and out of the routes that the guards who patrolled the grounds made use of, Ezio found that none of them quite seemed to believe that the flying machine they were guarding was anything more than some madman’s pipe-dream. Clearly, none of them had been present to witness his flight to the Palazzo Ducale, though it was also just as clear that some of those who had witnessed such a thing had gained the ears of important people. There would hardly be a flying machine that he needed to dispose of, otherwise.
Once he’d managed to make his way up to the tower that would serve to launch the flying machine – something that served as an even more potent reminder of his flight to the Palazzo Ducale in Venezia – Ezio slipped quietly inside.
The place was slightly more thickly-peopled than the grounds that he’d previously crossed, but none of those present seemed to believe that the flying-machine in the topmost room would do anything more than crash, either. It made them a great deal easier to bypass than any of the other guards that he’d had to deal with during the other times that he’d found himself forced to infiltrate a Borgia stronghold, since they spent a great deal of time grousing to one another about being forced to stand watch over a madman’s delusion made real. They felt that their time was being wasted, and such a thing was more apt to make them look outward than in.
Ezio was grateful for such a thing, even as he took shameless advantage of it.
Chapter 351: Bombs away
Chapter Text
Making it to the top of the tower at last, Ezio continued over to the side of the eerily familiar contraption. I can’t truly say I missed this mad machine, but at least I can keep it out of the hands of the Borgia, he reflected, feeling a perverse sort of amusement as he climbed into the familiar harness and set the flying-machine over the side of the tower it had been set up atop. The lurch as he reached the edge of the ground before him, feeling as though he’d left his stomach behind back on the tower, brought another wave of the most perverse sort of nostalgia.
It also brought the attention of the guards who had been stationed all around the tower, but that was only to be expected, given what he’d just done; it was yet another thing that reminded Ezio of when he’d made his flight into the Palazzo Ducale, though not having little Maria by his side in her own odd flying contraption was a change that he welcomed, under the circumstances.
Taking hold of the fire-cannon, just as he noticed that his momentum from the initial launch off the tower was beginning to decline, Ezio set fire to the open ground beneath him. Catching the warm updraft from the flames, Ezio turned and made for a nearby munitions storehouse. A select few of the guards on the ground, those who hadn’t turned tail and run at the sight of the closest thing to a dragon that anyone would likely have the chance to see, took shots at him from their positions around the storehouse.
The storehouse that was soon consumed by the flames set by his fire-cannon as he came within range.
Using the large fires raging all about the destroyed storehouse to boost the flying-machine back into the air once again, Ezio turned his path back over the burning grounds of the fortress once more. Using the fire-cannon, he destroyed more of the munitions that had been stored within the walls of the fortress, as well as the wagons that would have otherwise been used to carry either troops, weaponry, or supplies. By the time he was finished laying waste to the fortress beneath him, Ezio could see that night had fallen.
He could also see that a few of the survivors of his raid were piling into an intact wagon and preparing to set out; he’d little inkling of how such a thing had managed to survive the destruction of the fortress all around it, but the simple fact that it had meant that Ezio wasn’t quite finished with his work. Making a last pass over the burning remnants of the fortress, Ezio allowed himself to relax once the burning wagon had crashed into the side of the now-smoldering fortress.
Chapter 352: Broken wings
Chapter Text
Gliding as far as he could manage with the momentum that still remained, Ezio steered away from the remains of the Borgia fortress. Finding a clear field with enough bare dirt that he wouldn’t have to worry so much about setting fire to anything around him with what he was about to do, Ezio loosened the harness so that he would be able to jump out and away from the flying-machine before it crashed into the ground. As the flying-machine met the unyielding soil, crumpling into a twisted mass of wood, canvas, and metal, the remaining fuel in the fire-cannon ignited in a rather spectacular fireball.
Staying to make certain that the flying-machine was consumed by the fires that had been started by its own weapon, Ezio stamped down heavily on the shattered remains, grinding them into the dirt and kicking up enough debris to bury them. Once he’d finished, not only destroying the flying-machine but covering over the remnants well enough that no one who hadn’t seen Leonardo’s flying machine for their own would be likely to recognize it in such a state, Ezio allowed himself to relax just the slightest bit. Since he’d made sure that no one had seen where he’d guided this monstrosity to crash, Ezio was able to leave the field with some satisfaction for the job that he’d done.
Making his way back to the tunnels that served as a hidden road beneath the very streets of Roma itself, Ezio wondered just how many more of those contraptions he would ultimately be forced to deal with; it was beginning to seem as though the Borgia had pressed Leonardo like a grape, unyielding until he had given them everything that they had wanted. It was infuriating, but the knowledge that Leonardo was no longer in their hands provided a great deal of solace, when he allowed himself to think in that direction.
Breathing more easily once he’d made it back down into the tunnels, out of sight of anyone who might have been searching for him, Ezio turned his path to make his way back to the stronghold of the Assassins in Roma. There were times when he still found the thought that these tunnels he was using ran even underwater a hard one to believe, but whether he believed it or not, Ezio was still able to find his way to Isola Tiberina by following the path that had been laid out. He thought that Leonardo might have had something to say about that, but as yet he’d not spoken to the inventor about those kinds of things.
Ezio didn’t know if he ever would, either, since the topic wasn’t an especially pertinent one to their struggle, or really to anything at all; his own sense of wonder aside.
Chapter 353: Homecoming again
Chapter Text
When he’d finally managed to make his way back to Isola Tiberina and the shelter of the Brotherhood’s hidden stronghold there, the first thing that Ezio became aware of was the sound of voices. It seemed that La Volpe, Machiavelli, Aeon, Caterina, and even Leonardo were all involved in some kind of discussion about a matter that was clearly of import to all of them.
“Ah, Ezio, I’ve heard that you have been hard at work, disposing of the war machines that Maestro Leonardo was pressed into service to create,” Machiavelli said, nodding to him as Ezio made his way out of the tunnel and into the stronghold proper. “That is good.”
“Grazie,” he said, continuing on his way into the room so that he could take a seat at last.
“It is also good that you set Aeon upon the Borgia, and so were able to deprive them off Maestro Leonardo’s services,” La Volpe said, in the tone of one continuing an argument simply for the sake of it, rather than expecting the argument to actually go anywhere.
“Gilberto, stop antagonizing Niccolò,” Uncle Mario said, making his own way back into the main room of the Brotherhood’s stronghold, presumably from his office given the direction he seemed to be moving. “We are all aware that you are fully in favor of Aeon lending his aid to our struggle,” he turned his gaze to Machiavelli, pinning the other man in the same way that his gaze had pinned La Volpe not so long ago. “And, we are also aware that you, Machiavelli, simply wish to know more about Messer Aeon before giving your full trust to him. However, I feel that I must point out that such is a rather interesting sentiment, coming from you of all people.”
“I will keep that in mind, Mentore,” Machiavelli said, an unreadable expression on his face as he turned back to Ezio. “In any case, while you have been working to ensure that the Borgia are deprived of those terrible weapons of theirs, I have taken the opportunity to refine our carrier pigeon system. You will now be able to use it to send orders to those new recruits you have scattered throughout the city.”
“Excellent,” he said, smiling widely as he felt some of the concerns that he had been laboring under drop away with those words. “Grazie, Machiavelli.”
“If our conversation has concluded,” Aeon prompted, drawing their attention back to him where he stood next to the Apple that had sheltered him for only he knew how long.
“Of course, amico,” Uncle Mario said, making his way over to the Apple so that he could fetch it from the table once Aeon had retreated back into it once again. “Keep it close, nipote,” the man said, handing the artifact over to him so Ezio could tuck it back into the hidden pocket of his robes once again.
“Sí, he’s done a lot of good for us, strange as he is,” he said, sitting back down once he’d managed to get the artifact settled inside his robes once more.
“Sí, he has,” La Volpe said, a distinct note of challenge in his tone, though Machiavelli didn’t rise to the bait, and Uncle Mario gave the thief a warning glare in response.
Chapter 354: Money trail
Chapter Text
Looking over to the entrance as he heard the approach of a familiar pair of footsteps, Ezio saw Claudia and little Maria making their way into the stronghold where the rest of them had all gathered to speak to one another.
“Claudia, piccola Maria,” he said, grinning as slyly as he’d ever seen his imp of a littlest sister grin at someone she had in her sights. “I’m afraid we haven’t started lunch yet.”
“We’re not here to have lunch, idiota,” Claudia retorted, smirking at him for a moment, before she became serious again. “Bartolomeo sends his regards, and his apologies, but it seems that French General – Valois – has made another attack on the barracks where he’s been stationed.”
“He says that his men are holding their own, but you know what he’s like,” little Maria said, as she and Claudia made their way in among the rest of their group.
“Sí, I do,” he said, wrapping his left arm around her shoulders; he knew that both of them had their rightful concerns about just how it was that Bartolomeo and his forces were presently doing.
“Please sit down, all of you,” Uncle Mario said, gesturing to the places at the large table that had been set out for all of them. “I have a plan for seeing to the Borgia.”
“If I might make a suggestion, Mentore, we should either go after their supplies, or else Cesare’s followers,” Machiavelli said, almost before he’d settled down in his seat.
“My plan will see to both, Niccolò,” Uncle Mario said, giving the man a tolerant sort of smile. “If we can cut off his funds, Cesare will lose his army and be forced to return without his men. Gilberto, have you or your people managed to find out where he gets the money he’s been using?”
“We know that he depends on Rodrigo for a great deal of his funding, and Rodrigo’s banker is Agostino Chigi. However, it seems that Cesare has a banker of his own; we haven’t been able to confirm the man’s identity, though we have our suspicions.”
“I know someone who has had dealings with Cesare and his banker,” Claudia said, and Ezio smiled slightly as his little sister took up the conversation; he hadn’t approved of her joining up with the Brotherhood at first, and in truth he still worried, but he could hardly deny that Claudia seemed pleased with her chosen vocation. “He’s a client of ours at the Rosa in Fiore: the senator Egidio Troche has been complaining almost constantly about interest rates when he first comes over.”
“Sí, but your girls always make sure he leaves satisfied, right?” he asked, grinning slyly at his little sister where she sat.
“Ma certo,” Claudia said, sitting up straighter with her nose in the air for just a moment, before she, he, and little Maria all laughed.
“Bene, that’s enough out of you,” Uncle Mario said, sweeping the three of them with a kindly gaze. “We must follow up on that lead; Ezio, can you take care of that?”
“Va bene, Uncle,” he said, nodding as the man turned to look at him. “I’ll get it done.”
“There’s something else,” Machiavelli said. “My contacts have reported that the Borgia are planning to station French troops on the road that leads to Castello Sant’Angelo,” Machiavelli turned to look directly at him. “Your attack must have really rattled them; to say nothing of what they might have found out about Messer Aeon. It also appears that Cesare is planning to return to Roma immediately. Quite why is beyond my capacity to speculate, but when he does arrive, he’ll be guarded. Enough so that I doubt that anyone but Aeon himself would be able to breach his defenses,” this last part was said with a dubious glance at Ezio, though he knew where Machiavelli’s attention was truly focused. “In any case, I’ve also had reports that he intends to keep his return secret, at least for the moment.”
“Well, at least we know of someone capable of matching Cesare and his forces,” La Volpe said, turning a distinctly pleased expression on the same spot that Machiavelli had been looking at with such dubiousness.
“It seems to be that our best course of action is to corner this French general of theirs, Octavian de Valois, and kill him,” Uncle Mario said, returning their conversation to the matter at hand, before La Volpe and Machiavelli’s sniping could escalate out of hand once again. “Once he’s been taken care of, Bartolomeo will be able to put the Frenchmen on the defensive, and they’ll be forced to abandon their posts at the Castello.”
Chapter 355: Forlì’s Lady
Chapter Text
“It will be good to know that Roma will soon be free of the Borgia, but I’m afraid that I won’t be here to see it,” Caterina said, rising from her seat and catching the quilt that had been draped over her before it could fall to the ground. “I’ve heard reports myself; reports of heralds that no bribe can silence, all of them offering a reward for either my capture or my head,” Caterina smiled, grim amusement in every line of her proud, weathered face. “I suppose I might have overstayed my welcome.”
“We could still protect you here,” he said, feeling compelled to make the offer, even though it seemed as if Caterina had already made up her mind.
“It’s a generous offer, caro,” she said, gently pushing him back down when he tried to stand up. “But I wouldn’t wish to impose on your hospitality, or risk your safety, any more than I’ve already done. Besides,” she continued, her amusement seemed to take on a distinctly self-deprecating air. “I’m not of much use to you without Forlì. I’ll go back to Firenze, back to my children, and petition for the return of my lands.”
“I’ll arrange for an escort, then,” he said, and managed to rise so that the pair of them could properly embrace. “When will you be departing?”
“The day after tomorrow, or else sooner than that, if I can manage,” she said, her agile mind already plotting out what route she would take, the provisions she was going to request, and just how she was going to make it out of Roma under the very eyes of the Borgia.
As well as anyone else who may have been tempted by the reward that they were offering.
“Bene, we’ll see about getting you prepared to leave,” he said, turning to signal for little Maria and Claudia to follow him.
They would be better suited to helping Caterina prepare the clothing that she was going to need for her journey, while he looked to her food and drink; the four of them could all collaborate on the subject of her defenses once those two jobs had been completed. Once he’d finished gathering up the food and drink that Caterina would need while she made for Firenze to be with her children, hard-wearing things that would travel well and plenty of wine to wash them down with, Ezio tucked them into a pair of saddlebags and slung the whole thing over her left shoulder as he continued walking.
~AC: Bro~
Once the four of them had managed to had managed to finish provisioning the Contessa for her journey back to Firenze, with her obviously lovesick brother somehow managing not to sigh too much, Maria turned her attention to Ezio as Claudia and the Contessa discussed just what she was going to bring along while she was on the road.
“Dio mio, fratello, you truly are a hopeless case,” she said, once the Contessa had passed out of sight, following in Claudia’s footsteps as the pair of them continued speaking about their journey.
Ezio huffed, though Maria had the feeling that it was meant to be a laugh and hadn’t quite made it. “There are times when I wonder if I’m destined to be alone, sorellina,” he said, turning a weary sort of smile on her. “Not to say that I love all of you any less, but with first Christina, and then Caterina…” he sighed. “Sometimes I just wonder what’s to become of me, in the end.”
Firmly throttling the urge to laugh – her last brother was being entirely silly, but then most men seemed to be fools when it came to matters of the heart, or at least that was what Mother had always said when she’d asked about those kinds of things – Maria hugged Ezio just as tightly as he seemed to need at this moment of all moments.
“Grazie, sorellina,” Ezio said, wrapping his own arms around her, in turn.
~AC: Bro~
With the memory of the comfort that little Maria had been so willing to provide for him fresh in his mind, Ezio was able to bid Caterina farewell with a much lighter heart than he knew he would have otherwise possessed. He was pleased to be able to do so, even as he was fully aware that little Maria would tease him mercilessly when she was certain that he felt better. Something he looked forward to in a way, if only for the fact that it was yet more proof of how deeply little Maria cared about him.
As Caterina herself had said, it was simply the way of little sisters.
Chapter 356: The Rose’s favors
Chapter Text
Once the three of them had seen Caterina off, there of course remained a great deal more to be done; starting of course at the Rosa in Fiore, and the senator who seemed to have made himself something of a fixture there. Of course, there might also be other tasks awaiting him when he arrived; just because he’d found something to occupy his attention, that didn’t mean that the rest of the world was obligated to stop to allow him to take care of it.
Making his way back into the tunnels, after Claudia had departed to make her own way back to the Rosa, Ezio draped his left arm around little Maria’s shoulders, holding her closer as the pair of them made their way through the flickering darkness of the tunnels. Finding himself wondering just what kind of man Egidio Troche would end up being when he met him, Ezio shook his head to dispel those kinds of musings. There was no point in trying to determine what kind of person you were going to meet before you had actually met them, truly.
Once he and little Maria had made it back into the cool darkness of the Rosa’s basement, Ezio embraced his littlest sister a last time, and then made his way up to meet with Claudia so that the pair of them could begin making plans as to just how they would make use of the senator Egidio Troche to get them to the location of Cesare Borgia’s banker. So that they could finally be rid of the man.
Moving in those gaps that all but the most attentive of people left in their awareness of the world around them, Ezio managed to make it all the way to Claudia without more than the occasional person looking at him in askance. Not a one of them seemed apt to say anything, however, which Ezio was pleased to note. Most people did, after all, take note of someone new in their midst; however, taking interest was often a different matter altogether.
“Claudia, you brought up a senator named Egidio Troche at the meeting we were had earlier; one who owes money to Cesare’s banker,” he said, once the pair of them had managed to break away from the mass of people milling all around them. “Do you know where I might be able to find him?”
“Sí, you’d be most likely to find him on the Campidoglio,” she said, a sly smile spreading across her face as she did so. “Would you like me to send some of my girls to hold your hand?”
“No, but I would like you to give me a description of the man, so I’ll know who to look for,” he said, smirking back. “I’m also going to need your girls to take charge of the Banker’s money, once I’ve dealt with him,” he continued, becoming serious again. “And to get to the Banker, I need to know what this Egidio troche looks like, so that I can follow him to where the Banker might be.”
“I expect you have your own suspicions about who this mysterious banker might be,” Claudia said, and he nodded.
“Sí, but I still need to confirm it, and to do that I’m going to need a description,” he said, discreetly glancing around, just in case there was anyone paying an inordinate amount of attention to the conversation that he and Claudia were presently having.
Chapter 357: Help for the hopeless
Chapter Text
When he’d gotten the description he needed, Ezio had made his way out of the front doors of the Rosa, quickly blending into the crowds outside the building so that no one who might have taken undue notice of his presence within the brothel would have the chance to follow him without revealing themselves in the attempt. Once he’d managed to get out from under the eyes of the crowds, however, Ezio made his way back up onto the rooftops of Roma once more.
Once he’d made it out to the Capitoline Hill, Roma’s center of administration, Ezio found the busy scene that he’d been expecting. Still, in this place of all places, the influence of the Borgia, Cesare in particular, could be seen clearly. It was obvious in the guards that prowled the edges of the milling crowds; in the way that even the senators averted their gaze and tried to scurry out from under the eyes of the Borgia troops; in very livery of the troops: each and every one of them bore the two red bulls quartered with fleurs-de-lis that was Cesare’s personal crest, over and above the mulberry-and-yellow that marked them as Borgia men.
Narrowing his eyes as he caught sight of a group – four of them in all – closing in on a senator that fit the description that Claudia had given him more perfectly than any man that Ezio had seen since he’d begun his search. Making his way back down onto the street once more, being even more careful than usual to land out of sight of the crowds passing into and out of this place, Ezio hurried his stride.
“Your payment’s fallen due,” the sergeant of the guards said, an unpleasant sort of expression on his face. “A debt’s a debt.”
“Please, make an exception for an old man!” Egidio Troche shouted, a tone of obvious pleading to his voice; it seemed that the man was in just as much trouble as Claudia’s descriptions had hinted at. “I beg of you!”
“No,” the sergeant sneered in return, unpleasant expression blossoming into a cruel smile. “The Banker has sent us to collect, and you know what that means!”
Ezio couldn’t have helped but know, after he’d spent so much time in Roma trying to throw off the holds that the Borgia and their Templar masters had established over the city; holds that had only tightened with the ascension of Rodrigo Borgia to the Holy See. Limbering himself up for combat, even as he drove forward mercilessly into the body of the Borgia sergeant threatening Egidio Troche. Not a one of the Borgia guards seemed to notice him before he’d come in among them.
And by then, it was already too late.
Once the last of the four guards attacking the senator had fallen to the ground, and everyone who had been oh-so-carefully ignoring the Borgia guards as they had harassed and then attacked Egidio Troche had fled, Ezio continued on his way over to the side of the man whose life he had just saved.
“A good Samaritan in Roma,” the man commented, as though even he couldn’t believe what he’d just seen. “I thought they were a dying breed.”
“Senator Egidio Troche,” he said by way of greeting, and then winced inwardly as he realized what such a greeting must have sounded like to a man in Senator Troche’s position; the man’s next words confirmed it.
“I don’t owe you money, too, do I?”
“I’m looking for Cesare’s banker,” he said, wishing that he could say something to reassure the frightened man, but knowing that there was too much of a chance that unfriendly ears would catch his words if he spoke them aloud in this time and place.
“Cesare Borgia,” Egidio spate, sounding unimpressed; it was more spine than he’d seen from the man since the pair of them had met, and so Ezio considered it a hopeful sign. “And you are?”
“A friend of the family,” Ezio said, knowing that he would be best served by remaining nameless at this point in time.
Egidio scoffed. “The Cesare has many friends lately, but unfortunately I am not one of them.”
“I can pay,” he said, both because it was true, and because he knew that such a thing would be the most certain way to gain the cooperation of a man in Egidio Troche’s position.
“Ma che merviglia! He fights guards and he gives away money!” Egidio exclaimed. “Where have you been all my life?”
“There’s little time; do you have anywhere to stay?”
“Sí, my brother’s house,” Egidio said, nodding. “They’ve got no quarrel with him. But you’ll have to protect me; the guards will be after me as soon as they realize that those others aren’t coming back. Especially after that demonstration you gave in the piazza.”
“Let’s go, then,” he said, falling into step beside the senator, before the man himself stepped behind him, seemingly so that he would be in a better position to use Ezio as a shield against the attacks that would inevitably be coming their way.
Chapter 358: Paying debts
Chapter Text
With Egidio following in his wake, directing him even as the man used him as a human shield against the guards that came after them once they had begun moving in earnest, Ezio cut down the small group who had attempted to accost them on their way down the wide staircase the pair of them were descending. There were many other people out and about, and so Ezio was forced to take more care while he dispatched them than he’d had to do for some time. Still, the pair of them had soon enough made it to the bottom of the staircase, making their way away from the crowds that had been making their own ways down the stairs alongside them.
“Someone really wants you dead,” he commented, as the pair of them split from the crowds at last.
“Not quite yet,” Egidio said, a grim sort of humor in his tone. “They want me to pay them, first.”
“They intend to kill you after they have your money, then?” he asked, wanting to have as much a handle as he could on the situation he’d gotten himself into.
He’d the briefest thought of calling upon Aeon to aid him in this latest task of his, even feeling for a moment as though the man’s own phantasmal fingers had brushed his left hand, before Ezio thought better of it. Aeon was masterfully powerful, sometimes terrifyingly so, but no one who had seen his capabilities could deny his unearthly nature. The knowledge that Aeon’s presence represented, that of the Apple and the Assassins, was not one that could be allowed to spread too widely.
There was still the chance that the Borgia and their Templar masters would think to send another contingent of their soldiers out to retrieve it, and such was not a thing that he could afford at this time and place.
“It isn’t that simple,” Egidio Troche said, drawing Ezio’s attention back to the present, and all of the dangers inherent therein. “My brother Francesco, who happens to be Cesare’s chamberlain – I know, I know, don’t get me started,” the senator said, clearly having had the same kind of discussion with those outside his circle, or else with himself. “Anyway, he told me a great deal about Cesare’s ambitions for Romagna. So, seeing that Romagna is nearly on the doorstep of Venezia herself, I sent letters warning him of Cesare’s ambitions and what I’ve been able to learn about the man’s future plans. One of my letters must have been intercepted,” Egidio sighed gustily as the pair of them continued on their way.
“Won’t that kind of thing implicate your brother?” he asked, pleased in a way to have met someone else who was willing to stand against the Borgia, but also knowing the kind of man they were dealing with.
Cesare Borgia was the kind of man who could wipe out entire families, simply because a single member displeased him.
“He’s managed to keep himself in the clear for the time being, though I admit its put something of a strain on our relationship,” Egidio laughed, though there was a bittersweet tinge to his mirth. “Truly, he’s had to all but formally disown me, in the wake of this mess.”
“Why did you do it, then?” he asked, already knowing that he’d found an ally in the man walking on his left but slightly behind, but wishing to take the full measure of the senator while he had the chance.
“I had to do something,” Egidio burst out, stamping the cobbled ground as the pair of them continued on their way to whatever place the senator had found to hide himself so that he could wait for the Borgia to lose interest in him, or else to be distracted by another matter. “The Senate has no true power in Roma anymore, the Borgia have taken every last scrap of it. Do you know what it’s like, not having un cazzo to do? It changes a man. I admit that even I’ve taken to gambling, drinking-”
“And whoring,” Ezio finished for the man, remembering with some amusement the way he’d first found himself put on the trail of the senator named Egidio Troche; he still had hopes of using the man’s connection to the Borgia banker in order to deprive Cesare of one more thing that the man could and would use as one more means of oppressing those unfortunate enough to find themselves under his heel.
“Oh, you’re good,” the senator said, and this time his chuckle was far more amused than bittersweet. “Was it the scent of perfume on my sleeve?”
“Something like that,” he said, smiling as the pair of them pressed onward through the streets of Roma.
He was forced to cut down more than a few knots of guards on his way to Francisco Troche’s palazzo, and at times he and the senator were forced to conceal themselves from stalkers as they prowled the streets, clearly on the trail of the reward that the Borgia were offering for his head.
“Anyway, the senate used to petition about real issues, like unlawful cruelty, abandoned children, street crime, lending rates – trying to keep at least some kind of rein on Agostino Chigi, you understand – now we draw up legislation on the appropriate width of women’s sleeves.”
“But not you,” he returned, giving the man a rather sardonic smile. “You raise money for false causes to pay off your gambling debts.”
“False causes,” the man scoffed in return. “As soon as the senate in Roma is restored, and as soon as I have the means, I mean to pursue each and every one of them vigorously.”
“How long do you think that will take?” he asked, beginning to feel morose once again, as he contemplated the struggle ahead of them all.
Even when they were able to throw off the yoke of the Borgia, their fight with the Templars seemed set to be eternal.
“We must be patient,” Egidio said, sounding a bit like he was speaking to himself just as much as he was Ezio. “Tyranny is indeed unbearable, but it never lasts; far too brittle to withstand the weight of years.”
“Sí, but it always seems as though a new tyrant springs up, just when you think you’ve dealt with the old one,” he said, allowing himself to be a bit more open with the man; it truly was beginning to seem as though the pair of them shared many of the same ideals, though naturally they came at them from different standpoints.
“Well, of course you’ve got to stand up against it. Whatever else happens; and sometimes, if you find someone you can do a kindness for, you take that chance,” Egidio said, smiling in a way that wouldn’t allow Ezio to mistake what he was truly talking about. “Still, I’m what, ten or fifteen years older than you?”
“Something like that,” he said, feeling lighter than he had since the beginning of this particular conversation.
“That’s why I must make the most of the time I still have here,” Egidio said, and there was a certain melancholy to his tone as he did. “I don’t suppose you’ve ever looked at a grave and thought ‘this is the most significant thing I will ever do’ eh.”
Reaching out, Ezio wrapped his left arm around Egidio’s shoulders as the pair of them continued on their way to the building that seemed to be their destination.
“No, I don’t suppose a man like you would find himself falling prey to those kinds of thoughts,” Egidio said, leaning into him for a long moment, before the pair of them continued on their way up to the ornate gateway that now stood before them. “Maledetto letters! I should have never sent them to the ambassador, now Cesare will murder me!”
“I’ve the feeling that the Borgia will soon find their attention taken up by other matters,” he said, smiling briefly before returning his attention to the matters at hand. “However, we truly should return to business.”
“Sí, you mentioned something about a banker?”
“Cesare’s banker in particular, sí,” he said, pleased to note that the senator had been paying attention to what he’d been saying when the pair of them had first met. “Specifically, I wish to know where the man works, where he lives, and most of all who he is.”
“Right, so then I’ll need to arrive at the meeting with the money,” Egidio said, with a sickly sort of laugh. “Problem is, there is no money.”
“I told you, I’ll take care of that,” he said, giving the fretful man a reassuring smile. “Just tell me how much it is, and where you’re meeting with the Banker.”
“I never know until I’m actually there; I usually go to one of three prearranged places, and then his associates bring me to the meeting place.”
“Bene,” he said, nodding. “How much is it that you owe the Banker?” Egidio told him. “That won’t be a problem.”
“Sul serio?” the senator exclaim, having clearly expected to be turned away when he’d made apparent the depths of his current desperation. “You really have to stop doing this. You might actually give me hope!”
“Wait here,” he said, giving the senator another reassuring smile, even as he turned to make his way back to the Rosa once more. “I’ll return with the money at sunset.”
Egidio seemed entirely too flummoxed to answer him, even as he bid the senator farewell and made his way back up onto the rooftops of Roma once more.
Chapter 359: Ambushed ambassadors
Chapter Text
Sighing as he found himself once more in the place where an Assassin could truly be said to be at his best, Ezio turned his path back to the Rosa in Fiore once more. Not only did he currently need the rest, since even with the clear disparity between the skills he possessed and that of the guards who had been sent after him so many times that he’d stopped counting after the first few groups he’d been forced to cut his way through them, being buried under the weight of what had felt at times like every guard that had been stationed in Roma as a whole had taken its inevitable toll.
~AC: Bro~
Making her way up through the basement of the Rosa in Fiore, Maria still found herself by turns amused and annoyed at the young man who’d thrown in his lot with the Assassin of Roma just as soon as he’d laid eyes on her. Primo Penna had been his name, and while he was fairly skilled as a brawler and a knife-fighter both, the man was clearly far more interested in pursuing some kind of romance with her than in honing what skill he had possessed so that he could give his all in the service of the Brotherhood.
Honestly, Maria had never given much thought to romance on the whole; there had been few enough people in her life who could look past her odd appearance, and most of those had been family, or close enough that such a distinction was all but meaningless. As well, since she’d joined up with the Brotherhood in earnest, Maria had found herself with less and less time to spend on anything but the business of her brother and sister Assassins.
She supposed that Penna was a pleasant enough sort, though his fumbling advances reminded her so much of Ezio when he was younger and trying to court Christina Vespucci that it was all Maria could do not to burst out laughing at times. She knew that doing that kind of thing could only be taken the wrong way, so Maria tried to hold herself back whenever she could. She could only hope that he would grow up in the same way that her fumbling brother had, or things were going to be rather awkward while she and Ezio were working to bring Roma out from under the heel of the Borgia.
Spotting Mother just as she finished speaking with Claudia, Maria made her way over to the older woman; she’d been doing more than a bit of work for the Rosa, what with Ezio taking up more and more responsibilities for the Brotherhood from Uncle Mario, and it seemed that the older woman had even more for her to do. It also seemed as though Ezio had made it back to the Rosa after his own errand.
“Ezio!” she called, making her way through the thinning crowd in this area of the Rosa, smiling all the wider as her last brother.
“Sorellina, it’s wonderful to see you again,” he said, as the pair of them embraced for a long moment.
“I’m glad to see that the pair of you are getting along so well,” Mother said, calling their attention back to her where she was standing. “And I have heard from the girls that both of you have been doing good work in order to secure the loyalty of those that still reside here. However, I have also received word that ambassadors from the Spanish King and German Emperor have been dispatched in the hopes of gaining Cesare’s favor. Make sure they have no hope, my daughter.”
“Sí, Madre,” she said, smiling as she turned to make her way back out of the Rosa once more.
She’d need to speak to some of the courtesans in the area, to get a general idea of where the ambassadors might have begun their search.
~AC: Bro~
As he watched little Maria make her way back out of the brothel where she, Claudia, and Mother were all staying in while they did their own parts to break the hold that the Borgia still maintained over Roma and all of her people, Ezio smiled. It was good to see that the rest of his family was doing so well, even in spite of all the upheavals that they had been forced to endure for the legacy that each and every one of them was a part of.
“Ezio, you were telling me about your dealings with the senator?” Mother prompted, smiling even as she drew his attention firmly back to the present once more.
“Sí,” he said, nodding. “It seems that, while the senator does indeed owe Cesare and his underlings a great deal of money, he seems to be a great deal more interested in aiding the people of Roma than I previously suspected.”
“That is good,” Mother said, her smile becoming more satisfied as he informed her of just what it was that he had learned during the course of his work. “Now, as to the money that the senator owes, I will collect it for you. Meanwhile, if you would be willing to give some aid to little Maria, I think she would enjoy that.”
“Sí, when I can spare the time, between finding the remaining machines that Leonardo was forced to create by the Borgia,” he said, knowing that little Maria could handle that kind of thing on her own; he couldn’t help but know, after everything that the pair of them had been able to accomplish together.
“Sí, those terrible devices,” Mother said, folding her arms; Ezio caught the slight shudder up the length of her frame that she seemed to have been attempting to conceal. “Continue to make sure that the Borgia get no use out of them, of course; I’d no intention of dissuading you from your hunt, my, son, all that I ask is that you give your aid to the courtesans when you find the time.”
“I will,” he said, nodding as he turned to leave the Rosa after making his report.
As luck would have it, Ezio found himself met by one of the many courtesans on his way out of the Rosa. It seemed that she was having her own troubles with the ambassadors who had come to Roma. From her own words, it seemed as though as though the loyalty that she held to the people who lived and worked in the Rosa had made her a target for those kinds of men. And so, it fell to Ezio to deal with them.
Once he’d managed to get rid of the man hassling her, the courtesan hugged him in thanks, saying that her faith in him and the rest of his family had been restored, and renewing her pledge of loyalty once again.
Chapter 360: Heavy armor
Chapter Text
Feeling somewhat lighter as he returned to his search for the remaining war machines that Leonardo had marked off on the map that he’d been working off of ever since his old friend had handed it over with the request that he see to the destruction of those terrible machines, Ezio made his way back up to the rooftops once more. Looking out and down, in order to see just how that he might be able to evade the thickening swarms of guards that he could see gathering around the indicated fortress.
Once he’d managed to spot a likely path inside, Ezio leaped lightly back down to the ground, moving in what concealment he could find, until he’d managed to make it inside the walls and was able to take cover in a darkened warehouse to catch his breath for a long moment.
He’d heard talk of a pair of soldiers who had been captured, enemies of the Borgia who were set to be executed as soon as Cesare could set up a show trial and the “proper” implements, and so Ezio had resolved himself to rescue them, as well as seeing to the destruction of the war machine that Leonardo had been forced to create by the Borgia and their lackeys. Making his way deeper into the fortress, Ezio searched for the makeshift prison that he’d heard described – though not in detail, of course, since the men he’d overheard had been talking to those who were already aware of the makeup of this fortress – and had soon managed to find his way to the cage where the soldiers had been imprisoned.
“Grazie, Assassino,” the first of the two men who had managed to spot him said, waving Ezio over in a frantic sort of fashion.
“Nessun problema,” he said, nodding to the pair of them as he stepped out of their way so they could make their way out of the cage. “No one should have to remain in the hands of the Borgia.”
“Sí, and you’re going to need us to take charge of that monstrosity the Borgia dogs have been cobbling together,” the first man laughed, folding strong arms across his barrel chest. “I’m Ricardo, and this is my friend Lorenzo. He doesn’t talk much, but he’s the best cannoneer I’ve ever worked with.”
“Bene, I’m going to need the both of you if I’m to deal with that machine,” he said, reaching out to briefly clasp hands with both of the men in turn. “Though I doubt we’ll be able to get out as quietly as I made it inside,” he said, smiling wryly at the pair of soldiers who had thrown in their lot with him.
“So we’d best be prepared for a fight, then, vero?” Ricardo asked, with a sharp guffaw. “Bene, I’ve been looking for some revenge on these dogs since they first got the drop on us.”
“I suppose you’ll have your chance then,” he said, grinning back.
As the three of them made their way back out of the makeshift prison area, in search of the war machine that Leonardo had been forced to build, Ezio found himself once again considering the merits of unleashing Aeon upon the unsuspecting Borgia dogs staffing this place. It would have driven them into a rout faster than anything that he and the two men he was escorting could manage to do, and there would likely be little risk of any of those present escaping to warn the Borgia of what he’d done. Still, there was also the involvement of the two soldiers to consider; man who had only the most cursory of knowledge about the Assassins and what they fought for.
Besides, there was still the matter of the Apple itself to consider; for all that Aeon seemed to have tamed it, the same could not be said for any of the others that were purported to exist, and the Apple remained a dangerous artifact. He could ill afford to allow knowledge of the Apple to spread to those who might misuse it. Not that he thought that the two men aiding him in his present search would do any such thing, but he’d no way of knowing the character of those they knew, or of those they might speak to.
Continuing on his way, Ezio found himself feeling the brush of Aeon’s phantasmal fingers against his left wrist; Ezio imagined that the man in black was wishing him luck in this latest endeavor of his; it was a pleasant thought, though he’d no real way of knowing if it were true, since Aeon was a man who kept his own council.
When he, Ricardo, and Lorenzo all managed to make it to the location of the war machine that Leonardo had been pressed into creating by the Borgia and all of their dogs, Ezio found himself wondering at just what in the hell he was even looking at. Whatever else it was, the war machine he was facing was a squat, unattractive-looking thing. He could hardly see what such an ungainly-looking thing could do, but there had to be a reason for Cesare to have ordered Leonardo to design such a device for him.
“This was to be the centerpiece of Cesare’s forces,” Ricardo said, spitting to the side at the mention of the Borgia’s name; Ezio could fully understand the sentiment. “He’s already been making plans for a surprise assault on Sicilia.”
“We will stop the attack,” he assured the pair of them.
Chapter 361: Rolling thunder
Chapter Text
Making his way over to the sloped side of Leonardo’s machine that sat nearest to him, Ezio shook his head.
“No instructions,” he groused, shaking his head. “Of course. Come on,” he called over.
Once Ricardo and Lorenzo had climbed into the war machine alongside him, Ezio set the war machine into motion. It lurched in almost the same kind of way that he remembered the towed gun that he’d dealt with some time ago, but it seemed to move more smoothly than any other vehicle that he’d made use of before. It was strange, but that was the way things seemed to be.
Blasting his way out of the warehouse where the war machine looked to have been built, Ezio braced himself against the rattling and shaking as he ran over the remains of the wall that had previously been standing in front of him. Directing Lorenzo to keep up a steady barrage of cannon fire, keeping their path clear of any of the Borgia’s dogs who might have taken it into their heads to try stopping them, he and Ricardo directed the war machine to every corner of the fortress where it had been created, stored, and likely intended to be maintained. Lorenzo obliged them by saturating the entire fortress in cannon fire, crumbling the walls and shattering the buildings that they encountered into rubble.
Ezio, for his part, found himself rather forcefully reminded of Aeon; like the man in black, this machine would be a terrifying thing for anyone on the opposing side of whoever possessed it to confront, and like Aeon it seemed almost too dangerous a thing to exist. However, quite unlike their mysterious man in black, this war machine could hardly decide for itself just when and where its deadly armaments were best put to use. That was why, no matter how he wished that he could have kept such a device for the Brotherhood’s use, Ezio knew that such a thing would not be possible under any but the most forgiving of circumstances.
And these could hardly be called forgiving at all.
“We are crippling Cesare’s army!” Ricardo whooped, drawing Ezio’s attention firmly back from where it had wandered.
“Sí, we are,” he said, once he’d had a chance to observe the smoldering rubble that was all that remained of the fortress that he’d infiltrated not so very long ago.
“Oho, it seems that some of these dogs think they can bite!” Ricardo said, laughing derisively as the large form of a covered battering-ram – complete with a carven head that resembled nothing more than the rampant bull on the Borgia’s crest – loomed up out of the thick, billowing smoke all around them.
“Sí, it would seem as though they want a battle,” Ezio said, narrowing his eyes.
He couldn’t find it in himself to be so sanguine as Ricardo, since he’d faced down more than his share of Borgia soldiers in his time and knew that a mob could do a great deal of damage if they could be herded close enough together, but given the sheer speed of the war machine that the three of them were manning, in contrast to the way that those behind the Borgia battering-ram were forced to drive it forward through sheer strength alone… He could not have honestly said that he had no confidence in what they were about to do.
Lorenzo unleashed a withering barrage at his command, and Ezio let out a long breath when he saw the damage that had been done to the battering-ram standing before them.
Ricardo, on the other hand, laughed wildly. “Look at that; look at that! Magnifico! It’s a good thing we aren’t leaving this beauty in the hands of that Borgia bastardo!”
“Sí, a very good thing,” he said, nodding as he watched Lorenzo’s shots steadily chipping away at the armor of the battering-ram still trying in vain to stand against them.
Driving over the shattered remnants of the battering-ram, Ezio ruthlessly suppressed a shudder; truly, this war machine that he’d commandeered did remind him entirely too much of Aeon. Like him, it was an all but unstoppable force in battle, and those who had been set against it would have been best served to abandon their pride and run for their lives. Still, as before one simple fact remained: Aeon was capable of making the choice as to just what use he would put his fantastically terrifying abilities to. This machine was in no way capable of such a thing.
Best that it be destroyed here, as well.
When he brought up his reasoning to Ricardo and Lorenzo, the cannoneer simply nodded, looking back at the war machine that the three of them had just finished climbing up and out of with an unreadable expression on his face.
“Sí, I suppose that wishing to take it back with us was just a happy thought,” Ricardo said, chuckling as the three of them faced the machine that they had been riding in not such a long time ago.
“If the pair of you have somewhere else you’d like to be, I’m certain I could finish things here on my own,” he said, turning back to Ricardo and Lorenzo from his own study of the machine.
“Bene, we truly should get back to the rest of our people,” Ricardo said, grinning widely as he clapped Ezio’s right shoulder and then turned to leave alongside Lorenzo.
Returning his own attention to the machine he had set himself to destroy – for all that he wished there had been a way to keep it; one that wouldn’t run the risk of the Borgia laying claim to it once more – Ezio looked around for something that he could use to finish the task. When his gaze fell on one of the remaining cannons that had been spared the rampage of Leonardo’s war machine, Ezio smiled grimly. Making his way up to the top of the tower, Ezio took aim at the war machine.
I truly do wish I could keep you, he mused, even as he loaded the cannon and fired at the munitions storage he’d seen when he, Ricardo, and Lorenzo had been using that very war machine to devastate the forces that Cesare Borgia had set to guard this place. The resulting explosion was rather more spectacular than even the ones he’d seen when the war machine had fired the cannons that had been placed all along the machine’s middle. After taking the time to sabotage the cannon that he’d just been using – no sense in allowing the Borgia to use it against anyone else – Ezio made his way back out of the fortress.
There were other things he needed to do today, after all.
Chapter 362: Shadow hunter
Chapter Text
After making his way back into Roma proper once more, Ezio turned his path toward the house where Egidio Troche was hiding from the Borgia thugs who would have otherwise been pursuing him. The sun was already beginning to sink westward, and even though there was a part of him that wished to see how Mother, little Maria, and Claudia were all doing back at the Rosa, he knew that the only time he would have to make a stop would be at the nearby bank where he had arranged to have the money that had been gathered for the senator to pay off his debts to the Borgia be deposited.
A quick stop-off at said bank, providing the verification of his identity that had been agreed upon beforehand, saw Ezio leaving with the pair of heavy leather bags containing said money. He also managed to catch a glimpse of little Maria as she made her own way across Roma’s rooftops, leaving him to wonder for a long moment just what his littlest sister was doing. Still, in the end he had his own task, just as little Maria did, and knew that the sooner he got back to it the better.
Finding himself looking down upon the senator’s current safehouse at last, Ezio checked to make certain that he wasn’t being observed or followed, and made his way back down to the streets once more. Finding a way over the wall that served as at least some form of defense for the safehouse that the senator had ensconced himself in, Ezio made his way up to the front door.
“Dio mio, you came back!” the senator exclaimed. “You actually came back!”
“You waited,” he pointed out, smiling gently in an effort to reassure the man of his good intentions; suddenly appearing before someone when they were trying to take shelter from those who wished to kill them was not a thing that was likely to make someone like Egidio Troche feel better.
“I am a desperate man,” Egidio said, a hysterical note to his voice, as he looked from Ezio’s face to the bags in his hands almost convulsively. “I still cannot believe that you would just… do this.”
“There is a condition,” he said, as he packed the bags away in the ornate chest that had been set down for seemingly just this sort of an occasion.
It seemed that the senator was either more optimistic than he wanted to admit, or else he was just the kind of man who scrupulously prepared for everything that might come up.
“I knew it!” Egidio exclaimed, throwing his arms up.
Ezio firmly resisted the urge to shake his head in exasperation; truly, the man was more than a bit of a trial. “If you survive this, which I truly hope you do, I want you to keep an eye on what’s going on politically in Roma. I also wish for you to report your findings to Madonna Maria at the Rosa in Fiore. Particularly anything you learn about what the Borgia have been getting up to of late. Do you know the place?” he asked, managing to keep all but the slightest of sardonic tones out of his voice.
“I,” Egidio coughed, in that way people did when they were attempting to cover for one indiscretion or other. “I have a friend who sometimes frequents the place.”
“Bene,” he said, disguising a laugh as a cough of his own.
“What do you plan to do with this information, eh?” Egidio asked, still seeming more than a little shaken from everything that had gone on. “Make the Borgia disappear?”
“Something like that,” he said, allowing himself a small, secretive smile.
“I hate to give this to them,” Egidio said, looking down at the chest that Ezio had just finished packing, closing it even as he said those words. “My brother has been watching my back, even from so far away. We may have our differences, but he’s still family.”
“He works for Cesare,” Ezio reminded him; as though he needed it, given the look on his face.
“Sí, and that makes things difficult,” Egidio said, nodding as seemed to pull himself together. “Va bene, they sent me word of the meeting place. This afternoon, in fact, while you were off,” he glanced back towards the chest, a small, grateful smile curling his lips for the briefest of moments. “They’re impatient for their money, so the meeting’s been set for tonight. I have to tell you, I was sweating blood when I told their messenger that I had the money they’d,” Egidio laughed, though it was a sickly sort of sound. “I should be going soon. What will you do? Will you be following me?”
“Sí, but it would be best if I remained out of sight,” he said, and here was a situation that he could use Aeon’s help in, without the presence of the man in black sending people into a panic, or else revealing more than he wished to be known.
Making his way back up to the rooftops, after clearing the wall that stood before him, Ezio reflected semi-amusedly upon the offer that Egidio had made to him. Having a bit of wine with someone he knew was not something that Ezio would have usually objected to, but he’d had the distinct feeling – reinforced by the look on the man’s face and nearly everything about his present manner – that Egidio was trying to fortify himself for what he thought was to come. Not something Ezio felt the need to do.
Both since he was going to ensure that what Egidio feared was not going to happen, and because he was going to ask for Aeon’s assistance in this matter; truly, at times it seemed as though there was nothing the man in black couldn’t do.
Removing the Apple that Aeon resided in from the secret pocket within his robes where he kept it, Ezio smiled softly as the familiar light began shining out of the seams of the artifact. Soon enough, Aeon’s familiar form emerged once more from that light, standing before him once more.
“I trust you’ve been keeping abreast of my conversation with the senator,” he said, smiling softly as Aeon pushed his hood back and spilled free his waterfall of silver hair.
“Yes, but I am curious as to why you did not enlist my aid in dealing with that machine that Leonardo was forced to create,” Aeon said, a curious expression on his dusky-skinned face.
“I didn’t want to risk more of the Borgia finding out about you, amico,” he said, reaching out to clasp Aeon’s right shoulder in a firm, comradely grip. “With every appearance you make, there’s always the chance that one of them might see a way to control you – or at least the Apple you’ve taken shelter in – for their own purposes.”
“You’re concerned? For my sake?”
The mild confusion that he could see in Aeon’s yellow eyes struck right to Ezio’s heart; he might not have known the man’s past circumstances, but here and now Aeon was someone that Ezio was fully willing to call a friend. “Ma certo, amico,” he said, smiling widely in an effort to comfort the man. “You may not be able to participate in every facet of our struggle, but you are a part of it, all the same. I’m more than pleased to call you a friend, Aeon.”
“Thank you,” the man in black said, covering Ezio’s right hand with his own.
It was strange, Ezio reflected, how a man with no true presence in the world could feel so real; right down to the leather of his gloved hand, black as the rest of his garb.
“There was some reason you called me out,” Aeon prompted, after a moment seemingly spent in contemplation of what Ezio had just told him.
“Sí, I’m going to be following the senator I was just speaking to, and I wish to have your aid in disguising myself from the Borgia when he meets with them,” Ezio explained, nodding.
“In the same manner that we were able to escape from that fortress?” Aeon asked, Ezio nodded once more. “Very well, then.”
The familiar tingle of the Apple’s power washing over him brought a small smile to Ezio’s face, and as he descended back down into the streets of Roma in the guise of someone that the Borgia thugs would have no true choice but to overlook, Ezio turned with some surprise when he saw the bright light of Aeon’s form emerging once more beside him. He was about to ask the man in black just what he was about, but after the light had cleared, he realized that such an appellation was not applicable for the moment.
Indeed, Aeon now wore a white surcoat over silvery armor of some kind that Ezio couldn’t quite place the origin of, with what seemed to be – of all things – a purple cravat around his neck. All in all, Ezio thought the outfit rather outlandish.
“If you truly wished to accompany me, amico, you could have chosen a less conspicuous appearance,” he said, leaning in close so that the pair of them could speak in more privacy without drawing too much attention to themselves.
About the only thing that Ezio couldn’t find it in himself to criticize was Aeon’s seeming adoption of a younger face; his own, to be sure, but there was no question in Ezio’s mind that this was Aeon at a somewhat earlier point in his life. For one thing, Aeon’s waterfall of silver hair was a great deal shorter and more orderly, with only wispy fringes to frame his far-more youthful face. His eyes were the most different thing about the man, even considering all of Aeon’s other changes: instead of the bright yellow that they had always been, they had become a dark, brownish amber, with only hints of the color that distinguished Aeon and all of the other Guardians from those who had not been marked by the Pieces of Eden.
“My appearance surprises you?” Aeon asked, raising a silvery eyebrow in response.
“Unless you have another way to keep unfriendly eyes from falling on us, I would suggest you go back to the Apple, sí,” he said, sweeping his gaze over their surroundings as he and Aeon continued on their way in the wake of the Borgia thugs that had taken charge of Egidio.
“It won’t be a problem,” Aeon said, his tone having lost none of its usual certainty.
“Bene, I’ll trust you know what you’re doing, then,” he said, trying to keep the uncertainty he did feel from seeping into his tone as he spoke.
There were a great deal of things that could go wrong when one was tailing even common thugs like the Borgia guards that he and Aeon were following in the wake of, not the least being that they could be found out by the very ones whose notice they were trying so hard to avoid. He hoped that such a thing wasn’t going to be a risk that he and Aeon were running, considering the man’s presence and current appearance, but Ezio knew that Aeon could more than likely get them out of any situation his presence got them into. Still, he had to admit to at least some trepidation.
Finding himself slightly surprised as he and Aeon tailed the Borgia thugs closer and closer to the Tiber River, Ezio found himself with an odd sense of nostalgia. He might not have lived in this place for as long as he’d lived in Firenze – or even as long as he’d spent in Toscana with Uncle Mario – but it, too, was beginning to feel like a place he could call home. Aeon glanced over at him, a distinct curiosity in the man’s changed eyes, but he subsided when Ezio shook his head slightly.
This was hardly a time for idle chatter, after all.
Following Egidio and the Borgia thugs accompanying him to a square courtyard bordered by large, elegant houses on two sides – with the third bordered by shops that clearly catered toward Roma’s richer citizens – he signaled to Aeon and the pair of them took up a position under a cedar tree within sight of the stone bench where Egidio had seated himself. Ezio had to admire the man’s poise, for all that he’d needed what seemed to be more than a few glasses of wine to maintain it; it was also admittedly useful to the pair of them, since any signs of undue apprehension on the senator’s part may very well have alerted the Borgia that there was more to this situation than it had first appeared.
Settling himself as well as he could – truly, Ezio found himself admiring Aeon’s poise at the moment, as well, though the man had always seemed to be so composed – Ezio leaned against the cedar tree and watched for anyone else who might be coming. His patience was soon rewarded with the appearance of other men who clearly worked for the Borgia.
“Egidio,” snapped the foremost of them, an unpleasant tone to his voice. “It seems you are ready to die like a gentleman.”
“That’s a very unkind thing to say, Capitano, considering I have the money,” Egidio said, and Ezio smiled slightly as he realized that the senator was still trying to aid him, in spite of the fact that he couldn’t have known where he and Aeon were.
Or that Aeon was present at all, for that matter.
“Well, that makes all the difference, then,” the Borgia captain said, his tone becoming more subdued; though no more friendly, Ezio noted. He had the distinct feeling that at least his own skills, if not those of Aeon directly, would soon need to be put to use. “The Banker will be pleased to see this. Did you come alone?”
“Do you see anyone else here?” Egidio asked, and Ezio could see him spreading his hands as though to make the point; he bit back a chuckle.
“Just follow me, furbacchione,” the Borgia captain said, sounding supremely unimpressed.
Signaling for Aeon to follow him as the Borgia group following Egidio turned to retrace their steps back the way they had come, Ezio made sure that the pair of them were close enough to still be within earshot while not allowing the Borgia thugs to see them clearly. He wasn’t so worried about himself in particular, but for all Aeon’s confidence in his own disguise, Ezio didn’t know if he trusted it against the Borgia and those who might have still been on their side.
“Is there any news of my brother, Capitano?” Egidio asked, seemingly less for Ezio’s benefit than his own; Ezio could easily forgive him for such a thing, since he would have worried for anyone who remained in the presence of Cesare Borgia.
To say nothing of a member of his own family who had been forced by whatever unfortunate circumstances to do such.
“Cesare is going to interview him when he returns from Romagna,” the captain said, an unpleasant smile clear in his tone.
“I hope he’ll be all right,” Egidio said, and Ezio wished the both of them well, though he doubted that he himself would be able to truly do anything.
Aeon likely would, but that was a thought for later.
“If he has nothing to hide, then he has nothing to fear,” the Borgia captain said, as though things were that simple when dealing with a cruel-minded madman like Cesare Borgia.
Sighing, Ezio firmly restrained himself from shaking his head, instead focusing on the path that their group had taken. At the Church of Santa Maria sopra Minerva they turned north, making for the Pantheon, and Ezio found himself wondering if that would be their ultimate destination, or if it would be simply another stopover. He hoped for the latter, of course, considering that he didn’t wish to spend all day following in the footsteps of the Borgia and their hirelings.
“What will happen to my money?” Egidio asked, and Ezio realized that the man was pumping the Borgia captain as a service to him, even though he’d no real way of knowing if he were alone or not.
It was well done, Ezio had to say, and he was grateful for the kind of consideration that such a thing demonstrated.
“Your money?” the captain echoed, snickering unkindly. “I hope, for your sake, that all the interest you owe him is there.”
“It is,” Egidio said, sounding distinctly more subdued. “Every last ducat.”
“It had better be.”
“It is, it is,” Egidio said hurriedly, and Ezio saw him raising both hands in a placating gesture.
“Bene,” the Borgia captain said, his tone sounding only slightly more friendly than it had before. “The Banker likes to treat his friends well.”
“How generous he is,” Egidio said, and Ezio winced at the thread of sarcasm that even he could hear, so far back as he and Aeon were following behind their group.
The captain, not being deaf or stupid, heard it plainly, as well. “What was that?” the man demanded, turning back to Egidio.
“Nothing,” the senator said, sounding meek and cowed once again; Ezio was beginning to wonder just how much of that was an act, when all was said and done.
They had soon reached the massive, imposing bulk of the Pantheon – originally built as a place of worship for the Roman gods, but consecrated as a church some time ago – and Ezio signaled for Aeon to stop, even as he saw the group of Borgia thugs doing the same. Narrowing his eyes as he saw the three men who had presumably been waiting for the arrival of the group he and Aeon had been tailing for what felt like such a long time, Ezio found his gaze almost naturally drawn to the man in the center.
He was slightly larger than his two companions, and the armor that he was wearing seemed to mark him as some kind of important functionary of one sort or another.
“Luigi!” Egidio called, loudly enough that Ezio had the distinct feeling that he was the one the words were meant for; it was truly beginning to seem as though most people underestimated Egidio Troche. It also seemed to be something that the senator himself encouraged, however, so while Ezio would take care not to be taken in by such an impression himself, he wouldn’t go spoiling the senator’s carefully-crafted façade. “Luigi Torcelli! It’s good to see you again. Still the Banker’s man, I see. I thought you would have been promoted again by now; maybe gotten that desk job you’d always told me you’d been dreading.”
“Shut up,” said Torcelli, sounding distinctly unimpressed.
“He’s got the money,” the Borgia captain pointed out.
“Well, that’s different, then,” Torcelli said, tone becoming lighter, though his demeanor was no less unfriendly than before. “My master will certainly be pleased to hear it; he’s got a special party planned for this evening, so I’ll be delivering this to his palazzo personally. Give it! I need to make sure it’s all here; I’ll count it out, myself.”
Egidio was understandably reluctant to part with such a large sum of money, particularly when he’d heard just what it was to be spent on, but the pair of Borgia guards standing to either side of him raised their halberds and that was the end of that.
“Come, we need to get inside,” Ezio said, turning his attention back to Aeon, as Egidio tried to keep the attention of the guards upon him, even though there was no real way for him to know just how close his allies truly were.
Or that he had more than one of them, for that matter.
“Of course,” Aeon said, nodding as the pair of them began to make their own way into the Pantheon.
Sure enough, the disguise that Aeon had provided for him kept the eyes of the Borgia thugs from falling upon him in any but the most fleeting of manners, and Ezio found himself able to relax quite a bit more than he previously had been. He also noticed that, for all his strange attire, none of those present seemed to give Aeon more than a single glance, either. Something else to be thankful for, even if he did find it rather strange; still, the man’s ability to make all eyes turn away from him in what seemed to be an incredibly subtle sort of fashion was indeed a useful thing.
For all that Ezio still found himself wondering just how in all the world Aeon managed such a thing.
When the pair of them reached the center of the Pantheon, where Luigi Torcelli was engaged in the laborious task of counting out each and every one of the ducats that Ezio himself had given to the man when he’d requested the assistance of the Assassins – informally and unknowingly as such a thing had been done, true – Ezio narrowed his eyes in contemplation as Aeon stopped beside him.
“What is it?” the mysterious man asked, in a voice that was clearly for his ears alone.
“I need to get that chest, and I need to get rid of Luigi at the same time,” he said, keeping his voice just as low as Aeon’s own; it wouldn’t do for either of them to be detected, even at this late stage when there was little that anyone could do to stop them. “Wait here for me, sí?”
“Very well,” Aeon said, inclining his head slightly as he folded his arms behind his back and settled in to watch what Ezio was going to do next.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, nodding back at the man as his changed eyes followed Ezio’s movements easily.
After he’d dealt with Luigi, who had obviously thought him some kind of a thief, and just as obviously hadn’t been as loyal to Cesare’s banker as the man had clearly thought him to be, Ezio turned and made his way back to where Aeon had been waiting for him, pulling on the armor that he’d appropriated from Luigi’s corpse as he did so.
“You patience is rewarded, amico,” he said, smiling brightly at Aeon even as he placed the helmet that Luigi had once been wearing upon his own head.
“So it would seem,” the man said, nodding to him. “Would you prefer that I returned to the Apple, or may I come with you on this latest errand of yours?”
“You’re certain that you’ll be able to keep anyone from noticing you while we travel?” he asked; because while it was one thing to keep the gaze of milling crowds from falling upon the pair of them by chance, it would be quite a different matter to keep such suspicion from forming among a group that had been specifically trained – even if it had been by the Borgia – to ferret out spies from among their number.
“As I’ve said before, it won’t be a problem,” Aeon said, his tone having lost none of its surety.
“If you insist,” he said, feeling slightly dubious about the whole situation, but not wishing to offend Aeon by arguing about it.
Chapter 363: Man on the inside
Chapter Text
When he’d made his way back in among the crowd of soldiers who he and Aeon had tailed for such a long time, however, Ezio found that they didn’t seem to notice Aeon’s presence at all. It was a strange thing, and he wished for a moment that he could have asked the mysterious man how he was managing such a thing as the feat that Ezio found himself bearing witness to as their group traveled onward, but he had more than enough to concentrate on at the moment. The guards he and Aeon had met up with, seeing as they thought that he was Luigi and hence knew the way to the Banker’s palazzo, had quickly fallen in behind him.
Biting back a sigh, Ezio began making his way toward Roma’s financial district. He knew that such a place would be the most probable place that he would be able to find the palazzo of the banker whose services Cesare had made use of, and it was where Agostino Chigi made his own home, besides. Listening carefully to the reactions of the men that he was leading, Ezio allowed himself to relax just slightly when he heard the approval in their tones when he took the right path.
Catching Aeon’s eye briefly, in a subtle way that made it appear as though he was merely scanning the crowds all around them for those who might have attempted to hinder their progress or else to steal the chest that he was carrying, Ezio saw the mysterious man smile, just the slightest bit.
When their group finally managed to make it to the gates of the ornate – really, one really had to say opulent – palazzo where Cesare’s banker lived and worked, Ezio pursed his lips slightly as he found himself looking up into the vast crowds milling about around the grounds of the palazzo. There were, of course, more guards standing before them, at the top of the steps that their group was making for. It seemed that they were expected; only natural, Ezio supposed, but troublesome all the same.
“Just on time,” the leader of the guards who had been stationed to watch for any uninvited guests; any that they could spot, anyway. “Hand it over, Luigi,” the man said; clearly, he outranked the man whose place that Ezio had taken. “I’ll see that the Banker gets it, but you’d better come, too. There’s someone who wants to talk to you,” the man looked around, and Ezio found himself wondering for just a moment what the man was searching for. “Where’s the senator?”
“Dealt with, as ordered,” he said quickly, with enough coldness in his tone that no one seemed to see fit to gainsay him.
Falling into step with the man who had taken the chest from him, along with Aeon – who was still managing to keep himself out from under the eyes of the guards that were now all around them – Ezio heard the sounds of the guards that had been following in his footsteps making their own way up the steps.
“Not you,” the leader of the guards said, as he stepped into the path of that selfsame man.
“We can’t go in?” the guard demanded, sounding like he was trying desperately not to sound as irate as he truly felt.
“Not tonight,” the leader of the guards said, sounding distinctly unsympathetic. “You and your men are to join up with the patrols; you might also want to send for a few more of them. We’re to have full security here, by order of Duke Cesare himself.”
“Porco putana,” growled the other guard, the one who’d earlier identified himself as a former blacksmith during the course of the conversation that Ezio had found himself overhearing not such a long time ago.
Cesare? He’s here? Ezio found himself musing, as he and Aeon made their way into the inner walls of the garden that the guests were all milling about. A great many of them didn’t seem to be wearing anything but loincloths and strange animal skulls, but there were still enough people who seemed to be wearing normal enough clothes that he could blend in. He wasn’t so worried about Aeon, since he’d seen the way that people looked away from the mysterious man without even seeming to be aware of the fact that they were even doing it.
It was a strange thing to witness, but clearly true all the same.
Asking Aeon to keep the eyes of the crowds all around them from falling upon him while he changed out of the armor that he’d appropriated from Luigi when he’d dealt with the man, Ezio divested himself of the armor that he’d been wearing for the entirety of the journey he’d made after the men who had been transporting the chest. The sight of a familiar group of courtesans, almost as familiar as his own recruits, brought a smile to Ezio’s face. While it was a simple fact that he fully trusted Claudia in her capacity as the overseer of the Rosa in Fiore, Ezio would have to confess that he’d not been expecting so many of her courtesans to have shown up in this place.
He supposed, given the nature of the party they were all attending, he should have been expecting just such a thing.
Chapter 364: The Borgia banker
Chapter Text
Continuing on his way through the throngs of people – very many of them wearing very little other than loincloths and what appeared to be animal-skull masks – Ezio made certain to keep his eye on the chest that Luigi’s superior had taken from him when he and Aeon had shown up at this party. Such a feat was made quite a bit easier by the courtesan who had taken up a position beside the man, of course, chatting with the man, and thus keeping the bulk of his attention from falling upon anything else that might be going on around him. Sweeping his own gaze around the large, opulent garden that the party was taking place in, Ezio found his attention drawn to the man who had just appeared from behind an iron-banded door.
The man himself wore the broad, red hat of a Cardinal, but other than that he was just as briefly clad as most of the revelers that swirled all about them. Not a good look for him, considering that the man was corpulent, heavy-jowled, and sallow-skinned, but Ezio quickly turned his attention to memorizing the man’s face so that he would be able to find him more easily even if he did attempt to lose himself within the crowds. The hat would be a definite aid to his efforts, Ezio reflected with some amusement.
“Money for you, Your Eminence,” Luigi’s superior said, making his way over to the man; the one that Ezio was now completely certain was Juan Borgia the Elder.
He did seem like the kind of man that Cesare would have trusted with his banking, considering the relationship that seemed to exist between the pair of them; one more reason the man before him needed to die.
“I will take that,” Juan said, reaching out for both the chest that Luigi’s superior had brought to him, as well as the courtesan who had been walking beside him. “And that,” he continued, pulling the woman to his side with barely a pause.
It made things quite a bit simpler for Ezio, who had been keeping an eye out for her in any case, even as he admired her poise as he passed the pair of them by; dealing with Juan Borgia’s clumsy pawing could not have been an easy thing.
Continuing on his way, deeper into the garden where so many people – both revelers, and those who had seemingly been pulled from Roma itself in order to fill some kind of a quota, if only one that existed in the mind of Juan Borgia and whoever else had helped him to plan all of this – had been gathered, Ezio found himself wondering just where Cesare had hidden himself. That is, he found himself wondering such a thing, up until a herald and a trumpeter appeared to announce that very thing.
Turning to Aeon, as the mysterious man narrowed his changed eyes in thought, Ezio subtly handed him the Apple that he inhabited, and waited for a moment as the man secreted it away inside himself. Once he was certain that the Apple was as safe as anyone could possibly make it, he nodded and the pair of them moved into the crowd that had gathered to hear the speech that Cesare would make.
Chapter 365: Follies and frolics
Chapter Text
Having so many people before him, all gathered to hear what he – not his father, nor any of his brothers or cousins – had to say was quite the heady experience, indeed.
“What better way to celebrate my victories than to join in the brotherhood of man?” he asked, spreading his arms wide as though to embrace each and every one of the people before him; the prettier women, at least. “Soon, we shall be here celebrating a united Italia, and then the feasting will go on for forty days and forty nights! Commence now!”
Feeling eyes from the crowd upon him, Cesare turned to see if one of the lovelies that he’d spotted was indeed trying to catch his attention, but what he saw was just the opposite of anything he’d have ever wished to see again. Not when he was standing amidst so many who had such little understanding; not when that smirking, silver-haired, yellow eyed bastardo was standing all but close enough that Cesare might well have been able to reach out and touch him.
Grinding his teeth, even as he felt someone’s hand on his left arm, Cesare started to make for the form of the man who had caused him nothing but trouble since the pair of them had first encountered one another on that long-ago battlefield that he and his men had made of the grounds of that shabby little town where the remains of the Auditore had attempted to hide themselves.
“What?!” he demanded, turning to look back at the man who had been such a fool as to try to stop him when he clearly wished to be after that man.
“We did not agree to conquer Italia,” the man snarled, and only then did he realize that the fat old man currently speaking to him was his dear father.
“Padre, it seems that someone uninvited has made their way into our party,” he leaned in closer, growling softly. “The man in the Apple.”
“Misguided Child,” the fat man said, a growl rising in his own throat as well. “Try not to made too much of a fuss, capito? The last thing we can afford here is to send the people here into a panic. Let the guards handle him.”
“Do you see anyone else even looking at him?” he returned, as tried to keep his eye on the arrogant man who had been causing him and his so much trouble for all the time that he’d walking the world.
Cesare loathed him, him and all of his kind that didn’t know their true place in the world.
~AC: Bro~
As he continued on his way through the thronging crowds – an increasing amount of them seeming to be revelers, the farther he got from the outer walls of the garden he was making his way through – Ezio narrowed his eyes slightly as he caught sight of the corpulent form of Juan Borgia once more. The courtesan who had attached herself to his side remained close at hand, and Ezio found himself respecting her dedication to the cause all the more. He also found himself all the more committed to ridding the world of such a one.
To say nothing of Juan Borgia’s obvious corruption, no one should be forced to bow to the whims of such a man.
Making his way through the crowds of revelers, Ezio found himself feeling more than a bit exposed without the constant presence of Aeon by his side. Still, the mysterious man had offered to draw the eyes of Cesare and Rodrigo away from him, to give Ezio the time he needed in order to complete the task that he still had left before him, and the fact that he found himself honestly missing the presence of the mysterious man for more reasons than simply the personal was a sure sign that he’d come to rely just a bit too much upon such a thing.
Best to trust in his own skill, so that once he’d been inevitably deprived of Aeon’s constant presence at his side, he and his wouldn’t suffer too much for it. Firmly reminding himself of such a decision each time he found his wayward thoughts wandering back to just how much easier his pursuit of Juan Borgia would have been if he’d had Aeon’s – or, to be more precise the Apple’s – facility with concealing himself from the notice of the crowds as well as the guards, Ezio continued on his way. The courtesan who’d taken up a post at the side of the man he was hunting – Ezio thought he could recall that her name was Lucia, though he wished to be certain of such a thing before he called her such to her face – gave a subtle signal in his direction as he tried to find the perfect place to conceal himself so that he would be able to strike.
Ezio returned it with a respectful one of his own, just as he managed to find the perfect place to settle himself while he waited for Juan Borgia’s slow circuit of the party to bring the pair of them before each other.
Chapter 366: Juan Borgia
Chapter Text
Seating himself on a nearby bench, one that Juan Borgia’s meanderings would inevitably bring him within the reach of, Ezio held himself ready and waited for Cesare’s banker to come within the range of his blade. He would have been lying if he’d said he didn’t take at least some pleasure from what he was about to do, since he’d seen the depths of the man’s corruption with his own eyes, but there was also a decent amount of pity, as well. He could not have had an easy time, trying to maintain even basic humanity among such a family as the Borgia, but Ezio knew even as he watched the man’s approach that he could ill afford mercy at such a time as this.
No matter the child he’d once been – or the man he might have been if the world were kinder – Juan Borgia had made his choice, and now he had to pay for the consequences.
Once the man had come within striking-range of the bench Ezio had seated himself on for just such an occasion as the one he’d been awaiting, Ezio lunged with all of the sudden, inevitable speed of a striking viper. There was a look of surprise on the corpulent man’s sallow face, as he looked up into the face of the man who had just ended his life. It was as though he could only understand what had happened to him in a dim, removed sort of way.
As though he’d thought himself, if not immune to the anger of those around him, then at least insulated from it.
“The things I have felt, seen, and tasted? I do not regret a single one of them,” Juan Borgia said, a slight smile on his face even at the last.
“A man of power must be wary of indulging himself,” he advised the man dying in his arms, though Ezio knew that there was no chance of the dying man in his arms being ably to take his advice; still, for those around him there might still be some hope.
“But, I gave the people what they wanted,” Juan Borgia said, the light beginning to leave his eyes in earnest, fading even as he spoke.
“And now you pay the price for it,” he said, knowing that the man in his arms was already too far-gone to carry on any kind of conversation. “Pleasure unearned consumes itself. Requiescat in pace,” he said, laying down the man he’d been speaking to at last.
Chapter 367: A surprising welcome
Chapter Text
The rising commotion all around him, as well as the sudden reappearance of Aeon from the direction that he himself had first come from when he’d left Cesare and Rodrigo to the announcement that the former had been making such a spectacle of himself over, prompted Ezio to stand up and brace himself for what he expected was coming. Sure enough, Aeon grabbed him around the waist, taking the both of them to the top of the garden’s outer wall with the same, preternatural speed that he’d seen the mysterious man demonstrate on so many occasions before.
And not once has this kind of thing ever started to seem normal, Ezio mused with some asperity. Shaking his head as he and Aeon stood together for a moment at the top of the wall that the mysterious man had brought the both of them to. Looking back over at the man who had steadily proved himself to be such a worthy, willing ally of the Brotherhood, Ezio found that he had returned once more to the form that he seemed to wear the most often. The man in black was at his side once more.
“Grazie for all the help you’ve given us, amico,” he said, smiling widely as he and Aeon made for the rooftops on the other side of the wall that the pair of them had been perched upon.
“Of course,” Aeon said, nodding as he paced Ezio on his way back through Roma.
All that remained was for the pair of them to return to the Rosa in Fiore so that he could see the results of the mission that Claudia and her girls had carried out; Ezio knew that he wouldn’t be able to relax until he’d verified that his little sister was all right.
As the pair of them alighted on a rooftop together, Aeon handed him the Apple and vanished into it once more. Smiling slightly as he tucked the artifact back into the hidden pocket within his robes, Ezio turned his thoughts back to Claudia, little Maria, and Mother at the Rosa where the three of them were staying. He’d come to accept, if not entirely approve of, the fact that Claudia had chosen the life of an Assassin to be her own as well. After her husband had died in the service of their family in Monteriggioni, Ezio thought that it might be her own way of honoring the legacy that the Auditore family seemed destined to leave in the world.
He hadn’t wanted this kind of thing for either of his sisters, but fate seemed determined to force them onto this path, all the same.
Sighing as he found his thoughts treading down the familiar, melancholy paths that he tried to avoid when he could, Ezio shook his head to banish those musings back to the depths of his mind that they sometimes attempted to crawl out of when he didn’t keep a strict enough watch on his thoughts while he was out and about on the Brotherhood’s business. Once he came back into sight of the Rosa in Fiore and any who might have been keeping watch in one of the higher rooms of the brothel, Ezio smiled softly as he descended back down to the ground and continued on his way from there.
As he neared the courtyard of the Rosa, however, he began to see more and more signs that a battle had taken place. There were courtesans out in force, hauling off corpses of what looked like Borgia soldiers and scrubbing bloodstains from the paths leading up to the building itself. There were also others, fetching what seemed to be throwing knives and the occasional crossbow bolt from said corpses as they made to dispose of them. Looking around the courtyard as he continued on his way up to the front door of the Rosa, Ezio steeled himself for what he was going to see once he made his way inside the stately building before him.
“What happened here?” he asked, flagging down one of the girls who wasn’t carrying off a corpse to be burned in the small pile that he’d just caught a glimpse of in a secluded area of the Rosa’s large courtyard.
“We managed to get the Banker’s money, but some of them apparently thought to follow us home,” she chuckled softly, and Ezio took note of the throwing knives that she’d apparently been collecting. “I don’t think they expected the welcome we had waiting for them.”
“Sí, it looks that way,” he said, a small smile all Ezio could bring himself to offer since he still didn’t quite know what had become of the rest of his family.
Making his way inside, feeling only slightly more relaxed for the fact that none of the courtesans he had encountered had seemed to have been harmed in the aftermath of the battle that had clearly taken place on the grounds of the Rosa, Ezio caught his breath as he found himself standing before the forms of his sisters. Little Maria was clearly engaged in cleaning the longsword that she had bought for herself once she’d become both tall and strong enough to properly wield such a thing, but it was Claudia that Ezio found himself almost instinctively seeking out with his gaze.
After all, he’d had little Maria by his side since the day he’d started all this Assassin business; he knew what his littlest sister was capable of, but Claudia’s skills were another matter entirely.
The sight of Claudia herself, an ornate roundel dagger in her right hand and a stiletto in her left, brought most of the calm he’d been striving to regain back to his heart in truth, and Ezio allowed himself to relax and breathe deeply for the first time since he’d left the Borgia’s party and allowed Aeon to return to the Apple.
“How is everyone? I saw what happened outside,” he continued, not wishing for Claudia to think that he was coddling her simply because he hadn’t had the chance to see her prowess in combat the way he’d done for little Maria and Uncle Mario both.
We’re doing well enough,“ Claudia said, a rather self-satisfied smile stretching her mouth. “I doubt that any of those Borgia bastardi expected the welcome we were prepared to give them,” she said, putting away her weapons and folding her arms with a distinct air of pride, then she chuckled. “Though it did cost us a bit of furniture when some of the younger Guardians got the idea of beating off the invaders with chairs, or sheltering behind tables while those who actually had weapons made use of them.”
“It sounds as if you’ll be needing replacements, then,” he said, the mention of Aeon’s fellow Treasure Guardians bringing a certain measure of lightness to his heart as he remembered those that the Brotherhood had given shelter to in this place, so that they wouldn’t be at risk of falling into the hands of the Borgia or their Templar masters.
“Sí, and I think we’ll have more than enough money to cover them,” Claudia said, self satisfied smile not leaving her face for a moment as she gestured to the stack of strongboxes that had been piled against the wall farthest from where the pair of them were currently speaking.
“Bene, I can see you’ve managed to do quite well for yourself,” he said, smiling even though he’d felt just the slightest, passing urge to sigh.
It seemed that none of his family would truly be able to escape the burden that their legacy had laid out before them.
Chapter 368: Overtures
Chapter Text
“However, that’s not the only thing that’s been happening today,” Claudia continued, her voice taking on the same, teasing sort of tone that Ezio could remember finding himself on the wrong end of more than a few times while he and little Maria had been working their way down through the list of Templar conspirators, and all through the Borgia that still tried to hinder their progress.
“Oh?” he asked, raising his eyebrows in a way that had never failed to invite his sisters to share things with him when they thought that there was something that he’d be interested in knowing.
“Look over there,” Claudia said, directing his attention back to where little Maria was sitting, having just inspecting the longsword that she used in combat for any damage that she might have needed to take care of, before sheathing it again on her back.
He also noticed the young man seated just a bit closer to her than was strictly comradely, particularly when those comrades were a man and a young woman.
“I see,” he said, having indeed caught sight of the soppy look of devotion on the face of the young man sitting on the opposite side of the bench from where she was; fortunately, he’d also caught sight of the amused expression that little Maria had given the eager young man in return.
Making his way over to the bench where little Maria and the young man who was so obviously attempting to court her that such intentions would likely be visible from the other side of the very world were sitting as they took care of their respective weapons, Ezio found himself curious as to just what the young recruit – it’d become all the more obvious by his manner that that was just what he was – had seen little Maria doing when she’d recruited him that had made the young man so smitten with her as he clearly was. When the young man caught sight of him in return, however, he all but threw himself off the bench, grinning widely at the sight of him.
“Messer Ezio!” he exclaimed, as little Maria held a hand to her mouth to muffle what was obviously good-natured laughter; she clearly thought the young man was acting just as silly as she’d ever accused him of acting, at times.
Under present circumstances, Ezio couldn’t find it in himself to blame her.
“Sí, that’s who I am,” he said, offering the young man before him a tolerant smile; he did seem rather too earnest to be of any harm, and Ezio was beginning to see just why it was that little Maria looked at him with such a familiar-seeming sense of amusement. “But, that hardly tells me who you are, fratellino.”
“I am Primo Penna, Messer Ezio,” the young man said, puffing out his chest and grinning proudly. “Maria has told me so many things about her wonderful brother, and I also know that you are the Assassino who has been doing so much for the people of Roma. The man who will save us all from the Borgia!”
“I wouldn’t to that far,” he said, smiling gently down at Primo as the young man stood before him; truly, he was starting to remind Ezio more and more of himself, when he’d been the same age and trying to court Christina, before the life of an Assassin had been all but been forced upon him by the Pazzi and the Borgia who had been leading them. “I had a lot of help.”
Little Maria laughed softly, standing up beside the pair of them as she finished checking the last of her weapons in their various holsters. “Sí, Primo, all of us who work within the Brotherhood do so knowing that we will never be without allies if we have need of them,” his littlest sister said, smiling as she laid one hand each on the shoulder nearest to her, even as he and Primo stepped slightly apart in order to allow her to do so. “It’s part of what makes us a Brotherhood, in fact,” she continued, turning that same smile on Primo almost entirely.
“Sí, and the other is the trust and faith we place in the others who support us,” he said, folding his arms but keeping the smile that he’d worn on his face while he’d been making his assessment of the young man who’d taken such an obvious interest in little Maria. “I trust that my sister has told you where it is that we Assassini keep our headquarters within Roma?”
“Sí, she said that I should make the journey to Isola Tiberina if I truly wish to become a part of your Brotherhood and thus do more than just support the work that you do!” Primo exclaimed, and Ezio knew without even having to ask that the young man was going to make his way out to that selfsame island just as soon as he could.
Time would tell if he truly had the constitution for an Assassin’s work, of course; it wasn’t a life that anyone should take lightly.
Chapter 369: Equestrians
Chapter Text
When Primo had departed for the island headquarters that the Brotherhood had established for themselves within Roma, Ezio said his own farewells to his family at the Rosa and turned to make his own way out of the brothel. Once he’d returned to the open air of Roma once again, Ezio made his way back up onto the rooftops of the city, and then began his search for any of those who might have needed the kind of aid that only a member of the Brotherhood was truly in a position to give.
He ran across a woman and a man who had evidently made enemies in common of the Borgia simply for the fact that the man – who introduced himself and his fiancée as Ottavio Olivieri and Laura Boccanera – had refused to allow the guards to continue harassing the woman that he had intended to marry, and Laura herself had smashed an empty crate over the head of a man who’d not seemed to get the message the first time. Giving his aid to the couple, Ezio did actually end up recruiting the pair of them, even after he’d made plain what kind of a life those who pledged their service to the Brotherhood were obligated to live.
It seemed that this wasn’t the first time the pair of them had run afoul of the Borgia’s thugs and their ideas as to what they could take from the people they terrorized, and as anyone would have been they were fed up with such things.
Once he’d sent the pair of them off to Isola Tiberina to meet up with their fellow recruits, Ezio returned his attention to the rounds that he was currently making. He also descended back to the streets, since the buildings in this area of Roma had thinned out enough so as to make an Assassin’s favored mode of travel rather impractical. That, then, was how he ended up meeting the other man who seemed to be in need of his assistance.
The man who had one of the Borgia’s cutthroats personally angry with him.
“This was your stand?” he asked the man, looking down at the broken remains of what had clearly been a small shop, though nothing that it sold seemed to be present anymore.
“Sí,” the man said, looking down at the sad remnants of what might very well have been one of his only ways of making the money that anyone who hadn’t been born into the highest levels of society needed to support themselves. “Donato Mancini and his thugs were the ones who smashed it,” the man sighed, shaking his head as he looked down at the smashed, broken wood that had once been such a clearly integral part of his livelihood. “I made the mistake of winning when he challenged me to a horse race, and now he’s pledged to kill me,” the man said, sighing as he finished gathering up the last of the rubble he’d been working with. “Aspetta, I’ve heard of you! Everyone says that you’re an enemy of the Borgia and all of their soldiers. The Assassino! Would you help me against Donato?”
“Sí, I will,” he said, nodding and lending a hand for the last bits of work that the man he would soon be giving his aid to was doing. “Only tell me where he is, and I’ll make sure that he no longer troubles you.”
“Grazie, grazie!” the man enthused, looking a great deal more settled than he had before Ezio had made his appearance. “He rides in the Circo Massimo; he’s probably there right now, waiting for me with a group of his own thugs. They would likely be sent in to kill me, after he had gotten through humiliating me,” the man continued, offering him a sickly sort of smile.
“Not after I get through with them,” he said, offering the man a smile of a far more reassuring sort.
“Ma certo, and Grazie, for all of this,” the man said, as the pair of them finished tidying away the shattered remnants of his stand. “My name is Rocco Ricardo; I’ll owe you a great debt for this, Assassino.”
After assuring Rocco that he didn’t need compensation for doing what needed to be done – there was no need to bring up matters of the struggle that he and his had all become a part of, not to someone who didn’t seem to have any interest in joining said struggle – Ezio made his way to the Circo Massimo to address the matter of Donato Mancini and his depredations. The man he saw was indeed riding a horse, striding boldly across the grounds, all the while demanding that Rocco come out and face him. Scoffing as he heard the man making pretensions to a code of honor that he’d never seen any evidence of even a single member of the Templars as a whole – to say nothing of the Borgia in particular – held anything but the most thinly veiled of contempt for, Ezio searched for a vantagepoint from which he would be able to use the pistol that Leonardo had returned to him when the pair of them had been reunited once again.
Finding a shadowed alcove that was deep enough for his purposes, as well as being safely out of sight of any of the Borgia soldiers who would inevitably come looking for him once he’d ended the life of their benefactor, Ezio carefully took aim and fired. Once Donato’s corpse had fallen to the ground, Ezio waited for a moment while the group of Borgia soldiers who had been gathered around him to turn their eyes firmly in his direction, before swiftly departing from his post before one or more of them could think to organize a search for the one who’d ended Donato’s wasted life.
Chapter 370: Man of the people
Chapter Text
Making his way out and away from the Circo Massimo, Ezio made his way back toward the more built-up portions of Roma once more. Once he’d managed to regain the rooftops, however, Ezio found himself confronted by a sight that he’d never thought to see before. There was a woman up on one of the rooftops he was making his way towards; her footing was more uncertain that any but the least-trained of the young men and women that Ezio had brought into the ranks of the Brotherhood, and by the look of her she’d left her own youth behind some time ago.
Under the circumstances, Ezio found himself impressed with her determination, though he didn’t think so much of what she’d actually chosen to do in light of said determination.
“Careful,” he said, gentling his tone so he wouldn’t startle her into any hasty actions; it looked like it was taking all of her focus just to maintain her footing. “I have fallen from my share of rooftops,” he said, making his way over to where she was standing.
When she turned to look at him, Ezio saw in her eyes that there was indeed a reason she had done something so dangerous to those who hadn’t trained themselves to move in the way that all Assassins learned to.
“I’m waiting for my Lanz,” she said, and there was something in her manner that suggested that she’d been waiting to explain herself in just this sort of manner.
There was something she wanted to have known, before she carried on with whatever she’d had in mind to do, when she’d made her way up to this place; likely, something he could help her to have done with.
“Up on the rooftops?” he asked, moving closer when he was certain that he wouldn’t crowd the woman into doing something even more dangerous than what she’d already gotten herself up to when he’d first run across her.
“He left me, after our baby died,” she said, her head turning to look out over the rooflines while her eyes looked back into the past. “Joined up with the Cento Occhi gang; they say he kills, now. Pushes people from buildings. I say I don’t believe them, but…”
“You do,” he supplied, making his way over to place a companionable hand on her left shoulder.
“I do,” she said, looking over at him with the saddest sort of resolve in her eyes.
“What will you do, when he comes?” he asked, standing beside her to offer what comfort he could under these sorts of circumstances.
“I will jump,” she said, the sad resolve in her eyes hardening in a way that Ezio didn’t like at all.
“Why should you pay for his crimes?” he asked, trying to bring a measure of sanity back to the terrible circumstances that – if he didn’t act right here and now – would end up destroying both the innocent and the guilty.
“My death will remind Lanz of the man he once was,” she said, and Ezio could see how close he was to losing her to the sad, hardened resolve that had likely long since claimed her husband.
“Leave him to me,” Ezio said, relived when she allowed him to guide her back down to the ground again, before her clear inexperience with moving about on rooftops could have cost her anything more than simply her balance. “He no longer deserves your sacrifice.”
“Sí, I suppose not,” she said, looking downcast, but no longer so desperate as she’d seemed to be when the pair of them had first met. “Will you at least help me bury him, when you come back?”
“I will,” he said, holding the hand that she offered to him. “I’ll return soon, Madonna.”
With that promise to tie the both of them together, if only in the loosest sort of sense, Ezio made his own way back up to the rooftops once he’d gotten far enough away from the woman that he didn’t worry about her getting the idea to try following him for some reason. He knew that it was probably irrational, and he shouldn’t worry about those kinds of things, but Ezio still found them in his mind when he thought about what he was doing. Shaking his head to cast aside the distractions that might very well have cost him the chance to find the man he was looking for, Ezio found himself confronted by a sight that – under these rarest sort of circumstances – he was perversely pleased to see.
There was a man in rough-spun clothing, with a simple band to hold back his messy, coppery-brown hair from getting in his eyes while he worked, moving after someone who had seemingly just finished climbing onto a nearby rooftop. One of his throwing knives was enough to scare the man off from what was clearly his current quarry, and Ezio was after him before the man had a chance to do more than look in his direction with the mien of one who had been all but startled out of his mind.
Lanz might have been more than willing to go after people who had far less ability to move about on rooftops than he did, but it was clear from the way he ran that he’d no intention of setting himself against someone who knew their way around. In some ways – under the circumstances very few, of course – Ezio could understand the man’s desire not to expose himself to undue amounts of danger while he was working. However, as it was the nature of said work that Ezio had taken such a strong objection to, he wasn’t about to allow himself to be taken in by any admiration that he might have felt.
Perverse or otherwise.
Once he’d managed to put an end to Lanz and all of the problems that the man had been causing to the people who lived in this place, Ezio returned to the man’s wife to fulfill the promise that he’d made to her. She introduced herself as Luvia, and like Rocco before her she insisted that she was in his debt after what he’d done. Explaining to Luvia that she didn’t owe him a thing, even after he’d returned in the wake of his promise, Ezio departed once more.
Chapter 371: The people’s champion
Chapter Text
Breathing more easily once he had left Luvia and her sorrows behind – though it was clear that without her husband’s constant presence as a killer to remind her of everything that the pair of them had lost, she would be able to recover her self with time and care – Ezio found himself instinctively tensing up at the sound of gunfire. He’d become rather unpleasantly familiar with the sound, ever since he’d been started making actual progress in routing the Borgia from their conquests in Roma, and so Ezio descended back to the ground.
Finding a man sheltering behind a high wall, looking into the courtyard where the gunfire seemed to be coming from, Ezio made his way over. There was an expression of clear worry on the man’s face, and given the way he was looking into the courtyard, Ezio suspected that there was a great deal more to the situation than he was presently aware of.
“Get back!” the man Ezio had made his way up to the side of yelled, having clearly just become aware of Ezio’s presence next to him.
“What’s going on?” he asked, knowing that he wouldn’t be able to lend this man the aid he needed if he was unaware of just what it was that the pair of them were facing off against.
“We tried to form a resistance to the Borgia, but this man came and started firing his arquebus!” the man Ezio would soon be giving his aid to said, thin beard quivering as he clenched his hands in obvious terror. “My poor little Anna!” the man fretted, just as Ezio had begun to wonder what kind of madness or desperation had driven a man who seemed to have so little experience with combat to the very door of a compound under siege. “She’s all I have left!”
“Rest easy, amico, I will see that she gets back to you,” he said, knowing that he would be best served by enlisting Aeon’s aid in this matter, but also fully understanding that the presence of the man in black was best kept from the eyes of the world as a whole.
Particularly since his presence was tied so inexorably to the Apple, and all of the risk that such an artifact presented to those who might chance to come into contact with it.
Making his way into the compound in the brief lull when the shooter who had been raining down such destruction upon the heads of the innocent people of Roma was forced to reload that terrible weapon of his, Ezio brought his own terrible weapon to bear. He didn’t know if Aeon would quite approve, if the man were to somehow find out that Ezio thought of him in that way at times such as this, but those kinds of thoughts came to the fore all the more strongly when he found himself making use of Aeon’s preternatural talents in situations like this one. And, as yet, Ezio had seen no evidence that the man in black was capable of reading minds.
Breathing deeply to steady himself, even as he carefully concealed both his form and his actions from the man raining down death and mayhem all around him, Ezio removed the Apple from the hidden pouch within his robes once again.
“It would seem as though you’re in need of my assistance,” Aeon said, materializing once more from the depths of the Apple.
“Sí, there’s a child trapped in that compound, with a man who won’t let up his assault on her father,” Ezio said, directing the yellow eyes of the man in black – shaded as they were by the hood of the Assassin robes he wore – to the direction where the gunfire was coming from. “I need you to keep his attention, while I go reunite her with her father.”
“Indeed,” Aeon said, with a sharp nod, as his sharper eyes seemed to be picking out the trajectory of the fire from the arquebus the man was wielding with such deadly intent.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, nodding to the man as he himself moved deeper into the compound.
As the sounds of arquebus fire cut off with the kind of swiftness that Ezio had been hoping for when he’d unleashed Aeon upon the man who had been so callous as to attack people who were merely trying to do what they could in the face of such oppression as they found themselves confronted by, and like as not worked for the Borgia in at least some capacity, Ezio allowed himself a thin smile as he made his way into the compound at last. Comforting the little girl that he found, terrified as she was at the thought of what might have been happening to her papa, Ezio made his way back out into the sunlit courtyard, just in time to see Aeon slam the arquebusier into the ground with force enough to rattle the bones of even the strongest of men.
Shuddering briefly, knowing that the man had probably deserved the rough handling Aeon was giving him but still finding himself unnerved by the sheer, brutal efficiency of the violence playing out before him, Ezio forced himself to move on. He’d be able to speak with Aeon, and to see to the man who’d been assaulting these people, just as soon as he’d finished reuniting little Anna with her worried father.
Once he’d finished with that, finding himself feeling lighter and more at ease for the memory of the gratitude the pair of them had shown him when he’d carried little Anna back to the waiting arms of her father Angelo, Ezio made his way back into the compound to see what might be done with the arquebusier that Aeon had been manhandling. Nerving himself up for whatever it was that he might find himself confronted by, Ezio breathed a bit more easily when he found Aeon simply standing in the courtyard waiting for him.
Aeon vanished once more into the Apple as Ezio approached, pausing for the briefest of moments as Ezio thanked him once more for the part that he had played in rescuing Anna from the arquebusier, and therefore sparing her father the sorrow of losing her to the troubles that the Borgia had brought upon all of Roma with their greed. Making his way over to the fitfully moving form of the man who Aeon had seen to with such brutal, unrelenting efficiency, Ezio found that – for all the swiftly-becoming-frantic motions of his arms – his legs were as completely still as those Ezio had seen on corpses. He wondered about that, even as he made his way forward, to finish what Aeon had started.
“Requiescat in pace,” he said to the arquebusier in his spectacles, as he breathed his last on the ground.
Standing back up once more, Ezio found himself wondering just what Desmond had made of everything that had happened. Perhaps the young man from the future had already known just what was happening, and had merely been curious to see such a thing with his own eyes, or perhaps this ultimately minor battle was one that the sweep of history had forgotten, and the young man whose fate had seemed to be tied to his for some reason that Ezio was not sure he would ever know had simply been curious about a thing that he was learning for himself for the first time.
Ezio didn’t think he would have the chance to find out, either, since as Desmond had said, the future was best left to look after itself.
Leaving the compound behind him, as well as his own curiosity about just what Desmond might have made of the things he’d seen on this day of all days, Ezio continued on his way back into the more built-up areas of Roma, and from there he ascended back up onto the rooftops once more. There would, of course, be other matters that required the skill of one of the Brotherhood to settle them, and while Ezio was fully aware that he was no longer the only one in Roma with the means to settle them, in more ways than one it was still a comfort to see them done himself.
Chapter 372: Toppling the towers
Chapter Text
Once he’d made his way back into the city proper, Ezio caught sight of yet another of the towers that had been festooned with Borgia iconography, as well as staffed with the more brutal of the thugs that the Borgia had in their employ, Ezio narrowed his eyes. He’d been making it a point to burn the flags and banners that had been hung from the towers he passed on his way from one errand to another, and having already passed this tower some time ago – he recognized the landmarks he’d been passing on his way to this place – he sighed in annoyance as he realized that the Borgia had put them back up as a clear act of defiance.
It meant that he should probably check the other towers that he’d previously passed by, if only to reassure himself that the Borgia hadn’t tried to move themselves back into any of those, either.
Once he’d managed to cut his way through the last of the Borgia thugs who had been emplaced to guard the tower and ensure that it remained a symbol of the Borgia’s power to all who could see it – for all the good it had done the men who lay bleeding at his feet – Ezio made his way back up the side of the tower once again.
Once he’d found the powder-stores that had served those who had once been staffing this place, Ezio set them alight with the torch that had been bracketed to the wall, and then performed one more Leap of Faith in a long line of them to bring himself back down to the ground once more. Making his way out of the killing-field that he’d just finished creating, Ezio sighed as he realized that he should probably look in on the location of every one of the other towers that the Borgia had laid claim to within Roma. Perhaps I should see if some of our recruits could take a look, as well, Ezio mused, knowing that even with the training he possessed he couldn’t hope to be everywhere that he would need to be.
Particularly if the Borgia had been making a concerted effort to retake their territory, as it seemed they had done in this place.
Making his way to a pigeon coop, Ezio sent out a message to the recruits that he and little Maria had been steadily pulling in as the pair of them went about their business of freeing Roma from the Borgia and their Templar masters. He also added in a message about the continuing need to keep an eye on the activities of the wolfmen that seemed to be making their presence known more and more as the Assassins rebuilt their numbers and made their own sallies against the Borgia.
Chapter 373: Hunter and hunted
Chapter Text
He’d been on the trail of another group of them, even as he’d looked in on the tower that the Borgia had tried to reclaim for their own use, and his investigations had steadily led him back to the remnants of the Coliseum, and thus he’d found himself rather pleased that he hadn’t had to go too far out of his way to deal with the tower that the Borgia had tried to lay claim to again. Making his way onto the grounds of the ruin, Ezio called upon the second-sight that he shared with little Maria – and who knew how many of their fellow Assassins in this place, though he never seemed to know the right way to ask – Ezio had soon found his way to the concealed entrance to the underground caverns that the wolfmen always seemed to use in one capacity or another.
This one, just like the others that he’d previously seen, was marked with the skull of what seemed to be the same kind of wolf whose skins the men he’d faced so many times previous were wearing.
Kicking the grate that stood before him yielded nothing more than a slight ache in his toes, and so Ezio found himself forced – though not without a certain wry amusement – to make use of his hidden blade to pick the lock that had previously been securing the grate before he could descend into the catacombs where the wolfmen were to be found. And then, as though one surprise had simply not been enough, Ezio found that he could hear the sounds of fighting in the distance.
Though not quite so far away that he couldn’t hear the shouting of what seemed to be two distinct factions that had formed.
As the Apple glowed with the familiar light that Ezio had long since come to recognize as Aeon’s signal that he wished to return to the outside world once more, he smiled softly as he retrieved the artifact from the hidden pocket within his robes where he’d kept it for such a long time.
“Welcome back, amico,” he greeted, once Aeon had seemingly reformed himself out of the light within the Apple itself.
Ezio had often found himself wondering how Aeon had done such a thing as binding himself so tightly to the Apple in the first place, but he knew that he wasn’t likely to receive any kind of answers than he had to the other questions that he had about the mysterious past of the just-as-mysterious man in black. Truly, this kind of thing had to have been the reason that Altaïr had not found any common ground with Aeon. That, and the fact that he seemed to have had a particularly bad experience with a similar kind of man.
Truly, it seemed to be the most logical conclusion, given everything that he’d learned about the pair of them.
As he and Aeon continued on their way deeper into the catacombs, Ezio found himself startled by the sounds of what seemed to be open combat – of all things – just up ahead.
“It seems as though we might be interrupting something,” Aeon said, a contemplative tone to the man’s voice, just before Ezio himself could express the same kind of sentiment.
“Sí, it would seem that you’re right, amico.”
And so, as the pair of them continued on their way toward what figured to be another group of the wolfmen that Ezio had gone down into this place with the intention of confronting, he also found himself wondering just what it was that he and Aeon would find themselves confronted with when they met up with the wolfmen that the pair of them had taken to hunting together for nearly as long as they had known about them. When he caught his first glimpse of the men whose scuffle he and Aeon had both become aware of when they’d made their way deep enough into the catacombs to make out the sounds of those who had clearly been in there with them for only the men themselves knew how long, Ezio found himself faced with a group of wolfmen who had apparently been attacked by another group. This second group seemed to have taken their own inspiration from Aeon, even down to attempting to imitate the Ethereal Blades that the man in black had shown himself to be so terrifyingly capable of making use of.
Of course, there was a clear and not at all subtle difference between the deadly, shining blades that Aeon wielded with such lethal finesse and the red-colored steel that all of those who had seemingly chosen to follow in his footsteps all had in their hands. There were also very few of them who seemed to have the native skill to dual-wield the blades that they were carrying; and of course none of them possessed the preternatural speed that truly made Aeon such a terror on any battlefield where the man in black chose to make his presence felt.
“He appears, fratelli!” one of the men called out, one who did seem to have the skill to wield two of those red-bladed swords that had clearly been made in imitation of those that Aeon wielded with such deadly force and finesse both. “The King of Wolves walks among us again!”
None of the men wearing the wolf costumes seemed to be remotely pleased to hear the sentiment that the man – who seemed to be the leader of what was clearly a splinter-faction within the Followers of Romulus, if not the one who had formed such a splinter-faction in the first place – was expressing, but the one who was most displeased was a man wearing not only a mask, but the black cloak and hat of someone who seemed to have at least some kind of affiliation with the Church. Considering that he would have had to have the backing of that bastard of a Borgia Pope Rodrigo, there could be no question that this man was his enemy, as well.
“Romulus commands that these heretics be cleansed!”
“Well, if you think you can,” Aeon said, with a chuckle that carried more of pure menace than Ezio had previously heard from the man who had accompanied him on so many of the tasks that he’d taken up when he and the rest of his family had been forced to make their way to Roma so that they could stay one step ahead of the Borgia and their Templar masters. “Then I welcome you to try.”
Chapter 374: Among the wolves
Chapter Text
Aeon’s shining, red blades snapped out with the familiar hissing sound – Ezio still found himself wondering just what kind of mechanism powered those blades of his, but he knew that it was yet one more mystery that the man in black would like as not wish to keep to himself, so he hadn’t bothered asking after it – that Ezio had heard so many times before, and in the space of only a blink, Aeon himself was standing before the man who had ordered their deaths in such a callous manner. However, instead of sweeping his blades through the masked man’s torso, an outcome that Ezio had found himself apprehensive about nearly as soon as the man in black had made his move, Aeon gave the man the lightest of shoves to the chest, unbalancing him from where he had been standing and sending the man tumbling down among those he’d once been standing so far above.
Ezio chuckled softly. “Grazie, amico!”
“Of course,” Aeon called back down, before vanishing to reappear back among the group of wolfmen, and those who seemed to have taken their own inspiration from him. “I suspect that we will be more than capable of seeing to those that remain; go and seek out that treasure room of theirs.”
“Bene, I will,” he said, knowing that there was little enough that he himself could offer in terms of skill to the battle that Aeon was about to engage in.
Truly, there was little enough that anyone who’d not bound themselves to the Apple in whatever strange way that Aeon had somehow managed to do would be able to contribute to any battle that Aeon chose to personally involve himself in.
As he continued on his way down through the catacombs that the wolfmen had been haunting for only they truly knew how long, Ezio found that he couldn’t quite manage to banish them from his mind. No one living could match Aeon’s preternatural speed, and there didn’t seem to be a single kind of weapon that wouldn’t find itself cloven in two pieces or several when Aeon turned his Ethereal Blades upon it or its wielder. Shuddering as he found himself reflecting upon the fates of the men he’d left behind.
Forcing those thoughts out of his mind, knowing that the men who had given themselves over to the Borgia would have thought nothing of leaving any of their foes to Aeon if they had somehow managed to convince the man in black to support their cause instead of that of the Assassins, Ezio continued on his way through the catacombs. When he finally managed to make his way into the treasure room that lay at the end of every one of the lairs that housed the wolfmen that he and Aeon had steadily been rooting out, Ezio turned to see Aeon himself making his way into the room alongside him.
“I see you found what we came here for,” the man in black said, looking around for a long moment before making his way over to where Ezio was standing.
“Sí, I have,” he said, knowing that Aeon wouldn’t have come to seek him out if he hadn’t managed to deal with the last of the opposition that Ezio had left behind but finding that he didn’t wish to think about it, all the same.
When Aeon removed the Apple from the safety and concealment of his torso, handing it over to Ezio even as he himself vanished back into it once more, Ezio found that he couldn’t quite manage to hold back a sigh. While it was true that he wasn’t about to begin mourning the deaths of those whose only purpose in life seemed to be to cause havoc and terror for those whose only desire was to live free in the world as it was, Ezio still found himself uneasy. He almost wished that he could speak to Desmond for a long moment, but he knew that that wasn’t a likely prospect, either.
Truly, Aeon’s presence, as much as a boon as it was and had been to the battle that he and the rest of the Brotherhood were waging against the Templars, was beginning to unsettle him the more Ezio found himself reflecting upon it. He was beginning to think that this was the reason that Altaïr had been so reluctant to enlist the man’s aid, in spite of all the sheer power that Aeon could bring to any battle he was allowed to make his presence known in.
Sighing again as he tucked away the scroll he’d collected from the strongbox that seemed to be as fundamental a part of all the lairs that he’d journeyed through as the wolfmen who haunted them, Ezio turned and made his way back up to the streets of Roma once more. He’d have the time to ponder those kinds of questions when he’d made it out of the lonely catacombs he’d been down in for longer than he would ever have preferred.
Once he’d made it back into the clear air and fading light of Roma proper, Ezio took a deep breath to fortify himself, and then turned and made for a nearby tunnel entrance. Brushing his left hand over the Apple, tucked safely away in the hidden pouch within his robes where he’d taken to storing it when he didn’t need it – or Aeon wasn’t using it to manifest and either walk or fight beside him – Ezio almost stopped in his tracks as the sensation of Aeon’s phantom hand brushed over the back of his own.
Looking down at the part of his robes that concealed the Apple, Ezio wished for a moment that he could have seen through the layers concealing the artifact; still, even the light that the Apple gave off when someone made use of it was concealed by the clothes he was wearing, a fact he’d never had cause to regret before this moment.
Chapter 375: For the love of the people
Chapter Text
Shaking his head at where his wayward thoughts had brought him, Ezio continued on his way through the tunnels until he’d managed to make it back to the Rosa in Fiore once again. There was little he desired more than to have his last meal of the day and then take some rest for the night. Of course, he also wished that he could speak with Desmond, not only for the reassurance that the young man could have provided for him, but also to ask him what impact Aeon had had on the Brotherhood as a whole. Still, he knew that there was such a slim chance of that that he shouldn’t bother asking.
Still, there might be something I can do, he mused, considering just what he would need in order to see that Desmond could know at least some of what had been in his mind while the young man from the future had been watching him at work. His plans firmly fixed in mind, and his stomach now insisting that it be filled, Ezio chuckled as he made his way up to the Rosa’s dining room. Little Maria would tease him, of course, but he’d long since come to the point where he enjoyed that kind of gentle prodding more than anything.
~AC: Bro~
Once he’d rested, eaten, and thus fortified himself for the new day, Ezio made sure to arm himself as well as he ever did, before tucking the Apple safely within his robes. After having a night to sleep on matters and a morning to reflect upon them, Ezio had decided that – while he was still going to make some effort to leave a message for posterity in general and Desmond in particular – while his prowess and abilities could be unsettling due to how completely overwhelming they were, Aeon hadn’t truly done anything but lend his aid to the Brotherhood whenever and however he could.
It would, therefore, hardly be fair to the man if he treated him differently because of circumstances that might have easily been out of both of their control.
Having made his way to a nearby market, in search of a journal that he would be able to fill with his thoughts for Desmond to read and reflect upon, Ezio paused as he began to hear the soft, hitching sobs of someone in pain; someone who didn’t wish to be noticed, given how quiet they were clearly trying to be. Turning his path so that he could get closer to whoever it was that was trying to conceal themselves from the notice of the crowds still milling about within the part of Roma where the pair of them had chanced to find each other.
There had to be something he could do to help this one, even if it was just to lend an ear to whatever troubles had brought them to the bench they were sitting on with their sorrows in the first place.
As he drew closer to said bench, however, Ezio found himself reminded of Luvia with an almost painful twinge in his chest, once he’d caught sight of the woman – curled up on herself and sobbing as she was – who’d hidden herself away in this rarely-traveled corner of the marketplace. There were still differences, of course, foremost among them being that Luvia had borne her grief with a stoic – if hopeless – sort of resolve when the pair of them had chanced to meet, while the woman he was currently sitting next to had clearly broken under the weight of the grief that she bore. Ezio wasn’t about to look down on her for that, of course, since Luvia’s grief had ultimately driven her to try taking her own life for the sole purpose of making a statement to her husband.
A statement that Ezio had found himself honestly doubting would have made the kind of impact that Luvia had clearly meant it to.
Returning his attention to the woman he was currently standing before, Ezio found himself startled when she pulled away, and then increasingly furious at whoever it was that had blackened both her eyes and bloodied her lips.
“Stop!” she called, plaintively holding up her arms; Ezio found himself seething with a colder rage than he’d felt before, when he realized that she expected to be assaulted even in the place where she had come to seek what shelter she could find in a city that had been overtaken by the Borgia. “Hasn’t he hurt me enough?”
“I did not come here to hurt you, Madonna,” Ezio said, pitching his voice to be as reassuring as he could manage, under the circumstances. “I won’t touch you if you don’t want me to. Though, if it isn’t too painful for you, I would wish to know who did this to you.”
“My beloved husband, Auguste,” she said, giving a bitter, strangled sort of laugh. “He used to make signs for the shops around here, but ever since the Borgia came,” that same laugh seemed to wrench itself involuntarily from her, and Ezio found his rage growing all the colder, sharper, and more focused as the experiences that he’d previously had with the Borgia and all of their lackeys served to fill in the blanks of the story he was hearing; the same story he’d heard, in so many permutations, ever since he and his had arrived in Roma not such a long time ago. “Now he posts lies for them, and attacks anyone who tries to speak out against him.”
“Even those he should protect before all others sí?” he asked, knowing just what he’d hear, but wishing to give the woman a chance to speak her mind, as she’d likely been beaten into silence any other time she’d tried to do that very thing.
“Sí,” she said, and the expression she turned on him as she said that was filled now with the kind of calm relief he was nearly certain that she hadn’t the chance to feel in some time, no matter where she’d tried to go in order to take what refuge she could get in a place like this. Then, as though to prove that she hadn’t yet had all the spirit wrung out of her, at least not yet, she continued. “If you wish to draw his attention, you could begin tearing down the propaganda he posts for the Borgia. It would wound his pride, and the man seems to hold that above everything else.”
Even his own life, Ezio added silently, allowing himself a small, approving smile as the woman he was speaking to showed him the fortitude that he’d been hoping that she still possessed when he’d seen her face for the first time. “Bene, I’ll keep that in mind, Madonna,” he said, rising from the bench so he could start doing just that. “Don’t worry; he won’t be troubling anyone for much longer.”
“Grazie,” the woman said, and he knew that she fully understood what he was going to do to the man who should have cared for her and protected her above all others.
In the end, he was only forced to remove five of the posters that man who’d made himself Ezio’s next target had put up around this part of Roma, before someone apparently told him what was going on and the man himself came stomping out to confront him. Almost literally so, considering he wore-heavy-looking boots and wielded a hammer that looked even heavier. Sighing briefly, having already known that those who chose to give themselves over to the Borgia for promises of power, prestige, or simply more money than they themselves could rightfully earn were also the kind to fight viciously for what they felt that they were owed by the world as a whole, Ezio waded into this latest battle of his.
There were times that he wished this struggle of his could be over and done with, but then he would find himself set against men such as this one, and then he would remember just who it was that he and all of the Brotherhood were ultimately fighting for.
When he’d finally managed to lay the red-bearded man with his oversized hammer to rest, striking the fatal blow while the man had been off-balanced from his own over-extended strike – one that had been clearly aimed to take Ezio’s head off – and taking the opportunity to yank the hammer from the man’s slackening grip so that he couldn’t attempt to make use of it even if he had been the beneficiary of one of the kind of last gasps of desperate, rage-driven strength that Ezio had read about more than a few times when he was a boy.
Back before he’d so much as heard a single word about Assassins, Templars, or the continuing battle that the two groups waged with one another over the fate of the world they all lived in.
“Requiescat in pace,” he said, not bothering to gentle the snappishness he could hear in his own voice when he spoke.
Truly, the man he’d just dispatched was one of the more loathsome he’d ever had the misfortune to come across while he’d been working to root out the corruption that the Borgia and their Templar masters had been working to spread to every corner of the world that they had been able to make their way to.
Chapter 376: French fracas
Chapter Text
Before he could turn and begin making his way back toward the woman he’d left sitting on the bench, to at least reassure her that the man who had been such a burden to her was no longer in a position to trouble anyone with his arrogance and rage, Ezio caught sight of the familiar form of another of the Brotherhood making their way over the nearby rooftops in a clear effort to make contact with him.
As the robed figure drew ever closer, Ezio found himself smiling more and more widely as the familiar form of little Maria was revealed as the one who’d come to meet with him.
She smiled back when she caught sight of his expression, but Ezio couldn’t help but notice the harried edge to her motions, even as she scanned the most likely approaches for whoever was presumably pursuing her.
“Who’s after you, sorellina?” he asked, once she’d clearly managed to satisfy herself that none of her pursuers had managed to make it to this place alongside her.
“That French puttana has been sending soldiers after Pantasilea and I ever since the pair of us managed to escape him, after his forces tried to ambush us on the road,” little Maria said, her gaze still periodically scanning for anyone who looked threatening; the way her hands would tense, seeming as though she was having to force herself not to reach for the concealed weapons that each and every Assassin carried as a matter of course, told Ezio nearly everything he needed to know about what his little sister had been put through during the time that the Baron de Valois had been sending his dogs after her.
“Did you manage to get Pantasilea to safety, as well?”
“Sí,” his littlest sister said, breathing deeply in a clear effort to calm herself after everything she’d been but through during the course of what was clearly one of the more trying days that she’d been put through since their work as Assassins had begun. “Though, if it’s all the same to you, fratello, I don’t think this is the best place to talk about that kind of thing.”
“Vero,” he said, nodding and knowing it was true, even as he and little Maria made their way back up to the rooftops, both so that they would be able to stay out of sight of whatever remained of the soldiers that Valois had sent out after her, and so that the pair of them would be able to make their way to their next destination all the more easily. “Still, Bartolommeo will want to know what’s happened, and I don’t want to take the chance that one of those cani bastardi pursuing you might get in a lucky shot.”
“Grazie,” little Maria said, smiling in a weary sort of way as the pair of them continued on their way to the barracks where Bartolommeo and his forces were quartered.
It seemed to take just that much longer than usual, which might have been due to the tension that he could feel humming in his nerves as he found himself thinking about all the things that could have gone wrong for both little Maria and Pantasilea while they had been making their escape from Valois and his forces,, but also might have simply been due to the fact that that those selfsame forces seemed to be quite a bit more aware of their surroundings than Ezio had seen from any of the others that he and his brother and sister Assassins had had run-ins with in the past. Either way, he was more than grateful to come back onto the grounds where Bartolommeo’s barracks stood, knowing that he would find not only the aid that he and little Maria would need in order to begin planning a counter-attack, but also some certainty in what was becoming a more and more uncertain time.
When he and little Maria made their way into the compound, however, Ezio found himself faced with the point of Bartolomeo’s greatsword, Bianca; the sword itself glimmered as though it had been freshly sharpened, and Ezio chuckled.
“Salve to you, too,” he said, grinning in sardonic amusement as the large, bluff mercenary stopped in his tracks.
“Ezio!” the man exclaimed, putting the greatsword away before he could have made any more mistakes. “I was expecting my wife.”
“You’ve no need to worry, amico,” little Maria said, closing with Bartolomeo as the three of them began making their way into the barracks. “She’s safe, though I think it’s best that I wait to tell you more until we’re all inside.”
The sounds of increased fighting drew Ezio’s attention back to the parade grounds within the walls, and in particular to the three gates that stood open, in preparation for Bartolomeo’s men to depart through once they had armed themselves properly. Or else, he mused, the morbid thought coming upon him all unawares, for the French to use for their own men to attack. “What’s your situation with the French general?” he asked, as the three of them made their way up to the iron-banded door of the barracks.
“I’ll soon have Valois by the throat,” Bartolomeo said, and if he were another sort of man, the clear confidence in the mercenary captain’s tone would have set Ezio at least somewhat more at ease. “You’ve no need to worry.”
However, considering his familiarity with Bartolomeo, and how much he knew the man tended to disregard any form of personal danger that he might find himself confronted by, Ezio found that he couldn’t quite bring himself to settle down. He was proven right just a few moments later, when the stone of the wall the three of them were standing just a handful of paces away from was abruptly cratered by the sharp retort of what could only be one of the arquebusiers working for the French forces that Bartolomeo held in such contemp.
“It seems that they’re getting closer,” he said, looking back from the newly-cratered wall to the open gates that would serve to do far more than just allow Bartolomeo’s troops in and out of the barracks to challenge them.
“The situation is under control,” the mercenary himself said, waving Ezio’s concerns off as though they were annoying insects; there were times when he wished that he could grab the larger man and shake some sense into him, but he honestly doubted even that kind of thing would work.
“Bartolomeo, you know-” a sudden rush of Bartolomeo’s own mercenaries, back in through the three gates that had been standing open in order to allow them to do just that, cut off whatever it was that little Maria was going to say.
And, while it could hardly be considered a good thing, that Bartolomeo’s forces were being pressed to retreat in the face of their French adversaries, Ezio had the distinct feeling that it was also the only thing that could have gotten through to Bartolomeo in his current frame of mind. At least, the only thing that wouldn’t end up costing them more than what they’d ended up gaining, in the end.
“Okay, so I might need some help,” Bartolomeo admitted, with that same, dismissive tone he’d spoken about the French forces attacking him.
“Bene,” he said, knowing that it wouldn’t do anyone here any good if he got into an argument with Bartolomeo over the man’s methods and the seeming distain he held for anything that didn’t involve bashing his opponent’s head in with whatever weapon he managed to lay his hands to.
Or else cleaving them with his greatsword, but the principle still stood.
“We’ll cover your troops while they make their retreat, sí?” little Maria asked, turning to face Bartolomeo, even as her hands went again to the sword that she’d been carrying for so long that Ezio sometimes found himself feeling as though it was just as much a part of her as any of her actual limbs.
He wondered, sometimes, if little Maria herself felt the same way, but that wasn’t the kind of thing they talked about when they weren’t working; and, of course, there was never time when they were.
In the end, the pair of them did indeed give the aid that Bartolomeo had clearly needed for some time, and all of his troops were able to make it back into the fortified barracks and close the gates behind them. That wasn’t the end of things, of course, since the French troops who had been pursuing them were still clearly strong enough to hold the barracks under siege for at least some time, though Ezio couldn’t say for certain just how long a time that would actually be.
Still, the question became rather moot once the mounted form of a man who figured to be the Baron de Valois – if the way he was dressed and the way his horse was caparisoned was anything to go by – himself arrived at the front lines of what had seemed to be shaping up into a siege. Narrowing his eyes as he looked over the ranks of Frenchmen now drawing back together after they had parted to allow the Baron to make his appearance before them, Ezio studied the man that they were soon to be facing.
He seemed to have the same kind of arrogant bearing as all of the other allies – or lackeys, given how Cesare Borgia seemed to think of everyone who wasn’t him – that the Borgia as a whole employed.
“Bonjour, General d’Alviano, are you prepared to surrender?” the Baron asked, a smarmily pleased expression on his aristocratic face.
“Why don’t you come over here and ask me that?!” Bartolomeo demanded, brandishing his greatsword, even from behind the gates where they all stood.
“You truly must learn to speak French, mon General,” de Valois mocked. “It might serve to mask your barbaric sensibilities.”
“Perhaps you could teach me,” Bartolomeo mocked right back, sounding about as unimpressed with the Baron de Valois as Ezio himself felt. “And I would be able to instruct you in fighting, since you seem to do so little of it!”
Valois narrowed his eyes, the smile on his face thinning just enough to let anyone who had experience in reading the nuances of human expression than an Assassin came to have over the course of their work as one of those who sought to safeguard the freedom of humanity from the shadows that he’d heard the barb, without acknowledging it.
“As amusing as this whole parlay has been, I’m afraid I’m going to have to request that your formal, unconditional surrender be delivered by sunrise,” the Baron said, in a tone that suggested that he was far more amused by the words that had been exchanged than he had any real right to be.
Ezio had been suspecting that there was something far more than mere bravado behind the Baron’s words ever since he’d started speaking, something in his manner all but screaming that there was more to their present situation than had first been obvious when the man hadn’t reacted to Bartolomeo’s prodding in the way that the other Borgia dogs had when they were faced with such a thing. It was clear that there was something that gave him such confidence; something over and above the fact that he and his currently had Bartolomeo’s barracks surrounded.
After all, it was more than possible that their forces would be able to rout their attackers, or at least to bloody them enough that taking the fortified barracks would be untenable.
“Hah! My lady Bianca will whisper it in your ear!” Bartolomeo shouted, brandishing his greatsword once again.
The Baron actually chuckled at that; hardly a good sign when they were facing him in combat, particularly considering their respective sides.
“I believe another lady might object to that,” the Baron returned, the arrogance in his tone and manner not having diminished in even the slightest way.
Ezio bit down on his tongue as he saw the struggling form of a woman to the front-lines; he also heard little Maria’s sudden intake of breath and wondered just what had become of whatever place that she had originally left Pantasilea.
“I’ll kill you, fottutto francese!” Bartolomeo bellowed, as the struggling woman with the burlap sack over her head and her hands lashed firmly behind her back was shoved almost up to the side of the Baron’s own horse where he stood on the field before them.
“Calm down, for your wife’s sake,” the Baron said, the smarmy expression on his face making what would have otherwise merely sounded like helpful advice into mockery. “You may rest assured that no true Frenchman would ever harm a woman,” an oily smirk twisted his face. “At least, not without cause. Now, I’m sure even a brute like you will be able to understand the urgency of your current situation; I expect to see you at my headquarters at dawn. Unarmed. And practice your French, as well. Soon, all Italie will be speaking it.”
The Baron raised his right arm, almost before he’d finished speaking, and one of his infantrymen picked Pantasilea up like a sack of grain, throwing her across a nearby officer’s horse as the lot of them all turned to leave the barracks.
“I’ll kill you, pezzo di merda figlio di puttana!” Bartolomeo snarled, all but slamming his greatsword down upon the gates that they’d been standing behind for the duration of the Baron’s posturing.
Ezio wasn’t quite certain what he expected to happen next, but being silently drafted by little Maria to help drag Bartolomeo back into the barracks before he could go off and do something foolish as he’d clearly been planning was almost a relief, under the circumstances. Once the three of them had managed to make it back into the inner-room where the maps and other tools of long-duration campaigning had been stored, Ezio turned to little Maria as she let out a long, shaky breath. There was plainly more on her mind than just what the three of them had born witness to while the Baron had been strutting like a peacock before them.
He wasn’t the first one to break the silence, however.
“Why did you drag me off like that, piccola Aquila?” Bartolomeo demanded, using a term for little Maria that Ezio hadn’t ever thought to hear from the mercenary when he addressed her.
“Because, amico mio, if that fottutto Francese had managed to lay his hands to your wife, we would have all heard about it long before we all sat down to discuss things here,” little Maria said, her harsh, flat tone seeming almost like a series of slaps to the face.
“What do you mean, sorellina?” he asked, before Bartolomeo could begin working up a proper head of steam once again.
“I sent her to stay with Mother and Claudia in the Rosa in Fiore,” little Maria said, the spark of determination and defiance in her eyes growing just that much stronger as she turned to look at Bartolomeo once more, “If any of General Valois’ army had showed up there, we would have known about it; at the very least, they would have sent out a message calling for help.”
“Bene, then maybe we should do the same,” he said, rising from his seat at the table so that he could gather the materials that he would need to send his own message in turn. “If only to see how she’s been settling in.”
“Sí, that would take a great deal off of my mind, Ezio,” Bartolomeo said, a great deal of the tension that had been gathering in his powerful frame departing with that pronouncement. “And, grazie for all that you did for me, Madonna Maria.”
“Of course,” little Maria said, and Ezio smiled softly as he fetched some parchment and a bit of charcoal that would be suitable for writing messages.
In the end, just as he’d been expecting from the moment he’d suggested such a course of action, Bartolomeo was the one who insisted on writing the message that was aimed to put him in contact with the woman he loved so much. Once that was done, Ezio noticed the familiar sensation of Aeon making his presence known to the world outside the Apple once more. He placed the artifact on the table and stepped back, watching with Bartolomeo and little Maria as Aeon emerged once more.
Chapter 377: False flag
Chapter Text
“You’ve been paying attention to our conversation?” he asked, not wanting to make assumptions, but at the same time feeling as though such was a question that he didn’t truly need to ask.
“I have,” Aeon said, nodding as the last of the light that had emerged from the Apple settled into his black-cloaked form. “I have an idea as to how you might further turn the present situation to your advantage, if you wish to hear it.”
“What did you have in mind?” he asked, knowing that Aeon was bound to suggest something both inspired and unconventional.
“That French General causing you so much trouble clearly expects you to have taken the bait that he set out for you,” the man in black said, folding his arms elegantly over his broad chest, sweeping his golden gaze over the table that he, little Maria, and Bartolomeo had all settled themselves around once the matter of reestablishing contact with Pantasilea had been dealt with. “Such a situation would doubtless provide ample opportunities to turn his ploy back upon him.”
“Sí, you have a point,” he said, feeling a bit foolish for not having thought of such a thing on his own, but knowing that even the best of tacticians needed the aid of others on their side at times.
Aeon vanished back into the Apple, once the four of them had finished finalizing their plans for the infiltration and attack on Castra Praetoria, with only a brief admonishment to call him once they’d managed to fully prepare themselves for such a thing, and Ezio thanked the man once again for lending his aid so often as he had. Aeon’s answering smile had been both pleased and grateful, and Ezio had smiled easily at him as he vanished once more into the depths of the Apple.
He still found himself wondering just what Aeon’s aid had made of the Brotherhood, in the latter days when Desmond lived among whatever wonders that the people of his time had created for themselves, and reminded himself once again to buy a journal when all of this had been settled; even if he Desmond no longer desired to speak to him, for fear of what it might have meant for the future, he would at least be able to present something of himself to the young man he’d never thought to have the chance to speak to.
It didn’t take such a long time to acquire the armor that he and Bartolomeo’s men would need to make good their foray into the Castra Praetoria where the French had forted themselves up, but one of them had been more alert than Ezio had been counting on. Making sure to clean the armor as best as he could manage while they were all still in the field, Ezio tucked a clean cloth in with the armor as he and Bartolomeo’s men packed away their spoils and made their way back to the barracks where Bartolomeo and little Maria were waiting for them.
Once they’d all made it back to the barracks, Ezio cleaned the armor again at the well, then made his way to the room where Bartolomeo and little Maria were waiting for him.
“What is it?” he asked, having been greeted by Bartolomeo’s annoyed harrumph as he’d been coming in.
“As brilliant as your plan is, Ezio, I’ve never had much patience for these kinds of tricks,” the mercenary captain said, standing up from the table as he sheathed his greatsword and little Maria fell into step with him. “I believe in a fair fight, and may the best man win.”
“That is a rather pleasant sentiment, but I doubt your enemies will share it,” Aeon said, having emerged from the Apple as soon as little Maria had informed the man in black that he’d returned.
“Humph. ‘There will come a day when men no longer cheat each other, and on that day we will see what mankind is truly capable of,’” Bartolomeo said, an arch tone to his voice as he quoted something.
“Father may have been right when he said that, but he isn’t here now,” little Maria said, turning with a subtly reproving expression on her face as she pinned Bartolomeo with her bright yellow eyes.
“Father said that?” he asked, both to break the tension that he could tell was building in the room, and because he was curious to know more about the side of their father that he’d only seemed to be able to show to little Maria.
“He wrote it down first, but he’d quote it when either of us was starting to get particularly aggravated about how our struggle seemed to be going,” little Maria said, a wistful tone to her voice, even as she looked to be preparing to wade into battle once again.
“Intesi,” he said, nodding as he made his way over to wrap his right arm around her shoulders.
Little Maria leaned into him for a long moment, before the pair of them separated once again, preparing themselves for what was going to come next. As he, little Maria, and all of the soldiers that Bartolomeo had assigned to this particular mission began preparing themselves began to prepare for the infiltration that they were about to undertake, Ezio looked over as Aeon came to stand with him and little Maria at the head of their group. He’d once again transformed himself into the younger form that he’d been wearing when the pair of them had infiltrated the party that Juan Borgia had been presiding over.
It was still just as interesting a sight as when Ezio had first seen it.
As he, little Maria, and Aeon all set out alongside Bartolomeo’s troops, Ezio saw the subtle ripple of the Apple’s power as it rushed out to envelop their group. For a moment, as they were all starting to move, Ezio was tempted to ask the man just what it was that he was doing. Still, as it was likely to be just the same kind of thing that he’d done to get them through the party under the very noses of the Borgia and the others who would have otherwise set themselves against them, Ezio knew that such an explanation would likely take longer than they presently had.
He also knew that they would need all of their focus when they made their attack on Valois and his troops; powerful as Aeon had proven himself to be, even he couldn’t be everywhere at once.
As their group continued on their way closer to the fortress that Valois had claimed for himself and his troops, Ezio could hear Bartolomeo grumbling about something or other.
“What was that?” he asked, sidling up to the man, under the cover of whatever kind of illusion that Aeon had cast over them to turn away whatever unfriendly eyes might chance to land on them while they were still on their way.
“Valois thinks he’s going to be leading the French to victory,” Bartolomeo scoffed, the harsh tone of his voice letting anyone in ear-shot know just what he thought of that. “He thinks that Cesare will allow the French to rule Italia; the little idiota is so blinded by the trickle of royalty in his blood that he can’t see the lay of the land he’s trying to make his stand on,” Bartolomeo growled, looking for a moment as though he wished to fiddle with the shackles that Ezio had fastened on his wrists. “Still, anyone who’s had the chance to actually meet the man knows that Cesare intends nothing less than to rule Italia for himself.”
He’d previously warned Bartolomeo that the shackles themselves were fakes, requiring only a tightly-clenched fist to defeat the latch, and as Ezio kept half an eye upon the mercenary captain while they all continued on their way to the Castra Praetoria he found himself hoping that Aeon’s contributions to their efforts would see them through as well as they had when the pair of them had attended Cesare’s party not so long ago. Bartolomeo was too disciplined to outright fidget, but only just. There was also something about their current situation that was getting to him, as well.
When Aeon fell into step at with him, at the front of their group beside himself and Bartolomeo, Ezio realized just what it was that had been itching at the back of his mind for the better part of their journey.
“I would have expected there to be guards along the way,” he said, keeping his voice low enough that it wouldn’t carry beyond the three of them as they continued down the path to the Castra Praetoria.
“There were,” Aeon said, and there was a certain sense of satisfaction to his tone, and when Ezio turned to look at the man in his shining armor and white surcoat, he found that Aeon was smiling in that same, self-amused way he had.
It was faint, but it was there all the same. And Ezio found that it was entirely too easy for him to imagine the way the man had done it; his preternatural speed combined with his Ethereal Blades made him a terrifying foe even to those who did have a chance to prepare for his appearance. Turning away as soon as he could be certain that Aeon wouldn’t take it amiss, Ezio returned his attention to the path that they were all on. He supposed that he shouldn’t truly hold the unsettling nature of Aeon’s abilities against the man, since there very well might have been more to his presence within the Apple than any of them knew.
In fact, such was more than likely the case, given how reluctant the man seemed to be on the subject of his past and just how he’d come to be in his present situation.
~AC: Bro~
When their group finally made it to the barred gates of the Castra Praetoria, Maria narrowed her eyes as she studied the men who had come out to meet them. They seemed like just the kind of thugs that Cesare would approve of, and even the fact that they spoke French couldn’t conceal that kind of thing. Maria herself had always thought it was an elegant sort of language, ever since Ezio had decided that she would help him practice while he learned to woo a group of French girls who had been staying in Firenze. Still, the brutish nature of the men Maria found herself facing all but completely cancelled out what limited elegance their use of the French language might have otherwise imparted to them.
When Ezio gave the signal, Maria chuckled as Aeon literally blurred into action, red blades snapping out with the sharp hiss that Maria was only just beginning to become somewhat accustomed to, considering that Ezio was the one who usually worked with Aeon. Once the battle had been joined, however, Valois was all too quick to back away, the woman with the burlap sack over her head, wearing what seemed to be a very good approximation of Pantasilea’s dress brandished before him as though she was a shield. It was a feeble sort of shield, to be sure, but Maria wasn’t about to let the man think he could get away with threatening innocents just to avoid battle himself.
The walls of the Praetoria had clearly been built with the aim of withstanding the type of siege engines that the ancient foes of Roma could bring to bear on it, and she suspected that it would have been all the more impregnable back when it was built. However, the natural weathering of the great stone edifice before her had left enough imperfections in the walls that Maria was able to make her way up the walls and onto the rooftop with only slightly more exertion than she’d ever found herself put through when making her way across the rooftops of Roma as a whole.
Drawing her sword, she cut down two of the Frenchmen she’d found herself confronted by, using her newly-acquired pistola to deal with the pair that had been standing just out of her reach while she’d been dealing with the other two. Breathing more easily once she’d managed to clear out the rooftop, Maria paused for a moment to concentrate on her second-sight. She’d learned, simply from using the sense often enough and for long enough, that if she simply concentrated on who she was looking at for enough time, she’d be able to see them even through walls.
Or, at least through the wall nearest to wherever she presently was, since either she hadn’t refined the sense enough to see through more than one wall, or else that kind of thing just wasn’t possible in the first place.
Still, now that she could see just where it was that Valois was hiding, along with the woman he had taken prisoner – her form washed in the pale gray light of those who stood apart from the Assassins and Templars altogether – Maria primed her pistola once more. Popping up from behind what cover the lip of the roof she was standing on could offer her, she took aim at Valois’ left side and fired. He quickly lost his grip on the woman who he’d clearly been hoping to use to escape from the battle that he himself had instigated with his actions, and Maria quickly shot him in the left foot when he attempted to run after her.
Making her way back down to the ground as quickly as she could, Maria caught up to the woman that Valois had been holding hostage. She turned out to be a captured citizen from Roma by the name of Bettina Aliotti. Naturally, she also turned out to be furious enough at being taken prisoner by Valois that she accepted the offer to join the Assassins almost before Maria had finished making it.
Telling Bettina that she would take her to meet up with Bartolomeo and his mercenary forces once she’d once she’d finished her present business with Valois, she turned her attention to the Frenchman once more.
“I have the ear of King Louis XII!” Valois shouted, clearly desperate to evade the stalking death that he’d just realized was coming for him. “Whatever you might desire, Mademoiselle, I can see that you obtain it! Simply let me go on my way, and you can have money, power, and a fine title of your own! I swear, I will put in the best possible word about you!” he shouted at her, limping backwards even as she moved to close the distance that remained between the pair of them.
The sound of battering rams drew both of their attention, then, but Maria kept her eyes trained upon Valois, even as his own flickered towards the doors and then snapped right back to her. It seemed as though Bartolomeo – likely with a great deal of help from Aeon, since she didn’t yet know of any force in all the world that could stand up to the man in black, whatever color he was currently wearing – had managed to rout the French forces and was making his way into the back courtyard where she and Valois were having their confrontation.
Moving forward again, not bothering anymore with the stream of pleading noises that she could hear from the Frenchman’s mouth – truly, he seemed about as pathetic as she’d been expecting of those who’d chosen to throw in their lot with Cesare rather than being coerced into doing so by whatever kind of holds that those horse-fucking bastards had over them – Maria drew her sword, just as what fight had ever been in Valois went out of him and he knelt at her feet.
“Requiescat in pace,” she said, dipping her head slightly in acknowledgement of the man.
Gathering herself again, even as she wiped the blood from her blade and sheathed it once more, Maria smiled softly as she saw Ezio making his way over to where she was standing.
“It’s good to see you again, fratello,” she said, reaching out to embrace him as he kissed her hello and the pair of them fell into step.
Bettina hurried over when Maria waved to the other woman, and she introduced the pair of them, stepping back slightly so that Ezio could take his own measure of her. The pair of them seemed to get on well enough, and Maria could plainly hear the conviction in Bettina’s voice when she pledged her aid to the Assassins in all their future struggles.
Chapter 378: Cause célèbre
Chapter Text
Keeping an eye on little Maria, at least as well as he could when the pair of them were close enough together that she could see him doing it – which would bring him no end of good-natured teasing on the subject of his being a mother hen if little Maria were to catch him at it, he knew – Ezio looked over to Aeon. Once there was no need for him for him to remain in the guise of what seemed to be a younger version of himself, Aeon had naturally returned to the black-cloaked, long-haired form that seemed to be the one he favored.
Ezio found himself wondering if such a preference was simply because that was indeed the way he’d looked during his life, or if there was another reason for the comfort that Aeon clearly took in wearing that form. However, the knowledge of just how unlikely he was to find any kind of answers to even the most innocuous of his questions went as far as anything could to dissuade him from giving voice to them.
Still, the knowledge that he and his were safe from yet another of Cesare Borgia’s lackeys made him feel a great deal better about the situation than he otherwise would have,
As their group made their way steadily back through the tunnels to the Brotherhood’s headquarters at Isola Tiberina, after having parted company with Bartolomeo and Pantasilea at the barracks where the pair of them had been staying for so long, Ezio found himself called upon by Leonardo once more. He’d the feeling he knew just what the determinedly eccentric inventor had in mind to ask him, but he also knew just what kind of a danger that the war machines that he had been pressed into designing for the Borgia would cause if they were allowed to remain in the world.
It was with that in mind that Ezio bid a fond farewell to his littlest sister – though anyone with eyes could see that she wasn’t truly little anymore – and made his way into the room that Leonardo had claimed for himself within the Brotherhood’s headquarters in Roma.
“Ezio, so good to see you again,” his old friend said, standing up so that the pair of them could embrace and say a proper hello.
“It’s good to see you again, too, amico mio,” he said, smiling as the pair of them settled down once more at the little table that seemed to be Leonardo’s favorite to hold meetings with when someone or other would come to pay him a visit. “However, it seems as though you have need of more than just my company.”
“Sí,” the inventor said, nodding sharply as he pulled out another map, this one just as elegantly drawn as any of the others Ezio had been given. “I’ve finally managed to uncover the location of the naval warship that they had me designing,” Leonardo sighed, a relieved cast to his face as he looked back up from the finishing touches that he’d clearly been putting on the map. “It’s the last of the devices that they managed to get out of me, so once you finish with it it’ll be a great weight off of my mind.”
“Sí, and mine as well,” he said, taking the completed map from his old friend with a flash of the same kind of relief that the inventor himself seemed to be feeling.
Making his way back up and out of the Brotherhood’s headquarters, after stopping for a moment to speak with little Maria about the young woman that she had recruited, Ezio paused for a moment to gather his thoughts. Truly, this was the first time that he would be calling upon Aeon in what – he hoped – wouldn’t end up becoming the kind of pitched battle wherein he needed the assistance of the man in black. Still, the enigmatic Guardian had long since proven himself to be an invaluable part of the Brotherhood, no matter the strange circumstances that had brought him to them.
In the end, that was what truly mattered.
Chapter 379: Fire and water
Chapter Text
After the pair of them had spoken for a few moments, with Ezio managing to secure Aeon’s cooperation with the same ease that he’d always seemed to do in the past, he moved out again with a much lighter feeling in his heart. Even considering what he already knew, it was good to have the support of someone such as Aeon; no matter how unsettling he sometimes found the man in black.
Once the pair of them had made it to the docks where the last of the war machines that Leonardo had been pressed into designing by the Borgia when they’d had him in their depraved clutches, with Aeon’s ephemeral form laid over his like a weightless, shimmering cloak – serving as both the most perfect of disguises and also as a way for the both of them to benefit from the man’s preternatural abilities – Ezio found himself listening in on what seemed to be a group of guards – the same kind, he suspected, that he himself would have seen if he’d been given the opportunity to observe himself in any real detail – and paused for a lingering moment to hear what he could.
It seemed that a man by the name of Eduardo – an impressed gondolier, by the sound of him – would be his best method of gaining access to the interior of the docks.
Knowing that Aeon would understand the needs of their current objective just as well as he did – part of the reason that the pair of them were traveling in tandem – Ezio waited and watched, until the aforementioned gondolier had passed beneath their eyes, and then watching in anticipation as the world around him blurred into a mess of lines and colors for the endless instant of time that it took for Aeon to make use of that preternatural speed of his. Reorienting himself, now standing at ease within the darkened interior of the docks, Ezio closed his eyes for a long moment, even as Aeon took over movement for the pair of them.
Truly, he didn’t think he’d ever get used to moving as fast as Aeon seemed to make a habit of; no matter the advantages, and he could hardly deny that they were many, he didn’t think his stomach would forgive him if he made a habit of traveling in such a way.
Narrowing his eyes slightly, once his stomach had settled back into its accustomed place and he could be assured of suffering nothing more than the mildest of nausea, Ezio observed the guards as they went about their appointed tasks below him. He didn’t know just how far he had to do, in order to make it into the dry-dock that all of the layers of security he was making his way through served to stand guard over, but it was a simple fact that – no matter how thick the walls or doors of the dry-dock he and Aeon were making their way towards – they would end up needing to kill at least some of the guards that stood watch over these watery halls and corridors.
Whether in the course of making their way into the room itself, or that of making their ultimate escape from this place; there were simply too many men standing in the way, whatever their motives for serving men such as the Borgia, for the pair of them to come out of this without more blood on their hands. However ephemeral those hands might have been, in Aeon’s particular case. Still, as he continued deeper into the watery corridors that would ultimately bring them into the dry-dock that served to shelter the last of the war machines that he was searching for, Ezio reminded himself as sternly as he ever had that these men, too, had made their own choices.
Whether it was good for them in the end or not, it was one of the foremost things that the Brotherhood fought for: the right of everyone who lived to make their own choices.
Taking a deep breath to steady himself once more, even as he regained control of his limbs and body from Aeon for the second time since the pair of them had made their way into this place, Ezio returned his attention to his and Aeon’s ultimate goal once again. He was hardly going to get the chance to finish this mission if he didn’t start it, after all. The men who chose to stand against him would keep, but that naval war machine that Leonardo had described to him was hardly going to go and destroy itself.
Once he and Aeon had managed to make it into the room that obviously held the dry-dock itself, given the abundance of guards he could now see, and the form of what could only be the war machine itself that he just managed to catch a glimpse of, Ezio paused for only a moment, before Aeon urged him forward and the pair of them made their way into the center of the room. The guards inside the dry-dock took no more notice of him than those at Cesare’s party, or even those who had been stalking Egidio Troche through the streets of Roma. Not one of them looked over at him, immersed as he was within Aeon’s ephemeral body, not even when he made his way to the center of the expansive room he and Aeon now stood in.
Of course, all of that changed once Aeon separated himself from Ezio’s form, standing as himself for the first time since the pair of them had made their way into the depths of this place in order to deal with the last fruits of Leonardo’s forced labor. Then they took note of the both of them, but by that time it was far too late for even every one of them to have stood the slightest chance of hindering the progress that he and Aeon had made together. Turning away from the sound of men being cut down all around him – he’d asked Aeon to at least attempt to spare those who ran from battle, and the man in black had agreed, provided that they hadn’t simply departed or been dispatched to fetch reinforcements – Ezio searched for the plans that had been drawn up for this machine.
Even though they were Leonardo’s in the end, the inventor felt no particular attachment to them, and had in fact asked that Ezio destroy them when he found them. Considering the circumstances, Ezio was more than pleased to take care of such a thing.
Once he’d found the plans, destroying them with the very torch that had been used to illuminate the alcove where they had been stored for the use of the Borgia and their lackeys, Ezio turned his attention to the war machine itself. Aeon, having since disposed of the last of the guards who had been stationed in the room all around them, vanished once more into the depths of the Apple with a sharp nod in his direction. Making his way past the corpses that had been scattered over the floor in the wake of Aeon’s movements, Ezio shook off the melancholy that had gripped him more and more of late when he would find himself confronted with the results of the infiltrations he was having to make.
It would be a relief, after all of this was over and done with, to go back to hunting for the Borgia and their willing conspirators.
Chapter 380: Boats will burn
Chapter Text
Continuing on his way, Ezio managed to find the controls to open the floodgates, swimming through the resulting water to the war machine. From inside, the device looked even more like some kind of overly-designed gondola than it had when he’d merely been been looking at the thing from the outside. Still, that probably had been the base that Leonardo had worked off of, and Ezio could see the advantages in maneuverability that such a base would provide to anyone who might have been given the chance to use it.
If he’d been the type to allow such a dangerous device to remain in the hands of the Borgia, at least. Let’s see how well you can bite your master’s hand, he mused, turning the war machine in the direction of the Borgia fleet that he’d spotted while he and Aeon had been making their way down into this place. At first, while he was making his way into position, those manning the boats didn’t quite seem to know what to do in response to his presence; he’d been expecting as much, however, both since he was in a machine that had been created through the means of their Templar masters, and initiative seemed to be a thing that the Templars sought to stamp out in its entirety.
One more reason to fight them; as though he needed such a thing, at this point.
After he’d fired his first shots – from what turned out to be a flamethrower, of all things – those on the remaining ships were quick to take up arms against him. Steering out of the range of the archers that had been emplaced on the ships before him, seemingly for just this sort of a situation, Ezio fired back when he could. He focused the balance of his attention on the sails, taking care to destroy the maneuverability of the ships he’d set himself against, but when he could he also set fire to the decks and hulls of the ships around him.
The same thing that made them proof against the water that would have otherwise rotted their hulls out from under them, of course, would also make them all the more vulnerable to the fire he was currently wielding.
Once the last of the twelve boats that had been moored in this area was in flaming ruins, Ezio breathed deeply so as to resolve himself to his next course of action. Stretching his hands, since they’d cramped up more than a little after having spent so much time wrapped around the handle that had controlled the firing mechanism for this particular war machine, Ezio made his careful way to the part of the boat where the flamethrower itself had been mounted. The controls on the modified gondola themselves would have hardly allowed for him to carry out the plan he was now enacting, and as he gave a harsh shove to the flamethrower’s housing to fix it into position, Ezio again found himself wishing that he could’ve found a way to bring this one into the service of the Brotherhood.
Still, as impossible as such an idea had been with the rolling artillery platform that Leonardo had put so much work into, it would have been more than doubly so in the case of this fiery, waterborne weapon.
Chapter 381: Parachutist
Chapter Text
Making his way back into Roma once more, and then back down into the tunnels once he’d found an entrance that wasn’t being watched by whatever unfriendly eyes might have been concealing themselves within the crowds of Roma as they went about their daily business, Ezio allowed himself to relax the rest of the way as he continued onward in the direction of the Brotherhood’s hideout on Isola Tiberina. He always found it rather amusing, those times he would find his thoughts wandering in such a direction, that whoever had been responsible for constructing the tunnel-system that ran underneath nearly the length and breadth of Roma had somehow contrived to make their way underneath the river itself.
He was near-certain that Leonardo would have cheerfully talked his ear off about the subject, if he’d been in any kind of position to begin such a conversation in the first place.
Making his way back up and out of the mouth of the tunnel once more, Ezio smiled as he caught sight of little Maria and a group of recruits. The group of them looked like they were training, and since he had no desire to interrupt them as well as having the news to deliver to Leonardo about the last of the war machines that the Borgia had forced him to create for them, Ezio continued on his way with a smile. All other considerations aside, it was good to know that the Brotherhood was growing apace.
Good to know that, even when other considerations inevitably called him and his away from Roma again, the Brotherhood would endure.
Once he’d managed to find Leonardo again, Ezio smiled as he saw his inventor friend making yet another of the elaborately detailed sketches that he seemed to be so fond of working on when he found a spare moment or two to himself. Pausing for a moment, knowing that he wouldn’t have wished to be interrupted when he was hard at work the way Leonardo seemed to be, Ezio felt again the subtle sensation of Aeon pushing against the confines of the Apple once more.
Removing the artifact from its resting place within his robes, and taking care to be as subtle as he could even in spite of the fact that he already knew that Aeon could hardly help the rather ostentatious way he was made to enter and exit the world, Ezio glanced briefly over at Aeon as he reformed once more from the light of the Apple. It was not that he could truly bring himself to think of such a sight as mundane, not when he recalled what such a thing ultimately signified, but he had been the one who spent the most time working beside the phantasmal man in black. And, as much as he might not have wished to admit to it, even such a fantastic sight could begin to seem normal after so many times as he himself had seen it.
“Nearly a perfect likeness; I’m rather impressed,” Aeon said, after making his way over to where Leonardo was sitting.
“Grazie,” the inventor said, turning a surprised sort of smile onto the man in black where he was standing; clearly not having expected his work to be scrutinized so soon. “And for showing them to me, as well,” the inventor said, smiling all the more widely.
Ezio, his curiosity piqued by the strange discussion that the pair of them seemed to be having, made his way over to see just what the pair of them were talking about. Looking down at the sketch that Leonardo had been laboring over for only he truly knew how long, Ezio found that it seemed to be the Ethereal Blades that Aeon used in battle. However, what he was looking at clearly lacked both hilt and blade, and he couldn’t help but wonder just how in the wide world Aeon thought that the sketch resembled the weapons he used to such deadly effect.
Still, when Leonardo asked to see Aeon’s Ethereal Blades once again, Ezio found himself surprised as to just how much Leonardo’s sketch did actually resemble the reality of Aeon’s fantastical weapons. Lacking hilts or blades, and in fact seeming to be a simple cylinder with some decoration on the sides. It was all the more unsettling to think, then, just how deadly such an unassuming weapon could become in Aeon’s hands. Truly, even though it was plain for anyone to see just how readily Aeon gave his aid to the Brotherhood, Ezio knew that he would always find the man in black more than a bit unsettling.
This, then, was simply one more thing that would stick in his mind when Ezio found himself thinking of Aeon, he knew.
“I’ve also been developing something for you too, amico,” Leonardo said, gathering up what seemed to be a rolled up sack of some kind or other, once he and Aeon had finished with their discussion. “It’s a device to allow you to drift gently down from a great height. It’s based on the same theory as the lifting-bag that Maria and I designed, so I’m certain it will stand you in good stead,” he said, smiling happily; out of the corner of his right eye, Ezio saw Aeon returning to the Apple once more. “Still, I would like to know how it works out for you.”
“I’ll make sure to tell you how it goes, if I ever find myself in need of it,” he said, smiling at the pure enthusiasm he could see shining from Leonardo’s entire face; truly, his escape from the Borgia had done the man a world of good. “Grazie, for everything you’ve done.”
“I could hardly do anything less, amico,” Leonardo said, his smile as bright as ever, but with a certain darkness still lurking in the depths of his eyes.
Ezio held the man’s gaze for just a bit longer, knowing that he wasn’t the only one who had an all-too-vivid recollection of those weeks upon weeks that the pair of them had been out of contact with one another. Fitting, since he hadn’t been the one who’d ultimately ended up in the hands of the Borgia. It was only natural that such a thing would leave more marks than were immediately evident.
Chapter 382: Blade of the people
Chapter Text
As he made his way back up and out of the Brotherhood’s Headquarters once more, Ezio breathed in deeply of the fresh air all around him, and then made his way back up to the rooftops once more. Once up there, however, Ezio caught sight of a lone figure up on a low, hilly cliffside. What he could see of their movements seemed rather furtive, but since they – whoever they would turn out to be – didn’t have the baleful red glow of one of the Brotherhood’s enemies, Ezio felt safe enough investigating on his own.
Returning to ground-level quickly, once he’d both run out of buildings and managed to find a secluded place to do so, Ezio continued on his way, up the cliff to meet up with whoever it was that had drawn his attention. It turned out to be a man, one who’d all-too-recently suffered the loss of his clearly beloved wife to the Borgia and their machinations within Roma. Agreeing to give what aid he could to the grieving man was entirely simple, under the circumstances, and so Ezio found himself being directed to the Caracalla Baths.
Apparently the hunting-grounds of whichever of the Borgia’s lackeys he was going to be coming to grips with.
Making his way out to that very location, Ezio concealed himself within the milling crowds, calling up his second-sight so that he would be able to tell just who among them would be his target for this excursion. As it turned out, however, his current target was obliging enough to reveal themselves by dashing past him, fresh-seeming blood dripping from a dagger that they had clearly just used not such a long time ago.
Taking chase, Ezio found that where before he might have found himself surprised to be pursuing a woman, after having dealt seen how Lucrezia Borgia was such an eager aid to her perverse madman of a brother, he only found himself wondering what this woman’s story might have been. However, even as she died on the end of his short sword, Lia di Russo – her name had proven to be all that she’d been willing to give him – carried such a story to her grave.
He thought it a rather sad thing, that a woman who would have otherwise had a long, happy life ahead of her had chosen to waste it in service to the Templars; of course, there may well have been those who held the same sentiment towards him among that very faction.
Sighing, Ezio pushed his odd, melancholy musings aside, Ezio continued on his way through the outskirts of Roma. There may well have been other people who needed his help in such a place, but for one reason or another found themselves unable to make contact with the Brotherhood in the usual way. Aside from such concerns as those – pressing though they might well have been – Ezio found that his stroll through the countryside helped him to become both relaxed an alert.
The tension that he’d naturally come to feel, after having spent so long being about the Brotherhood’s business as he had been of late, drained away as he watched the long grasses waving in the wind and felt the sun-warmed breeze across his skin.
Chapter 383: The people’s brother
Chapter Text
However, the telltale sight of what were unmistakably a pair of coffins, resting uneasily in that selfsame grass, brought him firmly back to the reality that he’d managed to transcend for a few short, precious moments. Turning his path toward the form of the monk who had interred what seemed to be two of his own – judging by the direction of the speech he was making to everyone and no one – Ezio paused for a long moment to listen. Apparently, these were two of the monk’s own – all of them belonging to the Order of Minims – and the unfortunate pair before him had been poisoned by a man named Ristoro.
Even worse was the fact that the pair laid out before him had apparently been the man’s own students, murdered in a particularly cruel way for questioning the man’s proclivities; even if he hadn’t had ties to the Borgia, Ezio would have been more than willing to deal with the man.
Finding out the man’s location was a simple enough thing, after that; he’d gotten a good description of the church where Ristoro and his Borgia guards were staying, and as he made his way back up onto the rooftop of a nearby building so as to travel more quickly and easily through the more built-up sections of this still-rural part of Roma, Ezio found himself settling once again into the strange sort of routine that he’d made of his days. And, the fact that he was ridding the world of such a man as Ristoro had shown himself to be made his task all the simpler.
He knew that there was still danger, even in such outward simplicity as what he’d been asked to do, not so much because of the guards he would be facing – the Borgia lackeys posed less and less of a threat to him the more he found himself set against them; the more his legend grew, the more all of those who stood in his way seemed to fear him – but because of the straightforward simplicity of the task set before him. It would be all too simple, if he didn’t keep a strict watch on himself, to find himself wishing that more of that very simplicity.
The Templars, it was clear, had allowed their natural desires for uncomplicated simplicity to push them to acts of madness; an Assassin had to keep a stricter watch on themselves.
Chapter 384: House of wolves
Chapter Text
Leaving the corpse of Ristoro behind, Ezio paused for a moment to look around the courtyard where he had ended up after the battle. He’d caught, out of the corner of his eye, a flash of what might have been an entrance to the underground caverns where those wolfmen made their homes. Sure enough, there was indeed a wolf skull set into the wall nearby, standing above yet one more of the tiny, swinging doors that stood in front of the tunnels that he was clearly going to need to go down into once again.
Crouching down in front of the door, not wishing to bruise his toes again in an attempt that he suspected would not go any better than the one he’d made previously, Ezio picked the lock with his hidden blade. Slipping down into the caverns once more, Ezio took a deep breath of the stagnant air all around him, taking the Apple out of the hidden pocket within his robes.
Aeon appeared once more, the familiar flicker of the Apple’s light shimmering about his form for a moment, before he tucked the Apple safely away inside the hollow space of his torso. Nodding to the man in black, Ezio turned his eyes forward and began making his way deeper into the catacombs. Quite contrary to his expectations, the pair of them seemed to be making their way through the dilapidated remnants of someone’s palazzo.
There was the expected, unsettling feeling of forging a path through a place that had been full of life and sound, and now stood empty and devoid of anything of the sort; even as he shuddered, however, Ezio pressed determinedly forward.
The smell of dry, rotten wood all around him caused Ezio to wrinkle his nose, overwhelming even the feeble scents of the ivy he could see climbing down into the dilapidated structure from those places where the roof had caved in. As he continued farther, making his way ever downward since he’d been inside enough of these places to know where he was most likely to find the secret documents that these wolfmen – who seemed to be rather curiously absent from this place in particular – stood guard over. Even if he hadn’t had such a great deal of experience with the wolfmen and the catacombs they guarded, Ezio would have still known that the most logical place for important documents to be stored was down as far as one could manage.
That way, even if such a thing was discovered, one would still be able to put as much security as one could manage between whoever was attempting to steal that which was to be protected and the item or items itself.
All of that made perfect sense to him, but what Ezio did find himself wondering about was just where this hypothetical security was. It hardly made sense that all of the wolfmen would have found themselves drawn away from this place; even if the other faction, the one that had taken to styling themselves as some kind of acolytes of Aeon, had grown so powerful that the wolfmen had ended up needing to split their forces in order to deal with them, he’d have expected to encounter at least some of them on his way down into this place.
It might have any number of things keeping them away, but Ezio made up his mind that he would continue to be on the lookout for any more of the wolfmen; as well as any of their allies.
As he continued on his way down into the guts of the skeletal building, with Aeon’s occasional assistance to traverse those expanses where the floor had fallen in or the pair of them found their way blocked by the remains of a wall, Ezio found himself surprised all over again when he ended up staring down into the remnants of some kind of ancient church. He could have sworn that he’d been making his way into someone’s old residence; the remains of an ornate palazzo to be sure, but still a place where someone had been living.
Still, he’d never heard of anyone actually living above a church in anything but some of the stories that Mother had read to him when he was small, so Ezio didn’t know precisely what to make of what he was seeing at the moment.
Making his way up to what seemed to be a gate made out of bronze, if the sheen he could still see was any kind of indication, Ezio peered through the gaps in the gate – substantially taller than anything that Aeon had been able to comfortably toss him over – at the contents of what was clearly the room that he’d always found guarded by wolfmen in the past.
Before he could do much more than contemplate the gate barring their path, however, Ezio heard the familiar snap-hiss of Aeon’s Ethereal Blades and stepped out of the way as the man in black calmly and quite literally cut his way through the gate that had once stood in their way. Thanking Aeon for his unexpected assistance, helpful as it had been, Ezio made his way into the room where the wolfmen had been storing the scrolls he had been hunting for for nearly as long as he had been staying in Roma.
Once he’d taken the scroll for his own, Ezio made his way back out of the underground church and up into the open air and falling dusk of Roma once more. The sight of Aeon’s familiar black-clad form making its way up to stand beside him drew his attention, just before Ezio found the Apple deposited in his right hand.
“Grazie, amico,” he said softly, as Aeon’s form was once more subsumed by the artifact’s light, vanishing once again to wherever it was that he went when he left.
More and more, Ezio had found himself wondering just where that was; if Aeon did have anything to do with those who created the Apple – long-gone as such a people seemed to be – there was little doubt in his mind that such a place would be beyond anything he had ever seen. Perhaps even beyond the imagination of anyone but Leonardo or little Maria; given everything he’d seen, even during such brief glimpses as he’d been able to stand, Ezio thought that such was more than likely the case.
He wondered how he and the others might make Aeon feel comfortable speaking about the wondrous things that he must have seen, even though such a world had been lost to anything but memories, and almost slapped himself for how simple such a thing seemed, if only in hindsight.
Yes, it was true that he would have to convince the others – Machiavelli in particular- if the way he clearly felt about Aeon was any indication, and if such thoughts had not changed since the last time the pair of them had spoken – to support him in this endeavor, it seemed as good a first step as any, to make Aeon feel comfortable in the place that he was staying. Having made up his mind, Ezio turned his path toward the pigeon coop.
In order to make such a momentous decision, he would need the support of the Brotherhood’s leadership as a whole.
Chapter 385: Wards and secrets
Chapter Text
Having finished composing her letter to Christina and the family that she had made for herself alongside Manfredo, thanking them again for the kindness that the pair of them had shown to those who shared her circumstances enough to be in danger from the Templars, and also keeping the pair of them abreast of the current goings-on in Roma, Maria wondered again if she should include anything about Aeon. True, the man was a fellow Treasure Guardian, but telling Christina and Manfredo about him might lead to them wishing to meet the man for themselves, and Maria didn’t know just how that kind of thing would have worked out.
Still, there was a great deal that she didn’t think would have been possible without Aeon’s help – foremost in her mind was the rescue of Leonardo, at least given everything that Ezio had told her when he’d gotten back from doing just that – since the man in black seemed to be an army unto himself when he’d made up his mind to take a stand.
Truly, she was in perfect agreement with Ezio: it was a good thing that none of the Templars had managed to convince Aeon to take their side in the conflict that the Assassins had had with them for so long. Deciding that she would sit with her decision awhile, since it wasn’t as though she had a particularly strict schedule with regards to her correspondence with Christina and Manfredo where they still lived in Firenze – not even Savonarola and all of the madness he had stirred up being enough to press them into leaving the place where the pair of them had been born and raised – Maria set aside the letter she’d been composing so that it could dry, and the stoppered up her bottle of ink so that it wouldn’t.
Making her way away from her desk, Maria left for the gardens of the Rosa in Fiore; spending time in such a place always seemed to help with getting her thoughts in order.
~AC: Bro~
Once he’d managed to assemble the higher-ranks of the Brotherhood, his uncle, La Volpe, and Machiavelli among them, Ezio had found the consensus as to what was to be done with the man in black – Aeon, who had aided them a great deal during the time they’d all spent in Roma, or else faced with the Borgia in those other places where their corruption had emerged – had been cleanly split. Split in a way he’d almost been expecting, given how well he knew the men on each side of the divide, yes, but it was a troublesome thing all the same.
La Volpe was entirely in favor of welcoming Aeon into their ranks with open arms, while Machiavelli argued that such a mysterious man – deliberately so, since he’d all but refused point-blank to give anything more than his name to the Brotherhood no matter how closely they’d worked together – should be prodded to open up more completely before he was offered such.
“Basta, we’ve all heard both sides,” Uncle Mario said, sounding like even he was getting slightly fed up with the arguments – as politely-phrased as they were – that had been going on almost since the subject of Aeon had been brought up in the first place. “Ezio, what do you make of all this? You’ve worked with the man the most out of all of us,” the man said, and he smiled slightly.
It seemed that his was to be the deciding vote, after all.
“While I can’t deny that we don’t know much about Aeon’s past but what the man himself has told us, what I’ve seen during my work with him tells me that he does genuinely have our best interest at heart,” he said, knowing that Machiavelli wouldn’t be entirely pleased to hear such a thing, but also knowing that he couldn’t very well deny the contributions that Aeon had made to the Brotherhood’s efforts in Roma.
Well, not with any degree of truth, at least.
“Vero,” Uncle Mario said, nodding with a pleased sort of expression on his face. “All of your reports have given me the impression of a man who, reluctant as he is to talk about his past, is genuinely invested in the ideals that all of us here have dedicated ourselves to upholding.”
La Volpe flashed a smug grin at Machiavelli almost before Uncle Mario had finished speaking, but when his uncle caught sight of that, he gave the leader of Roma’s thieves an unimpressed sort of glare.
“Sí, well I suppose I won’t be able to argue any of you out of your current positions,” Machiavelli said, still sounding dubious about the whole thing. “Still, I would have my reservations about this course of action noted.”
“Bene,” Uncle Mario said, nodding respectfully back at the man. “Then I suppose that’s all we have to discus at the moment. Nipote, would you stay for a moment?” he asked, just as Ezio had been turning to leave.
“What is it, uncle?” he asked, wondering just what in the world his uncle could have wanted with him in particular.
Machiavelli seemed to know, if the interested expression on his face was any sort of clue, but for the life of him Ezio couldn’t think of what might be on his uncle’s mind at the moment.
Chapter 386: Initiation
Chapter Text
When she and a pair of the new Assassins who had been recruited in Roma – she recalled that their names were Saverio Salerno and Laura Boccanera, both of them having been recruited by Ezio during the course of his work – Maria smiled softly. She was glad to see that their training had paid such fine dividends, even though she hadn’t had the chance to involve herself too deeply in such matters given everything that she’d had to do. Moving up in the ranks of the Brotherhood was hardly a simple matter, after all.
Taking her place at the head of the double-line of Assassin recruits that had been assembled before them all – herself, Ezio, Uncle Mario, Machiavelli, and even La Volpe himself – Maria was careful to control her reaction as she sensed the familiar, mildly unsettling presence of the Apple very close by. Folding her arms neatly behind her, as she stood by to oversee the second ceremony of this kind that she’d been present for, Maria fell neatly into step with her fellow Assassins as the five of them led Laura and Saverio up to the top of their Headquarters to make what would be only the first Leap of Faith that the pair of them take as full-fledged Assassins.
When they all made their way back down into the Headquarters again, Maria had at least an idea of how things were going to go from that point on, so it came as quite a surprise when all of them were gathered together again deep within their Headquarters once more.
“I’m sure you’re all wondering why you’ve all been called back so soon, mi famiglia,” Uncle Mario said, sparing a particularly fond look back at her for a lingering moment, before returning his attention to the crowd of their brother and sister Assassins gathered before him. “There is one other to be initiated today,” Uncle Mario gestured to Ezio, who came forward with the Apple; Maria smiled slightly as she realized what the pair of them had been planning. “However, even though this man is one of the strangest that I have ever had the privilege of working with, I must ask that all of you respect his desire for privacy.”
As Aeon arose from the Apple once more, Maria reflected that there could hardly have been a speech more guaranteed to arouse the curiosity of all those present. Even she found herself wondering about Aeon, for all that she’d at least known the man long enough to understand – if not appreciate – that he was not a one to speak of himself or his past in any but the most oblique of terms. Still, the ceremony itself proceeded apace – save for the part where Aeon was handed a signet ring with the Brotherhood’s crest; one which would be kept in trust even as his Apple would be – in place of the mark, which could hardly be made on such a body as Aeon didn’t quite possess.
It was one more thing that Maria found herself wondering about; one more secret that she had resigned herself to never knowing.
Once the ceremony had truly finished, Maria caught up with Ezio.
“So, whose idea was that, fratello?” she asked her brother, once he’d finished putting away the Apple and setting his clothes to rights again.
“Mostly mine,” he said, smiling back at her as the pair of them continued on their way. “Though I did manage to get Uncle Mario and Volpe to agree with me.”
“Not Niccolò?” she asked, turning back to her brother in surprise; she’d known that their brother Assassin wasn’t one for taking people like Aeon at face-value, yes, but she hadn’t quite thought things would go so far.
“Uncle Mario’s talked him down more than a few times,” Ezio said, as the pair of them continued on their way through the Headquarters, nodding to the recruits that they passed, even as those selfsame people dispersed out through the tunnel entrances, headed back up to the streets of Roma. “Still, I doubt that he will ever truly be a friend of Aeon’s.”
“You’d be correct about that, amico,” Niccolò said, making his way determinedly over to where the pair of them were standing. “However, much as the man himself might unsettle me, I can hardly deny his utility to our cause,” he continued, glancing at the place where she’d seen Ezio put the Apple away more than a few times. “That’s not what I sought the pair of you out for, however.”
Chapter 387: Contract works
Chapter Text
“Why were you looking for us then, Niccolò?” she asked, knowing that he wouldn’t have done that kind of thing without a reason that at least made sense to him.
“Cesare, unsettled by both our growing success in general and Aeon’s presence in particular, has sent for one of his chief tacticians, in order that he might recover from the losses our people have been causing him,” Niccolò said, seeming rather dourly amused by the prospect.
Maria could fully see why, since there was little chance that even one of Cesare Borgia’s elite would be able to make the man in black so much as blink. Still, it would be troublesome for the rest of them, having another Borgia lackey running around within the environs of a city they were trying to restore freedom to. Of course, Niccolò wouldn’t have come to find them if he hadn’t had some kind of a plan to get rid of the man.
“Cesare has sent along a horse and an outrider,” Niccolò continued, and then proceeded to detail the appearance of both men. “I trust neither of them will be a problem for either of you?”
“Ma certo,” Ezio said, stepping up to Niccolò’s side for a moment as the pair of them conferred in low tones, and then turning to make his way back up and out of the Brotherhood’s Headquarters once more.
“Was that all you wanted to say, Niccolò?” Maria asked, fully prepared to find something that she could do herself if such ended up being the case, in the end.
~AC: Bro~
As he made his way out into the open air of Roma once again, Ezio quickly called up his second-sight so that he would be more easily able to determine just when and from where Cesare’s tactician was going to be coming from. Yes, he’d gotten a description of the man when Machiavelli had set him on his trail, but as to the descriptions of the outrider or the horses the pair of them would be riding, Machiavelli had been the first to admit that he hadn’t had much of an idea on that front.
In light of that, it was simply easier to make use of his second-sight for such a thing; Machiavelli had even been in favor of such an idea, himself.
Once he’d managed to locate the man and his small entourage – smaller than he’d honestly been expecting from any of the Borgia, but then it was possible that Cesare was either attempting to sneak the man into Roma under the cover of the swiftly-falling darkness, or else that he was simply beginning to run out of men after he’d sent so many of them to their deaths against the Brotherhood – Ezio carefully hitched up his horse, and then swiftly made his way up into the trees that lined the path they were taking. Specifically, the one that Cesare’s man and his entourage were soon to pass under on their way to their present destination. The destination that they were never going to reach.
In the end, however, the battle that he was forced to engage in proved a bit more involved than he’d been expecting – it seemed that the man Cesare had wished brought to him truly had earned the mantle of tactician, though Ezio had admittedly faced better in his time – and he came away from it more bloodied than he’d been for quite some time. It almost seems as though I’ve gone back to when all of this began, he mused, feeling a pointed sort of melancholy as he made his way back down into the tunnels.
He’d have to make a stop at the Rosa in Fiore, to clean up and see about having his clothes mended – something he hadn’t needed to do in quite some time, which again brought up a perverse sense of nostalgia – and then he’d probably be best served getting what rest he could. As he continued on his way through the tunnel that would take him back to the brothel that Mother and Claudia had taken over the management of – though Claudia took care of most of the day-to-day things, and Ezio found that he still wasn’t quite sure how he felt about such a thing – Ezio found himself wondering just what it was that little Maria was up to at the moment.
Chapter 388: The hunter in white
Chapter Text
After returning to the main room of the Brotherhood’s Headquarters, Maria had been joined by Adele Sozzi, Rinaldo Rocca, and Ottavio Olivieri once she’d told the small gathering of apprentices – all of them steadily growing in skill, but not one of them quite ready to become a full Assassin as yet – just what it was that she was going to be doing. Knowing that she now had four of her own to stand against the pair of Borgia guards that had been notorious for their cruelty – which must have been quite the thing, given the guards that she had had run-ins with in and around Roma as a whole – was a great deal more comforting than it would have been if she’d ended up with anything less than twice the number of the thugs she was about to face.
And, while it was true that none of those who had thrown in their lot with the Borgia had been too much of a threat for Maria to face on her own – at least once she’d gained both the size and the skill of a full Assassin – there was still the matter of Roma’s citizens to consider; there was a better chance of being able to get them all to safety if she herself only had to focus on the Borgia thugs she was going to be dealing with.
The four of them swiftly made their way to the location that Niccolò had described when he’d told her about where the pair of Borgia thugs had been stationed – allegedly to guard those in the area, though Maria doubted that any but the most hopelessly naïve of Roma’s citizens actually believed such a thing – and Maria was naturally the first one to spot the pair of them. The second-sight that she and Ezio shared was a help once again, determining just where the pair of them were even amidst the press of the seething crowd, and Maria found herself wondering – for a brief moment before she leapt down among them – just what was going on.
Still, there would be time to think about those kinds of things later.
Once she and the three Apprentice Assassins who had come with her to this place all landed, just outside the view of the crowd who seemed almost single-mindedly focused on the pair of Borgia thugs who had been set among them, Maria gathered them close and gave them their assignments, while she herself went to confront the Borgia thugs who had been sent to Roma for the express purpose of terrorizing the citizenry back into meek compliance with the Borgia and their tyranny.
Taking the thug closest to her with a barrage of thrown knives naturally served to draw the attention of his partner, and as the first of the Borgia thugs lay dying on the ground, Maria moved forward to engage the last man standing. He seemed at least slightly off-balance from watching a man he knew – if not one he seemed to be particularly fond of, given the way he reacted to his fellow’s demise – fall, bleeding from fatal wounds in his neck.
So, that gave her something of an advantage, which Maria pressed as ruthlessly as she’d been taught.
Out of the corner of her left eye, Maria noticed that one of the citizens whose defense she had come to seemed to be fighting by her side against the last of the remaining Borgia thugs. When the man finally fell, Maria striking the fatal blow with the aid of an opening created by the man fighting beside her, she allowed herself to breathe more easily for the first time in what felt like a longer time than it probably had been. Once she’d administered the last rites, bidding farewell to the Borgia thugs in the way that she’d learned to do for all of her targets – truly, the only rites that a pair of thugs such as they were likely to get, which would have been a sadder thought if she hadn’t seen how the both of them seemed to relish in the terror they created – Maria turned her attention to the man who’d given her his aid during the battle.
“Grazie, Messer,” she said, as she cleaned and then sheathed her sword once again, glancing back at him as he followed in her wake as she went to retrieve her throwing-knives. “Was there something you wanted, or do you just enjoy the odd punch-up when you can be a part of it?” she asked, feeling a flash of fond nostalgia for the sort of man that Ezio had been, before the responsibilities of the Brotherhood had fallen upon him all unasked-for.
“My name is Lorenzo LaFalce,” he said, smiling as he crouched down beside her and helped Maria to remove and then clean the quartet of throwing-knives that she’d used to make absolutely certain that the first of the Borgia thugs she had encountered wouldn’t have been a threat before she’d engaged his partner in combat. “I’d been hoping to meet up with one of you Assassini sometime.”
“You want to join up with the Brotherhood too, then?” she asked, smiling gently as she rose back to her feet, putting the last of her throwing-knives away as she did so. “It’s hardly an untroubled life,” she said, as Lorenzo fell into step with her and the pair of them made their way back to the trio that she’d sent to disburse the bulk of the crowd before they could have gotten underfoot and hence risked their own safety in a battle that wasn’t ultimately theirs to fight.
At least, those of them who wished to remain apart from the struggles of the Assassins and the Templars.
“Sí, I expect you’re right, signorina, but I doubt that anyone could live an untroubled life under the thrall of these brutes,” Lorenzo said, as he fell into step with Maria and the three apprentices who had made this particular journey alongside her.
“Bene, stay with me, then,” she said, signaling for Adele, Rinaldo, and Ottavio to return to the Brotherhood’s Headquarters without her. “I’ll help you to find your way.”
The pair of them set off again, this time down a path that Maria had become more than a bit familiar with, though not terribly so considering that she hadn’t made altogether extensive use of this particular means of accessing Isola Tiberina, and as always she was careful to keep an eye out for anyone who might have thought to follow them. Any Borgia lackeys in particular, since there was nearly nothing they would not have done in their efforts to find and eliminate such a stronghold as the Brotherhood had managed to establish.
Or else to reestablish, considering the impression Maria had gotten from not only the interior of the Headquarters itself, but from the way that Uncle Mario had reacted when they’d first made their way down into the hidden warehouse on Isola Tiberina.
~AC: Bro~
Making his way back to a nearby pigeon coop, knowing that a single mission was hardly going to make more than the smallest of dents in the Borgia’s operations in Roma, Ezio found that there was indeed a message waiting for him. It seemed that Cesare, having been deprived of the tactical advice that he had been seeking when he’d called for one of those remaining who chose to serve him – out of whatever twisted affection that such people could have been said to possess – had sent for three marksmen. It seemed that his aim, after being deprived of a number of his forces and what seemed to be a great deal of his tactical acumen, was now simply to kill anyone who might have borne even the faintest connection to the Brotherhood.
Or, at least such had been Machiavelli’s take on the matter, and his brother Assassin knew Cesare well enough that Ezio wasn’t about to begin doubting him at such a late stage.
Therefore, as he made his way back up onto the rooftops of Roma once more, Ezio searched for the marksmen whose descriptions Machiavelli had provided for him.
Once he’d managed to find the first of them – who was clearly about to begin firing into the milling crowds in what had to be one of the most despicable efforts to draw out those of the Brotherhood who would naturally seek to protect all of the innocent, uninvolved citizens in this place – Ezio primed his crossbow and fired in nearly the same motion, and without breaking stride. Such an action naturally served to draw the attention of what could only be another of the man’s compatriots, but fortunately he was slow enough bringing his arquebus to beat that Ezio was able to throw a trio of knives into his throat.
Priming his crossbow once again, Ezio sent a second bolt into the head of the last of the marksmen that Cesare had called to Roma in his ever-escalating – and ever-futile, so long as there was even a single member of the Brotherhood around to oppose him; not a thing Ezio had found himself worrying about very much of late, considering the revelations of Aeon’s presence and his power – attempts to wrest control of Roma away from the people who lived there. To say nothing of his designs upon Italia as a whole.
Shaking his head at the direction his thoughts had taken, in the absence of any other foes along his current path, Ezio turned and made his way in the direction of another pigeon coop. It’d become more than clear, after so much time spent dealing with the man’s lackeys, that Cesare was attempting to make a more indirect push into Roma. He and little Maria would need to deal with these things, alongside any other citizen who was willing to lend their aid to the Brotherhood in their ongoing struggle.
Ezio had made a personal vow that, no matter his own personal ties to the Assassins, he would never force anyone uninvolved to take sides in this battle; though even as he’d made it Ezio was fully aware that the Templars would think nothing of dragging anyone they could find into this struggle, if only to throw them in the path of the Brotherhood. Still, no matter what else happened, Ezio was determined to hold to his vows.
It was one of the things that served to separate the Assassins from the Templars, after all; that and the ideals they all held to.
Chapter 389: Horsing around
Chapter Text
As she made her way steadily through the far fields of Roma, Maria found herself wondering just what Cesare was about, sending a mere six men to attack the farmers in this area. Yes, it would prove more than slightly inconvenient if she were to allow them to carry out any further attacks, or even to keep hoarding the provisions that Niccolò had informed her that they had seized, but an inconvenience was all that such an action would prove to be, in the end.
Still, there was a better than average chance that this was some kind of a ruse, meant to draw out anyone who heard of the goings-on in this place, which she would keep in mind as she drew closer.
As she closed in on the fields that Niccolò’s message had described to her, Maria caught sight of the man who would be her first target. He was harassing a nearby man who seemed to be in the midst of attempting to plow a nearby field; he was also on horseback, so Maria knew that she would have more than a bit of difficulty coming to grips with this one. Taking a moment to steady herself for what she was going to need to do, Maria dashed forward, unseating the Borgia thug from his horse and pulling him to the ground with the last of her momentum.
Mounting his horse as quickly as she could, Maria ended the thug’s life with a bolt from her crossbow.
“Grazie, signorina,” the man said, standing back up and brushing himself off. “We’ve been having more and more trouble from those Borgia bastardi every day.”
“I’m glad that I was able to help you so quickly, Messer,” she said, nodding down at the man as the horse she’d appropriated shifted restlessly underneath her. “I’d heard that there were six of them here. Is that still true, or have more been showing up lately?”
“I’ve only heard of the six that came here originally, signorina, but I wouldn’t put it past any of those bastardi to send more into our fields,” the sturdy, middle-aged farmer said, a look of disgust upon his face as he made his way over to the plow that he’d been previously barred from using.
“Grazie, I’ll keep an eye out for them, then,” Maria said, turning her borrowed horse in the direction that the old farmer had indicated while she’d been speaking with him.
It didn’t take her that long to find the next of them, and then the next after that. With three of their own dead at her hands, those remaining turned their attention to her at last. Priming her crossbow as swiftly as she ever had, Maria shot the foremost of the three remaining Borgia thugs in the head, then drew her sword to cut down the last two. Turning her horse back toward a nearby stable, Maria caught her breath after all of the frenetic action she’d just participated in.
Climbing down from the mount she’d appropriated at the beginning of her scuffle with this particular group of Borgia thugs, Maria led the creature into the cool darkness of the stall at last. Leaving the creature in the care of the kindly stable-master – who seemed quite a bit happier once she’d informed him that the Borgia had been ousted from this quarter of Roma, and all the more pleased when she informed him that she and hers were going to do everything in their power to see that they stayed that way – Maria made her way back out into the fading sunlight of oncoming dusk.
She also found that a small group of what seemed to be the families of the farmers whose defense she’d been acting in.
“Mille grazie, Madonna,” the woman who seemed to be either the leader of this group or at least the one who had taken it upon herself to speak for them, said as she came up to Maria, carrying a small basket with what seemed to be a single loaf of bread in it. “I’m afraid that this is all we could spare, in repayment for your kindness,”
“I was only doing my duty, mi amici,” she said, stepping forward and softly pushing the basket back into the hands of the sturdy farm wife who was attempting to give it to her.
The pair of them went back and forth a bit, but in the end Maria found that the woman – a kindly but extremely determined mother of five – would not be swayed from doing at least something in repayment for the debt she’d convinced herself that she owed Maria for ridding the farmers of the Borgia that had been plaguing them for so long. In the end, Maria took the loaf of bread that had been offered to her, wrapping it up carefully in the provided cloth and then handing back the basket. Small as it was, she couldn’t exactly carry it with her on whatever new missions she was inevitably going to be called upon to carry out once she’d made her way back to one of the nearby pigeon coops in this area.
Chapter 390: Lines of communication
Chapter Text
Finding himself with a message from Pantasilea, calling him to meet with Bartolomeo’s wife at the barracks where the mercenary captain himself lived, worked, and fought either when the mood came to him or when he was called upon to do so, Ezio wondered just what he was going to be getting into. As it turned out, however, all that she’d wished to do was to personally update him on the progress of their struggle against the Borgia. She also sent him out after a pair of couriers that Cesare had dispatched with messages of some import.
He was to bring the messages back to Machiavelli, or else to destroy them if such a thing proved to be impossible.
As he made his way back out into the open fields and wide streets of Roma once more, taking to the rooftops once he found a place that was free of the nigh-omnipresent threat of discovery from either those who had no part in the struggle that he’d taken up – or else stood on the opposite side of it – Ezio took a moment to call up his second-sight again. Some of those standing about in the streets glowed with the hostile red hue of those who had made themselves his enemies, but none of those present moved with the kind of purpose he’d grown so used to seeing in the couriers he’d encountered.
Or those he’d been forced to hunt down.
Making his way back down to the ground, pleased to know that he would more than likely be able to intercept said couriers before they managed to make their way inside Roma itself, Ezio briefly stopped by a nearby stable to obtain a horse so that he would be better able to intercept the pair of escorted couriers that Cesare had thought would have a better chance of delivering whatever messages he desired to have in the hands of whoever it was that he was sending them to.
Once he’d managed to catch up to the first of the groups he was hunting, Ezio primed his crossbow, firing just as the thickly-armored brute riding at the head of the column. The bolt, under his steady hands and guided by vision that he’d honed to be precise during the course of the long battle that he’d fought against the Borgia and their Templar masters, flew without obstruction into the eye-slit of the brute’s visor, killing him nearly before the rest of the group that Ezio had confronted could react. Drawing his sword, even as he rode into the midst of the remaining two men – the courier himself, as well as another man who had clearly been dispatched alongside him as a last line of defense – Ezio cut them down with a pair of strokes to the neck.
Climbing down from his horse once the last of the Borgia men had fallen, Ezio quickly fetched the parcel the messenger had been carrying before one of the horses could trample it into the churned-up soil of the road, Ezio quickly made his way back up, soothing his horse and turning to grab the reins of the other horses so that he could at least tie them up before he departed on his way to come to grips with the last of the two groups he’d been sent out to deal with.
Once he’d finished gathering up the documents that he’d been sent out to claim, Ezio mounted his horse and made for the nearest tunnel entrance so that he would be able to deliver them to the Brotherhood so that whatever information was contained within them could be put to use. Once he’d made his way back to the section of the underground tunnels that led to Isola Tiberina, Ezio gratefully left the messages that he’d captured from the Borgia in the hands of Ottavio Olivieri as his brother Assassin came to meet him at the entrance.
Turning to make his way back out into the streets of Roma once more, Ezio allowed himself to relax slightly once more; there was no question in his mind that he would be called upon once again, until the Borgia had been ousted from Roma not a one of the Assassins would truly be able to rest, but Ezio knew also that keeping himself tensed with anticipation wouldn’t do anyone any good. Best he tended to things as they came up, rather than attempting to anticipate anything and everything that might occur.
Sometimes, Ezio found himself wondering if such a tendency rested at the heart of the Templars’ desire to simplify the world as a whole.
Chapter 391: Among shadows
Chapter Text
Once she’d gotten the message, that six cruel interrogators in the service of the Borgia had been into Roma for the sole purpose of terrifying the citizenry into turning on the Brotherhood and thus depriving the Assassins of one of their greatest assets, Maria had called upon three of the recruits who had been training themselves amid the underground rooms of Isola Tiberina. Primo Penna was one of them, as it turned out, still even considering the man’s clear and rather adorable desire to court her he could be professional when the moment called for it.
She knew that Uncle Mario would have sent the man away in a heartbeat if such had not been the case; it was what she would have done, in the same position.
As she, Lorenzo, Primo, and Alighiero made their way to the location that had been described to her in the message that Niccolò had left at the pigeon coop that she’d previously visited, Maria narrowed her eyes as she began hearing the distinct sounds of a crowd that was just as frightened as they were angry. Signaling to the three apprentices that had followed in her footsteps to spread out, so that they would be better able to deal with the interrogators, spread out as they themselves had become as they tried in vain to wring the Brotherhoods’ secrets out of those who were uninvolved in their struggle, Maria orientated herself on the nearest of them.
Cutting the man down in his tracks with a bolt from her crossbow, Maria continued on her way across the rooftop, she narrowed her eyes as she caught sight of a man standing against one of the larger, rougher-looking interrogators. There were people gathered around him, though even from where she was perched Maria could see that the man was protecting them. He would clearly need help, of course, so with that thought in mind Maria leaped down from the roof to join him.
Reinforcing his weaker side, helping him to stand against the interrogator he’d taken up arms against for the people who seemed to be his family, Maria smiled briefly at the man as he looked over at her during a brief lull in the battle they were both currently engaged in. Once she’d managed to finish off the interrogator, the man she’d been supporting having taken the opportunity to see to his family – a wife and a small boy, both of whom the Borgia had been willing to kill to get what they wanted; though given everything Maria had seen she was hardly surprised – Maria turned her attention to the man.
“Grazie, Madonna,” he said, smiling as he reached out to take her right hand in both of his own.
“Of course, Messer,” she said, nodding and turning to make her way back into the streets of Roma; there were still interrogators to be dealt with, after all.
The next of those she managed to find was also under attack, but the man fighting this one was younger, but also had someone by his side, as well. There was only one of them this time, however, a young woman who seemed about the same age, though the pair of them didn’t seem to be related. Still, there would be a chance for her to find out about all about them later; once she’d dealt with the Borgia thug threatening them.
Once the man lay dying on the ground, and after she’d performed the last rites as any Assassin learned to do, Maria turned her attention to the man she’d saved from death at the hands of the Borgia; and the young woman she’d likely saved from worse.
“Madonna, you were magnifico!” the young man said, eyes shining with excitement as he and the young woman that he’d been shielding came running over to her.
“Grazie,” she said, smiling at the pair of them as she began to suspect the way the conversation she was having was going to go.
“Madonna, is there some way that we can learn to do what you did?” the young woman asked, an eagerness in her manner that Maria could barely remember feeling, herself.
In the end, of course, Fedele Fabiani and his girlfriend Lucia Corretta chose to throw in their lot with the Assassins, following her directions to a nearby tunnel entrance. When she met back up with the apprentices she’d brought along on this latest task of hers, she sent Lorenzo to watch over them; to make sure the pair of eager young recruits made it to Isola Tiberina without getting into trouble their excitement might not have allowed them to see before it was upon them.
Making for another nearby pigeon coop, Maria found herself wondering just what task she was going to be set to next.
Chapter 392: Market forces
Chapter Text
Narrowing his eyes as he found himself thinking about how many people had allowed themselves to sell out their integrity for the protection of the Borgia, Ezio sighed as he remembered again just how precarious the situation in Roma truly was. He and the rest of the Brotherhood were trying to make things better, but it was slow going and it was only natural that the citizens would crave some surety amidst all the chaos surrounding them. And, under the circumstances, it was all too easy to find oneself with no other options than to turn to the Borgia for what protection they could offer.
It was a shrewd plan, for all its cruelty, and he knew that Machiavelli approved, in his way.
Sighing again, Ezio shook his head as he, Ottavio, and Primo continued on their way through the streets, searching for the merchants who had sold out their fellows for the dubious protection that the Borgia would be willing to offer. Primo Penna had offered to come along with him nearly as soon as the pair of them had spotted each other within the Brotherhood’s hidden headquarters on Isola Tiberina; it was more than clear that the young man was trying to impress him, and thus to make his courting of little Maria all the more simple.
It was, thus, with a certain sense of nostalgic amusement that Ezio brought him along on this latest of his excursions into Roma on the Brotherhood’s business.
As the three of them fanned out, each one of them seeking one of the merchants that had allowed themselves to believe the Borgia when they made their offers of protection – likely enough with the threat of brigands that they themselves had paid off as a further incentive – Ezio found himself as calm and steady as he truly could be under the present circumstances. He kept half an eye on Primo, of course, since the eagerness of a young man – particularly one who wished to impress someone – could easily carry him away during this kind of work. Ezio knew the feeling.
He wasn’t about to forget the foolish things he’d done when he’d been courting Christina, so long ago; not that little Maria would have allowed him to do such a thing, anyway.
Once he’d managed to find the first of the merchants who had sold out their fellows for what meager protection that the Borgia were willing to offer, Ezio killed the man quickly and silently with the hidden-blade clasped around his right wrist. Once he’d finished performing the man’s last rites, Ezio moved quickly away from the stall where he’d been kneeling, after taking a moment to snatch what was clearly the bribe money that had been left with the man when his contact had departed. The Brotherhood could always use the funds, and depriving the Borgia of both their money and influence in Roma would only be a good thing.
Spotting a group of Borgia guardsmen out of the corner of his right eye, Ezio melted back into the crowds, checking to see if they were merely patrolling and he could leave them for later, or if they’d managed to spot one of his apprentices and he’d need to deal with them quickly. As he tracked them from the rooftops, Ezio breathed a sigh of relief as they passed by. He hadn’t been looking forward to being forced into combat against such a large group.
Making his way back down to the street in the absence of a cushion of either hay or leaves swept clean from the streets, Ezio breathed deeply for a moment as he rose back to his feet, and then hurried in to the site of a large cloud of smoke that had clearly been deployed by one or more of the apprentices that Ezio had brought with him into this engagement. Narrowing his eyes as he activated his second-sight, Ezio found himself smiling softly as he found that there was not a single red-shaded enemy form moving about within the cloud.,
Joining up with the group as they made their way away from the place where the last of the two merchants who had sold out their fellows in exchange for what dubious protection that the Borgia would offer to them, Ezio kept himself alert for any other guards or Borgia soldiers who might try to attack them even at this late stage of things. He also found himself wondering what little Maria was doing. Whatever it was, he hoped she was all right.
Chapter 393: Baffling the Borgia
Chapter Text
As she made her way out of the Rosa in Fiore, having met Claudia and Mother there at their request, Maria smiled softly. The pair of them had wished to reconnect with her, since with all of their many and varied duties to the Brotherhood and Roma as a whole none of them had had quite as much time to themselves as they might have wanted. Still, as much as all of them enjoyed those peaceful moments they were able to grab for themselves, all three of them knew that moments – as was their nature – would not last forever.
Sure enough, a missive from Niccolò had arrived not long after they had finished their midday meal, telling her of the three veteran soldiers that Cesare had called to his side in an effort to give himself what advantages he could when he was facing the might of a revived Brotherhood of Assassins in Roma. The three of them had known even before she’d finished reading the letter what she’d had to do. And so, making her way back down into the tunnels that allowed her and her brother and sister Assassins to make their secret ways through Roma, Maria had made her way back to Isola Tiberina once again.
Fedele Fabiani and Ottavio Olivieri were quick to volunteer when she put out the call, though it seemed as though Ottavio had previously been through a fight; he was well enough that she didn’t send him back into the headquarters to get some rest, but there was a certain light in his eyes that she didn’t know what to make of, particularly considering the clear fact that he’d just come out of a fight. She’d speak to Ezio about it once all of this was finished with, of course, but for the moment she had more pressing concerns.
As she and her two apprentices made their way back out into the open air of Roma once more, Maria narrowed her eyes and called up her second-sight once again. Once she’d managed to spot the three men – large and intimidating figures in the finely-polished armor they were wearing – she signaled to Ottavio and Fedele. Priming her own crossbow, she shot the man in the center of the formation right in the back of his neck where the armor was of necessity weaker. Feeling a grim smile pulling at her lips as the last of the three fell dead to the ground, Maria blinked as her sight returned to normal and she signaled to Fedele and Ottavio to follow her.
The three of them swiftly made their way to the nearest tunnel entrance, before they could be spotted by the guards that had been assigned to the training grounds that they had been fortunate enough not to have to infiltrate during the course of their mission to free the people from the oppression of the new soldiers that would have otherwise been trained by those three soldiers from Cesare’s upper-echelons. She was glad to be out of that place, and all the more so that she hadn’t been forced to deal with yet more guards.
She didn’t know just how many of them were hirelings who either didn’t know – or tried not to think about – who their employers were and what they were doing, and those who shared the ideals of the Borgia and so needed to share their fate, and so Maria was pleased when she wasn’t forced to kill people who might have been innocent.
Sighing as she made her way back into the headquarters hidden on Isola Tiberina once more, Maria found her gaze drawn to Ezio as her brother made his way over to her, after Fedele and Ottavio had left to head for their own separate destinations. She was just about to call out to him, when she saw the look on his face and the way he seemed to be contemplating something.
Chapter 394: Friends of the Fox
Chapter Text
“What is it, fratello?” she asked, once her brother had looked up and she could be certain of catching his attention.
“La Volpe has requested that the both of us come to his headquarters,” he said, draping his right arm around her shoulders as the pair of them began making their way out into the tunnels that would lead them back to the old hotel where Gilberto had settled himself and his thieves to do their work.
She wondered just what it was that had driven Gilberto to call on them, knowing that if Ezio had been given that information he would have shared it with her without hesitation as the pair of them had been making their way through the tunnel that would bring them back to the hotel, but Maria supposed that she would have to wait to find out, just the same way that Ezio was doing.
Once the pair of them had made their way back onto the grounds of the hotel, the tunnel entrance having dropped them into an innocuous storage space in the lowest level of the basement, Maria pinched her nose as the dusty air tickled the inside of it and she found herself with the urge to sneeze.
“Come on, sorellina,” her brother said kindly, once Maria had managed to regain her composure and no longer felt the urge to sneeze.
“Sí, we should find out what Gilberto wants,” she said, chuckling softly as she had another thought. “And maybe suggest that he send someone down here to dust.”
“Sí, and maybe that, too,” Ezio said, and the pair of them shared an amused laugh.
True, it wasn’t likely that Gilberto would be interested in sending one of his people down to clean up a place that not many people made a point of visiting, and even less for pleasure, but it was an amusing thought all the same. And, given the tension in the faces of the thieves she was beginning to catch sight of as she and Ezio made their way up and out of the basement, it was beginning to seem as though everyone present would need all the amusement they could find.
Still, that kind of thing would clearly be for later; it looked as though Gilberto and his people were preparing for an attack of some sort or another, so she and Ezio were clearly going to need to help in whatever way Gilberto thought would be best.
“It’s good to see that you both came so quickly, mi amici,” Gilberto said, hurrying over to meet up with them as she and Ezio made their way up and out of the basement storeroom.
“What’s the trouble, Gilberto?” she asked, as the three of them came up out of the basement and into the man’s office; the harried air about all of the thieves present hadn’t diminished in the slightest.
“The Cento Occhi have been making more of a push into our territory, and somehow one of them managed to find out about this place,” the look in Gilberto’s eyes suggested that he still harbored suspicions against Niccolò, but Maria knew that she couldn’t spare the time they would need to begin convincing the man that such suspicions were baseless.
“They’re making an attack, then?” she asked, even though the question itself hardly needed to be voiced at this point.
“Sí,” Gilberto said, with the sharp nod that she’d come to expect from the man after working alongside him for so long. “We’ve already gotten the people who’d been staying here to stay somewhere else, so there’s little chance of any of them getting themselves caught up in this.”
“Bene, so where do you want us to stand?” Ezio asked, before Maria herself could ask that same kind of question.
“Behind the barricades, alongside Corradin and Angelo; but before you go off, would you mind calling out Messer Aeon again? I think his help would be worth more than anything the Cento Occhi could send against us.”
“I’m beginning to see that,” Ezio said, grinning slightly as he fetched the Apple from the hidden pouch within his robes where he’d kept it ever since they had all come to Roma alongside Mother and Uncle Mario.
There was the expected sensation of buzzing in her ears as Aeon made his appearance from the depths of the device, but as the familiar form of the black-clad Assassin solidified out of the light emerging from the Apple and Aeon took the device into his very form in order to protect it from anyone who might have otherwise attempted to take it for themselves, Maria saw the fingers of his left hand – encased in the same kind of black glove that shone like polished leather as his right – clench slightly. The strange sensation in her head eased then, bringing a welcome relief as it did so.
“Grazie, amico,” she said, nodding to Aeon as the man in black dipped his hooded head in her direction.
~AC: Bro~
As he, little Maria, La Volpe, and Aeon all took their respective positions among the ranks of the thieves who La Volpe had taken under his wing – with Aeon naturally spearheading the forces that would meet the Cento Occhi head-on – Ezio narrowed his eyes as he began to see the first of the Cento Occhi’s forces as they charged into the inn’s courtyard. As he’d begun to suspect, there were Borgia soldiers supporting them. It was all too likely, considering the fact that their hold upon Roma hadn’t been entirely loosened as yet, those working for the Cento Occhi had gone to the Borgia in person.
It was one of the disadvantages when the Brotherhood attempted to dislodge one tyrant or another: all of those who supported them for whatever reason would come charging to their defense.
Still, there were few better causes that Ezio could think to spend himself on than to bring liberty to those who had been deprived of it. So, when the Cento Occhi and their Borgia masters clashed with La Volpe’s thieves, Ezio was right there reinforcing them from his position behind the barricade that had been raised to defend the façade of La Volpe Addormentata. He might not have possessed the sheer, overwhelming power that Aeon could bring to any battle where his services were called upon – and hence he himself wasn’t nearly as powerful a symbol of hope as the man in black had become, not just for the Brotherhood, but all of those who had seen him in action as an ally – but Ezio was determined to do what he could to support those who’d stood beside him in their turn.
More than a few times – and certainly more than he would have wished, if he’d been given any kind of choice he could have accepted – one of La Volpe’s thieves would drag one of their own behind the barricade that he and little Maria were helping some of their brothers and sisters to man, and if they were injured enough one of the others would come to take them into the inn for further treatment. Still, Ezio suspected that such a thing would have been a far more frequent occurrence if not for Aeon standing as a nigh-impenetrable shield-wall before them.
Just as he was beginning to wonder when the losses the Cento Occhi were taking at their hands – though mostly at Aeon’s, if Ezio was to be perfectly honest – would finally overwhelm either the fear or the loyalty – what could be said to exist, when the Borgia and their Templar masters were involved – the tattered, broken remnants of those who had come to La Volpe Addormentata broke and ran at last. Finally allowing himself the breathe deeply, relaxing for the first time since the siege had begun, Ezio stood up and joined the rest of La Volpe’s thieves as they dismantled the barricades and brought the materials back into the storage sheds that they’d been brought out from in the first place.
Aeon fell into step beside him once he’d finished with that particular task, returning the Apple to him and then returning to the device himself without a word, though the thoughtful expression on his face suggested that he might have had something to say; that is, if he’d been a different sort of man, of course. Smiling slightly as he tucked the Apple away within the pocket hidden in the folds of his robes, Ezio yawned as he continued on his way into the inn now before him.
Considering everything that had previously happened, Ezio wasn’t surprised when La Volpe offered to let him and little Maria stay and recover their strength, though that wasn’t to say he wasn’t pleased, of course. Naturally, the both of them took the offer almost before it had been given. Bidding his littlest sister good night, Ezio loosed another, almost jaw-cracking yawn as he made his way up to the room that he’d been directed for the duration of his many and varied stays.
Chapter 395: Mail heist
Chapter Text
After he’d had both a night of rest and a filling morning meal, Ezio found himself called upon by La Volpe himself.
“I’m glad to have had your help in these matters, amico, and while I would not wish to impose, there is another matter that has come to my attention,” La Volpe said, once the pair of them had settled down in his office.
“What is it?” he asked, wondering just what it was that he was going to be called upon to do this time.
“I have received word of the location of a storehouse where the Borgia have been keeping the money and documents that the Cento Occhi have been using to make themselves such a problem to the people of Roma,” La Volpe said, and Ezio smirked softly as La Volpe described the location to him.
“And I suppose you wish for me to fetch these for you, sí?” he asked, smirk widening into a grin.
“You can hardly deny that they would do a great deal more good in our hands than in theirs, Ezio,” La Volpe said, a grin of his own lighting his face.
“Bene, then I suppose I can fetch these documents for you,” he said, as he rose from his seat and began making his way out of the office that La Volpe had set up for himself with his and little Maria’s help – something Ezio would always find himself remembering when he would catch sight of one of the little touches that he or his littlest sister had left behind – with La Volpe’s words of gratitude following him out.
When he’d made his way back out into La Volpe Addormentata’s courtyard, Ezio felt the subtle thrumming from the Apple that let him know that Aeon wished to speak with him about some matter or another.
“Would you like my help?” the man in black asked, once Ezio had removed the Apple from the folds of his robes and Aeon had reformed his body from the light.
“Not this time, amico,” he said, smiling as Aeon’s bright yellow eyes turned to him, a muted expression of curiosity upon his ageless face. “While I’m certain that things would be a great deal more simple if I had your aid, I don’t wish to impose an unfair burden on you, Aeon.”
There was also the issue that he might become too dependant upon the aid of a man who – for all the aid he had given to the Brotherhood and all of their allies, and freely as well – was still nearly a complete mystery aside from the few things he’d chosen to reveal. And little enough of those, besides. Aside from even that, however, Ezio had no desire to allow his own skills to degrade from his over-reliance on the seemingly impenetrable concealment that Aeon could offer at a whim.
Still, he didn’t wish to offend the man by bringing up such a comparatively selfish desire when the man himself had already made such selfless offers; ageless or not, Ezio doubted it was as easy on the man as Aeon tried to make it appear for him to do so much.
When he’d made it out to the location that La Volpe had described to him from the reports of his own thieves, Ezio breathed deeply as he made his way back down to the street, having searched in vain for either a hay cart or a pile of raked leaves. Making certain that he was out of sight of what guards there might have been in an out-of-the-way place such as this, Ezio made his way inside. Slinging the satchel he’d taken with him down off of his right shoulder as soon as he’d caught sight of the documents he’d been sent out to fetch.
Taking a long moment to scan the rooms that his second-sight would be able to see into for the presence of anyone who might attack him for what he was currently doing – or else what he was about to do – Ezio moved on to the strongbox that he’d spotted while he’d been gathering the documents that the Borgia had provided to the Cento Occhi. Swiftly picking the lock, Ezio unloaded the strongbox and piled the heavy bags of coins into the satchel alongside the documents he was carrying.
The sound of heavy footfalls drew his attention then, and the sight of a red-glowing form in his second-sight when he called upon it drew an annoyed sigh from Ezio as he scooped the second-last bag out of the strongbox before him. Slinging the satchel back up onto his right shoulder, Ezio grabbed the last of the bags, closed the strongbox so at least anyone tracking his presence would have to open it determine that something had gone amiss, and hurried as quietly as he could manage from the room.
Once he’d made it back outside, Ezio winced as he heard the cries of alarm beginning to go up behind him. Climbing as quickly as he could manage up the walls of a nearby building, Ezio allowed himself to breathe more deeply once he’d managed to make it out of the immediate line-of-sight of anyone who might have been searching for him. Well, searching for the one who’d stolen from them, but it all amounted to the same, in the end.
Making his way back to La Volpe Addormentata, Ezio sighed; he was glad not to have ended up getting into another fight so soon after the siege that he, little Maria, and all their allies had ended up facing just a day ago, but there was no question in his mind that he’d have to deal with them later. Still, he could at least be grateful for the reprieve he’d managed to get today by making the best of it.
Starting with delivering his spoils to La Volpe, of course.
Chapter 396: Rescue mission
Chapter Text
After she’d been called back to the Rosa in Fiore by a message from Claudia, Maria had bid farewell to Ezio and Gilberto both – taking a few moments more to thank the man for his hospitality before she departed, of course – and then made her way back down into the tunnels. The Borgia had been all the more determined to catch the pair of them, given each and every moment of defiance that they had not only displayed to those who thought themselves so far above the people they purported to rule, but the fact that through the Brotherhood they encouraged that same defiance in so many others. She and Ezio had both agreed that it was better that they remained out of sight as much as they reasonably could, under the circumstances.
Given what she’d heard Cesare intended to do to her if he managed to get his hands on her – as unlikely as that was going to be – Maria had agreed quickly.
Once she’d made it back into the basement of the Rosa in Fiore again, Maria sighed as she made her way back up the stairs. There were times when this struggle of theirs could seem never ending, and Maria would find herself wondering just what was going to be at the end of it. Ever since she’d seen Aeon, and the way he’d been bound so tightly to the Apple, Maria had found herself wondering if such a thing had been his choice, or if that kind of thing would end up happening to her some time.
She couldn’t even comfort herself with the ultimate fate of Altaïr’s apprentice Alnesr, because she didn’t actually know what had happened to him, in the end.
Shaking off those thoughts as well as she’d ever managed to, Maria continued on her way up to the main floor of the Rosa in Fiore. Cocking her head in surprise, as she caught sight of a man who was only familiar to her from the descriptions that Ezio had given of the man that he’d rescued from the danger that being in debt to a man such as Cesare Borgia would present to anyone, Maria continued on her way into the Rosa’s main room. When Mother waved her forward, Maria wondered what she was going to be asked to do next, even as she made her way to the foot of the main staircase where Mother and the man who Ezio had rescued were waiting for her.
“Ah, you would be the little Maria your mother told me about, sí?” the man, old and graying as Ezio had described him, but with a far more jovial demeanor that could only come from someone who had found their lives their own again after they’d given up hope of anything like that happening. “I’m in you’re brother’s debt, and given everything I’ve seen of your family, I could not be happier.”
“This is Egidio Troche, Maria,” Mother said, drawing her attention from where Maria had been studying the senator where he stood before her. “He’s been sharing a great deal of insight with us into the inner-workings of Cesare’s court.”
“Grazie, Messer,” she said, returning her attention to the man, who seemed to have more to say than just a greeting.
“You and your brother have both been doing good work, I hear, dispatching Cesare’s ambassadors anywhere you manage to run across them, but the matter of those who have been colluding with those ambassadors still remains,” the senator said, a serious expression overtaking his jovial face. “You both must also make certain that no word of your actions makes it back to Cesare.”
“I’ll be sure to let Ezio know about your advice, Messer, grazie,” Maria said, even though she was well aware of the need to be discreet in these matters.
Even with Cesare presently in Romagna overseeing one of his many campaigns, the man still possessed enough people in Roma to make trouble for the Brotherhood if they didn’t maintain due diligence in cutting them down.
“I must be about my work now, Senatore. Madre, it was good to see you again,” she said formally, excusing herself from the meeting that Egidio and her mother then swiftly returned to as she caught sight of Agnella signaling for her attention.
Once the pair of them had met up, moving to a secluded alcove out of the sight of the main room but close enough to spot anyone trying to spy on them with enough time to throw off any suspicion, Agnella didn’t waste time telling Maria just why it was that she’d wanted to speak with her. Apparently, that fat bastard Rodrigo had been composing a report to his somehow even more depraved bastard of a son; a report that would bring enough of the latter’s troops into Roma to cause untold trouble for the Brotherhood if such a thing wasn’t stopped.
“Capito, I’ll find this courier before he starts on his way,” she said, nodding to Agnella as she turned and made her way back out of the Rosa once more.
Making her way back up to the rooftops of Roma once she was safely out of sight of the crowd that always seemed to be gathered around the Rosa at all hours except the dead of night, Maria called upon her second-sight so that she would be more easily able to spot the man she’d need to find if she was to recover the letter he’d been meant to deliver. She managed to find him swiftly enough, in a tavern of all places, and so it was with a certain amusement that she went about making her own way in to that tavern.
The place seemed somehow even smaller than the shabby little building she’d spotted from an adjacent rooftop, once she’d made her way inside at last, Maria called up her second-sight again – with a brief, fleeting thought as to how some things might have very well proved simpler if she could have her second-sight in one eye, and her normal vision in the other – quickly locating the satchel that the man had been carrying. He was being careless enough with it that Maria found herself wondering for a long moment if this whole setup was some kind of a trap and the man knew that he was being followed.
Still, when Maria paused for a long moment to sweep the cramped environs of the tavern with her second-sight in more detail than she’d taken the time to do when she was merely looking for the letter that the man had been carrying, she didn’t find anything that suggested that her suspicions were anything more than the product of her overworked imagination. And so, moving as casually as she’d learned to do under the coaching of Gilberto and his fellow thieves, Maria lifted the letter that that bastard Rodrigo had written to his bastard son and left the tavern behind her at last.
Maria knew, even as she regained the rooftops and continued on her way back to the Rosa, that there was always the chance that she would need to intercept the man on the road out of Roma. Still, there was also the chance that he would still be present in the tavern where she left him when she returned with the forged message that Agnella was going to provide for her. The latter would make things a great deal easier, but she knew that the former was honestly more likely.
Once she’d returned with the forged letter that Agnella had provided for her – accurate down to the small flourishes that Rodrigo had added for whatever reason – Maria quickly crossed the distance that she’d put between herself and the tavern where she’d left the courier. Just as she’d thought, the man was just coming out of the building when she spotted him, and so she descended as quickly and quietly as she could back down to the ground. There was still one last step before she could call this latest task of hers finished, after all.
Cutting ahead on the road the man was taking on his way out of Roma, Maria took a moment to compose herself after she’d had to run so fast, so that she could be as certain as possible that she wouldn’t raise the man’s suspicion while she planted the forgery on him. Cesare was certain to be pleased that things were going to well in Roma. Forcing herself not to sigh in relief once she’d managed to plant the forgery, Maria did allow herself to relax as much as she ever did when she was out on the Brotherhood’s business.
Making her way back down into the tunnels that the Brotherhood had made such good use of when they’d first been shown then, Maria found herself making her way back to the Rosa, eager to have another relatively simple assignment. Once she made it back into the Rosa’s basement, Maria yawned as she made her way back up to the ground floor once again. Snapping her mouth shut as she caught sight of Ezio, standing in the main room of the Rosa, her brother smiling as the pair of them caught sight of each other, Maria hurried to greet him.
“It’s good to see you again, sorellina,” her last brother said, as the pair of them broke from their embrace after a long moment.
“You seemed to be in a hurry, fratello,” she said, leaning against him – she could remember a time when he’d seemed to tower over her in the best possible way, and now the pair of them stood at nearly the same height – as the pair of them continued on their way to the courtyard in front of the Rosa. “So, I guess you haven’t just come here for my company, eh?”
“Sí, and not for the food, either,” her silly brother said, and the pair of them shared a spate of brief laughter, before Ezio sobered and turned a serious expression to her. “I received word from Machiavelli that Prospero and Fabrizio Colonna – who have both caused more than their share of trouble for the Borgia – have at last been captured, and are due to be executed by torture. I’d thought that you and Aeon would be just the people to help me put a stop to that.”
“Sí, but why ask me if you’re going to call on Aeon?” she asked, more than a little confused by the prospect. “The man’s an army unto himself, truly.”
“Sí, but it’s hardly polite to push all of our troubles onto his shoulders, even if he does seem strong enough to bear them,” Ezio said, and the bright shimmer of the Apple, even as hidden as it was, combined with the familiar, distinctly unpleasant buzzing in the back of her head, let Maria know that Aeon himself had something to say on the subject.
“I see no problems with that,” the deep, resonant voice of Aeon himself rang out, once his body had reformed from out of the light within the artifact.
Maria was pleased to note that such a sight was steadily becoming less strange as she found herself seeing it more and more often. Still, she couldn’t say she was pleased that the after-effects of the man’s presence in their world, even after he’d done what he could to mitigate them, still remained. Clearly, it was something that Maria would need to steel herself to deal with.
“I was raised better than that,” Ezio said, bringing Maria’s attention back to the present from where it had clearly wandered.
“I suppose,” Aeon said, an inscrutable expression on his face as he retreated back into the Apple once more.
“He truly does seem to want to help,” she said, though the expression he’d given Ezio just before he’d vanished once more… Maria still couldn’t make heads-or-tails of it.
“Sí, but there’s no real telling just how far we can truly push him,” her brother said, as the pair of them began making their way through the crowds to a secluded place where they could make their way up to the rooftops once again. “For all we’ve found out, there’s a great deal we still don’t know about our miracolo fratello.”
“Vero, I can see what you mean,” she said, as the pair of them made their way up to Roma’s rooftops once again.
Ezio signaled for her to follow his lead, and the pair of them quickly made their way to the place where Niccolò had presumably detailed in either the message that he’d sent to her brother, or else in person when the pair of them had met. As the pair of them drew closer, Maria found that she could tell just where it was the pair of them were going to be heading: there was a large crowd, surging and clearly on the verge of becoming unruly, gathering in the square before them. When the pair of them alighted on a rooftop overlooking the square, Maria was hardly surprised when Aeon emerged once more from the depths of the Apple.
She could hardly have expected him to do anything else, after all.
She and Ezio unleashed a hail of thrown knives down upon the unsuspecting heads of the Borgia guards who had been standing around the cage where Prospero and Fabrizio had been held, as though they were simply animals to be displayed, and just before the last of the knives had reached their targets, the three of them leaped down from the rooftop, the snap-hiss of Aeon’s shining, red blades sounding just before they had landed.
Naturally, the man in black was the first of them to cut down one of the Borgia guards, right in their very tracks as they seemed about to take another step. Drawing her sword, Maria glanced briefly toward the path that Aeon was making for himself, before pressing forward down her own path. The Borgia guards who had remained – those who hadn’t had the sense to turn and run for their lives when they’d seen Aeon coming – behind, attempting to stop the three of them even as they were cut down in their tracks, fell to the last man.
However, just as Aeon slashed the lock that had been holding the bars of Prospero and Fabrizio’s closed so tightly together, Maria caught sight of the reinforcements that the Borgia guards had somehow been able to call for; clearly, some of those who had turned and fled from the battle had only done so to fetch more of their own forces.
“Grazie, mi amici, my brother and I owe you our lives,” one of the two men – either Prospero or Fabrizio, Maria didn’t precisely know – said, but Ezio cut him off before he could say more than that..
“There will be time for that later, amico,” her last brother said, his tone slightly terse, but a kindly expression on his face all the same. “Right now, we should concentrate on those that remain.”
However, with the five of them all working in concert with one another, the last of the reinforcements that the Borgia had called in to aid them soon lay just as dead as those who had first tried to prevent them from rescuing the men who they’d been keeping captive. Aeon vanished back into the Apple before the last of the corpses had fallen to the ground, and Maria found herself wondering for a moment if the man in black had somehow been offended by Ezio’s refusal to allow him to aid the Brotherhood that he seemed to have given so much to.
Even his very Self, in the end.
However, as she and Ezio said their farewells to Prospero and Fabrizio, wishing them well and extending an offer of aid in case they found themselves being pressured by the Borgia again, Maria found herself with the oddest feeling of amusement. Of all the things to be feeling, she mused, even as she and Ezio made their way back up to Roma’s rooftops once more.
Chapter 397: The play’s the thing
Chapter Text
Once he and little Maria had returned to the Rosa – after a meal and some rest for the night, of course – Ezio found himself called to a meeting by La Volpe at his hotel. Leaving a message with Lucia, so that Mother, Claudia, and little Maria wouldn’t worry so much for him, Ezio made his way into the depths of the Rosa and then back down into the tunnels that had been such a boon for him and his brother and sister Assassins ever since Machiavelli had pointed them out.
Truly, he didn’t look forward to making do without them, once he and his departed from Roma; whenever they were compelled to do such a thing.
Once he’d made it back to La Volpe Addormentata, following the signs on the wall that had clearly been renewed by some helpful thief or other, Ezio sighed with relief as he dusted the crumbs from the bread he’d taken along to eat from his hands, since he hadn’t been able to have breakfast before he’d received La Volpe’s message. Making his way up to the main floor of the Inn that La Volpe had established so well for himself, at least once he and little Maria had aided the man in restoring it, Ezio soon found himself pulled aside by one of the younger thieves who was evidently serving as La Volpe’s messenger at the moment.
Apparently, the man wished to hold the meeting he’d called in his office, a place that Ezio hadn’t visited quite enough times yet to make his way there without checking for the sign that La Volpe had so helpfully put up. Once he’d made his way into the office that La Volpe maintained, he found that the man was about to rise from the desk that he’d been working behind for what seemed to be some time, if the volume of paperwork on his desk was any indication.
“Ezio, it’s good to see that you came so quickly,” La Volpe said, a pleased expression on his face as he settled back into his seat. “There’s something I need to speak with you about.”
“Bene, but there’s also something that I wish to discus with you, as well,” he said, settling down in the chair that La Volpe offered to him.
“What would that be, Ezio?”
“It’s time to pay a visit to Lucrezia’s lover, Pietro,” he said; he’d spotted the man when he and Aeon had made their way through the Castello Sant’Angelo, while the man in black himself had gone on to rescue Caterina in his own strange, unearthly way.
He’d known that the information he’d gathered would come in handy sooner or later, so he was glad to have it.
“Bene, I already have people looking for him,” La Volpe said, nodding.
“Sí¸ and that’s good, but a working actor shouldn’t be hard to find, particularly a famous one like this one.”
“Sí, but the man is apparently famous enough to have his own minders,” La Volpe said, shaking his head. “And, there’s been some indication that he’s gone to ground, since he’s afraid of Cesare.”
“He’d have to be mad not to be,” he said, shaking his head; either mad, or with more skill than his profession would suggest. “Keep looking, will you?” Still, he hadn’t heard anything that even hinted that there was anything more to Lucrezia’s plaything than what he’d first seen while observing the pair of them during their clandestine meeting; a meeting that Cesare had clearly had his own people observing, as well. “Now, what was it that you wanted to talk to me about, Volpe?”
“It’s a rather delicate matter,” La Volpe said, seeming to wrestle with himself for a long moment, before deciding to press on. “Someone has warned Rodrigo to stay away from the Castello Sant’Angelo.”
“And you suspect Machiavelli?” he asked, suspecting what he was about to hear, but wishing to hear such words from the source, all the same.
“It’s a difficult thing, I know, but all of the information that I’ve been able to gather points to the same conclusion,” La Volpe said, the look on his face suggesting that he was marshalling his arguments. “However, the attack on Monteriggioni, and then this whole business with Rodrigo…”
“I know that this whole business with Machiavelli has been preying on your mind, but we mustn’t allow ourselves to be driven apart by mere suspicion.”
Just as he was about to get up, having said his piece and knowing that La Volpe would need to think about what had been going on before he made any kind of decision about what he was going to do next, Ezio turned at the sudden slam of the door as it was suddenly, roughly opened. A young thief, clearly wounded in a running-battle of the kind Ezio had become uncomfortably familiar with during the course of his work with the Brotherhood, staggered into the office, his gaze seeming to lock on La Volpe.
“Bad news! The Borgia know the locations of our spies!” the man shouted, even as Ezio rushed to catch him before he could lose his hold on the door and fall to the floor.
“Who told them?!” La Volpe demanded, rising from his seat with a face like a thundercloud.
“Maestro Machiavelli was asking about our search for the actor, Pietro, earlier today,” the man said, and Ezio struggled to keep himself from visibly wincing.
He couldn’t help but notice the fact that the man sounded distinctly unrehearsed, even though this was one of the way he’d had some of his and little Maria’s recruits working to destabilize more than a few of the remaining holds that the Borgia possessed on the people of Roma. If nothing else, even as he found himself entirely annoyed at the timing, Ezio found that he had to admire the elegance of what was happening. Even if it wasn’t one of the Borgias’ plans, it would have much the same effect if he allowed it to go much farther.
“Ezio,” La Volpe said, turning to him with the expression of a man who had just had a particularly unpleasant suspicion confirmed; Ezio sighed, knowing how any defense of Machiavelli would make him look in the thief’s eyes.
“They’ve got four of our men under guard!” the young thief shouted, drawing their attention once more. “I was lucky to get away when I did!”
“Where are they keeping them?” he asked, guiding the wounded thief over to the chair that he’d been previously seated in, if only long enough so that he would be able to tend at least some of the young man’s wounds in what time they clearly had.
“Not far from here: near Santa Maria del Orto,” the young thief reported, shooting him a grateful expression as he finished bandaging the worst of his wounds.
“Grazie, Ezio, but we should get moving,” La Volpe said, and Ezio let the man pull him back to his feet, offering his own arm to the young thief as he did so.
The three of them quickly made their way out to the stables that La Volpe maintained on his property, with the man himself calling for the pair of them to ride as swiftly as they could.
“I still do not believe that Machiavelli has turned traitor,” he called, as the pair of them rode for Santa Maria del Orto.
“I will allow that the man has done a great deal of good for our cause in the past, and yet, you must also consider the latest happenings: first the attack on Monteriggioni, then the business at Castello Sant’Angelo, and now this. I hardly see who else could be behind it all.”
“We can discus this later!” he called back, as the pair of them continued on their way. “We may still be in time to save them!”
As he and La Volpe continued their headlong, heedless dash through the narrow streets of Roma, Ezio could only hope that his declaration – preemptive and optimistic as it may very well have been – ended up proving true when they arrived. The journey seemed to take longer than it likely lasted, which he’d been expecting considering who he’d found himself worrying for those thieves who had been taken captive by the Borgia, but when Ezio finally caught sight of the covered wagon that the Borgia guards were attempting to force the force the four thieves that they had captured into, it was with a distinct sense of relief.
Even as he and La Volpe descended upon the guards, cutting them off from their would-be victims not only with the strength of their sword-arms, but also with the weight of their horses as they pushed through the thronging guards. The added height helped to mitigate the advantage of reach that the group of halberdiers would have otherwise possessed, and Ezio shifted to cut down any of the Borgia guards who moved in his direction.
“Run! Head back to base! We’ll meet you there!” La Volpe shouted, once he’d managed to clear out the ranks of Borgia guards threatening him.
Breathing more easily once he’d managed to clear out the front ranks of the Borgia halberdiers, leaving only those who had possessed either the good sense to run, or those who had been too grievously injured to move; more of the latter than the former, it had to be said.
Turning to follow in the wake of the escaping thieves, shepherding them so that they wouldn’t run into anyone else who might cause trouble for them – or at least would have ample protection if such a thing were to happen – Ezio only allowed himself to relax fully once he saw the surrounding environs of La Volpe Addormentata coming into view once more. Dismounting inside the stables, he and La Volpe made their way back into the inn, while the four thieves that they’d rescued made their way down into the hidden passages that Ezio had found himself becoming steadily more well-acquainted with the longer he spent in Roma.
It truly did remind him of the catacombs he’d found in Venezia and Firenze both, back when he’d still been starting out within the Brotherhood.
As he and La Volpe made their way back into the inn, Ezio looked back as the thief flipped the sign on the door to the side that read “closed”, without even breaking stride. As he and La Volpe settled down at the bar, Ezio more than glad to have the chance to sit on something that wasn’t bouncing around as much as even the most well-trained mount did as a matter of course, he looked over briefly as he heard La Volpe ordering refreshments.
Both for them, and for the men who were even now making their way into the room where he and La Volpe had previously settled themselves.
However, even before the first of those men had settled down at the bar alongside them, La Volpe had begun his interrogation.
“What were you able to find out?”
“There’s a plan to kill the actor this evening,” the leader of this particular group, a scarred man who didn’t seem to have reached his physical prime yet, said. “Cesare is sending his butcher to do it, personally.”
“Who is that?” he asked, unsure of just which one of Cesare’s hired thugs he’d have to be dealing with next.
“You’ve seen him,” La Volpe said, turning to him with a distinct expression of distaste. “Micheletto Corella; no one could forget a face like that.”
And indeed, Ezio found himself recalling the face of the man the face of the man who had been standing at Cesare’s right hand during the attack on Monteriggioni, as well as in the stables of Castello Sant’Angelo when he’d paid a visit to that place during the course of his work. A cruel, battered face; a face that seemed to have far more years about it than the body it was attached to could have lived, if the voice he’d heard in the stables was any indication. A face with hard, empty eyes, and a mouth scarred so that it seemed permanently fixed into a sardonic smirk.
Not a man that Ezio would have wished to meet, at least under any other circumstances than the ones he was about to be arranging.
“The man can kill his victims in one hundred and fifty different ways, it’s been said, but it’s widely known that his favorite method is strangulation,” La Volpe said, taking up the thread of their conversation once more. “He’s certainly the most accomplished murderer in Roma; no one has yet managed to escape him.”
“Let’s hope that I can change that tonight,” Ezio said, knowing that, with Aeon by his side, he would have a much better chance of making good on his resolve than someone who was forced to work without the aid of the man in black.
For all that he didn’t wish to rely too heavily on the ephemeral Assassin, Ezio could hardly deny that the man was an asset like no other.
“Where is it to take place?” La Volpe asked, returning his attention to his thieves once more. “Have you managed to find out?”
“Pietro’s performing in a passion play this evening,” that same thief, who seemed to have appointed himself as the spokesman for his group, said. “He’s been rehearsing in a secret location.”
“He must be terrified,” Ezio said, feeling a hint of sympathy for the man who had found himself in Cesare’s sights for what would be a minor indiscretion to anyone who was not completely mad.
“And?” La Volpe prompted, glancing briefly Ezio’s way, before returning his attention to his gathered thieves.
“He’s going to be playing Christ,” one of the younger thieves snickered, inordinately amused by everything that was going on; La Volpe glared at him, and even Ezio found himself looking askance until the young man had sobered. “He’s to be suspended from a cross,” the man continued. “Micheletto will come at him with a spear, pierce his side, only it won’t be make-believe.”
“Do you know where Pietro is?” he asked, turning his attention to the thief who seemed to have taken over their conversation.
“I can’t tell you that,” the younger man said, shaking his head. “We couldn’t find out. But, we do know that Micheletto will be waiting at the Terme di Traiano. His plan seems to be this: his men will be disguised in costumes, therefore making the killing look like an accident.”
“That still leaves us without any real way of telling where this play is due to be held,” he said, knowing that there was little he could do to change the circumstances they were currently operating under, but still finding himself annoyed by them, all the same.
“We can’t tell you something we don’t know, Messer Ezio,” the first thief spoke up again, a tolerant sort of annoyance on his face. “Still, I doubt it’ll be far from where Micheletto is planning to gather his people.”
“Sí, I suppose that’s the best I can ask for,” he said, nodding. “I’ll go there and shadow him; he will lead me to Lucrezia’s lover. Grazie, mi amici.”
“Anything else?” La Volpe asked, sweeping his gaze over the gathered thieves.
When he was answered in the negative by the last of the men who he had called to meet with him, and more than that when the refreshments that he’d ordered were brought over at last, La Volpe stood up, calling Ezio over to speak with him as his thieves all fell upon it with almost visible gratitude.
“Ezio, I know that neither of us are particularly eager to believe this, but I am convinced that Machiavelli has betrayed us,” the leader of the Brotherhood’s allied thieves said, his expression as grave as Ezio had ever seen it.
“Is that simply because he’d been acting mysteriously? Or the way he keeps to himself to a great degree?” Ezio asked, feeling more than a little amused for the fact that he could have just as easily have been speaking about Aeon as he was about Machiavelli.
“Sí, I suppose our men in black do have quite a bit in common with one another,” La Volpe said, with an amused chuckle of his own.
“Can I still count on your aid for this?” he asked, wishing to know just what kind of support he was going to be operating with, so that he could begin to make plans in earnest.
“Sí, as long as you make sure to keep an eye on Machiavelli,” La Volpe assured him “Set Messer Aeon on him, if things keep going wrong like this.”
“I’ll keep that option open,” he said, smiling softly as he turned to make his way back down into the hidden tunnel system again.
There were more than a few things about La Volpe’s manner, as the pair of them had been speaking, that let Ezio know that he would be better off relying on the men and women that he and little Maria had recruited. At least until he’d managed to find out who was truly passing information to the Borgia and had managed to root them out. Like as not, Aeon would end up lending him aid in the matter, since the man in black seemed to be just as dedicated to the Brotherhood as any of them.
Perhaps even moreso, given everything he had proved to be willing to do; binding himself to the Apple by whatever means he had being only the first part of it.
As he made his way up into the lower levels of the Rosa in Fiore, Ezio chuckled as he felt his stomach rumbling. It looked like he was going to be joining little Maria and the rest of his family for at least one more meal, before he had to leave to rescue the man who’d fallen afoul of Cesare Borgia and his depraved proclivities. He’d have to consider just who he was going to bring along on mission when he inevitably departed again.
On the one hand, the fact that he’d managed to secure La Volpe’s confidence once more meant that he would have little trouble working with the thieves who made their homes within Roma, but on the other there was no denying that this would be a prime opportunity to train more of the recruits that he and little Maria had gathered from those unfortunate districts that still remained in the hands of the Borgia. Reminding himself to think about such things in more detail later, Ezio rubbed the kinks out of his neck as he made his way back into the semi-public area of the Rosa in Fiore.
Because, while it was true that come this evening he would have a great deal to do, he would always do the best he could to make time to spend with his family.
Chapter 398: Death denied
Chapter Text
After having considered things for some time, as well as having consulted with little Maria and Mother both, Ezio had decided to bring along Saverio Salerno, Rinaldo Rocca, Alighiero Abate, and Fedele Fabiani, supplementing the four of them with one of La Volpe’s thieves, in addition to those who would be watching from within Il Colosseo itself. Once he’d spotted Micheletto’s men approaching – all six of those that he and his had observed while they were being gathered up for Cesare’s bloody work – Ezio directed his people to conceal themselves in the shadows that had lengthened as the evening had advanced.
Narrowing his eyes as he caught sight of Micheletto himself approaching, carrying the folded costumes that his people were going to be dressed in, Ezio carefully primed the poison-dart launcher that Leonardo had created for him such a long time ago. Taking aim, once Micheletto had departed to see to his own costume – that of a Roman Centurion, while the men he had brought with him were to be dressed as Legionaries – Ezio steadily cut down the men who had come with him, a single poison-dart to the neck sufficient to clear the way for his recruits and the thief who had come with him to make their own moves.
Making his own way over to the last of the men, Ezio took the costume that had been intended for him and quickly put it on.
Once he and his had taken care of their costumes, having dragged the bodies deeper into the shadows and left them safely out of sight, Ezio nodded to the men who had gathered behind him, before Micheletto himself returned to lead them up to the stage where they were to meet with Pietro. The stage itself had been set up within the ancient amphitheater itself, and though the gloom of evening had firmly taken hold in this place, at least some of that gloom had been dispersed by the hundreds of long, flickering torches that had been mounted on every available column, as well as those that had been set upon high stands before the audience.
Said audience sat on benches, neatly set up on a wooden grandstand, watching a play on the subject of Christ’s Passion.
“I seek Pietro Benintendi,” Micheletto said, displaying a warrant that could have easily been a forgery as not.
True, the Borgia did still hold more control within Roma than was good for anyone who wished to live free, but Cesare Borgia was also not a man who wished to leave anything to chance. Narrowing his eyes slightly as Micheletto began turning in his direction, Ezio schooled his expression as he and his came under the man’s scrutiny.
“Don’t forget, I will be wearing this black cloak with a white star on my right shoulder,” he paused to look them over, and Ezio found himself wondering – not for the first time, and he doubted it would be the last, considering what kind of life he led – just what was going through the man’s mind; he doubted that Micheletto suspected anything, since there was no chance that things would be going nearly as smoothly as they were if Cesare’s man had found them out, but he still found himself curious as to just what was going on behind those cold, calculating eyes. “Cover my back and wait for your cue, which will be Pontius Pilate’s order to the Centurion to strike.”
Knowing that he needed to get to Pietro before Micheletto did, Ezio held himself ready as the play continued around him. He’d gone to plays like this with his family, though few enough of them, and only when Father couldn’t think up a reason to avoid such a thing. He’d wondered why Father never seemed to approve of the play, but learning the truth of their family had helped a great deal. Knowing what it was that the Brotherhood fought for, that their ultimate goal was to end all forms of tyranny over the minds of the people they guarded, Ezio found that he understood.
He also made certain to keep his mind on everything that was going on around him, rather than just listening for the cue that Micheletto had specified while he’d been speaking to those he thought had come to this place to support him. Such attentiveness paid off, of course, when Ezio was able to slip backstage when the eyes of those both in the play and in the audience were no longer so completely upon him as they had been before. Knowing that he would need a way to get close to Micheletto without drawing the kind of suspicion that a Roman Legionary would if he were to be out of place, Ezio quickly shed his costume in favor of a rabbinical robe that he’d managed to uncover.
Making his way back onto the stage from the left, where two dramas were now set to take place, though those in the audience would be privy to only one of them, Ezio took up position behind Micheletto without anyone on the stage or in the play taking note of his actions. He was pleased to note such a thing, even though he had been expecting it.
Once Micheletto had begun to draw his stiletto, safely concealed from the gaze of anyone not close enough to see what would otherwise be covered by the costume he was still wearing, Ezio deployed his own hidden-blade, driving it into Micheletto’s side, and then guiding him offstage before anyone could begin asking after the man’s doings or his own. After he’d laid Cesare’s would-be killer down, however, Ezio noticed that there was the strangest look of triumph in the man’s glittering eyes.
“You cannot save Pietro,” Micheletto said, all but laughing in his face as Ezio straddled the man, pinning him down so that he wouldn’t go haring off to finish his appointed task. “The vinegar on the sponge was poisoned. As I told Cesare, I made doubly sure,” he laughed aloud, so sure of himself that for a moment Ezio himself was tempted to laugh in just the same manner.
After all, Aeon had been offering his aid more and more freely of late.
“You’ve heard what this man has said, amico?” he asked, as the man in black himself reemerged from the depths of the Apple once more.
“I did,” Aeon said, pushing back his deep hood to spill free his waterfall of silver hair. “I suppose you want this Pietro to be taken to a doctor?”
“As fast as you can,” he said, nodding sharply even as Aeon vanished with the preternatural speed that Ezio had seen him demonstrate on such rare and memorable occasions.
Micheletto, of course, looked beside himself with fury, and Ezio was forced to pin the man’s arms to the ground before he could reach again for the stiletto that he’d been clearly intending to use on Pietro before all of this business had happened.
“Do you truly think any of this will mean anything? Even when you kill me, Cesare will hunt you and yours to the ends of the very world,” Micheletto bared his teeth in something that couldn’t be mistaken for a smile. “Even your man in black won’t be safe from my master’s wrath,” he snarled, looking more and more like the dog he’d proven himself to be. “Every man alive has weaknesses.”
“Perhaps,” Ezio allowed, rising back to his feet as Aeon appeared next to him, red blade snapping out to slice across Micheletto’s outstretched right hand as the man foolishly went for his stiletto, even as Ezio turned to look back at him for a moment. “Grazie, amico,” he said, turning his attention to Aeon once again as Micheletto fell back, clutching at his seared hand; he’d often found himself wondering just how hot those blades that Aeon wielded so adroitly were, and seeing what had been done to Micheletto’s hand provided him at least something of an answer. “I must commend your timing, once again.”
“Of course,” Aeon said, seeming to study him for a long moment, before vanishing once more into the depths of the Apple.
Taking the device that the man in black had handed over to him, even as he’d been returning to it, Ezio tucked it away quickly, before Micheletto could begin to regain his bearings after being burned by Aeon’s blades. More than anything, he needed to speak with Pietro, and for that he would need to make his way to the doctor where Aeon would have taken Pietro to be cured of the poison that Micheletto had forced on him in an effort to ensure that his grisly task was carried out.
He met up quickly with the recruits that he’d brought along, with the thief that had come along departing so that he could relay the news of their success to La Volpe. As it turned out, Fedele had managed to catch Aeon’s attention just before the man in black had departed, and hence been able to direct him to Doctor Brunelleschi, who had treated more than a few of Ezio’s own injuries in the not-so-distant past. Thanking Fedele for his quick thinking, Ezio directed his recruits to follow him, just in case any of the Borgia guardsmen remaining in this area decided to make trouble for them.
Making their way to Doctor Brunelleschi’s office, Ezio was pleased to note that – though there were a few encounters with those who had thrown in their lot with the Borgia for whatever reasons such people could have – the streets were for the most part clear of those who would oppose them or try to delay them. An odd sort of thought came to him, as Ezio was continuing on his way up to the door of Brunelleschi’s office, and Ezio found himself wondering if things might have gone differently if he and his had kept hold of the costumes they had been wearing when they’d departed from the Passion play.
Still, those kinds of musings – while amusing in their way – were idle in the extreme, and so Ezio set them aside as he made his way into the darkened, herb-scented interior of Doctor Brunelleschi’s office.
Chapter 399: A few loose ends
Chapter Text
“Merda, I almost thought you were that phantom, come to haunt me again,” Doctor Brunelleschi said, shuddering in a way that Ezio couldn’t quite help but think was slightly overblown; perhaps it was simply because he’d known and worked with Aeon for so long.
“No worries about that amico,” he said, seeing the need to reassure the man; Aeon was rather odd, at least to those who hadn’t been given the chance to get to know him. “How is Pietro doing?”
“He had a rather concerning amount of canterella in his system, but as I’ve seen more than my fair share of those poor unfortunates, particularly considering all of the unrest as of late, I’ve come up with an antidote for just this sort of an occasion.”
“I can hardly thank you enough, cher ami,” Pietro said, seeming as though he would have tried to sit up on the table he’d been laid out on, but for Doctor Brunelleschi returning with a handful of leeches and a stern admonishment not to move as he busied himself.
“This will finish the work begun,” the doctor said, sounding a great deal more settled.
“I’m glad to hear it, dottore,” Ezio said, turning his attention to Pietro once more. “And, as to your gratitude, there is some way for you to repay me and mine for the help we’ve given: the key to the little gate you and Lucrezia use for your trysts at the Castello Sant’Angelo.”
“What are you talking about?” Pietro asked, misgivings clear on his face, even as he obviously struggled to regain his composure. “I’m just a poor actor, a victim of circumstance! I-!”
“Listen: Cesare already knows all about you and Lucrezia,” he preempted, having the feeling that this man in particular was prone to overblown fits of histrionics, even moreso than most of those in his particular profession.
“Dio mio!” Pietro exclaimed, his misgivings – as well as the protestations that he’d been clearly about to raise – swiftly giving way to true fear.
“But, I can help you,” he swiftly reassured the man. “If you would only give me the key.”
Mute with clear shock, Pietro dug into a hidden pocket within the loincloth he’d been dressed in. “I’ve kept it on me since the day she gave it over.”
“Wise of you,” he said, tucking the key into the same, hidden pocket within his robes where he’d stored the Apple that Aeon inhabited. “My men will fetch your clothes, and take you somewhere safe. I’ll detail a could of them to keep watch over you, though you’d best stay out of sight until Cesare looses interest, all the same.”
For a moment, Ezio found himself tempted to assure the man that Cesare would soon have a great deal more on his mind than simply the hunt for some little-name actor who’d only caught his eye from the man’s own sheer spite and possessiveness. Still, Pietro had proven himself to hardly be the type who could keep secrets, and so he turned his thoughts away from the subject. Soon enough, of course, such would become the focus of his attentions once more.
“But, my public!” the man exclaimed.
“They will simply have to make due with Longinus, at least until it’s safe for you to put your head above the parapet,” he said, then offered the man a thin, humorless smile. “Unless you would like to have it lopped right off your shoulders,” nodding as the actor shuddered, Ezio widened his smile in an effort to be at least slightly more reassuring. “In your place, I wouldn’t worry; he isn’t a patch on you.”
“You really think so?”
“No question,” he said, turning to leave, even as he heard the sounds of someone being subjected to the discomfiting sensation of live leeches being attached to their skin
As he swiftly departed from Doctor Brunelleschi’s rather large – though still cramped-feeling, considering everything the man actually possessed in such a place – office, Ezio returned his attention to those Assassins that had followed in his wake as he’d made his way to this particular confrontation. In the end, he deputized Saverio and Rinaldo to watch over Pietro in a nearby safe house, a place that would be given extra protection by the thieves that La Volpe had working this particular area.
After they’d all retrieved their normal garb from the Terme di Traiano, of course.
Chapter 400: A thief and a liar
Chapter Text
Feeling a great deal more settled, after having taken care of the tasks that had been laid out in front of him, Ezio was not so relaxed that he failed to notice someone or other skulking in the shadows near where he was, continuing on his way back to the tunnels that would allow him to move more freely within Roma while the Borgia continued to hold outward power. For a lingering moment, Ezio found himself tempted in the extreme to set Aeon upon the fleeing figure, but no. This, of all things, was something that Ezio could manage for himself.
Of course, once he’d managed to recognize the fleeing form of Paganino – one of La Volpe’s thieves who had been present at the sack of Monteriggioni, and the only one who’d insisted upon staying behind when the Borgia forces had been breaking through the last of their battle-lines – Ezio found himself reaching for the Apple nearly without conscious thought. A shadowy blur dashed forward, smashing into Paganino’s back with the seeming force of a loosed ballista bolt, crumpling the bald, one-eyed man against the wall of a nearby building he’d seemed just about to either climb or else – more likely, given his age and the condition he seemed to be in – to run past.
“Why did you run?” he asked, once Aeon had pulled Paganino back to his feet, holding the thief by the back of his collar as though he were nothing more than a disobedient puppy.
However, just as he’d managed to catch sight of the letter stuffed into the old thief’s pouch – or rather the seal on said letter – Paganino gave an almighty wrench, pulling his already threadbare shirt even further into tatters, and thereby managing to free himself from Aeon’s grasp. His hands, having been scrabbling at his belt even before he’d managed to free himself, were now holding not only an ugly-looking cinquedea, but also a stiletto, besides.
A blur of hot, hissing red slashed downward in the time it took Ezio to blink, though he had been readying himself to take hold of his own weapons – or else to disarm the previously-unknown foe standing before him – and he found himself staring at the cleanly-severed forms of Paganino’s hands, still clutching his blades in their dead grip. For a handful of moments, as Paganino stared down in understandable horror at the charred stumps at the end of his arms, Ezio found himself in complete sympathy with the man.
“Aeon!” he shouted, just slightly too late, as Paganino tried to run off a last time, and Aeon dove upon him with all the preternatural speed that he’d not-quite-seen the man in black demonstrate on so many occasions.
“Yes?” Aeon asked, raptorial yellow eyes coming to rest upon him, as he came to a neat stop, shimmering carmine blade extended for just a moment before the familiar snap-hiss sounded and the blade vanished once more.
“Let me handle the rest of this,” he said, glancing briefly to the maimed and horrified form of Paganino, shivering on the cobblestone street as he stared at his feet, neatly severed as his hands had been, just a few moments prior.
“As you wish,” Aeon said, dipping his hooded head slightly, before vanishing once more into the depths of the Apple.
“Cosa diavolo aspetti?!” Paganino demanded, snarling as Ezio crouched down next to him, having clearly regained himself in the absence of Aeon’s baleful presence. “Kill me already! You were clearly planning to do it before!”
“I was hardly going to kill you,” he said, considering just how he was going to be able to bring the man before him back to La Volpe. “Though I would wish to know why you were willing to sell our cause out to the Borgia.”
“You truly think I’d be willing to throw my life away for anyone willing to consort with that maldito bastardo?! That phantom beast?!”
“Messer Aeon truly terrifies you so much?” Ezio asked in return, though he was beginning to understand such a sentiment more and more, the more time he spent around the man in black.
Aeon, for all the aid he had so willingly offered to the Brotherhood and all who lived under threat from the Templars and their designs, could at times seem terrifyingly inhuman. For all that he clearly tried to restrain himself, it was more than obvious that Aeon had been alone and apart from humanity as a whole for long enough to forget that he himself was, in the end, human. For all the strange powers and abilities that his binding with the Apple had granted him – however such a thing had ultimately been accomplished – Ezio was beginning to realize just how much it had cost the man who called himself Aeon.
Perhaps at had even cost him his name, in the end.
Knowing that he wasn’t likely to secure the cooperation of Paganino – at least not so long as Aeon was an acknowledged part of the Brotherhood, and certainly not after everything that had previously happened – Ezio ended the wounded man’s life as gently as their circumstances would allow, taking the letter he’d been carrying so that La Volpe would know just who it was who had ultimately been responsible for leaking information to the Borgia. So that the both of them could put their remaining worries to rest.
Chapter 401: Closing the Eyes
Chapter Text
Making his way back down into the tunnels, turning his path to head for La Volpe Addormentata once again, Ezio found himself reflecting back on the fear he’d seen in Paganino’s eyes while he’d been speaking of Aeon. More and more, he found himself thinking back on those times when he’d found himself either pressed into calling upon the aid of their mysterious man in black, or else the recipient of Aeon’s not-infrequent offers of aid. And, while it was true that Aeon had more than proven his loyalty and trustworthiness as a member of the Brotherhood – as he was now considered in truth, after the initiation he’d been offered – Ezio found that he could not simply discount Paganino’s perspective on the man in black.
Aeon was a rather unsettling presence, and all the more terrifying for those who had chosen to set themselves against him because he seemed so completely unstoppable. And truly, fear of the unknown – or the unknowable, as it seemed to be in Aeon’s case – could indeed drive the most unassuming of people to acts that they would have never considered were they in their right minds. He would have to speak with La Volpe about what he had seen, and also to impress upon the man that it had not, in the end, been any kind of malice behind Paganino’s actions.
He could do at least that much for the man, after everything that had he’d been driven to.
Once he’d made his way back into the basement of the inn that La Volpe and his thieves did their true work out of, Ezio found himself breathing easily once more. La Volpe was waiting for him, as he’d come to expect from working with the man so much as he previously had, and Ezio found himself wondering what he was going to be asked to do next. The sight of another man sitting next to him drew Ezio’s attention then, and as La Volpe gestured for him to sit down at the table with them, Ezio found himself wondering just what it was that we was going to be called on to do next.
“Ezio, some of my people have discovered another way for us to strike at the Cento Occhi, and through them their Borgia masters,” La Volpe said, a pleased smile on his face as he gestured to the man seated beside him.
“Sí, we have found that, though the Cento Occhi employ a silver-tongued scribe named Vincenzo to speak on their behalf, the man himself has a habit of quarreling with one of their guards, a man by the name of Galvano,” the thief said; Ezio found himself reminded of Rosa in and odd sort of way, though admittedly that was more due to the pale green ribbon around his neck and the fact that he wore the same sort of woolen cap that she did, though his was a dark blue rather than the brownish green that hers had been.
“That does sound like it could work in our favor,” he said, knowing that the Borgia, as ever, would be apt to jump on the first sign of unrest.
Provided that they themselves had not caused the unrest in the first place, of course.
Once he’d gotten a description of both men – Galvano, who he was to kill, and Vincenzo who he would be framing for the killing – Ezio made his way out of the inn after stopping to check on those other thieves that he personally knew. He also promised to deliver a few messages to little Maria when he saw his littlest sister again.
Making his way back up onto the rooftops of Roma once again, Ezio called on the second-sight shared with little Maria, searching for the man limed in gold; the man whose life he would be ending today. Once he’d managed to find that man, Ezio paused for a few moments to wait out the crowd he was moving through, before swooping down on him like one of the eagles he’d seen so often in Assassin iconography.
Finishing the man quickly, Ezio found a small, golden chain with a simple, unadorned locket hanging from it. For a moment, before he shook the thought off and returned to his work, Ezio found himself wondering just who the locket was from, or else who it was for if it was meant to be some kind of a gift. Still, he could not truly afford to wonder at the lives his enemies had made for themselves before their paths and his had intersected in such a final way. In the end, however, it did help to remind him that his enemies were just as much men as he and his were.
It kept him human, in the end.
Tracking down Vincenzo, limed in gold just as Galvano had been, Ezio slipped silently through Roma’s crowds until he found the opportunity to plant the locket on the scribe’s person. Vanishing back into the crowds once more, just as he began to hear the hue and cry from another group of Borgia guards, Ezio made his way down to a nearby tunnel entrance.
This task he was particularly happy to have done with.
Chapter 402: Political maneuvering
Chapter Text
Once she’d left the confines of the Rosa in Fiore – safe as the place might have been, no one who’d been outside of it could truly call the brothel expansive – Maria found herself called upon by what seemed to be another of Gilberto’s thieves.
“So, this is another problem with the Cento Occhi?” she asked, wondering just how many such problems that she herself would be called upon to solve before the end.
“Sí,” the thief she’d met with said. “We and the poor of Roma have an agreement: we do not prey on them, and they do not see us. But, these Cento Occhi banditti do not abide by that rule. Or any rules at all, it seems, so no one would miss them if they happened to disappear.”
“Sí, it certainly seems that way,” she said, feeling a morbid sort of amusement even as she did. “Well, give me their locations, and I’ll be certain to deal with them.”
“Grazie,” the thief said, giving her the requested locations and then letting her go on her way after he’d wished her luck in her hunt.
After she’d thanked Gilberto’s man for his consideration, Maria made her way out to the neighborhood where she’d heard that the bandits she was after were presently working out of. It didn’t take her long to spot them, particularly with the aid of the second-sight that she and Ezio had both shared for each of their respective lives. After she’d tracked them for a bit, getting a feel for their patterns and how each man moved, a crossbow-bolt each served to dispatch them.
Making her way back down onto the streets of Roma once again, Maria quickly tracked down the thief she’d talked with that first time. Reporting her success to the man, and in turn receiving a promise that he would tell her if there was anything else that she could assist with considering their current struggle with the Borgia, Maria bid Gilberto’s man farewell. She wondered for a moment if she should pay a visit to the man herself, but decided to return to the Rosa first.
There was every chance that Mother and Claudia would need her assistance with something, after all.
~AC: Bro~
Finding himself stopped on a rooftop by one of La Volpe’s thieves was hardly a common occurrence, but as Ezio had come to recognize the challenging glint of another’s eyes – man or woman, they all looked the same when they had something to prove – he grinned back.
“I can’t help but think you have something to say to me, amico.”
“You are the famous Ezio Auditore?” the man, his skin browned deeply by Roma’s steady drenching of sunlight. “I have to admit, I expected a much younger man. Let’s see if you live up to your legend, sí?”
“Bene,” he said, chuckling softly. “Let’s see how you measure up.”
The pair of them exchanged grins sharp with challenge, before taking off on a course that would take each of them to a spot that the man – who had identified himself as Vincento, a former house painter who had found himself run out of business by the Borgia, which was a common enough theme among La Volpe’s thieves that he’d almost come to expect it at this point – and he had spoken about just before they’d set off. The pair of them weren’t running the same path, of course, not only to cut down on the temptation that other men would have likely had to sabotage each other, but also t keep him and Vincento from tripping over the other when one of them pulled ahead.
In the end, he did manage to make it to the end-point first, but it was a close enough victory for Vincento to feel more than a little vindicated, at least.
“So, it looks like you do have some life left in you, old man,” Vincento said, grinning as he lightly punched Ezio’s right flank.
Laughing, Ezio slapped the man’s back with a firm, companionable hand. “Your generation hasn’t gotten the best of me yet, fratellino.”
Leaving Vincento and his thoroughly amused laughter behind, Ezio made his way back down to the streets of Roma, vanishing into the depths of Roma’s hidden tunnel-system at last.
~AC: Bro~
When she’d returned to the Rosa in Fiore at last, it was only to be sent out again, this time to meet with Agnella on horseback.
“You and your brother have managed to rid us of the ambassadors who were conspiring with the Borgia, but now it is time to deal with those who conspired with them,” Agnella said, turning back to look over her right shoulder.
Maria nodded. “That would be where I come in, sí?”
A simple confirmation was all the pair of them needed to keep moving, and for a moment Maria found herself wishing that she’d had the time to call upon even one of the recruits that she and Ezio had worked to bring into the Brotherhood, but this was a situation that called for speed above all. And she still had the crossbow she’d bought for herself as soon as she could, so that would do for the present.
As the pair of them closed with the first of the ambassadors, Maria loosed a bolt into his head as Agnella pointed him out to her, and the both of them rode on. All in all, she was called upon to do the same sort of thing seven more times, occasionally supplementing her crossbow with throwing-knives when she wasn’t given enough time to reload the weapon.
Returning to the Rosa once more, after having signaled to enough of the Brotherhood’s recruits to set up an ambush for the Borgia guards that had begun following in her and Agnella’s wake as the pair of them sought to continue about their work, Maria sighed in relief as she and Agnella drew within sight of the protected grounds of the bordello again. Nothing sounded better to her at this moment, though she could possibly be persuaded to have a hot meal beforehand.
Still, more than anything, Maria was simply pleased to be returning to the closest she had to a home in these uncertain times.
Chapter 403: Lair of the wolves
Chapter Text
When he’d found himself looking down into the clouded waters of the sewer that his second-sight had informed him concealed the entrance to yet another lair where the Followers of Romulus concealed themselves from those who would have rightfully driven them out for what they were attempting to do to Roma and her people – or at least revealed them to be charlatans in the employ of the Borgia – Ezio found himself wondering if these particular Followers were also being divided between their own group and what could only truly be called the Followers of Aeon.
Well, I suppose I might as well use that in my own favor, as well, he mused, removing the Apple once more from the hidden pocket within his robes. Aeon himself appeared beside him swiftly enough that Ezio almost found himself wondering if the man in black had been anticipating such a meeting; it was likely enough to be true, considering how scrupulously aware of his surroundings the man in black had already proven himself to be.
“Mi amico, it seems that more of those wolfmen have made their appearance,” he said, knowing that the man in black could not help but to be curious about why he had been called out.
For all that he somehow managed to keep a metaphorical eye on his situation, Aeon was hardly omniscient.
“Oh? Well, it seems as though you called upon me at a rather opportune moment,” Aeon said, casting him an interested glance before turning his calm, golden gaze to the hidden entrance to the catacombs.
“Sí, though I have to confess that I’d hoped to have the last of these bastardi rooted out sooner,” he said, sighing as he himself looked down on the concealed entrance; scanning it with his second-sight once again, wanting to be sure that it was genuine while almost hoping at the same time that it would prove not to be.
No such luck; the catacombs glowed in the same, steady gold that had first drawn Ezio to this very place.
As he and Aeon descended into the catacombs beside one another, Ezio found himself grateful for the presence of the man in black, and in the odd position of envying his situation for the first time since he’d found out what such a thing even was; after all, Aeon would hardly need to wait for his elaborate robes to dry when they were nothing more than a construct of the Apple’s power combined with his own will. It was an absurd thing to consider, Ezio knew such even as he had the thought, but at the very least it served to distract him from the unpleasant nature of the journey that he and Aeon were presently making.
When he and Aeon finally made it through the concealed entrance and into the catacombs proper, the sounds of clashing blades made the situation that they had just walked into all the more obvious.
“It seems as though the schism is present even here,” Aeon said, sounding somewhat pleased; Ezio supposed that he could understand, as well, since these people were in the employ of the Borgia, and hence had tacitly chosen to throw in their lot with them.
The sight of wolfmen being herded into the main area of the catacomb, pursued by those who had taken on as much of Aeon’s appearance as anyone who’d only caught minor glimpses of the man while he’d been slaughtering his way through everyone around him could have, brought rather mixed feelings to Ezio as he bore witness to it. On the one hand, these men had thrown in their lot with the Borgia, and on the other he’d no inkling of how Aeon himself thought of the men who were steadily making themselves over in his image.
One thing that remained true of the man in black: whatever small pieces of himself that he saw fit to share, Aeon was a mysterious man by nature.
Joining in with the efforts of those who had chosen to stand against the Followers of Romulus – those who might easily come to call themselves the Followers of Aeon – Ezio turned as Aeon nodded to him.
“You have other business here, yes?” he asked, though the both of them knew the answer to such questions.
“Va bene,” he said, nodding as he turned to make his way deeper into the maze of the watery, fetid catacombs. “I’ll meet back up with you once I’ve found what these ones were guarding.”
“I’ll meet up with you,” Aeon said, casting an unimpressed, assessing look over the quickly-thinning ranks of the wolfmen who were still besieging them; those who hadn’t had the sense to break and run, at least.
“Sí, I suppose that would make more sense,” he said.
Departing to the sounds of clashing swords and the snap-hiss of Aeon’s red blades, Ezio called upon his second-sight to lead him through the seemingly-endless twists and turns of the catacombs that still lay before him. Every now and then, he would run across a lone straggler of the Followers of Romulus who would then attempt to hinder his progress. More often, however, Ezio would find himself confronted with the handiwork of the Followers of Aeon: dead wolfmen who had been cut down in their very tracks by those who might very well have at one time been their friends or comrades.
Ezio still wasn’t quite sure how he felt about such a thing; these men were his enemies, yes, but he knew well what it was to be betrayed.
Once he’d made it to the end of the catacombs, taking possession of the scroll with its ornate key attached – something that harkened back more than a little to the seals he’d found left by his brother and sister Assassins who had served before him; he wondered if there would be a fantastically advanced set of armor at the end of this treasure hunt – Ezio allowed himself to breathe easy for a moment. The sight of Aeon, appearing beside him in a burst of the man in black’s typical, preternatural speed brought his attention firmly back to the present.
It also brought him up short, but less so than it had when he’d first witnessed such a thing; he wondered what Desmond would say about such a thing, but he’d long since decided to respect the other man’s decision not to involve himself in the affairs of what Desmond thought of as his past.
When he and Aeon departed from the catacombs that had once held the Followers of both Romulus and Aeon, Ezio couldn’t help wondering what would come next. True, he’d cut out a good number of the Borgias’ followers in this area, and inadvertently sown the seeds of a force to oppose them even without the direction of the Brotherhood or his own personal intervention, but until he managed to throw off the last of the Borgia and their Templar masters’ influence over Roma, he and his brother Assassins would always have more to do.
He’d long since come to accept this truth, though at times it could prove a source of frustration.
When Aeon had vanished back into the Apple and Ezio had tucked the artifact neatly away within the hidden pocket of his robes, he quickly regained the streets and paused for a long moment simply to breathe the fresh air once he was outside again.
Chapter 404: Circus tricks
Chapter Text
Catching sight of a man in a blue tunic and rust-red cap, standing under a tree and subtly signaling for his attention, Ezio turned his path so that it would take him to that same tree, while at the same time keeping an eye out for anyone who expressed a disconcerting amount of interest in who he was or what he was doing. Leaning against the tree that the thief – the man had used their hand-signals, so there was little chance that he was something else – was standing under, Ezio adopted the mien of one who simply wished to get out of the sun. he waited to hear just what it was that the man wished to say to him.
“La Volpe says that you are a skilled horseman,” the thief said, moving so that the pair of them appeared to have simply decided to shelter under the same tree from the fierce heat of the sun. “This is good; we’ve discovered that the three leaders of the Cento Occhi gather to practice their horsemanship at the Circo Massimo.”
“Bene, I suppose that’s where I’ll be headed next, then,” he said, waiting for a few, lingering moments so that he could be certain that there were no unfriendly eyes watching him as he left the tree where he’d met with La Volpe’s man.
Making his way to a nearby stable whose owner was friendly to the Brotherhood – though there were few enough people who wouldn’t be, after having their place of business rebuilt and their livelihoods returned to them – Ezio secured a horse for himself and headed off to the Circo Massimo, there to come to grips with the leaders of the Cento Occhi.
When he’d made it to the circus grounds, the sounds of men on horseback greeted him, and as Ezio found a high point to conceal himself so that he would have a better vantage point for aiming his crossbow, Ezio sighed softly in relief. It seemed La Volpe’s people would soon be able to go about their business untroubled by the Cento Occhi, though their Borgia masters still had yet to be addressed. Still, their time would come soon enough.
Ezio and his brother Assassins would see to it.
As the last of the three men fell, a crossbow bolt buried in the back of his skull, Ezio quickly stowed away the weapon and set about making his way off of the grounds of the Circo Massimo. There would be people along soon enough to examine the corpses that Ezio had left in his wake, and the farther he was from the killing ground that he’d just made the better. He’d no regrets about killing men who had sold themselves to the Borgia – even as such men would have had no regrets about killing him, in turn – but the less he found himself entangled with the Borgia and their men the better.
After leaving the grounds of the Circo Massimo far enough behind him that those who had been sent to search such a place would more than likely give up before they’d made it close enough to be a threat to him, Ezio allowed himself to relax and breathe more easily once more.
Chapter 405: Art of the showman
Chapter Text
Finding himself a great deal closer to the Coliseum than he’d been when he first started out, Ezio made his way closer. He’d been somewhat fascinated with the built works of antiquity, ever since he’d become friends with Leonardo and the pair of them had been given a chance to get to know each other. He thought that little Maria might have shared his discovered passion for places such as the one he’d now found himself staring up at, particularly since she’d ended up becoming closer to the inventor than even he had.
Once he’d begun making his way into the proud old ruin itself, however, Ezio found himself called over to a shadowed alcove by what seemed to be another of La Volpe’s thieves, though this one looked quite a few years younger than the man he’d been working with.
“Dio mio, it’s you, isn’t it? Ezio Auditore,” the young man asked, the light of both interest and challenge sparkling in his eyes. “I’d been hoping to meet up with you, someday. I was wondering, would you be willing to take me on? I’d like to see how I measure up to the man who’s been an inspiration to so many of us.”
“Bene, I suppose I can spare the time,” he said, smiling at the younger man as he allowed him to take the lead as he seemed so eager to do.
As the pair of them paced each other throughout the length and breadth of the Coliseum, their path eventually culminating in a Leap of Faith from the from the topmost level of the structure and into a pile of loose hay and fallen leaves, Ezio turned to watch as the thief made his own Leap with admirable aplomb. It seemed that La Volpe’s men were taking more than a few lessons from the Brotherhood they worked beside.
He wondered if such a thing had begun even before La Volpe had taken up leadership of the thieves from whoever had held such a thing before him, or if the relationship that their respective organizations shared was a thing of their present generation only. Still, as he bid farewell and well-wishes to the thief who’d been so eager to race him, if only to boast to his friends that he’d actually done such a thing, Ezio found that he wasn’t so interested in such a conversation.
Even if the alliance shared by the Brotherhood and La Volpe’s thieves – or rather thieves in a more general sense – was indeed a new and unprecedented thing, it was still a boon to the both of their causes.
Chapter 406: Welcome to the Brotherhood
Chapter Text
Making his way back towards the Brotherhood’s hidden stronghold on Isola Tiberina, having found himself summoned back for some purpose or other by Uncle Mario himself, Ezio wondered if every member of the Brotherhood had received the name summons, or if this way going to be something that he alone was tasked to do. When he began hearing the sounds of other footsteps echoing off the walls of the underground tunnel he was making his way through, Ezio knew that there were at least some of his brother Assassins who had been called back as he had.
Though given the way sounds tended to echo in the enclosed space of even an artificial cavern such as this, he still couldn’t have said just how many there ultimately were; it was one of the many things that Leonardo had been eager to talk his ears off about when the pair of them had been given the opportunity to speak again after Aeon had freed him from the Borgia.
When he did finally arrive in the now lavishly-appointed – he’d had little appreciation of how his and little Maria’s efforts had been contributing to the upkeep and improvement of the Headquarters until he’d seen it all put together in such a way, which he supposed only made sense considering how little time he ultimately spent in such a place – Headquarters, Ezio found that nearly all of the Brotherhood had been gathered. The notable exception was Bartolomeo, since he was more than likely on some kind of campaign against the Borgia.
Ezio also had his doubts that the man would have attended in the first place, since Bartolomeo had never particularly struck him as a man to stand on ceremony.
“Ezio, it’s good to see you again, nipote,” Uncle Mario said, as the pair of them embraced and shared a formal kiss.
“Bene, I’m glad to see you again, too, Uncle,” he said, as the pair of them made their way up to the stage that stood before and slightly above where their brother and sister Assassins stood, allowing them to address the crowd of them more easily while still being nearly on their level.
He could appreciate the symbolism, at least better than he likely would have when he was a younger, more impatient man.
When Ottavio, Alighiero, Primo, Fedele, and Lorenzo, along with three newcomers by the names of Nestore Nucci, Lamberto Luini, and Bettina Aliotti were all inducted into the Brotherhood as one, Ezio found himself and Claudia called back up to stand on the stage before all of their brother and sister Assassins that had been gathered together. Watching as Claudia herself was inducted into the Brotherhood didn’t come as nearly as much of a surprise as what Machiavelli said next:
“And, from this day forward, Ezio Auditore will be taking Mario’s place as the Mentor of the Brotherhood within Italia,” the man said. “We all trust that he will carry out his new duties with the same competence and honor as he did when he was among our ranks, that he will continue to guard the secrets of our Order and protect our brother and sister Assassins as he always has.”
“Grazie, mi amici,” he said, quickly mastering himself as Claudia, little Maria, and Uncle Mario all came forward to kiss him on both cheeks. “I will indeed strive to serve the Brotherhood just as well as my uncle did in the past,” he vowed, turning back to his brother and sister Assassins where they stood arrayed in a double-row at the base of the single, small flight of stairs.
Once the last of the ceremonies had been concluded, the words spoken to formally hand leadership of the Brotherhood over to him – with himself, little Maria, Claudia, and even Machiavelli himself all wishing Uncle Mario a happy and prosperous retirement – Ezio turned and followed Machiavelli as his brother Assassin made his way up into the above-ground section of their Headquarters.
“Why the sudden change of heart, Niccolò?” he asked, feeling more than a little off-balance after everything he’d just witnessed and experienced; though mostly the latter, considering the present upheavals he’d come to speak to his brother Assassin about. “I thought you didn’t approve of me,” he said, feeling a wry smile twisting his face ever so slightly.
“While it is true that I have, at times, disapproved of your methods, it is a simple fact that you have always acted with the best interests of our Brotherhood at heart,” Machiavelli said, smiling slightly at him as the pair of them settled down at the table to speak to each other. “And, I have always stood behind you; I brought you and your family into Roma, the mercenari who protected you at Il Colosseo were mine as well. You just did not know it,” Machiavelli said, clapping a companionable hand on Ezio’s right shoulder.
“Maestro Machiavelli!” one of the many men in thief garb who reported to his brother Assassin called out suddenly, drawing both of their attention. “Cesare has returned to Roma alone. He rides for the Castel Sant’Angelo.”
“Grazie,” Machiavelli said, not sounding even slightly disturbed by what the man in his employ had just told him; truly, Niccolò Machiavelli had always seemed to be a rather more composed sort than most.
“Well?” he prompted, wanting to know his brother Assassin’s thoughts on the particular matter that had been troubling the Brotherhood so much.
“The decision is yours, not mine,” Machiavelli said, sounding as calm as Ezio had ever heard him, inclining his head slightly in a gesture that let Ezio know that his brother Assassin wasn’t going to gainsay him on this matter.
Not unless Ezio told him he could, at least.
“Niccolò,” he said, wanting his words to be heard and understood by this man above all. “You’d better not stop telling be what you think. Why else would I seek the opinion of my most trusted advisor?”
“Go kill them, Mentore,” Machiavelli said, standing from the table and then making a sweeping gesture to the hidden door of their Headquarters once he’d done so. “Finish what you started.”
“Good advice,” he said, grinning as he rose from his own place at the table, clapping a companionable hand to Machiavelli’s right shoulder in passing.
“I intend to write a book about you, one day.”
The sound of Machiavelli’s voice, suffused with the sardonic sort of good-humor he’d come to know his brother Assassin very well for, brought Ezio up short for a moment; he grinned wryly.
“If you do, make it short,” he said, making his own way out of the Brotherhood’s Headquarters on Isola Tiberina.
Chapter 407: Hidden enemy
Chapter Text
When she’d been flagged down by one of Gilberto’s thieves, a man with a weathered face, full beard, rounded cheeks, and shrewd eyes, Maria had found herself wondering just what it was that he’d wanted to speak to her about. As it turned out, there was a traitor – an agent of those of the Cento Occhi who had survived the concerted efforts of her last brother, Maria herself, and their brother and sister Assassins – who had managed to worm his way into the ranks of Gilberto’s thieves.
After she’d thanked the man – whose name turned out to be Mario; Maria smiled and the pair of them shared a laugh – for the information, as well as his ready offer to aid her in locating the man so she would be able to ensure that he no longer posed a danger to Gilberto’s people or those of the Brotherhood who worked closely with them. Maria could even count herself among those numbers, but of course this mission would serve to protect far more than just her own life.
As the pair of them made their across the rooftops of Roma, however, Maria began to see more and more Borgia guards – some of them alone, but an increasingly larger number of them in groups – as she and Mario made their way closer to wherever it was that the traitor Mario had warned her about was hidden.
“Careful mi amico, the Borgia still have a stranglehold over this place,” she said, keeping her voice low enough that she would be at the very least less likely to draw the attention of the Borgia’s men as they went about their rounds.
“Sí, I know,” Mario said, and there was something about his voice; narrowing her eyes slightly as she called up her second-sight, Maria ground her teeth.
Sure enough, the man shined with the unseen, deep crimson light of an enemy revealed. Leaping out of the way as the man – she doubted his name was actually Mario, since it would have taken a particularly arrogant sort of fool to reveal their true name to someone they fully intended to betray – attempted to shove her off of the building the pair of them were standing atop, she grabbed his arm in turn and hurled him from the rooftop himself.
As a cry went up from the Borgia guards, when the dying man had fallen to the cobblestones at their feet, Maria moved back from the edge of the building where she had been standing when the traitorous thief had revealed himself to her. Narrowing her eyes as she called up her second-sight once again, Maria studied the positions and patrols of the Borgia guardsmen down on the ground so that she could find an opening to leave the rooftop where she had momentarily been trapped by the machinations of the traitor within Gilberto’s ranks.
Once she’d managed to make it out from the Borgia-controlled section of this quarter of Roma, Maria climbed back down to the ground and made for the nearest entrance to the underground system of tunnels that the Brotherhood had made use of ever since they had come to Roma in the first place. She had to report this to Gilberto.
Chapter 408: Hidden blades
Chapter Text
After discussing his position in the Brotherhood with Uncle Mario, Ezio had decided that he would continue working among the ranks of the Brotherhood until at least he found the last of the keys that he’d begun searching for. Uncle Mario had understood, of course, since he’d done just the same himself when he had ascended to the position of Mentor. Making his way to the barracks where Bartolomeo and his wife worked to drive out the Borgia and their Templar masters from those places that they had conquered, Ezio found that Pantasilea was poring over the map on the wall and another that had been set out on the table.
The more he saw of the woman, the more it became clear that she was indeed the brains behind every campaign that the pair of them had conducted.
“Your successes continue to unnerve the Pope,” she informed him, stepping back from where she had been straightening a sword mounted on the wall; Ezio wondered just whose it had been, since it was unlikely in the extreme that Bartolomeo would go into battle without his beloved Bianca by his side. “Rodrigo has added several new members to the curia, filling the Papal government with men willing to kneel before the Borgia. Machiavelli knows them well.”
“And soon, so will I,” he said, smiling at Pantasilea, even as he turned to leave the barracks where Bartolomeo, his wife, and all of those who supported the Brotherhood against the forces that the Borgia constantly sent out after all of those who wished to live their own lives. “Grazie, Madonna.”
After he’d made his way away from the main barracks, Ezio made a stop at the pigeon coop; there would more than likely be a message present from Machiavelli, considering the discussion that he and Pantasilea had just had, and if there was such a message, he wished to have whatever task that Machiavelli meant to ask of him done as quickly as he could manage.
Reaching up, Ezio smiled slightly as one of the many messenger pigeons that had taken up residence in the coop that nearly every one of the Brotherhoods’ strongholds within Roma had been equipped with came fluttering out to land upon his right hand. Taking the message that had been attached to the little creature’s right leg, he found that it was indeed from Machiavelli.
It seemed as though Cesare had managed to connive his way into the good-graces of one or more weapon smiths in Roma, which had in turn ensured that his forces were provided with far higher-quality weapons than any other force that might have come up against them. Still, all of that would be of no consequence once he found their training grounds. There, he would be able to take the weapons for the Brotherhood, and also to deal with whatever Papal guards had been trained in their use.
Making his way away from the barracks and into Roma as a whole, Ezio regained the rooftops once more, continuing on his way to the location that Machiavelli’s message had provided for him.
Once he’d managed to locate the training grounds of the Papal guards who had been implicated by Machiavelli’s message, Ezio quickly made his way onto the grounds. The first of the guards to spot him, and therefore the first to fall, was slightly younger than Ezio would have preferred, but he shoved the thought out of his mind and continued on his way. There were other matters he had to concern himself with, if he was going to complete his work.
Once he’d cut down the last of the men in his way, Ezio moved inside the compound.
Climbing up into the rafters of the building, once he’d nudged the door shut, Ezio made his way all the deeper into the compound; he now had to either claim the weapons for himself, or else to find some way to destroy them.
With the aid of his crossbow, Ezio took out the men patrolling the interior grounds of the compound as well, leaping lightly down from the rafters once he’d taken care of the last of them. Continuing on his way to the armory, Ezio quickly managed to locate the weapons that Cesare had appropriated for the guards that he still likely thought would be working for him once this day was over.
He could tell by their make that they were of a slightly higher quality than even the ones possessed by the Brotherhood; pleasantly enough, there were also few enough of said weapons that Ezio could easily gather them up. Calling upon Aeon for a bit of aid in dealing with the logistics of preparing them for transport, since many hands did indeed make light work, Ezio politely declined the man in black’s offer to simply carry them out himself.
Ezio was not yet so old that he needed help with such a simple task, and he’d little enough desire to impose on Aeon any more than he absolutely needed to.
Once he and Aeon had gotten the weapons bundled up properly, Ezio slung them up onto his back and began to quickly made his way back out of the compound. He had to deal with a couple more patrolling guards, of course, since he was making his way out through a compound that had been used for their training. Hurrying back out, just as he heard cries of alarm beginning to be raised behind him, Ezio made his way back down into the hidden tunnels that the Brotherhood used to hide their movements.
Before he could do anything else, he needed to see that the weapons that Cesare had thought to make use of were delivered to Isola Tiberina.
Chapter 409: Little brother, little sister
Chapter Text
After she’d gotten word from Niccolò that one of the Borgia’s pet Cardinals had been spotted in the Vaticano district, Maria had made her way there just as fast as she could, making good use of the tunnel system that she and her brother and sister Assassins had restored nearly to its former functionality – if not glory – during the course of the work they’d been doing in Roma. Once she’d made it into the district itself, Maria quickly made her way up to the rooftops to begin her search.
Niccolò had given her the man’s description while she’d been speaking to him, of course, but as she was high enough off the ground not to be able to clearly see anyone’s features and as she didn’t possess any kind of spyglass, Maria knew that she would be relying on her second-sight in this particular instance. Stalking from rooftop to rooftop, navigating slowly so that she would have the chance to catch sight of the figures – mostly the reddish glow of a declared enemy – that moved to and fro across her field of vision long enough for their colors to fully resolve within her second-sight. Once she’d managed to find the bastard she was stalking, Maria primed her crossbow and took aim.
A single bolt was all she needed to cut out the corruption that the man represented; watching for a moment at the man fell in his very tracks, having more than likely been making for the sanctuary of San Pietro after a night of debauchery and vice, Maria breathed more easily as she made her way out of the area, listening to the shouting of an increasingly frantic crowd behind her.
Making her way back down to the ground, Maria made her way back down into the tunnel system once more.
~AC: Bro~
Having made a systematic search from the inside of the tunnel system, using his second-sight to peer through the stone itself, Ezio had found himself making his way up into the basement of what seemed to be Il Vaticano itself. Or else a faithful recreation on what seemed at first to be a smaller scale. Making his way up through the basement levels, he began to hear the sounds of a sermon close by. And, farther away, what very well might have been the sounds of a scuffle.
Making his way farther, up one more staircase, Ezio found that he had indeed returned to Il Vaticano itself. He thought it more than a little strange, and rather perversely amusing, that he’d once more come to this place on the trail of someone using religion to further their own corrupt – and distinctly secular – ends. Still, he’d be sure to make certain that this one would not have the same easy escape that he’d inadvertently granted Rodrigo.
The last escape that fat, old Templar was going to have.
However, as he began making his way up from the underground levels of Il Vaticano – a stark contrast to when he’d come in through the rafters, back during his hunt for Rodrigo; the hunt that had ended in the oddest way, a way he’d have never thought possible if he hadn’t borne witness to it himself – stepping in between groups of other Cardinals, each of whom he made a point of checking with his second-sight so as to be certain that they wouldn’t end up being his ultimate target, Ezio found that the sounds of battle were no longer quite so far-off as they had once been.
The feel of a phantom finger prodding at his side drew Ezio’s attention to the fact that Aeon – through whatever method that he used to maintain his awareness of the world outside the Apple he inhabited – had also noticed the fight that seemed to be going on outside Il Vaticano; right outside, if what he was hearing now was any indication.
Tapping on the Apple a couple of times, Ezio hoped that what he wanted could be communicated without the words that he would be unable to say if he wished to remain undetected for as long as possible. When he felt a sudden shift in the air, Ezio looked down to find that Aeon had indeed understood his intent, as he was now in the guise of one more of the Cardinals that freely walked the halls of Il Vaticano. Wishing for a long moment that he could have thanked the man in black immediately, and sternly reminding himself to do so as soon as he was in a position that he would be able to do such without being ousted and attacked, Ezio moved to investigate the sounds of combat.
As he slipped, seen and yet unnoticed, through the crowds of Cardinals that crowded the room he’d previously been standing just outside of, Ezio found that the sounds of battle were in fact coming from outside of the building. He also found that one of the Followers of Romulus was meeting with the very Cardinal that he’d seen more than a few times while he’d been after them.
“You mean to tell me that you still haven’t managed to rid yourselves of that phantom’s followers?!”
“It is not so simple as any of us would prefer, padrone,” the head wolfman said, sounding somehow both obsequious and furious at once. “The more that man in black appears before them, the more Followers I lose; the men we gathered under us crave power more than anything else, and seeing as that damned man in black has far more than his fair share of it-” the wolfman who seemed to have appointed himself to speak with the Borgia’s purchased Cardinal cut himself off then, clearly only just managing to restrain himself from going off on a tirade. “You can see how this would be a problem.”
“Sí, I suppose I can,” the Cardinal said, sounding more than slightly annoyed at what he was being forced to deal with, even as Ezio himself felt a subtle sense of amusement.
The feeling actually seemed to originate from somewhere outside his mind, and for a moment Ezio had the wild thought that the feeling was coming from within the Apple; almost as though he was somehow privy to Aeon’s emotions at this moment, half-closing his eyes, Ezio put the sensation out of his mind.
“We’ll do what we can to hold the traitors off,” the lead wolfman said, handing over a large, pale golden key to the Borgia’s Cardinal.
“See that you do,” the Borgia’s Cardinal said, taking the key that he’d been handed and making his way into the back of Il Vaticano.
For a moment, Ezio found himself torn as to what he wished to do next; yes, there was every indication that the Borgia’s Cardinal would be heading wherever it was that held the last of the keys that he was searching for, but there was also the matter of those men who had chosen to throw in their lot with Aeon. Yes, their motives didn’t seem as faultless as he would have honestly preferred, but under the circumstances, Ezio would take what he could get.
There was a brief sense of acknowledgement, and then of acquiescence, as the form of Aeon shimmered back into existence, splitting off from him to stand on his own.
“If you truly wish to find out where that man is going, I can meet up with those men outside,” Aeon offered.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, turning to nod at Aeon, then moving so that he could pick the lock on the gate he was standing before.
Chapter 410: Cardinal directives
Chapter Text
The Borgia Cardinal’s attention snapped to him once he’d opened the gate; given how loud the ungreased hinges had been in the comparative silence of the anteroom now behind him.
“Assassino! You will not get me!”
The same hollow words, every time, Ezio reflected, with a morbid sense of amusement, even as he set off after the Borgia Cardinal as the man took off deeper into Il Vaticano at a dead-run.
The ensuing chase led him and the Borgia’s purchased Cardinal up and through the expanse of Il Vaticano, revealing the construction that was being undertaken on the building itself, as well as the fact that a thunderstorm had begun while he was making up to this place. Either while he’d been traversing the sewers and the catacombs they had inevitably led to, or else while he and Aeon had been making their way through the anteroom. In either case, the weather was little more than a curiosity, but Ezio still made a note of it.
Depending on just where this particular chase was going to take him, the storm outside could very well play far more of a role than it otherwise would have.
Sure enough, as Ezio continued chasing the Borgia Cardinal up through the expanse of Il Vaticano, taking advantage of the scaffolding that was either being used to effect repairs or to support further construction, the pair of them did indeed end up making their way out onto the roof. Rain-slicked as it was, the Cardinal nearly ended up taking a fatal tumble from the tiles, kicking some of them off in his haste as he desperately clawed his way over the uneven footing.
Even Ezio, who had been doing such things for a far longer time than this man, even he found himself having to struggle briefly to maintain his footing on the slanted rooflines he found himself walking.
Still, this chase swiftly came to the same end that all of the others before it had, once the pair of them had made their way up to the apex of Il Vaticano, standing high above the ground as the storm continued lashing at them outside the walls, some of its fury spilling in through the gaps in the roofing. If nothing else, he’d clearly seen the need for the extensive repairs that Il Vaticano had been undergoing.
“You Assassini are fools! You wage war against the very instrument that prevents the ignorant from overthrowing order!”
“Your Templar order is unworthy of the name,” Ezio returned, narrowing his eyes, even as he watched the man in front of him for any signs of the weapons that all of the Borgia’s allies – or dupes; considering the nature of the Borgia, there was little enough difference between the two – had come prepared with.
Sure enough, the Borgia’s Cardinal pulled out a long stiletto, brandishing it as though the man thought he had come sort of a chance in combat. Ezio was soon to disabuse him of it, of course. Once he’d managed to firmly dispatch the man, laying his bleeding form out on the wooden flooring that was swiftly becoming soaked by the rain, Ezio recovered the key that he’d been given by the wolfman he’d been meeting.
The one who had like as not been dispatched himself, either by Aeon or one of the men who had all but declared themselves his Followers.
Chapter 411: Wolfskin, wolf’s kin
Chapter Text
Making up his mind that he would first go to fetch whatever treasure did lie beyond the locked door that the keys he’d been collecting were clearly meant to open, Ezio turned to make his way to the open window, where he could both hear and see the wrath of the storm outside increasing steadily in intensity. In a strange sort of way, it almost seemed appropriate.
Performing a Leap of Faith into the well that his second-sight identified as being of interest to him, Ezio quickly found himself inside the same kind of chamber that he’d seen so many times while he was searching for the other keys that had apparently been left behind by the Roman Assassin Brutus. It was at once both humbling and comforting, knowing that one of his own – even one he’d had no chance to meet – had been thinking of their shared Brotherhood enough to leave behind not only the armor that had seemingly brought them through whatever challenges they had faced during the course of their life, but also a message for whatever future Assassin would be able to find it.
Smiling softly, knowing that Desmond was likely to be reading over his shoulder if the young man was as much like him as Ezio had come to suspect, he took the scroll with the key attached and tucked them into another hidden pouch within his robes; separate from the one where he kept Aeon’s Apple, of course.
Making his way back up and out of the catacombs that he’d previously been traversing, Ezio thought back upon the mysterious, hidden structure that he’d glimpsed several times when he’d been making his way through Roma’s Antico District on one errand or another. He’d been curious about it, to be sure, but there had always been some matter or other to hold his attention when he was traveling that way.
Still, the fact that such a place – limed in gold when he’d taken the opportunity to examine it with his second-sight, and thus clearly of some import to himself and the cause he was serving – existed at all was reason enough in his mind to make at least one journey to examine it. Even if it turned out to be entirely unrelated to the treasure he was now seeking, Ezio would at least be able to put his curiosity regarding the place to rest.
If nothing else, he would no longer have such a feeling weighing on his mind.
Making his way back down into the tunnel-system that the Brotherhood had been getting such good use out of once they had refurbished it, as soon as he could after he’d gotten out of the catacombs, Ezio pushed onward into the Antico District. The signs that had been carved into the walls of certain intersections had helped to guide him on the many and varied occasions that he’d made use of these same tunnels, and soon enough Ezio found himself exiting within the Antico District itself.
Making his way down into the pit that housed the gold-limed room he’d glimpsed those few times he’d found himself looking in just the right direction with his second-sight, Ezio found himself walking through what seemed very much like a small labyrinth. Something that seemed all the more appropriate, considering where he was. As he continued on his way through the maze, Ezio found himself wondering idly if it had all been constructed all at once, or if whatever locked room the keys in his possession were meant to unlock had been the first thing finished, and the rooms that he had previously been moving through had been added on during later phases of construction.
In either case, Ezio had no sooner arrived before the very locked room that he’d first set out in search of, than he was putting the six keys into the lock before him, and opening the gates that stood as a last barrier between him and the prize he’d sought for so long.
It did indeed turn out to be yet another set of armor, and as he donned it Ezio found that it possessed many of the same qualities as Altaïr’s armor; primarily the sheer lightness of the metal as he wore it, and also the color was a near-exact match to the set that he had lost in the ruin of Monteriggioni. Finding himself more than a bit pleased to have such a boon returned to him – though he still couldn’t help but wonder what had ultimately become of the set that Altaïr himself had bequeathed to the Brotherhood’s future – Ezio swiftly made his way back up and out of the labyrinth he’d gone into with such singular purpose.
There were other matters that needed his attention, if his mind was ever truly going to be at rest.
Chapter 412: The death of wolves
Chapter Text
When he’d returned to the catacombs that had previously concealed and sheltered the Followers of Romulus, Ezio found that they had been cleared out almost completely. Wondering for a moment if such a thing had been due to the efforts of Aeon, the men who had all but declared themselves his Followers, or else some combination of both, Ezio put those thoughts out of his mind as he continued searching for the man in black. There were few enough people in Roma who would miss the wolfmen who had been cut down, considering the mass terror they worked to spread at the behest of their Borgia masters, but at the end of the day they had still been men like him.
It might very well have come about that they had left people behind who would miss them; not all of the ones here could have been motherless, fatherless or childless; still, like as not the families that these men may or may not have left behind would miss the men they had once been, rather than what the Borgia had made of them. Still, such things were idle musings at the best of times, and as he continued on his way Ezio put them out of his mind. Yes, he knew that he could ill afford to forget that even his enemies were just as human as he was, but for the moment his concern had to be for finding Aeon.
The sheer destruction the man in black was capable of aside, Ezio wouldn’t have felt right leaving one of his brother Assassins – even one so unsettling as Aeon –somewhere he might not have wished to be, even if he was surrounded by allies.
The sound of light footfalls in the catacomb ahead of him alerted Ezio to the fact that he was no longer quite so alone as he’d once been, but Aeon himself rounded the corner in front of him before Ezio could wonder too long about just who it was that would be coming for him.
“It’s good to see you again, amico,” he said, making his way over to where the man in black was standing, clearly waiting for him to make his own way over.
“Of course,” Aeon said, a subtle dip of his hooded head the only real acknowledgment that he gave. “I gave the order for those men to disperse, and not to trouble you or your fellows again,” the man in black said, and Ezio smiled softly.
“We are your brothers, too, amico,” he said, making his way forward to clap Aeon’s left shoulder as the pair of them stood before one another for the first time in what felt like longer than it likely had been.
“Of course,” Aeon said, reaching into his temporarily corporeal body so that he could fetch the Apple and hand it back to Ezio.
Once the man in black had vanished back into the depths of the artifact once more, Ezio tucked the Apple safely away within the hidden pouch inside his robes. Making his way back up and out of the catacombs he’d been traversing, Ezio found himself wondering again just how it was that Aeon had found himself bound to the Apple so tightly as he seemed to be. He found himself wondering, not for the first time, if such a thing had even truly been Aeon’s choice in the first place.
Perhaps it was a risk that anyone who gazed too deeply into the artifact took upon themselves, or perhaps it was due to Aeon’s own nature as one of those who he’d heard called Guardians of the Treasures of Eden in some of the writings he’d uncovered from his brother and sister Assassins.
Still, even among all his ponderings, Ezio knew that he wasn’t likely to gain any true answers for his questions from the only man in possession of them. Aeon was, and seemed determined to remain, equally as mysterious as he was helpful. Truly, it could only have been their respective natures that had led to such an estrangement between Altaïr and Aeon.
A pity, since the Brotherhood would have more than likely benefited all the more if a close relationship had been maintained between the man who had first brought the Guardians to the attention of the Brotherhood, and the man who seemed to be the most powerful of those selfsame Guardians.
Chapter 413: Scholar scuffle
Chapter Text
When she’d received word of a man who was of particular interest to Rodrigo Borgia – as in the grassone bastardo wanted him dead, which was more than enough of a reason for Maria to dedicate herself to his protection – she’d brought along five of her fellow Assassins to aid her in this latest task she was looking to take on. Having positioned them so that they would more easily be able to spot any Borgia guards that tried to make their way into the open courtyard where she’d been informed that the man was speaking, Maria continued on her way.
“So, who is this man?” she asked of the thief that had taken up a post at the back of the crowd watching the man speak.
“He comes from Prussia,” the man standing next to her reported, turning to look at her for a long moment, before returning his attention to the man speaking to the crowd that had gathered around him. “I hear he studies at Il Vaticano, but his words are unlike any that issue from that place.”
Turning her own attention to the man as he spoke, Maria found that he did indeed espouse contrary arguments to any that she’d heard from within the stronghold of Rodrigo Borgia and his fellow Templars; truly, his exhortations to question bad logic, and also that the practice of questioning was in fact why mankind as a whole lived… Well, that seemed far more fitting in the mouths of her brother and sister Assassins.
It was no surprise, then, when she began to see the red-limed forms of the Borgia’s dog soldiers moving in on the place where the man she was due to protect, if only to jab her thumb in the metaphorical eye of Rodrigo Borgia one more time. Moving forward herself, Maria signaled to the rest of her brother and sister Assassins who she had stationed nearby for just this sort of an occasion, and swiftly cut down the first of the Borgia guards she encountered.
Soon enough, she and her group of five were embroiled in yet another skirmish with the forces that the Borgia and their Templar masters had sent out to silence yet another voice speaking on behalf of the rights of men to think as they wanted; their right to seek the truth of their own lives.
Breathing heavily as she cut down the last of the Borgia guardsmen who had been sent to this place, Maria quickly made to meet up with the man that Rodrigo Borgia had taken such a deadly exception to.
“Who are you, that you would defend a man without cause?” the man whose life she had saved asked, staring at her in surprise.
She supposed that kind of thing made sense, given the fact that that grassone bastardo Rodrigo Borgia would hardly be one to risk his oversized culo in defense of even one other person.
“Someone who believes in freedom,” she said, making her way over to where the man was standing so that the pair of them would be able to speak more candidly. “I am Maria Auditore da Firenze,” she continued, continuing to keep an eye out for any more of the Borgia’s dog soldiers who might have escaped from the slaughter of their compatriots.
“Maria,” the man echoed, bowing deeply, the expression of clear gratitude on his bringing a slight smile to her own. “They call me Niccolò Copernico. I have heard your name spoken at the Borgia court, but seldom in complimentary terms.”
“Sí, and I suspect accompanied by one vulgar threat or another,” she said, having come to expect nothing less of that dickless bastardo Cesare Borgia after having discussed her time of imprisonment with Caterina.
“Yes, and yet now I have proof that not only do you exist, but I expect that the Borgia and their troops won’t have an easy time carrying the kinds of threats that I have heard from them out.”
Maria chuckled softly, but was quick to bring their conversation back to the main concern that both of them needed to focus on at present. “Il Vaticano welcomes you here, yet you’ve come under attack by its guards. I knew the Borgia were faithless, Maestro, but this seems excessive even for them.”
“Truly, you would be right; up until yesterday, I was indeed a Templar,” Niccolò – a far different man than the Brotherhood’s own Niccolò, and yet they shared a name; it was an amusing reminder of Maria’s own situation with Mother – said, a distinct air of self-deprecation lingering about him.
“And today?” she prompted, already suspecting that the man had left the organization behind, but still wishing to know the reasons for such a schism from the man’s own mouth.
“The Templars wanted me to keep the findings of my experiments hidden, and that I cannot do,” Niccolò said.
It seemed that, once again, a man’s integrity had driven him to break ties with those bastardi; it hardly surprised anymore, given that Cesare Borgia and his dogs wouldn’t have known integrity if it beat them over the head, but it was still rather gratifying to see someone willing to break away from the power that the Templars admittedly held because their conscience demanded that they do as such.
Chapter 414: Silver Guardian
Chapter Text
“That is good to hear, amico, but the Borgia will be hunting for you and your friends in light of this,” she said, knowing that this sort of danger was why a great many of those who served the the Borgia and their Templar masters chose to remain; sadly not all of them, or else the Templars would never have endured so long in the first place, but enough that Maria sometimes found herself wondering if there was anything more she could do for those people.
The answer always seemed to be never enough.
“My fellow scholars?” Niccolò echoed, a look of confusion overtaking his aristocratic face. “The logic of such a purge escapes me.”
“I expect that you won’t be finding logic here, amico,” she said, as a cry began to go up from the surrounding guards, calling for Niccolò’s head. “Cesare Borgia is a vicious, petty man; if anything even comes to appear as a challenge to the power he holds, he will attempt to destroy it no matter what it turns out to be.”
“Particularly when that something happens to be someone, yes?” Niccolò asked, a grim sort of amusement on his face.
“Sí, he particularly dislikes it when someone is the one to stand against him,” she said, chuckling even as she hurried him along. “Come now, we should be gone before they arrive.”
Niccolò was as quick to agree as anyone with good sense, and soon enough the pair of them were making their way through the crowded streets of Roma. Knowing that a scholar such as the Niccolò running beside her wouldn’t be able to move across the rooftops with the same ease that any of her brother or sister Assassins would, if he was even able to make it up in the first place, Maria kept pace with him, all the while taking care to leave messages at all of the pigeon coops that she chanced to pass by.
They would, after all, be better served if there was more than just herself standing between Niccolò Copernico and death at the hands of the Borgia.
Breathing more easily as she began to see the signs of her brother and sister Assassins at work, Maria made determinedly for the nearest of the Brotherhood’s safehouses. After leading Niccolò there, she settled down on a bench just inside of it. The building itself was unobtrusive enough not to draw any undue attention from the Borgia or their dog soldiers, and even in the unfortunate event that such a thing did happen, the location had ample protection in the form of both Gilberto’s thieves and her own brother and sister Assassins.
Such was one of the benefits of working so closely with both.
“You will be safe here for the time being, amico,” she assured the man, once the pair of them had settled down a bit after their flight.
“What of the other scholars?” Niccolò asked.
Maria smiled softly; it did a man good, to be concerned for the welfare of more than just himself. “My amici and I will protect them, too.”
“You had better take these letters, then,” Niccolò said, handing over a stack of five envelops. “My fellows will be more quick to trust you if they see you with them.”
“Bene, I will be certain to tell them that you send your regards,” she assured him. “Stay here until I come back for you, sí?”
“Of course, and thank you for your help, Maria,” Niccolò Copernico said, taking both of her hands in his larger ones.
Making her way out of the safehouse through the hidden exit, Maria quickly headed for the pigeon coop that served this place. She would need to make contact with her brother and sister Assassins, since time was of the essence if they were going to come to the aid of Niccolò’s fellow scholars, and she would once again need more than just herself to ensure that this task was not only done but done well.
Once she’d sent the four messages off, Maria made her way to the meeting point that she’d previously arranged with the four of them.
Soon enough, Saverio, Rinaldo, Ottavio, and Primo – who’d been the first to volunteer, but had clearly only come as part of his continuing efforts to impress both her, and of course Ezio in turn – had all met with her in the square with the fountain. Giving each one of them a letter from the stack, Maria filled them in on what had happened between her and Niccolò – as well as the fact that he was not their own Niccolò, of course – as well as what they were going to need to do in order to see that his friends and fellow scholars had their own protection from the Borgia and their dog soldiers.
Primo, of course, was the one most eager to carry out his task; still, whatever his reasons, Maria was grateful for the young man’s help.
Once she’d delivered the letter she’d elected to carry herself to its intended recipient, Maria made her way back up to the rooftops so that she would be able to quickly make an assessment of the progress made by her brother and sister Assassins. To see if any of them might have needed her help, or at least to ensure that any of the remaining scholars all made it to the Brotherhood’s safehouse in peace. Insofar as anyone who was the target of a Borgia manhunt could have peace, in any case.
Once she’d made a round of the nearby rooftops, stopping to take care of a couple Borgia patrols on her way, Maria turned her path back towards the safehouse where she had directed Niccolò to stay while the Borgia’s guardsmen were looking for him. She was also pleased to note that more than a few of the man’s fellow scholars had managed to make their own ways to the safehouse alongside him.
Allowing herself to relax after all of her previous exertions, Maria made her own way into the safehouse, pausing for a long moment in the stocked kitchen to refresh herself with some bread and wine, Maria continued on her way back to the enclosed courtyard to meet with Niccolò once more; given the fact that he’d ended up on the wrong side of the Templars, there was little chance that the Borgias’ dog soldiers were the only things he was going to have to worry about.
Once she’d made it back out into the courtyard, Maria found Niccolò seated on a bench overlooking the small fish pond that had been put in so that the people who needed to stay here would have something to put their minds at ease while they were in hiding. There was a contemplative expression on his face, but when she followed his line of sight, Maria found that he wasn’t actually looking at the pond. Still, given everything she’d previously learned about the man, she knew that such a thing was hardly out of character.
She only wondered what he could be thinking about at the moment.
Chapter 415: Hunting eagle
Chapter Text
“All of your letters have been delivered, Maestro,” she said, drawing the man’s attention as she made her way over to the bench that he was sitting on. “Your friends will be safe soon.”
“You have my deepest gratitude, and my humble respect for your efforts, Maria,” Niccolò said, hands clasped in front of him as he bowed deeply. “While you were gone, I determined the most likely source of these strange attacks: the Master of The Sacred Palace.”
“Who might that be?” she asked, wondering what the source of such an extravagant title could have been, as well; though such an answer was more than likely to elude her, under the circumstances.
“A Dominican, appointed by the Pope, who ensures that Roman religious philosophy remains pure. He never liked my studies to begin with, and now that I have crossed the Templars, he has clearly seized his chance for retaliation,” Niccolò said, pacing as he seemed to want to pull his words out of the very air, if the nervousness of his otherwise florid gestures was any indication.
“Where might I be able to find this man, Maestro?” she asked, knowing that Niccolò would appreciate having the man who clearly sought his head for his own, petty reasons out of his life in the most final possible way.
“Cardinals typically congregate nearby,” Niccolò said, and Maria could almost see the weight that the man had been carrying for such a long time dropping off. “Follow one of them; the Master likes to greet each one individually. Perhaps you will hear more conclusive evidence.”
“I suppose I can only hope,” she said, smiling and nodding as she made her way back out and away from the safehouse and its enclosed courtyard once more.
Once she’d made her way back into Roma proper, Maria turned her attention to seeking out one of the many Cardinals that she had seen making their way through the Vaticano quarter. She also found herself reflecting on how perversely fitting it was that she was being tasked with the removal of yet another Dominican from power. Savonarola had been from the same order of monks, and this new monk that she’d heard of seemed cut from just the same type of cloth, even.
Ezio had been the one to remove Savonarola himself from his unearned seat of power, but given everything the monk had done to her brother and sister Guardians, Maria had at times found herself wishing that she could have done the deed; as this Master of the Sacred Palace was from the same Order and seemed to follow the same kind of creed, Maria would be content with removing him from his unearned seat of power.
As she continued on her way through the quarter of Roma that she’d been searching for a Cardinal that she could follow, so that she could find out just where it was that the so-called Master of the Sacred Palace had made his home and deal with him, Maria began to see the light failing steadily as the sun set. Sighing with some asperity as she called upon her second-sight, Maria managed to spot one of the Cardinals that made this quarter of Roma their home.
Melting back in among the crowds, even as she steadily tracked the man back to his destination, Maria found herself wondering just what kind of man she would find at the end of all this; a fanatic as Savonarola had been, or one who had merely found a simple way to gain access to the levers of power and now had no interest in letting go.
Either way, it remained her task to deal with the man.
Once she’d managed to track the Cardinal she was following back to the man he was meeting with – a man in the midst of a great many of the Borgias’ dog soldiers; a man who seemed to fit the description Niccolò had given her perfectly – Maria was quick to conceal herself in a cart of hay so that she could observe the man in question more closely without being observed in turn herself.
“Giuliano. Any news of Copernico and the others?” the Cardinal she’d been following asked.
“Nothing,” the Dominican – she could tell that much by the severe cut of his robes, though that seemed to be the only trait he shared with Savonarola – said, and Maria studied him as well as she could from her current position, marking him with her second-sight so that she would be able to find him more quickly.
“Those fools, inundating the people with their theories; we can barely contain the populace as it is,” the Cardinal said, and Maria held back a sigh through sheer force of will; a Templar would always remain a Templar, it seemed. “I have dispatched my best guards to deal with them. I trust they will make quick work of it.”
“We must stop them,” Giuliano – the Dominican – agreed, a rumbling growl in his tone that Maria had grown entirely too familiar with during her time among the Brotherhood.
Still, considering the information she had been seeking was now right in her hands, Maria waited only long enough for the Cardinal and the Dominican to depart, before making her way back up to the rooftops once more. Making quickly for the safehouse where she’d sent Niccolò and his fellow scholars to wait, behind the walls and under the guard of her brother and sister Assassins, Maria allowed herself to relax slightly as she made her way back through the building and out into the enclosed courtyard once more.
Niccolò was waiting for her, this time, rather than allowing his attention to settle on something within the enclosed courtyard and contemplating something or other.
“You were right,” she said, making her way over to where Niccolò was standing, having risen from the bench just as soon as she’d come into his line of sight. “The Master does truly intend to kill you.”
“I will not allow his bluster to stop my research,” Niccolò said, an admirable sort of determination in his tone. “Tonight there is an eclipse; I intend to chronicle it.”
“The Master will be hunting for you,” she said, knowing that Niccolò was fully aware of such a fact, and yet wishing to see how he would react, all the same.
“Better to die enlightened, than to live in ignorance,” Niccolò said, and Maria found that she could agree with the sentiment, if not wholly or entirely.
There were few things that the Brotherhood encouraged more openly, than the search for truth, and the freedom needed to pursue it.
“Sí, but it is far better than that to live enlightened,” Maria said, offering the man a small, confident smile. “His end will come much sooner than yours, amico, I can promise you that much.”
Chapter 416: Blood moon
Chapter Text
After Niccolò had thanked her for all she’d done for him, and all that she was about to do, Maria quickly made her way back into Roma proper, heading once more for the section where she’d found the Cardinal to tail. The man who had indeed ended up leading her to where the Dominican had made his home while he was attempting to hunt down Niccolò for his alleged heresy was one more of the Cardinals that she and Ezio had been seeing more and more often as they made their forays into Roma.
It seemed as though the Borgia were working to consolidate their power in the Vaticano district, before moving out to encompass the rest of Roma; or, at least that was what they clearly thought they were going to do.
Moving quickly and quietly over the rooftops and alleyways of what had swiftly become one of her preferred hunting grounds, Maria had soon spotted the Dominican himself. She would have thought it odd, that the man seemed to be wandering alone, when word must have been spreading throughout the Borgia ranks that the Brotherhood had retaken their old places within Roma. To say nothing of the terror that had to be spreading at the merest hint of Aeon’s presence.
Still, she’d dealt with more than enough of the Borgia and their lackeys to know how arrogant almost every one of them was; Cesare being the worst, even above his bastardo father Rodrigo, which Maria would have thought impossible before she’d had so many dealings with those who’d been so unfortunate as to have met the man.
Readying her hidden-blade, once she’d managed to track the Dominican to an empty alley, Maria dove on him, as swiftly as she’d tracked him through Roma’s streets; though not quite as silently, of course.
“Silencing the truth will not stop its spread,” she said to the man dying in her arms, though it was clear that he wasn’t about to listen even at this late stage; truly, the man nearly seemed to be Savonarola wearing a new face, and notably without the Apple to aid him in his mad designs.
Maria found herself more than a little relieved for such a mercy.
“People are lazy; they will believe what we tell them to believe,” the Dominican wheezed out, looking strangely content; Maria began to suspect that there was going to be something more to the plot she’d uncovered than just the Dominican himself. “But, you have not won with my death, Child of Eden; I have sent my best man to find Copernico. You are already too late.”
“Requiescat in pace,” she said, pausing for a moment to close the Dominican’s eyes, before quickly making her way back to the rooftops once more.
Because, while it was true that more than a few of the Brotherhood’s own were looking out for Niccolò’s welfare, it was also possible that he’d left the protection of the safehouse and none of the Brotherhood had thought to follow in his wake. And so, in light of that, it was all the more simple for Maria to make the decision to return to Niccolò’s side. Even if she did end up having to track him down.
Making a stop at the safehouse where she’d originally settled Niccolò while the Borgia and their dog soldiers had been hunting for him – not that they had stopped, which made the lack of his presence rather troubling – Maria found that the man had indeed decided to leave the protection of the safehouse’s walls. A message that had been left for her by Primo, who seemed as eager to win her favor as he ever was, explained that Niccolò had found himself too closed in by the walls of the courtyard to manage the kind of observations that he wished to make of the eclipse that was to happen tonight.
She supposed that such a thing made at least some since, troublesome as it was, since Leonardo had been just as particular about where he made his observations from; she supposed it had to be a trait of particularly meticulous people.
When she’d managed to find the place that Primo’s message had spoken of, she found the man himself already engaged in battle with the man that the Dominican had clearly been speaking of. Racing across the expanse that separated her from Primo and Niccolò, Maria gathered a handful of throwing-knives and sent them flying into the back of the man assaulting Primo, before she herself dove upon the man to cut him down with her sword.
“It’s wonderful to see you again, amore mio,” Primo said, the smile on his face reminding her more than a little of all the smiles that she’d seen her last brother giving Christina when he was trying to court her.
“Grazie, amico,” she said, smiling back at him.
She tried not to laugh, of course, since she and Primo weren’t nearly as close as she and Ezio had been for the whole of their lives.
Continuing on her way over to where Niccolò was standing, looking out at the shadowed, red moon that had risen into the sky, she stopped at his side so that they could speak.
“Is the world not marvelous?” Niccolò asked, his sheer enthusiasm for the observations he was making coming through in more than just his voice.
“Sí, I would have to say that it is,” she readily agreed, moving to stand beside Niccolò as he spread his arms wide, seeming as though he wished to embrace the moon; no matter how impossible such a thing would ultimately prove to be.
“You should not be so emotional,” Niccolò chided, the self-amused good-humor in his tone drawing a grin from Maria herself. “You will find that things make more sense, that way.”
“I’ll try to keep that in mind, Messer Copernico,” she returned, chuckling softly.
“Cesare thinks himself the center of it all, but he circles the periphery with the rest of us,” Niccolò said, and the tone of philosophical contemplation she could hear in his voice reminded her more than a little of the Brotherhood’s own Niccolò. “Did you know that the sun is most likely the midpoint of the universe, not the Earth?”
“Sí, I have heard the same proposition from one of my amici,” she said, nodding. “Leonardo da Vinci is his name, if you wish to speak with him.”
“I was aware of da Vinci’s fame as a painter, but I’d no inkling that he had aspirations of being a natural philosopher, as well,” Niccolò said, sounding surprised and yet pleased at the same time. “Perhaps I will pay a visit to your friend,” Niccolò turned back to the moon once more, the contemplative air that had never quite left him returning in full. “I see the movements of the moon and stars, and yet I can only observe. So much is yet unknown to me; this age of reason is but the beginning of an end I will never see. Someday, we will be able to influence this world, to exploit the power of the human will, to harness light, and perhaps even travel into the heavens,” Niccolò said, the sheer enthusiasm of the way he spoke reminding Maria more and more of Leonardo; she wondered how he was doing, after his escape from the Borgia. “But, I am getting ahead of myself. First, we must see the sun spinning at the center.”
“Sí, first steps must always be taken first, Messer Copernico,” she said, laughing softly in recognition of the enthusiasm she’d seen so many times from Leonardo. “You truly should speak to Leonardo; you have a great deal in common, I can tell.”
“Perhaps I will speak to this friend of yours, if you regard him so highly,” Niccolò said, smiling at her as the pair of them continued to stand under the feeble light of the reddish-black moon. “Buona notte, Maria.”
Keeping watch over Niccolò until the man had finished with his observations, sometime after the eclipse itself had ended, Maria escorted Niccolò back to the safehouse so he could settle down for the night without the worry of one of the Borgias’ men slitting his throat while he slept. She also made the man a promise: that she would escort him out of Roma once he was ready to leave.
Chapter 417: Moving targets
Chapter Text
The next morning, once she’d managed to get some rest and allowed the events of the previous night to settle in her mind, Maria found herself called out of the safehouse to see to the elimination of a large group of Borgia guardsmen that had just finished their training and were about to be sent out into Roma with orders to hunt down and harass anyone and everyone who was attempting to stand against the Borgia. Niccolò – their Niccolò; the one that had worked for so long within the ranks of the Brotherhood to stop the Borgia and their Templar masters from carrying out their plans to subjugate the people of the world – had sent her the message seemingly as soon as he’d found out about it.
That was the one thing that she could be grateful for, after everything that had happened.
After she’d met up with a group of her brother and sister Assassins, Maria joined them up on the rooftops as they all made their way across to the training ground that Niccolò had detailed for them. Narrowing her eyes as she called up the second-sight that she and Ezio shared, Maria was able to guide her group to the location that Niccolò had pointed out to them. Sighing as she caught sight of the massive group of thickly-armored, brutal soldiers that were about to be deployed, Maria readied her crossbow amid the sounds of her brother and sister Assassins doing the same.
The sound of a rain of crossbow bolts falling upon them, smashing through their armor and felling each one of them in a single blow, allowed Maria to relax even if only a little.
After the last of the brutes had fallen dead to the ground, Maria sighed as she and her brother and sister Assassins quickly departed from their perch on the rooftop overlooking the Borgia training ground. Breaking off from them as she returned to the safehouse, Maria quickly made her way inside so that she could settle down and have a meal before she was inevitably called out on some other business. Passing by the table where Niccolò Copernico was working, she smiled as she saw him hunched over the dining table, writing furiously.
Truly, the man reminded her more than a bit of Leonardo; more and more, the more she saw of him.
Chapter 418: The nature of spies
Chapter Text
As he’d steadily made his way to the Castello Sant’Angelo, Ezio had found himself facing a large group of citizens gathered around the opposite bank of the Tiber. All of them seemed amused to some greater or lesser degree, watching as the French troops that Cesare and his lackey Valois had brought in to aid in the Borgia’s conquests scattered like headless chickens, all in disarray as they alternately attempted to pack and unpack their war gear. Throughout the expanse of the already fractious crowd, more than a few fights had broken out, likely in direct response to such contradictory orders as they were clearly receiving from their superiors.
He himself was once again dressed in the French armor that he’d appropriated for himself, allowing the gaze of the gathered crowd to pass over him nearly as easily as he’d been able to when Aeon would give him aid from within the Apple. As he removed the hooded cloak that he’d been using to conceal the armor, Ezio bit back a smile. There were times he found himself wondering if it had been Aeon himself who had begun the tradition of the Brotherhood wearing such garb in the first place.
Still, that kind of thing wasn’t important; he had to keep his mind on his mission.
As he drew closer to the grounds of the Castello Sant’Angelo, Ezio began hearing snippets of conversation that helped to give him a greater amount of insight into the mindsets of his French opponents:
“When are we expecting the attack from d’Alviano and his mercenaries?”
“They say he’s on his way now.”
“Then why are we packing? Are we going to retreat?”
Before he could hear anything more about what the French soldiers were thinking and planning, a private spotted him and raced over.
“Sir! Sir, what are our orders?” the man asked, looking more than a little flustered, though whether that was due to the man he thought he was meeting, or because of the man’s own thoughts on matters, remained either to be seen or not.
“I’m on my way to see,” he said, knowing that the pair of them would never see each other again after this day, as well as the fact that not enough of his face was uncovered for anyone here to recognize him.
Matters would have been different if he’d been in his traditional Assassin garb, of course.
“Sir!” the man called, drawing his attention back to the private that had been speaking to him before.
“What is it?” he asked, turning his attention back to the young man, who seemed both more eager and more apprehensive than before.
“Who is in charge now, sir? Now that General Valois is dead?”
“No doubt the king is sending a replacement,” he said, aiming to placate the young man.
“Is it true, sir, what’s being said?” the young man asked. “That General Valois died valorously, in battle?”
“Of course it’s true,” he said, biting back a smile that would be only for himself. “He was at the head of his men, up to the very end.”
Leaving with a final, quick farewell, Ezio hurried deeper into the grounds of Castello Sant’Angelo, though he did keep a sedate enough pace while he was still within the sight of the French soldiers he’d confronted not such a long time ago. Removing the armor, once he’d reached a storehouse and was hence able to divest himself of it without risking being spotted by anyone but a particularly fortunate – or unfortunate, depending on one’s view of the situation – guard, Ezio tucked it away safely and then continued on his way.
Having arrayed himself in his Assassin garb once again, Ezio breathed more easily once he’d made it onto the grounds of the Castello itself. Making his way up the ramparts, Ezio looked down from his new, higher vantagepoint into the courtyard. And there, stalking his way up to the nearest Papal Guard that had been posted before the door to the Castello’s inner citadel.
“I want to see the Pope!” Cesare shouted, all fire and fury; more than anything, Ezio wished to be done with him.
Still, there was a time and a place for all things; Cesare’s time would come.
“His Holiness waits for you at the top of the Castello, in his apartments,” the Guard on on duty said, clearly not wishing to arouse the wrath of such an unstable personage as Cesare.
“Get out of my way!” the man in question snarled, shoving his way past the pair of Papal Guards who had merely been doing their duty.
Ezio suspected that there would be few enough people who would actually miss Cesare, once he was gone; a bit of a sad thought, that a man had wasted his life to the point that he’d not likely be mourned when it was over, and if it had been anyone other than Cesare Borgia, Ezio would have likely have given the matter more than a passing, indifferent reflection. Still, Cesare’s decisions were his own, and the man had long since lost the right to any mercy in Ezio’s estimation.
Once Cesare had vanished into the depths of the Castello’s inner citadel, with the Papal Guards calling for a wicket gate within the main door to be opened for him, Ezio continued on his own way. Moving around the circumference of the Castello’s outer walls, until he came to the place where the secret gate had been placed by some helpful architect, Ezio took out Pietro’s key and let himself in.
Once he’d made it into the inner citadel itself, Ezio allowed himself to relax, even if ever so slightly. He was still fully aware that there was still the chance of his presence being discovered by a particularly zealous guard, either one of those who worked directly for the Pope, or those who worked for the Borgia directly, but he still continued determinedly on his way up. There would be time enough for other concerns later.
Chapter 419: Rodrigo Borgia
Chapter Text
Stalking his way through the halls to the room where that fat, old failure who had been both a pain in his ass and a persistent thorn in his side was cowering, Cesare ground his teeth as he found himself forced to recall all of the encounters with that damned man in black that the Assassins had somehow managed to bring into their ranks. It was not enough that those bastards had managed to lay their unjust claim to the Piece of Eden itself, no, they had to contrive a way to add yet more force to their side.
It was infuriating.
Making his way into his worthless father’s apartments within the Castello, Cesare didn’t even bother to waste his time announcing himself.
“What the hell is happening?!” he demanded, feeling almost as though he was trying to swallow a hot coal and raw lightning at once.
“I do not know what you mean,” the fat, old failure had the sheer audacity to say.
“My funds, old man!” he snarled, stalking up to the decrepit old fuck so that he could properly make himself heard. “My troops! All gone!”
“Financial difficulties strike all of us,” the fat fuck said, turning away with an arrogance that made Cesare grind his teeth all the more fiercely. “Even those with an army.”
“So, you intend to give me money?” he demanded, as the old shit turned away from him; he was already planning to make the fat failure regret the foolish actions he’d taken, this disrespect…
Well, it only ensured that the fat fuck’s punishment would be all the more severe.
“No, I do not,” was all the useless old man said in return.
Infuriating, fat, useless sack of shit, Cesare only just managed to keep the words behind his teeth, satisfying as they would have been to snarl in the old fuck’s jowly face. “Then how am I meant to proceed?!” he demanded, grabbing one of the apples and furiously taking a bite out of it. “You already know the Apple is beyond our grasp!”
“Sí, I am aware of that. However, are you aware that the Baron de Valois is dead?”
“Did you-?!”
~AC: Bro~
“What reason do you think I would have to do that?” he demanded, feeling a slow, creeping sort of fury at the short-sighted child that he was still dealing with; true, he wouldn’t have much longer to deal with him, once he’d finished the cantarella-laced apple that he was even now in the process of eating, but it was infuriating all the same. “Was he plotting against me? Perhaps with my ‘brilliant’, traitorous captain-general? ”
“I do not have to stand for this!” the idiot child sulked, and more importantly took another, furious bite of the poisoned apple in his hand.
Perhaps it was better that the Apple had been taken by the Assassins; better in their hands, where he had the chance of reclaiming it, than close enough that this little fool had the chance of laying his incompetent hands upon it.
“If you must know, the Assassins murdered him; with the help of their man in black, of course.”
The fool boy made an inarticulate, almost bestial sound of rage when he heard those words, and while Rodrigo did hold himself to higher standards than his idiot son, he could rather understand the sentiment, under the circumstances. The man in black had frustrated more than his fair share of their efforts to secure their place in Roma, as well as to solidify their influence over Italia as a whole.
“And yet, while the man in black does seem to be the spearhead of the Assassins’ efforts, the blame for this debacle can also be laid at your feet,” he continued, wanting the idiot child to know why he was being disposed of, even though it was doubtful that he would ever truly understand. “It was your decision to attack Monteriggioni; you brought the Assassins’ wrath down on us. The Auditore would have had no reason to pursue the secrets contained within the Apple – no reason to cultivate a relationship with the man in black – if you had not been so foolish as to invade their home.”
He could see that Cesare was just about to begin demanding more elaboration than he’d just provided – truly, the boy’s inadequacy knew no bounds – when Lucrezia came storming into the room; the wild-eyed look on her face giving him a rather unpleasant inkling as to just what she was about to do.
“Cesare, he intends to poison you!”
~AC: Bro~
For a long moment, as he watched the confrontation between Cesare and his father, Ezio found himself wondering if he should act to prevent what he could see clearly was coming. Still, while it was true that he’d come to this place to end the wasted life of Rodrigo Borgia at last, the simple fact was that Cesare Borgia was an even more petty, cruel, and vindictive man than his father had proven himself to be. As hard as that was to believe, at times.
However, for all that he might have ultimately hated the man, Ezio wasn’t about to allow even the one he’d once considered his worst enemy to die of cantarella poisoning.
For a moment, Ezio considered calling upon Aeon to aid him, then swiftly reconsidered and calmly loaded his crossbow. Moving just enough out of concealment that he could get a bead on just where it was that Rodrigo was standing, Ezio quickly put a bolt through the man’s head. As he heard the hue and cry go up from behind him, knowing that it would only be a matter of time before he was forced to turn and confront the guards and Papal Guards that Cesare would no doubt be calling down on his head, Ezio once again found his thoughts turning towards Aeon.
Chapter 420: Cesare’s challenge
Chapter Text
And, as he began to hear the sounds of steadily-increasing numbers of trampling feet on the marble flooring of the Castello Sant’Angelo, Ezio decided that such a time would indeed be the optimal one to call upon the uncanny – nigh unearthly – abilities possessed by the man in black.
Removing the Apple from its hidden pouch within his robes, Ezio found himself only slightly surprised when Aeon himself emerged from the Apple, the snap-hiss of his shining red blades making their reappearance as the first of the Borgia guards had stormed into the room. Ezio only had time to blink once, before the guard had been cut down in his very tracks.
“Grazie, amico,” he said, as Aeon came to a neat stop before him.
“I’d begun to wonder if you had forgotten my offer altogether,” Aeon said.
“My apologies, amico,” he said, then found himself forced to return his attention to the guards that were beginning to stampede into the room where the both of them were standing.
Aeon, of course, with his preternatural speed and his unstoppable blades was able to cut his way through the ranks of advancing guardsmen, letting the pair of them make a fighting retreat. Once he and Aeon had made their way out of the Castello entirely, Ezio allowed himself to breathe more freely.
“I apologize if I offended your hospitality, amico,” he said, once he and Aeon had made it to the safety of a nearby rooftop, out of sight of any of the other guards that Cesare might dispatch after them. “I simply had no wish to burden you unduly.”
“It’s hardly a burden,” Aeon said, vanishing once more into the depths of the Apple.
There hardly seemed to be a point in trying to explain himself to a man who seemed to be so taciturn as Aeon, particularly when the man himself had returned to the Apple. Sighing as he made his way back to the Brotherhood’s stronghold on Isola Tiberina, Ezio ducked down into the underground tunnels as soon as he could, making his way back with far greater speed and secrecy than he otherwise would have been able to.
Making his way back up and out of the tunnel, Ezio paused to have some food, before continuing on his way to the Brotherhood’s main meeting area.
“Rodrigo Borgia is dead,” he announced, once he’d managed to round up his brother and sister Assassins.
“We gathered as much from the bells,” Machiavelli said. “Yet, this is still welcome news. What of Cesare?”
“Poisoned, but alive,” he reported, wondering for a moment if he should have asked Aeon to finish the man off.
But no; more than a few times, of late, Ezio had found himself unsettled by how easy it would be to lay all of his responsibilities at the feet of the man in black. And so, Ezio was coming to understand the insidious temptation that such power as Aeon provided the Brotherhood was and would continue to be. And so, he was resolving himself that he would find a way to place the Apple somewhere out of reach.
Out of even his own hands, while he could still find the will to rid himself of the artifact.
“We must not allow him to assemble his remaining supporters,” Machiavelli said, bringing Ezio’s attention firmly back to the matter of Cesare, and the tasks they still had before them. “If Cesare truly has freed himself from the restraints of his father, he may be able to regain the ground that he has lost.”
“Given the way the man acts, I find myself doubting that, Niccolò,” little Maria said. “However, I will grant that my experiences with the man have been entirely second-hand.”
And let us all be thankful for small mercies, Ezio mused, forcing himself to repress a shudder at the very thought of little Maria any closer to Cesare Borgia than she was forced to be, given that the both of them were in Roma at the same time. “I think I know a way to hunt him down,” he said, knowing that he would once again be in need of Aeon’s aid.
Truly, it would be entirely too simple to fall into the trap of relying exclusively on the aid of the man in black, allowing his own skills to degrade, or even to decay into utter uselessness; he hoped that the future Desmond had come from was not one in which the Brotherhood as a whole had allowed such a thing to come to pass, even if Aeon was a terrifyingly effective counter to anything the Templars seemed to be able to able to set against them.
“Bene,” Machiavelli said, and Ezio was almost certain that his brother Assassin knew precisely what it was that he hadn’t suggested. “We will need to move quickly, however; the coming weeks will be crucial.”
“Sí,” La Volpe said, nodding as the sound of trumpets blaring in the far distance began to filter in through the windows. “Those trumpets you hear are a summons for all remaining Borgia forces.”
“Do you know where they would be most likely to gather, Volpe?” he asked, wondering again at just how much the leader of Roma’s thieves actually knew; he truly did seem to have an answer to every problem the Brotherhood faced.
“Sí; it’s more likely than not that Cesare will rally his troops in the piazza in front of his palace in Trastevere,” La Volpe said, beginning to sound as contemplative as Ezio himself felt. “Even if the man has been stricken by poison, he’ll be stubborn enough to at least go out to inspect his forces, even if he cannot command them personally.”
“My men will patrol the city,” Bartolomeo said, then he grinned widely. “Though we have something much more fearsome than an army, even of my men.”
“Sí, that we do,” Ezio was quick to agree, even as he promised himself once more that he would see that the Apple – and Aeon with it – was sealed away where it’s fantastic and terrifying power could not be misused.
Even by those who might well claim to have the best of intentions.
When Aeon himself emerged from the Apple once more, Ezio thanked the man in black for his continued support of their efforts, and then turned his attention to the other members of the Brotherhood.
“Claudia, I want you and your girls at the Rosa in Fiore to find out all they can about what Cesare might be planning, and make contact with our recruits, as well as those Guardians who are old enough to fight,” he said, smiling slightly as his little sister nodded sharply, moving off to handle the work he’d just given to her. “Volpe, please have your thieves fan out through the city; have them bring word of any Templar chapters that are trying to reorganize and reestablish themselves, we have to keep the pressure on, to ensure that neither of our enemies have the chance to regain their footing in this chaos. Bartolomeo, organize your men, and have them ready to move at a moment’s notice.”
For a moment, Ezio considered mentioning the need to keep a lookout for any Guardians who might have found themselves caught between the Brotherhood, the Borgia, and their Templar masters as the three sides clashed, but he already knew that they would, and he’d no desire to insult his brother and sister Assassins by stating something so blindingly obvious.
“You’ll be needing me in Il Vaticano,” Machiavelli said, with the assurance of a man who’d seen just this kind of situation before. “The College of Cardinals will be going into conclave soon to elect a new Pope, and Cesare will no doubt wish to use what influence he has left to elevate a candidate favorable to him. Or else, simply one that he will be able to manipulate.”
“Sí, but Cardinal della Rovere is the implacable enemy of the Borgia, and he wields great authority,” Ezio mused aloud.
“I will go and speak with the cardinal camerlengo,” Machiavelli said, nodding in a way that looked almost satisfied. “However, the election may be long and drawn out.”
“Sí, I expect delays are to be expected, under the circumstances,” he said, knowing that Cesare would be doing all he could to shape such circumstances in his favor; best he saw to such things as soon as he could. “Maria, come with me.”
“I thought you didn’t want me getting into a fight with Cesare,” little Maria said, looking just as confused as she sounded.
Chapter 421: Power of the Apple
Chapter Text
“Sí, that is just what I would have said, before Aeon chose to show himself to us,” he admitted. “However, now that we all know just how much Aeon’s presence infuriates Cesare, and how prone the man is to making mistakes when his fury carries him away, I think it would be better for our efforts if you did come with us when we faced him.”
“Bene, given everything you’ve told me about the man, that sounds like it could work,” little Maria said, nodding.
After Bartolomeo had bid the both of them farewell and good fortune, all of them went their separate ways, each of them intent on their individual tasks. As he and little Maria left for the palazzo where Cesare would be rallying his troops, Ezio found himself wondering just how much more of the Borgia forces he would be forced to confront, before he was finally rid of them. He was hardly counting on being rid of the Templars so easily, since from everything he’d heard they were entrenched far deeper than even the Borgia – and had existed for a much longer time, as well – but freeing Roma from the grip of the Borgia could truly only help, in the end.
As he and little Maria crossed to the west bank of the Tiberina, Ezio turned his attention to searching for the fortified palazzo where Cesare was most likely to be staying. He wouldn’t have wanted to go back to it, of course, since Cesare was arrogant enough to think himself invincible – or at least that he should have been – and would naturally wish to command and control his troops from the front-lines. It was a thing they always had to keep in mind: just how much Cesare thought of himself.
It was one more thing that could be used against the man.
As the pair of them moved closer to the guarded grounds where Cesare was assembling his forces, Ezio paused for a long moment to observe what defenses the man had set out; even someone so arrogant as Cesare Borgia couldn’t have easily dismissed the way so many of his fellows had fallen. Not after he’d come so close to death, himself. As he and little Maria pressed closer to Cesare’s fortified palazzo, Ezio removed the Apple that Aeon had made his own from the hidden pocket within his robes.
Once Aeon himself had appeared before them, Ezio signaled to his brother Assassin.
“It seems as though we’ve come to another turning point,” Aeon said, his voice held low so that none of them would chance being discovered by the patrols, thin and patchy as they seemed to be.
“Sí, Cesare has gathered the last of his forces in this place,” Ezio informed his brother Assassin, as little Maria kept an eye out for any of the guards who might chance to look in their direction, whether because they had caught wind of the conversation that was taking place, or simply because their assigned route had taken them in such a direction.
“And you wish to be rid of him, is that correct?”
“At least his forces, to start with,” Ezio said, not wishing to unduly burden Aeon, even considering everything he knew that the man in black was capable of.
Even after he’d seen what the Apple alone could do.
“Very well,” Aeon said, and for the briefest instant Ezio thought he saw a flash of pleasure in the ancient Assassin’s golden eyes.
More than likely, such had been a trick of his own perception; Aeon was stoic enough that anyone could be forgiven for attempting to humanize the man, if only in the most basic of ways.
Chapter 422: Shadows of Aeon
Chapter Text
As Aeon laid his right hand upon the Apple, surprisingly not having tucked it away within his both immaterial and yet frighteningly material body as soon as he’d emerged from the artifact, Ezio could feel the deep, thrumming power of the Apple as it rumbled its way through his body. Looking to little Maria, knowing that those who bore such a connection as she did to the Pieces of Eden had distinct – and distinctly unsettling – reactions to when those artifacts were put to use, Ezio caught sight of Aeon raising his left hand out of the corner of his eye.
He didn’t know quite what the gesture meant, but the simple fact that his littlest sister didn’t seem to have suffered the same loss of her senses comforted Ezio as the three of them began moving forward. Finding himself suddenly in the midst of a swarm of hooded figures, their own garments as starkly black as the ones Aeon himself wore, Ezio could only laugh as once again the Assassins’ strangest, most singular brother demonstrated that – even after revealing so much of himself – there were still facets he kept to himself.
Truly, it seemed as though Aeon’s methods had simply clashed too deeply with Altaïr’s own for the pair of them to overcome the difficulties that such a situation had presented.
Finding herself suddenly without an opponent, as Messer Aeon called up what seemed to be an infinite recursion of himself – the black-clad figures that had appeared all around her and her last living brother had the man in black’s exact build, or at least what anyone who looked at him could see, under the concealment of his robes – Maria turned to Ezio, as her last brother turned his own attention to her.
“Well, fratello, it seems as though we won’t be having any trouble with these bastardi,” she said.
Ezio laughed, though the sound itself seemed more that of someone finding relief in strange moments, rather than any kind of amusement. “Sí, I suppose the task of coming to grips with Cesare himself falls to us, then.”
Without another word, the both of them broke off from what was quickly becoming a rather one-sided mêlée, considering the sheer power differential between Aeon, what seemed to be the man in black’s own small army of recursions, and the Borgia guards. Who, for all their presumed devotion to Cesare, were still just as mortal as any of those that Aeon had cut down in their very tracks. Once the pair of them had made it inside Cesare’s palazzo, Maria found it as empty as she’d honestly been expecting.
Ezio signaled her to close with him, so that the pair of them would be able to react more quickly when they either found their quarry or else ended up confronted by the man’s remaining forces. There was little question of him having them, of course, but even with Aeon’s power and prowess to back them up, it was simply best to avoid a confrontation. As she and Ezio continued on, making their way up through Cesare’s palazzo and its eerily deserted environs, Maria found herself wondering if Cesare would already be aware of their coming and prepared to fight. It was possible, since for all his arrogance the man did have more than a modicum of experience with combat, and was likely to know that something had gone wrong.
Or, at the very least he would be able to see the ensuing battle through his window, if he had any in the room where he was staying.
As the pair of them made their way up into the room where Cesare seemed to be staying, Maria found herself rather amused by the fact that there were no windows in such a place. The gloom inside the room itself was almost as oppressive as that of the man seated at the head of the large, oak table that all of his higher-ranked men were arranged around. However, it was also clear that Cesare was suffering the effects of the poison that Ezio had told her Rodrigo Borgia had tried to use on him.
His skin looked grayish, even in the flickering candlelight of the windowless room, and the sheen of sweat stood out plainly on his face; there was also a man, plainly a doctor, seated next to him, attending Cesare as best as he could.
“You must hunt them down!” Cesare snarled, fists gripping the armrests of his chair, clearly trying to hold himself not only in the chair, but upright before the men he would clearly wish to have fear him.
“They are everywhere and nowhere at once!” the man seated at Cesare’s right hand, directly opposite the doctor who was tending to Cesare even as the meeting continued all around him, declared with a helpless sort of tone.
Still, for all that, the man was bolder than his fellows, since he was the only one who spoke against Cesare.
“I don’t care how you do it, just do it!” Cesare snarled, the weakness in his voice caused by the poison that hadn’t yet claimed him making his tone thinner and reedier than it had been before.
Maria found herself hoping that the small amount of poison Cesare had been fed by his grassone bastardo of a father would end up killing him, or at least that she and Ezio would be able to push him hard enough that he died anyway.
“We cannot, signore, not without your guidance,” the only man who’d been willing to speak out in Cesare’s presence continued, and Maria found herself wondering if Cesare was even remotely capable of recognizing that kind of loyalty. It took a certain kind of mind, after all, to realize when they were being foolish. “The Assassins have regrouped. With our French allies gone, or in disarray, our own forces are scarcely able to match them on the field. That’s not even mentioning their spy network; our own men are no longer able to root them out. Ezio Auditore and his sister have also turned a great many of the citizenry to their cause.”
“I am ill, you idioti!” Cesare shouted, clearly at the end of what little patience he’d possessed in the first place. “I depend on your initiative! I was damn nearly killed, but I still have teeth!”
Looking over to Ezio, wondering if the pair of them should move in now, or if they should wait and see if Cesare was fool enough to reveal anything else about his situation, Maria found that her last brother seemed to be contemplating just that kind of thing, himself.
“Signore-”
“Just hold them off, if that’s all you’re capable of!” Cesare snarled, clearly losing what little sense he could have even claimed to have even before she and Ezio had finally managed to catch up with him, as the doctor seated next to him wiped at his brow with a cloth that had been soaked in some kind of pungent astringent. “Soon, Micheletto will reach Roma with my own forces from Romagna, and then you will see how quickly the Assassini will crumble into dust!”
“You’ve deluded yourself, Cesare,” Ezio said firmly, as the pair of them made their way into the room where Cesare and his remaining men had all gathered.
“You?! Just how many lives do you and that cat-eyed bitch have?!” Cesare demanded, throwing himself to his feet, even as he scrambled to get out of the room. “Guards! Guards!”
Before even a single one of the guards could attack either her or Ezio, the far left wall was cut through by a pair of shining red blades, revealing the crouching form of Aeon.
~AC: Bro~
When Aeon himself joined up with them, Ezio found himself once again unsettled by the sheer ease with which the man in black was able to decimate whatever force he chose to set himself against. Yes, the fact that Aeon was on the side of the Brotherhood was indeed a great boon for the Assassins as a whole, but there was no question that relying on him too much would inevitably cause them to become complacent. And nothing good could come of complacency.
Once the three of them had managed to make their way out of the remnants of Cesare’s palazzo, Aeon was quick to vanish back into the depths of the Apple once more.
Chapter 423: For a rainy day
Chapter Text
Breathing more easily as he and little Maria began making their way back to the Rosa in Fiore once again, Ezio sighed softly as he found himself reflecting on what he was going to need to do with the Apple itself. He fully understood that no one else could be allowed to make use of the Apple. A weaker-minded person could all too easily find themselves falling under the sway of Aeon, allowing themselves to make use of his prowess and abilities, meanwhile allowing their own to fall by the wayside.
He would have to find a place to hide the Apple, somewhere it would be out of the hands of those who might have tried to overuse, misuse, or abuse it.
Once the pair of them had finally made it back to the Rosa, Ezio allowed himself to relax once more. Yes, he was fully aware that Cesare would be scrabbling for any scrap of power that he could gather, pushed into a corner as he was, and the fact that one of his allies had been allowed to escape after he’d tried to poison Pietro as an agent of Cesare’s jealousy. Still, as he was, Cesare was not likely to find the aid he sought.
He, little Maria, the Brotherhood as a whole, and Aeon himself had broken the back of the Borgia, and while there were still Templars to be dealt with, there would be time to address them later.
Once the pair of them were able to settle back into the Rosa once more, Ezio allowed himself to relax for the first time since he and little Maria had made their excursion to deal with Cesare and his forces to begin with.
Settling back into something of a normal routine was actually something of a surprise, in light of how much time he’d spent hunting for the Borgia and their supporters. Still, he was fully aware that Cesare was not about to give up, even after he’d been driven back from every one of the gains that his family – most likely in the person of his father, considering everything that he had learned about the man during the time that he and little Maria had been cutting their way through the Borgia’s forces – had made during the time that they had held power within Roma.
Machiavelli had reported that the conclave of Cardinals was still ongoing, with Cesare seemingly burning what remained of his influence to hold back della Rovere from election to the Papacy, and Machiavelli had reported that the Cardinals were likely to elect an interim Pope, considering everything that was going on. At least until the balance of power had been settled. In light of all that, Ezio was just as pleased not to have any immediate answers.
Chapter 424: Burly brawl
Chapter Text
After three weeks of reported deadlock, however, Ezio was also pleased to find out that something was actually happening again.
“The Cardinal of Rouen, a Frenchman by the name of Georges d’Amboise, had revealed under… Stress,” this last, Claudia said with a rather slyly amused expression on her face, and Ezio found himself reflecting on – not for the first time – how much happier Claudia seemed to be, as a fully-fledged Assassin. “That Cesare has planned a meeting with Templar loyalists in the countryside beyond Roma’s borders. The Cardinal himself is going to be in attendance.”
“When is it? And where?” Ezio asked, hardly surprised at the way Cesare was still scrabbling for what power he could maintain.
“Tonight, though the exact location is going to be kept secret until the meeting itself commences,” Claudia said.
Ezio found himself more than a little amused; it seemed even Cesare could learn to adapt after so many failures as he had suffered.
Bidding farewell to Claudia, Ezio found that he and little Maria were stopped at the Rosa’s front door by Machiavelli.
“They have elected a new Pope; a man that Claudia has a particular interest in,” Machiavelli said, sounding rather sardonically amused. “As I suspected, they have elected Cardinal Piccolomini. He’s hardly an old man, at sixty-four, but his health has never truly been the best. And, I suspect it’s likely to become worse with the additional stress that the position – and Cesare, to be sure – will put him under.”
“Sí, I expect you’re right,” Ezio said, wishing for a moment that he could have done more for the man; still, he was also fully aware that those who tried to do everything most often ended up accomplishing nothing. “Is there anything else I should know about him? Does he support anyone in particular?”
“He has chosen to be known as Pius III,” Machiavelli said, narrowing his eyes slightly in thought. “We don’t yet know if he precisely supports anyone, but all of Cesare’s foreign ambassadors were putting pressure on him to leave Roma for the duration of the election. Della Rovere is, of course, furious; but the man also knows how and when to wait.”
“Bene,” he said, smiling slightly; if there was any man who fully understood the value of patience, it was Niccolò Machiavelli. “I suppose little Maria and I truly should get going, then.”
“Sí, that would be best,” Machiavelli said, nodding to the both of them, before continuing on his way.
Presumably so that he could inform Claudia about what he’d learned about the man who now called himself Pius III, as well.
As he and little Maria made their way back to the barracks where Bartolomeo and his wife had chosen to make their home, at least for the duration of their stay in Roma, Ezio also found himself considering just where he would be able to hide the Apple that Aeon had taken such complete possession of. And also, just how he would explain such a course of action to the man in black. After all, considering how many varied abilities that Aeon had already demonstrated, as well as the awareness that the man in black had demonstrated of the outside world, Ezio hardly doubted that he could find his way out of anywhere he truly desired to leave.
It was, therefore, best that he found a way to explain his reasoning to Aeon before he left the man behind.
When he and little Maria had made their way to the barracks itself, so that the pair of them would be able to secure the aid of Bartolomeo and his soldiers – in addition to the Assassins they were going to be bringing along – Ezio sighed softly as the pair of them made their way inside again. Bartolomeo and Pantasilea seemed to have been waiting for them, and Ezio smiled as he made his way over to the table where the pair of them were sitting.
“We received word from Machiavelli that Cesare has returned, and his aim this time is to gather what aid he might from the remaining Templar loyalists in Roma,” Pantasilea said, before Ezio could begin to wonder just who had been the one to inform them about what was going on, now that they had managed to clear out the last of the Borgia supporters in Roma as a whole.
“Sí, now we’re going to have to go after them, now,” little Maria said, as the pair of them settled down at the table alongside Bartolomeo and Pantasilea.
“Turns out it might be for the best that you didn’t kill Cesare back at his palazzo,” Bartolomeo said, picking up a large piece of chicken and firmly biting into it. “This way, he’ll draw all his supporters to him, and we can smash the fuckin’ guts out of ‘em,” he continued, turning to grin at Ezio and little Maria where they both sat on the opposite side of the table. “Got to hand it to you, it almost seems like you planned it that way.”
Turning to share a smile with little Maria, as the pair of them took their own food from the plates of chicken and bread, Ezio allowed himself to relax for what little time he and the remainder of his family would have. Yes, he knew that all of them were going to have to move quickly, especially considering the time it was going to take to finish their meal, but the extra time to rest would be worth it. Once it was time, he and little Maria would track down the last of the Borgia.
The last of them who seemed to have ambitions that aligned with the Templars and their cause, at least.
~AC: Bro~
Once they’d finished with their respective meals, armed themselves, and gathered a mixed force of Assassins and Bartolomeo’s own condottieri – along with the promised presence of Aeon, but Maria had her doubts that anything could constrain the man in black if and when he wished to act – she and Ezio quickly set off to locate d’Amboise, so that they would be able to follow in the man’s footsteps as he made his way to the location where his meeting with Cesare was to take place.
The pair of them followed the man on horseback, even the Cardinal of Rouen gathered up his own followers and their entourage, falling in behind them as they made their way to a country estate near the shore of Lake Bracciano, the palazzo itself sitting behind tall, fortified walls that seemed almost a match for the ones that stood sentinel over the barracks that Bartolomeo and Pantasilea lived and worked out of.
As they all drew closer to the walls of the palazzo that Cesare was using to shelter himself, she and Ezio leaned in close to discuss just which one of them would make their way over the walls and into the building; even though they had Aeon close, Ezio had told her that something about the unearthly, uncanny presence of the man in black was beginning to unsettle him more and more as time went on.
He was, therefore, trying not to rely on the prowess and abilities of the man in black and the Apple he somehow inhabited.
In the end, Maria stayed behind and Ezio made his way into the palazzo where Cesare was planning to meet with his remaining supporters.
~AC: Bro~
After bidding little Maria goodbye, Ezio made his way up and over the walls that surrounded the palazzo where Cesare clearly intended to meet with what remained of his supporters. Inside the walls, he found himself following the delegation of Cardinals, along with what remained of the Borgia’s military forces, and what looked like a great deal of reinforcements from the wider Templar Order at large. Steeling himself against the urge to use the Apple, to either have Aeon cloak him so that he would be perfectly unnoticeable to anyone within the walls he now stood behind or else to set the man in black himself upon them and have things done with, Ezio continued on his way.
Cesare himself was present, of course, and it was clear that the efforts of his physician to cure him of even the mild poisoning that Rodrigo Borgia had managed to inflict on him, before Cesare had turned on him like the viper he so clearly was, were progressing steadily if not quickly.
The darkness inside the walls, lit all too infrequently by torches that flickered lowly in their wrought iron sconces, lent this place more than a slight air of foreboding. Or perhaps that was simply because Ezio had come to know entirely too well the kind of people that Cesare Borgia would willingly associate himself with. As well as those who the Templars looked to recruit.
In either case, Ezio suspected that he and his would have more than their share of problems; yes, Aeon was more than likely to take a hand in the battle, no matter Ezio’s own thoughts on the matter, and yet…
Returning his attention to the gathering in front of him, more forcefully than he’d found himself needing to do in some time, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he heard Cesare speaking.
“Join me and I will take back Roma for us!” the man declaimed; Ezio wondered if it was desperation or self-delusion coloring his tone, then found himself wondering if such a distinction truly mattered anymore.
Neither of them would be able to help him.
As the Cardinal of Rouen himself made his way into the room at last, Cesare stopped his mad tirade before it could truly begin.
“What news from the conclave?” Cesare demanded, seeming almost to have forgotten already that there was anyone else in the room with him at all; such tunnel-vision was only the least of his shortcomings, of course.
“Good news, and bad,” the hesitation in the Cardinal’s voice seemed to suggest that he knew Cesare Borgia, even if only by reputation.
Something like that could easily become a double-edged sword, at least for anyone who wasn’t foolish enough to think that they could force people to obey them for any real length of time.
“Spit it out!”
“We have elected Piccolomini.”
“Well, at least it isn’t that fisherman’s son, della Rovere!” Cesare snarled, turning a gimlet eye upon d’Amboise where he stood. “But it’s still not the man I wanted! I wanted a puppet! Piccolomini may have one foot in the grave, but he can still do a lot of damage to me. I paid for your appointment! Is this how you would thank me?!”
“Della Rovere is a powerful foe,” d’Amboise said, still seeming hesitant. “And, Roma is not what it once was. Borgia money has become… tainted.”
What little forbearance that Cesare actually possessed evaporated like morning dew as soon as he heard those words. “You will regret this decision.”
Gathering himself, Ezio pressed firmly forward. The moment one of the Cardinals spotted him, all of them turned and departed almost as one.
“Hired men promise you their blood, but as soon as you need help, they turn against you,” he admonished the assembly at large, what little remained of them after a general panic had taken hold in the wake of his approach.
Switching his left hidden-blade for the small pistol that Leonardo had designed for him, Ezio fired it into the air to signal to the remainder of his forces, as well as the condottieri that Bartolomeo had brought alongside them. The sight of Bartolomeo himself, smashing through the Borgia soldiery who had been vainly attempting to close the gates that had been opened when the Cardinals had turned to run, roaring out a war cry as he swung Bianca over his head…
Well, he imagined it was a rather disheartening sight for what remained of the Borgia soldiery, as well as those Templars who had presumably come to support one of their own; though Ezio honestly doubted that a man such as Cesare could truly be loyal to anyone but himself.
The mad clash of battle drew his attention for a long moment, but familiar snap-hiss of Aeon’s shining red blades drew his attention right back to the tall, hooded form of the man in black. Turning, Ezio watched as Aeon tucked the Apple neatly away within the hollow cavity of his chest, then turned himself, shining blades raised, as he used the preternatural speed that Ezio had seen him use many a time before to engage the Borgia and Templar soldiery surrounding them.
Shuddering slightly, as he once again found himself being reminded of just why Aeon and his Apple needed to be hidden away from the world lest someone with entirely too few scruples gain access to the overwhelming power that Aeon could provide; given the man in black’s clear detachment from the people who made up the world, it would be simple for one such as that to put a man who wished to be useful – as Aeon so clearly did – to the wrong sort of work.
~AC: Bro~
The odd sense that she’d had so many times lately, the feel of something heavy pressing down on the center of her chest as well as something light that seemed to have settled upon her head, drew her attention to the black-clad form of Aeon as he dashed into a knot of Borgia and Templar soldiery, shining red blades out and cutting before even one of them could take note of him. By the time they had, of course, it was entirely too late.
Truly, she could more than understand why the last of her brothers was finding himself more and more unnerved by what the man in black was capable of; and why he thought the world would be better off without him, even if the Brotherhood itself might not.
~AC: Bro~
Swiftly finding himself deprived of any living opponent, Ezio quickly set out to search for Cesare Borgia, who had run from the battle nearly as soon as it had been joined in the first place. While yes, Ezio could fully understand the motivations of anyone who’d no wish to face Aeon in combat – no one sane ever would have, after all – Cesare of all people could not be allowed to escape this place. Cesare Borgia could not be allowed to survive.
Still, the more he searched for the man, the more he found himself finding less than nothing; it appeared as though Cesare had indeed abandoned the battle that the Borgia remnants and Templar loyalists had come to support him. Yes, he had been expecting something like that to happen, given everything he’d found out about the man and his character, and yet… Ezio quickly put those thoughts away.
Now was not the time for anything but his pursuit of Cesare.
However, even after the last of the Borgia soldiery and their Templar allies had been dispatched, Ezio found himself unable to find the man who he’d spent so much time fighting and chasing by proxy.
Returning to the Rosa in Fiore to report such to Mother and Claudia, after Bartolomeo and his forces had broken off to return to their own barracks, Ezio found his thoughts once more drifting back to Aeon and the Apple that he inhabited. It was a simple fact that, even in spite of what a boon the man in black had been for the Brotherhood and their cause, such powers as Aeon held could not be allowed to come to light. There was too much temptation associated with such things.
Ezio would readily admit that even he himself was not immune to such.
Still, it was also a fact that Aeon himself would also have to be convinced of the merit behind such an idea, or else he was more than likely to simply walk out of whatever manner of containment Ezio found to put him in, with the Apple itself concealed safely within him. Still, there were other matters that would need to be attended to, before he could see about convincing Aeon to allow him to secret the Apple away so that no one who would seek to misuse its power – or Aeon’s, for that matter – for their own ends.
The hunt for Cesare Borgia took precedence, now of all times.
Chapter 425: The vanished Borgia
Chapter Text
Still, it was not as though the rest of the world was going to stop just because there was one more dangerous man loose in it; truly, Ezio had hardly been expecting anything different. By and large, the world as a whole was concerned by the short-lived reign of Pius III, who had succumbed to the stresses of both his delicate constitution and the increased workload that the papacy demanded after only twenty-six days. Ezio had at least been pleased to note that the man had not, in the end, been a puppet for the Borgia.
No, in fact nearly all of his reforms had been aimed at curtailing the corruption that Rodrigo Borgia and his followers had allowed to spread within the Church, so he’d at least been pleased to know that; the issue of a warrant for Cesare’s arrest throughout the Papal States was a welcome surprise, though not an entirely unexpected one. The ascension of della Rovere in his place had only truly been contested by d’Amboise, but in the end della Rovere had consolidated his supporters and laid claim to the Papacy for himself.
Julius II, as della Rovere had declared himself, was far more vigorous about going about his tasks; he was also ostentatiously proud to be known as the son of a fisherman. It was a welcome change from Rodrigo, of course, but he still found it more than a little odd. Perhaps it was simply the sheer difference between their two styles of operation.
Or perhaps it was simply the shadow of Cesare Borgia that hung over all of their doings of late.
“If only that spineless bastardo would show himself,” Bartolomeo said, flopping down in the chair at the map table in the barracks where they had all gathered to discuss how they were going to move forward.
“He will, but only when he’s ready,” little Maria said, sounding about as annoyed as Ezio found himself feeling at the moment.
“Machiavelli has informed me that Cesare is rallying his best soldiers in front of the main gate into Roma,” Pantasilea reported, making her way into the room where they had all gathered, awaiting news.
“If Cesare truly is coming in from the north, as seems to be his intention, he’ll try to get in through the gate near the Castra Praetoria,” Ezio said, considering carefully just where it was that they were going to need to go, in order to confront the man who had caused them and Roma as a whole such pains and troubles while he had been in power. “He might even attempt to take the Castra itself; it’s a strong strategic position.”
“Sí, you’re probably right,” little Maria said, standing even as Ezio did the same, himself.
“Gather the Assassins,” he directed at her, even as Bartolomeo stood up, himself. “We’ll face Cesare together.”
“And if we cannot?” Bartolomeo asked, that same, strange melancholy coming over him once more.
“That’s a fine thing to hear from you, Bartolomeo,” he said, his tone slightly sharper than he’d honestly intended. “Still, if you don’t think you can handle this fight, little Maria and I will handle it on our own.”
All of them parted company after that, with little Maria and Bartolomeo both heading off to rally their respective factions, and Ezio making his own way to contact some of their allies outside of the Brotherhood. Given what was going to be happening, once Cesare and his forces made it to the gate they were meaning to besiege, those who defended Roma were going to need to know what was about to happen. Aside from that, Julius II was a sensible man, in addition to being a staunch enemy of the Borgia.
After he’d let the relevant parties know about what was to be coming, Ezio gathered his and Bartolomeo’s forces in the piazza of a church near enough to both the Castra Praetoria, and Roma’s northern gate that they would be on hand when the inevitable finally happened. And happen it did, not soon after: Cesare himself, riding on a pale horse amid the supporters that either he or one of his own – like as not either Micheletto, or another that he was close enough to allow him to rally troops on his behalf – had gathered behind him. As he heard Cesare’s words, Ezio found himself wondering why anyone who had not been outright paid would have remained at his side.
And, even then, the Cardinal of Rouen himself had said that Borgia money was losing its sway.
“All of Italia shall be united, and you will rule beside me!” the man shouted, and Ezio narrowed his eyes, even as he heard little Maria scoffing from beside him. Not long after that, Cesare spotted them and their forces, and a deranged sort of grin began spreading across his face. “Come to watch my triumph?” Cesare mocked, and though the man was beyond the range of both crossbow and pistol, Ezio was nearly certain he would have seen the mad light of avarice in his eyes.
If he had been capable of seeing the man’s eyes at all.
Cesare went on, of course; it seemed to be the way of his family, to talk themselves up, without regard for their own abilities, or profound lack thereof.
As the forces that he, Bartolomeo, and little Maria had all brought to this place all clashed with those that had been brought to this place by Cesare, Ezio went after the man himself. Cesare was, after all, the last link in the chain that tied Roma as a whole to the Borgia, and by extension their Templar masters. Given what he’d seen of Lucrezia, she was hardly the type to carry on any kind of vendetta.
Particularly after the way Cesare had treated her…
Banishing those thoughts from his mind, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he brought up his second-sight again. All around him, the Assassin and condottieri forces that had been brought to this place finally broke the back of the Templar forces that had ostensibly come to support him during this battle, and the Templars had routed not long afterward. Returning his attention to Cesare, who was clearly attempting to rally the Templar forces and just as clearly failing to actually do so, Ezio rode calmly up to the man.
He’d started calling for the remaining troops to rally, commanding them to kill the Assassins in particular, but Ezio could plainly see that his forces – merely hirelings, and so without the conviction that allowed the Assassins and Bartolomeo’s condottieri to push through pain, fatigue, and the crush of battle to defeat their opponents – were utterly broken and already dispersing.
“Throw down your arms, Cesare,” he commanded, joining up with the rest of his and Bartolomeo’s forces as they steadily encircled the increasingly wild-eyed man.
“Never!”
“This is not your city anymore, Cesare,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he faced down the man who had caused so much suffering, simply for the sake of his own, twisted self-gratification. “You are no longer captain-general; the Orsini and Colonna families have already sworn themselves to the new Pope; and if they ever did offer you their support, it was only so long as you were the one who had control over the cities and the estates you stole from them.”
The sounds of more mounted soldiers approaching, this time from the opposite side of the gate Cesare had so obligingly left open for them, drew Ezio’s attention just as he’d been about to ride up to Cesare and take the man prisoner himself. Finding himself smiling almost reflexively when he saw that Fabio Orsini was at the head of the column, Ezio brought his horse to a neat halt, so that he could watch the proceedings without interfering.
“Cesare Borgia, called Valentino, sometime Cardinal of Valencia and Duke of Valence,” Fabio said, with the air of a man who was thoroughly enjoying a task that had been presented to him. “By order of Pope Julius II, I arrest you for the crimes of murder, betrayal, and incest.”
As the six knights that had been traveling alongside Fabio took up guard positions in a rough circle around Cesare, and the soldiers following in their wake all formed up behind them, Ezio could hear the man himself bellowing and screeching furiously.
“This is not how it ends! Chains will not hold me!” Cesare screamed, eyes wild; no one took much note of his inane ranting, of course. “I will not die by the hand of man!”
Watching as Cesare Borgia was taken away at last, Ezio found himself wondering just what Cesare’s last words – both cryptic and threatening as they had been – had ultimately meant. Considering everything he had seen Aeon do, Ezio could not help but doubt that the words were entirely without consequence. The thought that Cesare might have even the smallest chance of escaping from his confinement was not a pleasing one.
Particularly after all the trouble Ezio had found himself put through forcing the man to ground.
And so, even as he and the bulk of his and Bartolomeo’s forces made their way back to the barracks once more, Ezio found himself pondering Cesare’s last words. He’d seen enough to know that nothing could truly be said to be impossible, yes, but some things were so difficult for one who retained their humanity in full – rather than just what seemed to be the core of it, as Aeon had so clearly done – that they might as well have been.
When their group had returned to the barracks where Bartolomeo and his forces lived and worked, Ezio bid them farewell as he and little Maria left them behind for the day.
Chapter 426: Apples and oracles
Chapter Text
Settling back into his chair, after he and little Maria had made their way back to Isola Tiberina once more, Ezio found that he was still thinking about what Cesare Borgia had said when Fabio Orsini had caught up with him. While it was true that the man had likely been shouting nonsense in an effort to unnerve his enemies, Ezio couldn’t help but go over the last words that Cesare had spoken.
The sight of Leonardo, making his way down into the Brotherhood’s hidden outpost, brought a small smile to Ezio’s face; as well as some much needed calm to his churning thoughts.
“I was wondering when I would have the chance to see you again, Leonardo,” he said, making his way over to kiss the man on both cheeks as a long overdue greeting. “I was starting to think you had slipped away to Francia.”
“Not quite yet, I think,” Leonardo said, grinning widely back at him.
“I’m glad to hear it,” he said, leading Leonardo over to a pair of well-padded chairs so they could sit down and have a talk about what had been going on in both their lives. “I’m also glad to see that you didn’t get caught up in the dragnet for any of the last Borgia supporters that the new Pope has organized.”
“You just can’t keep a good man down,” Leonardo said, grinning widely as he settled back into his chair; he was just as finely-dressed as ever, and Ezio found himself more than a little pleased to see that, as well. “Pope Julius is hardly a fool; he knows who would be useful to him, and who wouldn’t, no matter what they’d done in the past.”
“Sí, provided they were truly repentant,” he said, as the pair of them settled back into their respective chairs.
“If you say so,” Leonardo said, nodding to him with a small, reflective smile on his face. “Still, what has you so worried? Cesare is under lock and key; it’s only a matter of time before they take him out and burn him at the stake. Truly, his list of arraignments is as long as my arm!”
“Perhaps you’re right,” he allowed, though there was still something about what was going on that stuck in his mind and wouldn’t allow him to forget it.
“Still, I suppose the world would hardly be the world with no trouble,” Leonardo said, an air of melancholy stealing over him, as he took a long drink of the wine Ezio had brought over for the pair of them to enjoy. “It’s all well and good that Cesare has been brought down at last, but I’ve still lost a potential patron,” he said, taking a long drink of the wine the pair of them were sharing. “And I’ve heard they’re thinking about bringing that young whippersnapper Michelangelo here from Firenze. All the boy can do is to knock out sculptures!”
“He’s a pretty good architect, from what I hear,” he said, grinning in a teasing sort of way. “Not a bad painter, either.”
“You know those pointing fingers I showed you, when we were speaking about what we were going to do, once this struggle of yours finally ended?” Leonardo asked, turning to him with a look of supreme annoyance. “One day, soon I hope, it’s going to be at the center of a portrait. A portrait of a man; John the Baptist in particular, pointing toward Heaven. Now that will be a painting!”
“I hardly said he was as good a painter as you,” he said, chuckling softly. “And, as for being an inventor-”
“He should stick to what he knows best,” Leonardo said firmly, all but turning his nose up at the very thought of the young artist named Michelangelo being brought to Roma by anyone.
“Leo, are you jealous?” he asked, feeling more than a little amused at the prospect.
“Me? Never,” Leonardo said, turning that same, rather annoyed look on Ezio once more.
Still, even with the fun he was having, there was still the matter that had weighed upon him for such a long time that he’d not even been able to leave it behind even after his departure from the actual battlefield itself.
“In any case, with regards to your former employer, I don’t like the way he said that chains would never hold him,” Ezio said, taking a long sip of his own wine as he settled down into his chair once more.
“Ezio, Cesare has been locked away in the deepest cell within the Castello Sant’Angelo,” Leonardo said, and while Ezio knew that his old friend was trying to comfort him, he couldn’t quite manage to let go of the worry that kept gnawing at him. “How the mighty have fallen, eh?”
“He still has friends,” Ezio said, narrowing his eyes as he considered what he was going to do about Cesare if the man did somehow manage to escape from his bonds.
“A few misguided creatures may still think he has a future, but since Micheletto and his armies have failed to materialize, I can’t see that there’s any danger,” Leonardo said, clearly trying to comfort him.
“Even if Micheletto failed to keep the remnants of Cesare’s forces together, which given everything I’ve learned does seem likely, I still wonder-”
“Ezio, you’ve got no reason to worry,” Leonardo said, cutting him off before he could truly begin speaking. “When the news came of della Rovere’s elevation to the Papacy, and then Cesare’s arrest, the old Borgia army probably scattered like ants from a nest when you pour boiling water on it.”
“Sí, I know, but I won’t be able to rest easy until I know Cesare won’t escape,” he said, sighing as he settled back into his seat.
“There might well be a way for you to find that out,” Leonardo said, looking over at him with a rather interested expression.
Ezio bit back a smile; he’d long since realized how fond Leonardo was of the Apple, it was just the kind of man he was. As an architect, a dreamer, and as a man who wished to create wondrous things, it was only to be expected that Leonardo would be greatly and entirely fascinated by the device. Still, it was entirely true that the Apple, and Aeon as well, could indeed give him the information he sought.
“I suppose I should go and fetch it, then,” he said, smiling slightly.
Making his way over to the covered box where he had stored the Apple that Aeon had inhabited for such a long time that it seemed to be almost a part of him by this time, Ezio picked it up and made his way back over to where he and Leonardo had settled down together.
“Do you suppose he’s been listening in on our conversation?” Leonardo asked, looking from him to the Apple and then back again.
“Indeed I have,” Aeon said, emerging once more from the depths of the Apple, the colorless light that seemingly made up his body taking on shape, color, and texture as the man in black came to stand beside the small table where he and Leonardo had stored their wine and the cups they were drinking out of. “There also seems to be a question that you are particularly interested in,” Aeon continued, turning his calm, golden gaze on Ezio.
“Sí, but there is also something else that I would like to speak to you about,” he said, gathering himself for what he needed to say. “But, we can discus all of that later. For the moment, however, I would like to know what you can tell me about the fate of Cesare Borgia.”
“Borgia? So far as I was aware, that man was taken to the prison that your friend Catarina was previously imprisoned within,” Aeon said, sounding as calm as he ever had.
“Sí, he was, but he said something about how chains would never hold him, and I simply wished to know if there was more to such a thing than the raving of a desperate madman.”
A thoughtful cast came over Aeon’s dusky-skinned face, before the man in black vanished once more into the depths of the Apple once again. After a long moment, Aeon reappeared once more.
“There’s nothing for you to be concerned about,” the man in black said, the sheer calmness of his tone doing a great deal to make him feel calmer and more clear-headed than he had since he’d left the battlefield where he and his forces had faced off against the remnants of Cesare’s own.
“So Cesare will not be able to escape from the Castello Sant’Angelo,” he said with a sigh, settling back into his seat. “That is good to hear.”
“What was the other matter that you wished to speak to me about?” Aeon asked, reaching back to pull off his hood, spilling free his veritable waterfall of silver hair.
“Your Apple,” he said, knowing that Aeon would appreciate his cutting to the heart of matters more than he would if Ezio attempted to ease him into matters. “I know that you yourself are perfectly capable of defending both it and yourself from anyone who might take it into their minds to lay claim to it, but for my own peace of mind, I feel that it would be best if the artifact was hidden away from the world. To keep it out of the hands of any who might attempt to misuse its power,” he continued, deliberately ignoring the way Leonardo sighed to focus on Aeon’s own reaction.
The man in black, though he did seem to be rather bemused at the prospect, didn’t actually seem to have any objections to the prospect of hiding the Apple away from the eyes of humanity as a whole. No, it was Leonardo who had the most to say in response to his suggestion as to what should be done with the Apple, now that the Borgia and their Templar masters had been routed and driven away from their conquests in Roma.
“Ezio, amico mio, just think about this,” Leonardo said, as Ezio packed away the Apple within his robes once more, preparing as he did to depart from Isola Tiberina once more. “This artifact is a masterpiece of technology and craftsmanship; you should hang onto it for as long as you and the Brotherhood need it, so that you may use such a thing for Good. And, when you do finally decide to bury it, think of it as a seed you plant, one that might again serve to protect the future. Aeon himself would tell you the same, if he’d not decided to depart for wherever it is that he goes to when he departs into the Apple. Leave a clue, for those who might come after you.”
“You said yourself, many years ago, that this artifact could never be allowed to fall into the wrong hands,” he said, feeling more than a little amused, as he and Leonardo continued on their way down and into the tunnels that would lead them away from the hideout on Isola Tiberina without those who might have still wished to attack them; the remnants of the Templars that had not yet been driven out.
“Sí, but I only meant that you should keep it out of the wrong hands,” Leonardo said, sounding more honestly unhappy than Ezio had truly been expecting. “I didn’t mean that you should hide it away from the world as a whole.”
“Even with Aeon’s aid in the matter, I suspect that such a thing would hardly be possible,” he said, seating himself neatly upon the horse that he’d lent out for the journey he was about to make.
He’d already had some idea of just where he was going to leave the Apple, now that he had convinced Aeon not to bring the device back into the world as a whole, and now all that remained was to deliver the artifact itself into that place. He and Leonardo parted on reasonably good terms, though Ezio was fully aware that he didn’t – and most likely would never – approve of what Ezio was going to go. What he was even now doing, considering the clear fact that he’d broken the Borgia influence over Roma.
The Templars, perhaps, remained to be addressed in the same way.
Chapter 427: Into the Vault
Chapter Text
Sighing once more, as he returned to the underground hideout that the Assassins and their brotherhood had established for themselves, Leonardo found himself more at loose ends than he’d been for a long time. Truly, for the first time since the pair of them had met in the first place. Settling down at one of the larger tables, Leonardo found himself wondering just what it was that had convinced his old friend that he needed to rid himself of the Apple so soon – or at least it felt soon – after it had come into his possession.
Aeon, the man in black who’d clearly made the Apple his home, was a truly fascinating man; it was also clear that he would be more than capable of defending it from anyone who might have sought to misuse the artifact’s power. He’d somehow made his home inside said artifact, after all; it was only to be expected that the man in black would defend it even more staunchly than anyone who lacked such a connection. Still, in the end none of his arguments to the contrary had amounted to little more than a seeming delay, and Leonardo found himself unable to think of what he might have said to persuade his old friend otherwise.
Truly, the loss of such a fascinating artifact was indeed something to mourn.
The sight of someone else making their way down into the Assassins’ stronghold drew his attention, and Leonardo found himself only slightly surprised that it was Mario Auditore.
“Buona sera,” he said, as the man caught sight of him and began to make his way over to the table where he was seated.
“Buona sera, Leonardo,” Mario said, settling down beside him as Leonardo pulled out a chair for the old man to sit on. “What has you so troubled?”
He sighed. “Ezio decided that the Apple was to be hidden away from the world as a whole, even with all the good that such an artifact could do for the people who live in this place.”
“Ezio is no longer in possession of the Apple?” Mario asked him, seeming a bit more interested in the fact that Ezio had given up the Apple, rather than anything Leonardo himself had actually said.
“Vero, but why does that seem to mean so much to you? Truly, it seems as though you were almost eager for Ezio to rid himself of the artifact,” Leonardo said, not even certain himself how he would end up feeling if such a thing turned out to be true.
“Not precisely, but there is a matter that I wished to discuss with him; something that necessitated that he be rid of the Apple before I could even mention it,” Mario said, pouring himself some of the wine that Leonardo had brought to the new table with him. “It’s at the request of the original author, however,” Mario took a long sip of wine, staring down into his cup with a rather contemplative expression once he’d finished. “It’s not as though I can’t see the value in Aeon’s presence, or that I entirely agree with the author’s opinions after having met Aeon for myself, but then I myself can hardly change the opinions of a man centuries dead.”
“Wait, do you mean to tell me that this author you speak of is in fact one of your own?” he asked, truly intrigued to be speaking of whoever it was that had been the first to take possession of the Apple that Aeon had made his own.
“His name was Altaïr Ibn La’Ahad,” Mario said, taking another sip of his wine, seeming as though he was gathering himself to speak in rather a lot of depth. “He was one of the greatest Masters that the Brotherhood produced, as well as the first to make contact with the Guardians of the Pieces of Eden.”
“Like piccola Maria?” he asked, finding himself all the more curious about Ezio’s littlest sister and all of those like her.
“Sí, just like her,” Mario said, smiling at him.
~AC: Bro~
As he made his way back to Isola Tiberina once again, Ezio found himself thinking back on the way Aeon had shown him a last glimpse of Desmond before the pair of them had parted ways for the last time. It seemed as though Desmond and the members of his own Brotherhood would be taking possession of Aeon’s Apple, and Ezio couldn’t help but wonder just what it was that they would be doing. He wondered what the Templars had accomplished in their era, that they would wish to have the terrifying power of Aeon at their disposal once more.
Still, he was not about to return to the depths of Il Colosseo to speak with Aeon on the matter; there were some things that simply could not be known without cost.
Making his way back down into the tunnel-network once more, Ezio soon found himself back within the stronghold on Isola Tiberina. Taking his first steps back into the underground stronghold that he and his brother and sister Assassins had used for the whole of the time that they had been fighting against the Borgia influence that had rooted itself deep within the political systems of Roma, Ezio found himself more than a little surprised to find Uncle Mario and Leonardo having some kind of conversation. Yes, he was fully aware that Leonardo was the sort to discuss anything with anyone he could, but he still found it a bit odd to find his old friend and his uncle in the midst of a discussion.
He couldn’t help wondering just what it was that they were talking about, though it seemed to be something of particular interest to Leonardo, leading Ezio to suspect that the topic had at least something to do with Aeon or his Apple; perhaps even the Pieces of Eden in general.
Chapter 428: The second Codex
Chapter Text
When Ezio made his way close enough that he could actually hear the conversation that Leonardo and his uncle were having, even though it seemed to be wrapping up, he found that it was indeed the Apple that they were talking about.
~AC: Bro~
Having Ezio back with him again, and divested of the Apple after so long in possession of the artifact, was an occasion for both relief and reflection. Yes, it meant that he could finally tell Ezio of the knowledge that Altaïr had imparted to the Brotherhood about those who had been touched by the man in black and the Apple he held dominion over, but it also meant that they had lost access to the unstoppable prowess and battle power that Aeon possessed. It was truly a double-edged matter.
While Leonardo had departed from Isola Tiberina, back down into the tunnels that would take him back into the streets of Roma and then to his home, Mario had turned his attention to Ezio as his nephew took a seat at the table where he and Leonardo had been having their own discussion.
“What were you and Leonardo talking about?” Ezio asked, looking both curious and slightly amused. “He seemed particularly inspired, while he was leaving.”
“It was something that Altaïr wished for the future to know,” he said, turning his full attention to Ezio; there was something in his nephew’s manner that suggested there was something in his mind, but as he didn’t seem to be particularly troubled about it, it seemed as though such a thing would keep. “Something that he wished to remain unknown by Aeon, as well.”
“It seems that the pair of them never truly came to understand each other,” Ezio said, sounding as though he wished that things could have been different.
“Sí, it sounds as though the both of them were simply too different to reconcile,” he said, finding himself wondering if things could have been otherwise, somehow; still, those kinds of thoughts would do no one any good, so Mario put them out of his mind as he always had.
Actually being able to speak to his nephew about the other Codex that Altaïr had written during the later parts of his life – after he’d discovered not only the Pieces of Eden and their connection to those who would come to be called Treasure Guardians, but also the lingering presence of Aeon – was something that Mario had been waiting to do for longer than he’d been expecting to do, back when he’d first encountered Altaïr’s Guardian Codex. Truly, Aeon’s presence had hardly been something that he had been prepared to expect.
Nothing that Altaïr had reported of his own interactions with Aeon had given him reason to expect that the man in black would so much as show himself, much less take a hand in the Brotherhood’s defense; Altaïr hadn’t even learned the name of the man in black, before the pair of them had parted company for the last time.
“It appears that Aeon had comrades of his own,” Ezio said, a contemplative expression on his face. “Though I suppose he might have lost them to time, as we lose so many others.”
Mario wondered what kind of interactions Altaïr had had with the man in black, to make him so wary of even interacting with him in the slightest way. Perhaps it was, as Ezio had suggested, the fact that Altaïr had found himself betrayed by a man who’s appearance he had described as resembling Aeon’s a great deal. Or rather, Altaïr wrote that Aeon had resembled him a great deal.
~AC: Bro~
Finding out that Aeon, for all his inscrutable mystery and uncannily devastating power, had once been a man like any of his brother or sister Assassins – even to the point of having his own comrades stolen from him by the uncaring march of time – was something of a comfort, Ezio found. Distinctly less of a comfort, however, was the message that he’d found himself reading, once he’d made his way back to the Rosa in Fiore with the aim of getting some actual rest.
And, even though he’d been expecting just such a thing to happen, he hadn’t at all wished for such a thing to end up being the case in the slightest.
Chapter 429: Arrested development
Chapter Text
Departing for the Castello Sant’Angelo once he had finished arming himself for the journey, Ezio couldn’t help wondering just what he would find when he arrived. The sight of the Castello itself, looming before him as he made his way back to the place where Cesare had been incarcerated, left him feeling more than a little uneasy. He found himself wondering just what it was that Aeon had seen, what it was that had given him the confidence that Cesare would remain locked away from the world and all of the people that he would have otherwise threatened.
The fact that he no longer had access to Aeon by his own actions was becoming more than slightly troublesome; still, the threat of those who might seek to misuse the Apple’s power was more important than his own, comparatively minor unease.
Arriving at the Castello Sant’Angelo once more, Ezio found a group of determined, almost angry guards searching the grounds of the Castello.
“Have you made any progress in your search?” he asked, flagging down a nearby guard.
“No,” the man growled, though Ezio could tell that he was simply annoyed with the present situation in general, rather than anything Ezio had done, himself. “We’ve searched the whole of the prison, and the grounds around the Castello, but as near as anyone can tell it’s as though Cesare simply vanished into thin air.”
“Has anyone thought to check on Lucrezia?” he asked, falling into step with the guard he’d first met up with.
“No; she’s hardly stirred from her apartments since all of this began,” the man said, turning back to him with an expression that was only slightly less annoyed than it had been since he’d arrived at the Castello in the first place. “The Pope’s had her under house arrest since he took power. We’ve presently arrested two guards who used to work for the Borgia; one of them is a former blacksmith, and so might have been able to pick the lock. However, there’s no damage to the cell door itself, so there is a chance that one of them might have stolen the key. However, the both of them have been stubbornly claiming innocence, so the investigation is moving fairly slowly.”
“Is Lucrezia giving you any trouble?” he asked, knowing that while there was no love lost between her and Cesare, there was still the chance that familial loyalty would win out even over such resentment.
“Strangely not. She seems, if anything, resigned to her fate,” the guard said, and Ezio narrowed his eyes in contemplation.
“I wouldn’t trust that to last, if I were in your position; this is her brother, imprisoned in this place,” he said, all the while finding himself reflecting upon the stark differences he had observed separating the Borgia family from the Auditore. “She may well seem docile, after everything that has happened, but make no mistake that such times are when she is at her most dangerous.”
“I’ll pass that along to my superiors,” the guard acknowledged, as the pair of them continued on their way. “Still, the woman is being guarded by Swiss mercenari; they’re hard as rocks.”
“Intesi, that’s good to hear,” he muttered, still thinking on just how Cesare Borgia might have managed his escape from the Castello Sant’Angelo.
Given that the man clearly still had allies – if not friends – within Roma, they would attempt to aid him in his escape from the city. However, by this time the gates would have already been sealed against just such an attempt, and as Cesare was bereft of both the Apple – a dubious boon in this particular case, considering Aeon’s clear antipathy for the Templars and their ilk – as well as any skills that would have allowed him to bypass or otherwise escape from the dragnets and cordons that would soon be set up all over the length and breadth of Roma.
However, there was still one means that would allow him to escape from the city relatively unmolested: the river.
Chapter 430: Riverside run
Chapter Text
It even fit with something little Maria had told him about, back when they had been just starting their work of reestablishing the Brotherhood’s presence within Roma. Cesare had employed a slave trader who plied the Tiber, and though that man was long since dead, there could easily be others in the employ of the Borgia, or those still loyal to them. Leaving by river, which would lead him entirely too quickly to the Tyrrhenian sea, would merely be a matter of smuggling the man onto a seagoing ship – either disguised as one of the crewmembers, or secreted away under a tarpaulin and brought aboard as cargo – and casting off.
From there, Cesare would be able to make good his escape, then go on to meet with Micheletto or some of his other allies.
Narrowing his eyes as he called upon his second-sight once more, Ezio searched for the gold-limed form of Cesare; the man would be limed in gold, since he was actively searching for him, which would naturally distinguish him from the masses of red that simply denoted an enemy. Continuing on his way, steadily making for the midtown docks that were closest to the Castello, and thus the most sensible place for Cesare to be departing from considering where he had been held, Ezio searched determinedly for the man.
All that he actually managed to find, however, were the small, scattered groups of red-limed figures that likely still held loyalty to the man.
“Messere Ezio!” a cheerful, rather familiar voice called out to him, and Ezio turned to see Claudio making his way over to where he was, looking over the boats that had been gathered in the hope of finding the one where Cesare had been secreted.
If the man had even come to this place at all.
“I hadn’t been expecting to see you again, amico,” he said, knowing that it was rude not to greet someone you knew, even if you were meeting them so unexpectedly. “What brings you to a place like this?”
“La Volpe found that I wasn’t cut out for thievery, so he lent me the money to buy this boat, since I’ve always been a good sailor,” Claudio said, looking more than a little proud of his accomplishment, before an expression of curiosity overtook his features. “What are you doing here, then, Messere? You seem distressed.”
“It seems that Cesare Borgia has escaped from his confinement within the Castello Sant’Angelo,” he said, feeling once more the tension of having nothing even resembling a lead as to where the depraved, clearly desperate man had secreted himself; or if he’d even come this way at all. “And, as this was the closest way he would be able to make an easy escape from Roma, I thought it best to check this place before I moved on.”
“Sí, that sounds reasonable,” Claudio said, pausing for a moment, then turning back to him with a rather thoughtful expression. “Do you have any ideas as to where he might have gone, or would you like me to make a suggestion?”
“Unfortunately, I don’t have any ideas on where he might have gone, so I would more than welcome your input, amico,” he said, feeling more than a little frustrated to be running into so many dead-ends even this early in his search.
“I’ve seen that crew around a few times,” Claudio said, pointing out a red-sailed caravel whose crew did seem to be rather furtive in their movements. “They don’t socialize much, but I have seen more than a few unsavory characters around them, those times I’ve crossed paths with them.”
Narrowing his eyes as he turned to regard the men, who were indeed rimmed with the red light that denoted enemies in his second-sight, Ezio paused for a long moment so that he could study them without it. He’d seen something familiar about the caravel itself, but nothing that he could truly put a name to until he was seeing it in the true colors that his second-sight served to deny him.
“Bene, those men and their vessel do resemble the description that little Maria gave me, of the slavers who were working for Cesare,” he said, narrowing his eyes again as he studied the men as they worked.
They were nearly finished loading the last of their cargo, and Ezio found himself wondering if Cesare himself had been packed into one of the crates stacked on the deck; more than a few of them looked large enough to hold a man his size, though not without some discomfort.
“Bene, we should follow them, then,” Ezio decided, turning to Claudio and seeing the newfound determination in his eyes reflected in the former thief’s own. “They match the descriptions my littlest sister gave me of the slavers she was forced to confront, back when she, I, and the rest of our family had first come to Roma on the trail of the Borgia. These men have worked for Cesare in the past, so it’s no real stretch to believe that he would come to them in this situation.”
“Sí, then I take it you’ll want to hire out my boat?” Claudio asked, turning slightly to smile at him.
“Sí, and I can pay you handsomely for the service,” he said, turning a smile of his own back onto Claudio as the man seemed to make up his mind as to what his next course of action would be.
“Keep your money,” Claudio said, smiling widely at him in that way that only those whose friendship had carried them through the most trying circumstances could truly do. “I still owe you for saving my life.”
Ordinarily, Ezio wouldn’t have wished to call in a favor for something like that – something that all good-hearted people did for one another as a matter of course – but under the circumstances, with the caravel having already cast off, and like as not hiding Cesare within one of the crates secured to the deck, was hardly the time to have an argument about that kind of thing.
Claudio called upon one of his fellow sailors by the name of Jacopo, giving him instructions to cast off, while he told the rest of his crew to see to the cargo that they’d just finished unloading the last of. Following Claudio and Jacopo onto the shallop, Ezio ducked down, making sure that he would be out of sight of any crewmembers of the caravel they were pursuing. Even if the man who seemed to have been the captain had died at little Maria’s hands, there was a strong possibility that Cesare’s men had managed to get the information about little Maria and the Brotherhood in general out among their ranks.
It was better to be safe than sorry, in a case such as this one.
However, when their shallop did manage to catch up to the caravel, Ezio found that his assumption that Cesare would be traveling with these men was simply that: an unfounded assumption that had been based on little more than his own desire to have a simple answer to the question of just where Cesare had managed to hide himself. Returned to the docks, after the battle between his forces and Cesare’s men had left even more of the slavers to drown in the Tiberina, Ezio found himself no closer to discovering where Cesare had gone than he was when he’d first started out.
He also found himself rather annoyed by such a development, but put those thoughts as soon as he noticed them creeping up on him; they would do no one any good, least of all him.
Chapter 431: Early mornings
Chapter Text
For the most part, things had seemed to have returned to at least some semblance of stability; however, the occasional sighting of Cesare was still being reported, and eventually Ezio found himself called to meet with Julius II, late in the spring of 1504. When he made his way into the man’s office, he found the Pope reading a letter, a thoughtful expression on his face.
“It seems as though Micheletto is making more noise about building an army for Cesare,” the Pope said, looking down at the letter he was reading for a long moment, before returning his attention to Ezio where he sat. “King Ferdinand and Queen Isabella of Aragon and Castile have been keeping me abreast of the developments with regard to that man and the forces that he seems to be determined to gather for his absent master.”
“That kind of loyalty; I suppose I might have admired the quality, if such a thing had not been wasted on a madman such as Cesare,” he muttered, steepling his fingers under his chin as he contemplated what had happened, and what very well might. “What of Ferrara? Has there been any word on Lucrezia?”
“Her third marriage seems to be doing her good, at least,” the Pope said, some of his good-humor seeming to return to him in light of the change of subject. “Though, I must admit that I was rather worried, at first. The d’Este family are such a bunch of snobs that I never thought the old duke would accept her as a suitable wife for his son. Marrying a Borgia! Particularly after everything that’s happened to the family. It could have easily turned into quite the scandal, but it seems that she’s managed to settle down. Not a peep out of her! She’s even taken to exchanging poetry and love letters with her old flame, Pietro Bembo,” the Pope seemed fairly amused, so Ezio didn’t think that anything untoward could truly be happening. “All aboveboard, of course. Spends most of her time embroidering tapestries, and even goes to church; basically, a good and faithful wife. Of course, there’s no chance at all of her returning to Roma, not after everything that’s happened, and she should honestly be grateful that she got to keep her head attached, after everything that she and her family have been getting up to. It seems that she understands that, as well. So, all in all, I’d say that we’re well rid of that flock of Catalan perverts.”
Not knowing if the Pope’s spy-network knew nearly as much about the Templars as they had about the Borgia, or even if they knew about the shadow-faction of would-be tyrants at all, Ezio had no inkling of what kind of weight the man’s continued presence – or that of his supporters, since the man himself seemed to have all but vanished into the aether – had for him.
“I hope so, Your Holiness,” was all he truly found it in himself to say.
“Ezio, I’m not a fool, so don’t take me lightly,” the Pope said, though he sounded nearly as jovial as he had while he’d been speaking about the fate of Lucrezia Borgia. “There’s a reason I brought you in as my councilor: I know that the Borgia still have many diehards and loyalists in pockets throughout the countryside, as well as those few that managed to keep their heads down during the fracas here,” the Pope sighed, shaking his head, no longer quite so jovial as he’d once been. “Still, I have other enemies than the Borgia, these days.”
“The Borgia could still pose a threat, if only through their supporters,” he said, like as not stating something that Julius II already knew on some level, but wanting to make his statement explicit enough not to be missed.
“Sí, I’m aware how these things go,” the Pope said, sounding a great deal less jovial than he had when he’d first begun their present discussion. “I know that there are many Borgia loyalists out in the countryside, and even a few remaining diehards within Roma herself. Still, for the moment all we can do is keep our guard up for Micheletto, and wait for him to make his move.”
There wasn’t truly any convincing argument that he could make, at least not considering the information – or rather the pronounced lack of such – that he was presently working with, and so Ezio resolved that he would keep an eye out for signs of Micheletto, or what the man might have been planning, himself.
His and Julius II’s conversation turned to more mundane matters, after that, and Ezio found that the Pope did indeed intend to hire Michelangelo to paint the Sistine Chapel; Leonardo wasn’t going to be happy to hear that, of course. Finding out that Julius II was aware of the Brotherhood’s existence – though naturally he was reluctant to specify just how much information he actually possessed, as anyone who had actual experience with operating covertly would do – was a rather interesting development, thought he didn’t seem to be aware of Aeon’s existence. Such a thing could have good and bad implications, of course.
It was something of a comfort, under the circumstances, to know that Aeon’s Apple was beyond the reach of those who might wish to make use of it; even the rest of the Brotherhood, considering the temptation that the sheer power of the man in black would present to anyone who beheld it.
Chapter 432: Pulling back
Chapter Text
Once he’d departed from the Pope’s residence, this time firmly on the trail of Micheletto, and Cesare’s other supporters with him, Ezio made his way back down into the tunnels that would lead him to Isola Tiberina and the hidden headquarters that the Brotherhood maintained on the island. Not so much out of a pressing need for secrecy, though such was still a concern so as to keep those uninvolved in the Brotherhood’s struggle from getting into trouble they couldn’t handle, but because the tunnels themselves were the quickest and simplest way to travel within Roma. At least for someone who could navigate them so well as he could.
It’d been just the same when he’d been operating in Firenze: the tunnels were truly the quickest and simplest route of travel across the city.
Arriving back within the hidden stronghold on Isola Tiberina once again, Ezio smiled as he saw the rest of his brother and sister Assassins gathered there, as well.
“Mi amici, I know how hard we have striven, and I believe that victory may be in sight, but there is still work that needs to be done,” he said, once he’d made his way over to the table the rest of them were all seated around, glad to see that all of them had responded to his invitation.
“Sí, it would seem that, even absent his master’s command, Micheletto is determined to carry out Cesare’s will,” La Volpe said, eyes narrowed with the kind of tired exasperation that Ezio could remember feeling more than a few times, himself.
Truly, it did seem as though there were always more forces for the Borgia to call upon; he supposed that such would hold true for the Templars as a whole, given the fact that the Borgia as a whole had apparently served the organization.
“Sí, so I am going to continue to need all of your support if I’m to properly address the remaining threats from Cesare’s supporters,” he said, looking around the table at all of those who had given him their aid and support for nearly all of the years that he had spent hunting the Borgia, the Templars, and those who had thrown in their lot with them.
“We’ll continue to give it to you,” Machiavelli was quick to agree, but Ezio couldn’t help but notice the way he seemed to be more settled, now that Ezio had parted company with Aeon.
He’d known that Machiavelli had never quite approved of the man in black, despite the clear advantage that Aeon’s power and prowess had provided to all of their efforts in Roma as a whole, but seeing the clear evidence of such a thing only served to remind him of the unease Machiavelli had been feeling; and of the feeling that had slowly crept up on him, as time had passed.
“Caterina and her armies will be able to keep watch on those diehards who might still be among the people of Romagna, since I sent word that she should keep an eye on them from Forlì,” he said, feeling again the slight tinge of melancholy that he’d felt every so often when he thought about her; the pair of them had never truly been in love, of course, but leaving Christina behind had left its marks on him. He still thought fondly of the both of them, when he had the time. “Barto, I want you to take some of your forces and stake out Ostia; I need eyes on the port. Tell me of any suspicious ships returning to or, and this is of particular import, departing from the harbor. I want you to have messengers, fully prepared to bring any news you might uncover.”
Bartolomeo scoffed. “Sentry duty. Hardly a fit task for a man of action, like me.”
“You will have all the action you can stand, when the time comes to move against the rebel city-states,” he said tolerantly. “For the moment, however, their hope of rising under Cesare’s banner – or that of the Borgia in general, if their allegiance isn’t strictly to the Templars – will keep them quiet enough. Our task is to see that such a hope never comes to be. Then, even if they still refuse to listen to reason, they won’t put up nearly as much fight as they would now.”
“I agree with Ezio,” Machiavelli said, sounding more pleased than Ezio had heard his brother Assassin sound in quite some time.
“Bene, I suppose, if you both insist,” Bartolomeo said, still sounding rather unimpressed with the idea.
“If nothing else, Pantasilea will enjoy the sea air,” he said, offering Bartolomeo a conciliatory smile; the bluff mercenary only grumbled in response.
He hadn’t truly been expecting much more than grudging acceptance, however; since for all his loyalty to the Brotherhood, Bartolomeo was a self-confessed man of action. For all of his fine qualities, Bartolomeo was indeed far happier on the front-lines of battle, bashing skulls or lopping off heads with Bianca. Truly, the fact that the man had gone so far as to name his own sword was simply more evidence as to his ultimate preference.
Turning away from Bartolomeo and his good-natured though unimpressed grumbling, Ezio gave his attention to Claudia. There was more than business that he wished to discuss with her, but such things did come before pleasure, as anyone knew.
“I imagine the change in regime hasn’t done much to affect business at the Rosa in Fiore, has it?” he asked, smiling with good-natured amusement when Claudia laughed in response.
“Truly, it’s funny just how many princes of the Church find it so hard to keep the devil in their loins in abeyance, no matter how many cold baths they say they take.”
“Bene,” he said, chuckling softly himself; truly, it did indeed seem as though the carnal desires of the clergy would ever prove to be the Brotherhood’s most reliable means of keeping tabs on them. “Tell your girls to keep their ears to the ground; Julius has the College of Cardinals firmly under his control, but he still has plenty of enemies with ambitions of their own, and some of them might just be mad enough to think they would be able to keep a leash on Cesare if they set him loose in the world again. Also, I want your girls to keep an eye on Johann Burchard.”
“Rodrigo’s master of ceremonies?” Claudia echoed, sounding more than a little confused. “He seems harmless enough; according to everything I’ve heard, he hated having to organize all those orgies! He seems to be just some kind of functionary.”
“Nevertheless, anything you hear – especially if it leads to diehard factions of either Borgia or Templar supporters still at large – let me know,” he said, turning so that he could nod to Claudia.
She chuckled. “At least it should be easier, now that we don’t have Borgia guards breathing down our necks, every hour of every day.”
Smiling in return, Ezio found another thought – more troubling, but less outright pressing – coming upon him. “How has Mother been doing? I know that I have been absent too often, of late, but I’ve kept her in my thoughts. Is she doing well?”
“She’s doing as well as she can, at her age, I think,” little Maria said, speaking for the first time since all of them had gathered in this place. “I’ve told her, as many times as I can, that we all keep her in our thoughts, but… Well, I think she’s beginning to fade; she speaks more and more of how much she misses Father, and of Federico and Petruccio. I try not to think of it too often, but I think she might be preparing herself to join them.”
Given the tone of little Maria’s voice, combined with the melancholic rather than panicked or dismayed cast to his littlest sister’s face, Ezio suspected that she’d merely observed Mother preparing herself to pass away peacefully rather than contemplating suicide or anything terrible like that. Still, it was a difficult matter to reconcile himself with, in any case. He was certain that anyone would understand his unease, considering his previous circumstances.
“I will come and visit her as soon as I can,” he vowed, both to his little sisters and to himself. “In the meantime, tell her I continue to keep her in my thoughts, and convey my apologies as well as you may.”
“I will,” little Maria said, nodding seriously, before allowing a kind smile to slip through her mask of strict professionalism. “However, I’m certain she knows, just as well as any of us, that you’re not just doing all of this for the sake of those we lost, but also to protect anyone else the Templars might have in their sights.”
“Sí, and I’m very glad she does,” he said, feeling again the wish that he could go and visit Mother; still, there remained other matters to occupy his attention, now of all times. “Volpe, some of those I’ve recruited have been expressing a desire to return to the lives they left, seeing as we’ve all but thrown off the yoke of the Borgia in Roma, and most of them have no real reason to fear the Templars as yet.”
“Bene, I expect you’ll be leaning more on my thieves then, sí?” La Volpe asked, though the understanding smile on the man’s weathered, though seemingly ageless, face told Ezio almost better than words that the leader of Roma’s thieves would continue to support him in any way he could.
“Vero, I’d hoped to have your understanding, and am very glad I still do,” he said, smiling back, though his own expression was more of warmth and pleasure rather than the gentle understanding he’d seen on La Volpe’s own. “Now, I know that the men and women under your command are city born and bred, but some country air will do them good.”
“Speak plainly, Ezio,” La Volpe said, though there was a tolerantly amused cast to his face as he did so.
“I want you to send your best people into the towns and villages around Roma,” he said, turning so that he could face La Volpe more squarely even as the pair of them remained in their respective seats. “You should not need to go farther out than Viterbo, Terni, L’Aquila, Avezzano, and Nettuno. I doubt that we’ll find much beyond the borders of Roma itself,” he said, knowing that he hardly needed to state the fact that those settlements he’d just named delineated that selfsame border. “If there are any Borgia diehards left, they’ll want to be within striking-distance of Roma herself.”
Left unvoiced was the question of just what to do about the Templars; more for the fact that Ezio himself had no such answers than due to any kind of negligence on his part.
“I’ll send out my best thieves,” La Volpe said, and there was a distinctly pleased sort of cast to his face; Ezio knew that his brother Assassin did truly enjoy a challenge every now and again. “Suggest they disguise themselves as peddlers, considering who they’re likely to be dealing with.”
“Report anything you find back to me, particularly news of Cesare or Micheletto,” he said; even now, Ezio found himself with the creeping unease that had settled firmly over him as soon as the news of Cesare Borgia’s disappearance had reached his ears.
“I’ll make certain to do that, amico,” La Volpe said.
Once the meeting had come to its natural close, in the absence of anything more that needed to be discussed among the whole of the Brotherhood’s leadership in Roma, Ezio called for Machiavelli to stay behind. There was, after all, a matter that the shrewdest of those he knew would be best suited to aiding him with. Something that, he hoped, would bring them closer to finding out just where Cesare Borgia might have gone.
Or, in lieu of such direct aid, might at least allow them to come to know the man more completely, so that they could better predict where he might have gone to ground in the face of the Pope’s present manhunt.
“What did you want my help with, Ezio?” Machiavelli asked, once the pair of them had settled back at the table with a plate of salami and some wine to wash it down.
“You and I both know that Cesare Borgia was never one to refrain from indulging in any of his desires.”
Machiavelli made a sound that seemed caught between a scoff and a chuckle. “I expect there’s hardly anyone in Roma who doesn’t know that, after everything the man did while he and his family were in power.”
“Sí, but such activities as Cesare got himself up to are bound to have left behind women who will more than likely be willing to speak out against the man,” he said, feeling at least reasonably certain of his conclusions.
“I expect you have the right of it,” Machiavelli said, though he seemed rather contemplative for a long moment, before an air of good-natured amusement settled around him. “Still, I suppose you picked the right man for the job; I am a diplomat.”
Smiling easily back at his old friend, Ezio left Isola Tiberina, feeling lighter than he had in quite some time.
~AC: Bro~
The first of those women who Ezio sought out was not, in fact, one of the many mistresses that Cesare Borgia was bound to have left in his wake with his many and varied indiscretions, but the woman who had bore both Cesare and Lucrezia Borgia: Vannozza Cattanei.
“I don’t see how I can help you,” she said, as the three of them faced each other over an elegant table, though not one that had been laid out with even the most rudimentary of meals.
Truly, everything about this meeting seemed have been only entered into with the utmost reluctance on the part of Vannozza; like as not, the only reason that he had even been willing to allow them into her palazzo at all was because of the efforts of the current Pope. Still, it was at least reasonably likely that the pair of them would at least learn something from her.
“If there truly are pockets of Borgia diehards still within Roma, we need to know about them, Altezza,” Machiavelli said, as the three of them continued their discussion.
“Dio mio, do you have any idea how long it has been since Rodrigo and I were lovers?” the woman demanded, sounding distinctly annoyed. “Well over twenty years!”
“You are their mother, Altezza,” he said, sighing softly; it seemed as though even their own family could not truly tolerate them. “Even if they haven’t been in contact with you, you would still be the one most likely to know them best.”
Aside from the men who worked with Cesare at present, but considering the present state of undeclared war between their two factions, there was basically no chance of finding out from any of them.
“I expect the both of you are wondering how a woman such as I could have produced such a brood,” Vannozza said, a grim, humorless smile on her face. “Well, I can tell you that there is very little Cattanei blood in them. Well, perhaps there is in Lucrezia, but Cesare…”
There was a profound sort of sadness that came over the stately woman when she spoke of her son, and Ezio thought that he could at least somewhat understand what she was going through: even though none of his own family had gone so drastically wrong, Ezio could still understand the pain of loss that Vannozza Cattanei was clearly going through. Still, there were more pressing matters than the shared suffering that bound them, even so loosely.
“Would you know where Cesare might have gone?” he asked, hoping for at least some kind of answer, after having come so far.
“I know no more than you do, nor do I have any desire to find out,” the stately woman said, the expression on her face one of old pain that had long since hardened. “It’s been years since I’ve last seen him, though we lived in within Roma at the same time. He and Rodrigo are dead to me.”
“Do you think Lucrezia would know anything more?” he asked, wishing to exhaust all possible options, though he was honestly beginning to lose hope of finding out even a single thing.
“If I don’t, why do you think she would?” the stately woman asked, looking at him in a way that told Ezio in no uncertain terms that the little patience she’d had for the pair of them was swiftly coming to an end. “She lives in Ferrara now. You could go and ask her, but it’s a long way north, and the Holy Father has forbidden her to return to Roma ever again.”
“Do you maintain contact with her?” Machiavelli asked, seeming as though he was also searching for one last bit of hope that the pair of them could use.
It seemed as though the both of them were doomed to be disappointed, however.
“As I said, Ferrara is a long way north, and I don’t care to travel much these days,” Vannozza said, sighing as she looked around the room once more.
She had been doing such things ever since the three of them had settled down at the table: raking her eyes toward the servants standing beside the door, as well as over to the water-clock, with a distinct sort of eagerness. She’d clearly only acquiesced to their request because of something the Pope had said or done beforehand; perhaps even something merely implied. Still, it seemed as though their coming here had truly been in vain.
He could only hope that the whole of their endeavor wouldn’t prove to be as futile as this first part.
“I have – rather, I had – eight grandchildren,” Vannozza said, with no prompting from either himself or Machiavelli.
Still, he’d heard from more than a few sources that Lucrezia didn’t treat her pregnancies with the kind of seriousness – and hence care – that such events required as a matter of course. He suspected it was more than just the bitterness of a potential grandmother denied the possibility of being such by the stubborn foolishness of one of her own children that drove Vannozza Cattanei to speak, but as he’d no real way of confirming such a suspicion, Ezio put those thoughts aside.
“Do you still see any of them?” Machiavelli asked.
And, while such an inquiry did seem to have been what Vannozza had been inviting with her words, Ezio still found himself wondering if she truly welcomed such inquiries.
“No,” the stately woman said with a thin, bitter smile that held no warmth nor kindness within it. “Louise is still within Roma, I think, but her mother has made certain that she is far more French than Italian.”
Vannozza rose from her seat at those words, and as though there had been some kind of pre-arranged signal given, the servants opened the ornate double-doors and subtly directed the pair of them to leave.
“I wish I could be of further aid,” the stately woman said, in a tone that lacked sincerity in its entirety.
“We thank you for your time,” Machiavelli said, his own tone one of dry amusement.
“There are others who you might have an interest in,” Vannozza said, clearly hoping to hurry them along.
“We also intend to visit the Principessa d’Albret,” he said, turning back to her a last time as he and Machiavelli left.
“Buona fortuna,” Vannozza said, though there was no sincerity in her tone, just as when she’d first begun speaking to them. “You’d better hurry, then. I hear she’s making preparations to leave for Francia. Perhaps, if I’m particularly fortunate, she’ll stop and say goodbye.”
After having made their own goodbyes, Ezio found that Machiavelli seemed to be thinking deeply about a particular matter. It was hardly a novel observation, since Machiavelli was the kind of man who seemed to think deeply upon every matter – or at least on the important ones – but Ezio still found himself wondering just what manner of thoughts lay behind Machiavelli’s shrewd eyes.
“Perhaps it would have been better if you had kept the Apple,” Machiavelli said, after a long moment spent in what Ezio now knew was a deep contemplation of their present situation. “At the very least, we might have consulted with Aeon about these matters.”
“Sí, we might have,” he allowed, turning a sidelong look upon Machiavelli as the pair of them continued on their way. “Still, you of all people should understand that, sooner or later, we would have needed to stand on our own once more.”
“I suppose,” Machiavelli said, turning a gently-amused smile in his direction in return. “Let’s go and see the Principessa. It’s a good thing the both of us can speak French.”
“Sí,” he said, smiling as the pair of them continued on their way. “Still, Charlotte d’Albret won’t be leaving for Francia right away; I’ve got some of our people watching her palazzo, just in case. However, there’s someone else that I wish to see first; though I find myself surprised that Madonna Cattanei made no mention of her.”
Of course, considering the woman’s demeanor when he and Machiavelli had been speaking to her, Ezio supposed that he honestly should have expected such to be the case.
“Who would that be?” Machiavelli asked, turning back to him with a curious expression on his face.
“Giulia Farnese,” he said, finding himself nearly patting the hidden pouch within his Assassin robes where he’d once held the Apple that Aeon had inhabited; it seemed that even he was beginning to crave that same reassurance, himself.
Still, if anything, that was one more reason for Ezio to be glad he’d locked the Piece of Eden away; learning to stand on their own, two feet wasn’t just something that the rest of the Brotherhood needed to concern themselves with, after all.
“Hadn’t she moved to Carbognano some time ago?”
“Not according to La Volpe’s thieves in the area,” he said, wondering for a moment at the source of the discrepancy between what information he had received, and that which Machiavelli seemed to be working with, before deciding to pursue the issue in more detail when he had the time. “We have to take advantage of that.”
“What makes you think she would be any more willing to speak to us than Vannozza was?” Machiavelli asked, clearly skeptical but also seemingly willing to be persuaded if he heard a compelling enough argument.
Ezio could only hope he possessed one. “Of course, I can’t be completely certain, but Giulia was Rodrigo’s last mistress, and he was passionate about her.”
“Sí, I remember when the French took her prisoner,” Machiavelli said, seeming to have indeed seen the logic in what he was suggesting. “The man was beside himself. And then the French foolishly ransomed her for three thousand ducats. He’d have clearly paid twenty times that amount to get her back, and he’d have probably struck any kind of deal to get her back, after that. But, I suppose that such a thing is what happens when your mistress is well over forty years younger than you: you get besotted.”
“Not as though that stopped him from throwing her aside once she turned twenty-five,” he said, feeling a morbid sort of amusement as he thought back on when he’d heard that such a thing had happened.
“Sí, she’d gotten too old for him by then, I expect,” Machiavelli said, sounding about as morbidly amused as Ezio himself had found himself feeling.
Chapter 433: Guardian Clash
Chapter Text
As the pair of them continued on their way, heading north toward the Quirinale, Ezio found himself feeling the familiar, unsettling unease that he felt whenever he had found himself being tailed by one or more of the Borgia’s agents. Machiavelli was, of course, quick to notice what he was beginning to feel.
“What’s the matter?”
“We’re being followed,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he called up the second-sight he’d used so often in the past, when he was tailing his targets, or else when he was attempting to escape from anyone tailing him. “There has been a woman tracking us since the moment we left Vannozza’s palazzo.”
“One of her people?”
“Perhaps, though I doubt we’ll have the chance to find that out,” he said, feeling a distinct annoyance at what the pair of them were going to have to deal with. “She seems to be alone, at least.”
“I suppose we’ll have to lose her quickly, then,” Machiavelli said, and Ezio nodded.
Still, given the skills that the both of them shared, they were able to shake the woman following them off their trail, moving back up onto Roma’s rooftops, where very few of those who might take it into their heads to follow them. He noticed that the woman who’d been following them did have quite a bit of the same skills that Ezio had seen in both his brother and sister Assassins, and the thieves under La Volpe. He found himself almost wishing that he could have attempted to recruit the woman following them.
If nothing else, her obvious skill could be put to better use if she did join the Brotherhood.
Once the pair of them had been able to lose Vannozza’s woman, whoever she ultimately had been, they continued on their way. The both of them understood that, considering the fact that there were still pockets of Borgia loyalists scattered about Roma, they would naturally need to be more cautious in their movements. Particularly considering the dual, and possibly related, facts of Vannozza Cattanei’s distinctly hostile manner, and also the way she’d sent what figured to be one of her own people to tail them.
The rest of their search, over the course of the three days that Ezio had given himself for the undertaking, turned up no better results than their meeting with Vannozza had provided to them; only telling him that not even the women that Cesare and Rodrigo had professed to care about had any room left in their hearts for the men. If they’d even had such in the first place, and the affairs hadn’t been precipitated entirely upon coercion. Hardly a charitable thought, but then thoughts of the Borgia could hardly be said to be associated with charity at all.
Still, the more walls that Ezio had found himself running into, the more he found himself wishing that he could have asked for Aeon’s advice, or even simply had free access to the comforting presence of the man in black; given the sidelong glances that Machiavelli had been shooting him, both when he was looking and when the man might well have thought he wasn’t, Ezio knew that Machiavelli was fully aware of such a longing. Though whether or not the other man shared it remained in question. And so it would remain, since Ezio was determined to remain standing upon his own, two feet.
For all that Aeon had proven himself both a worthy ally and a true brother, the unnatural hold that his Apple still maintained over Ezio’s mind only made it all the clearer that ridding himself of the artifact had indeed been the right decision to make.
~AC: Bro~
When she’d found herself and Claudia led deeper and deeper into the Prati, toward what looked like nothing more than a crumbling, abandoned palazzo, Maria cast her eyes slightly downward, as though she was simply uncertain. Calling upon her second-sight, Maria found that she and Claudia were indeed surrounded by enemies, as she’d begun to suspect when their erstwhile guides had begun making for this lonely place to begin with. Folding her hands in front of her, left over right, Maria tapped out the four men that she had spotted carrying the red glow of enemies.
Claudia lowered her eyes slightly, their way of nodding when one could not be seen doing so, and the both of them began making their own sort of preparations to fight.
As their group of six continued on their way up to the run-down, clearly disused palazzo they were being led inexorably to the gate of, Maria found to her surprise that she could see the blue light of an ally, nestled somewhere close to the left-side wall. It was too small to belong to anything human, but as the six of them all drew closer – with her and Claudia both preparing for battle as discreetly as they could – Maria found herself wondering just what in the world such a thing could be.
It was clear that she was going to have the chance to find out, just as soon as she and Claudia were given the chance to act; just as soon as their would-be attackers turned their attention away for those few, crucial moments.
When the four men she had determined would be their enemies for this confrontation – she didn’t know if they were Borgia diehards, or if these men in particular served the Templars – stopped just before the iron-bounded door of the old, clearly abandoned palazzo that she and Claudia had been led to, Maria gathered herself to fight.
As she and Claudia drew their respective blades, Maria glanced over at the spot where her second-sight had indicated that there was something of interest; something that had been left there by an ally of the Brotherhood, and in all likelihood, something that would grant whoever laid claim to it at least a modicum of aid.
Allowing herself to be pushed back, separated from Claudia even as her older sister pressed her own attack against both the men who had first turned on them, as well as those who were beginning to emerge from the iron-bounded door as the pair of them fought, Maria called up her second-sight once more.
The bright, ephemeral blue glow of whatever it was that her unseen ally had left for her drew Maria’s eye, even as the men who had once been trickling out of the dilapidated palazzo to her right suddenly began to pour. Crouching down, so that she would be able to gain access to what she could only now see was some kind of small compartment that seemed to have been built into the lower wall of the palazzo she’d found herself fighting beside, Maria took brief note of the symbol that had seemingly been carved into the small compartment that held whatever it was that the Brotherhood’s unknown ally had left for her to find.
Maria reminded herself to take a closer look at this place later.
Narrowing her eyes as she looked down at what she was now holding, Maria found that it was more than a little familiar; it looked a great deal like one of the red, shining blades that she’d seen in Aeon’s hands when the man in black had cut his way through the enemies of the Brotherhood. The hilt of one of those shining, red blades that Aeon had made so much use of, at least. Finding herself wondering for a moment just why anyone would have left one of the hilts of Aeon’s red blades in a hidden cache in this particular palazzo, or any palazzo at all, really, Maria paused for a moment.
However, when she took a deeper look at the hilt in her hand, still using the second-sight that she had been learning to use since Father had taken her into his confidence when she was merely four years old, Maria found that there was some kind of mechanism on the top of the hilt she was holding. Holding both ends of the supposed hilt away from her, just in case she truly was holding one of the red blades that Aeon had made such terrifying use of every time she had had the chance to witness his prowess in battle, Maria touched the mechanism that she had found, just as one of the men who had been inside the palazzo came at her with his sword raised.
The shining, red blade – just the same kind of blade that Aeon had wielded – erupted from the top of the hilt she’d taken hold of, impaling the man through the stomach, just as he’d closed with where she was standing.
Pulling Aeon’s blade – the blade had to be one of Aeon’s, left in this place as a gift to those who would come after him – free from her attacker’s belly, Maria found herself more than a little unsettled by how light and easy to move the sword she was holding actually was. This, then, might very well have contributed to the sheer, terrifying efficiency with which Aeon had been able to dispatch any of the enemies he’d been set against. That, combined with the ease with which the weapon she was currently wielding could cleave through the bodies of the Borgia diehards that she and Claudia were facing, made it all the clearer just how Aeon had been able to cut his way through anyone who attempted to stand against him.
Half of the reason, at least; there still remained the matter of his preternatural speed, something that she’d seen demonstrated whenever she’d had the chance to see the man in black locked in combat – however briefly – with the enemies of the Brotherhood.
~AC: Bro~
Having heard from one of La Volpe’s thieves – a man named Bruno, who had seemed particularly worried about just what it was that he’d seen – that Claudia and little Maria had been taken prisoner by a group of Borgia diehards that had been hiding out within the Prati, just to the east of Il Vaticano itself, Ezio had called for Machiavelli to follow him, and then set off quickly to find his sisters. As he and Machiavelli made their way back up onto the rooftops of Roma, he bit down on the worry gnawing at him as he found himself thinking about what could be happening to two of the last members of his immediate family.
He could only be glad that Mother and Uncle Mario were still protected within the strongholds that the Brotherhood maintained within Roma.
Once he and Machiavelli made it to the rundown palazzo that Bruno had described to them, however, Ezio found himself stopping short when he caught sight of what was actually happening in the courtyard of the palazzo. For a moment, the image of silver hair and a shining, red blade brought back memories of Aeon, and Ezio found himself wondering just how such a thing had been possible. When little Maria turned to face him, however, Ezio climbed down from the rooftops and hurried over to where little Maria was standing.
His littlest sister was staring down at what seemed to be the hilt of one of Aeon’s blades, after somehow retracting the red blade back into it once more.
Making his way across the length of the palazzo’s courtyard, Ezio shuddered as he saw the scattered remains of the men who had seemingly thrown themselves in the path of Aeon’s blade. That had to have been what they’d been doing, given the obvious fact that no one who had an actual body could move in the manner that the man in black had managed. That terrifying, preternatural speed was clearly a product of the Apple.
However such a thing had happened, something that Ezio still found himself wondering about, though he knew that he wasn’t likely to find out.
“Maria,” he said, as soon as the pair of them stood before each other amid the dismembered corpses that his littlest sister had left scattered about the grounds.
“Fratello,” little Maria muttered, turning to him with an expression that seemed to be caught between shock and something that he couldn’t quite identify. “It seems as though Aeon left something behind,” she said, looking over the devastation that she had caused.
“Sí, so it seems,” he said.
After that, the four of them all met up and made their way away from the palazzo and out of the Prati itself, with Ezio finding that his thoughts wouldn’t leave the pile of corpses that little Maria had left behind her. It was yet another unsettling reminder of the preternatural skill and prowess that Aeon had brought with him when he’d been present. Little Maria had given him Aeon’s blade as soon as he’d asked for it, and Ezio had determined that he would hide it alongside Aeon’s Apple.
Something so powerful and dangerous could hardly be allowed to remain at large in the world, after all.
Chapter 434: Dear friends
Chapter Text
The four of them all quickly made their way to meet with Gilberto, who’d sent them a message indicating that he had something important to tell them, and Maria found herself wondering if it was something to do with the Borgia diehards, or if something else had ended up presenting itself. She didn’t know just what that kind of thing could be, but given everything that had already happened, Maria knew that she couldn’t discount anything out of hand.
Still, as the four of them all settled around the table where Gilberto sat with the food he had ordered for them, Maria allowed herself to relax into her seat.
“We’ve found Micheletto,” Gilberto said, once the four of them had all had some of the food he’d ordered.
“Where?” Ezio asked, and there was an expression of clear urgency on his face, and a tightness to his voice that prompted Maria to reach out to embrace him where he sat; she smiled at him as he turned to look at her.
She was glad to see him smiling back.
“He’s holed up in Zagarolo, just to the east of here,” Gilberto said, taking a long drink of his wine, and seeming more thoughtful than she’d seen him in a long time.
Still, given everything she’d heard about Micheletto from Ezio, she supposed that there was a good reason for that.
“We should get after him as soon as possible,” Ezio said, seeming as though it took everything in him not to leap straight out of the chair he’d been sitting in.
“Hold on,” Gilberto said, reaching out to hold Ezio in place, even as Maria did the same. “Don’t be hasty, amico. He’s got contingents from the Romagna towns still loyal to Cesare; he won’t give up without a fight.”
“Sí, we should call the others and make plans,” she said, turning to look her last brother in the eyes, wishing to communicate the urgency of their present situation as well as she could.
“Sí, I suppose we should take the time to organize,” Ezio said, slumping back into his seat.
In the end, Ezio, Gilberto, and Niccolò all called for a meeting on Isola Tiberina once more, though Bartolomeo was still keeping watch over the ports in Ostia – just in case Cesare was to make the attempt to escape or return by sea – he’d sent along an envoy to the meeting. He’d also expressed his desire to be back on the front-lines of at least some kind of confrontation, but that was just the way Bartolomeo was. He’d of course offered his services for the battle, and while Ezio had at first been reluctant to bring any of them along with him, but Maria had managed to convince her brother to reconsider.
In the end, they’d been able to assemble a group of one-hundred of their own recruits, combined with the fifty condottieri who’d volunteered to serve alongside their forces, inside the barracks that Bartolomeo and Pantasilea had been staying in, before they and a number of Bartolomeo’s forces had gone to Ostia to watch over the port for Cesare.
“He’s encamped in an old gladiatorial school, and he has around two-hundred fifty men alongside him,” Gilberto reported, gaze sweeping over her, Ezio, and Niccolò where they had all gathered at the large table that she’d seen Bartolomeo working at those few times the pair of them had had the chance to work together.
“What do you think he intends to do?” she asked, settling back into her seat as she leaned on her left hand.
“I’ve no idea,” Gilberto said, frowning thoughtfully. “He might intend to meet with Cesare; he might intend to break himself out, or else head north and seek shelter with the French,” Gilberto continued, sighing deeply as he himself slumped back into his seat.
“Whatever his plans might be, we should take this opportunity to nip them in the bud,” Ezio said, rising from his own chair with an expression of stern determination on his face.
Chapter 435: Army to army
Chapter Text
Gathering up the mounts for their expeditionary force took until dawn had begun to break, and throughout the night Ezio had found himself more than a little concerned. He was at least glad that little Maria had managed to talk him out of leaving Bartolomeo’s condottieri behind, given the forces that Micheletto had already gathered to him. As his forces forged their path to Zagarolo, Ezio found his thoughts lingering on the blade that it seemed as though Aeon had left for them.
Forcing his thoughts back to the operation he and his were launching against Micheletto and his allies, Ezio shifted so that he could prime his crossbow while he was riding.
The sun was just beginning to rise in earnest when Ezio, little Maria, and their forces all managed to surround the encampment where Micheletto and his own forces were making their own preparations for whatever it was that they had intended. The defenders of the encampment of Borgia diehards attempted to hold their own, but the strength and discipline of the Brotherhood’s recruits, married to the sheer determination and training of Bartolomeo’s condottieri, had soon put paid to them.
Crossing the field of corpses that he and his had left in their wake, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he saw the snarling face of Micheletto, standing tall amidst the dead.
“We take you, Micheletto Corella, as our prisoner,” Machiavelli said, making his way over to Cesare’s man. “No more will you infect our nation with your putrid schemes.”
“Chains will not hold me, any more than they held my master,” Micheletto snarled, though there was an expression on his face that Ezio couldn’t interpret.
As though the murderer’s attention was on something beyond the battle that he had just lost.
As their group returned to Firenze, Micheletto in chains and firmly secured so that he wouldn’t have so much as a chance at escaping, Ezio found himself finding more than a little perverse satisfaction at locking Cesare’s man up in the same cell where Father had ended up after being betrayed by the Templars and abandoned to his death. Those times when Firenze’s governor Pietro Soderini, his friend and advisor Amerigo Vespucci, and Machiavelli would take Micheletto down into the depths of the Signoria to interrogate him, Ezio would find himself almost wishing that he could have been present, himself.
He was hardly proud of such an impulse, and he tried to ignore it as much as possible, but it still remained in the back of his mind.
Chapter 436: Brotherhoods
Chapter Text
The day came, of course, when Ezio found himself needing to return to Roma once more, while Machiavelli chose to stay in Firenze.
“I know your heart will always remain in Firenze, but I will miss you,” he said, smiling even as he and Machiavelli embraced for a last time; at least, until they chanced to meet again.
“I am also an Assassin,” Machiavelli said, smiling. “And, my first loyalty will always be to the Brotherhood. You’ve only to send for me, and I will return just as soon as I am able. Do convey my regards to our brothers and sisters who’ve chosen to stay in Roma. However,” Machiavelli continued, the good humor and cheer steadily leaving his face, as he turned his gaze toward the depths of the Signoria once more. “I haven’t given up all hope of squeezing at least some information from that vile man.”
“Best of luck, amico mio,” he said, before he turned to leave the Signoria once more.
Privately, however, Ezio had his doubts that any of the three of them – even all at once – would be able to extract any information that Micheletto honestly wished to keep hidden. He was, to his very core, an evil man. However, he was also particularly strong-willed.
Such was never a good combination, Ezio had long since learned.
Having made arrangements to return to Roma once more, Ezio found himself wishing to speak to Leonardo again; there were things that he wished to speak about, but he also didn’t wish to trouble any of his brother or sister Assassins with his own misgivings. Leonardo, therefore, was the only one that Ezio could find it in himself to speak to under the circumstances. There were few enough things that could trouble his inventor friend in the first place, and the intrigues of the Borgia and their servants didn’t seem to be one of them.
When he arrived back in the studio that Leonardo had been given when Pope Julius II had commissioned him, Ezio found himself greeted with the same, generous hospitality that he’d always been whenever he’d returned to Leonardo’s side.
“It’s good to see you again, amico, though I confess I hadn’t been expecting you so quickly. I thought you’d be visiting your family, first,” his old friend said, smiling gently at him as the both of them settled down together at one of the less cluttered tables scattered about the studio that Julius II had given him for his own use.
“I wished to speak with you about something before that, Leonardo,” he said, knowing that his old friend would respect his reasons, whenever he chose to disclose them. “I still have my concerns about Micheletto. He could still escape from the Signoria, with or without help. And, there’s still the matter of Cesare; no one knows where he is, and he still hasn’t returned. If he even is free in the first place.”
“Ezio, you truly must put those two out of your mind,” Leonardo said, as the pair of them shared wine and a good plate of salami in the latter’s studio. “Roma is at peace. This Pope is strong; he’s subdued the Romagna, he is as much a soldier as he is a man of God, and perhaps under him all of Italia will find peace at last. And, although Españia does control the south, Ferdinand and Isabella are close allies of ours.”
“I know, but I also know that, Micheletto’s current status notwithstanding, he will try with everything in him to make contact with Cesare Borgia again,” he said, narrowing his eyes as he found himself once more reflecting on the past; on the seeming disappearance of Cesare Borgia, and just what might have caused such a thing, as well as how it had happened. “Even if he doesn’t manage to meet up with Cesare, there still remain pockets of Borgia diehards who might very well support him in the endeavor.”
“No one has ever escaped from those cells, Ezio,” Leonardo said, clearly aiming to be reassuring, though there was still something in Ezio’s mind that would not allow him to rest so easily. “Still, why don’t you pay a visit to your family? I’m certain they’d be happy to see you again.”
“Sí, I was planning to visit them after the pair of us spoke, amico,” he said, nodding. “I was just hoping to discuss those things with you to settle my mind, before I met up with any of them.”
“I suppose that makes sense,” Leonardo said, smiling in that welcoming way he had.
The pair of them said their farewells then, and Ezio turned to make his way to the Rosa in Fiore. He’d been spending a great deal more time there, ever since Mother had taken ill and Claudia and little Maria had both dedicated themselves to her health. Still, the business of the Rosa itself could hardly be allowed to fall by the wayside, and so it hadn’t; little Maria had stationed herself at the Rosa alongside Claudia, so that the both of them would be able to share the burden of both Mother’s failing health and the running of the brothel and its attendant spy-ring.
Julius II had been quick to offer up one of his own people to take over the running of the Rosa, so that his little sisters would be able to devote the entirety of their attention to caring for Mother in what seemed to be her final days; the three of them had of course discussed the matter with Mother, and in the end while they had thanked the Pope for his generous offer, the Rosa had remained under the management of the Brotherhood. Even Antonio Maffei, who Ezio had been more than a little chagrinned to realize that he’d fallen out of contact with during the time he’d been seeking to oust the Borgia from their seats of power in Roma, had volunteered to send Rosa to give them some aid and comfort in such a difficult time.
Rosa, firebrand that she still was, had of course ended up coming along even after the three of them had refused her offer in the most polite way.
After he’d paid a visit to the Rosa in Fiore to visit with his family – feeling the familiar shudder of apprehension when he saw Mother in her bed, and even the kindness that she seemed to radiate as a matter of course seemed blunted by how frail she clearly was – Ezio found himself called in for a meeting with Julius II.
It was more than a little strange, and Ezio found himself wondering just what it was that the Pope wanted to speak to him about, now that the back of the Borgia diehards had been broken and things in Roma had begun to settle down at last, but all the same he’d made his way to Il Vaticano for the meeting that had been requested.
He could hardly have been expecting what he’d been called in to talk about.
“I’m most intrigued by these devices of yours,” Julius II said, coming straight to the point the way he usually did.
“What do you mean, Your Holiness?” he asked, feeling a certain chill at the thought of more than those within the Brotherhood knowing about not only the Apple, but Aeon’s unbreakable, shining red blade, as well.
“Don’t prevaricate with me, my dear Ezio,” Julius II said, a smile on his face that made clear his intentions of finding out every secret about Aeon’s possessions that Ezio had been hoping to keep from the world at large. “I have my sources, and they tell me you are in possession of a pair of artifacts of great power. The first of them is called the Apple, which you discovered under the Sistine Chapel some time ago. The other seems to be some kind of red blade, which seems to be capable of cutting through any kind of construction known to man.”
Ezio sighed; while he had been hoping to keep knowledge of the Apple, as well as Aeon’s blade, away from those outside the Brotherhood, but he supposed that there was truly no evading the gaze of someone who had so many eyes in his service. “They were given into my care by a man named Aeon,” he said, deciding not to complicate matters by mentioning Minerva and everything that had been revealed when she had appeared to him. “The blade is one of his own, and the Apple seems to be what ties him to this world.”
Matters involving Aeon were complicated enough on their own, truly.
“I’ve heard, myself, tales of the man’s preternatural abilities in combat,” Julius II said, steepling his fingers and seeming more than a little troubled; Ezio wondered how much of what he was seeing was genuine emotion on the Pope’s part, and how much was simply put on as a way to gain sympathy given what he knew about Ezio. “I suppose, if this Aeon truly gave those artifacts of his over into your care, it would be best if you were left to the duty. However,” Julius II continued, an expression on his face that suggested he was thinking deeply on the matter of the artifacts that Ezio had found himself in possession of; one of them given over by Aeon, and the other given over into his hands when Rodrigo Borgia had brought it to Venezia in an effort to turn its power against Italia as a whole. “I feel it would be of great aid to the future if you would leave some means for someone, perhaps even one of your descendants, to find it. Wherever you choose to leave it in the future.”
“I’ll consider that, Your Holiness,” he said, though there was a part of him that suspected that Desmond – watching as he was from his place in the future, wherever such a place might actually be – would be the one to bring Aeon’s Apple back into the world once more.
He could only hope that it would be because he was seeking the knowledge that Aeon possessed, rather than needing the unstoppable combat prowess that the man in black possessed.
After he’d been released from his meeting with the Pope, Ezio found himself thinking about the last thing that Julius II had said to him before the pair of them had parted ways. It seemed that his own suspicions about Leonardo’s companion Salaí were the same as those that Julius II had, as well. Deciding that he would speak to Leonardo about his suspicions, Ezio turned his path back toward Leonardo’s studio.
He would be as diplomatic as he could, but Ezio was determined to make himself heard in this instance.
When he made his way to the studio where Leonardo seemed at times to live, Ezio found that his inventor friend was hard at work on yet another painting. He also seemed to be working on another of his endless projects, as well.
“What are those writings of yours?” he asked, looking down at the papers that Leonardo seemed to have devoted so much attention to.
“A hobby of mine,” Leonardo said, sounding as eager to share in the joy of his discoveries as he ever was. “Of course, you are familiar with Pythagoras!”
“Remind me,” he said, seeing the eagerness in Leonardo’s face and deciding that he would indulge it.
“The brilliant scholar from Grecia, who discovered many secrets about the heavenly spheres and our cosmos,” Leonardo said, the eagerness and desire for further discovery all but shining out of his still-youthful eyes as his inventor friend spoke.
It was at times like these when Ezio found himself reminded of just how old the both of them were; all of them, truly.
“These symbols come from him?” he asked, watching as Leonardo hurried about the room, clearly searching for the name of the captain he’d made mention of.
“Ever since my exploration of Messer Aeon’s Apple, they have been stamped on my mind,” Leonardo said, and Ezio found himself wondering just what kind of connection such symbols could have had to the mysterious man in black. “I found symbols like them in the writings of the Pythagorean disciples,” after a long moment bent over what seemed to be yet another pile of papers, Leonardo sighed. “I am afraid the captain’s name escapes me.”
“Aeon’s Apple has been put to rest,” he said, then wondered for a moment if he should mention that the works of the man in black still seemed to be at large in the world; or, at least the fact that Aeon seemed to have left one of his shining blades behind as a gift to the Brotherhood of the future. In the end, however, it was probably for the best that Aeon’s preternatural deeds remained a thing of the past. “Perhaps it would do you good to focus on painting,” he continued, gesturing to the direction of the work so clearly in progress that Leonardo had displayed on a nearby easel. “You seem to be doing decent work on this one,” he said, making his way over to examine the woman’s portrait that looked to be Leonardo’s latest creation.
Leonardo laughed, a sharp, self-deprecating sort of sound. “You are kind. However, even I can see that she is badly drawn. And that smile? Overdone. Meaningless, even. But, forget about painting; I made a breakthrough in my research several days ago. A huge discovery! Salaí! Can you bring the-” Leonardo paused for a moment, his excitement clearly having carried him away, the way he’d done so many times in the past; it was a rather amusing thought, that for all the gray that’d come into his hair and beard, Leonardo remained one of the most youthful people Ezio had ever known. “Oh, he’s still not back. I had intended to accompany you to the docks, since I still know the captain by sight, even though his name still escapes me. But, we cannot leave my workshop without my assistant present.”
“Bene,” he said, knowing that such a thing would have been true even if Leonardo’s personal workshop had not possessed the wonders that his friend’s wildfire mind had created. “An easy task.”
“I am afraid you underestimate Salaí,” Leonardo said, in the tone of fond exasperation that one reserved for a foolish friend of theirs; though there was also a certain, underlying warmth to his words.
He chuckled softly. “Wait and see,” he said.
“Suit yourself,” Leonardo said, that same, fondly exasperated tone lacing his words as he spoke them. “You will likely find him at La Volpe Addormentata.”
After the pair of them had said a momentary farewell, Ezio found himself wondering just what La Volpe himself thought about Salaí. He was hardly concerned about the young man’s safety, not in a place where the Brotherhood had established such a strong presence, but he still wondered how his old friend saw Leonardo’s assistant. Perhaps he would ask, when he found the time.
However, for the moment, he had to focus on bringing Salaí back to Leonardo, so that the pair of them would be able to meet up with the captain that Leonardo had spoken of and he could return to the search for any mention of Cesare Borgia. The complete, utter silence surrounding the matter of what had actually happened to the man unsettled him on any number of levels, and hence Ezio had committed himself to at least finding some word of where the man was or had gone.
Even if he found that Cesare Borgia had indeed been killed, it would be better to know than to be constantly prey to his current uncertainty.
Forcing those thoughts from his mind once more, Ezio dismounted and led his borrowed horse to the stables that served La Volpe’s inn. After seeing that his horse would be well taken care of while he attended to the business of returning Salaí to Leonardo’s side, so that he and the inventor would be able to meet with the captain that Leonardo still seemed intent on introducing him to, Ezio made his way inside La Volpe Addormentata once more.
The inn seemed to be just as he remembered it, though the presence of the extravagantly dressed young man at the center of a ring of observers – playing some kind of game with what seemed to be loaded dice – was a new sight, though one he’d been prepared for beforehand by his conversation with Leonardo.
“Gian Giacomo?” he asked, looming over the smaller form of Leonardo’s assistant, just in case the younger man proved determined to be troublesome.
Or, he ended up finding finding that very same trouble in the person of one of those observing the goings-on at present.
“I do not answer to that name,” Leonardo’s assistant said, raising himself up to his knees, but not seeming to be in any great hurry to stand up again.
“Salaí,” he said, electing to humor the younger man so that the both of them would be able to leave more quickly.
Chapter 437: Stolen property
Chapter Text
At least, he hoped that was going to be what happened, though given the way the young man quickly returned his attention to the game that he had been playing – with only a dismissive “Better, but not good enough.” – Ezio suspected that he was in for a rather difficult time with Leonardo’s assistant. He wondered for a moment just what it was that his inventor friend saw in the younger man, or if there was a side of himself that Salaí reserved for those he was closest to. However, in light of his present circumstances, those kinds of questions would have to wait.
“Leonardo, your master, requests your presence,” he said, beginning to become more than a little fed up with the way Salaí was ignoring every possible non-verbal signal that Ezio had been giving – up to and including his own, looming presence – to hurry and say his farewells so that the pair of them could leave for the night.
“Let him wait,” Salaí said, making a gesture as though to sweep Ezio’s words away into the air.
More annoyed than he’d been in quite some time, Ezio stepped forward, right foot coming down on the die that Salaí had just been about to throw. “No,” he said, allowing the bite of annoyance he’d been feeling to come through loud and clear in his voice.
Salaí, seeming to understand at last that he was not going to be able to bluster his way out of returning to Leonardo’s workshop, finally rose to his feet. Though the expression on his youthful face suggested that he felt he was doing so under the most dire of duress. The whole situation seemed nearly more trouble than it was worth, but with how much time he’d committed, Ezio wasn’t about to leave this particular task unfinished.
“Nice hood,” Salaí said, the expression on his face suggesting that Leonardo had shared more than a few secrets about the Brotherhood with him, though clearly not enough for him to know that he now stood within the stronghold of one of their staunchest allies. “Are you one of Julius’ monks?”
“My church is not of God,” he said simply, finding himself wondering for a moment if Mother had ever felt about him as he now felt about Salaí; the similarities between himself as a young man and this particular young man were becoming more than a little uncanny.
Perhaps that, then, was why Ezio had been finding himself more and more annoyed by Salaí; and, perhaps, that was what Leonardo saw in the younger man, in the end.
“Outside the kingdom of God is the realm of men,” Salaí said, sounding as though he was honestly beginning to enjoy himself; that made one of them. “You worship there, Messere?”
“Come with me and find out,” he said, turning to leave, and feeling a profound sense of relief when he heard Salaí’s softer footfalls following in his wake.
Such relief, of course, only lasted until he heard the challenging tone of one of the men who’d been present at the game that Salaí had been so engaged in when Ezio had come to fetch him. As it turned out, two of the man’s companions – either moving unseen within the greater whole of the crowd, or simply taking advantage of the way Ezio’s attention had been taken up by his search for Salaí – were making their own way out on either side of him. The three of them were wearing hoods, though what few similarities Ezio might have seen between his own manner of dress and that of these men – whoever they might have been – ended decisively at the fact that the both of them were clad in hoods.
Indeed, the robes that these three men wore were a rusty orange sort of color, and each of them possessed a bunch of lace at not only their throats but their wrists as well.
He wasn’t given much time to contemplate just who these men might be or what purpose their insistent delay of Salaí might have served, since just as Salaí had disregarded his earlier warning to stay silent – so that the pair of them might have had at least some chance of putting enough distance between their two groups that they would be able to lose them in one of the larger crowds that were always bustling about Roma, even at such a late hour – seeming almost to have deliberately provoked a confrontation between their two groups.
The men that he was now being forced to confront had clearly managed to call for reinforcements somehow or other, given the fact that Ezio quickly found himself accosted by several more men than the three who had initially followed him and Salaí away from La Volpe Addormentata. For a long moment, Ezio found himself honestly considering calling upon his fellow Assassins. There were those who had chosen not to return to their homes and their lives once the threat of the Borgia and their followers had been ended; perhaps not permanently, but the main force of the Borgias’ power was clearly destroyed.
He’d little doubts that, if called, those who had chosen to remain with the Brotherhood would answer his summons; still, he would be remiss in his duties as Il Mentore if he did not first discover just who it truly was that they would be fighting.
Once he’d managed to drive off the last of the ten men who’d set upon him and Salaí – six of whom now lay dead at their feet – he found Leonardo’s assistant looking at him in what seemed to be an entirely new light.
“There is only one man in Roma who can put on a show like that,” Salaí said, turning a rather more interested expression on him than the one he’d been wearing before. “You must be Ezio Auditore.”
“Come,” he said, deciding that he would find out later just how free Leonardo had been with the information that Ezio – and sometimes little Maria – had shared with him. “We need to return to Leonardo right away.”
“You do not talk much, do you?” Salaí asked, still sounding as though everything the pair of them had seen was simply a passing amusement in his eyes; it was becoming more than a little troubling. “Bene. I will run ahead; you catch up.”
After he’d managed to catch up to Salaí – neither of them having managed to make it to Leonardo’s workshop amid the stalking presence of whatever new faction had chosen to make their presence known within Roma; Templars would have gone on the offensive immediately, as would any of the remaining Borgia diehards, so he at least knew that neither of those two factions were the ones stalking him and his young charge – Ezio found himself watching as a pair of those selfsame newcomers made their way through the streets, clearly searching for something. Or perhaps someone, if they’d made contact with those few who had managed to escape from their fellows’ ill-advised attack.
“These strangers do not quit,” Salaí said, giving voice to Ezio’s own sentiments.
“Disciples wearing similar robes appeared once before,” Ezio said, pausing for a moment to recall the journey he’d made to conceal Aeon’s Apple from those who might have sought to misuse it; Aeon had been no fonder of them than they had been of him, in the end. “They sought… An object I had in my possession.”
“You mean the Piece of Eden,” Salaí said, turning back to him with an interested expression, one that quickly took on more than a few hints of amusement. “The one that that fantastical man in black made his home in?”
“Leonardo told you?” he asked, though he’d already learned such a thing during his meeting with Julius, he wished to see how Salaí himself reacted to such a question; he was well aware that he would need to speak to his inventor friend about his propensity for loose lips, in any case.
“He tells me everything,” Salaí said plainly, and Ezio found himself reminded more than a little of himself as a young man.
Such a thing could very well have as many bad implications as good, of course.
“I fear his indiscretion has cost us greatly,” he said, feeling no need to hold himself back, in light of everything that Salaí knew and had seen. “We must warn him.”
“Say no more,” Salaí said, finally seeming engaged in what the pair of them were going to have to do, if they wished to keep Leonardo safe. “I know the best route home; I take it every morning, after the taverns close. Follow me.”
Keeping pace with Salaí, as the younger man made his way back to Leonardo’s workshop once more, Ezio found that Salaí was more than a little curious about him. And also, that he was better informed as to what it was that had been keeping Leonardo in Roma for such a long time than Ezio would have thought. Apparently, the hidden catacomb that Leonardo had spoken to him about looking into was indeed somewhere in Roma, and Leonardo had indeed managed to discover it.
Salaí also took the opportunity to remind Ezio once more of his own younger days, though he wasn’t about to mention that in conversation.
As the pair of them continued on their way, searching for a path back to Leonardo’s workshop that would not bring them into conflict with the strange men who seemed to haunt every one of the direct paths back to Leonardo’s workshop, he and Salaí were forced to make their way up to the rooftops. Of course, the sight of Salaí, climbing and moving around so freely only served to remind Ezio even more of himself, so it was with the oddest feeling of nostalgia following in his wake that Ezio found himself making his way down and back into Leonardo’s workshop.
Of course, such a feeling only truly lasted until he and Salaí had made their way at last into Leonardo’s workshop. It had been ransacked, clearly by men in a great hurry, and even more clearly by kidnappers who he would soon be pursuing.
“Maestro!” Salaí called into the gloom, clearly either unaware of what had truly happened, or in a desperate attempt to convince himself that everything was still normal.
Ezio could understand such a sentiment perfectly, but it wouldn’t help either them or Leonardo, wherever he currently was.
“They took him,” he said, drawing Salaí’s attention back to the present moment, as well as the trials now set before them.
“No,” Salaí said, and Ezio could almost see the stubborn look he’d seen described on his own face, mirrored back to him from the night Father and his brothers had vanished into that dark night in Firenze, so long ago. “He must be here!”
“The temple he discovered,” Ezio said, knowing that such a place would be their best lead, and also wishing to give Salaí something more concrete to focus on than his present worries. “Where is it?” Following in Salaí’s wake, Ezio called to the young man, even as Salaí called out for Leonardo again. “If you want to save him, tell me where the temple is.”
“I do not know,” Salaí said, sounding more shaken than Ezio had ever heard the young man sound since the pair of them had first met; sounding, honestly, as shaken as Ezio could remember himself feeling, that last night in his family’s palazzo.
“Cazzo,” he hissed, struck with the restless need to move that saw him pacing the length of Leonardo’s ravaged workshop.
“Ezio,” Salaí called softly, drawing his attention over the simmering frustration that being left helpless had always drawn out of him. “Something is written on the floor.”
“What does it say?” he asked, making his way over to where Salaí was seated, having turned up one of Leonardo’s backless chairs for his own use.
“I cannot read,” Salaí said, as the both of them gathered to look at the message they’d been left. “Leonardo promised to teach me, but now…”
Ezio nodded, since their present predicament hardly needed to be stated aloud again. Still, the contents of Leonardo’s message…
“Villa. Paintings,” he muttered, narrowing his eyes at the cryptic words that his inventive friend had left for anyone who might wish to follow his trail. “He wants us to examine art?”
“I remember when Leonardo used to live at your villa; he was researching the location of the catacombs,” Salaí said, the cryptic words before them obviously having resolved into some kind of coherence for him.
“Several of his paintings hung in the gallery there,” Ezio said, shifting on his feet as he found himself fighting a growing urge to pace again. “What do they have to do with the temple?”
“Perhaps the pages of his research are hidden in one of the frames?” Salaí suggested, looking up at him with a bemused sort of expression; it seemed that Leonardo remained as inscrutable as ever, even to those who professed to know him.
Still… “The paintings are gone. They all burned in the attack,” he said, finding himself annoyed once more at the loss of a potential lead.
“No, they did not,” Salaí said, raising his head. “Only Leda and St. John; the Borgia took the rest.”
“Six paintings,” he said, feeling some of the hope that had faded steadily at the thought of his lost home – the second one, which was just as horrible a thing, in its own way – rekindled by the notion that something might have survived, small and inconsequential as such a thing might have ultimately been.
“Five,” Salaí said, a sheepish expression on his face, even as he lowered his head. “I told the art merchant that Portrait of a Lady was by Leonardo. I needed the money for a doublet,” he sighed, slumping further on the stool where he sat. “Of course, now it has gone out of fashion.”
Chapter 438: Troublesome familiarity
Chapter Text
“Who has the paintings now?” he said, deciding not to make an issue of Salaí’s indiscretion; heaven knew he’d gotten up to some absurd things as a younger man.
“Lucrezia Borgia, in her husband’s palazzo outside Ferrara,” Salaí said, hands folded in his lap as he continued to look at his feet.
“Then it is time I took back what was stolen,” he said, feeling a renewed sense of purpose settling over him again.
While it was true that reclaiming the paintings that had once hung in the gallery of his uncle’s destroyed villa in Toscana would not in fact serve as anything more than a minor comfort in the grand scheme of things, having access to whatever research that Leonardo had left there could only aid them in their efforts to free him from the grasp of those strange men who’d taken such a clear interest in the Apple. For a moment, Ezio found himself wondering just what their interest was in the catacombs that Leonardo had been studying, but he quickly pushed those thoughts out of his mind.
He could ask Leonardo, once he and his old friend had been reunited once more.
Once he’d managed to make his way to Ferrara, back on the trail of Lucrezia Borgia once more, Ezio found himself watching from concealment as Lucrezia herself rode back into the extravagant palazzo where she and her husband lived together. Though it seemed as if the wedded bliss either of them might have hoped for was quite a bit less than blissful. If anything, Lucrezia seemed to have become even less happy without her brother’s mad schemes and his possessiveness intruding on her life.
Shaking off the thoughts of what might have been troubling the Duchess, Ezio set off after her.
Making his way into and through the grounds of the palazzo, moving carefully in the blind-spots that even the most dedicated of guards left in their patrol routes, Ezio found himself falling into the familiar, silent movements that he’d practiced for so long. He was pleased to know that, for all his concerns about allowing his skills to lapse in light of the overwhelming power and abilities that Aeon had provided to him when he’d had the man in black so close at hand, he still had full command of the prowess he’d honed on his own.
If nothing else, it was good to have confirmation.
After he’d made his way through the inner gardens of the palazzo he’d set himself to infiltrating, with the very decoration within said garden providing ample cover for him to evade the sight of any and all of the Duke’s personal guard, Ezio found himself standing before a slightly opened window. He’d checked with his second-sight as he was making his way there, and so he knew that this was where Lucrezia Borgia presently was. And also that she was currently alone.
Both being rather important, considering what had happened in the past; he could hardly expect someone to be cordial to one who had done such damage to their family and the standing they had once enjoyed. Truly, it was the same kind of feeling that had led Ezio himself on his initial hunt for the Pazzi, and then the Borgia who had supported them. It was, indeed, what had brought him and little Maria into the Brotherhood in the first place.
Given the man he’d once been, back in Firenze, Ezio didn’t know if he would have taken Father’s explanation of the Auditore legacy and the part their family had played in the world nearly as well as he had after he’d had the chance to find out what kind of men the Templars and their allies were for himself.
Putting those thoughts out of his mind, even as he climbed in through a window that had been left conveniently open, Ezio called upon his second-sight once again; happily enough, he had indeed managed to find the right room, sighing softly in relief as he spotted the gold-limed form of Lucrezia Borgia, standing over a large book. Pushing aside the nostalgia that crept up on him – the book she was reading from did seem to be almost as large as the one that Uncle Mario had used to record the state of the Auditore Villa’s expenses and renovations, back in Toscana – Ezio pressed forward into the room alongside her.
“Come to kill me at last, Assassino?” Lucrezia asked, in lieu of a greeting.
Ezio supposed he couldn’t truly blame her for it, considering everything that had happened between their respective factions.
“Buon giorno, Lucrezia,” he said, hoping that a more civil start to their conversation would put her at least somewhat at ease. “Or, would you like me to call you Duchessa?”
“A borrowed title from my husband,” Lucrezia countered, though the venom in her tone didn’t carry so much of a bite as he’d heard in the past. “Ill-fitting, and barely concealing the truth.”
“You can keep your life,” he said, understanding that delaying the matter further would only draw Lucrezia’s ire; something he already had more than enough of, considering both their shared past, and their present circumstances. “I am here for the art on your walls.”
“Redecorating, are we?” Lucrezia drawled, sounding more than slightly unimpressed.
“I count five Leonardo da Vinci paintings you have stolen, and I want them returned,” he said, taking a slight step forward as the pair of them continued their discussion.
Lucrezia chuckled, though there was no true mirth in her tone, and even less in the thin, cold smile she offered him. “Ah, if only it were that easy. My birthplace, my family, have been taken from me. You think Ferrara loves me? I am a stranger, a castaway, an orphan,” Lucrezia snapped, taking a step forward with every, bitten-off word. “Your paintings are gone, Assassino.”
“I do not believe you,” he said, moving to meet her more closely, before she could begin thinking that he was one to be intimidated so easily, and also wondering what would come of pushing for more information in this instance.
“Frightening, is it not?” Lucrezia asked, standing firmly in her place, even as the pair of them continued to stare each other down. “To have lost so much.” The sight of her right hand, moving up the center of his chest, the back brushing across the armor plating that his Assassin robes concealed, only served to make Ezio all the warier of what Lucrezia might have been planning; orphan or not, deprived of allies or not, he’d learned well enough from Cesare that a cornered Borgia could be frightfully inventive. The vindictiveness was a given, of course. “Perhaps we can comfort each other.”
Given the direction his thoughts had been moving in, that was just about the last thing Ezio had been expecting Lucrezia to say, though when he recalled her interactions with Cesare, he supposed that such a relationship might well have been the only true protection she had ever truly known; dubious as such a thing had been, both in the case of Cesare, and likely in the case of Rodrigo, as well.
“Perhaps,” he said, obligingly pulling back his hood, so that Lucrezia would find herself distracted while he maneuvered her into position. “Where are the paintings?” Ezio asked, even as he laid both of his hands on Lucrezia Borgia’s slender waist, guiding her backwards towards a thick, heavy curtain that had been obligingly tied back with a proportionally thick, heavy cord.
“Sold to Francesco Colonna… And one to someone who was, special to me: Patrizio. He spends his time near Il Vaticano,” Lucrezia continued, seeming more than a little pleased with the way he was allowing his hands to roam around her shoulders, neck, and face. “I kept one for myself.”
“Give it to me,” he said, leaning in closer, as though to nuzzle or kiss her; all the while continuing to guide Lucrezia back toward the tied-up length of the curtain, close enough that he would be able to restrain her more easily when the time came.
When Lucrezia called for her guardsmen, Ezio made certain that he was far enough out of sight not to be spotted, but couldn’t quite keep himself from tensing up when the two men she had called to her appeared. When she merely gave the pair of them orders to place the painting that she had kept for herself in a cart outside the walls, Ezio allowed himself to relax, just slightly enough that he could take a full breath for the first time since she had summoned the men into the room with them.
He didn’t know just whose room it was, since it appeared to be more of a study than anything else, but admittedly he was at the wrong angle to see what might have been beyond the doors, a price he had to pay to keep out of sight of her guards.
“My husband will soon arrive with his guards, so it is best if you hurry,” Lucrezia said, clearly enjoying having him – or perhaps merely another man, he could hardly be certain, considering the limited time he had to work with – close to her.
She also seemed to be enjoying what Ezio was doing with his hands, though he knew that such enjoyment would not and could not last any longer than the time it took for her to notice what he had actually been doing.
“Forgive me, Duchessa,” he said, continuing to hold her attention, even as he tied the last knot firmly.
“What for?” Lucrezia asked, sounding about as distracted as he could have asked for.
“No man can heal your pain,” he said, moving away from Lucrezia in earnest; all the better that he left before she had the time to realize what he’d truly been doing, while she’d been distracted. “You must do so on your own. Say hello to the Duca for me.”
Making his escape, even as Lucrezia called on her guards and the doors to the far side of him slammed open once again, Ezio once again found himself falling into the easy rhythm of running, dodging, and leaping up through the house where he had tracked Lucrezia back to once he’d managed to make his way to Ferrara. In the end, he was able to escape the guard patrols as easily as he’d ever managed, but he found himself more than a bit breathless when he finally made his way up to the cart that Lucrezia had had placed outside the walls of her palazzo.
Pausing for a moment to catch his breath, Ezio quickly climbed into the cart, whipping up the horses so that he would be able to escape from whatever guards that had managed to spot him as he made his way away from Lucrezia’s palazzo at last.
Once he’d made it back outside the lands controlled by Lucrezia Borgia and her latest husband, Ezio turned his path towards Il Vaticano once more. He was beginning to wonder, after so many times, just how many things had been hidden in such a place. Still, as he continued on his way through the streets and alleys, pausing at every intersection to sweep the milling crowds with his second-sight, Ezio found that the men who had accosted him and Salaí back when he’d first gone to find Leonardo’s assistant seemed to be out and about.
Either they were hunting him and he’d just had the mixed fortune to evade them while at the same time becoming aware of their plans, or else they were here on the trail of the same painting that he was; an unfortunately plausible scenario, considering the fact that the only reason he’d become aware of the stalking presence of these men was because they had gone so far as to kidnap Leonardo, after ransacking his friend’s workshop. And, as he’d suspected might very well be the case, merely given the way his often-capricious luck had been turning during the course of the hunt he was on.
The hunt that he’d honestly never expected to have to engage in; his efforts to find out where Cesare had hidden himself were being stymied by a faction that he’d never had cause to believe existed before now.
Deciding that he would send a message to little Maria, asking for her assistance in this particular matter, Ezio found himself regretting – just for a moment, just for long enough to remind himself why he’d done as he had when the time came – the fact that he’d left Aeon’s blade in that strange temple beneath Il Colosseo. Still, the fact that he and the Brotherhood no longer possessed such a powerful weapon was of small consequence, compared to what might have happened if he had chosen to take the risk the Templars somehow getting their hands on such a weapon.
Forcing his thoughts back to the matters presently at hand, Ezio narrowed his eyes as he saw the gold-limed form of Patrizio making his way back into what seemed to be his own palazzo, the red forms of more of the same kind of hooded men he’d previously encountered following in his wake. However, this group seemed to contain at least one man of considerable rank among these people, if the conversation he overheard when he made his way to the door of Patrizio’s palazzo was any indication.
Following in the man’s wake, even as the man in question made a break for the rooftops – it was swiftly becoming a matter of some consternation, just how many people seemed to have taken to Roma’s rooftops, both since it made pursuing them somewhat more difficult, and also because it could easily lead the less trained and more foolhardy of her citizens to try making their own ways up – Ezio swiftly scaled a nearby wall, lined up a shot from his crossbow, and laid the fleeing man out flat. Advancing, once he was certain that the man he’d been pursuing could neither attack him nor turn and run for the protection of his fellows, Ezio quickly fetched the second of the five paintings made by Leonardo that he’d been searching for.
Once it was safely back in his possession, Ezio allowed himself to relax slightly, before turning to make his way back to the safehouse that he had been operating out of; he needed to store the painting he had just reclaimed, and then he needed to send a message to little Maria.
~AC: Bro~
When she’d received the summons from Ezio, the last thing Maria had expected was to be called to a meeting with Duccio. Truly, she’d almost forgotten the rat existed in the first place, since she’d actually had important matters to concern herself with, ever since she and Ezio had left Firenze behind. And, in truth, even before that. Still, there was just something about the man’s face that Maria couldn’t help but find infuriating at first sight.
The expression on said face wasn’t helping, of course, and neither were the words coming out of the rat’s mouth:
“Living in this third-rate city, instead of beautiful Firenze?” the rat asked, once he’d finished propositioning an uninvolved woman; Maria found herself tempted – not for the first time – to feed Duccio his own testicles and be done with the bastardo. Still, at present the man had at least some use to them. “How low you have fallen, Ezio Auditore. I don’t see why you continue to stay with him, amore mio,” Duccio said, turning his smarmy face in her direction. “Associating with such riffraff can only serve to diminish your loveliness.”
“Duccio, we are not children anymore,” Ezio said tolerantly, while Maria herself struggled to bite back laughter.
Idiot that Duccio was, he could be good for a laugh if one was in the right mood; though under the circumstances, outright laughing in the idiot’s face would serve no true purpose. Ezio still had a use for the rat, after all. They still needed to find out what message Leonardo was trying to send them.
“Look around,” Duccio said, gesturing to the burly, sour-faced men he’d gathered all about himself, on the pier where the three of them were standing. “I have come prepared this time, Ezio Auditore.”
Chapter 439: Artisan crafts
Chapter Text
He might have said something to her, as well, but Maria ignored him in favor of studying the men that Duccio had brought with him; or else hired when he’d arrived in port. Regardless of the way he’d ultimately found them, not one of the men associated with him looked to be more than the kind of undisciplined brawler that had fallen in droves before the skill that she and Ezio had honed for such a long time within the Brotherhood.
There was little chance, then, that any of the men Duccio had brought with him would be anything more than a momentary inconvenience to either her or Ezio.
Duccio, of course, seemed to have other ideas; ideas which, unfortunately for him, seemed to revolve around insulting her and Ezio’s sister. Ezio was closer, so naturally he got the first hit in, but just as Duccio was stumbling backwards from being punched in his smarmy face, Maria stepped forward to drive her right knee into his balls, then turned to slam her right fist into the face of one of the burly men that Duccio had brought to this place in a vain attempt to intimidate her and Ezio.
Really, even if Ezio had chosen to come alone for some reason, there was no chance that this motley crew would be able to cause more than a momentary delay for her brother.
Even the fact that neither of them wished to kill the men that Duccio had with him hardly proved an impediment as she and Ezio both laid them out flat in what felt like no time at all. After Ezio had managed to wring the last of the information he needed from Duccio; apparently, only one of the three paintings that she and her brother had come here searching for still remained in Duccio’s possession. The other two had been sold to a Roman Cardinal.
A Cardinal who would soon be making an exhibition to his fellows, no less.
As Ezio made his way onto Duccio’s ship to lay claim to the painting that the man had actually possessed, Maria herself kept watch for any of the robed figures that her brother had described to her. They seemed to be at least somewhat similar to the Brotherhood that she and Ezio were a part of, but for all that they were proving to be just as much of a potential problem as the Followers of Romulus.
And this time, they didn’t have Aeon’s sheer, overwhelming power to back them up.
Chapter 440: Blooming roses
Chapter Text
When Ezio made his way back to where she’d ended up after killing a pair of the robed men that she’d flushed out, carrying another of the paintings that had been stolen from their palazzo in Firenze when their first home had been ransacked by the Pazzi and their Templar masters, he seemed to have come to a decision.
“Come, sorellina; there’s something I need to speak to Claudia about,” Ezio said, reaching out to wrap his right arm around her as the pair of them made their way to the safehouse that Ezio had been working out of, ever since he’d begun making the attempt to recover the paintings that Leonardo had indicated would help them to rescue him from the men who had taken him captive.
Once the pair of them had recovered the three paintings that Ezio had previously stored there, packing them up so that they would be able to carry them through the tunnels that connected their present safehouse with the Rosa in Fiore, Maria found herself wondering what their next move would be. And also, just what new faction she and her last brother had managed to stumble across during the course of their work in Roma. It was an odd sort of reminder of the time she’d spent working with Adriano to root out a group that Cesare Borgia had formed, either to discredit the Brotherhood or else just to fight them.
She wondered what kind of men these would prove to be, when their groups came face-to-face.
“Have you found out anything about who the men we’re trying to rescue Leonardo from?” she asked, as the pair of them crossed deep enough into the tunnels that she didn’t have to worry so much about the sound of their voices carrying to anyone who might be listening.
“Only that they seem to have an interest in Leonardo’s paintings, in addition to the man himself,” Ezio said, a thoughtful expression passing over his face. “However, I did hear one of them mentioning something about a second Renascence, from one of the men I was forced to confront on Duccio’s boat.”
Humming softly in thought, Maria shifted the painting she was carrying; she was trying not to think too much about the fact that she and Ezio had essentially been forced into another meeting with a man she’d have honestly been perfectly happy to never see again, but the sight of the rat’s face – even after so long – had been just enough to make him stick in her mind again. Maria could only hope that, whatever task lay before them, it would be enough to banish the lingering specter of Duccio to the far edges of her him where he belonged.
If she wasn’t lucky enough to forget about him entirely, at least.
~AC: Bro~
Looking over at little Maria as the pair of them continued on their way to the Rosa in Fiore, Ezio wrapped his free arm around his littlest sister. He could tell, given the troubled expression on her face, that there was at least some part of the challenges the pair of them had been forced to face during the past few days that still remained in the forefront of her mind. Still, the both of them had nearly reached the basement of the Rosa in Fiore, and there was little better for bringing up the spirits of his either of his sisters than a visit to the other.
The thought brought a smile to his face, as well, and as the pair of them made their way into the hidden part of the Rosa’s basement so that they could store the paintings they had both been carrying, Ezio found that he could leave behind at least some of the cares that had been weighing him down since he’d been forced to search for Leonardo in the first place.
Once he and little Maria could begin making their way up and out of the basement where they’d arrived, Ezio pulled aside the first girl he spotted, so that he could ask her where Claudia was. Once he knew where he could find his little sister – the woman Duccio had been foolish enough to insult, earning himself a well-deserved beating – Ezio continued on his way, up through the building and out to the gardens where Claudia was said to be heading. Three of the girls who worked out of the Rosa were already present, seemingly relaxing and enjoying the early evening.
“Buon giorno. Have you ladies heard about an art viewing, somewhere in the city?” he asked, curious about just how far the news of the exhibition had ultimately spread.
“You have returned to Roma,” Claudia said, drawing his attention before any of the three girls present could answer his question.
“With just enough time to visit you, sorellina,” he said, making his way over to embrace his younger sister for a long moment, before Claudia pulled back.
Chapter 441: Uninvited
Chapter Text
“Maria already told me what it is you’re looking for, fratello,” Claudia said, an amused smile settling on her face. “That exhibition of Da Vinci paintings, the one being held at the Castello Sant’Angelo, later today. Fortunately for you, I know just where you can procure an invitation,” Claudia paused for a moment, looking him over. “However, there is only one invitation available, and it will only grant you access to the lower levels. Only Cardinals are allowed higher.”
“I knew I could count on you, Claudia,” he said, smiling as he reached out to cup his little sister’s chin.
“Sí, bene,” Claudia said, sounding both amused and ever so slightly exasperated, even as little Maria laughed softly at the pair of them. “Some of my girls will accompany you, since you’re obviously going to insist on handling this yourself. Buona fortuna, and don’t get caught.”
Once Claudia had told him just when and from where he would be able to find the invitation that would allow him access to the art viewing that was to be held, and he and little Maria had said their temporary farewells, Ezio made his way back out of the Rosa, on his way to find and intercept the invitation that Claudia had informed him about.
Making his way back onto Roma’s rooftops once more, using his second-sight to determine just where it was that he was going to need to go, Ezio found himself descending into the midst of a group of Claudia’s courtesans. The four of them smiled at him, before they set off to the palazzo he’d been directed to when he and Claudia had been speaking to each other just before he left. As he moved along, watching as the eyes of those who would have otherwise been more than likely to take note of him if there hadn’t been surrounded by the Courtesans Claudia had lent him to distract the eyes of those who would have otherwise caused him troubles in his efforts to retrieve the invitation Claudia had told him about.
Once he’d made it to the courtyard that Claudia had described to him, with the group of Courtesans he’d been traveling with having obligingly split off to distract the guards that had previously been positioned around the perimeter, Ezio made his way up the wall he’d come to a stop in front of. Slipping back down to the ground, Ezio called up his second-sight, revealing the golden glow of the invitation that he had come to this place in order to obtain.
Taking the invitation from the ornate box – not even a strongbox, necessitating his spending time picking any kind of lock – Ezio quickly departed once be began hearing the sound of someone else approaching the courtyard he was standing in.
Making his way back out across the district, Ezio breathed more easily once he’d gotten away from the palazzo and the courtyard he’d needed to infiltrate in order to obtain the invitation that Claudia had told him about.
Meeting up with a different group of Courtesans on the bridge that he’d crossed on his way to and from the Castello Sant’Angelo, Ezio called up his second-sight for a moment in order to determine just how many enemies were present in the area and just how he was going to need to avoid them currently. Once he’d led the four of them into a safer area of the bridge, he explained the situation as it currently stood.
“Come with me,” he instructed them, once he’d finished catching the four of them up on events as they presently stood. “Once we make it inside, I will mark the paintings for you to steal. Bring them to Leonardo’s workshop. Capito?”
Chapter 442: Art appreciation
Chapter Text
With their acknowledgement secured, Ezio continued on his way to the Castello Sant’Angelo among his new entourage. Pausing for a moment as the pair of guards that had been assigned to the double-doors of the Castello stepped in front of him, he handed over the invitation that he’d managed to retrieve to the guard on the left. However, as he’d seen so many times before, the man seemed far more interested in the courtesans that had followed in his wake than anything that Ezio himself might have been doing.
One of the many reasons that he was pleased to have the loyalty of the women who lived and worked in the Rosa in Fiore.
Once he’d made his way into the courtyard of the Castello, Ezio called up his second-sight once more, narrowing his eyes slightly as the gold-limed form of a person or object of interest drew his attention amid the dull, colorless hues that his second-sight painted the world as a whole. He’d wondered, off and on, those times when he made use of the altered sense, just how such a thing was possible.
Truly, even though the altered perception had been more of a boon than even a great deal of the weapons that Leonardo had been generous enough to provide him with, Ezio still wondered just how such a thing worked, in the end.
Forcing his thoughts back to the present, Ezio found the first of the two paintings he had been looking for when he’d first set out to find what was stolen from him. Pausing for a long moment, waiting for the patrolling guards to leave on their rounds once again, Ezio moved to mark the frame for the courtesans that he had brought with him. Moving away from the painting, Ezio called up his second-sight once again.
However, he was unable to find the second of the two paintings, for all that he searched the ground floor, and so it seemed that he would need to make his way up to the second level once again.
Sighing, finding himself biting back a chuckle once again, Ezio searched for a group of Cardinals that he could use to conceal his movements while he made his way up to the second level; or, failing that, a route that would keep him from falling under suspicion from the guards – spread thin as they were, with so many people invited to the showing – for long enough to make his way to the upper floors of the Castello. In the end, he managed to find his way up to the second level in the gaps that the guards had left in their patrols.
Making his way up through the corridors once again, Ezio found himself wondering – for just a moment, before he forced his attention back to the task in front of him – how many more times he was going to find himself returning to this place before he was finished with it. Once he’d managed to make his way up to where the second of Leonardo’s stolen paintings had been stored, Ezio quickly marked it, then turned to make his escape from the Castello for what he hoped would be the last time.
Hoped, yes, but had no true way of knowing.
As he made his escape, Ezio found a rather amused smile settling on his face as he heard the hue and cry going up from the guards. It seemed that his faith in Claudia’s Courtesans had been rewarded once more. Continuing up and over a nearby wall, just before a larger group of guards began spilling out into the courtyard of the Castello.
Skittering back up onto the rooftops once again, Ezio quickly made his way back to Leonardo’s workshop, where all of the paintings that he and little Maria had both worked to gather, ever since their close friend had been captured by those strange men in hooded cloaks. Brown cloaks in particular, so Ezio doubted that these were the same group who had become so enamored with Aeon; his skill and prowess in particular, since the men had once been Followers of Romulus, and hence the only thing that could have conceivably drawn them to Aeon was the preternatural abilities that the man in black had demonstrated. Still, that did leave the question of just who these people were, in the end.
However, once he found Leonardo again, he would more than likely be able to ask those kinds of questions, and more if the subject came up.
Chapter 443: Hunting Hermeticists
Chapter Text
Once he had finally made it back to Leonardo’s workshop – the place where all of this had started, much as Ezio had found himself wishing that it hadn’t – Ezio found both little Maria and Salaí looking over the recovered paintings.
“Have you managed to find anything?” he asked, looking from his littlest sister to Salaí and then back again, trusting that the pair of them would understand that he was speaking to them both.
“Nothing,” Salaí groused, throwing his hands up in the air. “These paintings are a blank slate. No pages, no hidden secrets, nothing.”
“Sorry to say, fratello, but I haven’t found anything on the backs or the frames, either,” little Maria said, turning a brief smile on him, before her expression melted slowly into a scowl as she returned her attention to the paintings that the pair of them had worked so hard to recover.
“There must be something special about them,” he said, knowing that – for all his eccentricities – Leonardo was not the kind of man to leave meaningless messages. “Salaí, does Leonardo have a way to conceal his research?”
“He frequently writes backwards,” the young man said, a contemplative expression coming over his face. “And… He also experimented with inks! Including an ink that vanishes! But, we can’t see invisible ink,” Salaí continued, seeming crestfallen for a moment, before raising himself back up once more. “Or, can we? You could both use your gifts to see the hidden messages.”
“Leonardo told you about that, too?” Ezio groused, finding himself more than a little annoyed.
Truly, it was beginning to seem as though Julius II had been right about Leonardo’s loose lips; he could only hope that Salaí would be able to keep their secrets better than he had.
Once he and little Maria had comfortably divvied up the workload, Ezio called up his second-sight and made his way over to the three paintings he was going to be searching. It took a bit longer than he was honestly comfortable with, but in the end the pair of them managed to find all of the drawings that Leonardo had left behind. After he and little Maria had copied the hidden drawings that Leonardo had left behind, they still had to assemble them into a coherent map.
The loss of the information contained within the painting that truly had been burned in one of the many fires that Savonarola had set in the Firenze that had once been – the one that Ezio had been forced to leave behind, with little Maria following in his wake the way she had since the both of them were children – was troubling, but in the end Ezio was still able to determine the location that Leonardo had presumably been taken to. The one where those brown-robed strangers presumably awaited him.
“At least he marked the entrance to the catacombs,” little Maria said, sounding wry and relieved at once.
“Sí,” Ezio said, nodding as he fixed the location in his mind; there was a part of him that thought he might have seen such a place before, but not enough to say such a thing with any real kind of certainty.
Perhaps it was simply that the situation in and of itself was more than a little familiar to him, considering his previous dealings with the Followers of Romulus.
Little Maria insisted on coming with him, of course, and once they’d said farewell to Salaí and received the young man’s well-wishes in turn, he and little Maria both made their way back out of Leonardo’s workshop so that they could find a stable and so hire a pair of horses. Making their way out to the location that had been given on Leonardo’s hidden map, Ezio found himself feeling an odd sense of nostalgia.
Not an entirely pleasant one, to be sure, but as he made his way up to the concealed door, Ezio did in fact find himself reminded of the time he had spent hunting for the Followers of Romulus, though the lack of a wolf skull was at least something of a comfort. Once he was close enough to the hidden door to see it in detail, he found that the cover was seemingly marked with a Templar sigil. That was significantly less comforting, of course.
“I hope we don’t end up having to fight Templars down here, of all places,” little Maria said, unknowingly echoing the thoughts Ezio himself had been having.
Chapter 444: Combing the catacombs
Chapter Text
The pair of them descended into the catacombs without another word, the musty air wrapping around them as he and little Maria landed on the debris-scattered floor. It seemed that this place had once been a crypt, just as a few of the catacombs he’d descended into. It was an unsettling reminder of the times he’d spent working beside Aeon, but he tried not to think of that.
More than anything, the fact that Aeon continued to consume so much of his thoughts even absent the man in black’s presence let Ezio know that he had, in fact, made the right decision when he’d left Aeon’s Apple in the strange temple beneath Il Colloseo when he had; there would be no peace with such a dangerous artifact at large in the world.
As he and little Maria tracked Leonardo’s kidnappers deeper into the catacombs, following the tracks that their group had left in the debris-scattered gravel – following the dragging tracks that showed how Leonardo had struggled against his captors – Ezio found that he could actually see the red-limed glow of an enemy lining the tracks that the men who had captured his friend had left behind, those times when he called up his second-sight. It was strange, and certainly unexpected, but it was a useful development all the same.
He’d make a point of exploring such a thing when he had the time, but for now it would have to wait.
As he and little Maria made their way deeper and deeper into the catacombs, Ezio began to hear the furious voice of a man; one who seemed to be just as familiar with Leonardo as he and little Maria were, if the words he was speaking were any indication. However, it also seemed as though this man had slipped out of contact some time ago – sometime before he and little Maria had met up with Leonardo in Firenze, it seemed – and their worldviews had diverged from there.
Dramatically so, it seemed, to the point where the other man had been driven to stalk Leonardo all the way to Roma in an effort to capture them; little Maria’s idle musing about Templars was beginning to sound more plausible than he honestly would have wished.
The pair of them continued onward, up through a room that seemed as though it had once been divided into multiple levels, given the remnants that he and little Maria were climbing on in order to make their way into the next room. The room where he could now clearly hear the his captor speaking with Leonardo, and also the sounds of Leonardo being harshly beaten. Grinding his teeth, Ezio caught sight of the snarl that passed over little Maria’s face, as the pair of them continued on their way through the room with the fallen-in floor, over and across what seemed to be the remains of an ornate entrance.
He supposed that such a thing was only to be expected, considering the fact that – according to Leonardo, at any rate – this place had once been a temple to the scholar Pythagoras.
“Tell me where the entrance is!” he heard the one he presumed to be the leader of this particular sect – whether or not they were actually Templars was beginning to seem completely immaterial at this point, considering how they were acting – demanded, and Ezio found himself grinding his teeth all over again.
More than anything, Ezio found himself wishing that he dropped to the floor and ran the rest of the way to the room where he could hear Leonardo being assaulted, but the standing water obscuring the bottom of the room that he and little Maria were climbing through gave him pause. There was no way of knowing just how deep the water was, not without wasting more time than Ezio was honestly comfortable with, and attempting to run in water would have only slowed them down, anyway.
Narrowing his eyes as he continued on his way through the room he and little Maria had nearly managed to cross, Ezio found himself finally back on solid ground, though only for the length of a half-broken staircase. He knew that little Maria was just as impatient as Ezio had found himself feeling, as the both of them were forced to listen to Leonardo being beaten as they made their way across the room.
They could also hear Leonardo stubbornly resisting the overtures that his attacker was making.
It seemed that these men belonged to a sect that worshiped – or at least followed the teachings of – Hermes, but given what the man who was presumably leading them had been saying… Ezio had the unpleasant feeling that his musings about encountering Templars even in this place was a great deal less idle that he’d been hoping it would be. Still, he wasn’t about to leave Leonardo in the cruel hands of his captors.
Even if he was forced to fight his way through yet another cadre of Templars to save him.
Leaping lightly over the final barrier that separated him and little Maria from where they’d been hearing Leonardo’s cries – and his defiance, as well – ever since they had both made their way into this particular room to begin with.
“Basta!” he shouted, swiftly unfolding from his crouch, and hearing little Maria landing lightly behind him even as he rose to his full height once more.
“Ezio Auditore!” the man standing next to Leonardo – clearly the leader of this band given his ornate finery, as well as the one who had been beating his friend for who knew how long, given the blood on his knuckles and the hems of his sleeves – exclaimed, clearly at least somewhat familiar with his exploits, given the way he signaled for his men to stop; Ezio was hardly flattered. “You who arrested Cesare Borgia, who stopped the spread of Roman ignorance, convince our friend Leonardo to open the temple and usher in the golden age of mankind!”
Forcing himself not to focus his attention on little Maria, who he’d seen making her way up the wall while he’d been moving forward to confront the leader of these men, Ezio stepped forward. He needed to keep their attention on him, so that little Maria would be free to reach Leonardo in at least some form of peace.
“Should I persuade ‘our friend’ by kicking him? Or would you rather I used my knife?” he demanded, glaring up at the man; for a moment, Ezio found himself tempted to call upon his second-sight once again, of only so that he would be able to see his littlest sister’s progress.
If only so that he’d have some assurance that Leonardo was going to be safe, sooner rather than later.
“On the contrary,” the man in charge of this band of brutal thugs said, all false contrition and attempted reason; at least what reason could be had, from someone as clearly mad as this man. “There is nothing I would like more than an amiable solution. Help Leonardo see reason. With the Pythagorean unifier, we will remake humanity together.”
If Ezio had needed further convincing that these men were Templars, or at least had been influenced deeply enough by their ideology that such a distinction could hardly be made, that kind of talk would have put them fully to rest. Fortunately enough, little Maria dropped a smoke bomb just as the man had finished speaking, and even as Ezio found himself set upon by the men that had come down into this temple with him, he could still feel a sense of satisfaction.
At the very least, he could be certain that Leonardo was safe.
~AC: Bro~
After she’d dealt with the man who had been keeping Leonardo prisoner, Maria turned her attention to the man who’d ultimately been responsible for this whole debacle.
“We are all the same underneath, and yet these people persist in their witch hunts,” the man said, stumbling back a step, before he regained his composure. “And, to see you of all people, coming after me… I heard about the Man of Ages who resided within an artifact that the Assassins possessed, and also that there were some of Italia’s own citizens who had been marked by him, but I had never expected to meet one in this manner. You both truly wish to see humanity remain mired in ignorance and hatred?”
“You truly think that kidnapping and assaulting a dear friend of mine would make me at all kindly disposed to anything you and yours have to say?” she demanded in return, unsheathing her sword and knocking the dagger that the man had drawn in response neatly from his grasp.
Just as the man looked to be about to start ranting again, the words he was saying at complete odds with the actions he had taken – both in kidnapping Leonardo to begin with, and then compounding such a vile act with the beating he had clearly ordered – Maria lunged forward, driving her sword into the man’s heart and out through his back. Moving with the motion of his fall, Maria gently lowered the man to the hard, cold stone of the catacombs that she and Ezio had found their way into after such a long time.
Or, at least, what had felt like such a long time; without the sun, or access to a clock, there was no way for her to truly say how long she and Ezio had been down in this long, winding maze of disused, crumbling tunnels.
“You… Assassins… Enemies of knowledge?” the man asked, his eyes beginning to fall closed as he bled to death on the stone floor.
“The search for truth must be a choice, Messer,” Maria said, as she finished cleaning her sword and sheathed the weapon once again. “That, above all other things, is what we Assassins fight for: to make certain that everyone has the chance to live as they choose.”
“Forcing knowledge on people does little, aside from the risk of making them resistant to learning itself,” Ezio said, having clearly made his way up to where she and the leader of the sect who’d kidnapped Leonardo sat, playing out a role she’d come to know quite well during her time as a member of the Brotherhood.
It was a role Maria didn’t think she would ever truly become comfortable with, and perhaps that was a good thing.
“These lost people… warring kingdoms… I would have ended their suffering,” the former leader of the sect that had kidnapped Leonardo and brought him down into this lightless, underground maze to be tortured said, eyes slipping closed as the last of the light behind them faded away.
“May you know the truth in death,” Maria said, not bothering to hold to the small flame of anger that had stayed with her during the time that she and Ezio had spent hunting for Leonardo and his captors throughout the maze they’d both descended into. “Requiescat in pace.”
Rising from her crouch, Maria dusted off her Assassin robes and made her way over to where Ezio was tending to Leonardo, helping their mutual friend to sit up, and cleaning the blood off of his face.
“Come, let us leave this place,” her last brother said, rising back to his feet while helping Leonardo to do the same.
Chapter 445: Hidden temple
Chapter Text
“We cannot,” Leonardo said, before any of them could start making their way out of the maze. “Not without reaching the final room of the temple.”
“You’re hardly in condition to travel, amico,” she said, not quite able to keep herself from wincing at the poor condition she and Ezio had found the man in; neither of them had quite expected that they would need to treat such extensive wounds, and so they only had the few small things the both of them used to treat the minor scrapes and bruises that any Assassin picked up as they went about their work.
“I will be fine,” Leonardo said, the clear determination in his voice and on his face reminding Maria more than a little of Ezio and the rest of their family. “If that number remains intact, we risk another madman discovering it.”
With those words echoing between the three of them, Leonardo made his way over to a carved relief on the base of a large, seated statue, pressing his right palm against part of the relief – an equilateral triangle turned on its point – and Maria found herself amused and intrigued at once when the center of the large, carven throne sank slowly into the ground. It seemed as though she and Ezio would never quite be able to escape the allure of secret passages or the desire to find out what lay beyond them.
With Ezio in the lead, carrying the torch that had once been resting in a bracket on the right side of the base of the carven throne, the three of them made their way deeper into the caverns.
“It is a good thing that I sent Massimo to collect the rest of my paintings. It gave the both of you the time you needed to catch up with him,” Leonardo said, and Maria found her attention snapping back to the man for more than one reason.
“Massimo was the name of the man we encountered here?” she asked, prompting Leonardo to look back over his right shoulder at her, she and Ezio having surrounded the inventor so as to give him extra protection from anything else that might have appeared to threaten them; or else to keep their inventor friend from being led astray by his own curiosity, an outcome that was truly the more likely of the two.
Particularly given Leonardo’s demonstrated proclivities, which she and Ezio both knew well.
“Sí, his name was Ercole Massimo. A man I thought would be better than this,” Leonardo said, sounding more than a touch melancholy; Maria could fully sympathize.
There had indeed been those in her life who Maria had thought would prove themselves to be better than they ultimately had; Uberto Alberti was the first who came to mind.
“I am sorry to hear that, Leonardo,” Ezio said, as the three of them continued on their way.
Passing into a far more intricate room along the path that Leonardo’s efforts had revealed to them, Maria found that she was hardly surprised to see the statue that had been placed in the center point of the room they all stood in; she could have hardly expected anything less from a place that had been described a s a temple, of course. What did come as something of a surprise was the prism that said statue bore in an upraised hand, and all the more because said prism glowed with a brilliant radiance at that very moment.
Maria found herself wondering if there was a mechanism for directing sunlight down into this place, or if the light that she, Ezio, and Leonardo were all seeing was generated by some means hidden within the statue itself; after everything that Maria had already seen, she wouldn’t have been surprised in either case.
“Maria,” Leonardo called softly, softly gripping her right shoulder in a clear effort to draw her attention. “Are you well? Is this artifact troubling you? Ezio was concerned, so he and I thought it best that we leave this place as quickly as possible.”
“No,” Maria said, shaking her head, before she thought better and amended her statement. “I don’t think so, at least,” she said, shifting so that she could look at Leonardo more squarely while the pair of them spoke. “I was simply wondering how the light we’re seeing is generated, or if it somehow directed down here from the surface.”
“Sí, but in the latter case it would need to be amplified somehow,” Leonardo said, his agile mind clearly engaged with the new puzzle Maria had presented to him.
However, before the pair of them could become engaged with the mystery that the statue presented to them, Ezio came to meet up with them once more.
“I managed to open the next of the doors, if either of you are interested in moving on,” her last brother said, a gentle sort amusement clearly visible in his crinkled eyes and lopsided smile.
She and Leonardo shared a rather sheepish laugh, as the pair of them made their way into the room that Ezio’s efforts had revealed for them.
Said room turned out to be full of both the sight and the smell of ancient, stirring dust, something that prompted a sneeze from both her and Leonardo, and also served to drive her and Ezio to solve the puzzle within said room as quickly as they could; Maria since she had no desire to stay in such a musty place any longer than she absolutely had to, and Ezio for likely the same reasons. Maria found that she couldn’t even properly appreciate the intricate mechanisms of the clearly ancient puzzle that she and Ezio were solving.
Especially given the way that she had been driven to abandon her efforts after being overcome by a particularly harsh sneezing fit just as it seemed that she and Ezio would be able to solve the puzzle together.
The sight of the gears that she’d been catching glimpses of – while she’d been able to work without sneezing, of course – sparking as they rolled, causing yet another door to retract up into the ceiling, made Maria all the more grateful that the temple the three of them were making their way through had all been carved from stone. Aside from the marked tendency of both fabric and wood to rot over time – to say nothing of their propensity for being eaten by insects – Maria wouldn’t have wished to be surrounded by flammable things when it seemed that they were about to be working with fire.
Sure enough, the smell of oil – a marked improvement from the dust she’d been so uncomfortably aware of, if only for the fact that it didn’t make her want to sneeze – prompted her and Ezio to make their way up off of the ground. If they truly were going to be working with fire – or at least burning oil, which was a close enough second that Maria hardly thought such a distinction mattered – then the last thing either of them truly wanted was to find themselves close enough to catch fire while they worked.
As she and Ezio made their way to opposite sides of the room they were going to be working in – something that her last brother had done before with Aeon, a fact that had prompted a rather nostalgic-sounding laugh from Ezio before the pair of them had parted ways for a time – Maria found herself once more working to scale the first in a line of half-broken columns. All the while, she also found herself wondering what this place had looked like back during the days of those who had first built it.
The Pythagoreans, according to what Leonardo had said.
As she and Ezio released one stream of burning oil after another – four in all, which served to light up the four quadrants of some kind of labyrinth-looking design imbedded in the floor of the room where they were standing – Maria narrowed her eyes as she looked down at the symbols on the four quadrants as they all lit up in their turn. There was a strange sort of familiarity to them, she could at least admit, though unfortunately she could hardly say any more than that there was a part of her that recognized them.
She supposed that this, then, might have simply been one an echo of Aeon’s influence; something that the man in black had seen, some time or another, and passed down through whatever strange connection Aeon had forged with the Pieces of Eden.
“Leonardo, do you recognize these symbols?”
The sound of Ezio’s voice, closer than she’d honestly been expecting, startled Maria out of her contemplation, and she turned to regard her last brother and their mutual friend with the same curiosity she’d turned on the strange column with all of its carvings that the three of them were all now standing before.
“Sí, I’ve seen these symbols before. The Apple that Messer Aeon inhabits showed them to me, before all of us truly met,” Leonardo said, an eager smile on his face as he moved close enough to reach out and touch the column they had arranged themselves around. “However, they were not quite in this order,” the inventor added, reaching out so that he could twist and rearrange the symbols.
Maria had honestly been expecting something like that, simply given the way the column had been formed.
“Bene, let’s see what all of this hard work of ours was for, then,” she said, stepping between Leonardo and Ezio so that she could clap the both of their shoulders.
Chapter 446: One future’s past
Chapter Text
The three of them made their way to the latest door that had been opened by their combined efforts, and Maria could only hope that this would be the last door that she and Ezio would need to work at opening. As fascinating a journey as this had all been, learning just who the Cult of Hermes was and what exactly they professed to want, she was more than ready to leave. Fortunately, the room the three of them made their way into was indeed the room they had been searching for.
It seemed as though, whoever the Pythagoreans ultimately were, they had had at least some contact with Minerva and her people; Maria couldn’t help but wonder if any of those who had been involved with any of the various aspects of this place – whatever those had been, in the end – had ever had the chance to meet Aeon in person.
“Forty-three, thirty-nine, nineteen ‘N’; seventy-five, twenty-seven, forty-two ‘W’,” Leonardo read aloud, sounding about as honestly perplexed as Maria had found herself feeling. “The Cult of Hermes is wrong; the number is meaningless.”
~AC: Bro~
“To us, perhaps,” Ezio found himself saying, after a long moment of contemplative silence. “Perhaps this is meant for Desmond’s eyes,” he continued, finding himself once more wishing that he could consult with the Assassin who remained so paradoxically close and far at the same time.
Still, such a thing was hardly possible without Aeon’s presence to mediate whatever kind of connection that he and Desmond possessed, and Ezio wasn’t about to go and fetch such a perilous artifact as the Apple of Eden that Aeon had bound himself to; not merely to satisfy his own curiosity, and particularly not after spending so much time convincing the man in black that it would be best if he and his Apple remained in storage beneath Il Colosseo.
As the three of them made their way back up and out of the ancient temple they had discovered, Leonardo and Maria chattering away about their discoveries and what they might mean – with Ezio himself putting in the occasional word when he could find the space to slip one in edgewise – Ezio found his own thoughts turning toward Desmond once more. He’d already made up his mind to leave something more tangible than just words and memories to the young man he’d found himself connected to in such an odd way, and finding himself without many things to do at the moment – there had been no leads as to where Cesare Borgia had gone to ground, and the people he had tailing Micheletto continually reported that Cesare’s man seemed just as bereft as the rest of them when it came to finding Rodrigo Borgia’s son – Ezio had decided that he would begin his project while the matters that he wished for Desmond to know about were at least somewhat fresh in his mind.
The three of them made their way back to Leonardo’s workshop, and Ezio found himself stopping long enough to assist with the cleanup and see that little Maria and Leonardo had managed to get themselves settled in for a late lunch and some rest; Ezio extracted a promise that the both of them would rest, and another from Salaí that he would see that the both of them kept such a promise, something he made certain to do within sight and most importantly earshot of both his littlest sister and their mutual friend, since there was truly no rule that he could not tease the both of them while at the same time ensuring that they would be taken care of. Even if they did become absorbed in their speculations the way the both of them tended to do.
He would at least have Salaí’s assurance that they would be taken care of.
Now, to take care of that errand of mine, Ezio reflected, smiling as he made his way away from Leonardo’s restored workshop. Making his way to the Campagna District, in search of a shop where he would be able to buy a hardy journal so that he would be able to record his thoughts in a manner that would stand the test of whatever length of time it was that actually stood between him and Desmond.. Ezio once more found himself immersed in the crowds of people that made up the life and breath of Roma.
The people that he and the Brotherhood strove to protect, and yet were separated from by the very nature of the work they did.
It was one of the paradoxes that lay at the heart of their work, right alongside the fact that the Brotherhood worked to preserve life while at the same time being blooded killers themselves. The same paradox extended even to the Creed that all Assassins lived by – nothing is true, everything is permitted – a creed that called not for the kind of blind, unthinking obedience that the Templars demanded of their adherents – of their subordinates – but demanded reflection and a more philosophical bent.
Chapter 447: Unwelcome encounters
Chapter Text
While he was browsing the wares of another shop, having slowly made a list of the supplies that he wished to purchase – in addition to the journal that he’d already been interested in – Ezio caught sight of an all-too familiar uniform. Putting away the list he’d made, pausing only briefly to note the name and location of the store where he’d just been, Ezio moved quickly to shadow the pair of Templars he’d just spotted. There was the chance, however slim, that the men he’d just spotted would be the ones to lead him to Cesare.
Or at least give him some inkling as to where the man might have gone, since even their efforts to tail Micheletto hadn’t seemed to yield anything more than a dead end. Though there had been rumblings that Cesare’s man, deprived of his patron and hence a steady source of income for so long, was beginning to grow all the more rash and impatient…
Shaking those thoughts off, Ezio returned his attention to the pair of Templars he was following. Once he’d made it to the building where they presumably conducted their meetings and made their plans for the future, Ezio carefully concealed himself as he began looking for a way inside. It was something of a more difficult prospect than the other time’s he’d followed Templars, since without a crowd of ordinary citizens to blend into, Ezio found himself wishing for a moment that he was still in possession of Aeon’s Apple and so could call upon the man in black.
Firmly setting those thoughts aside, Ezio sternly reminded himself once again just why he had left Aeon’s Apple beneath the crumbling form of Il Colosseo.
The pair of Templars he was tracking moved into a nearby stronghold, and Ezio paused for a long moment to determine just what it was the pair of them were looking for. When it turned out to be some kind of treasure – something that would allow the Templars to continue with their work even in spite of the fact that they had lost the backing of their Borgia allies – Ezio made up his mind that he would claim it for the Brotherhood.
He simply needed to find out where such a treasure had been hidden.
Narrowing his eyes as he continued to follow in the wake of the Templars he had marked with his second-sight, Ezio once more found himself having to chase yet another of the men he’d set out to follow without being seen, in the wake of yet another misstep that allowed his quarry to catch sight of him. Once he’d caught up with the man he’d been pursuing, Ezio quickly finished him off, then departed quickly before he could draw the attention of any more of the Templars in the base where he’d pursued this man to.
Tucking the key safely away within his robes, Ezio turned and made for the Torre della Milizie, where this particular group of Templars had stored the money they had more than likely stolen from the people of Roma in one way or another.
Taking what he and the Brotherhood would need for their own use, Ezio packed the rest of the money into various bags so that he would be able to redistribute it to the people it had been taken from however long ago. Making his way back down into the tunnels that would lead him back into the stronghold beneath Isola Tiberina, Ezio called Lorenzo LaFalce and Ottavio Olivieri over to the entrance of the tunnel, informing the pair of them on the way about what the three of them would be doing.
Once the three of them had completed that particular task, Ezio thanked them and allowed himself to settle down for a moment.
Chapter 448: Great escape
Chapter Text
However, the talk he’d heard around the Campagna District – talk of a mine on the eastern edge of the district, one that was under the full control of the Templars; one that held yet more captives taken from among the people of Roma – let Ezio know that he was going to have another task set before him very soon. Resting while he had a quick meal, Ezio took out a map and studied it in an effort to find out just where the mine he was going to be infiltrating soon actually was.
Once he’d found it, and once he’d finished his meal, Ezio began planning just what route he would take to the mine, and just how he would be able to evacuate the people who had been taken captive and held in that place.
Cleaning up the remains of his meal, Ezio rearmed himself and quickly made his way back down the tunnels once again. Stepping out into the open air once again, Ezio turned and made for the eastern edge of the Campagna District. The sight of the Templar-owned mine – just out of sight of the town of Tivoli – as well as all of the innocent citizens that had been taken captive in that place, brought up the same, simmering rage that he’d found himself feeling so many times when confronted with the many and varied atrocities that the Templars seemed bound and determined to commit.
Truly, every time he’d thought that he’d seen every depravity that the Templars were capable of, it seemed as though one of them would think up some new, horrible idea to implement.
Making his way up through the mine, hopping from scaffolds, hanging platforms, and occasionally the channels that water would have been flowing down under better circumstances, Ezio paused for a moment at the sound of a gunshot. Narrowing his eyes, even as he called up his second-sight once more, Ezio found that there was only a single Templar overseeing the mine.
Still, the fact that the man possessed a pistol of his own could only serve to make matters more complicated than they would have otherwise been.
It was rather troublesome, particularly when Ezio was forced to reveal himself by a lack of cover in the mine, and the Captain – still wearing Borgia livery for reasons of either sentiment or necessity – set the very people he was aiming to liberate upon him. Throwing down a pair of smoke bombs to cover his departure, Ezio hurried after the Captain as he swiftly departed.
Ducking out of the way of another shot from the Captain’s pistol, Ezio drew and loaded his crossbow, crouching and keeping low to the ground so that it would be more difficult for the Captain to hit him.
After he’d managed to shoot the Captain and kill him at last, Ezio searched for the treasure cache that the Templar had been guarding. After taking what the Brotherhood could use from the cache, Ezio marked it and made for a pigeon coop so that he could send for some of his brother and sister Assassins so that they would be able to distribute it to the people of Tivoli.
The people there would be able to make the best use of it, truly.
After making his way back to Isola Tiberina once more, Ezio allowed himself to relax for as long as he could, knowing that he would soon need to return to the field once again. Considering the twin facts that Micheletto was still at large, and no one had yet managed to find hide nor hair of Cesare Borgia even after so much time, Ezio know that there was no way he would be able to avoid returning to battle against the Templars and their Borgia allies.
Even if Cesare didn’t return, there was every chance that Micheletto would come after them in an effort to avenge his master.
Chapter 449: Lone wolf’s last stand
Chapter Text
The sight of Machiavelli, making his way down into the stronghold that the Brotherhood had operated out of for the duration of their time spent in Roma, drew Ezio’s attention, and he found himself wondering just what they were going to be doing next. Or else, just what new developments had arisen while Ezio himself had been out and about on his self-appointed errands.
“It seems that Micheletto, deprived of the hope that his master will ever return to him, has returned to their shared home of Valencia,” the look on Machiavelli’s face as he spoke suggested that Micheletto’s current activities proceeded something far more sinister than simply the wish to end his life in peace upon his native soil, and when Ezio said just such a thing, a grim sort of good-humor lit Machiavelli’s aristocratic face. “Sí, it seems as though Micheletto intends to gather like-minded followers of Cesare’s in that place, and then return to raze Roma to the ground.”
Ezio sighed, rising from his seat even as he did so. “I expected it would be something like that.”
“Sí, and we should put a stop to it as soon as possible,” little Maria said, drawing both of their attention as she made her own way up to the table, standing amid himself and Machiavelli as the third point of their triangle. “One of Claudia’s contacts on the Napoli docks, a woman by the name of Camilla, passed along Micheletto’s intentions to depart on a carrack for Valencia as soon as the weather permitted.”
For a long moment – as he looked upon the woman that his littlest sister had become – Ezio found his brotherly instincts screaming at him to tell her to go back, tell her to keep herself with Claudia and the lingering memories of their mother; to keep herself safe, behind the walls of the Rosa in Fiore. Still, Ezio knew better than most that such a thing wouldn’t have done him a bit of good, and would truly only serve to annoy little Maria, and to provoke an argument that the three of them could ill-afford. And so, firmly shutting the worried brother back in his box, Ezio prepared once more to leave.
The threat that Micheletto Corella posed to them all was hardly about to resolve itself, after all.
Once the three of them had made their own way to the Napoli docks, Ezio found to his dismay that Micheletto had seemingly departed before him, aboard a carrack by the name of Marea di Alba, if the words of the girl he’d met on the docks were true. None of them had any reason to to disbelieve her, however, and they were soon enough on their way to Valencia.
The three of them had hired a caravel, since it would give them greater speed than the carrack that Micheletto had hired, but the weather – and in turn, the sea itself – swiftly turned against them. The waves were rough and choppy, and even in spite of all the skill of the sailors Machiavelli had pointed out to them, they encountered what felt like more than their fair share of squalls. All of which served to delay their journey, and further to dash any hope they might have had of intercepting Micheletto at sea.
Five days later, their battered, weather-beaten caravel finally made it to the port of Valencia, and Ezio found that their captain and the one Micheletto had hired were close friends. Such a thing worked to their advantage, of course, and they were soon able to determine that Micheletto had gone to take his rest at an inn by the name of the Lone Wolf. According to the two captains, the Lone Wolf wasn’t the best of places; though Ezio had hardly been expecting any better, considering Micheletto’s quality as a person.
Or rather, the pronounced lack of such.
He, little Maria, and Machiavelli were soon on their way, following the trail that Micheletto had left for them without even knowing it. And, Ezio found himself instructing little Maria about a new facet of his second-sight that seemed to have developed in the wake of either his contact with Aeon’s Apple, or else just as a natural extension of such a sight after he’d put it to so much use already. Soon enough, the three of them had come to the site of the Lone Wolf: a narrow street of tall tenement buildings that branched off of one of Valencia’s main thoroughfares.
The inn itself was a low, dark, squat sort of thing, one whose aged and weathered appearance was a stark contrast to the relative newness of the tenements surrounding it; and of the port town in general, beyond them.
The open door seemed almost calculated to beckon them in, and Ezio paused for a moment to allow little Maria and Machiavelli to catch up with him. This new situation that had been presented to them was so obviously a trap that it was almost insulting, and the three of them shared an expression of exasperation and a resigned sort of annoyance, before making their way inside. He and Machiavelli took up positions to the front and back, while little Maria brought up the middle.
However, when he looked back over his left shoulder, Ezio could see the plainly unimpressed expression on little Maria’s face, lit as it was by the blue radiance of a friend and ally.
Sure enough, the building had been meant as a trap; though whether it was meant to throw them off Micheletto’s trail or just to kill the three of them outright was a question that would remain unanswered. Once the three of them had managed to cut their way through the last of the men that Micheletto had set upon them, they were forced to settle in there for the night. They’d burned too much daylight, and spent too much energy, dealing with Micheletto’s men.
It was a frustrating turn of events, but at this point it couldn’t really be helped.
Chapter 450: Slow convergence
Chapter Text
Once the three of them had rested and refreshed themselves as well as they could, in a place like the Lone Wolf, Ezio found that he was all the more eager to return to the hunt for Micheletto once more. Not only because such a man was dangerous on his own, but because they could simply not allow him to carry through with the plans he had clearly been forming in his mind. Truly, they couldn’t have allowed anyone with such plans the time they would need to carry them out.
Following tales of where Micheletto had gone, Ezio found himself more than slightly surprised to find himself, Machiavelli, and little Maria all returning to the port of Valencia once more.
When he considered Micheletto’s desires more deeply, however, Ezio supposed that such a thing made sense; the port of Valencia would be the fastest way for the forces that he intended to gather to him to depart for Roma.
~AC: Bro~
During the course of the next month, while the three of them settled themselves within the port city of Valencia in order to keep tabs on the forces that Micheletto was gathering to himself, Maria found herself more and more curious about just how it was that he was even gathering them to him in the first place. There couldn’t be that many people who wished to burn Roma to the ground, as opposed to conquering it or occupying the city-state with their own forces. Still, given everything she’d heard about the man, Micheletto didn’t seem the type to tell those kind of truths when he didn’t need to.
Or any kind of truths, really.
They’d received word that Ferdinand and Isabella – convinced that the army Micheletto was gathering in Cesare’s name was meant to conquer not only Napoli, but all of Italia in turn – were sending troops of their own into Valencia. However, the simple fact remained that none of their troops were going to arrive in time to deal with Micheletto and the men he was gathering around him. The three of them, therefore, were going to need to handle Cesare’s man, as well as the forces that he had gathered around him.
Chapter 451: Raining fire
Chapter Text
In light of that, it was all the more pleasing when they received a package from Leonardo; one containing fifteen small bombs, meant to aid them with the task they were soon to be undertaking.
Maria was pleased to know that Leonardo still kept them in his thoughts, even though it was plain for anyone to see that he didn’t quite approve of the situation they had gotten themselves into, and in spite of the fact that he had personally chosen to remain behind in Roma while she, Machiavelli, and Ezio had made the journey to Valencia to deal with the man at last. Moving in under the cover of darkness, pausing only long enough to dispatch the men who had been set out to guard the camp that Micheletto had established for himself, Maria couldn’t help the thought that all of this was too simple.
Yes, she was fully aware of just what kind of madness could possess a man who had been deprived of so much – she’d seen some shade of it, when Father, Federico, and Petruccio had been murdered by Rodrigo Borgia and his Templar allies back in Firenze so long ago – but… She could hardly have explained it to anyone who might have asked, not when she was so focused on dealing with the man that she and the last of her brothers had come to deal with at last, but the thought remained firmly in the back of her mind. Nothing, in her experience, was ever truly as simple as all of this.
Sure enough, when the three of them moved to confront Micheletto at last, the madman revealed that the rumors he had been spreading – that he intended to return to Roma at the head of an army of fanatical Borgia devotees and raze it to the ground in memory of the man he had served with dedication all his life – had simply been meant to draw the attention of the Brotherhood as a whole. True, Micheletto had been hoping to draw in more than just the three of them when he’d set out his bait, but the look on his face when he spotted Ezio in particular…
It was clear that Micheletto, mad dog that he was, would be fully willing to settle for the death of her last brother in place of the destruction of the Assassin Brotherhood as a whole.
~AC: Bro~
Micheletto’s ranting and raving had driven off the remainder of his supporters, by the time the madman had rushed him with the burning torch he’d been brandishing. He’d sent little Maria and Machiavelli both away, telling them to give what aid they could to the men attempting to contain the blazes that Micheletto had been setting. It was more than plain to see that Micheletto, deprived of the man he had served and the position that such service had granted him, intended for the both of them to burn upon the same pyre.
It was madness, pure and simple, but Ezio could understand – if not sympathize – just what had driven Micheletto to such an end.
Still, the fact of the matter remained that Ezio was not about to simply let himself be killed by a man like Micheletto. He had too many things still to do, and he was not about to leave little Maria to take up all of the responsibilities that leadership of the Brotherhood would press upon her all alone. Narrowing his eyes against the flame and smoke surrounding them, what there was of it that hadn’t been blown away by the winds raised by that very same fire, Ezio raised his sword once again.
Micheletto fought like a man who wished to die, and while that did make it a great deal easier to come to grips with him, there was still the matter of the environment that had been turned against him. The heat, hazy air, and the thick smoke still hanging around them, made things far more difficult than they would have otherwise been. Still, Ezio had hardly gone such a long time and faced so many dangers, simply to lose his life at the hands of a man like Micheletto.
Once he’d dispatched Micheletto at last, Ezio hurried away from the fire as quickly as he could. Out of the corner of his eye, as he passed the dying form of Cesare’s right-hand man, Ezio found himself imagining for a moment that he’d caught sight of Aeon’s hooded form, moving within the flames as easily as the wraith he truly was. More than likely, it was simply a trick of the fire, his own steadily increasing fatigue, and the wish that he hadn’t truly been able to leave aside.
The wish that he’d retained the services of their mysterious man in black, even up to this late stage.
Still, he wasn’t about to begin allowing himself to regret the choices he’d made so long after he’d made them, and particularly not when it had to do with the Apple that Aeon had inhabited for such a long time that it seemed almost to have become a part of him. There was clearly something about the Apple that gave it a strange hold on his mind. Ezio found himself wondering if Aeon knew about such a thing, or if the fact that he had bound himself to the artifact was enough to protect him from such a thing.
Or, conversely, if it was the hold that all such artifacts held over each and every one of the Treasure Guardians had been what drove Aeon to bind himself to the Apple in the first place.
Chapter 452: Fire and Shadow
Chapter Text
Reuniting with Machiavelli and little Maria once again, Ezio allowed himself to rest once the three of them had boarded a ship and were on their way back to Roma once more. During their return voyage, the weather was at least more cooperative than it had been when they’d been pursuing Micheletto in an effort to come to grips with him before he could have enacted the plans that his deranged mind had actually formed in the wake of losing his master.
When they finally made it back into Roma again, the first place that Ezio made for was the Brotherhood’s hidden headquarters on Isola Tiberina. There had clearly been some work done while they were gone, since it looked as though the building standing above the Brotherhood’ s headquarters was in the process of being refurbished. He and little Maria were quick to join in their efforts, though Ezio found that he couldn’t quite manage as much work as the younger members of the Brotherhood.
Once the work had been finished at last, Ezio found that it was his forty-eighth birthday. It was strange to consider, the fact that he’d even been able to notice such a thing without having it pointed out to him, since the work that he and the rest of the Brotherhood had been doing in Roma had taken up so much of his time for so long. Still, the thought that he could finally rest enough to notice such an occasion on his own was a pleasant one.
He, little Maria, Machiavelli, and Leonardo had all gathered within the fully refurbished building that stood sentinel above the Brotherhood’s underground headquarters, connected as it was to the labyrinth of tunnels that lay beneath the streets of Roma. It truly did remind him more than a little of his time in Venezia, working with Antonio and the rest of his thieves. Maybe he was just becoming sentimental.
So many things had happened since the day he’d first left Firenze, after all.
Chapter 453: Two roads, diverged
Chapter Text
“I have to say, Ezio, this is a very small sort of birthday party,” Leonardo said, looking around at little Maria, Machiavelli, and then back to him once more. “Now, if you had let me design something for you, a real pageant-”
Ezio chuckled, cutting into Leonardo’s enthusiasm before he could become carried away by it. “Save that for two years’ time,” he said, as this was merely his forty-eighth birthday; not anything particularly special, in the grand scheme of things. “However, I did have something more in mind than a celebration when I invited you here, Leonardo.”
“What is on your mind, Ezio?”
“We wish to extend an invitation to you,” Machiavelli said, settling down at the table where the rest of them had gathered for their small celebration.
“Another?” Leonardo asked, his eyes lighting up with the familiar curiosity that Ezio had seen so many times. “Where are you intending to go this time?”
“It’s not quite that kind of invitation, Leo,” he said, chuckling softly at the sheer enthusiasm that he could see all but radiating from his old friend. “I wish for you to join us; to become an Assassin, yourself.”
“I’m glad that the bombs I sent to you worked out so well as they did,” Leonardo said, his expression becoming far more solemn; Ezio had the distinct feeling that he knew just what kind of answer his old friend was going to give him. “While I will continue supporting your efforts for as long as I can, and continue keeping your secrets, besides,” Leonardo sighed, though he didn’t seem quite as solemn as before. “Still, I must travel a different path than all of you. A solitary one, that will take me to many different places.”
“I’m glad to still have your support,” he said, settling down at the table in the remaining spot that had been left open. “Though I suppose that none of us could persuade you to reconsider?”
“No,” Leo said shaking his head, though the smile on his face was just as kindly as Ezio had ever seen it. “I shall continue to support your efforts in any way that I can, but I am going to be leaving for Milano soon.”
“You intend to return to Milano?”
“Sí, and from there I intend to settle in Amboise.”
“You mean to settle in Francia?” he asked, curious; Leonardo had hardly mentioned the country at all, much less expressed any kind of interest in leaving Italia in the first place.
“Principe Francis has offered me a generous patronage,” Leonardo said.
Little Maria chuckled softly. “Sí, I suppose that does make more sense, considering your present circumstances, Leo.”
“I suppose this is where we part company,” Ezio said, feeling a profound sense of both melancholy and nostalgia washing over him at once.
“What do you mean?” Leonardo asked.
“I am going to return to Firenze; I still have work to do there,” Machiavelli said, rising from the table they had all previously been seated at, a wry, self-amused smile emerging on his aristocratic face. “There’s still the matter of that book I intend to write.”
“And, what do you intend to call this hypothetical book of yours?” he asked, feeling a wry sort of amusement, himself.
“The Prince,” Machiavelli answered, quickly enough that Ezio thought he might have had such a title in mind for some time.
The four of them said their final goodbyes not long after Machiavelli had made his pronouncement, and for a moment Ezio had found himself turning his path almost instinctively back toward the tunnel entrance. Still, he and little Maria were no longer in danger from the guards at large within Roma, considering their close connections with the current Pope. Taking a ferry would not, therefore, expose the pair of them to unnecessary danger.
And also, the chance to breathe air that didn’t smell like dust was a more than welcome one, after spending such a long time down in tunnels and catacombs.
Chapter 454: Treasure seeker
Chapter Text
When he and little Maria had found their seats aboard the modest ferry, at ease among the gentle rocking of the watercraft, Ezio found himself wondering what was going to happen next. Not simply during this day, or even the next week or month; there were clearly matters that would need attending to, even with the last of the Borgia supporters routed. There was still the Templars so deal with.
Still some dangers, to those who had chosen to take up the cause of the Assassins; those who had chosen to fight for humanity from the shadows.
Once the pair of them had returned to the Rosa in Fiore once more, Ezio found himself called to a meeting with Mario. Apparently, there was something else that Father had been looking into; another thing having to do with the Brotherhood that the both of them had served in their turn. When he made his way into the office where his uncle had settled himself, looking over the many and varied documents that Father had gathered during the course of his life.
At least, those that had pertained to the Brotherhood and their struggle against the Templars and those who served their cause, in any case.
When he settled down at the desk next to Mario, his uncle carefully handed him a pair of folded letters. Both of them were weathered and delicate with age, and so Ezio made certain to handle them with the utmost care and attention. The first of the letters, the one that Father had written himself, gave Ezio the general idea of what he was going to be looking for next.
Apparently, there was still something of interest within the walls of the Brotherhood’s Syrian stronghold; the place where the Assassins had first emerged into the world.
The second of the pages, however, was clearly one that Father had translated, rather than one that the man had written himself:
I have spent days with the Artifact, now. Or has it been weeks? Months? The others come, from time to time, offering food or distractions; however, while I know in my heart of hearts that I should detach myself from this artifact, leave aside these studies, I find it more and more difficult to resume my normal duties. Malik has been supportive, as ever, but I can tell that my old friend is becoming impatient.
Still, I must understand the workings of the Apple of Eden; not only for its own sake, but also to ensure that Alnesr is protected from its influence. To say nothing of the man in black…
However, the artifact itself carries its own hazards; its function is almost painfully straightforward: dominion, the ability to exert control over the thoughts, and seemingly in Alnesr’s case the actions, of whatever unfortunate person is the focus of whoever possesses it. However, the method that the artifact employs is rather fascinating. The Apple is, as Al Mualim once said, temptation incarnate.
Those who find themselves subjected to its glow are promised all that they desire. The artifact asks only one thing in return: complete and total obedience. And, I find myself wondering if that was the lure that the man in black succumbed to; if he indeed found himself offered an eternal life, at the cost of his very Self.
And then, I find myself remembering my own moment of weakness when confronted by Al Mualim – the man who had once been my own Mentor, and a man who was more of a father to me than any other – the man who had revealed himself as my greatest enemy. Not only that, but he had also struck at Alnesr in a way that I would not have believed possible if I’d not witnessed such a thing for myself.
And, even as I write, I find that I still wonder how such a thing was possible at all.
Still, the fact remains that I vanquished Al Mualim’s phantoms, in the end; I restored my self-confidence and sent my former mentor from this world, and in doing so I saved Alnesr from whatever fate had been intended for him, as well.
However, even now I find myself wondering what truly became of me in the process. Here I sit, absorbed in the study of the artifact I swore to destroy from the beginning. I sense that the artifact is more than a mere weapon; more than simply a device for controlling the minds of men. Or is that simply the artifact attempting to offer me my own fondest desire?
Is is simply the artifact offering me knowledge, in exchange for my own submission? Truly, I have no way of knowing; as I have no way of truly knowing if the man in black that I glimpsed within the light is yet another of Al Mualim’s phantoms, or something else entirely…
There was nothing more to be read after that, and even though the parchment that he’d been given to read seemed fairly new, Ezio knew that the words upon it were far older.
“So, at the very least, we can say that we know something more about Messere Aeon than Altaïr himself knew, back when he was writing this,” Ezio said, finding himself attempting to lighten what had become a rather somber mood.
“Sí, so it would seem,” Uncle Mario said, smiling slightly as the pair of them sat, studying the words that both Father and Altaïr had left behind to guide them.
In the end, Ezio decided that he would take little Maria and see if he could find out anything more about the Brotherhood that they had all served in their turn from the place where it all began. To see if there was indeed anything more concealed within the ancient stronghold; to see if Masyaf was still a place where they would be welcome.
Chapter 455: Expected farewells
Chapter Text
When Ezio had come to the Rosa in Fiore to speak with her, Maria hadn’t been entirely certain of what her last brother had truly been aiming to find when he sought her out, but the prospect of discovering even more about the Brotherhood that all of their family had been a part of – or, at least those that Father had told her about, back when the pair of them had been able to speak with one another – was a prospect that she’d no problem at all agreeing to. Truly, even if Ezio hadn’t been entirely in favor of her coming along, Maria would have strongly insisted.
Very strongly, if Ezio had attempted to dissuade her from coming.
However, there was now the matter of Primo Penna to consider. He was one of those who had chosen to stay among the ranks of the Brotherhood even after the threat of the Borgia had been dealt with, but his motives were clearly more aimed at impressing her – and by proxy Ezio, since her last brother was both the Mentor of their branch of Assassins, as well as the closest male relative that the man had had the chance to meet.
At least for more than the handful of moments he’d spent with Uncle Mario, anyway.
Speaking to the man about their impending departure proved to be more than a little interesting, though less troublesome than she had been concerned about. It turned out that Primo, having had the time to consider their respective situations during the time that she and Ezio had spent searching for Micheletto, had decided that it would be best if he established himself before dedicating his full attention to courting her in earnest. It was something that Maria found herself more than slightly thankful for.
Not only because Primo had proven himself to be genuine in his affections, but also because Maria felt that she still needed time to sort through her own feelings. Being at the forefront of a campaign, the way she and Ezio had so often found themselves, was hardly the kind of place where thoughts of romance were given the time they needed to bloom.
As she and Ezio prepared for their journey to Masyaf, they also made a point to make personal contact with their fellow Assassins so that they would be able to say their farewells in person, as well as to ascertain just what kind of information the others – Niccolò in particular – might have about the fate of Masyaf in the present day. Stopping off in Ostia, the pair of them paid a visit to Bartolomeo and Pantasilea.
Bartolomeo looked even more like a bear than he had the last time she’d seen him, though it was clear he’d taken to food and drink that much more in the absence of a battle to throw himself into, or a campaign to run. More than that, Maria found herself slightly surprised to meet the family that Bartolomeo had begun raising. Perhaps it was simply because Father had always and would always be the first thing on her mind when she thought of family, or else because of the man Bartolomeo had shown himself to be on every occasion, but she’d found herself a bit startled to think that the bluff mercenary was actually raising a family.
Three boys, and a girl that had just joined them a month before she and Ezio had arrived.
Perhaps it had been Pantasilea’s idea, or perhaps there was indeed something of the family man in Bartolomeo’s temperament, and he’d simply grown into it over the years. Maria didn’t know, and there would be little time to find out while she and Ezio were undertaking what would clearly be a long search for whatever secrets remained within the Brotherhood’s ancient fortress at Masyaf. So, Maria put away her curiosity, and focused on the preparations that she and Ezio were going to be making.
The next place Ezio insisted on going was Firenze, even in spite of the unhappy memories that lingered for the both of them in such a place.
Niccolò was there to meet them nearly as soon as she and Ezio had left their carriage behind, and certainly before either of them had had the chance to begin looking for a place to stay for the night; it was clear that Niccolò had more than maintained the network of friends and informants that she and Ezio had worked to establish while the pair of them had been working together within Firenze. Like as not, he’d even been working to expand them.
It seemed like the kind of thing he would do, after all.
Still, as seemed to be the way of things in the home that she and Ezio had been forced to abandon such a long time ago, Niccolò himself came to deliver them the news that Caterina Sforza had been killed in a battle for her beloved Forli. As of yet, he’d been unable to determine just who was responsible for such a horrible thing, but Niccolò agreed with the both of them when they said that it was more than likely to be Templars. The remaining supporters of the Borgia had long since fractured and gone into hiding.
Still, even though she was sad to learn what had become of another of her friends – no matter how distant the pair of them had physically been from one another, Maria had still held Caterina within her heart – had been lost to the eternal-seeming conflict between the Brotherhood and the Templars, Maria knew that there were still things that she and Ezio would need to do. She would make the time to mourn later; for the moment there were travel preparations that needed to be made.
Once she and Ezio had finished their meeting with Niccolò, the three of them having caught the others up on what had been happening in their respective protectorates, she and Ezio said their farewells once again.
Chapter 456: The road to Masyaf
Chapter Text
There was still shopping to do, and after that would come packing for the journey. After she and Ezio had departed for Napoli, having chartered themselves a ship that would leave from the southern port of Bari, they found themselves met by a very familiar, bearish sort of man. Bartolomeo had insisted on escorting her and Ezio to the port, and Maria found herself warmed by the gesture. It wasn’t something that the pair of them had strictly needed, considering their own skill in combat, but it was a kindly gesture all the same.
Once they had arrived in the port, laden with their provisions and the parchment for the letters that Claudia had insisted that the both of them write to her while they were away – including the journal that Ezio had begun while they had still been in Roma together; something that he’d said was for Desmond, far in the future as that young man seemed to be – Maria found herself all the more curious about just what this next journey of theirs would bring.
She also found herself wondering if she and Ezio would have the chance to meet up with Aeon again; truly, she doubted that Ezio would have been so concerned about what the future would think of him if he’d not been given the opportunity to speak across time the way that their mysterious man in black seemed to do so easily.
~AC: Rev~
Once he and little Maria had arrived at the port, Ezio thanked Bartolomeo for his aid and the loan of his people, then quickly rushed to the freighter so that he and little Maria would be able to take advantage of the outgoing tide on this next leg of their voyage. The freighter itself was named the Anaan, a part of the Turkish merchant fleet under the management of Piri Reis and his family, and while their journey wasn’t likely to be entirely comfortable, this leg would only take them to Corfu.
As he and little Maria settled down in their shared cabin, Ezio found himself wondering if he would have the chance to meet Piri Reis in person; he also hoped that, if such a thing were indeed to happen, the man would have since forgotten or forgiven that time when his own brother Assassins had been pressed to appropriate some of Piri’s maps from him.
They were welcomed in Corfu by the mayor himself; a fellow Italian, though the man himself was rather rotund and preferred to go by the name of Spyridon, though he’d introduced himself to her and Ezio under the name Franco. And truly, if there was one thing that could be said in favor of her odd appearance, it was that it kept Franco from attempting to court her openly. Though he did seem to act more kindly disposed toward her in particular.
Maria tried to put those thoughts out of her mind, whenever she would find herself focused on them for too long.
It wasn’t long, happily enough, before she and Ezio were setting off again, this time bound for Athens. They were still traveling with the crew of the Anaan, though she’d been informed that they would be meeting up with the brother-in-law of their current captain once the ship had docked at Athens. She’d also been informed of the suspicions that they would find themselves accosted by pirates on this voyage.
Considering their present cargo, Maria had found herself agreeing entirely too easily with her last brother’s assessment.
And so, it had been with a grim sense of anticipation that she and Ezio once more boarded the Anaan, each of them armed with a weighted scimitar that Ezio had purchased for their use. Sure enough, it turned out once more that her last brother’s instincts had steered them right, and a pair of ships, filled with Berber corsairs, attempted to ambush the Anaan just south past the isle of Zante.
The battle itself was slightly more hectic than any of those Maria had found herself taking part in before, though she suspected that a great deal of that was due to the confined space of the boat, as well as the choppy seas they were traveling on; though she expected the fire that someone had set was no help to anyone but the pirates.
Both of her arms were sore and just beginning to go numb, when the Berber pirates surrounding them broke and began fleeing back to their own ships. Firmly grateful for the reprieve, even as she found herself curious to know what had caused such a thing, Maria turned her gaze to follow the path that the last of them had taken on their flight. Smiling tiredly at the sight of both ships on fire – something she suspected she’d find that Ezio was at the bottom of, if she were to ask her brother when the pair of them finally made their way back to a place where they could rest – Maria allowed her arms to fall back to her sides.
One of the sailors, a man whose name she was too tired to remember at the moment, came to fetch her sword, offering to clean it in thanks for what she had done for him and his fellow sailors. Maria thanked him for the offer, pausing for a moment to ask him if he would be willing to return it to the cabin she and Ezio were sharing while she went to find her last brother. The man was kind enough to promise, and Maria offered him her thanks before she went to find Ezio.
And then, after that, she promised herself that she would take a long moment to rest.
Chapter 457: Changing tides
Chapter Text
Once he caught sight of little Maria again, Ezio allowed the last of the tension that had gripped him in the wake of the attack on the Anaan to fade to the back of his mind. Embracing his littlest sister tightly, Ezio turned his attention back to the captain who had gotten them so far. As it turned out, the man insisted on returning the fee that Ezio had paid for his and little Maria’s passage aboard the Anaan. He said it was in recognition of what the pair of them had done for the man and his crew.
And, though Ezio found himself slightly discomfited to be rewarded for something that came so naturally to him, Ezio found that the captain was far more loathe to allow such a thing to pass unrewarded. And, once he and little Maria had managed to make their way to Athens, Ezio found that Ma’Mun and his family were entirely too eager to celebrate their accomplishments, as well. Though the look on little Maria’s face when one of Ma’Mun’s older daughters propositioned her was more than a little amusing.
Nothing truly came of it, of course.
Heavy, unseasonable storms kept the pair of them from departing on the next leg of their journey until spring – something that Ezio found himself less than impressed by, though he wished more than a few times he could have borrowed some of little Maria’s sardonic amusement at times such as those – but once they had, Ezio found himself more than a bit relived that their method of transportation was to be more heavily-armed than the smaller Anaan. The Qutaybah was a warship; a four-masted kogge, armed with twenty cannon – ten to each side – on her lower decks, as well as additional gun emplacements on her fore and aft decks.
If nothing else, such a ship was bound to prove a stronger deterrent to pirates than the name of Piri Reis alone.
The Qutaybah meant to take the pair of them to Cyprus – dangerous as such a place was, both to those who had pledged themselves to the Creed, as well as those who had been marked by the Pieces of Eden as one of their guardians – as they put underway, they once more found themselves assailed by high winds, forced nearly off their course entirely, before the Qutaybah managed to limp into the port of Larnaka. Ezio wasted little time, first setting himself and little Maria up in the best accommodations he could, and then moving to prepare for the next leg of their journey.
The accommodations turned out to be a great deal simpler; the agent Ma’Mun had spoken of, a man by the name of Bekir, was more than happy to accommodate the pair of them in as lavish a style as Ezio would allow.
Still, there remained the matter of getting their journey underway again, of traveling to the port of Tortosa – the port that would bring him into Syria itself, mere steps from Masyaf itself – and that was where Ezio once more found the troubles he’d been hoping to leave behind. It seemed as though Bekir, having once more mistaken him and little Maria for Venetians, thought that there might have been a chance of either of them speaking in their own favor to authorities from Venezia.
As though any of them would be kindly disposed toward a pair of travelers from Firenze.
Still, it wasn’t as though Ezio found himself with nothing to do, since there was still the map – produced by Piri Reis, and hence one of the best specimens of such that anyone could have asked for – that had been gifted to him by Ma’Mun when the pair of them had parted company for what Ezio suspected would be the last time. Once he’d settled down at a table with said map spread out before him, however, Ezio found that there was something drew his attention to Limassol.
There was something about that place, something that drew his attention even above the urgency of his and little Maria’s present quest for Masyaf; and so, while little Maria stayed back at the apartment to ensure that their travel preparations would remain on course, Ezio made the journey to Limassol so that he might find out just what it was that had drawn his attention in such a place.
As he walked among the desiccated, decaying remains of the castle that had once stood on the grounds he’d found himself drawn so strangely to, Ezio found himself moved to delve beneath the overgrown, wildflower-strewn grounds of the ruin. He’d seen, on and off, those who lived in surrounding towns watching him as he delved into the ruin, clearly wondering what a stranger might have been hoping to find in such a place.
Truly, he wouldn’t have been able to tell anyone who asked, either.
Still, as he descended into the remnants of what had clearly been a vast archive, Ezio found himself asking that question more and more. Truly, it was beginning to seem as though nothing more than rats could be found in such a place, and as there was nothing that a rat could tell him, Ezio decided to leave. Little Maria would be concerned, if he were stay in such a place chasing ghosts for so long. During the course of his return to the apartment where he and his littlest sister were staying, however, it came to him that Cyprus had once been the property of the Templars.
Perhaps it had been Altaïr’s own recollections, pulling Ezio along to the old archive that had once been hidden within the ruins of the castle that he’d been drawn to explore.
When he did return to little Maria, it was to find that she’d been all but butting heads with a rather stubborn Venetian governor by the name of Domenico Garofoli. The man himself resembled a thin, grey pencil dressed in the rags of a scarecrow, and for all the finery of his dress and manners, Ezio could tell that he and little Maria would find no help from the man. Even considering the favor that their actions had won them, during their journey out this way to begin with.
As seemed to be the case in more often than not, he and little Maria would have to look out for themselves.
And so, the pair of them made their way down to the docks, under the cover of night where they would at least be less apt to be recognized. Their search for a vessel that would take the pair of them along on the next part of their journey, however, refused to bear fruit for the first five nights of their search. And then, on the one night that they did manage to find a vessel that the pair of them would be able to use on the next leg of their journey, he and little Maria were once more forced to fight in order to lay claim to it.
The simple problem facing them was, in lieu of finding a ship and crew to take them anywhere, they’d been forced to take one; the Night Watch, naturally, had taken exception to that.
Finding himself once more embroiled in battle with yet another group of guards – though these, he hoped, could be counted on to have no association with the Borgia – Ezio found himself in uncomfortably close proximity to the man that had led the attack on the Anaan while he and little Maria were attempting to make their way to Larnaka in the first place. It was troublesome, but Ezio supposed he could hardly have expected different, when he’d found himself driven to the kind of desperation that created men like the one behind him.
Once the three of them had managed to lay claim to the jetty they’d been fighting for possession of, Ezio continued to maintain the vigilance that had carried him and little Maria through their battle with the guards back on the docks; this man, like all allies of convenience, was not to be trusted lightly.
“Well, I suppose having my debt to you paid is at least worth the annoyance of having the both of you as passengers,” the man, who’d fought at their backs after tasting more than a bit of Ezio’s steel, said with an expression of wry annoyance on his salt-weathered face.
“Where are we?” he asked, even as he felt little Maria beginning to tend to the wounds he’d gained in combat, few as they were.
“At sea,” the man said, seemingly unimpressed with either the conversation or just the pair of them in general; it wasn’t easy to tell, since he’d seemed to be in a dour sort of mood since the end of the battle. “You wrecked my ships, curse you,” the man said, and Ezio realized just where it was that the nagging sense of familiarity he’d been pushing aside had actually come from. “I’d been stalking the Anaan for days; that prize would have taken me back to Egypt a rich man. Instead, thanks to you, they made a galley slave of me. Me!”
“Egypt?” Ezio asked; if the man expected an apology, he was going to be waiting for a long time. “You’re not a Berber, then?”
“Berber be damned,” the man said, looking somehow even more unimpressed than he had previously. “I’m a Mamluk, though I may not look like one, dressed in these rags. Soon as we get there, I’m treating myself to a woman, a good plate of kofta, and a good suit of clothes.”
As the three of them became more comfortable with each other, with the pirate even introducing himself as Al-Scarab, Ezio found himself more than a little bemused at just how his and little Maria’s fortunes seemed to turn on the toss of a proverbial coin. He probably wouldn’t have believed anyone who told him, back when he’d first begun this long journey of his, that he would have been traveling with a man like Al-Scarab – a self-admitted pirate, who’d previously attacked him – Ezio didn’t know just how he would have responded.
Still, as fickle as his fortune had proven itself to be, Ezio was committed; he was bound and determined to find out just what manner of lessons the past could teach him.
Chapter 458: Seeing Shadows
Chapter Text
Once they’d stayed in Acre long enough to rest, refresh themselves, and restock the supplies that had been depleted by their journey, Maria found herself more than a little pleased to be leaving. It was not that she had found Al-Scarab’s extended family inhospitable, of course; quite the opposite, since thanks to the man’s oft-embellished tales, more than a few of them had been asking Ezio just what kind of dowry he was interested in. Considering their present circumstances, and the fact that she’d no true interest in any of the men attempting to court her essentially by proxy, Ezio had always been careful to let them down gently.
It hadn’t stopped her from semi-seriously threatening to sneak spiders into every one of Al-Scarab’s meals for the trouble, of course.
Once the pair of them had parted company with Al-Scarab and his extended family – the man seeming much more kindly disposed to her and Ezio after so long spent alongside the pair of them – Maria took what time she could to rest. She also made certain to ride herd on Ezio, when her last brother would become too absorbed in either his maps or his writing. Yes, it was good that he was keeping his promise to maintain contact with Claudia – to assure her that the pair of them were doing well, and so to keep her from worrying overmuch when she had her own matters to attend to – but it would do them no good if he allowed himself to neglect his health.
Or rather, if she allowed him to do such.
~AC: Rev~
Chuckling under his breath, as he settled down at his desk with the plate of sliced chicken little Maria had brought for him, Ezio turned his attention back to the letter he’d been composing for Claudia:
My dearest little sister Claudia:
Maria and I have been here in Acre for a week now, safe and in high spirits – though I think that if either of us hear one more marriage proposal, more than a few people will be getting a long lecture – still, we’re prepared for the worst. The men and women who have sheltered us here have also brought warning that the road to Masyaf is overrun by mercenaries and bandits not native to this land. What this could mean, I hesitate to guess.
More than a few of those marriage proposals, in fact, came after we declared our intent to travel to Masyaf, and may well have been these peoples’ way of protecting the both of us.
When I first set out from Roma ten months ago – and little Maria insisted on coming, as she so often does – I did so with a singular purpose: to discover what our father could not. In the letter you know of, written a year before my birth, Father makes a single mention of a library hidden beneath the floors of Altaïr’s former castle. A sanctum full of invaluable wisdom.
But, what will we find when we arrive? Who will be there to greet us? A host of eager Templars, as I most strongly fear? Or only the whistling of a cold and lonely wind? Masyaf has not been home to the Assassins for almost three hundred years now. Does it remember us? Are we still welcome?
Ah, I find myself weary of this fight, Claudia. Not because I am tired, but because our struggle seems to move in one direction: towards chaos. Today I have more questions than answers. This is why I have come so far; and why, I know, that little Maria continues to travel with me: so that we may find clarity. To find the wisdom left behind by the Great Mentor, so that we may come to better understand the nature of this battle, as well as our place in it. And, I also know that little Maria is curious to know if he wrote anything more about Alnesr, the Assassin who seemed to share at least some of her circumstances.
She’s also told me that she is curious to find out if Alnesr left behind any writings of his own, as well.
Should anything happen to us, Claudia, should our skills fail us, or our ambitions lead us astray, do not seek revenge on our behalf, but strive to continue the search for truth. Our stories are only two of many thousands, and the world will not suffer much if they end too soon.
Signing the letter he’d just finished, Ezio sighed deeply as he stretched. Sealing Claudia’s letter as he prepared to depart from Al-Scarab’s family home for the last time, Ezio made his way to meet up with little Maria and the big pirate the both of them had come to know so well during the duration of their stay. Al-Scarab had said that he wished to give the pair of them a final parting gift, and Ezio for one was curious to know what such a thing might have been.
He had his suspicions, yes, but he still wished to be certain.
Once the three of them had parted company for the last time, riding on well-provisioned, tough little Arab horses – three of them, one for him, one for little Maria, and the last for the remainder of the provisions that had been given over to them – Ezio considered just what their next destination was to be. The both of them were going to be making for the remnants of Masyaf castle, a journey that would take them through what had once been the Crusader Kingdom of Jerusalem.
A journey that might very well bring them into direct conflict with the Templars, considering their origins among the Crusader Knights.
The journey itself, however, provided more than its fair share of hazards even without an encounter with the ancient enemies of the Brotherhood. The countryside had been overrun by bandits for some time, at least according to everything he’d heard – and everything he was coming to know, traveling these roads alongside little Maria – and as there was no longer any organized forces to protect the people who lived this far out of the way, not even the Templars themselves, the remnants of mercenary companies had taken to banditry in their efforts to survive.
Bare survival seemed to be their only aim, their only consideration in minds that seemed to have gone completely feral.
When he and little Maria had taken their leave of a small village, where he had saved a woman from rape, torture, and likely death – while little Maria had made certain that her attackers would never escape to warn their remaining brothers of what was soon to be coming for them – Ezio found himself wondering what would happen to this place in their absence. Even clearing out the bandit camp as they had – leaving the corpses out for the carrion birds and other scavengers to feed on – would do little more than buy time for these people. People who already seemed to be living on borrowed time as things stood.
However, he and little Maria could hardly be in every place that needed them, and Ezio in particular could feel time weighing all the more heavily on them as winter closed its remorseless grip.
~AC: Rev~
Three weeks passed – not easily, but time rolled forward all the same – and Maria found that the thought of the poor, loyal horses that she and Ezio had been forced to leave behind in a frozen pass on their way to Masyaf would not leave her so easily as she might have wished. She’d done them the kindness of shooting each one in the head, so at least the poor animals hadn’t suffered unduly or for too long, but Maria still found her thoughts drifting back to them as she and Ezio pressed forward.
The sight of the towering mountain range, standing before them like silent sentinels against the march of time itself, brought a small, relived smile to Maria’s face and a lightness to her heart. It was good to know that at least the longest part of their journey was behind them. No, there only remained whatever dangers might lurk within the ancient castle itself.
One of those very dangers announced itself with an arrow shot between the pair of them – closer to Ezio than Maria herself, it had to be said – and so she and Ezio quickly dove to opposite sides in order that they might present a less opportune target to whoever it was that was after them now. Maria had her suspicions as to just who they were, considering that Masyaf had been a stronghold for the Brotherhood and so would naturally draw those seeking their secrets, but for the moment her suspicions would clearly have to remain merely that.
The man who had been targeting her and Ezio revealed himself then: his age seemed to be somewhere between Ezio’s and Maria’s own, though perhaps it was his bald pate and scar that served to prematurely age him. The scar cleaved his face from right to left, curving down from his forehead to his cheek, nearly close enough to his left eyebrow to split it without actually doing so. The remainder of his forces were garbed in face-concealing helmets, so the scarred man stood out all the more strongly for the fact that his face was showing.
Maria supposed that such arrogance came naturally to a Templar, alongside their desire for power.
The scarred Templar signaled to his forces, and Maria quickly found herself and Ezio forced to throw themselves in opposite directions to avoid the opening barrage of arrows. It was merely an opening, however; merely a way to give the scarred Templar’s forces a way to advance upon her and Ezio without the pair of them having any chance to thin their numbers while they were out of sword-range. Truly, for all the rigidity of their worldview and goals, the Templars could be frustratingly flexible at times.
As the forces that the scarred Templar had brought to Masyaf with him closed in on the pair of them like some kind of ephemeral noose, Maria caught a hint of movement out of the corner of her left eye. However, as she and Ezio had managed to find each other amid the press of enemies and the clash of weapons, Maria quickly put the sight out of her mind. Here and now was hardly the time or place to be distracted.
As she and Ezio stood alone together against what seemed to be an unending, untiring tide of Templar soldiers, Maria caught sight of what seemed to be a pair of figures, garbed in a white variant of the Assassin robes that she and Ezio had worn for long enough that they almost seemed a second-skin to her. The taller of them seemed to only have eyes, hidden as they were, for Ezio. But, the shorter…
…across time, through space, to the shores of foreign Seas and the sands of shattered Worlds, those who walked the Path of the Guardian would always find a home in each other…
Chapter 459: A captive eagle
Chapter Text
Rubbing her aching head, Maria took stock of just where it was that she had managed to find herself. Before she could catch more than a glimpse of what seemed to be a hastily-prepared bedroom of all things, the sight of the scarred Templar making his way into the room – she couldn’t rightly call such a place a proper cell, though that did beg the question of just what the Templars wanted, to put her up in a place like this – prompted Maria to push those thoughts to the back of her mind. It was more than likely that she wouldn’t be pleased with the answers to her unasked questions.
“I’d heard the reports, but even I didn’t think that that old dog would be so stupid as to bring a prize like you right to our doorstep.”
“What are you blathering about, stronzo?” she snarled, trying to hide the fact that she’d noticed how her feet had been bound at the ankles, and also the way she was subtly testing to see if she could manage to slip even one of her feet free.
“A Child of Eden, ripe and in the fullness of her womanhood,” the look on the scarred Templar’s face was distinctly not the kind of leer that she had seen so many times on the face of Cesare Borgia or one of those who had been influenced by the vanished Templar, but more the sort of pleasure one would expect on a horse breeder looking at a fine example of a mare. “As I said, a fine prize.”
All the more unsettling, of course, since the expression was aimed at her.
“Go fuck your horse,” she snarled, both furious and trying to draw his attention away from her determined struggle to free her feet; if her wrists hadn’t been lashed securely to the posts of the bed she’d been laid out on, Maria would have slapped the man firmly in the face. “I’d sooner bite off my own tongue.”
“There are herbs that will take care of that, Child,” the scarred Templar said, a condescending sort of amusement overtaking his face, even as his right hand came to rest possessively on her head. “We’ll see to your care and keeping, once we’ve dealt with the Assassin who brought you to us.”
The scarred Templar vanished not soon after that, leaving Maria with the seething annoyance that she swiftly pushed aside, and unfettered access to the ropes that still bound her to the frame of the bed. The wood itself was dried and seemingly brittle, but the Templars had clearly seen that fact for themselves, having taken the time to brace the frame with what seemed to be a pair of swords too chipped and jagged to be of much use in battle. So, it was not as though she could simply bring her arms inward and hope to snap the bedposts that way.
However, it seemed that once again the Templars’ haste and arrogance would give her the means to defeat them once again; they had left her the ropes, a sword jagged enough to saw, and above all other things, they had given her time.
~AC: Rev~
Once he had gotten what rest he could, in a ruined castle full of Templars and with little Maria no longer by his side, Ezio braced himself for what was to come. He could hear the heavy tread of the Templar soldiers as they made their way up to the cell where he’d been imprisoned until they decided on just how they were going to execute him. He had already made up his mind, just how he was going to handle himself when the Templars came to collect him.
First, he would pretend to be weaker than he presently was; hardly a difficult prospect, considering that he had been careful to avoid sampling the food and drink that had been provided for him, considering how likely it was to have been drugged or tampered with in some other way. Laying himself down on his stomach, his hood pulled down far enough to obscure as much of his face as he could manage, Ezio waited for the Templar soldiers to arrive.
The sound of the cell door being thrown open, overlaid with the clatter of heavy-shod boots as the Templar soldiers made their way inside, prompted a brief sigh as Ezio allowed the singing tension that had momentarily gripped him at the thought of how long he’d been away from little Maria and the fact that he’d no real way of knowing just what was happening to her to pass out of his mind. It would do him no good, considering what he was aiming to do.
He could worry about little Maria once he was free of the Templars.
Keeping his eyes turned down, Ezio found himself dragged over an ornate inlay of the Brotherhood’s insignia, then into the wider spaces of what seemed to be some kind of hall. He didn’t know if it had previously been a gathering place of some kind, the hall in the tower he was currently being dragged through, but the scent of fresh air coming in did serve to revive him more than a bit. And, when he raised his head slightly, Ezio found himself staring out the large windows of a high tower.
It seemed that he’d been brought deep into Masyaf; Ezio didn’t know if he should be flattered, furious, or both, to see that Templars had made it so far into what had been an Assassin stronghold.
“You are a tenacious man, Ezio Auditore, though I suppose I should thank you for delivering the Child to us in such good condition,” the scarred man said, and Ezio ground his teeth at the pleased tone of his voice; he’d remember it, when the time came. “Still, you’re an old hound now; better to put you out of your misery quickly than to see you whimper to a lowly end.”
“I think I’ll castrate you, before I hang your gutted corpse from the nearest tree,” he ground out, the surrounding soldiers all backing up a step at the venom in his tone.
All of them, that was, save for the scarred man; who simply chuckled.
“Well, it seems that your tongue hasn’t quite lost its bite,” he said, seeming annoyingly unmoved by Ezio’s fury, even though it had been directed at him in particular.
Though if the man thought that he wasn’t going to act in little Maria’s defense, he was sorely – about to be fatally – mistaken.
Chapter 460: Breaking free
Chapter Text
Moving out to the end of the wooden platform, Ezio found himself once more catching sight of the faded apparition that seemed to the same kind of strange, pale shadow of Altaïr that he’d seen before. Gathering himself once more, Ezio felt the scarred Templar putting a rope around his neck. Waiting for just long enough to give the man a false sense of security, Ezio lunged.
Firmly grasping hold of the rope around his neck, the weapon that the scarred Templar had been so obliging as to provide him with, Ezio knocked the man to the old, rough wooden planks where they had been standing just a handful of moments before. With the Templar’s own weight to counter-balance his own, Ezio was able to jump down to level ground within the abandoned citadel. The citadel that had once housed the Assassin Brotherhood.
The place that may very well have witnessed the birth of the Brotherhood itself.
Rising back to his feet, Ezio found himself catching yet another glimpse of the shadowy, transparent form of what seemed to be Altaïr. It seemed as though his brother Assassin wished to lead him somewhere, and so Ezio quickly fell in behind the phantom apparition, scaling his way back up the crumbling walls of the ancient fortress. Finding himself taken back to up to the ramparts of the ancient fortress, Ezio smiled as he found himself reunited with little Maria once again.
“It’s good to see you again, sorellina,” he said, making his way over so that he could hold her close.
“It’s good to see you again too, fratello,” she said, as the pair of them held each other for a lingering moment.
He wondered if she had seen any phantom apparitions, herself, but now was hardly the time to talk about those kinds of things. There were still Templars to deal with, so the pair of them would have to focus on those for the time being. They could talk about things such as that later.
There were enough strange things in the life of an Assassin to fill a lifetime of conversations.
As the pair of them continued on their way up through the empty halls and corridors of the crumbling, timeworn fortress, more than a few of the Templars that had been brought to Masyaf made their own attempts to attack. He and little Maria quickly cut their respective ways through the Templars in their path, moving on even as they did.
The scarred captain that he had found himself confronted by at the beginning of all this seemed to have vanished, leaving the rest of his people to deal with the pair of them – as well as to do whatever it was that he intended for little Maria; Ezio knew that thinking about such things would infuriate him to the point where he could not have thought of anything else, so he avoided the thought so he would be able to work beside little Maria instead of rushing to protect her, the way he would have otherwise wished to – so that made things more simple, at least.
These things were never truly easy, but they could at least be more simple.
Chapter 461: Shadowed savior
Chapter Text
The sight of a curious expression on little Maria’s face, just before the phantom apparition of Altaïr appeared once again, brought up the question of whether or not his littlest sister was able to see the form of the apparition that seemed to have been guiding him. Ezio also wondered if it could have had anything to do with Desmond, but as he’d long since hidden Aeon’s Apple away, there was no way that he could make contact with his brother Assassin even if the young man had been following in his wake once again.
As the pair of them continued on their way through the ruins of Masyaf, dispatching the Templars that had been left behind to hinder their progress in every possible way, Ezio noticed that Altaïr seemed to be leading them to an armory within the ancient, crumbling remains of Masyaf castle. Once the pair of them had managed to rearm themselves once more, he and little Maria made their way up to the top of the old ruin.
There was something that Altaïr seemed to be leading them to, something that the old Mentor seemed to have in mind, and when Ezio made his way over to the stone-carved eagle overlooking the empty courtyard, he shoved it over and the phantom of Altaïr seemed satisfied just before it vanished. He and little Maria dove after the falling sculpture, once it was far enough out of their way that they weren’t likely to hit either of their heads on it when they reached whatever cavern Ezio had opened with his efforts.
There turned out to be a wide, deep lake beneath the stones of the courtyard the sculpture had broken through, and when Ezio had made it back to the shore, he found himself confronted by yet another of the Templar guards who had been set against them by the scarred captain. Once the pair of them had managed to dispatch the last of the guards, Ezio made his way up through the catacombs that he’d read descriptions of so many times before. As before, being inside felt somewhat different than merely reading about them, of course.
Finding himself overlooking another, smaller group of guards, this one surrounding what seemed to be a man at work on an ornate wall at the far end of the room, Ezio turned a wry smile to little Maria as the pair of them prepared to leap into the fray once more. Landing more heavily than he would have preferred next to his littlest sister, Ezio drew the sword that he had found for himself, standing back-to-back with little Maria once more.
The pair of them were once again able to make quick work of the Templar guards surrounding them, and then to move on so that they might be able to find out what the man at the wall was about.
As it turned out, the man was a stonemason, and the wall was in fact some sort of ornate, locked door.
“Be merciful, please! I am a working man, with a family!” the man, who seemed to be about Ezio’s age, though clearly without his level of physical conditioning.
“We’re not here for you, Messere, no need to worry,” little Maria said, stepping forward to stand next to him, once she had cleaned and re-sheathed her blades.
“What kind of work have you been doing for these people?” he asked, folding his arms as he looked down at the man; the fact that the pair of them had put away their weapons seemed to be greatly comforting to the man, at least.
“Digging, mostly. It took me a year just to find this chamber. And for the last three months, I have been trying to break through this door,” the stonemason said, gesturing to the expansive, ornate double-doors that the three of them had gathered before.
The ones that concealed Altaïr’s great library, and so stood between the Templars and yet more knowledge that they were more than certain to misuse.
“You don’t seem to have made much progress,” little Maria said, staring up at the doors for a long moment, before returning her attention to the stonemason the pair of them had encountered.
“I haven’t made a dent!” the stonemason exclaimed, though he seemed more awed – and perhaps even approving, in the way of one master craftsman appreciating the craft of another – than strictly angry. “This stone is harder than steel!”
“I doubt you will,” he said, looking up at the doors of Altaïr’s library for a long moment, himself. “This door is guarding objects more valuable than all the gold in the world.”
“Ah… Do you mean gemstones?” the stonemason asked, and for a moment Desmond was tempted to chuckle.
He sometimes forgot that not everyone considered knowledge the most valuable thing in the world.
“There are keyholes here,” he said, moving to examine the pattern of impressions on the door more closely. “Where are the keys?” he wondered aloud, not truly expecting an answer,
“These Templars found one beneath the Ottoman Sultan’s palace,” the stonemason said. “As for the others, I suppose their little book will tell them.”
“What book would that be, Messere?” little Maria asked, before Ezio could make the same kind of inquiry.
“A journal of some kind,” the stonemason said, not sounding particularly concerned. “That ugly captain, he carries it with him wherever he goes.”
Tossing a sack of the money he had saved from various jobs – in addition to the friends he tried to make wherever he went – to the stonemason the pair of them had been talking to for so long, Ezio smiled gently.
“Go home, find work with honest men,” he said.
“Oh, I would love to leave this place,” the stonemason said, bowing deeply before the pair of them. “But these men, they will murder me if I try.”
“My brother and I will see to it that none of them have the chance,” little Maria said, smiling gently at the man whose life they were about to save. “Pack your tools.”
Chapter 462: Snowbound
Chapter Text
The pair of them bade their farewells to the stonemason, whose name turned out to be Adad, and Maria found the shade of Alnesr appearing before her once again. Her fellow Guardian once more seemed to have some place he wished to lead her, and Maria found herself curious as to who it was that Ezio was following. He seemed entirely too sure-footed, as the pair of them continued on their way up through the catacombs and into the old castle once more, given that neither of them had set so much as a single foot within the walls of Masyaf at any time during their respective lives.
Still, it was a known fact that Alnesr had worked beside Altaïr himself, the legendary Mentor of the Brotherhood, so there was a possible explanation as to just who it was that her brother had been following.
Once the pair of them had made it out to Masyaf’s courtyard, empty of people but filling steadily with snow as it was, Maria could hear a man’s shouting carried on the wind. The words themselves were shredded and indistinct over the frigid winds, but given the fact that more Templar guards began filtering into the courtyard itself, as well as the pair of falling gates, Maria could make a quite educated guess about what the man had been saying. Now, it only remained to reclaim the journal that had been written by one of their brother Assassins.
The journal that might very well contain more insights about the man whose shade she had been following through the empty halls and corridors of the castle where he seemed to have grown up.
As she and Ezio cut their way through yet another group of Templar guards, Maria found herself looking around at the ancient fortress castle that she and her last brother had made their way to. She couldn’t exactly say that she felt a connection to the place – since for all that Alnesr had spent most of his life in Masyaf, she was still a stranger to this place – but seeing it with her own eyes was indeed more fascinating that she had been expecting.
As she and Ezio made their way to a high tower, parachuting into the village that Masyaf castle presided over, Maria found herself wondering just what kind of new troubles she would find herself running into. The Templar guards that had been unleashed within the environs of what had once been Masyaf’s protectorate city would clearly be on high-alert, considering what their captain was more than likely to have told him about her. Considering the plans that that scarred, bald bastard of a captain had so gleefully told her about.
Landing in a crouch to lessen the impact, Maria stood and quickly pulled the parachute off of her head, rolling it back up so that she could move more easily. Using the second-sight that she and Ezio both possessed, Maria quickly found a place where she could repack Leonardo’s marvelous invention. Once more, Maria found herself grateful to have formed such a strong friendship with the inventor, back when the pair of them had lived in Firenze together.
Not only for the brilliant mind and all of the inventions that such a mind had produced, but also for the kindly and inquisitive nature that had led Leonardo to become such a brilliant inventor to begin with.
Once she had her parachute properly repacked and was prepared to move again, Maria called up her second-sight in an effort to find just where it was that Ezio had landed. Even though the pair of them had made their leaps from the top of the same tower, the vagaries of both their respective weights and the wind in such a high place as where the both of them had been standing had ended up carrying them both to different sections of the city. She’d seen the general area where her last brother had landed, and was now making her way toward the area so that she and Ezio could rejoin each other once more.
The sound of searching footfalls, crunching in the snow of the city she was standing in, drove Maria to quickly dive into a nearby pile of hay, concealing herself from whoever it might have been who was hunting for her. Watching the pair of patrolling Templars as they continued on their way, Maria narrowed her eyes as she found the sound of their voices carried to her on the wind. The pair of them had been dispatched to find her in particular, by the captain of these Templars, a man by the name of Leandros.
The bald, scar-faced bastard had just the same kind of plans for her as she had heard from that fat, old bastard of a Borgia.
Truly, it seemed to be the same kind of plan that every Templar would have in mind for any Guardian they found; perhaps they could have had just the same kind of plans if Maria had not been a woman, but under the circumstances Maria wasn’t going to allow herself to fixate on such things. Once the patrolling Templars had left even the range of her second-sight, Maria emerged from the haystack and quickly departed from the section of the city she had been moving through. Breathing out as she continued on her way, Maria kept a sharp ear out for anymore approaching footfalls.
However, the fact that she was swiftly approaching a crowd of by standing civilians – while it would mean that she had more options to escape than simply hiding in haystacks or attempting to conceal herself in atop a nearby building – meant that she would not only be deprived of one of her senses, the footfalls of the Templars tracking her being muffled by those of the citizens she would be moving through, but it also meant that she would need to worry about the safety of those who had no stake in the battle she and Ezio had carried on for so much of their lives.
The Templars, of course, would have no such concerns.
Matching her own movements to the ebb and flow of the crowd she had been observing for such a long time during the course of her approach, Maria stepped in among the people, keeping her eyes and ears open for any other Templars that might have managed to follow her this far. She also took the opportunity to sweep the crowd with her second-sight, making as certain as she could that she wasn’t being stalked by Templars.
Catching a glimpse of something fast, falling out of the air towards the crowd that she was making her way through the crowd of citizens milling all around her, Maria looked up just in time to see what she could now see was some kind of a smoke bomb, falling towards the crowd. Hurrying as fast as she could, without tripping up or tripping over one of the citizens surrounding her, Maria pulled up the cloth around her neck as she saw the spreading clouds of whatever happened to be inside the smoke bombs – multiples, now, that she could see out of the corners of both of her eyes – that the Templars had begun throwing at her.
Ducking as the citizens around her began falling, Maria ran for higher, open ground, where she would either be able to escape into the environs of Masyaf’s protectorate city, or else to turn and fight off the Templars who had clearly been able to find her by some means or other. The thickening cloud she was running through, even with the filtering effects of the cloth she had pulled up and over her nose and mouth, made Maria feel as though she was attempting to force her way through a steadily deepening mire.
Her head was heavy and her vision was beginning to tilt – it felt as though she was attempting to run across the deck of a ship in the midst of a howling storm – by the time Maria had stumbled the last steps that she was able to take…
Mrl3 on Chapter 299 Sun 25 Aug 2019 03:41PM UTC
Comment Actions
Troper_Nyaru on Chapter 299 Thu 29 Aug 2019 05:45AM UTC
Comment Actions
Mrl3 on Chapter 405 Sun 03 Apr 2022 12:46AM UTC
Comment Actions
Bythia on Chapter 462 Sat 17 Dec 2022 11:53AM UTC
Comment Actions